Protection Control Tesys - Contactor Tesys D-F

Low Voltage
Control and
protection
components
Catalogue
2011
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Productreferenceindex 8
1
504pp 6/88
490 NAD 911 pp 1/97, 6/89
490 NTW 000
ppp
6/89
A
AB1 AB8ppp 1/41, 1/49
AB1 AC6BL 2/12, 2/14
AB1 BCppppp 1/41, 1/49
AB1 DV10235U 1/211
AB1 DVM10235U 1/211
AB1 Gp 1/211, 4/30,
4/33, 5/25,
6/51, 6/89,
7/7
AB1 Pp 5/25
AB1 Rpp 1/211, 4/30,
4/33, 6/51,
6/89, 7/7
AB1 VV635UBL 2/12, 2/14
ABF H20 ppp 1/79, 1/197
ACM GVpppp 1/49
AE3 FX122 1/49
AF1 CDppp 1/49, 5/186
AF1 VAppp 1/41, 1/49
AF1 VC820 1/49, 5/186
AK5 1/207
AK5 BT01 1/211
AK5 GF1 1/210
AK5 JBpppp 1/66, 1/210
AK5 PAppppppp 1/211
AK5 PCppppp 1/210
AK5 PEpp 1/211
AK5 SB1 1/211
AM1 ppppp 1/49, 1/210,
5/186
AM3 PA65 1/41
APE pppppp 1/197
APP 2AH40H060 1/197
ASI TERV2 1/81
ATSppDpp 1/140
ATSU 01NpppLT 1/130
ATV21pppppp 1/140
ATV31pppppp 1/141
ATV61pppppp 1/141
ATV71pppppp 1/141
B
BMX FCC pppp 1/79
C
C801p 1/28
CA2 KNppppp 7/4
CA2 SKppppp 7/12
CA3 KNppppp 7/4
CA3 SKpppp 7/12
CA4 KNppppp 7/5
CAD 32pp 1/41, 1/47
CR1 BLppppp 5/241,
5/250
CR1 BMppppp 5/241,
5/250
CR1 BPppppp 5/250
CR1 BRppppp 5/250
CR1 Fpppppp 5/241,
5/250
D
DA1 TSppp 6/51
DA1 TTppp 6/51, 6/88
DE1 DSpppp 2/41
DE1 LT315 2/52, 2/60
DF1p pppp 4/29, 4/30
DF2 pppppp 4/72 to 4/75
DF22 pppp 4/29, 4/30
DF3 pppp 4/72 and
4/74
DF4 pppppp 4/73 and
4/75
DF8 ppp 4/29, 4/30
DFCC pp 4/33
DK1 pppp 4/37
DR2 SCpppp 5/138,
5/139,
5/188,
5/189,
5/190,
5/191,
5/257
DR5 TEpp 5/135
5/188,
5/189,
5/190,
5/191,
5/257
DR5 TF4V 5/135
DV1 RCppp 5/259
DV1 RT292 5/259
DX1 AP25 6/25, 7/7,
5/25
DZ3 ppp 5/124
E
ER1 XA2p 6/42
And1 KB50 5/259
EZ2 LB0601 5/186,
5/251
G
GA1 pp 5/279,
5/293
GAC pppp 5/279,
5/293
GAP 21 5/279,
5/293
GAP 23 5/279,
5/293
GB2 CBpp 1/41, 1/47,
3/94
GB2 CDpp 3/94
GB2 CSpp 3/95
GB2 DBpp 3/94
GC ppppppp 5/278
GF pppppp 5/286
GK1 pppp 1/30, 4/36,
4/37
GK2 pppp 3/57, 3/65
GK3 pppp 3/53, 3/65
GS1 AD10 4/59, 4/69
GS1 AFpp 4/59
GS1 AHppp 4/61
GS1 AMppp 4/59, 4/69
GS1 ANppp 4/59, 4/69
GS1 AVpp 4/61
GS1 AWpp 4/61
GS1 DDpp 1/24, 1/31,
1/32, 1/33,
4/53, 4/55,
4/57, 4/68,
6/96
GS1 EERUpp 4/68
GS1 Fpp 4/55
GS1 Gpp 4/55
GS1 Jpp 4/55
GS1 Kppp 4/55
GS1 Lppp 4/55
GS1 Npp 4/55
GS1 QQpp 4/55
GS2 4/53
GS2 ADpp 4/59, 4/61,
4/69
GS2 AEpp 4/60, 4/70
GS2 AFpp 4/59
GS2 AHpppp 4/60, 4/61,
4/70, 4/71
GS2 APpp 4/61, 4/71
GS2 AX1 4/61
GS2 Dpp 4/57
GS2 Eppp 4/68
GS2 Fpp 4/53
GS2 Gpp 1/32, 1/33,
4/53, 4/57,
4/68
GS2 Jpp 4/53, 4/57
GS2 Kpppp 4/53
GS2 Lppp 1/32, 1/33,
4/53, 4/57,
GS2 Mppp 1/32, 1/33,
4/57, 4/68
GS2 Npp 1/32, 1/33,
4/53, 4/57,
GS2 PPpp 4/57
GS2 QQpp
1/32, 1/33,
4/53, 4/57,
4/68
GS2 Spp 1/24, 1/25,
1/30, 1/31,
1/32, 1/33,
4/53, 4/55,
4/57, 4/68,
6/96, 6/99
GS2 Tpp 4/57, 4/68
GS2 Vpp 1/24, 1/31,
4/53, 4/55,
4/57, 6/96
GSp F 1/24, 1/25,
1/31, 6/96,
6/99
GSp G 6/99
GSp J 1/24, 1/25,
1/31, 6/96,
6/99
GSp K 1/30, 6/96
GSp KK 1/25, 6/99
GSp L 1/24, 1/25,
1/30, 1/31,
6/96, 6/99
GSp N 1/24, 1/25,
1/30, 1/31,
6/96, 6/99
GSp QQ 1/24, 1/25,
1/30, 1/31,
6/96, 6/99
GV ADpppp 3/55, 3/61
GV AEppp 3/47, 3/55,
3/61, 4/37
GV AMppp 3/47, 3/55,
3/61
GV Apppp 3/55, 3/61
GV APppp 1/68, 3/58,
3/62,
GV AXppp 3/55
GV NGCpppp 2/18
GV1 F03 3/57
GV1 Gpp 1/66, 3/57,
5/85, 4/39,
GV1 L3 3/55
GV1 V02 3/65
GV2 AFpp 1/7 to 1/11,
3/57, 4/39
GV2 AK00 3/55
GV2 AP03 3/51, 3/58
GV2 APNpp 3/58
GV2 Apppp 2/15
GV2 AXppp 2/15
GV2 CP21 2/12
GV2 DMppppp 1/8, 1/9
GV2 DPppppp 1/10, 1/11
GV2 Epp 2/12, 2/14,
2/30
GV2 Gppp 1/66, 3/57,
4/39, 5/85
GV2 Kppp 2/12, 2/14,
2/15, 2/30
GV2 Lpp 1/20, 1/29,
3/53, 6/97
GV2 LCpppp 2/18
GV2 LEpp 1/20, 1/28,
3/52,
GV2 MCppp 2/12, 2/14,
2/15
GV2 MEpppppp 1/6, 1/7,
1/16, 1/17,
1/26, 3/46,
3/47
GV2 MEpp 2/15
GV2 MPpp 2/12
GV2 Ppp 1/17, 1/27,
3/48
GV2 RTpp 3/50, 3/51
GV2 V01 2/12, 2/14,
2/30
GV2 V03 3/58, 3/61,
4/39
GV3 App 3/65
GV3 APNpp 3/62
GV3 Bpp 3/65
GV3 Dpp 3/65
GV3 Gppp 3/61, 5/85
GV3 Lpp 1/20, 1/21,
1/28, 1/29,
3/53, 6/65,
6/97
GV3 ME80 3/48, 1/16,
1/26
GV3 Ppp 1/16, 1/17,
1/26, 1/27,
3/48
GV3 PCpp 2/13
GV3 S 5/85
GV7 AB11 3/67
GV7 ACpp 3/69, 5/84
GV7 ADppp 3/67
GV7 AE11 3/67
GV7 APpp 3/69
GV7 ASppp 3/67
GV7 AUppp 3/67
GV7 REppp 1/16, 1/26,
3/49,
GV7 RSppp 1/17, 1/27,
3/49
GV7 V01 3/69
GW ppp 5/279,
5/293
GY pppppp 5/292
K
KAC 1BZ 4/19
KAD 1PZ 4/11, 4/17
KAE 1BZ 4/19
KAF ppp 4/17
KBD 1PZ 4/19
KBF ppp 4/19
KCC ppp 4/11, 4/17,
4/19
KCD 1PZ 4/11, 4/17
KCE ppp 4/17, 4/19
KCF ppp 4/17
KDD 1PZ 4/19
KDF ppp 4/19
KZ ppp 4/11, 4/20,
4/21
L
LA1 DNpp 2/45, 2/49
LA1 DXpp 5/79, 5/123,
7/21
LA1 DY20 5/79, 5/123,
7/21
LA1 DZpp 5/79, 5/123,
7/21
LA1 KNppp 5/23, 7/6
LA1 LB021 1/167
LA1 LCpppp 1/167, 2/59
LA1 LDppppp 1/171
LA1 SKpp 5/34, 5/35,
7/13
LA1 VNppp 5/235
LA2 KTpp 5/23, 7/6
LA4 DApp 5/81
LA4 DBpp 5/81
LA4 DBL 5/83
LA4 DC3U 5/81
LA4 DEpp 5/81
LA4 DFB 5/83
LA4 DTpp 5/83
LA4 DWB 5/83
LA4 FDp 5/124
LA4 FRpp 5/124
LA4 FSRE 5/123
LA4 FTp 5/124
LA4 KA1U 5/24, 7/7
LA4 Kpppp 5/24, 7/7
LA4 SKppp 5/35, 5/43,
7/13
LA5 Dpppppp 5/85
LA5 Fppp 5/127,
5/177,
5/258
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
LA5 FFppp 5/127,
5/177,
5/258
LA5 FGppp 5/127,
5/177,
5/258
LA5 FHppp 5/127,
5/177,
5/258
LA6 DK20p 5/80
LA7 Dpppp 6/25, 6/36,
6/37
LA7 Fppp 1/47, 6/36,
6/37, 5/125
LA7 K0064 6/12
LA8 D324 4/36
LA9 B103 5/186,
5/251
LA9 D0975 2/44, 2/45,
2/48, 2/49
LA9 D09907 2/21, 2/25,
2/45
LA9 D09966 5/84
LA9 D09981 5/124
LA9 D09982 1/171
LA9 D11ppp 1/41, 5/76,
5/77, 5/84
LA9 D12ppp 1/39, 1/41,
2/44, 2/45,
5/76, 5/84
LA9 D15017 1/41
LA9 D2561 5/84
LA9 D32ppp 1/39, 5/76,
5/84
LA9 D4pppp 1/39, 5/76,
5/77
LA9 D5pppp 1/39, 5/76,
5/77, 5/85
LA9 D65App 5/76, 5/77
LA9 D730 5/85
LA9 D8pppp 1/39, 5/76,
5/77, 5/84
LA9 D9pp 1/41, 1/47,
2/45, 2/49,
3/47, 3/57,
5/25, 5/85,
6/25, 6/37,
7/7, 7/23
LA9 Epp 3/57, 4/39,
5/25
LA9 F100 1/49
LA9 F103 5/126,
5/176,
5/251, 6/25,
6/37
LA9 F15ppp 5/119,
5/121
LA9 F18517 1/47
LA9 F2100 5/125
LA9 F22ppp 1/47, 5/119,
5/121
LA9 F7pp 5/116,
5/117,
5/126,
5/176,
5/251, 6/37
LA9 FFpppp 5/119,
5/121,
5/124,
5/125,
5/128,
5/253
LA9
FGpppppppp
1/41, 1/47,
5/119,
5/121,
5/124,
5/125,
5/128,
5/176,
5/253
LA9 Fp4p4p 5/128,
5/129
and 5/253
LA9 FHppp 1/47, 5/119,
5/121,
5/124,
5/253
LA9 FJppp 1/47, 5/119,
5/121,
5/124,
5/253
LA9 FKppp 5/119,
5/121,
5/124,
5/125,
5/253
LA9 FLppp 5/119,
5/121,
5/124,
5/125,
5/253
LA9 FXppp 5/119,
5/121,
5/153
LA9 K09pp 5/25
LA9 LB920 1/66, 3/55
LA9 LCppp 1/172, 2/52,
2/60
LA9 LDppp 1/172
LA9 LFpppp 2/87
LA9 V974 5/234
LA9 Zppppp 1/184,
1/185,
1/186,
1/187
LAD 2p 5/85, 7/23
LAD 3pppppp 1/195, 3/57,
4/39, 5/76
LAD 4pppp 5/76, 5/77,
5/81, 5/83,
7/22
LAD 6K10p 5/80, 7/22
LAD 7pppp 3/61, 5/85
6/25, 6/58
LAD 8ppp 5/79, 7/21
LAD 90 1/66, 5/85,
6/25, 7/23
LAD 90ppp 2/40
LAD 912pp 1/39, 5/76
LAD 918pp 2/40
LAD 92560 5/84
LAD 93217 1/39, 5/76
LAD 96ppp 3/61, 5/84,
6/25
LAD 99 4/39
LAD 9APppp 1/197
LAD 9Andp 5/85, 7/23
LAD 9Pppp 5/84
LAD 9PVGV 5/76
LAD 9Rpp 5/76, 5/77
LAD 9SD3 5/76
LAD 9T4 2/40
LAD 9Vpp 5/76, 5/77
LAD ALLEN4 3/61, 5/85,
6/25
LAD C22 5/79, 5/123,
7/21
LAD Nppp 1/41, 5/79,
5/123,
5/175,
5/251, 7/21
LAD Rp 5/80, 5/123,
5/175, 7/22
LAD S2 5/80, 5/123,
5/175, 7/22
LAD Tp 1/41, 1/47,
5/80, 5/123,
5/175, 7/22
LAD T9Rpp 5/77
LAD UL1 5/71
LAZ R9pp 5/156,
5/157
LB1 LD03ppp 1/163,
1/165, 2/57,
2/58
LB6 LD03ppp 1/163, 2/57
LC1 BL 5/217
LC1 BLppppp 5/184,
5/214,
5/215
LC1 BM 5/217
LC1 BMppppp 5/184,
5/185,
5/214,
5/215
LC1 BP 5/217
LC1 BPppppp 5/184,
5/185,
5/214,
5/215
LC1 BR 5/217
LC1 BRppppp 5/184,
5/185,
5/214,
5/215
LC1 BR34p40 5/185
LC1 Dppppppp 1/16, 1/17,
1/20,
1/24 to
1/29, 1/31
to 1/33,
1/39, 1/47,
5/62 to
5/67, 5/71,
5/74, 5/75,
5/102,
5/156,
5/188,
5/190,
5/191,
5/214,
5/215,
5/217, 6/65,
6/96 to 6/99
LC1 DpKpppp 5/102
LC1 Dpppp 5/156
LC1
DTpppppppp
5/188,
5/190,
5/191
LC1 DWK12pp 5/102
LC1 Fpppppp 1/16, 1/17,
1/21, 1/24,
1/25, 1/27,
1/29, 1/31
to 1/33,
1/47, 5/114,
5/115,
5/153,
5/163,
5/174,
5/214,
5/215,
5/217, 6/60,
6/65, 6/96,
6/98, 6/99
LC1 Kppppppp 1/16, 2/28,
5/14, 5/16,
5/214
LC1 SKpppppp 5/34, 5/42
LC1 Vppppp 5/234
LC2 Dpppppppp 5/72 to 5/75
LC2 Fpppp 5/116
and 5/117
LC2 Kpppppp 5/18, 5/20
LC2 Vpppppp 5/234
LC3 Dppppppp 1/26, 1/28,
1/30, 1/37
LC3 Fpppppp 1/28, 1/30,
1/45
LC3 Kpppp 1/26, 1/28,
1/30, 1/37
LC4 Dppppp 1/34
LC7 Kppppppp 5/14, 5/16,
LC8 Kppppppp 5/18, 5/20
LD1 LC030p 1/165
LD1 LD030p 1/162
LD4 LDpppp 2/56, 2/58,
1/162,
1/165
LD5 LDpppp 2/56, 1/162
LEpp 1/20
LE1 Dpppppp 2/20, 2/44
LE1 GVppppppp 2/30
LE1 M35pppp 2/28
LE2 Dppppp 2/20, 2/24
LE2 Kppppp 2/20
LE3 Dppppp 2/32, 2/36
LE3 Fppppp 2/42
LE3 Kppppp 2/32
LE4 Dppppp 2/24, 2/48
LE4 Kppppp 2/24
LE6 Dpppp 2/24, 2/36
LE8 Kppppp 2/24
LF3 Mppp 2/85
LF3 Pppp 2/84
LF4 Mppp 2/85
LF4 Pppp 2/84
LG1 D1pppppp 2/63
LG1 Kppppppp 2/63
LG7 Dpppppp 2/62
LG7 Kpppppp 2/62
LG8 Kpppppp 2/64
LJ7 Kpppppp 2/68
LJ8 Kpppppp 2/69
LP1 Dppppppp 5/66, 5/214,
5/215
LP1
DTpppppppp
5/189
LP1 Kppppppp 5/15, 5/17
LP1 SKpppppp 5/34
LR2 Dpppp 1/25, 2/44,
2/48, 6/22
LR2 F8383 5/241
LR2 Kpppp 1/28, 6/12,
1/30
LR2 K0322 6/12
LR9 D5367 1/21, 1/24,
1/25, 1/28,
1/29, 1/31,
1/32, 1/33,
5/219, 6/23
LR9 Fpppp 1/21, 1/24,
1/25, 1/28
to 1/33,
5/219,
5/241, 6/34
LR97 Dppppp 6/58
LRD pppp 1/20, 1/24
and 1/25,
1/28 to
1/33, 5/219,
6/20 to 6/22
LS1 Dppppp 4/36, 4/37,
1/30
LT3 Spppppp 6/50
LT47 06ppp 6/58
LT47 30ppp 6/58
LT47 60ppp 6/58
LT6 CTpppp 6/88, 6/96,
6/98, 6/99
LTM 9TCS 6/87
LTM Cpppp 6/87
LTM EVpppp 6/87
LTM Rppppp 6/86, 6/96
to 6/99
LU2B 12pp 1/60, 1/63,
1/85, 1/91
LU2B 32BL 1/85, 1/91
LU2B 32pp 1/63
LU2B pppp 1/63
LU6M B0pp 1/63
LU9 Apppp 1/68, 1/69,
1/83, 3/62
LU9 BN11L 1/84, 1/90
LU9 CD1 1/72, 1/81,
1/95, 1/97
LU9 Gpp 1/79, 1/83,
1/95, 1/197
LU9 M1 1/63, 1/85,
1/91
LU9 Rppppp 1/79, 1/83,
1/93,
1/197, 6/87
LU9 SP0 1/67
LU9B pppp 1/61, 1/62,
1/65, 1/79,
1/81, 1/83,
1/87, 1/89,
1/93, 1/95
LU9C p 1/65
LU9M ppp 1/63, 1/79,
1/81, 1/83,
1/87, 1/89,
1/93, 1/95
LUA Lpp 1/66
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
LUA1 pppp 1/65
LUA8 E20 1/65
LUB ppp 1/137, 1/58,
1/61, 1/62,
1/84, 1/90,
1/137
LUC Apppp 1/84, 1/85,
1/90, 1/91
LUC Bpppp 1/84, 1/85,
1/90, 1/91
LUC Dpppp 1/84, 1/85,
1/90, 1/91
LUC Mpppp 1/84, 1/85,
1/90, 1/91
LUCA pppp 1/71
LUCA 12FU 1/58, 1/60,
1/71
LUCB pppp 1/59, 1/71,
6/64
LUCC pppp 1/71
LUCD pppp 1/71, 6/64
LUCLpppp 1/136,
1/137
LUCM pppp 1/61, 1/72,
6/60, 6/64,
6/65
LUF pppp 1/59, 1/65,
1/73, 1/97
LUL pppp 1/61, 1/83,
1/84, 1/85,
1/87, 1/89,
1/90, 1/91,
1/93, 1/95,
6/60
LUT ppppp 6/64, 6/65
LV4ppppp 1/187
LX0 FFppp 5/254
and 5/255
LX0 FGppp 5/254
and 5/255
LX0 FHppp 5/254
and 5/255
LX0 FJppp 5/254
and 5/255
LX0 FKppp 5/254
and 5/255
LX0 FLppp 5/254
and 5/255
LX1 D6pp 5/88
LX1 D8pp 5/89
LX1 FFpppp 5/130,
5/178
LX1 FGpppp 5/130,
5/178
LX1 FHpppp 5/131,
5/179
LX1 FJpppp 5/131,
5/179
LX1 FKpppp 5/132,
5/133,
5/179
LX1 FLpppp 5/132,
5/179
LX1 FXppp 5/133
LX1 LDpppp 1/171,
1/173
LX1 Vpppppp 5/235
LX2 FJWpp 5/139
LX4 D7pp 5/90 and
5/91
LX4 D8pp 5/91
LX4 F8pp 5/133,
5/137
LX4 FFppp 5/134,
5/136,
5/139
LX4 FGppp 5/134,
5/136,
5/139
LX4 FHppp 5/134,
5/136,
5/139
LX4 FJppp 5/135,
5/138,
5/136
LX4 FKppp 5/135,
5/138,
5/137
LX4 FLppp 5/135,
5/138,
5/137
LX4 FXppp 5/137
LX5 FJWpp 5/139
LXD 1ppp 5/86, 7/23
LXD 3ppp 5/87
N
NSpppppp 1/21, 1/28,
6/60, 6/65,
6/97, 6/98
P
PA1 LBpp 5/186,
5/259
PA1 PB50 5/186,
5/259
PA1 RB50 5/186,
5/259
PA2pppp 1/207
PA5ppp 1/207
PN1 FB50 5/259
PR4 FBpppp 5/257,
5/259
PV1 FA80 5/259
R
RHZ 66 6/51
RM1 XAppp 6/41, 6/42
RM1 ZG21 6/41
RM1 ZH21 6/42
S
SR2 CBL06 6/88
STB EPI 2145 1/197
STB XBE1100 1/93
STB XBE1300 1/93
STR35ME 1/28
T
TC1pppp 5/219
TC2pppp 5/219
TCpppp 5/219
TSX CAN ppppp 1/87, 6/89
TSX CANTD M4 1/87
TSX CDP ppp 1/79, 1/197
TSX FP ACC12 1/97
TSX PBSCAppp 1/83, 6/89
V
Vpp 2/5, 4/14
VBD pp 4/13
VBDN pp 4/8
VBF pp 4/13
VBF ppGE 2/4
VBF pGEp 2/4
VBFX GEp 2/5
VCp GUN 2/10
VCCD pp 4/12
VCCDN pp 4/8
VCCF pp 4/12
VCD pp 4/12
VCDN pp 4/8
VCF pp 4/12
VCF ppGE 2/4
VCF pGE 2/4
VCF pGEN 2/4
VCFN ppGE 2/4
VCFX GEp 2/5
VN pp 2/5, 4/9
VVD p 4/13
VW3 A1 pppRpp 6/87
VW3 A8 1pp 1/76, 6/88
VW3 A8 306 ppp 1/61, 1/95,
1/97, 6/89
VW3 G4104 1/130
VZ pp 2/6, 2/10,
4/14, 4/20
VZN pp 2/7, 4/9,
4/11, 4/20
W
WB1 KBppp 5/188
to 5/191,
5/256
X
XB5 Apppppp 6/25
XBT N410 6/87
XBT NU400 1/72
XBT Z938 1/72, 6/87
XBY 2U 5/85, 7/23
XGS Z24 1/76
XZ CG0142 1/81
XZ MCpp 1/81
XZ MG12 2/99, 1/81
Z
Z01 4/21
ZA2 Bpppp 6/36
ZB5 AAppp 2/40
ZB5 ADp 2/40
ZB5 AL432 2/40
ZBA 639 2/40
ZC4 GMp 5/186,
5/188,
5/189,
5/190,
5/191,
5/257,
5/259
ZEN L11pp 2/40
1 - TeSys motor starters: open version

Selection guide page 1/4
Combination automatic motor starters page 1/6
Combination starters for customer assembly page 1/16
DOL starters, plate mounted, for motor control page 1/36
Star-delta starters for motor control page 1/37
TeSys U starter-controllers page 1/52
integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers page 1/142
Adaptators for use with busbar sytem page 1/180
TeSys Quickft, installation system for motor starter components page 1/188
AK5 pre-assembled panel busbar system page 1/205
2 - TeSys motor starters: enclosed version
VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors page 2/4
Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers page 2/12
DOL starters for motor control page 2/18
Star-delta starters for motor control page 2/32
DOL starters for control in category AC-1 page 2/44
integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers page 2/52
Enclosed DOL starters for motor control for use on a machine subject
to the application of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE page 2/62
Enclosed DOL starters for AS-Interface cabling system page 2/72
3 - TeSys protection components: motor circuit-breakers
TeSys GV thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers page 3/46
TeSys GV magnetic motor circuit-breakers page 3/52
TeSys GB2 thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers for the protection
of control circuits, solenoid valves and transformers page 3/90
4 - TeSys protection components: fuse protection
Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors for standard applications page 4/8
VARIO switch disconnectors for high performance applications page 4/12
TeSys DF fuse carriers for the protection of control circuits
or transformers page 4/28
TeSys GK1 fuse carriers for motor protection page 4/32
TeSys GS switch-disconnectors-fuses for motor
or variable speed drive protection page 4/34
TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses provide on-load breaking
and making, safe isolation and overcurrent protection page /2
Cartridge fuses page 4/74
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
General contents
TeSys
Control and protection components
5
5 - TeSys contactors and reversing contactors
Defnitions and comments page 5/2
TeSys K contactors and reversing contactors page 5/8
TeSys LC1 SK and LP1 SK mini-contators page 5/30
TeSys LC1 SKGC mini-contators page 5/38
TeSys D contactors and reversing contactors page 5/50
TeSys contactors for switching 3-phase capacitor banks page 5/104
TeSys F contactors and reversing contactors page 5/106
High power changeover contactor pairs for distribution page 5/153
Capacitive delayed opening devices page 5/156
TeSys FG shockproof contactors page 5/158
TeSys LC1 B contactors page 5/182
Variable composition contactors page 5/228
3-pole vacuum contactors and reversing contactors page 5/232
Magnetic latching contactors CR1 F and CR1 B page 5/240
Modular equipment page 5/268
6 - TeSys protection components: relays and controllers
Motor and machine protection page 6/
TeSys K thermal overload relays page 6/10
TeSys D, 3-pole thermal overload relays page 6/1
TeSys LR9 D, 3-pole electronic overload relays page 6/18
TeSys LR9 F, 3-pole electronic overload relays page 6/30
TeSys RM1 XA single-pole magnetic over current relays page 6/0
TeSys LT3 S thermistor protection units for use with PTC thermistor
probes page 6/
TeSys LR97D and LT7 electronic over current relays page 6/5
TeSys U controllers page 6/60
TeSys T, Motor Management System page 6/68
7 - TeSys control relays
TeSys K control relays page 7/2
TeSys SK mini-control relays page 7/10
TeSys D control relays and add-on blocks page 7/16
8 - Technical information
Product standards and certifcations, degrees of protection, etc page 8/2
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Levels of service. .page 1/2

Combination automatic motor starters
DOL.starters,.type.1.coordination. page 1/6
DOL.starters,.type..coordination page 1/10
Combination starters for customer assembly
DOL.starters
With.circuit-breaker.and.overload.protection.built.into..
the.circuit-breaker . page 1/16
With.circuit-breaker.and.overload.protection.by.separate.
thermal.overload.relay. page 1/18
With.fuse.protection.(NF.C.or.DIN). page 1/22
Star-delta.starters
With.circuit-breaker.and.overload.protection.built.into..
the.circuit-breaker . page 1/26
With.circuit-breaker.and.overload.protection.by.separate.
thermal.overload.relay. page 1/28
With.fuse.protection.(NF.C.or.DIN). page 1/30
With.fuse.protection.(BS.fuses) . page 1/32
DOL starters, plate mounted, for motor control
4.to.37.kW,.without.isolating.device,.pre-assembled . page 1/34
Star-delta starters for motor control
55.to.13.kW,.without.isolating.device,.pre-assembled. page 1/37
75.to.13.kW,.without.mechanical.interlock,for.customer.assembly . page 1/39
90.to.375.kW,.without.isolating.device,.pre-assembled . page 1/45
90.to.375.kW,.on.chassis.for.customer.assembly. page 1/47
TeSys U starter-controllers
Presentation.. page 1/52
Application.examples. page 1/58
Non-reversing.and.reversing.power.bases. page 1/62
Add-on.contact.blocks.and.auxiliary.contact.modules . page 1/64
LU9. page 1/68
Control.units.and.function.modules . page 1/70
PowerSuite.software.workshop. page 1/74
Parallel.wiring.module.and.pre-wired.coil.connection.components . page 1/78
AS-Interface.communication.modules. page 1/80
Profbus DP communication module . page 1/82
CANopen.communication.module. page 1/86
DeviceNet.communication.module............................. page 1/88
Advantys.STB.communication.module.......................... page 1/92
Modbus.communication.module . page 1/94
Communication.gateways.LUF.P. page 1/96
Characteristics. page 1/98
Curves. page 1/106
b
b
b
b
v
v
v
b
v
v
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Contents
1.-.TeSys.motor.starters:..
open.version
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/1
Selection.curves.according.to.categories. page 1/110
Dimensions. page 1/112
Schemes. page 1/114
TeSys.U.starter-controllers,.variable.speed.controllers..
and.soft.start/soft.stop.units
Altistart.U01.and.TeSys.U. page 1/126
Magnetic.control.unit.for.the.protection.of.variable.speed.controllers.
and.soft.start/soft.stop.units. page 1/136
Combination............................................. page 1/138
integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing
contactor breakers
General,.terminology. page 1/142
References . page 1/162
Accessories.and.coils.references. page 1/167
Dimensions,.schemes. page 1/176
Adaptators for use with busbar sytem
With.60.mm.pitch. page 1/180
TeSys Quickft, installation system for motor starter
components
Presentation............................................. page 1/190
Dimensions,.schemes. page 1/200
AK5 pre-assembled panel busbar system
Mounting.(equipment.possibilities). page 1/208
Dimensions. page 1/212
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/
1
TeSys motor starters
Levels.of.service
Type 1 and type 2 coordination according to the standard
The standard defnes tests at different levels of current; the purpose of these tests is
to.place.the.equipment.in.extreme.conditions.
The standard defnes 2 types of coordination, according to the condition of the
components.after.testing:.
type 1,
type 2
To.determine.the.type.of.coordination,.the.standard.requires.that.the.behaviour.of.the.
equipment.be.tested.under.overload.and.short-circuit.conditions.for.3.fault.current.
values,.covering.overload.and.short-circuit.conditions.
Type 1 coordination
Type.1.coordination.requires.that.in.a.short-circuit.condition,.the.contactor.or.starter.
must.not.present.any.danger.to.personnel.or.installations.and.must.not.be.able.to.
resume.operation.without.repair.or.the.replacement.of.parts.
1 Thermal.overload.relay.curve
2 Fuse
3 Tripping.of.thermal.overload.relay.only
4 Thermal.limit.of.the.circuit-breaker
5 Thermal.overload.relay.limit
6 Current.broken.by.the.SCPD.(1)
7 Circuit.breaker.magnetic.trip
Type 2 coordination
Type..coordination.requires.that.In.a.short-circuit.condition,.the.contactor.or.starter.
must.not.present.any.danger.to.personnel.or.installations.and.must.subsequently.
be able to resume operation. The risk of contact welding is permissible; in this case,
the.manufacturer.must.indicate.measures.to.be.taken.regarding.maintenance.of.the.
equipment.
Type..coordination.increases.reliability.of.operation.
Current values
Current Ico (overload I < 10 In)
The.thermal.overload.relay.associated.with.the.contactor.provides.protection.against.
this type of fault, up to a value Ico (see curve) defned by the manufacturer..
Standard IEC 60947-4-1 specifes the 2 current values to be used for checking
coordination.between.the.thermal.overload.relay.and.the.short-circuit.protection.
device:.
at.075.Ico.only.the.thermal.overload.relay.must.trip,
at.15.Ico.the.short-circuit.protection.device.must.operate.
b
b
Current r (low level short-circuit 10 < I < 50 In)
The.main.cause.of.this.type.of.fault.is.the.deterioration.of.insulating.materials.
Standard IEC 60947-4-1 defnes an intermediate short-circuit current r. This test
current.makes.it.possible.to.check.whether.the.protection.device.is.providing.
protection.against.low-level.short-circuits.
Operational current Ie (AC-3).(A) Current r (kA)
Ie.y.16 1
16.<.Ie.y 63 3
63.<.Ie.y 15 5
15.<.Ie.y.315 10
315.<.Ie.y.630 18
630.<.Ie.y.1000 30
Current Iq (short-circuit > current r)
This.type.of.fault.corresponds.to.a.dead.short.and.is.relatively.rare..It.can.be.caused.
by.a.connection.error.during.maintenance.work.Short-circuit.protection.is.provided.
by.fast.operating.devices.
Standard IEC 60947-4-1 defnes a current Iq. The coordination tables supplied by
Schneider Electric are based on a current Iq that is generally u.50.kA
(1) SCPD: short-circuit protection device.
1 10 50
In
t
0,75 Ico 1,25 Ico
Ico
Ir Iq
1
3 6
7
4
5
2
Overload.zone Short-circuit.zone Low-level..
short-circuit.zone
1 10 50
In
t
0,75 Ico 1,25 Ico
Ico
Ir Iq
1
3 6
7
4
5
2
Overload.zone Short-circuit.zone Low-level..
short-circuit.zone
General
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/3
1
TeSys motor starters
Levels.of.service
Selection
No coordination Considerable risks to both persons and
equipment
Not.authorised.by.standards:
NF.C.15-100.and.IEC.60364-1,.article.133-1..
(installation.regulations),
EN/IEC.6004-1,.article.7..
(electrical.equipment.in.machines),
IEC.60947-4-1,.article.85.(starters).
v
v
v
Type 1 coordination The most frequently used solution
Equipment.costs.are.lower
Reliability.of.operation.is.not.a.requirement
Before.restarting,.it.may.be.necessary.to.repair.the.
motor.starter.
Consequences:.
signifcant amount of machine downtime,
skilled.maintenance.personnel.required.to.repair,.
check,.obtain.supplies
Example:.air.conditioning.in.commercial.premises
b
b
b
v
v
Type 2 coordination This solution ensures reliability of operation
Consequences:.
reduced.machine.downtime,
reduced.maintenance.after.a.short-circuit
Example:.escalators
v
v
Total coordination With this solution, no damage or misadjustment is
permissible and reliability of operation is
guaranteed
Consequences:.
immediate.return.to.service,
no.special.precautions.required.
Examples: smoke extraction, fre-fghting pumps.
v
v
General (continued)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1/4
Applications Pre-assembled starters

Starters for customer assembly
Small machines starting under full load: DOL starters Machines starting
under no-load:
star-delta starters

Small machines starting under full load: DOL starters
Machines starting under no-load: star-delta starters
Starter type DOL or reversing starters with circuit-breaker DOL starters with
fuse protection
Soft start units or
star-delta starters to
be used in association
with a circuit-breaker or
fuses

DOL or reversing starters DOL, reversing or star-delta starters with circuit-breakers DOL, reversoing or star-delta starters with fuses
Level of service Type.1.coordination Type..coordination .
.
Total.coordination Type.1.and.type..coordination
Power at 400 V Up.to.55.kW Up.to.37.kW Up.to.37.kW Up.to.13.kW .
.
Up.to.15.kW Up.to.110.kW Up.to.315.kW Up.to.355.kW
Type of components Combination automatic motor starter with overload protection
built into the circuit-breaker
Fuse carrier
+ plate-mounted
contactor
3 contactors
(line, star and delta,
mounted on plate,
rail or chassis)

Starter-controller Thermal magnetic
circuit-breaker
+ contactor(s)
Magnetic circuit-breaker
+ contactor(s)
+ thermal overload relay
Fuse carrier
+ contactor(s)
Switch-disconnector-fuse
+ contactor(s)
Pages 1/6.and.1/7 1/8.and.1/9 1/10.and.1/11 1/34 1/37 .
.
1/6.and.1/63 1/16.and.1/17,..
1/6.and.1/7
1/18.and.1/19,..
1/8.and.1/9
1/..
1/30
1/3,.1/31,.
1/3.and.1/33
Selection guide
TeSys motor starters - open version
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1/5
Applications Pre-assembled starters

Starters for customer assembly
Small machines starting under full load: DOL starters Machines starting
under no-load:
star-delta starters

Small machines starting under full load: DOL starters
Machines starting under no-load: star-delta starters
Starter type DOL or reversing starters with circuit-breaker DOL starters with
fuse protection
Soft start units or
star-delta starters to
be used in association
with a circuit-breaker or
fuses

DOL or reversing starters DOL, reversing or star-delta starters with circuit-breakers DOL, reversoing or star-delta starters with fuses
Level of service Type.1.coordination Type..coordination .
.
Total.coordination Type.1.and.type..coordination
Power at 400 V Up.to.55.kW Up.to.37.kW Up.to.37.kW Up.to.13.kW .
.
Up.to.15.kW Up.to.110.kW Up.to.315.kW Up.to.355.kW
Type of components Combination automatic motor starter with overload protection
built into the circuit-breaker
Fuse carrier
+ plate-mounted
contactor
3 contactors
(line, star and delta,
mounted on plate,
rail or chassis)

Starter-controller Thermal magnetic
circuit-breaker
+ contactor(s)
Magnetic circuit-breaker
+ contactor(s)
Fuse carrier
+ contactor(s)
Switch-disconnector-fuse
+ contactor(s)
Pages 1/6.and.1/7 1/8.and.1/9 1/10.and.1/11 1/34 1/37 .
.
1/6.and.1/63 1/16.and.1/17,..
1/6.and.1/7
1/18.and.1/19,..
1/8.and.1/9
1/..
1/30
1/3,.1/31,.
1/3.and.1/33
1/6
1
Combination.automatic.motor.starters..
with.overload.protection.built.into.the.circuit-breaker
....
DOL starters, non-reversing, from 037 to 55 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination
This.pre-assembled.combination.comprises:
1.motor.circuit-breaker.GV.ME,
1.3-pole.contactor.LC1.K,
1.combination.block.GV.AF01.
Characteristics
Starter type GV2 ME06K1 ME07K1 ME08K1 ME10K1 ME14K1 ME16K1
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)
Conforming.to.
IEC.60947-4-1
400/415.V kA 50 50 50 50 50 15
440.V kA 50 50 50 50 15 8
500.V kA 50 50 50 50 10.(4.kW)
6.(55.kW)
6
References
DOL starters, non-reversing
Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in AC-3
Setting
range of
thermal
trips
Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth
For customer assembly Pre-assembled Weight
400/
415 V
440 V 500 V Motor
circuit-
breaker
Reference
Contactor
Reference
to be
completed
(2)
Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code
(3)
kW kW kW A A kg
037
055
037
055
037
055
075
116 5 GV.ME06 LC1.K06 GV2 ME06K1pp 0460
075
075
11

11
165 335 GV.ME07 LC1.K06 GV2 ME07K1pp 0460
11
15

15
15
54 51 GV.ME08 LC1.K06 GV2 ME08K1pp 0460

3

3
463 78 GV.ME10 LC1.K06 GV2 ME10K1pp 0460
3
4

4
4
55
610 138 GV.ME14 LC1.K09 GV2 ME14K1pp 0460
55 55 75 914 170 GV.ME16 LC1.K1 GV2 ME16K1pp 0460
Add-on blocks
Description Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor 10. GV2 AF01 000
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/13.
(2)PleaseconsultyourRegionalSalesOffce.
(3)Standardcontrolcircuitvoltages(forothervoltages,pleaseconsultyourRegionalSalesOffce):
Volts 24 110 220/230 230 230/240 380/400
a 50/60 Hz B7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7
c (4) BW3
(4) Coil: low consumption (1.5 W), wide range (0.71.3 Uc) with integral suppression device as standard.
b
b
b
GV2 ME10K1pp GV2 ME10K1pp
Dimensions.:
page.1/1
Schemes.:
page.1/14
Dimensions.:
page.1/1
Schemes.:
page.1/14
Dimensions.:
page.1/1
Schemes.:
page.1/14
Dimensions.:
page.1/1
Schemes.:
page.1/14
References
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/7
1
..
DOL starters, reversing, from 037 to 55 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination
1.3-pole.reversing.contactor.LC.K,
Characteristics
Starter type GV2 ME06K2 ME07K2 ME08K2 ME10K2 ME14K2 ME16K2
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)
Conforming.to.
IEC.60947-4-1
400/415.V kA 50 50 50 50 50 15
440.V kA 50 50 50 50 15 8
500.V kA 50 50 50 50 10/4.kW
6/55.kW
6
References
DOL starters, reversing
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in AC-3
Setting
range of
thermal
trips
Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth
400/
415 V
440 V 500 V Motor
circuit-
breaker
Reference
Contactor
Reference
to be
completed
(2)
Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code
(3)
kW kW kW A A kg
037
055
037
055
037
055
075
116 5 GV.ME06 LC.K06 GV2 ME06K2pp 0460
075
075
11

11
165 335 GV.ME07 LC.K06 GV2 ME07K2pp 0460
11
15

15
15
54 51 GV.ME08 LC.K06 GV2 ME08K2pp 0460

3

3
463 78 GV.ME10 LC.K06 GV2 ME10K2pp 0460
3
4

4
4
55
610 138 GV.ME14 LC.K09 GV2 ME14K2pp 0460
55 55 75 914 170 GV.ME16 LC.K1 GV2 ME16K2pp 0460
Add-on blocks
Description Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor 10. GV2 AF01 000
(2)PleaseconsultyourRegionalSalesOffce.
Volts 24 110 220/230 230 230/240 380/400
a 50/60 Hz B7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7
c (4) BW3
(4) Coil: low consumption (1.5 W), wide range (0.71.3 Uc) with integral suppression device as standard.
b
b
b
GV2 ME10K2pp GV2 ME10K2pp
Dimensions.:
page.1/1
Schemes.:
page.1/14
Dimensions.:
page.1/1
Schemes.:
page.1/14
Dimensions.:
page.1/1
Schemes.:
page.1/14
Dimensions.:
page.1/1
Schemes.:
page.1/14
References
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/8
1
.
1.3-pole.contactor.LC1.D,
Characteristics
Starter type GV2 DM 102 to
DM 110
DM 114 DM 116 DM 120 DM 121 DM 122 DM 132
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)
Conforming.to.
IEC.60947-4-1
400/415.V kA 50 50 15 15 15 15 10
440.V kA 50 15 8 8 6 6 6
500.V kA 50 6 6 6 4 4 4
References
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in AC-3
Setting
range of
thermal
trips
Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth
400/
415 V
440 V 500 V Motor
circuit-
breaker
Reference
Contactor
Reference
to be
completed
(2)
Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code
(2)
kW kW kW A A kg
006 006 01605 4 GV.ME0 LC1.D09pp GV2 DM102pp (3) 0596
009
009
01
05040 5 GV.ME03 LC1.D09pp GV2 DM103pp (3) 0596
01
018

018


05
037
05
037

055
055
037
055
075
075
075
11

11
11
15

15
15

3

3
3
4

4
4
55
55 55 75 914 170 GV.ME16 LC1.D1pp GV2 DM116pp 0601
75
75
9

9
1318 3 GV.ME0 LC1.D18pp GV2 DM120pp 0606
9 11 11 173 37 GV.ME1 LC1.D5pp GV2 DM121pp 0646
11 15 05 37 GV.ME LC1.D5pp GV2 DM122pp 0646
15 15 185 43 416 GV.ME3 LC1.D3pp GV2 DM132pp 0651.
Add-on blocks
Description Mounting of
GV2
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor 5.rail 10. GV2-AF3 0016
Mounting.plate.
LAD.311
10 GV2-AF4 0016
Volts 24 220 230
a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7
c (4) BD
(3) Type 2 coordination also possible, see page 1/17.
(4) Only available for GV2 DM. Coil with integral suppression device as standard.
b
b
b
GV2 DM102pp GV2 DM102pp
Dimensions.:
pages.1/1.and.1/13.
Schemes.:
page1/14
Dimensions.:
pages.1/1.and.1/13.
Schemes.:
page1/14
Dimensions.:
pages.1/1.and.1/13.
Schemes.:
page1/14
Dimensions.:
pages.1/1.and.1/13.
Schemes.:
page1/14
References
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/9
1
.
1.3-pole.reversing.contactor.LC.D,
Characteristics
Starter type GV2 DM202 to
DM210
DM214 DM216 DM220 DM221 DM222 DM232
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)
Conforming.to.
IEC.60947-4-1
400/415.V kA 50 50 15 15 15 15 10
440.V kA 50 15 8 8 6 6 6
500.V kA 50 10 6 6 4 4 4
References
DOL starters, reversing (2)
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in AC-3
Setting
range of
thermal
trips
Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth
400/
415 V
440 V 500 V Motor
circuit-
breaker
Reference
Contactor
Reference
to be
completed (3)
Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (4)
kW kW kW A A kg
006 006 01605 4 GV.ME0 LC.D09pp GV2 DM202pp 0963
009
009
01
05040 5 GV.ME03 LC.D09pp GV2 DM203pp 0963
01
018

018


05
037
05
037

055
055
037
055
075
075
075
11

11
11
15

15
15

3

3
3
4

4
4
55
55 55 75 914 170 GV.ME16 LC.D1pp GV2 DM216pp 0973
75
75
9

9
11 15 05 37 GV.ME LC.D5pp GV2 DM222pp 1063
Add-on blocks
GV2
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Combination block between
circuit-breaker and contactor
5.rail 10. GV2-AF3 0016
Mounting.plate.
LAD.311
10 GV2-AF4 0016
(2) Type 2 coordination also possible, see page 1/7.
(3) See page 5/62.
Volts 24 220 230
a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7
c (5) BD
(5) Coil with integral suppression device as standard.
b
b
b
GV2 DM202pp GV2 DM202pp
Dimensions.:
page.1/1
Schemes.:
page.1/14
Dimensions.:
page.1/1
Schemes.:
page.1/14
Dimensions.:
page.1/1
Schemes.:
page.1/14
Dimensions.:
page.1/1
Schemes.:
page.1/14
References
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/10
1
.
1.motor.circuit-breaker.GV.P,
1.3-pole.contactor.LC1.D,
Characteristics
Starter type GV2 DP102 to
DP110
DP114 DP116 DP120 DP121 DP122 DP132
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)
Conforming.to.
IEC.60947-4-1
400/415.V kA 130 130 130 50 50 50 50
440.V kA 130 130 50 0 0 0 0
500.V kA 130 50 4 10 10 10 10
References
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in AC-3
Setting
range of
thermal
trips
Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth
400/
415 V
440 V 500 V Motor
circuit-
breaker
Reference
Contactor
Reference
to be
completed
(2)
Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code
(3)
kW kW kW A A kg
006 006 01605 4 GV.P0 LC1.D09pp GV2 DP102pp 0686
009
009
01
05040 5 GV.P03 LC1.D09pp GV2 DP103pp 0686
01
018

018

040063 8 GV.P04 LC1.D09pp GV2 DP104pp 0686

05
037
05
037

0631 13 GV.P05 LC1.D09pp GV2 DP105pp 0686
055
055
037
055
075
116 5 GV.P06 LC1.D09pp GV2 DP106pp 0686
075
075
11

11
165 335 GV.P07 LC1.D09pp GV2 DP107pp 0686
11
15

15
15
54 51 GV.P08 LC1.D09pp GV2 DP108pp 0696

3

3
463 78 GV.P10 LC1.D09pp GV2 DP110pp 0736
3
4

4
4
55
610 138 GV.P14 LC1.D09pp GV2 DP114pp 0736
55
55
75
75
9
914 170 GV.P16 LC1.D5pp GV2 DP116pp 0741
75 9 1318 3 GV.P0 LC1.D5pp GV2 DP120pp 0736
9 11 11 173 37 GV.P1 LC1.D5pp GV2 DP121pp 0741
11 15 05 37 GV.P LC1.D5pp GV2 DP122pp 0741
15 15 185 43 416 GV.P3 LC1.D3pp GV2 DP132pp 0741
185 3040 560 GV3.P401.(4) LC1.D50App 175
185 3040 560 GV3.P401.(4) LC1.D65App 1730
3750 700 GV3.P501.(4) LC1.D50App 175
30 3750 700 GV3.P501.(4) LC1.D65App 1730
30 37 4865 910 GV3.P651.(4) LC1.D65App 1730
Add-on blocks
GV2
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Combination block between
circuit-breaker and contactor
5.rail 10. GV2-AF3 0016
Mounting.plate.
LAD.311
10 GV2-AF4 0016
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/13.
(2) See page 5/62.
Volts 24 220 230
a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7
c (5) BD
(4) Circuit-breaker supplied without downstream EverLink power terminal block, which is required for vertical mounting.
For side by side mounting, use a GV3 P circuit-breaker with terminal blocks and the GV3S set of S-shape busbars
(see page 5/85).
b
b
b
Dimensions.:
page1/13.
Schemes.:
page1/15
Dimensions.:
page1/13.
Schemes.:
page1/15
Dimensions.:
page1/13.
Schemes.:
page1/15
Dimensions.:
page1/13.
Schemes.:
page1/15
References
GV3 P651
+
LC1 D65App
GV2 DP102pp
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/11
1
Combination.automatic.motor.starters.with.overload.
protection.built.into.the.circuit-breaker
.
1.motor.circuit-breaker.GV.P,
1.3-pole.reversing.contactor.LC.D,
Characteristics
Starter type GV2 DP202 to
DP210
DP214 DP216 DP220 DP221 DP222 DP232
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)
Conforming.to.
IEC.60947-4-1
400/415.V kA 130 130 130 50 50 50 50
440.V kA 130 130 50 0 0 0 0
500.V kA 130 50 4 10 10 10 10
References
DOL starters, reversing
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in AC-3
Setting
range of
thermal
trips
Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth
400/
415 V
440 V 500 V Motor
circuit-
breaker
Reference
Contactor
Reference
to be
completed
(2)
Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code
(3)
kW kW kW A A kg
006 006 01605 4 GV.P0 LC.D09pp GV2 DP202pp 1053
009
009
01
05040 5 GV.P03 LC.D09pp GV2 DP203pp 1053
01
018

018

040063 8 GV.P04 LC.D09pp GV2 DP204pp 1053

05
037
05
037

0631 13 GV.P05 LC.D09pp GV2 DP205pp 1053
055
055
037
055
075
116 5 GV.P06 LC.D09pp GV2 DP206pp 1053
075
075
11

11
165 335 GV.P07 LC.D09pp GV2 DP207pp 1053
11
15

15
15
54 51 GV.P08 LC.D09pp GV2 DP208pp 1073

3

3
463 78 GV.P10 LC.D09pp GV2 DP210pp 1153
3
4

4
4
55
610 138 GV.P14 LC.D09pp GV2 DP214pp 1153
55
55
75
75
9
914 170 GV.P16 LC.D5pp GV2 DP216pp 1163
75 9 1318 3 GV.P0 LC.D5pp GV2 DP220pp 1153
9 11 11 173 37 GV.P1 LC.D5pp GV2 DP221pp 1163
11 15 05 37 GV.P LC.D5pp GV2 DP222pp 1163
15 15 185 43 416 GV.P3 LC.D3pp GV2 DP232pp 1163
185 3040 560 GV3.P401.(4) LC.D50App 750
185 3040 560 GV3.P401.(4) LC.D65App 760
3750 700 GV3.P501.(4) LC.D50App 750
30 3750 700 GV3.P501.(4) LC.D65App 760
30 37 4865 910 GV3.P651.(4) LC.D65App 760
Add-on blocks
GV2
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor 5.rail 10. GV2-AF3 0016
Mounting.plate.
LAD.311
10 GV2-AF4 0016
(2) See page 5/62.
Volts 24 220 230
a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7
c.(5) BD
(4) Circuit-breaker supplied without downstream EverLink power terminal block, which is required for vertical mounting.
For side by side mounting, use a GV3 P circuit-breaker with terminal blocks and the GV3S set of S-shape busbars (see
page 5/85).
b
b
b
References
GV3 P651
+
LC2 D65App
GV2 DP202pp
Dimensions.:
page1/13.
Schemes.:
page1/15
Dimensions.:
page1/13.
Schemes.:
page1/15
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/1
1
TeSys motor starters - open
version
Combination.automatic.motor.starters
............
GV2 MEppKppp
On mounting rail AM1 DE200 GV2 MEppK1pp GV2 MEppK2pp
66
87
11 45
1
5
2
90
1
5
2
GV2 DMppppp
On mounting rail AM1 DE200 With adapter plate LAD 311 GV2 DM1pppp GV2 DM2pppp
c1
c
1
c1
c
d1
d
1
2
5

3
2
3
4

45
b
c
GV2 DMp02pp to
DMp20pp
DMp21pp to
DMp32pp
GV2 DMp02pp to
DMp20pp
DMp21pp to
DMp32pp
b 1764 1868 c 1356 1419
c 996 1059 c1 1301 1364
c1 941 1004 d 115 115
d1 107 107
....
90
b
90
b
References:
pages.1/6.to.1/11.
References:
pages.1/6.to.1/11.
References:
pages.1/6.to.1/11.
References:
pages.1/6.to.1/11.
Dimensions,
mounting
GV2 DPppppp
On mounting rail AM1 DE200 With adapter plate LAD 311 GV2 DP1pppp GV2 DP2pppp
c1
c
d1
d
1
c1
c
1
2
5

3
2
3
4

45
b
90
b
GV2 DPp02pp to
DPp08pp
DPp10pp to
DPp32pp
GV2 DPp02pp to
DPp08pp
DPp10pp to
DPp32pp
b 1764 1868 c 1416 1479
c 1056 1119 c1 1365 144
c1 1001 1064
d 1005 1005
d1 95 95
1/13
1
version
GV3 Ppp1 + LC1 D40AD65A (for customer assembly)
Vertical mounting (1) Side by side mounting with S-shape busbar system GV3 S (2)
2
3
1
1
2
0
136 55
141
1
2
0

+
3 0
136
141
119
1
3
8
GV3 Ppp1 + LC2 D40AD65A (for customer assembly)
Vertical mounting (1) Side by side mounting with S-shape busbar system GV3 S (2)
2
3
3
119
1
3
8
183
(1) For several side-by-side motor starters, the maximum current allowed is equal to the nominal current under 400 V.
Example: 55 A for a 30 kW motor under 400 V, for a GV3 P65 circuit-breaker and a LC1 D65A contactor association.
(2) The maximum current allowed is equal to 90 % of maximum current. Example: 45 A for a LC1 D50A contactor.
....
References:
pages.1/6.to.1/11.
References:
pages.1/6.to.1/11.
References:
pages.1/6.to.1/11.
References:
pages.1/6.to.1/11.
Dimensions,
mounting (continued)
1/14
1
version
....
GV2 MEppK1pp GV2 MEppK2pp
GV2 DM1pppp GV2 DM2pppp
....
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
T
1
/
2
T
2
/
4
T
3
/
6
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
A
1
A
2
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
T
1
/
2
T
2
/
4
T
3
/
6
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
A
1
A
2
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
T
1
/
2
T
2
/
4
T
3
/
6
1
3
/
N
O
T
1
/
2
T
2
/
4
T
3
/
6
1
4
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
A
1
A
2
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
T
1
/
2
T
2
/
4
T
3
/
6
1
3
/
N
O
T
1
/
2
T
2
/
4
T
3
/
6
1
4
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
A
1
A
2
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
T
1
/
2
T
2
/
4
T
3
/
6
A
1
A
2
1
4
1
3
/
N
O
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
T
1
/
2
T
2
/
4
T
3
/
6
A
1
A
2
1
4
1
3
/
N
O
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
4
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
1
L
2
L
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
U V W
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
1
3
/
N
O
A
1
A
2
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
GV2DM2-SCH-2-M
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
4
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
1
L
2
L
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
U V W
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
1
3
/
N
O
A
1
A
2
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
GV2DM2-SCH-2-M
References:
pages.1/6.to.1/11.
References:
pages.1/6.to.1/11.
References:
pages.1/6.to.1/11.
References:
pages.1/6.to.1/11.
Schemes
1/15
1
version
.........
GV2 DP1pppp GV2 DP2pppp
Mechanical interlock with integral electrical contacts
Control circuit a Control circuit c
.....
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
T
1
/
2
T
2
/
4
T
3
/
6
A
1
A
2
1
4
1
3
/
N
O
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
T
1
/
2
T
2
/
4
T
3
/
6
A
1
A
2
1
4
1
3
/
N
O
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
4
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
1
L
2
L
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
U V W
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
1
3
/
N
O
A
1
A
2
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
GV2DP2-SCH-2-M
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
4
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
1
L
2
L
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
U V W
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
1
3
/
N
O
A
1
A
2
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
GV2DP2-SCH-2-M
KM1
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
0
1
0
1
0
2
0
2
KM2 KM1
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
0
1
0
1
0
2
0
2
KM2
KM1
A
2
A
2
0
1
0
2
0
2
KM2
0
1
A
1
A
1
KM1
A
2
A
2
0
1
0
2
0
2
KM2
0
1
A
1
A
1
KM1 KM2
A
1
A
2
A
2
A
1
KM1 KM2
A
1
A
2
A
2
A
1
References:
pages.1/6.to.1/11.
References:
pages.1/6.to.1/11.
References:
pages.1/6.to.1/11.
References:
pages.1/6.to.1/11.
Schemes (continued)
1
1/16
006 to 110 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in category AC-3
Circuit-breaker Contactor
Reference Setting range
of thermal trips
Reference (2)
400/415 V 440 V 500 V
P Ie Iq (1) P Ie Iq (1) P Ie Iq (1)
kW A kA kW A kA kW A kA A
006 0 50 006 019 50 GV2 ME02 01605 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
009 03 50 009
012
08
037
50
50
GV2 ME03 05040 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
012
018
044
06
50
50

018

055

50

GV2 ME04 040063 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09

025
037
085
11
50
50
025
037
076
099
50
50
GV2 ME05 0631 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
055

15

50

055

136

50
037
055
088
1
50
50
GV2 ME06 116 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
075 15 50 GV2 ME06 116 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
075
19
50
075
11
168
37
50
50

11

50
GV2 ME07 165 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
11
15
7
36
50
50

15

306

50
15
22
9
39
5050 GV2 ME08 54 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
22
49
50
22
3
44
577
50
50

3

5

50
GV2 ME10 463 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
3
4
65
85
50
50

4

79

15
4
55
68
9
10
10
GV2 ME14 610 LC1 K09 or LC1 D09
55 115 15 55 104 8 75 14 6 GV2 ME16 914 LC1 K12 or LC1 D12
75
155
15
75
9
137
169
8
8
9
139
GV2 ME20 1318 LC1 D18

9 181 15 11 01 6 11 176 4 GV2 ME21 173 LC1 D25
11 15 15 3 4 GV2 ME22 05 LC1 D25
15 9 10 15 65 6 185 8 4 GV2 ME32 43 LC1 D32
185 35 50 185 38 50 22 33 10 GV3 P40 3040 LC1 D40A
22 41 50 22 39 50 30 44 10 GV3 P50 3750 LC1 D50A
30 55 50 37 515 50 37 53 10 GV3 P65 4865 LC1 D65A
37 64 5 45 64 18 GV7 RE80 4880 LC1 D65A
37 66 15 45 76 10 55 78 4 GV3 ME80 5680 LC1 D80
37 66 5 45 76 5 55 78 18 GV7 RE80 4880 LC1 D80
45 80 5 GV7 RE100 60100 LC1 D95
50 90 5 GV7 RE100 60100 LC1 D115
55 97 5 75 106 30 GV7 RE150 90150 LC1 D115
75 13 35 75 15 35 90 18 30 GV7 RE150 90150 LC1 D150
90 146 35 GV7 RE150 90150 LC1 F185
90 160 35 110 156 30 GV7 RE220 130 LC1 F185

110

178

35
132
160
184
4
30
30
GV7 RE220 130 LC1 F265
110 195 35 132 15 35 GV7 RE220 130 LC1 F225
(2)Forreversingoperation,replacetheprefxLC1withLC2.
Combination starters
for customer assembly
DOL.starters.with.circuit-breaker..
and.overload.protection.built.into.the.circuit-breaker
1
1/17
Circuit-breaker Contactor
Reference Setting range
of thermal trips
Reference (2)
400/415 V 440 V 500 V
P Ie Iq (1) P Ie Iq (1) P Ie Iq (1)
kW A kA kW A kA kW A kA A
006 0 130 006 019 130 GV2 P02 or GV2 ME02 01605 LC1 D09
009

03

130
009
012
08
037
130
130

GV2 P03 or GV2 ME03 0504 LC1 D09

012
018
044
06
130
130

018

055

130

GV2 P04 or GV2 ME04 04063 LC1 D09

025
037
085
11
130
130
025
037
076
099
130
130

GV2 P05 or GV2 ME05 0631 LC1 D09
055

15

130

055

136

130
037
055
088
1
130
130
GV2 P06 or GV2 ME06 116 LC1 D09
075 15 130 GV2 P06 or GV2 ME06 116 LC1 D09
075
19
130
075
11
168
37
130
130

11

130
GV2 P07 or GV2 ME07 165 LC1 D09
11
15
7
36
130
130

15

306

130
15
22
9
39
130
130
GV2 P08 or GV2 ME08 54 LC1 D09
22

49

130

GV2 P10 or GV2 ME10 463 LC1 D09
22
3
44
577
50
50

3

5

50
GV2 ME10 463 LC1 D09
22
3
44
577
130
130

3

5

130
GV2 P10 463 LC1 D09
3
4
65
85
130
130

GV2 P14 or GV2 ME14 610 LC1 D09
79
15
4
55
68
9
10
10
GV2 ME14 610 LC1 D09

4

79

130
4
55
68
9
50
50
GV2 P14 610 LC1 D12
55
115
130
55
75
104
137
50
50
75
9
14
139
4
4
GV2 P16 or GV2 ME16 914 LC1 D25
75 155 50 9 169 0 GV2 P20 or GV2 ME20 1318 LC1 D25
9 181 50 11 01 0 11 176 10 GV2 P21 or GV2 ME21 173 LC1 D25
11 50 GV2 P22 or GV2 ME22 05 LC1 D25
15 3 10 GV2 P22 05 LC1 D32
15 9 35 15 65 5 185 8 10 GV2 P32 or GV2 ME32 540 LC1 D32
185 35 50 GV3 P40 3040 LC1 D50A
185 38 50 22 33 10 GV3 P40 3040 LC1 D65A
22 41 50 GV3 P50 3750 LC1 D50A
22 39 50 30 44 10 GV3 P50 3750 LC1 D65A
30 55 50 37 515 50 GV3 P65 4865 LC1 D65A
37 53 10 GV3 P65 4865 LC1 D80
22 39 65 GV7 RS40 540 LC1 D80
30 44 50 GV7 RS50 3050 LC1 D80
37 53 50 GV7 RS80 4880 LC1 D80
22 41 70 GV7 RS50 3050 LC1 D80
30 55 70 30 515 65 GV7 RS80 4880 LC1 D80
37 66 70 37 64 65 GV7 RS80 4880 LC1 D80
45 76 65 GV7 RS80 4880 LC1 D80
45 64 50 GV7 RS80 4880 LC1 D115
55 78 50 GV7 RS80 4880 LC1 D115
45
80
70

55

90

65

GV7 RS100 60100 LC1 D115

55
75
97
13
70
70
75
90
15
146
65
65

90

18

50
GV7 RS150 90150 LC1 D150
90 160 70 110 178 65 110 156 50 GV7 RS220 130 LC1 F185
110 195 70 132 15 65 GV7 RS220 130 LC1 F225
132
160
184
4
50
50
GV7 RS220 130 LC1 F265
(2) Combinations with circuit-breaker GV2 ME are type 2 coordinated only at 400/415 V and 440 V.
DOL.starters.with.circuit-breaker..
and.overload.protection.built.into.the.circuit-breaker
1
1/18
Circuit-breaker Contactor Thermal overload relay
400/415 V 440 V 500 V Reference Rating Irm (1) Reference (2) Reference Setting
range
P Ie Iq P Ie Iq P Ie Iq
kW A kA kW A kA kW A kA A A A
006 0 50 006 019 50 GV2 LE03 04 5 LC1 K06 LR2 K0302 01603
009 08 50 GV2 LE03 04 5 LC1 K06 LR2 K0303 03036
009 03 50 01 037 50 GV2 LE03 04 5 LC1 K06 LR2 K0304 036054
01 044 50 GV2 LE04 063 8 LC1 K06 LR2 K0304 036054
018 06 50 018 055 50 GV2 LE04 063 8 LC1 K06 LR2 K0305 05408
05 076 50 GV2 LE05 1 13 LC1 K06 LR2 K0305 05408
05
037
085
11
50
50

037

1

50

037

088

50
GV2 LE05 1 13 LC1 K06 LR2 K0306 081
055
15
50
055
136
50
055
075
1
15
50
50
GV2 LE06 16 5 LC1 K06 LR2 K0307 118
075 168 50 GV2 LE07 5 335 LC1 K06 LR2 K0307 118
075
11
19
7
50
50

11

37

50

11

50
GV2 LE07 5 335 LC1 K06 LR2 K0308 186
15 36 50 15 306 50 15 9 50 GV2 LE08 4 51 LC1 K06 LR2 K0310 637
39 50 GV2 LE08 4 51 LC1 K06 LR2 K0312 3755
49 50 44 50 3 5 50 GV2 LE10 63 78 LC1 K06 LR2 K0312 3755
3 577 50 GV2 LE10 63 78 LC1 K06 LR2 K0314 558
4 79 15 GV2 LE14 10 138 LC1 K09 LR2 K0314 558
3 65 50 4 68 10 GV2 LE14 10 138 LC1 K09 LR2 K0314 558
4 85 50 GV2 LE14 10 138 LC1 K09 LR2 K0316 8115
55 115 15 55 104 8 75 14 6 GV2 LE16 14 170 LC1 K12 LR2 K0321 1014
75 137 8 9 139 6 GV2 LE16 14 170 LC1 D18 LRD 21 118
75 155 15 9 169 8 GV2 LE20 18 3 LC1 D18 LRD 21 118
9 181 15 11 176 4 GV2 LE22 5 37 LC1 D25 LRD 22 164
11 15 11 01 6 15 3 4 GV2 LE22 5 37 LC1 D25 LRD 22 164
15 9 10 15 65 6 185 8 4 GV2 LE32 3 416 LC1 D32 LRD 32 33
185 35 50 185 35 50 33 10 GV3 L40 40 560 LC1 D40A LRD 340 3040
41 50 39 50 30 44 10 GV3 L50 50 700 LC1 D50A LRD 350 3750
(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip.
DOL.starters.with.circuit-breaker.and.overload.
protection.by.separate.thermal.overload.relay
1
1/19
006 to 250 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination (continued)
range
30 55 50 37 515 50 37 53 10 GV3 L65 65 910 LC1 D65A LRD 365 4865
37 64 50 37 53 10 GV3 L65 65 910 LC1 D65A LRD 365 4865
45 64 50 GV3 L65 65 910 LC1 D80 LRD 3361 4865
37 66 70 45 76 65 55 78 5 NS80HMA 80 1040 LC1 D80 LRD 3363 6380
45 80 (3) NS100pMA (3) 100 1300 LC1 D95 LRD 3365 80104
50 90 (3) NS100pMA (3) 100 100 LC1 D115 LRD 4365 80104
75 106 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 1500 LC1 D115 LRD 4367 9510
55 97 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 1350 LC1 D115 LRD 4367 9510
75 13 (3) 75 15 (3) 90 18 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 1800 LC1 D150 LRD 4369 110140
90 146 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 1950 LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 130
90 160 (3) 110 156 (3) NS250pMA (3) 0 00 LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 130
110 195 (3) NS250pMA (3) 0 640 LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 130
110 178 (3) NS250pMA (3) 0 40 LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 130
132 184 (3) NS250pMA (3) 0 640 LC1 F265 LR9 F5371 130
132 15 (3) NS250pMA (3) 0 860 LC1 F265 LR9 F5371 130
132 30 (3) NS400pMA (3) 30 300 LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 00330
160 4 (3) NS400pMA (3) 30 860 LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 00330
160 56 (3) NS400pMA (3) 30 350 LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 00330
160 80 (3) 200 31 (3) NS400pMA (3) 30 4160 LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 00330
200 80 (3) NS400pMA (3) 30 3840 LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 00330
220 310 (3) NS400pMA (3) 30 4160 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300500
200 350 (3) 220 353 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 5000 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300500
250 401 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 5550 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300500
250 344 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 5000 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300500
220 388 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 5500 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300500
250 430 (3) 280 470 (3) 315 43 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 6000 LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300500
355 488 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 6500 LC1 F500 LR9 F7381 380630
(3) Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code:
Breaking performance Iq (kA) NS100pMA NS160pMA and NS250pMA NS400pMA and NS630pMA
400/415 V 5 70 36 70 70 130
440 V 5 65 35 65 65 130
500 V 18 50 30 50 50 70
660/690 V 8 10 8 10 0 35
Code N H N H H L
(continued)
1
1/0
range
006 0 130 006 019 130 GV2 L03 or LE03 04 5 LC1 D09 LRD 02 01605
009
03
130
009
012
08
037
130
130
GV2 L03 or LE03 04 5 LC1 D09 LRD 03 05040

012
018
044
06
130
130
018

055

130
GV2 L04 or LE04 063 8 LC1 D09 LRD 04 04063

025
037
085
11
130
130
025
037
076
099
130
130
GV2 L05 or LE05 1 13 LC1 D09 LRD 05 0631

037 088 130 GV2 L05 or LE05 1 13 LC1 D09 LRD 06 117
055
15
130
055

136

130
055
075
1
15
130
130
GV2 L06 or LE06 16 5 LC1 D09 LRD 06 117
075 19 130 075 168 130 11 130 GV2 L07 or LE07 5 335 LC1 D09 LRD 07 165
11
15
7
36
130
130
11
37
130
15
22
9
39
130
130
GV2 L08 or LE08 4 51 LC1 D09 LRD 08 54
15 306 130 GV2 L08 or LE08 4 51 LC1 D09 LRD 10 46
22
49
130
3

5

13
GV2 L10 or LE10 63 78 LC1 D09 LRD 10 46
22
3
44
577
50
50
3

5

50
GV2 LE10 63 78 LC1 D09 LRD 10 46
22
3
44
577
130
130
3

5

130
GV2 L10 63 78 LC1 D09 LRD 10 46
3 65 130 GV2 L14 or LE14 10 10 LC1 D09 LRD 12 558
4 68 10 GV2 LE14 10 138 LC1 D12 LRD 12 558
4 68 50 GV2 L14 10 138 LC1 D12 LRD 12 558
4 85 130 GV2 L14 or LE14 10 138 LC1 D09 LRD 14 710
4 79 15 GV2 LE14 10 138 LC1 D09 LRD 14 710
4 79 130 GV2 L14 10 138 LC1 D09 LRD 14 710
55 9 10 GV2 LE14 10 138 LC1 D09 LRD 14 710
55 9 50 GV2 L14 10 138 LC1 D09 LRD 14 710
55 115 130 55 104 50 75 14 4 GV2 L16 14 170 LC1 D25 LRD 16 913
75 137 50 GV2 L16 14 170 LC1 D25 LRD 21 118
75 155 50 9 169 0 9 139 4 GV2 L20 18 3 LC1 D25 LRD 21 118
9
11
181
50
50
11

01

0
GV2 L22 5 37 LC1 D25 LRD 22 164
11
15
176
3
10
10
GV2 L22 5 37 LC1 D32 LRD 22 164
15 9 50 15 65 50 GV3 L32 3 448 LC1 D40A LRD 332 33
185 8 10 GV3 L32 3 448 LC1 D65A LRD 332 33
(continued)
1
1/1
range
185 35 50 GV3 L40 40 560 LC1 D50A LRD 340 3040
185 35 50 GV3 L40 40 560 LC1 D65A LRD 340 3040
22 41 50 GV3 L50 50 700 LC1 D50A LRD 350 3750
22 39 50 30 44 10 GV3 L50 50 700 LC1 D65A LRD 350 3750
30 55 50 37 515 50 GV3 L65 65 910 LC1 D65A LRD 365 4865
37 64 50 37 53 10 GV3 L65 65 910 LC1 D80 LRD 3359 4865
37 66 70 45 76 65 NS80HMA 80 1000 LC1 D80 LRD 3363 6380
55 78 (3) NS100pMA (3) 100 1040 LC1 D80 LRD 3363 6380
45 80 (3) 55 90 (3) NS100pMA (3) 100 1300 LC1 D115 LR9 D5367 60100
55 97 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 1500 LC1 D115 LR9 D5369 90150
75 106 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 1050 LC1 D115 LR9 D5369 90150
75 13 (3) 75 15 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 1950 LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90150
90 146 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 1950 LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90150
90 18 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 100 LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90150
90 160 (3) 110 178 (3) NS250pMA (3) 0 40 LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 130
110 156 (3) NS250pMA (3) 0 1540 LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 130
110 195 (3) NS250pMA (3) 0 860 LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 130
132 15 (3) 132 184 (3) NS250pMA (3) 0 00 LC1 F265 LR9 F5371 130
132 30 (3) 160 56 (3) NS400pMA (3) 30 350 LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 00330
160 4 (3) NS400pMA (3) 30 00 LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 00330
160 80 (3) NS400pMA (3) 30 4000 LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 00330
200 31 (3) NS400pMA (3) 30 4000 LC1 F330 LR9 F7379 300500
200 80 (3) NS400pMA (3) 30 3500 LC1 F400 LR9 F7375 00330
220 310 (3) NS400pMA (3) 30 3500 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300500
200

350

(3)
220
250
353
401
(3)
(3)

NS630pMA (3) 500 5500 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300500
250
315
344
43
(3)
(3)
NS630pMA (3) 500 4500 LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300500
220
250
388
430
(3)
(3)

NS630pMA (3) 500 650 LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300500

355 488 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 5000 LC1 F630 LR9 F7381 380630
(3) Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code:
Breaking performance Iq (kA) NS100pMA NS160pMA and NS250pMA NS400pMA and NS630pMA
400/415 V 5 70 36 70 70 130
440 V 5 65 35 65 65 130
500 V 18 50 30 50 50 70
660/690 V 8 10 8 10 0 35
Code N H N H H L
(continued)
1/
1
1/
DOL.starters.with.fuse.protection.
(NF.C.or.DIN.fuses,.type.aM)
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz
in category AC-3
Fuse carrier (1)
(basic block)
aM fuses Contactor Thermal overload relay
class 10
400/415 V 440 V 500 V Reference Size Rating Reference (2) Reference Setting
range
P Ie P Ie P Ie
kW A kW A kW A A A
006 0 006 019 LS1 D32 10.x.38 LC1 K06 LR2 K0302 01603
. 009 08 LS1 D32 10.x.38 LC1 K06 LR2 K0303 03036
009
012
03
044
012

037

LS1 D32 10.x.38 LC1 K06 LR2 K0304 036054
018
06
. 018
025
055
076

LS1 D32 10.x.38 LC1 K06 LR2 K0305 05408
025
037
085
11
.
037

1
037

088 LS1 D32 10.x.38 LC1 K06 LR2 K0306 081
055
15
055
075
136
168
055
075
1
15

LS1 D32
.
10.x.38
.

LC1 K06

LR2 K0307
.
118
075
11
19
7
11

37
11
15

9

LS1 D32
.
10.x.38
.
4

LC1 K06

LR2 K0308
.
186
15 36 15 306 LS1 D32 10.x.38 4 LC1 K06 LR2 K0310 637
22
49
22
3
39
5 LS1 D32
.
10.x.38
.
6

LC1 K06

LR2 K0312
.
3755
22 44 LS1 D32 10.x.38 8 LC1 K06 LR2 K0312 3755
3 65 3 577 4 68 LS1 D32 10.x.38 8 LC1 K09 LR2 K0314 558
4 85 4 79 55 9 LS1 D32 10.x.38 1 LC1 K09 LR2 K0316 8115
(1) For breaking under load, add a rotary switch-disconnector.
1/3
1
1/3
(continued)
in category AC-3
Fuse carrier (1)
(basic block)
classe 10
400/415 V 440 V 500 V Reference Size Rating Reference (2) Reference Setting
range
P Ie P Ie P Ie
kW A kW A kW A A A
55 115 55 104 75 14 LS1 D32 10.x.38 16 LC1 K12 LR2 K0321 1014
75 155 75 137 9 139 LS1 D32 10.x.38 16 LC1 D18 LRD 21 118
9 169 LS1 D32 10.x.38 0 LC1 D25 LRD 21 118
9
11
181
11

01
11
15
176
3

GK1 EK
.
14.x.51
.
5

LC1 D25

LRD 22
.
164
15 9 15 65 185 8 GK1 EK 14.x.51 3 LC1 D32 LRD 32 33
185 35 185 38 22 33 GK1 EK 14.x.51 40 LC1 D40 LRD 3355 3040
22 41 22 39 30 44 GK1 FK .x.58 50 LC1 D50 LRD 3357 3750
30 515 GK1 FK .x.58 80 LC1 D50 LRD 3359 4865
37 53 GK1 FK .x.58 80 LC1 D65 LRD 3359 4865
30 55 37 64 GK1 FK .x.58 80 LC1 D65 LRD 3361 5570
45 64 GK1 FK .x.58 80 LC1 D80 LRD 3361 5570
37 (3) 66 45 76 GK1 FK .x.58 100 LC1 D80 LRD 3363 6380
45 80 55 78 GK1 FK .x.58 100 LC1 D95 LRD 3365 8093
55 90 GK1 FK .x.58 15 LC1 D115 LRD 4365 80104
55 97 75 106 GK1 FK .x.58 15 LC1 D115 LRD 4367 9510
(1) For breaking under load, add a rotary switch-disconnector.
(3) 400 V maximum.
1/4
1
1/4
(continued)
in category AC-3
Switch-
disconnector
classe 10
400/415 V 440 V 500 V Reference (1) Size Rating Reference (2) Reference Setting
range
P Ie P Ie P Ie
kW A kW A kW A A A
006 0 006 019 GS1 DD 10.x.38 LC1 D09 LRD 02 01605
009 08 GS1 DD 10.x.38 LC1 D09 LRD 03 0504
009
012
03
044
012

037

GS1 DD
.
10.x.38

LC1 D09

LRD 04
.
04063
018
06
018
025
055
076

GS1 DD
.
10.x.38
.

LC1 D09

LRD 05
.
0631
025
037
055
085
11
15
037
055
1
136
037
055
075
088
1
15

GS1 DD
.
.
10.x.38
.
.

LC1 D09

LRD 06
.
.
117
075
19
075
11
168
37
11

GS1 DD
.
10.x.38
.
4

LC1 D09

LRD 07
.
165
11
15
7
36
15

306
15
22
9
39

GS1 DD
.
10.x.38
.
4

LC1 D09

LRD 08
.
54
22 49 22 44 3 5 GS1 DD 10.x.38 6 LC1 D09 LRD 10 46
3 65 3 577 4 68 GS1 DD 10.x.38 8 LC1 D09 LRD 12 558
4 85 4 79 55 9 GS1 DD 10.x.38 10 LC1 D09 LRD 14 710
55 115 55 104 75 14 GS1 DD 10.x.38 16 LC1 D12 LRD 16 913
75 155 75 137 9 139 GS1 DD 10.x.38 16 LC1 D18 LRD 21 118
9 169 GSp F 14.x.51 0 LC1 D25 LRD 21 118
9
11
181
11
01
11
15
176
3

GSp F
.
14.x.51
.
5

LC1 D25

LRD 22
.
164
15 9 15 65 185 8 GSp F 14.x.51 3 LC1 D32 LRD 32 33
185 35 185 38 22 33 GSp F 14.x.51 40 LC1 D40A LRD 340 3040
22 41 22 39 30 44 GSp J .x.58 50 LC1 D50A LRD 350 3750
30 515 GSp J .x.58 80 LC1 D65A LRD 365 4865
37 53 GSp J .x.58 80 LC1 D65A LRD 365 4865
30 55 37 64 GSp J .x.58 80 LC1 D65A LRD 365 4865
45 64 GSp J .x.58 80 LC1 D95 LRD 3361 5570
37 66 45 76 GSp J .x.58 100 LC1 D80 LRD 3363 6380
55 78 GSp J .x.58 100 LC1 D115 LR9 D5367 60100
45 80 GSp J .x.58 100 LC1 D95 LRD 3365 8093
55 97 55 90 75 106 GSp L T0 15 LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90150
75 13 75 15 90 18 GSp L T0 160 LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90150
90 160 90 146 110 156 GSp N T1 00 LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 130
110 195 110 178 132 184 GSp N T1 50 LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 130
132 30 132 15 160 4 GSp QQ T 315 LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 00330
160 56 GSp QQ T 315 LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 00330
160 80 200 31 200 80 GSp QQ T 400 LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 00330
220 310 GSp QQ T 400 LC1 F400 LR9 F7375 00330
200
220
350
388
220

353
250

344

GS2 S
.
T3
.
500

LC1 F400

LR9 F7379
.
300500
250 430 250 401 GS2 S T3 500 LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300500
315
355
43
488

GS2 S
.
T3
.
630

LC1 F500

LR9 F7381
.
380630
315 540 315 505 GS2 S T3 630 LC1 F630 LR9 F7381 380630
355
400
549
611
400

55

GS2 V
.
T4
.
800

LC1 F630

LR9 F7381
.
380630
(1) GSp: GS1 for direct operator or GS2 for external operator.
1/5
1
1/5
(continued)
075 to 400 kW at 690 V: type 2 coordination
Standard power ratings of 3-phase
motors 50/60 Hz
in category AC-3
Switch-
disconnector
classe 10
P Ie Reference (1) Size Rating Reference (2) Reference Setting range
kW A A A
075 11 GSp F 14.x.51 LC1 D09 LRD 06 116
11 16 GSp F 14.x.51 LC1 D09 LRD 06 116
15 1 GSp F 14.x.51 4 LC1 D09 LRD 07 165
22 8 GSp F 14.x.51 4 LC1 D09 LRD 08 54
3 38 GSp F 14.x.51 6 LC1 D09 LRD 08 54
4 49 GSp F 14.x.51 6 LC1 D09 LRD 10 46
55 67 GSp F 14.x.51 8 LC1 D09 LRD 12 558
75 89 GSp F 14.x.51 10 LC1 D25 LRD 16 913
11 18 GSp F 14.x.51 16 LC1 D25 LRD 16 913
15 17 GSp F 14.x.51 0 LC1 D25 LRD 22 164
185 1 GSp F 14.x.51 5 LC1 D32 LRD 22 164
22 4 GSp F 14.x.51 3 LC1 D40A LRD 332 33
30 3 GSp F 14.x.51 40 LC1 D40A LRD 340 3040
37 39 GSp F 14.x.51 50 LC1 D65A LRD 350 3750
45 47 GSp J .x.58 63 LC1 D80 LR2 D3357 3750
55 57 GSp J .x.58 80 LC1 D115 LR2 D3359 4865
75 77 GSp KK T00 100 LC1 D115 LR2 D3363 6380
90 93 GSp KK T00 15 LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90150
110 113 GSp KK T00 15 LC1 F185 LR9 D5369 90150
132 134 GSp L T0 160 LC1 F265 LR9 F5371 130
160 16 GSp N T1 00 LC1 F265 LR9 F5371 130
200 03 GSp N T1 50 LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 00330
220 4 GSp QQ T 50 LC1 F400 LR9 F7375 00330
250 50 GSp QQ T 315 LC1 F400 LR9 F7375 00330
315 313 GSp QQ T 355 LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300500
355 354 GSp QQ T 400 LC1 F630 LR9 F7379 300500
400 400 GS2 S T3 500 LC1 F630 LR9 F7379 300500
(1) GSp: GS1 for direct operator or GS2 for external operator.
1
1/6
Maximum operating rate: LC3 K: 12 starts/hour; LC3 D: 30 starts/hour.
Maximum starting time:.30.seconds
50-60 Hz in category AC-3
Circuit-breaker Star-delta
contactors
400/415 V 440 V Reference
Setting range
of thermal trips
Reference
P Ie IrD (1) Iq (2) P Ie IrD (1) Iq (2)
kW A A kA kW A A kA A
15 36 50 15 306 18 50 GV2 ME08 54 LC3 K06
22
49
50
22
3
44
577
6
33
50
50
GV2 ME10 463 LC3 K06
3
4
65
85
38
49
50
50

4

79

46

15
GV2 ME14 610 LC3 K06
55 115 64 15 55 104 6 8 GV2 ME16 914 LC3 K06
75 155 86 15 75 137 79 8 GV2 ME20 1318 LC3 K09
9 169 98 8 GV2 ME20 1318 LC3 D12A
9 181 10 15 11 01 1 6 GV2 ME21 173 LC3 D12A
11 1 15 GV2 ME22 05 LC3 D12A
15 9 17 10 15 65 15 6 GV2 ME32 43 LC3 D18A
185 35 0 50 185 38 19 50 GV3 P40 3040 LC3 D18A
22 39 3 50 GV3 P50 3750 LC3 D32A
22 41 4 50 30 515 30 50 GV3 P50 3750 LC3 D32A
30 55 33 50 30 515 30 50 GV3 P65 4865 LC3 D32A
37 66 40 50 37 64 37 50 GV3 P65 4865 3.x.LC1 D40A (3)
37 66 40 5 37 64 37 5 GV7 RE80 4880 3.x.LC1 D40A (3)
45 76 44 10 GV3 ME80 5680 .x.LC1 D50A
+ 1.x.LC1 D40A (3)
45 76 44 5 GV7 RE80 4880 .x.LC1 D50A
+ 1.x LC1 D40A (3)
45
55
80
97
47
58
5
5

55

90

5

5
GV7 RE100 60100 .x.LC1 D50A
+ 1.x LC1 D40A (3)
75 13 78 35 75 15 7 35 GV7 RE150 90150 LC3 D80
90 146 84 35 GV7 RE150 90150 LC3 D115
90
110
160
195
95
115
35
35
110 178 103 35 GV7 RE220 130 LC3 D115
132 15 14 35 GV7 RE220 130 LC3 D150
(1) IrD: current in the motor windings in delta connection.
(3) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 DppA, star-delta starter kit LAD 9SD3 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
Star-delta.starters.with.circuit-breaker.and.
overload.protection.built.into.the.circuit-breaker..
1
1/7
Maximum operating rate: LC1 D: 30 starts/hour; LC1 F: 12 starts/hour.
Maximum starting time: LC1 D: 30 seconds; LC1 F: 20 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 Circuit-breaker Star-delta contactors
400/415 V 440 V Reference Setting range
of thermal trips
Reference
P Ie Iq P Ie Iq (1)
kW A kA kW A kA A
15 36 130 15 306 130 GV2 P08 54 3.x.LC1 D09 (2)
22 49 130 22 44 130 GV2 P10 463 3.x.LC1 D18 (3)
3 577 130 GV2 P10 463 3.x.LC1 D18 (3)
3 65 130 GV2 P14 610 3.x.LC1 D18 (3)
4 85 130 4 79 130 GV2 P14 610 3.x.LC1 D18 (3)
55 115 130 55 104 50 GV2 P16 914 3.x.LC1 D25 (3)
75 137 50 GV2 P16 914 3.x.LC1 D25 (3)
75 155 50 9 169 0 GV2 P20 1318 3.x.LC1 D25 (3)
9 181 50 11 01 0 GV2 P21 173 3.x.LC1 D25 (3)
11 50 GV2 P22 05 3.x.LC1 D25 (3)
15 9 50 15 65 50 GV3 P32 33 3.x.LC1 D40A (4)
185 35 50 GV3 P40 3040 .x.LC1 D50A
+ 1.x LC1 D40A (3)
185 38 50 GV3 P40 3040 .x.LC1 D65A
+ 1.x LC1 D40A (4)
22 41 50 GV3 P50 3750 .x.LC1 D50A
+ 1.x LC1 D40A (3)
22 39 50 GV3 P50 3750 .x.LC1 D65A
+ 1.x LC1 D40A (4)
30 55 50 30 515 50 GV3 P65 4865 .x.LC1 D65A
+ 1.x LC1 D40A (4)
37 66 70 37 64 65 GV7 RS80 4880 3.x.LC1 D80 (5)
45 76 65 GV7 RS80 4880 3.x.LC1 D80 (5)
45 80 70 GV7 RS100 60100 3.x.LC1 D115 (6)
55 97 70 55 90 65 GV7 RS100 60100 3.x.LC1 D115 (6)
75 13 70 75 15 65 GV7 RS150 90150 3.x.LC1 D150 (6)
90 146 65 GV7 RS150 90150 3.x.LC1 D150 (6)
90 160 70 110 178 65 GV7 RS220 130 3.x.LC1 F185 (7)
110 195 70 132 15 65 GV7 RS220 130 3.x.LC1 F225 (7)
(2) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D09, star-delta starter kit LAD 91217 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
(3) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D18 or LC1 D25, star-delta starter kit LAD 93217 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
(4) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 DppA, star-delta starter kit LAD 9SD3 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
(5) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D80, star-delta starter kit LA9 D8017 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
(6) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D115 or LC1 D150, see page 1/41.
(7) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 F185 or LC1 F225, see pages 1/47 and 1/49.
Combination starters or
customer assembly
(continued)
Star-delta.starters.with.circuit-breaker.and.
overload.protection.built.into.the.circuit-breaker..
1
1/8
Maximum operating rate: LC3 K and LC3 F: 12 starts/hour; LC3 D: 30 starts/hour.
Maximum starting time: LC3 K and LC3 D: 30 seconds; LC3 F: 20 seconds.
contactors
Thermal overload relay
400/415 V 440 V Reference Rating Irm (2) Reference Reference Setting
range
P Ie IrD (1) Iq P Ie IrD (1) Iq
kW A A kA kW A A kA A A A
15

36

50
15
22
306
44
18
3
50
50
GV2 LE08 4 51 LC3 K06 LR2 K0308 186
22 49 3 50 3 577 3 50 GV2 LE10 63 78 LC3 K06 LR2 K0310 637
3 65 4 50 GV2 LE14 10 138 LC3 K06 LR2 K0312 3755
4 79 5 50 GV2 LE10 63 78 LC3 K06 LR2 K0312 3755
4 85 5 50 GV2 LE14 10 138 LC3 K06 LR2 K0312 3755
55 104 6 15 GV2 LE14 10 138 LC3 K06 LR2 K0314 558
55 115 6 15 GV2 LE16 14 170 LC3 K06 LR2 K0314 558
75 137 8 8 GV2 LE16 14 170 LC3 K09 LR2 K0316 8115
75 155 9 15 GV2 LE20 18 3 LC3 K09 LR2 K0316 8115
9 169 1 8 GV2 LE16 14 170 LC3 D12A LRD 16 913
9 181 10 15 GV2 LE22 5 37 LC3 K12 LR2 K0316 8115
11 01 1 8 GV2 LE20 18 3 LC3 K12 LR2 K0321 1014
11 1 15 GV2 LE22 5 37 LC3 K12 LR2 K0321 1014
15 65 15 6 GV2 LE22 5 37 LC3 D18A LRD 21 118
15 9 16 10 GV2 LE32 3 384 LC3 D18A LRD 21 118
185 35 0 50 185 38 19 50 GV3 L40 40 560 LC3 D18A LRD 22 164
22 41 4 50 22 39 3 50 GV3 L50 50 700 LC3 D32A LRD 32 33
30 515 30 50 GV3 L65 65 910 LC3 D32A LRD 32 33
30 55 33 50 GV3 L65 65 910 LC3 D32A LRD 35 3038
37 64 37 50 GV3 L65 65 910 3.x.LC1 D40A (4) LRD 340 3040
45 76 44 65 NS80HMA 80 640 .x.LC1 D50A
+.1 x LC1 D40A (4)
LRD 350 3750
55 90 5 65 NS80HMA 80 800 .x.LC1 D65A
+.1 x LC1 D40A (4)
LRD 365 4865
37 66 40 70 NS80HMA 80 640 3.x.LC1 D40A (4) LRD 350 3750
75 15 7 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 100 LC3 D80 LRD 3363 6380
45 80 47 (3) NS100pMA (3) 100 800 .x.LC1 D50A
+.1 x LC1 D40A (4)
LRD 350 3750
55 97 58 (3) NS100pMA (3) 100 100 .x.LC1 D65A
+.1 x LC1 D40A (4)
LRD 365 4865
75 13 78 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 100 LC3 D80 LRD 3363 6380
90 146 85 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 100 LC3 D115 LRD 4365 80104
90 160 96 (3) 110 178 103 (3) NS250pMA (3) 0 1760 LC3 D115 LRD 4365 80104
132 15 15 (3) NS250pMA (3) 0 1760 LC3 D150 LRD 4369 110140
110 195 116 (3) NS250pMA (3) 0 1760 LC3 D115 LRD 4369 110140
160 56 148 (3) NS400pMA (3) 30 40 LC3 D150 LR9 D5369 90150
200 31 186 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 3150 LC3 F225 LR9 F5371 130
132 30 139 (3) NS400pMA (3) 30 40 LC3 D150 LRD 4369 110140
160 80 165 (3) NS400pMA (3) 30 560 LC3 F185 LR9 F5371 130
200 350 04 (3) 220 353 04 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 3150 LC3 F225 LR9 F5371 130
220 388 5 (3) 250 401 33 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 3500 LC3 F265 LR9 F7375 00330
280 480 78 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 4000 LC3 F330 LR9 F7375 00330
315 505 95 (3) C801p+STR35ME 800 4000 LC3 F330 LR9 F7375 00330
315 540 3 (3) 355 518 300 (3) C801p+STR35ME 800 4500 LC3 F330 LR9 F7375 00330
375 575 334 (3) C801p+STR35ME 800 5000 LC3 F400 LR9 F7379 300500
(3) Products marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand. Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code:
Breaking performance Iq (kA) NS100pMA NS160pMA, NS250pMA NS400pMA, NS630pMA C801p+STR35ME
400/415 V 5 70 36 70 70 130 70 150
440 V 5 65 35 65 65 130 65 100
Code E S E S H L H L
Star-delta.starters.with.circuit-breaker.and.overload.
1
1/9
contactors
400/415 V 440 V Reference Rating Irm (1) Reference Reference Setting
range
P Ie Iq P Ie Iq
kW A kA kW A kA A A A
15 36 130 15 306 130 GV2 L08 4 51 3.x.LC1 D18 LRD 08 54
22
3
49
65
130
130
22
3
44
577
130
130
GV2 L10 63 78 3.x.LC1 D18 LRD 10 46
4 79 0 GV2 L14 10 138 3.x.LC1 D18 LRD 14 710
4 85 130 GV2 L14 10 138 3.x.LC1 D18 LRD 16 913
55 115 50 55 104 0 GV2 L16 14 170 3.x.LC1 D25 LRD 16 913
75 155 50 75 137 0 GV2 L20 18 3 3.x.LC1 D25 LRD 21 118
9 169 0 GV2 L22 5 37 3.x.LC1 D25 LRD 21 118
9
11
181
50
50

11

01

0
GV2 L22 5 37 3.x.LC1 D25 LRD 22 164
15 9 50 15 65 50 GV3 L32 3 448 3.x.LC1 D40A (2) LRD 332 33
185 35 50 GV3 L40 40 560 .x.LC1 D50A
+.1 x LC1 D40A (2)
LRD 340 3040
185 38 50 GV3 L40 40 560 .x.LC1 D65A
+.1 x LC1 D40A (2)
LRD 340 3040
22 41 50 GV3 L50 50 700 .x.LC1 D50A
+.1 x LC1 D40A (2)
LRD 350 3750
22 39 50 GV3 L50 50 700 .x.LC1 D65A
+.1 x LC1 D40A (2)
LRD 350 3750
30 55 50 30 515 50 GV3 L65 65 910 .x.LC1 D65A
+.1 x LC1 D40A (2)
LRD 365 4865
37 64 50 GV3 L65 65 910 3.x.LC1 D80 LRD 3359 4865
37 66 70 45 76 65 NS80HMA 80 640 3.x.LC1 D80 LRD 3363 6380
45 80 (2) 55 90 (2) NS100pMA (2) 100 800 3.x.LC1 D115 LR9 D5367 60100
55 97 (2) NS160pMA (2) 150 100 3.x.LC1 D115 LR9 D5369 90150
75 15 (2) NS160pMA (2) 150 100 3.x.LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90150
75 13 (2) 90 146 (2) NS160pMA (2) 150 100 3.x.LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90150
90 160 (2) 110 178 (2) NS250pMA (2) 0 1760 3.x.LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 130
110 195 (2) NS250pMA (2) 0 1760 3.x.LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 130
132 15 (2) NS250pMA (2) 0 1760 3.x.LC1 F225 LR9 F7375 00330
132 30 (2) 160 56 (2) NS400pMA (2) 30 40 3.x.LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 00330
160 80 (2) NS400pMA (2) 30 560 3.x.LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 00330
200 31 (2) NS400pMA (2) 30 880 3.x.LC1 F330 LR9 F7379 300500
200 350 (2) 220 353 (2) NS630pMA (2) 500 3150 3.x.LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300500
220 388 (2) 250 401 (2) NS630pMA (2) 500 3500 3.x.LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300500
250 430 (2) NS630pMA (2) 500 4000 3.x.LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300500
(2) Products marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand. Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code:
Breaking performance Iq (kA) NS100pMA NS160pMA, NS250pMA NS400pMA, NS630pMA
400/415 V 5 70 36 70 70 130
440 V 5 65 35 65 65 130
Code E S E S H L
(continued)
Star-delta.starters.with.circuit-breaker.and.overload.
1/30
1
Maximum operating rate: LC3 K and LC3 F: 12 starts/hour; LC3 D: 30 starts/hour.
Maximum starting time: LC3 K and LC3 D: 30 seconds; LC3 F: 20 seconds.
motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3
Fuse carrier
(basic block)
aM fuses Star-delta
contactors
400/415 V 440 V Reference Size Rating Reference Reference Setting
range
P Ie IrD (1) Iq P Ie IrD (1) Iq
kW A A kA kW A A kA A A
15 35 50 15 306 50 LS1 D32 10.x.38 4 LC3 K06 LR2 K0308 186
22 5 3 50 LS1 D32 10.x.38 6 LC3 K06 LR2 K0310 637
22
3
44
577
3
3
50
50 LS1 D32 10.x.38 8 LC3 K06 LR2 K0310 637
3 65 4 50 LS1 D32 10.x.38 8 LC3 K06 LR2 K0312 3755
4 84 5 50 4 79 5 50 LS1 D32 10.x.38 1 LC3 K06 LR2 K0312 3755
55 11 6 50 55 104 6 50 LS1 D32 10.x.38 16 LC3 K06 LR2 K0314 558
75 148 9 50 75 137 8 50 LS1 D32 10.x.38 16 LC3 K09 LR2 K0316 8115
9 181 10 100 9 169 10 50 LS1 D32 10.x.38 0 LC3 D12A LRD 16 913
11 1 1 100 11 01 1 100 GK1 EK 14.x.51 5 LC3 D12A LRD 16 913
15 85 16 100 15 65 15 100 GK1 EK 14.x.51 3 LC3 D18A LRD 21 118
185 35 0 100 185 38 19 100 GK1 EK 14.x.51 40 LC3 D18A LRD 22 164
22 39 3 100 GK1 FK .x.58 50 LC3 D18A LRD 22 164
22 4 4 100 GK1 FK .x.58 50 LC3 D32A LRD 32 33
30 515 30 100 GK1 FK .x.58 63 LC3 D32A LRD 32 33
30 57 33 100 37 64 37 100 GK1 FK .x.58 80 LC3 D40 LRD 3355 3040
37 69 40 100 GK1 FK .x.58 80 LC3 D40 LRD 3357 3750
45 76 44 100 GK1 FK .x.58 80 LC3 D50 LRD 3357 3750
45 81 47 100 GK1 FK .x.58 100 LC3 D50 LRD 3357 3750
55 90 5 100 GSp K .x.58 100 LC3 D50 LRD 3359 4865
55 100 58 100 GSp K .x.58 15 LC3 D50 LRD 3361 5570
75 135 78 100 75 15 7 100 GSp L T0 160 LC3 D80 LRD 3363 6380
90 146 84 100 GSp L T0 160 LC3 D115 LRD 4365 80104
90 165 95 100 GSp N T1 00 LC3 D115 LRD 4367 9510
110 00 115 100 110 178 103 100 GSp N T1 00 LC3 D115 LRD 4367 9510
132 40 139 100 132 15 14 100 GSp QQ T 50 LC3 D150 LRD 4369 110140
160 85 165 100 160 56 148 100 GSp QQ T 315 LC3 F185 LR9 F5371 130
200 31 185 100 GSp QQ T 400 LC3 F225 LR9 F5369 130
220 388 5 100 GSp QQ T 400 LC3 F265 LR9 F7375 00330
250 401 33 100 GS2 S T3 500 LC3 F265 LR9 F7375 00330
280 480 78 100 GS2 S T3 500 LC3 F330 LR9 F7375 00330
315

555

3

100
315
355
505
518
93
300
100
100 GS2 S T3 630 LC3 F330 LR9 F7375 00330
375 575 334 100 GS2 S T3 630 LC3 F400 LR9 F7379 300500
Star-delta.starters.with.fuse.protection..
(NF.C.or.DIN.fuses)
.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/31
1
Switch-
disconnector-fuse
aM fuses Star-delta
contactors
400/415 V 440 V Reference Size Rating Reference Reference Setting
range
P Ie Iq P Ie Iq
kW A kA kW A kA A A
15 35 50 15 306 50 GS1 DD 10.x.38 4 3.x.LC1 D09 LRD 08 54
22 5 50 22 44 50 GS1 DD 10.x.38 6 3.x.LC1 D09 LRD 10 46
3 65 50 3 577 50 GS1 DD 10.x.38 8 3.x.LC1 D09 LRD 12 558
4 84 50 4 79 50 GS1 DD 10.x.38 10 3.x.LC1 D09 LRD 14 710
55 11 50 55 104 50 GS1 DD 10.x.38 16 3.x.LC1 D12 LRD 16 913
75 148 50 75 137 50 GS1 DD 10.x.38 16 3.x.LC1 D18 LRD 21 118
9
11
181
1
100
100
9
11
169
01
100
100 GSp F 14.x.51 5 3.x.LC1 D25 LRD 22 164
15 85 100 15 65 100 GSp F 14.x.51 3 3.x.LC1 D32 LRD 32 33
185 35 100 185 38 100 GSp F 14.x.51 40 3.x.LC1 D40 LRD 3355 3040
22 4 100 22 39 100 GSp F .x.58 50 3.x.LC1 D50 LRD 3357 3750
30 57 100 30 515 100 GSp J .x.58 80 3.x.LC1 D65 LRD 3361 5570
37 69 100 37 64 100 GSp J .x.58 80 3.x LC1 D80 LRD 3363 6380
45 76 100 GSp J .x.58 80 3.x LC1 D80 LRD 3365 8093
45 81 100 GSp J .x.58 100 3.x LC1 D115 LR9 D5367 60100
55 90 100 GSp L T0 15 3.x LC1 D115 LR9 D5369 90150
55 100 100 GSp L T0 15 3.x LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90150
75 15 100 GSp L T0 160 3.x LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90150
75 135 100 GSp L T0 160 3.x LC1 F185 LR9 D5369 90150
90 165 100 90 146 100 GSp N T1 00 3.x LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 130
110 00 100 110 178 100 GSp N T1 50 3.x LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 130
132 40 100 132 15 100 GSp QQ T 315 3.x LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 00330
160 85 100 160 56 100 GSp QQ T 315 3.x LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 00330
200 31 100 GSp QQ T 400 3.x LC1 F330 LR9 F7379 300500
200
220
35
388
100
100
220
250
353
401
100
100 GS2 S T3 500 3.x LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300500
250 437 100 GS2 S T3 500 3.x LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300500
315 555 100 315 505 100 GS2 S T3 630 3.x LC1 F630 LR9 F7381 380630
355
400
549
611
100
100 GS2 V T4 800 3.x LC1 F630 LR9 F7381 380630
355 605 100 GS2 V T4 800 3.x LC1 F780 LR9 F7381 380630
Star-delta.starters.with.fuse.protection..
(NF.C.or.DIN.fuses)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/3
DOL.starters.with.fuse.protection.(BS.fuses)
..
Switch-
disconnector-
fuse
BS fuses Contactor Thermal overload relay
415 V 440 V 500 V Reference Size Rating Reference (1) Reference Setting
range
P Ie P Ie P Ie
kW A kW A A kA A A
006 0 006 019 GS1 DDB A1 NIT. LC1 D09 LRD 02 01605
009 08 GS1 DDB A1 NIT. LC1 D09 LRD 03 0504
009
012
036
04

01

037

GS1 DDB
.
A1
.
NIT.

LC1 D09

LRD 04
.
04063
018 06 018 055 GS1 DDB A1 NIT. LC1 D09 LRD 05 0631
05 076 GS1 DDB A1 NIT.4 LC1 D09 LRD 05 0631
025
037
055
088
1
15
037
055
075
1
136
168
037
055
075
1
1
15

GS1 DDB
.
.
A1
.
.
NIT.6

LC1 D09

LRD 06
.
.
117
075 GS1 DDB A1 NIT.10 LC1 D09 LRD 07 165
15 6 GS1 DDB A1 NIT.10 LC1 D09 LRD 08 54
15 35 15 306 22 38 GS1 DDB A1 NIT.16 LC1 D09 LRD 08 54
22 5 44 3 5 GS1 DDB A1 NIT.16 LC1 D09 LRD 10 46
55 11 55 104 75 1 GS1 DDB A1 NIT.0M5 LC1 D12 LRD 16 913
75 14 75 137 9 139 GS1 DDB A1 NIT.0M3 LC1 D18 LRD 21 118
9 181 9 169 GS2 GB A TIA.3M35 LC1 D18 LRD 21 118
11
11
11
15
184
3

GS2 GB
.
A
.
TIA.3M50

LC1 D25

LRD 22
.
164
15 85 15 65 GS2 GB A TIA.3M63 LC1 D32 LRD 32 33
22 33 GS2 GB A3 TIS.63M80 LC1 D40 LRD 3355 3040
22 4 39 30 45 GS2 GB A3 TIS.63M100 LC1 D50 LRD 3357 3750
45 76 45 65 GS2 LLB A4 TCP.100M15 LC1 D80 LRD 3363 6380
45 81 55 80 GS2 LLB A4 TCP.100M15 LC1 D95 LRD 3365 8093
55 100 GS2 LLB A4 TCP.100M160 LC1 D115 LR9 D5369 90150
55 90 GS2 LLB A4 TCP.100M160 LC1 D115 LR9 D5367 60100
80 116 GS2 LB B TF.00 LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90150
80 138 80 13 GS2 LB B TF.00M50 LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90150
100
110
143
156

GS2 LB
.
B
.
TF.00M50

LC1 F185

LR9 F5371
.
130
100 18 100 16 GS2 MMB B TF.00M50 LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 130
110 196 110 178 GS2 MMB B TF.00M315 LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 130
140 00 GS2 NB B3 TKF.315M355 LC1 F265 LR9 F5371 130
140 50 140 6 160 0 GS2 NB B3 TKF.315M355 LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 00330
160 85 160 56 GS2 QQB B4 TKF.315M355 LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 00330
220 310 GS2 QQB B4 TMF.400 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300500
220 388 0 353 257 36 GS2 QQB B4 TMF.400M450 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300500
270 380 GS2 SB C TTM.500 LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300500
257
270
450
460
57
70
41
433

GS2 SB
.
C
.
TTM.500

LC1 F500

LR9 F7381
.
380630
375
610
375
577
375
425
508
556

GS2 SB
.
C
.
TTM.630

LC1 F630

LR9 F7381
.
380630
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1/33
Star-delta.starters.with.fuse.protection.
(BS.fuses)
..
Switch-
disconnector-
fuse
BS fuses Contactor Thermal overload relay
415 V 440 V Reference Size Rating Reference Reference Setting
range
P Ie Iq P Ie Iq
kW A kA kW A kA A A
15 35 50 15 306 50 GS1 DDB A1 NIT.16 3.x.LC1 D09 LRD 08 . 54
55 11 50 55 104 50 GS1 DDB A1 NIT.0M5 3.x.LC1 D12 LRD 16 . 913
75 148 50 75 137 50 GS1 DDB A1 NIT.0M3 3.x.LC1 D18 LRD 21 . 118
9 181 50 9 169 50 GS2 GB A TIA.3M35 3.x.LC1 D18 LRD 21 . 118
22 4 50 22 39 50 GS2 GB A3 TIS.63M80 3.x.LC1 D40 LRD 3355 . 3040
30 515 50 GS2 GB A3 TIS.63M100 3.x.LC1 D50 LRD 3359 . 4865
30 57 50 GS2 GB A3 TIS.63M100 3.x LC1 D65 LRD 3359 . 4865
45 81 50 45 76 50 GS2 LLB A4 TCP.100M15 3.x LC1 D80 LRD 3363 . 6380
55 100 80 55 90 80 GS2 LLB A4 TCP.100M160 3.x LC1 D115 LR9 D5369 . 90150
80 138 80 80 13 80 GS2 LB B TF.00M50 3.x LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 . 90150
100 18 80 100 16 80 GS2 MMB B TF.00M50 3.x LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 . 130
110 196 80 110 178 80 GS2 MMB B TF.00M315 3.x LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 . 130
140 50 80 140 6 80 GS2 NB B3 TFK.315M355 3.x LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 . 00330
160 85 80 160 56 80 GS2 QQB B3 TFK.315M355 3.x LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 . 00330
220 388 80 220 353 80 GS2 QQB B4 TMF.400M450 3.x LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 . 300500
257
270
450
460
80
80
257
270
41
433
80
80

GS2 SB
.
C
.
TTM.500
.
3.x LC1 F500

LR9 F7379
.
.
.
300500
375 610 80 375 577 80 GS2 SB C TTM.630 3.x LC1 F630 LR9 F7381 . 380630
(continued)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1/34
1
DOL.starters,.plate.mounted,.for.motor.control..
4.to.37.kW,.(1),.with.isolating.device,.pre-assembled...
References
Utilisation category AC-3 Fuses to be
ftted by the
customer
Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code (2)
Weight
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz
Opera-
tional
current
220 V
230 V
380 V
400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V
660 V
690 V
440 V up
to
Size Type
aM
kW kW kW kW kW kW A A kg
4 4 4 55 9 10.x.38 1 LC4 D09App 0870
3 55 55 55 75 12 10.x.38 16 LC4 D12App 0870
4 75 9 9 10 18 10.x.38 0 LC4 D18App 1150
55 11 11 11 15 25 10.x.38 5 LC4 D25App 1580
75 15 15 15 185 185 32 14.x.51 3 LC4 D32App 630
11 185 30 40 14.x.51 40 LC4 D40pp 930
15 5 30 30 33 50 .x.58 63 LC4 D50pp 300
185 30 37 37 37 37 65 .x.58 80 LC4 D65pp 3340
37 45 45 55 45 80 .x.58 80 LC4 D80pp 3650
Specifcations
Pre-wired.power.and.control.circuit.connections.
3-pole.isolating.device.
.
(1) Thermal overload relay to be ordered separately (see pages 6/20 and 6/21).
(2) Standard control circuit voltages.
Volts 24 42 48 110 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
For other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Offce.
LC4 D09App
5
6
4
5
9
LC4 D09App
5
6
4
5
9
Dimensions. :
page.1/35
Schemes. :
page.1/35
Dimensions. :
page.1/35
Schemes. :
page.1/35
Dimensions. :
page.1/35
Schemes. :
page.1/35
Dimensions. :
page.1/35
Schemes. :
page.1/35
References
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/35
1
DOL.starters,.plate.mounted,.for.motor.control..
4.to.37.kW,.with.isolating.device,.pre-assembled
Dimensions
DOL starters, plate mounted, pre-assembled
LC4 D09AD25A
.
LC4 D09AD18A D25A
b 18 1
c1 without.cover.or.add-on.blocks 94 100
with.cover,.without.add-on.blocks 96 10
with.LAD.N.or.C.(.or.4.contacts) 17 133
with.LA6.DK10 139 145
with.LAD.T,.R,.S 147 153
with.LAD.T,.R,.S.and.sealing.cover 151 157
LC4 D32A
.
LC4 D32A
c1 without.cover.or.add-on.blocks 100
with.cover,.without.add-on.blocks 10
with.LAD.N.or.C.(.or.4.contacts) 133
with.LA6.DK10 145
with.LAD.T,.R,.S 153
with.LAD.T,.R,.S.and.sealing.cover 157
LC4 D40D80
.
LC4 D40D65 D80
a 81 311
b 143 143
b1 45 48
c 130 140
c1 without.cover.or.add-on.blocks 14 135
with.cover,.without.add-on.blocks 19 140
with.LA1.DN.(1.contact) 149 160
with.LAD.N.or.C.(.or.4.contacts) 157 168
with.LA6.DK 169 180
with.LAD.T,.R,.S 177 188
with.LAD.T,.R,.S.and.sealing.cover 181 19
c2 100 178
G 63 93
Scheme
DOL starters
LC4 D09A to D80
1
7
3
b
c1
79
98
55
71
86
= =
= =
5
0
6
3
3
3
1
1
0
1
7
3
b
c1
79
98
55
71
86
= =
= =
5
0
6
3
3
3
1
1
0
c1
3
6
1
2
4
1
1
0
88
90
165
= =
c1
3
6
1
2
4
1
1
0
88
90
165
= =
c
c1
c2
b
b
1
G
a
= =
=
=
6
0
1
0
0
/
1
1
0
=
=
c
c1
c2
b
b
1
G
a
= =
=
=
6
0
1
0
0
/
1
1
0
=
=
2 4 6
- Q1
2 4
1 3
- KM1
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
6
5
2 4 6
- Q1
2 4
1 3
- KM1
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
6
5
References. :
page.1/34
References. :
page.1/34
References. :
page.1/34
References. :
page.1/34
Dimensions,
schemes
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/36
1
Start-delta.starters.for.motor.control
.
Star-delta starting
.
This.method.of.starting.is.applicable.to.
motors.on.which.all.6.stator.terminals.
are.accessible.and.whose.delta.
connection.voltage.corresponds.to.the.
mains.voltage.
.
Star-delta.starting.should.be.used.for.
motors.starting.on.no-load.or.having.a.
low.load.torque.and.gradual.build-up:..
-.the.starting.torque.in.star.connection.is.
reduced.to.one.third.of.the.direct.starting.
torque,.ie.about.50%.of.the.rated.
torque.
-.the.starting.current.in.star.connection.
is.about.18.to.6.times.the.rated.
current.
.
The.transition.from.star.to.delta.
connection.must.occur.when.the.
machine.has.run.up.to.speed.A.too.
rapid.build-up.in.load.torque.would.
cause.the.stabilised.run-up.speed.to.be.
too.low.and.would.therefore.eliminate.
any.advantage.in.this.method.of.
starting:.this.is.the.case.with.certain.
machines.whose.load.torque.depends.
on.the.machine.speed.(a.characteristic.
of.centrifugal.machines,.for.example).
.
All.star-delta.starters.are.supplied.with.a.
special.LAD.S.or.LA.KTp.time.delay.
relay.which.imposes.a.delay.on.the.
delta.contactor.during.the.transition.
period.in.order.to.allow.the.star.
contactor suffcient breaking time..
.
For.ratings.D115.and.D150,.this..
function.is.performed.by.a.time.delay.
auxiliary.contact.block.LAD.T.and.a.
control.relay
(1) Motor manufacturers generally specify machine load torques.
Example: maximum resistive torque on completion of star-delta start (expressed as a
proportion of the rated torque).
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1
1
2
0
0,5
0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1
1
2
3
(1)
1
1,5
2
2,5
Current
Speed
1 Starting.in.direct.delta.connection
2 Starting.in.star.connection
Current
Speed
3 Resistive.torque.of.the.machine
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1
1
2
0
0,5
0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1
1
2
3
(1)
1
1,5
2
2,5
Current
Speed
Current
Speed
Presentation
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/37
1
Star-delta.starters.for.motor.control.
55.to.13.kW,.(1),.without.isolating.device,.
pre-assembled...
Plate mounted starters
Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour Maximum starting time: 30 seconds
of squirrel cage motors
Mains voltage -
delta connection
Auxiliary contacts available
on each contactor
line delta star
Star delta
mechanical
interlock
Basic reference,
to be completed by
Weight
220/
230 V
380/
400 V 415 V 440 V
KM2 KM3 KM1
kW kW kW kW kg
4 75 75 75 .(3). 1 With LC3 D09App 1530
55 11 11 11 .(3) 1 With LC3 D12App 1530
11 185 .(3) 1 With LC3 D18App 1730
15 5 30 30 .(3) 1 With LC3 D32App 030
185 37 37 37 1 1 .(3) 1 Without LC3 D40pp 4360
With LC3 D40ppA64 4500
30 55 59 59 1 1 .(3) .(3) Without LC3 D50pp 4360
37 75 75 75 1 1 (3) .(3) Without LC3 D80pp 500
63 110 110 110 1 1 .(3). .(3) Without
LC3 D115pp.(4)
11800
With
LC3 D115ppA64 (4)
1100
75 13 13 147 1 1 .(3). 1.(3) Without
LC3 D150pp.(4)
1100
With
LC3 D150ppA64 (4)
1100
Rail mounted starters (35 mm 7 rail)
Mains voltage -
delta connection
Auxiliary contacts
available on each contactor

Star delta
mechanical
interlock
Basic reference,
to be completed by
Weight
line delta star
220/
230 V
380/
400 V 415 V 440 V
KM2 KM3 KM1
kW kW kW kW kg
3 55 55 55 .. 1 With LC3 K06pp 0740
4 75 75 75 .. 1 With LC3 K09pp 0740
4 75 75 75 .(3). 1 With LC3 D090App 1530
55 11 11 11 .(3) 1 With LC3 D120App 1530
11 185 .(3) 1 With LC3 D180App 1730
15 5 30 30 .(3) 1 With LC3 D320App 030
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload
relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current (see pages 6/20 and 6/21).
(2) Standard control circuit voltages:
Volts.a.50/60.Hz 24 36 42 48 110 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
Star-delta starters LC3 K06 and K09
Code B7. C7 D7. E7. F7. M7. P7. U7.
Star-delta starters LC3 D09AD150, LC3 D090AD320A
Code B7. D7. E7. F7. .M7 P7. U7. Q7. V7. N7. R7
(3) One auxiliary contact block type LAD N canalsobeftted,seepage5/79.
(4) These starters consist of contactors LC1 D115 or D150 without connectors.
LC3 D32App
D
F
5
6
4
6
0
LC3 D32App
D
F
5
6
4
6
0
Dimensions. :.
pages.1/4.and.1/43
Schemes.:
page.1/43
Dimensions. :.
pages.1/4.and.1/43
Schemes.:
page.1/43
Dimensions. :.
pages.1/4.and.1/43
Schemes.:
page.1/43
Dimensions. :.
pages.1/4.and.1/43
Schemes.:
page.1/43
References
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/38
1

K
M
1
K
M
3
K
M
2
K
M
2
K
M
1
KM
3
1c
1c
2
1a
1b
a
a
a
a
a
1b
K
M
1
K
M
3
K
M
2
K
M
2
K
M
1
KM
3
1c
1c
2
1a
1b
a
a
a
a
a
1b
K
M
1
K
M
3
K
M
2
K
M
2
K
M
1
KM
3
1c
1c
2
1a
1b
a
a
a
a
a
1b
K
M
1
K
M
3
K
M
2
K
M
2
K
M
1
KM
3
1c
1c
2
1a
1b
a
a
a
a
a
1b

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/39
1
Star-delta.starters,.for.motor.control,.75.to.13.kW.(1),.
without.mechanical.interlock,.for.customer.assembly.
(on.plate.or.on.mounting.rail).(2)
Starters for direct combination with a circuit-breaker
Standard power
ratings of squirrel
cage motors (3)
Mains voltage-
delta connection
Thermal-magnetic
motor
circuit-breaker
Contactors
(basic references, to be completed
by adding the voltage code) (4)
400/
415 V 440 V line delta star
kW kW KM2 KM3 KM1
75 75 GV2 ME20 LC1 D09pp LC1 D09pp LC1 D09pp
9 GV2 ME20 LC1 D12pp LC1 D12pp LC1 D09pp
11 GV2 ME22 LC1 D12pp LC1 D12pp LC1 D09pp
Separate component
Description Illustration
item no
Reference Weight
kg
Mounting kit.comprising:..
power.circuit.connections.and
1.time.delay.contact.block.LAD.S
a LAD 912GV 0130
Starters for mounting separately from upstream protection
of squirrel cage motors (3)
Mains voltage - delta connection
Contactors
(basic references, to be completed
by adding the voltage code) (4)
Separate
components
(see.below)
220/
230 V
380/
400 V 415 V 440 V line delta star
kW kW kW kW KM2 KM3 KM1 Component
types
4 75 75 75 LC1 D09pp LC1 D09pp LC1 D09pp D09
55 11 11 11 LC1 D18pp (6) LC1 D12pp. LC1 D09pp D1
11 185 LC1 D25pp (7) LC1 D25pp. (7) LC1 D09pp D18
15 5 30 30 LC1 D32pp LC1 D32pp LC1 D18pp. D3
185 37 37 37 LC1 D40pp. LC1 D40pp. LC1 D40pp. D40
30 55 59 59 LC1 D50pp LC1 D50pp LC1 D40pp. D50
37 75 75 75 LC1 D80pp LC1 D80pp LC1 D50pp D80
63 110 110 110 LC1 D115pp LC1 D115pp LC1 D80pp. D115.(5)
75 13 13 147 LC1 D150pp LC1 D150pp LC1 D115pp D150.(5)
Separate components
item no
For components
type (5)
Reference Weight
kg
Mounting kit comprising:
1.time.delay.contact.block.LAD.S..
(D09D80).(3),
power.circuit.connections.(D09D80),
screws and clamps for fxing contactors .
to.the.plate.(D40D80)
-
-
-
1 a
1 b
1 c
D09.and.D1 LAD 91217 0180
D18.and.D3 LAD 93217 0310
D40.and.D50 LA9 D5017 0380
D80 LA9 D8017 0680
Equipment mounting plates 2 D09,.D1,.D18 LA9 D12974 0150
D3 LA9 D32974 0180
D40.and.D50 LA9 D40973 0300
D80 LA9 D80973 0300
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately.
Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/20 and 6/21.
(2) For mounting, assembly and cabling: please refer to installation instructions supplied with the equipment.
(3) See comments on page 1/36.
(4) See page 5/62.
(5) For D115 and D150 components, see illustration and separate parts on pages 1/40 and 1/41.
(6) A D12 component is adequate for the application, but use of a D18 is recommended.
(connection capacity, correct use of power connection kit and connections).
(7) A D18 component is adequate for the application, but use of a D25 is recommended.
(connection capacity, correct use of power connection kit and connections).
Illustrations:.
page.1/38
Dimensions:.
pages.1/4.and.1/43
Schemes:
page.1/43
Illustrations:.
page.1/38
Dimensions:.
pages.1/4.and.1/43
Schemes:
page.1/43
Illustrations:.
page.1/38
Dimensions:.
pages.1/4.and.1/43
Schemes:
page.1/43
Illustrations:.
page.1/38
Dimensions:.
pages.1/4.and.1/43
Schemes:
page.1/43
References
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/40
1

13 7 12 9 11 10 3
8 5 4
6
14
8
8
13 7 12 9 11 10 3
8 5 4
6
14
8
8
13 7 12 9 11 10 3
8 5 4
6
14
8
8
13 7 12 9 11 10 3
8 5 4
6
14
8
8

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/41
1
Star-delta.starters,.for.motor.control,.75.to.13.kW.(1),.
without.mechanical.interlock,.for.customer.assembly.
(on.plate.or.mounting.rail).(2)
Starters for mounting separately from upstream protection
Separate components (continued)
item no
For
use on
No Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Instantaneous
auxiliary contact
blocks 1.N/O
1 D115..
(star)
1 1 LAD N10 000
Control relay 3 D115,.D150 1 1 CAD 32pp (3) 030
Time delay
auxiliary
contact blocks
4 D115,.D150 1 1 LAD T2 0060
Lead sealing kit
for time delay
auxiliary
contact blocks
5 D115,.D150 1 1 LA9 D901 0005
Thermal magnetic
circuit-breaker for
control circuit .
(00415.V)
6 D115,.D150 6 GB2 CB05 0060
Set of 3
connectors for
wider terminations .
(optional)
7 D115,.D150 1 1 LA9 FG980 000
Set of power
connections with
fxing accessories
8 D115 1 1 LA9 D11517 0800
D150 1 1 LA9 D15017 1050
Spare volt free
terminals
9 D115,.D150 1 10 DZ3 HA3 0007
10 DZ3 GA3 0006
Lug-connector
terminal block
10 D115,.D150 1 10 AB1 BC9535 036
End stop 11 D115,.D150 3 100 AB1 AB8M35 0005
Mounting rail
5 35 mm
12 D115,.D150 1 10 AM1 ED021 010
Pre-slotted
mounting plate
13 D115,.D150 1 1 AM3 PA65 1950
Screw with
captive washer
14 D115,.D150 1 100 AF1 VA618 0006
100 AF1 VA410 000
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered
separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor
current, see pages 6/20 and 6/21.
(2) For mounting, assembly and cabling: please refer to installation instructions supplied with the
equipment.
(3) See page 7/21.
References (continued)
Illustrations:.
page.1/38
Dimensions:.
pages.1/4.and.1/43
Schemes:
page.1/43
Illustrations:.
page.1/38
Dimensions:.
pages.1/4.and.1/43
Schemes:
page.1/43
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/4
1
Star-delta.starters
..
Dimensions
Star-delta starters
Plate mounted, pre-assembled Pre-assembled:
LC3 K LC3 D09AD32A
For customer assembly: 3 x LC1 D with components D09 to D32
On.starters.LC3.D09A.to.D18A,.a.connection.block.is.mounted.on.the.upper.
part.of.contactor.KM,.increasing.the.overall.height.of.the.product.by.65.mm
LC3 D09A D12A D18A D32A
a 143 143 144 165
b 65 65 65 35
c with.LAD.S 139 139 139 145
with.LAD.S.and.sealing.cover 143 143 143 149
Pre-assembled: LC3 D40, D50 Pre-assembled: LC3 D80
For customer assembly: 3 x LC1 D with components D09 or D50 For customer assembly: 3 x LC1 D with components D80
(1) + 4 mm with sealing cover (1) + 4 mm with sealing cover
Pre-assembled: LC3 D115, D150
For customer assembly: 3 x LC1 D with components D115 or D150
a b c G H
LC3 D115 or 3 x LC1 D with.components D115 450 555 05 45 55
LC3 D150.or.3.x.LC1.D.with.components D150 450 555 05 45 55
94
1
1
0
175
150 94
1
1
0
175
150 c 4
1
2
4
b
90 = =
a
1
1
0 KM2
KM3 KM1
1
1
0
c 4
1
2
4
b
90 = =
a
1
1
0 KM2
KM3 KM1
1
1
0
175 (1)
4
5
1
4
3
263
281
= =
6
0
=
1
0
0
/
1
1
0
=
=
=
175 (1)
4
5
1
4
3
263
281
= =
6
0
=
1
0
0
/
1
1
0
=
=
=
183 (1)
4
7
1
4
3
293
311
= =
6
0
=
1
0
0
/
1
1
0
=
=
=
183 (1)
4
7
1
4
3
293
311
= =
6
0
=
1
0
0
/
1
1
0
=
=
=
a
G
H
c
b
a
G
H
c
b
Dimensions
References:
pages.1/37.to.1/41
Schemes:
pages.1/43
References:
pages.1/37.to.1/41
Schemes:
pages.1/43
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/43
1
Star-delta.starters
Dimensions (continued)
Star-delta starters (continued)
On mounting rail AM1 DP, pre-assembled
LC3 D090A to D320A
LC3 D090A to D180A D320A
b 153 137
c with.LAD.S 139 145
with.LAD.S.and.sealing.cover 143 149
Schemes
LC3 K, LC3 D09A to D80
LC3 D090A to D320A
LC3 K LC3 D
Note: LC3 D09A to D18A: Mechanical interlock between KM3 and KM1.
LC3 D115 and D150
(1) Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end).
(2) Remote control.
c
b
2x7
160
175
KM2
KM3 KM1
c
b
2x7
160
175
KM2
KM3 KM1
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
2 4 6
KM2
1
2
3
4
5
6
KM3
1
2
3
4
5
6
KM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
1 3 5
2 4 6
L
1
L
2
L
3
(1)
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
2 4 6
KM2
1
2
3
4
5
6
KM3
1
2
3
4
5
6
KM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
1 3 5
2 4 6
L
1
L
2
L
3
(1)
KM2/1 (N)
O
T
T
I
Y
L
KM3/5
KM3 KM2 KM1
KM1
54 53
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
KM1 KM3
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
5
1
6
9
5
9
6
KM2
1
4
1
3
KM2/1 (N)
O
T
T
I
Y
L
KM3/5
KM3 KM2 KM1
KM1
54 53
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
KM1 KM3
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
5
1
6
9
5
9
6
KM2
1
4
1
3
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
KM3
5
5
5
6
KM2
1
3
1
4
KM1
9
5
9
6
KM3/5
O
l
6
8
6
7
KM2
A
1
A
2
KM3
2
2
2
1
KM1
A
1
A
2
KM2
1
3
1
4
KM2
KM3/1
N
(2)
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
KM3
5
5
5
6
KM2
1
3
1
4
KM1
9
5
9
6
KM3/5
O
l
6
8
6
7
KM2
A
1
A
2
KM3
2
2
2
1
KM1
A
1
A
2
KM2
1
3
1
4
KM2
KM3/1
N
(2)
.KM
1
3
4
5
6
.KM3
1
3
4
5
6
.KM1
1
3
4
5
6
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
1 3 5
4 6
L
1
L
L
3
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
4 6
Recommended.
cabling.for.reversal..
of.motor.rotation.
(standard.motor,.
viewed.from.shaft.
end)
.KM
1
3
4
5
6
.KM3
1
3
4
5
6
.KM1
1
3
4
5
6
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
1 3 5
4 6
L
1
L
L
3
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
4 6
Recommended.
cabling.for.reversal..
of.motor.rotation.
(standard.motor,.
viewed.from.shaft.
end)
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
6
2
1
6
1
KM3
5
5
5
6
KM2
1
8
4
1
8
3
KM1
9
5
9
6
F1
F1
O
l
1
5
3
1
5
4
KM2
A
1
A
2
KA1
A
1
A
2
KM2
1
5
3
1
5
4
KM1
F2
1
7
1
6
7
6
8
KM2
1
7
2
KM1
1
3
1
4
A
1
A
2
KM3
KA1
Y L
(2)
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
6
2
1
6
1
KM3
5
5
5
6
KM2
1
8
4
1
8
3
KM1
9
5
9
6
F1
F1
O
l
1
5
3
1
5
4
KM2
A
1
A
2
KA1
A
1
A
2
KM2
1
5
3
1
5
4
KM1
F2
1
7
1
6
7
6
8
KM2
1
7
2
KM1
1
3
1
4
A
1
A
2
KM3
KA1
Y L
(2)
Dimensions (continued),
schemes
References:
pages.1/37.to.1/41
References:
pages.1/37.to.1/41
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/44
Motor starters - open version
Start-delta.starters.for.motor.control
.
Star-delta starting
This.method.of.starting.is.applicable.to.
motors.on.which.all.6.stator.terminals.
are.accessible.and.whose.delta.
connection.voltage.corresponds.to.the.
mains.voltage.
Star-delta.starting.should.be.used.for.
motors.starting.on.no-load.or.having.a.
low.load.torque.and.gradual.build-up:.
the.starting.torque.in.star.connection.is.
reduced.to.one.third.of.the.direct.starting.
torque,.ie.about.50%.of.the.rated.
torque
the.starting.current.in.star.connection.
is.about.18.to.6.times.the.rated.
current.
The.transition.from.star.to.delta.
connection.must.occur.when.the.
machine.has.run.up.to.speed.A.too.
rapid.build-up.in.load.torque.would.
cause.the.stabilised.run-up.speed.to.be.
too.low.and.would.therefore.eliminate.
any.advantage.in.this.method.of.
starting:.this.is.the.case.with.certain.
machines.whose.load.torque.depends.
on.the.machine.speed.(a.characteristic.
of.centrifugal.machines,.for.example).
Switching.from.star.to.delta.connection.
must.be.completed.within.a.minimum.
time.
This.function.is.performed.by.a.control.
relay.and.a.time.delay.auxiliary.contact.
block
-
-
(1) Motor manufacturers generally specify machine load torques.
Example: maximum resistive torque on completion of star-delta start (expressed as a
proportion of the rated torque).
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1
1
2
0
0,5
0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1
1
2
3
(1)
1
1,5
2
2,5
Current
Speed
Current
Speed
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1
1
2
0
0,5
0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1
1
2
3
(1)
1
1,5
2
2,5
Current
Speed
Current
Speed
Presentation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1/45
Star-delta.starters.for.motor.control,..
90.to.375.kW.(1),.without.isolating.device,..
pre-assembled
..
Pre-assembled starters
Maximum.operating.rate:.1.starts/hour.
Maximum.starting.time:
LC3.Fppppp:.0.seconds,
LC3.FpppppA64:.30.seconds.(3.identical.contactors).
Composition of starters without mechanical interlock,.see.pages.1/47.and.1/49
Star-delta starters
Mains voltage -
delta connection
Auxiliary contacts available
on each contactor
line delta star
Star delta
mechanical
interlock
Basic reference,
to be completed by
Weight
220/
230 V
380/
400 V 415 V 440 V
KM2 KM3 KM1
(3)
kW kW kW kW kg
90 160 160 185 1 1 1 1 Without LC3 F185pp 16500
With LC3 F185ppA64 1665
100 00 00 0 1 1 1 1 Without LC3 F225pp 16500
110 0 0 50 1 1 1 1 Without LC3 F265pp 7300
160 80 80 315 1 1 1 1 Without LC3 F330pp 37000
185 315 355 375 1 1 1 1 Without LC3 F400pp 37000
relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/34 and 6/35.
Volts a 50/60 Hz 48 110 115 220/230 230 240 380/400 400 415
Code E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7
(3)OneauxiliarycontactblocktypeLADNcanbeftted.
LC3 FpppppA64
5
1
1
0
8
0
LC3 FpppppA64
5
1
1
0
8
0
Presentation:
page.1/44
Dimensions:
page.1/50
Schemes:
page.1/51
Presentation:
page.1/44
Dimensions:
page.1/50
Schemes:
page.1/51
Presentation:
page.1/44
Dimensions:
page.1/50
Schemes:
page.1/51
Presentation:
page.1/44
Dimensions:
page.1/50
Schemes:
page.1/51
References
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1/46
1
1
K
M
2
K
M
3
K
M
1
1
1
1 3 4
7
7
7
8
*
*
* *
*
*
6 5 2
* * * *
1
*.See.page.1/48
K
M
2
K
M
3
K
M
1
1
1
1 3 4
7
7
7
8
*
*
* *
*
*
6 5 2
* * * *
1
*.See.page.1/48
K
M
2
K
M
3
K
M
1
1
1
1 3 4
7
7
7
8
*
*
* *
*
*
6 5 2
* * * *
1
*.See.page.1/48
K
M
2
K
M
3
K
M
1
1
1
1 3 4
7
7
7
8
*
*
* *
*
*
6 5 2
* * * *
1
*.See.page.1/48
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/47
1
Motor starters - open version 1
90.to.375.kW,.(1),.for.customer.assembly..
(on.chassis)
.
Contactors
Maximum operating rate: 12 starts/hour Maximum starting time: 20 seconds (3)
Contactors (2) Separate
components
(see below)
220/
230 V
380/
400 V 415 V 440 V
line delta star
kW kW kW kW KM2 KM3 KM1 Component types
90 160 160 185 LC1 F185pp LC1 F185pp LC1 D150pp F185
100 00 00 0 LC1 F225pp LC1 F225pp LC1 F185pp F5
Separate components (4)
item no
For
use on
No Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Instantaneous auxiliary
contact blocks
.N/O. +. .N/C
1 F185.to.F400. 3 1 LAD N22 0050
Control relay 2 F185.to.F400. 1 1 CAD 32 0580
Time delay auxiliary
contact blocks
3 F185.to.F400. 1 1 LAD T2 0060
Sealing cover 4 F185.to.F400. 1 1 LA9 D901 0005
Thermal magnetic circuit-
breaker for 5 A control circuit
5 F185.to.F400. 6 GB2 CB10 0050
Sets of 3 connectors
for wider terminations .
(optional)
6 F185 1 1 LA9 FG980 000
F5.to.F400 1 1 LA9 FJ980 0490
Sets of power connections 7 F185 1 1 LA9 F18517 0800
F5 1 1 LA9 F22510 1400
F65 1 1 LA9 FH610 1400
F330.and.F400 1 1 LA9 FJ610 1500
Set of 3 busbars for
thermal overload
connections
8 F185.to.F400. 1 1 LA7 Fppp (Selected.according.to.size..
of.thermal.overload.relay).see.pages.6/34.
and.6/35.
relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/34.and.6/35.
(2) Contactors supplied with coil. Complete the reference by adding the control circuit voltage code.
Standardcontrolcircuitvoltages(forothervoltages,pleaseconsultyourRegionalSalesOffce):
LC1 D150
Volts 48 110 115 120 220 230 240 380 400 415
50/60 Hz E7 F7 FE7 G7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7.
LC1 F185 and F225
Volts 48 110 115 120 220 230 240 380 400 415
50 Hz (coil LX1) E5 F5 FE5 M5 P5 U5 Q5 V5 N5
60 Hz (coil LX1) E6 F6 G6 M6 U6 Q6 .
LC1 F185 to F400
Volts 48 110 115 120 220 230 240 380 400 415
40 400 Hz (5) E7.(6) F7 FE7 G7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7
Standard.voltages,.see.page.5/114
For.other.voltages.between.4.and.660.V,.see.pages.5/130.to.5/139
(3)Forlongerstartingtimes,pleaseconsultyourRegionalSalesOffce.
(4) Other separate components, see page 1/49.
(5) Coil LX1: LC1 F265, F330 and F400. Coil LX9: LC1F185 and F225.
(6) Except for LC1 F400.
Presentation:
page.1/44
Illustrations:
page.1/46
Dimensions:
page.1/50
Schemes:
page.1/51
Presentation:
page.1/44
Illustrations:
page.1/46
Dimensions:
page.1/50
Schemes:
page.1/51
Presentation:
page.1/44
Illustrations:
page.1/46
Dimensions:
page.1/50
Schemes:
page.1/51
Presentation:
page.1/44
Illustrations:
page.1/46
Dimensions:
page.1/50
Schemes:
page.1/51
References 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/48
1
1
K
M
2
K
M
3
K
M
1
16 13
9
15
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * *
*
17 10 12 14
* * *
11
17
*.See.page.1/46
K
M
2
K
M
3
K
M
1
16 13
9
15
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * *
*
17 10 12 14
* * *
11
17
*.See.page.1/46
K
M
2
K
M
3
K
M
1
16 13
9
15
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * *
*
17 10 12 14
* * *
11
17
*.See.page.1/46
K
M
2
K
M
3
K
M
1
16 13
9
15
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * *
*
17 10 12 14
* * *
11
17
*.See.page.1/46
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/49
1
90.to.375.kW,.(1),.for.customer.assembly..
(on.chassis)
Separate components (continued from page 1/47)
item no
For
use on
No Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Spare volt free terminals 9 F185 3 10 DZ3 GA3 0006
F5F400 3 10 DZ3 HA3 0007
Neutral terminals
with stop and spare
volt free terminal
(for.control.circuit)
10 F185 1 10 AB1 BC9535 036
100 AB1 AB8P35 0006
1 10 DZ3 HA3 0007
F5.and.F65 1 10 AB1 BC15035 077
100 AB1 AB8M35 0007
1 10 DZ3 JA3 0010
F330.and.F400 1 10 AB1 BC24035 087
100 AB1 AB8M35 0007
1 10 DZ3 JA3 0010
Reducer bracket 11 F400 1 LA9 F100 0100
Mounting rails (2) 12 F185F400 1 10 AM1 DE200 0900
13 F185F400 1 4 AM1 EC200 980
Uprights (2) 14 F115F400 4 AM1 EC200 980
1/4 turn sliding clip nuts
and corresponding bolts
for.rails.AM1.DE
15 F185F400 10 AF1 CD061 000
100 AF1 VA618 0006
for.rails.AM1.DE
16 F185F400 8 10 AF1 CD081 000
10 AF1 VC820 004
for equipment fxing
17 F185F330 15 10 AF1 CD061 000
100 AF1 VA618 0006
F400 8 10 AF1 CD061 000
10 AF1 CD081 000
100 AF1 VA618 0006
10 AF1 VC820 004
4 25 x H6 screws with.washers.
Enclosures:
metal,.grey.RAL.703
F185F5 1 1 ACM GV763 19090
F65 1 1 ACM GV973 33310
F330.and.F400 1 1 ACM GV1084 54000
Fixing lugs
adjustable.for.enclosure.ACM
4 4 AE3 FX122 0080
relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/34 and 6/35.
(2) Supplied in 2 m lengths. See page 1/50 for cutting to length.
Presentation:
page.1/44
Illustrations:
page.1/48
Dimensions:
page.1/50
Schemes:
page.1/51
Presentation:
page.1/44
Illustrations:
page.1/48
Dimensions:
page.1/50
Schemes:
page.1/51
Presentation:
page.1/44
Illustrations:
page.1/48
Dimensions:
page.1/50
Schemes:
page.1/51
Presentation:
page.1/44
Illustrations:
page.1/48
Dimensions:
page.1/50
Schemes:
page.1/51
References (continued) 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/50
1
Star-delta.starters
Dimensions
Chassis mounted starters
Pre-assembled:.LC3 F185 to LC3 F400
For.customer.assembly:.2 x LC1 Fppp and 1 x LC1 D150 or 3 x LC1 Fppp
a b c G H K K1 K2 K3 K4
LC3 F185 or 2 x LC1 Fppp + 1 x LC1 D..
with.components.F185
565 675 35 55 65 160 110 80 110 80
LC3 F225 or 3 x LC1 Fppp.with.components.F5 565 675 35 55 65 160 110 80 110 80
c
H
KM3 KM2 KM1
b
a
G
K
K
1
K
2
K
3
K
4
F1F2
c
H
KM3 KM2 KM1
b
a
G
K
K
1
K
2
K
3
K
4
F1F2
Presentation:
page.1/44
References:
pages.1/45,.1/47.and.1/49
Presentation:
page.1/44
References:
pages.1/45,.1/47.and.1/49
Presentation:
page.1/44
References:
pages.1/45,.1/47.and.1/49
Presentation:
page.1/44
References:
pages.1/45,.1/47.and.1/49
Dimensions
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/51
1
Star-delta.starters
Schemes
Star-delta starters
LC3 F185 to F400

.
.
Recommended.cabling.for.reversal.of.motor.rotation.
(standard.motor,.viewed.from.shaft.end)
.KM
1
3
4
5
6
.KM3
1
3
4
5
6
.KM1
1
3
4
5
6
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
1 3 5
4 6
L
1
L
L
3
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
4 6
.KM
1
3
4
5
6
.KM3
1
3
4
5
6
.KM1
1
3
4
5
6
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
1 3 5
4 6
L
1
L
L
3
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
4 6
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
6
2
6
1
KM3
5
5
5
6
KM2
1
8
4
1
8
3
KM1
9
5
9
6
F1
F1
O
l
A
1
A
2
KA1
A
1
A
2
KM2
1
5
3
1
5
4
KM1
F2
1
7
1
6
7
6
8
KM2
1
7
2
KM1
1
3
1
4
A
1
A
2
KM3
KA1
5
3
5
4
KM2
Remote.
control
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
6
2
6
1
KM3
5
5
5
6
KM2
1
8
4
1
8
3
KM1
9
5
9
6
F1
F1
O
l
A
1
A
2
KA1
A
1
A
2
KM2
1
5
3
1
5
4
KM1
F2
1
7
1
6
7
6
8
KM2
1
7
2
KM1
1
3
1
4
A
1
A
2
KM3
KA1
5
3
5
4
KM2
Remote.
control
Presentation:
page.1/44
References:
pages.1/45,.1/47.and.1/49
Presentation:
page.1/44
References:
pages.1/45,.1/47.and.1/49
Presentation:
page.1/44
References:
pages.1/45,.1/47.and.1/49
Presentation:
page.1/44
References:
pages.1/45,.1/47.and.1/49
Schemes
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1/5
Presentation
The.TeSys.U.starter-controller.is.a.DOL.starter.(1).which.performs.the.following.
functions:
Protection.and.control.of.single-phase.or.3-phase.motors:
isolation.and.breaking.function,
overload.and.short-circuit.protection,
thermal.overload.protection,
power.switching
Control.of.the.application:.
protection.function.alarms,.application.monitoring.(running.time,.number.of.faults,.
motor.current.values,.),
logs.(last.5.faults.saved,.together.with.motor.parameter.values)
These.functions.can.be.added.by.selecting.control.units.and.function.modules.which.
simply.clip.into.the.power.base.
This.late.customisation.is.even.possible.after.power.and.control.circuit.wiring.has.
been.completed
TeSys U is a fexible range that meets the current and future needs of system
builders,.panel.builders.and.machine.manufacturers,.as.well.as.those.of.additional.
systems
From design through to operation, TeSys U offers many advantages and simplifes
the.selection.of.components.in.comparison.with.a.traditional.solution.
the breaking, isolation and contactor functions are incorporated in a single block;
this.means.fewer.references.to.be.ordered.and.easy.selection.without.any.risk.of.
error,.because.a.single.reference.covers.all.needs.up.to.15.Kw.
the.control.unit.has.a.wide.setting.range.It.can.operate.on.a.dc.or.ac.supply.
The.number.of.references.required.is.divided.by.10,.compared.with.traditional.
solutions
The.compact.components.in.the.TeSys.U.range.are.mounted.on.a.single.rail,.so.
optimising.the.amount.of.space.required.in.enclosures.By.eliminating.power.wiring.
between.the.circuit-breaker.and.contactor,.TeSys.U.reduces.installation.times.in.
enclosures.
Setting-up.accessories.simplify.or.completely.eliminate.wiring.between.components.
and.eliminate.the.risk.of.errors
b
v
v
v
v
b
v
v
-
-
Starter-controller
Consists.of.a.power.base.and.a.control.unit
Power bases
The.power.base.is.independent.of.the.control.voltage.
It.is.available.from.0.to.15.kW.at.400.V.
It.incorporates.the.breaking.function.with.a.breaking.capacity.of.50.kA.at.400V,.total.
coordination.(continuity.of.service).and.the.switching.function.
.ratings.are.available:.01.A.and.03.A
Non-reversing.(LUB).and.reversing.(LUB).
b
b
Control units
These.must.be.selected.according.to.the.control.voltage,.the.power.of.the.motor.to.
be.protected.and.the.type.of.protection.required
Standard control unit (LUCA): satisfes the basic protection requirements for
motor.starters:.overload.and.short-circuit
Magnetic control unit (LUCL): when ftted upstream of a variable speed drive or
soft.start-soft.stop.unit.and.used.in.conjunction.with.an.LUB.1.or.LUB.3.power.
base,.this.unit.provides.isolation.and.short-circuit.protection.of.the.motor.starter
Advanced control unit (LUCB, LUCC or LUCD):.allows.additional.advanced.
functions.such.as.alarm,.fault.differentiation,
Multifunction control unit (LUCM):.suitable.for.the.most.sophisticated.control.
and.protection.requirements
The.control.units.are.interchangeable.without.rewiring.and.without.using.tools.
They.have.a.wide.range.of.adjustment.(range.of.4).and.low.heat.dissipation,.due.to.
the.fact.that.bimetallic.overload.protection.components.are.no.longer.used.
b
b
b
b
(1) For use with resistive and inductive loads. Control of d.c. or capacitive loads is not possible.
11
22
Presentation
TeSys.U.starter-controllers
5
3
8
8
4
9
1
2
1
0
7
9
8
3
TeSys U starter-controller
1
1/53
Control options
Function.modules.can.be.used.to.increase.the.functions.of.the.starter-controller
Function modules
Must.be.used.in.conjunction.with.advanced.control.units.
4.types.are.available:
Thermal.overload.alarm.(LUF.W10)
Thermal.fault.and.manual.reset.(LUF.DH11)
Thermal.fault.and.automatic.or.remote.reset.(LUF.DA01.and.LUF.DA10)
Indication.of.motor.load.(LUF.V),.which.can.also.be.used.in.conjunction.with.the.
multifunction.control.unit
All.alarm.and.fault.information..processed.by.these.modules.is.available.on.digital.
contacts
b
b
b
b
Communication modules
The.information.processed.is.exchanged:
Via.a.parallel.bus:
parallel.wiring.module.(LUF.C00)
Via.a.serial.bus:
AS-Interface.modules.(ASILUF.C5.and.ASILUF.C51),
Profbus DP module (LUL C07),
CANopen.module.(LUL.C08),
DeviceNet.module..(LUL.C09),
Advantys.STB.module.(LUL.C15)
Modbus.modules.(LUL.C031.and.LUL.C033)
They.must.be.used.in.conjunction.with.a.c 24 V control unit and require a
c 24 V supply voltage.
Connection.to.other.protocols,.such.as.Fipio,.is.possible.via.gateway.modules.
(LUFP).or.via.the.TeSysPort.for.Ethernet
b
v
b
v
v
v
v
v
v
Auxiliary contact modules (LUFN)
3 possible confgurations: 2 N/O, 1 N/O + 1 N/C or 2 N/C.
Auxiliary contacts
They.provide.the.following.information:.fault.signalling.and.rotary.knob.in."ready".. .
position
Power options
Reverser block
Allows.a.non-reversing.power.base.to.be.converted.to.reversing.operation
The.reverser.block.(LUM).is.mounted.directly.beneath.the.power.base.without.
modifying.the.width.of.the.product.(45.mm).The.reverser.block.(LU6M).is.mounted.
separately.from.the.power.base.when.the.height.available.is.limited
Limiter-disconnector LUA LB
This.unit.is.mounted.directly.on.the.power.base.It.allows.the.breaking.capacity.to.be.
increased.up.to.130.kA.at.400.V,.with.a.visible.break
Setting-up accessories
Plug-in terminal blocks
The.control.terminal.blocks.are.of.the.plug-in.type,.so.allowing.wiring.to.be.prepared.
away.from.the.machine.or.the.replacement.of.products.without.rewiring
Control circuit pre-wiring system
Numerous.pre-wired.accessories.provide.simple,.clip-in.connections,.eg.
connection.of.reverser.control.terminals,.
33
33
33
44
55
66
77
Presentation (continued)
5
3
8
8
5
1
5
6
7
3
3
3
5
3
8
8
5
5
3
8
8
5
0
4
1
1/54
Structure of a motor starter
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
/
N
O
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
/
N
C
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
8
4
8
2
8
1
2
/T
1
4
/T
2
6
/T
3
2
/T
1
4
/T
2
6
/T
3
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
1
/L
1
3
/L
2
5
/L
3
In
Coil.cut-out.contact.built.into..
the.handle.as.standard
Disconnection.and.breaking
Short-ciircuit.protection
Overload.protection
Power.switching
Disconnection.and.breaking
Short-ciircuit.protection
Power.switching
Variable.speed.control
Reverser Motor starter structure
. Mirror.auxiliary.contacts.built-in.
as.standard,.mechanically.
linked.to.the.power.poles
. Low.consumption.
technology.coil
Control.unit
Control.unit
Pre-wiring
Reverser
Variable.speed.
controller
Understanding the commercial references through a comparison with a traditional motor starter
Contactor.
family
Non-
reversing
TeSys.D
1.Amp.
category.AC3
Coil.voltage.:.
110.V.50/60.Hz
Circuit-
breaker.
family
Size.of.product..
(45.mm.wide)
TeSys.D
Rating
. Auxiliary.contact.(for.cut-out.of.contactor.coil) . Power.combination.block
Starter-
controller.
family
Power.base
For.ratings..
up.to.1.A
Starter-
controller.
family
Wide.range..
control.unit.
Standard
Rating
eg.:.31.A
Control.voltage
eg.:.11040.V
AC/DC
1
1/55
Selection
Setting.range
Maximum.standard.power.ratings.of.3-phase.motors.50/60.Hz
Reference
or
CONTROL UNIT POWER BASE
Reference.to.be.completed.by.adding.the.voltage.code
Control.circuit.voltages.(V)
Rating
. Instantaneous.auxiliary.contacts.built-in.as.standard
For.DOL.starting..
non-reversing
For.DOL.starting.
reversing
Reference.to.be.completed.by.
adding.the.voltage.code
Auxiliary contacts
Auxiliary contacts
Signalling contacts
Number.of.contacts
Power.pole.status
Position.of.rotary.knob
Number.of.contacts
Fault.signalling
References
References
Signalling contacts
Auxiliary contacts
Removable terminal
block
Power base
1
1/56
1
1
2
3
2
3
1
2
Standard control unit Magnetic control unit Advanced control unit Multifunction control unit
LUCA
Class 10 - 3-phase
(see page 1/71)
LUCL
For.use.with.a..
variable.speed.
controller.or.a.soft.
start-soft.stop.unit.
(see page 1/136)
LUCB
Class 10 - 3-phase
LUCC
Class 10 - single-phase
LUCD
Class 20 - 3-phase
(see page 1/71)
LUCM
Classes 5 to 30 - single-phase and 3-phase
(see page 1/72)
Protection.against.overloads.and.short-
circuits
Protection.against.phase.failure.and.
phase.imbalance.
Earth.fault.protection.(equipment.
protection.only)
Manual.reset.
.
b
b
b
b
Short-circuit.protection
Manual.Reset
Motor.thermal.overload.protection.must.
be.provided.by.the.variable.speed.
controller.or.soft.starter
b
b
Same.functions.as.the.standard.control.unit
In.addition,.in.conjunction.with.a.function.module:
fault.differentiation.with.manual.reset,
fault.differentiation.with.remote.or.automatic.reset,.
thermal.overload.alarm,.
indication.of.motor.load
b
b
v
v
v
v
In.addition,.reset.parameters.can.be.set.to.manual.or.automatic
Protection.function.alarm.
Indication.on.front.panel.or.on.remote.terminal.via.Modbus.RS.
485.port
Log function.
Monitoring function, indication of main motor parameters on
front.panel.of.the.control.unit,.or.via.a.remote.terminal.
Differentiation.of.thermal.overload.and.magnetic.fault
Overload,.no-load.running
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Power base
LUB or LU2B
Thermal.overload.signalling.
module.and.manual.reset
LUF DH11
(see.page.1/73)
modules.and.automatic.or.
remote.reset
LUF DA01.and.LUF DA10
(see.page.1/73).
Thermal.overload.alarm.
module
LUF W10
(see.page.1/73)
AS-Interface..
communication.modules.(1)
ASILUF C5.and.ASILUF C51
(see.page.1/80)
Profbus DP .
communication.module.(1)
LUL C07
(see.page.1/8)
CANopen..
LUL C08
(see.page.1/86)
DeviceNet..
LUL C09
(see.page.1/88)
.Advantys.STB.
LUL C15
(see.page.1/9)
Motor.load.indication.module.
LUF V2
(see.page.1/73)
Auxiliary.contact.modules
LUF Npp
(see.page.1/65)
Parallel.wiring.module
LUF C00
(see.page.1/78)
Modbus..
LUL C031.and.LUL C033
(see.page.1/94)
Fault.signalling.contacts
LUA1pp (Depending on confguration)
(see.page.1/65)
Note: the colour indicates possible combinations with the selected control unit.
Example: function module LUF DH11 can only be used with an advanced control unit.
(1) Communication modules can only be combined with a c 24 V control unit (LUCp pp BL).
1
1/57
1
1
2
3
2
3
1
2
Standard control unit Magnetic control unit Advanced control unit Multifunction control unit
LUCA
Class 10 - 3-phase
(see page 1/71)
LUCL
For.use.with.a..
variable.speed.
controller.or.a.soft.
start-soft.stop.unit.
(see page 1/136)
LUCB
Class 10 - 3-phase
LUCC
Class 10 - single-phase
LUCD
Class 20 - 3-phase
(see page 1/71)
LUCM
Classes 5 to 30 - single-phase and 3-phase
(see page 1/72)
Protection.against.overloads.and.short-
circuits
Protection.against.phase.failure.and.
phase.imbalance.
Earth.fault.protection.(equipment.
protection.only)
Manual.reset.
.
b
b
b
b
Manual.Reset
Motor.thermal.overload.protection.must.
be.provided.by.the.variable.speed.
controller.or.soft.starter
b
b
In.addition,.in.conjunction.with.a.function.module:
fault.differentiation.with.manual.reset,
fault.differentiation.with.remote.or.automatic.reset,.
thermal.overload.alarm,.
indication.of.motor.load
b
b
v
v
v
v
In.addition,.reset.parameters.can.be.set.to.manual.or.automatic
Protection.function.alarm.
Indication.on.front.panel.or.on.remote.terminal.via.Modbus.RS.
485.port
Log function.
Monitoring function, indication of main motor parameters on
front.panel.of.the.control.unit,.or.via.a.remote.terminal.
Differentiation.of.thermal.overload.and.magnetic.fault
Overload,.no-load.running
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Power base
LUB or LU2B
module.and.manual.reset
LUF DH11
(see.page.1/73)
modules.and.automatic.or.
remote.reset
LUF DA01.and.LUF DA10
(see.page.1/73).
Thermal.overload.alarm.
module
LUF W10
(see.page.1/73)
AS-Interface..
ASILUF C5.and.ASILUF C51
(see.page.1/80)
Profbus DP .
LUL C07
(see.page.1/8)
CANopen..
LUL C08
(see.page.1/86)
DeviceNet..
LUL C09
(see.page.1/88)
.Advantys.STB.
LUL C15
(see.page.1/9)
Motor.load.indication.module.
LUF V2
(see.page.1/73)
Auxiliary.contact.modules
LUF Npp
(see.page.1/65)
Parallel.wiring.module
LUF C00
(see.page.1/78)
Modbus..
LUL C031.and.LUL C033
(see.page.1/94)
Fault.signalling.contacts
LUA1pp (Depending on confguration)
(see.page.1/65)
Note: the colour indicates possible combinations with the selected control unit.
Example: function module LUF DH11 can only be used with an advanced control unit.
(1) Communication modules can only be combined with a c 24 V control unit (LUCp pp BL).
1/58
1
Application examples
Application
Starting.and.protection.of.a.pump..
..
Operating conditions
Power:.4.kW.at.400.V
In:.9.A
Maximum.of.10.class.10.starts.per.hour
Duty.class.S3
3-wire.control:
Start.button.(S),
Stop.button.(S1),
Control.circuit.voltage:.a.30.V.
......
Products used
Description Item Quantity Reference Page
Power base..
1.A.with.screw.clamp.connections
1 1 LUB 12 1/6
Standard control unit 2 1 LUCA 12FU 1/71
...
Functions performed
Short-circuit.protection.with.level.of.protection.of.50.kA.at.400V
Total.coordination.of.protection.devices.conforming.to.EN.60947-6-.(continuity.of.
service).in.case.of.a.short-circuit
Electronic.protection.against.thermal.overloads.with.an.adjustment.range.of.4
Load.switching.(.million.operating.cycles.in.category.AC-43.at.In)
Indication.of.motor.status.by.N/C.or.N/O.contact
Interlock between the motor starter control and the position of the rotary knob; not
possible.to.start.the.motor.when.the.knob.is.in.the.OFF.position
...
Scheme
.........
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
5
5
9
7
1
5
5
9
7
1
5
1
0
9
0
1
1
2
5
1
0
9
0
1
1
2
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
A
2
A
1
1
3
1
4
M
3
230 V
U
1
V
1
W
1
CU
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
A
2
A
1
1
3
1
4
M
3
230 V
U
1
V
1
W
1
CU
...
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/59
1
Application
Expansion.of.an.existing.installation.for.improved.control.of.its.operation
....
Monitor.the.status.of.the.motor.and.obtain.alarm.signalling.by.a.digital.contact.in.
order.to.improve.operation.of.the.pump.and.anticipate.a.complete.stoppage.due.to.
thermal.overload
........
Additional products used
Replace.the.standard.control.unit.with.an.advanced.control.unit.and.insert.a.thermal.
overload.alarm.function.module
Advanced control unit 2 1 LUCB 12FU 1/71
Alarm function module 3 1 LUF W10 1/73
...
Functions performed
Alarm.information.is.generated.by.the.advanced.control.unit.and.is.processed.by.
the.thermal.overload.alarm.function.module.to.make.it.usable
The.advanced.control.unit.includes.a.thermal.trip.Test.button.on.its.front.panel
...
Scheme
....
..
Other versions The.advanced.control.unit.can.provide.other.functions,.
depending.on.the.type.of.function.modules.used.(instead.of.
the.LUF.W.module.described.above):
-.thermal.fault.signalling.with.function.modules.LUF.DA01,.
LUF.DA10.or..LUF.DH11,
-..indication.of.motor.load.with.function.module.LUF.V.This.
module.delivers.a.4-0.mA.analogue.signal,.which.is.
proportional.to.the.average.3-phase.current.drawn.by.the.
motor.This.allows.the.load.current.to.be.monitored.and.
provides.access.to.other.application.functions.using.this.
value,.or.to.predictive.or.preventive.maintenance.
possibilities.(replacement.of.the.motor.before.it.breaks.
down)
...
b
b
5
1
0
9
0
5
1
0
9
0
LUF W10
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
A
2
A
1
1
3
1
4
M
3 a
a 230 V
a
U
1
V
1
W
1
07 08
CU
To..
application
Alarms.Module LUF W10
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
A
2
A
1
1
3
1
4
M
3 a
a 230 V
a
U
1
V
1
W
1
07 08
CU
To..
application
Alarms.Module
...
2
3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/60
1
...
Application
Manual.control.of.a.-position.turntable
....
Power:..kW.at.400.V
In:.6.A
30.starts.per.hour
Duty.class.S4
3-wire.control:
Pushbutton.for.Position.1.(S1),
Pushbutton.for.Position..(S),
Stop.button.(S5),
Stopping.at.the.positions.is.achieved.by.limit.switches.S3.and.S4
Control.circuit.voltage:.a.115.V
........
Products used
Power base,.reversing,..
1.A.with.screw.clamp.connections
1 1 LU2B 12FU 1/63
Standard control unit 2 1 LUCA 12FU 1/71
...
Functions performed
Load.switching.(.million.operating.cycles.in.category.AC-43.at.In)
Electrical.interlocking.is.ensured.by.pre-wired.connector.LU9M.R1C.included.on.
base.LUB.1.The.design.of.the.reversing.power.block.makes.mechanical.
interlocking.unnecessary......
...
Scheme (manual control)
...
...
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
5
0
9
7
1
5
0
9
7
1
5
3
7
6
1
1
2
5
3
7
6
1
1
2
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
V
1
U
1
W
1
6
/
T
3
M
3
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
LU2B
115 V
CU
Reverser.Motor.Controller
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
V
1
U
1
W
1
6
/
T
3
M
3
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
LU2B
115 V
CU
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/61
1
...
Application
Monitoring.operation.of.a.surface.pump.in.a.water.treatment.plant.to.avoid.dry.
running,.which.could.lead.to.destruction.of.the.pump....
Power:.15.kW.at.400.V
In:.85.A
Duty.class.S1
Control.circuit.voltage:.c.4.V
Control-command.by.PLC.and.serial.link.using.the.Modbus.protocol..........
Products used
Power base.3.A.without.connections 1 1 LUB 320 1/6
Multifunction control unit 2 1 LUCM 32BL 1/7
Modbus communication module 3 1 LUL C033 1/95
Pre-wired coil connection
Connection.of.communication.module.
output.terminals.to.the.coil.terminals
4 1 LU9B N11C 1/95
Connection cable.for.connecting.the.
communication.module.to.the.serial.bus
1 VW3 A8 306 Rpp 1/95
T-junction. 1 VW3 A8 306 TF03 1/95
Functions performed
Load.switching.(15.million.operating.cycles.in.category.AC-43.at.In)
Measurement.of.load.current.and.detection.of.no-load.running.by.the.multifunction.
control.unit
No-load.running.or.operation.under.load.To.use.this.function,.the.following.
parameters.must.be.entered:
trip:.the.answer.yes/no.enables.or.disables.the.function,
time.before.tripping:.the.time.period.during.which.the.value.of.the.current.must.be.
below.the.tripping.threshold.in.order.to.cause.tripping.(adjustable.from.1.to.00.s),
tripping.threshold:.value.as.a.%.of.the.load.current.ratio.in.relation.to.the.setting.
current. If the ratio remains below this threshold for the time specifed in the previous
parameter,.the.product.trips.(adjustable.from.30.to.100.%)
Indication.of.the.various.motor.starter.statuses.and.currents
Schemes
...
...
Other functions
The.multifunction.control.unit.incorporates.other.control.and.protection.functions,.
such.as:.monitoring.and.control.of.phase.current,.alarm,.
Module LUL C033 also provides a programmable output and two confgurable
discrete.inputs
...
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
v
b
5
0
9
6
9
5
0
9
6
9
5
1
0
9
0
3
5
1
0
9
0
3
4 5 8
Modbus
4 5 8
VW3 A8 306 TF03
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
M
3 a
U
1
V
1
W
1
D

(
B
)
D

(
A
)
G
n
d
+
c 24 V
L
O
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
D

(
B
)
D

(
A
)
G
n
d
LUCM LUL C033
CU
LU9B.N11C
Pre.wired.coil
Modbus.Module Multifunction.
Control.Unit
4.V.Aux
4.V
c
4.V
Aux COM
4 5 8
Modbus
4 5 8
VW3 A8 306 TF03
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
M
3 a
U
1
V
1
W
1
D

(
B
)
D

(
A
)
G
n
d
+
c 24 V
L
O
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
D

(
B
)
D

(
A
)
G
n
d
LUCM LUL C033
CU
LU9B.N11C
Pre.wired.coil
Modbus.Module Multifunction.
Control.Unit
4.V.Aux
4.V
c
4.V
Aux COM
Modbus profle IEC 64915
Commands.(Register.704) Status.(Register.455)
Forward.running Bit.0 Ready.(available)
Reverse.running Bit.1 Poles.closed
Reserved Bit. Fault
Reset Bit.3 Alarms
Reserved Bit.4 Tripped
Connection.test Bit.5 Reserved.reset.enabled
Reserved Bit.6 A1-A.powered
Reserved Bit.7 Motor.running
Reserved Bit.8 Motor.current.%.(bit.0)
Reserved Bit.10 Motor.current.%.(bit.)
Reserved.3-phase.control Bit.1 Motor.current.%.(bit.4)
Reserved Bit.14 Reserved
Reserved Bit.15 Motor.starting
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/6
1
Non-reversing.power.bases. ...
Two versions of control connection confguration are available:
connection by screw terminals,.plug-in.control.terminal.block,
without connections.This.version.enables.wiring.to.be.prepared.in.advance.and.
is.recommended.when.a.communication.module.is.required.(allowing.the.use.of.
control.connection.prewiring.accessories).or.when.a.reverser.block.is.to.be.mounted.
by.the.customer.
b
b
Power bases for non-reversing DOL starting (1)
Connection Item
(2)
Rating Reference Weight
Power Control y 440 V 500 V 690 V
A A A kg
These.bases.have..auxiliary.contacts:.1.N/O.(13-14).and.1.N/C.(1-).which.
indicate.the.closed.or.open.position.of.the.power.poles.
A.low.power.internal.contact.allows.power.supply.to.the.control.unit.to.be.switched.off.
when.the.rotary.knob.is.no.longer.in.the.ON.position
The.power.bases.must.be.used.in.conjunction.with.a.control.unit,.see.pages.1/70.to.
1/7
Screw
clamp
terminals
Screw.
clamp.
terminals
1.+..+.3.
+.4
1 1 9 LUB 12 0900.
3 3 1 LUB 32 0900.
Without.
connections
1.+. 1 1 9 LUB 120 0865.
3 3 1 LUB 320 0865.
Terminal block for power bases without connections
Connection For base Item
(2)
Reference Weight
kg
Screw clamp terminals LUB.10.or.30 3.+.4 LU9B N11 0045.
(1) Rated breaking capacity for operation on short-circuit (Ics), see table below.
For higher values, use current limiters, see page 1/66.
Volts 230 440 500 690 (3)
kA 50 50 10 4
(2) The various sub-assemblies are supplied assembled but they are easy to separate, as shown
in the illustration.
(3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9 SP0.
Other versions Power.bases.without.built-in.short-circuit.protection.device.
(short-circuit.protection.by.circuit-breaker.or.separate.
fuses)
Please consult your Regional Sales Offce.
LUB p2
5
0
7
3
9
LUB p2
5
0
7
3
9
LUB p20
5
6
1
3
3
0
LUB p20
5
6
1
3
3
0
1
4
3
5
1
0
9
0
4
1
4
3
5
1
0
9
0
4
Characteristics:.
pages.1/98..1/100
Dimensions:.
pages.1/11.et.1/113
Schemes:
pages.1/114..1/11
Characteristics:.
pages.1/98..1/100
Dimensions:.
pages.1/11.et.1/113
Schemes:
pages.1/114..1/11
Characteristics:.
pages.1/98..1/100
Dimensions:.
pages.1/11.et.1/113
Schemes:
pages.1/114..1/11
Characteristics:.
pages.1/98..1/100
Dimensions:.
pages.1/11.et.1/113
Schemes:
pages.1/114..1/11
LUB p2
References
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/63
1
Reversing.power.bases. .......
Two versions of control connection confguration are available:
connection by screw terminals,.plug-in.control.terminal.block,
without connections.This.version.enables.wiring.to.be.prepared.in.advance.and.
is.recommended.when.a.communication.module.is.required.(allowing.the.use.of.
control.connection.prewiring.accessories)
b
b
Power bases for reversing DOL starting, pre-assembled
Connection Item
(1)
Rating Reference, to
be completed) (2)
Weight
Power Control y 440 V 500 V 690 V
A A A kg
These.bases.have.two.N/O.common.point.contacts.(81-8-84).which.indicate.non-
reversing.and.reversing.operating.status
Screw
clamp
terminals
Screw.
clamp.
terminals
1.+..+.3.
+.4.+.5
1 1 9 LU2B 12pp 170
3 3 1 LU2B 32pp 170
Without.
connections
1.+..+.3.
+.5
1 1 9 LU2B A0pp 170
3 3 1 LU2B B0pp 150
Power bases for reversing DOL starting
A.reverser.block.should.preferably.be.combined.with.a.non-reversing.power.base.
without.connections.to.create.a.reversing.starter-controller
The.built-in.N/O.(13-14).and.N/C.(1-).contacts.are.used.for.electrical.interlocking.
between the reverser block and the base; they are therefore no longer available as
output.contacts
The.reverser.block.has.two.N/O.common.point.contacts.(81-8-84).which.indicate.
non-reversing.and.reversing.operating.status
32 A reverser block Connection Item (1) Reference, to
be completed) (2)
Weight
kg
Power Control
For mounting directly
beneath the power base
Screw.clamp.
terminals
Without.
connections
3 LU2M B0pp 0400
For mounting separately
from the base
(screw or rail fxing).
Screw.clamp.
terminals
Without.
connections
6 LU6M B0pp 045
Accessories
Description Item Application Reference Weight
kg
Control
terminal
block
4 Reversing.power.base.without.
connections.LUB.A0pp.or.B0pp
LU9 M1 005
Reverser.block.LUM.B0pp..
for.direct.mounting.beneath.power.base
LU9 M1 005
Reverser.block.LU6M.B0pp..
for..mounting.separately.from.power.base
LU9 M1 005
7 Reverser.block.LU6M.B0pp..
for..mounting.separately.from.power.base
LU9M R1 0030
Control circuit pre-wiring components
Description Item Reference Weight
kg
Pre-wired connector (3) 5 LU9M R1C 0035
(1) The various sub-assemblies are supplied assembled but they are easy to separate, as shown
in the illustration.
(2) Select the same control voltage as that of the control unit.
Standard control circuit voltages:
Volts 24 4872 110240
c
BL
a
B
c.or.a ES.(4) FU.(5)
(3) For control connection between a power base and a reverser block, for direct mounting.
(4) c : 4872 V, a : 48 V.
(5) c : 110220 V, a : 110...240 V.
Other versions Power.bases.without.built-in.short-circuit.protection.device.
(short-circuit.protection.by.circuit-breaker.or.separate.fuses).
.
LU2B p2
5
6
1
7
0
LU2B p2
5
6
1
7
0
4
3
5
1
LU2B p2
6
7
4
LU6M + LU9 M1 + LU9M R1
5
1
0
9
0
5
5
1
0
9
0
6
4
3
5
1
LU2B p2
6
7
4
LU6M + LU9 M1 + LU9M R1
5
1
0
9
0
5
5
1
0
9
0
6
Characteristics:.
pages.1/98..1/100
Dimensions:.
pages.1/11.et.1/113
Schemes:
pages.1/114.et.1/11
Characteristics:.
pages.1/98..1/100
Dimensions:.
pages.1/11.et.1/113
Schemes:
pages.1/114.et.1/11
Characteristics:.
pages.1/98..1/100
Dimensions:.
pages.1/11.et.1/113
Schemes:
pages.1/114.et.1/11
Characteristics:.
pages.1/98..1/100
Dimensions:.
pages.1/11.et.1/113
Schemes:
pages.1/114.et.1/11
References
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1/64
Presentation
Add-on.contact.blocks.and.auxiliary.contact.modules
Contact states depending on the product status
Position
of rotary
knob
Indication
on front
panel
N/O pole
contact
N/C pole
contact
N/O
contact
any fault
N/C ontact
any fault
N/O contact
product
ready
References of add-on contact blocks
and auxiliary contact modules
Terminal.referencing.
LUF N11
31-3
LUA1 C20
97-98
LUA1 C11
95-96
LUA1 C20
17-18
or LUF N02
31-3
41-4
LUA1 C200
No.terminal.
block
LUA1 C110
No.terminal.
block
LUA1 C200
No.terminal.
block
or LUF N20
33-34
43-44
LUB9 N11
1-
LUA1 C11
17-18
or LUF N11
43-44
LUA1 C110
No.terminal.
block
or LUB9 N11
13-14

Off
OFF
0
Ready to operate 0
Start 1
Tripped on short-circuit TRIP I>>
Tripped on
thermal overload
Manual.reset.mode TRIP 0
Automatic.reset.on.thermal.
overload.fault.mode
0
Remote.reset.mode 0
N/O contact in closed position.

N/C contact in open position.
Characteristics:
page.1/100
Schemes:
page.1/114
1
1/65
References
Add-on.contact.blocks.and.auxiliary.contact.modules
References
Auxiliary contacts
Signalling and composition Cabling Item Reference Weight
kg
1 N/C fault signalling
contact (95-96) and
1 N/O contact (17-18)
indicating rotary knob
in ready position
Screw.clamp.
terminals
1 + 2 LUA1 C11 0030
Without.
connections
1 LUA1 C110 001
1 N/O fault signalling
contact (97-98) and
1 N/O contact (17-18)
indicating rotary knob
in ready position
Screw.clamp.
terminals
1 + 2 LUA1 C20 0030
Without.
connections
1 LUA1 C200 001
2 N/O contacts
Contacts open, rotary knob
in OFF position
Contacts closed, rotary knob
in ready position
Screw.clamp.
terminals
6 LUA8 E20 0048
Auxiliary contact modules for connection by screw clamp terminals
Module.with..contacts.indicating.the.status.of.the.starter-controller.power.poles
Operation:.a.or.c.450.V,.I.th:.5.A
Composition Item Reference Weight
kg
2 N/O contacts (33-34 and 43-44) 3 LUF N20 0050
1 N/C contact (31-32) and 1 N/O contact (43-44) 3 LUF N11 0050
2 N/C contacts (31-32 and 41-42) 3 LUF N02 0050
Accessories
Description For use on Item Reference Weight
kg
Screw clamp
terminal blocks
LUA1.C110. 2 LU9B C11 00
LUA1.C00. 2 LU9B C20 00
Blanking
covers
Location.for.auxiliary.contact,.
communication.or..
function.module
4 LU9C 1 000
Location.for.add-on..
contact.blocks
5 LU9C 2 0010
3
4
6
2
1
5
5
6
8
7
6
4
LUB + LUA1 + LUF N + LUA 8E20
3
4
6
2
1
5
5
6
8
7
6
4
LUB + LUA1 + LUF N + LUA 8E20
Characteristics:
page.1/110
Schemes:
page.1/114
1
1/66
Pre-wired system for power connections up to 63 A
Description Application Pitch
mm
Item Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Sets of 3-pole
63 A busbars
.tap-offs 45 2 1 GV2 G245 0036
54 1 GV2 G254 0038
3.tap-offs 45 1 GV2 G345 0058
54 1 GV2 G354 0060
4.tap-offs 45 1 1 GV2 G445 077
54 1 GV2 G454 0085
5.tap-offs 54 1 GV2 G554 0100
Protective
end cover
For.unused.
busbar.outlets
4 5 GV1 G10 0005
Terminal block for
supply to one or
more busbar sets
Connection.
from.the.top
3 1 GV1 G09 0040
Pre-wired system for power connections up to 160 A
The.busbar.system.can.be.screw-mounted.onto.any.type.of.support
Set of 4-pole busbars: 3-phase + neutral or 3-phase + common
Number of
tap-offs at
18 mm intervals
Item Length For mounting in
enclosure width
Reference Weight
mm mm kg
18 5 45 800 AK5 JB144 0900
Removable 3-phase power sockets
Number of
points used
on the busbar
system
Thermal
current
Item Cable
lengths
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
2 16 6 00 6 AK5 PC13 (1) 0040
3 6 50 6 AK5 PC33 (1) 0045
1000 6 AK5 PC33L (1) 0060
Limiter blocks and accessories
Application Item Breaking
capacity Iq
Mounting Unit
reference
Weight
y 440 V 690 V
kA kA kg
Limiter-
disconnector
(3) (5)
7 + 9 130 70 Direct.on..
power.base
LUA LB1 (2) 0310
Current limiter
(3)
8 100 35 Separate LA9 LB920 030
Limiter cartridge 9 130 70 Limiter-disconnector LUA LF1 0135
Clip-in
marker holder
On.power.base,..
on.reverser.block,..
on.parallel.link..
splitter.box
LAD 90 (4) 0001
(1) The rated peak current for power sockets AK5 PCpp is 6 kA.
When used in association with power bases LUBpp, the prospective short-circuit current
must not exceed 7 kA.
(2) Supplied with limiter cartridge.
(3) These devices make it possible to increase the breaking capacity of the power base.
(4) Sold in lots of 100.
(5) The limiter must be mounted on an LUB or LU2B power base. The limiter can therefore not
be common to several motor starters.
3
8
1 4 2
3
8
1 4 2
5 6 5 6
7
8
9
7
8
9
Dimensions:
pages.1/11.and.1/113
References
Power.connection.pre-wired.system,.limiter.blocks.and.
accessories
1
1/67
Phase barrier
Phase.barrier.LU9.SP0.must.be.used:
To.build.a.UL.508.type E certifed starter (Self Protected Starter).
Without the phase barrier, the starter-controller is certifed UL 508.
If.the.starter-controller.is.to.be.used.on.an.operational.voltage.of.690.V.
b
b
Description Item Application Mounting Reference Weight
kg
Phase barrier 1 LUB.or.LUB.1.or.10
LUB.or.LUB.3.or.30
LUA.LB1
Direct.on..
terminals.
L1,.L,.L3
LU9 SP0 0030
Dimensions:
Power.connection.pre-wired.system,.limiter.blocks.and.
accessories
5
6
8
7
6
8
1
1
1/68
LU9

1
4
3
2
5
6
Extended Rotary Handle
Allows.a.circuit-breaker.or.a.starter-controller.installed.in.back.of.an.enclosure..
to.be.operated.from.the.front.of.the.enclosure
A.rotary.handle.can.be.black.or.red/yellow,.IP54.or.IP65.It.includes.a.function..
for.locking.the.circuit.breaker.or.the.starter.in.the.O.(Off).or.I.(On).position..
(depending.of.the.type.of.rotary.handle).by.means.of.up.to.3.padlocks.with.a.shank.
diameter.of.4.to.8.mm.The.extended.shaft.must.be.adjusted.to.use.in.different.size.
enclosures. The IP54 rotary handle is fxed with a nut ( 22) to make easier .
the.assembling.The.new.Laser.Square.tool.brings.the.accuracy.to.align.the.circuit.
breaker.and.the.rotary.handle
Padlockable external operators for LU9
Description
1 Kit.handle.+.mounting.system
2 Universal.handle
3 Shaft
4 Shaft.support.plate.for.deep.enclosure
5 Retroft accessory
6 Laser.Square.accessory
Kit handle + mounting system
kg
For LU9 Black.handle,.with.trip.status,.IP.54 1 LU9 APN21 080
Red.handle,.with.trip.status,.IP.54 1 LU9 APN22 080
Red.handle,.without.trip.status,.IP.65 1 LU9 APN24 080
Universal handle
For LU9 Black.handle,.IP.54 2 GV APB54 0140
Red.handle,.IP.54 2 GV APR54 0140
Red.handle,.IP.65 2 GV APR65 0140
Shaft
For LU9 L.=.315.mm 3 GV APA1 0110
Shaft support plate for deep enclosure
For LU9 Depth.u.300.mm 4 GV APK12 0030
Retroft accessory
For LU9 5 GV APP1 0100
Laser Square accessory
For LU9 6 GV APL01 0160
Sticker Sold in lots of
Warning label For.French 10 - GV APSFR
For.English 10 - GV APSEN
For.German 10 - GV APSDE
For.Spanish 10 - GV APSES
For.Chinese 10 - GV APSCN
For.Portuguese 10 - GV APSPT
For.Russian 10 - GV APSRU
For.Italian 10 - GV APSIT
Dimensions:
page.1/11
1
1/69
LU9
RESET
TEST
0
1
2
3
Door interlock mechanisms
kg
Fixing kit (1) (2) 1 +2 LU9 AP00 0490
Handle for mounting in the MCC drawer
(Motor Control Centre)
3 LU9 AP20 0096
(1) Thefxingkitincludesabracketandashaftextension(maximumdepth508mm).
(2) TousethefxingkitwithaD.O.L.reversingpowerbase,onlyreverserblockLU6Mmustbe
used.
.
1/70
1
Control.units
.... ..
Operating characteristics
Control units Standard Advanced Multifunction
LUCA LUCB LUCC LUCD LUCM
Thermal overload protection
Overcurrent protection
Short-circuit protection
Protection against phase loss
Protection against phase imbalance
Earth fault protection
(equipment.protection.only)
Tripping class
Motor type
Thermal overload test function
Overtorque
No-load running
Long starting time
Reset method

Manual
Automatic.or.remote With.function.module,.or.parameters.
can.be.set.via.the.bus.with.a.
communication.module,.see.chart.
below
Parameters.can.be.set.via.the.bus.with.
a.communication.module.(see.below)
Alarm

Thermal.overload.alarm.only.with.
function.module.or.communication.
module,.see.below
With.communication.modules.to.make.
use.of.these.alarms.via.a.bus,.see.
below
Log function

.
Monitoring function

With function modules (2)
Thermal overload alarm
Thermal overload signalling and manual reset
Thermal overload signalling and automatic or remote reset
Indication of motor load (analogue)
With communication module or via Modbus port on control unit LUCM (2)
Starter status (ready, running, fault)
Reset method Parameters.can.be.set.via.the.bus
Alarm
Remote reset via the bus
Indication of motor load
Fault signalling and differentiation
Remote programming and monitoring of all functions
Log function
Monitoring function
Built-in function Function provided with accessory
(1) PDA: Personal Digital Assistant.
(2) Mounting possibilities: 1 function module or 1 communication module.
Selection
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/71
1
Standard.and.advanced.control.units
Description
1 Extraction.and.locking.handle
2 Test.button.(on.advanced.control.unit.only)
3 Ir.adjustment.dial
4 Locking.of.settings.by.sealing.the.transparent.cover
5 Sealing.of.locking.handle
Standard control units
Maximum standard power
ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz
Setting
range
Clip-in
mounting on
power base
Rating
Reference, to
be completed
by adding the
voltage code (1)
Weight
400/440 V 500 V 690 V
kW kW kW A A kg
Class 10 for 3-phase motors
009 01506 1.and.3 LUCA X6pp 0135
05 03514 1.and.3 LUCA 1Xpp 0135
15 3 155 1.and.3 LUCA 05pp 0135
55 55 9 31 1.and.3 LUCA 12pp 0135
75 9 15 4518 3 LUCA 18pp 0135
15 15 185 83 3 LUCA 32pp 0135.
Advanced control units
Pressing.the.Test.button.on.the.front.panel.simulates.tripping.on.thermal.overload
009 01506 1.and.3 LUCB X6pp 0140
05 03514 1.and.3 LUCB 1Xpp 0140
15 3 155 1.and.3 LUCB 05pp 0140
55 55 9 31 1.and.3 LUCB 12pp 0140
75 9 15 4518 3 LUCB 18pp 0140
15 15 185 83 3 LUCB 32pp 0140.
Class 10 for single-phase motors
01506 1.and.3 LUCC X6pp 0140
009 03514 1.and.3 LUCC 1Xpp 0140
055 155 1.and.3 LUCC 05pp 0140
31 1.and.3 LUCC 12pp 0140
4 4518 3 LUCC 18pp 0140
75 83 3 LUCC 32pp 0140.
009 01506 1.and.3 LUCD X6pp 0140
05 03514 1.and.3 LUCD 1Xpp 0140
15 3 155 1.and.3 LUCD 05pp 0140
55 55 9 31 1.and.3 LUCD 12pp 0140
75 9 15 4518 3 LUCD 18pp 0140
15 15 185 83 3 LUCD 32pp 0140.
Volts 24 4872 110240
c
BL.(2), (3)
a
B
c.or.a ES.(4) FU.(5)
(2) Voltage code to be used for a starter-controller with communication module.
(3) d.c. voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %.
(4) c : 4872 V, a : 48 V.
(5) c : 110220 V, a : 110...240 V.
5
1
2
3 4
5
1
0
9
1
3
LUCA pppp
LUCB pppp
5
1
2
3 4
5
1
0
9
1
3
LUCA pppp
LUCB pppp
LUB p2 + LUCA pppp
5
0
7
3
5
LUB p2 + LUCA pppp
5
0
7
3
5
LUB p2 + LUCB pppp
5
0
7
3
6
LUB p2 + LUCB pppp
5
0
7
3
6
Characteristics:.
Schemes:
page.1/115
Characteristics:.
Schemes:
page.1/115
Characteristics:.
Schemes:
page.1/115
Characteristics:.
Schemes:
page.1/115
References
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/7
1
Multifunction.control.units
..... ..
Description
1 Extraction.and.locking.handle
2 Built-in.display.window.(.lines,.1.characters)
3 4-button.keypad
4 c.4.V.auxiliary.power.supply
5 Modbus.RS485.communication.port.Connection.by.RJ45.connector
6 Sealing.of.locking.handle
The.display.window.2.and.keypad.3.allow:
in confguration mode: local confguration of protection functions and alarms,
in.run.mode:.display.of.parameter.values.and.events
The.Modbus.communication.port.5.is.used.to.connect:
an.operator.terminal,
a.PC,
a.Personal.Digital.Assistant.(PDA)
b
b
b
b
b
Multifunction control units
Parameter.entry,.monitoring.of.parameter.values.and.consultation.of.logs.are.carried.
out:
either.on.the.front.panel,.using.the.built-in.display.window/keypad,
or.via.an.operator.terminal,
or.via.a.PC.or.a.PDA.with.PowerSuite.software,
or.remotely,.via.a.Modbus.communication.bus.
Programming.of.the.product.via.the.keypad.requires.a.c .4.V.auxiliary.power.
supply
b
b
b
b
Maximum standard power
ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz
Setting
range
Clip-in
mounting on
power base
Rating
Reference
(1)
Weight
400/415 V 500 V 690 V
kW kW kW A A kg
009 01506 1.and.3 LUCM X6BL 0175
05 03514 1.and.3 LUCM 1XBL 0175
15 3 155 1.and.3 LUCM 05BL 0175.
55 55 9 31 1.and.3 LUCM 12BL 0175
75 9 15 4518 3 LUCM 18BL 0175
15 15 185 83 3 LUCM 32BL 0175.
TeSys U users manual (2)
Application Language Reference Weight
kg
On CD-Rom Multi-language.(3) LU9 CD1 00.
HMI terminal
This.compact.Magelis.terminal.enables.the.parameters.of.multifunction.control.unit.
LUCM to be read and modifed.
It is supplied pre-confgured to provide dialogue with 8 TeSys U starter-controllers
(Modbus.protocol,.application.pages.and.alarm.pages.loaded).
Starter-controller.alarm.and.fault.management.takes.priority
Language Display window Supply voltage Reference Weight
kg
Multi-language (3) 4.lines.of..
0.characters
c.4.V XBT NU400 0150.
Connecting cable (4)
Function Length Type Reference Weight
kg
Connects terminal XBT NU400
to a multifunction control unit
5.m SUB-D.5-way.
female.-.RJ45
XBT Z938 000.
(1) Input voltage c 24 V with maximum ripple of 10 %.
(2) The CD-Rom contains users manuals for the AS-Interface and Modbus communication
modules, multifunction control units and gateway modules, as well as the gateway
programming software.
(3) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish
(4) If a terminal is used with several control units, this cable can be connected to a Modbus hub
or to T-junctions (see page 1/95).
....
6
1
2
3
5
4
5
1
0
9
1
4
LUCMppBL
6
1
2
3
5
4
5
1
0
9
1
4
LUCMppBL
LUB p2 + LUCM ppBL
5
0
7
3
7
LUB p2 + LUCM ppBL
5
0
7
3
7
XBT NU400
5
1
3
3
5
XBT NU400
5
1
3
3
5
Characteristics:.
Schemes:
pages.1/114.to.1/117
Characteristics:.
Schemes:
pages.1/114.to.1/117
Characteristics:.
Schemes:
pages.1/114.to.1/117
Characteristics:.
Schemes:
pages.1/114.to.1/117
References
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/73
1
Function.modules
.........
Characteristics:.
Schemes:
page.1/115
Characteristics:.
Schemes:
page.1/115
Characteristics:.
Schemes:
page.1/115
Characteristics:.
Schemes:
page.1/115
Function modules
Output Item Application Reference Weight
kg
Thermal overload signalling and manual reset
Module.LUF.DH11.makes.it.possible.to.differentiate.thermal.overload.and.short-
circuit.faults.(The.short-circuit.fault.can.then.be.signalled.via.add-on.contact.blocks.
LUA1.C).The.module.includes.two.contacts.for.thermal.overload.signalling,.as.well.
as.an.LED.on.the.front.panel..
To.reset.the.motor.starter,.the.operator.must.use.the.rotary.knob.on.the.power.base.
The.module.can.only.be.used.with.an.advanced.control.unit.and.requires.an.a/c.
440.V.external.power.supply
1 N/O + 1 N/C 3 a.or.c.450.V LUF DH11 0060.
Thermal overload signalling and automatic or remote reset
These.modules.make..it.possible.to.differentiate.thermal.overload.and.short-circuit.
faults.(The.short-circuit.fault.can.then.be.signalled.via.add-on.contact.blocks.
LUA1.C).
The.modules.include.one.contact.for.thermal.overload.signalling,.as.well.as.an.LED.
on.the.front.panel.A.second.contact.(terminals.Z1-Z).must.be.wired.in.series.with.
terminal.A1.of.the.motor.starter.In.the.event.of.a.thermal.overload.fault,.this.wiring.
allows.motor.control.to.be.switched.off.The.rotary.knob.on.the.power.base.will.then.
stay in the ready position
Resetting.of.the.motor.starter.is.automatic.after.the.required.motor.cooling.time.if.
terminals.X1-X.are.linked.by.a.strap,.or.remote.by.pulsed.closing.of.a.volt-free.
contact.connected.to.terminals.X1-X
These.modules.can.only.be.used.with.an.advanced.control.unit.and.require.an.a/c.
440.V.external.power.supply..
Note: Terminals X1-X2 are not isolated from the signalling module power supply.
Forremoteresetting,useavolt-freecontactspecifctoeachmoduletobereset.
1 N/C 4 a.or.c.450.V LUF DA01 0055
1 N/O 4 a.or.c.450.V LUF DA10 0055.
Through.load.shedding,.this.module.makes.it.possible.to.avoid.stoppages.in.
operation.due.to.overload.tripping
Imminent.thermal.overload.tripping.is.displayed.as.soon.as.the.thermal.state.
exceeds.the.threshold.of.105.%.(hysteresis.=.5.%)
Signalling.is.possible.via.an.LED.on.the.front.panel.of.the.module.and.externally.by.
an.N/O.relay.output
It.can.only.be.used.with.an.advanced.control.unit,.from.which.it.takes.its.power
1 N/O 1 a.or.c.450.V LUF W10 0055.
This.module.provides.a.signal.which.is.representative.of.the.motor.load.status.
(I.average/Ir)
I.average.=.average.value.of.the.rms.currents.in.the.3.phases,
Ir.=.value.of.the.setting.current
The.value.of.the.signal.(4-0.mA).corresponds.to.a.load.status.of.0.to.00.%.(0.to.
300.%.for.a.single-phase.load)
It.can.be.used.with.an.advanced.or.multifunction.control.unit
Module.LUF.V.requires.a.c.4.V.external.power.supply
b
b
4 - 20 mA 2 LUF V2 0050.
2
3
4
1
1
2
3
100
200
%
20 mA 4 12 mA
LUB p2 + LUCB pppp
+
LUFW 10 or LUF Vp
5
1
0
9
1
5
5
1
0
4
4
5
1 2.2 kW
2 4 kW
3 7.5 kW
2
3
4
1
1
2
3
100
200
%
20 mA 4 12 mA
LUB p2 + LUCB pppp
+
LUFW 10 or LUF Vp
5
1
0
9
1
5
5
1
0
4
4
5
1 2.2 kW
2 4 kW
3 7.5 kW
References
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
111
1/74
Presentation,
functions
PowerSuite software workshop
Presentation
The.PowerSuite.software.workshop.for.PC.is.a.user-friendly.tool.designed.for.setting.
up.the.Schneider.Electric.control.device.motors:
TeSys.T.motor.management.systems
Altistart.soft.start/soft.stop.units
Altivar.variable.speed.drives
Lexium.05.servo.drives
It.includes.various.functions.designed.for.setup.phases.such.as:
Preparing confgurations
Start-up
Maintenance
To.facilitate.start-up.and.maintenance,.the.PowerSuite.software.workshop.is.
compatible.with.the.Bluetooth
.wireless.link
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Functions (1)
Preparing confgurations
The.PowerSuite.software.workshop.can.be.used.on.its.own.to.generate.the.device.
confguration, which can be saved, printed and exported to offce automation
software
The.PowerSuite.software.workshop.can.also.be.used.to.convert.an.Altivar.58.or.
Altivar 58F drive confguration into one that is compatible with an Altivar 71.
Start-up
When.the.PC.is.connected.to.the.device,.the.PowerSuite.software.workshop.can.be.
used.to:
Transfer the generated confguration
Adjust
Monitor.This.option.has.been.enhanced.with.new.functions.such.as:
The.oscilloscope
The.high-speed.oscilloscope.(minimum.time.base:..ms)
The.FFT.(Fast Fourier Transform).oscilloscope
Display.of.communication.parameters
Control
Save the fnal confguration
b
b
b
v
v
v
v
b
b
Maintenance
To.facilitate.maintenance.operations,.the.PowerSuite.software.workshop.can.be.
used.to:
Compare the confguration of a device currently being used with a saved
confguration
Manage.the.users.installed.equipment.base,.in.particular:
Organize.the.installed.base.into.folders.(electrical.equipment,.machinery,.
workshops,.etc)
Store.maintenance.messages
Facilitate.Modbus.TCP.connection.by.storing.the.IP.address
b
b
v
v
v
User interface
The.PowerSuite.software.workshop.can.be.used.to:
Present.the.device.parameters.(arranged.by.function).in.the.form.of.illustrated.
views.of.diagrams.or.simple.tables
Customize.the.parameter.names
Create:
A.user.menu.(choice.of.particular.parameters)
Monitoring.control.panels.with.graphic.elements.(cursors,.gauges,.bar.charts)
Perform.sort.operations.on.the.parameters
Display text in fve languages (English, French, German, Italian and Spanish). The
language.changes.immediately.and.there.is.no.need.to.restart.the.program
It.also.features.online.contextual.help:
On.the.PowerSuite.tool
On.the.device.functions.by.direct.access.to.the.user.manuals.
b
b
b
v
v
b
b
b
b
(1) Certain functions are not available for all devices. See the table of available functions,
page 1/75.
PowerSuite screen on PC
View of PI regulator function parameters
5
3
3
1
8
1
View of PI regulator function parameters
5
3
3
1
8
1
View of the FTT oscilloscope
5
7
7
0
6
View of the FTT oscilloscope
5
7
7
0
6
References:
page.1/76
5
3
4
5
1
3
11
1/75
Functions available for the PowerSuite software workshop
Functions.not.listed.in.the.table.are.available.for.all.devices
Function available with devices Controller Starter-
controller
Soft start/
soft stop
unit
Drives Servo
drive
TeSys T TeSys U ATS 48 ATV 11 ATV 31 ATV 61 ATV 71 LXM 05
Monitoring
Oscilloscope
High-speed oscilloscope
FFT oscilloscope
Display of communication parameters
Control
Customization of parameter names
Creation of a user menu
Creation of monitoring control panels
Sort operation on parameters
Custom logic editor
.
Functions.available
.
Functions.not.available
Connections (1)
Modbus serial link
The.PowerSuite.software.workshop.can.be.connected.directly.to.the.device.terminal.
port.or.Modbus.network.port.via.the.serial.port.on.the.PC
Two.types.of.connection.are.possible:
With.a.single.device.(point-to-point.connection),.use.a.VW3.A8.106.PC.serial.port.
connection.kit
With.a.number.of.devices.(multidrop.connection),.use.the.XGS.Z4.interface
b
b
Modbus TCP communication network
The.PowerSuite.software.workshop.can.be.connected.to.a.Modbus.TCP.network.
In.this.case,.the.devices.can.be.accessed:
Using.a.VW3.A3.310.communication.card.for.the.Altivar.61and.71.drives
Using.a.TSX.ETG.100.Modbus.TCP/Modbus.gateway
b
b
Bluetooth
wireless link
The.PowerSuite.software.workshop.can.communicate.via.a.Bluetooth
..
radio.link.if.
the.device.is.equipped.with.a.Bluetooth
.
Modbus.VW3.A8.114.The.adapter.plugs.
into.the.device.connector.terminal.port.or.Modbus.network.port.and.has.a.range.of.
10.m.(class.)
If.the.PC.does.not.feature.Bluetooth
.technology,.use.the.VW3.A8.115.USB.-.
Bluetooth
.
adapter
Remote maintenance
A.simple.Modbus.TCP.connection.is.all.that.is.required.for.the.PowerSuite.software.
workshop.to.support.remote.monitoring.and.diagnostics
When.devices.are.not.connected.to.the.Modbus.TCP.network,.or.it.is.not.directly.
accessible,.various.remote.transmission.solutions.may.be.used.instead.(modem,.
teleprocessing gateway, etc.). Please consult your Regional Sales Offce.
(1) Please refer to the compatibility table on page 1/77.
(2) Please refer to our specialist "Automation platform Modicon Premium and Unity - PL7
software" and "Automation platform Modicon M340" catalogues.
RS.3
RS.485
ATV.31.or.
Lexium.05
ATV.61 ATV.71 TeSys.U ATS.48
Modbus multidrop connection
Modbus.serial.link
PowerSuite
XGS.Z4
5
3
6
8
4
5
RS.3
RS.485
ATV.31.or.
Lexium.05
ATV.61 ATV.71 TeSys.U ATS.48
Modbus multidrop connection
Modbus.serial.link
PowerSuite
XGS.Z4
5
3
6
8
4
5
Modbus TCP connection
Bridge
Modbus.TCP.network
ATV.31.or.
Lexium.05
ATS.48 ATV.61 ATV.71
Modbus.
serial.link
PLC.(2)
5
3
6
8
4
6
PowerSuite
Modbus TCP connection
Bridge
Modbus.TCP.network
ATV.31.or.
Lexium.05
ATS.48 ATV.61 ATV.71
Modbus.
serial.link
PLC.(2)
5
3
6
8
4
6
PowerSuite
Functions (continued)
Presentation:
page.1/74
References:.
page.1/76
111
1/76
Description Composition Reference Weight
kg
PowerSuite CD-ROM 1.program.for.PC.in.English,.French,.German,.Italian..
and.Spanish.
Variable.speed.drive,.starter.and.servo.drive.technical.manuals
b
b
VW3 A8 104 0100
PowerSuite update
CD-ROM (1)
1.program.for.PC.in.English,.French,.German,.Italian..
and.Spanish.
Variable.speed.drive.and.starter.technical.manuals
b
b
VW3 A8 105 0100
PC serial port connection kit
for.point-to-point.Modbus..
connection
1.x.3.m.cable.with.1.RJ45.connector.on.starter-controller.or.
drive.side.and.1.RS.3/RS.485.converter.with.1.9-way.female.
SUB-D.connector.on.PC.side
For.the.ATV.11.drive:.1.converter.with.one.4-way.male.SUB-D.
connector.and.1.RJ45.connector
For.ATV.38/58/58F.drives:.1.RJ45/9-way.male.SUB-D.adapter
b
b
b
VW3 A8 106 0350
RS 232/RS 485 interface
for.multidrop.Modbus..
connection
1.Modbus.multidrop.converter.for.connection.to.screw.
terminals.Requires.a.4.V.c.(030.V),.0.mA.power.supply.(2)
b XGS Z24 0105
Modbus-Bluetooth
adapter
(3)
1.Bluetooth
.adapter.(10.m.range,.class.)..
with.1.RJ45.connector
For.PowerSuite:.1.x.01.m.cable.with..RJ45.connectors
For.TwidoSoft:.1.x.01.m.cable.with.1.RJ45.connector.and..
1.mini.DIN.connector
For.ATV.38/58/58F.drives:.1.RJ45/9-way.male.SUB-D.adapter
b
b
b
b
VW3 A8 114 0155
USB - Bluetooth

adapter for
PC
This.adapter.is.required.in.the.case.of.a.PC.that.does.not.feature.
Bluetooth
.technology.It.is.connected.to.a.USB.port.on.the.PC
10.m.range.(class.)
VW3 A8 115 090
(1) Updates a version u V1.40 with the latest available version. For versions < V1.40, you should order the PowerSuite CD-Rom,
VW3 A8 104.
(2) Please refer to the "Interfaces, I/O splitter boxes and power supplies" catalogue.
(3) Can also be used to communicate between a Twido PLC and the TwidoSoft software workshop.
VW3 A8 104
5
3
6
8
4
8
VW3 A8 104
5
3
6
8
4
8
5
3
6
8
4
7
VW3 A8 114
5
3
6
8
4
7
VW3 A8 114
References
Presentation:
page.1/74
Functions:
page.1/74
11
1/77
Compatibility of PowerSuite software workshop with the following devices (1)
Connexion Controller Starter-
controller
Soft start/
soft stop
unit
Drives Servo drives
TeSys T TeSys U (2) ATS 48 ATV 11 ATV 31 ATV 61 ATV 71 LXM 05A LXM 05B LXM 05C
Modbus V25 V140 V130 V140 V20 V23 V22 V22 V24 V25
Modbus TCP (device equipped
with Modbus TCP card)
V23 V22
Modbus TCP via
Modbus TCP/Modbus gateway
V150 V20 V23 V22 V22 V24 V25
Bluetooth
V22 V22 V23 V22 V22 V24 V25

. Compatible.software.versions
. Incompatible.software.versions
Hardware and software environments
The PowerSuite software workshop can operate in the following PC environments and confgurations:
Microsoft.Windows
.XP.SP1,.SP,
Pentium.III,.800.MHz,.hard.disk.with.300.MB.available,.18.MB.RAM
SVGA or higher defnition monitor
b
b
b
(1) Minimum software version.
(2) TeSys U starter-controller without communication module or with Modbus LUL C031 or C033 communication module.
Compatibility
Presentation:
page.1/74
Functions:
page.1/74
References:
page.1/76
1/78
1
TeSys motor starters - open version 1
Parallel.wiring.module.and.pre-wired.coil.connection.
components
Presentation
The.parallel.wiring.system.makes.it.possible.to.connect.starter-controllers.to.the.PLC.
I/O.modules.quickly.and.without.any.need.for.tools.It.replaces.traditional.screw.
terminal.and.single.wire.connections.It.is.used.with.the.Telefast.pre-wired.system.
(1)
The.parallel.wiring.module.provides.the.status.and.command.information.for.each.
starter-controller.It.must.be.used.with.an.LUB.1.or.LUB.A0BL.power.base.and.a.
c.4.V.control.unit.LUCp ppBL
Splitter.boxes.LU9.G0.and.LU9.G03..distribute.information.from.the.PLC.I/O.
modules.to.each.of.the.starter-controllers.connected.to.it
Splitter.box.LU9.G0.(maximum.of.4.reversing.starters).is.optimised.for.use.with.
card.TSX.DMZ8DTK.and.splitter.box.LU9.G03.(maximum.of.8.reversing.starters).
for.use.with.cards.TSX.DMZ64DTK.and.BMX.DDM30K
When.used.in.conjunction.with.the.Advantys.STB.distributed.I/O.solution,.the.
TeSys.U.starter-controller.is.ideal.in.decentralised.automation.architectures.(2).
The.use.of.dedicated.parallel.interface.module.STB.EPI.145.allows.remote.
connection.of.4.starter-controllers
Parallel.wiring.module.LUF.C00.has:
.outputs:.control.of.starter.forward.and.reverse.running,
3.inputs:.position.of.the.rotary.knob,.fault.indication.and.position.of.the.poles
Each.of.the.channels.of.LU9.G0p.splitter.boxes.has:
.outputs:..control.of.starter.forward.and.reverse.running,.in.the.case.of.a.
reversing.starter
.inputs:.fault.indication.and.position.of.poles
Connection.to.the.dedicated.module.is.by.means.of.the.following.cables:.
RJ45.LU9Rpp,.for.lengths.less.than.3.metres,
490.NTW.000pp,.for.lengths.greater.than.3.metres
Parallel type connection
Architecture
.......
. 3 Parallel.wiring.module.
LUF.C00
4 Pre-wired.coil.connection.
LU9B.N11C
5 Connection.cable.LU9.Rp.with.
one.RJ45.connector.at.each.
end
6 Splitter.box.LU9.G0.or.
LU9.G03..for.8.motor.starters.
with.channel.connections.on.
the.PLC.side.by.two.HE.10.
connectors.and.on.the.starter-
controller.side.by.8.RJ45.
connectors
7 Connection.cable.
TSX.CDPppp.with.one.HE.10.
connector.at.each.end
.........
References
kg
Parallel wiring module 3 LUF C00 0045
(1) Please consult our "Power Control and connection components catalogue.
(2) Please consult our "IP20 distributed inputs/outputs Advantys STB" catalogue
b
b
b
b
b
b
1 Outputs.for.starter.commands
2 RJ45.connector.for.connecting.to.splitter.box
1 2
5
1
0
9
1
6
2 RJ45.connector.for.connecting.to.splitter.box
1 2
5
1
0
9
1
6
3
5 7
4
3
4
6
To..
PLC
3
5 7
4
3
4
6
To..
PLC
5
1
0
9
1
7
8 Dedicated.parallel.interface.module.
(STB.EPI.145)
9 Power.base
10 c.4.V.control.unit.(LUC.B/D/C/M.pp.BL)
11 Parallel.wiring.module.(LUF.C00)
12 Options:.add-on.contact.blocks,.reverser.blocks
5
1
0
9
1
7
8 Dedicated.parallel.interface.module.
(STB.EPI.145)
9 Power.base
10 c.4.V.control.unit.(LUC.B/D/C/M.pp.BL)
11 Parallel.wiring.module.(LUF.C00)
12 Options:.add-on.contact.blocks,.reverser.blocks
Presentation,
references 1
12
9
10
11
12
8
5
1
1
5
8
LU9.G0 LU9.G03
5
1
1
5
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/79
1
Parallel.wiring.module.and.pre-wired.coil.connection.
components
Pre-wired.components.simplify.wiring.and.reduce.wiring.errors
..........
Connection of communication module output terminals
to the coil terminals
By.pre-wired.connector.or.wire.link.
Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection
The.use.of.a.power.base.without.pre-wired.connections.is.recommended
Description For use with
power base
Item Reference Weight
kg
Pre-wired coil
connection
LUB.pp 4 LU9B N11C 0045
LUB.pp 13 LU9M RC 0030
Wire link:
Allows.insertion,.for.example,.of.an.emergency.Stop.control.or.a.voltage.interface
This.type.of.connection.must.be.used.for.a.reversing.starter-controller.assembled.
using.an.LU6M.reverser.block.for.separate.mounting.When.reverser.block.LU6M.
and.the.power.base.are.mounted.side-by-side,.a.pre-wired.coil.connection.LU9M.RC.
may.by.used
Connection of parallel wiring module to the PLC
No.tools.are.required.to.connect.the.parallel.wiring.module.to.the.PLC.Connection.
is via a splitter box which allows up to 8 starter-controllers to be connected; a
maximum.of.4.reversing.starters.per.splitter.box.is.allowed
The.splitter.box.requires.a.c.4.V.power.supply
Splitter boxes
Connectors For use with Reference Weight

kg
PLC side Starter-controller
side
2 x HE 10
20-way
8 x RJ45 4.reversing.starters.
maximum
LU9 G02 (1) 060
8.reversing.starters.
maximum
LU9 G03 (1) 060
Connection cables to the splitter box
Connectors Item Length
m
Reference Weight
kg
2 x RJ45 connectors 5 03 LU9 R03 0045
1 LU9 R10 0065
3 LU9 R30 015
Connection cables from splitter box to PLC
Type of connection Gauge Csa Length Reference Weight
PLC side Splitter box
side
AWG mm
2
m kg
HE 10
20-way
HE 10
20-way
034 05 TSX CDP 053 0085
1 TSX CDP 103 0150
TSX CDP 203 080
3 TSX CDP 303 0410
5 TSX CDP 503 0670
8 0080 1 ABF H20 H100 0080
ABF H20 H200 0140
3 ABF H20 H300 010
HE 10
40-way
2 x HE 10
20-way
034 05 BMX FCC 053 010
1 BMX FCC 103 0350
BMX FCC 203 0630
3 BMX FCC 303 0940
5 BMX FCC 503 1530
10 BMX FCC 1003 3000
Bare wires HE 10
20-way
034 3 TSX CDP 301 0400
5 TSX CDP 501 0660
(1) Allows "run" and "fault" status of each starter-controller to be fed back to the PLC and
transmits commands.
b
b
3
4
5
6
6
9
6
4
LUB + LUF C00 + LU9B
3
13
5
1
0
9
1
8
LU2B + LUF C00 + LU9M
3
4
5
6
6
9
6
4
LUB + LUF C00 + LU9B
3
13
5
1
0
9
1
8
LU2B + LUF C00 + LU9M
Characteristics:.
Characteristics:.
Characteristics:.
Characteristics:.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/80
1
AS-Interface.communication.modules
.
Presentation
AS-Interface.communication.modules.ASILUF.C5.and.ASILUF.C51.make.it.easy.to.
connect.starter-controllers.to.the.AS-Interface.cabling.system,.and.therefore.allow.
remote.control.and.command.of.these.starter-controllers.
.
Module.ASILUF.C51.features.extended.addresing.
The.various.operating.states.of.the.modules.(AS-Interface.voltage.present,.
communication.fault,.addressing.fault,).are.indicated.on.the.front.panel.by.a.green.
LED.1.and.a.red.LED.2.
Operation.of.the.modules.is.continuously.monitored.by.auto-testing,.in.a.way.that.is.
totally.transparent.to.the.user.
The.incorporation.of.AS-Interface.V1.functions.allows.diagnostics.to.be.performed.
on.the.modules,.either.remotely.via.the.line.or.locally.via.the.ASI.TERV.addressing.
terminal.
The.communication.modules.must.be.connected.to.a.c.4.V.auxiliary.supply.and.
must.be.used.in.conjunction.with.a.c.4.V.control.unit,.LUCp ppBL
The.product.is.supplied.with.a.yellow.connector.4.for.connection.to.the.AS-Interface.
system,.a.black.connector.5.for.connection.to.the.c.4.V.auxiliary.supply.and.a.black.
connector.3.for.connection.of.the.outputs.
......
Series type connection
Architecture
............. ...
. 6 Communication.modules.ASILUF.C5.or.
ASILUF.C51
7 Tap-off..TCS.ATV01N
8 Pre-wired.coil.connection.LU9B.N11C
Information transmitted by the AS-Interface system
AS-Interface profles 7.D.F.0 profle and 7.A.7.E profle
Data bits (command) Bit.value =.0 =.1
Command.D0.(O) Stop.forward Forward.running
Command.D1.(O) Stop.reverse Reverse.running
Command.D.(O) Not.used Not.used
Command.D3.(O) Not.used Not.used.
Data bits
(status)
Bit.value =.0 =.1
Status.D0.(I) Not.ready.or.fault Ready
Status.D1.(I) Stopped Running
Status.D.(I) Not.used Not.used
Status.D3.(I) Not.used Not.used
References
Description Addressing Item Reference Weight
kg
Communication
modules
Single.
31.slaves
6 ASI LUF C5 0065.
Extended.
6.slaves
6 ASI LUF C51 0065.
c 24 V
AS-Interface
6 8
7
c 24 V
AS-Interface
6 8
7
1 2
3 4 5
1 Green.LED:.AS-Interface.voltage.present
2 Red.LED:.AS-Interface.or.module.fault
4 Black.connector.for.connection.to.c.4.V.auxiliary.
power.supply
5 Yellow.connector.for.connection.to.the.AS-Interface.
system
5
1
0
9
1
9
1 2
3 4 5
1 Green.LED:.AS-Interface.voltage.present
2 Red.LED:.AS-Interface.or.module.fault
4 Black.connector.for.connection.to.c.4.V.auxiliary.
power.supply
5 Yellow.connector.for.connection.to.the.AS-Interface.
system
5
1
0
9
1
9
Presentation,
references
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/81
1
........
Connection of communication module output terminals to the
coil terminals
By.pre-wired.connector.or.wire.link
The.use.of.a.power.base.without.pre-wired.control.circuit.connections.is.
recommended
...
power base
kg
Pre-wired
coil connection
LUB pp 3 LU9B N11C 0045.
LUB pp 5. LU9M RC 0030.
Wire link
may.be.used
. ......
Connection of the communication module (1)
This.is.achieved.by.using.a.tap-off.for.connection.to..ribbon.cables:.
1.for.AS-Interface.(yellow)
1.for.separate.c.4.V.supply.(black)..
b
b
Description Length
m
Reference Weight
kg
Tap-off XZ CG0142 065.
.
Consoles and cable adapter
Description Reference Weight
kg
Addressing terminal
Battery.operated.Battery.charger.supplied
AS-Interface.V1.and.V1.compatible
XZ MC11 0550
Adjustment and diagnostics console
Runs.on.LR6.batteries
Allows.addressing.of.AS-Interface.V1.slaves.
and.diagnostics
ASI TERV2 0500.
Cable adapter
For.console.XZ.MC11
XZ MG12 0070.
.
Software set-up
AS-Interface confguration is carried out using PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software. From
the module declaration screen, it is possible to confgure all the slave devices
corresponding.to.all.the.AS-Interface.I/O
Confguration is carried out by following the instructions on the screen.
...
kg
On CD-Rom Multi-language.
(3)
LU9 CD1 00.
(1) Degree of protection IP 54. Connection by 4 x 0.34 mm
2
wires.
Black wire: + 24 V.
White wire: 0 V.
Blue wire: AS-Interface ().
Brown wire: AS-Interface (+).
....
b
b
1
3
1
5
5
1
0
9
0
LUB + ASILUF C5 + LU9B
5
3
1
1
LU2B + ASILUF C5 + LU9M

1
3
1
5
5
1
0
9
0
LUB + ASILUF C5 + LU9B
5
3
1
1
LU2B + ASILUF C5 + LU9M

XZ MC11
5
0
8
9
8
ASI TERV2
5
0
8
9
9
XZ MC11
5
0
8
9
8
ASI TERV2
5
0
8
9
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/8
1
Profbus DP communication module and pre-wired coil
connection.components
...
Presentation
When.used.in.conjunction.with.the.power.base.and.control.unit,.communication.
module LULC07 allows TeSys U starter-controllers to be controlled via Profbus DP
(Deported.Periphery)..
Communication.module.LULC07.is.of.the.slave.type.and.uses.the.TeSys.U.systems.
internal registers (which can be accessed via the Profbus DP bus) in cyclic or acyclic
mode. This module has a 24 V (0.5 A) discrete output and two confgurable discrete
inputs
..........
Connections
Serial bus topology
.
11 Programmable controller with Profbus DP master card
12 Other.slave.(not.powered.via.the.bus)
13 Profbus DP 2-wire cable (TSX PBSCA100 = 100 m, TSX PBSCA400 = 400 m)
14 Standard Profbus DP connector (490NAD91103 or 490NAD91104)
15 Profbus DP power supply module for c.4.V-Aux.supply.to.LUL.C07.modules.(LU9.GC7)
16 Profbus DP connector, TeSys U dedicated (LU9 AD7)
17 Profbus DP 4-wire cable (LU9 RPBppp)
18 Profbus DP communication module (LUL C07)
Profbus DP: general information
The TeSys U communication module supports 2 Profbus application profles based
on.DP.V0.and.DP.V1.services:.motor.starter.(MS),.motor.management.starter.
(MMS).
Cyclic / Acyclic services
In.general,.data.is.exchanged.via.cyclic.services.and.via.acyclic.services
The application profles defne, for the cyclic data:
manufacturer.independent.data,
manufacturer specifc data..
b
b
DP V1 Read / Write services
DP.V1.read.and.write.services.allow.access.to.all.data.that.cannot.be.accessed.by.
cyclic.data.exchange.
PKW feature
In.order.to.make.data.which.is.not.cyclically.exchanged.accessible.for.DP.V0.
masters,.a.function.called.PKW.(Periodically.Kept.in.acyclic.Words).is.implemented.
The.cyclic.data.carries.a.dedicated.zone.of.4.input.words.and.4.output.words,.called.
PKW,.which.makes.it.possible.to.access.all.the.registers.en.bloc.
Electronic device description
The TeSys U system is described by a GS*- fle (1). This fle will be used by any
Profbus confguration tool to get information about the device.
The GS*- fles and associated icon, dedicated to the TeSys U system, can be
downloaded from the www.schneider-electric.com website (Library / Software
Tools).
(1) Replace the asterisk with the letter corresponding to the required language.
1 2 3
9 4
10
5 6 7 8
1 LED.indicating.module.status
2 Fault.signalling.LED
3 LED.indicating.c.4.V.supply.ON.for.outputs.OA1,.
OA3.and.LO1
4 SUB-D.connector.for.bus.link
5 c.4.V.supply.connection
6 Discrete.input
7 Discrete.input
8 Discrete.output
9 Outputs.for.starter-controller.commands.(non-
reversing.and.reversing)
10 Pin.for.connection.to.control.unit.(advanced.or.
multifunction)
5
6
7
1
3
9
1 2 3
9 4
10
5 6 7 8
OA3.and.LO1
6 Discrete.input
7 Discrete.input
8 Discrete.output
multifunction)
5
6
7
1
3
9
11
12
13
13
15 15
12
16 14
17 17
18 18 18 18
c 24 V c 24 V
11
12
13
13
15 15
12
16 14
17 17
18 18 18 18
c 24 V c 24 V
Presentation
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/83
1
......................................
Information carried by the bus
Depends.on.the.type.of.control.unit.used.with.module.LUL.C07
Compatibility of Profbus DP communication module LUL C07
with c 24 V control units
Information accessible
via Profbus DP
LUL C07 in conjunction with:
LUCA ppBL LUCB/C/D ppBL LUCM ppBL
Standard
control unit
Advanced
control unit
Multifunction
control unit
Start and Stop commands
Remote programming and
monitoring of all functions
Log function
Monitoring function
Alarms (overcurrent, )
.Functions.performed
References
kg
Profbus DP communication module 18 LUL C07 0108
coil terminals
Pre-wired.connector:.pre-wired.coil.connection
recommended
..
power base
kg
Pre-wired coil connection LUB.pp 4 LU9B N11L 0050
LUB.pp 6 LU9M RL 0450
Wire link:
using.an.LU6M.reverser.block..
When.this.reverser.block.and.the.power.base.are.mounted.side-by-side,.a.pre-wired.
coil.connection.LU9M.RL.may.be.used.
.........
Components for connection to the bus and to the installation
The.c 24 V-Aux supply to Profbus DP modules LUL C07 must pass through power
supply.module.LU9.GC7..
LUL.C07.modules.must.be.connected.to.the.LU9.GC7.splitter.box.in.order.to.be.
powered
The.number.of.TeSys.U.starter-controllers.that.can.be.powered.by.an.LU9.GC7.
module.is.limited.by.the.maximum.current.(15.A).which.it.can.deliver.
The.c.4.V.supply.for.the.inputs/outputs.must.be.provided.separately
Description Length
m
Item
(1)
Reference Weight
kg
Profbus DP
power supply module
15 LU9 GC7
Profbus DP connector . 16 LU9 AD7
Profbus DP cables
2-wire
100 13 TSX PBSCA100
400 13 TSX PBSCA400
Profbus DP cables
4-wire
10 17 LU9 RPB010
100 17 LU9 RPB100
400 17 LU9 RPB400
(1) See connection diagram on page 1/82.
b
b
1
0
6
9
4
9
LUL C07
1
0
6
9
4
9
LUL C07
OA3
A1
A2
L1
c 24 V
0 V
L
O
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
c

2
4

V
c

2
4

V
C
O
M
OA1 COM
5
1
0
9
5
1
On
power.
base
Connection of power supplies
OA3
A1
A2
L1
c 24 V
0 V
L
O
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
c

2
4

V
c

2
4

V
C
O
M
OA1 COM
5
1
0
9
5
1
On
power.
base
references
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/84
1
..............
with starter-controller LUB 12 / LUB 32
Maximum
power
ratings
50/60 Hz
400/415 V
1 2 or or 3 4
Power
base
Standard
control
unit
Advanced
control
unit
Multifunction
control
unit
Profbus
DP
module
Pre-wired
coil
connection,
non-
reversing
Non-
reversing
Class 10 Class 10 Class 20 Classes
530
kW
009
or
LUB 12
LUB 32

LUC A6XBL LUC B6XBL LUC D6XBL LUC M6XBL LUL C07 LU9 BN11L
05
or
LUB 12
LUB 32

15
or
LUB 12
LUB 32

LUC A05BL LUC B05BL LUC D05BL LUC M05BL LUL C07 LU9 BN11L
55
or
LUB 12
LUB 32

75 LUB 32 LUC A18BL LUC B18BL LUC D18BL LUC M18BL LUL C07 LU9 BN11L
15
.
LUB 32 LUC A32BL LUC B32BL LUC D32BL LUC M32BL LUL C07 LU9 BN11L
Note: ProfbusDPmoduleLULC07isnotcompatiblewithLUTMcontrollers.
4
3
1
2
5
6
7
1
LUB + LUC pppBL

+ LUL C07 + LU9B N11L
4
3
1
2
5
6
7
1
LUB + LUC pppBL

Compatibility
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/85
1
..................
with starter-controller LU2B 12 / LU2B 32
Maximum
power
ratings
50/60 Hz
400/415 V
5 2 or or 3 6
Power
base
Standard
control
unit
Advanced
control
unit
Multifunction
control
unit
Profbus
DP
module
Pre-wired
coil
connection,
reversing
Reversing Class 10 Class 10 Class 20 Classes
530
kW
009
or
LU2B 12BL
LU2B 32BL

LUC A6XBL LUC B6XBL LUC D6XBL LUC M6XBL LUL C07 LU9 MRL
05 or LU2B 12BL
LU2B 32BL

15
or
LU2B 12BL
LU2B 32BL

LUC A05BL LUC B05BL LUC D05BL LUC M05BL LUL C07 LU9 MRL
55
or
LU2B 12BL
LU2B 32BL

75 LU2B 32BL LUC A18BL LUC B18BL LUC D18BL LUC M18BL LUL C07 LU9 MRL
Note: ProfbusDPmoduleLULC07isnotcompatiblewithLUTMcontrollers.
5
6
7
1
6
3
5
2
5
6
7
1
3
LU2B + LUC pppBL
+ LUL C07 + LU9M RL
5
6
7
1
6
3
5
2
5
6
7
1
3
LU2B + LUC pppBL
+ LUL C07 + LU9M RL
Compatibility (continued)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/86
1
CANopen.communication.module.and..
pre-wired.coil.connection.components
Presentation
Communication.module.LUL.C08.allows.direct.connection.of.TeSys.U.starter-
controllers.and.controllers.on.a.CANopen.bus.
Module.LUL.C08.is.of.the.slave.type
When.used.in.conjunction.with.an.LUC.pppBL.or.LUC.pT1BL.control.unit,.module.
LUL.C08.provides.control.and.command.of.the.starter-controller.and.of.the.controller
For local control requirements, the module is equipped with a confgurable, c.4.V.
0.5 V discrete output and two confgurable discrete inputs.
LUL.C08.communication.modules.can.be.connected.to.Advantys.STB.module.:.
XBE.100K
Connections
Star topology Bus topology
.
The.c.4.V.power.supply.for.modules.LUL.C08.is.distributed.via.the.bus.and.must.
be connected to the frst TSX CANTDM4 junction box. The cable c.s.a. allows
connection.of.up.to.5.LUL.C08.modules..
Above.this.number,.another.power.supply.must.be.connected.to.the.next.junction.
box
A.c.4.V.supply.must.be.connected.to.module.LUL.C08.for.outputs.OA1,.OA3.and.
LO1
Depends.on.the.type.of.control.unit.used
Control unit Standard Advanced Multifunction
Remote programming and monitoring of all
functions
"Log" function
"Monitoring" function
Functions.performed
For.more.detailed.information,.please.refer.to.User's.Manual.LU9.CD1,.see.page.opposite.
Compatibility of CANopen communication module with
control units
LUCA ppBL / B ppBL / C ppBL / D ppBL All.versions.marketed.after.2T04081 (1)
LUCM ppBL All.versions.u.V3
LUCM T1BL All.versions.u.V3
(1) This date code is made up as follows: 2T or 2C factory code.
04,05,06 and so on: year of manufacture. 08: week. 1: 1st day of the week.
15
12
c 24 V
11
15
17
16
17
16
15
12
c 24 V
11
15
17
16
17
16
Presentation
3 LED.indicating.c.4.V.supply.ON.for.outputs.OA1,.OA3.
and.LO1
5 c 4.V.supply.connection
6 Discrete.input
7 Discrete.input
8 Discrete.output
10 CANopen.master.module.TSX.CPP110.(PMCIA.card.with.
junction.box)
11 Cable.TSX.CANCpp.equipped.with.a.TSX.CANKCDF90T.
connector.(to.be.assembled)
12 Terminal.block.TSX.CANTDM4.with.4.SUB.D.type.
connectors.for.connection.of.slaves.and.screw..terminal.
blocks.(connection.of..bus.and.dedicated.4.V.supply.to.
modules.LUL.C08)
13 Connection.between.junction.boxes.TSX.CANTDM4.by.
cable.TSX.CANCADDpp or.cable.TSX.CANCpp ftted with
TSX.CANKCDF90T.connectors
14 The.slaves.are.connected.by.means.of.cables.
TSX.CANCADDpp
15 Connections.are.made.by.means.of.cables.TSX.CANCpp.
ftted with TSX CANKCDF180T connectors for the slaves
and.with.TSX.CANKCDF90T.connectors.for.the.junction.
boxes
16 Starter-controller
17 CANopen.communication.module.LUL.C08
18 Advantys.STB.island.(NIM:.Network.Interface.Modules
+.I/O.modules)
19 CANopen.extension.module.STB.XBE.100K
1 2
5
3
6 7 8
9
4
or
10
14 17
14
13
12
11
c 24 V
16
17
16
18
19
11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/87
1
CANopen.communication.module.and..
........
Communication services
Communication.module.LUL.C08.uses.PDO,.SDO.and.PKW.type.objects.for.data.
exchange.(Process.Data.Objects,.Service.Data.Objects,.Periodically.Kept.in.Acyclic.
Words).
Transmit and Receive PDO
PDO 1 Real.time.command-control Preconfgured and enabled
PDO 2, PDO 3 Unused To be defned by confguration
PDO 4 Adjustment,.diagnostics.and.acyclic.exchanges Preconfgured and enabled
References
kg
CANopen communication module 16 LUL C08 0108
Note: The Electronic Data Sheets (EDS), and users manuals are available on the website
www.schneider-electric.com.
.......
recommended.
.
power base
kg
Wire link:
Allows.insertion,.for.example,.of.an.emergency.stop.control.or.a.voltage.interface
and.the.power.base.are.mounted.side-by-side,.a.pre-wired.coil.connection.LU9M.RL.
may.be.used..
.....................
Cables for connection to the bus
Description Length
m
kg
Standard
Cables equipped with
SUB-D connectors
03 14 TSX CANCADD03 0045
Reel of cable 50 11 TSX CANCA50
100 11 TSX CANCA100
UL approved
Cables equipped with
SUB-D connectors
03 14 TSX CANCBDD03 0045
Reel of cable 50 11 TSX CANCB50
100 11 TSX CANCB100
Separate components
kg
Elbowed connector TSX CANKCDF90T
Straight connector TSX CANKCDF180T
Junction box TSX CANTD M4
b
b
17
16
5
1
0
9
LUB + LUL C08 + LU9B N11L

16
18
5
6
6
9
8
8
LU2B + LUL C08 + LU9M RL
17
16
5
1
0
9
LUB + LUL C08 + LU9B N11L

16
18
5
6
6
9
8
8
LU2B + LUL C08 + LU9M RL
References
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/88
1
DeviceNet.communication.module.and.pre-wired.coil.
...
Presentation
When.used.in.conjunction.with.the.power.base.and.control.unit,.communication.
module.LUL.C09.allows.TeSys.U.starter-controllers.and.controllers.to.be.controlled.
via.DeviceNet
Communication.module.LUL.C09.is.of.the.slave.type.and.uses.the.TeSys.U.systems.
internal.registers.which.can.be.accessed.via.DeviceNet
Module LUL C09 has a confgurable 24 V (0.5 A) discrete output and two
confgurable discrete inputs.
..........
Connections
Serial bus topology

11 Industrial.PLC:.Industrial.Programmable.Controller.equipped.with.a.DeviceNet.Master
12 Connection.and.power.distribution.box.for.supply.to.DeviceNet.communication.modules
13 Starter-controller
14 DeviceNet.communication.module.LUL.C09
1 2 3
4 9
10
5 6 7 8
OA3.and.LO1.and.4.V.bus
4 DeviceNet.connector.for.bus.link
6 Discrete.input
7 Discrete.input
8 Discrete.output
multifunction)
5
6
7
5
1 2 3
4 9
10
5 6 7 8
OA3.and.LO1.and.4.V.bus
4 DeviceNet.connector.for.bus.link
6 Discrete.input
7 Discrete.input
8 Discrete.output
multifunction)
5
6
7
5
c 24 V
11
14 14 14 12
13 13 13
63.starter-controllers.max..
with.modules.LUL.C09
c 24 V
11
14 14 14 12
13 13 13
63.starter-controllers.max..
with.modules.LUL.C09
Presentation
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/89
1
........................................
Depends.on.the.type.of.control.unit.used.with.module.LUL.C09
Compatibility of DeviceNet LUL C09 communication module with
c 24 V control units
Information accessible
via DeviceNet
LUL C09 in conjunction with:
LUCA ppBL LUCB/C/D ppBL LUCM ppBL
Standard
control unit
Advanced
control unit
Multifunction
control unit
Remote programming and
monitoring of all functions
Log function
Monitoring function
.Functions.performed
References
kg
DeviceNet communication module 14 LUL C09 0108
recommended
b
power base
Reference Weight
kg
Pre-wired coil connection LUB.pp LU9B N11L 0050
LUB.pppp LU9M RL 0450
Wire link:
using.an.LU6M.reverser.block..
When.this.reverser.block.and.the.power.base.are.mounted.side-by-side,.a.pre-wired.
coil.connection.LU9M.RL.may.be.used.
Supply
The.4.V.supply.to.DeviceNet.LUL.C09.modules.is.provided.via.the.(V+.,.V-).
terminals
The.4.V.supply.for.the.inputs/outputs.must.be.provided.separately.from.the.supply.
to.the.LUL.C09.modules
The.4.V.Aux.terminal.is.for.supply.to.the.LUCM.control.unit.or.the.LUTM.controller
b
5
6
7
8
LUL C09
5
6
7
8
LUL C09
OA3
L
O
1
L
I
1
L
I

+
.
c
.
4
.
V

+
.
c
.
4
.
V
.
.
.
c
.
4
.
V
OA1 COM
V. V+ S
Can_L Can_H
5
6
7
6
OA3
L
O
1
L
I
1
L
I

+
.
c
.
4
.
V

+
.
c
.
4
.
V
.
.
.
c
.
4
.
V
OA1 COM
V. V+ S
Can_L Can_H
5
6
7
6
Presentation (continued),
references
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/90
1
..............
Compatibility of DeviceNet communication module LUL C09
with starter-controller LUB 12 / LUB 32
Maximum
power
ratings
50/60 Hz
400/415 V
1 2 or or 3 4
Power
base
Standard
control unit
Advanced
control unit
Multifunction
control unit
DeviceNet
module
Pre-wired
coil
connection,
non-
reversing
Non-
reversing
Class 10 Class 10 Class 20 Classes
530
kW
009
or
LUB 12
LUB 32

05
or
LUB 12
LUB 32

15
or
LUB 12
LUB 32

55
or
LUB 12
LUB 32

75 LUB 32 LUC A18BL LUC B18BL LUC D18BL LUC M18BL LUL C09 LU9 BN11L
15
.
LUB 32 LUC A32BL LUC B32BL LUC D32BL LUC M32BL LUL C09 LU9 BN11L
Note: DeviceNet communication module LUL C09 is compatible with LUT M controllers.
4
3
1
2
5
6
7
1
LUB + LUC pppBL

4
3
1
2
5
6
7
1
LUB + LUC pppBL

Compatibility
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/91
1
..................
Compatibility of DeviceNet communication module LUL C09
with starter-controller LU2B 12 / LU2B 32
Maximum
power
ratings
50/60 Hz
400/415 V
5 2 or or 3 6
Power
base
Standard
control unit
Advanced
control unit
Multifunction
control unit
DeviceNet
module
Pre-wired
coil
connection,
reversing
Reversing Class 10 Class 10 Class 20 Classes
530
kW
009
or
LU2B 12BL
LU2B 32BL

05 or LU2B 12BL
LU2B 32BL

15
or
LU2B 12BL
LU2B 32BL

55
or
LU2B 12BL
LU2B 32BL

Note: DeviceNet communication module LUL C09 is compatible with LUT M controllers.
5
6
7
1
6
3
5
2
5
6
7
1
3
LU2B + LUC pppBL
+ LUL C09 + LU9M RL
5
6
7
1
6
3
5
2
5
6
7
1
3
LU2B + LUC pppBL
+ LUL C09 + LU9M RL
Compatibility (continued)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/9
1 11
Advantys.STB.communication.module.and..
...
Presentation
Communication.module.LUL.C15.allows.direct.connection.of.TeSys.U.starter-
controllers.and.controllers.on.an.Advantys.STB.island,.between.two.segments.or.at.
the.end.of.a.segment.In.the.latter.case,.the.segment.must.be.equipped.with.an.EOS.
(End.of.segment).extension.module.STB.XBE1100
The.starter-controller.will.then.be.able.to.make.use.of.the.services.provided.by.
Advantys.STB:.self-addressing,.autobaud,.fallback.positions
When.used.in.conjunction.with.an.LUC.pppBL.or.LUC.pT1BL.control.unit,.module.
LUL.C15.provides.control.and.command.of.the.starter-controller.and.of.the.controller
For local control requirements, the module is equipped with a confgurable, c.4.V,.
0.5 A discrete output and two confgurable discrete inputs.
..........
Connections
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Advantys.STB.island.(NIM:.Network.Interface.Module.+.I/O.modules)
Extension.module.(EOS/End.of.segment).STB.XBE1100
Bus.connecting.cable.LU9.RCDpp, elbowed/straight, for connection of the frst TeSys U
communication.module
Starter-controller
Communication.module.LUL.C15
Connector.for.connection.of.product.either.by.wire.link.or.using.coil.connection.modules.
LU9.BN11L.or.LU9.MRL
Line.end.adapter.LU9.RFL15
Bus.connection.cable.LU9.RDDpp,.straight/straight,.for.connections.between.LUL.C15.modules
Beginning.of.segment.(BOS)
Connection of power supply for the outputs
A.c.4.V.supply.must.be.connected.to.module.LUL.C15.for.outputs.OA1,.OA3.and.
LO1
functions
"Log" function
"Monitoring" function
Functions.performed
For.more.detailed.information,.please.refer.to.User's.Manual.LU9.CD1,.see.page.opposite.
Compatibility of Advantys STB communication module
with control units
LUCA ppBL / B ppBL / C ppBL / D ppBL All.versions.marketed.after.2T04081 (1)
LUCM ppBL All.versions.u.V3
LUCM T1BL All.versions.u.V3
(1) This date code is made up as follows: 2T or 2C: factory code. 04,05,06 and so on: year of
manufacture. 08: week. 1: 1st day of the week.
12
16
12 17
17 12 12
14
13
10 11
15
18
13
14
13
14 + 16
13
14
13
14
12
16
12 17
17 12 12
14
13
10 11
15
18
13
14
13
14 + 16
13
14
13
14
4
1 2 3
9
5 6 7 8
1 Two-colour.LED.indicating.module.status
3 LED.indicating.that.c.4.V.supply.is.ON
4 Bus.connectors
6 Discrete.input
7 Discrete.input
8 Discrete.output
4
1 2 3
9
5 6 7 8
1 Two-colour.LED.indicating.module.status
3 LED.indicating.that.c.4.V.supply.is.ON
4 Bus.connectors
6 Discrete.input
7 Discrete.input
8 Discrete.output
Presentation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/93
1 11
Advantys.STB.communication.module.and..
...........
Possible architectures
The.maximum.number.of.starter-controllers.and.controllers.that.can.be.connected.to.
an.Advantys.STB.island.depends.on.the.Network.Interface.Module.(NIM).used.and.
the.associated.control.units
NIM
(Network Interface
Module)
Number of starter-controllers Number of controllers
LUCA ppBL LUCB ppBL
LUCC ppBL
LUCD ppBL
LUCM ppBL LUCB pp
LUCD pp
LUCM pp
CANopen Standard 17 17 15 15
Basic 1 1 1 1
DeviceNet Standard 18 18 16 16
Basic 1 1 1 1
Profbus DP Standard 9 8 8 8
Basic 9 8 8 8
Interbus Standard 1 1
Basic 1 1
Fipio Standard 4 4 4 4
Modbus plus Standard 17 17 15 15
Ethernet Standard 3 3 3 3
References
kg
Advantys STB communication module 14 LUL C15 0108
Line end adapter 16 LU9 RFL15 001
End of segment.(EOS) 11 STB XBE1100
Beginning of segment (BOS) 18 STB XBE1300
...
Pre-wired.connector:.pre-wired.coil.connection.
recommended..
.
power base
kg
Wire link:
and.the.power.base.are.mounted.side-by-side,.a.pre-wired.coil.connection.LU9M.RL.
may.be.used.
.............
Cables
Description Length
m
kg
Cables ftted with
connectors,
one straight
and one elbowed
03 12 LU9 RCD03 0045
1 12 LU9 RCD10 0065
3 12 LU9 RCD30 015
5 12 LU9 RCD50 1500
Cables ftted with
two straight connectors
03 17 LU9 RDD03 0045
1 17 LU9 RDD10 0065
3 LU9 RDD30 015
Note: User manuals are available on the website www.schneider-electric.com.
b
b
19
14
20
14
19
14
20
14
References
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/94
11
Presentation
Communication.modules.LUL.C031.and.LUL.C033.enable.the.TeSys.U.starter-
controller.to.be.connected.to.the.Modbus.network
They.must.have.a.c.4.V.supply.and.must.be.used.in.conjunction.with.a.c.4.V.
control.unit,.LUCp ppBL
They.incorporate.a.05.A,.c.4.V.discrete.output.for.local.command.requirements
The module LUL C033 also has two confgurable discrete inputs.
.......
Series type connection
Architecture
Star topology Bus topology
.
7 Communication.module.LUL.C031.or.LUL.C033
8 Pre-wired.coil.connection.LU9B.N11C
9 Connection.cable.VW3.A8.306.Rpp with.one.RJ45.connector.at.each.end
10 Modbus.hub.LU9.GC3.with.channel.connections.to.PLC.and.to.starter-controller.
with.RJ45.connectors
11 T-junction.VW3.A8.306.TFpp
12 Line.terminator.VW3.A8.306.R
...
Starter status
(ready, running, fault)
functions
Log function
Monitoring function
Functions.performed
For.more.detailed.information,.please.refer.to.Users.Manual.LU9.CD1,.see.page.
opposite.
Compatibility of Modbus communication modules
With starter-controllers and controllers
Starter-controllers and controllers LUL C031 LUL C033
LUB pp / LU2Bp2
LUT M ppBL
Possible.combinations
1 Module.status.signalling.LED
2 4.V.supply.connection
3 RJ45.connector.for.RS485.Modbus.link
4 .discrete.inputs
5 1.discrete.output
5
1
0
6
4
LUL C033
5
6
6
9
7
0
LUL C031
1
1
2 5 3 6 2 5 3 6 4
1 Module.status.signalling.LED
2 4.V.supply.connection
3 RJ45.connector.for.RS485.Modbus.link
4 .discrete.inputs
5 1.discrete.output
5
1
0
6
4
LUL C033
5
6
6
9
7
0
LUL C031
1
1
2 5 3 6 2 5 3 6 4
7
8
7
9
8
10
12
9
To.PLC
7
8
7
9
8
10
12
9
To.PLC
11 12
8
11
8
7 7
11 12
8
11
8
7 7
Modbus.communication.modules.and.pre-wired.coil.
...
Presentation
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1/95
11
Modbus.communication.modules.and.pre-wired.coil.
.....................
Compatibility of Modbus communication modules (continued)
With power bases
Control unit software versions LUL C031 LUL C033
V23 (1) V22 (1)
LUCA ppBL Yes Yes
LUCB ppBL, LUCC ppBL and LUCD ppBL Yes Yes
LUCM.ppBL V104 Yes No
V105 Yes Yes
V106 Yes No
V110.(1) Yes Yes
With base controllers, version 1200 (1)
Control unit software versions LUL C031 LUL C033
V23 (1) V21 (1)
LUCB TppBL and LUCD TppBL No Yes
LUCM TppBL V11.(1) No Yes
(1) And higher versions
Combinations.not.permitted
References
kg
Modbus communication modules 7 LUL C031 0080
7 LUL C033 0080
coil terminals
recommended.
b
power base
kg
Pre-wired coil connection LUB.pp 8 LU9B N11C 0045
LUB.pp 13 LU9M RC 0030
Wire link:
may.be.used
Connection of communication modules on the serial bus
Achieved.either.by.means.of.a.Modbus.hub.or.using.T-junctions
Description Length
m
kg
Modbus hub
8 slaves
10 LU9 GC3 060.
Cables ftted with
2 x RJ45 connectors
03 9 VW3 A8 306 R03 0045
1 9 VW3 A8 306 R10 0065
3 9 VW3 A8 306 R30 015
T-junctions (1) 03 11 VW3 A8 306 TF03 003
1 11 VW3 A8 306 TF10 003
RS 485 line terminator 12 VW3 A8 306 R 001
kg
On CD-Rom Multi-language (3) LU9 CD1 00.
(1) Fitted with 2 x RJ45 female connectors (bus side) and a 0.3 m or 1 m length cable supplied
with an RJ45 male connector (station side).
b
7
8
5
1
1
5
7
LUB + LUL C03p + LU9B
7
13
5
6
6
9
6
7
LU2B + LUL C03p + LU9M
7
8
5
1
1
5
7
LUB + LUL C03p + LU9B
7
13
5
6
6
9
6
7
LU2B + LUL C03p + LU9M
References
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1/96
1
Communication.gateways.LUF.P
...
Presentation
Communication.gateways.LUF.P.allow.connection.between.the.Modbus.serial.link.
and Fipio, Profbus DP or DeviceNet feld buses.
After confguration, these gateways manage information which can be accessed by
the.Modbus.serial.link.and.make.this.information.available.for.read/write.functions.
(command, monitoring, confguration and adjustment) on the feld buses.
An.LUF.P.communication.gateway.consists.of.a.box.which.can.be.clipped.onto.a.
35.mm.omega.rail,.allowing.connection.of.up.to.8.Slaves.connected.on.the.Modbus.
serial.link
Example of architecture
..
...
Description
Front panel of the product
1 LED.indicating.:.
-.communication.status.of.the.Modbus.serial.links,.
-.gateway.status,.
- communication status of the Fipio, Profbus DP or DeviceNet bus.
2 Connectors for connection to Fipio, Profbus DP or DeviceNet buses..
.
.
.
.
.
.
Underside of product
3 RJ45.connector.for.connection.of.the.Modbus.serial.link
4 RJ45.connector.for.link.to.a.PC
5 c.4.V.power.supply.
........
Software set-up
For.the.Fipio.bus,.software.set-up.of.the.gateway.is.performed.using.either.PL7.
Micro/Junior/Pro software or ABC Confgurator software.
For the Profbus DP and DeviceNet buses, software set-up is performed using
ABC Confgurator.
This.software.is.included.in.the.TeSys.U.users.manual.
(1) Connection kit for PowerSuite software workshop (see page 1/76).
Confguration
of.gateway
by.PC
.TeSys.U.starter-controllers
Fipio..
Profbus DP .
DeviceNet
LUF.P
ATS.48...ATV.31
(1)
Modbus
Confguration
of.gateway
by.PC
.TeSys.U.starter-controllers
Fipio..
Profbus DP .
DeviceNet
LUF.P
ATS.48...ATV.31
(1)
Modbus
5
4
1
7
7
5
6
1
5
1
1
2
3
5
4
5
4
1
7
7
5
6
1
5
1
1
2
3
5
4
Characteristics,.references:
page.1/97
Dimensions:
page.1/97
Schemes:
page.1/10
page.1/97
Dimensions:
page.1/97
Schemes:
page.1/10
page.1/97
Dimensions:
page.1/97
Schemes:
page.1/10
page.1/97
Dimensions:
page.1/97
Schemes:
page.1/10
Presentation,
description,
setting-up 0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/97
1
Communication.gateways.LUF.P
Characteristics
Bus type Fipio Profbus DP DeviceNet
Environment Conforming.to.IEC.60664 Degree.of.pollution:.
Ambient air temperature Around.the.device C +.5+.50
Degree of protection IP.0
Electromagnetic
compatibility
Emission Conforming.to.IEC.50081-:.1993
Immunity Conforming.to.IEC.61000-6-:.1999
Number of Modbus slaves which can be connected y.8
Connection Modbus By.RJ45.connector.conforming.to.Schneider.Electric.RS485.standard
To.a.PC By.RJ45.connector,.with.PowerSuite.connection.kit
Field.bus. By.SUB.D9.female.
connector
By.SUB.D9.female.
connector
By.5-way.removable.
screw.connector
Supply V External.supply,..c.4..10.%
Consumption Max mA 80
Typical mA 100
Indication/diagnostics By.LED.on.front.panel
Services Profle FED.C3.or.FED.C3P
Command 26 confgurable words (1) 122 confgurable words 256 confgurable words
Monitoring 26 confgurable words (1) 122 confgurable words 256 confgurable words
Confguration and adjustment By.gateway.mini.messaging.facility.(PKW)
References
Description For use with With bus/
serial link
Reference Weight
kg
Communication
gateways
TeSys.U.starter-controllers,.
Altistart.48,..
Altivar.31,
Altivar.31
Fipio/Modbus LUF P1 045
Profbus DP/Modbus LUF P7 045
DeviceNet/Modbus. LUF P9 045
Connection accessories
Description For use with Length
m
Connectors Reference Weight
kg
Connection cables Modbus 3 1.RJ45.type.connector.and.
one.end.with.stripped.wires
VW3 A8 306 D30 0150
03 .RJ45.type.connectors VW3 A8 306 R03 0050
Connectors Fipio 1.SUB-D.9.male.connector TSX FP ACC12 0040.
Profbus mid line 1.SUB-D.9.male.connector 490 NAD 911 04
Profbus line end 1.SUB-D.9.male.connector 490 NAD 911 03 .
Documentation
Description Medium Language Reference Weight
kg
Users manual for
TeSys U range (2)
CD-Rom

Multilingual:.English,.French,.German,.Italian,.
Spanish
LU9 CD1 00
Dimensions
(1)IfthegatewayisconfguredusingPL7andnotABCConfgurator,theI/Ocapacityislimited
to a total of 26 words.
(2) This CD-Rom contains users manuals for AS-Interface and Modbus communication modules,
multifunction control units and gateways, as well as for the gateway programming software,
ABCConfgurator.
8
6
3
1
TSX FP ACC 12
8
6
3
1
TSX FP ACC 12
490 NAD 911 03
8
7
1
3
490 NAD 911 03
8
7
1
3
75 27
1
2
0
=
=
75 27
1
2
0
=
=
Presentation,.description:
page.1/96
Setting-up:
page.1/96
Schemes:
page.1/10
page.1/96
Setting-up:
page.1/96
Schemes:
page.1/10
page.1/96
Setting-up:
page.1/96
Schemes:
page.1/10
page.1/96
Setting-up:
page.1/96
Schemes:
page.1/10
page.1/96
Setting-up:
page.1/96
Schemes:
page.1/10
page.1/96
Setting-up:
page.1/96
Schemes:
page.1/10
page.1/96
Setting-up:
page.1/96
Schemes:
page.1/10
page.1/96
Setting-up:
page.1/96
Schemes:
page.1/10
Characteristics,
references,
dimensions 0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/98
1
....
Environment
Product certifcations UL,.CSA,.CCC,.GOST,.ASEFA
ABS,.BV,.DNV,.GL,.LROS
ATEX
Conforming to standards IEC/EN..60947-6-,.CSA.C-.N14,.Type.E
UL.508.type.E:.with.phase.barrier.LU9.SP0
Rated insulation voltage.(Ui) Conforming.to.IEC/EN.60947-1,.
overvoltage.category.III,.
degree.of.pollution:.3
V 690
Conforming.to.UL508,.
CSA.C-.n14
V 600
Rated impulse
withstand voltage (Uimp)
Conforming.to.
IEC/EN.60947-6-
kV 6
Safety separation of circuits
SELV
Conforming.to.IEC/EN.60947-1.
appendix.N
V Between.the.control.or.auxiliary.circuit.and.the.main.circuit:.400.
Between.the.control.and.auxiliary.circuits:.400.
Degree of protection
Conforming.to.IEC/EN.60947-1
(protection.against.
direct fnger contact)
Front.panel.outside.connection.
zone
IP.40
Front.panel.and.wired.terminals IP.0
Other.faces. IP.0
Protective treatment Conforming.to.IEC/EN.60068 TH
Conforming.to.IEC/EN.60068--30 Cycles 1
Conforming.to.IEC/EN.60068--11 h 48
Ambient air temperature
around the device
Storage C .-.40+.85
Operation C Power.bases.and.standard.and.advanced.control.units:.-.5.+.70
(At.temperatures.above.60C.and.up.to.70C,.for.starter-controller.LUB3,.leave.a.
minimum.gap.of..9.mm.between.products)
Power.bases.and.multifunction.control.units:.-.5+.60.
(At.temperatures.above.45.C,.leave.a.minimum.gap.of.9.mm.between.products.
At.temperatures.above.55.C.and.up.to.60.C,.leave.a.gap.of.0.mm.between.
products)
Maximum operating altitude m 000
Operating positions In.relation.to.normal.vertical.
mounting.plane
Flame resistance Conforming.to.UL.94 V
Conforming.to.
IEC/EN.60695--1
C 960..(parts.supporting.live.components)
C 650
Environmental restrictions Cadmium.and.silicone-free,.recyclable
Shock resistance
1/.sine.wave.=.11.ms
Conforming.to.IEC/EN60068--7.
(1)
Power.poles.open:.10.gn
Power.poles.closed:.15.gn
Vibration resistance
5300 Hz
Conforming.to.IEC/EN.60068--6
(1)
Power.poles.open:..gn
Power.poles.closed:.4.gn.(2)
Resistance to
electrostatic discharge
Conforming.to.IEC/EN.61000-4- kV In.open.air:.8.-.Level.3
kV On.contact:.8.-.Level.4
Immunity to radiated high-
frequency disturbance
Conforming.to.IEC/EN.61000-4-3 V/m 10.-.Level.3
Immunity to fast
transient currents
Conforming.to.IEC/EN.61000-4-4 kV All.circuits.except.for.serial.link:.4.-.Level.4
kV Serial.link:..-.Level.3
Immunity to dissipated
shock waves
Conforming.to.IEC/EN.60947-6- Common mode Serial mode
Uc.a.440.V,
Uc..c.480.V
kV 1
Uc.=.4.V.c Not.applicable
Immunity to conducted
high-frequency disturbance
Conforming.to.IEC/EN.61000-4-6 V 10
Radiated emission
and conducted
Conforming.to.CISPR.11.and.
EN.55011
Class.A
(1) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction.
(2) 2 gn with Advantys STB or CANopen communication modules.
30 30
30 30
90 90 90 90 90 90 90
References.:
pages.1/6.to.1/78
Dimensions.:.
Schemes.:.
pages.1/114.to.1/11
References.:
pages.1/6.to.1/78
Dimensions.:.
Schemes.:.
pages.1/114.to.1/11
References.:
pages.1/6.to.1/78
Dimensions.:.
Schemes.:.
pages.1/114.to.1/11
References.:
pages.1/6.to.1/78
Dimensions.:.
Schemes.:.
pages.1/114.to.1/11
Characteristics
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/99
1
Power.bases.and.control.units
....
Power base, control unit or reverser block type LUB 12 + LUCA
or LUCB or LUCC
or LUCD
LUB 32 + LUCA
or LUCB or LUCC
or LUCD
LUB 12 +
LUCM
LUB 32 +
LUCM
LU2M
LU6M
Power circuit connection characteristics
Connection to 4 mm screw clamp terminals
Flexible cable
without.cable.end
1.conductor mm
2
510 510 510 510 510
.conductors mm
2
156 156 156 156 156
Flexible cable
with.cable.end
1.conductor mm
2
16 16 16 16 16
.conductors mm
2
16 16 16 16 16
Solid cable
without.cable.end
1.conductor mm
2
110 110 110 110 110
.conductors mm
2
16 16 16 16 16
Screwdriver Philips n 2 or fat screwdriver: 6 mm
Tightening torque Nm 195 195 195 195 195
Control circuit connection characteristics
Flexible cable
without.cable.end
1.conductor mm
2
07515 07515 07515 07515 07515
.conductors mm
2
07515 07515 07515 07515 07515
Flexible cable
with.cable.end
1.conductor mm
2
03415 03415 03415 03415 03415
.conductors mm
2
03415 03415 03415 03415 03415
Solid cable
without.cable.end
1.conductor mm
2
07515 07515 07515 07515 07515
.conductors mm
2
07515 07515 07515 07515 07515
Tightening torque Nm 081 081 081 081 081
Control circuit characteristics
Rated voltage
of.control.circuit
a.50/60.Hz V 440. 440.
c
V 40 40 4 4
Voltage limits c.4.V.(1) V 07 07 08 08
Operation a.4.V V 065 065 . .
a.or.c.487.V V a.3857.c.38593
a.11040.V V a.8864 a.8864
.c.1100.V V c.884 c.884
Drop-out c.4.V V 145 145 145 145
a.4.V V 145 145 . .
a.or.c.487.V V 9 9 . .
a.11040.V,.c.1100.V V 55 55 . .
Typical consumption c.4.V mA 130 0 150 00 10
I.max.while.closing a.4.V mA 140 0 . . 360
a.or.c.487.V mA 80 80 . . 300
a.11040.V,.c.1100.V mA 80 80 . 1000
I.rms.sealed c.4.V mA 60 80 70 75 10
a.4.V mA 70 90 . . (2)
a.or.c.487.V mA 35 45 . . (2)
a.11040.V,.c.1100.V mA 35 5 . (2)
Heat dissipation W 3 17 18
Operating time Closing ms 24 V: 70; 48 V: 60; u.7.V:.50 75 65
Opening ms 35 35 35 35
Resistance to micro-breaks ms 3 3 3 3
Resistance to voltage dips IEC/EN.61000-4-11 At.least.70.%.of.Uc.for.500.ms
Mechanical durability In.millions.of.operating.cycles 15 15 15 15
Maximum operating rate In.operating.cycles.per.hour 3600 3600 3600 3600
Main pole characteristics
Number of poles 3 3 3 3
Isolation
conforming.to.IEC/EN.60947-1
Possible Yes Yes Yes Yes
Padlocking 1 padlock with 6.9 mm shank
Rated thermal current A 1 3 1 3
Rated operational current
(Ue y.440V)
To.IEC/..
EN.60947-6-
Category.AC-41 q.y.70C:.1A.... q.y.70C:.3A. q..y.55C:.1A. q y.55C:.3A.
Category.AC-43 q.y.70C:.1A.... q.y.70C:.3A. q..y.55C:.1A. q y.55C:.3A.
Rated operational voltage V 690.(3) 690.(3) 690.(3) 690.(3)
Frequency limits Of.the.operating.current Hz 4060 4060 4060 4060
Power dissipated
in the power circuits
Operational.current A 3 6 9 1 18 5 3
Power.dissipated.in.all.three.poles W 01 03 06 11 4 46 75
Rated breaking capacity on short-circuit V 30 440 500 690
kA 50 50 10 4
Total breaking time ms
Thermal limit With.Isc.max.on.440.V kAs 90 10 90 10
(1) Voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %.
(2) No consumption sealed. (3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9 SP0.
Characteristics
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/100
1
Reversing.power.bases.and.auxiliary.contacts
............
Specifc characteristics of power bases LU2B and reverser blocks LU2M or LU6M
Duration of inrush phase a.50/60.Hz ms 5
c. ms 15
Maximum
operating time
Without.change.of.direction. ms 75
With.change.of.direction ms 150
General characteristics of auxiliary contacts
Conventional
thermal current (Ith)
For.ambient.temperature q <.70.C
A 5
Frequency of the operational current Hz Up.to.400
Minimum switching capacityl = 10
-8
U.min V 17
I.min mA 5
Short-circuit
protection
Conforming.to.IEC/EN.60947-5-1 A gG.fuse:.4
Short-time rating Permissible.for 1.s A 30
500.ms A 40
100.ms A 50
Insulation resistance mW 10
Non-overlap time Guaranteed.between..
N/C.and.N/O.contacts
ms .(on.energisation.and.on.de-energisation)
Specifc characteristics of auxiliary contacts built-into the power base
Linked contacts Conforming.to.IEC/EN.60947-4-1 Each.power.base.has.1.N/O.contact.and.1.N/C.contact.which.are.mechanically.linked
Mirror contact Conforming.to.IEC/EN.60947-1 The N/C contact ftted in each power base reliably represents the state of the power
contacts.(safety.scheme)
Rated operational voltage (Ue) V Up.to.a 690; c.50
Rated insulation
voltage.(Ui)
Conforming.to.UL,.CSA V 600
Specifc characteristics of auxiliary contacts in modules LUF N, of auxiliary contacts LUA1
and of reverser blocks LU2M and LU6M
Rated operational voltage (Ue) V Up.to.a 250; c.50
Rated insulation
voltage.(Ui)
Rated operational power of contacts
Conforming.to.IEC/EN.60947-5-1
ac supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15
Electrical.durability.(valid.for.up.to.3600.operating.cycles/hour).on.an.
inductive.load.such.as.the.coil.of.an.electromagnet:.making.current.
(cos.j.07).=.10.times.the.power.broken.(cos.j =.04)
dc supply, category DC-13
Electrical.durability.(valid.for.up.to.100.operating.cycles/hour).on.an.inductive.load.
such.as.the.coil.of.an.electromagnet,.without.economy.resistor,.the.time.constant.
increasing.with.the.load
V 24 48 115 230 400 440 600 V 24 48 125 250
1 million
operating cycles
VA 60 10 80 560 960 1050 1440 W 10 90 75 68
3 million
operating cycles
VA 16 3 80 160 80 300 40 W 70 50 38 33
10 million
operating cycles
VA 4 8 0 40 70 80 100 W 5 18 14 1
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1 2 3 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,6
0,5
0,8
0,7
7
1
2
3
5
4
6
8
10
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s
.
o
f
.
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
.
c
y
c
l
e
s
Current.broken.in.A
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1 2 3 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,6
0,5
0,8
0,7
7
1
2
3
5
4
6
8
10
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s
.
o
f
.
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
.
c
y
c
l
e
s
Current.broken.in.A
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1 2 3 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,6
0,5
0,8
0,7
7
1
2
3
5
4
6
8
10
48 V
250 V
125 V
24 V
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s
.
o
f
.
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
.
c
y
c
l
e
s
Current.broken.in.A
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1 2 3 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,6
0,5
0,8
0,7
7
1
2
3
5
4
6
8
10
48 V
250 V
125 V
24 V
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s
.
o
f
.
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
.
c
y
c
l
e
s
Current.broken.in.A
Characteristics
References:
pages.1/63.and.1/64
Dimensions:.
Schemes:.
pages.1/114.to.1/11
References:
pages.1/63.and.1/64
Dimensions:.
Schemes:.
pages.1/114.to.1/11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/101
1
Control.units
............
Characteristics of standard control units LUCA
Protection Motor.type 3-phase
Conforming.to.standard IEC/EN.60947-6-,.UL.508,.CSA.C-.n14
Overload
protection
Tripping.class.conforming.to.
UL.508,.IEC/EN.60947-6-
10
Frequency.limits.of.the.operational.current Hz 4060
Temperature.compensation C -.5+.70
Protection.against.phase.imbalance Yes
Short-circuit
protection
Tripping.threshold 14.x.Ir.(setting.current)
Tripping.tolerance .0.%
Characteristics of advanced control units LUCB, LUCC and LUCD
Control unit type LUCB LUCC LUCD
Protection Motor.type 3-phase Single-phase 3-phase
Conforming.to.standard IEC/EN.60947-6-,.UL.508,.
CSA.C-.n14
IEC/EN.60947-6-,.UL.508,.
CSA.C-.n14
IEC/EN.60947-6-,.UL.508,.
CSA.C-.n14
Overload
protection
UL.508,.IEC/EN.60947-6-
10 10 0
Frequency.limits.of.the.operational.current Hz 4060 4060 4060
Temperature.compensation C -.5+.70 -.5+.55 -.5+.70
Protection.against.phase.imbalance Yes Yes
Short-circuit
protection
Tripping.threshold 14.x.Ir.max 14.x.Ir.max 14.x.Ir.max
Tripping.tolerance .0.% .0.% .0.%
Characteristics of multifunction control units LUCM
Protection Motor.type Parameters.can.be.set:.single-phase.or.3-phase
Conforming.to.standard IEC/EN.60947-6-,.UL.508
Overload
protection
UL.508,.IEC/EN.60947-6-
5,.10,.15,.0,.5,.30.(selectable)
Frequency.limits.of.the.operational.current Hz 5060
Temperature.compensation C -.5+.55
Communication
interface for
terminal on
enclosure door
Physical.interface RS.485.multi-drop
Connections RJ45.on.front.panel
Protocol Modbus.RTU
Maximum.transmission.speed bit/s 19 200 (self-confguration up to this value)
Maximum.return.time ms 00
Display Type LCD,..lines.of.1.characters
Language.version Multilanguage.(English,.French,.German,.Italian,.Spanish)
Precision .5.%
Resolution 1.%.of.Ir
Auxiliary supply External.type V c.4,.with.maximum.ripple.of..10.%
Heat.dissipation W 08
Confguration table for protection devices and alarms on multifunction control units LUCM
Tripping Alarm Adjustment of tripping
threshold
Adjustment of time before
tripping
Adjustment of alarm
threshold
Factory setting Factory setting Range Default value Range Default value Range Default value
Overcurrent Activated. (1) 317.Ir 14
Overload Activated.(1) Activated 053.A.(2) Ir.min Class:.530 5 10100.%.of.
the.thermal.state
85.%
Earth fault Activated Activated 05.Ir.min 03.Ir.min 011.s 01.s 05.Ir.min 03.Ir.min
Phase imbalance Activated Activated 1030.% 10.% 00.s 5.s 1030.% 10.%
Torque limitation Deactivated Deactivated 18.Ir .Ir 130.s 5.s 18.Ir .Ir
No-load running Deactivated Deactivated 031.Ir 05.Ir 100.s 10.s 031.Ir 05.Ir
Long starting time Deactivated Deactivated 18.Ir Ir 100.s 10.s 18.Ir Ir
Confguration of additional functions on multifunction control units LUCM
Factory setting Setting range
Reset Manual Manual,.automatic.or.remote
Time before reset 10.s 11000.s
Type of load 3-phase.motor 3-phase.motor,.single-phase.motor
Self-cooled Self-cooled,.force.cooled
Language English English,.French,.German,.Italian,.Spanish
Display Average.current Average.current,.thermal.state.of.motor,.current.in.phase.1./../.3,.earth.leakage.current,.phase.imbalance,.cause.of.
last.5.faults
(1) This function cannot be deactivated.
(2) The setting range depends on the rating of the control unit used.
...
Characteristics
References:
pages.1/63.and.1/64
Dimensions:.
Schemes:.
pages.1/114.to.1/11
References:
pages.1/63.and.1/64
Dimensions:.
Schemes:.
pages.1/114.to.1/11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/10
1
Limiter-disconnector,.current.limiter,.thermal.overload.
alarm.function.module.and.thermal.overload.fault.
signalling.modules....
Characteristics of limiter-disconnector LUA LB1
Rated insulation voltage.(Ui)
conforming.to.standard.IEC/EN.60947-1
V 690
Conventional thermal current (Ith)
A 3
Operating threshold I.rms kA 50
Breaking capacity V 440. . . 690
kA 130. . . 70
Mounting Directly.on.the.upstream.terminals.of.the.starter-controller
Cabling
Solid cable 1.conductor mm
2
1510
.conductors mm
2
156
Flexible cable without cable end 1.conductor mm
2
110
.conductors mm
2
16
Flexible cable with cable end 1.conductor mm
2
16
.conductors mm
2
16
Screwdriver Phillips n2 or fat screwdriver 6 mm
Tightening torque Nm 195
Characteristics of current limiter LA9 LB920
Rated insulation voltage.(Ui)
V 690
A 63
Operating threshold I.rms A 1000
Breaking capacity V 440. . . 690
kA 100. . . 35
Mounting Separate
Cabling
Solid cable 1.conductor mm
2
155
.conductors mm
2
1510
Flexible cable without cable end 1.conductor mm
2
155
.conductors mm
2
510
Flexible cable with cable end 1.conductor mm
2
1516
.conductors mm
2
154
Screwdriver Phillips n2 or fat screwdriver 6 mm
Tightening torque Nm
Characteristics of thermal overload alarm function modules LUF W10
Activation threshold Fixed.at.88%.of.the.thermal.tripping.state
Hysteresis between activation and switching off 5.%
Display By.LED.on.front.panel
Supply Powered.by.the.control.unit
Discrete output characteristics Type N/O.contact.
AC-15 230 V max; 400 VA 100 000 operating cycles
DC-13 24 V; 50 W 100 000 operating cycles
Conventional thermal current (Ith) For.ambient.
temperature q <.70.C
A
Short-circuit protection Conforming.to.
IEC/EN.60947-5-1
A gG.fuse:.
Characteristics of thermal overload fault signalling and reset modules
Module type LUF DH11 LUF DA01 LUF DA10
Fault signalling By.LED.on.front.panel
External power supply V a/c.4.40
Module consumption mA 7.at.c.4.
11.at.a.40.
Discrete outputs Type 1.N/C+.1.N/O 1..N/C 1.N/O
AC-15 230 V max; 400 VA 100 000 operating cycles
DC-13 24 V; 50 W 100 000 operating cycles
Conventional thermal current (Ith) For.ambient.
temperature q <.70.C
A
Short-circuit protection Conforming.to.
IEC/EN.60947-5-1
A gG.fuse:.
Reset input Conductor.csa mm
2
0.min
Length m 500.(R.=.50.W.,.L.=.58.mH,.Cp.=.93.pF)
.
Characteristics
References:
pages.1/63.and.1/64
Dimensions:.
Schemes:.
pages.1/114.to.1/11
References:
pages.1/63.and.1/64
Dimensions:.
Schemes:.
pages.1/114.to.1/11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/103
1
Function.modules.and.communication.modules
....
Characteristics of motor load indication function module LUF V2
Analogue output 4.-.0.mA
Signal delivered Value.of.I.average/Ir.ratio.within.the.range.of.0.to..for.LUCB.and.LUCD
Value.of.I.average/Ir.ratio.within.the.range.of.0.to.3.for.LUCC
Load impedance Minimum kW
Maximum W 500
Typical W 100
Signal characteristics
with advanced control unit
Precision .6.%
Signal characteristics
with multifunction control unit
Precision .10.%
Resolution 1.%.of.Ir
Supply External c.4.V
Characteristics of AS-Interface communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51
Module type ASILUF C5 ASILUF C51
Product certifcation AS-Interface.V1.n.5901 AS-Interface.V1.n.5303
AS-Interface profle 7DF0 7A7E
Ambient air temperature C Operation.-.5+.70
Cycle time ms 5 10
Addressing 31.slaves 6.slaves
AS-Interface supply V 95315
Current consumption On.the..
AS-Interface.bus
mA Normal.operation:.5
mA Fault.condition:.30
On.4.V.supply..
for.the.outputs
mA 00
Auxiliary supply V c.4..30.%
Number of outputs .dedicated.to.starter-controller.coil.operation
Switching capacity of the solid state outputs 05.A/4.V..(outputs.protected.against.short-circuits)
Indication/diagnostics By..LEDs.on.front.panel
Characteristics of Modbus communication module LUL C03p
Module type LUL C031 LUL C033
Physical interface RS.485.multi-drop
Connections RJ45.on.front.panel
Protocol Modbus.RTU
Maximum transmission speed bit/s 19 200 (self-confguration up to this value)
Maximum return time ms 30
Addressing By.switches:.from.031
Discrete inputs Number 2 (to be assigned according to the confguration)
Supply V c 4
Input.current mA 7
Nominal.input.values Voltage V c.4..(positive.logic)
Current mA 7
Response.time Change.to.state.1 ms 10.(.30.%)
Change.to.state.0 ms 10.(.30.%)
Input.type Resistive
Solid state
outputs
Number 3,.of.which..dedicated.to.starter-controller.coil.operation
Supply V c 4
Max.current mA 500
Protection gI.fuse A 1
Switching.capacity 05.A/4.V.
Indication/diagnostics By.3.LEDs.on.front.panel
Characteristics
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/104
1
.
..
Characteristics of CANopen, Profbus DPand DeviceNet communication modules
Communication module Profbus DP
LUL C07
CANopen
LUL C08
DeviceNet
LUL C09
Services Conformity.class NA S.0.(Schneider.Electric) NA
Standard Profbus DP CIADS-301.V40.
DR.303-
IEC.606-1,..
Profle LVSG.V10.
MS.(Motor.Starter).and.
MMS.(Motor.Management.
Starter)
ODVA.(Open.DeviceNet.
Vendor.Association).
MS.(Motor.Starter)
Protocol Profbus DP CAN.0A.(B.passive) CAN.0A.(B.passive)
Address 115 017.(by.switches) 063
Structure Physical.interface 9-way.SUB-D.male 9-way.SUB-D.female Open Style connector
Binary.rate 9600.Kbits/s1.Mbits/s 10,.0,.50,.15,.50,.500.
and.1000.Kbits/s..
(by.switches)
15500.kbaud
Cables .shielded.twisted.pairs
Supply for the
discrete outputs
and control
c.4.V V 08
Current.consumption A 15.(max)
Protection.by..gl.fuse A
Ambient air temperature C Operation.-5+55
Logic inputs Number 2 (to be assigned according to the confguration)
Supply V .c 4
Input.current mA 7
Current mA 7
Response.time Change.to.state.1 ms 10.(.30%)
Change.to.state.0 ms 10.(.30%)
Discrete outputs Number 3,.of.which..dedicated.to.starter-controller.coil.operation
Max.current mA 500
Short-circuit.protection Yes
Switching.capacity 05.A./.c.4.V
Characteristics of Advantys STB communication module LUL C15
Physical interface CAN
Connections Fire.Wire
Protocol CAN.0.and.CAN.B.(passive.mode)
Transmission speed kbit/s 800
Addressing Self-addressing
Supply for the
discrete outputs
and control
c.4.V V 08
Current.consumption A 15.(max)
Protection.by.gl.fuse A
Discrete inputs Number 2 ( to be assigned according to confguration)
Supply V c 4
Input.current mA 7
Current mA 7
Response.time Change.to.state.1 ms 10.(.30.%)
Change.to.state.0 ms 10.(.30.%)
Discrete outputs Number 3,.of.which..dedicated.to.starter-controller.coil.operation
Max.current mA 500
Short-circuit.protection Yes
Switching.capacity 05.A./.c.4.V
Characteristics (continued)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/105
1
........
Connection characteristics
Module type LUF W10,
LUF DH11,
LUF DA01 and
LUF DA10
LUF V2 ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51
Inputs and 24 V
auxiliary supply
Outputs
Connectors Pitch 508 381 508 381
Flexible cable
without cable end
1.conductor mm 015 0141 015 0141
.identical.conductors mm 01 014075 01 014075
Flexible cable
with cable end
Without.
insulated..
ferrule
1.conductor mm 0515 051 0515 051
With..
insulated..
ferrule
1.conductor mm 0515 0505 0515 0505
.identical.conductors
(Use.a.double.cable.end)
mm 051 05 051 05
Solid cable
without cable end
1.conductor mm 015 0141 015 0141
Conductor size 1.conductor AWG.4.AWG.16 AWG.6.AWG.16 AWG.4.AWG.16 AWG.6.AWG.16
Tightening torque Nm 0506 0005 0506 0005
Flat screwdriver mm 35 5 35 5
Module type LUL C031,
LUL C033,
LUL C08 and
LUL C15
LUFC 00 LUL C09
Inputs and 24 V
auxiliary supply
Connection
on the bus
Connectors Pitch 381 381 381 5.(Open.Style).
DeviceNet
Flexible cable
without cable end
1.conductor mm 0141 0141 0141 05
Flexible cable
with cable end
Without.
insulated..
ferrule
1.conductor mm 051 051 051 055
With..
insulated..
ferrule
1.conductor mm 0505 0505 0505 055
.identical.conductors
(Use.a.double.cable.end)
mm 05 05 075 0515
Solid cable
without cable end
1.conductor mm 0141 0141 0141 05
Conductor size 1.conductor AWG.6.AWG.16 AWG.6.AWG.16 AWG.6.AWG.16 AWG.4.AWG.16
Tightening torque Nm 0005 0005 0005 0506
Flat screwdriver mm 5 5 5 35
Characteristics(continued)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/106
1 11
..........
Tripping curves for control units LUCA, LUCB, LUCD
Average operating times at 20 C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : 20 %
1 LUCD,.3.poles.from.cold.state,.class.0
2 LUCA,.LUCB,.3.poles.from.cold.state,.class.10
3 LUCA,.LUCB,.LUCD,.3.poles.from.hot.state.
Tripping curves for control units LUCC
1 LUCC,.single-phase,.cold.state
2 LUCC,.single-phase,.hot.state
1
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 20 30 14
1
3
2
T
i
m
e
.
(
s
)
x.the.setting.current.(Ir)
1
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 20 30 14
1
3
2
T
i
m
e
.
(
s
)
1 10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 20 30 14
0,1
1
10
100
1000
2
1
T
i
m
e
.
(
s
)
1 10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 20 30 14
0,1
1
10
100
1000
2
1
T
i
m
e
.
(
s
)
References:.
page.1/71
References:.
page.1/71
References:.
page.1/71
References:.
page.1/71
Curves
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/107
1 11
.....
Tripping curves for control units LUCM
Cold state curves
1
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10
11
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12
13 15 17 19
20 14 16 18
10000
30
T
i
m
e
.
(
s
)
Class.30
Class.5
Class.0
Class.15
Class.10
Class.5
1
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10
11
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12
13 15 17 19
20 14 16 18
10000
30
T
i
m
e
.
(
s
)
Class.30
Class.5
Class.0
Class.15
Class.10
Class.5
References:.
page.1/7
References:.
page.1/7
References:.
page.1/7
References:.
page.1/7
Curves (continued)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/108
1 11
.....
Tripping curves for control units LUCM
Hot state curves
1
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10
11
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12
13 15 17 19
20 14 16 18
10000
30
T
i
m
e
.
(
s
)
Class.30
Class.5
Class.0
Class.15
Class.10
Class.5
1
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10
11
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12
13 15 17 19
20 14 16 18
10000
30
T
i
m
e
.
(
s
)
Class.30
Class.5
Class.0
Class.15
Class.10
Class.5
References:.
page.1/7
References:.
page.1/7
References:.
page.1/7
References:.
page.1/7
Curves (continued)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/109
1 11
.........
Current limitation on short-circuit
U
e
= 460 V
1 Maximum.peak.current
2 3.A.power.base
3 1.A.power.base.
Thermal limit on short-circuit
U
e
= 460 V
1 3.A.power.base
2 1.A.power.base
0,1
0,1
1
10
100
1 0, 0,4 0,6 0,8 10 3 4 6 8 100 0 30 40 60 80
1
3
p
e
a
k
.
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
.
(
k
A
)
Prospective.Isc.(kA)
0,1
0,1
1
10
100
1 0, 0,4 0,6 0,8 10 3 4 6 8 100 0 30 40 60 80
1
3
p
e
a
k
.
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
.
(
k
A
)
0,1
1
10
100
1000
1 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 10 2 3 4 6 8 100 20 30 40 60 80
1
2
S
u
m
.
o
f
.
I
d
t
.
(
A
s
)
.
1
0
3
0,1
1
10
100
1000
1 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 10 2 3 4 6 8 100 20 30 40 60 80
1
2
S
u
m
.
o
f
.
I
d
t
.
(
A
s
)
.
1
0
3
References:.
pages.1/6.to.1/7
References:.
pages.1/6.to.1/7
References:.
pages.1/6.to.1/7
References:.
pages.1/6.to.1/7
Curves (continued)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/110
.
Use in category AC-41
....
Ue y 440 V Ue = 690 V
.... ...
....
2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 32 40
0,5
0,6
0,8
1
2
3
5
4
6
8
10
L
U
B

1
2
L
U
B

3
2
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s
.
o
f
.
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
.
c
y
c
l
e
s
Current.broken.in.A
2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 32 40
0,5
0,6
0,8
1
2
3
5
4
6
8
10
L
U
B

1
2
L
U
B

3
2
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s
.
o
f
.
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
.
c
y
c
l
e
s
Current.broken.in.A
2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 32 40
0,5
0,6
0,8
1
2
4
5
3
6
8
10
L
U
B

1
2
L
U
B

3
2
0
,
5
5
0
,
7
5
1
,
5
2
,
2
4
5
,
5
7
,
5
230 V
400 V
0
,
7
5
0
,
5
5
1
,
5
2
,
2
4 5
,
5
7
,
5
1
1
1
5
kW
1
,
5
2
,
2
5
,
5
7
,
5
1
1
1
5
440 V
kW
kW
0
,
5
5
0
,
7
5
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s
.
o
f
.
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
.
c
y
c
l
e
s
Current.broken.in.A
2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 32 40
0,5
0,6
0,8
1
2
4
5
3
6
8
10
L
U
B

1
2
L
U
B

3
2
0
,
5
5
0
,
7
5
1
,
5
2
,
2
4
5
,
5
7
,
5
230 V
400 V
0
,
7
5
0
,
5
5
1
,
5
2
,
2
4 5
,
5
7
,
5
1
1
1
5
kW
1
,
5
2
,
2
5
,
5
7
,
5
1
1
1
5
440 V
kW
kW
0
,
5
5
0
,
7
5
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s
.
o
f
.
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
.
c
y
c
l
e
s
Current.broken.in.A
2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 21 10 12 32 40
0,5
0,6
0,8
1
2
4
3
5
6
8
10
L
U
B

1
2
L
U
B

3
2
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s
.
o
f
.
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
.
c
y
c
l
e
s
Current.broken.in.A
2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 21 10 12 32 40
0,5
0,6
0,8
1
2
4
3
5
6
8
10
L
U
B

1
2
L
U
B

3
2
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s
.
o
f
.
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
.
c
y
c
l
e
s
Current.broken.in.A
References:.
pages.1/6.to.1/7
References:.
pages.1/6.to.1/7
References:.
pages.1/6.to.1/7
References:.
pages.1/6.to.1/7
Selection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1/111
.
Ue y 440 V Ue = 690 V
.... ...
....
2 1 3 5 10 20 100 30
170 80
66
60 40
50 200
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,3
0,5
0,6
0,8
1
0,01
0,02
0,04
0,03
0,05
0,06
0,08
L
U
B

1
2
L
U
B

3
2
Current.broken.in.A
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s
.
o
f
.
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
.
c
y
c
l
e
s
2 1 3 5 10 20 100 30
170 80
66
60 40
50 200
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,3
0,5
0,6
0,8
1
0,01
0,02
0,04
0,03
0,05
0,06
0,08
L
U
B

1
2
L
U
B

3
2
Current.broken.in.A
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s
.
o
f
.
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
.
c
y
c
l
e
s
2 1 3 5 10 20 100 30
126 80 54
60
40
50 200
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,3
0,5
0,6
0,8
1
0,01
0,02
0,04
0,03
0,05
0,06
0,08
L
U
B

1
2
L
U
B

3
2
Current.broken.in.A
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s
.
o
f
.
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
.
c
y
c
l
e
s
2 1 3 5 10 20 100 30
126 80 54
60
40
50 200
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,3
0,5
0,6
0,8
1
0,01
0,02
0,04
0,03
0,05
0,06
0,08
L
U
B

1
2
L
U
B

3
2
Current.broken.in.A
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s
.
o
f
.
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
.
c
y
c
l
e
s
References:.
pages.1/6.to.1/7
References:.
pages.1/6.to.1/7
References:.
pages.1/6.to.1/7
References:.
pages.1/6.to.1/7
Selection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1 11
1/11
Dimensions
Dimensions
Starter-controllers
LUB: non-reversing LU2B: reversing
Rail.mounting Screw fxing Rail.mounting Screw fxing
126
a (1)
1
5
4
X
1
X
1
45
X2
X2
16
135 (1)
7
3
30 4.(2)
1
6
3
1
6
7
4
45
1
0
/
1
3
3
3
7
9 4.(2)
a
With Modbus module 135
With Advantys STB, CANopen, Profbus DP
or DeviceNet modules
147
Minimum.electrical.clearance:.
X1.=.50.mm.for.Ue.=.440.V.and.70.mm.for.Ue.=.500.and.690.V,.X.=.0
Reverser block for mounting separately from power base
Rail.mounting Screw fxing
45 113
1
1
5
113 36
1
0
4
4
Sets of busbars and plug-in power sockets
GV2 G445 and GV2 G454 GV2 Gppp with terminal block GV1 G09 GV2 G245 and G254
9
5
l
a
1
8
p
GV1.G09
3
8
l
I
GV2 G245.(.x.45) 89
GV2 G254.(.x.54) 98
I P GV2 G554 GV2 G345 and G354
GV2 G445.(.x.45) 179 45
60
l
GV2 G454.(.x.54) 06 54
a
Number of tap-offs 5 6 7 8 I
GV2 G445.(.x.45) 4 69 314 359 GV.G345.(.x.45) 134
GV2 G454.(.x.54) 60 314 368 4 GV.G354.(.x.54) 152
AK5 JB144 AK5 PC13, PC33, PC33L
79.
8
.
3
0
.
.
4
5
8
1
438
45
4
5
,
5
35,5 38
(1) Depth with communication module.
(2) Retractablefxinglugs.
1 11
1/113
mounting
Dimensions, mounting
Limiter-disconnector LUA LB1
Disconnector LUA LB10
Current limiter LA9 LB920
a.(1) 45
9
3
1
5
4
6
53,5
1
4
6
2M4
1
0
3
1
1
5
51
a
With Advantys STB,
CANopen, Profbus DP or
DeviceNet modules
147
Door interlock mechanisms
LU9 APN21, LU9 APN22, LU9 APN24 Door cut-out
79,5
2
3
7
,
4
0,5...4
43 a
6
0
6
= =
48
= =
=
=
4
8
43,5 (1)
16
1
6
3,5
22
a
Mini Maxi
LU9 APNpp 191 300
LU9 APNpp..
+ GV APK12
300 483
Addressing consoles
XZ MC11 ASI TERV2
30 80
0
9
1
9
5
84 35
Splitter boxes
LU9 GC3 (Modbus) LU9 G02 and LU9 G03 LU9 GC7 (Profbus DP)
Rail.mounting Screw fxing Rail.mounting Screw fxing
128 45
1
5
4
18 30
4 (2)
1
6
3
1
6
7
45 65
1
7
0
65
1
6
3
1
6
7
30
4 (2)
(1) Depth with communication module.
(2) Retractablefxinglugs.
(1) For IP65 only.
1 11
1/114
Schemes
Starter-controllers, 12 or 32 A
With standard, advanced or multifunction control unit
Non-reversing Non-reversing
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
/
N
O
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
/
N
C
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
Control.Unit
8
4
8
2
8
1
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
Control.Unit
Pre-wired
Reverser
With control unit LUCC or LUCM
Connection of a single-phase motor
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
/
N
O
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
/
N
C
2 4 6
A
1
A
2
1 3 5
L
1
L
2
M
U V
Control.Unit
Control terminal block
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
LU2B Reverser.Motor.Controller
Reverser blocks
LU2M LU6M
Control terminal blocks
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
A
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
B
3
A
1
S
1
S
2
S
3
B
1
A
2
8
4
8
2
8
1
S
1
S
2
S
3
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
LU6M Reverser.Block
With.pre-wired.connector.LU9.MRC
S
1
S
2
S
3
LU6M
LU9M RC
Reverser.Block
Pre-wired.coil
Control terminal block Basic.scheme
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
LU2M Reverser.Motor.Controller
LU6M
A
1
A
3
A
2
S
1
2
2
A
2
A
1
2
1
1
4
1
3
S
3
B
1
B
3
S
2
(1) S1 Start next stage
S Electrical interlocking
S3 Maintaining contact
B1 Maintain forward running
B3 Maintain reverse running
A1 Pulse forward running
A Common
A3 Pulse reverse running
(1) Electronically operated
bistable electromagnet.
F
o
r
w
a
r
d
R
e
v
e
r
s
e
F
o
r
w
a
r
d
R
e
v
e
r
s
e
Add-on contact blocks Add-on contact modules
LUA1 C11 LUA1 C20 LUA8 E20 LUFN 20 LUFN 11 LUFN 02
17/NO 18/NO
95/NC 96/NC
17/NO 18/NO
97/NO 98/NO
O I 5
7
5
8
6
7
6
8
33/NO 34/NO
43/NO 44/NO 31/NC 32/NC
43/NO 44/NO 31/NC 32/NC
41/NC 42/NC
Reverser
1 11
1/115
Control units
Standard control units LUCA Advanced control units LUCB, LUCC, LUCD
Basic.scheme Basic.schemehd
A
1
A
2
LUCA
1 2 3 4
tr
5 6
Supply.and.
Detection.of.
start.
sequence
Thermal.
overload.
memory
Control.
ASIC
Power.Base..
Interface Sensor.
L1
Sensor.
L
Sensor.
L3
1.and.. Trips
3.and.4. Electromagnet
5. ...Power.base.rating
6. ...N/C
A
1
7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
2
LUCp
tr
Supply.and.
Detection.of.
start.
sequence
Therm.overload.
memory
Control.
ASIC
Power.Base..
Interface Sensor.
L1
Sensor.
L
Sensor.
L3
Test
Interface.module
1.and...Trips
3.and.4..Electromagnet
5. Power.base.rating
6. N/C
7. Earth
8. Thermal.status/Set
9. Reset.mode/Reset
10. (lm/Ir)
11. Vc.
1. Vc1
Multifunction control units LUCM
Control.terminal.block
6 5 4
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
+

5

V
7 5 4
LUCM
0

V
8
Multifunction.Control.Unit
4.V.Aux
Basic.scheme
A
1
7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
2
LUCM
D(B)
D(A)
+ 5 V
0 V
ESC ENT
RS485
4
5
7
8
RJ45
Supply.and.
detection.of.
start.
sequence
Thermal.
overload.
memory
Control.
ASIC
Power.Base..
Interface Sensor.
L1
Sensor.
L
Sensor.
L3
Supply
Display.and.
Parameter.Entry
Interface.module
4.V.Aux
1.and.. Trips
3.and.4. Electromagnet
5. Power.base.rating
6. . N/C
7. . Earth
8. . N/C
9. . Earth
10. (lm/Ir)
11. Rx/Tx.
1. Vc1
Schemes (continued)
1 11
1/116
Function modules
Alarm
LUF W10
LUF V2
4-20 mA output
0
7
0
8
LUFW 10 Alarms.Module
4...20 mA
NC
LUFV 2
Analogue.output.Module
4.V.Aux 4.V.Aux
Basic.scheme Basic.scheme
0
7
0
8
LUFW 10
Input.interface
Advanced.Control.Unit.or.Multifunction.Control.Unit
LED Supply
Relais.bistable
LUFV 2
4...20 mA
Input.interface
Supply
P.-.Analogue/Digital.
converter
Isolation
Digital/Analogue.
converter
Voltage/Current.converter
100.W.<.load.<.500.W...c.30.V.max.and.40.mA.min
Communication modules
Communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51
Without pre-wired coil connection With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C
C
o
m
O
A
1
O
A
3
AS-i
AS-Interface.Module ASILUF.C5.or.ASILUF.C51
AS-i
LU9B N11C
Pre-wired.coil
With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
AS-i
LU9M RC
Pre-wired.coil
Basic.scheme
ASILUF C5
C
o
m
O
A
1
O
A
3 AS-i
A2SI
ASILUF C51
Output.interface
DEL
Ready-Fault-Pole
or
Schemes (continued)
1 11
1/117
Schemes (continued)
Communication modules (continued)
Modbus communication module LUL C031 Modbus communication module LUL C033
Without pre-wired coil connection Without pre-wired coil connection
C
o
m
O
A
1
C
o
m
L
O
1
O
A
3
6 5 4
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
0

V
8 5 4
LUL C031
Modbus.Module
4.V.Aux
C
o
m
O
A
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
L
O
1
O
A
3
6 5 4
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
0

V
8 5 4
LUL C033
Modbus.Module
4.V.
Aux
4.V
c .COM
With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C
C
o
m
L
O
1
6 5 4
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
0

V
8 5 4
LUL C031
LU9B N11C
Modbus.Module
4.V.Aux
Pre-wired.coil
L
I
1
L
I
2
L
O
1
6 5 4
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
0

V
8 5 4
LUL C033
LU9B N11C
Modbus.Module
Pre-wired.coil
4.V.
Aux .COM
4.V.
c
With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
C
o
m
L
O
1
5 4
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
0

V
8 5 4
LUL C031
LU9M RC
Modbus.Module
Pre-wired.coil
4.V.Aux
L
I
1
L
I
2
L
O
1
5 4
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
0

V
8 5 4
LUL C033
LU9M RC
Modbus.Module
Pre-wired.coil
4.V.
Aux .COM
4.V.
c
LUL C031
C
o
m
C
o
m
O
A
1
O
A
3
L
O
1
D(B)
D(A)
0 V
RS485
AL1
AL2
4
5
8
Modbus
RJ45
24 V
Input.interface
LED Address
Output.interface
Supply
Ready-Fault-Pole
4.V.Aux
Modbus
RJ45
C
o
m
L
I
1
L
I
2
O
A
1
O
A
3
L
O
1
D(B)
D(A)
0 V
RS485
AL1
AL2
4
5
8
x 6
LUL C033
Control.unit.interface
LED Address
I/O.interface
Supply
Ready-Fault-Pole
COM
Output.interface
4.V.
Aux
4.V.
c
Controller
Controller.
interface
1 11
1/118
Profbus DP communication module LUL C07 CANopen communication module LUL C08
C
o
m
O
A
1
L
O
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
O
A
3
LUL C07
Bus
Profbus DP Module
C
o
m
O
A
1
L
O
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
O
A
3
LUL C08
Bus
Canopen.Module
With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11LC With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11LC
LU9B N11L
L
O
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
LUL C07
Bus
Profbus DP Module
Pre-wired.coil
LU9B N11L
L
O
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
LUL C08
Bus
Canopen.Module
Pre-wired.coil
LU9M RL
L
O
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
LUL C07
Bus
Profbus DP Module
Pre-wired.coil
LU9M RL
L
O
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
LUL C08
Bus
Canopen.Module
Pre-wired.coil
LUL C07
C
o
m
L
I
2
L
I
1
O
A
1
O
A
3
L
O
1
AL1
AL2
x 6
LED Address
I/O.interface
Supply
Ready-Fault-Pole
Advanced.Control.Unit.or.Multifunction.Control.Unit Controller
Controller.
interface
LUL C08
C
o
m
L
I
2
L
I
1
O
A
1
O
A
3
L
O
1
AL1
AL2
x 6
LED Address
I/O.interface
Supply
Ready-Fault-Pole
Controller.
interface
DeviceNet communication module LUL C09
Without pre-wired coil connection Basic.scheme
C
o
m
O
A
1
L
O
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
O
A
3
LUL C09
Bus
DeviceNet.Module
LUL C09
C
o
m
L
I
2
L
I
1
O
A
1
O
A
3
L
O
1
AL1
AL2
x 6
2
4

V

c
LED Address
I/O.interface
Supply
Ready-Fault-Pole
Controller.
interface
With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11LC
LU9B N11L
L
O
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
LUL C09
Bus
DeviceNet.Module
Pre-wired.coil
With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL
LU9M RL
L
O
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
LUL C09
Bus
DeviceNet.Module
Pre-wired.coil
Schemes (continued)
1 11
1/119
Schemes (continued)
Advantys STB communication module LUL C15 Parallel wiring modules
C
o
m
O
A
1
L
O
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
O
A
3
LUL C15
Bus
In Out
Advantys.STB.Module
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
C
o
m
O
A
1
O
A
3
LUF C00 Parallel.bus.Module
Link.//.RJ45
With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11LC With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11LC
L
O
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
LUL C15
Bus
In Out
LU9B N11L
Advantys.STB.Module
Pre-wired.coil 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LUF C00
LU9B N11C
Parallel.bus.Module
Pre-wired.coil
Link.//.RJ45
LU9M RL
L
O
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
LUL C15
Bus
In Out
Advantys.STB.Module
Pre-wired.coil 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LUF C00
LU9M RC
Parallel.bus.Module
Pre-wired.coil
Link.//.RJ45
LUL C15
C
o
m
L
I
2
L
I
1
O
A
1
O
A
3
L
O
1
AL1
AL2
x 6
OUT
IN
LED Address
I/O.interface
Supply
Ready-Fault-Pole
Controller.
interface
C
o
m
O
A
3
O
A
1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LUF C00
RJ45
Reay-.
Fault-.
Pole
1. Forward.running
. Reverse.running
3. Output.common
4. Selector.in.position
5. Pole.state
6. Reserved
7. Fault
8. Input.common
Profbus DP power supply module LU9 GC7
OUT IN
LU9 GC7
4.V.Aux
Filter
1 11
1/10
Schemes (continued)
Wiring hub and splitter boxes
Modbus hub LU9GC3 Parallel wiring splitter box LU9 G02 Parallel wiring splitter box LU9 G03
LU9 GC3
0

V
0

V
D

(
A
)

+
D

(
B
)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RJ45
X1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RJ45
X9
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
X10
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
S
h
i
e
l
d
i
n
g
S
h
i
e
l
d
i
n
g
S
h
i
e
l
d
i
n
g
N/C
N/C
N/C
D.(B).
D.(A).+
N/C
4.V.
(1)
0.V
N/C
.N/C
.N/C
D.(B).
D.(A).+
N/C
N/C
.0.V
LU9 G02
C
o
m
C
o
m
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
(2)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(3)
RJ45
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
X10
X9
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RJ45
Fault.X1
Fault.X
Fault.X3
Fault.X4
Fault.X5
Fault.X6
Fault.X7
Fault.X8
Pole.state.X1
Pole.state.X
Pole.state.X3
Pole.state.X4
Pole.state.X5
Pole.state.X6
Pole.state.X7
Pole.state.X8.
+.4.V.Aux
Com
+.4.V.Aux
Com
Forward.running.X1
Forward.running.X
Forward.running.X3
Forward.running.X4
Forward.running.X5
Forward.running.X6
Forward.running.X7
Forward.running.X8
Reverse.running.X1
Reverse.running.X
Reverse.running.X3
Reverse.running.X4
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
+..c.4.V
Com
+..c.4.V
Com
Forward.running
Reverse.running
Output.common
N/C
Pole.state
N/C
Fault
+4.V.Aux
Forward.running
N/C
Commun.des.sorties
N/C
Pole.state
N/C
Fault
+.4.V.Aux
4.V.Aux
I
n
p
u
t
s
O
u
t
p
u
t
s
LU9 G03
C
o
m
C
o
m
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
(2)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(3)
RJ45
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
X10
X9
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RJ45
Fault.X1
Fault.X
Fault.X3
Fault.X4
Fault.X5
Fault.X6
Fault.X7
Fault.X8
Pole.state.X1
Pole.state.X
Pole.state.X3
Pole.state.X4
Pole.state.X5
Pole.state.X6
Pole.state.X7
Pole.state.X8.
+.4.V.Aux
Com
+.4.V.Aux
Com
Forward.running.X1
Forward.running.X
Forward.running.X3
Forward.running.X4
Forward.running.X5
Forward.running.X6
Forward.running.X7
Forward.running.X8
Reverse.running.X1
Reverse.running.X
Reverse.running.X3
Reverse.running.X4
Reverse.running.X5
Reverse.running.X6.
Reverse.running.X7.
Reverse.running.X8
+..c.4.V
Com
+..c.4.V
Com
Forward.running
Reverse.running
Output.common.
N/C
Pole.state
+.4.V
Fault
+.4.V.Aux
4.V.Aux
I
n
p
u
t
s
O
u
t
p
u
t
s
(1) Not connected on connectors X1 to X8. Only present on RJ45 IN and OUT connectors.
(2) 20-way HE10 input connector.
(3) 20-way HE10 output connector.
(4) Wire colours and corresponding HE10 connector pin numbers.
Gateways
LUF P1 LUF P7 LUF P9
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LUF P1
X2 Fip I/O
5 4
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
0

V
8 5 4 9
X1
Fip.I/O.-.Modbus.Gateway
4.V.Aux
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LUF P7
X2 Profibus
5 4
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
0

v
8 5 4 9
X1
Profbus - Modbus Gateway
4.V.Aux
5 4 3 2 1
LUF P9
X2 DeviceNet
5 4
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
0

V
8 5 4
X1
DeviceNet.-.Modbus.Gateway
4.V.Aux
Colours of
TSX CDPppp
connection
cable wires
(4)
1...White
2...Brown
3...Green
4...Yellow
5...Grey
6...Pink
7...Blue
8...Red
9...Black
10.Violet
11.Grey-pink
12.Red-blue
13.White-green
14.Brown-green
15.White-yellow
16.Yellow-brown
17.White-grey
18.Grey-brown
19.White-pink
20.Pink-brown
1 11
1/11
Schemes (continued)
Data profle under AS-Interface
Control unit present in the product Standard
LUCA
Advanced
LUCB,.
CC,.CD
Multifunction
LUCM
Status D0 Ready.(available)
D1 Poles.closed.(running)
Commands D0 Start.-.forward.running
D1 Start.-.reverse.running
Main registers accessible with Modbus, CANopen, Advantys STB, Profbus DP and DeviceNet communication modules.
For.other.registers.and.for.further.information,.please.consult.the.User's.Manual.Communication variables.on.the.website.wwwschneider-electriccom
Control unit present in the product Standard Advanced Multifunction
Marking Register.0Register.99 WordsBits Commercial.reference,.serial.number,.software.version
Log Register.100Register.450 WordsBits Fault.log,.Operating.log,.Log.of.last.5.trips
Status Register.451Register.464 WordsBits Alarm.signalling.(bits),.Fault.signalling.(bits)
Values Register.465Register.473 Words Irms.phase.1,.phase.,.phase.3.Motor.load,.thermal.status.
Earth.leakage.current..
Phase.imbalance.and.phase.failure
Register.474Register.599 WordsBits Reserved
Confguration Register.600Register.699 WordsBits Protection.and.alarm.thresholds,.fallback.mode.and.reset.
mode
Commands Register.700Register.714 WordsBits Commands
Status and
values
Register.45 Bit.0 Short-circuit.fault
Bit.1 Overcurrent.fault
Bit. Thermal.overload.fault
Register.455 Bit.0 Ready.(available)
Bit.1 Poles.closed
Bit. Fault
Bit.3 Alarms
Bit.4 Tripped.("TRIP".position)
Bit.5 Fault.acknowledgement.allowed
Bit.6 Reserved
Bit.7 Motor.running
Bit.8 Motor.current.%.(bit.0)
Bit.10 Motor.current.%.(bit.)
Bit.14 Reserved
Bit.15 Motor.starting
Register.461 Bit.3 Thermal.overload.alarm
Register.465 Word Thermal.status.value
Register.466 Word Motor.load.value.(Im/Ir)
Confguration Register.60 Bit.0 Manual.reset.on.thermal.overload.fault
Bit.1 Remote.reset.on.thermal.overload.fault
Bit. Automatic.reset.on.thermal.overload.fault
Register.68 Value.0 Fallback.mode.validation
Value.1 Outputs.OA1.and.OA3.unchanged
Value. Outputs.OA1.and.OA3.forced.to.0
Value.3 Outputs.OA1.and.OA3.unchanged,.
signalling.existence.of.communication.failure
Value.4 Outputs.OA1.forced.to.1.and.OA3.unchanged
Value.5 Outputs.OA3.forced.to.1.and.OA1.unchanged
Commands Register.700 Bit.0 LO1.output.command
Register.704 Bit.0 OA1.output.command
Bit.1 OA3.output.command
Bit. Reserved
Bit.3 Fault.acknowledgement
Bit.4 Reserved
Bit.5 Trip.test
Bit.615 Reserved
Data accessible
1/1
11
Non-reversing
........
Non-reversing starter-controllers LUB
2-wire control via 2-position switch 3-wire control, pulsed start with
maintaining contact
Connection of a motor load indicator
module LUFV 2
.... .... ....
Connection of thermal overload fault signalling modules LUF DA10
Automatic reset Remote reset
Control via Modbus communication module
LUL C031
Control via Modbus communication module LUL C033
.... ....
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
M
3 a
U
1
V
1
W
1
Control.Unit
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
M
3 a
U
1
V
1
W
1
Control.Unit
A2 A1
Start
Stop
A2 A1
Start
Stop
A2 A1
13 14
Reversed
A2 A1
13 14
Reversed
4...20 mA
NC
LUFV 2 Analogue.output.Module
4.V.Aux 4.V.Aux 4...20 mA
NC
LUFV 2 Analogue.output.Module
4.V.Aux 4.V.Aux
Z
1
Z
2
0
7
0
8
LUF DA10
A1
24230 V
A2
X
1
X
2
QF1
V1
S1
Automatic.or.remote.reset
Z
1
Z
2
0
7
0
8
LUF DA10
A1
24230 V
A2
X
1
X
2
QF1
V1
S1
Z
1
Z
2
0
7
0
8
LUF DA10
A1
24230 V
A2
X
1
X
2
QF1 S2
V1
S1
Z
1
Z
2
0
7
0
8
LUF DA10
A1
24230 V
A2
X
1
X
2
QF1 S2
V1
S1
A1 A2
C
o
m
O
A
1
C
o
m
L
O
1
O
A
3
6 5 4
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
G
N
D
8 5 4
Modbus
LUL C031 Modbus.Module
4.V.Aux
A1 A2
C
o
m
O
A
1
C
o
m
L
O
1
O
A
3
6 5 4
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
G
N
D
8 5 4
Modbus
LUL C031 Modbus.Module
4.V.Aux
A1 A2
C
o
m
O
A
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
L
O
1
O
A
3
6 5 4
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
G
N
D
8 5 4
Modbus
LUL C033
S2 S1
Modbus.Module
4.V
c
4.V
Aux COM
A1 A2
C
o
m
O
A
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
L
O
1
O
A
3
6 5 4
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
G
N
D
8 5 4
Modbus
LUL C033
S2 S1
Modbus.Module
4.V
c
4.V
Aux COM
Basic schemes
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/13
11
Non-reversing
....
Non-reversing starter controllers LUB (continued)
Control by communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51
With local control
With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C Without pre-wired coil connection
With local control
Without pre-wired coil connection
With multifunction control unit LUCM
A1 A2
C
o
m
O
A
1
O
A
3
AS-Interface
ASILUF C5 AS-Interface.Module
AS-Interface.line
or.ASILUF.C51
A1 A2
C
o
m
O
A
1
O
A
3
AS-Interface
AS-Interface.line
or.ASILUF.C51
A1 A2
C
o
m
O
A
1
O
A
3
AS-Interface
ASILUF C5
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
N
o
r
m
a
l
AS-Interface.Module
AS-Interface.line
or.ASILUF.C51
A1 A2
C
o
m
O
A
1
O
A
3
AS-Interface
ASILUF C5
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
N
o
r
m
a
l
AS-Interface.Module
AS-Interface.line
or.ASILUF.C51
AS-Interface
LU9B.N11C.
Pre.wired.coil
AS-Interface.line
or.ASILUF.C51
AS-Interface
LU9B.N11C.
Pre.wired.coil
AS-Interface.line
or.ASILUF.C51
A1 A2
C
o
m
O
A
1
O
A
3
AS-Interface
ASILUF C5
AS-i.Module
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
N
o
r
m
a
l
.
AS-Interface.line
or.ASILUF.C51
A1 A2
C
o
m
O
A
1
O
A
3
AS-Interface
ASILUF C5
AS-i.Module
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
N
o
r
m
a
l
.
AS-Interface.line
or.ASILUF.C51
A1 A
C
o
m
O
A
1
O
A
3
AS-Interface
6 5 4
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
G
N
D
8 5 4
RJ45
Bus.Modbus
RS.485
ASILUF.C5
LUCM Multifunction.Control.Unit
4.V.Aux
AS-Interface.Module
AS-Interface.line
or.ASILUF.C51
A1 A
C
o
m
O
A
1
O
A
3
AS-Interface
6 5 4
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
G
N
D
8 5 4
RJ45
Bus.Modbus
RS.485
ASILUF.C5
LUCM Multifunction.Control.Unit
4.V.Aux
AS-Interface.Module
AS-Interface.line
or.ASILUF.C51
Basic schemes (continued)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/14
11
Reversing
....
Reversing starter-controllers LUB
2-wire control
via 3-position switch
3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact
Control by communication modules ASILUF C5
and ASILUF C51
3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact and limit switches
With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
With multifunction control unit LUCM
Control by communication modules ASILUF C5
and ASILUF C51
Without pre-wired coil connection
With running direction pilot lights and limit switches
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
U
1
W
1
V
1
M
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
Control.Unit
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
U
1
W
1
V
1
M
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
Control.Unit
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
Stop
forward.running
reverse.running
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
Stop
forward.running
reverse.running
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
LU2B
Stop..
forward.running.
and.reverse.
running
Stop..
forward.running
Stop..
reverse.running
Start.
forward.running
Start..
reverse.running
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
LU2B
Stop..
forward.running.
and.reverse.
running
Stop..
forward.running
Stop..
reverse.running
Start.
forward.running
Start..
reverse.running
AS-Interface
6 5 4
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
G
N
D
8 5 4
Bus.Modbus
RS.485
LUCM
ASILUF.C5
4.V.Aux
AS-Interface.Module
LU9M.RC.
Pre.wired.coil
AS-Interface.line
or..ASILUF.C51
AS-Interface
6 5 4
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
G
N
D
8 5 4
Bus.Modbus
RS.485
LUCM
ASILUF.C5
4.V.Aux
AS-Interface.Module
LU9M.RC.
Pre.wired.coil
AS-Interface.line
or..ASILUF.C51
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
LU2B
Stop.forward.
running.
and.reverse.
running
Stop..
forward.running
Stop..
reverse.running
Start..
forward.running
Start..
reverse.running
Limit.switch.
forward.running
Limit.switch.
reverse.running
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
LU2B
Stop.forward.
running.
and.reverse.
running
Stop..
forward.running
Stop..
reverse.running
Start..
forward.running
Start..
reverse.running
Limit.switch.
forward.running
Limit.switch.
reverse.running
53 54 81 84
82
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
C
o
m
O
A
1
O
A
3
AS-Interface
LU2B ASILUF C5/C51 AS-Interface.Module
Reverser.
Motor.
Controller
AS-Interface.line
53 54 81 84
82
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
C
o
m
O
A
1
O
A
3
AS-Interface
LU2B ASILUF C5/C51 AS-Interface.Module
Reverser.
Motor.
Controller
AS-Interface.line
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/15
11
Reversing
.........
Reversing starter controllers LU2B (continued)
Control via Modbus communication module LUL C031 Control via Modbus communication module LUL C033
Without pre-wired coil connection With local control Without pre-wired coil connection With local control
Reversing starter-controllers LUB + LU6M
3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact 2-wire control via 3-position switch
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
C
o
m
O
A
1
C
o
m
L
O
1
O
A
3
6 5 4
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
G
N
D
8 5 4
Modbus
LU2B LUL C031 Modbus.Module
4.V.Aux
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
N
o
r
m
a
l
Start.reverse.
running
Start.forward.
running
Reverser.
Motor.
Controller
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
C
o
m
O
A
1
C
o
m
L
O
1
O
A
3
6 5 4
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
G
N
D
8 5 4
Modbus
LU2B LUL C031 Modbus.Module
4.V.Aux
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
N
o
r
m
a
l
Start.reverse.
running
Start.forward.
running
Reverser.
Motor.
Controller
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
C
o
m
O
A
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
L
O
1
O
A
3
6 5 4
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
G
N
D
8 5 4
Modbus
LU2B LULC 033 Modbus.Module
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
N
o
r
m
a
l
Start..
reverse.running
Start..
forward.running
Reverser.
Motor.
Controller
4.V
c
4.V
Aux COM
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
C
o
m
O
A
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
L
O
1
O
A
3
6 5 4
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
G
N
D
8 5 4
Modbus
LU2B LULC 033 Modbus.Module
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
N
o
r
m
a
l
Start..
reverse.running
Start..
forward.running
Reverser.
Motor.
Controller
4.V
c
4.V
Aux COM
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
U
1
W
1
V
1
M
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
Control.Unit
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
U
1
W
1
V
1
M
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
Control.Unit
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
21 22
S
1
S
2
S
3
13 14
A2 A1
LU6M
S5 S6 S8
S7 S9
Reverser.Block
Stop..
forward.running.
and.reverse.
running
Stop.
forward.running
Stop..
reverse.running
Start.
forward.running
Start..
reverse.running
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
21 22
S
1
S
2
S
3
13 14
A2 A1
LU6M
S5 S6 S8
S7 S9
Reverser.Block
Stop..
forward.running.
and.reverse.
running
Stop.
forward.running
Stop..
reverse.running
Start.
forward.running
Start..
reverse.running
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
21 22
S
1
S
2
S
3
A2 A1
LU6M Reverser.Block
Stop
forward.running
reverse.running
A
3
B
3
A
1
B
1
A
2
21 22
S
1
S
2
S
3
A2 A1
LU6M Reverser.Block
Stop
forward.running
reverse.running
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/16
1
Soft starters
for asynchronous motors
Altistart.U01.and.TeSys.U
..
Presentation..
The.Altistart.U01.is.a.soft.start/soft.stop.unit.for.asynchronous.motors.It.is.designed.
primarily.for.combinations.with.TeSys U.controller-starters.
When.combined.with.a.TeSys U.1.controller.by.means.of.a.connector.2,.the.
Altistart.U01.3 is a power option which provides the Soft start/soft stop function.
The.result.is.a.unique,.innovative.motor.starter
Using.the.Altistart.U01.starter.enhances.the.starting.performance.of.asynchronous.
motors.by.allowing.them.to.start.gradually,.smoothly.and.in.a.controlled.manner.It.
prevents.mechanical.shocks,.which.lead.to.wear.and.tear,.and.limits.the.amount.of.
maintenance.work.and.production.downtime
The.Altistart.U01.limits.the.starting.torque.and.current.peaks.on.starting,.on.machines.
which.do.not.require.a.high.starting.torque
The.Altistart.U01.is.designed.for.the.following.simple.applications:
b Conveyors
b Conveyor.belts
b Pumps
b Fans
b Compressors
b Automatic.doors.and.gates
b Small.cranes
b Belt-driven.machines,.etc
The.Altistart.U01.is.compact.and.easy.to.install.It.complies.with.standards.IEC/EN.
60947-4-2, carries UL, CSA, C-Tick, CCC certifcations and e marking
b ATSU 01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units
v Control.two.phases.of.the.motor.power.supply.to.limit.the.starting.current.and.for.
deceleration
v Internal.bypass.relay
v Motor.power.ratings.ranging.from.075.kW.to.15.kW
v Motor.supply.voltages.ranging.from.00.V.to.480.V,.50/60.Hz
An.external.power.supply.is.required.for.controlling.the.starter
.
Description
b Altistart.U01.soft.start/soft.stop.units.are.equipped.with:
v A.potentiometer.for.setting.the.starting.time.6
v A.potentiometer.for.setting.the.deceleration.time.8
v A.potentiometer.for.adjusting.the.start.voltage.threshold.according.to.the.motor.
load.7
v 1.green.LED.4.to.indicate.that.the.unit.is.switched.on
v 1.yellow.LED.5..to indicate that the motor is powered at nominal voltage, if it
is connected to the starter
v A.connector.9:
-..logic.inputs.for.Run/Stop.commands
-.1.logic.input.for.the.BOOST.function
-.1.logic.output.to.indicate.the.end.of.starting
-.1.relay.output.to.indicate.the.starter.has.a.power.supply.fault.or.the.motor.has.
reached.a.standstill.at.the.end.of.the.deceleration.stage.
.
5
3
6
5
6
6
1
2
3
9
5
3
6
5
6
6
1
2
3
9
Characteristics:
pages.1/18.and.1/19
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
Schemes:
pages.1/13.to.1/135
Characteristics:
pages.1/18.and.1/19
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
Schemes:
pages.1/13.to.1/135
Characteristics:
pages.1/18.and.1/19
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
Schemes:
pages.1/13.to.1/135
Characteristics:
pages.1/18.and.1/19
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
Schemes:
pages.1/13.to.1/135
4
5
6
7
8
Presentation1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/17
1
Soft starters
..
Description of a TeSys U controller-starter
Please consult the TeSys U starters - open version catalogue.
. .
ATSU 01N2pppLT soft start unit functions
b -wire.control
The.run.and.stop.commands.are.controlled.by.a.single.logic.input.State.1.of.logic.
input.LI.controls.starting.and.state.0.controls.stopping......
b 3-wire.control
The.run.and.stop.commands.are.controlled.by..different.logic.inputs.
Stopping.is.achieved.when.logic.input.LI1.opens.(state.0).
The.pulse.on.input.LI.is.stored.until.input.LI1.opens...
b Starting.time
Controlling.the.starting.time.means.that.the.time.of.the.voltage.ramp.applied.to.the.
motor.can.be.adjusted.to.obtain.a.gradual.starting.time,.dependent.on.the.motor.load
b Voltage.boost.function.via.logic.input
Activating.the.BOOST.logic.input.enables.the.function.for.supplying.a.starting.
overtorque.capable.of.overcoming.any.mechanical.friction
When.the.input.is.at.state.1,.the.function.is.active.(input.connected.to.the.+.4.V).and.
the starter applies a fxed voltage to the motor for a limited time before starting.
b End.of.starting
v Application.function.for.logic.output.LO1
ATSU.01NppLT.soft.start/soft.stop.units.are.equipped.with.an.open.collector.logic.
output.LO,.which.indicates.the.end.of.starting.when.the.motor.has.reached.nominal.
speed
.
+ 24 V LI1 LI2
Wiring diagram for 2-wire control
Altistart.U01.control.terminals
+ 24 V LI1 LI2
LI1 LI2 + 24 V
LI1 LI2 + 24 V
00.ms
t
Application of a voltage boost equal to 100% of the nominal
motor voltage
Voltage.ramp
U
100%.
Un
50%.
Un
Initial.voltage
00.ms
t
Application of a voltage boost equal to 100% of the nominal
motor voltage
Voltage.ramp
U
100%.
Un
50%.
Un
Initial.voltage
Characteristics:
pages.1/18.and.1/19
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
Schemes:
pages.1/13.to.1/135
Characteristics:
pages.1/18.and.1/19
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
Schemes:
pages.1/13.to.1/135
Characteristics:
pages.1/18.and.1/19
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
Schemes:
pages.1/13.to.1/135
Characteristics:
pages.1/18.and.1/19
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
Schemes:
pages.1/13.to.1/135
Presentation (continued)1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/18
Soft starters
...............
Environmental characteristics
Type of starter ATSU 01N2ppLT
Conformity to standards Altistart.U01.electronic.starters.have.been.developed.to.conform.to.the.strictest.
international.standards.and.the.recommendations.relating.to.electrical.industrial.
control.devices.(IEC,.EN),.in.particular.standard.IEC/EN.60947-4-
Electromagnetic compatibility EMC
Conducted.and.radiated.
emissions
CISPR.11.level.B,.IEC.60947-4-,.level.B
Harmonics IEC.1000-3-,.IEC.1000-3-4
EMC.immunity EN.5008-,.EN.5008-1
Electrostatic.discharge IEC.61000-4-.level.3
Immunity.to.radiated.radio-
electrical.interference
IEC.61000-4-3.level.3
Immunity.to.electrical.transients IEC.61000-4-4.level.4
Voltage/current.impulse IEC.61000-4-5.level.3
Conducted.and.radiated.
emissions
IEC.61000-4-6.level.3
Immunity.to.conducted.
interference.caused.by.radio-
electrical felds
IEC.61000-4-11
Damped.oscillating.waves IEC.61000-4-1.level.3
e marking The.starters.carry.e.marking.in.accordance.with.the.European.low.voltage.directives.
IEC/EN.60947-4-
Product certifcations UL,.CSA,.C-Tick.and.CCC
Degree of protection IP.0
Degree of pollution .conforming.to.IEC/EN.60947-4-
Vibration resistance 15.mm.peak.to.peak.from.3.to.13.Hz,.1.gn.from.13.to.150.Hz,.conforming.to.IEC/EN.
60068--6
Shock resistance 15.gn.for.11.ms.conforming.to.IEC/EN.60068--7
Relative humidity 595%.without.condensation.or.dripping.water.conforming.to.IEC.60068--3
Ambient temperature around.
the.unit
Storage C -.5+.70.conforming.to.IEC/EN.60947-4-
Operation C -.10+.40.without.derating,.up.to.50C.with.current.derating.of.%.per.C.above.40C
Maximum operating altitude m 1000.without.derating.(above.this,.derate.the.current.by.%.per.additional.100.m)
Operating position
Maximum.permanent.angle.in.relation.to.the.normal.vertical.
mounting.position
Electrical characteristics
Type of starter ATSU 01N2ppLT
Category of use Conforming.to.IEC.60947-4- Ac-53b
Rated operating voltage 3-phase.a.voltage V 00.-.10%.to.480.+.10%.
Frequency Hz 50.-.5%.to.60.+.5%
Output voltage Maximum.3-phase.voltage.equal.to.line.supply.voltage
Control supply voltage 4.V.c,.100.mA..10%
Rated operating current A 63
Adjustable starting time s 110
Adjustable deceleration time s 110
Starting torque % 30.80%.of.DOL.motor.starting.torque
Type of starter ATSU 01N206LT 01N209LT 01N212LT 01N222LT 01N232LT
Control power supply consumption 4.V.c,.65.mA 4.V.c,.100.mA
Power dissipated At.full.load.at.end.of.starting W 15 15 15 5 5
In.transient.state.at.5.times.the.
rated.operating.current
W 615 915 115 5 35
Type of starter ATSU 01N206LT to ATSU 01N222LT ATSU 01N232LT
Use
Starting.time s 1 5 10 1 5 10
Maximum.number.of.cycles.per.
hour
100 0 10 50 10 5
10 10 10 10
Starting.time
Full.voltage.state.or.
starter.at.standstill
Operating.cycle
t
I
Starting.time
Full.voltage.state.or.
starter.at.standstill
Operating.cycle
t
I
Presentation:
pages.1/16.and.1/17
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
Schemes:
pages.1/13.to.1/135
Presentation:
pages.1/16.and.1/17
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
Schemes:
pages.1/13.to.1/135
Presentation:
pages.1/16.and.1/17
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
Schemes:
pages.1/13.to.1/135
Presentation:
pages.1/16.and.1/17
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
Schemes:
pages.1/13.to.1/135
Characteristics1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1/19
Soft starters
................
Electrical characteristics (continued)
Logic input power supply (electrically.isolated.between.power.
and.control)
+ 24 V, COM
4.V..10%
Isolated
Max.current.100.mA
Logic inputs
LI1, LI2, BOOST
Stop,.run.and.boost.on.start-up.functions
Logic.inputs.with.impedance.7.kW; 24 V power supply (U max 40 V)
Max.current.8.mA
State.0.if.U.<.5.V.and.I.<.0.mA
State.1.if.U.>.13.V.and.I.>.05.mA
Logic output LO1
End.of.starting.signal
Open.collector.logic.output:
External.4.V.power.supply.(minimum.6.V,.maximum.30.V)
Max.current.00.mA
Relay output
R1A R1C
Normally.open.(N/O).contact
Minimum.switching.capacity:.10.mA.for.6.V.c
Maximum.switching.capacity.on.inductive.load.(cos.j.=.05.and.L/R.=.0.ms):..A.for.
50.V.a.or.30.V.c.(AC-15)
Maximum.operating.voltage.440.V
LED signalling Green.LED Starter.powered.up
Yellow.LED Nominal.voltage.reached
Connections (maximum connection capacity and tightening torque)
Power circuit Connection to 4 mm screw clamps
Flexible wire without cable
end
1.conductor mm
2
1510 8.AWG
.conductors mm
2
156 10.AWG
Flexible wire with cable end 1.conductor mm
2
16 10.AWG
.conductors mm
2
16 10.AWG
Rigid wire 1.conductor mm
2
110 8.AWG
.conductors mm
2
16 10.AWG
Control circuit Screw.connector
Flexible wire without cable
end
1.conductor mm
2
055 14.AWG
.conductors mm
2
0515 16.AWG
Flexible wire with cable end 1.conductor mm
2
0515 16.AWG
.conductors mm
2
0515 16.AWG
Rigid wire 1.conductor mm
2
055 14.AWG
.conductors mm
2
051 17.AWG
Torque characteristics (typical curves)
The.diagram.opposite.shows.the.torque/speed.characteristic.of.a.cage.motor.in.relation.to.the.
supply.voltage..
The torque varies in line with the square of the voltage at a fxed frequency. The gradual increase
in.the.voltage.prevents.the.instantaneous.current.peak.on.power-up
0
0 0,25 0,5 0,75 1
N/Ns
U
0,85 U
0,6 U
T
Tr
3.Tn
.Tn
Tn
0
0 0,25 0,5 0,75 1
N/Ns
U
0,85 U
0,6 U
T
Tr
3.Tn
.Tn
Tn
Characteristics (continued)1
Presentation:
pages.1/16.and.1/17
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
Schemes:
pages.1/13.to.1/135
Presentation:
pages.1/16.and.1/17
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
Schemes:
pages.1/13.to.1/135
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1/130
1
Soft starters
................
Soft start/soft stop units for 075 to 15 kW motors
(can be combined with the TeSys U starter)
Motor Starter
Motor power (1) Nominal
current
Reference Weight
230 V 230 V 400 V 460 V
kW HP kW HP A kg
3-phase supply voltage: 200480 V 50/60 Hz
075
11
1
1.5
15
3
2
3
6 ATSU 01N206LT .. 0340
15
4
5
9 ATSU 01N209LT .. 0340
3
3
55
7.5
1 ATSU 01N212LT .. 0340

4
55
5
7.5
75
11
10
15
ATSU 01N222LT .. 0490
75 10 15 20 3 ATSU 01N232LT .. 0490
Accessorie
Description Used for starter Reference Weight
kg
Power.connector.between.
ATSU.01NppLT.and.
TeSys.U
ATSU.01NppLT VW3 G4104 000
TeSys U starter and soft start unit combinations
Numerous.possibilities.for.combinations.and.options.are.offered
Please consult the TeSys U Starters-open version specialist catalogue.
Motor power Soft starter TeSys U
Voltage Power base Control unit (2)
230 V
kW/HP
400 V
kW
460 V
HP
075/1 15 2 ATSU.01N06LT LUB.1 LUCp.05BL
11/1.5 /3 3 ATSU.01N06LT LUB.1 LUCp.1BL
15/2 ATSU.01N09LT LUB.1 LUCp.1BL
4 5 ATSU.01N09LT LUB.1 LUCp.1BL
/3 ATSU.01N1LT LUB.1 LUCp.1BL
3/ 55 7.5 ATSU.01N1LT LUB.3 LUCp.18BL
4/5 75 10 ATSU.01NLT LUB.3 LUCp.18BL
55/7.5 11 15 ATSU.01NLT LUB.3 LUCp.3BL
75/10 15 20 ATSU.01N3LT LUB.3 LUCp.3BL
Example.of.a.starter-motor.combination.with:
1.non-reversing.power.base.for.DOL.starting.(LUBpBL)
2.control.unit.(LUCM.ppBL)
3.power.connector.(VW3.G4104)
4.Altistart.U01soft.start/soft.stop.unit.(ATSU.01NppLT)
ATSU 01N222LT
D
F
5
3
1
7
1
4
ATSU 01N222LT
D
F
5
3
1
7
1
4
1
2
4
LUBp2BL
LUCM ppBL
ATSU 01N2ppLT
3
D
F
5
1
0
3
6
1
2
4
LUBp2BL
LUCM ppBL
ATSU 01N2ppLT
3
D
F
5
1
0
3
6
(1) Standard motor power ratings, HP power ratings indicated according to standard UL 508.
(2)DependingontheconfgurationofthechosenTeSysUstarter,replacethep with A for
standard, B for expandable, and M for multifunction.
References1
Presentation:
pages.1/16.and.1/17
Characteristics:
pages.1/18.and.1/19
References:
page.1/131
Dimensions:
page.1/13.to.1/135
Presentation:
pages.1/16.and.1/17
Characteristics:
pages.1/18.and.1/19
References:
page.1/131
Dimensions:
page.1/13.to.1/135
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/131
1
Soft starters
....
TeSys U combination (non-reversing power base) and
ATSU 01N206LT to ATSU 01N212LT
TeSys U combination (non-reversing or reversing power base)
and ATSU 01N206LT to ATSU 01N212LT
Mounting on 5 (35 mm) rail with VW3 G4104 connector Side by side mounting
TeSys U combination (non-reversing power base) and
ATSU 01N222LT to ATSU 01N232LT
TeSys U combination (non-reversing or reversing power base)
and ATSU 01N222LT to ATSU 01N232LT
Mounting on 5 (35 mm) rail with VW3 G4104 connector Side by side mounting
VW3 G4104 connector
1
5
0
2
8
4
45
9
1
5
0
2
8
4
45
9
99
135
1
5
4
7
9
1
4
99
135
1
5
4
7
9
1
4
3
1
4
45
1
7
0
9
3
1
4
45
1
7
0
9
99
135
7
1
5
4
9
99
135
7
1
5
4
9
44,8 20
6
4
6
,
6
2
8
44,8 20
6
4
6
,
6
2
8
Dimensions1
Presentation:
pages.1/16.and.1/17
Characteristics:
pages.1/18.and.1/19
References:
page.1/131
Dimensions:
page.1/13.to.1/135
Presentation:
pages.1/16.and.1/17
Characteristics:
pages.1/18.and.1/19
References:
page.1/131
Dimensions:
page.1/13.to.1/135
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/13
1
Soft starters
For.075.to.15.kW.motors......
ATSU 01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units
Power wiring Power wiring with reversing unit
Compatible components (For full references, see pages ... and ... or refer to our catalogue: Motor starter solutions - Control and protection components)
Code Description
A1 Soft.start/soft.stop.unit
QF1 TeSys.U.controller-starter
CU TeSys.U.control.unit
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
M1
3
A1
CU
QF1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
Tesys.U
TeSys.U
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
M1
3
A1
CU
QF1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
Tesys.U
TeSys.U
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
M1
3
CU
QF1
A1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
TeSys.U.
with.
reversing.
unit
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
M1
3
CU
QF1
A1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
TeSys.U.
with.
reversing.
unit
Presentation:
pages.1/16.and.1/17
Characteristics:
pages.1/18.and.1/19
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
Presentation:
pages.1/16.and.1/17
Characteristics:
pages.1/18.and.1/19
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
Presentation:
pages.1/16.and.1/17
Characteristics:
pages.1/18.and.1/19
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
Presentation:
pages.1/16.and.1/17
Characteristics:
pages.1/18.and.1/19
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
Schemes1
Tesys.U
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/133
1
Soft starters
For.075.to.15.kW.motors............
ATSU 01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units (continued)
Automatic 2-wire control
Without.deceleration With and without deceleration
Functional diagrams
Automatic 3-wire control
Without.deceleration With.deceleration
Functional diagrams
A1: Soft start/soft stop unit
S1, S2: XB4 B or XB5 B pushbuttons
QF1: TeSys U controller-starter
t1: Acceleration time can be controlled by a potentiometer
t2: Deceleration time can be controlled by a potentiometer
U
1
: Starting time can be controlled by a potentiometer
..
QF1
S1
LUA1 C20
R
1
A
A
1
A
2
1
7
1
8
R
1
C
L
I
1
L
I
2
+

2
4

V
B
O
O
S
T
L
O
1
C
O
M
A1
+
c 24 V
ATSU 01N2ppLT
QF1
S1
LUA1 C20
R
1
A
A
1
A
2
1
7
1
8
R
1
C
L
I
1
L
I
2
+

2
4

V
B
O
O
S
T
L
O
1
C
O
M
A1
+
c 24 V
ATSU 01N2ppLT
QF1
S2
A
1
A
2
A1
+
c 24 V
S1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
R
1
A
R
1
C
L
I
1
L
I
2
+

2
4

V
B
O
O
S
T
L
O
1
C
O
M
LUA1 C20
1
7
1
8
S
t
o
p
R
u
n
S
t
o
p
R
u
n
QF1
S2
A
1
A
2
A1
+
c 24 V
S1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
R
1
A
R
1
C
L
I
1
L
I
2
+

2
4

V
B
O
O
S
T
L
O
1
C
O
M
LUA1 C20
1
7
1
8
S
t
o
p
R
u
n
S
t
o
p
R
u
n
10.s
t
t1
U
1
Power.supply.
voltage
Green.LED
Logic.input.LI
Pushbutton.S1
Logic.output.LO1
Yellow.LED
Motor.voltage
10.s
t
t1
U
1
Power.supply.
voltage
Green.LED
Logic.input.LI
Pushbutton.S1
Logic.output.LO1
Yellow.LED
Motor.voltage
t
t
t1
10.s
U
1
Power.supply.
voltage
Green.LED
Logic.input.LI
Pushbutton.S
Logic.output.LO1
Yellow.LED
Motor.voltage
Pushbutton.S1
t
t
t1
10.s
U
1
Power.supply.
voltage
Green.LED
Logic.input.LI
Pushbutton.S
Logic.output.LO1
Yellow.LED
Motor.voltage
Pushbutton.S1
QF1
S2
QF1
14 13
A
1
A
2
A1
+
c 24 V
S1
R
1
A
R
1
C
ATSU 01N2ppLT
L
I
1
L
I
2
+

2
4

V
B
O
O
S
T
L
O
1
C
O
M
LUA1 C20
1
7
1
8
QF1
S2
QF1
14 13
A
1
A
2
A1
+
c 24 V
S1
R
1
A
R
1
C
ATSU 01N2ppLT
L
I
1
L
I
2
+

2
4

V
B
O
O
S
T
L
O
1
C
O
M
LUA1 C20
1
7
1
8
QF1
QF1
S2
A
1
1
4
1
3
A
2
A1
+
c 24 V
S1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
R
1
A
R
1
C
L
I
1
L
I
2
+

2
4

V
B
O
O
S
T
L
O
1
C
O
M
LUA1 C20
1
7
1
8
QF1
QF1
S2
A
1
1
4
1
3
A
2
A1
+
c 24 V
S1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
R
1
A
R
1
C
L
I
1
L
I
2
+

2
4

V
B
O
O
S
T
L
O
1
C
O
M
LUA1 C20
1
7
1
8
500.ms
t
t1
10.s
U
1
Power.supply.
voltage
Green.LED
Pushbutton.S1
Logic.output.LO1
Yellow.LED
Motor.voltage
Logic.input.LI
Pushbutton.S
500.ms
t
t1
10.s
U
1
Power.supply.
voltage
Green.LED
Pushbutton.S1
Logic.output.LO1
Yellow.LED
Motor.voltage
Logic.input.LI
Pushbutton.S
t
10.s
t1
Power.supply..
voltage
Green.LED
Logic.output.LO1
Yellow.LED
Motor.voltage
Logic.input.LI
Pushbutton.S
Logic.input.LI1
Pushbutton.S1
t
10.s
t1
Power.supply..
voltage
Green.LED
Logic.output.LO1
Yellow.LED
Motor.voltage
Logic.input.LI
Pushbutton.S
Logic.input.LI1
Pushbutton.S1
Schemes (continued)1
Presentation:
pages.1/16.and.1/17
Characteristics:
pages.1/18.and.1/19
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
Presentation:
pages.1/16.and.1/17
Characteristics:
pages.1/18.and.1/19
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/134
1
Soft starters
For.075.to.15.kW.motors....
Automatic 3-wire control, with reversing unit
Without deceleration With deceleration
QF1: TeSys U controller-starter with reversing unit
S1, S2, S3: XB4 B or XB5 B pushbuttons
S3: minimum depression time 500 ms
S1, S2, S3: XB4 B or XB5 B pushbuttons
Boost on starting and end of starting signal
A
3
B
3
A
1
A
2
B
1
A1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
R
1
A
R
1
C
C
O
M
B
O
O
S
T
L
O
1
L
I
2
L
I
1
+

2
4

V
S2
S1
S3
c 24 V
+
LUA1 C20
1
7
1
8
QF1
LU2B p2BL
Run.
direction.1
Run.
direction.
Stop
A
3
B
3
A
1
A
2
B
1
A1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
R
1
A
R
1
C
C
O
M
B
O
O
S
T
L
O
1
L
I
2
L
I
1
+

2
4

V
S2
S1
S3
c 24 V
+
LUA1 C20
1
7
1
8
QF1
LU2B p2BL
Run.
direction.1
Run.
direction.
Stop
A
3
B
3
A
1
A
2
B
1
LU2B p2BL
A1 QF1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
R
1
A
R
1
C
C
O
M
B
O
O
S
T
L
O
1
L
I
2
L
I
1
+

2
4

V
S2
S1
c 24 V
S3
+
LUA1 C20
1
7
1
8
Run.
direction.1
Run.
direction.
Stop
A
3
B
3
A
1
A
2
B
1
LU2B p2BL
A1 QF1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
R
1
A
R
1
C
C
O
M
B
O
O
S
T
L
O
1
L
I
2
L
I
1
+

2
4

V
S2
S1
c 24 V
S3
+
LUA1 C20
1
7
1
8
Run.
direction.1
Run.
direction.
Stop
A1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
R
1
A
R
1
C
L
I
1
L
I
2
+

2
4

V
B
O
O
S
T
L
O
1
C
O
M
To.PLC
A1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
R
1
A
R
1
C
L
I
1
L
I
2
+

2
4

V
B
O
O
S
T
L
O
1
C
O
M
To.PLC
Presentation:
pages.1/16.and.1/17
Characteristics:
pages.1/18.and.1/19
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
Presentation:
pages.1/16.and.1/17
Characteristics:
pages.1/18.and.1/19
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/135
1
Soft starters
For.075.to.15.kW.motors.....
Automatic control with Modbus communication module, with and without deceleration
Without reversing unit With reversing unit
Function Register Bit Value Function Register Bit Value
Powering down TeSys U and ATSU Powering up TeSys U and ATSU
704 0 0 Forward 704 0 1
Reverse 704 1 1
Automatic control without deceleration Powering down TeSys U and ATSU
Run 700 0 1 Forward 704 0 0
Stop 704 0 0 Reverse 704 1 0
Automatic control with deceleration Automatic control without deceleration
Run 700 0 1 Run 700 0 1
Soft.stop 700 0 0 Stop.forward 704 0 0
Stop.reverse 704 1 0
Automatic control with deceleration (forward or reverse)
Run 700 0 1
Soft.stop 700 0 0
A1: Soft start/soft stop unit A1: Soft start/soft stop unit
Automatic control with AS-Interface communication module, without deceleration
Without reversing unit With reversing unit
Function Bit Value Function Bit Value
Power-up and automatic control without deceleration Power-up and automatic control without deceleration
Run D0 1 Run.forward D0 1
Stop D0 0 Stop D0 0
Run.reverse D1 1
Stop D1 0
A1: Soft start/soft stop unit A1: Soft start/soft stop unit
A1
L
O
1
C
O
M
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
G
n
d
A1
+ +
c 24 V
LU9B N11C
LUL C031
4 5 8
ATSU 01N2ppLT
R
1
A
R
1
C
Modbus Module
C
O
M
B
O
O
S
T
L
O
1
L
I
2
L
I
1
+

2
4

V
c 24 V
+
1
3
1
4
Pre-wired.coil
4.V.Aux
A1
L
O
1
C
O
M
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
G
n
d
A1
+ +
c 24 V
LU9B N11C
LUL C031
4 5 8
ATSU 01N2ppLT
R
1
A
R
1
C
Modbus Module
C
O
M
B
O
O
S
T
L
O
1
L
I
2
L
I
1
+

2
4

V
c 24 V
+
1
3
1
4
Pre-wired.coil
4.V.Aux
A1
L
O
1
C
O
M
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
G
n
d
A1
+ +
c 24 V
LUL C031
4 5 8 O
A
1
O
A
3
C
O
M
ATSU 01N2ppLT
R
1
A
R
1
C
Modbus Module
C
O
M
B
O
O
S
T
L
O
1
L
I
2
L
I
1
+

2
4

V
c 24 V
+
A
3
B
3
A
1
A
2
B
1
LU2B p2BL
QF1
4.V.Aux
A1
L
O
1
C
O
M
D
(
B
)
D
(
A
)
G
n
d
A1
+ +
c 24 V
LUL C031
4 5 8 O
A
1
O
A
3
C
O
M
ATSU 01N2ppLT
R
1
A
R
1
C
Modbus Module
C
O
M
B
O
O
S
T
L
O
1
L
I
2
L
I
1
+

2
4

V
c 24 V
+
A
3
B
3
A
1
A
2
B
1
LU2B p2BL
QF1
4.V.Aux
C
O
M
B
O
O
S
T
L
O
1
L
I
2
L
I
1
+

2
4

V
A1
+ +
AS-Interface c 24 V
LU9B N11C
ASI LUFC5
ATSU 01N2ppLT
R
1
A
R
1
C
1
3
1
4
c 24 V
+
Pre-wired.coil
C
O
M
B
O
O
S
T
L
O
1
L
I
2
L
I
1
+

2
4

V
A1
+ +
AS-Interface c 24 V
LU9B N11C
ASI LUFC5
ATSU 01N2ppLT
R
1
A
R
1
C
1
3
1
4
c 24 V
+
Pre-wired.coil
C
O
M
B
O
O
S
T
L
O
1
L
I
2
L
I
1
+

2
4

V
A1
+ +
AS-Interface c 24 V
ASI LUFC5
ATSU 01N2ppLT
R
1
A
R
1
C
A
3
B
3
A
1
A
2
B
1
LU2B p2BL
QF1
O
A
1
O
A
3
C
O
M
c 24 V
+
C
O
M
B
O
O
S
T
L
O
1
L
I
2
L
I
1
+

2
4

V
A1
+ +
AS-Interface c 24 V
ASI LUFC5
ATSU 01N2ppLT
R
1
A
R
1
C
A
3
B
3
A
1
A
2
B
1
LU2B p2BL
QF1
O
A
1
O
A
3
C
O
M
c 24 V
+
Presentation:
pages.1/16.and.1/17
Characteristics:
pages.1/18.and.1/19
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
Presentation:
pages.1/16.and.1/17
Characteristics:
pages.1/18.and.1/19
References:
page.1/130
Dimensions:
page.1/131
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1/136
Presentation,
description,
references
Magnetic.control.unit.for.the.protection.of..
variable.speed.controllers.and.soft.start.units
Presentation
When.installed.upstream.of.a.variable.speed.controller.or.soft.start.unit,.
control.unit.LUCLpp,.used.in.conjunction.with.an.LUB.1.or.LUB.3.power.base,.
provides:
isolation,
short-circuit.protection.of.the.motor.starter
(variable.speed.controller-based.or.soft.start.unit-based.motor.starters)
Note: control unit LUCL, when used in conjunction with power base LUB 12 or
LUB 32, conforms to standard IEC 60947-2.
v
v
Installation regulations
When.the.length.of.the.cable.between.the.TeSys.U.starter.and.the.variable.speed.
controller.is.more.than.15.m,.the.csa.of.the.cable.between.the.variable.speed.
controller.and.the.TeSys.U.starter.(S).must.be.equal.to.the.csa.of.the.cable.
upstream.of.TeSys.U.(S1)
Description
1..Extraction.and.locking.handle
2..Sealing.of.locking.handle
3..Dial.for.magnetic.adjustment.of.motor.In.
4..Locking.of.settings.by.sealing.the.transparent.cover
References
Description Line current of the
variable speed controller
or soft start unit
Reference
(1)
Weight
A kg
Magnetic control unit 01506 LUCLX6pp 0135
03514 LUCL1Xpp 0135
155 LUCL05pp 0135
31 LUCL12pp 0135
4518 LUCL18pp 0135
83 LUCL32pp 0135
(1) Standard control circuit voltage:
Volts 24 4872 110240
c BL.(2), (3)
a B
c or a ES.(4) FU.(5)
(2) Voltage code to be used for a starter-controller with communication module.
(4) c: 4872 V, a: 48 V.
(5) c: 110220 V, a: 110240 V.
5
6
8
0
7
1
2
3
4
LUB pp LUCLpp
S1 (mm
2
/ AWG)
S2 (mm
2
/ AWG)
Altivar.or.Altistart
11
1/137
Selection
Magnetic.control.unit.for.the.protection.of..
variable.speed.controllers.and.soft.start.stop.units
Control unit and associated power base selection
Functions provided Maximum motor
power ratings 50/60 Hz
Power base
reference
Control unit
reference
Line current
< 400/415 V 500 V 690 V
KW KW KW A
Manual.reset
b
b
009 LUB 12 or LUB 32 LUCLX6pp 01506
05 LUB 12 or LUB 32 LUCL1Xpp 03514
15 3 LUB 12 or LUB 32 LUCL05pp 155
55 55 9 LUB 12 or LUB 32 LUCL12pp 31
75 9 15 LUB 32 LUCL18pp 4518
15 15 185 LUB 32 LUCL32pp 83
Control units Standard Advanced Multifunction
LUCA LUCB LUCC LUCD LUCL LUCM
Thermal overload protection
Over current protection 14.x.the.setting.current 3.to.17.x.the.setting.
current
Short-circuit protection 14.x.the.max.current
Protection against phase loss
Protection against phase imbalance
Earth fault protection (equipment protection only)
Tripping class 10 10 0 530
Motor type 3-phase Single-phase 3-phase Single-phase.and.3-phase
Thermal overload test function
Overtorque
No-load running
Long starting time
Reset method Manual Parameters.can.be.set
Automatic or remote With.function.module,.or.parameters.can.
be.set.via.the.bus.with.a.communication.
module.(see.page.1/70)
Parameters.can.be.set
Parameters.can.be.set.
via.the.bus.with.a.
communication.module.
(see.page.1/70)
Integrated.function .Function.provided.with.accessory.
Compatibility
Compatibility of
control unit LUCLpp with
References Functions
The starter-controller Yes LUB.1/LUB.3 Starter-controller.(magnetic.protection)
The starter No LUS.1/LUS.3 Starter.without.either.magnetic.or.thermal.overload.protection)
The controller No LUT.M Controller.(without.thermal.overload.protection)
Add-on contact blocks
with fault signalling
and auxiliary contacts
Yes LUA.1C11 Add-on.contact.blocks.with.fault.signalling.(1.N/O.+.1.N/C)
LUA.1C0 Add-on.contact.blocks.with.fault.signalling.(.N/O)
LUF.N0. Auxiliary.contacts.(.N/O)
LUF.N11. Auxiliary.contacts.(1.N/O.+.1.N/C)
LUF.N0. Auxiliary.contacts.(.N/C)
Communication
modules
Yes ASILUF.C5.and.
ASILUF.C51
LUF.C00 Parallel.wiring.module
LUL.C033 Modbus.communication.module.(1.output/.inputs)
LUL.C031 Modbus.communication.module.(1.output)
LUL.C15 Advantys.STB.communication.module.(1.output/.inputs)
LUL.C08 CANopen.communication.module.(1.output/.inputs)
LUL.C09 DeviceNet.communication.module.(1.output/.inputs)
LUL.C07 Profbus DP communication module (1 output/2 inputs)
Function modules No LUF.W10 Alarm.function.module
LUF.DH11 Thermal.overload.signalling.module.with.manual.reset
LUF.DA01. Thermal.overload.signalling.module.with.automatic.or.remote.reset.(1.N/C)
LUF.DA10 Thermal.overload.signalling.module.with.automatic.or.remote.reset.(1.N/O)
LUF.V Motor.load.indication.module
11
1/138
Characteristics
Characteristics of magnetic control unit LUCL
Protection Motor.type 3-phase
Conforming.to.standard When.used.in.conjunction.with.an.LUB.1.or.LUB.3.power.base,.magnetic.control.
unit.LUCL.conforms.to.standard.IEC.60947-
Short-circuit protection Tripping.threshold 14.x.In.(max.setting.current)
Tripping.tolerance .0.%
Environment
Product certifcations CE
Conforming to standards When.used.in.conjunction.an.LUB.power.base,.control.unit.LUCL.conforms.to.
standard.60947-
Rated insulation voltage.(Ui) Conforming.to.IEC/EN.60947-1,.
V 690
Rated impulse withstand
voltage (Uimp)
Conforming.to.IEC/EN.60947- kV 6
Safety separation of circuits
SELV
Conforming.to.IEC/EN.60947-1.
appendix.N
V Between.the.control.or.auxiliary.circuit.and.the.main.circuit:.400
Between.the.control.and.auxiliary.circuits:.40
Conforming.to.IEC/EN.60947-1
(protection.against..
direct fnger contact)
Front.panel.outside.connection.
zone
IP.40
Front.panel.and.wired.terminals IP.0
Other.faces IP.0
Protective treatment Conforming.to.IEC/EN.60068 TH
Conforming.to/EN.60068--30 Cycles 1
Conforming.to.IEC/EN.60068--11 h 48
around the device
Storage C -.40+.85
Operation C Power.bases.and.standard.and.advanced.control.units:.-.5.+.70
(At.temperatures.above.60C.and.up.to.70C,.for.Ie.=.3.A,.leave.a.minimum.gap.of..
9.mm.between.products)
Power.bases.and.multifunction.control.units:.-.5+.60.
(At.temperatures.above.45.C,.leave.a.minimum.gap.of.9.mm.between.products.
At.temperatures.above.55.C.up.to.60.C,.leave.a.gap.of.0.mm.between.products)
Operating positions In.relation.to.normal.vertical.
mounting.plane
Flame resistance Conforming.to.UL.94 V
Conforming.to.IEC/EN.60695--1 C 960..(parts.supporting.live.components)
C 650
Environmental restrictions Cadmium.and.silicone-free,.recyclable
Shock resistance
1/.sine.wave.=.11.ms
Conforming.to.IEC/EN60068--7.
(1)
Power.poles.open:.10.gn
Power.poles.closed:.15.gn
5300 Hz
Conforming.to.IEC/EN.60068--6
(1)
Power.poles.open:..gn
Power.poles.closed:.4.gn.(2)
Resistance to
Conforming.to.IEC/EN.61000-4- kV In.open.air:.8.-.Level.3
kV On.contact:.8.-.Level.4
Immunity to radiated high-
frequency disturbance
Conforming.to.IEC/EN.61000-4-3 V/m 10.-.Level.3
Immunity to
fast transient currents
Conforming.to.IEC/EN.61000-4-4 kV All.circuits.except.for.serial.link:.4.-.Level.4
kV Serial.link:..-.Level.3
Immunity to dissipated
shock waves
Conforming.to.IEC/EN.60947- Common mode Serial mode
Uc.a.440.V,
Uc..c.480.V
kV 1
Uc.=.4.V.c Not.applicable
high-frequency disturbance
(2) 2 gn with Advantys STB or CANopen communication modules.
11
1/139
Characteristics
Power.bases.and.LUCL.magnetic.control.unit
Power base and control unit type LUB 12 + LUCL LUB 32 + LUCL
Flexible cable
without.cable.end
1.conductor mm
2
510 510
.conductors mm
2
156 156
Flexible cable
with.cable.end
1.conductor mm
2
16 16
.conductors mm
2
16 16
Flexible cable
without.cable.end
1.conductor mm
2
110 110
.conductors mm
2
16 16
Tightening torque Nm 195 195
Flexible cable
without.cable.end
1.conductor mm
2
07515 07515
.conductors mm
2
07515 07515
Flexible cable
with.cable.end
1.conductor mm
2
03415 03415
.conductors mm
2
03415 03415
Flexible cable
without.cable.end
1.conductor mm
2
07515 07515
.conductors mm
2
07515 07515
Rated control
circuit voltage
a.50/60.Hz V 440 440
c V 40 40
Voltage limits c.4.V.(1) V 07 07
Operation a.4.V V 065 065
a.or.c.487.V V a.3857.c.38593 a.3857.c.38593
a.11040.V V a.8864 a.8864
c.11040.V V c.884 c.884
Drop-out c.4.V V 145 145
a.4.V V 145 145
a.or.c.487.V V 9 9
a.11040.V,.c.1100.V V 55 55
Typical consumption c.4.V mA 130 0
I.max.while.closing a.4.V mA 140 0
a.or.c.487.V mA 80 80
a.11040.V,.c.1100.V mA 80 80
I.rms.sealed c.4.V mA 60 80
a.4.V mA 70 90
a.or.c.487.V mA 35 45
a.11040.V,.c.1100.V mA 35 5
Heat dissipation W 3
Operating time Closing ms 24 V: 70; 48 V: 60; u.7.V:.50 24 V: 70; 48 V: 60; u.7.V:.50
Opening ms 35 35
Resistance to micro-breaks ms 3 3
Resistance to voltage dips IEC/EN.61000-4-11 At.least.70.%.of.Uc.for.500.ms
Mechanical durability In.millions.of.operating.cycles 15 15
Maximum operating rate In.operating.cycles.per.hour 3600 3600
Number of poles 3 3
Isolation
conforming.to.IEC/EN.60947-1
Possible Yes Yes
Padlocking 1 padlock with 6.9 mm shank 1 padlock with 6.9 mm shank
Rated thermal current A 1 3
Rated operational current
(Ue.y.440.V)
Conforming.
to.IEC/.EN.
60947-
Category.AC-41 y.70.C:.1.A y.70.C:.3.A
Category.AC-43 y.70.C:.1.A y.70.C:.3.A
Rated operational voltage V 690.(3) 690.(3)
Frequency limits Of.the.operating.current Hz 4060 4060
Power dissipated
in the power circuits
Operational.current A 3 6 9 1 18 5 3
Power.dissipated..
in.all.three.poles
W 01 03 06 11 4 46 75
Rated breaking capacity on short-circuit V 30 440 500 600
kA 50 50 10 4
Total breaking time ms
Thermal limit With.Isc.max.on.440.V kA
2
s 90 10
(2) No consumption sealed.
(3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9SP0.
11
1/140
Coordination
The standard defnes tests at different levels of current; the purpose of these tests is
to.place.the.equipment.in.extreme.conditions.
The standard defnes 2 types of coordination, according to the condition of the
components.after.testing:.type.1.and.type.
Type.1.coordination.requires.that.in.a.short-circuit.condition,.the.contactor.or.starter.
must.not.present.any.danger.to.personnel.or.installations.and.must.not.be.able.to.
resume.operation.without.repair.or.the.replacement.of.parts
The product combinations given below provide type 1 coordination.
Soft start-soft stop unit/TeSysU starter controller combination

with magnetic protection
TeSys U / Altistart 48: type 1 coordination
Power
400 V (kW)
TeSys U references
(protection.+.power.switching)
Soft start unit reference
Class 10 Class 20
55 LUB3..+..LUCL3.or.LUCL18 ATS48D17
75 LUB3..+..LUCL3 ATS48D17 ATS48D22
Variable speed controller/TeSysU starter controller combination
with magnetic protection
TeSys U / Altivar 21 UL Type 1/IP 20: type 1 coordination
Power
400 V (kW)
TeSys U references
Variable speed controller reference
075 LUB1..+..LUCL05 ATV21H075N4
ATV21HU15N4
LUB1..+..LUCL1 ATV21HU22N4
3 LUB1..+..LUCL1 ATV21HU30N4
4 LUB1..+..LUCL1 ATV21HU40N4
55 LUB3..+..LUCL3.or.LUCL18 ATV21HU55N4
75 LUB3..+..LUCL3.or.LUCL18 ATV21HU75N4
11 LUB3..+..LUCL3 ATV21HD11N4
15 LUB3..+..LUCL3 ATV21HD15N4
TeSys U / Altivar 21 IP 54: type 1 coordination
Power
400 V (kW)
TeSys U references
075 LUB1..+..LUCL05 ATV21W075N4/N4C
15 LUB1..+..LUCL1.or.LUCL05 ATV21WU15N4/N4C
LUB1..+..LUCL1 ATV21WU22N4/N4C
3 LUB1..+..LUCL1 ATV21WU30N4/N4C
4 LUB1..+..LUCL1 ATV21WU40N4/N4C
11 LUB3..+..LUCL3 ATV21WD11N4/N4C
15 LUB3..+..LUCL3 ATV21WD15N4/N4C
Combinations
5
6
1
1
6
1
1
3
+
5
6
1
1
6
1
1
5
+
5
6
1
1
6
1
1
4
+
11
1/141
Variable speed controller/TeSysU starter controller combination
with magnetic protection (continued)
Power
400 V (kW)
TeSys U references
037 LUB1.+.LUCL05 ATV31H037N4
11 LUB1.+.LUCL1 ATV31HU11N4
LUB1.+.LUCL1 ATV31HU22N4
Power
400V (kW)
TeSys U references
Power
400V (kW)
TeSys U references
Combinations
5
6
1
1
6
1
1
6
+
5
6
1
1
6
1
1
7
+
5
6
1
1
6
1
1
8
+
1/14
1
General
integral 63: a high performance concept
for reliability of operation
integral.63.contactor.breakers.combine.all.the.functions.of.a.power.switching.
assembly.up.to.63.A.in.a.single.compact.device,.with.performance.equivalent.to.that.
of.the.best.separate.specialist.devices.
They.conform.to.the.main.standards.currently.in.force,.in.particular.IEC.60947-1,.
IEC.60947-,.IEC.60947-3,.IEC.60947-4-1.and.IEC.60947-6-.(welding.of.power.
poles.impossible),.as.well.as.to.international.approvals.UL,.CSA,.and.the.
European.directives.
The.integral.range.ensures.reliability.of.operation.up.to.63.A.In.addition.to.safety.of.
operation,.integral.has.numerous.other.functions:.increased.protection,.
communication, remote control, fault identifcation, isolation, padlocking.
... ....
Functions performed by integral 63
units
The equipment in a power switching circuit must perform 4 main functions:
power.switching,
isolation,
overload.protection,
short-circuit.protection
These.functions.are.traditionally.performed.by.separate.devices.which.must.be.
combined.to.form.a.motor.starter.assembly,.the.most.common.being:.
fuses.+.contactor.+.thermal.overload.relay,
circuit.breaker.+.contactor.+.thermal.overload.relay
b
b
b
b
v
v
Power switching
... Contactor (for automatic and remote control)
Operational.power.for.use.in.category.AC-43:
up.to.30.kW.at.400/415.V.50.Hz,
up.to.33.kW.at.440/415.V.50.Hz
Electrical.life.in.number.of.operating.cycles,.in.category.AC-43,.at.415.V.and.at.
rated.power:.1.million
Mechanical.life.in.number.of.operating.cycles:.5.million
b
v
v
b
b
... Reversing pairs
Two.3-pole.contactors,.horizontally.mounted:
mechanically.interlocked
Can be ftted with the same protection modules as integral 63 contactor breaker.
b
....
5
6
4
5
4
5
6
4
5
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
3
5
5
6
3
5
integral.63.contactor.breakers..
and.reversing.contactor.breakers
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
Dimensions.and.schemes:
pages.1/176.to.1/179
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/143
1
General (continued)
Functions performed by integral 63
units (continued)
Isolation
Isolation conforming to IEC 60947
integral.63.contactor.breakers.provide.isolation.and.padlocking.functions.conforming.
to.standards.IEC.60947
In addition, integral 63 LD4 contactor breakers and LD5 reversing contactor
breakers incorporate specifc poles for control testing and padlocking.
Overload protection
.... Thermal-magnetic protection module (for protection against overload and
overcurrent)
A.range.of.interchangeable.modules.allows.the.equipment.to.be.adapted.to.suit:
the.rated.operational.current.(rating.and.settings),
the.application:
motors,
frequent.starting.motors,
distribution.circuits
b
b
v
v
v
.... High breaking capacity current limiting circuit breaker
For.short-circuit.protection
High.breaking.capacity.with.short-circuit.limited.by.ultra-fast.tripping
Possibility.of.increasing.the.breaking.capacity.of.the.integral.unit.by.adding.a.current.
limiter.(LA9 LB920)
The current limiter is ftted upstream of the integral unit.
Several integral units may be ftted downstream of the current limiter
(Ith.=.63.A,.Ie.=.3.A)
Signalling and attachments
These.devices.provide.comprehensive.local.signalling:
pole.position.indicator,
different signalling for overload and short-circuit.
They.also.allow.dialogue.with.the.automated.control.system.by.means.of.numerous.
add-on.blocks:
auxiliary.contact.and.signalling.blocks,
remote.electrical.reset.device,
undervoltage.and.shunt.trips,
control.circuit.switching,
etc
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
....
Simple fxing and cabling methods
integral 63 contractor breakers and reversing contactor breakers ft onto 75 mm 7.
rails.using.a.separate.mounting.plate
integral.units.can.also.be.mounted.on:
panels,
pre-slotted.mounting.plates.type.AM1.P,
.x.35.mm.7.rails.using.sliding.clip.nuts,
CMD.prefabricated.plug-in.busbar.trunking.(providing.an.economical.assembly,.
combining.safety.and.simplicity.of.use),
AK5.panel.busbar.systems
b
b
b
b
b
....
5
3
4
5
9
5
3
4
5
9
5
6
3
7
5
6
3
7
5
6
3
8
5
6
3
8
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/144
1
Terminology
Terminology Altitude
The rarefed atmosphere at high altitude reduces the dielectric strength of the air and
hence.the.rated.operational.voltage.of.the.contactor.breaker.It.also.reduces.the.
cooling.effect.of.the.air.and.hence.the.rated.operational.current.of.the.contactor.
breaker.(unless.the.temperature.drops.at.the.same.time)
No.derating.is.necessary.up.to.3000.m
Derating.factors.to.be.applied.above.this.altitude.for.main.pole.operational.voltage.
and.current.(ac.supply).are.as.follows:
Altitude 3500 m 4000 m 4500 m 5000 m
Rated operational voltage 090 080 070 060
Rated operational current 09 090 088 086
The.temperature.of.the.air.surrounding.the.device,.measured.near.to.the.device.The.
operating.characteristics.are.given:.
with.no.restriction.for.temperatures.between.-.5.and.+.55.C
with.restrictions,.if.necessary,.for.temperatures.between.-.50.and.+.70.C
b
b
Rated operational current (Ie)
This is defned taking into account the rated operational voltage, operating rate and
duty,.utilisation.category.and.air.temperature.around.the.device
Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) (1)
The.current.Ith.which.a.closed.contactor.breaker.can.sustain.for.a.minimum.of.8.
hours.without.its.temperature.rise.exceeding.the.limits.given.in.the.standards
Short time rating
The.current.which.a.closed.contactor.breaker.can.sustain.for.a.short.time,.after.a.
period.of.no.load,.without.dangerous.overheating
Rated operational voltage (Ue)
This.is.the.voltage.value.which,.in.conjunction.with.the.rated.operational.current,.
determines.the.use.of.the.contactor.breaker.or.starter,.and.on.which.the.
corresponding.tests.and.the.utilisation.category.are.based.For.3-phase.circuits,.it.is.
expressed.as.the.voltage.between.phases.
Apart.from.exceptional.cases.such.as.rotor.short-circuiting,.the.rated.operational.
voltage.Ue.is.less.than.or.equal.to.the.rated.insulation.voltage.Ui
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)
The.rated.value.of.the.control.circuit.voltage,.on.which.the.operating.characteristics.
are.based.For.ac.applications,.the.values.are.given.for.a.near.sinusoidal.wave.form.
(less.than.5%.total.harmonic.distortion)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
This is the voltage value used to defne the insulation characteristics of a device and
referred.to.in.dielectric.tests.determining.leakage.paths.and.creepage.distances.As.
the specifcations are not identical for all standards, the rated values given for each
of.them.are.not.necessarily.the.same
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)
This.is.the.highest.peak.value.of.an.impulse.voltage,.of.prescribed.form.and.polarity,.
which the device is able to withstand without failure under specifed test conditions,
and.to.which.isolation.clearance.values.are.referred
The.rated.impulse.withstand.voltage.of.a.device.must.be.equal.to.or.higher.than.the.
values.stated.for.the.transient.overvoltages.appearing.in.the.circuit.in.which.the.
device is ftted.
Note: thesedefnitionsarebasedonextractsfromstandardIEC60947.
(1) Conventional free air thermal current, conforming to IEC standards.
....
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/145
1
Terminology (continued)
Terminology (continued) Rated operational power (expressed in kW)
The.rated.power.of.the.standard.motor.which.can.be.switched.by.the.contactor.
breaker,.at.the.stated.operational.voltage
Rated breaking capacity (Iq) (1)
This.is.the.current.value.which.the.contactor.breaker.can.break.in.accordance.with.
the breaking conditions specifed in the IEC standard.
Rated making capacity (1)
This.is.the.current.value.which.the.contactor.breaker.can.make.in.accordance.with.
the making conditions specifed in the IEC standard.
....
.
.
On-load factor (m)
This is the ratio between the time the current fows (t) and the duration of the cycle (T):
.
Cycle duration: duration of current fow + time at zero current.
Pole impedance
The.impedance.of.one.pole.is.the.sum.of.the.impedance.of.all.the.circuit.components.
between.the.input.terminal.and.the.output.terminal
The.impedance.comprises.a.resistive.component.(R).and.an.inductive.component.
X.=.Lw).The.total.impedance.therefore.depends.on.the.frequency.and.is.normally.
given.for.50.Hz.The.average.value.is.given.for.the.pole.at.its.rated.operational.current
Electrical durability
This.is.the.average.number.of.on-load.operating.cycles.which.the.main.pole.contacts.
can.perform.without.maintenance.The.electrical.durability.depends.on.the.utilisation.
category,.the.rated.operational.current.and.the.rated.operational.voltage
Mechanical durability
This is the average number of no-load operating cycles (i.e. with zero current fow
through.the.main.poles).which.the.contactor.breaker.can.perform.without.mechanical.
failure
Coordination
The.coordination.of.protection.devices.involves.combining,.in.a.selective.way,.a.
short-circuit.protection.device.(fuses.or.magnetic.circuit-breakers).with.a.contactor.
and.an.overload.protection.device.Its.objective.is.to.break.any.abnormal.current,.in.
plenty.of.time,.without.any.danger.to.personnel,.whilst.providing.adequate.protection.
of.the.equipment.against.an.overload.or.short-circuit.current
Type 1 - IEC 60947-4-1
In.a.short-circuit.condition,.the.contactor.or.starter.must.not.present.any.danger.to.
personnel.or.installations.and.may.not.be.able.to.resume.operation.without.repair.or.
the.replacement.of.parts
Type 2 - IEC 60947-4-1
In.a.short-circuit.condition,.the.contactor.or.starter.must.not.present.any.danger.to.
personnel.or.installations.and.must.be.able.to.resume.operation.The.risk.of.contact.
welding.is.permissible.if.they.can.be.easily.separated
Total, ensuring reliability of operation - IEC 60947-6-2
In.the.event.of.a.short-circuit,.no.damage.or.risk.of.welding.is.permissible.on.the.
equipment.constituting.the.motor.starter.Operation.can.be.resumed.without.any.
maintenance
Note: thesedefnitionsarebasedonextractsfromstandardIEC60947.
(1) For a.c. applications, the breaking and making capacities are expressed by the rms value of
the symmetrical component of the short-circuit current. Taking into account the maximum
asymmetry which may exist in the circuit, the contacts therefore have to withstand a peak
asymmetrical current which may be twice the rms symmetrical component.
....
t
T
t
T
m
t
T
--- = m
t
T
--- =
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/146
1
Defnition
The standard utilisation categories defne the current values which the contactor
breaker.must.be.able.to.make.or.break.These.values.depend.on:
the.type.of.load.being.switched:.squirrel.cage.or.slip.ring.motor,.resistors,
the.conditions.under.which.making.or.breaking.takes.place:.motor.stalled,.starting.
or.running,.reversing,.plugging
b
b
Reminder of standards IEC 60947
IEC 60947-1:.general.rules,
IEC 60947-2:.circuit.breakers,
IEC 60947-3:.isolating.devices,
IEC 60947-4-1:.contactors.and.motor.starters,
IEC 60947-5-1:.control.and.signalling.units,
IEC 60947-6-2:.control.and.protection.devices,
b
b
b
b
b
b
Standards for contactor breakers IEC 60947-4-1
Standard.IEC.60947-4-1:.covers.contactors.and.electromechanical.motor.starters.It.
concerns:
types.of.equipment.with.main.contacts.designed.for.connection.to.circuits.whose.
rated.operational.voltage.does.not.exceed.1000.V.for.ac.applications.or.1500.V.for.
dc.applications,
contactors.used.in.conjunction.with.overload.and/or.short-circuit.protection.
devices,
motor.starters.used.in.conjunction.with.separate.short-circuit.protection.devices.
and/or.with.separate.short-circuit.protection.devices.and.built-in.overload.protection.
devices,
contactors.and.combination.motor.starters.which.incorporate.their.own.short-
circuit.protection.device
b
b
b
b
IEC 60947-6-2
Standard.IEC.60947-6:.covers.multi-function.equipment
It.concerns.connection,.power.switching.and.protection.devices.(or.equipment).with.
main.contacts.designed.for.connection.to.circuits.whose.rated.operational.voltage.is.
less.than.or.equal.to.1000.V.for.ac.applications,.or.1500.V.for.dc.applications
Such.devices.are.designed.to.perform.both.the.power.switching.function.and.the.
protection of remotely controlled circuits function; they can also perform other
functions,.such.as.isolation
After short-circuit (Isc) tests, the products must be able to make and break the
currents corresponding to the specifed utilisation categories, and to the
number of operating cycles specifed in the standard, without failing. This
series of tests is completed by temperature rise tests
Standard IEC 947-6-2 specifes that, in the event of a short-circuit, no damage
or risk of contact welding is permissible on the devices constituting the motor
starter
The integral contactor breaker, through its design, ensures reliability of
operation After eliminating the fault, operation can be resumed instantly
without any maintenance work on the product, other than resetting
Utilisation categories for ac applications
Category AC-1
This.category.applies.to.all.types.of.ac.device.(load).with.a.power.factor.equal.to.or.
greater.than.095.(cos.j.y.095).Non.inductive.or.slightly.inductive.loads
Application examples: heating, distribution.
Category AC-2
This.category.applies.to.starting,.plugging.and.inching.of.slip.ring.motors
On.closing,.the.contactor.breaker.makes.the.starting.current,.which.is.about.5.
times.the.rated.current.of.the.motor
On.opening,.it.must.break.the.starting.current,.at.a.voltage.less.than.or.equal.to.
the.mains.supply.voltage
b
b
Category AC-3
This.category.applies.to.squirrel.cage.motors.with.breaking.while.motor.running
On.closing.the.contactor.breaker.makes.the.starting.current,.which.is.about.5.to.7.
On opening, it breaks the rated current drawn by the motor; at this point, the
voltage.at.the.contactor.breaker.terminals.is.about.0%.of.the.mains.supply.voltage.
Breaking.is.light
Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors (lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket
elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc.).
b
b
....
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/147
1
Standards for contactor breakers
(continued)
Utilisation categories for ac applications (continued)
Category AC-4
This.category.covers.starting,..plug.braking.and.inching.of.squirrel.cage.motors
On.closing,.the.contactor.breaker.makes.a.current.peak.which.may.be.as.high.as.5.
to.7.times.the.rated.motor.current.On.opening,.it.breaks.this.same.current.at.a.
voltage.which.is.higher,.the.lower.the.motor.speed.This.voltage.can.be.the.same.as.
the.mains.voltage.Breaking.is.severe
Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, hoisting equipment, metallurgy
industry.
Category AC-41
This.category.applies.to.all.types.of.ac.device.(load).with.a.power.factor.equal.to.or.
greater.than.095.(cos.j.y.095).Non.inductive.or.slightly.inductive.loads
Application examples: heating, distribution.
Category AC-42
This.category.applies.to.starting,.plugging.and.inching.of.slip.ring.motors
On.closing,.the.contactor.breaker.makes.the.starting.current,.which.is.about.5.
On.opening,.it.must.break.the.starting.current,.at.a.voltage.less.than.or.equal.to.
the.mains.supply.voltage
b
b
Category AC-43
This category applies to squirrel cage motors with breaking while motor running;
inching.or.occasional.reversing.of.limited.duration.are.permissible.if.the.number.of.
operating.cycles.does.not.exceed.5.per.minute,.or.10.within.a.10.minute.period
On.closing.the.contactor.breaker.makes.the.starting.current,.which.is.about.5.to.7.
On opening, it breaks the rated current drawn by the motor; at this point, the
voltage.at.the.contactor.breaker.terminals.is.about.0%.of.the.mains.supply.voltage.
Breaking.is.light
Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors: lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket
elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc.).
b
b
Category AC-44
This.category.covers.applications.with.plug.braking.and.inching.of.squirrel.cage.or.
slip.ring.motors
On.closing,.the.contactor.breaker.makes.a.current.peak.which.may.be.as.high.as.5.
to.7.times.the.rated.motor.current.On.opening,.it.breaks.this.same.current.at.a.
voltage.which.is.higher,.the.lower.the.motor.speed.This.voltage.can.be.the.same.as.
the.mains.voltage.Breaking.is.severe
Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, hoisting equipment, metallurgy
industry.
Tripping classes of protection modules
The.creation.of.thermal.tripping.classes.allows.better.adaptation.of.the.thermal.
protection.to.suit.different.motor.and.application.technologies.(short.or.long.starting.
times)..Conforming.to.IEC.60947-4-1.and.IEC.60947-6-
Class 10 A 10 20 30
Tripping time at 72 Ir (1) 10.s 410.s 60.s 930.s
Standards for auxiliary contacts IEC 60947-5
Standard.IEC.60947-5-1:.covers.switching.devices.and.components.for.control.
circuits
It.concerns.electromechanical.devices.for.control.circuits
Utilisation categories for ac applications
Category AC-14 (2)
This.category.applies.to.the.switching.of.electromagnetic.loads.whose.power.drawn.
with.the.electromagnet.closed.is.less.than.7.VA
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors and relays.
Category AC-15 (2)
This.category.applies.to.the.switching.of.electromagnetic.loads.whose.power.drawn.
with.the.electromagnet.closed.is.greater.than.7.VA
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors.
Utilisation categories for dc applications
Category DC-13 (3)
This.category.applies.to.the.switching.of.electromagnetic.loads.for.which.the.time.
taken.to.reach.95.%.of.the.steady.state.current.(T.=.095).is.equal.to.6.times.the.
power.P.drawn.by.the.load.(with.P.y.50.W)
Application.example:.switching.the.operating.coil.of.contactor.breakers
(1) Ir = protection module setting current.
(2) Replaces category AC-11.
(3) Replaces category DC-11.
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/148
1
Equipment selection
for starters
When.designing.an.installation,.it.is.essential.to.take.into.account.precise.criteria.for.
determining.the.conductor.csa.and.selecting.equipment
In.particular:
permissible.currents.for.the.conductors,
maximum.voltage.drops,
short-circuit.protection,
protection.against.indirect.contact
The.latter.three.criteria.must.be.taken.into.account.when.selecting.the.integral.unit
The.principle.behind.the.rules.described.below.is,.on.the.whole,.common.to.all.
European.publications.However,.the.calculations.and.values.concerning.protection.
against.indirect.contact.are.based.on.French.standard.NF.C.15-100,.and.it.is.up.to.
the.user.to.check.the.regulations.in.force.in.the.country.concerned
....
Cable protection against overload
To.achieve.this,.the.thermal.setting.value.Irth.selected.must.be.greater.than.the.
current.drawn.I
B
.and.less.than.or.equal.to.the.permissible.current.Iz.in.the.cable.to..
be.protected
I
B
.<.Irth.y.Iz
...........
Breaking capacity rule
Check.that.the.breaking.capacity.(BC).of.the.integral.unit.is.equal.to.or.greater.than.
the.prospective.short-circuit.current.(Isc.max).at.the.point.where.it.is.to.be.installed
BC.u.Isc.max
....
Breaking time rule
2 conditions must be fulflled:
The.short-circuit.current.at.the.end.of.the.circuit,.Isc.min,.must.be.greater.than.or.
equal.to.the.minimum.current.required.for.magnetic.tripping.of.the.device,
The.short-circuit.current.at.the.start.of.the.circuit,.Isc.max,.must.be.such.that:
....
I
2
sc max t
m
y I
2
o
t
o
I
2
o
t
o
.=.permissible.thermal.stress.limit.for.the.circuit,
t
m
.=.operating.time.of.the.integral.unit.or.of.the.short-circuit.
protection.device
These..checks.need.only.be.made.when.modules.with.a.low.rating.are.used
Example:.for.a.63/10.A.module,.a.cable.csa.u..5.mm
.is.required.to.withstand..
Isc.max.=.50.kA
.........
Protection against indirect contact in TN schemes
TN multiple earthed neutral scheme
....
Neutral.is.connected.to.earth
The.earths.are.connected.to.neutral
Any.phase/earth.insulation.fault.causes.a.short-circuit
As contact voltage is dangerous, breaking must occur at the frst fault.
The.PE.conductor.and.the.neutral.conductor.may.be:
combined.(TNC.scheme),
separate.(TNS.scheme)
....
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
PEN B B'
C C'
A
TNC.scheme
PEN B B'
C C'
A
TNC.scheme
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/149
1
Equipment selection
for starters
Protection against indirect contact in TN schemes (continued)
Protection.against.indirect.contact.(TN.schemes),.for.dead.shorts.only,.requires.
that the following 2 conditions be fulflled simultaneously:
The.fault.current.Id.must.be.greater.than.or.equal.to.the.minimum.current.required.
for.magnetic.tripping.of.the.integral.unit,.ie.11..Irth.max
....
.... c = coeffcient taking into account the upstream part of the
fault.loop.impedance.assumed.to.be.equal.to.08,.unless.
otherwise.indicated
q = coeffcient dependent on the earth connection scheme
and.equal.to.1.in.the.TN.scheme
Uo.=.phase-neutral.voltage.in.volts
Zb.=.fault.loop.impedance.in.mW/m.such.that:..
Zb..R.(fault.loop.resistance)
.... L =.length.of.the.fault.loop.equal.to.twice.the.length.Lc.of.the.
circuit
S.=.Sph,.csa.of.the.phase.conductors.=.S
PE
.=.csa.of.the.
protective.conductors
r.=.resistivity.of.the.copper.=.005
.=.ratio.between.the.magnetic.tripping.current.and.the.
maximum.setting.current.of.the.instantaneous.thermal.
tripping.device
The.contact.voltage.(U
L
).for.a.dead.short.is.at.most.equal.to.the.value.determined.
by.the.safety.curve.for.the.operating.time.tm.of.the.integral.unit.in.its.magnetic.tripping.
zone
This condition is generally fulflled for power supplies of 230/415 V. .
(In.fact,.for.U
L
.=.50.V,.a.tm.y.500.ms.would.be.required.and.for.U
L
.=.5.V,..
a.tm.y.110.ms.would.be.required)
The frst condition allows us to calculate the maximum length of the circuit to provide
protection.against.indirect.contact.in.the.TN.scheme
For.the.TN.scheme:
..........
.....
Maximum length of 230/415 V circuits with TN scheme
Csa Irth max = 3 = 6 = 12 = 15
mm
2
A m m m m
15 10 180 90 45 36
16 11 56 8
25 10 98 149 75 60
16 186 93 47 37
5 118 59 3
3 9 46 3
4 16 96 148 74 60
5 190 95 48
3 148 74 37
40 118 59 30
6 5 84 14 71
3 111 56
40 178 89 45
50 14 71 36
10 3 370 185 93
40 96 148 74
50 36 118 59
63 188 94 47
16 3 590 95 148
40 47 36 118
50 378 189 95
63 300 150 75
25 3 9 461 81
40 738 369 185
50 590 95 148
63 468 34 117
....
b
v
v
Id = cq
___ Uo
Zb
Id = cq
___ Uo
Zb
R =

r
__

=
2
r
___
L
S
Lc
S
R =

r
__

=
2
r
___
L
S
Lc
S
L y
__________ cqUoSph
2r1 Irth
L y
__________ cqUoSph
2r1 Irth
ie.L max =
_______________________
08 x Uo x Sph
2 x 00225 x 12 Irth max
ie.L max =
_______________________
08 x Uo x Sph
2 x 00225 x 12 Irth max
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/150
1
Selection according to
utilisation category and
required electrical
durability
Selection for a temperature q y 40 C
Rated operational voltage V 220/240 400/415 440 480/525 600/690
Rated operational currents (according to the rated operational voltage)
integral 63 A 63 63 63 63 63
Rated operational powers (for standard motors)
integral 63 kW 15 33 33 37 55
Control and protection of motors at Ue y 415 V
in.utilisation.categories.AC,.AC3.conforming.to.IEC.60947-4-1,
in.utilisation.categories.AC,.AC3.conforming.to.IEC.60947-6-.
b
b
..
1 Not.having.previously.broken.a.short-circuit.current
2 Having.broken.a.short-circuit.current.10.times.at.30.Ie.(most.common.values.of.
short-circuit.current.during.operation)
..
....
1
1,5
3 4 5
6
7
8
9
10
0 40 6080
100
150
300 63 160
0,01
0,0
0,04
0,06
0,08
0,1
0,
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
1,5
4
5
6
8
10
0
(63.A)
1 2
00
Millions.of.operating.cycles
Current.broken.in.A
1
1,5
3 4 5
6
7
8
9
10
0 40 6080
100
150
300 63 160
0,01
0,0
0,04
0,06
0,08
0,1
0,
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
1,5
4
5
6
8
10
0
(63.A)
1 2
00
Current.broken.in.A
AC-3
AC-42 AC-43
AC-2
Current.
breaking.
limit
AC-3
AC-42 AC-43
AC-2
Current.
breaking.
limit
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/151
1
Selection according to
utilisation category and
required electrical
durability
ac supply, utilisation categories AC-1, AC-3, AC-41, AC-43
Rated operational currents (according to ambient temperature)
With cable csa q y 40 C q y 55 C q y 70 C
integral 63 16.mm
A 63 55 50
ac supply, utilisation categories AC-1, AC-41
Maximum operating rates in operating cycles/hour
On-load
factor 85 %
On-load
factor 25 %
Operation
at Ie max
Operation
at 05 Ie
Operation
at Ie max
integral 63 Operating cycles/h 100 400 1800
Electrical durability Ue y 415 V
..
Note: foruseincategoryAC-44,pleaseconsultyourRegionalSalesOffce.
....
0,01
0,02
0,04
0,06
0,08
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
1,5
2
4
5
6
8
10
20
(63 A)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 20 10 40
60
6380100
Current.broken.in.A
0,01
0,02
0,04
0,06
0,08
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
1,5
2
4
5
6
8
10
20
(63 A)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 20 10 40
60
6380100
Current.broken.in.A
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/15
1
Characteristics
Type integral 63
Number of poles 3
Rated operational current (Ie) In.AC-3 A 63
Rated operational voltage (Ue) V 690
Electrical durability In.AC-3.at.400.V 1.million.operating.cycles
Mechanical durability at.Uc 5.million.operating.cycles
Maximum operating rate
at.ambient.temperature.y.55.C
a
3600.operating.cycles/hour
c.with.converter 600.operating.cycles/hour
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC:.158-1,.04-1,.04-,.364,.947-1/.and.4
UTE:.NF.C.63-110,.C.63-10,.C.63-130,.C.63-650,.C.79-100,.C.0-040
VDE:.0100,.0110,.0113,.0170,.0171,.471,.0660
BS:.544,.475,.4941
NEN,.NBN
Product certifcations ASE,.ASEFA,.ASTA,.BV,.CSA,.DEMKO,.DNV,.GL
NEMKO,.NKK,.VE,.RINA,.SCC,.SETI,.UL,.USSR,.LROS
Protective treatment TH
around.the.device
a
Operation C -.0+.60
Storage C -.40+.80
c
(1)
Operation C -.5+.50
Storage C -.5+.70
Permissible.acceleration
5100.Hz Energised.state:.3.gn
De-energised.state:.3.gn
Shock resistance
Permissible.acceleration
Impulse.duration:.11.ms Energised.state:.8.gn
De-energised.state:.8.gn
Degree of protection Conforming.to.IEC.60144.&.6059 IP.0B
Conforming.to.VDE.0106 Protection against direct fnger contact
Flame resistance Conforming.to.IEC.6095--1,.NF.C.0-455.and.decree.of.-1-81
(JO.7.NC.of.1
st
.and.//198)
Conforming.to.UL.94.-.V0.and.NF.T.51-07
Maximum operating altitude Without.derating m 3000
Operating positions
(without.derating)
In.relation.to.normal..
vertical.mounting.plane
From.main.axis.
(left-right.tilt)
Rated control circuit voltage
(Uc)
a.50.Hz V 4660
a.60.Hz V 4600
c.with.converter V 4,.48,.110
Voltage limits
at.q y 55.C
Operation 08511.Uc
Drop-out 0507.Uc
Average consumption
at.0.C.and.at.Uc
a
Inrush VA 375.(50.Hz),.450.(60.Hz)
Sealed VA 5.(50.Hz.or.60.Hz)
c.(1) Inrush W 300.for.50.ms
Sealed W 8
Heat dissipation W 8.(50.Hz),.11.(60.Hz)
Operating time (2)
at.0.C.and.at.Uc
a.50/60.Hz C ms 135
O ms 70
c.with.
converter
C ms 540
O ms 155
(1) With converter.
(2) The closing time C is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial
contact of the main poles.
The opening time O is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the
moment the main poles separate.
Contactor.breakers..
and.reversing.contactor.breakers.integral.63
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/153
1
Characteristics
Type integral 63
Pole characteristics
Conventional thermal current (Ith) q.y.40.C A 63
Frequency limits
of the operational current
Hz 4060
Rated impulse
Conforming.to.IEC.60947-4 kV 8
Rated insulation voltage (Ui). Conforming.to.IEC.60947-1 V 690
Heat dissipation in.the.power.
circuits.of.the.contactor.breaker..
and.its.protection.module
Operational.current A 5 3 40 50 63
Power.per.pole,.hot.state W 44 5 58 7 9
Rated making capacity
I.rms Conforming.to.IEC.60947-4 A 1.or.15.x.Ith.(above.this.value.the.breaker.trips)
I.peak Conforming.to.IEC.60947- kA 105
Rated breaking capacity
conforming.to..
IEC.60947-
Operational.voltage V 220/240 380/415 440 480/525 600/690
Value.of.cos j 05 05 05 05 05
Cycle.P1.(O-t-CO).Icu.(1) kA rms 50 50 50 35 10
Cycle.P.(O-t.CO-t-CO).Ics.(1) kA rms 50 50 50 35 10
conforming.to.IEC...
60947-6-.ensuring.
reliability.of.operation
Icu.=.Ics. kA rms 50 50 50 30 10
Total breaking time ms 4
Electrical durability in AC-3..
at.Ie.max.and.at.415.V..
after.1.cycle.O-CO-r-CO.at.Isc
Prospective.rms..............
short-circuit.current.at.
terminals.of.a.new.device
kA 3 10 5 35 50
Millions.of.operating.cycles 1 09 06 05 0
Thermal limit With.Isc.max..
at.415.V,.50.Hz
A
2
s 300.x.10
3
Cabling Maximum.csa Minimum.csa
Flexible.cable..
without.cable.end
mm
2
1.x.50.or..x.35 1.x.6
Flexible.cable..
with.cable.end
mm
2
.x.5 1.x.6
Solid.cable mm
2
1.x.50 1.x.6
Characteristics of thermal-magnetic or magnetic only protection modules
Module type LB1 LD03P LB1 LD03M LB6 LD03M LB1 LD03L
Protection Standard.motors Standard.motors Frequent.starting Distribution.circuits
Conforming.to.standards NF.C.63-650 NF.C.63-650 NF.C.63-650 NF.C.63-10
Number.of.poles 3 3 3 3
Number.of.protected.poles 3 3 3 3
Rated.operational.voltage V 690 690 690 690
Max.continuous.current A 1363 1363 1363 1363
Thermal protection Setting.range.(Irth.min/Irth.max) A 10/1345/63 10/1345/63 10/1345/63
Temperature.compensation C -.0+.60 .0+.60 .0+.60 .0+.60
Protection.against..
phase.imbalance
With With Without Without
Tripping.class 0 0
Magnetic protection
conforming.to..
IEC.60947-1//4/6-
Instantaneous.trip.current.
setting.range
Fixed.at.15.Irth.max 61.Irth.max.(usual.
setting..
910.Irth.maxi)
61.Irth.max 36.Irth.max
Tripping.tolerance .0.% .0.% .0.% .0.%
Characteristics of versions without control test function, with padlocking facility
Conforming to standards IEC.60947
Rated operational voltage V 690
Mechanical durability Operating.cycles 10.000
Padlocking By 1, 2 or 3 padlocks, 8 mm shank
Characteristics of versions with control test function and padlocking facility
Conforming to standards IEC.60947,.NF.C.63-130,.VDE.0660,.VDE.0113
Mechanical durability Operating.cycles 10.000
Padlocking 1, 2 or 3 padlocks, shank 8 mm max and 5 mm min. When fush mounting,
interlocking.of.the.enclosure.or.cabinet.door.is.possible
(1) O: breaking short-circuit current (open),
t: time
CO: closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (closed-open)
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/154
1
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts LA1 Lpp
Conventional thermal current (Ith) A 6
Rated insulation voltage (Ui). Conforming.to..
IEC.60947-5-1
V 690
Switching capacity With.U.u.17.V.and.I.u.10.mA mVA 600
Rated
operational
power
a.category..
AC-15.(1)
Voltage V 48 110/127 220/240 380/415 440
1.million.operating.cycles VA 300 500 600 50 500
15.million.operating.cycles VA 160 300 330 300 80
Making capacity a.category.AC-15 VA 1500 3500 6000 7500 7000
Rated
operational
power
c.category..
DC-13.(2)
Voltage V 24 48 110 220 440
1.million.operating.cycles W 10 90 75 68 61
15.million.operating.cycles W 70 50 38 33 8
Making capacity c.category.DC-13 W 800 700 400 60 0
Cabling mm
2
Maximum.csa:..x.5.
Minimum.csa:..x.1.
Isolating auxiliary contacts LA1 LC03p
Rated insulation voltage (Ui).
Conforming.to.IEC.60947..
and.NF.C.63-130
ac.supply V 690
dc.supply V 15
Cabling mm
2
Maximum.csa:..x.15.or.1.x.5
Signalling contacts LA1 LC001
Rated insulation voltage (Ui). Conforming.to..
IEC.60947-5-1
V 50
Operational power
for.00.000.operating.cycles
a
Voltage V 110/127 220
Resistive.load VA 600 750
Lamp.load.(3) VA 90 15
Inductive.load.(4) VA 875 500
Motor (5) VA 160 00
c
Voltage V 24 48 110/125 200
Resistive.load W 100 100 50 50
Lamp.load.(3) W 50 50 6 75
Inductive.load.(4) W 75 75 50 50
Motor (5) W 75 75 6 75
Cabling mm
2

Maximum.csa:..x.5.
Minimum.csa:..x.1
(1) Electrical durability on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current
(cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos j 0.4).
(2) Electrical durability on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, the time
constant increasing with the load.
(3) Lamp load: peak current = 10 times the rated current.
(4) Inductive load: cos j 0.4 for a.c. operation; time constant 7 ms for d.c. operation.
(5) Motor: peak current = 6 times the rated current.
Add-on.current.limiter.and.auxiliary.contacts
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/155
1
Characteristics
Type Interface modules Converters
Used for control
of the integral 32
By.a.programmable.controller,..
with.ac.control.of.the.electromagnet
By.a.programmable.controller,..
with.dc.control.of.the.electromagnet..
Control.on.dc.supply
around the device
Storage C -.5+.70 -.5+.70
Operation C -.5+.50 -.5+.50
Isolation kV rms.voltage.between.inputs.and.outputs:.5 Common.negative.terminal
Cabling Min mm
2
1.x.1 1.x.1
Max mm
2
.x.5 .x.5
Operating limits 085101.Uc 0811.Uc.(2)
Protection

Against.reverse.polarity.(by.diode)..
and.against.overvoltage
Against.reverse.polarity.(by.diode)..
and.against.overvoltage
Module or converter type LA1 LC LA1 LC
580BD 580ED 180BD 080BD 080ED 080FD
Schemes
Indication of input state By.LED
Input signals
(logic.side)
Voltage V c 4
(E1-E)
c.48
(E1-E)
c.54
(E1-E)
c.4.
(E1-E)
c.48.
(E1-E)
c.54
(E1-E)
c.4.(1)
(E3-E)
c.48.(1)
(E3-E)
c.4.(1)
(E3-E)
c.48.(1)
(E3-E)

Current mA 30 0 154.V.
.855.V
50 5 154.V.
.855.V
0 10 0 10
State 0
guaranteed
For.U V <.4 <.48 <.5 <.4 <.48 <.5 <7 <.14 <.7 <14
For.I mA <. <. <. <. <. <. <.5 <.5 <.5 <.5
State 1
guaranteed
For.U V >.04 >.408 >.4 >.04 >.4 >.4 >.14 >.8 >.14 >.8
Supply voltage V

a.
440
(A1-A)
a.
440
(A1-A)
a.
440
(A1-A)
a.
440
(A1-A)
a.
440
(A1-A)
a.
440
(A1-A)
c..
4.(2)
(E1-E)
c
48.(2)
(E1-E)
c..
110.()
(E1-E)
c..
4.(2)
(E1-E)
c..
48.(2)
(E1-E)
c..
110.(2)
(E1-E)
in.millions.of.operating.cycles
5 1
Average
consumption
Inrush 50.Hz VA 160 160 160 375 375 375
60.Hz VA 185 185 185 450 450 450
c
W 50 50 50 300 300 300
Sealed 50/60.Hz VA 1 1 1 5 5 5
c
W 4 4 4 8 8 8
Operating time
at.0.C..
and.at.Uc
Pull-in ms 1530 1530 1035 040 040 1045 30 30 30 35 35 35
Drop-out ms

35 35 830 545 545 830 15 15 15 0 0 0
(1) For direct control by external contact: connect E1-E3.
(2)Warning:forsupplyfromrectifeda.c.,the2followingconditionsmustbemet:thepowersupplymustexceed300VAandthemaximumripplemustbey 14 %.
+ E1
E2
A1
A2
+ E1
E2
A1
A2
LA1 LCp580pD LA1 Lp180BD
+ E1
E2
A1
A2
+ E1
E2
A1
A2
LA1 LCp580pD LA1 Lp180BD
+
(0V)
E1
E3
E2
A1
A2
+
(0V)
E1
E2
A1
A2
LA1 Lp080BD
LA1 Lp080ED
LA1 Lp080FD
+
(0V)
E1
E3
E2
A1
A2
+
(0V)
E1
E2
A1
A2
LA1 Lp080BD
LA1 Lp080ED
LA1 Lp080FD
Interface.modules.and.converters
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/156
1
Characteristics
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC.60337-1
around.the.device
Storage C -.40+.80
Operation C -.5+.55
Permissible.for..
operation.at.Uc
C -.5+.70
Protection against
direct fnger contact
Conforming.to.VDE.0106
Tripping devices
Type LA1 LC070p, LC072p LA1 LC071p
Pull-in voltage Uc 0811 0711
Drop-out voltage Uc 03507
Average consumption Inrush VA 8 8
Sealed VA 4 4
Minimum pulse time ms 10
Reset devices
Type LA1 LC052p
Consumption VA 9
Duration of a reset cycle s 9
Minimum pulse duration s 05
Suppressor module LA9 D09982
Type of protection RC.(resistor-capacitor)
Connection scheme
Operational voltage V y.50
Tripping.and.reset.devices,.coil.suppressor.module
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/157
1
Characteristics
Breaking.capacity.of.integral.63.contactor.breakers,.according.to.the.operational.
voltage and protection module ftted.
Breaking capacity
Protection module Operational voltage
Reference Irth 220/240 V 400/415 V 440 V 500 V 600/690 V
min max
A A kA kA kA kA kA
LBp.LD03p16. 10 13
u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
10
LBp.LD03p1. 13 18
u 130 u 130 u 130 u 130
10
LBp.LD03p. 18 5
u 130 u 130
50 35 10
LBp.LD03p53. 3 3
u 130
50 50 35 10
LBp.LD03p55. 8 40
u 130
50 50 30 10
LBp.LD03p57. 35 50
u 130
50 50 30 10
LBp.LD03p61. 45 63
u 130
50 50 30 10
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/158
1
Selection of protection
module according to the
tripping characteristics
Motor protection (normal starting)
By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03P (1)
By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03M (1)
(1) Thermal protection: the average operating times shown in the above curves are for an
ambientairtemperatureof20C,withoutpriorcurrentfow(coldstate).Theaverage
operatingtimesafterprolongedcurrentfow(hotstate)canbecalculatedbyapplyingthe
coeffcient0.5.
6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000
0,01 s
0,1 s
1 s
10 s
1 min
10
min
100
min
300
min
15 30 54
40 s
P16
P21
P22
P53
P55
P61
P57
irth
35 45
10 13 18 25
23
32
28
40 50
63
195
270
375
480
600
750
945
Time
Current.in.A
6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000
0,01 s
0,1 s
1 s
10 s
1 min
10
min
100
min
300
min
15 30 54
40 s
P16
P21
P22
P53
P55
P61
P57
irth
35 45
10 13 18 25
23
32
28
40 50
63
195
270
375
480
600
750
945
Time
Current.in.A
6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000
0,01 s
0,1 s
1 s
10 s
1 min
10
min
100
min
300
min
irth 10 18 25
23
32
28 35
40
45 63
50
M16
M21
M22
M53
M55
M57
M61
13 13
190
380
600
78
108
240
216 150
156
300
480
760
13 13
Time
Current.in.A
M
a
g
n
e
t
i
c
.
z
o
n
e
T
h
e
r
m
a
l
.
z
o
n
e
6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000
0,01 s
0,1 s
1 s
10 s
1 min
10
min
100
min
300
min
irth 10 18 25
23
32
28 35
40
45 63
50
M16
M21
M22
M53
M55
M57
M61
13 13
190
380
600
78
108
240
216 150
156
300
480
760
13 13
Time
Current.in.A
M
a
g
n
e
t
i
c
.
z
o
n
e
T
h
e
r
m
a
l
.
z
o
n
e
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/159
1
Motor protection (frequent starting)
By magnetic modules LB6 LD03M
Distribution circuit protection
By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03L
6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000
0,01 s
0,1 s
1 s
10 s
1 min
10
min
100
min
300
min
80 110
190
380
600
78
108
240
216 150
156
300
480
760
Time
Current.in.A
M
a
g
n
e
t
i
c
.
z
o
n
e
T
h
e
r
m
a
l
.
z
o
n
e
6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000
0,01 s
0,1 s
1 s
10 s
1 min
10
min
100
min
300
min
80 110
190
380
600
78
108
240
216 150
156
300
480
760
Time
Current.in.A
M
a
g
n
e
t
i
c
.
z
o
n
e
T
h
e
r
m
a
l
.
z
o
n
e
6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000
0,01 s
0,1 s
1 s
10 s
1 min
10
min
100
min
300
min
18 23 63 irth
25
28
32
35
40
45
50
L22
L53
L55
L57
L61
150
150
190
120 240
300
380 190
75
95
Time
Current.in.A
6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000
0,01 s
0,1 s
1 s
10 s
1 min
10
min
100
min
300
min
18 23 63 irth
25
28
32
35
40
45
50
L22
L53
L55
L57
L61
150
150
190
120 240
300
380 190
75
95
Time
Current.in.A
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/160
1
Current limitation and thermal limit on short-circuit
3-phase 400/415 V, 50 Hz
Current.limitation.on.short-circuit.
..
1 18.to.5.A.up.to.45.to.63.A.
Maximum.thermal.limit.on.short-circuit
1 18.to.5.A.up.to.45.to.63.A.
(1) LB1 LD03p22 to LD06p61: rating of associated thermal overload module.
100
80
60
40
10
20
8
6
4
3
2
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,2 0,1 0,4 0,3 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 50 100 200 20
c
o
s

=

0
,
7

=

0
,
5

=

0
,
3

=

0
,
2
5
1(1)
Maximum.peak.current.in.kA
Prospective.rms.short-circuit.current.in.kA
100
80
60
40
10
20
8
6
4
3
2
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,2 0,1 0,4 0,3 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 50 100 200 20
c
o
s

=

0
,
7

=

0
,
5

=

0
,
3

=

0
,
2
5
1(1)
1000
800
600
400
200
100
80
60
40
20
10
1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 50 100 200
(1)
1
Thermal.limit.I
t.in.kA
s.in.the......
short-circuit.protection.zone
1000
800
600
400
200
100
80
60
40
20
10
1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 50 100 200
(1)
1
Thermal.limit.I
t.in.kA
s.in.the......
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/161
1
Current limitation and thermal limit on short-circuit (continued)
3-phase 480/500 V, 50 Hz
Current.limitation.on.short-circuit.
.
1 18.to.5.A.up.to.45.to.63.A.
Current.limitation.on.short-circuit
1 18.to.5.A.up.to.45.to.63.A.
(1) LB1 LD03p22 to LD03p61: rating of associated thermal overload module.
100
80
60
40
10
20
8
6
4
3
2
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,2 0,1 0,4 0,3 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 50 100 200 20 35
c
o
s

=

0
,
7

=

0
,
5

=

0
,
3

=

0
,
2
5
(1) 1
100
80
60
40
10
20
8
6
4
3
2
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,2 0,1 0,4 0,3 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 50 100 200 20 35
c
o
s

=

0
,
7

=

0
,
5

=

0
,
3

=

0
,
2
5
(1) 1
1000
800
600
400
200
100
80
60
40
20
10
1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 50 100 200 35
(1)
1
Thermal.limit.I
t.in.kA
s.in.the.....
1000
800
600
400
200
100
80
60
40
20
10
1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 50 100 200 35
(1)
1
Thermal.limit.I
t.in.kA
s.in.the.....
Contactor.breakers.and..
reversing.contactor.breakers.integral.63
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/16
1
for.control.and.protection.of.motors
(for.customer.assembly)......
3-pole contactor breakers without protection module (1)
Without control test function, with padlocking facility
Standard power ratings of
3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-43
Operational
current
Breaking
capacity (Iq)
for
Ue y 415 V
Basic reference (3)
To be completed by adding
the control circuit voltage code (2)
Weight
220 V
240 V
400 V
415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V
kW kW kW kW kW A kA kg
Black knob
15 30
33
33 37 55 63 50 LD1 LD030p 3700.
.
With control test function and padlocking facility
Operational
current
Breaking
capacity (Iq)
for
Ue y 415 V
Basic reference (3)
Weight
220 V
240 V
400 V
415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V
Black knob (CNOMO, VDE 0113)
15 30
33
33 37 55 63 50 LD4 LD130p 3800.
.
Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop
15 30
33
33 37 55 63 50 LD4 LD030p 3800.
.
3-pole reversing contactor breakers without protection module (1)
Operational
current
Breaking
capacity (Iq)
for
Ue y 415 V
Basic reference (3)
Weight
220 V
240 V
400 V
415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V
Black knob (CNOMO, VDE 0113)
15 30
33
33 37 55 63 50 LD5 LD130p 7600.
.
15 30
33
33 37 55 63 50 LD5 LD030p 7600.
.
(1)Fortheunittofunction,itmustbefttedwithaprotectionmodule,tobeorderedseparately,seepageopposite.
Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380
400
415 440 480 500 600 660
50 Hz B D E F M M U Q N N S Y
60 Hz BC CC CE K FC LC MC MC UX Q S
c.(4). BD ED FD
(3)Variant:UL508typeEapprovedversion(SPCD)at347/600V;toorder,addsuffxH5 to the reference.
Example: LD1 LD030MH5.
(4) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with 1 or 2 converters, including coil suppression devices (2 converters for reversing
contactor breakers).
LD1 LD030p LD1 LD030p
LD5 LC030p LD5 LC030p
References
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
Characteristics:
pages.1/15.to.1/161
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
Characteristics:
pages.1/15.to.1/161
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/163
1
for.control.and.protection.of.motors
(for.customer.assembly).....
Thermal-magnetic protection modules (compensated.and.differential.for.normal.starting.motors) (1)
Fixed magnetic protection, set at 15 Irth max, for mounting on integral 63
of 3-phase motors
Thermal
setting range
(Irth min to Irth max)
Magnetic
protection
Reference Weight
220 V
240 V
400 V
415 V 440 V
480 V
525 V
600 V
690 V
kW kW kW kW kW A A kg
3 55 55 75 10 1013 LB1 LD03P16 0780.
4 9 9 11 15 1318 LB1 LD03P21 0780.
55 11 11 15 185 185 LB1 LD03P22 0780.
75 15 15 185 33 LB1 LD03P53 0780.
9 5 33 840 LB1 LD03P55 0780.
11 5 5 33 45 3550 LB1 LD03P57 0780.
15 33 33 40 55 4563 LB1 LD03P61 0780.
Adjustable magnetic protection from 6 to 12 Irth max, for mounting on integral 63
of 3-phase motors
Thermal
setting range
Magnetic
protection
Reference Weight
220 V
240 V
400 V
415 V 440 V
480 V
525 V
600 V
690 V
3 55 55 75 10 1013 78156 LB1 LD03M16 0780.
4 9 9 11 15 1318 10816 LB1 LD03M21 0780.
55 11 11 15 185 185 150300 LB1 LD03M22 0780.
75 5 33 33 190380 LB1 LD03M53 0780.
9 5 33 840 40480 LB1 LD03M55 0780.
11 5 5 33 45 3550 300600 LB1 LD03M57 0780.
15 33 33 40 55 4563 380760 LB1 LD03M61 0780.
Magnetic only protection modules (for.frequent.starting.motors)
of 3-phase motors
Magnetic protection Reference Weight
220 V
240 V
400 V
415 V 440 V
480 V
525 V
600 V
690 V
kW kW kW kW kW A kg
3 55 55 75 10 78156 LB6 LD03M16 0780.
4 9 9 11 15 10816 LB6 LD03M21 0780.
55 11 11 15 185 150300 LB6 LD03M22 0780.
75 5 33 190380 LB6 LD03M53 0780.
9 5 33 40480 LB6 LD03M55 0780.
11 5 5 33 45 300600 LB6 LD03M57 0780.
15 33 33 40 55 380760 LB6 LD03M61 0780.
(1) Protection modules UL and CSA approved.
LB1 LD03Mpp LB1 LD03Mpp
LB6 LD03Mpp LB6 LD03Mpp
References
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
Characteristics:
pages.1/15.to.1/161
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
Characteristics:
pages.1/15.to.1/161
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1/164
1
Contactor.breakers.integral.63
for.control.and.protection.of.resistive.circuits..
in.category.AC-1
.
Selecting the type of contactor breaker and protection module
Neutral point
connection
Type of
circuit
Equipment
scheme
Combination
contactor breaker + protection module
Neutral.
connection
TNC.
(neutral.and..
PE.combined)
3-pole.+.PEN LD1.LD030p.+.LB1.LD03Lpp
LD4.LD130p.+.LB1.LD03Lpp
LD4.LD030p.+.LB1.LD03Lpp
Note: the PEN conductor must not be isolated,
Neutral point
connection
Type of
circuit
Equipment scheme Combination
contactor breaker + protection module
Neutral.
connection
TNS.
(neutral.and..
PE.separated)
3-pole LD1.LC030p.+.LB1.LC03Lpp
LD4.LC130p.+.LB1.LC03Lpp
LD4.LC030p.+.LB1.LC03Lpp
Note: all live conductors must be isolated. Neutral protection optional.
PEN PEN
Selection 1
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
Characteristics:
pages.1/15.to.1/161
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
Characteristics:
pages.1/15.to.1/161
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1/165
1
for.control.and.protection.of.resistive.circuits..
in.category.AC-1
.....
Without control test function, with padlocking facility
Rated
thermal
current I th
q y 40 C
Maximum
operational
current AC-1
q y 40 C
Maximum
operational
voltage
Breaking
capacity (Iq)
for
Ue y 415 V
Number
of poles
Basic reference
the control voltage code (2)
Weight
A A V kA kg
Black knob
63 63 690 50 3 LD1 LC030p 3700.
Rated
thermal
current I th
q y 40 C
Maximum
operational
current AC-1
q y 40 C
Maximum
operational
voltage
Breaking
capacity (Iq)
for
Ue y 415 V
Number
of poles
Basic reference
Weight
A A V kA kg
Black knob (CNOMO VDE 0113)
63 63 690 50 3 LD4 LD130p 3800.
Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO VDE 0113) Emergency Stop
63 63 690 50 3 LD4 LD030p 3800.
Protection modules (for.customer.assembly)
Thermal-magnetic (compensated)
Thermal
setting range
(Irth min/Irth max)
Magnetic
setting range
(36 Irth max)
Number
of poles
Number of
protected
poles
Reference Weight
A A kg
1013 3978 3 3 LB1 LD03L16 0780.
1318 54108 3 3 LB1 LD03L21 0780.
185 75150 3 3 LB1 LD03L22 0780.
33 95190 3 3 LB1 LD03L53 0780.
840 1040 3 3 LB1 LD03L55 0780.
3550 150300 3 3 LB1 LD03L57 0780.
4563 190380 3 3 LB1 LD03L61 0780.
(1)Fortheunittofunction,itmustbefttedwithaprotectionmodule,tobeorderedseparately.
Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380
400
415 440 480 500 600 660
c.(3) BD ED FD
(3) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with a converter, including coil suppression device.
LD1 LD030p LD1 LD030p
LB1 LD03Lpp LB1 LD03Lpp
References 1
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
Characteristics:
pages.1/15.to.1/161
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
Characteristics:
pages.1/15.to.1/161
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1/166
1
1
.
.
O
O
AUTO
TRIP. +
RESE T
AUTO
TRIP. +
RESE T
O
O
AUTO
TRIP. +
RESE T
1/167
1
Add-on.blocks
.
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (IP.0) (1)
For
use on
Type and number
of blocks per unit
Composition Reference Weight
kg
N/O N/C C/O
LD1, LD4
or LD5
Mounted..
on.RH.side
1.block.of.6.contacts.comprising:
3.signalling.contacts..
contactor state
1.signalling.contact..
control knob in any .
position other than Auto
tripped.on.short-circuit
1 signalling contact tripped.
b
b
b
b
2
1
1
1
LA1 LC010 080
contactor state
tripped.on.short-circuit
1 signalling contact tripped.
b
b
b
2
1
1
1
LA1 LC012 00
contactor state
1 signalling contact tripped,
selectable.by.the.user.
b
b
2
1
1
1
LA1 LC025 0170

1.block.of.3.signalling.contacts.
contactor state.
2 1 LA1 LC020 0100.
LD4
Mounted..
on.LH.side
1.control.circuit.isolating.block.
(1.or..blocks.per.unit).
1 LA1 LC030 0035.
LD5
Mounted..
on.LH.side
1.block.of.3.signalling.contacts.
contactor state.
2 1 LA1 LB021 0100
1.control.circuit.isolating.block.
comprising..contacts.
2 LA1 LC031 0100.
Signalling contact block (IP.10) (1)
For
use on
Type and number
of blocks per unit
kg
N/O N/C C/O
LD1, LD4
or LD5
1.block.comprising.1.signalling.
contact contactor state
Mounted.on.LH.or.RH.side.
1 LA1 LC001 0035
(1) UL and CSA approved.
References 1
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
Characteristics:
pages.1/15.to.1/161
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
Characteristics:
pages.1/15.to.1/161
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1/168
1
.
.
O
Off
AUTO
TRIP.+
RESET
1/169
1
Accessories
...
Electrical tripping and reset devices
For
use on
Type and number
of devices per unit
Basic reference
Weight
kg
LD1, LD4
or LD5
ftted with an.
LA1 LC010 or.
LA1 LC012..
block
1.undervoltage.trip.
.
Time.delay.0.s LA1 LC070p 0150
Instantaneous LA1 LC072p 0150.
or.1.shunt.trip. Instantaneous LA1 LC071p 0150.
LD1, LD4
or LD5
ftted with an.
LA1 LC010 or.
LA1 LC012..
add-on.block
1.remote.electrical..
reset.device.
4.V.50/60.Hz. LA1 LC052B 030
4.V.50.Hz
48.V.50/60.Hz.
LA1 LC052E 030
100/17.V..
50/60.Hz.
LA1 LC052F 030
00/40.V..
50/60.Hz.
LA1 LC052M 030.
(1)Standardcontrolcircuitvoltages(forothervoltages,pleaseconsultyourRegionalSalesOffce).
Volts 24 48 110 120 220/230 240 380/400 415 440
50 Hz B E F M U Q N N
60 Hz B E F F M M Q N
References 1
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
Characteristics:
pages.1/15.to.1/161
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
Characteristics:
pages.1/15.to.1/161
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1/170
1
.
.
O
Off
AUTO
TRIP.+
RESET
AUTO
TRIP.+
RESET
O
O
AUTO
TRIP. +
RESE T
1/171
1
Accessories.and.spare.parts
.......
Interface modules (1)
Mounting Type Control
voltage
c
Operational
voltage
50/60 Hz
Reference Weight
V V kg
On.top.of.the.
integral.unit
Solid.state 54 440 LA1 LD180BD 0110.
Relay.output 4 440 LA1 LD580BD 0110.
48 440 LA1 LD580ED 0110.
Replacement coils and voltage converters (1)
For c control circuit operation
Mounting For use
on integral
Operational
voltage
c (2)
Consumption Description Reference (3) Weight
Inrush Sealed
V W W kg
On.top.of.the.
integral.unit
LDp.LDpppBD 4.(4) 300 8 Coil LX1 LD0249 0300.
Converter LA1 LD080BD 0150.
LDp.LDpppED 48.(4) 300 8 Coil LX1 LD0489 0300.
Converter LA1 LD080ED 0150.
LDp.LDpppFD 110. 300 8 Coil LX1 LD01109 0300.
Converter LA1 LD080FD 0150.
Suppressor module
Mounting Type Operational voltage
50/60 Hz
Reference Weight
V kg
Clip-on RC.circuit.(Resistor-Capacitor).(5). y.50 LA9 D09982 0010.
(1) For reversing contactor breakers, order 2 interface modules or 2 voltage converters.
(2)Whenusedonrectifedsingle-phaseor3-phasesupply,thepeaktopeakripplevoltagemustbeequaltoorlessthan0.14of
the average voltage.
Operating limits 0.8 to 1.1 Uc for an ambient temperature y 40 C.
(3)Itisessentialthatthevoltageconverterbeassociatedwiththespecifccoilindicated.
(4) 24 V and 48 V converters can be operated by Low level input. In this case, the control circuit voltage must be the same as the
supply voltage (24 or 48 V).
(5) An RC circuit provides effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to high frequency interference. Voltage limited to 3 Uc
max. and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max.
Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time).
References 1
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
Characteristics:
pages.1/15.to.1/161
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
Characteristics:
pages.1/15.to.1/161
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1/17
1
Accessories
..
Protection accessories
Description For
use on
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Power terminal
protection shroud
Upstream.power.
terminals.(L1,.L,.L3)
5 LA9 LD701 0050
Sealing cover Protection.module 1 LA1 LC090 0010.
Mounting accessories
Description For
use on
Mounting
on
Reference Weight
kg
Mounting plate LD1,.LD4,.LD5 1.x.75.mm.
7.rail.or..
.x.3.mm.
4.rails.
LA9 LD010 0450.
.
.
Door interlock mechanisms (IP.54)
Type For
use on
Colour
of knob
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Adjustable
from.0.to.185.mm..
with.extension.
(control.knob.mounted..
on.plate.or.door)
LD1 Red LA9 LC330 0400.
Black LA9 LC331 0400.
LD4,.LD5 Red LA9 LC530 0400.
Black LA9 LC531 0400.
LA1 LC090 LA1 LC090
LA9 LD010 LA9 LD010
References
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
Characteristics:
pages.1/15.to.1/161
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
Characteristics:
pages.1/15.to.1/161
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1/173
1
Coils.(replacement.parts)
.
ac operation
Rated control
circuit voltages
Average
resistance at
20 C 10 %
Inductance
of closed
circuit
Voltage
code (1)
Reference Weight
Uc 50 Hz Uc 60 Hz
V V W H kg
4 013 0045 BC LX1 LD020 0300.
4 033 0071 B LX1 LD024 0300.
36 0503 0106 CC LX1 LD030 0300.
48 0845 019 CE LX1 LD040 0300.
4 0987 0 D LX1 LD042 0300.
48 16 09 E LX1 LD048 0300.
110 488 1 K LX1 LD090 0300.
115/10 589 118 FC LX1 LD100 0300.
110 648 148 F LX1 LD110 0300.
17 980 13 G LX1 LD127 0300.
0 198 4 LC LX1 LD180 0300.
30/40 34 45 MC LX1 LD190 0300.
0/30 3051 67 M LX1 LD220 0300.
40 3766 79 U LX1 LD240 0300.
440 8046 167 UX LX1 LD360 0300.
380/400 460/480 9363 0 Q LX1 LD380 0300.
415/440 11646 37 N LX1 LD415 0300.
500 575/600 1518 31 S LX1 LD500 0300.
660 9080 60 Y LX1 LD660 0300.
Consumption.at.50.Hz:.inrush.(cos j: 0.55) 350 to 400 VA; sealed (cos j:.08).0.to.30.VA.
Consumption.at.60.Hz:.inrush.(cos.j: 0.55) 420 to 500 VA; sealed (cos j:.030).4.to.36.VA.
dc operation
The integral 63 can operate on a d.c. supply when ftted with a special coil and corresponding
voltage.converter:.see.page.1/171
(1) Coil voltage reference code, used to complete the basic reference when ordering an integral
unit.
.
LX1 LDppp LX1 LDppp
References
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
Characteristics:
pages.1/15.to.1/161
pages.1/176.to.1/179
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Selection:
pages.1/148.to.1/151
Characteristics:
pages.1/15.to.1/161
pages.1/176.to.1/179
1/174
1
Operation
Auxiliary contact actuators
..
Auxiliary contacts
..
..
....
LD1 LD4
LD1 LD4
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
5
/
L
3
3
/
L
2
1
/
L
1
A
2
A
1
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
A
2
A
1
Contact open
Contact closed
LD1 LD4
LD1 LD4
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
5
/
L
3
3
/
L
2
1
/
L
1
A
2
A
1
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
A
2
A
1
Contact open
Contact closed
U
0 Auto +
U U U
0 Auto +
U U
LA1 LC010 LA1 LC012 LA1 LC025 LA1
LC001
LA1
LC030
LA1
LC020
1
3
1
4
3
2
3
1
2
3
2
4
1
5
1
6
1
8
0
5
0
6
0
8
9
5
9
6
9
8
0
8
0
5
9
8
9
5
9
5
9
6
9
8
9
5
ou
4
2
4
1
(
5
3
)
(
5
4
)
6
3
6
4
1
3
1
4
3
2
3
1
2
3
2
4
1
3
1
4
3
2
3
1
2
3
2
4
1
3
1
4
3
2
3
1
2
3
2
4
LC001
LA1
LC030
LA1
LC020
1
3
1
4
3
2
3
1
2
3
2
4
1
5
1
6
1
8
0
5
0
6
0
8
9
5
9
6
9
8
0
8
0
5
9
8
9
5
9
5
9
6
9
8
9
5
ou
4
2
4
1
(
5
3
)
(
5
4
)
6
3
6
4
1
3
1
4
3
2
3
1
2
3
2
4
1
3
1
4
3
2
3
1
2
3
2
4
1
3
1
4
3
2
3
1
2
3
2
4
53
54
53
54
53
54
53
54
53
54
53
54
53
54
53
54
16 18
15
16 18
15
41
42
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
16 18
15
16 18
15
0608
05
96 98
95
13 23 31
14 24 32
08
05 95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32 95
96
95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32
53
54
41
42
0608
05
96 98
95
13 23 31
14 24 32
08
05 95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32 95
96
95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32
41
42
0608
05
0608
05
0608
05
0608
05
96 98
95
96 98
95
13 23 31
14 24 32
08
05
08
05
08
05
08
05
95
98
95
98
13 23 31
14 24 32 95
96
95
98
95
96
95
98
13 23 31
14 24 32
41
42
96 98
95
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
16 18
15
16 18
15
16 18
15
16 18
15
16 18
15
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
95
98
95
96
95
98 41
42
41
42
41
42
41
42
41
42
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
96 98
95 95
98
95
96
95
98
0608
05
0608
05
96 98
95
08
05
08
05
95
98
95
96
95
98
96 98
95
96 98
95
95
98
95
98
95
96
95
98
95
96
95
98 0608
05
08
05
TRIP. +
RESET
TRIP. +
RESET
TRIP. + TRIP. +
TRIP. + TRIP. +
TRIP. + TRIP. +
AUTO AUTO
AUTO AUTO
TRIP. + TRIP. +
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
Off.+.control.test.function
Off
On,.contactor.open
On,.contactor.closed
Tripped.on.overload
Tripped.on.short-circuit
Manual.reset
Off.after.overload
Off.after.short-circuit
53
54
53
54
53
54
53
54
53
54
53
54
53
54
53
54
16 18
15
16 18
15
41
42
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
16 18
15
16 18
15
0608
05
96 98
95
13 23 31
14 24 32
08
05 95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32 95
96
95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32
53
54
41
42
0608
05
96 98
95
13 23 31
14 24 32
08
05 95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32 95
96
95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32
41
42
0608
05
0608
05
0608
05
0608
05
96 98
95
96 98
95
13 23 31
14 24 32
08
05
08
05
08
05
08
05
95
98
95
98
13 23 31
14 24 32 95
96
95
98
95
96
95
98
13 23 31
14 24 32
41
42
96 98
95
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
16 18
15
16 18
15
16 18
15
16 18
15
16 18
15
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
95
98
95
96
95
98 41
42
41
42
41
42
41
42
41
42
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
96 98
95 95
98
95
96
95
98
0608
05
0608
05
96 98
95
08
05
08
05
95
98
95
96
95
98
96 98
95
96 98
95
95
98
95
98
95
96
95
98
95
96
95
98 0608
05
08
05
TRIP. +
RESET
TRIP. +
RESET
TRIP. + TRIP. +
TRIP. + TRIP. +
TRIP. + TRIP. +
AUTO AUTO
AUTO AUTO
TRIP. + TRIP. +
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
Off
On,.contactor.open
On,.contactor.closed
Tripped.on.overload
Manual.reset
Off.after.overload
Auxiliary.contact.states..
according.to.the.positions.of.the.control.knob
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Characteristics:
pages.1/148.to.1/161
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
Dimensions:
pages.1/176.and.1/177
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Characteristics:
pages.1/148.to.1/161
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
Dimensions:
pages.1/176.and.1/177
1/175
1
Operation
Auxiliary contact actuators
..
Auxiliary contacts
..
..
....
LD5
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
Contact open
Contact closed
LD5
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
Contact open
Contact closed
U
ou
0 Auto +
U U U
ou
0 Auto +
U U
LA1
LC021
LC020
LA1
LC001
LA1
LC031
1
3
1
4
3
2
3
1
2
3
2
4
1
5
1
6
1
8
0
5
0
6
0
8
9
5
9
6
9
8
0
8
0
5
9
8
9
5
9
5
9
6
9
8
9
5
ou
4
2
4
1
5
3
5
4
6
3
6
4
1
3
1
4
3
2
3
1
2
3
2
4
1
3
1
4
3
2
3
1
2
3
2
4
1
3
1
4
3
2
3
1
2
3
2
4
1
3
1
4
3
2
3
1
2
3
2
4
LA1
LC021
LC020
LA1
LC001
LA1
LC031
1
3
1
4
3
2
3
1
2
3
2
4
1
5
1
6
1
8
0
5
0
6
0
8
9
5
9
6
9
8
0
8
0
5
9
8
9
5
9
5
9
6
9
8
9
5
ou
4
2
4
1
5
3
5
4
6
3
6
4
1
3
1
4
3
2
3
1
2
3
2
4
1
3
1
4
3
2
3
1
2
3
2
4
1
3
1
4
3
2
3
1
2
3
2
4
1
3
1
4
3
2
3
1
2
3
2
4
95
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
15
16 18
15
16 18
06
08
05
06
08
05
06
08
05
06
08
05
95
96 98
95
96 98
95
96 98
95
96 98
13 23 31
14 24 32
08
05 95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32 95
96
95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
08
05 95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32 95
96
95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
08
05 95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32 95
96
95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
08
05 95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32 95
96
95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32
42
41 13 23 31
14 24 32
53
54
63
64
16 18
15
16 18
15
53
54
63
64 42
41 13 23 31
14 24 32
53
54
63
64 42
41 13 23 31
14 24 32
53
54
63
64
06
08
05 95
96 98 08
05 95
98
95
96
95
98 16 18
15
53
54
63
64
13 23 31
14 24 32
0608
05
08
05
06
08
05
96 98
95
08
05 95
98
95
96
95
98
96 98
95 95
98
95
96
95
98 06
08
05
08
05
96 98
95 95
98
95
96
95
98
96 98
95 95
98
95
96
95
98
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
41
42
13 23 31
14 24 32
06
08
05
08
05
53
54
63
64
13 23 31
14 24 32
41
42
41
42
13 23 31
14 24 32 95
96
95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32
98 13 23 31
14 24 32
96 98
95
16 18
15
13 23 31
14 24 32
06
08
05
08
05
53
54
63
64
13 23 31
14 24 32
41
42
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
16 18
15
13 23 31
14 24 32
53
54
63
64
13 23 31
14 24 32
41
42
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
16 18
15
13 23 31
14 24 32
53
54
63
64
13 23 31
14 24 32
41
42
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
16 18
15
13 23 31
14 24 32
53
54
63
64
13 23 31
14 24 32
41
42
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
16 18
15
13 23 31
14 24 32
TRIP. +
TRIP. +
TRIP. +
TRIP. +
TRIP. +
RESET
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
On,.reversing.contactor.open
On,.closed
On,.closed
Tripped.on.overload
Manual.reset
Off.after.overload
Off
95
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
15
16 18
15
16 18
06
08
05
06
08
05
06
08
05
06
08
05
95
96 98
95
96 98
95
96 98
95
96 98
13 23 31
14 24 32
08
05 95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32 95
96
95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
08
05 95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32 95
96
95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
08
05 95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32 95
96
95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
08
05 95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32 95
96
95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32
42
41 13 23 31
14 24 32
53
54
63
64
16 18
15
16 18
15
53
54
63
64 42
41 13 23 31
14 24 32
53
54
63
64 42
41 13 23 31
14 24 32
53
54
63
64
06
08
05 95
96 98 08
05 95
98
95
96
95
98 16 18
15
53
54
63
64
13 23 31
14 24 32
0608
05
08
05
06
08
05
96 98
95
08
05 95
98
95
96
95
98
96 98
95 95
98
95
96
95
98 06
08
05
08
05
96 98
95 95
98
95
96
95
98
96 98
95 95
98
95
96
95
98
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
41
42
13 23 31
14 24 32
06
08
05
08
05
53
54
63
64
13 23 31
14 24 32
41
42
41
42
13 23 31
14 24 32 95
96
95
98 13 23 31
14 24 32
98 13 23 31
14 24 32
96 98
95
16 18
15
13 23 31
14 24 32
06
08
05
08
05
53
54
63
64
13 23 31
14 24 32
41
42
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
16 18
15
13 23 31
14 24 32
53
54
63
64
13 23 31
14 24 32
41
42
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
16 18
15
13 23 31
14 24 32
53
54
63
64
13 23 31
14 24 32
41
42
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
16 18
15
13 23 31
14 24 32
53
54
63
64
13 23 31
14 24 32
41
42
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
13 23 31
14 24 32
16 18
15
13 23 31
14 24 32
TRIP. +
TRIP. +
TRIP. +
TRIP. +
TRIP. +
RESET
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
On,.reversing.contactor.open
On,.closed
On,.closed
Tripped.on.overload
Manual.reset
Off.after.overload
Off
Reversing.contactor.breakers.integral.63
Auxiliary.contact.states..
according.to.the.positions.of.the.control.knob
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Characteristics:
pages.1/148.to.1/161
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
Dimensions:
pages.1/176.and.1/177
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
Characteristics:
pages.1/148.to.1/161
References:.
pages.1/16.to.1/173
Dimensions:
pages.1/176.and.1/177
1
1/176
Contactor breakers integral 63
Control circuit: ac Control circuit: dc
LDp LDp30 + LBp LD03 LDp LDp30 + LBp LD03 + LA1 LD080
1
1
,
5
1
1
,
5
146
158,5
19
4
3
= = 8
= =
90
9
7
,
5
4
5
1
0
0
,
5
1
0
1
6
,
5
1
8
,
5
1
1
,
5
146
158,5
19
5
0
LA1.LD080
8
=
90
1
0
4
,
5
4
5
1
0
0
,
5
1
0
1
6
,
5
=
= =
Reversing contactor breakers integral 63 Current limiter
LD5 LDp30 + LBp LD03M LA9 LB920
1
1
,
5
1
5
3
,
5
7
5
148
160,5
194 181
45
1
0
0
,
5
4
5
1
9
,
5
59 63 59
1
0
1
6
,
5
6
53,5
1
4
6
1
0
3
1
1
5
51
2M4
Add-on blocks
For mounting on contactor breakers integral 63
LA1 LC012
LA1 LC001
LA1 LC010
LA1 LC07p
LA1 LC052 LA1 LC020 LA1 LC030
(1.ou.)
LA1 LC025
LA LC001
13
LA1.LC001
11
LA1.LC01
6
LA1.LC010
LA1.LC070
LA1.LC071
LA1.LC07
51 1
9
9
LA1.LC001
11 1
LA1.LC05
For mounting on reversing contactor breakers integral 63
LA1 LC021, LC025
LA1 LC001
LA1 LC031 LA1 LC012
LA1 LC001
LA1 LC010
LA1 LC07pp
LA1 LC052p LA1 LC020
13
11
LA1.LC05
LA1.LC01
LA1.LC001
1 6
LA1.LC031
LA1.LC01
13 11
LA1.LC01
LA1.LC001
6
LA1.LC010
LA1.LC070
LA1.LC071
LA1.LC07
51 1
Schemes
version
Integral.63.contactor.breakers.
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
Schemes:
pages.1/178.and.1/179
1
1/177
Mounting
On 75 mm 6 rail, with mounting plate LA9 LD010 On 32 mm 4 rails, at 220 mm centres On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 P
1
0
G 4xM5
75
c 33
1
3
7
,
5
1
8
,
5
6
6
LA9.LD010
c 15 G
1
0
DZ5.ME9
c G AF1.EA5
1
0
a b c G c G c G
LD1 66 1375 19 8 LD1 19 8 LD1 19 8
LD4 66 1375 19 8 LD4 19 8 LD4 19 8
LD5 8 1535 194 63 LD5 194 63 LD5 194 63
With mounting plate LA9 LD010
SOn 32 mm 4 rails, at 120 mm centres
c 31
G
LA9.LD010
6
8
1
0
1
1
0
40
DZ5.ME5
c G
LD1 19 78
LD4 19 78
LD5 194 94
Flush mounting (contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers) Minimum electrical
clearance
4.(1)
4
6
=
=
1
a
a1
a
(
2
)
(
3
)
3
0
.
3
0
.
a a1 a2
LD1 LD030 90
LD4 LDp30 90
LD5 LDp30 181
LA1 LC010 13
LA1 LC012 13
LA1 LC010 + LA1 LC052p 51
LA1 LC012 + LA1 LC052p 51
(1) Maximum door thickness for interlocking by LD4 and LD5.
(2) Centre of operating handle.
(3) Fixing centre.
Adjustable door interlock mechanisms LA9 LC33p and LA9 LC53p
For mounting on LD4 LDp30 and LD5 LDp30 Door drillings
= = 8
1
0
5
90
= =
4
3
63 59 59
1
0
5
1
0
5
181
45
7
5
1
0
5
1
0
5
07357.(LD4)
09359.(LD5)
54
6
5
= =
=
=
5
4
54
Schemes (continued)
version
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
Schemes:
pages.1/178.and.1/179
1
1/178
Contactor breakers integral 63 with protection module LBp Reversing contactor breakers
integral 63 with protection
module LBp
LD1 LD030 + LB1 LD03p LD4 LDp30 + LB1 LD03p LD5 LDp30 + LB1 LD03M ou LD03P
/
T
1
4
/
T
6
/
T
3
A
A
1
Q1
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
5
/
L
3
/
T
1
4
/
T
6
/
T
3
LB6 LD03M
/
T
1
4
/
T
6
/
T
3
5
/
L
3
3
/
L
1
/
L
1
A
A
1
Q1
/
T
1
4
/
T
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
5
/
L
3
A
A
1
A
A
1
/
T
1
4
/
T
6
/
T
3
LB6 LD03M
Add-on blocks
For contactor breakers LD4 For contactor breakers LD1 or LD4 and reversing contactor breakers LD5
Mounted on LH side Mounted on RH side
5
4
5
3
5
4
5
3
(
6
3
)
(
6
4
)
LA1.LC030
Isolator
1.or..LA1.LC030
1
3
3
3
1
1
4
4
3
1
3
1
4
3
1
3
9
5
9
8
1
3
1
4
3
1
3
4
1
4
LA1.LC010 LA1.LC01 LA1.LC00 LA1.LC001

9
8
9
5
9
6
0
8
0
5
0
6
1
8
1
5
1
6 0 Auto +
4
0
5
0
8
4
1
3
1
4
3
1
3
LA1.LC05
4
9
8
9
5
9
6
9
5
Control.knob
position
Breaker
Trip.signallingt
Short-circuit
signalling
Pour contacteurs-disjoncteurs-inverseurs LD5
Montage to gauche
1
3
1
4
3
1
3
4
1
4
LA1.LC01 LA1.LC001
4
5
4
5
3
6
4
6
3
LA1.LC031
Isolator
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
Dimensions,.mounting:
pages.1/176.and.1/177
Schemes
version
1
1/179
Tripping devices (1) for LD1, LD4, LD5 Remote electrical reset devices (1) for LD1 to LD5
LA1 LC071 LA1 LC070, LC072 LA1 LC052p
C
1
C
2
D
1
D
2
U<
M
B4
B
B3
B1
Dclench
Rarmement
TRIP.+.
RESET
The.use.of.instantaneous.auxiliary
contact.block.LA1.LC00.prevents
the.use.of.tripping.devices.or.electrical
reset.devices
(1)ForcontactorbreakersandreversingcontactorbreakersalreadyfttedwithanLA1LC010orLA1LC012instantaneousauxiliarycontactblock.
Interface modules
LA1 LD180 LA1 LD580
+
E1
E2
A1
A2
+
E1
E2
A1
A2
Voltage converter LA1 LD080 (supply with contactor breakers for c control circuit operation)
Switching by control contact Switching by Low level input
24 or 48 V 24 or 48 V
+
(0V)
E1
E3
E
A1
A
+
(0V)
E1
E
A1
A
+
(0V)
E1
E3
E
A1
A
+
S
u
p
p
l
y
Low
level
input
General:
pages.1/14.to.1/147
References:
pages.1/16.to.1/173
Dimensions,.mounting:
pages.1/176.and.1/177
Schemes (continued)
version
1/180 1/180
1
4
1
8
6
7
2
60.mm
4
5
1
6
1
3
60.mm
2
2
D
B
4
0
0
4
4
D
B
4
0
0
4
5
1/181 1/181
1
TeSys starters and bare devices
Plates.for.mounting.on.60.mm.busbar
Description
D
B
4
0
0
4
6
Description
The TeSys mounting plate system for busbars simplifes the installation of motor
feeder.components.used.in.your.electrical.installations..
Power.distribution.is.performed.by.a.busbar
The mounting plates are ftted directly on this busbar, by snap-on mounting, .
thus.implementing.electrical.connection
This system offers numerous benefts:
space.saving.in.cabinets
fast,.safe.and.reliable.electrical.and.mechanical.connection
easy.connection
protection.for.users.against.electric.shocks.by.direct.contacts.(IP0).by.using.covers
equipment fexibility and modularity
increased.equipment.availability:.easier.maintenance
power.supply.without.drilling.(connectors).from.15.to.10.mm
.
The 3P and 4P busbar
The.busbar.interaxis.is.60.mm.Depending.on.the.cross.section.of.the.bars,..
the.busbar.can.withstand.a.maximum.current.of.630.A
Note: The bars forming the busbar are not part of the TeSys LA9Z offer.
They are not supplied by us. Their selection depends on the maximum current
needed for your installation (see next page).

Support for 3P and 4P busbar (1)
These.are.available.in..versions:.three-pole.and.four-pole
For.applications.having.to.comply.with.the.UL.standard,.use.the.LA9ZX01508.
support.(3P.only)
The mounting plates .(2)
These.allow.mounting.of.the.power.feeder.components.consisting.of:
a.GV.motor.circuit.breaker,.mounted.alone.or.in.conjunction.with.a.TeSys.K..
or.TeSys.D.contactor
a.GV3.motor.circuit.breaker,.mounted.alone.or.in.conjunction.with.a.TeSys.D.
contactor
a.TeSys.U.starter-controller
a.TeSys.GV7.motor.circuit.breaker
an.LD63.integral.contactor-circuit.breaker
a.NSX100-50.or.NSX400-630.A.circuit.breaker
Accessories
Accessories.complete.the.offer:
covers.(3).for.5.and.10.mm.bars
end.covers.(4)
a.base.plate.(5)
1P.connectors.(6)
3P.connectors.on.mounting.plate.(7)
a.spring.terminal.3P.connection.module.(8)
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
D
B
4
0
0
4
7
Installation examples.
1/18 1/18
1
Plates.for.mounting.on.busbars
Short-circuit.withstand.capability
Curves
D
B
4
0
1
3
9
Determining the spacing between busbar supports

(1)
Spacing.between.busbar.supports.(mm)
P
e
a
k
.
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
.
I
p
k
.
(
k
A
)
(1) Depending on the short-circuit current.
References:
pages.1/184.to.1/187
1/183 1/183
1
Plates.for.mounting.on.busbars
Short-circuit.withstand.capability
Curves
Load resistance of busbar assemblies
For an ambient temperature of 35 C and a busbar temperature of 65 C
Cross section mm
2
12 x 5 15 x 5 20 x 5 25 x 5 30 x 5 12 x 10 20 x 10 30 x 10
Permissible current A 00 50 30 400 450 360 50 630
In.the.event.of.changes.in.climatic.conditions,.the.following.curve.indicates.the.correction.factor.K
.to.be.applied
2,2
2,1
2,0
1,9
1,8
1,7
1,6
1,5
1,4
1,3
1,2
1,1
1,0
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125
0
C
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
Factor.K
Busbar.temperature.(C)
A
m
b
i
e
n
t
.
t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
.
Example:.In.normal.operating.conditions,.a.tinned.busbar.of.30.x.10.can.permanently.withstand.630.A
For.a.load.of.800.A,.the.correction.factor.K
.to.be.applied.will.be.13.(
800 A
630 A
).As.a.result,.the.temperature.rise.in.the.busbars.will.reach.85.C
D
F
5
6
9
5
5
9
References:
pages.1/184.to.1/187
1/184 1/184
1
Busbar.support
References
IEC busbar supports and accessories
Sale
in ind
Q
Unit
reference
3-pole For.1,.15,.0,.5,.30.x.5/10.mm
.busbars 10 LA9ZX01495
End.covers.for.3-pole.busbar.support 10 LA9ZX01573
4-pole For.1,.15,.0,.5,.30.x.5/10.mm
End.covers.for.4-pole.busbar.support.(5.left,.5.right) 10 LA9ZX01131
UL busbar supports and accessories
Sale
in ind
Q
Unit
reference
3-pole For.1,.0,.30.x.5/10.mm.busbars 10 LA9ZX01508
Base.plate.40.x.700 2 LA9ZX01515
End.covers.for.busbar.support 10 LA9ZX01573
Other accessories
Sale
in ind
Q
Unit
reference
Covers, length 1 m
For.1-30.x.5.mm
For.1-30.x.10.mm
General characteristics
Conformity with IEC.61439-,.UL508
Degree of protection IP0.with.cover.LA9ZX01244.or.LA9ZX01245
Thermal resistance C 10
Rated current frequency Hz 50/60
Rated
operating
current
Depending.on.type.of.
busbars.and.at.35.C
mm 1.x.5 15.x.5 0.x.5 5.x.5 30.x.5 1.x.10 0.x.10 30.x.10
A 00 50 30 400 450 360 50 630
K-factor.to.be.applied.
depending.on.ambient.
temperature
C 35 45 50 60 60 40 55 60
K 1 075 065 035 035 09 055 035
Rated insulation voltage V 690.as.per.IEC.60947-1.and.NF.C.0-040
Rated operating voltage V 690
Peak
permissible
rated current
With.busbar.support LA9ZX01508 (UL) LA9ZX01495 and LA9ZX01485 (IEC)
Bar.dimensions.............. mm 1.x.5 1.x.10 1.x.5 1.x.10 0.x.10 30.x.5 30.x.10
Rated.current kA 35 35 30 35 35 45 55
Maximum thermal stress A
2
s 1.x.10
8
4.x.10
8
1.x.10
8
11.x.10
8
11.x.10
8
6.x.10
8
48.x.10
8
Support fastening by screws mm 4.x.6 4.x.5
D
B
4
0
0
3
9
0
D
B
4
0
0
5
8
LA9ZX01573 LA9ZX01495
D
B
4
0
0
3
9
D
B
4
0
0
LA9ZX01131 LA9ZX01485
D
B
4
0
0
3
9
0
D
B
4
0
0
4
1
LA9ZX01573 LA9ZX01508
Curves:
1/185 1/185
1
Choice.of.mounting.plates
References
For TeSys GV2 motor circuit breakers
Operating
current AC-3
440 V
Protection
by motor
circuit breaker
For contactor Mounting
plate Ixh
Sale
in ind
Q
Unit
reference
Mounting plate, 1-way
25 A GV.ME
GV.P
GV.LE
LC1.D
LC1.K
LP4.K06-K1
45.x.00 4 LA9ZA32621
32 A GV.ME
GV.P
GV.LE
LC1.D 45.x.00 4 LA9ZA32434
Mounting plate, 2-way (3)
25 A GV.ME
GV.P
GV.LE
LC1.D
LC1.K
LP4.K06-K1
90.x.00 2 LA9ZA32622
32 A GV.ME
GV.P
GV.LE
LC1.D 90.x.00 2 LA9ZA32623
TeSys U starter-controllers
Operating
current AC-3
440 V
Protection by
power base
Mounting
plate Ixh
Sale
in ind
Q
Unit
reference
32 A LUB1,.LUB3 45.x.00 4 LA9ZA32427
32 A LUB1,.LUB3 45.x.60 4 LA9ZA32428
Pour disjoncteurs-moteurs TeSys GV3
Operating
current AC-3
440 V
Protection by
power base
For contactor Mounting
plate Ixh
Sale
in ind
Q
Unit
reference
Mounting plate, 1-way (1)
63 A GV3.P 54.x.00 4 LA9ZA32624
GV3.P LC1.D40A65.A 54.x.60 4 LA9ZA32625
Mounting plate, 2-way (1) (2)
63 A GV3.P LC1.D40A65.A 117.x.60 4 LA9ZA32626
(1) Contactor-circuit breaker combination without additional part.
(2) Use the LAD 9R3 kit for the execution of changeover contactors.
(3) Use the LAD 9R1 or LAD 9R1V kit for the execution of changeover contactors.
Note: the mounting plate rails can be shifted vertically in 1.25 mm increments.
D
B
4
0
0
3
4
LA9ZA32621
D
B
4
0
0
3
5
LA9ZA32434
D
B
4
0
0
3
3
LA9ZA32622
D
B
4
0
0
LA9ZA32623
D
B
4
0
0
3
7
LA9ZA32427
D
B
4
0
0
3
6
LA9ZA32428
D
B
4
0
0
3
1
LA9ZA32624
D
B
4
0
0
3
0
LA9ZA32625
D
B
4
0
0
9
LA9ZA32626
1/186 1/186
1
Choice.of.mounting.plates
References
For TeSys integral contactor-circuit breakers
Operating
current AC-3
440 V
Protection by
contactor-circuit breaker
Mounting
plate Ixh
Sale in
ind Q
Unit
reference
63 A LD1,.LD4.LD 108.x.60 1 LA9ZA32627
For TeSys GV7 motor circuit breakers
Operating
current AC-3
440 V
Protection by
contactor-circuit breaker
Mounting
plate Ixh
Sale in
ind Q
Unit
reference
80 A GV7 104.x.190 1 LV429372
For Compact NSX circuit breakers
Operating
current AC-3
440 V
Mounting
plate Ixh
Sale in
ind Q
Unit
reference
100-250 A Mounting.plate.for.3P.circuit.breakers 104.x.190 1 LV429372
Mounting.plate.for.4P.circuit.breakers 139.x.51 1 LV429373
400-630 A Mounting.plate.for.3P.circuit.breakers 139.x.70 1 LV432623
Mounting.plate.for.4P.circuit.breakers 184.x.84 1 LV432624
Characteristics of busbar mounting plates
Type of mounting plate LA9ZA32621
LA9ZA32622
LA9ZA32427
LA9ZA32428
LA9ZA32434
LA9ZA32623
LA9ZA32624
LA9ZA32625
LA9ZA32626
LA9ZA32627
Degree of protection as
per IEC 60529
IP 0
Conductor cross section
(colour:.black)
mm
2
4 6 10
AWG.1 AWG.10 AWG.8
Type of conductor insulating
material
PVC 105.C
Permissible current A 5 3 63
Rated insulation voltage V 690.as.per.IEC.60947-1.and.NF.C.0-040
Peak rated current kA 6 6 10
Maximum thermal stress A
2
s .x.10
5
.x.10
5
3.x.10
5
D
B
4
0
0
8
LA9ZA32627
D
B
4
0
0
3
8
8
LV432623
D
B
4
0
0
3
8
8
7
LV432624
Curves:
1/187 1/187
1
Terminals,.connection.module
References
Terminals
I max Sale in
ind Q
Unit
reference
One-pole for fat bars,
5 mm
2
70.A Capacity.4-35.mm
50 LA9ZX01285
25 LA9ZX01287
3P cover, width 84 mm 10 LA9ZX01413
Terminals on mounting plate
I max Sale in
ind Q
Unit
reference
3P, on mounting plate +
cover, for 12 x 5 to 30 x 10
busbars
1 LA9ZX01243
Connection module
I max Sale in
ind Q
Unit
reference
3P, spring terminal
connection + cover, for
busbars of 12 x 5 to 30 x 10
80.A Capacity.15-16.mm 8 LA9ZX01563
Connection by connectors
LA9ZX01285
270 A maxi
LA9ZX01287
400 A maxi
LA9ZX01243
440 A
LA9ZX01563
4 A 80 A
Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max
Flexible.wire.with.end-piece mm
2
4 35 16 70 35 10 15 16
Multi-strand.wire mm
2
4 35 16 70 35 10 15 16
Rigid.wire mm
2
4 35 15 16
Tightening.torque Nm .x.5
Supplied..
without.cover
.x.10
Supplied..
without.cover
.x.5-10 .x.5-10
D
B
4
0
0
7
LA9ZX01285
D
B
4
0
0
4
3
LA9ZX01287
D
B
4
0
0
6
LA9ZX01243
D
B
4
0
0
4
0
LA9ZX01563
Curves:
1/188
1
Selection guide
Installation system
TeSys Quickft for motor starter components
Components.with.spring.terminals
Functions Assembly and connection of motor starter components with spring terminals, without
using tools
Communication with the processing part
Product type Power circuit pre-wiring
components
Control-command pre-wiring components for
TeSys motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME
TeSys motor circuit-breakers GV3 P
Splitter box Parallel interface module, with Advantys STB
network interface module
For contactors TeSys.D.(9.to.5.A) TeSys.D.(40.to.65.A)
Type of starter Direct.and.reversing Direct Reversing Direct Reversing
Coil control Yes No Yes No Yes Yes
Use with motor starters Limited.to.60.A.(Ith)
Limited.to.8.starters.(1)

Number of motor starters 1 8.starters.per.splitter.box 4.starters.per.module
Type of connection or bus HE.10 Modbus.Plus,.Fipio,.CANopen,.Ethernet,.TCP/IP,.
Profbus DP, INTERBUS, DeviceNet
Number of channels 16.inputs/1.outputs
References
LAD 3p LAD 9AP3pp LU9 G02 STB EPI2145
Pages 1/195 1/197 1/197 1/197
(1) With TeSys circuit-breakers GV2 ME and upstream terminal block LAD 3B1.
1/189
1
Functions Assembly and connection of motor starter components with spring terminals, without
using tools
Communication with the processing part
Product type Power circuit pre-wiring
components
TeSys motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME
TeSys motor circuit-breakers GV3 P
Splitter box Parallel interface module, with Advantys STB
network interface module
For contactors TeSys.D.(9.to.5.A) TeSys.D.(40.to.65.A)
Type of starter Direct.and.reversing Direct Reversing Direct Reversing
Coil control Yes No Yes No Yes Yes
Use with motor starters Limited.to.60.A.(Ith)
Limited.to.8.starters.(1)

Number of motor starters 1 8.starters.per.splitter.box 4.starters.per.module
Type of connection or bus HE.10 Modbus.Plus,.Fipio,.CANopen,.Ethernet,.TCP/IP,.
Profbus DP, INTERBUS, DeviceNet
Number of channels 16.inputs/1.outputs
References
LAD 3p LAD 9AP3pp LU9 G02 STB EPI2145
Pages 1/195 1/197 1/197 1/197
(1) With TeSys circuit-breakers GV2 ME and upstream terminal block LAD 3B1.
1/190
1
Presentation
TeSys Quickft is a modular system which standardises and simplifes setting up of
motor.starters.with.its.pre-wired.control.and.power.circuits.
Installation of a motor starter is therefore quick, simple, safe and fexible. In addition,
this.system:.
enables.the.motor.starter.to.be.customised.at.a.later.date,.
reduces.maintenance.time.and
optimises.panel.space.by.reducing.the.number.of.terminals.and.intermediate.
interfaces.and.the.amount.of.ducting.
System for motor starters with spring terminals
Motor starters with TeSys GV2 ME circuit-breakers
From.0.to.18.A.max,
TeSys.GV.ME.circuit-breakers.combined.with.LC1.D.contactors.from.9.to.5.A.
(spring.terminal.version),
Quickft pre-wired power and control connections.
Motor starters with TeSys GV3 P circuit-breakers
From.9.to.65.A.max,
TeSys.GV3.P.circuit-breakers.combined.with.LC1.D.contactors.from.40.to.65.A.
(spring.terminal.version),
Quickft pre-wired control connections only,
For.pre-wired.power.connections,.use.busbar.sets.from.the.TeSys.d.40.to.65.A.
contactor.range.(see.page.5/85)
This.range.comprises.pre-wiring.components.for:.
the.power.circuits,
the.control.circuits
Power circuit pre-wiring components
(motor.starters.with.TeSys.GV.circuit-breakers.only)
a power circuit connection kit.comprising,.for.each.starter,.a.plate.for.mounting.
the.contactor.and.the.circuit-breaker.and.two.power.connection.modules,
a power.splitter box.for..or.4.starters,
an upstream terminal block.for.a.power.supply.up.to.60.A..(16.mm
),.
an outgoing terminal block for.connection.of.the.motor.power.supply.cables.and.
the.earth.cables.(6.mm
)
Note:.with.GV3.circuit-breakers,.no.accessories.are.required.for.pre-wiring.of.the.
power.circuit.The.GV3.Ppp.outgoing.terminal.block.can.be.removed.
This.circuit-breaker.is.also.sold.with.only.one.terminal.block.(reference:.GV3.Ppp1)
Control circuit pre-wiring components
(motor.starters.with.TeSys.GV.and.GV3.circuit-breakers)
a control circuit connection.module which.plugs.directly.into.the.contactor.and.
the.circuit-breaker.on.each.starter.This.module.incorporates.status.and.control.data.
for.this.motor.starter
a parallel wiring module which.concentrates.the.data.of.each.motor.starter:
HE 10.connector,.for.centralised.applications.Data.is.transmitted.to.the.PLC.via.
the.Advantys.Telefast.pre-wired.system
STB,.designed.for.decentralised.automation.architectures.This.module.is.suitable.
for use in an Advantys STB confguration for connection to the PLC via a feld bus.

b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
Motor.starter.with.GV.ME.circuit-breakers
Motor.starter.with.GV3.P.circuit-breakers
Installation system
Description:
page.1/01
Characteristics:
pages.1/0.and.1/03
References:
pages.1/199.to.1/01
Dimensions:
pages.1/04.and.1/05
Schemes:
pages.1/06.and.1/07
Description:
page.1/01
Characteristics:
pages.1/0.and.1/03
References:
pages.1/199.to.1/01
Dimensions:
pages.1/04.and.1/05
Schemes:
pages.1/06.and.1/07
1/191
1
Control/command
HE 10 connection ...
............
Connection on bus using Advantys STB (1)
Confguration example (for.motor.starter.applications.only):
Power supply module
Module STB.PDT.3100
Connection base STB.XBA.00
Terminal block STB.XTB.1130
Parallel interface module (2)
Module STB.EPI.145
Connection base STB.XBA.3000
Network interface module (3)
CANopen STB.NCO.1010.(4)
Fipio STB.NFP.10
Ethernet TCP/IP STB.NIP.10
InterBus STB.NIB.1010.(4)
Profbus DP STB.NDP.1010.(4)
DeviceNet STB.NDN.1010.(4)
Modbus Plus STB.NMP.10
Terminal block STB.WTS.10
....
TeSys Quickft LAD 9AP3 pp used with modules APP1 Cpp
The.motor.starter.is.connected.to.an.APP 1Cp module.7.using.an.adapter.plate.
APP 2CX.8.and.a.connection.cable.APP 2AH40H060 10
Information.is.available.on.the.module.for.each.motor.starter:
1.output:.motor.control,.
.inputs:.circuit-breaker.status.and.contactor.status
b
b
(1) Please consult our catalogue "Advantys STB I/O. The open solution".
(2) For 4 direct or 2 reversing motor starters.
(3) Reference to be selected according to the network used.
(4) Optimised version.

1 Automation.platform
2 Connection.cable..
TSXCDPpp.or.ABFH20pp
3 Splitter.box.LU9 G02
1 Automation.platform
2 Connection.cable..
TSXCDPpp.or.ABFH20pp
3 Splitter.box.LU9 G02
1 3
2
2
1 3
2
2
4 Network.interface.module
5 Supply.module
6 Parallel.interface.module
4 Network.interface.module
5 Supply.module
6 Parallel.interface.module
4 5 6 4 5 6
9
10
7 8
9
10
7 8
7 TeSys Quickft module
8 Adapter.plate.APP 2CX
9 Splitter.box..LU9 G02.for.8.direct.motor.
starters,.with.channel.connections.on.the.
APP 1C.module.side.by.two.HE.10.
connectors.(0-way).and.on.theTeSys.
Quickft side, by RJ45 connectors
10 Connection.cable.APP 2AH40H060
7 TeSys Quickft module
8 Adapter.plate.APP 2CX
9 Splitter.box..LU9 G02.for.8.direct.motor.
starters,.with.channel.connections.on.the.
APP 1C.module.side.by.two.HE.10.
connectors.(0-way).and.on.theTeSys.
Quickft side, by RJ45 connectors
10 Connection.cable.APP 2AH40H060
Installation system
Description:
pages.1/01.and.1/01
Characteristics:
pages.1/0.and.1/03
References:
pages.1/199.to.1/01
Dimensions:
pages.1/04.and.1/05
Schemes:
pages.1/06.and.1/07
Description:
pages.1/01.and.1/01
Characteristics:
pages.1/0.and.1/03
References:
pages.1/199.to.1/01
Dimensions:
pages.1/04.and.1/05
Schemes:
pages.1/06.and.1/07
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1/19
Power components
(only for motor starters with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers)
Power kits LAD 3p
Each.motor.starter.requires.a.power.kit.which.consists.of.a.plate.1 and two Quickft
technology.power.connection.modules.2
The.plate.is.used.for.mounting.TeSys.D.contactors.3 (9.to.5. A,.direct.or.reversing,.
with spring terminals and ftted with a.c. or d.c. coil) and the GV2 ME circuit-breaker
4 only This.plate.is.mounted.on.two.35.mm.7.rails.or.is.screwed.onto.a.base.plate
The.two.power.connection.modules.2a and 2b are.identical,.whatever.the.rating.of.
the.contactor.up.to.18.A
The.upper.power.connection.module.2a connects.the.power.between.the.splitter.box.
and.the.circuit-breaker
The.lower.power.connection.module.2b connects.the.power.between.the.circuit-
breaker.and.the.contactor
Splitter boxes LAD 32p
Splitter.boxes.5 are.available.for..or.4.starters.
They.can.be.combined.to.create.motor.starters.up.to.60.A.per.power.supply
A.reversing.starter.occupies.a.width.equivalent.to.that.of..direct.starters
Direct.supply.of.power.to.the.splitter.boxes.is.possible.up.to.5. A.(4.mm
)
Upstream terminal block LAD 3B1
The.upstream.terminal.block.6.performs.two.functions:
power.supply.up.to.60.A.(16.mm
),
power.supply.between.two.connected.splitter.boxes
The upstream terminal block connects to the splitter box using Quickft technology. .
It.is.positioned.on.the.splitter.box.or.straddling.two.splitter.boxes.and.takes.up..
a.width.equivalent.to.two.motor.starters
b
b
Outgoing terminal block LAD 331
The.outgoing.terminal.block.7.performs.two.functions:
connection.of.the.motor.power.supply.cables.up.to.6.mm
,
connection.of.the.motor.earth.cables
In.addition,.the.terminal.block.enables.quick.connection.and.disconnection.for.
maintenance,.avoiding.the.risk.of.phase.reversal
The.outgoing.terminal.block.connects.to.the.downstream.spring.terminals.on..
the contactor, using Quickft technology.
b
b
Description
Installation system
2a
1 5 6
2b
7
3
4
Presentation:
pages.1/194.and.1/195
Characteristics:
pages.1/0.and.1/03
References:
pages.1/199.to.1/01
Dimensions:
pages.1/04.and.1/05
Schemes:
pages.1/06.and.1/07
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1/193
Control/command components
Control circuit connection modules LAD 9 AP3 pp
The.control.circuit.connection.module.1.plugs.directly.into.the.control.terminals.on.
the.contactor.and.on.the.TeSys.GV.ME.or.TeSys.GV3.P.motor.circuit-breaker,.in.the.
location.provided.for.the.front-mounting.block.
It.is.compatible.with.all.contactor.ratings.up.to.18.A.for.TeSys.GV.ME.and.65.A.for.
TeSys.GV3.P.
Mechanical.locking.2 of.the.system.onto.the.top.of.the.contactor.ensures.a.perfect.
connection,.whatever.the.operating.conditions.(vibrations,.knocks,.etc).
These.modules.are.available.in.4.versions:.for.direct.or.reversing.starter,.with.or.
without.contactor.coil.interface.relay
The.coil.control.can.be.ac.or.dc,.up.to.a.50.V.and.c.130.V
The.version.without.relay.is.designed.to.control.the.contactor.coils.with.no.interface,.
at.4.V.dc
The.version.with.relay.has.a.connector.for.connecting.the.contactor.power.supply.
Module.LAD9 AP3pp incorporates,.in.its.lower.part,.several.external.connectors:
3.RJ45.connector,.for.connecting.the.automation.system
4 -way.connector,.for.connecting.the.contactor.power.supply.(only.on.versions.with.
relay)
5 -way.connector,.for.connecting.an.external.contact.in.series.with.the.contactor.coil.
(supplied.complete.with.shunt)
Parallel wiring modules
The.parallel.wiring.system.makes.it.possible.to.connect.motor.starters.which.
incorporate TeSys Quickft technology to the processing unit (PLC) quickly and
without.any.need.for.tools.The.parallel.wiring.module.provides.the.status.and.
command.information.for.each.motor.starter.
Control.connection.modules.LAD9 AP3pp.are.connected.to.the.parallel.wiring.
modules.using.RJ45.cables.LU9Rpp.6,.which.are.available.in.different.lengths.
The.following.information.is.available.for.each.motor.starter:
.inputs:.circuit-breaker.status.and.contactor.status,
1.output:.contactor.coil.control
A.direct.motor.starter.uses.one.RJ45.channel
A.reversing.motor.starter.uses.two RJ45 channels
Note: for motor starters built using TeSys GV3 circuit-breakers and TeSys D contactors, the
Quickftpre-wiredsystemallowsthecontactortobemountedbelowthecircuit-breakeror
mounting of the two devices side by side.
b
b
Parallel wiring module LU9 G02
This.module.7 enables.connection.of.up.to.8.direct.or.4.reversing.motor.starters.
directly.to.the.I/O.modules.of.PLCs.It.is.used.with.the.Advantys.Telefast.pre-wiring.
system.(1).
This.splitter.box.is.optimised.for.use.with.card.TSX DMZ28DTK
Dedicated parallel interface module STB EPI 2145 (2)
This.module.enables.4.direct.or..reversing.motor.starters.to.be.connected.via.the.
Advantys.STB.distributed.I/O.solution.With.STB.network.interface.modules,.motor.
starters.can.be.connected.to.the.following.communication.networks:.Modbus.Plus,.
FIPIO, CANopen, Ethernet TCP/IP, Profbus DP, INTERBUS and DeviceNet.
(1) Please consult our catalogue Power supplies, splitter boxes and interfaces.
(2) Please consult our catalogue "Advantys STB I/O. The open solution".
Description (continued)
Installation system
6
1
7
1
5 4 3 2
Presentation:
pages.1/194.and.1/195
Characteristics:
pages.1/0.and.1/03
References:
pages.1/199.to.1/01
Dimensions:
pages.1/04.and.1/05
Schemes:
pages.1/06.and.1/07
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1/194
LAD 352
GV2 MEpp3
LC1 Dpp3
LAD 331
LAD 3B1
LC2 Dpp3
Power.circuit.pre-wiring.
components
Direct.starter
Power.circuit.pre-wiring.
components
Reversing.starter
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1/195
Power circuit pre-wiring components (only for motor starters with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers)
Description Maximum
connection csa
Application Sold in
lots of
Reference Weight
kg
Upstream terminal block 16.mm
(1) Power.supply.of.1.or...
power.splitter.boxes
1 LAD 3B1 01
Description Extension by Number of starters Reference Weight
kg
Power splitter box, 60 A LAD.3p . LAD 322 010
4 LAD 324 040
kg
Direct starter
Power connection kit 1.plate.LAD.311.for.GV.ME.and..
.power.connection.modules.LAD.341
LAD 352 0078
Reversing starter
To.build.a.reversing.starter,.order..kits.LAD 352
Description Maximum
connection csa
Application Sold in
lots of
Reference Weight
kg
Outgoing terminal block 6.mm
Connection.of..
motor.cables.
10 LAD 331 0050
Description No of
starters
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Plate for mounting a
GV2 ME circuit-breaker and a contactor
1 10 LAD 311 004
Power connection module 1 10 LAD 341 0018
(1) Cables with one end pre-crimped are available to allow fast connection. References:
1 set of 3 x 6 mm
2
cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B061, length 2 m: LAD 3B062 and length 3 m: LAD 3B063),
1 set of 3 x 10 mm
2
cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B101, length 2 m: LAD 3B102 and length 3 m: LAD 3B103),
1 set of 3 x 16 mm
2
cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B161, length 2 m: LAD 3B162 and length 3 m: LAD 3B163).
References
Installation system
LAD 3B1
LAD 324
LAD 352
LAD 331
Presentation:
pages.1/194.and.1/195
Characteristics:
pages.1/0.and.1/03
References:
pages.1/199.to.1/01
Dimensions:
pages.1/04.and.1/05
Schemes:
pages.1/06.and.1/07
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1/196
LAD 9AP3D2 LAD 9AP3D1
LC2 Dpp3
GV2 MEpp3
LAD 32p
STB EPI 2145
LU9 G02
LC1 Dpp3
LC2 DppA3
GV3 Ppp
LC1 DppA3
Note: Circuit-breakers TeSys GV3 P and contactors LC1 D40A3 to D65A3 can be mounted side by side, using a set of S-shape busbars (GV3 S).
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1/197
Control-command pre-wiring components
Description TeSys D
coil voltage
Type of coil
control relay
Type of
starter
Reference Weight
kg
Control connection modules a.1.50.V.or.
c.5130.V
Electromechanical Direct LAD 9AP31 0150
Reversing LAD 9AP32 000
c.4.V Without.relay Direct LAD 9AP3D1 0140
Reversing LAD 9AP3D2 0190
Parallel wiring modules (c 24 V)
Description Connectors Reference Weight
kg PLC side Motor starter side
Splitter box .x.HE.10
0-way
8.x.RJ45 LU9 G02 060
Description Connectors Reference Weight
kg PLC side Motor starter side
Advantys STB parallel
interface module
4.x.RJ45 STB EPI 2145 0165
Connection cables
Between the control connection module and the splitter box LU9 G02 or STB EPI 2145
Connectors Length Reference Weight
m kg
2 x RJ45 connectors 03 LU9 R03 0045
1 LU9 R10 0065
3 LU9 R30 015
Between splitter box LU9 G02 and the PLC
Type of connection Gauge Csa Length Reference Weight
PLC side Splitter box side
AWG mm
2
m kg
HE 10
20-way
HE 10
20-way
034 05 TSX CDP 053 0085
1 TSX CDP 103 0150
TSX CDP 203 080
3 TSX CDP 303 0410
5 TSX CDP 503 0670
8 0080 1 ABF H20 H100 0080
ABF H20 H200 0140
3 ABF H20 H300 010
Bare wires HE 10
20-way
034 3 TSX CDP 301 0400
5 TSX CDP 501 0660
Separate components
Description Characteristics Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Spring terminal connections for:
the.external.contact
the.auxiliary.power.supply
b
b
-way,.5.mm.pitch
Wire.csa:.05.mm
10 APE 1PRE21 000
Self-stripping connector for:
the.external.contact
the.auxiliary.power.supply
b
b
-way,.5.mm.pitch
Wire.csa:.075.mm
16 APE 1PAD21 000
Connecting cable
between.module.APP.1Cp.and..
splitter.box.LU9.G0.(.length:.06.m)
Connectors:.
1.x.HE.10,.30-way.
.x.HE.10,.0-way
1 APP 2AH40H060 0400
Installation system
LAD 9AP3p
Presentation:
pages.1/194.and.1/195
Characteristics:
pages.1/0.and.1/03
References:
pages.1/199.to.1/01
Dimensions:
pages.1/04.and.1/05
Schemes:
pages.1/06.and.1/07
1/198
1
Characteristics
Type of control connection module LAD 9AP3pp
General environment
Standard IEC.60439-1
Certifcations UL,.CSA.
Degree of protection Conforming.to.IEC.6059 IP.40.(mounted.assembly)
Resistance to
incandescent wire
Conforming.to.IEC.60695--1 C 960
Shock resistance Conforming.to.IEC.60068--7 11.ms.and.15.gn.(half.sine.wave)
Vibration resistance Conforming.to.IEC.60068--6.
and.BV/LR
gn 100.Hz.:.4.and.3100.Hz:.0,7
Resistance to
Conforming.to.IEC.61000-4- Level.3
Resistance to radiated felds Conforming.to.IEC.61000-4-3 V/m 10.(61000.MHz)
Immunity to fast
transient currents
Conforming.to.IEC.61000-4-4 Level.3
Surge withstand Conforming.to.IEC.61000-4-5 kV .in.common.mode,.06.in.differential.mode
Wave.form:.1/50.s.-.8/0.s
Immunity to
radioelectric felds
Conforming.to.IEC.61000-4-6 V 10.(01580.MHz)
Ambient air temperature Operation.in..
foor-standing enclosure
C -.5+.60
Operation.in..
wall-mounted.enclosure
C -.5+.40
Storage C -.40+.70
Space required around
mounted assembly
For.inserting.cables..
and.heat.dissipation
mm >.30
Degree of pollution 3
Assembly fxing
(with.TeSys.GV.circuit-breakers.only)
On 2 x 35 mm rails or with 2 x 5.5 mm screws on plate for GV2 ME
Suitable wire
csa
Voltage.supply.
for.power
Number.of.wires 3
Flexible.cable.with.cable.end mm 16
Flexible.cable..
without.cable.end
mm 5
Solid.cable mm 5
Voltage.supply.
for.contactor.
coil.control
Number.of.wires
Flexible.cable..
with.cable.end.(max)
mm 15
Flexible.cable..
without.cable.end.(max)
mm 5
Solid.cable.(max) mm 5
3-phase power circuit characteristics
Maximum
current
Per.power.
supply
Conforming.to.IEC.60439-1 A 60.(single.power.supply.to.one.or.more.sub-bases.or.splitter.boxes)
Per.sub-base Conforming.to.IEC.60439-1 A 60
GV2 operating limit 80.%.of.Imax.at.60.C.ambient.temperature.(see.table.on.opposite.page)
Maximum current per starter A 18.(with.an.empty.slot.between.two.starters)
Insulation voltage V 750
Operational voltage V 690
U imp kV 6
Rated operational frequency Hz 50-60
Rated short-circuit current
conditional Isc at 415 V
Conforming.to.IEC.60439-1 kA 50
Permissible
short-time rating Icw
Conforming.to.IEC.60439-1 kA 91.(for.70.ms)
Contactor coil control voltage V a.150.(with.interface.relay)
V c.54.(without.interface.relay)
V c.5130.(with.interface.relay)
Installation system
Presentation:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Description.:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Characteristics:.
pages.1/198.and.1/199.
References:.
pages.1/195.to.1/197
Schemes:.
pages.1/0.and.1/03
Presentation:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Description.:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Characteristics:.
pages.1/198.and.1/199.
References:.
pages.1/195.to.1/197
Schemes:.
pages.1/0.and.1/03
1/199
1
Table of GV2 circuit-breaker current limitation at 60C ambient temperature with TeSys Quickft
Circuit-breaker reference GV2 ratings (1) Maximum current of GV2 with TeSys Quickft
GV2 ME06 1.-.16.A 18.A
GV2 ME07 16.-.5.A .A
GV2 ME08 5.-.4.A 3.A
GV2 ME10 4.-.63.A 5.A
GV2 ME14 6.-.10.A 8.A
GV2 ME16 9.-.14.A 11.A
GV2 ME20 13.-.18.A 144.A
GV2 ME21 17.-.3.A 18.A
.... ................
Electromechanical relay characteristics
Type of control connection module LAD 9AP31, LAD 9AP32
Characteristics of the electromechanical relay control circuit (PLC side)
Rated voltage at Us V c 4
Energisation threshold at 40 C V c 19
Drop-out voltage at 20 C V c 4
Maximum operational voltage V c 30
Maximum current at Us mA 15
Drop-out current at 20 C mA 1
Maximum power dissipated at Us W 036
Supply failure ms 5
Characteristics of the electromechanical relay output circuit
Type of contact 1F
Maximum switching voltage V a 50
V c 130
Frequency of the operating current Hz 50/60
Maximum current of the contact A 4.
Other characteristics of the electromechanical relay
Maximum operating time
at Us (including.bounce)
Between.coil.energisation
and.closing.of.the.contact
ms 10
Between.coil.de-energisation
and.opening.of.the.contact
ms 5
Maximum operating ratet No.load Hz 10
At.Ie Hz 05
Mechanical life In.millions.of.operating.cycles 0
Dielectric strength V 1000.(50/60.Hz).-.1.mn
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 5.
Primary/secondary rated insulation voltage V 300
Maximum current
for 500 000 operations
4.V.-.DC13 A 06
30.V.-.AC15 A 09
(1) Thermal trip setting range.
.... ................
Electromechanical relay characteristics
Type of control connection module LAD 9AP31, LAD 9AP32
Characteristics of the electromechanical relay control circuit (PLC side)
Rated voltage at Us V c 4
Energisation threshold at 40 C V c 19
Drop-out voltage at 20 C V c 4
Maximum operational voltage V c 30
Maximum current at Us mA 15
Drop-out current at 20 C mA 1
Maximum power dissipated at Us W 036
Supply failure ms 5
Characteristics of the electromechanical relay output circuit
Type of contact 1F
Maximum switching voltage V a 50
V c 130
Frequency of the operating current Hz 50/60
Maximum current of the contact A 4.
Other characteristics of the electromechanical relay
Maximum operating time
at Us (including.bounce)
Between.coil.energisation
and.closing.of.the.contact
ms 10
Between.coil.de-energisation
and.opening.of.the.contact
ms 5
Maximum operating ratet No.load Hz 10
At.Ie Hz 05
Mechanical life In.millions.of.operating.cycles 0
Dielectric strength V 1000.(50/60.Hz).-.1.mn
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 5.
Primary/secondary rated insulation voltage V 300
Maximum current
for 500 000 operations
4.V.-.DC13 A 06
30.V.-.AC15 A 09
(1) Thermal trip setting range.
Installation system
Presentation:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Description.:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Characteristics:.
pages.1/198.and.1/199.
References:.
pages.1/195.to.1/197
Schemes:.
pages.1/0.and.1/03
Presentation:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Description.:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Characteristics:.
pages.1/198.and.1/199.
References:.
pages.1/195.to.1/197
Schemes:.
pages.1/0.and.1/03
1/00
1
Dimensions
Dimensions
Mounted assembly, with TeSys GV2 ME circuit-breakers and TeSys D contactors
1 Circuit-breaker.and.contactor.support.plate.
2 Power.connection.module
3 Power.splitter.box
4 Control.splitter.box
5 Upstream.terminal.block
6 Outgoing.terminal.block
(1) 2 starters: 90 mm, 4 starters: 180 mm, 8 starters: 360 mm.
Mounted assembly with TeSys GV3 P circuit-breakers and TeSys D contactors (LC1 D40A3 LC1 D65A3)
Vertical mounting Side by side mounting
55
2
3
1
119
55
1
1
2
141
2
141 119
1
3
8
1
1
3
1 Control.splitter.box
2 Set.of.GV3.G64.busbars
3 Set.of.S-shape.busbars.GV3.S
.
135
110
120
(1)
2
5
5
2
8
5
1
4
4
3 2
5
6
135
110
120
(1)
2
5
5
2
8
5
1
4
4
3 2
5
6
Installation system
Presentation:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Description.:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Characteristics:.
pages.1/198.and.1/199.
References:.
pages.1/195.to.1/197
Schemes:.
pages.1/0.and.1/03
Presentation:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Description.:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Characteristics:.
pages.1/198.and.1/199.
References:.
pages.1/195.to.1/197
Schemes:.
pages.1/0.and.1/03
1/01
1
schemes
Dimensions
Parallel wiring modules
Splitter box LU9 G02 Parallel wiring module Advantys STB EPI 2145
1
0
75
5
6
3
5
1
5
5
47 70
4
2
3
5
1
2
0
5
28,1 (1)
(1) Dimension to be multiplied by the number of STB EPI 2145 modules present in the
confguration.
Schemes
Splitter box LU9 G02
..
(2) 20-way HE10 input connector.
(3) 20-way HE10 output connector.
(4) Wire colours and corresponding HE10 connector pin numbers.
LU9 G02
c 24 V
C
o
m
C
o
m
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RJ45
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RJ45
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
(2)
(3)
X10
X9
Control.contact
NC
...Output.common
NC
Contactor.status
NC
Circuit-breaker.
status
Input.common
Control.contact
NC
Output.common
NC
Contactor.status
NC
Circuit-breaker.
status
Input.common
O
u
t
p
u
t
s
I
n
p
u
t
s
4.V...Aux
Colours of
TSX CDPppp
connection cable
wires (4)
1...White
2...Brown
3...Green
4...Yellow
5...Grey
6...Pink
7...Blue
8...Red
9...Black
10.Violet
11.Grey-pink
12.Red-blue
13.White-green
14.Brown-green
15.White-yellow
16.Yellow-brown
17.White-grey
18.Grey-brown
19.White-pink
20.Pink-brown
Fault.X1
Fault.X
Fault.X3
Fault.X4
Fault.X5
Fault.X6
Fault.X7
Fault.X8
Pole.status.X1
Pole.status.X
Pole.status.X3
Pole.status.X4
Pole.status.X5
Pole.status.X6
Pole.status.X7
Pole.status.X8
+.4.V.Aux
-.4.V.Aux
+.4.V.Aux
-.4.V.Aux
Control.X1
Control.X
Control.X3
Control.X4
Control.X5
Control.X6
Control.X7
Control.X8
NC
NC
NC
NC
+..c.4.V
-..c.4.V
+..c.4.V
-..c.4.V
Not.used.with..
TeSys Quickft
LU9 G02
c 24 V
C
o
m
C
o
m
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RJ45
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
RJ45
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RJ45
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
(2)
(3)
X10
X9
Control.contact
NC
...Output.common
NC
Contactor.status
NC
Circuit-breaker.
status
Input.common
Control.contact
NC
Output.common
NC
Contactor.status
NC
Circuit-breaker.
status
Input.common
O
u
t
p
u
t
s
I
n
p
u
t
s
4.V...Aux
Colours of
TSX CDPppp
connection cable
wires (4)
1...White
2...Brown
3...Green
4...Yellow
5...Grey
6...Pink
7...Blue
8...Red
9...Black
10.Violet
11.Grey-pink
12.Red-blue
13.White-green
14.Brown-green
15.White-yellow
16.Yellow-brown
17.White-grey
18.Grey-brown
19.White-pink
20.Pink-brown
Fault.X1
Fault.X
Fault.X3
Fault.X4
Fault.X5
Fault.X6
Fault.X7
Fault.X8
Pole.status.X1
Pole.status.X
Pole.status.X3
Pole.status.X4
Pole.status.X5
Pole.status.X6
Pole.status.X7
Pole.status.X8
+.4.V.Aux
-.4.V.Aux
+.4.V.Aux
-.4.V.Aux
Control.X1
Control.X
Control.X3
Control.X4
Control.X5
Control.X6
Control.X7
Control.X8
NC
NC
NC
NC
+..c.4.V
-..c.4.V
+..c.4.V
-..c.4.V
Not.used.with..
TeSys Quickft
Installation system
Presentation:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Description.:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Characteristics:.
pages.1/198.and.1/199.
References:.
pages.1/195.to.1/197
Schemes:.
pages.1/0.and.1/03
Presentation:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Description.:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Characteristics:.
pages.1/198.and.1/199.
References:.
pages.1/195.to.1/197
Schemes:.
pages.1/0.and.1/03
1/0
1
Schemes (continued)
Wiring schemes
With relay
LAD9 AP31 LAD9 AP32
Q1.Thermal-magnetic.motor.circuit-breaker
(1) Contactor coil.
(2) Interface relay.
KA1
Shunt 1
P
h
N
4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
2
4
2
3
Q1
KM1 (1)
(2)
2
2
2
1
KA1
Shunt 1
P
h
N
4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
2
4
2
3
Q1
KM1 (1)
(2)
2
2
2
1
4 3
Shunt 1 Shunt 2
2 1 8 7 6 5
1
4
N P
h
N P
h
1
3
1
4
1
3
2
4
2
3
Q1
KM1
KA1 KA2
4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5
1
4
1
3
KM2
(1) (1)
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
(2) (2)
4 3
Shunt 1 Shunt 2
2 1 8 7 6 5
1
4
N P
h
N P
h
1
3
1
4
1
3
2
4
2
3
Q1
KM1
KA1 KA2
4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5
1
4
1
3
KM2
(1) (1)
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
(2) (2)
Installation system
Presentation:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Description.:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Characteristics:.
pages.1/198.and.1/199.
References:.
pages.1/195.to.1/197
Dimensions:.
pages.1/00.and.1/01
Presentation:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Description.:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Characteristics:.
pages.1/198.and.1/199.
References:.
pages.1/195.to.1/197
Dimensions:.
pages.1/00.and.1/01
1/03
1
Schemes (continued)
Wiring schemes (continued)
Without relay
LAD9 AP3D1 LAD9 AP3D2
Q1.Thermal-magnetic.motor.circuit-breaker
(1) Contactor coil.
4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
Q1
KM1
(1)
Shunt 1
4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
Q1
KM1
(1)
Shunt 1
4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
Q1
KM1
4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5
1
4
1
3
2
2
2
1
KM2
(1) (1)
Shunt 1 Shunt 2
4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
Q1
KM1
4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5
1
4
1
3
2
2
2
1
KM2
(1) (1)
Shunt 1 Shunt 2
Installation system
Presentation:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Description.:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Characteristics:.
pages.1/198.and.1/199.
References:.
pages.1/195.to.1/197
Dimensions:.
pages.1/00.and.1/01
Presentation:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Description.:.
pages.1/190.and.1/191
Characteristics:.
pages.1/198.and.1/199.
References:.
pages.1/195.to.1/197
Dimensions:.
pages.1/00.and.1/01
1/04
1
2 3 4 1
8
10
6
11
13
2
1
5 5
7
9
12
5
6
10 15 14
8
12
AK5-ASS-3-Q
1/05
1
Presentation
The.assembly.of.automated.control.and.distribution.panels.requires.the.use.of.
products.that.are.not.only.safe.but.also.simple.and.quick.to.mount.and.cable
The.AK5.pre-assembled.busbar.system.meets.all.these.criteria.by.incorporating.
prefabricated.components.which.cater.for.3.principal.functions:
Carrying of electric current
By.the.pre-assembled.4-pole.busbar.system.1,.160.A.at.35.C
4-pole.busbar.systems.can.be.used.for.3-phase.+.Neutral.or.3-phase.+.Common
The.busbar.systems.are.available.in.6.lengths:.344,.45,.560,.668,.99,.1100.mm
An.incoming.supply.terminal.block.2.is.located.at.the.extreme.left.of.the.busbar.
system
"Knock-out".partitions.allow.connection.of.the.power.supply.from.above.or.below.to.
connectors.3.which.are.protected.by.a.removable.cover.4.
Upstream.protection.of.the.busbar.system.is.shown.on.page.1/06
Current distribution
Tap-off.units.5.(factory.assembled).are.available.in.4.versions:
-pole,
3-pole,
4-pole.(3-phase.+.Neutral),
4-pole.(3-phase.+.Common)
The.tap-offs.clip.onto.the.busbar.system.with.instantaneous.mechanical.and.
electrical.connection.to.the.busbars
.ratings.are.available:.16.and..3.A
The.tap-off.units.ensure.not.only.rapid.mounting,.but.also.a.neat.appearance.for.the.
power.distribution.system.and.complete.safety.when.accessing.under.live.circuit.
conditions
Component mounting
Component.mounting.plates.with.incorporated.tap-off.allow.mounting.of.and.supply.
of.power.to.components
They.are.available.in.5.A.or.50.A.ratings
These.mounting.plates.clip.onto.the.mounting.rail.11,.which.also.supports.the.busbar.
system,.and.at.the.same.time.make.electrical.connection.via.the.incorporated.tap-
off
.types.of.mounting.plate.are.available:
single.plates.6.(height.105.mm),.with.bolt-on.35.mm.wide.7 rail.7,.which.may.be.
bolted.on.in.one.of.two.positions,.allowing.height.adjustment.of.10.mm
double.plates.8 and 14.(height.190.mm),.with.two.bolt-on,.35.mm.wide.7 rails 9.
mounted on 100 mm fxing centres; each rail may be bolted on in one of 4 positions,
allowing.height.adjustment.in.10.mm.steps.These.plates.are.supplied.with.
connectors.12.to.allow.wiring.between.control.and.protection.devices
Single.mounting.plates.enable.the.following.types.of.distribution:
-pole.(Ph.+.N).and.(Ph.+.Ph)
3-pole,
4-pole.(3.Ph.+.N.or.3.Ph.+.common)
Double.mounting.plates.enable.the.following.types.of.distribution:.-pole.(Ph.+.N,..
Ph.+.Ph),..3-pole.or.4-pole.(3Ph+N.and.3Ph.+.common)
Extension.plates.10.can.be.bolted.onto.single.and.double.mounting.plates.to.enable.
mounting.of.wider.components.Using.a.side.stop.15 in.conjunction.with.these
extension.plates.also.supports.the.AK5.JB.busbar.system.when.used.vertically
A.control.terminal.block.13.comprising.a.support.plate.bolted.onto.the.single.or.
double.mounting.plates.and.a.10-pole.plug-in.block,.enables.connection.of.the.
control.circuit.wires.(csa.15.mm
.max)
.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Power distribution in control panels
Pre-assembled.panel.busbar.system.AK5
Presentation:
page.1/05
Characteristics:
pages.1/06.and.1/07
References:
pages.1/10.and.1/11
Mouting.possibilities:
pages.1/08.and.1/09
Presentation:
page.1/05
Characteristics:
pages.1/06.and.1/07
References:
pages.1/10.and.1/11
pages.1/08.and.1/09
1/06
1
Characteristics
Busbar system characteristics
Product certifcations UL,.CSA,.DNV,.LROS.
Degree of protection Against.access.to.live.parts IP.XXB.conforming.to.IEC.6059
Flame resistance Conforming.to.IEC.60695 C 850.(incandescent.wire)
Conforming.to.standard.UL.94 V0
Number of conductors AK5.JB14p 4
Supply current
a
Rated operational frequency Hz 50.or.60
Rated operational current Ambient.temperature.35.C A 160
Coeffcient K to be applied
according.to.the
ambient.temperature
C 35 40 45 50 55 60
K 1 096 09 088 083 078
Rated insulation voltage Conforming.to.IEC.60439-1 V 690
Conforming.to.UL.and.CSA V 600
Operational voltage Off-load.plugging-in.and.unplugging,.with.supply.switched.on
Conforming.to.IEC.60439-1 V 400
Plugging-in.and.unplugging,.with.supply.switched.off
Conforming.to.IEC.60439-1 V 690
Maximum permissible
peak current
kA 5
Maximum let-through energy A
s 1.x.10.
7
Upstream short-circuit (1)
and overload protection
Type.of.protection Schneider.Electric.circuit-breaker Fuses
NS.160.H NS.160.H aM gF
Rating A 160 160 160 160
Prospective..
short-circuit.current
kA 36 70 100 100
Operational.current A 160 160 160 160
Cabling Maximum.csa Minimum.csa
Flexible.cable.with.cable.end mm
70 5
Solid.cable mm
70 5
Tightening.torque Nm 10
Mounting position Horizontal.or.vertical.(2) Fixing.with.screws.provided
(1) For conditions where conditional short-circuit current exceeds 25 kA.
(2) Using side stop AK5 BT01 on mounting plates AK5 PA.
.
Presentation:
page.1/05
Characteristics:
pages.1/06.and.1/07
References:
pages.1/10.and.1/11
pages.1/08.and.1/09
Presentation:
page.1/05
Characteristics:
pages.1/06.and.1/07
References:
pages.1/10.and.1/11
pages.1/08.and.1/09
1/07
1
Tap-off characteristics
Type AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5
PC12 PC12PH PC13 PC14 PC131 PC32L PC32LPH PC33 PC34 PC331
PC33L PC34L
Product certifcations UL,.LROS,.CSA,.DNV
Degree of protection Against.access.to.live.parts:.IP.XXB.conforming.to.IEC.59
Polarity Phase. Phase. 3-phase 3-phase 3-phase Phase Phase. 3-phase 3-phase 3-phase
+ + +. +. +. +. +. +.
Neutral Phase Neutral Common Neutral Phase Neutral Common
Conductor csa mm
.x.5 .x.5 3.x.5 4.x.5 3.x.5 .x.4 .x.4 3.x.4 4.x.4 3.x.4
(UL.cables) 1.x.15 1.x.15
Conductor colours Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black
Blue Blue White Blue Blue White
(Neutral) (Neutral) (Neutral) (Neutral) (Common)
Permissible current A 16 16 16 16 16 3 3 3 3 3
10 10
(Common) (Common)
Rated insulation voltage V 690.conforming.to.IEC.60439-1
Rated peak current kA 6
s 100.000 00.000
Type of conductor insulation. PVC.105.C
Tap-off characteristics
Type AK5
PA211N1
PA211N2
PA211N3
PA212N1
PA212N2
PA212N3
AK5
PA211PH12
PA211PH13
PA211PH23
PA212PH12
PA212PH13
PA212PH23
AK5
PA231
PA232
PA232S
AK5
PA241
PA242
AK5
PA2311
PA2312
PA2312S
AK5
PA532
AK5
PA542
AK5
PA5312
Product certifcations UL,.LROS,.CSA,.DNV
Degree of protection Against.access.to.live.parts:.IP.XXB.conforming.to.IEC.6059
Polarity Phase.+..
Neutral
Phase.+.
Phase
3-phase 3-phase
+.Neutral
3-phase
+.Common
3-phase 3-phase
+.Neutral
3-phase
+.Common
Conductor csa
(UL.cables)
mm
.x.4 .x.4 3.x.4 4.x.4 3.x.4

1.x.15
.x.(3.x.4) .x.(4.x.4) .x.(3.x.4)
1.x.15
Permissible current A 5 5. 5 5 5
10.
(Common)
50 50 50
10.
(Common)
Rated insulation voltage V 690.conforming.to.IEC.60439-1
Rated peak current kA 6
s 00.000
Type of conductor insulation PVC.105.C
Characteristics of mounting rails AM1 DL201 and AM1 DL2017
Type Omega.7 (width.75.mm,.depth.15.mm)
Material .mm.sheet.steel
Surface treatment Galvanized
1/08
1
Mounting
(equipment possibilities)
Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off mounted on AK5 JB busbar system
Note: if the equipment is wider than the
mounting plate, an extension plate can be
used to increase the width of the support
plate.
(1) 3-pole + common
AK5
PA211N1
PA211N2
PA211N3
AK5
PA231
PA2311
(1)
AK5
PA241
AK5
PA212N1
PA212N2
PA212N3
AK5
PA212PH12
PA213PH13
PA212PH23
AK5
PA232
PA2312
(1)
AK5
PA242
AK5
PA232S
PA2312S
(1)
AK5
PA532
PA5312
(1)
AK5
PA542
Mounting
plate
incorporating
tap-off
Width.in.mm 54 54 54 54 54 54 54 108 108 108
Height.in.mm 105 105 105 190 190 190 190 190 190 190
No.of.18.mm.pitches 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 6 6 6
Thermal.current 5.A 5.A 5.A 5.A 5.A 5.A 5.A 5.A 50.A 50.A
Application. Ph.+.N 3-pole 3-pole.
+.N
Ph.+.N Ph.+.Ph 3-pole 3-pole.
+.N
3-pole 3-pole 3-pole..
+.N
Motor starter type Minimum.
centres.
with..
60.mm.
ducting
Number.of.points.used.on.the.busbar.system
Fuses, contactors and thermal overload relay
LS1.D5 170 4 4
LS1.D5.+.LA8.D54 170 5
LS1.D5.+.LC1.-D09.to.D5.and.
overload.relay.up.to.LR.D13
30 4
LS1.D5.+.LC1.D09.to.D5..
(with.1.add-on.block.LA8.D).+.
30 4
Fuses, reversing contactors + thermal overload relay
LS1.D5.+.LC.D09.to.D18..
(with.1.add-on.block.LA8.D).+.
30 6
LS1.D5.+.LC.D5..
with.1.add-on.block.LA8.D).+.
30 7
Optimal breaker switch
GK.CF03.to.CF 170 3
GK.CF03.to.CF.+.4.blocks.
GK.AX
170 5
GK3.EF40 70 6
GK3.EF40.+.4.blocks.GK.AX 70 6
Optimal breaker switch + contactor + thermal overload relay
GK.CF03.to.CF1.+.LC1.D09.
to.D18.+.overload.relay.up.to.
LR.D13
30 3
GK.CF03.to.CF.+.LC1.D09.
to.D5.+.overload.relay.up.to.
LR.D13
30 4
GK-AX.+.LC1.D09.to.D18.with.
1.block.LA8.D.+.overload.relay.
up.to.LR.D13
30 5
Optimal breaker switch + reversing contactor + thermal overload relay
GK.AX.+.LC1.D09.to.D18..
with.1.block.LA8.D.+.overload.
relay.up.to.LR.D13
30 6
GK.AX.+.LC.D5...
with.1.block.LA8.D.+.overload.
relay.up.to.LR.D13
30 7
1/09
1
Mounting
(equipment possibilities)
(continued)
Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off mounted on AK5 JB busbar system
Note 1:.if.the.equipment.is.wider.than.the.
mounting.plate,.an.extension.plate.can.be.
used.to.increase.the.width.of.the.support.
plate
Note 2:.for.upstream.protection,.see.page.
1/07
(1) 3-pole + common
AK5
PA211N1
PA211N2
PA211N3
AK5
PA231
PA2311
(1)
AK5
PA241
AK5
PA212N1
PA212N2
PA212N3
AK5
PA212PH12
PA213PH13
PA212PH23
AK5PA
232
PA2312
(1)
AK5
PA242
AK5
PA232S
PA2312S
(1)
AK
PA532
PA5312
(1)
AK5
PA542
Mounting
plate
incorporating
tap-off
Width.in.mm 54 54 54 54 54 54 54 108 108 108
Height.in.mm 105 105 105 190 190 190 190 190 190 190
No.of.18.mm.pitches 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 6 6 6
Thermal.current 5.A 5.A 5.A 5.A 5.A 5.A 5.A 5.A 50.A 50.A
Application. Ph.+.N 3-pole 3-pole.
+.N
Ph.+.N Ph.+.Ph 3-pole 3-pole.
+.N
3-pole 3-pole 3-pole..
+.N
Motor starter type Minimum.
centres.with.
60.mm.
ducting
Number.of.points.used.on.the.busbar.system
Motor circuit-breaker (type.1.coordination)
GVp06.to.p 170 3
GV3M01.to.M40 70 6
Motor circuit-breaker + contactor
GVp06.to.p16.+.LC1.D09.or.
D1.with.1.add-on.block.LA8.D
70
4
GVp06.to.p0..+.LC1.D09..
to.D18
70
3
GVp06.to.p.+.LC1.D09.or.
D1.with.1.add-on.block.LA8.D
70
4
GV3M01.to.M40.with.
GV1App.+.LC1D09.to.D3
70 7
GV3M01.to.M40.+.LC1.D09.
to.D3.with.1.add-on.block.
LA8.D
70 8
Motor circuit-breaker + reversing contactor
GVp06.to.p0.+.LC-D09.to.
D18.with.or.without.add-on.
block.LA8.D
70 6
GVp.with.1.add-on.block.
LA8-D

70 7
Integral contactor breaker + protection module
LD1.LB030.+.LB1.LB03Ppp
(integral.18)
70 3
LD1.LB030.with..add-on.
blocks.LA1.-LB.+.LB1.LB30P.
(integral.18)
70 4
LD1.LB030.with.4.add-on.
blocks.LA1.LB.+.LB1.LB03P.
(integral.18)
70 6
LD1.LC030.+.LB1.LC03M.
(integral.3)
70 6
LD1.LC030.+.LB1.LC03M.
(integral.3).with.1.add-on.
block.LA1.LC.and.1.reset.
device.LA1.LC05p
70 7
LD1.LC030.with..add-on.
blocks..LA1.LB.+.LB1.LC03M.
(integral.3)
70 6
Reversing contactor breaker integral 18 + protection module
LD5.LB130.+.LB1.LB03Ppp 70 6
LD5.LB130.with.3.add-on.
blocks.LA1.LB.+.LB1.LB03P
70 8
Schneider Electric C 60 circuit-breaker for circuit protection
369p 170
370p 170 3 3 3 3
371p.and.37p 170 4 4 4
1/10
1
References
Busbar systems
The.busbar.system.can.be.screw-mounted.onto.any.type.of.support.However.if.it.is.to.be.used.in.conjunction.with.
component.mounting.plates.incorporating.a.tap-off,.it.is.essential.that.it.is.mounted.on.the.AM1.DL01.rail
When.mounting.tap-offs,.the.rated.operational.current.of.the.busbar.system.should.be.taken.into.account:.160.A.at.35.C
Number of
conductors
Number of
tap-offs at
18 mm intervals
Length Suitable for
mounting in
enclosure width
Reference Weight
mm mm kg
4.(1) 1 344 600 AK5 JB143 0700
18 45 800 AK5 JB144 0900
4 560 800 AK5 JB145 1100
30 668 800 AK5 JB146 1300
48 99 100 AK5 JB149 1900
54 1100 100 AK5 JB1410 100
Omega rail, width 75 mm
This.rail.is.designed.to.accommodate.the.busbar.system.when.it.is.used.with.AK5.PA.mounting.plates.incorporating.tap-
offs.It.supportsthe.busbar.system.The.plates.simply.clip.onto.the.rail
Material and
surface treatment
Depth Length Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
mm mm kg
.mm.sheet.steel 15 000.(4) 6 AM1 DL201 3000
Removable power sockets
Use Number of points
used on the
busbar system
Thermal
current
Cable
lengths
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
A mm kg
Single-phase 1 16 00 6.(2) AK5 PC12 0035
+
Neutral 3 1000 6.(2) AK5 PC32L 0040
-phase 1 16 00 6 (3) AK5 PC12PH 0035
3 1000 6.(3) AK5 PC32LPH 0040
3-phase 16 00 6 AK5 PC13 0040
3 50 6 AK5 PC33 0045
1000 6 AK5 PC33L 0060
3-phase 16 00 6 AK5 PC14 0045
+
Neutral 3 50 6 AK5 PC34 0050
1000 6 AK5 PC34L 0065
3-phase 16 00 6 AK5 PC131 0045
+ 10.(common)
common
3 50 6 AK5 PC331 0050
10.(common)
Accessories
Description Maximum no
of connections
Csa mm
2
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Cable guide 4 5.or.4 0 AK5 GF1 0300
(1) 4-pole: 3-phase + Neutral or 3-phase + Common.
(2) Total of 6 sockets supplied: 2 sockets (N + L1), 2 sockets (N + L2). 2 sockets (N + L3).
(3) Total of 6 sockets supplied: 2 sockets (L1 + L2), 2 sockets (L1 + L3). 2 sockets (L2 + L3).
(4) Cut and drill to suit use.
..
AK5 JB1pp AK5 JB1pp
AK5 PC12 AK5 PC12
AK5 PC14
AK5 GF1
AK5 PC14
AK5 GF1
Presentation:
page.1/05
Characteristics:
pages.1/06.and.1/07
References:
pages.1/10.and.1/11
pages.1/08.and.1/09
Presentation:
page.1/05
Characteristics:
pages.1/06.and.1/07
References:
pages.1/10.and.1/11
pages.1/08.and.1/09
1/11
1
AK5 PA231
Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off
Single plate (height 105 mm)
Use No of 18mm
points used on the
busbar system
Phase Thermal
currentA
Number of 6
rails for com-
ponent support
Reference Weight
kg
Single-phase..
+.neutral
3 Ph1+N 5 1 AK5 PA211N1 0135
Ph+N 5 1 AK5 PA211N2 0135
Ph3+N 5 1 AK5 PA211N3 0135
-phase 3 Ph1+Ph 5 1 AK5 PA211PH12 0135
Ph1+Ph3 5 1 AK5 PA211PH13 0135
Ph+Ph3 5 1 AK5 PA211PH23 0135
3-phase 3 5 1 AK5 PA231 0140
3-phase.+.common 3 5 1 AK5 PA2311 0145
3-phase.+.neutral. 3. 5 1 AK5 PA241 0145
Double plate (height 190 mm)
Prefabricated.5.A.connectors.are.supplied.for.connecting.the..protection.and.control.devices
Single-phase...
+.neutral
3 Ph1+N 5 AK5 PA212N1 0135
Ph+N 5 AK5 PA212N2 0135
Ph3+N 5 AK5 PA212N3 0135
-phase 3 Ph1+Ph 5 AK5 PA212PH12 0135
Ph1+Ph3 5 AK5 PA212PH13 0135
Ph+Ph3 5 AK5 PA212PH23 0135
3-phase 3 5 AK5 PA232 030
6 5 AK5 PA232S 0600
50 1 AK5 PA532 0700
3-phase.+.neutral 3 5 AK5 PA242 030
3-phase.+.common 3 5.(10.common) AK5 PA2312 035
6 5.(10.common) AK5 PA2312S 0610
50.(10.common) 1 AK5 PA5312 0710
3-phase.+.neutral 6 50 1 AK5 PA542 .0715
Extension plates
These.plates.bolt.onto.the.equipment.support.plates,.after.having.removed.them.from.the.rails,.to.be.able.to.mount.wider.
components
Use Number of tap-offs
at 18 mm intervals
Reference Weight
kg
For mounting
plates incor-
porating tap-off
Single 4 AK5 PE17 0100
Double 4 AK5 PE27 0150
Side stop (AK5.JB.mounted.vertically)
Use Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
For extension plate 50 AK5 BT01 0005
Control terminal blocks
Description Thermal
current A
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
10-pole terminal blocks, for screwing onto plate AK5 PAppp
10 10 AK5 SB1 .0065
10-pole front connecting plug-in terminal blocks which can be clipped onto.1 6 4 rails
Fixed.part 10 10 AB1 DV10235U .0047
Moving.part 10 10 AB1 DVM10235U .001
Accessories
Description Marking Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Strips of clip-in markers 09 5 AB1 Rp (1) 0050
10.identical.numbers,.signs.or + 5 AB1 R12 0050
capital.letters.per.strip 5 AB1 R13 0050
AZ 5 AB1 Gp (1) 0050
(1) Replace the p

in the selected reference with the number or letter required. Example: AB1 R1 or AB1 GA
AK5 PA232 AK5 PA232
AK5 BT01 AK5 BT01
AK5 SB1 AK5 SB1
Presentation:
page.1/05
Characteristics:
pages.1/06.and.1/07
References:
pages.1/10.and.1/11
pages.1/08.and.1/09
Presentation:
page.1/05
Characteristics:
pages.1/06.and.1/07
References:
pages.1/10.and.1/11
pages.1/08.and.1/09
1/1
1
Dimensions
Busbar systems
AK5 JBppp
AK5 a G No.of
18.mm.
points
JB143 344 330 1
JB144 45 438 18
JB145 560 546 4
JB146 668 654 30
JB149 99 978 48
JB1410 1100 1086 54
Busbar feed units
AK5 JBppp Installation of AK5 JBppp busbar systems
Connection Csa.in.mm
min max
Flexible.cable.with.or.without.cable.end..
1.x.5 1.x.70.(1)
.x.5 .x.35
Flexible.bar..
.x.(9.x.4)
Flexible.bar..
9.x.4 9.x.4
+ +
+ 1.x.5 1.x.35
fexible cable with or without cable end
(1) Maximum c.s.a. or connection of conductor without cable end.
Removable power sockets 16 and 32 A Mounting plates incorporating tap-offs, 25 A Single width extension plates
AK5 PC12p AK5 PC32Lp AK5 PA2p1 AK5 PA2311 AK5 PA211pppp AK5 PE17
.
.
AK5 PCp3 AK5 PC33L
AK5 PCp4 AK5 PC34L
AK5 PCp31
Note: It is recommended that the power sockets or the removable plates are connected as close as possible to the busbar feed unit.
(1)Canbefxedat43mm

79
8
2

3
0

79
8
2

3
0

4
5
8
1
G
a
4
5
8
1
G
a
4
5
,
5
17,5 38
4
5
,
5
17,5 38
46 15 54
5
3

(
1
)
1
0
5
1
0
46 15 54
5
3

(
1
)
1
0
5
1
0
7 15 71
5
3

(
1
)
1
0
5
1
0
7 15 71
5
3

(
1
)
1
0
5
1
0
4
5
,
5
35,5 38
4
5
,
5
35,5 38
Presentation:
page.1/05
Characteristics:
pages.1/06.and.1/07
References:
pages.1/10.and.1/11
pages.1/08.and.1/09
Presentation:
page.1/05
Characteristics:
pages.1/06.and.1/07
References:
pages.1/10.and.1/11
pages.1/08.and.1/09
1/13
1
Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off Double extension plate
AK5 PA232 AK5 PA2312 AK5 PA242 AK5 PE27
Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off
AK5 PA232S AK5 PA2312S AK5 PA532 AK5 PA5312 AK5 PA542
Side stop Control terminal block
AK5 BT01 AK5 SB1
(1)Canbefxedat43mm
.
46 15 54
1
0
0
1
0
4
0
1
9
0
5
3

(
1
)
46 15 54
1
0
0
1
0
4
0
1
9
0
5
3

(
1
)
7 15 71
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
9
0
5
3

(
1
)
7 15 71
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
9
0
5
3

(
1
)

0
,
8
15,5
7
2
0
2
2
4
,
2

0
,
8
15,5
7
2
0
2
2
4
,
2
Presentation:
page.1/05
Characteristics:
pages.1/06.and.1/07
References:
pages.1/10.and.1/11
pages.1/08.and.1/09
Presentation:
page.1/05
Characteristics:
pages.1/06.and.1/07
References:
pages.1/10.and.1/11
pages.1/08.and.1/09

VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors
Pre-assembled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/4
Assembled by the user page 2/5
Add-on modules page 2/6
VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors for the North American market,
conforming to UL and CSA standards page 2/10
Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers
TeSys GV ME
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/12
Assembly of a safety enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/14
TeSys GV3 PC page 2/13
DOL starters for motor control
0.55 to 30 kW
With manual control and with magnetic circuit-breaker . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/18
. to 45 kW
Without isolating device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/20
With isolating device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/24
0.5 to 7.5 kW
With 3-phase thermal overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/28
0.37 to 5.5 kW
With thermal magnetic circuit-breaker and contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/30
Star-delta starters for motor control
5.5 to 13 kW
7.5 to 75 kW
With isolating device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/36
90 to 375 kW
DOL starters for control in category AC-1
Without isolating device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/44
With isolating device page 2/48
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
b
v
b
v
v
b
v
b
v
b
v
b
v
b
v
b
b
Contents
- TeSys motor starters:
enclosed version
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/1
integral 63 contactor breaker and reversing
contactor breaker
Enclosures and door interlock mechanisms for customer assembly . . . page 2/52
For control and protection of motors page 2/56
For control and protection of resistive circuits in category AC-1 page 2/58
Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories page 2/59
Enclosed DOL starters for motor control for use
in a machine subject to the application of Machinery
Directive 98/37/CE
Non-reversing starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/62
Reversing starters page 2/64
Enclosed DOL starters for AS-Interface cabling
system
TeSys LF3 P and LF4 P page 2/84
TeSys LF3 M and LF4 M page 2/89
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/
2
General selection guide
Applications DOL starters
Type Standard starters

of 3-phase motors in AC-3 400/415 V
437 kW 0.0645 kW 0.5530 kW 0.375.5 kW 0.545 kW
Starters
Manual
p p p

Auto
p p
Isolation
Switch
p

Circuit-breaker
p p p
Fuse carrier
Protection
Short-circuit
p p p
Overload
p p p p
Communication
References
Non-reversing VpF
VCFN
VpFX
GV2 ME
GV3 CE
GV2 LC
GV NGC
LE1 GVME LE1 M
LE1 D
Reversing
LE2 K
LE2 D
Pages /4 and /5 /1 and /13 /18 /30 /0, /1 and
/8
TeSys enclosed starters

Soft starters
Starters for safety applications Starters for use on
AS-Interface line
Standard star-delta starters

.45 kW 0.0611 kW 0.069 kW 0.069 kW 0.065.5 kW 5.513 kW 7.575 kW
p

p
p p p p p

p

p p p p

p

p
p p p p p
p
p p p p p p p

p

LE4 K
LE4 D
GV2 ME LG1 K
LG1 D
LG7 K
LG7 D
LJ7 K
LF3 P
LF3 M
LE3 K
LE3 D
LE3 F
LE6 D
LE3 D
LE8 K
LE8 D
LE2 D
LG8 K
LJ8 K
LF4 P
LF4 M

/4 and
/5
/14 and
/15
/63 /6, /63,
/68 and
/69
/84 and
/85
/3,
/33 and
/4
/36 and
/37
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/3
2

Applications DOL starters
Type Standard starters

of 3-phase motors in AC-3 400/415 V
437 kW 0.0645 kW 0.5530 kW 0.375.5 kW 0.545 kW
Starters
Manual
p p p

Auto
p p
Isolation
Switch
p

Circuit-breaker
p p p
Fuse carrier
Protection
Short-circuit
p p p
Overload
p p p p
Communication
References
Non-reversing VpF
VCFN
VpFX
GV2 ME
GV3 CE
GV2 LC
GV NGC
LE1 GVME LE1 M
LE1 D
Reversing
LE2 K
LE2 D
Pages /4 and /5 /1 and /13 /18 /30 /0, /1 and
/8
Soft starters
Starters for safety applications Starters for use on
AS-Interface line
Standard star-delta starters

.45 kW 0.0611 kW 0.069 kW 0.069 kW 0.065.5 kW 5.513 kW 7.575 kW
p

p
p p p p p

p

p p p p

p

p
p p p p p
p
p p p p p p p

p

LE4 K
LE4 D
GV2 ME LG1 K
LG1 D
LG7 K
LG7 D
LJ7 K
LF3 P
LF3 M
LE3 K
LE3 D
LE3 F
LE6 D
LE3 D
LE8 K
LE8 D
LE2 D
LG8 K
LJ8 K
LF4 P
LF4 M

/4 and
/5
/14 and
/15
/63 /6, /63,
/68 and
/69
/84 and
/85
/3,
/33 and
/4
/36 and
/37
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/4
2
References 2
Enclosed switch disconnectors for high performance applications
3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 10 to 140 A, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 6004.
Marking on operator
Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not included).
IP 65 degree of protection enclosures, sealable and lockable.
Cover lockable in position I (ON) up to 63 A rating.
b
b
b
b
b
3-pole main and Emergency Stop switch disconnectors (1)
Operator lthe Power
AC-23
at 400 V
Incorpor-
ated
switch
body
Possible
attach-
ments (2)
Reference Weight
Handle Front plate
Dimensions
mm A kW kg
Red, standard,
padlockable
with up to 3 padlocks
( 4 to 8 shank)
Yellow
60 x 60
10 4 V0 VCF 02GE 0.500
16 5.5 V01 VCF 01GE 0.500
0 7.5 V0 VCF 0GE 0.500
5 11 V1 VCF 1GE 0.500
3 15 V VCF 2GE 0.500
50 V3 3 VCF 3GE 0.930
63 30 V4 3 VCF 4GE 0.930
Red, long, padlockable
( 4 to 8 shanks)
Yellow
90 x 90
100 37 V5 1 VCF 5GEN .190
140 45 V6 1 VCF 6GEN .190
3-pole main switch disconnectors (1)
Black, standard,
padlockable
( 4 to 8 shank)
Black
60 x 60
10 4 V0 VBF 02GE 0.500
16 5.5 V01 VBF 01GE 0.500
0 7.5 V0 VBF 0GE 0.500
5 11 V1 VBF 1GE 0.500
3 15 V VBF 2GE 0.500
50 V3 3 VBF 3GE 0.930
63 30 V4 3 VBF 4GE 0.930
Black, long, padlockable
( 4 to 8 shank)
Black
90 x 90
100 37 V5 1 VBF 5GEN .190
140 45 V6 1 VBF 6GEN .190
Enclosed switch disconnectors for standard applications
3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 10 to 3 A, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1.
Degree of protection IP 55.
b
b
3-pole main and Emergency Stop switch disconnectors (1)
Operator lthe Power
AC-23
at 400 V
Incorpor-
ated
switch
body
Possible
attach-
ments (2)
Reference Weight
Handle Front plate
Dimensions
mm A kW kg
Red padlockable,
either by 1
( 8 shank)
or by 3 padlocks
( 6 shank)
Yellow
60 x 60
10 4 VN 1 VCFN 12GE (2) 0.4
16 5.5 VN 0 VCFN 20GE (2) 0.4
0 7.5 V0 0 VCFN 25GE 0.51
5 11 V1 0 VCFN 32GE 0.51
3 15 V 0 VCFN 40GE 0.51
(1)Forcharacteristicsofswitchdisconnectors,pleaseconsultyourRegionalSalesOffce.
(2)ForVCFandVBFenclosures,seepage2/6.ForVCFNenclosures,seepage2/7.
OO
5
6
9
3
9
4
5
8
0
5
4
8
5
8
0
5
4
6
5
8
0
5
4
5
VCF 0GE
VCF 3GE
VCF5GEN
VCFN12GE
5
6
9
3
9
4
5
8
0
5
4
8
5
8
0
5
4
6
5
8
0
5
4
5
VCF 0GE
VCF 3GE
VCF5GEN
VCFN12GE
Dimensions:
page /8
Schemes:
page /9
Dimensions:
page /8
Schemes:
page /9
Dimensions:
page /8
Schemes:
page /9
Dimensions:
page /8
Schemes:
page /9
Enclosed starters 2
VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors,
pre-assembled
/5
2
References 2
Empty enclosures
IP 65 enclosure with red padlockable handle operator and yellow front plate
(for mounting a main or Emergency Stop switch disconnector)
For switch body lthe Possible attachments (1) Reference Weight
A kg
VN 12, VN 20
V02V2
103 VCFX GE1 0.340
V02V2 103 4 VCFX GE4 0.660
V3 50 3 VCFX GE2 0.660
IP 65 enclosure with black padlockable handle and black front plate
(for mounting a main switch disconnector)
VN 12, VN 20
V02V2
103 VBFX GE1 0.340
V02V2 103 4 VBFX GE4 0.660
V3 50 3 VBFX GE2 0.660
Switch bodies for standard applications (2)
Description Rating Reference Weight
A kg
3-pole
switch disconnectors
10 VN 12 0.110
16 VN 20 0.110
Switch bodies for high performance applications (2)
A kg
3-pole
10 V02 0.00
16 V01 0.00
0 V0 0.00
5 V1 0.00
3 V2 0.00
50 V3 0.00
63 V4 0.00
(1)Seepages2/6and2/7.
V0
VBFX GE2
5
8
0
5
4
9
5
8
0
5
5
0
V0
VBFX GE2
5
8
0
5
4
9
5
8
0
5
5
0
Dimensions:
page /8
Schemes:
page /9
Dimensions:
page /8
Schemes:
page /9
Dimensions:
page /8
Schemes:
page /9
Dimensions:
page /8
Schemes:
page /9
Enclosed starters 2
VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors,
assembled by the user

/6
Enclosed starters 2
Add-on modules

Add-on modules for enclosures VCF and VBF
A kg
Main pole module
(mounted in enclosure)
10 VZ 02 0.050
16 VZ 01 0.050
0 VZ 0 0.050
5 VZ 1 0.050
3 VZ 2 0.050
50 VZ 3 0.100
63 VZ 4 0.100
Neutral pole modules
with early make and
late break contacts
10 to 3 VZ 11 0.050
50 and 63 VZ 12 0.100
100 and 140 VZ 13 0.50
Earthing modules 10 to 3 VZ 14 0.050
50 and 63 VZ 15 0.100
100 and 140 VZ 16 0.50
Description Type of contacts Reference Weight
kg
Auxiliary contact block
modules with
2 auxiliary contacts
N/O + N/C (1) VZ 7 0.050
N/O + N/O VZ 20 0.050
Maximum number of add-on modules that can be ftted on a
switch body
1 add-on module on each side of the switch body
VZ 7 or VZ 0 + V0p
V0
to
V4
+ VZ 7 or VZ 0
or or
VZ 11 or VZ 1 + + VZ 11 or VZ 1
or or
VZ 14 or VZ 15 + + VZ 14 or VZ 15
or or
VZ 0p/VZ 0 to VZ 4 + + VZ 0p/VZ 0 to VZ 4

2 add-on modules on each side of the switch body
VZ 0p + VZ 0p + V0p + VZ 0p + VZ 7 or VZ 0 or VZ 11 or VZ 14
VZ 0 + VZ 0 + V0 + VZ 0 + VZ 7 or VZ 0 or VZ 11 or VZ 14
VZ + VZ + V2 + VZ + VZ 7 or VZ 0 or VZ 11 or VZ 14
Note: Theadd-onmodulesmountednexttotheswitchbodyaremainpolemodules.
Maximumof3mainpolemodulesperswitchbody.
(1)LatemakeN/O,earlybreakN/Ccontacts
5
8
0
5
9
6
5
8
0
5
8
9
5
8
0
5
9
4
5
8
0
5
9
5
VZ 0 VZ 11
VZ 15 VZ 20
5
8
0
5
9
6
5
8
0
5
8
9
5
8
0
5
9
4
5
8
0
5
9
5
VZ 0 VZ 11
VZ 15 VZ 20
Schemes :
page /9
Schemes :
page /9
Schemes :
page /9
Schemes :
page /9
References 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
/7
Enclosed starters 2
Add-on modules

Add-on modules for enclosures VCFN 12GE and 20GE
A kg
Main pole modules 10 VZN 12 0.00
16 VZN 20 0.00
Neutral pole module
with early make and
late break contacts
10 and 16 VZN 11 0.00
Earthing module 10 and 16 VZN 14 0.016
kg
modules
1 N/O late make contact VZN 05 0.00

1 N/C early break contact VZN 06 0.00

switch body
VZN 1 or VZN 0 +
VN 12
or
VN 20
+ VZN 1 or VZN 0
or
VZN 11
or or
VZN 05 or VZN 06
or
VZN 05 or VZN 06 VZN 14
5
8
0
5
9
7
5
8
0
5
9
8
5
8
0
5
9
9
VZN11
VZN14
VZN05
5
8
0
5
9
7
5
8
0
5
9
8
5
8
0
5
9
9
VZN11
VZN14
VZN05
Schemes :
page /9
Schemes :
page /9
Schemes :
page /9
Schemes :
page /9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
/8
2
Dimensions 2
Dimensions
VCFN 12GE to VCFN 40GE
Cableglands:2x16Ptopandbottom.
VCF or VBF 02GE to 4GE
VCFX or VBFX GE1 to GE4
a b c c1 H
VpF 02GE to VpF 2GE, VpFX GE1 (1) 90 146 85 131 130
VpF 3GE and VpF 4GE (2) 150 170 106 15 164
VpFX GE2 and VpFX GE4 (2) 150 170 106 15 164
(1)Cableglands:2x16Ptopandbottom.
(2)Cableglands:2x16/21/29Ptopandbottom.
VCF or VBF 5GEN and 6GEN
82,5 106
1
3
1
9
0
=
=
82,5 106
1
3
1
9
0
=
=
c
c1
b
a
= =
H
c
c1
b
a
= =
H
218,5
241
2
6
8
,
5
=

=

2
9
1
128
190,5
4x4,2
218,5
241
2
6
8
,
5
=

=

2
9
1
128
190,5
4x4,2
References:
pages /4 and /5
Schemes:
page /9
References:
pages /4 and /5
Schemes:
page /9
References:
pages /4 and /5
Schemes:
page /9
References:
pages /4 and /5
Schemes:
page /9
Enclosed starters 2

/9
2
Schemes 2
Schemes
Switch disconnectors
Enclosed or switch bodies Main pole module Neutral pole
module
Auxiliary contact blocks
VZ 7 VZ 20 VZN 05 VZN 06
1
/
L
1
2
/
T
1
3
/
L
2
4
/
T
2
5
/
L
3
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
2
/
T
1
3
/
L
2
4
/
T
2
5
/
L
3
6
/
T
3
2
2
2
1
1
3
1
4
2
2
2
1
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
2
4
2
3
1
3
1
4
2
4
2
3
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
References:
pages /5 and /6
References:
pages /5 and /6
References:
pages /5 and /6
References:
pages /5 and /6
Enclosed starters 2

2
/10
Enclosed switch disconnectors for high performance applications
3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 5 to 140 A, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 6004, UL 508 and
CSA . n 14.
Marking on operator
Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not included).
NEMA type 1 and type 1 enclosures, IP 65 degree of protection, sealable and lockable.
b
b
b
b
3-pole main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors (1)
Operator Rating Standard
power
ratings
of UL motors
Incor-
porated
switch
body
Possible
attach-
ments
Reference Weight
Handle Front plate
Dimensions
IEC
(Ith)
UL
600 V 240 V 480 V 600 V
mm A A HP HP HP kg
Red, standard,
padlockable
( 4 to 8)
Yellow
60 x 60
3 0 5 10 10 V1 VC1 GUN 0.500
40 5 5 10 15 V VC2 GUN 0.500
63 45 10 0 30 V3 VC3 GUN 0.930
80 63 15 30 40 V4 VC4 GUN 0.930
Red, long,
padlockable
( 4 to 8)
Yellow
90 x 90
15 100 5 50 50 V5 1 VC5 GUN .190
175 115 30 50 60 V6 1 VC6 GUN .190
Add-on modules for VC enclosure
A kg
Main pole module
(mounted in enclosure)
5 VZ 1 0.050
3 VZ 2 0.050
50 VZ 3 0.100
63 VZ 4 0.100
Neutral pole module
with early make and
late break contacts
10 to 3 VZ 11 0.050
50 and 63 VZ 12 0.100
100 and 140 VZ 13 0.50
Earthing modules 10 to 3 VZ 14 0.050
50 and 63 VZ 15 0.100
100 and 140 VZ 16 0.50
kg
modules with
N/O + N/C (2) VZ 7 0.050
N/O + N/O VZ 20 0.050
Maximum number of add-on modules that can be ftted on a switch body
VZ 7 or VZ 0 + + VZ 7 or VZ 0
or V1 or
VZ 11 or VZ 1 + + VZ 11 or VZ 1
or to or
VZ 14 or VZ 15 + + VZ 14 or VZ 15
or V4 or
VZ 1 to VZ 4 + + VZ 1 to VZ 4
(2)LatemakeN/O,earlybreakN/Ccontacts.
OO
References
Enclosed starters
for the North American market,
conforming to UL and CSA standards
VC1GUN
5
6
9
3
9
6
VC3GUN
5
6
9
3
9
7
VC5GUN
5
6
9
3
9
8
VZ 11
5
6
9
4
0
0
VZ 15
5
6
9
4
0
1
VZ 20
5
6
9
4
0
2
/11
Dimensions,
schemes
Enclosed starters
conforming to UL and CSA standards
Dimensions
VC1 GUN and VC2 GUN
Fixing (rear view)
121 87
132,1
1
6
4
98
1
4
1
4x4,2
VC3 GUN and VC4 GUN
Fixing (rear view)
87
132,1
164
1
9
3
141
1
7
0
4x4,2
VC5 GUN and VC6 GUN
128
190,5
218,5 241
2
6
8
,
5
2
9
1
4x4,2
Fixing (rear view)
Schemes
Enclosed switch disconnectors
or switch bodies
Main pole module Neutral pole module
1
/
L
1
2
/
T
1
3
/
L
2
4
/
T
2
5
/
L
3
6
/
T
3
Auxiliary contact block modules
VZ 7 VZ 20
2
2
2
1
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
2
4
2
3
/1
References
References
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME
For motor circuit-breakers and accessories: see pages 3/48, 3/56 and 3/63.
Starters consisting of a GV ME motor circuit-breaker in an enclosure conform to
standard IEC 60947-4-1.
GV2 ME
01
ME
02
ME
03
ME
04
ME
05
ME
06
ME
07
ME
08
ME
10
ME
14
ME
16
ME
20
ME
21
ME
22
Ithe in
enclosure
(A)
0.16 0.5 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 .5 4 6.3 9 13 17 1 3
Enclosures for thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 ME
Type Degree of
protection
Possible no of
side mounting auxiliary
contact blocks on GV2 ME
Reference Weight
LH side RH side kg
Surface
mounting,
double
insulated with
protective
conductor.
Sealable cover
IP 41 1 1 GV2 MC01 0.90
IP 55 1 1 GV2 MC02 0.300
or GV2 MCK04 (1) 0.40
IP 55 for
temperature < + 5 C
1 1 GV2 MC03 0.300
Flush
mounting,
with protective
conductor
IP 41 (front face) 1 1 GV2 MP01 0.115
IP 41 (reduced
fush mounting)
1 GV2 MP03 0.115
IP 55 (front face) 1 1 GV2 MP02 0.130
IP 55 (reduced
fush mounting)
1 GV2 MP04 0.130
Front plate
kg
For direct control,
through a panel,
of a chassis mounted GV ME
IP 55 GV2 CP21 0.800
Accessories common to all enclosures (to be ordered separately)
Description Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Padlocking device (2)
for GV ME operator
(padlocking is only
possible in the O position)
1 to 3 padlocks 4
to 8 mm
1 GV2 V01 0.075
Mushroom
head
Emergency
stop
pushbutton
40 mm, red
Spring return (2) 1 GV2 K011 0.05
Latching (2)
IP 55
Key release, key n
455
1 GV2 K021 0.160
Turn to release 1 GV2 K031 0.115
1 GV2 K04 (3) 0.10
Sealing kit For enclosures
and front plate
IP 55 for
temperature
between
+ 5 C and + 40 C
10 GV2 E01 0.01
IP 55 for
temperature
between
- 0 C and + 40 C
10 GV2 E02 0.01
Neutral
terminal
100 AB1 VV635UBL 0.015
Partition 50 AB1 AC6BL 0.003
(1) Enclosure GV2 MCK04isfttedwithaGV2 K04 mushroom head Emergency stop pushbutton
asstandard.
(2)SuppliedwithIP55sealingkit.TobefttedwithenclosureGV2 Mp01.
(3)PadlockableinOpositionusing4to8mmshankpadlocks.
GV2 MC
5
0
0
7
7
_
1
GV2 MC
5
0
0
7
7
_
1
GV2-MP
GV2 MP
5
0
0
8
0
_
1
GV2-MP
GV2 MP
5
0
0
8
0
_
1
GV2-CP
GV2 CP21
5
0
0
7
8
_
1
GV2-CP
GV2 CP21
5
0
0
7
8
_
1
GV2-K011
GV2 K011
5
0
0
7
9
_
1
GV2-K011
GV2 K011
5
0
0
7
9
_
1
GV ME and accessories, for customer assembly
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
/13
References
dimensions
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3 P
For motor circuit-breakers and accessories: see pages 3/48 and 3/59.
GV3 P40: operational current in enclosure limited to 30 A.
Starters consisting of a GV3 P motor circuit-breaker in an enclosure conform to
standards IEC/EN 60947-4-1 and IEC/EN 60947-.
Metal enclosures ftted with a padlockable rotary handle (1),
for thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV3 P, up to 30 A
Composition (2) Type Degree of
protection
of
enclosure
Reference Weight
kg
Metal enclosure,
Black handle LU9 AP11
Padlocking in ON/OFF position
Circuit-breaker/handle adapter
b
b
b
Surface
mounting
IP 55
IK 09
GV3 PC01 .000
Metal enclosure,
Red handle LU9 AP1
Padlocking in OFF position
Circuit-breaker/handle adapter
b
b
b
Surface
mounting
IP 55
IK 09
GV3 PC02 .000
(1) For special applications a GV3 Lmagneticmotorcircuit-breakercanbefttedinthistypeof
enclosure.PleaseconsultyourRegionalSalesOffce.
(2)Componentsforcustomerassembly.Circuit-breakertobeorderedseparately.
Dimensions

150
203,5
181
3
1
2
52,5 52,5
9
7
,
5
9
7
,
5
7,7
150
203,5
181
3
1
2
52,5 52,5
9
7
,
5
9
7
,
5
7,7
GV3 P (for customer assembly)
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
/14
References
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME
For motor circuit-breakers and accessories: see pages 3/48, 3/55 and 3/57.
Starters consisting of a GV ME motor circuit-breaker in an enclosure conform to
standard IEC 60947-4-1.
GV2 ME
01
ME
02
ME
03
ME
04
ME
05
ME
06
ME
07
ME
08
ME
10
ME
14
ME
16
ME
20
ME
21
ME
22
Ithe in
enclosure
(A)
0.16 0.5 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 .5 4 6.3 9 13 17 1 3
Enclosures for thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 ME
Type Degree of
protection
Possible number of
side-mounting auxiliary
contact blocks on GV2 ME
Reference Weight
LH side RH side kg
Surface
mounting,
double
insulated with
protective
conductor.
Sealable cover
IP 41 1 1 GV2 MC01

0.90
IP 55 1 1 GV2 MC02 0.300
or GV2 MCK04 (1) 0.40
IP 55 for
temperature < + 5 C
1 1 GV2 MC03 0.300
Accessories common to all enclosures (to be ordered separately)
Description Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Padlocking devices (2)
for GV ME operator (padlocking
is only possible in the O position)
1 to 3 padlocks 4
to 8 mm
1 GV2 V01 0.075
Mushroom
head
Emergency
stop
pushbutton
40 mm, red
Latching (2)
IP 55
Key release, key n
455
1 GV2 K021 0.160
Turn to
release
1 GV2 K031 0.115
1 GV2 K04 (3) 0.10
Sealing kit For enclosures
and front plate
IP 55 for
temperature
between
+ 5 C and + 40 C
10 GV2 E01 0.01
IP 55 for
temperature
between
- 0 C and + 40 C
10 GV2 E02 0.01
Neutral
terminal
100 AB1 VV635UBL 0.015
Partition 50 AB1 AC6BL 0.003
(1) Enclosure GV2 MCK04isfttedwithaGV2 K04 mushroom head Emergency stop pushbutton
asstandard.
(2)SuppliedwithIP55sealingkit.TobefttedwithenclosureGV2 Mp01.
(3)PadlockableinOffpositionusing4to8mmshankpadlocks.
GV ME and accessories
Assembly of a safety enclosure
GV2 MC
5
0
0
7
7
_
1
GV2-K011
GV2 K011
5
0
0
7
9
_
1
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
22
/15
(conformingtostandardsIEC60974-4-1,IEC60204andIEC60292)
Type of product Page Reference
Enclosure Opposite GV2 MCpp
Circuit-breaker 3/46 GV2 MEpp
Undervoltage trip or INRS trip (1) 3/55 GV2 Apppp
or GV2 AXppp
Mushroom head Emergency stop
pushbutton 40 mm, red
Opposite GV2 K021
or GV2 K031
or GV2 K04
(1)SafetydevicefordangerousmachinesconformingtoINRSandVDE0113.
GV ME and accessories
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
22
/16
2
GV ME
Dimensions
Surface mounting enclosure GV2 MC0p
(1)4knock-outsfor16mmplasticcableglandor16mmconduit.
Surface mounting enclosure GV2 MCK04
(1)4knock-outsfor16mmplasticcableglandor16mmconduit.
Mounting
Flush mounting enclosures GV2 MP0p (panel cut-out)
GV2 MP0p GV2 MP01, MP02 GV2 MP03, MP04 Front plate GV2 CP21
1
4
7
84
(1)
93 =
1
3
0
=
=
=
1
4
7
84
(1)
93 =
1
3
0
=
=
=
1
4
7
84
145,5
(1)
=
1
3
0
=
=
= 93
1
4
7
84
145,5
(1)
=
1
3
0
=
=
= 93
1...6
a 12
1
4
0
=
1
2
7
=
= 93,5 =
106,5
71
93
6,5
1
1
7
1
3
3
71
= =
9
,
5
1...6
a 12
1
4
0
=
1
2
7
=
= 93,5 =
106,5
71
93
6,5
1
1
7
1
3
3
71
= =
9
,
5
1...4
12
76
93
7,5
1
1
8
2
1
1
3
3
= =
6
2
1
1
,
5
1...4
12
76
93
7,5
1
1
8
2
1
1
3
3
= =
6
2
1
1
,
5
GV2 a
MP01, MP02
MP03, MP04 86
GV2 a
MP01, MP02
MP03, MP04 86
Dimensions,
mounting
/17
2
GV ME
Schemes
GV2 MEpp
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts
GV AE1 GV AE11 GV AE20
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and fault signalling contacts
GV AD0110 GV AD0101 GV AD1010 GV AD1001
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Short-circuit signalling contacts
GV AN11 GV AN20 GV AM11
Voltage trips
GV AUppp GV ASppp GV AXppp
Wiring diagram for undervoltage trip used on potentially dangerous machines, conforming to INRS
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
3
1
4
1
2
1
1
or
1
3
1
4
1
2
1
1
or
1
3
1
4
2
2
2
1
1
3
1
4
2
2
2
1
1
3
1
4
2
3
2
4
1
3
1
4
2
3
2
4
5
3
5
4
9
6
9
5
5
3
5
4
9
6
9
5
5
2
5
1
9
6
9
5
5
2
5
1
9
6
9
5
9
7
9
8
5
3
5
4
9
7
9
8
5
3
5
4
9
7
9
8
5
1
5
2
9
7
9
8
5
1
5
2
(
6
2
)
3
2
(
6
1
)
3
1
4
3
(
7
3
)
4
4
(
7
4
)
(
6
2
)
3
2
(
6
1
)
3
1
4
3
(
7
3
)
4
4
(
7
4
)
(
6
4
)
3
4
(
6
3
)
3
3
4
3
(
7
3
)
4
4
(
7
4
)
(
6
4
)
3
4
(
6
3
)
3
3
4
3
(
7
3
)
4
4
(
7
4
)
0
5
0
6
0
8
0
5
0
6
0
8
D
1
D
2
E
1
E
2
D
1
D
2
E
1
E
2
D
1
D
2
D
1
D
2
C
1
C
2
C
1
C
2
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
D
1
D
2
E2
E1
10 AgG max
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
D
1
D
2
E2
E1
10 AgG max
Schemes
/18
2
Characteristics,
references
Characteristics (1)
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-4, IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-10 and EN 60947
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 GV2 LC: IP 547
GV NGC: IP 407
Operational voltage Ue GV2 LC: 690 V
GV NGC: 500 V
Material Polycarbonate (2)
References
Control by black rotary handle, padlockable in Off position (up to 3 padlocks with 8 shank, to be ordered separately)
Rating
In
Breaking capacity Icu
conforming to IEC 60947-2
Magnetic
tripping
current
Id 20 %
Reference Weight
220/
230 V
400/
415 V
440 V 500 V
A kA kA kA kA A kg
16 100 100 100 100 13 In GV2 LC0206 (3) 0.780
25 100 100 100 100 13 In GV2 LC0207 (3) 0.780
4 100 100 100 100 13 In GV2 LC0208 (3) 0.780
63 100 100 100 100 13 In GV2 LC0210 (3) 0.780
10 100 100 0 10 13 In GV2 LC0214 (3) 0.780
14 100 50 0 10 13 In GV2 LC0216 (3) 0.780
18 100 50 0 10 13 In GV2 LC0220 (3) 0.780
25 100 50 30 15 1 In GV NGC0225 .450
32 100 50 30 15 1 In GV NGC0232 .450
40 100 50 30 15 1 In GV NGC0240 .450
50 100 50 30 15 1 In GV NGC0250 .450
63 100 50 30 15 1 In GV NGC0263 .450
Variants
Starters with control by red rotary handle on yellow background
Add the letter R to the references selected above.
Example: GV2 LC0206 becomes GV2 LC0206R.
Enclosure without circuit-breaker, with rotary handle mounted on cover
A kg
Black rotary handle 1.618 GV2 LC02 0.300
563 GV NGC02 0.550
Red rotary handle on yellow background 1.618 GV2 LC02R 0.300
563 GV NGC02R 0.550
(1) Circuit-breaker characteristics:
GV2 L: seepages3/14and3/15.
NG 125L:productmarketedundertheSchneiderElectricbrand,pleaseconsultyourRegionalSalesOffce.
(2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic
hydrocarbons).
(3)Thefollowingcanbefttedbythecustomer:aGVAD or GVAM auxiliary contact block on the LH side and a GVAp trip on the
RHside.
5
3
3
7
4
0
GV2 LC02pp
5
6
1
4
8
GV2 LC02pp
5
6
1
4
9
GVNGC02pp
5
6
1
4
8
GV2 LC02
D.O.L. starters with manual control,
with magnetic circuit-breaker, 0.55 to 30 kW
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/19
2
Dimensions,
scheme
Dimensions
GV2 LC0206LC0220 GV NGC0225NGC0263

Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands
Enclosure type At top At bottom
ISO ISO
GV2 LC x 0 or x 5 x 0 or x 5
GV NGC

x 0 or x 5 or x 3 or x 40 x 0 or x 5 or x 3 or x 40
Scheme

120
173
1
6
6
1
5
0
6
5
=
=
=
88
= 120
173
1
6
6
1
5
0
6
5
=
=
=
88
=
3
4
8
3
3
0
=
=
= 167
237 186,3
=
3
4
8
3
3
0
=
=
= 167
237 186,3
=
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
References :
page /18
References :
page /18
D.O.L. starters with manual control,
with magnetic circuit-breaker, 0.55 to 30 kW
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/0
2
TeSys enclosed starters 2
D.O.L. starters for motor control (1)
. to 45 kW, without isolating device

Characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-10, EN 60947
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 IP 659: LE2 K
IP 657: LEp D09D35
IP 557: LEp D405D955
Ambient air temperature Operation: - 5+ 40 C
Operating positions Same as that of the contactors
Material Polycarbonate (2): LE2 K and LEp D09D35
Sheet steel: LEp D405D955
References
Non-reversing starters
motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3
Maximum
current
I the
up to
Basic reference,
to be completed by adding
the voltage code (3)
Weight
220 V
230 V
380 V
400 V
415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V
690 V
kW kW kW kW kW kW A kg
. 4 4 4 5.5 5.5 9 LE1 D09pp 0.90
3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 12 LE1 D12pp 0.90
4 7.5 9 9 10 10 18 LE1 D18pp 1.015
5.5 11 11 11 15 15 25 LE1 D25pp 1.015
7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 35 LE1 D35pp 4.30
11 18.5 30 40 LE1 D405pp 4.80
15 5 30 30 33 50 LE1 D505pp 4.850
18.5 30 37 37 37 37 65 LE1 D655pp 4.850
37 45 45 55 45 80 LE1 D805pp 5.140
5 45 45 45 55 45 95 LE1 D955pp 5.440
Reversing starters
1.5 . . 3 6 LE2 K065pp 1.080
. 4 4 4 9 LE2 K095pp 1.080
LE2 D09pp (4) .100
5.5 5.5 9 LE2 D09pp .100
3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 12 LE2 D12pp .100
4 7.5 9 9 10 10 18 LE2 D18pp .410
5.5 11 11 11 15 15 25 LE2 D25pp .570
7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 35 LE2 D35pp 4.100
11 18.5 30 40 LE2 D405pp 5.70
15 5 30 30 33 50 LE2 D505pp 5.470
18.5 30 37 37 37 37 65 LE2 D655pp 5.470
37 45 45 55 45 80 LE2 D805pp 6.700
5 45 45 45 55 45 95 LE2 D955pp 7.000
(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately,
seepages6/20and6/23.
(2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents,
ketones,alcohol,aromatichydrocarbons).
(3)Standardcontrolcircuitvoltages.
Volts
a 50/60 Hz
24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
LE2 K B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
LE1, LE2 D B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
Othervoltages:pleaseconsultyourRegionalSalesOffce.
(4) Selection according to the number of operating cycles, please consult your Regional Sales
Offce.

5
6
4
3
LE1 D12pp
5
6
4
3
LE1 D12pp
5
6
4
4
LE2 D12pp
5
6
4
4
LE2 D12pp
Dimensions :
page /
Schemes :
page /3
Dimensions :
page /
Schemes :
page /3
Dimensions :
page /
Schemes :
page /3
Dimensions :
page /
Schemes :
page /3
Characteristics,
references 2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/1
2

Description
Standard versions comprise:
For non-reversing starters:
1 green Start button I,
1 red Stop/Reset button O.
For reversing starters:
LE K:
1 Start button A,
1 Start button E,
1 red Stop/Reset button.
LE D09D35:
1 -position spring return selector switch I-II,
1 red Stop/Reset button O,
LE D405D955:
1 blue Reset button R.

Variants (pre-assembled)
Description Application Suffx to be added to
the starter reference (2)
No pushbuttons on cover

LE1 D09D955
LE D09D955
A04
1 green Start button I
1 green Start button II
1 red Stop/Reset button O
LE D405D955 A11
1 blue Reset button R

LE1 D09D955
LE K06 and K09
LE D09D35
A05
1 3-position stay put selector
switch (I-O-II)
(I: Automatic Start; O: Stop;
II: Manual Start)
LE1 D09D35 A09
1 -position stay put selector
switch O-I
(O: Stop; I: Manual Start)
LE1 D09D35 A13
1 3-position selector switch
O-I spring return to centre position
(I: Manual start;
O: Stop, stay put)
LE1 D09D35
A35
1 neutral terminal
Fitted as standard on
LE1 and LE D09 to D35,
LE1 and LE D405 to D955 starters
ordered with V (M7), 30 V (P7)
or 40 V (U7) control supply
LE1 D405D955
LE K06 and K09
LE D405D955
A59
Mounting of an LC1 D09 or D1 contactor
in an enclosure identical to LE1 D18 (3)
LE1 D09
LE1 D1
T
Accessory (for customer assembly)
Description Application Reference Weight
kg
Start pushbutton latching device
for stay put operation
(Start-Stop)
LE1 D405D955 LA9 D09907 0.060
(1)Seepreviouspage.
(2) Example: LE1 D09F7A04.
(3)Seedimensionspage2/22.

Other versions Possible combinations of variants.

b
v
v
b
v
-
-
-
v
-
-
v
-
5
6
4
5
LE1 D12ppA04
5
6
4
5
LE1 D12ppA04
5
6
4
6
LE1 D12ppA05
5
6
4
6
LE1 D12ppA05
5
6
4
7
LE1 D12ppA09
5
6
4
7
LE1 D12ppA09
5
6
4
8
LE1 D12ppA13
5
6
4
8
LE1 D12ppA13
5
6
4
9
LE1 D12ppA35
5
6
4
9
LE1 D12ppA35
Schemes :
page /3
Schemes :
page /3
Schemes :
page /3
Schemes :
page /3
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/
D.O.L. starters for motor control

Dimensions
LE1 D09 and D12 LE1 D09 and D12ppT
LE1 D18D35 and LE2 D09D35
LE1 D405D655

c1
c1 LE1 D LE2 D c1
Standard version 18.5 Standard version 153.5 160 Standard version 161
Variant A04 135 Variant A04 145 145 Variant A04 150
Variant A05 18.5 Variant A05 153.5 153.5 Variant A05 161
Variant A09 135 Variant A09 160
LE2 K06 and K09

LE1 D805, LE1 D955 and LE2 D405D655 LE2 D805 and D955

c1
LE1 D LE2 D c1
Standard version 176 176 Standard version 194
Variant A04 165 165 Variant A04 190
Variant A11 176
Type of enclosure At top At bottom
PG ISO PG ISO
LE1 D09 and D12 x 0 x 13 or x 16 x 0
LE1 D18D35 and LE2 D09D35 x 0 or x 5 x 16 or x 1 x 0 or x 5
LE2 D405 1 x 13 and 1 x 1 1 x 0 and 1 x 5 1 x 13 and x 1 1 x 0 and x 5
LE1 D405D655, LE2 D505 and D655 1 x 13 and 1 x 9 1 x 0 and 1 x 3 1 x 13 and x 9 1 x 0 and x 3
LE1 or LE2 D805 and D955 1 x 13 and 1 x 36 1 x 0 and 1 x 40 1 x 13 and x 36 1 x 0 and x 40
LE2 K x 13 and x 16 4 x 0 x 13 and x 16 4 x 0

c1
1
6
6
1
5
0
=
=
=
88
= c1
1
6
6
1
5
0
=
=
=
88
=
c1
1
8
3
= =
101
2
0
1
c1
1
8
3
= =
101
2
0
1
c1
3
1
2
=
181
= 105
1
9
5
=
=
c1
3
1
2
=
181
= 105
1
9
5
=
=
146
120
84
175
1
5
0
1
6
5
19
146
120
84
175
1
5
0
1
6
5
19
c1
3
0
7
=
257
= 165
1
6
5
=
=
c1
3
0
7
=
257
= 165
1
6
5
=
=
2
8
7
c1 =
367
= 225
1
9
5
=
=
2
8
7
c1 =
367
= 225
1
9
5
=
=
References :
pages /0 and /1
Schemes :
page /3
References :
pages /0 and /1
Schemes :
page /3
References :
pages /0 and /1
Schemes :
page /3
References :
pages /0 and /1
Schemes :
page /3
Dimensions 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
/3

Schemes
LE1 D09D955 LE1 D09D955 Variant A04 or A05

LE2 K06, K09 LE2 K06, K09 Variant A05

LE2 D09D955 LE2 D09D35 LE2 D405D955, LE2 D09D955
with variants A04 or A05

Connections A B
220 V, 230 V, 240 V LE K, LE1 and LE D09 and D1 L3 Neutral
LE1 and LE D18D955 L3 Neutral terminal
380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V All products L3 L1
Other voltages LE1 and LE D09D35 Terminal 1 Terminal
LE K, LE1 and LE D405 and D955 Direct connection

L
1
L
2
KM1
U V W
L
3
L
1
L
2
KM1
U V W
L
3
B
A
A
1
A
2
KM1
KM1
O
I
B
A
A
1
A
2
KM1
KM1
O
I
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
A
O
l
KM1
B
A
1
A
2
KM1
Remote control
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
A
O
l
KM1
B
A
1
A
2
KM1
Remote control
KM1 KM2
L
1
L
2
L
3
U V W
KM1 KM2
L
1
L
2
L
3
U V W
KM2
A
B
KM1
KM2 KM1
KM2 KM1
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
O
KM2
A
B
KM1
KM2 KM1
KM2 KM1
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
O
B
KM2 KM1
KM2 KM1
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
R
Remote
control
B
KM2 KM1
KM2 KM1
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
R
Remote
control
KM1 KM2
L
1
L
2
L
3
U V W
KM1 KM2
L
1
L
2
L
3
U V W
A
1
A
2
KM1
KM2
KM2
A
A
1
A
2
KM2
KM1
B
KM1
S1
II I
A
1
A
2
KM1
KM2
KM2
A
A
1
A
2
KM2
KM1
B
KM1
S1
II I
KM2
A
1
A
2
KM1
2
1
2
2
KM2
A
O
A
1
A
2
KM2
KM1
B
R
l l
KM1
Remote
control
KM2
A
1
A
2
KM1
2
1
2
2
KM2
A
O
A
1
A
2
KM2
KM1
B
R
l l
KM1
Remote
control
References :
pages /0 and /1
Dimensions :
page /
References :
pages /0 and /1
Dimensions :
page /
References :
pages /0 and /1
Dimensions :
page /
References :
pages /0 and /1
Dimensions :
page /
Schemes 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
/4
2
. to 45 kW, with isolating device

Characteristics
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 IP 659: LEp K
IP 657: LEp D09D35
IP 557: LEp D406D806
Ambient air temperature Operation: - 5+ 40 C
Material Polycarbonate (2): LEp K and LEp D09D35
Sheet steel: LEp D406D806
References
Maximum
current
I the
up to
Fuses to be ftted
by the customer
Basic reference,
to be completed by
Weight
220 V
230 V
380 V
400 V
415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V
690 V
Size Type aM
kW kW kW kW kW kW A A kg
1.5 . . 3 6 10 x 38 10 LE4 K065pp 1.450
. 4 4 4 9 10 x 38 1 LE4 K095pp 1.450
or LE4 D09pp (4) 1.960
. 4 4 4 5.5 9 10 x 38 1 LE4 D09pp 1.960
3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 12 10 x 38 16 LE4 D12pp 1.960
4 7.5 9 9 10 18 10 x 38 0 LE4 D18pp .00
5.5 11 11 11 15 25 10 x 38 5 LE4 D25pp .00
7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 35 14 x 51 3 LE4 D35pp 5.190
11 18.5 30 40 14 x 51 40 LE4 D406pp 5.770
15 5 30 30 33 50 x 58 63 LE4 D506pp 6.440
18.5 30 37 37 37 37 65 x 58 80 LE4 D656pp 6.670
37 45 45 55 45 80 x 58 80 LE4 D806pp (5) 7.100
Reversing starters
1.5 . . 3 6 10 x 38 10 LE8 K065pp 1.600
. 4 4 4 9 10 x 38 1 LE8 K095pp 1.600
or LE8 D09pp (4) 3.550
5.5 9 10 x 38 1 LE8 D09pp 3.550
3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 12 10 x 38 16 LE8 D12pp 3.550
4 7.5 9 9 10 18 10 x 38 0 LE8 D18pp 3.700
5.5 11 11 11 15 25 10 x 38 5 LE8 D25pp 4.670
7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 35 14 x 51 3 LE8 D35pp 5.800
11 18.5 30 40 14 x 51 40 LE2 D406pp 14.170
15 5 30 30 33 50 x 58 63 LE2 D506pp 14.700
18.5 30 37 37 37 37 65 x 58 80 LE2 D656pp 14.770
37 45 45 55 45 80 x 58 80 LE2 D806pp 16.000
(1)Overloadprotectionmustbeprovidedbyathermaloverloadrelay,tobeorderedseparately,seepages6/20and6/23.
(2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic
hydrocarbons).
Volts
a 50/60 Hz
24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
LEp K B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
LEp D B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
(4)Selectionaccordingtodimensionsandthenumberofoperatingcycles,pleaseconsultyourRegionalSalesOffce.
(5)Suppliedwith3cableentries.

5
1
1
5
4
7
LE4 D12pp
5
1
1
5
4
7
LE4 D12pp
5
6
4
3
0
LE8 D12pp
5
6
4
3
0
LE8 D12pp
Dimensions:
page /6
Schemes:
page /7
Dimensions:
page /6
Schemes:
page /7
Dimensions:
page /6
Schemes:
page /7
Dimensions:
page /6
Schemes:
page /7
Characteristics,
references 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/5
2

Description
Standard versions comprise:
For non-reversing starters:
LE4 K and LE4 D09D656
LE4 D806
no pushbuttons on cover
For reversing starters:
LE8 K :
1 Start button A,
1 Start button E,
1 red Stop/Reset button.
LE8 D09D35 :
1 -position spring return selector switch I-II,
1 red Stop/Reset button O,
LE D406 to D806:
no pushbuttons on cover.

Protection Power circuit Control circuit
LE4 and LE8 K 1 3-pole isolating device None
LE4 and LE8 D09D5 1 3-pole isolating device + 1 additional pole
LE4 and LE D35D806 1 3-pole isolating device + 1 circuit-breaker GB CB08

No pushbuttons on cover LE4 D09D656
LE8 D09D35
A04
1 green Start button II
LE D406D806 A11
1 blue Reset button R LE4 D09D806
LE8 K06 and K09
LE8 D09D35
LE D406D806
A05
1 neutral terminal
Fitted as standard on LE4 D18D806,
LE8 D18D35 and LE4 D406D806
starters ordered with 0 V (M7),
30 V (P7) or 40 V (U7) control supply
LE4 K06 and K09
LE4 D09D806
LE8 K06 and K09
LE8 D09D35
LE D406D806
A59
Accessory (for customer assembly)
kg
(Start-Stop)
LE4 D406D656 LA9 D09907 0.060
(1) See previous page


b
v
-
-
v
-
b
v
-
-
-
v
-
-
v
-
5
6
4
3
1
LE4 D12ppA04
5
6
4
3
1
LE4 D12ppA04
5
6
4
3
LE4 D12ppA05
5
6
4
3
LE4 D12ppA05
Dimensions:
page /6
Schemes:
page /7
Dimensions:
page /6
Schemes:
page /7
Dimensions:
page /6
Schemes:
page /7
Dimensions:
page /6
Schemes:
page /7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/6
2

Dimensions
LE4 K06 and K09, LE8 K06 and K09 LE4 D09D35, LE8 D09D35

c1 c1
LE4 K LE8 K LE4 D LE8 D
Standard version 146 146 Standard version 175.5 18
Variant A05 139 Variant A04 167 167
(1) For LE8 only Variant A05 175.5 175.5
LE4 D406D656 LE2 D406D806, LE4 D806

c1
c1 a LE2 D LE4 D
Standard version 01 LE2 D406, D506, D656 300 Standard version 18 18
Variant A04 190 LE2 D806 400 Variant A05 18 18
Variant A05 01 LE4 D806 400 Variant A11 18
(1)+14mmwithblankingplugs.
PG ISO PG ISO
LE4 and LE8 D09D35 x 0 or x 5 or
x 3 or x 40
x 0 or x 5 or
x 3 or x 40
LE2 D09D35 x 0 or x 5 x 0 or x 5
LE2 D406 and LE4 D406 1 x 13 and 1 x 1 1 x 0 and 1 x 5 1 x 13 and x 1 1 x 0 and x 5
LE1 D506D656, LE4 D506 and D656 1 x 13 and 1 x 9 1 x 0 and 1 x 3 1 x 13 and x 9 1 x 0 and x 3
LE2 D806 and LE4 D806 1 x 13 and 1 x 36 1 x 0 and 1 x 40 1 x 13 and x 36 1 x 0 and x 40
LE4 K and LE8 K x 13 and x 16 4 x 0 x 13 and x 16 4 x 0

c1
0 84
175
1
5
0
1
6
5
(1)
10
19
31
c1
0 84
175
1
5
0
1
6
5
(1)
10
19
31
c1
3
4
8
3
3
0
=
=
=
186 31
= c1
3
4
8
3
3
0
=
=
=
186 31
=
2
8
7
c1 =
367
=
31
225
1
9
5
=
=
2
8
7
c1 =
367
=
31
225
1
9
5
=
=
4
0
0

(
1
)
0
c1
= = a-75
a-50
a
a+57,5
3
5
0
3
4
,
5
3
5
=
=
4xM8x5
31
4
0
0

(
1
)
0
c1
= = a-75
a-50
a
a+57,5
3
5
0
3
4
,
5
3
5
=
=
4xM8x5
31
References :
pages /4 and /5
Schemes :
page /7
References :
pages /4 and /5
Schemes :
page /7
References :
pages /4 and /5
Schemes :
page /7
References :
pages /4 and /5
Schemes :
page /7
Dimensions 2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/7
2

Schemes
LE4 K06, K09
LE4 D09D806
LE4 K06, K09 LE4 D09D35 LE4 D406D656 LE4 D806, LE4 D09D656
with variant A04 or A05

LE8 K06, K09 LE8 K06, K09 Variant A05

LE8 D09LE2 D806 LE8 D09D35 LE2 D406D806

Connections A B
220 V, 230 V, 240 V LE4 and LE8 K, LE4 and LE8 D09 and D1 L3 Neutral
LE4 D18D806, LE8 D18D35 and LE D406D806 L3 Neutral terminal
Other voltages LE4 and LE8 D09D35 Terminal 1 Terminal
LE4 and LE D406D806 Direct connection

Q1
KM1
L
1
L
2
L
3
U W V
Q1
KM1
L
1
L
2
L
3
U W V
KM1
O
I
KM1
A
1
A
2
A
B
KM1
O
I
KM1
A
1
A
2
A
B
B
A
A
1
A
2
KM1
KM1
1
8
1
7
Q1
Q1
O
I
B
A
A
1
A
2
KM1
KM1
1
8
1
7
Q1
Q1
O
I
O
l
A
1
A
2
KM1
KM1
Q1
F1
B
A
O
l
A
1
A
2
KM1
KM1
Q1
F1
B
A
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
O
l
KM1
A
2
A
1
KM1
Q1 F1
B
A
Remote control
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
O
l
KM1
A
2
A
1
KM1
Q1 F1
B
A
Remote control
Q1
KM1 KM2
L
1
L
2
L
3
U V W
Q1
KM1 KM2
L
1
L
2
L
3
U V W
KM KM1
KM
KM KM1
A
1
A
Q1
KM1
A
1
A
A
B
O
KM KM1
KM
KM KM1
A
1
A
Q1
KM1
A
1
A
A
B
O
KM KM1
KM KM1
A
1
A
A
1
A
R
A
B
Remote control
KM KM1
KM KM1
A
1
A
A
1
A
R
A
B
Remote control
Q1
2 KM1 KM2
L
1
L
2
L
3
U V W
Q1
2 KM1 KM2
L
1
L
2
L
3
U V W
A
1
A
2
KM1
KM2
KM2
A
1
A
2
KM2
KM1
KM1
Q1
Q1
A
B
S1
II I
O
A
1
A
2
KM1
KM2
KM2
A
1
A
2
KM2
KM1
KM1
Q1
Q1
A
B
S1
II I
O
A
1
A
2
KM1
2
1
2
2
KM2
KM2
O
A
1
A
2
KM2
KM1
KM1
1
3
1
4
l l
Q1 F1
A
B
Remote control
A
1
A
2
KM1
2
1
2
2
KM2
KM2
O
A
1
A
2
KM2
KM1
KM1
1
3
1
4
l l
Q1 F1
A
B
Remote control
References :
pages /4 and /5
Dimensions :
page /6
References :
pages /4 and /5
Dimensions :
page /6
References :
pages /4 and /5
Dimensions :
page /6
References :
pages /4 and /5
Dimensions :
page /6
Schemes 2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/8
2
0.5 to 7.5 kW with 3-phase thermal
overload relay with 3 protected phases
Characteristics (1)
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-10 and EN 60947
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 IP 65
Ambient air temperature Operation: - 5 to + 40 C
Operating positions Same as for the TeSys K contactors
Material Self-extinguishing ABS
References
Starter LE1 M, combined with short-circuit protection components, provides type 1
or type coordination, depending on the type of devices used.
Setting range
of thermal
overload relay
LR2 K (2)
Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (3)
Weight
220 V
230 V
240 V 380 V
400 V
415 V
kW kW kW kW A kg
0.1 0.1 0.5 0.5 0.540.8 LE1 M35pp05 0.600
0.18 0.18 0.37 0.37 0.81. LE1 M35pp06 0.600
0.5 0.5 0.55 0.55 1.1.8 LE1 M35pp07 0.600
0.37 0.37 1.1 0.75 1.8.6 LE1 M35pp08 0.600
0.55 0.55 1.5 1.5 .63.7 LE1 M35pp10 0.600
1.1 0.75 . . 3.75.5 LE1 M35pp12 0.600
1.5 1.1 3 3 5.58 LE1 M35pp14 0.600
. . 4 4 811.5 LE1 M35pp16 0.600
3 3 5.5 5.5 1014 LE1 M35pp21 0.600
3.7 4 7.5 7.5 116 LE1 M35pp22 0.600
Description
The standard version comprises:
1 TeSys contactor LC1 Kpp,
1 TeSys thermal overload relay LR K,
1 red Stop/Reset button O/R,
1 yellow operating indicator.
Control may be pulsed or maintained.
An earth terminal and a neutral terminal are provided on the bottom of the
enclosure.
For safey applications, see enclosed starters:
GV MC, LG1 K, LG1 D, LG7 K, LG7 D, LJ7 K, LG8 K and LJ8 K.
Variant
Starter without thermal overload relay LR2 K
Delete the last digits of the starter references selected above.
Example: LE1 M35pp
Replacement part
Description Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (3)
Weight
kg
Contactor LC1 KppA80 0.180
(1)ForcharacteristicsofTeSysKcontactor,seepages5/10and5/13.
ForcharacteristicsofTeSysthermaloverloadrelayLR2K,seepages6/10to6/11.
(2)Thermaloverloadrelayfttedasstandard.
(3)Thecontactorcoilispre-wiredbetween2phasesofthepowercircuit.
The codes indicated below therefore correspond to the power circuit voltage.
Volts
a 50/60 Hz
24 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
Code B7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
Example: 380/400 V 3-phase supply, 4 kW motor: LE1 M35Q716.

b
v
v
v
v
v
b
b
b
LE1 M35pppp
5
1
1
5
4
8
5
3
3
7
8
9
LE1 M35pppp
5
1
1
5
4
8
5
3
3
7
8
9
Dimensions :
page /9
Schemes :
page /9
Dimensions :
page /9
Schemes :
page /9
Dimensions :
page /9
Schemes :
page /9
Dimensions :
page /9
Schemes :
page /9
Characteristics,
references 2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/9
2
0.5 to 7.5 kW with 3-phase thermal
overload relay with 3 protected phases

Dimensions
LE1 M35 (1)

PG ISO PG ISO
LE1 M x 13 to x 1 x 0 or x 5 x 13 to x 1 x 0 or x 5
(1)Canbemountedonmachinepanelorframe.Knock-outsfor4x13Pcableglands.
Schemes
LE1 M35 Choice of type of control built into the product
Control by latching pushbuttons Control by spring return pushbuttons

Connection A B
220 V, 230 V, 240 V L3 Neutral
380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V L3 L1
Other voltages Terminal 1 Terminal

108 108 78
1
6
0
78
1
6
0
1
3
0

(
5
"
1
/
8
)
1
3
0

(
5
"
1
/
8
)
I
O/R
1
2
3
4
5
6
13
14
A1
A2
2 4 6
L1 L2 L3
Reset/OR
T1 T2 T3
I
O/R
1
2
3
4
5
6
13
14
A1
A2
2 4 6
L1 L2 L3
Reset/OR
T1 T2 T3
U W V
2 4 6
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
M
KM1
U W V
2 4 6
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
M
KM1 I
A
B
O
9
5
9
6
KM1 H1
A
2
A
1
1
4
1
3
KM1
I
A
B
O
9
5
9
6
KM1 H1
A
2
A
1
1
4
1
3
KM1
I
A
B
1
4
1
3
O/R
9
5
9
6
KM1 H1
A
2
A
1
KM1 I
A
B
1
4
1
3
O/R
9
5
9
6
KM1 H1
A
2
A
1
KM1
References :
page /8
References :
page /8
References :
page /8
References :
page /8
Dimensions,
schemes 2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/30
2
D.O.L. starters for motor control, 0.37 to 5.5 kW
with thermal magnetic circuit-breaker and contactor

Characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-10 and EN 60947
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 IP 55
Operating positions Same as for the TeSys K contactors
Material Polycarbonate (1)
References
3-phase motors 50-60 Hz
in category AC-3
Setting
range of
thermal
trips
Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth
Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (2)
Weight
230 V 400/
415 V
440 V 500 V 690 V
0.18
0.5
0.37
0.55
0.37
0.55
0.37
0.55
0.75
0.75
1.1
11.6 .5 LE1 GVME06Kpp 1.10
0.37 0.75 0.75
1.1
1.1 1.5 1.6.5 33.5 LE1 GVME07Kpp 1.10
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
1.5 1.5
.
.
3
.54 51 LE1 GVME08Kpp 1.10
1.1 . .
3
3 4 46.3 78 LE1 GVME10Kpp 1.10
1.5
.
3
4
4 4
5.5
5.5
7.5
610 138 LE1 GVME14Kpp 1.10
.
3
5.5 5.5
7.5
7.5 9
11
914 170 LE1 GVME16Kpp 1.10
Variants
Description Suffx to be added
to the starter
reference (3)
Weight
kg
Neutral terminal A59
kg
Enclosure without starter, with sealing kit ftted
(references of combination motor starters
for customer assembly, see pages 1/6 and 1/7)
LE1 GVMEK 0.740
Accessories (to be ordered separately)
Description Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Padlocking device (4)
for GV ME operator (padlocking
is only possible in the O position)
1 to 3 padlocks
4 to 8 mm
1 GV2 V01 0.075
Mushroom
head Stop
pushbutton
40 mm,
red
Latching (4)
IP 55
Key release,
key n 455
1 GV2 K021 0.160
Turn to release 1 GV2 K031 0.115
1 GV2 K04 (5) 0.10
Sealing kit IP 55 for
temperature
between
+ 5C and + 40C
10 GV2 E01 0.01
IP 55 for
temperature
between
- 0C and + 40C
10 GV2 E02 0.01
Volts
a 50/60 Hz
24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
Item B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
(3) Example: LE1 GVME06KF7A59.
(4)SuppliedwithIP55sealingkit.
(5)PadlockableinpositionOusing4to8mmshankpadlocks.
5
6
4
4
0
LE1 GVMEppKpp
5
3
3
7
9
8
5
6
4
4
0
LE1 GVMEppKpp
5
3
3
7
9
8
5
6
4
4
1
LE1 GVMEK
5
6
4
4
1
LE1 GVMEK
Dimensions :
page /31
Schemes :
page /31
Dimensions :
page /31
Schemes :
page /31
Dimensions :
page /31
Schemes :
page /31
Dimensions :
page /31
Schemes :
page /31
Characteristics,
references 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/31
2
D.O.L. starters for motor control, 0.37 to 5.5 kW
with thermal magnetic circuit-breaker and contactor

Dimensions
LE1 GVMEK

ISO ISO
LE1 GV x 0 or x 5 x 0 or x 5
Schemes
LE1 GVMEK

Connections A B
220 V, 230 V, 240 V L3 Neutral
380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V L3 L1
Other voltages Terminal 1 Terminal

86
94
1
8
3
2
0
1
86
94
1
8
3
2
0
1
= =
101
= =
101
L
1
L
2
L
3
KM1
Q1
L
1
L
2
L
3
KM1
Q1
A
1
A
2
O
I KM1
KM1
Q1
A
B
External
control
A
1
A
2
O
I KM1
KM1
Q1
A
B
External
control
References :
page /30
References :
page /30
References :
page /30
References :
page /30
Dimensions,
schemes 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/3
Star-delta starters
5.5 to 13 kW, without isolating device (1)

Characteristics
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 IP 659: LE3 K
IP 657: LE3 D09D35
IP 557: LE3 D405D150
Material Polycarbonate (2): LE3 K and LE3 D09D35
Sheet steel: LE3 D405D150
References
Maximum operating rate:
LE3 K: 1 starts/hour and LE3-D: 30 starts/hour.
Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.
LE3 D: an LAD S timer imposes a delay of 40 ms 15 ms on the delta contactor at
the moment of changeover to ensure that the star contactor has suffcient breaking
time.

Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors
Basic reference,
to be completed by
Weight
220 V 380/400 V 415 V 440 V
kW kW kW kW kg
3 5.5 5.5 5.5 LE3 K065pp 1.460
4 7.5 7.5 7.5 LE3 K095pp 1.460
or LE3 D09pp (4) 3.650
5.5 11 11 11 LE3 D12pp 3.650
11 18.5 LE3 D18pp 3.750
15 30 30 30 LE3 D35pp 5.160
18.5 37 37 37 LE3 D405pp 8.160
30 55 59 59 LE3 D505pp 8.150
37 75 75 75 LE3 D805pp 14.000
63 110 110 110 LE3 D115pp 4.500
75 13 13 147 LE3 D150pp 4.500
(1)Overloadprotectionmustbeprovidedbyathermaloverloadrelay,tobeorderedseparately.
Selectappropriateoverloadrelayforsettingat0.58ofthefullloadratedmotorcurrent,see
pages6/20and6/23.
Volts
a 50/60 Hz
24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
LE3 K B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7
LE3 D B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
(4) Selection according to dimensions and the number of operating cycles, please consult your
RegionalSalesOffce.

LE3 D12pp
5
6
4
3
5
LE3 D12pp
5
6
4
3
5
Dimensions :
page /34
Schemes :
page /35
Dimensions :
page /34
Schemes :
page /35
Dimensions :
page /34
Schemes :
page /35
Dimensions :
page /34
Schemes :
page /35
Characteristics,
references 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
/33
Star-delta starters
5.5 to 13 kW, without isolating device

Description
LE3 K and LE3 D09D35:
LE3 D405D150:
no pushbuttons on cover.

No pushbuttons on cover LE3 D09D35

A04
LE3 D405D150

A06
1 blue Reset button R LE3 D09D805

A05
1 neutral terminal
starters LE3 D115 and D150
LE3 K065 and K095
LE3 D09D805

A59
Mechanical interlock
Fitted as standard on starters
LE3 K and LE3 D09D35
LE3 D405 to D150

A64
(1)Example:LE3D09F7A04


b
v
v
b
v
LE3 D12ppA04
5
6
4
3
6
LE3 D12ppA04
5
6
4
3
6
LE3 D12ppA05
5
6
4
3
7
LE3 D12ppA05
5
6
4
3
7
Schemes :
page /35
Schemes :
page /35
Schemes :
page /35
Schemes :
page /35
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
/34
Dimensions
LE3 K065, K095 LE3 D09D35

c1
Standard version 175.5
Variant A04 167
Variant A05 175.5
LE3 D405 and D505 LE3 D805D150

c1
c1 LE3 a b LE3 D805 D115, D150
Standard version 190 D805 400 400 Standard version 0 5
Variant A05 194 D1155 500 600 Variant A05 18
Variant A06 194 D1505 500 600 Variant A06 18 68
PG ISO PG ISO
LE3 D09D35 x 0 or x 5 or
x 3 or x 40
x 0 or x 5 or
x 3 or x 40
LE3 D405 1 x 9 1 x 3 1 x 9,
x 13 and x 1
1 x 3,
x 0 and x 5
LE3 D505 1 x 36 1 x 40 1 x 36,
x 13 and x 9
1 x 40,
x 0 and x 3
LE3 D805 1 x 36 1 x 40 x 13 and 3 x 36 x 0 and 3 x 40
LE3 K x 13 and x 16 4 x 0 x 13 and x 16 4 x 0

84
175
1
5
0
146
120
1
6
5
19
84
175
1
5
0
146
120
1
6
5
19
c1
3
4
8
3
3
0
=
=
=
186
= c1
3
4
8
3
3
0
=
=
=
186
=
2
8
7
c1 =
367
= 225
1
9
5
=
=
2
8
7
c1 =
367
= 225
1
9
5
=
=
b

(
1
)
c1
c1 + 15,5
= = a - 75
a - 50
a
a + 57,5
b

-

5
0
b

+

5
7
,
5
b

-

7
5
=
=
b

(
1
)
c1
c1 + 15,5
= = a - 75
a - 50
a
a + 57,5
b

-

5
0
b

+

5
7
,
5
b

-

7
5
=
=
References :
pages /3 and /33
Schemes :
page /35
References :
pages /3 and /33
Schemes :
page /35
References :
pages /3 and /33
Schemes :
page /35
References :
pages /3 and /33
Schemes :
page /35
Star-delta starters
Dimensions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/35
Schemes
LE3 K065 and K095

LE3 D09D805 LE3 D09D35 LE3 D405D805

Note : inaccordancewithcurrentinstallationregulations,short-circuitprotectionmustbeprovidedbyfusesoracircuit-breaker.
LE3 D115 and D150

Connections A B
220 V, 230 V, 240 V LD09 and D1 L3 Neutral
LE3 D18 to D150 L3 Neutral terminal
Other voltages LE3 D09D35 Terminal 1 Terminal
LE3 K and LE3 D405D150 Direct connection

KM2 KM3 KM1
L
1
L
2
L
3
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
Recommended
cabling for reversal
of motor rotation
(standard motor,
viewed from
shaft end).
KM2 KM3 KM1
L
1
L
2
L
3
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
Recommended
of motor rotation
(standard motor,
viewed from
shaft end).
A
O
KM3 KM2 KM1 T
T
KM1
I
Y
L
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
KM1 KM3
KM2
B
A
O
KM3 KM2 KM1 T
T
KM1
I
Y
L
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
KM1 KM3
KM2
B
KM2 KM3 KM1
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
L
1
L
2
L
3
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
Recommended
of motor rotation
(standard motor,
viewed from
shaft end).
KM2 KM3 KM1
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
L
1
L
2
L
3
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
Recommended
of motor rotation
(standard motor,
viewed from
shaft end).
A
1
A
2
KM1
KM3
KM2
KM1
KM2
A
1
A
2
KM3
KM1
A
1
A
2
KM2
KM2
B
A
O
I
Y
L
A
1
A
2
KM1
KM3
KM2
KM1
KM2
A
1
A
2
KM3
KM1
A
1
A
2
KM2
KM2
B
A
O
I
Y
L
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
7
1
8
KM3
KM2
KM1
KM2
A
1
A
2
KM3
KM1
A
1
A
2
KM2
KM2
B
A
I
Y
L
Remote
control
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
7
1
8
KM3
KM2
KM1
KM2
A
1
A
2
KM3
KM1
A
1
A
2
KM2
KM2
B
A
I
Y
L
Remote
control
KM2 KM3 KM1
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
L
1
L
2
L
3
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
Recommended
of motor rotation
(standard motor,
viewed from shaft
end).
KM2 KM3 KM1
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
L
1
L
2
L
3
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
Recommended
of motor rotation
(standard motor,
viewed from shaft
end).
1
7
1
8
l
A
1
A
2
KM1
KM3
KM2
KM1
KM2
A
1
A
2
KA1
A
1
A
2
KM2
KM1
F2
KM2
KM1
A
1
A
2
KM3
KA1
Y
L
A
B
Remote
control
1
7
1
8
l
A
1
A
2
KM1
KM3
KM2
KM1
KM2
A
1
A
2
KA1
A
1
A
2
KM2
KM1
F2
KM2
KM1
A
1
A
2
KM3
KA1
Y
L
A
B
Remote
control
References :
pages /3 and /33
Dimensions :
page /34
References :
pages /3 and /33
Dimensions :
page /34
References :
pages /3 and /33
Dimensions :
page /34
References :
pages /3 and /33
Dimensions :
page /34
Star-delta starters
Schemes
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/36
2
Star-delta starters (1)
7.5 to 75 kW with isolating device

Characteristics
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 IP 657: LE6 D09D18
IP 557: LE3 D326D806
Material Polycarbonate (2): LE6 D
Sheet steel: LE3 D
References
Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour.
Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.
An LA DS timer imposes a delay of 40 ms 15 ms on the delta contactor at the
moment of changeover to ensure that the star contactor has suffcient breaking time.

squirrel cage motors Mains
voltage - Delta connection
Fuses to be ftted
by the customer
Basic reference,
to be completed by
Weight
Size Type
aM 220 V 380 V
400 V
415 V 440 V
kW kW kW kW A kg
4 7.5 7.5 7.5 10 x 38 0 LE6 D09pp 3.900
5.5 11 11 11 10 x 38 5 LE6 D12pp 3.900
11 18.5 14 x 51 40 LE6 D18pp 4.850
15 30 30 30 x 58 63 LE3 D326pp 7.650
18.5 37 37 37 x 58 80 LE3 D406pp 16.900
30 55 59 59 x 58 15 LE3 D506pp 17.000
37 75 75 75 0 160 LE3 D806pp 7.500
pages6/20and6/23.
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7

LE6 D12pp
5
1
1
5
4
9
LE6 D12pp
5
1
1
5
4
9
Dimensions:
page /38
Schemes:
page /39
Dimensions:
page /38
Schemes:
page /39
Dimensions:
page /38
Schemes:
page /39
Dimensions:
page /38
Schemes:
page /39
Characteristics,
references 2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/37
2
Star-delta starters
7.5 to 75 kW, with isolating device

Description
LE6 D09D18:
LE3 D36D806:
no pushbuttons on cover

Protection Power circuit Control circuit
LE6 D09 and D1 1 3-pole isolating device + 1 additional pole
LE6 D18LE3 D806 1 3-pole isolating device + 1 circuit-breaker GB CB08

No pushbuttons on cover LE6 D09D18 A04

LE3 D36D806 A06

1 blue Reset button R LE6 D09LE3 D806 A05

1 neutral terminal LE6 D09LE3 D806 A59

starters LE6 D09D18
LE3 D36D806 A64


b
v
v
b
v
LE6 D12ppA04
5
6
4
3
8
LE6 D12ppA04
5
6
4
3
8
LE6 D12ppA05
5
6
4
3
9
LE6 D12ppA05
5
6
4
3
9
Dimensions:
page /38
Schemes:
page /39
Dimensions:
page /38
Schemes:
page /39
Dimensions:
page /38
Schemes:
page /39
Dimensions:
page /38
Schemes:
page /39
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/38
2
Dimensions
LE6 D09D18 LE3 D326

c1
Standard version 175.5
Variant A04 167
Variant A05 175.5
LE3 D406D806

LE3 a b c1
D406, D506 400 500 18
D806 500 700 69
PG ISO PG ISO
LE6 D09D18 x 0 or x 5
or x 3 or x 40
x 0 or x 5
or x 3 or x 40
LE3 D326 1 x 1 1 x 3 x 13, x 16
and 1 x 1
x 0, x 5
and 1 x 3
LE3 D406 1 x 9 1 x 3 x 13, x 1
and 1 x 9
x 0, x 5
and 1 x 3
LE3 D506 1 x 36 1 x 40 x 13, x 9
and 1 x 36
1 x 40, x 0
and x 3
LE3 D806 1 x 36 1 x 40 x 13 and 3 x 36 x 0 and 3 x 40

c1
3
4
8
3
3
0
=
=
=
186 31
= c1
3
4
8
3
3
0
=
=
=
186 31
=
190
3
6
7
2
2
5
=
=
=
287
=
31
195 190
3
6
7
2
2
5
=
=
=
287
=
31
195
b

(
1
)
c1
= = a-75
a-50
a
a+57,5
b
-
5
0
b
+
5
7
,
5
b
-
7
5
=
=
4xM8x25
31
b

(
1
)
c1
= = a-75
a-50
a
a+57,5
b
-
5
0
b
+
5
7
,
5
b
-
7
5
=
=
4xM8x25
31
References :
pages /36 and 4108/3
Schemes :
page /39
References :
pages /36 and 4108/3
Schemes :
page /39
Star-delta starters
Dimensions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/39
2
Schemes
LE6 D09D18

LE3 D326D806

Connections A B
220 V, 230 V, 240 V LE6 D09 and D1 L3 Neutral
LE6 D18LE3 D806 L3 Neutral terminal
Other voltages LE6 D09D18 Terminal 1 Terminal
LE3 D36D806 Direct connection

KM2
1
2
3
4
5
6
KM3
1
2
3
4
5
6
KM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
1 3 5
2 4 6
Q1
1
/
L
1
2
3
/
L
2
4
5
/
L
3
6
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
2 4 6
Recommended
cabling for
reversal of
motor rotation
(standard motor,
viewed from
shaft end)
KM2
1
2
3
4
5
6
KM3
1
2
3
4
5
6
KM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
1 3 5
2 4 6
Q1
1
/
L
1
2
3
/
L
2
4
5
/
L
3
6
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
2 4 6
Recommended
cabling for
reversal of
motor rotation
(standard motor,
viewed from
shaft end)
A
1
A
2
KM1
KM3
KM2
KM1
l
KM2
A
1
A
2
KM3
KM1
A
1
A
2
KM2
KM2
B
O
A
Q1
Q1
A
1
A
2
KM1
KM3
KM2
KM1
l
KM2
A
1
A
2
KM3
KM1
A
1
A
2
KM2
KM2
B
O
A
Q1
Q1
KM2
1
2
3
4
5
6
KM3
1
2
3
4
5
6
KM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
1 3 5
2 4 6
Q1
1
/
L
1
2
3
/
L
2
4
5
/
L
3
6
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
2 4 6
Recommended
cabling for
reversal of
motor rotation
(standard motor,
viewed from
shaft end)
KM2
1
2
3
4
5
6
KM3
1
2
3
4
5
6
KM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
1 3 5
2 4 6
Q1
1
/
L
1
2
3
/
L
2
4
5
/
L
3
6
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
2 4 6
Recommended
cabling for
reversal of
motor rotation
(standard motor,
viewed from
shaft end)
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
3
1
4
KM3
KM2
KM1
l
KM2
A
1
A
2
KM3
KM1
A
1
A
2
KM2
KM2
B
A
Q1
F1
2
1
2
2
S1
Remote
control
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
3
1
4
KM3
KM2
KM1
l
KM2
A
1
A
2
KM3
KM1
A
1
A
2
KM2
KM2
B
A
Q1
F1
2
1
2
2
S1
Remote
control
References :
pages /36 and /37
Dimensions :
page /38
References :
pages /36 and /37
Dimensions :
page /38
Star-delta starters
Schemes
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/40
2
Heads for Start and Stop/Reset pushbuttons
Description For
use on
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Flush, green I (1) LE1 D09...D35 ZB5 AA331 0.018
Projecting, red O (1) LE1 D09...D35 ZB5 AL432 0.019
Adaptation kit
for head ZB5 AL432
LE1 D09 and D1 LAD 9091 0.00
LE1 D18...D35 LAD 91810 0.003
Heads for Reset pushbuttons
Flush, blue R(2) LE1 D09...D35
+
ZB5 AA0 0.0
ZBA 639 (3) 0.001
Adaptation kit for head
ZB5 AA0 + ZBA 639
LE1 D09 and D1 LAD 9092 0.00
LE1 or LE D18...D35 LAD 91810 0.003
LE3, LE6, LE4
or LE8 D09...D35
LAD 9T4 0.004
Heads for selector switches
3-position stay put LE1 D09...D35 ZB5 AD3 0.04
2-position stay put LE1 D09...D35 ZB5 AD2 0.04
3-position
spring return to centre
LE1 D09...D35 ZB5 AD5 0.04
Contact blocks
1 N/O spring return LE1 D09...D35 ZEN L1111 0.010
1 N/C spring return LE1 D09...D35 ZEN L1121 0.010
Mounting for contact block LE1 D09 and D1 LAD 90909 0.008
LEp D18...D35 (4) LAD 91809 0.014
(1) RemembertoorderadaptationkitLAD9091orLAD91810,dependingonsize.
(2) RemembertoorderadaptationkitLAD9092.
(3) Soldinlotsof10.
(4) LE1,LE2,LE3,LE4,LE6orLE8.
ZB5-AA333
ZB5 AA331
5
0
0
1
1
8
_
1
ZB5-AA333
ZB5 AA331
5
0
0
1
1
8
_
1
ZB5-AL434
ZB5 AL432
5
0
0
1
0
_
1
ZB5-AL434
ZB5 AL432
5
0
0
1
0
_
1
LAD-9091
LAD 9091
5
0
0
1
1
7
_
1
LAD-9091
LAD 9091
5
0
0
1
1
7
_
1
ZB5-AD203
ZB5 ADp
5
0
0
1
1
9
_
1
ZB5-AD203
ZB5 ADp
5
0
0
1
1
9
_
1
ZEN-L1111
ZENL1111
5
0
0
1
1
_
1
ZEN-L1111
ZENL1111
5
0
0
1
1
_
1
LAD91809
LAD 91809
5
0
0
1
_
1
LAD91809
LAD 91809
5
0
0
1
_
1
References
Replacement parts
for starters without isolating device
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/41
2
Empty enclosures for DOL starters without isolating device
Designed
for use with
Head(s)
mounted on cover
Reference Weight
kg
LE1 D09 and D12 Without DE1 DS1A04 0.300
1 fush blue head R DE1 DS1A05 0.300
1 fush green head I
1 projecting red head O
DE1 DS1 0.300
1 fush blue head R
1 switch
DE1 DS1A13 0.300
LE1 D18D35 Without DE1 DS2A04 0.500
1 fush blue head R DE1 DS2A05 0.500
1 fush green head I
1 projecting red head O
DE1 DS2 0.500
1 fush blue head R
1 switch
DE1 DS2A13 0.500
DE1 DS1A04
5
1
1
5
5
1
DE1 DS1A04
5
1
1
5
5
1
DE1 DS1A05
5
1
1
5
5
DE1 DS1A05
5
1
1
5
5
DE1 DS1
5
1
1
5
5
3
DE1 DS1
5
1
1
5
5
3
DE1 DS1A13
5
1
1
5
5
4
DE1 DS1A13
5
1
1
5
5
4
Replacement parts
for starters without isolating device
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/4
2
Star-delta starters
Maximum operating rate: 1 starts/hour.
Maximum starting time: 0 seconds
Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code
(2) (3)
Weight
220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V
kW kW kW kW kg
90 160 160 185 LE3 F185pp 31.400
100 00 00 0 LE3 F225pp 33.000
110 0 0 50 LE3 F265pp 50.800
160 80 80 315 LE3 F330pp 80.000
185 315 355 375 LE3 F400pp 8.000
Specifcations
Enclosure LE3 F185F400 Metal, degree of protection IP 559
No pushbuttons on cover LE3 F185F400
Connections LE3 F185F400 Pre-wired power and control circuit
connections
Description For
use on
Suffx to be added
to the starter
reference(4)
LE3 F185F400 A06
pages6/34and6/35.
Volts 48 110 220/230 230 240 380/400 400 415
50/60 Hz E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7
Forothervoltages,seepages5/130to5/137.
(3)LC1F185andF225:contactorsfttedwithLX9Fcoils,
LC1F265F400:contactorsfttedwithLX1Fcoils.
(4) Example: LE3 F185M7A06.

Other versions

Possible combinations of variants.

LE3 Fppppp
5
3
3
8
6
6
5
3
3
8
6
7
LE3 Fppppp
5
3
3
8
6
6
5
3
3
8
6
7
Star-delta starters (1)
90 to 375 kW, without isolating device
References
Dimensions :
page /43
Schemes :
page /43
Dimensions :
page /43
Schemes :
page /43
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/43
2
Dimensions
LE3 Fppp

LE3 a b (1) c c1 Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands
F185, F225 600 700 303 319 Type of enclosure At top At bottom
F265 700 900 303 319 LE3 F185, F225 x 48 P x 13 P and 4 x 48 P
F330, F400 800 1000 403 419 LE3 F265400
Schemes
LE3 Fppp

Note : inaccordancewithcurrentinstallationregulations,eachstartermustbeprovidedwithshort-circuitprotectionbyfusesoracircuit-breaker.

b

(
1
)
c
c1
= = a-75
a-50
a
a+57,5
b
-
5
0
b
+
5
7
,
5
b
-
7
5
=
=
4xM8x25
b

(
1
)
c
c1
= = a-75
a-50
a
a+57,5
b
-
5
0
b
+
5
7
,
5
b
-
7
5
=
=
4xM8x25
KM2
1
2
3
4
5
6
KM3
1
2
3
4
5
6
KM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
1 3 5
2 4 6
L
1
L
2
L
3
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
2 4 6
Recommended
cabling for
reversal of
motor rotation
(standard motor,
viewed from
shaft end)
KM2
1
2
3
4
5
6
KM3
1
2
3
4
5
6
KM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
1 3 5
2 4 6
L
1
L
2
L
3
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
2 4 6
Recommended
cabling for
reversal of
motor rotation
(standard motor,
viewed from
shaft end)
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
6
2
6
1
KM3
5
5
5
6
KM2
5
3
5
4
KM1
9
5
9
6
F1
F1
KM3:5
O
l
6
7
6
8
KM2
A
1
A
2
KA1
A
1
A
2
KM2
5
3
5
4
KM2
(
1
3
)
(
1
4
)
F2
KM3:1
6
2
6
1
KM1
1
3
1
4
A
1
A
2
KM3
KA1
Remote
control
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
6
2
6
1
KM3
5
5
5
6
KM2
5
3
5
4
KM1
9
5
9
6
F1
F1
KM3:5
O
l
6
7
6
8
KM2
A
1
A
2
KA1
A
1
A
2
KM2
5
3
5
4
KM2
(
1
3
)
(
1
4
)
F2
KM3:1
6
2
6
1
KM1
1
3
1
4
A
1
A
2
KM3
KA1
Remote
control
Star-delta starters
90 to 375 kW, without isolating device
Dimensions,
schemes
References :
page /4
References :
page /4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/44
2
Equipment for control in utilisation
category AC-1(1) (2), without isolating device

References
Operational
current
up to
Minimum
csa of
phase
conductors
Fuses to be
ftted separately
For use with relay
LR2 D or kit LA9 D
(to be ordered
separately)
Basic reference,
to be completed by
(3)
Weight
aM gG
A mm
2
A A kg
16 .5 16 LA9 D1275 (4) LE1 D123pp 0.90
175 1.5 0 LR2 D1321 (2) LE1 D123pp 0.90
24 .5 5 LR2 D1322 (2) LE1 D255pp 1.015
32 6 3 LA9 D0975 (4) LE1 D255pp 1.015
50 10 50 LE1 D405ppA04
(5)
4.80
57 10 63 LR2 D3359 (2) LE1 D405pp 4.80
63 16 63 LE1 D655ppA04
(5)
4.850
76 16 80 LR2 D3363 (2) LE1 D655pp 4.850
90 5 100 LR2 D3365 (2) LE1 D805pp 5.140
100 35 100 LE1 D805ppA04
(5)
5.140
Specifcations
Enclosure LE1 D1 Double insulated, degree of protection IP 659

LE1 D5 Double insulated, degree of protection IP 557

LE1 D40...D80 Metal, degree of protection IP 559

Control ( pushbuttons
mounted on enclosure cover)
LE1 D1D80 1 green Start button I
No pushbuttons on cover LE1 DpppppA04

Connections LE1 D1D80 Pre-wired control circuit connections

(1)3-phase220/230V,240V,380/400Vor415V50/60Hz.3-coreor3Ph+N(unprotectedneutral)insulatedPVCcable,fxed
to walls, ceilings, in cable racks or ducting, laid singly, ambient temperature y35C,conformingtoNFC15-100.
(2) Order the required LR2 Dthermaloverloadrelayseparately,foruseonbalancedcircuitsonly.
(3) Control circuit voltage 50/60 Hz 220/230 V (code M7) or 380/400 V (code Q7).
(4) As protection is provided by type gG fuses only, the Stop function normally provided by the thermal overload relay (where aM
type fuses are used) can be obtained by means of kit LA9 Dpp75.
(5)Equipmentsuppliedwithoutpushbuttons;externalStart-Stopstationrequired.

LE1 D123
5
1
1
5
5
0
LE1 D123
5
1
1
5
5
0
LE1 D405
5
6
4
1
LE1 D405
5
6
4
1
Dimensions :
page /46
Schemes :
page /47
Dimensions :
page /46
Schemes :
page /47
Dimensions :
page /46
Schemes :
page /47
Dimensions :
page /46
Schemes :
page /47
References 2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/45
2
category AC-1(1) (2), without isolating device

No pushbuttons on cover LE1 D1 and D5 A04
1 blue Reset button R LE1 D1D80 A05
1 green Start button I and
1 red Stop button O with 1 N/C contact
(for distribution circuits without thermal overload relay)
LE1 D1 and D5 A07
1 -position selector switch O-I
(O: Stop; I: Manual Start)
LE1 D1 A13
Knock-outs for 4 x 16 mm plastic cable glands
(instead of 4 x 13 mm plastic glands)
LE1 D1 A20
1 neutral terminal (for 3-phase + N circuits) LE1 D1D80 A59
Accessories (for customer assembly)
Description For
use on
Reference Weight
kg
for stay put operation (Start-Stop)
LE1 D5D65 LA9 D09907 0.060
Kits to provide Stop function
without thermal overload relay ftted
LE1 D1 LA9 D1275 0.040
LE1 D5 LA9 D0975 0.00
Miniature control circuit fuse holder
size 5 x 0, 4 A/50 V
Fuse supplied
LE1 D1 LA9 D931 0.040
LE1 D5 LA9 D941 0.05
Pilot light with neon bulb,
red lens and locking ring
110 V LE1 D1 and D5 LA9 D924 0.00
0 V LE1 D1 and D5 LA9 D925 0.00
380, 415 V LE1 D1 and D5 LA9 D926 0.00
1 front-mounting block of 2 auxiliary contacts,
please consult your Regional Sales Offce
LE1 D1 D80 LA1 DNpp 0.030
(1)3-phase220/230Vor380/400V50/60Hz.3-coreor3Ph+N(unprotectedneutral)insulatedPVCcable,fxedtowalls,ceilings,
in cable racks or ducting, laid singly, ambient temperature y35C,conformingtoNFC15-100.
Example: LE1 D123M7A04.

.
.
Dimensions :
page /46
Schemes :
page /47
Dimensions :
page /46
Schemes :
page /47
Dimensions :
page /46
Schemes :
page /47
Dimensions :
page /46
Schemes :
page /47
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/46
2
Dimensions
LE1 D123 LE1 D255

LE1 D405, D655 LE1 D805

(1) 150 for LE1 DpppppA04(withoutpushbuttons).
LE1 D123 x 13 P x 13 P
LE1 D255 1 x 13 P and 1 x 16 P x 16 P
LE1 D405 and LE1 D655 1 x 13 P and 1 x 9 P 1 x 13 P and x 9 P
LE1 D805 1 x 13 P and 1 x 36 P 1 x 13 P and x 36 P

120
140
1
6
6
1
5
0
=
=
=
88
= 120
140
1
6
6
1
5
0
=
=
=
88
=
1
8
5
135
142
=
101
=
1
6
5
=
=
1
8
5
135
142
=
101
=
1
6
5
=
=
150
161 (1)
3
1
2
=
181
= 105
1
9
5
=
=
150
161 (1)
3
1
2
=
181
= 105
1
9
5
=
=
165
c1
3
0
7
=
257
= 165
1
6
5
=
=
165
c1
3
0
7
=
257
= 165
1
6
5
=
=
References :
pages /44 and /45
Schemes :
page /47
References :
pages /44 and /45
Schemes :
page /47
References :
pages /44 and /45
Schemes :
page /47
References :
pages /44 and /45
Schemes :
page /47
Enclosed starters
D.O.L. starters and equipment,
without isolating device
Dimensions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/47
2
Schemes
DOL starters and equipment for control in category AC-1
LE1 D123D805, LE1 DpppppA04 LE1 D123

LE1 D255D805 LE1 DpppppA04, LE1 DpppppA05

2 4 6
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
KM1
1 3 5
2 4 6
U V W
5
/
L
3
2 4 6
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
KM1
1 3 5
2 4 6
U V W
5
/
L
3
N
KM1/1
KM1/5
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
4
1
3
KM1
1
4
1
3
O
9
5
9
6
I
N
KM1/1
KM1/5
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
4
1
3
KM1
1
4
1
3
O
9
5
9
6
I
O
l
N
KM1/1
KM1/5
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
4
1
3
KM1
1
8
1
7
9
5
9
6
O
l
N
KM1/1
KM1/5
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
4
1
3
KM1
1
8
1
7
9
5
9
6
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
9
5
9
6
KM1/5
O
l
1
4
1
3
KM1
N
KM1/1
A
1
A
2
KM1
Remote
control
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
9
5
9
6
KM1/5
O
l
1
4
1
3
KM1
N
KM1/1
A
1
A
2
KM1
Remote
control
References :
pages /44 and /45
Dimensions :
page /46
References :
pages /44 and /45
Dimensions :
page /46
References :
pages /44 and /45
Dimensions :
page /46
References :
pages /44 and /45
Dimensions :
page /46
Enclosed starters
without isolating device
Schemes
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/48
category AC-1 (1) (2), with isolating device

References
Operational
current
up to
Minimum
csa of
phase
conductors
Fuses to be ftted
by the customer
For use with relay
LR2 D or kit LA9 D
(to be ordered
separately)
Basic reference,
to be completed by
(3)
Weight
Size Type
aM gG
A mm
2
A A kg
16 .5 10 x 38 16 LA9 D0975 (4) LE4 D126pp 1.960
175 1.5 10 x 38 0 LR2 D1321 (2) LE4 D126pp 1.960
20 .5 10 x 38 0 LA9 D0975 (4) LE4 D256pp .00
22 .5 10 x 38 5 LR2 D1322 (2) LE4 D256pp .00
40 10 14 x 51 40 LE4 D406ppA04 (5) 5.770
45 10 14 x 51 50 LR2 D3357 (2) LE4 D406pp 5.770
63 16 x 58 63 LE4 D656ppA04 (5) 6.670
76 16 x 58 80 LR2 D3363 (2) LE4 D656pp 6.670
90 5 x 58 100 LR2 D3365 (2) LE4 D806pp (5) 7.100
100 35 x 58 100 LE4 D806pp (5) 7.100
Specifcations
Enclosure LE4 D1 and D5 Double insulated, degree of protection IP 557
LE4 D40D80 Metal, degree of protection IP 559

Control
( pushbuttons mounted
on enclosure cover)
LE4 D1D65 1 green Start button I

No pushbuttons on cover LE4 Dppppp A04
LE4 D80

Isolating device with
external operator
LE4 D1 and D5 1 3-pole isolator + 1 additional pole
LE4 D40D80 1 3-pole isolator and 1 circuit breaker GB CB08

Connections LE4 D1D80 Pre-wired power and control circuit connections

(3) Control circuit voltage 50/60 Hz 220/230 V (code M7) or 380/400 V (code Q7).
(4) As protection is provided by type gG fuses only, the Stop function normally provided by the thermal overload relay (where aM
type fuses are used) can be obtained by means of kit LA9 D0975.
(5)Equipmentsuppliedwithoutpushbuttons;externalStart-Stopstationrequired.

LE4 D126
5
6
4
1
9
LE4 D126
5
6
4
1
9
LE4 D406
5
6
4
0
LE4 D406
5
6
4
0
Dimensions :
page /50
Schemes :
page /51
Dimensions :
page /50
Schemes :
page /51
Dimensions :
page /50
Schemes :
page /51
Dimensions :
page /50
Schemes :
page /51
References 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
/49
category AC-1 (1) (2), with isolating device

Description For use on Suffx to be added to
the starter reference(3)
No pushbuttons on cover LE4 D1 and D5 A04

1 blue Reset button R LE4 D1D80 A05

1 green Start button I and 1 red Stop button O
with 1 N/C contact (for distribution circuits
without thermal overload relay)
LE4 D1 and D5 A07

1 neutral terminal (for 3-phase + N circuits) LE4 D1D80 A59

Accessories (for customer assembly)
Description For
use on
Reference Weight
kg
Start button latching device
(Start-Stop)
LE4 D1D65 LA9 D09907 0.060
Kit to provide Stop function
without thermal overload relay ftted
LE4 D1 and D5 LA9 D0975 0.00
Miniature control circuit fuse holder
size 5 x 0, 4 A/50 V
Fuse supplied
LE4 D1 and D5 LA9 D941 0.05
Pilot light with neon bulb,
red lens and locking ring
110 V LE4 D1 and D5 LA9 D924 0.00
0 V LE4 D1 and D5 LA9 D925 0.00
380, 415 V LE4 D1 and D5 LA9 D926 0.00
1 front-mounting block of 2 auxiliary contacts,
LE4 D1D80 LA1 DNpp 0.030
(3) Example: LE4 D126M7A04.


Dimensions :
page /50
Schemes :
page /51
Dimensions :
page /50
Schemes :
page /51
Dimensions :
page /50
Schemes :
page /51
Dimensions :
page /50
Schemes :
page /51
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
/50
Dimensions
LE4 D126, D256 LE4 D406, D656

LE4 c c1
D126 13 139
D256 144 151 (1) c1 = c for LE4 DpppppA04(withoutpushbuttons).
LE4 D806

LE4 D126 x 13 P x 13 P
LE4 D256 1 x 13 P and 1 x 16 P x 16 P

c
c1
2
8
0
2
6
0
=
=
=
122
=
31
c
c1
2
8
0
2
6
0
=
=
=
122
=
31
b
c
c1 (1)
=
a
=
31
G
H
=
=
b
c
c1 (1)
=
a
=
31
G
H
=
=
b

(
1
)
c
c1
= = a-75
a-50
a
a+57,5
b
-
5
0
b
+
5
7
,
5
b
-
7
5
=
=
4xM8x25
31
b

(
1
)
c
c1
= = a-75
a-50
a
a+57,5
b
-
5
0
b
+
5
7
,
5
b
-
7
5
=
=
4xM8x25
31
References :
pages /48 and /49
Schemes :
page /51
References :
pages /48 and /49
Schemes :
page /51
References :
pages /48 and /49
Schemes :
page /51
References :
pages /48 and /49
Schemes :
page /51
Enclosed starters
with isolating device
Dimensions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/51
Schemes
DOL starters and equipment for control in category AC-1
LE4 D126D806, LE4 DpppppA04 LE4 D126 and D256

LE4 D406 and D656 LE4 D806, LE4 DpppppA04 and DpppppA05

2 4 6
Q1
2 4
1 3
KM1
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
U W V
1 3 5
2 4 6
6
5
2 4 6
Q1
2 4
1 3
KM1
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
U W V
1 3 5
2 4 6
6
5
O
l
N
Q1/6
Q1/2
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
4
1
3
KM1
1
8
1
7
9
5
9
6
9 0
Q1
Q1
1
3
1
4
O
l
N
Q1/6
Q1/2
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
4
1
3
KM1
1
8
1
7
9
5
9
6
9 0
Q1
Q1
1
3
1
4
O
l
N
Q1/6
Q1/2
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
4
1
3
KM1
1
8
1
7
9
5
9
6
Q1
1
3
1
4
F1
O
l
N
Q1/6
Q1/2
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
4
1
3
KM1
1
8
1
7
9
5
9
6
Q1
1
3
1
4
F1
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
9
5
9
6
O
l
1
4
1
3
KM1
N
Q1/1
A
2
A
1
KM1
Q1/2
Q1
14 13
F1
Remote
control
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
9
5
9
6
O
l
1
4
1
3
KM1
N
Q1/1
A
2
A
1
KM1
Q1/2
Q1
14 13
F1
Remote
control
References :
pages /48 and /49
Dimensions :
page /50
References :
pages /48 and /49
Dimensions :
page /50
References :
pages /48 and /49
Dimensions :
page /50
References :
pages /48 and /49
Dimensions :
page /50
Enclosed starters
with isolating device
Schemes
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
/5
Empty metal enclosure
Type of
enclosure
For use
on integral
Reference Weight
kg
Degree of protection IP 54
with drillings for
door interlock mechanism
(interlock not supplied),
(1)
LD1 LD or LD4 LD DE1 LT315 3.510
Door interlock mechanisms (IP 54)
Type For use on
enclosure
Colour
of knob
Reference Weight
kg
Non-adjustable DE1 LT315
(LD1)
Red LA9 LC320 0.00
Black LA9 LC321 0.00
DE1 LT315
(LD4)
Red LA9 LC520 0.00
Black LA9 LC521 0.00
(1) Enclosuressuppliedwithdrillingsandfttedwithremovableblankingplugs,foradditionof
cable glands (to be ordered separately): for number and diameters, see page2/53.
References
integral 63 contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers,
Dimensions :
page /53
DE1 LT315
5
6
4
1
1
2
/53
Empty metal enclosure, degree of protection IP 54
190 69
3
6
7
87
= 19 =
5
=
=
Number of blanked-off cable entries for addition of cable glands
At Cable For cable gland
top bottom min max N Type
1 10 1 13 13M
1 4 30 36 36M
Non-adjustable door interlock mechanisms LA9 LC33p and LA9 LC53p
For mounting on LD4 LDp30 and LD5 LDp30
LD4 LDp30 LD5 LDp30
= = 8
1
0
5
90
= =
4
3
63 59 59
1
0
5
1
0
5
181
45
7
5
174 (LD5)
54
6
5
1
0
5
1
0
5
17 (LD4)
(1)
Door drillings
= =
=
=
5
4
54
(1)Thickness:5mmmax.
Dimensions,
mounting of accessories
and reversing contactor breakers,
References :
page /5
/54
2
Enclosed starters 2
and reversing contactor breakers
Type integral 63
Number of poles 3
Rated operational current (Ie) A 63 in AC-3
Electrical durability, AC-43 at 415 V 1. million operating cycles
Mechanical durability at Uc 5 million operating cycles
at ambient temperature
y 55 C
a 3600 operating cycles/hour
c With converter 600 operating cycles/hour
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC: 60947-1, 60047-, 60947-3, 60947-4-1, 60947-6-
VDE: 0100, 0110, 0113, 0170, 0171, 471, 0660
BS: 544, 475, 4941
NEN, NBN
Product certifcations ASE, ASEFA, ASTA, BV, CSA, DEMKO, DNV, GL, NEMKO, NKK, VE,
RINA, SCC, SETI, UL, USSR,
LROS, PTB, SEMKO
around the device
a Operation C - 0+ 60
Storage C - 40+ 80
c (1) Operation C - 5+ 50
Storage C - 5+ 70
Permissible acceleration
5100 Hz Energised state: 3 gn
De-energised state: 3 gn
Shock resistance
Permissible acceleration
Impulse duration: 11 ms Energised state: 8 gn
De-energised state: 8 gn
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 144 and 59 IP 0B
Conforming to VDE 0106 Protection against direct fnger contact
Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 6095--1, NF C 0-455 and the requirement of -1-81
(JO 7 NC of 1st and //198) and conforming to UL 94 - V0 and NF T 51-07
Maximum operating altitude Without derating m 3000
Operating positions
(without derating)
In relation to normal
vertical mounting plane
From main axis
(left-right tilt)
Rated control
circuit voltage (Uc)
a 50 Hz V 4660
a 60 Hz V 4600
c With converter V 4, 48, 110
Voltage limits
at q y 55 C
Operating 0.851.1 Uc
Drop-out 0.50.7 Uc
Average consumption
at 0 C and at Uc
a Inrush VA 375 (50 Hz), 450 (60 Hz)
Sealed VA 5 (50 or 60 Hz)
c (1) Inrush W 300 for 50 ms
Sealed W 8
Heat dissipation a 50 Hz W 8 (50 Hz)
11 (60 Hz)
Operating time (2)
at 0 C and at Uc
a
50/60 Hz
C ms 135
O ms 70
c (1) C ms 540
O ms 155
(1)Withconverter.
contactofthemainpoles.TheopeningtimeOismeasuredfromthemomentthecoilsupply
isswitchedofftothemomentthemainpolesseparate.

References :
pages /56 to /59
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
References :
pages /56 to /59
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
References :
pages /56 to /59
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
References :
pages /56 to /59
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
Characteristics 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/55
2
Enclosed starters 2
Type integral 63
Rated thermal current
(Ith)
q y 40 C
A 63
Frequency limits
of the operational current
Hz 4060
Rated impulse
Conforming to IEC 60947-4 kV 8
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V 690
Heat dissipation
in the power circuits of the
contactor breaker and its
protection module
Operational current A 5 3 40 50 63
Power per pole, hot state W 4.4 5 5.8 7 9
Rated making capacity I rms conforming to IEC 60947-4 A 1 or 15 x Ith (1)
I peak conforming to IEC 60947- kA 105
conforming to IEC 60947-
Operational voltage V 220/ 240 380/ 415 440 480/ 525 600/ 690
Value of cos j 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Icu (O-t CO) kA rms 50 50 40 35 10
Ics (O-t-CO-t-CO) kA rms 50 50 40 35 10
Conforming to IEC 60947-6-
ensuring continuity of service
Icu = Ics (O-t-CO-t-rCO) kA rms 50 50 50 30 10
O : breaking short-circuit current (open)
t : time
CO : closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (closed-open) (manual)
rCO : closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (remote control)
Total breaking time ms 4
Thermal stress limit With Isc max. at 415 V, 50 Hz A
2
s 300 x 10
3
Cabling Maximum csa Minimum csa
Flexible cable without cable end mm
2
1 x 50 or x 35 1 x 6
Flexible cable with cable end mm
2
x 5 1 x 6
Solid cable mm
2
1 x 50 1 x 6
Characteristics of thermal-magnetic or magnetic only protection modules
Module type LB1 LD03P LB1 LD03M LB6 LD03P LB1 LD03L
Protection Standard motors,
frequent starting,
distribution circuits
Standard motors Standard motors Frequent starting Distribution circuits
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-4 type (Iq = 50 kA) and NF C
63-650 63-650 63-650 63-10
Number of poles 3 3 3 3
Number of protected poles 3 3 3 3
Rated operational voltage V 690 690 690 690
Maximum continuous current A 1363 1363 1363 1363
Thermal protection Setting range
(Irth min./Irth max.)
A 10/13... 45/63 10/13... 45/63 10/13... 45/63
Temperature compensation C - 0+ 60
Protection against
phase imbalance
With With Without Without
Tripping class 0 0
Magnetic protection
conforming to
IEC 60947-1//4/6-
Instantaneous trip current
setting range
Irth
max
Fixed at 15 61 (2) 61 36
Tripping tolerance 0 %
Characteristics of versions with control test function and padlocking facility
Conforming to standards IEC 60947, NF C 63-130, VDE 0660, VDE 0113
Mechanical durability Operating cycles 10 000
Padlocking 1, 2 or 3 padlocks (shank 8 mm max. and 5 mm min.). When fush mounting,
interlocking of the enclosure or cabinet door is possible.
(1)Abovethisvalue,thebreakertrips.
(2)Usualsettingrange910Irthmax.

References :
pages /56 to /59
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
References :
pages /56 to /59
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
References :
pages /56 to /59
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
References :
pages /56 to /59
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
Characteristics (continued) 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/56
2
Enclosed starters 2
for control and protection of motors
Operational
current
Breaking
capacity
(Iq) for Ue
y 415 V
Basic reference,
the control voltage code
(2)
Weight
220 V
240 V
400 V
415 V
440 V 500 V 660 V
15 30
33
33 37 55 63 50 LD4 LD030p 3.800
3-pole reversing contactor breakers without protection module (1)
Operational
current
Breaking
capacity
(Iq) for Ue
y 415 V
Basic reference,
(2)
Weight
220 V
240 V
400 V
415 V
440 V 500 V 660 V
15 30
33
33 37 55 63 50 LD5 LD030p 7.600
(1)Fortheunittofunction,itmustbefttedwithaprotectionmodule,tobeorderedseparately,seepageopposite.
Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380/ 400 415 440 480 500 600 660
c (3) BD ED FD
(3)Foruseond.c.,theunitissuppliedwith1or2converters,includingcoilsuppressiondevices(2convertersforreversing
contactorbreakers).

LD4 LD030p
5
6
4
0
4
LD4 LD030p
5
6
4
0
4
LD5 LD030p
5
6
4
0
5
LD5 LD030p
5
6
4
0
5
Characteristics :
pages /54 and /55
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
Characteristics :
pages /54 and /55
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
Characteristics :
pages /54 and /55
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
Characteristics :
pages /54 and /55
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
References 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/57
2
Enclosed starters 2
Motor protection modules (for customer assembly)
Thermal-magnetic protection, compensated and differential for normal starting motors
Thermal
setting range
(Irth min
to Irth max)
Magnetic
setting range
(612 Irth max)
Reference Weight
220 V
240 V
400 V
415 V
440 V 480/
525 V
600/
690 V
Fixed magnetic protection, set at 15 Irth max
3 5.5 5.5 7.5 10 10...13 LB1 LD03P16 0.780
4 9 9 11 15 13...18 LB1 LD03P21 0.780
5.5 11 11 15 18.5 18...5 LB1 LD03P22 0.780
7.5 15 15 18.5 3...3 LB1 LD03P53 0.780
9 5 33 8...40 LB1 LD03P55 0.780
11 5 5 33 45 35...50 LB1 LD03P57 0.780
15 33 33 40 55 45...63 LB1 LD03P61 0.780
Adjustable magnetic protection from 6 to 12 Irth max
3 5.5 5.5 7.5 10 10...13 78...156 LB1 LD03M16 0.780
4 9 9 11 15 13...18 108...16 LB1 LD03M21 0.780
5.5 11 11 15 18.5 18...5 150...300 LB1 LD03M22 0.780
7.5 15 15 18.5 3...3 190...380 LB1 LD03M53 0.780
9 5 33 8...40 40...480 LB1 LD03M55 0.780
11 5 5 33 45 35...50 300...600 LB1 LD03M57 0.780
15 33 33 40 55 45...63 380...760 LB1 LD03M61 0.780
Magnetic only protection, for frequent starting motors
Thermal
setting range
(Irth min
to Irth max)
Magnetic
setting range
(612 Irth max)
Reference Weight
220 V
240 V
400 V
415 V
440 V 480/
525 V
600/
690 V
Adjustable magnetic protection from 6 to 12 Irth max
3 5.5 5.5 7.5 10 78...156 LB6 LD03M16 0.780
4 9 9 11 15 108...16 LB6 LD03M21 0.780
5.5 11 11 15 18.5 150...300 LB6 LD03M22 0.780
7.5 15 15 18.5 190...380 LB6 LD03M53 0.780
9 5 33 40...480 LB6 LD03M55 0.780
11 5 5 33 45 300...600 LB6 LD03M57 0.780
15 33 33 40 55 380...760 LB6 LD03M61 0.780

LB1 LD03Mpp
5
3
3
9
3
6
LB1 LD03Mpp
5
3
3
9
3
6
LB6 LD03Mpp
5
3
3
9
3
6
LB6 LD03Mpp
5
3
3
9
3
6
Characteristics :
pages /54 and /55
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
Characteristics :
pages /54 and /55
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
Characteristics :
pages /54 and /55
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
Characteristics :
pages /54 and /55
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
References 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/58
2
Enclosed starters 2
for control and protection of resistive circuits
in category AC-1
3 and 4-pole contactor breakers without protection module (1)
Rated
thermal
current
Ith q y 40 C
Maximum
operational
current
AC-1 q y 40 C
Maximum
operational
voltage
Breaking
capacity
Iq for
Ue y 415 V
Number
of
poles
Basic reference,
(2)
Weight
A A V kA kg
63 63 690 50 3 LD4 LD030p 3.800
Protection modules (for customer assembly)
Thermal-magnetic (compensated)
Thermal
setting range
Magnetic
setting range
(36 Irth max)
Number
of
poles
Number of
protected
poles
Reference Weight
A A kg
10...13 39...78 3 3 LB1 LD03L16 0.780
13...18 54...108 3 3 LB1 LD03L21 0.780
18...5 75...150 3 3 LB1 LD03L22 0.780
3...3 95...190 3 3 LB1 LD03L53 0.780
8...40 10...40 3 3 LB1 LD03L55 0.780
35...50 150...300 3 3 LB1 LD03L57 0.780
45...63 190...380 3 3 LB1 LD03L61 0.780
(1)Fortheunittofunction,itmustbefttedwithaprotectionmodule,tobeorderedseparately.
Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380/
400
415 440 480 500 600 660
c (3) BD ED FD
(3)Foruseond.c.,theunitissuppliedwithaconverter,includingcoilsuppressiondevice.

LB1 LD03Lpp
5
3
3
9
3
7
LB1 LD03Lpp
5
3
3
9
3
7
Characteristics :
pages /54 and /55
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
Characteristics :
pages /54 and /55
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
Characteristics :
pages /54 and /55
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
Characteristics :
pages /54 and /55
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
References 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/59
2
Enclosed starters 2
Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (IP 20)
For
use on
Type and number
of blocks per unit
kg
LD4 or LD5
Mounted on RH side
1 block of 6 instantaneous contacts
comprising:
3 signalling contacts contactor state
1 signalling contact tripped on short-circuit
1 signalling contact tripped
1 signalling contact control knob in any
position other than Auto
1
1
1
LA1 LC010 0.80
1 block of 5 instantaneous contacts
comprising:
3 signalling contacts contactor state
1 signalling contact tripped
1 signalling contact tripped on short-circuit
1
1
1
LA1 LC012 0.0

Isolating blocks
For
use on
Type and number
of blocks per unit
kg
LD4
Mounted on LH side
1 control circuit isolating block
(1 or blocks per unit)
1 LA1 LC030 0.035
LD5
Mounted on LH side
1 control circuit isolating block LA1 LC031 0.100
Electrical tripping devices
For
use on
Type and number
of blocks per unit
Function Basic reference,
(1)
Weight
kg
LD4 or LD5
ftted with an
LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012
add-on block
1 undervoltage trip Time delay
0. s
LA1 LC070p 0.150
Instantaneous LA1 LC072p 0.150
or 1 shunt trip Instantaneous LA1 LC071p 0.150
Remote electrical reset devices
For
use on
Type and number
of blocks per unit
Control voltage Reference Weight
kg
LD4 or LD5
ftted with an
LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012
add-on block
1 remote electrical
reset block
4 V
50/60 Hz
LA1 LC052B 0.30
4 V 50 Hz
48 V 50/60 Hz
LA1 LC052E 0.30
100/17 V
50/60 Hz
LA1 LC052F 0.30
00/40V
50/60 Hz
LA1 LC052M 0.30
Volts 24 48 110 120 220/230 240 380/
400
415 440
50 Hz B E F M U Q N N
60 Hz B E F F M M Q N

integral
+
LA1 LC030
5
6
4
0
7
integral
+
LA1 LC030
5
6
4
0
7
integral
+
LA1 LC010
+
LA1LC070p
5
6
4
0
8
integral
+
LA1 LC010
+
LA1LC070p
5
6
4
0
8
integral
+
LA1 LC012
+
LA1 LC052p
5
6
4
0
9
integral
+
LA1 LC012
+
LA1 LC052p
5
6
4
0
9
Characteristics :
pages /54 and /55
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
Characteristics :
pages /54 and /55
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
Characteristics :
pages /54 and /55
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
Characteristics :
pages /54 and /55
Dimensions :
page /60
Schemes :
page /61
References 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
/60
References
Empty metal enclosure
Type of enclosure For use on Reference Weight
kg
Degree of protection IP 54 (1)
with drillings for door interlock
mechanism
(interlock not supplied).
For customer assembly
LD4 LD130p
LD4 LD030p
DE1 LT315 3,510
Door interlock mechanism (IP 54)
Type For use on
enclosure
Colour
of knob
Reference Weight
kg
Non-adjustable DE1 LT315 Red LA9 LC520 0,00
(1)Enclosuresuppliedwithdrillingsandfttedwithremovableblankingplugs,foradditionof
cableglands(tebeorderedseparately):fornumberanddiameters,seebelow.
Dimensions
Metal enclosure DE1 LT315
190
3
6
7
69
87
=
5
195 =
=
=
Number of blanked-off cable entries
At Cable For cable gland
Top Bottom min max N Type
1 10 1 13 13M
1 4 30 36 36M
Non-adjustable door interlock mechanism LA9 LC52p
integral 63, for mounting on LD4 LD030 and LD5 LD030
LD4 LD030 LD5 LD030
= = 8
1
0
5
90
= =
4
3
63 59 59
1
0
5
1
0
5
181
45
7
5
174 (LD5)
54
6
5
1
0
5
1
0
5
17 (LD4)
(2)
Door drillings
= =
=
=
5
4
54
(2)thickness5mmmax.
References,
dimensions
Enclosures
Schemes :
page /61
2
/61
Contactor breakers with protection module LBp Reversing contactor breakers with protection module LBp
LD4 LD030 + LB1 LD03p LD5 LD030 + LB1 LD03M or LD03P
/
T
1
4
/
T
6
/
T
3
5
/
L
3
3
/
L
1
/
L
1
A
A
1
Q1
LB6 LD03M
/
T
1
4
/
T
6
/
T
3
LB6 LD03M
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
Add-on blocks
Mounted on LH side For contactor breaker LD4 and reversing contactor breaker LD5
Mounted on LH side Mounted on RH side
1 ou LA1 LC030
5
4
5
3
5
4
5
3
(
6
3
)
(
6
4
)
LA1 LC030
Isolator
1
3
3
3
1
1
4
4
3
1
3
1
4
3
1
3
9
5
9
8
1
3
1
4
3
1
3
4
1
4
LA1 LC010 LA1 LC01 LA1 LC00 LA1 LC001

9
8
9
5
9
6
0
8
0
5
0
6
1
8
1
5
1
6 0 Auto +
4
0
5
0
8
4
1
3
1
4
3
1
3
LA1 LC05
4
9
8
9
5
9
6
9
5
Control knob
position signalling
Breaker
Trip signalling
Short-circuit
signalling
For reversing contactor breaker LD5
Mounted on LH side
5
4
5
3
6
4
6
3
LA1 LC031
Isolator
Tripping devices (1) for LD4, LD5 Remote electrical reset devices (1) for LD4, LD5
LA1L C071 LA1L C070, LC072 LA1L C052p
C
1
C
2
D
1
D
2
U<
M
B4
B
B3
B1
Trip +
RESET
Auto
(1)ForcontactorbreakersandreversingcontactorbreakersalreadyfttedwithanLA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012instantaneousauxiliarycontactblock.
schemes
Enclosures
References, dimensions :
page /60
/6
2
Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control
for use on a machine subject to the application
of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE (1)
Non-reversing starters (with pushbutton control of isolation)
of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz
in category AC-3
Circuit-breaker Dust & damp protected starter Weight
Setting range
of thermal trips
Basic reference,
to be completed by
(2) (3)
220/
230 V
400/
415 V
440 V
kW kW kW A kg
0.06 0.06 0.160.5 LG7 K06pp02 1.300
0.06 0.09 0.1 0.50.40 LG7 K06pp03 1.300
0.18 0.18 0.400.63 LG7 K06pp04 1.300
0.1 0.5 0.37 0.631 LG7 K06pp05 1.300
0.5 0.55 0.55 11.6 LG7 K06pp06 1.300
0.37 0.75 1.1 1.6.5 LG7 K06pp07 1.300
0.75 1.5 1.5 .54 LG7 K06pp08 1.300
1.1 . 3 46.3 LG7 K06pp10 1.300
1.5 4 4 610 LG7 K09pp14 1.450
3 5.5 5.5 914 LG7 D12pp16 1.600
4 7.5 9 1318 LG7 D18pp20 1.630
4 9 9 173 LG7 D18pp21 1.630
Specifcations
Functions performed by the starter:
isolation,
locking of isolation ftted as standard as from LG7 K09,
lockable Emergency Stop (1/4 turn) (3),
short-circuit protection,
overload protection,
pushbutton control: 1 white Start button I and 1 black Stop button O,
degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated.
Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action.
A GV SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales
Offce.
For supply voltages between 380 and 415 V (codes Q7, V7 or N7) the control circuit is pre-wired between phases.
For other supply voltages, the control circuit must be wired by the customer.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
See page /65.
(1) Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that
installation,buildinginand/orassemblyofthestarteriscarriedoutcorrectlybythemachinemanufacturer.
HarmonisedEuropeanstandards:EN60947andEN60439.
Conformitytointernationalstandards:IEC60947andIEC60439.
LG7 K
Volts a
50/60 Hz
12 24 36 42 48 110 127 220/
230
230 230/
240
380/
400
400 400/
415
440 500 660/
690
Code J7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FC7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 S7 Y7
LG7 D
Volts a
50/60 Hz
24 42 48 110 220/
230
230 240 380/
400
400 415 440
Code B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
(3) LG7 K06:themushroomheadtypeEmergencyStopactsmechanicallyonthecircuit-breaker.
LG7 K09, D12, D18:theEmergencyStopfunctionisperformedbyanundervoltagetrip,actingonthecircuit-breaker.This
circuit-breakerisalwayssuppliedpre-wiredforuseon380/415V50Hz.Fora60Hzsupply,pleaseconsultyourRegional
SalesOffce.
Other versions Starters for voltages other than those indicated above.

LG7K06
5
6
4
1
4
LG7K06
5
6
4
1
4
LG7D12withpadlocking
facilityfttedasstandard
5
6
4
1
5
LG7D12withpadlocking
5
6
4
1
5
Dimensions :
page /66
Schemes :
page /66
Dimensions :
page /66
Schemes :
page /66
Dimensions :
page /66
Schemes :
page /66
Dimensions :
page /66
Schemes :
page /66
References
/63
2
Non-reversing starters (with rotary operator for control of isolation)
Enclosure cannot be opened when energised in position I
in category AC-3
Setting range
of thermal trips
Basic reference,
to be completed by
(2)
220/
230 V
400/
415 V
440 V
kW kW kW A kg
0.06 0.06 0.160.5 LG1 K065pp02 0.970
0.06 0.09 0.1 0.50.40 LG1 K065pp03 0.970
0.18 0.18 0.400.63 LG1 K065pp04 0.970
0.1 0.5 0.5 0.631 LG1 K065pp05 0.970
0.5 0.55 0.55 11.6 LG1 K065pp06 0.970
0.37 0.75 1.1 1.6.5 LG1 K065pp07 0.970
0.75 1.5 1.5 .54 LG1 K065pp08 0.970
1.1 . 3 46.3 LG1 K065pp10 0.970
1.5 4 4 610 LG1 K095pp14 1.10
3 5.5 5.5 914 LG1 D122pp16 1.70
4 7.5 9 1318 LG1 D182pp20 1.90
4 9 9 173 LG1 D182pp21 1.90
Specifcations
isolation,
locking of isolation,
lockable Emergency Stop (red/yellow switch disconnector),
Offce.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
See page /65.
LG1 K
Volts a
50/60 Hz
12 24 36 42 48 110 127 220/
230
230 230/
240
380/
400
400 400/
415
440 500 660/
690
LG1 D
Volts a
50/60 Hz
24 42 48 110 220/
230
230 240 380/
400
400 415 440
Code B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
Other versions Starters for voltages other than those indicated above.

LG1 K
5
6
4
1
6
LG1 K
5
6
4
1
6
Dimensions :
page /66
Schemes :
page /67
Dimensions :
page /66
Schemes :
page /67
Dimensions :
page /66
Schemes :
page /67
Dimensions :
page /66
Schemes :
page /67
/64
2
Reversing starters (with pushbutton control of isolation)
in category AC-3
Setting range
of thermal trips
Basic reference,
to be completed by
(2) (3)
220/
230 V
400/
415 V
440 V
kW kW kW A kg
0.06 0.06 0.160.5 LG8 K06pp02 1.640
0.06 0.09 0.1 0.50.40 LG8 K06pp03 1.640
0.18 0.18 0.400.63 LG8 K06pp04 1.640
0.1 0.5 0.5 0.631 LG8 K06pp05 1.640
0.5 0.55 0.55 11.6 LG8 K06pp06 1.640
0.37 0.75 1.1 1.6.5 LG8 K06pp07 1.640
0.75 1.5 1.5 .54 LG8 K06pp08 1.640
1.1 . 3 46.3 LG8 K06pp10 1.640
1.5 4 4 610 LG8 K09pp14 1.640
3 5.5 5.5 914 LG8 K12pp16 1.640
Specifcations of reversing starters
isolation,
locking of isolation ftted as standard as from LG8 K09,
Emergency stop (3),
control by selector switch 1-, position non maintained,
Offce.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
See page /65.
Volts a
50/60 Hz
12 24 36 42 48 110 127 220/
230
230 230/
240
380/
400
400 400/
415
440 500 660/
690
LG8 K09:theEmergencyStopfunctionisperformedbyanundervoltagetrip,actingonthecircuit-breaker.Thiscircuit-breaker
isalwayssuppliedpre-wiredforuseon380/415V50Hz.Fora60Hzsupply,pleaseconsultyourRegionalSalesOffce.
Other versions Starters for higher power ratings.

LG8 K06
5
6
4
1
7
LG8 K06
5
6
4
1
7
LG8 K09 with padlocking
5
6
4
1
8
LG8 K09 with padlocking
5
6
4
1
8
Dimensions :
page /66
Schemes :
page /67
Dimensions :
page /66
Schemes :
page /67
Dimensions :
page /66
Schemes :
page /67
Dimensions :
page /66
Schemes :
page /67
/65
2
Variants
With Emergency Stop
No control pushbuttons
LG1, LG7, LG8

A04
With Emergency Stop
2 pushbuttons with arrows A and E
(latching)
1 Stop button O
LG8 K06 A10
Without Emergency Stop
2 pushbuttons with arrows A and E
(non latching)
LG8 A14
With Emergency Stop, mushroom head LG1

A37
(when the Emergency Stop is on the machine)
LG7, LG8

A39
With padlocking facility
(ftted as standard as from LG1 K09 or LG7 K09)
LG1 K06, LG7 K06 A29
1 neutral terminal
Fitted as standard on starters ordered
for use on 40 V (U7) supply
LG1, LG7, LG8

A59
Short-circuit signalling block LG7

A12
Vacuum valve for compressor LG7 D

A40
Without circuit-breaker LG1, LG7, LG8

(3)
Possible combinations of variants for the selected starter type (4)
Starter type A04 A10 A12 A14 A29 A37 A39 A40 A59
LG1 K (5)
LG7 K06
LG7 K09
LG7 D12
LG8 K06

LG8 K09

Combination possible Combination not possible
(2) Example: LG7 D12M716A04.
(3)Deletethelast2digitsoftheselectedstarterreference.Example:LG1 K065pp08 becomes LG1 K065pp.
(4) Example: LG8 K095ppA04A39A59.
LG1 K09, D12, D18:theEmergencyStopfunctionisperformedbyanundervoltagetrip,actingonthecircuit-breaker.This
circuit-breakerisalwayssuppliedpre-wiredforuseon380/415V50Hz.Fora60Hzsupply,pleaseconsultyourRegional
SalesOffce.
/66
2
Safety control and protection
solutions
of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE
Starters without isolator
LG1 K06, K09
LG1 D12, D18
LG7 K06, K09, D12, D18
LG8 K06, K09, K12

(1) Emergency Stop for starters < 3 kW
(2) Emergency Stop for starters u 3 kW
(3)OnlyforLG7
LG1 K and LG1 D x 13 P and x 16 P x 13 P and x 16 P
LG7 K and LG7 D x 13 P and x 16 P x 13 P and x 16 P
LG8 K x 13 P and x 16 P x 13 P and x 16 P

120
165
84
175
1
5
0
1
6
5
120
165
84
175
1
5
0
1
6
5
146 (2)
120
177 (1)
84
175
1
5
0
1
6
5
(1)
(2)
(3) 146 (2)
120
177 (1)
84
175
1
5
0
1
6
5
(1)
(2)
(3)
References :
pages /6 to /65
Schemes :
page /67
References :
pages /6 to /65
Schemes :
page /67
References :
pages /6 to /65
Schemes :
page /67
References :
pages /6 to /65
Schemes :
page /67
Dimensions
/67
2
solutions2
DOL starters
LG1 K06, K09, D12, D18 LG1 K06, K09, D12, D18
380/400 V, code Q7 or 400/415 V, code N7
220/230 V, code M7

LG7 K06 LG7 K09, D12, D18 LG7 K06, K09, D12, D18
380/400 V, code Q7 or
400/415 V, code N7
220/230 V, code M7

Reversing starters
LG8 K06 LG8 K09, K12 LG8 K06, K09, K12
380/400 V, code Q7 or
400/415 V, code N7
220/230 V, code M7

L
3
T
3
L
2
T
2
L
1
T
1
Q1
1 3 5
2
Q2
4 6
KM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
U
1
W
1
V
1
L
3
T
3
L
2
T
2
L
1
T
1
Q1
1 3 5
2
Q2
4 6
KM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
U
1
W
1
V
1
KM1/1
KM1/5
KM1
KM1
S2
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
1
1
2
A
2
A
1
S1
Ph
N
KM1/1
KM1/5
KM1
KM1
S2
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
1
1
2
A
2
A
1
S1
Ph
N
2 4 6
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
KM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
U
1
W
1
V
1
Q1
2 4 6
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
KM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
U
1
W
1
V
1
Q1
1
/
L
1
Q1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
F1
U
1
W
1
V
1
KM1
1 3 5
2 4 6
2 4 6
D
1
D
2
E
1
E
2
1
/
L
1
Q1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
F1
U
1
W
1
V
1
KM1
1 3 5
2 4 6
2 4 6
D
1
D
2
E
1
E
2
KM1/1
KM1/5
KM1
KM1
S2
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
1
1
2
A
2
A
1
S1
Ph
N
KM1/1
KM1/5
KM1
KM1
S2
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
1
1
2
A
2
A
1
S1
Ph
N
1
/
L
1
Q1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
U W V
KM1 KM2
1 3 5 1 3 5
2 4 6 2 4 6
2 4 6
1
/
L
1
Q1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
U W V
KM1 KM2
1 3 5 1 3 5
2 4 6 2 4 6
2 4 6
1
/
L
1
Q1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
U W V
KM1 KM2
1 3 5 1 3 5
2 4 6 2 4 6
2 4 6
D
1
D
2
E
1
E
2
1
/
L
1
Q1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
U W V
KM1 KM2
1 3 5 1 3 5
2 4 6 2 4 6
2 4 6
D
1
D
2
E
1
E
2
1
1
KM2/5
KM2/1
KM1
KM2 KM1
1
2
1
3
1
4
5
4
5
3
KM2
2
1
2
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
S1
S2
1 0
KM2
1
3
1
4
5
4
5
3
KM1
2
1
2
2
S2
2 0
Ph
N
1
1
KM2/5
KM2/1
KM1
KM2 KM1
1
2
1
3
1
4
5
4
5
3
KM2
2
1
2
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
S1
S2
1 0
KM2
1
3
1
4
5
4
5
3
KM1
2
1
2
2
S2
2 0
Ph
N
References :
pages /6 to /65
Schemes :
page /66
References :
pages /6 to /65
Schemes :
page /66
References :
pages /6 to /65
Schemes :
page /66
References :
pages /6 to /65
Schemes :
page /66
Schemes
/68
2
Non-reversing starters with integral transformer
Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided
that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer.
Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439.
Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439.
Starters pre-wired for operation on a 3-phase 380 to 400 V 50 Hz supply
(with pushbutton control of isolator function)
motors 50 Hz in category AC-3
Circuit-breaker Dust and damp
protected starter
Weight
Setting range of thermal trips Reference (1)
380/400 V
kW A kg
0.06 0.160.5 LJ7 K06Q702 .70
0.09 0.50.40 LJ7 K06Q703 .70
0.18 0.400.63 LJ7 K06Q704 .70
0.5 0.631 LJ7 K06Q705 .70
0.55 11.6 LJ7 K06Q706 .70
0.75 1.6.5 LJ7 K06Q707 .70
1.5 .54 LJ7 K06Q708 .70
. 46.3 LJ7 K06Q710 .70
4 610 LJ7 K09Q714 .70
Specifcations
isolation,
locking of isolation ftted as standard on LJ7 K09,
terminal allowing connection of a volt-free contact, if required, in the control circuit,
Offce.
Integral transformer: 400/4 V, 5 VA.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Variants (3)
Description For
use on
Suffx to be added to
With Emergency Stop
LJ7 A04
(when the Emergency Stop is on the machine)
LJ7 A39
(ftted as standard on LJ7 K09)
LJ7 K06 A29
Without circuit-breaker LJ7 (5)
(1) In the reference, the voltage code Q7 (380/400 V) indicates the power supply voltage to which the starter will be connected,
it being assumed that the contactor has a a24Vcoil(seecontrolcircuitscheme).
(2) LJ7 K06 (P y3kWat400V):themushroomheadtypeEmergencyStopactsmechanicallyonthecircuit-breaker.
LJ7 K09 (P > 3 kW at 400 V): the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip GV AX385, acting on the
circuit-breaker.Thiscircuit-breakerisalwayssuppliedpre-wiredforuseon380/400V50Hz.
(3)PossiblecombinationofvariantsA04,A29andA39onstartersLJ7K06.Example:LJ7 K06Q702A04A29A39.
Possible combination of variants A04 and A39 on starters LJ7 K09Q714A04A39.
(4) Example: LJ7 K06Q702A04.
(5)Deletethelast2digitsoftheselectedstarterreference.Example:LJ7 K06Q702 becomes LJ7 K06Q7.

Other versions

Starters for voltages other than those indicated above.

LJ7K
5
1
1
5
4
4
LJ7K
5
1
1
5
4
4
Dimensions :
page /70
Schemes :
page /71
Dimensions :
page /70
Schemes :
page /71
Dimensions :
page /70
Schemes :
page /71
Dimensions :
page /70
Schemes :
page /71
References 2
/69
2
Reversing starters with integral transformer
Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided
that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer.
Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439.
Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439.
Starters pre-wired for operation on a 3-phase 380 to 400 V 50 Hz supply
(with pushbutton control of isolator function)
motors 50 Hz in category AC-3
Circuit-breaker Dust and damp
protected starter
Weight
Setting range of thermal trips Reference (1)
380/400 V
kW A kg
0.06 0.160.5 LJ8 K06Q702 .650
0.09 0.50.40 LJ8 K06Q703 .650
0.18 0.400.63 LJ8 K06Q704 .650
0.5 0.631 LJ8 K06Q705 .650
0.55 11.6 LJ8 K06Q706 .650
0.75 1.6.5 LJ8 K06Q707 .650
1.5 .54 LJ8 K06Q708 .650
. 46.3 LJ8 K06Q710 .650
4 610 LJ8 K09Q714 .650
Specifcations
isolation,
locking of isolation ftted as standard on LJ8 K09,
terminal allowing connection of a volt-free contact, if required, in the control circuit,
Offce.
Integral transformer: 400/4 V, 5 VA.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Variants (3)
Description For
use on
Suffx to be added to
With Emergency Stop
LJ8 A04
(when the Emergency Stop is on the
LJ8 A39
(ftted as standard on LJ8 K09)
LJ8 K06 A29
Without circuit-breaker LJ8 (5)
(1) In the reference, the voltage code Q7 (380/400 V) indicates the power supply voltage to which the starter will be connected,
it being assumed that the contactor has a a24Vcoil(seecontrolcircuitscheme).
(2) LJ8 K06 (P y3kWat400V):themushroomheadtypeEmergencyStopactsmechanicallyonthecircuit-breaker.
LJ8 K09 (P > 3 kW at 400 V): the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip GV AX385, acting on the
circuit-breaker.Thiscircuit-breakerisalwayssuppliedpre-wiredforuseon380/400V50Hz.
(3)PossiblecombinationofvariantsA04,A29andA39onstartersLJ8K06.Example:LJ8 K06Q702A04A29A39.
PossiblecombinationofvariantsA04andA39onstartersLJ8K09.Example:LJ8 K09Q714A04A39.
(4) Example: LJ8 K06Q702A04.
(5)Deletethelast2digitsoftheselectedstarterreference.Example:LJ8 K06Q702 becomes LJ8 K06Q7.

Other versions

Starters for voltages other than those indicated above.

LJ8 K
5
1
1
5
4
5
LJ8 K
5
1
1
5
4
5
Dimensions :
page /70
Schemes :
page /71
Dimensions :
page /70
Schemes :
page /71
Dimensions :
page /70
Schemes :
page /71
Dimensions :
page /70
Schemes :
page /71
/70
2
Enclosed starters
Dimensions
LJ7 K06, LJ8 K06

LJ7 K09, LJ8 K09

Cut-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands at the top and at the bottom x 13 P and x 16 P.

177
120
84
175
1
5
0
1
6
5
177
120
84
175
1
5
0
1
6
5
146
120
84
175
1
5
0
1
6
5
146
120
84
175
1
5
0
1
6
5
References :
pages /68 and /69
References :
pages /68 and /69
References :
pages /68 and /69
References :
pages /68 and /69
Dimensions 2
/71
2
Enclosed starters
Schemes
LJ7 K06 LJ7 K09

Reversing starters
LJ8 K06

LJ8 K09

2 4 6
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
KM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
U
1
W
1
V
1
Q1
2 4 6
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
KM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
U
1
W
1
V
1
Q1

K
M
1
/
5

K
M
1
/
1
KM1
X1
KM1
S2
F1 4 A
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
1
1
2
A
1
A
2
S1
T1
400/24 V
25 VA
1
2
2
1

K
M
1
/
5

K
M
1
/
1
KM1
X1
KM1
S2
F1 4 A
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
1
1
2
A
1
A
2
S1
T1
400/24 V
25 VA
1
2
2
1
1
/
L
1
Q1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
F1
U
1
W
1
V
1
M
3
KM1
1 3 5
2 4 6
2 4 6
D
1
D
2
E
1
E
2
1
/
L
1
Q1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
F1
U
1
W
1
V
1
M
3
KM1
1 3 5
2 4 6
2 4 6
D
1
D
2
E
1
E
2

K
M
1
/
5

K
M
1
/
1
KM1
X1
KM1
S2
F1 4 A
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
1
1
2
A
1
A
2
S1
T1
400/24 V
25 VA
1
2
2
1

K
M
1
/
5

K
M
1
/
1
KM1
X1
KM1
S2
F1 4 A
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
1
1
2
A
1
A
2
S1
T1
400/24 V
25 VA
1
2
2
1
1
/
L
1
Q1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
U W V
KM1 KM2
1 3 5 1 3 5
2 4 6 2 4 6
2 4 6
1
/
L
1
Q1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
U W V
KM1 KM2
1 3 5 1 3 5
2 4 6 2 4 6
2 4 6
1
1
KM1
KM2 KM1
1
2
2
3
2
4
5
4
5
3
KM2
2
1
2
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
S1
S2
1 0
KM2
1
3
1
4
5
4
5
3
KM1
2
1
2
2
S2
2 0

K
M
2
/
1

K
M
2
/
5
T1
400/24 V
25 VA
F1
2
1
1
1
KM1
KM2 KM1
1
2
2
3
2
4
5
4
5
3
KM2
2
1
2
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
S1
S2
1 0
KM2
1
3
1
4
5
4
5
3
KM1
2
1
2
2
S2
2 0

K
M
2
/
1

K
M
2
/
5
T1
400/24 V
25 VA
F1
2
1
1
/
L
1
Q1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
U W V
KM1 KM2
1 3 5 1 3 5
2 4 6 2 4 6
2 4 6
D
1
D
2
E
1
E
2
1
/
L
1
Q1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
U W V
KM1 KM2
1 3 5 1 3 5
2 4 6 2 4 6
2 4 6
D
1
D
2
E
1
E
2
1
1
KM1
KM2 KM1
1
2
2
3
2
4
5
4
5
3
KM2
2
1
2
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
S1
S2
1 0
KM2
1
3
1
4
5
4
5
3
KM1
2
1
2
2
S2
2 0

K
M
2
/
1

K
M
2
/
5
T1
400/24 V
25 VA
F1
2
1
1
1
KM1
KM2 KM1
1
2
2
3
2
4
5
4
5
3
KM2
2
1
2
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
S1
S2
1 0
KM2
1
3
1
4
5
4
5
3
KM1
2
1
2
2
S2
2 0

K
M
2
/
1

K
M
2
/
5
T1
400/24 V
25 VA
F1
2
1
References :
pages /68 and /69
References :
pages /68 and /69
References :
pages /68 and /69
References :
pages /68 and /69
Schemes 2
/7
Selection guide
Applications
Composition Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker
Low consumption contactor or contactor pair
Electronic control device
Enclosure Insulated (plastic)
Operator Rotary knob
Sensor connection With With and local/line control
Contactors Non-reversing LF3 Pppp LF3 PpppA79
Reversing LF4 Pppp LF4 PpppA79
Pages /84 and /85
D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Metal Insulated (plastic)
Pushbuttons
With With and local/line control With With and local/line control
LF3 MPppp LF3 MPpppA79 LF3 Mppp LF3 MpppA79
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/73
Applications
Composition Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker
Low consumption contactor or contactor pair
Electronic control device
Enclosure Insulated (plastic)
Operator Rotary knob
Sensor connection With With and local/line control
Contactors Non-reversing LF3 Pppp LF3 PpppA79
Reversing LF4 Pppp LF4 PpppA79
Pages /84 and /85

Metal Insulated (plastic)
Pushbuttons
With With and local/line control With With and local/line control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/74
Presentation
Characteristics:
pages /80 to /83
References:
pages /84 and /85
Dimensions, schemes:
pages /88 to /93
Connections:
pages /94 and /95
Presentation
Decentralised control of motors using enclosed starters which communicate on
AS-Interface, drastically reduces setting-up times, thereby increasing the availability
of machines.
In order to cater for different environments, these starters are sub-divided according
to:
the different power connection methods: cable gland or Harting plug-in
connectors,
the local/AS-Interface remote operating modes,
the type of enclosure: insulated (plastic) or metal.
Decentralisation of machine starters
These enclosed starters which communicate on AS-Interface are pre-assembled
and ready-to-use with a minimum of cabling.
They are designed for building decentralised electrical installations:
i.e. the starters are installed as near as possible to the motors they are to control.
The decentralisation of the starters provides obvious advantages regarding power
distribution to machines not grouped together, for example: motors driving a
conveyor system.
Traditional installation
Equipment
foor-standing
enclosure
Distribution circuit circuit-breaker
Programmable controller with its inputs/outputs
Contactor + thermal overload relay
Decentralised installation
Distribution circuit circuit-breaker
Programmable controller
AS-Interface starters
Power is distributed either by prefabricated trunking or by cable.
These starters incorporate all the functions necessary for the management of motors
(control, protection, isolation, etc.), and comprise:
a thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker,
a low consumption contactor (non reversing) or contactor pair (reversing),
an I/O module ASI 0MTpp.
Designed primarily for use with 3-phase a.c. motors, they can nevertheless be used
with single-phase or d.c. motors. In these applications, the 3 phases of the internal
circuit-breaker should be wired in series (each phase sensing the same current) in
order to avoid tripping due to an assumed phase failure.
b
b
b
-
-
-
M M M M M
AS-Interface
Distribution
enclosure
Power
M M M M M
AS-Interface
Distribution
enclosure
Power
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/75
Connection by cable gland
1 Product diagnostics via 3 LEDs.
2 Input state.
3 Output state.
4 Knock-out for cable gland (not included for any power extension or output control
relay cabling).
5 Disconnect rotary control knob.
Indicates Trip when switch-disconnector tripped.
6 Local/AS-Interface key switch (variant A79).
7 For variant A79: 3-position, spring return to zero selector switch for reversing starter
(LF4). Function:
position 1 = forward running,
position 0 = Stop,
- position = reverse running.
Pushbutton for non-reversing starter (LF3).
Function: Pulsed operation.
8 Cable gland for power supply cable.
9 M1 female connector for cable connection to a sensor (supplied with protective
cap).
10 M1 male connector for connection to AS-Interface (1) and auxiliary supply.
11 Cable gland for motor cabling.
12 Reset pushbutton.
13 Stop pushbutton.
Connection by plug-in connectors(variant A74)
1 Product diagnostics via 3 LEDs.
2 Input state.
3 Output state.
4 Knock-out for cable gland (not included for output control relay cabling).
5 Male connector for incoming power supply to motor starter (2).
6 Disconnect rotary control knob.
Indicates Trip when switch-disconnector tripped.
Pushbutton: for non-reversing starters (LF3).
Function: Pulsed operation.
10 Female connector for power supply to motor (2).
11 M1 female connector for cable connection to a sensor (supplied with protective
cap).
12 M1 male connector for connection to AS-Interface (1) and auxiliary supply.
13 Stop pushbutton.
14 Reset pushbutton.
(1)Extensioncables:pleaseconsultyourRegionalSalesOffce.
(2)HARTINGplug-inconnectortobefttedtocable(notincluded,seepage2/95).
-
-
5
D
F
5
6
3
6
1 2 3 4
6
7
11 10 9 8
5
D
F
5
6
3
6
1 2 3 4
6
7
11 10 9 8
D
F
5
6
3
6
3
1 2 3 4
11 10 9 8
6
7
13
12
D
F
5
6
3
6
3
1 2 3 4
11 10 9 8
6
7
13
12
D
F
5
6
3
6
4
1 2 3 4
10 11 12
8 6 5
7
9
D
F
5
6
3
6
4
1 2 3 4
10 11 12
8 6 5
7
9
D
F
5
6
3
6
7
1 2 3 4
10 11 12
8 13 5
7
9
14
D
F
5
6
3
6
7
1 2 3 4
10 11 12
8 13 5
7
9
14
Description
Characteristics:
pages /80 to /83
References:
pages /84 and /85
pages /88 to /93
Connections:
pages /94 and /95
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/76
D
F
5
6
3
6
8
D
F
5
6
3
6
5
Functions
Characteristics:
pages /80 to /83
References:
pages /84 and /85
pages /88 to /93
Connections:
pages /94 and /95
Auxiliary supply
A c 4 V supply is necessary for LF3 and LF4 starters.
Prospective current consumptions are listed on page /83.
Motor command-control
The functions provided by this range of starters are:
motor control and status monitoring via AS-Interface,
D.O.L. starting (non-reversing or reversing),
overload protection of the motor,
short-circuit protection of the motor and its power supply cabling.
Starters with rotary control knob
These starters provide the following functions:
load break switch-disconnector with padlockable control knob,
IP 54 degree of protection, double insulation.
Opening of the enclosure is mechanically inhibited whilst the starter is switched on or
whilst in the off position and padlocked.
The rotary control knob has 3 positions:
0: switch-disconnector opened manually,
I: switch-disconnector closed,
Trip: switch-disconnector tripped.
Starters with pushbutton control
These starters provide the following functions:
pushbutton resetting of the protection device,
pushbutton stop control,
IP 54 degree of protection, double insulation.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-

Control-command and
contactor supply
Power supply
AS-Interface
Contactor supply
Auxiliary supply

Control-command and
contactor supply
Power supply
AS-Interface
Contactor supply
Auxiliary supply
Contactor supply
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/77
Local control
Stop and reset functions are possible from the front of the enclosure. The stop
command is achieved by actuating the internal circuit-breaker, which provides the
switch-disconnector function.
Depending on the type of starter, stopping is controlled by either:
a rotary control knob, or
a stop pushbutton (black).
In the event of an overload, resetting of the internal thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker
is possible after the motor has cooled down.
Depending on the type of starter, resetting is controlled by either:
a rotary control knob, or
a reset pushbutton (blue).
Integral local/AS-Interface control (variant A79)
This starter variant is ftted with a 2-position local/AS-Interface switch which,
depending on the position of the switch, allows the following functions:
AS-Interface: the PLC controls the motor starter.
Local: local Start/Stop commands override instructions from the PLC.
3-position, spring return to zero selector switch for reversing starter (LF4).
Function:
position 1 = forward running,
position 0 = Stop,
position = reverse running.
Pushbutton for non-reversing starter (LF3) .
Function:
Pulsed operation.
Control via a control station
It is possible to achieve manual local start control from pushbutton control stations
connected to AS-Interface. Please consult your Regional Sales Offce.
Actuation of a pushbutton is transmitted to the programmable controller (message 1)
which passes it on to the starter (message ).

-
-
-
-
b
b
b
-
-
-
b
-
D
F
5
6
3
6
9
D
F
5
6
3
6
9
AS-Interface
Message 1
Message
Power supply
AS-Interface
Message 1
Message
Power supply
Characteristics:
pages /80 to /83
References:
pages /84 and /85
pages /88 to /93
Connections:
pages /94 and /95
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/78
Characteristics:
pages /80 to /83
References:
pages /84 and /85
pages /88 to /93
Connections:
pages /94 and /95
Local signalling
Indication of all the operating states (diagnostic, inputs and outputs) is visible without
having to open the enclosure (transparent window in the enclosure cover).
Safety
The starter features continual self-checking to ensure correct operation.
External safety functions are not processed by the starter.
Emergency stop and machine safety wiring must follow standard safety practice and
be hard-wired, using electromechanical devices in the approved way. These
functions must not be handled by communication bus systems (EN 6004 9..5.4).
Protection against unexpected restarting, after an accidental power supply failure,
must be provided by a safety device separate from the starter.
The starter control (rotary knob or pushbutton) does not provide the Emergency Stop
function if the machine is ftted with other actuators. The control operators on the
starter are therefore coloured black, in accordance with standard EN 6004
10..1. Starters with rotary control knob may be padlocked in the ON position, since
this control does not provide an Emergency Stop function.
Assume fallback condition
When communication is interrupted, the starter is no longer controlled by the PLC.
The fallback condition of the starter is motor stopped (outputs at 0).
Output control relay
This relay incorporates a C/O contact, which may be used to control an indicator
lamp, solenoid valve, etc. (50 V, 5 A), via AS-Interface.
AS-Interface
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/79
Characteristics:
pages /80 to /83
References:
pages /84 and /85
pages /88 to /93
Connections:
pages /94 and /95
Starters with sensors connected (1)
Two 3-wire PNP sensors (50 mA max) or -wire limit switches can be connected
directly to the starter.
The information supplied by the sensor/limit switch is fed back via the AS-Interface
line.
(1)For"RefexStop"function,pleaseconsultyourRegionalSalesOffce.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/80
Characteristics
Functions :
pages /80 to /83
References:
pages /84 and /85
pages /88 to /93
Connections:
pages /94 and /95
Environment
Starter type LF3, LF4
Conforming to standards IEC 6004-1, EN 6004-1,
IEC 60439-1, IEC 60947-4-1,
EN 60947-4-1
UL 508, CSA C- n 14 (1)
Product certifcations
Protective treatment Standard version TC
conforming to IEC 6059
IP 54
around the device
Storage C - 40+ 80
Operation C - 5+ 40
Operating position
without derating
3
0
3
0
9
0
9
0
Flame resistance
of equipment
Conforming to IEC 60695--1 C 960
Shock resistance
(1/ sine wave, 11ms)
conforming to IEC 60068--7
Contactor open 10 gn
Contactor closed 15 gn
5150 Hz
Contactor open gn
Safe separation of circuits Conforming to VDE 0106
and IEC 60536
SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage), up to 400 V
Immunity to non-dissipating
shock wave (Uimp)
Conforming to IEC 60947-1 kV 6: power
.5: AS-Interface, 4 V and sensor
Material and colour
of enclosure base
Insulated enclosures Polycarbonate impregnated with 20 % glass fbre, black throughout
Metal enclosures Sheet steel RAL 9001
Material and colour
of enclosure cover
Insulated enclosures Polycarbonate impregnated with 20% glass fbre, RAL 9001 throughout
Metal enclosures Sheet steel RAL 9001
Resistance to
chemical agents
Insulated enclosures Avoid allowing this material to come into contact with: strong bases (certain
detergents), aromatic hydrocarbons, alcohol, chlorine solvents, ketones.
Electromagnetic compatibility
Immunity to electrostatic
discharge
EN 61000-4-
kV 8: in open air (level 3)
4: in indirect mode (level )
Immunity to fast transient
currents
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-4
kV : power, AS-Interface, 4 V and sensor (level 3)
Immunity to
dissipated shock wave
EN 61000-4-5
kV 4/: power (level 4)
/0.5: power, AS-Interface, 4 V and sensor (level )
radio-frequency interference
ENV 50 141
V/m 10
Immunity to radiated
ENV 50 140 and ENV 50 04
(GSM)
V/m 10
Radio-conducted and
radio-radiated rejection
ENV 55 011/CISPR11 (G1) Class B
(1) Only for metal enclosures with letter Uattheendofthereference.Certifcationpending.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/81
Functions :
pages /80 to /83
References:
pages /84 and /85
pages /88 to /93
Connections:
pages /94 and /95
Cabling
Starter type LF3 LF4
Min. Max. Min. Max.
Power supply
cabling
Screw clamp
terminals
Solid cable mm
2
1 x 1.5 x 6 1 x 1.5 x 6
Flexible cable
without cable end
mm
2
1 x 1.5 x 6 1 x 1.5 x 6
Flexible cable
with cable end
mm
2
1 x 1.5 x 4 1 x 1.5 x 4
Tightening torque (1) Nm 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7
Cable Gland
(Pg 16)
Clamping capacity mm 10 15 10 15
Min. Max. Min. Max.
Motor cabling Screw clamp
terminals
Solid cable mm
2
1 x 1.5 x 4 1 x 1.5 1 x 4
Flexible cable
without cable end
mm
2
1 x 1.5 x 4 1 x 1.5 1 x 4
Flexible cable
with cable end
mm
2
1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 + 1 x .5 1 x 1.5 1 x .5
Tightening torque (1) Nm 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
Cable Gland
(Pg 16)
Clamping capacity mm 10 15 10 15
Min. Max. Min. Max.
Output
control relay
cabling
Terminal block Solid cable mm
2
0.5 1.5 0.5 1.5
Flexible cable
without cable end
mm
2
0.5 1.5 0.5 1.5
Flexible cable
with cable end
mm
2
0.5 1.5 0.5 1.5
Tightening torque () Nm 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
Cable gland Clamping capacity Pg 13 mm 8 13 8 13
Pg 16 mm 10 15 10 15
Pole electrical characteristics
Utilisation category Conforming to IEC 60947-
(circuit-breaker)
A
Conforming to 947-4-1
(motor starter)
AC-3
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Conforming to IEC 60947 V 415
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947 V 415
Rated operational frequency Conforming to IEC 60947 Hz 50/60
Breaking capacity (Ics and Icu) Conforming to
IEC 60947-
30/40 V kA > 100
400/415 V kA > 100
Sensitivity to phase failure Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1 7--1-5-
Yes
Circuit-breaker characteristics (manual operation)
Mechanical durability C.O.: closing, opening CO 100 000
Electrical durability For AC-3 duty CO 100 000
Duty class Maximum operating rate CO/h 5
Circuit-breaker characteristics (automatic operation)
Maximum operating rate In operating cycles
per hour
3600
Mechanical durability In millions of
operating cycles
30 5
Electrical durability In category AC-3 at 8.5 A 800 000
Other characteristics
Starters with rotary control knob Circuit-breaker type
GV2 P
See pages 3/8 to 3/11
Starters with pushbutton control Circuit-breaker type
GV2 ME LF3, LF4 only
Non-reversing starters Contactor
LP4 K0901BW3 (3)
Reversing starters Reversing contactor
LP5 K0901BW3 (4)
(1)Philipsn2orfatscrewdriver5.5.
(2)Flatscrewdriver3.5.
(3)LP4K1201BW3forcircuit-breakerratings00and16.
(4)LP5K1201BW3forcircuit-breakerratings00and16.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/8
Functions :
pages /80 to /83
References:
pages /84 and /85
pages /88 to /93
Connections:
pages /94 and /95
Sensor inputs
Starter type LF3, LF4
Cabling M1
Nominal input values Voltage V c 4
Maximum current
available
per sensor
mA 50
Sensor supply
(including ripple)
V 1930
Input voltage range At state 1 Voltage V c > 11
Current mA > 6
At state 0 Voltage V c < 5
Current mA <
Maximum number of sensors
Proximity sensor compatibility -wire/3-wire
Isolation with respect to the AS-Interface line Yes
Input type Resistive for PNP type sensor
Output control relay
Operating voltage limit a.c. supply V 50
d.c. supply V 30
Thermal current at 40 C (Ith) A 5
Service life
on an a 24 V load
Resistive
load
AC-1
Millions of operating cycles 0.1 (1) in 5 A current,
1 (2) in 1 A current.
Inductive
load
AC-14
1 (2) in 0.5 A current,
5 (3) in 0.5 A current.
Service life on
a c 24 V load
Resistive
load
DC-1
0. (1) in A current.
Resistive
load
DC-3
> 1 (3) in 0.5 A current.
Response time Latching ms < 10
Unlatching ms < 15
Contact type C/O
Built-in protection Against overload
and short-circuits
None, a quick-blow fuse must be ftted
Against a.c. or d.c.
inductive overloads
Protected against overvoltages generated by switching the coils of preactuators
Isolation rms voltage between output
and earth or between output
and internal logic
V 1500, 50/60 Hz for 60 s
Insulation resistance between
output terminals and AS-Interface
mW > 1000
(1)0.2ofanoperation(C/O)persecond.
(2)0.5ofanoperation(C/O)persecond.
(3)1operation(C/O)persecond.
Tess enclosed starters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/83
Functions :
pages /80 to /83
References:
pages /84 and /85
pages /88 to /93
Connections:
pages /94 and /95
Consumption
Starter type Product confgured for supply
from an auxiliary c 24 V supply
LF3 LF4
Current consumption From the
AS-Interface line
(1)
De-energised 0 mA 0 mA
Inrush 0 mA 0 mA
Sealed 0 mA 0 mA
Per sensor Sensor consumption (50 mA max) + 10 mA (signal = 1)
Relays 0 mA
From the auxiliary
c 4 V supply
De-energised 0 0
Inrush 110 mA 110 mA
Energised 30 mA 30 mA
Data exchange characteristics
AS-Interface profle 7.D.F.F (standard addressing
7.A.7.0 (extended addressing A/B)
Data bits (commands) Bit value = 0 = 1
Command D0 (O) Stop - forward running Start - forward running
Command D1 (O) Stop - reverse running Start - reverse running (2)
Command D (O) Deactivation of control relay Activation of
control relay
Command D3 (O) Not Used Not Used
Data bits (status) Bit value = 0 = 1
Status D0 (I) Not ready or fault Ready
Status D1 (I) Stopped Running
Status D (I) Sensor 1 signal absent (3) Sensor 1 signal
present (3)
Status D3 (I) Sensor signal absent (4) Sensor signal
present (4)
(1)30mAmaximum+sensorconsumption.
(2)OnlyonLF4.
(3)Sensor1orcircuit-breakerfaultsignal,dependingonconfguration.
(4)Sensor1orsensor2signalorcontrol/localmode,dependingonconfguration.
Tess enclosed starters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/84
Characteristics,
references
Dimensions:
pages /88 to /90
Schemes:
pages /91 to /93
Characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 6004-1, 60439-1, 60947-4-1, EN 6004-1, 60947-4-1
UL 508, CSA C- n 14 (1)
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 6059 IP 54
Ambient air temperature Operation - 5 to + 40 C
Material LFp P: polycarbonate (2). LFp MP: sheet steel
Starters in insulated (plastic) enclosure
Circuit-breaker
adjustment range
of thermal trips
Starter
Ref with
standard
addressing
Ref with
extended
addressing
Weight
220/230 V 400/415 V
kW kW A kg
Non-reversing starters with rotary control knob, with black handle on blue background (3)
Without LF3 P00D (4) LF3 P00E (4) 1.00
0.06 0.160.5 LF3 P02D LF3 P02E 1.300
0.06 0.09 0.50.40 LF3 P03D LF3 P03E 1.300
0.1
0.18
0.400.63 LF3 P04D LF3 P04E 1.300
0.09
0.1
0.5
0.631 LF3 P05D LF3 P05E 1.300

0.18
0.5
0.37
0.55
11.6 LF3 P06D LF3 P06E 1.350
0.37 0.75 1.6.5 LF3 P07D LF3 P07E 1.350
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
.54 LF3 P08D LF3 P08E 1.350
1.1 . 46.3 LF3 P10D LF3 P10E 1.350
1.5
3
4
610 LF3 P14D LF3 P14E 1.350
.
3
5.5
914 LF3 P16D LF3 P16E 1.350

Reversing starters with rotary control knob, with black handle on blue background (3)
Without LF4 P00D (4) LF4 P00E (4) 1.00
0.06 0.160.5 LF4 P02D LF4 P02E 1.550
0.06 0.09 0.50.40 LF4 P03D LF4 P03E 1.550
0.1
0.18
0.400.63 LF4 P04D LF4 P04E 1.550
0.09
0.1
0.5
0.631 LF4 P05D LF4 P05E 1.550

0.18
0.5
0.37
0.55
11.6 LF4 P06D LF4 P06E 1.600
0.37 0.75 1.6.5 LF4 P07D LF4 P07E 1.600
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
.54 LF4 P08D LF4 P08E 1.600
1.1 . 46.3 LF4 P10D LF4 P10E 1.600
1.5
3
4
610 LF4 P14D LF4 P14E 1.600
.
3
5.5
914 LF4 P16D LF4 P16E 1.600

Starters in metal enclosures
To order a metal enclosure, add a letter M after LF3 or LF4, in the references selected above.
Example: LF3 P0D becomes LF3 MP02D.
To order a metal enclosure that conforms to standards UL 508 and CSA C- n 14, add a letter M after LF3 or LF4 and a
letter U at the end of the references selected above. Example: LF3 P0D becomes LF3 MP02DU.
b
b
Description For mounting on Suffx to be added to the
starter reference (5)
With HARTING connectors (6) Insulated or metal enclosure A74
With local/AS-Interface control Insulated enclosure A79
With local/AS-Interface control Metal enclosure A79
(1) Only for metal enclosures with letter Uattheendofthereference.Certifcationpending.
(2) Avoid allowing the material to come into contact with strong bases (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic
hydrocarbons).
(3) On metal enclosures only, to order an Emergency Stop rotary control knob with red handle on yellow background, add the
letter Rtotheendofthereference.Example:LF3 MP02DR.
(4)SuppliedwithoutGV2Pmotorcircuit-breaker.
(5) Example: LF3 P02DA79A74.
(6)Connectorstobefttedtocables(tobeorderedseparately,seepage2/95).
LF3 P and LF4 P
LF3 PppD
D
F
5
6
3
5
6
LF4 PppDA79A74
D
F
5
6
3
5
7
LF4 MPppDA74A79
D
F
5
6
3
5
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/85
Characteristics,
references
Dimensions:
pages /88 to /90
Schemes:
pages /91 to /93
Characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 6004-1, 60439-1, 60947-4-1, EN 6004-1, 60947-4-1
UL 508, CSA C- n 14
Conforming to IEC 6059
IP 54
Ambient air temperature Operation - 5 to + 40 C
Material LFp M: polycarbonate (1).
Starters in insulated (plastic) enclosure
Circuit-breaker
adjustment range
of thermal trips
Starter
Ref with
standard
addressing
Ref with
extended
addressing
Weight
220/230 V 400/415 V
kW kW A kg
Non-reversing starters with pushbutton control
Without LF3 M00D (2) LF3 M00E (2) 1.000
0.06 0.160.5 LF3 M02D LF3 M02E 1.50
0.06 0.09 0.50.40 LF3 M03D LF3 M03E 1.50
0.1
0.18
0.400.63 LF3 M04D LF3 M04E 1.50
0.09
0.1
0.5
0.631 LF3 M05D LF3 M05E 1.50

0.18
0.5
0.37
0.55
11.6 LF3 M06D LF3 M06E 1.300
0.37 0.75 1.6.5 LF3 M07D LF3 M07E 1.300
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
.54 LF3 M08D LF3 M08E 1.300
1.1 . 46.3 LF3 M10D LF3 M10E 1.300
1.5
3
4
610 LF3 M14D LF3 M14E 1.300
.
3
5.5
914 LF3 M16D LF3 M16E 1.300

Reversing starters with pushbutton control
Without LF4 M00D (2) LF4 M00E (2) 1.000
0.06 0.160.5 LF4 M02D LF4 M02E 1.500
0.06 0.09 0.50.40 LF4 M03D LF4 M03E 1.500
0.1
0.18
0.400.63 LF4 M04D LF4 M04E 1.500
0.09
0.1
0.5
0.631 LF4 M05D LF4 M05E 1.500

0.18
0.5
0.37
0.55
11.6 LF4 M06D LF4 M06E 1.550
0.37 0.75 1.6.5 LF4 M07D LF4 M07E 1.550
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
.54 LF4 M08D LF4 M08E 1.550
1.1 . 46.3 LF4 M10D LF4 M10E 1.550
1.5
3
4
610 LF4 M14D LF4 M14E 1.550
.
3
5.5
914 LF4 M16D LF4 M16D 1.550

Description For mounting on Suffx to be added to the
starter reference (3)
With HARTING connectors (4) Insulated enclosure A74
With local/AS-Interface control Insulated enclosure A79
(1) Avoid allowing the material to come into contact with strong bases (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic
hydrocarbons).
(2)SuppliedwithoutGV2MEmotorcircuit-breaker.
(3) Example: LF3 M02DA79A74.
(4)Connectorstobefttedtocables(tobeorderedseparately,seepage2/95).
LF3 M and LF4 M
LF3 MppD
D
F
5
6
3
5
9
LF3 MppDA79
D
F
5
6
3
6
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/86
Insulated enclosures LF3 and LF4
Power extension (daisy-chaining) Terminal
Metal enclosures LF3 and LF4
LA9 LFF
LA9 LFC
LA9 LFM
LA9 LFF
LA9 LFC
LA9 LFM
LA9 LFF
LA9 LFT
LA9 LFM
LA9 LFF
LA9 LFT
LA9 LFM
LA9 LFFM40
LA9 LFMM
LA9 LFM
LA9 LFFM40
LA9 LFMM
LA9 LFM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/87
Accessories for insulated enclosures with variant A74
Presentation
In order to reduce setting-up times and to simplify maintenance, variant A74 LF
starters are ftted with Harting plug-in connectors. These starters are designed to
allow types of connection topology.
Connection
using tap links
This confguration avoids having to switch off the power
supply when replacing or adding one or more starters.
Although machine availability is increased, a larger
number of power connections is required: 4 per starter.
Connection
using power
extension
(daisy-
chaining)
The number of power connections per starter is halved,
but continuity of service is no longer assured if any of the
upstream starters are disconnected or removed. With
this type of installation, special precautions must be taken
because removal of a starter at the head of the power
supply line de-energises all the remaining starters on that
line. For safety reasons therefore, starters must not be
removed under load (prohibited by standard EN6004
above 3kW/400V).
The connection kits and accessories shown below have been designed to facilitate setting up
of power extension confgurations by the user.
Connection kit (depending on enclosure application)
Enclosure
application
Capacity Kit contents For
mounting on
Reference Weight
mm
2
kg
Power
extension
(daisy-
chaining)
3-pole
1.5 or .5
1 female connector
male connectors and
corresponding power
sockets (1)
Enclosures
LF3 and LF4
LA9 LFC 0.150
Terminal 3-pole
1.5 or .5
1 female connector
1 male connector
1 blanking plug and
corresponding power
sockets (1)
Enclosures
LF3 and LF4
LA9 LFT 0.110
Crimping contacts
Type Capacity
mm
2
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Male 1.5 100 LA9 LFM15 0.10
.5 100 LA9 LFM25 0.10
Female 1.5 100 LA9 LFF15 0.160
.5 100 LA9 LFF25 0.150
Accessories for metal enclosures with variant A74
Connection kits
For
connector
Kit contents For
mounting on
Reference Weight
kg
Input 1 metal cover
size 16 cable glands
1 blanking plug
1 female power socket (3P + earth)
4 female crimping contacts (2)
Metal
enclosures
LF3, LF4
LA9 LFFM40 0.60
Output
to motor
1 metal cover
1 size 16 cable gland
1 female power socket
(3P+ earth) (1)
Metal
enclosures
LF3, LF4
LA9 LFMM 0.060
Crimping contacts
Type Capacity Thermal
current
Voltage Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
mm
2
A V kg
Male 1.5 10 400 100 LA9 LFM15 0.10
.5 10 400 100 LA9 LFM25 0.10
(1)Crimpingcontactstobeorderedseparately.
(2)Forfexiblecable,4mm
2
maximum,Ith:16A,Us:400V.
LF LF LF LF
LF LF LF LF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/88
Dimensions
References:
page /84
Schemes:
pages /91 to /93
Non-reversing and reversing starters with rotary control knob
With cable glands With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74)
LFp Pppp LFp PpppA74
With cable glands
Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79)
With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74)
LFp PpppA79 LFp PpppA79A74
Knock-outs for cable gland
From above x Pg16 and x Pg13
From below x Pg16 (cable glands supplied)
(1)M12maleconnectorforconnectiontoAS-Interfaceandauxiliary24Vsupply.
(2)M12femaleconnectorforconnectiontosensor.
10
1
5
0
1
6
5
1
8
84
(1) (2)
4x5,3
175 175 47
10
1
5
0
1
6
5
1
8
84
(1) (2)
4x5,3
175 175 47
10
1
5
0
1
6
5
1
8
84
(1) (2)
4x5,3
175 175 47
10
1
5
0
1
6
5
1
8
84
(1) (2)
4x5,3
175 175 47
LF3 P and LF4 P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/89
References:
page /85
Schemes :
pages /91 to /93
Non-reversing and reversing starters with pushbutton control
LFp Mppp LFp MpppA74
With cable glands
LFp MpppA79 LFp MpppA79A74
Knock-outs for cable gland
From above x Pg16 and x Pg13
From below x Pg16 (cable glands supplied)
(1)M12maleconnectorforconnectiontoAS-Interfaceandauxiliary24Vsupply.
10
1
5
0
1
6
5
3
0
84
(1) (2)
4x5,3
175 140
10
1
5
0
1
6
5
3
0
84
(1) (2)
4x5,3
175 140 140
10
1
5
0
1
6
5
1
8
84
(1) (2)
4x5,3
175 47 140
10
1
5
0
1
6
5
1
8
84
(1) (2)
4x5,3
175 47
165
10
1
5
0
1
6
5
1
8
84
(1) (2)
4x5,3
175 47 165
10
1
5
0
1
6
5
1
8
84
(1) (2)
4x5,3
175 47
LF3 M and LF4 M
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/90
References:
pages /84 and /85
Schemes:
pages /91 to /93
Non-reversing and reversing starters with rotary control knob
LFp MPppp LFp MPpppA74
With cable glands
LFp MPpppA79 LFp MPpppA79A74
Knock-outs for cable
gland
Standard enclosure Enclosure with variant
A74
From above 3 x Pg16 1 x Pg16
From below x Pg16 1 x Pg16
(1) M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface and auxiliary 24 V
supply.
8
,
5
7
13
(1) (2)
179
125
1
9
9
2
3
0
2
4
5
175
219
8
,
5
7
13
(1) (2)
179
125
1
9
9
2
3
0
2
4
5
175
219 179
125
(1) (2)
1
9
9
2
3
0
2
4
5
175
219 60
8
,
5
7
13
179
125
(1) (2)
1
9
9
2
3
0
2
4
5
175
219 60
8
,
5
7
13
8
,
5
7
13
(1) (2)
1
9
9
2
3
0
2
4
5
175
219 179
125
8
,
5
7
13
(1) (2)
1
9
9
2
3
0
2
4
5
175
219 179
125
179
125
(1) (2)
1
9
9
8
,
5
2
3
0
2
4
5
175
7
13
219 60 179
125
(1) (2)
1
9
9
8
,
5
2
3
0
2
4
5
175
7
13
219 60
LF3 MP and LF4 MP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/91
Schemes
Sensor
GV
Flt.
GV
ready
References :
pages /84 and /85
Dimensions :
pages /88 to /90
Non-reversing starters LF3
Reversing starters LF4
I1
1
I 0 II
-KM1
-KM1 -KM
-KA1
PR3 4 1 3
PR5 4
NO
-KO3
J
COM
O3
50 VAC / 5 A
NC
1 3
5
-KA1
-KO3
-KM
3
1 3
I I3
J1A J1B
I4 +S-S Q1
Output Input
AS Interface
Q Q3 A
u
x
+
A
u
x
-
A
S
i
+
A
S
i
-
+
4

V
0

V
A
S
i
+
A
S
i
-
GV
ready
GV
Flt.
Sensor
Sensor 1
GV
ready
A (bus) M (local)
B
l
a
c
k
W
h
i
t
e
B
r
o
w
n
B
l
u
e
Insulated enclosure with variant A79 or metal enclosure with variant A79
I1
1
KM
-KM1
-KA1
PR3 4 1 3
PR5 4
NO
-KO3
J
COM
O3
50 VAC / 5 A
NC
1 3
5
-KA1
-KO3
3
1 3
I I3
J1A J1B
I4 +S-S Q1
Output Input
AS Interface
Q Q3 A
u
x
+
A
u
x
-
A
S
i
+
A
S
i
-
+
4

V
0

V
A
S
i
+
A
S
i
-
B
l
a
c
k
W
h
i
t
e
A (bus) M (local)
GV
ready
B
l
u
e
B
r
o
w
n
Sensor 1
I1
1
KM
-KM1
-KA1
PR3 4 1 3
PR5 4
NO
-KO3
J
COM
O3
50 VAC / 5 A
NC
1 3
5
-KA1
-KO3
3
1 3
I I3
J1A J1B
I4 +S-S Q1
Output Input
AS Interface
Q Q3 A
u
x
+
A
u
x
-
A
S
i
+
A
S
i
-
+
4

V
0

V
A
S
i
+
A
S
i
-
B
l
a
c
k
W
h
i
t
e
A (bus) M (local)
GV
ready
B
l
u
e
B
r
o
w
n
Sensor 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/9
Recommended application
schemes
Non-reversing and reversing starters with 2 sensors, an auxiliary supply and a control relay
AS-Interface line AS-Interface line
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/93
Recommended
application schemes
(continued)
Connections on enclosure
M12 male connector for AS-Interface and c 24 V auxiliary supply
Sensor M12 female connector
Limit switch 2-wire PNP type sensor 3-wire PNP type sensor
3 4
2 1
24 V AS-i
AS-i + 0 V
3 4
2 1
24 V AS-i
AS-i + 0 V
4 3
1 2
5
Sensor 1
Sensor
4 3
1 2
5
Sensor 1
Sensor
4 3
1 2
+
+
5
Sensor 1
Sensor
4 3
1 2
+
+
5
Sensor 1
Sensor
+
+
4 3
1 2
5
Sensor 1
Sensor
+
+
4 3
1 2
5
Sensor 1
Sensor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/94
Functions :
pages /76 to /79
Characteristics:
pages /80 to /83
References:
pages /84 and /85
pages /88 to /93
Starters in enclosures with cable glands
1 Junction box
2 Incoming power
3 Power extension
4 FTX CY1212: splitter block
5 XZ CR1511040Ap: extension
6 XZ CB1pp02: fat cable (black) for auxiliary supply
7 XZ CG01403D: tap link for two cables
8 XZ CB1pp01: fat cable (yellow) for AS-Interface
M
1
2
5
3
7
8
6
4

M
1
2
5
3
7
8
6
4

Connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/95
Functions :
pages /76 to /79
Characteristics:
pages /80 to /83
References:
pages /84 and /85
pages /88 to /93
Starters in insulated enclosures with HARTING type plug-in power connectors
M
3
4
1
2
5
7
8
6
1 Incoming power
2 Power extension
3 Control relay (example: illuminated indicator bank
6 XZ CB1pp02: fat cable (black) for auxiliary supply
8 XZ CB1pp01: fat cable (yellow) for AS-Interface
Confguration of HARTING connectors to be ftted on cables (to
be ordered separately)
Number and HARTING reference
for incoming power
female connector
for power extension
and motor connection
male connectors
Straight cover 1 x 09-20-003-0420 x 09-20-003-0420
Male insert
6-way, 400 V
x 09-12-005-3101
Female insert
6-way, 400 V
1 x 09-12-005-3001
Male contacts
.5 mm
8 x 09-33-000-6102
Female contacts
.5 mm
3 x 09-33-000-6202
Plug for the last socket 1 x 09-20-003-5408
Starters in metal enclosures with HARTING type plug-in power connectors
M
2
3
1
4
6
7
5
1 Incoming power
2 Control relay (example: illuminated indicator bank
5 XZ CB1pp02p: fat cable (black) for auxiliary supply
7 XZ CB1pp01p: fat cable (yellow) for AS-Interface
Confguration of HARTING connectors to be ftted on cables (to
be ordered separately)
Number and HARTING reference
for incoming power
female connector
for power extension
and motor connection
male connectors
Straight cover 1 x 09-30-006-442 (1)
1 x 09-30-006-443 (2)
x 09-20-003-1440
Male insert
6-way, 400 V
x 09-12-005-3101
Female insert
6-way, 400 V
1 x 09-33-006-2702
Male contacts
.5 mm
5 x 09-33-000-6102
Female contacts
.5 mm
3 x 09-33-000-6207
(1)PG21.
(2)PG29.
Connections (continued)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/96
DOL starters 2
LA9 Z modules for AS-Interface cabling system
Presentation
AS-Interface modules LA9 Z32810 and LA9 Z32811 allow motor starters to be
monitored and controlled by AS-Interface. These products are in addition to the
AS-Interface enclosed starter range, LF1 and LF, LF7 and LF8.
The module sizes offered are: inputs/1 output or 4 inputs/ outputs.
These products can be mounted in two ways:
on 5 rail,
on LA9 Zppp adapters for use with busbar systems.
Inputs/outputs are connected to a built-in, fexible terminal type connector, so
reducing installation time.
The AS-Interface line is connected to the module by the yellow connector.
The external c 4 V supply to the module outputs is connected to the black
connector. With this supply method, it is possible to make the output states subject
to external safety conditions (Emergency stop, safety overtravel, etc.).
b
b
AS-I
PWR
AS-I
PWR
5
6
5
1
8
8
5
6
5
1
8
9
AS-I
PWR
AS-I
PWR
5
6
5
1
8
8
5
6
5
1
8
9
Characteristics:
page /98
References:
page /99
Dimensions, scheme :
pages /100 and /101
Characteristics:
page /98
References:
page /99
pages /100 and /101
Characteristics:
page /98
References:
page /99
pages /100 and /101
Characteristics:
page /98
References:
page /99
pages /100 and /101
Presentation 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/97
DOL starters 2

Fields of application
The various module sizes allow control of:
non-reversing starters,
reversing starters,
-speed starters for motors with separate windings.
The outputs, supplied by the separate auxiliary voltage, can simultaneously switch a
current of 0.5 A at c 4 V and can therefore switch the following contactors:
LP1, LP4 K06 to K1,
LC1 D09 to D3.
Composition
AS-Interface module
1 AS-Interface green/red LED indicator:
red: no communication with the Master. The outputs are switched off,
green: communication OK, outputs OK,
red/yellow fashing: module has no address (assign an address between 1 and 31),
off: no power supply to AS-Interface.
2 Green PWR LED:
LED on: auxiliary power supply ON,
LED off: auxiliary power supply OFF.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
AS-I
PW
R
1
2
5
6
5
1
9
0
AS-I
PW
R
1
2
5
6
5
1
9
0
Characteristics:
page /98
References:
page /99
pages /100 and /101
Characteristics:
page /98
References:
page /99
pages /100 and /101
Characteristics:
page /98
References:
page /99
pages /100 and /101
Characteristics:
page /98
References:
page /99
pages /100 and /101
Presentation (continued) 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/98
DOL starters 2

General system environment
Interface type LA9 Z32810 LA9 Z32811
Product certifcations AS-Interface N 18701 AS-Interface N 18601
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60539 IP 0
around the device
Storage, conforming to IEC 60539 C - 40+ 85
Operation C - 10+ 55
Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 60695--1 C 960
Resistance to external
mechanical impact
1/ sine wave, 11ms
15 gn
Vibration resistance 5150 Hz
conforming to 60068--6
gn
Immunity to non-dissipating
shockwave (Uimp)
Conforming to IEC 60439-1 kV .5: AS-Interface, 4 V and on inputs/outputs
Immunity to
EN 61000-4-
kV 8: in open air (level 3)
4: in indirect mode (level )
Immunity to
EN 61000-4-4 level 4
kV : AS-Interface, 4 V and on inputs/outputs
Immunity to
dissipated shock wave
EN 61000-4-5
kV : AS-Interface, 4 V and on inputs/outputs
ENV 50 141
V/m 10
ENV 50 140 and ENV 50 04
(GSM)
V/m 10
Radio-conducted and
radio-radiated rejection
ENV 55 011/CISPR (G1) Class A
AS-Interface supply V 9.5-31.6
Cabling csa, AS-Interface Flexible cable mm
2
x 0.50.75
Cabling csa, 24 V Flexible cable mm
2
x 0.50.75
Cabling csa, input/output Flexible cage terminal
and fexible cable
mm
2
0.08.5; AWG81
Input current mA 7
Coincidence of inputs 100 %
Maximum length of wires to switching components m 0.4
Maximum current of outputs c 13/14, (4 V) A 0.5
Thermal current Ith A
Coincidence of outputs 100 %
Short-circuit protection By fywheel diode Yes
Outputs switched off
in event of interference
on the AS-Interface line
Watchdog Yes
AS-Interface profle 3 F 7 F
Number of I/O inputs/1 output 4 inputs/ outputs
Current consumption On AS-Interface On/OFF mA 81 81
Data bits Status 0 1 0 1
Command D0 (O) Out 1 Off On Off On
D1 (O) Out Not used Off On
D (O) Out 3 Not used
D3 (O) Out 4 Not used
Status D0 (I) In 1 Absent Present Absent Present
D1 (I) In Absent Present Absent Present
D (I) In 3 Not used Absent Present
D3 (I) In 4 Not used Absent Present
Parameters P0P3 Not used
Presentation :
pages /96 and /97
References :
page /99
Dimensions, schemes :
pages /100 and /101
Presentation :
pages /96 and /97
References :
page /99
pages /100 and /101
Presentation :
pages /96 and /97
References :
page /99
pages /100 and /101
Presentation :
pages /96 and /97
References :
page /99
pages /100 and /101
Characteristics 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/99
DOL starters 2

AS-Interface modules (1) (2)
No of
channels
Number
of inputs
Number
of outputs
Output
voltage
Current
per output
Reference Weight
V A kg
3 1 c 4 0.5 LA9 Z32810 0.070
6 4 c 4 0.5 LA9 Z32811 0.070
Accessories
Description Busbar
system
Width Reference Weight
mm mm kg
Modules without
electrical connection,
for use with all
LA9 Zpp adapters
40 or 60 45 LA9 Z32744 0.044
54 LA9 Z32745 0.051
Module with
PE + N polarity and
5-way connector
40 45 LA9 Z32740 0.091
54 LA9 Z32741 0.098
60 45 LA9 Z32742 0.085
54 LA9 Z32743 0.09
Replacement connectors and adapter cable
Description Colour Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Insulation Displacement
Connector (IDC) for AS-Interface
Yellow 5 LA9 Z32825 0.100
Insulation Displacement
Connector (IDC)
for auxiliary supply
Black 5 LA9 Z32826 0.100
Description Cable length Reference Weight
m kg
Adapter cable for connection to
addressing terminal XZ MC11
0.5 XZ MG12 0.070
(1)UsersManualtobeorderedseparately,pleaseconsultyourRegionalSalesOffce.
(2) Supplied with connectors LA9 Z32825 and LA9 Z32826.

Presentation :
pages /96 and /97
Characteristics :
page /98
pages /100 and /101
Presentation :
pages /96 and /97
Characteristics :
page /98
pages /100 and /101
Presentation :
pages /96 and /97
Characteristics :
page /98
pages /100 and /101
Presentation :
pages /96 and /97
Characteristics :
page /98
pages /100 and /101
References 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/100
DOL starters 2

Dimensions
LA9 Z3281p
Mounting on modules
LA9 Z32742, LA9 Z32743 LA9 Z32740, LA9 Z32741
60 mm busbar system 40 mm busbar system
Common front face view
LA9 a
Z32740, Z32742 45
Z32741, Z32743 54
LA9 Z32745 LA9 Z32744
40 or 60 mm busbar system
Common front face view
LA9 a
Z32745 54
Z32744 45
86 45
6
5 6
9
,
5
86 45
6
5 6
9
,
5
135,5
8
0
1
2
0
135,5
8
0
1
2
0
125,5
8
0
4
0
1
1
5
125,5
8
0
4
0
1
1
5
a
30
a
30
135,5
8
0
135,5
8
0
125,5
8
0
4
0
125,5
8
0
4
0
aa
Presentation :
pages /96 and /97
Characteristics :
page /98
References :
page /99
Presentation :
pages /96 and /97
Characteristics :
page /98
References :
page /99
Presentation :
pages /96 and /97
Characteristics :
page /98
References :
page /99
Presentation :
pages /96 and /97
Characteristics :
page /98
References :
page /99
Dimensions,
mounting 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/101
DOL starters 2

Schemes
DOL starter, non-reversing
1 motor 2 motors
DOL starter, reversing
KM
I
N
1

X
3
,

1
I
N

X
3
,

I
N

+

X
3
,

3
M

X
4
,

4
Q
LA9 Z3810
KM
O
U
T
1

X
4
,

Q
M
U W V
/
T
1
6
/
T
3
4
/
T
1
/
L
1
5
/
L
3
3
/
L
KM
Q
KM
I
N
1

X
3
,

1
I
N

X
3
,

I
N

+

X
3
,

3
M

X
4
,

4
Q
LA9 Z3810
KM
O
U
T
1

X
4
,

Q
M
U W V
/
T
1
6
/
T
3
4
/
T
1
/
L
1
5
/
L
3
3
/
L
KM
Q
Q1
M1
U W V
/
T
1
6
/
T
3
4
/
T
1
/
L
1
5
/
L
3
3
/
L
KM1
Q
M
U W V
/
T
1
6
/
T
3
4
/
T
1
/
L
1
5
/
L
3
3
/
L
KM
KM Q1 Q
I
N
1

X
3
,

1
I
N

X
3
,

I
N
3

X
3
,

3
I
N
4

X
3
,

4
LA9 Z3811
KM1
O
U
T

X
3
,

8
M

X
3
,

6
O
U
T
1

X
3
,

7
I
N

+

X
3
,

5
KM1
KM
Q1 Q
Q1
M1
U W V
/
T
1
6
/
T
3
4
/
T
1
/
L
1
5
/
L
3
3
/
L
KM1
Q
M
U W V
/
T
1
6
/
T
3
4
/
T
1
/
L
1
5
/
L
3
3
/
L
KM
KM Q1 Q
I
N
1

X
3
,

1
I
N

X
3
,

I
N
3

X
3
,

3
I
N
4

X
3
,

4
LA9 Z3811
KM1
O
U
T

X
3
,

8
M

X
3
,

6
O
U
T
1

X
3
,

7
I
N

+

X
3
,

5
KM1
KM
Q1 Q
KM Q
I
N
1

X
3
,

1
I
N

X
3
,

I
N
3

X
3
,

3
I
N
4

X
3
,

4
LA9 Z3811
KM1
O
U
T

X
3
,

8
M

X
3
,

6
O
U
T
1

X
3
,

7
I
N

+

X
3
,

5
Q
M
U W V
/
T
1
6
/
T
3
4
/
T
1
/
L
1
5
/
L
3
3
/
L
KM1 KM
KM
KM1
KM
KM1 Q
KM Q
I
N
1

X
3
,

1
I
N

X
3
,

I
N
3

X
3
,

3
I
N
4

X
3
,

4
LA9 Z3811
KM1
O
U
T

X
3
,

8
M

X
3
,

6
O
U
T
1

X
3
,

7
I
N

+

X
3
,

5
Q
M
U W V
/
T
1
6
/
T
3
4
/
T
1
/
L
1
5
/
L
3
3
/
L
KM1 KM
KM
KM1
KM
KM1 Q
Presentation :
pages /96 and /97
Characteristics :
page /98
References :
page /99
Presentation :
pages /96 and /97
Characteristics :
page /98
References :
page /99
Presentation :
pages /96 and /97
Characteristics :
page /98
References :
page /99
Presentation :
pages /96 and /97
Characteristics :
page /98
References :
page /99
Schemes 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3/1

Contents
3-TeSysprotectioncomponents:
motorcircuit-breakers
TeSys GV thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers
Presentation page3/6
Characteristics page 3/8
References page 3/46
Dimensions,mounting page 3/70
Schemes page 3/82
TeSys GV magnetic motor circuit-breakers
Dimensions,mounting page 3/84
Schemes page 3/89
TeSys GB2 thermal-magnetic circuit breakers for
the protection of control circuits, solenoid and
transformers
Presentation page 3/92
Dimensions page 3/97
Schemes page 3/97
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3/
3
Selection guide
Protection of motors with high current peak
on starting

0In
75110kW Upto11kW
10A 053A
35and36kA 70kA 15100kA
With With
GV7 RE GV7 RS GV2 RT
3/49 3/50and3/51
Applications Protection of motors against short-circuits and overloads

Tripping threshold on short-circuit 13In
Standard motor power ratings in AC-3, 415 V Upto15kW Upto30kW 37kW
Operational current at 415 V 013A 965A 5680A
Breaking capacity at 415 V (Icu) to IEC 60947-2 10100kA 35100kA 50100kA 15kA
Door interlock mechanism Without With With Without
Circuit-breaker type GV2 ME GV2 P GV3 P GV3 ME80
Pages 3/47and3/48 3/49 3/49 3/49
TeSys protection components
Thermal-magneticmotorcircuit-breakers
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3/3
3
Protection of motors with high current peak
on starting

0In
75110kW Upto11kW
10A 053A
35and36kA 70kA 15100kA
With With
GV7 RE GV7 RS GV2 RT
3/49 3/50and3/51
Applications Protection of motors against short-circuits and overloads

Standard motor power ratings in AC-3, 415 V Upto15kW Upto30kW 37kW
Operational current at 415 V 013A 965A 5680A
Breaking capacity at 415 V (Icu) to IEC 60947-2 10100kA 35100kA 50100kA 15kA
Door interlock mechanism Without With With Without
Pages 3/47and3/48 3/49 3/49 3/49
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3/4
3

614In 813In 6315In
Upto30kW 37kW 03750kW
565A 80A 15500A
50100kA 35kA 57and150kA 357150kA 457150kA
With With With
GV3 L GK3 EF80 NS 80 NS 100 to
NS 250
NS 400 and
NS 630
3/53 3/53 PleaseconsulttheSchneiderElectriccatalogue-LowVoltageDistribution
Applications Protection of motors

Magnetic circuit-breakers provide short-circuit protection. They must be combined with
thermal overload relays to provide motor overload protection.

Standard motor power ratings in AC-3, 415 V Upto15kW
Operational current at 415 V 043A
Breaking capacity at 415 V (Icu) to IEC 60947-2 10100kA 35100kA
Door interlock mechanism With
Circuit-breaker type GV2 LE GV2 L
Pages 3/5 3/53
Selection guide
Magneticmotorcircuit-breakers
3/5
3

614In 813In 6315In
Upto30kW 37kW 03750kW
565A 80A 15500A
50100kA 35kA 57and150kA 357150kA 457150kA
With With With
GV3 L GK3 EF80 NS 80 NS 100 to
NS 250
NS 400 and
NS 630
3/53 3/53 PleaseconsulttheSchneiderElectriccatalogue-LowVoltageDistribution
Applications Protection of motors

Magnetic circuit-breakers provide short-circuit protection. They must be combined with
thermal overload relays to provide motor overload protection.

Standard motor power ratings in AC-3, 415 V Upto15kW
Operational current at 415 V 043A
Breaking capacity at 415 V (Icu) to IEC 60947-2 10100kA 35100kA
Door interlock mechanism With
Pages 3/5 3/53
3/6
3
Presentation
Presentation
GVME,GVP,GV3ME,GV3PandGV7Rmotorcircuit-breakersare3-pole
thermal-magneticcircuit-breakersspecifcally designed for the control and
protection of motors,conformingtostandardsIEC60947-andIEC60947-4-1
Connection
GV2
GVMEandGVPcircuit-breakersaredesignedforconnectionbyscrewclamp
terminals
Circuit-breakerGVMEcanbesuppliedwithlugsorspringterminalconnections
Springterminalconnectionsensuresecure,permanentanddurableclampingthatis
resistanttoharshenvironments,vibrationandimpactandareevenmoreeffective
whenconductorswithoutcableendsareusedEachconnectioncantaketwo
independentconductors
GV3
GV3circuit-breakersfeatureconnectionbyBTRscrews(hexagonsockethead),
tightenedusingan4Allenkey
ThistypeofconnectionusestheEverLinksystemwithcreepcompensation(1)
(SchneiderElectricpatent)
Thistechniquemakesitpossibletoachieveaccurateanddurabletighteningtorque,
inordertoavoidcablecreep
GV3circuit-breakersarealsoavailablewithconnectionbylugsThistypeof
connectionmeetstherequirementsofcertainAsianmarketsandissuitablefor
applicationssubjecttostrongvibration,suchasrailwaytransport
GV7
GV7circuit-breakers:withconnectionbyscrewclampterminals(forbarsandlugs)
andbyclip-onconnectors
Operation
Controlismanualandlocalwhenthemotorcircuit-breakerisusedonitsown
Controlisautomaticandremotewhenitisassociatedwithacontactor
GV2 ME and GV3 ME80

Pushbuttoncontrol
EnergisationiscontrolledmanuallybyoperatingtheStartbuttonI1
De-energisationiscontrolledmanuallybyoperatingtheStopbuttonO2,or
automaticallybythethermal-magneticprotectionelementsorbyavoltagetrip
attachment
GV2 P, GV3 P and GV7 R

Controlbyrotaryknob:forGVPandGV3P
Controlbyrockerlever:forGV7R
b
b
EnergisationiscontrolledmanuallybymovingtheknoborrockerlevertopositionI1
De-energisationiscontrolledmanuallybymovingtheknoborrockerlevertopositionO2
De-energisationduetoafaultautomaticallyplacestheknoborrockerleverinthe
Tripposition3
Re-energisationispossibleonlyafterhavingreturnedtheknoborrockerleverto
positionO
(1) Creep: normal crushing phenomenon of copper conductors, that is accentuated over time.
GV2 ME
with screw clamp
terminals
5
6
1
3
4
1
2
4
GV2 ME
with screw clamp
terminals
5
6
1
3
4
1
2
4
GV2 ME
with spring terminals
connections
5
6
1
3
5
1
2
4
GV2 ME
connections
5
6
1
3
5
1
2
4
GV2 P
5
6
1
3
7
1
3
4
2
GV2 P
5
6
1
3
7
1
3
4
2
GV3 P
5
6
1
3
6
1
3
2
4
GV3 P
5
6
1
3
6
1
3
2
4
GV7 R
5
6
1
3
8
1
3
2
GV7 R
5
6
1
3
8
1
3
2
GV,GV3andGV7
Characteristics:
pages3/8to3/3
References:
pages3/47to3/51
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/75
Schemes:
pages3/76and3/77
Characteristics:
pages3/8to3/3
References:
pages3/47to3/51
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/75
Schemes:
pages3/76and3/77
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3/7
3
Protection of motors and personnel
Motorprotectionisprovidedbythethermal-magneticprotectionelements
incorporatedinthemotorcircuit-breaker
Themagneticelements(short-circuitprotection)haveanon-adjustabletripping
threshold,whichisequalto13timesthemaximumsettingcurrentofthethermal
trips
Thethermalelements(overloadprotection)includeautomaticcompensationfor
ambienttemperaturevariations
Theratedoperationalcurrentofthemotorisdisplayedbymeansofagraduatedknob4
Personnel protection is also provided. All live parts are protected against direct fnger
contactfromthefrontpanel
Theadditionofanundervoltagetripallowsthecircuit-breakertobede-energisedin
theeventofanundervoltageconditionTheuseristhereforeprotectedagainst
suddenstartingofthemachinewhennormalvoltageisrestored,sincetheStart
buttonIhastobepressedtorestartthemotor
Withtheadditionofashunttrip,de-energisationoftheunitcanberemotely
controlled
Theoperatorsonbothopen-mountedandenclosedmotorcircuit-breakerscanbe
lockedintheStoppositionObyupto4padlocks
Becausetheyaresuitableforisolation,thesecircuit-breakers,intheopenposition,
provideanadequateisolationdistanceandindicatetheactualpositionofthemoving
contactsbythepositionoftheoperators
Special features
These motor circuit-breakers are easily installed in any confguration thanks to their
universal fxing arrangement: screw fxing or clip-on mounting on symmetrical,
asymmetricalorcombinationrails

GV,GV3andGV7
Characteristics:
pages3/8to3/3
References:
pages3/47to3/51
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/75
Schemes:
pages3/76and3/77
Characteristics:
pages3/8to3/3
References:
pages3/47to3/51
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/75
Schemes:
pages3/76and3/77
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3/8
3
Characteristics
Environment
Circuit-breaker type GV2 ME GV2 P GV3 P GV3 ME80 GV7 R
Conforming to standards IEC60947-1,60947-,
60947-4-1,
EN6004,UL508,
CSACn14-05,
NFC63-650,63-10,79-130,
VDE0113,0660
IEC/EN
60947-1,
60947-,
60947-4-1,
UL508typeE,
CSAC
n14-05typeE
IEC/EN,NF
EN,BSEN,
DINEN60947-,
60947-4-1
IEC60947-1,
60947-,
60947-4-1,
EN60947-1,
60947-,
EN60947-4-1,
NFC63-650,
NFC63-10,
79-130,
VDE0113,
0660
Product certifcations UL,CSA,CCC,
CEBEC,
GOST,TSE,
BV,GL,LROS,
DNV,PTB,
EZU,SETI,
RINA,ATEX
UL(1),CSA,
PTB,EZU,
GOST,TSE,
DNV,LROS,
GL,BV,RINA,
CCC,ATEX
UL,CSA,
CCC,GOST,
ATEX,BV,
GL,DNV,RINA,
LROS(pending)
UL,CSA,
LROS
UL,DNV,
CCC
Protective treatment TH TH TC TC
Degree of protection Conformingto
IEC6059
Openmounted IP0 IP0 IP0 IP405with
terminal
shrouds
Inenclosure GV2 Mp01:
IP41
GV2 Mp02:
IP55
GV3 PC01and
GV3 PC02:IP55
GV3 CE01:
IP55

Shock resistance ConformingtoIEC60068--7 30gn-11ms On:15gn-11ms
Off:30gn-11ms
gn-0ms 15gn-11ms
Vibration resistance ConformingtoIEC60068--6 5gn(5150Hz) 4gn
(5300Hz)
5gn
(05Hz)
5gn(5Hz)
Ambient air temperature Storage C -40+80 -40+80 -40+80 -40+80 -55+95
Operation Openmounted C -0+60 -0+60 -0+60(2) -0+60 -5+70
Inenclosure C -0+40 -0+40 -0+40 -0+40
Temperature compensation Openmounted C -0+60 -0+60 -0+60 -0+60 -5+55(3)
Inenclosure C -0+40 -0+40 -0+40 -0+40
Flame resistance ConformingtoIEC60695--1 C 960 960 960 960
Maximum operating altitude m 000 3000 3000 000
Suitable for isolation ConformingtoIEC60947-17-1-6 Yes Yes Yes
Resistance to mechanical impact J 05 05 10 05 05
IK04 IK09
(inenclosure)

Sensitivity to phase failure Yes,conformingtoIEC60947-4-17--1-5-
Technical characteristics
Circuit-breaker type GV2 ME GV2 P GV2 RT GV3 P GV3
ME80
GV7
Rp20...
Rp100
GV7
Rp150
GV7
Rp220
Utilisation category ConformingtoIEC60947- A A A A
ConformingtoIEC60947-4-1 AC-3 AC-3 AC-3 AC-3
Rated operational voltage
(Ue)
ConformingtoIEC60947- V 690 690 690 690
Rated insulation voltage
(Ui)
ConformingtoIEC60947- V 690 690 690 750
Rated voltage ConformingtoCSAC-n14,
UL508
V 600 600 600
(B600)
600
Rated operational
frequency
ConformingtoIEC60947-4-1
UL,CSA
Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
voltage (Uimp)
ConformingtoIEC60947- kV 6 6 6 8
Total power dissipated per pole W 5 8 8 5 87 145
(CO:Close,Open)
C.O. 100000 50000 30000 50000 40000 0000
forAC-3duty
440VIn/ C.O. 100000 30000 50000 40000 0000
440VIn C.O. 50000 30000 0000 10000
Duty class (maximumoperatingrate) C.O./h 5 5 5 5
Maximum conventional
rated thermal current (Ith)
ConformingtoIEC60947-4-1 A 016
3
016
3
040
3
13
65
80 1
100
150 0
Rated duty ConformingtoIEC60947-4-1 Continuousduty
(1) UL 508 type E for GV2 PppH7
(2) Leave a space of 9 mm between 2 circuit-breakers: either an empty space, or side mounting add-
on contact blocks. Side by side mounting is possible up to 40 C.
(3)Foroperationupto70C,pleaseconsultyourRegionalSalesOffce.
References:
pages3/47to3/51
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/77
Schemes:
pages3/78and3/79
References:
pages3/47to3/51
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/77
Schemes:
pages3/78and3/79
3/9
3
Mounting characteristics
Operating position
Withoutderating,inrelationtonormalverticalmountingplane(1)

Connection characteristics
Connection to screw clamp terminals or spring terminals
Bare cables
Connection to screw clamp terminals
(2)
(Maxnumberof
conductorsxcsa)
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Solidcable mm
2
x1 x6 x1 x6 x1 1x5and
1x35
1x5 1x35
Flexiblecable
withoutcableend
mm
2
x15 x6 x15 x6 x1 1x5and
1x35
1x5 x16
Flexiblecable
withcableend
mm
2
x1 x4 x1 x4 x1 1x5and
1x35
1x5 x16
Tightening torque N.m 17 17 17 17 5 5:5mm
8:35mm
5 5
Connection to spring terminals
Number of conductors x c.s.a.
Solidcable mm
2
x1(3) x6
Flexiblecable
withoutcableend
mm
2
x15(3) x4
Connection by bars or lugs
Bars or lugs
Circuit-breaker type GV2 MEpp6 GV3 Ppp6 GV7
Rp20...Rp100
GV7 Rp150 GV7 Rp220
Pitch Withoutspreaders mm 135 175 35 35 35
Withspreaders mm 45 45 45
Bars or cables with lugs e mm y6 y6 y6 y6 y6
L mm y95 y135 y5 y5 y5
L mm y95 y165
d mm y10 y10 y10 y10 y10
Screws M4 M6 M6 M8 M8
Tighteningtorque N.m 17 6 10 15 15
Bare cables(copperoraluminium)
with connectors
Height(h) mm 0 0 0
Csa mm
2
1595 1595 15185
Tighteningtorque N.m 15 15 15
(1)Whenmountingonaverticalrail,ftastoptopreventanyslippage.
(2) For motor circuit-breakers GV3 P: BTR hexagon socket head screws, EverLink
system.
Require use of an insulated Allen key, in compliance with local electrical wiring regulations.
(3) For cross-sections 1 to 1.5 mm
2
, the use of an LA9 D99 cable end reducer is recommended.
9
0
9
0
9
0
9
0
9
0
9
0
9
0
9
0
hh
e
d
L
d
L
L'
6
e
d
L
d
L
L'
6
References:
pages3/47to3/51
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/77
Schemes:
pages3/78and3/79
References:
pages3/47to3/51
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/77
Schemes:
pages3/78and3/79
3/10
3
Characteristics
Breaking capacity of GV2 ME and GV2 P
Circuit-breaker type GV2 ME GV2 P
01
to
06
07 08 10 14 16 20 21
&
22
32 01
to
06
07 08 10 14 16 20 21
&
22
32
Rating A 0.1
to
1.6
2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 23
&
25
32 0.1
to
1.6
2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 23
&
25
32
Breaking capacity
conformingtoIEC60947-
30/40V Icu kA
g g g g g g g
50 50
g g g g g g g g g
Ics%(1)
g g g g g g g
100 100
g g g g g g g g g
400/415V Icu kA
g g g g g
15 15 15 10
g g g g g g
50 50 50
Ics%(1)
g g g g g
50 50 40 50
g g g g g g
50 50 50
440V Icu kA
g g g
50 15 8 8 6 6
g g g g g
50 0 0 0
Ics%(1)
g g g
100 100 50 50 50 50
g g g g g
75 75 75 75
500V Icu kA
g g g
50 10 6 6 4 4
g g g g
50 4 10 10 10
Ics%(1)
g g g
100 100 75 75 75 75
g g g g
100 75 75 75 75
690V Icu kA
g
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
g
8 8 6 6 6 4 4 4
Ics%(1)
g
75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
g
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Associated fuses (if required)
if Isc > breaking capacity Icu
30/40V aM A
g
g g g g g g 80 80 g g g g g g g g g
gG A g g g g g g g 100 100 g g g g g g g g g
400/415V aM A g g g g g 63 63 80 80 g g g g g g 100 100 100
gG A g g g g g 80 80 100 100 g g g g g g 15 15 15
440V aM A g g g 50 50 50 50 63 63 g g g g g 50 63 80 80
gG A g g g 63 63 63 63 80 80 g g g g
g
63 80 100 100
500V aM A g g g 50 50 50 50 50 50 g g g g 50 50 50 50 50
gG A g g g 63 63 63 63 63 63 g g g g 63 63 63 63 63
690V aM A g 16 5 3 3 40 40 40 40 g 0 5 40 40 50 50 50 50
gG A g 0 3 40 40 50 50 50 50
g
5 3 50 50 63 63 63 63
g > 100 kA.
(1) As % of Icu.
GVMEandGVP
References:
pages3/47to3/51
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/7
Schemes:
page3/78
References:
pages3/47to3/51
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/7
Schemes:
page3/78
3/11
3
Breaking capacity of GV2 ME and GV2 P (used in association with current limiter GV1 L3)
Circuit-breaker type GV2 ME
01 to 06 07 08 10 14 16 20 21 22 32
Rating A 0.1 to
1.6
2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 23 25 32
Breaking capacity
30/40V Icu kA
g g g g g g g g g g
Ics%(1)
g g g g g g g g g g
400/415V Icu kA
g g g g g
100 100 100 100 100
Ics%(1)
g g g g g
50 50 40 40 40
440V Icu kA
g g g g g
50 0 0 0 0
Ics%(1)
g g g g g
75 75 75 75 75
500V Icu kA
g g g g
50 4 10 10 10 10
Ics%(1)
g g g g
100 100 75 75 75 75
Circuit-breaker type GV2 P
01 to 06 07 08 10 14 16 20 21 22 32
Rating A 0.1 to
1.6
2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 23 25 32
Breaking capacity
30/40V Icu kA
g g g g g g g g g g
Ics% (1)
g g g g g g g g g g
400/415V Icu kA
g g g g g g g g g g
Ics%(1)
g g g g g g g g g g
440V Icu kA
g g g g g
100 100 100 100 100
Ics%(1)
g g g g g
50 50 50 50 50
500V Icu kA
g g g g
100 100 100 100 100 100
Ics%(1)
g g g g
50 50 50 50 50 50
690V(3) Icu=Ics kA
g
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Circuit-breaker type GV2 ME
01 to 06 07 08 10 14 16 20 21 22 32
Rating A 0.1
to 1.6
2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 23 25 32
Cable protection against
thermal stress in the
event of short-circuit
(PVCinsulatedcoppercables)
Minimum
csa
protected
at40C
atIscmax
1mm
p
p p y10kA y6kA (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
15mm
p p p y0kA y10kA (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)

5mm
p p p p p p p p
p
(2)
46mm
p p p p p p p
p p p
g > 100 kA
p Cable c.s.a. protected
(1) As % of Icu
(2) Cable c.s.a. not protected
(3) With limiter LA9 LB920
GVMEandGVP
References:
pages3/47to3/51
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/7
Schemes:
page3/78
References:
pages3/47to3/51
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/7
Schemes:
page3/78
3/1
3
Characteristics
Breaking capacity of GV3 P and GV3 ME80
Motor circuit-breaker type GV3 P GV3 ME80
13 18 25 32 40 50 65
Rating A 13 18 25 32 40 50 65 80
Breaking capacity
30/40V Icu kA 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Ics%(1) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
400/415V Icu kA 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 15
Ics% (1) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 50
440V Icu kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 10
Ics%(1) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 60
500V Icu kA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4
Ics%(1) 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 100
690V Icu kA 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Ics% (1) 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 100
Associated fuses, if required
if lsc > breaking capacity Icu
30/40V aM A
g g g g g g g g
gG A
g g g g g g g g
415V aM A
g g g g
15 15 15 315
gG A
g g g g
160 160 160 400
440V aM A 63 80 15 15 15 15 15 315
gG A 80 100 160 160 160 160 160 400
500V aM A 63 63 63 63 80 80 80 00
gG A 80 80 80 80 100 100 100 50
690V aM A 50 50 50 50 63 63 63 00
gG A 63 63 63 63 80 80 80 50
g Fuse not required: breaking capacity Icn > Isc.
(1) As % of Icu.
GV3PandGV3ME80
References:
pages3/47to3/51
Dimensions:
pages3/73and3/74
Schemes:
pages3/78and3/79
References:
pages3/47to3/51
Dimensions:
pages3/73and3/74
Schemes:
pages3/78and3/79
3/13
3
Characteristics
Breaking capacity of GV7 R
Circuit-breaker type GV7
RE20RE100 RS20RS100 RE150 RS150 RE220 RS220
Rating A 1220 to 60100 90150 90150 132220 132220
Breaking capacity
30/40V lcu kA 85 100 85 100 85 100
Ics% (1) 100 100 100 100 100 100
400/415V Icu kA 36 70 35 70 35 70
Ics% (1) 100 100 100 100 100 100
440V Icu kA 36 65 35 65 35 65
Ics%(1) 100 100 100 100 100 100
500V Icu kA 18 50 30 50 30 50
Ics%(1) 100 100 100 100 100 100
690V Icu kA 8 10 8 10 8 10
Ics%(1) 100 100 100 100 100 100
thermal stress in the
event of short-circuit
Minimum
csa
protected
at40C
atIscmax
4mm
y6kA y6kA (2) (2) (2) (2)

6mm
p
y5kA (2) (2) (2) (2)
1050mm
p p p p p p
(1) As % of Icu.
p Cable c.s.a. protected.
(2) Cable c.s.a. not protected.
GV7R
References:
pages3/47to3/51
Dimensions:
pages3/73and3/74
Schemes:
pages3/78and3/79
References:
pages3/47to3/51
Dimensions:
pages3/73and3/74
Schemes:
pages3/78and3/79
3/14
3
Characteristics
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC60947-1,60947-,EN6004,NFC63-650,NFC63-10,79-130,
VDE0113,0660
Product certifcations CSA,CCC CSA,CCC,BV,DNV,GL,LROS,RINA
Protective treatment TH TH
Shock resistance ConformingtoIEC60068--7 30gn 30gn
Vibration resistance ConformingtoIEC60068--6 5gn(5to150Hz) 5gn(5to150Hz)
Ambient air temperature Storage C -40+80 -40+80
Operation C -0+60 -0+60
Flame resistance ConformingtoIEC60695--1 C 960 960
Maximum operating altitude m 000 000
Operating position
Connection
(Maxnumberof
conductorsxcsa)
Min. Max. Min. Max.
Solidcable mm
2
x1 x6 x1 x6
Flexiblecablewithoutcableend mm
2
x15 x6 x15 x6
Flexiblecablewithcableend mm
2
x1 x4 x1 x4
Tightening torque N.m 17 17
Suitable for isolation ConformingtoIEC60947-17-1-6 Yes Yes
Resistance to mechanical impact J 05 05
Utilisation category ConformingtoIEC60947- A A
ConformingtoIEC60947-4-1 AC-3 AC-3
Rated operational
voltage (Ue)
ConformingtoIEC60947- V 690 690
Rated insulation
voltage (Ui)
Rated operational frequency ConformingtoIEC60947- Hz 50/60 50/60
voltage (Uimp)
ConformingtoIEC60947- kV 6 6
Total power dissipated per pole W 18 18
(CO:Closing,Opening)
ForAC-3duty C.O. 100000 100000
Electrical durability for AC-3/415V duty
C.O. 100000 100000
Duty class
(maximumoperatingrate)
C.O./h 40 40
Rated duty ConformingtoIEC60947-4-1 Continuousduty Continuousduty

GVLEandGVL
References:
pages3/5and3/53
Dimensions:
pages3/83to3/84
Schemes:
page3/87
References:
pages3/5and3/53
Dimensions:
pages3/83to3/84
Schemes:
page3/87
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3/15
3
03
to
06
07 08 10 14 16 20 22 32 03
to
05
06
&
07
08 10 14 16 20 22 32
Rating A 0.4
to
1.6
2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 25 32 0.4
to
1
1.6
to
2.5
4 6.3 10 14 18 25 32
Breaking capacity
30/40V Icu kA
g g g g g g g
50 50
g g g g g g g
50 50
Ics%(1)
g g g g g g g
100 100
g g g g g g g
100 100
400/415V Icu kA
g g g g g
15 15 15 10
g g g g g
50 50 50 50
Ics%(1)
g g g g g
50 50 40 50
g g g g g
50 50 50 50
440V Icu kA
g g g
50 15 8 8 6 6
g g g g
0 0 0 0 0
Ics%(1)
g g g
100 100 50 50 50 50
g g g g
75 75 75 75 75
500V Icu kA
g g g
50 10 6 6 4 4
g g g g
10 10 10 10 10
Ics%(1)
g g g
100 100 75 75 75 75
g g g g
100 75 75 75 75
690V Icu kA
g
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
g
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Ics%(1)
g
75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
g
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
if Isc > breaking capacity Icu
amendment1
30/40V aM A
g g g g g g
g 80 80
g g g g g g
g 100 100
gG A
g g g g g g
g 100 100
g g g g g g g
15 15
400/415V aM A
g g g g
g 63 63 80 80
g g g g
g 80 100 100 100
gG A
g g g g
g 80 80 100 100
g g g g g
100 15 15 15
440V aM A
g g g
50 50 50 50 63 63
g g g g
50 63 80 80 80
gG A
g g g
63 63 63 63 80 80
g g g g
63 80 100 100 100
500V aM A
g g g
50 50 50 50 50 50
g g g
g 50 50 50 50 50
gG A
g g g
63 63 63 63 63 63
g g g g
63 63 63 63 63
690V aM A
g
16 5 3 3 40 40 40 40 g 0 5 40 40 50 50 50 50
gG A
g
0 3 40 40 50 50 50 50
g
5 3 50 50 63 63 63 63
thermal stress in the event
of short-circuit
Minimumcsaprotectedat40C
andatIscmax
1mm
kA
p p p
y10 y6 (2) (2) (2) (2)
p p p
y10 y6 (2) (2) (2) (2)
15mm
kA
p p p
y0 y10 (2) (2) (2) (2)
p p p
y0 y10 (2) (2) (2) (2)
5mm
p p p p p p p p
(2)
p p p p p p p p
(2)
46mm
p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
g > 100 kA
p Cable c.s.a. protected
(1) As % of Icu
(2) Cable c.s.a. not protected

GVLEandGVL
References:
pages3/5and3/53
Dimensions:
pages3/83to3/84
Schemes:
page3/87
References:
pages3/5and3/53
Dimensions:
pages3/83to3/84
Schemes:
page3/87
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3/16
3
Characteristics
Environment
Circuit-breaker type GV3 L GK3 EF80
Conforming to standards IEC/EN60947-1,60947- IEC60947-,EN6004
Protective treatment TH TC
Degree of protection ConformingtoIEC6059 IP0 IP0
Shock resistance Conformingto
IEC60068--7
On:15gn-11ms
Off:30gn-11ms
gn-0ms
Vibration resistance Conformingto
IEC60068--6
4gn(5300Hz) 5gn(05Hz)
Flame resistance Conformingto
IEC60695--1
C 960 960
Ambient air temperature Storage C -40+80 -40+80
Operation C -0+60(1) -0+70openmounted
Operating position
Withoutderating,inrelationtonormalverticalmountingplane(2)
Anyposition
Connection
(Maxnumberof
conductorsxcsa)
Min. Max. Min. Max.
Solidcable mm
2
x1 1x5
1x35
1x5 1x35
Flexiblecable
withoutcableend
mm
2
x1 1x5
1x35
1x5or
x5
1x5or
x16
Flexiblecable
withcableend
mm
2
x1 1x5
1x35
1x5or
x5
1x5or
x16
Tightening torque N.m 5 5:5mm
8:35mm
5
Suitable for isolation
conformingtoIEC60947-17-1-6
Yes Yes
Rated insulation
voltage (Ui)
voltage (Uimp)
ConformingtoIEC60947- kV 6 10
Rated operational
voltage (Ue)
Rated operational frequency Hz 50/60 5060
Electrical durability for AC-3/415V duty
(CO:Close-Open)
C.O. 50000 1500
C.O. 50000 0000
Maximum operating rate C.O./h 5 40
Operating threshold of magnetic trips 14Imax 3363
Utilisation category ConformingtoIEC60947- A A
(1) Leave a space of 9 mm between 2 circuit-breakers: either an empty space or side-mounting
add-on contact blocks. Side by side mounting is possible up to 40 C.
(2)Whenmountingonaverticalrail,ftastoptopreventanyslippage.

GV3LandGK3EF80
References:
pages3/5and3/53
Dimensions:
pages3/85and3/88
Schemes:
page3/87
References:
pages3/5and3/53
Dimensions:
pages3/85and3/88
Schemes:
page3/87
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3/17
3
Breaking capacity of GV3 L and GK3 EF80
Type GV3 L25 GV3 L32 GV3 L40 GV3 L50 GV3 L65 GK3 EF80
Breaking capacity of the
circuit-breaker only or of the
circuit-breaker combined with
a thermal overload relay
30/40V Icu kA 100 100 100 100 100 50
Ics% (1) 100 100 100 100 100 40
400/415V Icu kA 100 100 50 50 50 35
Ics%(1) 100 100 100 100 100 5
440V Icu kA 50 50 50 50 50 5
Ics%(1) 100 100 100 100 100 30
500V Icu kA 1 1 1 1 1 15
Ics% (1) 50 50 50 50 50 30
690V Icu kA 6 6 6 6 6 6
Ics% (1) 50 50 50 50 50 50
for use with circuit-breaker only
or circuit-breaker combined with
a thermal overload relay
iflsc>breakingcapacity
30/40V aM A
g g g g g
00
gG A
g g g g g
315
415V aM A
g g g g
15 00
gG A
g g g g
160 50
440V aM A 63 80 15 15 15 160
gG A 80 100 160 160 160 50
500V aM A 63 63 63 63 80 160
gG A 80 80 80 80 100 00
690V aM A 50 50 50 50 63 15
gG A 63 63 63 63 80 160
Use of circuit-breakers without fuses Minimumcablelength(inmetres)limitingthemaximumshort-circuitcurrentto35kA
maximum,soenablingbreakersGK3 EF80tobeusedwithoutfuses
Cablecsa mm
2
y 25 35 50 70 95 120
Isc(rms)3-phase,incoming
(Ue=415V)
50kA m 5 6 8 10 13 15
45kA m 5 5 7 8 10 1
40kA m 5 5 5 5 8 9
37kA m 5 5 5 5 5 5
g Fuse not required: breaking capacity Icn > Isc.
(1) As % of Icu

GV3LandGK3EF80
References:
pages3/5and3/53
Dimensions:
pages3/85and3/88
Schemes:
page3/87
References:
pages3/5and3/53
Dimensions:
pages3/85and3/88
Schemes:
page3/87
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3/18
3
Characteristics
0 1
F
F
F
O
O
O
F
F
F
F
O
F
Type of contacts Instantaneous auxiliary
GV AN, GV AD
Fault signalling
GV AD,
GV AM11 (1)
Instantaneous
auxiliary GV AE
(associatedinsulation
coordination)
ConformingtoIEC60947-1 V 690 690 50(690inrelationto
maincircuit)
ConformingtoCSAC-n14
andUL508
V 600 300 300
Conventional
ConformingtoIEC60947-5-1 A 6 5 5
ConformingtoCSAC-n14
andUL508
A 5 1 1
(CO:Close-Open)
C.O. 100000 1000 100000
Operational power and current
conformingtoIEC60947-5-1acoperation
AC-15/100000CO AC-14/1000CO AC-15/100000CO
Ratedoperationalvoltage
(Ue)
V 48 110
127
230
240
380
415
440 500 690 24 48 110
127
230
240
24 48 110
127
230
240
Operationalpower,
normalconditions
VA 300 500 70 850 650 500 400 36 48 7 7 48 60 10 10
Occasionalbreakingandmaking
capacities,abnormalconditions
kVA 3 7 13 15 13 1 9 0 03 045 045 048 06 17 4
Ratedoperationalcurrent
(Ie)
A 6 45 33 15 1 06 15 1 05 03 15 1 05
Operational power and current
conformingtoIEC60947-5-1dcoperation
DC-13/100000CO DC-13/1000CO DC-13/100000CO
(Ue)
V 24 48 60 110 240
(2)
24 48 60 24 48 60
Operationalpower,
normalconditions
W 140 40 180 140 10 4 15 9 4 15 9
capacities,abnormalconditions
W 40 360 40 10 180 100 50 50 100 50 50
Ratedoperationalcurrent
(Ie)
A 6 5 3 13 05 1 03 015 1 03 015
Low power switching reliability of contact GV AE:Numberoffailuresfornmillionoperatingcycles
(17V-5mA):=10
-6
Minimum operational conditions
dcoperation
V 17
mA 5
Short-circuit protection ByGB2 CBppcircuit-breaker(ratingaccordingtooperational
currentforUey415V)orbygGfuse10Amax
GB2 CB06orgGfuse
10Amax
Cabling, screw clamp
terminals
Numberofconductors 1 2
Solidcable mm
2
15 15
2
0755 0755
2
07515 07515
Tighteningtorque N.m 14max 14max
Cabling, spring terminal
connections
GV ANonly
2
0755 0755 07515
Operation of instantaneous auxiliary contacts Operation of fault signalling contacts

GV AM11
Changeofstatefollowingtrippingon
short-circuit
GV AD10pp and GV AD01pp

Changeofstatefollowingtrippingon
short-circuit,overloadorundervoltage
(1) For application example of fault signalling contact and short-circuit signalling contact, see page 3/82.
(2) Add an RC circuit type LA4 D to the load terminals, see page 5/81.
Powerpole
Contactopen
Contactclosed
Powerpole
Contactopen
Contactclosed
GV,GV3PandGV3L
Auxiliarycontacts
References:
page3/55
Dimensionsandschemes:
pages3/70to3/87
References:
page3/55
pages3/70to3/87
3/19
3
Characteristics
0 1
O
F
F
F
F
F
O
F
F
F
F
F
GV3 A01, A07
GV3 A02
GV3 A03
GV3 A05
GV3 A06
Type of contacts Instantaneous auxiliary contacts
GV3 A01A07
Fault signalling contacts
GV3 A08 and A09
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) ConformingtoIEC60947-1 V 690 690
ConformingtoCSAC-n14,
UL508
V 600(B600) 600(B600)
Conventional rated
ConformingtoIEC60947-5-1 A 6 6
UL508
A 5(B600) 5(B600)
(CO:Close-Open)
C.O. 100000 1000
Operational
power and current
conformingtoIEC60947-5-1
acoperation
(Ue)
V 48 110
127
220
240
380
415
440 500 690 48 110
127
220
240
380
415
440 500 690
Operationalpower AC-11/100000CO AC-11/1000CO
VA 350 500 800 850 700 700 400 40 460 800 850 450 450 00
Occasionalbreakingand
makingcapacities
kVA 4 1 0 0 15 15 10 4 8 1 15 1 1 8
Operationalcurrent(Ie) A 6 45 35 15 15 06 5 36 35 1 1 03
Operational power
and current
dcoperation
(Ue)
V 24 48 60 110 220 24 48 60 110 220
Operationalpower DC-11/100000CO DC-11/1000CO
W 180 40 180 140 10 10 10 90 70 60
makingcapacities
W 40 360 40 10 180 180 180 135 105 90
Operationalcurrent(Ie) A 6 5 3 13 05 5 5 15 07 03
Short-circuit protection ByGB2 CB08circuit-breakerorgGfuse,6Amax
Connection Numberofconductors 1 2
Solidcable mm
2
15 15
2
0755 0755
2
0755 07515
Contact operation GV3 A08andA09changestatefollowing
trippingonshort-circuitoroverload
Powerpole
Contactopen
Contactclosed
Powerpole
Contactopen
Contactclosed
GV3ME80
Auxiliarycontacts
References:
page3/65
Schemes:
page3/79
References:
page3/65
Schemes:
page3/79
3/0
3
Characteristics
Auxiliary contact characteristics
Type of contacts GV7 AE11 GV7 AB11
Rated insulation voltage(Ui)
(associatedinsulation
coordination)
ConformingtoIEC60947-1 V 690 690
Conventional
ConformingtoIEC60947-5-1 A 6 6
(CO:Close-Open)
C.O. 50000 50000
Operational current
acoperation
AC-1orAC-1550000CO AC-1orAC-1550000CO
Ratedoperational
voltage(Ue)
V 24 48 110 230/
240
380/
415
440 690 24 48 110 230/
240
380/
415
440 690
Ratedoperational
current(Ie)
AC-1 A 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
AC-15 A 6 6 5 4 3 3 01 5 5 4 3 5 5 01
Operational current
dcoperation
DC-1orDC-1450000CO DC-1orDC-1450000CO
Ratedoperational
voltage(Ue)
V 24 48 110 250 24 48 110 250
Ratedoperational
current(Ie)
DC-1 A 5 5 08 03 05
DC-14 A 1 0 05 003 05 01 05
Minimum operational conditions
dcoperation
V 17 1
mA 5 5
Short-circuit protection ByGB2 CBppcircuit-breaker
(ratingaccordingtooperationalcurrentforUey415V)orgGfuse,10Amax
Cabling Solidcable mm
2
1x15conductor 1x15conductor
2
2

GV7
Auxiliarycontacts
References:
page3/61
Schemes:
pages3/79
References:
page3/61
Schemes:
pages3/79
3/1
3
Characteristics
Characteristics of Start-Stop and fault signalling contacts
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) ConformingtoIEC60947-1 V 500
Rated operational
voltage (Ue)
ConformingtoIEC60947-1 V 500
Conventional
ConformingtoIEC60947-5-1 A 6
Operational
power and current
acoperation
(CO:Close-Open)
AC-150000CO
Ratedoperationalvoltage(Ue) V 48 110/127 220/240 380/415 440 500
Operationalpower VA 360 500 800 850 700 700
capacities
VA 4000 1000 0000 0000 15000 15000
Ratedoperationalcurrent(Ie) A 6 45 35 15 15
Operational
power and current
dcoperation
(CO:Close-Open)
DC-131000CO
Ratedoperationalvoltage(Ue) V 24 48 60 110 220
Operationalpower W 180 40 180 140 10
makingcapacities
W 40 80 40 10 180
Ratedoperationalcurrent(Ie) A 6 5 3 13 05
Short-circuit protection ConformingtoIEC60947-5-1 ByGB2 CB08circuit-breakerorgGfuse,6Amax
Cabling Solidcable mm
2
1x14conductor
2
1x5conductor
2
1x15conductororx15conductors
Tightening torque N.m 08

GK3EF80
Auxiliarycontacts
References:
page3/65
Dimensions:
page3/88
References:
page3/65
Dimensions:
page3/88
3/
3
Characteristics
Characteristics of electric trips
Circuit-breaker type GV2 ME, GV2 P
GV3 P, GV3 L
GV2 ME
only
GV3 ME80 GV7 R
Type of trip GV AU GV AS GV AX (1) GV3 B GV3 D GV7 AU GV7 AS
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) ConformingtoIEC60947-1 V 690 690 500 690 690 690 690
UL508
V 600 600 600(B600) 600(B600) 600 600
Operational voltage ConformingtoIEC60947-1 V 085
11Un
07
11Un
085
11Un
0811Un 085
11Un
07
11Un
Drop-out voltage V 07
035Un
075
0Un
07
035Un
07035Un 035
07Ue
0
075Ue
Inrush consumption
a
VA 1 14 1 1 <10
c
W 8 105 8 7 <5
Sealed consumption
a
VA 35 5 35 7 <5
c
W 11 16 11 5 <5
Operating time ConformingtoIEC60947-1 Fromthemomentthevoltagereachesitsoperationalvalueuntilopeningofthe
circuit-breaker
ms 1015 10 15 <50
On-load factor 100% 100% 100%
Cabling Numberofconductors or4 1or 1
Solidcable mm
2
15 15 15
2
0755 0755 15
2
07515 0755 1
Tightening torque N.m 14max 1 1
(CO:Close-Open)
C.O. 30000(GVMEandGVP)
10000(GV3PandGV3L)
50%ofthemechanicaldurabilityofthe
circuit-breaker
(1) Wiring scheme of undervoltage trip for dangerous machines (conforming to INRS) on GV2 ME
only, see page 3/82.

Electrictrips
References:
page3/61
Schemes:
pages3/78and3/79
References:
page3/61
Schemes:
pages3/78and3/79
3/3
3
Characteristics
Characteristics of 3-pole busbars GV2 Gppp and GV3 Gp64
GV2 Gppp GV3 Gp64
Conventional
ConformingtoIEC60439-1 A 63 115
Permissible
peak current(Ipeak)
kA 11 0
Permissible
thermal limit(I
2
t)
kA
2
s 104 300
Degree of protection ConformingtoIEC6059 IP0 IP0
Terminal block Yes
Characteristics of terminal blocks GV2 G05 and GV1 G09 (for GV2 ME and GV2 P)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) ConformingtoIEC60947-1 V 690
Conventional
ConformingtoIEC60439-1 A 63
Degree of protection ConformingtoIEC6059 IP0
Connection Solidcable mm
2
1x15to5conductororx15to6conductors
2
1x15to16conductororx5to4conductors
2
1x15to10conductororx15toconductors
FlexibleorsolidcableAWG 1AWG4
Tightening torque Connector N.m
Screwclampterminals N.m 17
Characteristics of current limiters (GV2 ME and GV2 P)
Type GV1 L3 LA9 LB920
Conventional
ConformingtoIEC60947-1 A 63 63
Operating threshold rmscurrent A 1500(nonadjustablethreshold) 1000(nonadjustablethreshold)
Connection 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors
Solidcable mm
2
155 1510 155 1510
2
155 510 155 1510
2
1516 154 1516 154
Tightening torque N.m

Thermal-magneticandmagneticmotor
circuit-breakersGVandGV3
Accessories
References:
page3/67
References:
page3/67
3/4
3
Curves
Thermal-magnetic tripping curves for GV2 ME and GV2 P
Average operating times at 20 C related to multiples of the setting current
1 3polesfromcoldstate
2 polesfromcoldstate
3 3polesfromhotstate
0,001
0,1
1
10
100
0,01
1 1,5 10 100
1000
10 000

3
2
1
Time(s)
xthesettingcurrent(Ir)
0,001
0,1
1
10
100
0,01
1 1,5 10 100
1000
10 000

3
2
1
Time(s)
GVMEandGVP
References:
pages3/48and3/49
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/7
Schemes:
page3/76
References:
pages3/48and3/49
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/7
Schemes:
page3/76
3/5
3
Curves (continued)
Current limitation on short-circuit for GV2 ME and GV2 P (3-phase 400/415 V)
Dynamic stress
Ipeak=f(prospectiveIsc)at105Ue=435V
1 Maximumpeakcurrent
2 4-3A
3 0-5A
4 17-3A
5 13-18A
6 9-14A
7 6-10A
8 4-63A
9 5-4A
10 16-5A
11 1-16A
12 Limitofratedultimatebreakingcapacityonshort-circuitofGVME(14,18,3and5Aratings)
1
6
5
4
3
7
8
9
10
11
2
100
10
1
0,1
0,1 1 10 100
c
o
s

=

0
.
9
5
=

0
.
9
=

0
.
8
=

0
.
7
=

0
.
5
=

0
.
3
=

0
.
2
5
15 (12)
Limitedpeakcurrent(kA)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
1
6
5
4
3
7
8
9
10
11
2
100
10
1
0,1
0,1 1 10 100
c
o
s

=

0
.
9
5
=

0
.
9
=

0
.
8
=

0
.
7
=

0
.
5
=

0
.
3
=

0
.
2
5
15 (12)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
GVMEandGVP
References:
pages3/48and3/49
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/7
Schemes:
page3/76
References:
pages3/48and3/49
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/7
Schemes:
page3/76
3/6
3
Curves (continued)
Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 ME
Thermal limit in kA
2
s in the magnetic operating zone
SumofI
dt=f(prospectiveIsc)at105Ue=435V
1 4-3A
2 0-5A
3 17-3A
4 13-18A
5 9-14A
6 6-10A
7 4-63A
8 5-4A
9 16-5A
10 1-16A
100
10
1
0,1
0,01
0,1 1 10 100
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
1
SumofI
dt(kA
s)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
100
10
1
0,1
0,01
0,1 1 10 100
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
1
SumofI
dt(kA
s)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
GVME
References:
pages3/48and3/49
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/7
Schemes:
page3/76
References:
pages3/48and3/49
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/7
Schemes:
page3/76
3/7
3
Curves (continued)
Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 P
Thermal limit in kA
2
SumofI
1 4-3A
1 0-5A
2 17-3A
3 13-18A
4 9-14A
5 6-10A
6 4-63A
7 5-4A
8 16-5A
9 1-16A
100
10
1
0,1
0,01
0,1 1 10 100
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SumofI
dt(kA
s)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
100
10
1
0,1
0,01
0,1 1 10 100
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SumofI
dt(kA
s)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
GVP
References:
pages3/48and3/49
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/7
Schemes:
page3/76
References:
pages3/48and3/49
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/7
Schemes:
page3/76
3/8
3
Curves
Thermal-magnetic tripping curves
1a3polesfromcoldstate(Irmini):GV3P
1b3polesfromcoldstate(Irmaxi):GV3P
2a polesfromcoldstate(Irmini):GV3ME80
2b polesfromcoldstate(Irmaxi):GV3ME80
3a3polesfromhotstate(Irmini):GV3P
3b 3polesfromhotstate(Irmaxi):GV3P
4a3polesfromhotstate(Irmini):GV3ME80
4b 3polesfromhotstate(Irmaxi):GV3ME80
0,001
0,1
1
10
100
0,01
1 10 100
1000
10 000
1a
1b
2a
2b
3a
3b
4a
4b
Time(s)
0,001
0,1
1
10
100
0,01
1 10 100
1000
10 000
1a
1b
2a
2b
3a
3b
4a
4b
Time(s)
GV3PandGV3ME80
References:
page3/49
Dimensions:
page3/73
Schemes:
page3/77
References:
page3/49
Dimensions:
page3/73
Schemes:
page3/77
3/9
3
Curves (continued)
Current limitation on short-circuit (3-phase 400/415 V)
Dynamic stress
2 56-80A
3 48-65A
4 37-50A
5 30-40A
6 3-3A
7 17-5A
8 1-18A
9 9-13A
1 10 15 100
100
10
1
7
6
8
9
=

0
.
9
=

0
.
8
=

0
.
7
=

0
.
5
=

0
.
3
=

0
.
2
5
5
1
3 2 4
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
1 10 15 100
100
10
1
7
6
8
9
=

0
.
9
=

0
.
8
=

0
.
7
=

0
.
5
=

0
.
3
=

0
.
2
5
5
1
3 2 4
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
GV3PandGV3ME80
References:
page3/49
Dimensions:
page3/73
Schemes:
page3/77
References:
page3/49
Dimensions:
page3/73
Schemes:
page3/77
3/30
3
Curves (continued)
Maximum thermal limit on short-circuit
Thermal limit in kA
2
SumofI
1 56-80A(GV3ME80)
2 48-65A(GV3P65)
3 37-50A(GV3P50)
4 30-40A(GV3P40)
5 3-3A(GV3P3)
6 17-5A(GV3P5)
7 1-18A(GV3P18)
8 9-13A(GV3P13)
100
1000
10
1
1 10 15 100
1
4
3
2
8
7
6
5
SumofI
dt(kA
s)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
100
1000
10
1
1 10 15 100
1
4
3
2
8
7
6
5
SumofI
dt(kA
s)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
GV3PandGV3ME80
References:
page3/49
Dimensions:
page3/73
Schemes:
page3/77
References:
page3/49
Dimensions:
page3/73
Schemes:
page3/77
3/31
3
Curves
Thermal-magnetic tripping curves for GV7 R
1 Coldstatecurve
2 Coldstatecurve
3 114Ir
Intheeventoftotalphasefailure,trippingoccursafter4s0%
0,001
0,00
0,1
0,01
0,005
0,05
1
0,5
0,0
0,
5
10
0
50
100
00
500
1000
000
5000
10000
10 3 4 7 100 0 30 40 5 50 70 1
3
1
1,1
Time(s)
0,001
0,00
0,1
0,01
0,005
0,05
1
0,5
0,0
0,
5
10
0
50
100
00
500
1000
000
5000
10000
10 3 4 7 100 0 30 40 5 50 70 1
3
1
1,1
Time(s)
GV7R
References:
page3/49
Dimensions:
page3/73
Schemes:
page3/77
References:
page3/49
Dimensions:
page3/73
Schemes:
page3/77
3/3
3
Curves (continued)
Current limitation on short-circuit (3-phase 400/415 V)
Dynamic stress
Ipeak=f(prospectiveIsc)
For GV7 RE only
1 GV7RE0
2 GV7RE150
3 GV7RE100
For GV7 RS only
1 GV7RS0
2 GV7RS150
3 GV7RS100
4
10 2
5
7
60
20
10
50
100
30
3 4 6 100 20 30 40 60
40
70
5 50
6
8
80
1
2
3
70
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
4
10 2
5
7
60
20
10
50
100
30
3 4 6 100 20 30 40 60
40
70
5 50
6
8
80
1
2
3
70
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
4
10 2
5
7
60
20
10
50
100
30
3 4 6 100 20 30 40 60
40
70
5 50
1
2
3
6
8
80
70
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
4
10 2
5
7
60
20
10
50
100
30
3 4 6 100 20 30 40 60
40
70
5 50
1
2
3
6
8
80
70
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
GV7R
References:
page3/50
Dimensions:
pages3/73to3/75
Schemes:
page3/77
References:
page3/50
Dimensions:
pages3/73to3/75
Schemes:
page3/77
3/33
3
Curves (continued)
Thermal limit (3-phase 400/415 V)
Thermal limit
SumofI
dt=f(prospectiveIsc)
For GV7 RE only
1 GV7RE0
2 GV7RE150
3 GV7RE100
For GV7 RS only
1 GV7RS0
2 GV7RS150
3 GV7RS100
2x10
4
10 2
3x10
4
5x10
4
2x10
6
2x10
5
10
5
10
6
10
7
5x10
6
3x10
5
3 4 6 100 20 30 40 60
5x10
5
3x10
6
5 50 70
1
2
3
SumofI
dt(A
s)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
2x10
4
10 2
3x10
4
5x10
4
2x10
6
2x10
5
10
5
10
6
10
7
5x10
6
3x10
5
3 4 6 100 20 30 40 60
5x10
5
3x10
6
5 50 70
1
2
3
SumofI
dt(A
s)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
2x10
4
10 2
3x10
4
5x10
4
2x10
6
2x10
5
10
5
10
6
10
7
5x10
6
3x10
5
3 4 6 100 20 30 40 60
5x10
5
3x10
6
5 50 70
1
2
3
SumofI
dt(A
s)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
2x10
4
10 2
3x10
4
5x10
4
2x10
6
2x10
5
10
5
10
6
10
7
5x10
6
3x10
5
3 4 6 100 20 30 40 60
5x10
5
3x10
6
5 50 70
1
2
3
SumofI
dt(A
s)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
GV7R
References:
page3/50
Dimensions:
pages3/73to3/75
Schemes:
page3/77
References:
page3/50
Dimensions:
pages3/73to3/75
Schemes:
page3/77
3/34
3
Curves (continued)
Current limitation on short-circuit (3-phase 690 V)
Dynamic stress
Ipeak=f(prospectiveIsc)
For GV7 RE only
1 GV7RE0
2 GV7RE150andGV7RE100
For GV7 RS only
1 GV7RS0
2 GV7RS150andGV7RS100
4
10 2
5
6
30
10
8
20
50
40
3 4 6 20 5
1
2
7
9
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
4
10 2
5
6
30
10
8
20
50
40
3 4 6 20 5
1
2
7
9
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
4
10 2
5
6
30
10
8
20
50
40
3 4 6 20 5
1
2
7
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
4
10 2
5
6
30
10
8
20
50
40
3 4 6 20 5
1
2
7
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
GV7R
References:
page3/49
Dimensions:
pages3/73to3/75
Schemes:
page3/77
References:
page3/49
Dimensions:
pages3/73to3/75
Schemes:
page3/77
3/35
3
Curves (continued)
Thermal limit on short-circuit (3-phase 690 V)
Thermal limit
SumofI
dt=f(prospectiveIsc)
For GV7 RE only
1 GV7RE0
2 GV7RE150andGV7RE100
For GV7 RS only
1 GV7RS0
2 GV7RS150andGV7RS100
10 2 3 4 6 20 5
2x10
6
2x10
5
10
5
10
6
3x10
5
5x10
5
3x10
6
1
2
8
SumofI
dt(A
s)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
10 2 3 4 6 20 5
2x10
6
2x10
5
10
5
10
6
3x10
5
5x10
5
3x10
6
1
2
8
SumofI
dt(A
s)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
10 2 3 4 6 20 5
2x10
6
2x10
5
10
5
10
6
3x10
5
5x10
5
3x10
6
1
2
SumofI
dt(A
s)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
10 2 3 4 6 20 5
2x10
6
2x10
5
10
5
10
6
3x10
5
5x10
5
3x10
6
1
2
SumofI
dt(A
s)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
GV7R
References:
page3/49
Dimensions:
pages3/73to3/75
Schemes:
page3/77
References:
page3/49
Dimensions:
pages3/73to3/75
Schemes:
page3/77
3/36
3
Curves
Thermal-magnetic tripping curves for GV2 RT
10
10 000
1
0,1
0,001
1 10 100
1000
100
0,01
2
1

3
Time(s)
kxIr
10
10 000
1
0,1
0,001
1 10 100
1000
100
0,01
2
1

3
Time(s)
kxIr
GVRT
References:
page3/50
Dimensions:
page3/7
Schemes:
page3/76
References:
page3/50
Dimensions:
page3/7
Schemes:
page3/76
3/37
3
Curves
Tripping curves for GV2 L or LE combined with thermal overload relay LRD or LR2 K
10
10 000
1
0,1
0,001
1 10 100
1000
100
0,01

3
2
1
Time(s)
10
10 000
1
0,1
0,001
1 10 100
1000
100
0,01

3
2
1
Time(s)
GVLandGVLE
References:
pages3/5and3/53
Dimensions:
page3/84
Schemes:
page3/85
References:
pages3/5and3/53
Dimensions:
page3/84
Schemes:
page3/85
3/38
3
Curves (continued)
Current limitation on short-circuit for GV2 L and GV2 LE only (3-phase 400/415 V)
Dynamic stress
2 3A
3 5A
4 18A
5 14A
6 10A
7 63A
8 4A
9 5A
10 16A
11 Limitofratedultimatebreakingcapacityonshort-circuitofGVLE(14,18,3and5Aratings)
100
10
1
0,1
0,1 1 100
1
5
4
3
8
9
10
7
6
c
o
s

=

0
.
9
5
=

0
.
9
=

0
.
8
=

0
.
7
=

0
.
5
=

0
.
3
=

0
.
2
5
15 10
11
2
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
100
10
1
0,1
0,1 1 100
1
5
4
3
8
9
10
7
6
c
o
s

=

0
.
9
5
=

0
.
9
=

0
.
8
=

0
.
7
=

0
.
5
=

0
.
3
=

0
.
2
5
15 10
11
2
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
GVLandGVLE
References:
pages3/5and3/53
Dimensions:
page3/84
Schemes:
page3/85
References:
pages3/5and3/53
Dimensions:
page3/84
Schemes:
page3/85
3/39
3
Curves (continued)
Current limitation on short-circuit for GV2 L and GV2 LE + thermal overload relay LRD or LR2 K (3-phase 400/415 V)
Dynamic stress
2 3A
3 5A
4 18A
5 14A
6 10A
7 63A
8 4A
9 5A
10 16A
100
10
1
0,1
0,1 1 10 100
c
o
s

=

0
.
9
5
=

0
.
9
=

0
.
8
=

0
.
7
=

0
.
5
=

0
.
3
=

0
.
2
5
15
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
100
10
1
0,1
0,1 1 10 100
c
o
s

=

0
.
9
5
=

0
.
9
=

0
.
8
=

0
.
7
=

0
.
5
=

0
.
3
=

0
.
2
5
15
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
GVLandGVLE
References:
page3/5
Dimensions:
page3/84
Schemes:
page3/85
References:
page3/5
Dimensions:
page3/84
Schemes:
page3/85
3/40
3
Curves (continued)
Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 LE only
Thermal limit in kA
2
SumofI
1 3A
2 5A
3 18A
4 14A
5 10A
6 63A
7 4A
8 5A
9 16A
100
10
1
0,1
0,01
0,1 1 10 100
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SumofI
dt(kA
s)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
100
10
1
0,1
0,01
0,1 1 10 100
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SumofI
dt(kA
s)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
GVLE
References:
page3/5
Dimensions:
page3/84
Schemes:
page3/85
References:
page3/5
Dimensions:
page3/84
Schemes:
page3/85
3/41
3
Curves (continued)
Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 L only
Thermal limit in kA
2
SumofI
1 5Aand3A
2 18A
3 14A
4 10A
5 63A
6 4A
7 5A
8 16A
100
10
1
0,1
0,01
0,1 1 10 100
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
SumofI
dt(kA
s)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
100
10
1
0,1
0,01
0,1 1 10 100
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
SumofI
dt(kA
s)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
GVL
References:
pages3/5and3/53
Dimensions:
page3/84
Schemes:
page3/85
References:
pages3/5and3/53
Dimensions:
page3/84
Schemes:
page3/85
3/4
3
Curves (continued)
Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 L and GV2 LE + thermal overload relay LRD or LR2 K
Thermal limit in kA
2
SumofI
1 3A(GVLE3)
2 5Aand3A(GVL3)
3 18A
4 14A
5 10A
6 63A
7 4A
8 5A
9 16A
100
10
1
0,1
0,01
0,1 1 10 100
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15
1
10
SumofI
dt(kA
s)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
100
10
1
0,1
0,01
0,1 1 10 100
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15
1
10
SumofI
dt(kA
s)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
GVLandGVLE
References:
pages3/5and3/53
Dimensions:
pages3/84
Schemes:
page3/85
References:
pages3/5and3/53
Dimensions:
pages3/84
Schemes:
page3/85
3/43
3
Curves
Tripping curves for GV3 L and GK3 EF80 combined with thermal overload relay LRD 33
Average operating time at 20 C without prior current fow
A Thermaloverloadrelayprotectionzone
B GK3EF80andGV3Lprotectionzone
10
10 000
1
0,1
0,001
1 10 100
1000
100
0,01

3
2
1
B
A
Time(s)
10
10 000
1
0,1
0,001
1 10 100
1000
100
0,01

3
2
1
B
A
Time(s)
GV3LandGK3EF80
References:
page3/53
Dimensions:
page3/84
Schemes:
page3/85
References:
page3/53
Dimensions:
page3/84
Schemes:
page3/85
3/44
3
Curves (continued)
Current limitation on short-circuit for GV3 L and GK3 EF80 (3-phase 400/415 V)
Dynamic stress
2 GK3EF80
3 GV3L65
4 GV3L50
5 GV3L40
6 GV3L3
7 GV3L5
1
1 10 100
10
50
2
1
5
4
3
7
6
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
1
1 10 100
10
50
2
1
5
4
3
7
6
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
GV3LandGK3EF80
References:
page3/53
Dimensions:
page3/84
Schemes:
page3/85
References:
page3/53
Dimensions:
page3/84
Schemes:
page3/85
3/45
3
Curves (continued)
Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV3 L and GK3 EF80
Thermal limit in A
2
s
SumofI
1 GK3EF80
2 GV3L65
3 GV3L50
4 GV3L40
5 GV3L3
6 GV3L5
10
1
1 10 100
100
1000
1
4
3
2
5
6
SumofIdt(A
s)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
10
1
1 10 100
100
1000
1
4
3
2
5
6
SumofIdt(A
s)
ProspectiveIsc(kA)
GV3LandGK3EF80
References:
page3/53
Dimensions:
page3/84
Schemes:
page3/85
References:
page3/53
Dimensions:
page3/84
Schemes:
page3/85
3/46
3
GVME
References
Motor circuit-breakers from 0.06 to 15 kW / 400 V, with screw clamp terminals
GV2 ME with pushbutton control
Setting
range
of thermal
trips
(2)
Magnetic
tripping
current
Id 20 %
Reference Weight
400/415 V 500 V 690 V
P Icu Ics
(1)
P Icu Ics (1) P Icu Ics (1)
kW kA % kW kA % kW kA % A A kg

01016 15 GV2 ME01 060

0.06
g g

01605 4 GV2 ME02 060

0.09
g g

05040 5 GV2 ME03 060

0.12
0.18
g
g
g
g

0.37
040063 8 GV2 ME04 060

0.25
g g

0.55
g g
0631 13 GV2 ME05 060
0.37
0.55
g
g
g
g
0.37
0.55
0.75
g
g
g
g
g
g

0.75
1.1
g
g
g
g
116 5 GV2 ME06 060
0.75
g g
1.1
g g

1.5 3 75 165 335 GV2 ME07 060

1.1
1.5
g
g
g
g
1.5
2.2
g
g
g
g

2.2
3
3
3
75
75
54 51 GV2 ME08 060
2.2
g g
3 50 100
4 3 75 463 78 GV2 ME10 060

3
4
g
g
g
g
4
5.5
10
10
100
100

5.5
7.5
3
3
75
75
610 138 GV2 ME14 060
5.5
15
50
7.5
75
9
11
3
3
75
75
914 170 GV2 ME16 060
7.5 15 50 9 6 75
15 3 75 1318 3 GV2 ME20 060

9 15 40 11 4 75
18.5 3 75 173 37 GV2 ME21 060

11 15 40 15 4 75
05 37 GV2 ME22 (3) 060

15 10 50 18.5 4 75 22 3 75 43 416 GV2 ME32 060
Motor circuit-breakers from 0.06 to 15 kW / 400 V, with lugs
Toorderthermalmagneticcircuit-breakerswithconnectionbylugs,addthedigit6totheendofreferenceselected
above
Example:GV2 ME08becomesGV2 ME086
Thermal magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 ME with built-in auxiliary contact block
Withinstantaneousauxiliarycontactblock(composition,seepage3/55):
GV AE1, add suffx AE1TQtothemotorcircuit-breakerreferenceselectedabove
Example:GV2 ME01AE1TQ
GV AE11, add suffx AE11TQtothemotorcircuit-breakerreferenceselectedabove
Example:GV2 ME01AE11TQ
GV AN11, add suffx AN11TQtothemotorcircuit-breakerreferenceselectedabove
Example:GV2 ME01AN11TQ
Thesecircuit-breakerswithbuilt-incontactblockaresoldinlotsof0unitsinasinglepack
b
b
b
(1) As % of Icu.
(2) The thermal trip setting must be within the range marked on the graduated knob.
(3) Maximum rating which can be mounted in enclosures GV2 MC or MP,pleaseconsultyourRegionalSalesOffce.
g > 100 kA.

GV2 ME10
5
6
1
3
4
GV2 ME10
5
6
1
3
4
Characteristics:
pages3/8to3/1
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/7
Schemes:
page3/76
Characteristics:
pages3/8to3/1
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/7
Schemes:
page3/76
3/47
3
GVME
Motor circuit-breakers from 0.06 to 11 kW, with spring terminal connections
GV2 ME (1) with pushbutton control
Setting
range
of thermal
trips
(3)
Magnetic
tripping
current
Id 20 %
Reference Weight
400/415 V 500 V
P Icu Ics (2) P Icu Ics (2)
kW kA % kW kA % A A kg
01016 15 GV2 ME013 080
0.06
g g
01605 4 GV2 ME023 080
0.09
g g
05040 5 GV2 ME033 080
0.12
0.18
g
g
g
g
040063 8 GV2 ME043 080
0.25
0.37
g
g
g
g
0.37
g g
0631 13 GV2 ME053 080
0.37
0.55
g
g
g
g
0.37
0.55
0.75
g
g
g
g
g
g
116 5 GV2 ME063 080
0.75
g g
1.1
g g
165 335 GV2 ME073 080
1.1
1.5
g
g
g
g
1.5
2.2
g
g
g
g
54 51 GV2 ME083 080
2.2
g g
3 50 100 463 78 GV2 ME103 080
3
4
g
g
g
g
4
5.5
10
10
100
100
610 138 GV2 ME143 080
5.5 15 50 7.5 6 75 914 170 GV2 ME163 080
7.5 15 50 9 6 75 1318 3 GV2 ME203 080
9
11
15
15
40
40
11 4 75 173 37 GV2 ME213 060
11 15 40 15 4 75 05 37 GV2 ME223 060
Contact blocks
Description Mounting Maximum
number
Type of
contacts
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
Front 1 N/O+N/C 10 GV AE113 0030
N/O+N/O 10 GV AE203 0030
LHside N/O+N/C 1 GV AN113 0060
N/O+N/O 1 GV AN203 0060
Accessory
Description Application Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Cable end reducer Forconnectionofconductorsfrom1to15mm
0 LA9 D99
(1) For connection of conductors from 1 to 1.5 mm
2
(2) Maximum rating which can be mounted in enclosures GV2 MC or MP,pleaseconsultyourRegionalSalesOffce
g > 100 kA.

GV2 MEpp3
5
6
1
3
5
GV2 MEpp3
5
6
1
3
5
LA9 D99 LA9 D99
Characteristics:
pages3/8to3/1
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/7
Schemes:
page3/76
Characteristics:
pages3/8to3/1
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/7
Schemes:
page3/76
3/48
3
References
Motor circuit-breakers from 0.06 to 30 kW / 400 V
Setting
range
of thermal
trips
(2)
Magnetic
tripping
current
Id 20 %
Reference Weight
400/415 V 500 V 690 V
P Icu Ics
(1)
P Icu Ics
(1)
P Icu Ics
(1)
kW kA % kW kA % kW kA % A A kg
GV2 P: control by rotary knob
Screw clamp terminals
01016 15 GV2 P01 0350
0.06
g g
01605 4 GV2 P02 0350
0.09
g g
05040 5 GV2 P03 0350
0.12
0.18
g
g
g
g

0.37
040063 8 GV2 P04 0350

0.25
g g
0.55
g g
0631 13 GV2 P05 0350
0.37
0.55
g
g
g
g
0.37
0.55
g
g
g
g

0.75

g

g
116 5 GV2 P06 0350
0.75
g g
1.1
g g
1.5 8 100 165 335 GV2 P07 0350
1.1
g g
1.5
g g
2.2 8 100 54 51 GV2 P08 0350
2.2
g g
3
g g
4 6 100 463 78 GV2 P10 0350
3
g g
5 50 100 5.5 6 100 610 138 GV2 P14 0350
5.5
7.5
75
9
11
6
6
100
100
914 170 GV2 P16 0350
7.5 50 50 9 10 75 15 4 100 1318 3 GV2 P20 0350
9 50 50 11 10 75 18.5 4 100 173 37 GV2 P21 0350
11 50 50 15 10 75 05 37 GV2 P22 0350
15 35 50 18.5 10 75 22 4 100 43 416 GV2 P32 0350
GV3 P: control by rotary knob
Connection by EverLink BTR screw connectors (3)
5.5 100 100 7.5 1 50 11 6 50 913 18 GV3 P13 0960
7.5 100 100 9 1 50 15 6 50 118 5 GV3 P18 0960
11 100 100 15 1 50 18.5 6 50 175 350 GV3 P25 0960
15 100 100 18.5 1 50 22 6 50 33 448 GV3 P32 0960
18.5 50 100 22 1 50 37 6 50 3040 560 GV3 P40 0960
22 50 100 30 1 50 45 6 50 3750 700 GV3 P50 0960
30 50 100 45 1 50 55 6 50 4865 910 GV3 P65 0960
Connection by EverLink BTR screw connectors, for assembly with a contactor
ToassembleaGV3 P13toP65circuit-breakerwithanLC1 D40AtoD65Acontactor,itispossibletousethe
circuit-breakersuppliedwithoutdownstreamEverLinkpowerterminalblockToorderthisproduct,addthe
digit1totheendofthereferencesselectedaboveExample:GV3 P65becomesGV3 P651
Connection by lugs
Toorderthermalmagneticcircuit-breakerswithconnectionbylugs,addthedigit6totheendofreferenceselected
aboveExample:GV3 P18becomesGV3 P186
GV3 ME80: pushbutton control, screw clamp terminals
37 15 50 45 4 100 55 100 5680 GV3 ME80 (4) 0700
Motor circuit-breakers up to 50 hp / 600 V, UL 508 type E
GV2 (5)
ToobtainaGVPmotorcircuit-breaker,UL508typeE,combine:
acircuit-breakerGV2 Ppp(except3A),
andaLargeSpacingadapterGV2 GH7.
b
b
GV3 (6)
Toobtainamotor-circuit-breakerGV3P,UL508typeE,usethefollowingwiththecircuit-breaker:
aLargeSpacingcoverGV3 G66,
ashort-circuitsignallingcontactGV AM11
b
b
GV3 with connection by lugs (6)
Toobtainamotor-circuit-breakerGV3P,UL508typeE,withconnectionbylugs,addthedigit6totheendof
referenceselectedaboveandusethefollowingwiththecircuit-breaker:
twoIP0coversLAD 96570,
ashort-circuitsignallingcontactGV AM11
b
b
(1) As % of Icu.
(3) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. Require use of an insulated Allen key, in compliance with local wiring regulations.
(4) Recommended for use in association with a contactor.
(5) Accessory: see page 3/67.
(6) Accessories: see page 3/57.
g > 100 kA.
GV2 P10
5
6
1
3
7
GV2 P10
5
6
1
3
7
GV3 P65
5
6
1
3
9
GV3 P65
5
6
1
3
9
GVP,GV3PandGV3ME80
GV3 P651
5
6
1
4
0
Characteristics:
pages3/8to3/13
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/73
Characteristics:
pages3/8to3/13
Dimensions:
pages3/70to3/73
3/49
3
References
Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV7 R with screw clamp terminals
Control by rocker lever
Setting
range
of thermal
trips
Reference Weight
400/415 V 500 V 660/690 V
P Icu Ics (1) P Icu Ics (1) P Icu Ics (1)
kW kA % kW kA % kW kA % A kg
7.5
9
36
36
100
100
9
11
18
18
100
100
11
15
8
8
100
100
10 GV7 RE20 010
7.5
9
70
70
100
100
9
11
50
50
100
100
11
15
10
10
100
100
10 GV7 RS20 010
9
11
36
36
100
100
11
15
18
18
100
100
15
18.5
8
8
100
100
155 GV7 RE25 010
9
11
70
70
100
100
11
15
50
50
100
100
15
18.5
10
10
100
100
155 GV7 RS25 010
18.5 36 100 18.5
22
18
18
100
100
22 8 100 540 GV7 RE40 010
18.5 70 100 18.5 50 100 22 10 100 540 GV7 RS40 010
22 36 100 30 18 100 30 8 100 3050 GV7 RE50 015
22 70 100 30 50 100 30 10 100 3050 GV7 RS50 015
37 36 100 45
55
18
18
100
100
55 8 100 4880 GV7 RE80 040
37 70 100 45
55
50
50
100
100
55 10 100 4880 GV7 RS80 040
45 36 100 18 100 75 8 100 60100 GV7 RE100 040
45 70 100 50 100 75 10 100 60100 GV7 RS100 040
55
75
35
35
100
100
75
90
30
30
100
100
90
110
8
8
100
100
90150 GV7 RE150 00
55
75
70
70
100
100
75
90
50
50
100
100
90
110
10
10
100
100
90150 GV7 RS150 00
90
110
35
35
100
100
110
132
160
30
30
30
100
100
100
160
200
8
8
100
100
130 GV7 RE220 350
90
110
70
70
100
100
110
132
160
50
50
50
100
100
100
160
200
10
10
100
100
130 GV7 RS220 350
(1) As % of lcu
GV7 RE40
5
6
1
3
8
GV7 RE40
5
6
1
3
8
GV7 RS220
5
6
1
4
1
GV7 RS220
5
6
1
4
1
GV7R
Characteristics:
page3/13
Dimensions:
page3/73
Schemes:
page3/77
Characteristics:
page3/13
Dimensions:
page3/73
Schemes:
page3/77
3/50
3
References
For motors with high current peak on starting
Setting
range
of thermal trips
(1)
Magnetic
tripping
current
Id 20 %
Reference Weight
220/
230 V
400/
415 V
440 V 500 V 690 V
006 009 009
01
05040 8 GV2 RT03 0350
01
018
018 037 040063 13 GV2 RT04 0350
009
01
05
037
05
037
037 055 0631 GV2 RT05 0350
018
05
037
055
037
055
037
055
075
075
11
116 33 GV2 RT06 0350
037 075 075
11
11 15 165 51 GV2 RT07 0350
055
075
11
15
15 15

3
54 78 GV2 RT08 0350
11
3
3 4 463 138 GV2 RT10 0350
15
3
4
4 4
55
55
75
610 00 GV2 RT14 0350
3
55 55
75
75 9
11
914 80 GV2 RT16 0350
4 75 75
9
9 15 1318 400 GV2 RT20 0350
55 9
11
11 11 185 173 400 GV2 RT21 0350
GV2 RT
5
6
1
4
GV2 RT
5
6
1
4

Thermal-magneticcircuit-breakers
GVRT
Characteristics:
pages3/8to3/3
Dimensions:
page3/7
Schemes:
page3/76
Characteristics:
pages3/8to3/3
Dimensions:
page3/7
Schemes:
page3/76
3/51
3
For primaries of 3-phase transformers
Standard power ratings Setting
range of
thermal trips (1)
Magnetic
tripping current
Id 20 %
Reference Weight
230/240 V 400/415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V
05040 8 GV2 RT03 0350
040063 13 GV2 RT04 0350
063 063 1 0631 GV2 RT05 0350
04 063 1 1 116 33 GV2 RT06 0350
063 1 16 16
165 51 GV2 RT07 0350

1 16
16

5
5 54 78 GV2 RT08 0350
16
5 5
4
4 4
5
63
463 138 GV2 RT10 0350
5 4
5
5 5
63
610 00 GV2 RT14 0350
4 63 63 10
15
914 80 GV2 RT16 0350
5
63
10 10 10
15
10 1318 400 GV2 RT20 0350
Accessory (2)
kg
Padlockable external operator(IP54)
blackhandle,bluelegendplate

GV2 AP03 080

(2) Other accessories such as mounting, cabling and marking accessories are identical to those used for GV2 ME motor
circuit-breakers, see page 3/57.
GV2 RT
5
6
1
4
GV2 RT
5
6
1
4

Thermal-magneticcircuit-breakers
GVRT
Characteristics:
pages3/8to3/3
Dimensions:
page3/7
Schemes:
page3/76
Characteristics:
pages3/8to3/3
Dimensions:
page3/7
Schemes:
page3/76
3/5
3
References
Magnetic motor circuit-breakers from 0.06 to 15 kW
GV2 L: control by rocker lever, connection by screw clamp terminals
Magnetic
protection
rating
Tripping
current
Id 20 %
Use in
association
with
thermal
overload
relay
Reference Weight
400/415 V 500 V 690 V
kW kA kW kA kW kA A A kg
0.06
g g
04 5 LRK030 GV2 LE03 0330
0.09
g g
04 5 LRK0304 GV2 LE03 0330
0.12
g g
0.37
g g
063 8 LRK0304 GV2 LE04 0330
0.18
g g
063 8 LRK0305 GV2 LE04 0330
0.55
g g
1 13 LRK0305 GV2 LE05 0330
0.25
g g
1 13 LRK0306 GV2 LE05 0330
0.75
g g
1 13 LRK0306 GV2 LE05 0330
0.37
g g
0.37
g g
1 13 LRK0306 GV2 LE05 0330
0.55
g g
0.55
g g
1.1
g g
16 5 LRK0307 GV2 LE06 0330
0.75
g g
16 5 LRK0307 GV2 LE06 0330
0.75
g g
1.1
g g
1.5 3 75 5 335 LRK0308 GV2 LE07 0330
1.1
g g
5 335 LRK0308 GV2 LE07 0330
1.5
g g
1.5
g g
3 3 75 4 51 LRK0310 GV2 LE08 0330
2.2
g g
4 51 LRK031 GV2 LE08 0330
2.2
g g
3 50 100 4 3 75 63 78 LRK031 GV2 LE10 0330
3
g g
4 10 100 5.5 3 75 10 138 LRK0314 GV2 LE14 0330
4
g g
5.5 10 100 10 138 LRK0316 GV2 LE14 0330
7.5 3 75 10 138 LRD14 GV2 LE14 0330
9 3 75 14 170 LRD16 GV2 LE16 0330
5.5 15 50 7.5 6 75 11 3 75 14 170 LRK031 GV2 LE16 0330
7.5 15 50 9 6 75 15 3 75 18 3 LRD1 GV2 LE20 0330
9 15 40 11 4 75 18.5 3 75 5 37 LRD GV2 LE22 0330
11 15 40 15 4 75 5 37 LRD GV2 LE22 0330
15 10 50 18.5 4 75 22 3 75 3 416 LRD3 GV2 LE32 0330
(1) As % of Icu.
g > 100 kA.
GV2 LE10
5
6
1
4
4
GV2 LE10
5
6
1
4
4
GVLE
Characteristics:
pages3/14and3/15
Dimensions:
page3/84
Schemes:
page3/85
Characteristics:
pages3/14and3/15
Dimensions:
page3/84
Schemes:
page3/85
3/53
3
References
Motor circuit-breakers from 0.09 to 30 kW
GV2 L: Control by rotary knob, connection by screw clamp terminals
Magnetic
protection
rating
Tripping
current
Id 20 %
Use in
association
with
thermal
overload
relay
(class10A)
Reference Weight
400/415 V 500 V 690 V
0.09
g g
04 5 LRD03 GV2 L03 0330
0.12
g g
0.37
g g
063 8 LRD04 GV2 L04 0330
0.18
g g
063 8 LRD04 GV2 L04 0330
0.55
g g
1 13 LRD05 GV2 L05 0330
0.25
g g
1 13 LRD05 GV2 L05 0330
0.75
g g
1 13 LRD06 GV2 L05 0330
0.37
g g
0.37
g g
1 13 LRD05 GV2 L05 0330
0.55
g g
0.55
g g
1.1
g g
16 5 LRD06 GV2 L06 0330
0.75
g g
16 5 LRD06 GV2 L06 0330
0.75
g g
1.1
g g
1.5 4 100 5 335 LRD07 GV2 L07 0330
1.1 LRD08 GV2 L08 0330
1.5
g g
1.5
g g
3 4 100 4 51 LRD08 GV2 L08 0330
LRD08 GV2 L08 0330
2.2
g g
3
g g
4 4 100 63 78 LRD10 GV2 L10 0330
3
g g
4 10 100 5.5 4 100 10 138 LRD1 GV2 L14 0330
4 LRD14 GV2 L14 0330
7.5 4 100 10 138 LRD14 GV2 L14 0330
9 4 100 14 170 LRD16 GV2 L16 0330
5.5 50 50 7.5 10 75 11 4 100 14 170 LRD16 GV2 L16 0330
7.5 50 50 9 10 75 15 4 100 18 3 LRD1 GV2 L20 0330
9 50 50 11 10 75 18.5 4 100 5 37 LRD GV2 L22 0330
11 50 50 15 10 75 5 37 LRD GV2 L22 0330
15 35 50 18.5 10 75 22 4 100 3 416 LRD3 GV2 L32 0330
GV3 L: control by rotary knob, connection by EverLink BTR screw connectors
Magnetic
protection
rating
Tripping
current
Id 20 %
Use in
association
with thermal
overload
relay
(class10A)
Reference Weight
400/415 V 500 V 690 V
11 100 100 15 1 50 18.5 6 50 5 350 LRD35 GV3 L25 0960
15 100 100 18.5 1 50 22 6 50 3 448 LRD33 GV3 L32 0960
18.5 50 100 22 1 50 37 6 50 40 560 LRD340 GV3 L40 0960
22 50 100 30 1 50 45 6 50 50 700 LRD350 GV3 L50 0960
30 50 100 37 1 50 55 6 50 65 910 LRD365 GV3 L65 0960
Connection by EverLink BTR screw connectors, for assembly with a contactor
ToassembleaGV3 L25toL65 circuit-breakerwithanLC1 D40AtoD65Acontactor,itispossibletousethe
circuit-breakersuppliedwithoutdownstreamEverLinkpowerterminalblockToorderthisproduct,addthe
digit1totheendofthereferencesselectedaboveExample:GV3 L65becomesGV3 L651
Connection by lugs
Toorderthesecircuit-breakerswithconnectionbylugs,addthedigit6totheendofreferenceselectedabove
Example: GV3 L32becomesGV3 L326
GK3: control by rotary knob, connection by screw clamp terminals
37 35 5 55 15 30 80 1040 LRD3363 GK3 EF80 0795
(1) As % of Icu. Associated current limiter or fuses, where required. See characteristics page 3/17.
g > 100 kA.
GV2 L10
5
6
1
4
5
GV2 L10
5
6
1
4
5
GV3 L65
5
6
1
4
6
GV3 L65
5
6
1
4
6
GK3 EF80
5
6
1
4
7
GK3 EF80
5
6
1
4
7
GVL,GV3LandGK3EF80
Characteristics:
pages3/14and3/15
Dimensions:
pages3/84to3/85
Schemes:
page3/85
Characteristics:
pages3/14and3/15
Dimensions:
pages3/84to3/85
Schemes:
page3/85
3/54
3
GV2 AK00
GV1 L3
GV AD
GV AM11
GV AM11
GV AN
GV AN
GV2 P
GV2 ME
GV AX
GV AU
GV AS
GV AE1
GV AE1
GV AE11, GV AE20
GV2 L
GV2 LE
3/55
3
Contact blocks
number
Type of
contacts
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
Front (1) 1 N/OorN/C (2) 10 GV AE1 0015
N/O+N/C 10 GV AE11 000
N/O+N/O 10 GV AE20 000
Side
(LH)
N/O+N/C 1 GV AN11 0050
N/O+N/O 1 GV AN20 0050
Fault signalling contact +
instantaneous
auxiliary contact
Side (3)
(LH)
1 N/O(fault) +N/O 1 GV AD1010 0055
+N/C 1 GV AD1001 0055
N/C(fault) +N/O 1 GV AD0110 0055
+N/C 1 GV AD0101 0055
Short-circuit
signalling contact
Side
(LH)
1 C/Ocommonpoint 1 GV AM11 0045
Electric trips
Mounting Voltage Reference Weight
kg
Undervoltage or shunt trips (4)
Side
(1blockonRHside
ofcircuit-breaker)
4V 50Hz GV Ap025 0105
60Hz GV Ap026 0105
48V 50Hz GV Ap055 0105
60Hz GV Ap056 0105
100V 50Hz GV Ap107 0105
100110V 60Hz GV Ap107 0105
110115V 50Hz GV Ap115 0105
60Hz GV Ap116 0105
1017V 50Hz GV Ap125 0105
17V 60Hz GV Ap115 0105
00V 50Hz GV Ap207 0105
000V 60Hz GV Ap207 0105
040V 50Hz GV Ap225 0105
60Hz GV Ap226 0105
380400V 50Hz GV Ap385 0105
60Hz GV Ap386 0105
415440V 50Hz GV Ap415 0105
415V 60Hz GV Ap416 0105
440V 60Hz GV Ap385 0105
480V 60Hz GV Ap415 0105
500V 50Hz GV Ap505 0105
600V 60Hz GV Ap505 0105
Undervoltage trip, INRS (can only be mounted on GV2 ME)
Safety device for dangerous machines conforming to INRS and VDE 0113
Side
(1blockonRHside
ofcircuit-breakerGVME)
110115V 50Hz GV AX115 0110
60Hz GV AX116 0110
17V 60Hz GV AX115 0110
040V 50Hz GV AX225 0110
60Hz GV AX226 0110
380400V 50Hz GV AX385 0110
60Hz GV AX386 0110
415440V 50Hz GV AX415 0110
440V 60Hz GV AX385 0110
number
Reference Weight
kg
Visible isolation block (5) Front (1) 1 GV2 AK00 0150
Limiters Attop
(GVMEandGVP)
1 GV1 L3 0130
Independent 1 LA9 LB920 030
(1) Mounting of a GV AE contact block or a GV2 AK00 visible isolation block on GV2 P and GV2 L.
(2) Choice of N/C or N/O contact operation, depending on which way round the reversible block is mounted.
(3) The GV AD is always mounted next to the circuit-breaker.
(4) To order an undervoltage trip: replace the dot (p) in the reference with a U, example: GV AU025.
To order a shunt trip: replace the dot (p) in the reference with an S, example: GV AS025.
(5) Visible isolation of the 3 poles upstream of circuit-breaker GV2 P and GV2 L.
Visible isolation block GV2 AK00 cannot be used with motor circuit-breakers GV2 P32 and GV2 L32 (Ith max = 25 A).
LA9 LB920 LA9 LB920

References
Thermal-magneticandmagneticmotorcircuit-
breakersGVwithscrewclampconnections
Add-onblocksandaccessories
Characteristics:
pages3/18to3/3
pages3/70to3/89
Characteristics:
pages3/18to3/3
pages3/70to3/89
3/56
3
3/57
3
Accessories
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Adapter plates FormountingaGVME
or GV2 LE by screw fxing
10 GV2 AF02 001
FormountingaGVMEorGVP
andcontactorLC1D09D38
withfrontfacesaligned
1 LAD 311 0040
Height compensation plate 7,5mm 10 GV1 F03 0003
Combination blocks BetweenGVandcontactorLC1KorLP1K 10 GV2 AF01 000
BetweenGVandcontactorLC1D09D38 10 GV2 AF3 0016
BetweenGVmountedonLAD311
andcontactorLC1D09D38
10 GV2 AF4 0016
Motor starter adapter plate With3-poleconnectionformountingaGV
andacontactorLC1D09D5
1 GK2 AF01 010
Description Application Pitch Reference Weight
mm kg
Sets of 3-pole
63 A busbars
tap-offs 45 GV2 G245 0036
54 GV2 G254 0038
7 GV2 G272 004
3tap-offs 45 GV2 G345 0058
54 GV2 G354 0060
4tap-offs 45 GV2 G445 0077
54 GV2 G454 0085
7 GV2 G472 0094
5tap-offs 54 GV2 G554 0100
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Protective end cover Forunusedbusbaroutlets 5 GV1 G10 0005
Terminal block
forsupplytooneormore
GVGbusbarsets
Connectionfromthetop 1 GV1 G09 0040
Can be ftted with current limiter GV1 L3
(GVMEandGVP)
1 GV2 G05 0115
Cover for terminal block Formountinginmodularpanels 10 LA9 E07 0005
Flexible 3-pole connection
forconnectingaGVtoa
contactorLC1-D09D5
Centredistancebetweenmountingrails:
10010mm
10 GV1 G02 0013
Set of connections
upstream/downstream
ForconnectingGVMEtoaprintedcircuitboard 10 GV2 GA01 0045
Large Spacing adapter
UL508typeE
ForGVPppH7(except3A) 1 GV2 GH7 0040
Clip-in marker holders
(suppliedwitheach
circuit-breaker)
ForGVP,GVL,GVLEandGVRT
(8xmm)
100 LA9 D92 0001
References
Accessories
3/58
3
1
5
3
2
4
6
7
Allowsacircuit-breakerorastarter-controllerinstalledinbackofanenclosure
tobeoperatedfromthefrontoftheenclosure
Arotaryhandlecanbeblackorred/yellow,IP54orIP65Itincludesafunction
forlockingthecircuitbreakerorthestarterintheO(Off)orI(On)position
(dependingofthetypeofrotaryhandle)bymeansofupto3padlockswithashank
diameterof4to8mmTheextendedshaftmustbeadjustedtouseindifferentsize
enclosures. The IP54 rotary handle is fxed with a nut ( 22) to make easier
theassemblingThenewLaserSquaretoolbringstheaccuracytoalignthecircuit
breakerandtherotaryhandle
Padlockable external operators for GV2P and GV2L
Description
1 Kithandle+mountingsystem
2 Universalhandle
3 Shaft
4 Bracket
5 Shaftsupportplatefordeepenclosure
6 Retroft accessory
7 LaserSquareaccessory
kg
For GV2 P/L Blackhandle,frontplate,withtripstatus,IP54 1 GV2 APN01 0300
Redhandle,frontplate,withtripstatus,IP54 1 GV2 APN02 0300
Redhandle,frontplate,withouttripstatus,IP65 1 GV2 APN04 0300
For GV2 LE PadlockinginOnandOffposition
Blackhandle,bluefrontplate,IP54
- GV2 AP03 080
Universal handle
For GV2 P/L Blackhandle,IP54 2 GV APB54 0140
Redhandle,IP54 2 GV APR54 0140
Shaft
For GV2 P/L L=315mm 3 GV APA1 0110
Bracket
For GV2 P/L 4 GV APH02 0300
For GV2 P/L Depthu50mm 5 GV APK11 0030
Retroft accessory
For GV2 P/L 6 GV APP1 0100
For GV2 P/L 7 GV APL01 0160
Warning label ForFrench 10 - GV APSFR
ForEnglish 10 - GV APSEN
ForGerman 10 - GV APSDE
ForSpanish 10 - GV APSES
ForChinese 10 - GV APSCN
ForPortuguese 10 - GV APSPT
ForRussian 10 - GV APSRU
ForItalian 10 - GV APSIT
Padlocking device
kg
For all GV2
device
For use with up to 4 padlocks, 6 mm shank max.
(padlocksnotincluded)
GV2 V03 009
References
3/59
3
3/60
3
GV AM11
GV AM11
GV AE1
GV AE1
GV AE11, GV AE20,
GV3 L
GV3 P
GV3 G364
GV AE113, GV AE203, GV AED 1013,
GV AED 0113
GV AED 101, GV AED 011
GV2 V03
GV3 G264
GV3 APN02
3/61
3
Contact blocks
number
Type of
contacts
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
Front 1 N/OorN/C(1) 10 GV AE1 0015
N/O+N/C 10 GV AE11 (2) 000
N/O+N/O 10 GV AE20 (2) 000
Side
(LH)
N/O+N/C 1 GV AN11 (2) 0050
N/O+N/O 1 GV AN20 (2) 0050
Fault signalling contact +
instantaneous
auxiliary contact
Front 1 N/O(fault) +N/O 1 GV AED101 (2) 000
N/O(fault) +N/C 1 GV AED011 (2) 000
Side(3)
(LH)
1 N/O(fault) +N/O 1 GV AD1010 0055
+N/C 1 GV AD1001 0055
N/C(fault) +N/O 1 GV AD0110 0055
+N/C 1 GV AD0101 0055
Short-circuit signalling contact Side(LH) 1 C/Ocommonpoint 1 GV AM11 0045
Electric trips - undervotlage or shunt (4)
Mounting Voltage Reference Weight
kg
Side
(1blockonRHside
ofcircuit-breaker)
4V 50Hz GV Ap025 0105
60Hz GV Ap026 0105
48V 50Hz GV Ap055 0105
60Hz GV Ap056 0105
100 50Hz GV Ap107 0105
100110V 60Hz GV Ap107 0105
110115V 50Hz GV Ap115 0105
60Hz GV Ap116 0105
1017V 50Hz GV Ap125 0105
17V 60Hz GV Ap115 0105
00V 50Hz GV Ap207 0105
000V 60Hz GV Ap207 0105
040V 50Hz GV Ap225 0105
60Hz GV Ap226 0105
380400V 50Hz GV Ap385 0105
60Hz GV Ap386 0105
415440V 50Hz GV Ap415 0105
415V 60Hz GV Ap416 0105
440V 60Hz GV Ap385 0105
480V 60Hz GV Ap415 0105
500V 50Hz GV Ap505 0105
600V 60Hz GV Ap505 0105
Accessories
kg
Sets of 3-pole
115 A busbars
Pitch:64mm
tap-off GV3PppandGV3Lpp GV3 G264 0150
3tap-off GV3PppandGV3Lpp GV3 G364 050
Cover LargeSpacingUL508typeE
(Onlyonecoverrequiredonsupplyside)
GV3Ppp GV3 G66 000
IP 20 cover
(Twocoversrequiredperbreaker)
GV3Ppp6andGV3Lpp6 LAD 96570 001
IP 20 cover
forusewhenmountedwithcircuit-breakers
GV3Ppp6andGV3Lpp6 LAD 96575 0010
Size 4 Allen key, insulated, 1000 V GV3PppandGV3Lpp LAD ALLEN4 (5) 006
Padlocking device
forusewithupto4padlocks(notsupplied)
6 mm shank max.
GV3PppandGV3Lpp
GV3Ppp6andGV3Lpp6
GV2 V03 009
Retroft plate
for screw fxing
ReplacementofGV3ME
withGV3PpporGVPpp
LAD 7X3 0150
(1) Choice of N/C or N/O contact operation, depending on which way round the reversible block is mounted.
(2)Contactblocksavailableinversionwithspringterminalconnections.Addafgure3 at the end of the references selected above.
Example: GV AED101 becomes GV AED1013.
(3) The GV ADpp is always mounted next to the circuit-breaker.
(4) To order an undervoltage trip: replace the dot (p) in the reference with a U, example: GV AU025.
To order a shunt trip: replace the dot (p) in the reference with an S, example: GV AS025.
References
GV3PandGV3L
GV3 G66
LAD 96570
LAD 96575
LAD 7X3
3/6
3
1
5
3
2
4
6
7
Allowsacircuit-breakerorastarter-controllerinstalledinbackofanenclosure
tobeoperatedfromthefrontoftheenclosure
Arotaryhandlecanbeblackorred/yellow,IP54orIP65Itincludesafunction
forlockingthecircuitbreakerorthestarterintheO(Off)orI(On)position
(dependingofthetypeofrotaryhandle)bymeansofupto3padlockswithashank
diameterof4to8mmTheextendedshaftmustbeadjustedtouseindifferentsize
enclosures. The IP54 rotary handle is fxed with a nut ( 22) to make easier
theassemblingThenewLaserSquaretoolbringstheaccurencytoalignthecircuit
breakerandtherotaryhandle
Padlockable external operators for GV3 and GV3L
Description
1 Kithandle+mountingsystem
2 Universalhandle
3 Shaft
4 Bracket
5 Shaftsupportplatefordeepenclosure
6 Retroft accessory
7 LaserSquareaccessory
kg
For GV3 P/L Blackhandle,frontplate,withtripstatus,IP54 1 GV3 APN01 0300
Redhandle,frontplate,withtripstatus,IP54 1 GV3 APN02 0300
Redhandle,frontplate,withouttripstatus,IP65 1 GV3 APN04 0300
Universal handle
For GV3 P/L Blackhandle,IP54 2 GV APB54 0140
Shaft
For GV3 P/L L=315mm 3 GV APA1 0110
Bracket
For GV3 P/L 4 GV APH03 0300
For GV3 P/L Depthu300mm 5 GV APK12 0030
Retroft accessory
For GV3 P/L 6 GV APP1 0100
For GV3 P/L 7 GV APL01 0160
Warning label ForFrench 10 - GV APSFR
ForEnglish 10 - GV APSEN
ForGerman 10 - GV APSDE
ForSpanish 10 - GV APSES
ForChinese 10 - GV APSCN
ForPortuguese 10 - GV APSPT
ForRussian 10 - GV APSRU
ForItalian 10 - GV APSIT
References
GV3PandGV3L
3/63
3
3/64
3
GV3 A08
GV3 A09
GV3 A01...A07
3/65
3
For thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3 ME80
Contact blocks
Description Type of standard
early break contacts
Reference Weight
kg
contact blocks
(1percircuit-breaker)
N/C+N/O GV3 A01 0,060
N/O+N/O GV3 A02 0060
N/C+N/O+N/O GV3 A03 0070
N/O+N/O+N/O GV3 A05 0070
N/O+N/O+volt-freeterminals GV3 A06 0070
N/C+N/O+volt-freeterminals GV3 A07 0070
Fault signalling contacts (1) N/C GV3 A08 0030
N/O GV3 A09 0030
Electric trips
Description Voltages Reference Weight
50 Hz 60 Hz kg
Udervoltage trips (1) 110,10,17V 10,17V GV3 B11 0070
0,40V 77V GV3 B22 0070
380,415V 440V,480V GV3 B38 0070
Shunt trips (1) 110,10,17V 10,17V GV3 D11 0070
0,40V 77V GV3 D22 0070
380,415V 440V,480V GV3 D38 0070
Accessory
Description Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Padlocking device,
for locking the Start button (onopen-mountedproduct)
5 GV1 V02 0010
For magnetic circuit-breaker GK3 EF80
Contact blocks
Description Number of poles Reference Weight
kg
Auxiliary contact blocks for On-Off signalling
and control circuit test function
(1orblocksperdevice)
mountedonRHsideofGK3EF80
N/O GK2 AX10 005
N/O+N/O GK2 AX20 0031
N/C+N/O GK2 AX50 0031
Instantaneous fault signalling contact blocks
(1orblocksperdevice)
mountedonLHsideofGK3EF80
N/O GK2 AX12 005
N/O+N/O GK2 AX22 0031
N/C+N/O GK2 AX52 0031
Accessories
kg
Padlocking device for padlocking the operator,
using up to 3 padlocks
(padlockstobeorderedseparately)
GK3 AV01 000
External operator for mounting on enclosure door.
Red 40 knob on yellow plate, padlockable in position O
(with up to 3 padlocks). Door locked when knob in position I,
and when knob padlocked in position O.
GK3 AP03 0300
(1) 1 voltage trip OR1faultsignallingcontacttobefttedinsidethemotorcircuit-breaker.

Other versions

4to690V,50or60Hzvoltagetripsforcircuit-breakersGV3 ME80
References
Motorcircuit-breakersGV3ME80and
GK3EF80
Characteristics:
pages3/18and3/
Dimensions:
pages3/79to3/88
Characteristics:
pages3/18and3/
Dimensions:
pages3/79to3/88
3/66
3
GV7 RE, RS
GV7 AE11, AB11
GV7 AU, AS
1
2
3
4
3/67
3
Add-on auxiliary contacts
Theseallowremoteindicationofthecircuit-breakercontactstatesTheycanbeusedforsignalling,electrical
locking,relaying,etcTheyareavailableintwoversions:standardandlowlevelTheyincludeaterminalblock
andtheauxiliarycircuitsleavethecircuit-breakerthroughaholeprovidedforthispurpose
Theyperformthefollowingfunctions,dependingonwheretheyarelocatedinthecircuit-breaker:
Location Function Application
1 and/or 4 C/Ocontact Indicatesthepositionofthecircuit-breakerpoles
2 Tripindication Indicatesthatthecircuit-breakerhastrippedduetoan
overload,ashort-circuit,adifferentialfaultortheoperationofa
voltagetrip(undervoltageorshunttrip),orofthepushtotrip
testbuttonItresetswhenthecircuit-breakerisreset
3 Electricalfaultindication Indicatesthatthecircuit-breakerhastrippedduetoan
overload,ashort-circuitoradifferentialfaultItresetswhenthe
circuit-breakerisreset
Type Reference Weight
kg
Standard GV7 AE11 0015
Low level GV7 AB11 0015
Fault discrimination devices
Thesemakeitpossibleto:
eitherdifferentiateathermalfaultfromamagneticfault,
oropenthecontactoronlyintheeventofathermalfault
b
b
Voltage Reference Weight
kg
a 24...48 and c 2472 V GV7 AD111 (1) 0100
z 110240 V GV7 AD112 (1) 0100
Electric trips
Theseallowthecircuit-breakertobetrippedviaanelectricalcontrolsignal
UndervoltagetripGV7AU
Tripsthecircuit-breakerwhenthecontrolvoltagedropsbelowthetrippingthreshold,whichisbetween035and
07timestheratedvoltage
Circuit-breakerclosingisonlypossibleifthevoltageexceeds085timestheratedvoltage
Circuit-breakertrippingbyaGV7AUtripmeetstherequirementsofIEC60947-
ShunttripGV7AS
Tripsthecircuit-breakerwhenthecontrolvoltagerisesabove07timestheratedvoltage
Operation(GV7AUorGV7AS)
Whenthecircuit-breakerhasbeentrippedbyaGV7AUorAS,itmustbereseteitherlocallyorbyremotecontrol
(For remote control, please consult your Regional Sales Offce).
Trippinghaspriorityovermanualclosing:ifatrippinginstructionispresent,manualactiondoesnotresultin
closing,eventemporarily,ofthecontacts
Durability:50%ofthemechanicaldurabilityofthecircuit-breaker
b
v
v
b
b
v
v
v
Type Voltage Reference Weight
kg
Undervoltage trip 48V,50/60Hz GV7 AU055 (1) 0105
110130V,50/60Hz GV7 AU107 (1) 0110
0040V,50/60Hz GV7 AU207 (1) 0110
380440V,50/60Hz GV7 AU387 (1) 0105
55V,50Hz GV7 AU525 (1) 0100
Shunt trip 48V,50/60Hz GV7 AS055 (1) 0105
110130V,50/60Hz GV7 AS107 (1) 0110
0040V,50/60Hz GV7 AS207 (1) 0110
380440V,50/60Hz GV7 AS387 (1) 0105
55V,50Hz GV7 AS525 (1) 0100
(1) For mounting of a GV7 AD or a GV7 AU or AS.
References
GV7Rwithscrewclampconnections
Characteristics:
pages3/18,3/and3/3
Dimensions:
pages3/75to3/77
Schemes:
page3/79
Characteristics:
pages3/18,3/and3/3
Dimensions:
pages3/75to3/77
Schemes:
page3/79
3/68
3
ON
OFF
O
ON
OFF
O
ON
OFF
O
OFF
O
ON
ON
OFF
O
GV7 RE, RS
GV7 AP03
OFF
O
ON
GV7 AP04
GV7 AP01, AP02
GV7 V01
GV7 AP05
GV7 RE, RS
GV7 AC01
GV7 AC03
GV7 AC01
GV7 AC04
GV7 AC04
3/69
3
Cabling accessories
Description Application For use on
contactors
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Clip-on connectors
for GV7 R
Upto150A,1595mm
3 GV7 AC021 0300

Upto0A,15185mm
3 GV7 AC022 0350

Spreader
3-pole (1)
Toincreasethepitchto45mm 1 GV7 AC03 0180
Terminal shields
IP 405 (1)
Suppliedwith
sealingaccessory
1 GV7 AC01 015
Phase barriers Safetyaccessoriesusedwhen
ftting of shields is impossible
GV7 AC04 0075
Insulating screens Ensureinsulationbetweenthe
connectionsandthebackplate
GV7 AC05 0075
Kits for combination
with contactor(2)
Allowinglinkbetweenthe
circuit-breakerandthecontactor
Thecoverprovidesprotection
against direct fnger contact
LC1F115F185 1 GV7 AC06 0550
LC1F5andF65 1 GV7 AC07 0550
LC1D115andD150 1 GV7 AC08 0550
Direct rotary handle
Replacesthecircuit-breakerfrontcover;securedbyscrewsItincludesadeviceforlockingthecircuit-breakerin
theO(Off)positionbymeansofupto3padlockswithashankdiameterof5to8mm(padlocksnotincluded)A
conversionaccessoryallowsthedirectrotaryhandletobemountedontheenclosuredoorInthiscase,thedoor
cannotbeopenedifthecircuit-breakerisintheONpositionCircuit-breakerclosingisinhibitediftheenclosure
doorisopen
Description Type Degree of
protection
Reference Weight
kg
Direct rotary handle Blackhandle,blacklegendplate IP40 GV7 AP03 005
Redhandle,yellowlegendplate IP40 GV7 AP04 005
Adapter plate (3) Fourmountingdirectrotary
handleonenclosuredoor
IP43 GV7 AP05 0100
Extended rotary handle
Allowsacircuit-breakerinstalledinthebackofanenclosuretobeoperatedfromthefrontoftheenclosure
Itcomprises:
aunitwhichscrewsontothefrontcoverofthecircuit-breaker,
an assembly (handle and front plate) to be ftted on the enclosure door,
anextensionshaftwhichmustbeadjusted(distancebetweenthemountingsurfaceandthedoor:185mm
minimum,600mmmaximum)Itincludesadeviceforlockingthecircuit-breakerintheO(Off)positionbymeans
ofupto3padlockswithashankdiameterof5to8mm(padlocksnotincluded)Thispreventstheenclosuredoor
frombeingopened
b
b
b
Description Type Degree of
protection
Reference Weight
kg
Extended rotary handle Blackhandle,blacklegendplate IP55 GV7 AP01 0775
Redhandle,yellowlegendplate IP55 GV7 AP02 0775
Locking device
Allows circuit-breakers not ftted with a rotary handle to be locked in the O (Off) position by means of up to 3
padlockswithashankdiameterof5to8mm(padlocksnotincluded)
kg
Locking device For circuit-breaker not ftted with a rotary handle GV7 V01 0100
(1) Terminal shields cannot be used together with spreaders.
(2) The kit comprises links, a protective shield and a depth adjustable metal bracket for the breaker.
(3) This conversion accessory makes it impossible to open the door if the device is closed and prevents the device from being
closed if the door is open.
+
+
GV7 AC07
+
+
GV7 AC07
+
GV7 AC08
+
GV7 AC08
References
GV7Rwithscrewclampconnections
Accessories
Dimensions:
pages3/75to3/77
Schemes:
page3/79
Dimensions:
pages3/75to3/77
Schemes:
page3/79
3/70
3
Dimensions
Dimensions
GV2 ME GV AX GV AD, AM, AN, AU,
AS, AX
GV AE

b
GV2 MEpp 89
GV2 MEpp3 101
(1) Maximum
X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 690 V
GV2 P GV AD, AM, AN, AU, AS GV2 AK00

(1) Maximum
X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 415 V, or 80 mm for Ue = 440 V,
or 120 mm for Ue = 500 and 690 V
X2 = 40 mm
GV2 GH7
70
44,5
1
5
b
67,
X
1
46
15,7
X
1
11
4
5
=
=
44,5
b
67,
X
1
46
15,7
X
1
11
4
5
=
=
44,5 16 9,3 9,3
81(1)
18
BlockGVAD,AM,AN
BlockGVAU,AS,AX
16 9,3 9,3
81(1)
18
BlockGVAD,AM,AN
BlockGVAU,AS,AX
15
1
0
15
1
0
44,5 9,3 9,3
81(1)
18 18
8
9
8
X
1
50 6
X
15
6
1
4
5
=
=
BlockGVAD,AM,AN
BlockGVAU,AS
44,5 9,3 9,3
81(1)
18 18
8
9
8
X
1
50 6
X
15
6
1
4
5
=
=
BlockGVAD,AM,AN
BlockGVAU,AS
98 14
44,5
3
98 14
44,5
3

GVMEandGVP
3/71
3
Mounting
GV2 ME
On 35 mm 5 rail On panel with adapter plate GV2 AF02 On pre-slotted plate
AM1 PA
On rails DZ5 MB201

c = 78.5 on AM1 DP200 (35 x 7.5)
c = 86 on AM1 DE200, ED200 (35 x 15)
GV2 P
On rail AM1 DE200, ED200
(35 x 15)
Panel mounted On pre-slotted plate
AM1 PA
Adapter plate GK2 AF01
Dimensions
GV2 AF01 GV2 AF3
Combination GV2 ME + TeSys k contactor Combination GV2 ME + TeSys d contactor Combination GV2 P + TeSys d contactor

GV2 ME + LC1 D09
D18
LC1 D25
and D32
GV2 P + LC1 D09
D18
LC1 D25
and D32
b 1764 1868 b 1764 1868
c1 941 1004 c1 1001 1064
c 996 1059 c 1056 1119
d1 95 95
d 1005 1005
80 c
=
=
5
0
/
6
0
4,
35
80 c
=
=
5
0
/
6
0
4,
35
AF1 EA4
35
5
0
/
6
0
35
6
0
5
0
15
DZ5 MB201 GV2 AF02
DZ5 ME8
AF1 EA4
35
5
0
/
6
0
35
6
0
5
0
15
DZ5 MB201 GV2 AF02
DZ5 ME8
13,5
8
4
4
4
,
5
4
4
,
5
106
45
3
5
54
1
0
5
5
3
5 5
AF1EA4
8
4
13,5
4
5
5
4
5
1
3
5
9,5
13,5
8
4
4
4
,
5
4
4
,
5
106
45
3
5
54
1
0
5
5
3
5 5
AF1EA4
8
4
13,5
4
5
5
4
5
1
3
5
9,5
79 45
1
5
79 45
1
5
c1
c
45
b
c1
c
45
b
45
b
c1
c
d
d1
45
b
c1
c
d
d1
GVMEandGVP
Mounting,
dimensions
3/7
3
Dimensions,
mounting
GV2 AF4 + LAD 311
Combination GV2 ME + TeSys d contactor Combination GV2 P + TeSys d contactor

GV2 ME + LC1 D09D18 LC1 D25 and D32 GV2 P + LC1 D09D18 LC1 D25 and D32
b 1764 1868 b 1764 1868
c1 1031 1364 c1 1365 144
c 1356 1419 c 1416 1479
d1 107 107
d 115 115
GV2 ME + GV1 L3 (current limiter) 7.5 mm height compensation plate GV1 F03
4
5
1
44,5
8
9
77
X
1
X
1
4
0
X1 = 10 mm for Ue = 230 V
or 30 mm for 230 V < Ue y 690 V
3
9
35 13
45
b
3
4
1
c1
c
d1
d
1
3
45
b
3
4
1
c1
c
d1
d
1
3
45
b
3
4
1
c1
c
1
3
45
b
3
4
1
c1
c
1
3
GVMEandGVP
3/73
3
GVP
Dimensions,
mounting
Mounting
Mounting of external operator GV2 APN01, GV2 APN02 or GV2 APN04 for motor circuit-breakers GV2 P
5,2
= =
0,5...4
6
43 6 a
6
0
Door cut-out
48
= =
=
=
4
8
43,5 (1)
16
1
6
3,5
22
Mounting of external operator GV APH02 for motor circuit-breakers GV2 P
0,5...4
6
43 b
6
0
64,1
1
7
3
,
4
= =
Door cut-out
48
= =
=
=
4
8
43,5 (1)
16
1
6
3,5
22
a b
Mini Maxi Mini Maxi
GV2 APNpp 140 50
GV2 APNpp+ GV APH02 151 50
GV2 APNpp+ GV APK11 50 434 - -
GV2 APNpp+ GV APH02
+ GV APK11
- - 50 445
(1) For IP65 only.
(1) For IP65 only.
3/74
3
Dimensions,
mounting
GV2 ME, GV2 P
Sets of busbars GV2 G445, GV2 G454, GV2 G472, with terminal block GV2 G05
6
3
l 3
a
1
8
p
45
l p a
GV2 G445(4x45mm) 179 45 Number of tap-offs 5 6 7 8
GV2 G454(4x54mm) 06 54 GV2 G445 4 69 314 359
GV2 G472(4x7mm) 60 7 GV2 G454 60 314 368 4
GV2 G472 33 404 476 548
Sets of busbars GV2 Gppp with terminal block GV1 G09 Sets of busbars GV2 G245, GV2 G254, GV2 G272
GV1G09
3
8

l
GV2 G245(x45mm) 89
GV2 G254(x54mm) 98
GV2 G272(x7mm) 116
Sets of busbars GV2 G554 Sets of busbars GV2 G345 and GV2 G354
60

l
GV2 G345(3x45mm) 134
GV2 G354(3x54mm) 15
ll
ll
GVMEandGVP
3/75
3
GV2 RT
Dimensions
X1: Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue < 690 V

Mounting
Mounting of external operator GV2 AP03
1,55
1
3
53 1338
6
5
6
= =
1,3
On 35 mm 7 rail On panel with adapter
plate GV2 AF02
On pre-slotted plate
AM1 PA
On rails DZ5 MB

c = 80 on AM1 DP200 (35 x 7.5)
c = 88 on AM1 DE200, ED200 (35 x 15)
8
9
66
X
1
44 16 7,5
X
1
1,5
4
5
=
=
44,5
8
9
66
X
1
44 16 7,5
X
1
1,5
4
5
=
=
44,5
c
4
4
,
5
4
4
,
5
84,5 c
4
4
,
5
4
4
,
5
84,5
5
0
/
6
0
4,
35
5
0
/
6
0
4,
35
AF1EA4
35
5
0
/
6
0
AF1EA4
35
5
0
/
6
0
35
6
0
5
0
15
DZ5MB01 GVAF0
DZ5ME8
35
6
0
5
0
15
DZ5MB01 GVAF0
DZ5ME8
35
6
0
5
0
15
DZ5MB01 GVAF0
DZ5ME8
35
6
0
5
0
15
DZ5MB01 GVAF0
DZ5ME8
GVRT
Dimensions,
mounting
3/76
3
Dimensions,
mounting
GV3 P
Dimensions
X1 = Electrical clearance (ISC max)
40 mm for Ue y 500 V, 50 mm for Ue y 690 V
(1) Blocks GV ANpp , GV ADpp and GV AM11
(2) Blocks GV3 AUpp and GV3 ASpp
Note: Leave a gap of 9 mm between 2 circuit-breakers: either an empty space or side-mounting add-on contact blocks.
Horizontal mounting is possible up to 40 C
Mounting
Mounting with TeSys contactor LC1 D40AD65A Side by side mounting with TeSys contactor LC1 D40AD65A
(S-shape busbar system GV3 S)
2
3
1
1
2
0
136 55
136 119
1
3
8
Mounting on rail AM1 DE200 or AM1 ED201 Panel mounting, using M4 screws
6
8
6
4
144
136 3x4
1
3
7
,
5
37,5
Mounting on pre-slotted plate AM1 PA
136 18,7 18,7
1
3
7
,
5
AF1 EA4
136
X
1
X
1
1
3
2
6
8
6
4
55 136
X
1
X
1
1
3
2
6
8
6
4
55 9 18
(2)
(1)
9 18
(2)
(1)
GV3P
3/77
3
GV3 P (continued)
Busbar systems
Set of busbars GV3 G264 Set of busbars GV3 G364
119
1
6
183
1
6
Note: Leave a space of 9 mm between 2 circuit-breakers: either an empty space or side-mounting add-on contact blocks.
Horizontal mounting is possible up to 40 C.
Mounting
Mounting of external operator GV3 APN01, GV3 APN02 or GV3 APN04 for motor circuit-breakers GV3 P
0,5...4
43
60
a
6
0
6
= =
Door cut-out
48
= =
=
=
4
8
43,5 (1)
16
1
6
3,5
22
Mounting of external operator GV APH03 for motor circuit-breakers GV3 P
0,5...4
43 b
6
0
6
2
1
3
,
4
73,8
= =
Door cut-out
48
= =
=
=
4
8
43,5 (1)
16
1
6
3,5
22
a b
Mini Maxi Mini Maxi
GV3 APNpp 189 300 - -
GV3 APNpp+ GV APK12 300 481
GV3 APNpp+ GV APH03 - - 00 300
GV3 APNpp+ GV APH03
+ GV APK12
- - 300 49
Dimensions,
mounting
GV3P
(1) For IP65 only.
(1) For IP65 only.
3/78
3
GV3 ME80
Dimensions
17,3
22 77,5
113
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
2
0
5,5
X
1
X
1
4
5
=
=
7
0
61,2
21,2
20
4,5
70,4
(1)
(1) Blocks GV3 A01A07.
Mounting
Mounting on rail AM1 DE200 or AM1 ED201 Panel mounting, using M4 screws Mounting on pre-slotted plate AM1 PA
122,5 113 =
=
61,2
21,2
20 20
1
0
0
1
1
0
20 113 AF1 EA4
1
0
0
1
1
0
Dimensions,
mounting
GV3ME80
3/79
3
GV7 R
Dimensions

(1) 126 for GV7 Rp220
Motor circuit-breakers with terminal shields or phase barriers
GV7 R + GV7 AC01 or AC04
(2) Phase barriers: GV7 AC04
(3) Terminal shields: GV7 AC01
Combination of GV7 R and TeSys contactor LC1 F with kit GV7 AC0p Minimum electrical clearance

a b c
GV7 R + LC1 F115 or
F150 + GV7 AC06
119 334 181
GV7 R + LC1 F185 +
GV7 AC06
119 338 188
GV7 R + LC1 F225 +
GV7 AC07
131 358 188
GV7 R + LC1 F265 +
GV7 AC07
131 364 15
Minimum distance between 2 circuit-breakers
mounted side by side = 0
x1 x2
Painted or insulated metal plate,
insulation or insulated bar
0 30
Bare
metal
plate
Uy440V 5 35
440V<U<600V 10 35
Uu600V 0 35
81
86
111(1)
=
1
6
1
=
=
=
1
5
=
105
= =
35
= 81
86
111(1)
=
1
6
1
=
=
=
1
5
=
105
= =
35
=
a c
b
a c
b
x1 x1
x
x1 x1
x
Dimensions,
mounting
GV7R
3/80
3
Dimensions,
mounting
GV7 R
Panel mounting Mounting on 2 mounting rails DZ5 MB201

Flush-mounting
1 circuit-breaker GV7 R n circuit-breakers GV7 R
side by side
Combination of GV7 R and TeSys contactor LC1 F with kit GV7 AC0p
E G H
GV7 R + LC1 F115 + GV7 AC06 44 85 10
GV7 R + LC1 F150 + GV7 AC06 46 85 10
GV7 R + LC1 F185 + GV7 AC06 48 85 10
GV7 R + LC1 F225 + GV7 AC07 57 85 10
GV7 R + LC1 F265 + GV7 AC07 60 85 10
35
=
1
5
35 35
=
35
=
1
5
35 35
=
1
3
5
35
1
5
DZ5ME5
15
1
3
5
35
1
5
DZ5ME5
15
=
9
=
9
4
7
7
6
88 83
=
=
1
0
8
= =
108
=
=
1
0
8
=
9
=
9
4
7
7
6
88 83
=
=
1
0
8
= =
108
=
=
1
0
8
G
E
H
G
E
H
GV7R
3/81
3
Dimensions,
mounting
GV7 R
Spreaders GV7 AC03 Connection
Smooth terminals Connectors
a
GV7 Rp40Rp150 195
GV7 Rp220 15
Direct rotary handle GV7 AP03, GV7 AP04
Flush-mounting

Direct rotary handle GV7 AP03 or GV7 AP04 with conversion accessory GV7 AP05
Front face cut-out Enclosure viewed from top

Door cut-outs require a minimum distance between the centre
of the circuit-breaker and the door hinge point D u 100 + (h x 5)
e = 1 to 3 max
Extended rotary handle GV7 AP01, GV7 AP02
l : 185 min, 600 max

The shaft of the extended rotary handle GV7 AP01 or GV7 AP02 must be cut to length: l 126 mm.
45 45
114
3
0
4
1
45 45
114
3
0
4
1
Z
X
Z
X
X
7
0
1
0
,
5
Z
7
0
Z
X
1
9
a
X
7
0
1
0
,
5
Z
7
0
Z
X
1
9
a
7
3
4
5
8
155
11
0
I
55
91
36
7
3
4
5
8
155
11
0
I
55
91
36
=
9
=
97
4
7
7
6
89 =
9
=
97
4
7
7
6
89
=
4
1
=
100
5
9
1
0
0
69
=
51
10
=
1
0
15
e
9
9,5
=
4
1
=
100
5
9
1
0
0
69
=
51
10
=
1
0
15
e
9
9,5
hh
75
=
60
60
0
I
=
7
5
=
=
l
9
9,5
75
=
60
60
0
I
=
7
5
=
=
l
9
9,5
GV7R
3/8
3
GVME,GVP,GV3PandGVRT
Schemes
Schemes
GV2 MEpp and GV2 RT GV2 Ppp GV3 Ppp

Front mounting add-on contact blocks
GV AE1 GV AE11 GV AE20 GV AED101 GV AED011

Side mounting add-on contact blocks


Voltage trips Current limiter
GV AUppp GV ASppp GV AXppp GV1 L3

Use of fault signalling contact
and short-circuit signalling contact
Connection of undervoltage trip for dangerous machines
(conforming to INRS) on GV2 ME only

2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
3
1
4
1
2
1
1
or
1
3
1
4
1
2
1
1
or
1
3
1
4
2
2
2
1
1
3
1
4
2
2
2
1
1
3
1
4
2
3
2
4
1
3
1
4
2
3
2
4
9
7
9
8
2
3
2
4
9
7
9
8
2
3
2
4
9
7
9
8
2
1
2
2
9
7
9
8
2
1
2
2
5
3
5
4
9
6
9
5
5
3
5
4
9
6
9
5
5
5
1
9
6
9
5
5
5
1
9
6
9
5
9
7
9
8
5
3
5
4
9
7
9
8
5
3
5
4
9
7
9
8
5
1
5
9
7
9
8
5
1
5
(
6
2
)
3
2
(
6
1
)
3
1
4
3
(
7
3
)
4
4
(
7
4
)
(
6
2
)
3
2
(
6
1
)
3
1
4
3
(
7
3
)
4
4
(
7
4
)
(
6
4
)
3
4
(
6
3
)
3
3
4
3
(
7
3
)
4
4
(
7
4
)
(
6
4
)
3
4
(
6
3
)
3
3
4
3
(
7
3
)
4
4
(
7
4
)
0
5
0
6
0
8
0
5
0
6
0
8
D
1
D
D
1
D
D
1
D
D
1
D
D
1
D
E
1
E
D
1
D
E
1
E
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
5
/
L
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
5
/
L
3
GVAD10pp GVAM11
Short-circuit
signalling
Tripsignalling
N/CorN/O
Start-Stopcontact
GVAD10pp GVAM11
Short-circuit
signalling
Tripsignalling
N/CorN/O
Start-Stopcontact
/
T
1
4
/
T
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
5
/
L
3
D
1
D
E
E1
10Aglmax
/
T
1
4
/
T
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
5
/
L
3
D
1
D
E
E1
10Aglmax
3/83
3
Schemes
GV3ME80andGV7R
Schemes
Motor circuit-breakers Auxiliary contact block modules
GV3 ME80 GV3 A01 GV3 A02 GV3 A03 GV3 A05 GV3 A06 GV3 A07

Fault signalling contacts Voltage trips
GV3 A08 GV3 A09 GV3 B GV3 D

Motor circuit-breakers Add-on auxiliary contacts according to their location (1)
GV7 R GV7 AE11, GV7 AB11
Location 1
C/O contact
Location 2
Trip indication
Location 3
Electrical fault
indication
Location 4
C/O contact

Aself-adhesivelabel,suppliedwiththecontact,canbeaffxedtothefrontfaceofthe
circuit-breaker to allow personalised marking according to the function of the contact or contacts.
(1) See pages 3/20 and 3/61.
Electric trips
GV7 AUppp GV7 ASppp GV7 AD111, AD112

Recommended application schemes GV7 AD111, AD112
Fault indication Contactor opening on overload

Associated components
KA1: CA2 KN or CAD N
Associated components
KA1: CAD + LAD 6K10 or RHK
KM1: LC1 D or LC1 F
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
3
1
4
2
2
2
1
1
3
1
4
2
2
2
1
1
3
1
4
2
3
2
4
1
3
1
4
2
3
2
4
1
3
1
4
4
3
3
1
1
3
1
4
4
3
3
1
1
3
1
4
4
3
3
3
4
1
3
1
4
4
3
3
3
4
1
3
1
4
4
3
3
3
4
1
3
1
4
4
3
3
3
4
4
3
3
1
1
3
1
4
4
3
3
1
1
3
1
4
9
6
9
5
9
6
9
5
9
7
9
8
9
7
9
8
D
1
D
2
U
D
1
D
2
U
C
1
C
2
C
1
C
2
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
1
1
4
1
2
1
1
1
4
1
2
9
1
9
4
9
2
9
1
9
4
9
2
8
1
8
4
8
2
8
1
8
4
8
2
2
1
2
4
2
2
2
1
2
4
2
2
D
1
D
4
D
1
D
4
C
1
C
2
C
1
C
2
9
8
9
7
50ms
9
8
9
7
50ms
9
8
9
7
50ms
KA1
4
1
3
1
4
KA1
Reset
Overloadfault
9
8
9
7
50ms
KA1
4
1
3
1
4
KA1
Reset
Overloadfault
9
8
9
7
50ms
KM1 KA1
A
1
A
A
1
A
B
1
KA1
Reset
9
8
9
7
50ms
KM1 KA1
A
1
A
A
1
A
B
1
KA1
Reset
3/84
3
Dimensions,
mounting
GV2 L
Dimensions GV AD, AM, AN, AU, AS GV2 AK00

X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 415 V, or
80 mm for Ue = 440 V, or 120 mm for Ue = 500 and 690 V.
X2 = 40 mm.
(1) Maximum
Mounting Adapter plate GK2 AF01
On rail AM1 DE200,
AM1 ED200 (35 x 15)
Panel mounted On pre-slotted mounting
plate AM1 PA
7.5 mm height compensation plate GV1 F03
GV2 LE
Dimensions GV AD, AM, AN, AU, AS GV AE

X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 690 V. (1) Maximum
Mounting
On 35 mm 7 rail On panel with adapter plate GV2 AF02 On pre-slotted plate AM1 PA On rails DZ5 MB201

c = 80 on AM1 DP200
(35 x 7.5) and 88 on
AM1 DE200, ED200 (35 x15)
44,5 9,3 9,3
81 (1)
18 18
8
9
82
X
1
50 26
X
2
15
6
1
4
5
=
=
BlockGVAD,AM,AN
BlockGVAU,AS
44,5 9,3 9,3
81 (1)
18 18
8
9
82
X
1
50 26
X
2
15
6
1
4
5
=
=
BlockGVAD,AM,AN
BlockGVAU,AS
98 14
44,5
3
2
98 14
44,5
3
2
13,5
8
4
4
4
,
5
4
4
,
5
106
45
3
5
54
1
0
5
5
3
5
5,5
5
AF1 EA4
8
4
13,5 24
5
5
4
5
1
3
5
9,5 13,5
8
4
4
4
,
5
4
4
,
5
106
45
3
5
54
1
0
5
5
3
5
5,5
5
AF1 EA4
8
4
13,5 24
5
5
4
5
1
3
5
9,5
3
9
35 13
3
9
35 13
44
8
9
16 7,5
66 12,5
X
1
X
1
44,5
4
5
=
=
44
8
9
16 7,5
66 12,5
X
1
X
1
44,5
4
5
=
=
9,3 9,3 18
81 (1)
BlockGVAD,AM,AN
BlockGVAU,AS
9,3 9,3 18
81 (1)
BlockGVAD,AM,AN
BlockGVAU,AS
15
1
0
15
1
0
c
4
4
,
5
4
4
,
5
c
4
4
,
5
4
4
,
5
84,5
4,2
35
5
0
/
6
0
84,5
4,2
35
5
0
/
6
0
AF1 EA4
35
5
0
/
6
0
AF1 EA4
35
5
0
/
6
0
15 35
5
0
6
0
DZ5 MB201 GV2 AF02
DZ5 ME8
15 35
5
0
6
0
DZ5 MB201 GV2 AF02
DZ5 ME8
GVLandGVLE
3/85
3
Dimensions,
mounting
TeSys protection components0
GVLandGVLE
Mounting
Mounting of external operator GV2 APN01, GV2 APN02 or GV2 APN04 for motor circuit-breakers GV2 L
5,2
= =
0,5...4
6
43 6 a
6
0
Door cut-out
48
= =
=
=
4
8
43,5 (1)
16
1
6
3,5
22
Mounting of external operator GV APH02 for motor circuit-breakers GV2 L
0,5...4
6
43 b
6
0
64,1
1
7
3
,
4
= =
Door cut-out
48
= =
=
=
4
8
43,5 (1)
16
1
6
3,5
22
a b
Mini Maxi Mini Maxi
GV2 APNpp 140 50
GV2 APNpp+ GV APH02 151 50
GV2 APNpp+ GV APK11 50 434 - -
GV2 APNpp+ GV APH02
+ GV APK11
- - 50 445
Mounting of external operator GV2 AP03 for GV2 LE
1,55
7
53 13584
6
5
4
5
=
=
44,5
Door cut-out
=
54
=
=
=
5
4
(1) For IP65 only.
(1) For IP65 only.
3/86
3
Dimensions,
mounting
GV2 L and GV2 LE
Sets of busbars GV2 G445, GV2 G454, GV2 G472, with terminal block GV2 G05
l p
GV2 G445(4x45mm) 179 45
GV2 G454(4x54mm) 06 54
GV2 G472 (4x7mm) 60 7
a
Number of tap-offs 5 6 7 8
GV2 G445 4 69 314 359
GV2 G454 60 314 368 4
GV2 G472 33 404 476 548
Sets of busbars for GV2 L and GV2 LE
Sets of busbars GV2 Gppp with term. block GV1 G09 Sets of busbars GV2 G245, GV2 G254, GV2 GR272
GV1 G09
3
0
I
GV2 G245(x45mm) 89
GV2 G254(x54mm) 98
GV2 G272(x7mm) 116
Set of busbars GV2 G554 Sets of busbars GV2 G345 and GV2 G354

I
GV2 G345(3x45mm) 134
GV2 G354(3x54mm) 15
6
3
l 3
a
1
8
p
45
6
3
l 3
a
1
8
p
45
ll
260 260 ll
GVLandGVLE
GV1G09
3
8
3/87
3
GV3 L
Dimensions
(1) Blocks GV ANpp , GV ADpp and GV AM11
(2) Blocks GV3 AUpp and GV3 ASpp
Note: Leave a space of 9 mm between 2 circuit-breakers: either an empty space or side-mounting add-on contact blocks.
Side by side mounting is possible up to 40 C.
Mounting
Mounting with Tesys contactor LC1 D40AD65A and
relay LR3 D313365
Side by side mounting with Tesys contactor LC1 D40AD65A
(S-shape busbar system GV3 S)
1
8
5
2
9
9
7
0
1
1
5
136 55
136 119
1
9
5
Mounting on rail AM1 DE200 or AM1 ED201 Panel mounting, using M4 screws
144
6
8
6
4
136 3x4
1
3
7
,
5
37,5
Mounting on pre-slotted plate AM1 PA Set of busbars GV3 G264 Set of busbars GV3 G364
136 18,7 18,7
1
3
7
,
5
AF1 EA4
119
1
6
183
1
6
136
X
1
X
1
1
3
2
6
8
6
4
55 136
X
1
X
1
1
3
2
6
8
6
4
55 9 18
(2)
(1)
9 18
(2)
(1)
Dimensions,
mounting
GV3L
3/88
3
Dimensions,
mounting
GV3LandGK3EF80
Mounting
Mounting of external operator GV3 APN01, GV3 APN02 or GV3 APN04 for motor circuit-breakers GV3 L
0,5...4
43
60
a
6
0
6
= =
Door cut-out
48
= =
=
=
4
8
43,5 (1)
16
1
6
3,5
22
Mounting of external operator GV APH03 for motor circuit-breakers GV3 L
0,5...4
43 b
6
0
6
2
1
3
,
4
73,8
= =
Door cut-out
48
= =
=
=
4
8
43,5 (1)
16
1
6
3,5
22
a b
Mini Maxi Mini Maxi
GV3 APNpp 189 300 - -
GV3 APNpp+ GV APK12 300 481
GV3 APNpp+ GV APH03 - - 00 300
GV3 APNpp+ GV APH03
+ GV APK12
- - 300 49
GK3 EF80
GK3 EF80 + 4 GK2 AX
70 4,5 15
1
2
0
X
1
X
1
105 38 28
4
5
=
=
a
8
0
Number of GK2 AX
0 1 3 4
a 66 748 835 95 101
(1) For IP65 only.
(1) For IP65 only.
3/89
3
Schemes
TeSys protection components0
GVL,GVLE,GV3LandGK3EF80
Magnetic motor circuit-breakers
GV2 Lpp GV2 LEpp GV3 Lpp GK3 EF80

Accessories
GV AE1 GV AE11 GV AE20 GV AED101 and GV AED011



Voltage trips
GV AUppp GV ASppp

Start-Stop signalling contact blocks
GK2 AX10 GK2 AX20 GK2 AX50

Fault signalling contact blocks
GK2 AX12 GK2 AX22 GK2 AX52

2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
3
1
4
1
2
1
1
OR
1
3
1
4
1
2
1
1
OR
1
3
1
4
2
2
2
1
1
3
1
4
2
2
2
1
1
3
1
4
2
3
2
4
1
3
1
4
2
3
2
4
9
7
9
8
2
3
2
4
9
7
9
8
2
1
2
2
9
7
9
8
2
3
2
4
9
7
9
8
2
1
2
2
5
3
5
4
9
6
9
5
5
3
5
4
9
6
9
5
5
2
5
1
9
6
9
5
5
2
5
1
9
6
9
5
9
7
9
8
5
3
5
4
9
7
9
8
5
3
5
4
9
7
9
8
5
1
5
2
9
7
9
8
5
1
5
2
(
6
2
)
3
2
(
6
1
)
3
1
4
3
(
7
3
)
4
4
(
7
4
)
(
6
2
)
3
2
(
6
1
)
3
1
4
3
(
7
3
)
4
4
(
7
4
)
(
6
4
)
3
4
(
6
3
)
3
3
4
3
(
7
3
)
4
4
(
7
4
)
(
6
4
)
3
4
(
6
3
)
3
3
4
3
(
7
3
)
4
4
(
7
4
)
0
5
0
6
0
8
0
5
0
6
0
8
D
1
D
2
D
1
D
2
C
1
C
2
C
1
C
2
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
2
3
2
4
1
3
1
4
2
3
2
4
2
2
2
1
1
3
1
4
2
2
2
1
1
3
1
4
9
7
9
8
9
7
9
8
9
7
9
8
0
7
0
8
9
7
9
8
0
7
0
8
9
7
9
8
0
6
0
5
9
7
9
8
0
6
0
5
3/90
3
Applications Protection of industrial equipment control circuits and of single-phase loads Protection of transformers
Single-phase y 5000 VA/415 V 3-phase y 10 kVA/415 V
Primary Secondary

Tripping threshold on short-circuit 57In 116In About0In
Operational current 05and1A 050A 053A
Maximum operational voltage 415V 50V 415V 690V
Number of poles 1 1+neutral 1+neutral 3
Breaking capacity (Icu) conforming to IEC 60947-2 50kAat415V 1550kAat415V 1550kAat50V 1550kAat415V 1550kAat50V 15100kAat415V
Device type GB2 C GB2 CB GB2 CD GB2 DB GB2 DB GB2 CD GV2 RT
Pages 3/97 3/96 3/96 3/96 3/96 3/96 3/51
Protection components
Thermal-magneticcircuit-breakersTeSysGB
fortheprotectionofcontrolcircuits,
solenoidvalvesandtransformers
Selection guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3/91
3
Applications Protection of industrial equipment control circuits and of single-phase loads Protection of transformers
Single-phase y 5000 VA/415 V 3-phase y 10 kVA/415 V
Primary Secondary

Tripping threshold on short-circuit 57In 116In About0In
Operational current 05and1A 050A 053A
Maximum operational voltage 415V 50V 415V 690V
Number of poles 1 1+neutral 1+neutral 3
Breaking capacity (Icu) conforming to IEC 60947-2 50kAat415V 1550kAat415V 1550kAat50V 1550kAat415V 1550kAat50V 15100kAat415V
Device type GB2 C GB2 CB GB2 CD GB2 DB GB2 DB GB2 CD GV2 RT
Pages 3/97 3/96 3/96 3/96 3/96 3/96 3/51
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3/9
3
Presentation
GBthermal-magneticcircuit-breakersprotectandisolatethecontrolcircuitsof
industrialequipmentwithcontactorcoils,transformers
Theyprotectandisolatesingle-phaseauxiliarycircuitssuchassolenoidvalves,
electro-brakes,batterychargers,suppliedfromthecontrolcircuitvoltage
GB2 CB, GB2 CD, GB2 DB

1ratingsareavailable,from05to0A,insingle-pole(GBCB),single-pole+
neutral(GBCD)and-pole(GBDB)versions
Theyhaveamagnetictrippingthresholdsetatbetween1and16Intowithstandthe
currentpeaksgeneratedbymanyindustrialcomponents
GB2 CS
ratingsareavailable,05and1A,insingle-poleversion
Themagnetictrippingthresholdissetbetween5and7In
Functions, installation
Clip-on fxing onto all types of 35 mm 5rails,on4railsandonTelequick
mountingplates
UpstreamanddownstreammarkingbymeansofAB1clip-inmarkers
ClearindicationofIandOpositionsontheoperator
Tamper-proof device which requires no special maintenance (fxed magnetic and
thermaltrippingthresholds)
Selection for the protection of circuits supplied by transformers

Single-phasetransformers
Magnetisingpeak:0In
Operationofmagnetictrips:13In
Power Primary (1) Secondary

VA 220/240 V 380/415 V 24 V 48 V 110 V 220 V
40 GBDB05 GBDB05 GBCD07 GBCD06 GBCD05 GBCD05
400 GBDB08 GBDB07 GBCD GBCD14 GBCD09 GBCD07
630 GBDB10 GBDB08 GBCD1 GBCD1 GBCD08
1000 GBDB14 GBDB09 GBCD16 GBCD10
1600 GBDB0 GBDB14 GBCD14
2000 GBDB1 GBDB14 GBCD GBCD16
2500 GBDB GBDB0 GBCD0
3000 GBDB GBDB0 GBCD1
4000 GBDB1 GBCD
5000 GBDB
(1) If the breaking capacity of the GB2isinsuffcient,useaGV2 RT with 2 poles connected in
series, see page 3/51.
fortheprotectionofindustrialequipmentcontrol
circuits
Presentation, selection
Characteristics:
pages3/93to3/95
References:
pages3/96and3/97
Dimensions:
page3/97
Schemes:
page3/97
Characteristics:
pages3/93to3/95
References:
pages3/96and3/97
Dimensions:
page3/97
Schemes:
page3/97
3/93
3
Circuit-breaker type GB2 CB GB2 CD GB2 DB GB2 CS
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC60947-1,947-,EN60947-1,60947-
Product certifcations CSA,NEMKO,UL NEMKO,UL
Protective treatment TC
Shock resistance ConformingtoIEC60068--7 gnfor0ms
Vibration resistance ConformingtoIEC60068--6 5gn(5110Hz)
around the device
Storage C -40+80
Operation C -0+60
Flame resistance ConformingtoIEC60695--1 C 960
Operating position Inrelationtonormal
verticalmountingplane

GB2 CB,CD, CS GB2 DB
Cabling Minimum c.s.a. Maximum c.s.a.
Solidcable mm
2
1x075 1x6orx4
2
1x075 1x4orx5
Utilisation category ConformingtoIEC60947- A A A A
(Ue)
ConformingtoIEC60947- V 415(1) 50 415 415(1)
ConformingtoCSAC-Nr14
andUL1077
V 77 77
Rated operational frequency ConformingtoIEC60947- Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
voltage (Uimp)
ConformingtoIEC60947- kV 4 4 4 4
Total power dissipated per pole W 19
Mechanical and
electrical durability
CO:Closing-Opening C.O. 8000 8000 8000 8000
Operational current
correction coeffcient
(aorc)
Accordingtothepermissible
ambienttemperature
C - 20 - 10 0 + 10 + 20 + 30 + 40 + 50 + 60
Correction coeffcient 1 115 11 105 1 095 090 085 080
Tripping threshold Ofthemagnetictrips 116In 116In 116In 57In
(1) One GB2 circuit-breaker on each live conductor.
Tripping curves
Average operating time at 20 C without prior current fow (cold state)
GB2 CB, GB2 CD, GB2 DB GB2 CS

1,05
1,5
2 3 4 5 6 8
10
1
5
2
20
10
100
50
1
5
2
20
10
1
5
2
20
10
60
120
500
200
100 x In 1,05
1,5
2 3 4 5 6 8
10
1
5
2
20
10
100
50
1
5
2
20
10
1
5
2
20
10
60
120
500
200
100 x In
M
i
l
l
i
s
e
c
o
n
d
s
S
e
c
o
n
d
s
M
i
n
u
t
e
s
1,05
1,5
2 3 4 5 6 8
10
1
5
2
20
10
100
50
1
5
2
20
10
1
5
2
20
10
60
120
500
200
100 x In 1,05
1,5
2 3 4 5 6 8
10
1
5
2
20
10
100
50
1
5
2
20
10
1
5
2
20
10
60
120
500
200
100 x In
M
i
l
l
i
s
e
c
o
n
d
s
S
e
c
o
n
d
s
M
i
n
u
t
e
s
1,05
1,5
2 3 4 56 8
10
1
5
2
20
10
100
50
1
5
2
20
10
1
5
2
20
10
60
120
500
200
100 x In
M
i
l
l
i
s
e
c
o
n
d
s
S
e
c
o
n
d
s
M
i
n
u
t
e
s
1,05
1,5
2 3 4 56 8
10
1
5
2
20
10
100
50
1
5
2
20
10
1
5
2
20
10
60
120
500
200
100 x In
M
i
l
l
i
s
e
c
o
n
d
s
S
e
c
o
n
d
s
M
i
n
u
t
e
s
circuits
Characteristics
Presentation,selection:
page3/9
References:
pages3/96and3/97
Dimensions:
page3/97
Schemes:
page3/97
page3/9
References:
pages3/96and3/97
Dimensions:
page3/97
Schemes:
page3/97
3/94
3
Circuit-breaker type GB2
CB05 CB06 CB07 CB08 CB09 CB10 CB12 CB14 CB16 CB20 CB21 CB22
Rating A 05 1 3 4 5 6 8 10 1 16 0
Breaking capacity
a50/60Hz
110V Icu kA 50 50 15 10 6 3 3 3
Ics%(1) 100 50 50 50 50 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
30/40V Icu kA 50 50 15 3 3 15 15 15 15 15 15
Ics%(1) 5 5 5 50 50 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
400/415V Icu kA 50 50 15 3 3 15 15 15 15 15 15
Ics%(1) 5 5 5 50 50 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
ifIsc>breakingcapacityIcu
110V aM A
g g
0 5 5 40 40 50 50 63 63 63
gG A
g g
5 3 3 50 50 63 63 80 80 80
30/40V aM A
g g
16 0 0 3 3 40 40 50 50 50
gG A
g g
5 3 3 40 40 50 50 63 63 63
400/415V aM A
g g
16 0 0 3 3 40 40 50 50 50
gG A
g g
5 3 3 40 40 50 50 63 63 63
CD05 CD06 CD07 CD08 CD09 CD10 CD12 CD14 CD16 CD20 CD21 CD22
Rating A 05 1 3 4 5 6 8 10 1 16 0
Breaking capacity
a50/60Hz
110V Icu kA 50 50 15 10 6 3 3 3
Ics%(1) 100 50 50 50 50 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
30/40V Icu kA 50 50 15 3 3 15 15 15 15 15 15
Ics%(1) 5 5 5 50 50 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
iflsc>breakingcapacityIcu
110V aM A
g g
0 5 5 40 40 50 50 63 63 63
gG A
g g
5 3 3 50 50 63 63 80 80 80
30/40V aM A
g g
16 0 0 3 3 40 40 50 50 50
gG A
g g
5 3 3 40 40 50 50 63 63 63
DB05 DB06 DB07 DB08 DB09 DB10 DB12 DB14 DB16 DB20 DB21 DB22
Rating A 05 1 3 4 5 6 8 10 1 16 0
Breaking capacity
a50/60Hz
110V lcu kA 50 50 15 10 6 3 3 3
Ics%(1) 100 50 50 50 50 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
30/40V lcu kA 50 50 15 3 3 15 15 15 15 15 15
Ics%(1) 5 5 5 50 50 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
400/415V lcu kA 50 50 15 3 3 15 15 15 15 15 15
Ics%(1) 5 5 5 50 50 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
iflsc>breakingcapacityIcu
110V aM A
g g
0 5 5 40 40 50 50 63 63 63
gG A
g g
5 3 3 50 50 63 63 80 80 80
30/40V aM A
g g
16 0 0 3 3 40 40 50 50 50
gG A
g g
5 3 3 40 40 50 50 63 63 63
400/415V aM A
g g
16 0 0 3 3 40 40 50 50 50
gG A
g g
5 3 3 40 40 50 50 63 63 63
(1) As % of Icu.
g Fuse not required. Breaking capacity Icu > lsc.
circuits
page3/9
References:
page3/96
Dimensions:
page3/97
Schemes:
page3/97
page3/9
References:
page3/96
Dimensions:
page3/97
Schemes:
page3/97
3/95
3
pp05 pp06 pp07 pp08 pp09 pp10 pp12 pp14 pp16 pp20 pp21 pp22
Breaking capacity (lcu)
c
4V kA 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
48V kA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Operational current
c
DC-1 4V A 05 1 3 4 5 6 8 10 1 16 0
48V A 05 1 3 4 5 6 8 10 1 16 0
DC-13 4V A 05 1 3 4 5 6 8 10 1 16 0
48V A 05 1 3 4 5 6 8
CS05 CS06
Rating A 05 1
Breaking capacity
a50/60Hz
110V lcu kA 50 50
lcs%(1) 100 100
30/40V lcu kA 50 50
lcs% (1) 5 5
400/415V
(2)
lcu kA 50 50
lcs%(1) 5 5
Breaking capacity (lcu)
c
4V kA 15 15
48V kA 1 1
Operational current
c
DC-1 4V A 05 1
48V A 05 1
DC-13 4V A 05 1
48V A 05 1
Maximum
permissible
line length for
star-delta starting
(lengthofcable
containingor
moreconductors)
Withcontactors
LCpD09D18
Operationalvoltage V 48 110 230 48 110 230
Csa 060mm
m (3) 31 365 6 85 30
075mm
m (3) 39 460 8 110 90

1mm
m (3) 5 610 10 145 380

15mm
m (3) 78 910 15 0 570

5mm
m (3) 130 150 6 360 950

4mm
m (3) 00 400 41 580 1500

Withcontactors
LCpD5D3
Csa 060mm
m (3) (3) 30 (3) 56 30

075mm
m (3) (3) 90 (3) 70 90

1mm
m (3) (3) 390 (3) 95 380

15mm
m (3) (3) 580 (3) 140 570

5mm
m (3) (3) 970 (3) 30 950

4mm
m (3) (3) 1500 (3) 375 1500

Withcontactors
LCpD40D80
Csa 060mm
m (3) (3) 46 (3) 13 100

075mm
m (3) (3) 60 (3) 17 130

1mm
m (3) (3) 80 (3) 170

15mm
m (3) (3) 10 (3) 34 50

5mm
m (3) (3) 190 (3) 56 40

4mm
m (3) (3) 310 (3) 90 680

(1) As % of Icu.
(2) One GB2 CS circuit-breaker on each live conductor.
(3) Use relays.
circuits
page3/9
References:
pages3/96and3/97
Dimensions:
page3/97
Schemes:
page3/97
page3/9
References:
pages3/96and3/97
Dimensions:
page3/97
Schemes:
page3/97
3/96
3
Circuit-breakers with magnetic tripping threshold: 12 to 16 In
Single-pole
Conventional
rated thermal
current Ith (1)
Magnetic
tripping current
Id 20 %
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
A A kg
05 66 6 GB2 CB05 0060
1 14 6 GB2 CB06 0060
6 6 GB2 CB07 0060
3 40 6 GB2 CB08 0060
4 5 6 GB2 CB09 0060
5 66 6 GB2 CB10 0060
6 83 6 GB2 CB12 0060
8 108 6 GB2 CB14 0060
10 138 6 GB2 CB16 0060
1 165 6 GB2 CB20 0060
16 0 6 GB2 CB21 0060
0 70 6 GB2 CB22 0060
Single-pole + neutral
Conventional
rated thermal
current Ith (1)
Magnetic
tripping current
Id 20 %
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
A A kg
05 66 6 GB2 CD05 0070
1 14 6 GB2 CD06 0070
6 6 GB2 CD07 0070
3 40 6 GB2 CD08 0070
4 5 6 GB2 CD09 0070
5 66 6 GB2 CD10 0070
6 83 6 GB2 CD12 0070
8 108 6 GB2 CD14 0070
10 138 6 GB2 CD16 0070
1 165 6 GB2 CD20 0070
16 0 6 GB2 CD21 0070
0 70 6 GB2 CD22 0070
2-pole
Conventional
rated thermal
current Ith (1)
Magnetic
tripping current
Id 20 %
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
A A kg
05 66 3 GB2 DB05 0115
1 14 3 GB2 DB06 0115
6 3 GB2 DB07 0115
3 40 3 GB2 DB08 0115
4 50 3 GB2 DB09 0115
5 66 3 GB2 DB10 0115
6 83 3 GB2 DB12 0115
8 108 3 GB2 DB14 0115
10 138 3 GB2 DB16 0115
1 165 3 GB2 DB20 0115
16 0 3 GB2 DB21 0115
0 70 3 GB2 DB22 0115
(1) Conforming to IEC 60947-1.
5
3
4
6
8
GB2 CBpp
5
3
4
6
8
GB2 CBpp
5
3
4
6
9
GB2 CDpp
5
3
4
6
9
GB2 CDpp
5
3
4
7
0
GB2 DBpp
5
3
4
7
0
GB2 DBpp
circuits
References
page3/9
Characteristics:
pages3/93to3/95
Dimensions:
page3/97
Schemes:
page3/97
page3/9
Characteristics:
pages3/93to3/95
Dimensions:
page3/97
Schemes:
page3/97
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3/97
3
Circuit-breakers with magnetic tripping threshold: 5 to 7 In
Single-pole
Conventional
rated thermal
current Ith (1)
Magnetic
tripping current
Id 20 %
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
A A kg
05 33 6 GB2 CS05 0055
1 6 6 GB2 CS06 0055
(1) Conforming to IEC 60947-1.
Accessories for circuit-breakers GB2-CB, DB and CS
Description Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Busbarsetforsupplyto
10GBDBor
0GBCBorGBCSwithconnectors
1 GB2 G210 0100
Supplyconnector 10 GB2 G01
Dimensions
GB2 CBpp, GB2 CDpp, GB2 CSpp GB2 DBpp

Marking: up to twelve AB1 R clip-in markers.
Schemes
GB2 CBpp GB2 CDpp GB2 DBpp GB2 CSpp

5
3
4
7
1
GB2 CSpp
5
3
4
7
1
GB2 CSpp
7
4
15 82
82
75
79
67
7
4
15 82
82
75
79
67
30
7
4
85
85
78
82
70
30
7
4
85
85
78
82
70
2
/
T
1
1
/
L
1
2
/
T
1
1
/
L
1
2
/
T
1
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2

(
1
3
)

4
/
T
2

(
1
4
)
2
/
T
1
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2

(
1
3
)

4
/
T
2

(
1
4
)
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
2
/
T
1
1
/
L
1
2
/
T
1
1
/
L
1
circuits
References (continued),
dimensions,
schemes
page3/9
Characteristics:
pages3/93to3/95
page3/9
Characteristics:
pages3/93to3/95
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4

Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors for standard
applications
Completeunits page 4/8
Switchbodiesandadd-onmodules page 4/9
Operatorsandaccessories page 4/11 and page 4/17
Dimensions,mountingandschemes page 4/22
VARIO switch disconnectors for high performance
applications
Completeunits page 4/12
Switchbodies,add-onmodulesandauxiliarycontacts page 4/14
Operators page 4/17
TeSys DF fuse carriers for the protection of control
circuits or transformers
FusecarriersfortheNorthAmericanmarket,conforming
toULandCSAstandards page 4/32
TeSys GK1 fuse carriers for motor protection
Operatorsandaccessories page 4/37
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Contents
4 - TeSysprotectioncomponents:
fuseprotection
4/1
4
TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses for motor
or variable speed drive protection
Auxiliarycontacts page 4/60
Switch-disconnector-fusesfortheNorthAmericanmarket,conforming
toULandCSAstandards page 4/68
Cartridge fuses for protection of equipment with
current peaks
TypeaM page 4/74
TypegG page 4/76
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
4/
4
Selection guide
Applications Mini-Vario and Vario rotary switch disconnectors from 12 to 175 A are suitable for on-
load making and breaking of resistive or mixed resistive and inductive circuits where
frequent operation is required. They can also be used for direct switching of motors in
utilisation categories AC-3 and DC-3 specifc to motors.
Vario switch disconnectors are suitable for isolator applications with fully visible
breaking (since the handle cannot indicate the open position unless all the contacts
are actually open and separated by the appropriate isolating distance) and it is possible
to padlock the handles in the open position.
Switch type Mini-VARIOforstandardapplications VARIOforhighperformanceapplications
Thermal current 1A 0A 1A 0A 5A
Operational current
AC-23 A at 400 Volts
81A 11A 81A 11A 145A
Number of poles 35 36
Number of auxiliary contacts 1or 14
Switch fxing Screw fxing, 1 or 4 holes
Fromthefront Fixing:1x5holeor4x55screws
Fromtheback Clip-onmountingon7rail Clip-onmountingon7 rail or screw fxing
Reversible terminal blocks Yes
Door mounting, direct operator Yes
Mounting at back of enclosure,
indirect operator with door interlock
Yes
Enclosure reference

VpDN 12 VpDN 20 VpD 02
VpF 02
VpD 01
VpF 01
VpD 0
VpF 0
Product reference VCFN 12GE VCFN 20GE VpF 02GE VpF 01GE VpF 0GE
Pages /4and4/8 4/1and4/13
Mini-VARIOandVARIOswitchdisconnectors
Mini-Vario and Vario rotary switch disconnectors from 12 to 175 A are suitable for on-load making and breaking of resistive or mixed resistive and
inductive circuits where frequent operation is required.
They can also be used for direct switching of motors in utilisation categories AC-3 and DC-3 specifc to motors.
Vario switch disconnectors are suitable for isolator applications with fully visible breaking (since the handle cannot indicate the open position unless
all the contacts are actually open and separated by the appropriate isolating distance) and it is possible to padlock the handles in the open position.
VARIOforhighperformanceapplications
3A 40A 63A 80A 15A 175A
18A 9A 415A 57A 685A 83A
36 3+N+PE
14
Screw fxing, 1 or 4 holes
Fixing:1x5holeor4x55screws Fixing4x55screws
Clip-onmountingon7 rail or screw fxing Screw fxing
Yes
Yes
Yes
VpD 1
VpF 1
VpD 2
VpF 2
VpF 3 VpF 4 VpF 5 VpF 6
VpF 1GE VpF 2GE VpF 3GE VpF 4GE VpF 5GE VpF 6GE
/4and4/8and4/13
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
4/3
4
Applications Mini-Vario and Vario rotary switch disconnectors from 12 to 175 A are suitable for on-
load making and breaking of resistive or mixed resistive and inductive circuits where
frequent operation is required. They can also be used for direct switching of motors in
utilisation categories AC-3 and DC-3 specifc to motors.
Vario switch disconnectors are suitable for isolator applications with fully visible
breaking (since the handle cannot indicate the open position unless all the contacts
are actually open and separated by the appropriate isolating distance) and it is possible
to padlock the handles in the open position.
Switch type Mini-VARIOforstandardapplications VARIOforhighperformanceapplications
Thermal current 1A 0A 1A 0A 5A
Operational current
AC-23 A at 400 Volts
81A 11A 81A 11A 145A
Number of poles 35 36
Number of auxiliary contacts 1or 14
Switch fxing Screw fxing, 1 or 4 holes
Fromthefront Fixing:1x5holeor4x55screws
Fromtheback Clip-onmountingon7rail Clip-onmountingon7 rail or screw fxing
Reversible terminal blocks Yes
Door mounting, direct operator Yes
Mounting at back of enclosure,
indirect operator with door interlock
Yes
Enclosure reference

VpDN 12 VpDN 20 VpD 02
VpF 02
VpD 01
VpF 01
VpD 0
VpF 0
Product reference VCFN 12GE VCFN 20GE VpF 02GE VpF 01GE VpF 0GE
Pages /4and4/8 4/1and4/13
Mini-Vario and Vario rotary switch disconnectors from 12 to 175 A are suitable for on-load making and breaking of resistive or mixed resistive and
inductive circuits where frequent operation is required.
They can also be used for direct switching of motors in utilisation categories AC-3 and DC-3 specifc to motors.
Vario switch disconnectors are suitable for isolator applications with fully visible breaking (since the handle cannot indicate the open position unless
all the contacts are actually open and separated by the appropriate isolating distance) and it is possible to padlock the handles in the open position.
VARIOforhighperformanceapplications
3A 40A 63A 80A 15A 175A
18A 9A 415A 57A 685A 83A
36 3+N+PE
14
Screw fxing, 1 or 4 holes
Fixing:1x5holeor4x55screws Fixing4x55screws
Clip-onmountingon7 rail or screw fxing Screw fxing
Yes
Yes
Yes
VpD 1
VpF 1
VpD 2
VpF 2
VpF 3 VpF 4 VpF 5 VpF 6
VpF 1GE VpF 2GE VpF 3GE VpF 4GE VpF 5GE VpF 6GE
/4and4/8and4/13
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
4/4
4
solutions
Characteristics
Environment
Switch type (bare type) VN 12
VZN 12
V02
VZ 02
VN 20
VZN 20
V01
VZ 01
V0
VZ 0
VVD 0
VVE 0
V1
VZ 1
VVD 1
VVE 1
Conforming to standards IEC60947-3
Product certifcations UL,CSA,GL
Protective treatment TC
withprotectionshroud

IP0conformingtoIEC6059
Ambient air temperature C -0+50
Flame resistance C 960conformingtoIEC60695--1
Shock resistance
1/sinewave=11msconformingtoIEC60068--7
gn

15 30 15 30
10150HzconformingtoIEC60068--6
gn

5 1
Electrical characteristics, a.c. operation
VZN 12
V02
VZ 02
VN 20
VZN 20
V01
VZ 01
V0
VZ 0
VVD 0
VVE 0
V1
VZ 1
VVD 1
VVE 1
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 6 8 6 8
Conventional thermal currents in free air (lth)
and rated uninterrupted (lu)
A

1 0 5 3
Conventional thermal current in enclosure(lthe) A 10 16 0 5
Rated operational
power and current
AC-1A/A 30690V A 1 0 5 3
AC-3A 30V A/kW 106/3 14/4 197/55
40V A/kW 106/3 14/4 199/55 189/55
400V A/kW 81/4 11/55 145/75 18/11
415V A/kW 81/4 11/55 14/75 1/11
500V A/kW 89/55 119/75 167/11
690V A/kW 86/75 13/11 175/15
Rated
operational power
AC-3 30/40V kW 15 3 4
400/415V kW 3 4 55 75
500V kW 4 55 75
690V kW 4 55 75 11
Intermittent duty class 30
Characteristics
in normal operating
conditions
Ratedmakingcapacity
AC-1A/A/3A(Irms)
A/
400V
10 00 50 30
Ratedbreakingcapacity
AC-1A/A/3A(Irms)
A/
400V
10 00 50
Short-circuit
characteristics
Permissiblermsshorttimerating(Icw) A/
400V/1s
140 300 140 300 384
Ratedmakingcapacityunder
short-circuitconditions(Icm)Ipeak
kA/
400V
05 1 05 1
Ratedconditional
short-circuitcurrent(Irms)
withaM/gGfuses
kA/
400V
6 10 6 10
A 1 0 5 35
Characteristics
4/5
4
0
V2
VZ 2
VVD 2
VVE 2
V3
VZ 3
VVD 3
VVE 3
V4
VZ 4
VVD 4
VVE 4
V5 V6 VZ7
VZ2 0
VZN 05
VZN 06
IEC60947-3 IEC60947-5
UL,CSA,GL
TC
IP0conformingtoIEC6059
-0+50
960conformingtoIEC60695--1
30
1
V2
VZ 2
VVD 2
VVE 2
V3
VZ 3
VVD 3
VVE 3
V4
VZ 4
VVD 4
VVE 4
V5 V6 VZ7
VZ2 0
VZN 05
VZN 06
690
8 6
40 63 80 15 175 1 6
3 50 63 100 140 10 4
40 63 80 15 160 le/AC-15
58/75 503/15 61/185 719/ 966/30 6A
48/75 48/15 585/185 68/ 97/30 6A
9/15 415/ 57/30 685/37 83/45 4A
8/15 40/ 55/30 66/37 80/45 4A
85/185 44/30 54/37 645/45 79/55 A
175/15 5/ 33/30 4/37 49/45 1A
55 11 15 30
11 185 30 37
15 30 37 45
11 185 30 37
30
400 630 800 150 1750
30 500 640 1000 1400
480 756 960 1500 100
1 1 8
10 1
50 63 80 15 00 16 16
4/6
4
solutions
Characteristics
Electrical characteristics, d.c. operation
VZN 12
V02
VZ 02
VN 20
VZN 20
V01
VZ 01
V0
VZ 0
VVD 0
VVE 0
V1
VZ 1
VVD 1
VVE 1
Rated
operational current
DC-1(L/R=1ms)
4V 1contact A 1 0 5 3
contacts A 1 0 5 3
3contacts A 1 0 5 3
contacts A 1 0 5 3
3contacts A 1 0 5 3
contacts A 1 0 5 3
3contacts A 1 0 5 3
110V 1contact A 15 9 10
contacts A 8 10 1 16
3contacts A 1 0 5 3
0V 1contact A 15 5 3
contacts A 7 8 10 1
3contacts A 10 14 16 0
50V 1contact A 06 07 08 1
contacts A 3 4 6 8
3contacts A 8 10 1 16
Rated
operational current
DC-toDC-5
(L/R=1ms)
contacts A 1 0 5 3
3contacts A 1 0 5 3
contacts A 1 0 5 3
3contacts A 1 0 5 3
60V 1contact A 10 14 16 0
contacts A 1 0 5 3
3contacts A 1 0 5 3
110V 1contact A 15 5 3
contacts A 3 4 5 6
3contacts A 1 0 5 3
0V 1contact A 04 05 05 08
contacts A 14 15 15
3contacts A 1 3 4
50V 1contact A 03 04 05 08
contacts A 04 06 08 1
3contacts A 1 4 16
VZN 12
V02
VZ 02
VN 20
VZN 20
V01
VZ 01
V0
VZ 0
VVD 0
VVE 0
V1
VZ 1
VVD 1
VVE 1
(millionsofoperatingcycles)
005 01 005 01
Electrical durability in cat. AC-21
(millionsofoperatingcycles)

005 01 005 01
Electrical durability in cat. DC-1 to 5
(operatingcycles)
30000
Suitable for isolation Yes
Cabling Flexiblecable+cableend mm
2
4 6 4 6
Solidcable mm
2
4 10 4 10
Tightening torque N.m 07 1 07 1
4/7
4
0
V2
VZ 2
VVD 2
VVE 2
V3
VZ 3
VVD 3
VVE 3
V4
VZ 4
VVD 4
VVE 4
V5 V6 VZ7
VZ2 0
VZN 05
VZN 06
40 63 80 15 175 8(le/DC-11)
40 63 80 15 175
40 63 80 15 175
40 63 80 15 175 8(le/DC-11)
40 63 80 15 175
40 63 80 15 175
35 40 50 60 70 4(le/DC-11)
40 63 80 15 175
40 63 80 15 175
1 0 5 30 1 (le/DC-11)
0 63 80 15 175
40 63 80 15 175
4 6 8 1 15 1(le/DC-11)
14 5 30 40 50
5 30 40 80 100
4 5 3 10 08(le/DC-11)
1 0 5 30 40
0 30 40 50 61
40 63 80 15 175
40 63 80 15 175
40 63 80 15 175
40 63 80 15 175
40 63 80 15 175
40 63 80 15 175
5 40 50 60 70
40 63 80 15 175
40 63 80 15 175
5 6 8 10 1
8 10 0 4
40 50 63 70 80
1 15 4
3 4 6 7 8
7 10 15 16 13
1 1 15 16 18
3 6 7 8
6 8 10 1 14
V2
VZ 2
VVD 2
VVE 2
V3
VZ 3
VVD 3
VVE 3
V4
VZ 4
VVD 4
VVE 4
V5 V6 VZ7
VZ2 0
VZN 05
VZN 06
01 003 01 005
01 003 01(AC-15) 005
30000 30000(DC-11)
Yes
6 16 70 x07515
10 5 95 x15
1 4 6 07
4/8
4
TeSys protection components 4
Mini-VARIOswitchdisconnectors
forstandardapplications
Completeunits
3-polerotaryswitchdisconnectors,1to0A
Markingonoperator
Padlockableoperatinghandle(padlocksnotsupplied)
DegreeofprotectionIP65
Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors
for door mounting
Operator lth Reference Weight
Handle Front plate Fixing
mm mm A kg
Red, padlockable
(4to8)
Yellow
60x60
5
1 VCDN 12 0177
0 VCDN 20 0177
Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors for mounting
at back of an enclosure (1)
mm mm A kg
Red, padlockable
(4to8)
Yellow
60x60
5
1 VCCDN 12 0334
0 VCCDN 20 0334
Main switch disconnectors for door mounting
mm mm A kg
Black, padlockable
(4to8)
Black
60x60
5
1 VBDN 12 0177
0 VBDN 20 0177
(1)SwitchessuppliedwithashaftextensionVZN 17andadoorinterlockplateKZ 32
(seepage4/11)
b
b
b
b
5
1
1
1
5
6
5
1
1
1
5
7
5
1
1
1
5
8
VCDN 20
VCCDN 20
VBDN 20
5
1
1
1
5
6
5
1
1
1
5
7
5
1
1
1
5
8
VCDN 20
VCCDN 20
VBDN 20
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/and4/3
Schemes:
page4/3
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/and4/3
Schemes:
page4/3
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/and4/3
Schemes:
page4/3
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/and4/3
Schemes:
page4/3
References 4
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
4/9
4
Switch bodies
Description Rating
A
Reference Weight
kg
3-pole switch disconnectors 1 VN 12 0110
0 VN 20 0110
Add-on modules
Description Rating
A
Reference Weight
kg
Main pole modules 1 VZN 12 000
0 VZN 20 000
Neutral pole module

with early make and
late break contacts
1and0 VZN 11 000
Earthing module 1and0 VZN 14 0016

modules
1N/Olatemakecontact VZN 05 000
1N/Cearlybreakcontact VZN 06 000
Input terminal
protection shrouds
Foradd-onpolemodulesor
auxiliarycontactblockmodules
(single-poleshroud)
VZN 26 0004
Forswitchbodies
(3-poleshroud)
VZN 08 0007
Maximum number of add-on modules that can be ftted on

a switch body
VZN1orVZN0 + + VZN1orVZN0
VN 12 or
or or VZN11 + VZN14
VN 20 or
VZN05orVZN06 VZN05orVZN06
VN 20
VZN 11
VZN 14
VZN 05
VZN 26
VZN 08
8
1
8
0
1
5
8
0
5
8
6
5
8
0
5
8
7
5
8
0
5
8
8
8
1
8
0
5
8
1
8
0
6
VN 20
VZN 11
VZN 14
VZN 05
VZN 26
VZN 08
8
1
8
0
1
5
8
0
5
8
6
5
8
0
5
8
7
5
8
0
5
8
8
8
1
8
0
5
8
1
8
0
6
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/and4/3
Schemes:
page4/3
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/and4/3
Schemes:
page4/3
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/and4/3
Schemes:
page4/3
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/and4/3
Schemes:
page4/3
Switchbodies,add-onmodules
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
4/10
4
4
VZN pp VN 12, VN 20
VZN pp
VZN 14
VZN 17, VZN 30
KZ 32, KZ 83
KCD 1PZ
KCC 1YZ
KAD 1PZ
VZN pp VN 12, VN 20
VZN pp
VZN 14
VZN 17, VZN 30
KZ 32, KZ 83
KCD 1PZ
KCC 1YZ
KAD 1PZ
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
4/11
4
Operatorsandaccessories
Markingonoperator
Operator fxing by 1 22.5 hole; for other operators see pages 4/17 and 4/19.
Forotheraccessoriesandemptyenclosures,seepages4/0,4/1and/5
Operators for main and Emergency stop

Handle Front plate
mm
Reference Weight
kg
Red, padlockable
with 1 padlock
(4to6)
Yellow
45x45
KCC 1YZ 0050
Red, padlockable
(4to8)
Yellow
60x60
KCD 1PZ 0084
Operators for main switch disconnectors

Handle Front plate
mm
Reference Weight
kg
Black, padlockable
(4to8)
Black
60x60
KAD 1PZ 0084
Accessories for door interlocking

For rear fxing switch disconnectors mounted at the back of an enclosure, in
addition to a direct operator
Description Front
plate
Distance
enclosure
back/door
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
mm mm kg
Shaft extensions 300330 1 VZN 17 0100
400430 1 VZN 30 0130
Door interlock plate 45x45or

60x60
5 KZ 32 0170
Plate for door mounting 45x45or

60x60
5 KZ 83 005
b
b
b
b
b
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/and4/3
Schemes:
page4/3
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/and4/3
Schemes:
page4/3
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/and4/3
Schemes:
page4/3
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/and4/3
Schemes:
page4/3
References 4
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
4/1
4
VARIOswitchdisconnectors
forhighperformanceapplications
Completeunits
Markingonoperator
for door mounting
Handle Front plate
mm
Fixing Rating
A
Reference Weight
kg
Red,
padlockable
with up to
3 padlocks
(4to8)
Yellow
60x60
5 1 VCD 02 015
0 VCD 01 015
5 VCD 0 015
3 VCD 1 015
40 VCD 2 015
4screws 1 VCF 02 050
0 VCF 01 050
5 VCF 0 050
3 VCF 1 050
40 VCF 2 050
63 VCF 3 0560
80 VCF 4 0560
Red, long,
padlockable
with up to
3 padlocks
(4to8)
Yellow
90x90
4screws 15 VCF 5 100
175 VCF 6 100

for mounting at back of an enclosure (1)
Handle Front plate
mm
Fixing Rating
A
Reference Weight
kg
Red,
padlockable
with up to
3 padlocks
(4to8)
Yellow
60x60
5 1 VCCD 02 039
0 VCCD 01 039
5 VCCD 0 039
3 VCCD 1 039
40 VCCD 2 039
4screws 1 VCCF 02 057
0 VCCF 01 057
5 VCCF 0 057
3 VCCF 1 057
40 VCCF 2 057
63 VCCF 3 0440
80 VCCF 4 0680
Red, long,
padlockable
with up to
3 padlocks
(4to8)
Yellow
90x90
4screws 15 VCCF 5 130
175 VCCF 6 130
(1) Unit supplied with a shaft extension VZN 17 and a door interlock plate KZ 32 or KZ 74 (see
page 4/20).
b
b
b
b
5
1
1
1
6
1
5
1
1
1
6
0
5
1
1
1
5
9
VCF 0
VCF 5
VCCF 0
5
1
1
1
6
1
5
1
1
1
6
0
5
1
1
1
5
9
VCF 0
VCF 5
VCCF 0
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/4and4/5
Schemes:
page4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/4and4/5
Schemes:
page4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/4and4/5
Schemes:
page4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/4and4/5
Schemes:
page4/5
References 4
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
4/13
4
Completeunits
Markingonoperator
Main switch disconnectors for door mounting

Handle Front plate
mm
Fixing Rating
A
Reference Weight
kg
Black,
padlockable
with up to
3 padlocks
(4to8)
Black
60x60
5 1 VBD 02 015
0 VBD 01 015
5 VBD 0 015
3 VBD 1 015
40 VBD 2 015
4screws 1 VBF 02 050
0 VBF 01 050
5 VBF 0 050
3 VBF 1 050
40 VBF 2 050
63 VBF 3 0560
80 VBF 4 0560
Red, long,
padlockable
with up to
3 padlocks
(4to8)
Black
90x90
4screws 15 VBF 5 100
175 VBF 6 100

For mounting in an enclosure or for modular distribution boards
Handle Front plate
mm
Rating
A
Reference Weight
kg
Red,
padlockable
with 1 padlock
(4to6)
Yellow
45x45
5 VVE 0 050
3 VVE 1 050
40 VVE 2 050
63 VVE 3 0530
80 VVE 4 0530
Main switch disconnectors
For mounting in an enclosure or for modular distribution boards
Handle Front plate
mm
Rating
A
Reference Weight
kg
Black, not
padlockable
Black
45x45
5 VVD 0 050
3 VVD 1 050
40 VVD 2 050
63 VVD 3 0560
80 VVD 4 0560
b
b
b
b
5
8
0
5
3
4
5
1
1
1
6
3
5
1
1
1
6
VBD 0
VBF 4
VVE 1
5
8
0
5
3
4
5
1
1
1
6
3
5
1
1
1
6
VBD 0
VBF 4
VVE 1
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/4and4/5
Schemes:
page4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/4and4/5
Schemes:
page4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/4and4/5
Schemes:
page4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/4and4/5
Schemes:
page4/5
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
4/14
4
Switchbodies,add-onmodules,auxiliarycontacts
(forcustomerassembly)
Switch bodies
Description Rating
A
Reference Weight
kg
3-pole switch disconnectors
(1)
1 V02 000
0 V01 000
5 V0 000
3 V1 000
40 V2 000
63 V3 0500
80 V4 0500
15 V5 0900
175 V6 0900
Add-on modules
Description Rating
A
Reference Weight
kg
Main pole modules 1 VZ 02 0050
0 VZ 01 0050
5 VZ 0 0050
3 VZ 1 0050
40 VZ 2 0050
63 VZ 3 0100
80 VZ 4 0100
Neutral pole modules with
early make and late break
contacts (1)
1to40 VZ 11 0050
63to80 VZ 12 0100
15and175 VZ 13 050
Earthing modules 1to40 VZ 14 0050
63and80 VZ 15 0100
15and175 VZ 16 050
Auxiliary contact block modules
Description Type Reference Weight
kg
modules with
N/O+N/C(2) VZ 7 0050
N/O+N/O VZ 20 0050
(1) Protection shrouds are available if required: see page 4/20.
(2) Late make N/O, early break N/C contacts
5
8
0
5
4
0
5
8
0
5
3
9
5
8
0
5
3
7
5
8
0
5
3
8
5
8
0
5
3
5
5
8
0
5
3
6
V0
V5
VZ 0 VZ 11
VZ 15 VZ 20
5
8
0
5
4
0
5
8
0
5
3
9
5
8
0
5
3
7
5
8
0
5
3
8
5
8
0
5
3
5
5
8
0
5
3
6
V0
V5
VZ 0 VZ 11
VZ 15 VZ 20
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/4and4/5
Schemes:
page4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/4and4/5
Schemes:
page4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/4and4/5
Schemes:
page4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/4and4/5
Schemes:
page4/5
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
4/15
4
Switchbodies,add-onmodules,auxiliarycontacts
switch body
VZ7orVZ0 + V0p
V0
to
V4
+ VZ7orVZ0 VZ7 +
V5
or
V6
+ VZ7
or or or or
VZ11orVZ1 + + VZ11orVZ1 VZ0 + + VZ0
or or or or
VZ14orVZ15 + + VZ14orVZ15 VZ13 + + VZ13
or or or or
VZ0p/VZ0toVZ4 + + VZ0p/VZ0to
VZ4
VZ16 + + VZ16
2 add-on modules on each side of the switch body

VZ0p + VZ0p + V0p + VZ0p + VZ7 or VZ0 or VZ11 or VZ14
VZ0 + VZ0 + V0 + VZ0 + VZ7 or VZ0 or VZ11 or VZ14
VZ + VZ + V2 + VZ + VZ7 or VZ0 or VZ11 or VZ14
Nota : The add-on modules mounted next to the switch body are main pole modules. Maximum
of 3 main pole modules per switch body.
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/4and4/5
Schemes:
page4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/4and4/5
Schemes:
page4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/4and4/5
Schemes:
page4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/4and4/5
Schemes:
page4/5
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
4/16
4
503798
VN 12, VN 20
V02V2
VZN 17, VZN 30
V3, V4
KZ 32, KZ 83
KCp 1YZ
KCp 1LZ
KAp 1BZ
KCp 1PZ
KAp 1PZ
KDp 1PZ
KBp 1PZ
VZ 18, VZ 31
V5, V6
KZ 81
VZ 18, VZ 31
KCF 2PZ
KAF 2PZ
KDF 2PZ
KBF 2PZ
KCF 3PZ
KAF 3PZ
KDF 3PZ
KBF 3PZ
KZ 74
503798
VN 12, VN 20
V02V2
VZN 17, VZN 30
V3, V4
KZ 32, KZ 83
KCp 1YZ
KCp 1LZ
KAp 1BZ
KCp 1PZ
KAp 1PZ
KDp 1PZ
KBp 1PZ
VZ 18, VZ 31
V5, V6
KZ 81
VZ 18, VZ 31
KCF 2PZ
KAF 2PZ
KDF 2PZ
KBF 2PZ
KCF 3PZ
KAF 3PZ
KDF 3PZ
KBF 3PZ
KZ 74
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
4/17
4
Protection components 4
Operators,handlesandfrontplates
Markingonoperator
Handles and front plates for main and Emergency stop

For
switch
body
Operator Reference Weight
Handle Front plate
Dimensions Fixing
mm kg
VN 12, VN 20
V02V2
Red,
padlockable
with1padlock
(4to6)
Yellow
45x45
5 KCC 1YZ 0050
4screws KCE 1YZ 0040
Red,
padlockable
withupto
3padlocks
(4to8)
Yellow
60x60
5 KCD 1PZ 008
4screws KCF 1PZ 0075
V3 and V4 Red,
padlockable
withupto
3padlocks
(4to8)
Yellow
60x60
4screws KCF 2PZ 0070
V5 and V6 Red,long,
padlockable
withupto
3padlocks
(4to8)
Yellow
90x90
4screws KCF 3PZ (1) 0160
Handles and front plates for main switch disconnectors
For
switch
body
Handle Front plate
Dimensions Fixing
mm kg
VN 12, VN 20
V02V2
Black,
padlockable
withupto3
padlocks
(4to8)
Black
60x60
5 KAD 1PZ 008
4screws KAF 1PZ 0075
V3 and V4 Black,
padlockable
withupto
3padlocks
(4to8)
Black
60x60
4screws KAF 2PZ 0070
V5 and V6 Black,long,
padlockable
withupto
3padlocks
(4to8)
Black
90x90
4screws KAF 3PZ (1) 0160
(1) For door mounting of 63 and 80 A switch disconnectors, adapter plate KZ 106 must be
ordered separately (see page 4/20).
b
b
b
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/to4/5
Schemes:
pages4/and4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/to4/5
Schemes:
pages4/and4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/to4/5
Schemes:
pages4/and4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/to4/5
Schemes:
pages4/and4/5
References 4
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
4/18
4
503799
VN 12, VN 20
V02V2
VZN 17, VZN 30
V3, V4
KZ 32, KZ 83
KCp 1YZ
KCp 1LZ
KAp 1BZ
KCp 1PZ
KAp 1PZ
KDp 1PZ
KBp 1PZ
VZ 18, VZ 31
V5, V6
KZ 81
VZ 18, VZ 31
KCF 2PZ
KAF 2PZ
KDF 2PZ
KBF 2PZ
KCF 3PZ
KAF 3PZ
KDF 3PZ
KBF 3PZ
KZ 74
503799
VN 12, VN 20
V02V2
VZN 17, VZN 30
V3, V4
KZ 32, KZ 83
KCp 1YZ
KCp 1LZ
KAp 1BZ
KCp 1PZ
KAp 1PZ
KDp 1PZ
KBp 1PZ
VZ 18, VZ 31
V5, V6
KZ 81
VZ 18, VZ 31
KCF 2PZ
KAF 2PZ
KDF 2PZ
KBF 2PZ
KCF 3PZ
KAF 3PZ
KDF 3PZ
KBF 3PZ
KZ 74
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
4/19
4
Operators,handlesandfrontplates
Markingonoperator
Handles and front plates for Emergency stop

For
switch
body
Handle Front plate
Dimensions Fixing
mm kg
VN 12, VN 20
V02V2
Red,
not
padlockable
Yellow
45x45
5 KCC 1LZ 0050
4screws KCE 1LZ 0040
Yellow
60x60
5 KDD 1PZ 008
4screws KDF 1PZ 0075
V3 and V4 Red,
long,not
padlockable
Yellow
60x60
4screws KDF 2PZ 0070
V5 and V6 Red,
long,not
padlockable
Yellow
90x90
4screws KDF 3PZ (1) 0160
Handles and front plates for switch disconnectors
For
switch
body
Handle Front plate
Dimensions Fixing
mm kg
VN 12, VN 20
V02V2
Black,
not
padlockable
Black
45x45
5 KAC 1BZ 0050
4screws KAE 1BZ 0040
Black
60x60
5 KBD 1PZ 0055
4screws KBF 1PZ 0045
V3 and V4 Black,
not
padlockable
Black
60x60
4screws KBF 2PZ 0070
V5 and V6 Black,
not
padlockable
Black
90x90
4screws KBF 3PZ (1) 0160
(1) For door mounting of 63 and 80 A switch disconnectors, adapter plate KZ 106 must be
ordered separately (see next page).
b
b
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/to4/5
Schemes:
pages4/and4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/to4/5
Schemes:
pages4/and4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/to4/5
Schemes:
pages4/and4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/to4/5
Schemes:
pages4/and4/5
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
4/0
4
Accessories
Input terminal protection shrouds

Description For
use on
Reference Weight
kg
For switch bodies
(3-poleshroud)
V0V VZ 8 0015
V3andV4 VZ 9 000
V5andV6 VZ 10 0060
For add-on pole modules
(single-poleshroud)
VZ0VZ,VZ11,VZ14 VZ 26 0005
VZ3,VZ4,VZ1,VZ15 VZ 27 0007
VZ13,VZ16 VZ 28 000
For contact blocks
with 2 auxiliary contacts
VZ 29 0005
Components for door interlocking

For rear fxing switch disconnectors mounted at the back of an enclosure, in
addition to a direct operator
Description For
use on
Distance enc.
back/door
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
mm kg
Shaft
extensions
VN1,VN0
V0V
300330 1 VZN 17 (1) 0100
400430 1 VZN 30 (1) 0130
V0V 300330 1 VZ 17 0075
400430 1 VZ 30 015
V3andV4 30030 1 VZ 18 0170
40040 1 VZ 31 015
V5andV6 330350 1 VZ 18 0170
430450 1 VZ 31 015
Door
interlock plates
VN1,VN0
V0V
5 KZ 32 0177
V3V6 5 KZ 74 000
Description For
use on
Front plate
dimensions
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
mm kg
Plates for
door mounting
of handles with
4 screw fxing
VN1,VN0
V0V
45x45or
60x60
5 KZ 83 005
V3V6 60x60or
90x90
5 KZ 81 0010
Adapter plate
for switch
disconnectors
V3andV4 90x90 5 KZ 106 0075
(1) Can be used with V02 to V2 switches.

5
8
0
5
8
3
5
8
0
5
8
4
5
8
0
5
6
5
8
0
5
8
5
5
8
0
5
7
VZ 8
VZ 26
VZ 18
KZ 32
KZ 81
5
8
0
5
8
3
5
8
0
5
8
4
5
8
0
5
6
5
8
0
5
8
5
5
8
0
5
7
VZ 8
VZ 26
VZ 18
KZ 32
KZ 81
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/to4/5
Schemes:
pages4/and4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/to4/5
Schemes:
pages4/and4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/to4/5
Schemes:
pages4/and4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/to4/5
Schemes:
pages4/and4/5
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
4/1
4
Accessories
Accessories for operators

Description For
use on
Front plate
dimensions
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
mm kg
Legend
holder with
silver coloured
blank legend
plate
Frontplate 45x45 5 KZ 13 0060
60x60 5 KZ 15 0065
90x90 5 KZ 103 0070
Legend
holders
without
legend plate
Frontplate 45x45 0 KZ 14 0060
60x60 10 KZ 16 0065
90x90 5 KZ 101 0070
Silver
coloured
blank legend
plates for
engraving by
customer
KZ14 0 KZ 76 000
KZ16 10 KZ 77 0010
KZ101 5 KZ 100 0005
Seals VN1,VN0 45x45 5 KZ 65 0037
V0V 60x60 5 KZ 66 0033
V3andV4 60x60 5 KZ 62 0033
V3V6 90x90 5 KZ 67 0064
Tightening
tool
Foroperators
with5
fxing
5 Z01 0050
8
1
7
8
3
5
8
0
5
8
8
1
7
8
5
KZ 15
KZ 67
Z01
8
1
7
8
3
5
8
0
5
8
8
1
7
8
5
KZ 15
KZ 67
Z01
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/to4/5
Schemes:
pages4/and4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/to4/5
Schemes:
pages4/and4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/to4/5
Schemes:
pages4/and4/5
Characteristics:
pages4/4to4/6
Dimensions:
pages4/to4/5
Schemes:
pages4/and4/5
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
4/
4
solutions
Mini-VARIOswitchdisconnectors,1and0A
Dimensions
Switch bodies VN 12, VN 20 Add-on modules VZN 12, VZN 20 Add-on modules VZN 11, VZN 14 VZN 05
and VZN 06
Mounting
Switch disconnector mounted on enclosure door
VN 12, VN 20
Single hole fxing
VN 12, VN 20
4 screw fxing
45 x 45 front plate 60 x 60 front plate
62
4
6
,
5
48
56
39 12
4
5
,
5
39 12
4
5
,
5
62
4
6
,
5
48
56
39 12
4
5
,
5
39 12
4
5
,
5
1,5...6
74,5 44
1,5...6
74,5 44
3
1
2
,
7
22,5
3
1
2
,
7
22,5
1,5...6
62,5 44
1,5...6
62,5 44
13
36
3
6

13
36
3
6

4
8

48
4
8

48
Characteristics:
page4/4
References:
page4/14
Schemes:
page4/3
Characteristics:
page4/4
References:
page4/14
Schemes:
page4/3
Characteristics:
page4/4
References:
page4/14
Schemes:
page4/3
Characteristics:
page4/4
References:
page4/14
Schemes:
page4/3
Dimensions,
mounting
4/3
4
solutions
Mini-VARIOswitchdisconnectors,1and0A
Mounting (continued)
Switch disconnector mounted at back of enclosure with shaft extension VZN 17 or VZN 30 (clip-on mounting on 6 rail)
VN 12, VN 20
Single hole fxing 4 screw fxing
Shaft extension Distance (e)
enclosure back/door
mm
VN 12, VN 20 VZN17 300330
VZN30 400430
Schemes
Switch body
VN 12, VN 20
Main pole module
VZN 12, VZN 20
Neutral pole module
VZN 11
VZN 05 VZN 06
1,5...6
e
1,5...6
e
1,5...6
e
1,5...6
e
1
/
L
1
2
/
T
1
3
/
L
2
4
/
T
2
5
/
L
3
6
/
T
3
1
3
1
4
2
2
2
1
1
/
L
1
2
/
T
1
3
/
L
2
4
/
T
2
5
/
L
3
6
/
T
3
1
3
1
4
2
2
2
1
Characteristics:
page4/4
References:
page4/14
Characteristics:
page4/4
References:
page4/14
Characteristics:
page4/4
References:
page4/14
Characteristics:
page4/4
References:
page4/14
Mounting (continued),
schemes 4
4/4
4
solutions
VARIOswitchdisconnectors,1to175A
Dimensions
Switch bodies V0p, V0 to V2 Switch bodies V3 to V6
a b c G H
V3, V4 60 83 65 48 48 55
V5, V6 90 15 90 68 68 55
Add-on modules VZ 02 to VZ 4 and VZ 11 to VZ 16 Add-on modules VZ 7, VZ 20
a b c
VZ 02 and VZ 01,
VZ 0 to VZ 2, VZ 11, VZ 14
16 74 35
VZ 3, VZ 4, VZ 12, VZ 15 0 83 46
VZ 13, VZ 16 30 15 63
Mounting
Switch disconnector mounted on enclosure door
Single hole fxing
V0p, V0 to V4
4 screw fxing
V0p, V0 to V4
4 screw fxing
45 x 45 front plate
V0p, V0 to V2
4 screw fxing
60 x 60 front plate
V0p, V0 to V4
c
V0p, V0 to V2 60
V3, V4 65
V5 and V6. 4 screw fxing
90 x 90 front plate
60 60
7
4

55
7
4

55
cc
G
a
H b
=
=
G
a
H b
=
=
c
b

a c
b

a
48,5
6
5
20
48,5
6
5
20
1,5...6
72 44
3
1
2
,
7
22,5
1,5...6
72 44
3
1
2
,
7
22,5
1,5...6
c 44
1,5...6
c 37
1,5...6
c 44
1,5...6
c 37
36
3
6

36
3
6

48
4
8

48
4
8

1,5...6
90 65
9
4

1,5...6
90 65
9
4

6
8

68
6
8

68
Characteristics:
page4/4
References:
pages4/14
Schemes:
page4/5
Characteristics:
page4/4
References:
pages4/14
Schemes:
page4/5
Characteristics:
page4/4
References:
pages4/14
Schemes:
page4/5
Characteristics:
page4/4
References:
pages4/14
Schemes:
page4/5
Dimensions,
mounting
4/5
4
solutions
VARIOswitchdisconnectors,1to175A
Switch disconnector mounted at back of enclosure
4 screw fxing
V0p, V0 to V2 with shaft
extension VZ 17 or VZ 30
(clip-on mounting on 6 rail
possible for V0p to V2)
Single hole fxing
V3 to V4 with shaft extension
VZ 18 or VZ 31
V5 and V6 with shaft extension
VZ 18 or VZ 31
Shaft extension Distance (e)
enc.back/door
G Shaft
extension
Distance (e) enc.
back/door
mm mm
V02 and V01
V0 to V2
VZ17 300330 x4 15 V5 and V6 VZ18 300350
VZ30 400430 x4 15 VZ31 430450
V3 and V4 VZ18 30030 x5 0
VZ31 40040 x5 0
Switch disconnectors for modular distribution boards
VVp0 to VVp 2 VVp3 to VVp 4
Schemes
Switch body Main pole module Neutral pole module Auxiliary contact blocks
V02 and V01
V0 to V6
VZ 02 and VZ 01
VZ 0 to VZ 4
VZ 11 to VZ 13 VZ 7 VZ 20
1,5...6
e
1,5...6
e
1,5...6
e
6
0
G
1,5...6
e
6
0
G
1,5...6
e
9
4

1
0
0
30
1,5...6
e
9
4

1
0
0
30
45
7
4
5,5
68
106
4
5
60
8
3
5,5
72
110
4
5
45
7
4
5,5
68
106
4
5
60
8
3
5,5
72
110
4
5
1
/
L
1
2
/
T
1
3
/
L
2
4
/
T
2
5
/
L
3
6
/
T
3
2
2
2
1
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
2
4
2
3
1
/
L
1
2
/
T
1
3
/
L
2
4
/
T
2
5
/
L
3
6
/
T
3
2
2
2
1
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
2
4
2
3
Characteristics:
page4/4
References:
pages4/14
Schemes:
page4/5
Characteristics:
page4/4
References:
pages4/14
Schemes:
page4/5
Characteristics:
page4/4
References:
pages4/14
Schemes:
page4/5
Characteristics:
page4/4
References:
pages4/14
Schemes:
page4/5
Mounting (continued),
schemes
4/6
4
Protection of motors Protection of motors or variable speed drives

Yes,onlyifcombinedwithacontactor Yes
NFCorDIN NFC,DIN,BSorUL
115A 1150A
Fusecarriers Switch-disconnector-fuses
LS1 and GK1 GS
4/4 09Q/
Selection guide
Applications Protection of control circuits or transformers
Breaking under load

Fuse type NFCorDIN
Cartridge fuses 115A
Device type Fusecarriers
References DF
Pages 4/9
Fuseprotection
4/7
4
Protection of motors Protection of motors or variable speed drives

Yes,onlyifcombinedwithacontactor Yes
NFCorDIN NFC,DIN,BSorUL
115A 1150A
Fusecarriers Switch-disconnector-fuses
LS1 and GK1 GS
4/4 09Q/
Applications Protection of control circuits or transformers
Breaking under load

Fuse type NFCorDIN
Cartridge fuses 115A
Device type Fusecarriers
References DF
Pages 4/9
4/8
4
Fusecarriers
Fuse carrier type DF8 DF10 DF14 DF22

Environment characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC60947-3,UL51,CSA-n39
Ambient air temperature Storage C -40+80
Foroperation,withderating(1) C -0+60
Operating positions Withoutderating 3inrelationtonormalmountingplane
Fuse size mm 85x315 10x38 14x51 x58
withtubularlinks,acsupply
V 500 690 690 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 6 6 8 8
forambientairtemperaturey40C (1)
Withtubularlinks A 5 3 50 15
WithaMcartridgefuses A 5 3 50 15
WithgGcartridgefuses A 5 3 50 100
Rated conditional short-circuit current
ConformingtoIEC60947-3
400V kA 0 10 10 10
500V kA 10 10 10
690V kA 80 80
Peak withstand current (dynamic stress)
ConformingtoIEC6069-1
Withtubularlinks kA 11 15 15 19
Cabling(numberofconductorsxcsa) Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Solidcable mm
2
1x15 1x16
x6
1x15 1x16
x6
1x5 1x5
x10
1x5 1x35
x5
2
1x15 1x10
x6
1x15 1x10
x6
1x5 1x5
x10
1x5 1x35
x16
2
1x15 1x10
x6
1x15 1x10
x6
1x5 1x5
x10
1x5 1x35
x16
Characteristics of early break and signalling contacts DF14 AM and DF22 AM
acsupply
V 50
forambientairtemperaturey40C (1)
A 5
Rated operational current 24 V 48 V 127 V 240 V
CategoryAC-15 A 4 4 3 5
CategoryDC-13 A 3 1 0 01
Defnition of
rated characteristics
ConformingtoIEC60947-5-1 B300
Low load operating
characteristics
Minimumvoltage V 10
Minimumcurrent mA 30
Cabling Fastonconnectors
(1)Foruseinaninstallationwithambienttemperature>20C,applyaderatingcoeffcient:
Maximumtemperature 0C 30C 40C 50C 60C
Maxrelativehumidity 95% 90% 80% 50% 50%
Currentderating
coeffcient
1 095 09 08 07
References:
pages4/9and4/30
Substitution:
page4/30
Dimensions:
page4/31
Schemes:
page4/31
References:
pages4/9and4/30
Substitution:
page4/30
Dimensions:
page4/31
Schemes:
page4/31
References:
pages4/9and4/30
Substitution:
page4/30
Dimensions:
page4/31
Schemes:
page4/31
References:
pages4/9and4/30
Substitution:
page4/30
Dimensions:
page4/31
Schemes:
page4/31
Characteristics 4
4/9
4
Fusecarriers
Fuse carriers (1)

Conventional
thermal current
(Ith)
Size of
cartridge
fuse or link
Composition Sold
in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
A mm kg
25 85x315 1P 1 DF8 1 0061
N 1 DF10 N 0071
1P+N(2) 6 DF8 1N 013
P 6 DF8 2 01
3P 4 DF8 3 0183
3P+N(2) 3 DF8 3N 054
32 10x38 1P 1 DF10 1 0061
N 1 DF10 N 0071
1P+N(2) 6 DF10 1N 013
P 6 DF10 2 01
3P 4 DF10 3 0183
3P+N(2) 3 DF10 3N 054
50 14x51 1P 6 DF14 1 0140
N 6 DF14 N 0150
1P+N(2) 3 DF14 1N 090
P 3 DF14 2 080
3P DF14 3C (3) 040
3P+N(2) 1 DF14 3NC (3) 0570
125 x58 1P 6 DF22 1 018
N 6 DF22 N 038
1P+N(2) 3 DF22 1N 0456
P 3 DF22 2 0436
3P DF22 3C (3) 0654
3P+N(2) 1 DF22 3NC (3) 089
Fuse carriers with blown fuse indicators (neon) (1) (4)
Conventional
thermal current
(Ith)
Size of
cartridge
fuse or link
Composition Sold
in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
A mm kg
25 85x315 1P 1 DF8 1V 0064
1P+N(2) 6 DF8 1NV 0135
P 6 DF8 2V 015
3P 4 DF8 3V 0186
3P+N(2) 3 DF8 3NV 057
32 10x38 1P 1 DF10 1V 0064
1P+N(2) 6 DF10 1NV 0135
P 6 DF10 2V 015
3P 4 DF10 3V 0186
3P+N(2) 3 DF10 3NV 057
50 14x51 1P 6 DF14 1V 0143
1P+N(2) 3 DF14 1NV 093
P 3 DF14 2V 083
3P DF14 3VC (3) 043
3P+N(2) 1 DF14 3NVC (3) 0573
125 x58 1P 6 DF22 1V 01
1P+N(2) 3 DF22 1NV 0459
P 3 DF22 2V 0439
3P DF22 3VC (3) 0657
3P+N(2) 1 DF22 3NVC (3) 0895
(1) Each pole can be marked. A clip-in marker holder is provided for this purpose. Clip-in markers
type AB1 Rp or AB1 Gp can also be used.
(2)N:neutralpolefttedwithalockedtubularlinkasstandard.
(3)AletterCinthereferenceindicatesthatthefusecarriercanbefttedwithauxiliaryearly
break, blown fuse signalling and fuse present signalling contacts.
(4) Operational voltage of the blown fuse indicator: 110 V...690 V.
1
0
6
7
8
6
DF10 1
1
0
6
7
8
6
DF10 1
1
0
6
7
8
8
DF10 3N
1
0
6
7
8
8
DF10 3N
1
0
6
7
9
3
DF14 1
1
0
6
7
9
3
DF14 1
1
0
6
7
9
5
DF14 3NC
1
0
6
7
9
5
DF14 3NC
1
0
6
8
3
DF22 1
1
0
6
8
3
DF22 1
1
0
6
8
5
DF22 3NC
1
0
6
8
5
DF22 3NC
1
0
6
7
9
1
DF10 1NV
1
0
6
7
9
1
DF10 1NV
1
0
6
7
9
DF10 3V
1
0
6
7
9
DF10 3V
1
0
6
8
3
4
DF14 1NV
1
0
6
8
3
4
DF14 1NV
1
0
6
8
DF14 3VC
1
0
6
8
DF14 3VC
1
0
6
8
3
4
DF22 1NV
DF221NV
1
0
6
8
3
4
DF22 1NV
DF221NV
1
0
6
8
3
5
DF22 3VC
1
0
6
8
3
5
DF22 3VC
Characteristics:
page4/8
Substitution:
page4/30
Dimensions:
page4/31
Schemes:
page4/31
Characteristics:
page4/8
Substitution:
page4/30
Dimensions:
page4/31
Schemes:
page4/31
Characteristics:
page4/8
Substitution:
page4/30
Dimensions:
page4/31
Schemes:
page4/31
Characteristics:
page4/8
Substitution:
page4/30
Dimensions:
page4/31
Schemes:
page4/31
References 4
4/30
4
Fusecarriers
Accessories
Auxiliary early break and blown fuse signalling contacts (1)
Fuse carriers
to be equipped
Size of cartridge
fuse or link
Number
of contacts
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
DF14
(3Por3P+N)
14x51 1 1 DF14 AM1 005
1 DF14 AM2 009
DF22
(3Por3P+N)
X58 1 1 DF22 AM1 003
1 DF22 AM2 0035
Fuse carrier assembly kits (2)
Fuse carriers
to be
assembled
Size of cartridge
fuse or link
Composition Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
DF8 85x315 1pin,
clips
1 DF10 AP 0001
DF10 10x38
DF14 14x51 1pin,
3clips
10 DF14 AP 0003
DF22 x58 1pin,
3clips
10 DF22 AP 0003
Marking accessories
Description Composition Marking Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Clip-in markers Stripof10identical
numbersorletters
09 5 AB1 Rp (3) 000
AZ 5 AB1 Gp (3) 000
Substitution
Fuse carriers
Old range New range
Reference Size of cartridge
fuse or link
Composition Reference
w/o indicator
Reference
with indicator
DF6AB08 85x315 1P DF8 1 DF8 1V
DF6AB10 10x38 1P DF10 1 DF10 1V
DF6N10 85x315or10x38 1N DF10 N
GK1CC 85x315 1P+N DF8 1N DF8 1NV
GK1CD 85x315 P DF8 2 DF8 2V
GK1CF 85x315 3P DF8 3 DF8 3V
GK1CH 85x315 3P+N DF8 3N DF8 3NV
GK1DC 10x38 1P+N DF10 1N DF10 1NV
GK1DD 10x38 P DF10 2 DF10 2V
GK1DF 10x38 3P DF10 3 DF10 3V
GK1DH 10x38 3P+N DF10 3N DF10 3NV
GK1EB 14x51 1P DF14 1 DF14 1V
GK1EN 14x51 1N DF14 N
GK1EC 14x51 1P+N DF14 1N DF14 1NV
GK1ED 14x51 P DF14 2 DF14 2V
GK1EF 14x51 3P DF14 3C DF14 3VC
GK1EH 14x51 3P+N DF14 3NC DF14 3NVC
GK1FB x58 1P DF22 1 DF22 1V
GK1FN x58 1N DF22 N
GK1FC x58 1P+N DF22 1N DF22 1NV
GK1FD x58 P DF22 2 DF22 2V
GK1FF x58 3P DF22 3C DF22 3CV
GK1FH x58 3P+N DF22 3NC DF22 3NVC
Fuse carrier assembly kits
Old range New range
Reference Size of cartridge fuse or link Reference
GK1AP 85x315or10x38 DF10 AP
GK1AP3 85x315or10x38 DF10 AP
14x51 DF14 AP
GK1AP4 85x315or10x38 DF10 AP
x58 DF22 AP
GK1AP5 14x51 DF14 AP
GK1AP6 14x51 DF14 AP
x58 DF22 AP
GK1AP9 x58 DF22 AP
(1) These auxiliary contacts provide the following functions: early break, blown fuse signalling (if
thefusecarrierisfttedwithstrikerfuses)andfusepresentsignalling.
(2) 1 pin and 2 clips are required to assemble two DF8 or DF10 fuse carriers together.
1 pin and 3 clips are required to assemble two DF14 or DF22 fuse carriers together.
(3) When ordering, replace the p in the reference with the number or letter required. Example:
AB1-R1 or AB1-GA
1
0
6
8
3
6
DF14 AMp
1
0
6
8
3
6
DF14 AMp
5
4
1
9
6
Detail of assembly clip and pin mounting
5
4
1
9
6
Characteristics:
page4/8
Dimensions:
page4/31
Schemes:
page4/31
Characteristics:
page4/8
Dimensions:
page4/31
Schemes:
page4/31
Characteristics:
page4/8
Dimensions:
page4/31
Schemes:
page4/31
Characteristics:
page4/8
Dimensions:
page4/31
Schemes:
page4/31
References (continued),
substitution 4
4/31
4
Fusecarriers
Dimensions
Modular fuse carriers 25 A and 32 A
Mounting on 35 mm 5 rail
DF8 1 and DF8 1V
DF10 1 and DF10 1V
DF10 N
DF8 1N and DF8 1NV
DF8 2 and DF8 2V
DF10 1N and DF10 1NV
DF10 2 and DF10 2V
DF8 3 and DF8 3V
DF10 3 and DF10 3V
DF8 3N and DF8 3NV
Modular fuse carriers 50 A

DF14 1 and DF14 1V

DF14 N
DF14 2 and DF14 2V
DF14 3C and DF14 3VC DF14 3NC and DF14 3NVC
DF22 1 and DF22 1V

DF22 N
DF22 2 and DF22 2V
DF22 3C and DF22 3VC DF22 3NC and DF22 3NVC
Schemes
Modular fuse carriers
DFp1P DFpN DFp1P + N DFp2P

DFp3P DFp3P + N

47
58
64
8
3

5
,
5

17,5 4x17,5 3x17,5 2x17,5
4
5

4
0
,
5

47
58
64
8
3

5
,
5

17,5 4x17,5 3x17,5 2x17,5
4
5

4
0
,
5

1
0
7
4
5
3
,
8
76,5
1,5x17,5 50,5 3x17,5 4,5x17,5 6x17,5
4
8
,
5

70
1
0
7
4
5
3
,
8
76,5
1,5x17,5 50,5 3x17,5 4,5x17,5 6x17,5
4
8
,
5

70
1
2
6
,
5

50,5
76,5
5
1

4
5

1

2x17,5 4x17,5
70
6x17,5 8x17,5
1
2
6
,
5

50,5
76,5
5
1

4
5

1

2x17,5 4x17,5
70
6x17,5 8x17,5
1
2
N 1
2
N 3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
3
4
1
2
5
6
3
4
1
2
5
6
3
4
1
2
N 5
6
3
4
1
2
N
Characteristics:
page4/8
References:
pages4/9and4/30
Substitution:
page4/30
Characteristics:
page4/8
References:
pages4/9and4/30
Substitution:
page4/30
Characteristics:
page4/8
References:
pages4/9and4/30
Substitution:
page4/30
Characteristics:
page4/8
References:
pages4/9and4/30
Substitution:
page4/30
Dimensions,
schemes 4
4
4/3
Characteristics
FusecarriersfortheNorthAmericanmarket,
conformingtostandardsULandCSA,
Fuse carrier type DFCC
Conforming to standards IEC60947-3,UL51,CSA-n39
Ambient air temperature Storage C -40+80
Foroperation,withderating(1) C -0+60
Operating positions Withoutderating 3inrelationtonormalverticalmountingplane
Fuse carrier type DFCC
Fuse size ClassCC
withtubularlinks,acsupply
V 600
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 6
forambientairtemperaturey40C(1)
Withtubularlinks A 30
WithaMcartridgefuses A 30
WithgGcartridgefuses A 30
Short-circuit current withstand
WithUL48-4ClassCCfuses
ConformingtoUL51at600V kA 00
Cabling (numberofconductorsxcsa) Min. Max.
Solidcable mm
2
1x15 1x16
x6
2
1x15 1x10
x6
2
1x15 1x10
x6
Tightening torque Nm
(1) Foruseinaninstallationwithambienttemperature>20C,applyaderatingcoeffcient:
Maximum temperature 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C
Maxrelativehumidity 95% 90% 80% 50% 50%
Current derating coeffcient 1 095 09 08 07
References:
page4/33
Dimensions:
page4/33
Schemes:
page4/33
4
4/33
References,
dimensions,
schemes
FusecarriersfortheNorthAmericanmarket,
conformingtostandardsULandCSA,
References
Fuse carriers (1)
Conventional
thermal current
(Ith)
Size of
cartridge
fuse or link
Composition Sold
in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
A kg
30 ClassCC 1P 1 DFCC 1 0061
P 1 DFCC 2 01
3P 6 DFCC 3 0183
Fuse carriers with blown fuse indicators (neon) (1), (2)
Conventional
thermal current
(Ith)
Size of
cartridge
fuse or link
Composition Sold
in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
A kg
30 ClassCC 1P 1 DFCC 1V 0064
P 6 DFCC 2V 015
3P 6 DFCC 3V 0186
Fuse carrier assembly kits (3)
Fuse carriers
to be assembled
Size of
cartridge
fuse or link
Composition Sold
in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
DFCC ClassCC 1pin,
clips
1 DF10 AP 0001
Marking accessories
Description Composition Marking Sold
in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Clip-in markers Stripof10identical
numbersorletter
09 5 AB1 Rp (4) 000
AZ 5 AB1 Gp (4) 000
(1) Each pole can be marked. A clip-in marker holder is provided for this purpose.
Clip-in markers type AB1 Rp or AB1 Gp can also be used.
(2) Operational voltage of the blown fuse indicator: 110 V...690 V.
(3) 1 pin and 2 clips are required to assemble two DFCC fuse carriers together.
(4) When ordering, replace the p in the reference with the number or letter required.
Example: AB1 R1 or AB1 GA.
Dimensions
DFCC 1 and DFCC 1V DFCC 2 and DFCC 2V DFCC 3 and DFCC 3V
47
58
64
8
3

5
,
5

17,5 3x17,5 2x17,5
4
5

4
0
,
5

Schemes
Modular fuse carriers
DFCC 1P DFCC 2P DFCC 3P
3
4
1
2
5
6
3
4
1
2
Characteristics:
page4/3
1
0
6
7
8
6
DFCC 1
1
0
6
7
9
DFCC 3V
5
4
1
9
6
4/34
4
4
Fusecarriers
Operation: safety
Thefusecarrierperformstwobasicfunctions:
itisolatesthedownstreamcircuitbymeansofavisiblebreakandwideopening
contacts,
itholdsthecartridgefusesdesignedtoprotecttheinstallationagainstshort-
circuits
Thetypeofcartridgefuseneededtoprotectthecircuitmustbedeterminedbefore
selectingthefusecarrier
Cartridge fuse selection (type, rating, size)
Type
Application Motorprotection
Transformerprotection
b
b
Solution aM typefusesThesefusesaredesignedtowithstandhigh
currentpeaksofaveryshortdurationTheymustbe
combinedwithathermaloverloadrelaycoupledwitha
contactor
b
Application Lightingcircuitprotection
Supplylineprotection
Furnaceprotection
b
b
b
Solution gGtypefuses,whicharemorewidelyusedbutwhose
limitingcapacityisweakerthanthatofaMtypefuses
b
Rating
gG fuses
aM fuses
SeestandardNFC15-100
Table53Aparagraph53--1andtable5C
paragraph53-1
Motors
3 x 220 V
Motors
3 x 400 V
Cartridge fuses
type aM
Fuse carrier
P in P in Size Rating
kW A kW A A
9 3 15 85 10x38 3 LS1 D32
11 39 44 14x51 50 GK1 EK
75 37 73 x58 80 GK1 FK
30 103 55 105 x58 15 GK1 FK
Size
Usethefusecharacteristicstableoppositetoselectthe
correctfusesizeaccordingto:
thenominalcurrentofthecircuittobeprotected,
theoperationalvoltage
b
b
Fuse carrier selection
Application Isolationofacircuitforsafetyreasonsonly
Solution The fuse carrier may be ftted with links.
Themaximumpermissiblecurrentisindicatedinthepole
characteristicstableopposite
Application Isolationofacircuitanditsprotectionagainstshort-circuits
Solution Selectafusecarrieraccordingto:
thetypeofcartridgefuserequired,
themaximumpermissiblecurrentinthefusecarrierpoles
(seepolecharacteristicstableopposite)Ifthe
operationalcurrentisgreaterthanthemaximum
permissiblecurrentinthepolesofthefusecarrier
correspondingtothecartridgefusesizeselected,select
thefusecarrierthenextsizeup
Thesafetyprovidedbyusingafusecarriercanbeincreased
byaddingapadlockingdevicewithuptothreepadlocks
b
b
Recommendations for use
ThefusecarrierconformstoutilisationcategoryAC-1A/Aofstandard
IEC60947-3Itisthereforerecommendedthatthefusecarrierearlybreakauxiliary
contactsalwaysbeinsertedinthecoilcircuitofthecontactorwithwhichitisinseries
Ifthefusecarrierisnotassociatedwithacontactor,itisessentialtoensurethatitwill
beoperatedoff-load
b
b
Characteristics:
page4/35
References:
pages4/36and4/37
Dimensions:
page4/40
Schemes:
page4/41
Characteristics:
page4/35
References:
pages4/36and4/37
Dimensions:
page4/40
Schemes:
page4/41
Characteristics:
page4/35
References:
pages4/36and4/37
Dimensions:
page4/40
Schemes:
page4/41
Characteristics:
page4/35
References:
pages4/36and4/37
Dimensions:
page4/40
Schemes:
page4/41
Selection 4
4/35
4
4
Fusecarriers
Fuse carrier type LS1 D32 LS1 D323 GK1 Ep GK1 Fp
Environment
Conforming to standards NFEN60947-3
p p p
IEC60947-3
p p p
Product certifcations BV,UR
Protective treatment TH TC TC
foroperationwithlinkswithoutderating
C -50+70 -50+70 -50+70
Maximum tilt
inrelationtonormalverticalmountingplane
3 3 3
Fuse size 10x38 10x38 14x51 x58
withlinksacsupply
V 690 690 690 690
Maximum continuous current at
ambienttemperaturey40C(1)(Mincable/Ie)
Withtubularlinks mm
2
/A 6/3or4/5
or5/16
4/5or5/16 10/50or6/40 35/15or5/100
WithaMfuses mm
2
/A 6/3or4/
or5/0
4/5or5/0 10/50or6/35 35/15or5/100
WithgGfuses mm
2
/A 4/5or5/0
or15/16
5/0or15/16 10/40or6/3 5/100or16/80
Early break contact characteristics
Rated operational voltage V a 50c 60 a 50c 60 a 500c 440 a 500c 0
Conventional thermal current A 5 5 6 6
Cartridge fuse characteristics
Fuse size 10x38 10x38 14x51 x58
TypeaM a400V A 3(2) 5 50 15
a500V A 0 0 40 80
a660V A 5 50
TypegG a400V A 5(2) 5 40 100
a500V A 5 5 40 80
a660V A 5 50
Maximum power dissipated by fuse W 3 3 85 18
Cabling
Connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors
Number and c.s.a. of conductors Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Solidcable mm
2
x1 x6 1x5 1x5 1x16 1x70
2
x15 x6 1x5 1x5 1x16 1x50
2
x1 x4 1x5 1x16 1x16 1x5
Connection Screwclamp
terminals
Connector Connector
Connection by spring terminals
Number and c.s.a. of conductors Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Solidcable mm
2
x1(3) x4
2
x15
(3)
x4
(1)Foruseinaninstallationwithambienttemperature>55C,applyaderatingcoeffcient
equivalent to
(2) These values are for fuse carriers mounted side by side with a gap of 10 mm between them
or mounted with sets of busbars GV2 p54. If mounted side by side without a gap, use the
following fuse sizes: aM fuse: 25 A and gG fuse: 20 A.
(3) For cross-sections 1 to 1.5 mm
2
Selection:
page4/34
References:
pages4/36and4/37
Dimensions:
page4/40
Schemes:
page4/41
Selection:
page4/34
References:
pages4/36and4/37
Dimensions:
page4/40
Schemes:
page4/41
Selection:
page4/34
References:
pages4/36and4/37
Dimensions:
page4/40
Schemes:
page4/41
Selection:
page4/34
References:
pages4/36and4/37
Dimensions:
page4/40
Schemes:
page4/41
Characteristics 4
4/36
4
Fusecarriers
3-pole basic blocks
Rating Cartridge
fuse
size
Number of
early break
contacts (1)
Single-phase
protection
device (2)
Reference
(3)
Weight
kg
25 A 10x38 (4) Without LS1 D323 070
32 A 10x38 (4) Without LS1 D32 0300
50 A 14x51 1 Without GK1 EK 0430
With GK1 EV 0470
Without GK1 ES 0470
With GK1 EW 0510
125 A x58 1 Without GK1 FK 0860
With GK1 FV 0900
Without GK1 FS 0900
With GK1 FW 0940
4-pole basic blocks
32 A 10x38 (4) Without LS1 D32
+ LA8 D324 (5)
0300
50 A 14x51 1 Without GK1 EM 0570
With GK1 EY 0600
Without GK1 ET 0610
With GK1 EX 0650
125 A x58 1 Without GK1 FM 1090
With GK1 FY 1130
Without GK1 FT 1130
With GK1 FX 1160
Fuse carriers for the North American market
25 and 30 A basic blocks: please consult your Regional Sales Offce.
(1) With 1 or 2 early break contacts to be inserted in the contactor control circuit.
(2)Fusecarrierswithsingle-phaseprotectiondevicemustbefttedwithstrikerfuses.
(3) LS1 D: clips directly onto a 35 mm 5railorscrewfxing.
GK1: clips directly onto a 35 mm 5 rail or Telequick mounting plate.
(4) Addition of add-on contact block, see page 4/37.
(5) Can be mounted on left-hand or right-hand side of the basic block.
LS1 D323
5
6
3
9
9
LS1 D323
5
6
3
9
9
LS1 D32
5
6
4
0
0
LS1 D32
5
6
4
0
0
GK1 FK
5
6
4
0
1
GK1 FK
5
6
4
0
1
LS1 D32 + LA8 D324
5
6
4
0
0
5
0
0
5
0
5
_
1
LS1 D32 + LA8 D324
5
6
4
0
0
5
0
0
5
0
5
_
1
Selection:
page4/34
Characteristics:
page4/35
Dimensions:
page4/40
Schemes:
page4/41
Selection:
page4/34
Characteristics:
page4/35
Dimensions:
page4/40
Schemes:
page4/41
Selection:
page4/34
Characteristics:
page4/35
Dimensions:
page4/40
Schemes:
page4/41
Selection:
page4/34
Characteristics:
page4/35
Dimensions:
page4/40
Schemes:
page4/41
References 4
4/37
4
Fusecarriers
Operatorsandaccessories

Description For
use on
Mounting Maximum
number
Type of
contacts
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
(earlybreakcontacts)
LS1D3 Front 1 N/O+N/C 10 GV AE11 000
N/O+N/O 10 GV AE20 000
LS1D33 Front 1 N/O+N/C 10 GV AE113 0030
N/O+N/O 10 GV AE203 0030
Operators
For fuse carrier For
mounting on
Reference Weight
kg
Rating Number of poles
Side handles
125 A 3or4 Right-handside GK1 AP07 0300
Left-handside GK1 AP08 0300
Front handles (1)
32 - 50 - 125 A Fittedasstandard
External handles
32 A 3or4 Right-handside LS1 D32005 (2) 000
Left-handside LS1 D32006 000
Padlocking devices (3)
For fuse carrier Reference Weight
Rating Number of poles Single-phase
protection device kg
32 A 3or4 Without integral
50 A 3 Without GK1 AV07 0100
With GK1 AV08 0110
4 Without GK1 AV08 0110
With GK1 AV09 0070
Links
Tubular links
For fuse carrier Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
Rating Number of poles kg
32 A 3or4 10 DK1 CB92 (4) 0007
50 A 3or4 10 DK1 EB92 (5) 001
125 A 3or4 10 DK1 FA92 (5) 000
(1) Fitted as standard on 32, 50 and 125 A fuse carriers type GK1.
(2) Reference LS1 D32005 replaces reference DK1 FB005.
(3) For the 125 A rating, use side handles GK1 AP07 or GK1 AP08.
(4) For use on a neutral circuit, the tubular link can be interlocked with special device LA8 D25906 (sold in lots of 10).
(5)50and125AfusecarrierstypeGK1arefttedwithaninterlockedneutraltubularlinkasstandard.
GK1 FK + GK1 AP07
5
6
4
0
GK1 FK + GK1 AP07

5
6
4
0
Selection:
page4/34
Characteristics:
page4/35
Dimensions:
page4/40
Schemes:
page4/41
Selection:
page4/34
Characteristics:
page4/35
Dimensions:
page4/40
Schemes:
page4/41
Selection:
page4/34
Characteristics:
page4/35
Dimensions:
page4/40
Schemes:
page4/41
Selection:
page4/34
Characteristics:
page4/35
Dimensions:
page4/40
Schemes:
page4/41
References 4
4/38
4
4
4
4/39
4
Accessories
Accessories for LS1 D32 (screw clamp terminals)

lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Plate for mounting LS1D3andcontactor
LC1D09D38
1 LAD 311 0040
Combination blocks BetweenLS1D3and
contactorLC1KorLP1K
10 GV2 AF01 000
BetweenLS1D3and
contactorLC1D09D38
10 GV2 AF3 0016
BetweenLS1D3mounted
onLAD311andcontactor
LC1D09D38
10 GV2 AF4 0016
Description Application Pitch
mm
Reference Weight
kg
Sets of 3-pole
63 A busbars
tap-offs 45 GV2 G245 0036
54 GV2 G254 0038
7 GV2 G272 004
3tap-offs 45 GV2 G345 0058
54 GV2 G354 0060
4tap-offs 45 GV2 G445 0077
54 GV2 G454 0085
7 GV2 G472 0094
5tap-offs 54 GV2 G554 0100
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Protective end cover Forunusedbusbaroutlets 5 GV1 G10 0005
Terminal block
Connectionfromthetop
Forsupplytooneormore
GVGbusbarsets
1 GV1 G09 0040
Cover for terminal block Formountinginmodularpanels 10 LA9 E07 0005
Padlocking device Forusewithupto4padlocks
(notsupplied)
6mmshankmax
1 GV2 V03 009
Accessories for LS1 D323 (spring terminals)
kg
Plate for mounting LS1D33andcontactorLC1D09D38
LAD 311 0040
Description Extension by Number
of starters
Reference Weight
kg
Power splitter box, 63A LAD3p LAD 322 010
3 LAD 323 0180
4 LAD 324 040
Description Kit contents Reference Weight
kg
Assembly and
power connection kit
forLS1D33and
LC1D093D33
1LAD311plateformountingLS1D33
LAD341powerconnectionmodules
-betweenLS1D33andpowersplitterbox
-betweenLS1D33andcontactor
LAD 352 0078
Description Maximum
capacity
Application Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Upstream
terminal block
16mm
Powersupplyto1or
powersplitterboxes
1 LAD 3B1 01
Downstream
terminal block
16mm
Connectionofmotorcables 1 LAD 331 0050

Cable end
reducer
Forconnectionofconductors
from1to15mm
0 LAD 99
References 4
4/40
4
Fusecarriers
LS1 D32 LS1 D32 + LA8 D324

Mounting on rail AM1 DP200 Panel
mounting
Mounting
on rail
AM1 DP200
Mounting of 4th pole
On left-hand side On right-hand side
GK1 EK, EM, ES, ET, EV, EW, EX, EY GK1 E + GK1 AV (padlocking device)
Mounting on rail AM1 DP200 Mounting on
pre-slotted
plate AM 1P

a: with single-phase protection device.
a1: without single-phase protection device.
External operator GK1 AP05 right-hand, GK1 AP06 left-hand
Panel cut-out
GK1 a a1
3 P 4 P 3 P 4 P
EK 88
EM 114
ES 97
ET 13
EV 106
EW 115 External operator, RH or LH side f
EX 141 GK1 EK, EM, ES, ET 9114
EY 13 GK1 EV, EW, EX, EY 9114
GK1 Fp + GK1 AP07 (internal right-hand control)
Mounting on rail AM1 DE or ED Mounting on pre-slotted plate AM1PA

GK1 a a1
3 P 4 P 3 P 4 P
Fp 70 105 96 131
(1) Padlocking device (up to 3 padlocks)
Internal or external control GK1 AP07 RH, AP08LH
Panel cut-out (for external control)
GK1 a a1
3 P 4 P 3 P 4 P
FK 11
FM 156
FS 136
FT 171
FV 136
FW 151 External operator, RH or LH side f
FX 186 GK1 FK, FM, FS, FT 35114
FY 171 GK1 FV, FW, FX, FY 35114
1
4
,
2
51,5
68,3 38,5
22,5
8
9
45
1
4
,
2
51,5
68,3 38,5
22,5
8
9
45
22,5
2x5
8
4
22,5
2x5
8
4
40
57
40
57
8
9
45 17,5
8
7
8
9
45 17,5
8
7
17,5
8
7
45 17,5
8
7
45
2
9
,
5
2
0
,
5
4
5
2
4
0
,
5
8

9
5
82
45
7,5 7,5 7,5 a
a1
82
45
2
9
,
5
2
0
,
5
4
5
2
4
0
,
5
8

9
5
82
45
7,5 7,5 7,5 a
a1
82
45
98
45 53 4,5 4,5
98
45 53 4,5 4,5
7
0
1
5

1
5

7
0
110
f
30 13
5
8
7
0
1
5

1
5

7
0
110
f
30 13
5
8
82 15 a
a1 55 35
(1)
44
1
2
0

4
7

4

4
6
7,5 82 15 a
a1 55 35
(1)
44
1
2
0

4
7

4

4
6
7,5
a1
a
1
0
0
/
1
1
0
a AF1 EA4
82
44
a1
a
1
0
0
/
1
1
0
a AF1 EA4
82
44
5
5
=

=

1
2
,
5

5
5
110 f
30 25
5
8
8,5
= = = =
5
5
=

=

1
2
,
5

5
5
110 f
30 25
5
8
8,5
= = = =
Selection:
page4/34
Characteristics:
page4/35
References:
pages4/36and4/37
Schemes:
page4/41
Selection:
page4/34
Characteristics:
page4/35
References:
pages4/36and4/37
Schemes:
page4/41
Selection:
page4/34
Characteristics:
page4/35
References:
pages4/36and4/37
Schemes:
page4/41
Selection:
page4/34
Characteristics:
page4/35
References:
pages4/36and4/37
Schemes:
page4/41
Dimensions,
mounting 4
4/41
4
Fusecarriers
Fuse carriers without single-phase protection device

3-pole
LS1 D32, D323 LS1 D32, D323 + GV AE11p LS1 D32, D323 + GV AE20p GK1 EK

4-pole
GK1 ES GK1 FK GK1 FS LS1 D32 + LA8 D324

3-pole + Neutral
GK1 EM GK1 ET GK1 FM GK1 FT

Fuse carriers with single-phase protection device
3-pole
GK1 EV GK1 EW GK1 FV GK1 FW

3-pole + Neutral
GK1 EY GK1 EX

GK1 FY GK1 FX

5
6
3
4
1
2
5
6
3
4
1
2
5
6
3
4
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
5
6
3
4
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
5
6
3
4
1
2
2
3
2
4
1
3
1
4
5
6
3
4
1
2
2
3
2
4
1
3
1
4
5
6
3
4
1
2
1
3
1
4
5
6
3
4
1
2
1
3
1
4
5
6
3
4
1
2
2
3
2
4
1
3
1
4
5
6
3
4
1
2
2
3
2
4
1
3
1
4
5
6
3
4
1
1
4
1
1
1
5
6
3
4
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
5
6
3
4
1
1
4
1
1
1
5
6
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
8
3
4
1
2
5
6
3
4
1
2
1
3
1
4
N 5
6
3
4
1
2
1
3
1
4
N 5
6
3
4
1
4
1
3
1
4
N 5
6
3
4
1
4
1
3
1
4
N 5
6
3
4
1
N
1
4
1
1
1
5
6
3
4
1
N
1
4
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
5
6
3
4
1
1
4
1
1
1
5
6
3
4
1
5
6
3
4
1
2
1
3
1
4
9
8
9
5
9
6
5
6
3
4
1
2
1
3
1
4
9
8
9
5
9
6
5
6
3
4
1
2
1
3
1
4
9
8
9
5
9
6
2
3
2
4
5
6
3
4
1
2
1
3
1
4
9
8
9
5
9
6
2
3
2
4
5
6
3
4
1
9
8
9
5
9
6
1
4
1
1
1
5
6
3
4
1
9
8
9
5
9
6
1
4
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
5
6
3
4
1
9
8
9
5
9
6
1
4
1
1
1
5
6
3
4
1
9
8
9
5
9
6
5
6
3
4
1
2
1
3
1
4
9
8
9
5
9
6
N 5
6
3
4
1
2
1
3
1
4
9
8
9
5
9
6
N 5
6
3
4
1
2
1
3
1
4
9
8
9
5
9
6
N 2
3
2
4
5
6
3
4
1
2
1
3
1
4
9
8
9
5
9
6
N 2
3
2
4
5
6
3
4
1
9
8
9
5
9
6
N
1
4
1
1
1
5
6
3
4
1
9
8
9
5
9
6
N
1
4
1
1
1
5
6
3
4
1
9
8
9
5
9
6
N
1
4
1
1
1
5
6
3
4
1
9
8
9
5
9
6
N
1
4
1
1
1
Selection:
page4/34
Characteristics:
page4/35
References:
pages4/36and4/37
Dimensions:
page4/40
Selection:
page4/34
Characteristics:
page4/35
References:
pages4/36and4/37
Dimensions:
page4/40
Selection:
page4/34
Characteristics:
page4/35
References:
pages4/36and4/37
Dimensions:
page4/40
Selection:
page4/34
Characteristics:
page4/35
References:
pages4/36and4/37
Dimensions:
page4/40
Schemes 4
4
4/4
Applications TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses provide on-load breaking and making, safe isolation and
They are used, in particular, on the incoming supply to control panels, for protecting and switching
They provide simultaneous disconnection, together with all the other associated functions such as
Their compact design means that they can also be ftted in small automation system equipment to
overcurrent protection.
off main circuits (including Emergency stop).
padlocking and interlocking.
provide the same disconnect and protection functions on the incoming supply of equipment, generators or starters, including motors.
Fuse type NFCorDIN BS
Rated thermal current (Ith) 3A 50A 63A 100A 15A 160A 50A 400A 630A 150A 3A 3A 63A 100A 160A 00A 50A 315A 400A 630A 800A 150A
Number of poles 3or
3+Nc
3or4 3or
3+Nc
3or4
Fuse size 10x38 14x51 T00C x58 x58
T00
T0
T00
T1 T T3 T4 A1 A1 A-A3 A4
y31mm
A4
B1-B
B1-B B1B3 B1B3 B1B4 C1-C C1C3 D1
External operator, padlockable and lockable FrontandRHside
LHside
FrontandRHside
Direct operator, padlockable Front RHside Front Front Front
Rated operational voltage (Ue) 690V 690V
Rated operational current (Ie) at 400 V, AC-23 A 3A 50A 63A 100A 15A 160A 50A 400A 630A 1000A 3A 3A 63A 100A 160A 00A 50A 315A 400A 630A 800A 1000A
Rated making capacity at 400 V, AC-23B 30A 500A 630A 1000A 150A 1600A 500A 4000A 6300A 10000A 30A 30A 630A 1000A 1600A 000A 500A 3150A 4000A 6300A 8000A 10000A
Rated breaking capacity at 400 V, AC-23B 56A 400A 500A 800A 1000A 180A 000A 300A 5040A 8000A 56A 56A 500A 800A 180A 1600A 000A 50A 300A 5040A 6400A 8000A
at 400 V, with gG (gI)fuses
100kA 100kA 100kA 100kA 100kA 100kA 100kA 50kA 100kA 100kA 80kA 80kA 80kA 80kA 80kA 80kA 80kA 80kA 80kA 80kA 80kA 80kA
Switch-disconnector-fuse type references GS1
DD
GSp
F
GSp
G
GSp
J
GSp
K
or KK
GSp
L
or LL
GSp
N
GSp
QQ
GS2
S
GS2
V
GS1
DDB
GS2
DB
GS2
GB
GS2
JB
GS2
LB
or LLB
GS2
MMB
GS2
NB
GS2
PPB
GS2
QQB
GS2
SB
GS2
TB
GS2
VB
Pages 4/53 4/55
TeSysGSswitch-disconnector-fuses,
3to150A
Selection guide
4
4/43
Applications TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses provide on-load breaking and making, safe isolation and
They are used, in particular, on the incoming supply to control panels, for protecting and switching
They provide simultaneous disconnection, together with all the other associated functions such as
Their compact design means that they can also be ftted in small automation system equipment to
overcurrent protection.
off main circuits (including Emergency stop).
padlocking and interlocking.
provide the same disconnect and protection functions on the incoming supply of equipment, generators or starters, including motors.
Fuse type NFCorDIN BS
Rated thermal current (Ith) 3A 50A 63A 100A 15A 160A 50A 400A 630A 150A 3A 3A 63A 100A 160A 00A 50A 315A 400A 630A 800A 150A
Number of poles 3or
3+Nc
3or4 3or
3+Nc
3or4
Fuse size 10x38 14x51 T00C x58 x58
T00
T0
T00
T1 T T3 T4 A1 A1 A-A3 A4
y31mm
A4
B1-B
B1-B B1B3 B1B3 B1B4 C1-C C1C3 D1
External operator, padlockable and lockable FrontandRHside
LHside
FrontandRHside
Direct operator, padlockable Front RHside Front Front Front
Rated operational voltage (Ue) 690V 690V
Rated operational current (Ie) at 400 V, AC-23 A 3A 50A 63A 100A 15A 160A 50A 400A 630A 1000A 3A 3A 63A 100A 160A 00A 50A 315A 400A 630A 800A 1000A
Rated making capacity at 400 V, AC-23B 30A 500A 630A 1000A 150A 1600A 500A 4000A 6300A 10000A 30A 30A 630A 1000A 1600A 000A 500A 3150A 4000A 6300A 8000A 10000A
Rated breaking capacity at 400 V, AC-23B 56A 400A 500A 800A 1000A 180A 000A 300A 5040A 8000A 56A 56A 500A 800A 180A 1600A 000A 50A 300A 5040A 6400A 8000A
at 400 V, with gG (gI)fuses
100kA 100kA 100kA 100kA 100kA 100kA 100kA 50kA 100kA 100kA 80kA 80kA 80kA 80kA 80kA 80kA 80kA 80kA 80kA 80kA 80kA 80kA
Switch-disconnector-fuse type references GS1
DD
GSp
F
GSp
G
GSp
J
GSp
K
or KK
GSp
L
or LL
GSp
N
GSp
QQ
GS2
S
GS2
V
GS1
DDB
GS2
DB
GS2
GB
GS2
JB
GS2
LB
or LLB
GS2
MMB
GS2
NB
GS2
PPB
GS2
QQB
GS2
SB
GS2
TB
GS2
VB
Pages 4/53 4/55
4
4/44
Presentation
Switch-disconnector-fuses
3to150A,TeSysGS
Presentation
TeSysGSswitch-disconnector-fusesprovideon-loadbreakingormaking,safe
isolationandovercurrentprotectionofalllowvoltageelectricalcircuits
Theyareused,inparticular,ontheincomingsupplytocontrolpanels,forprotecting
andswitchingoffmaincircuits(includingEmergencystop)
Their compact design means that they can also be ftted in small automation system
equipmenttoprovidethesamedisconnectandprotectionfunctionsontheincoming
supplyofequipment,generatorsormotorstarters
ConformingtostandardIEC60947-3,TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fusesare
availableforusewith:
NFCorDINfuses,
BSfuses
A range for use with UL fuses, specifcally for the North-American market and
meetingtherequirementsofstandardsUL98andCSANr4,isalsoavailable
TheTeSysGSrangeincludessturdy and compact handlesThesehandlesare
easytoinstallandoperateandareavailableinthefollowingoptions:
Directoperator
ExternalfrontandRHside-mountedoperator
ExternalLHside-mountedoperator
Padlockablewithupto3padlocksThedoorislockedwhenthehandleis
padlocked
Lockingbymeansofakey-operatedlock(option)
WithdoorinterlockintheclosedpositionWhenintheClosedposition,thedoor
canbeopenedbymeansofatooltobeusedonlybyauthorisedpersonnel
Lockingisautomaticallyre-establishedwhenthedoorisclosed
Black/GreyorYellow/RedfortheEmergencystopfunction
IP65orIP55
Thisrangeiscompletedbyauxiliary contacts:
Two auxiliary early break and O and I position signalling contacts, confgurable
andcommontoallratings
AuxiliarycontactsGS1AN,whicharesuitableforisolation
ReversibilityofthesecontactstoconvertanN/CcontactintoanN/Ocontactandvice
versa
Controlcircuittestfacility,off-load,withauxiliarycontactsGS1AM110,
GS1AM101orGS1ANT,usedinconjunctionwithhandlesGSAHT
Auxiliaryblownfusesignallingcontacts
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Functions
Breaking
Quickbreakandquicktrippingmechanism,independentofthefuses
Openingandclosingindependentofoperatorspeed
On-loadmakingandbreakingofresistive,inductiveormixedresistiveand
inductivecircuits
Qualityanddurabilityofmechanicalandelectricallives
UtilisationcategoriesAC-3/690VandDC-3/440V
Durableperformanceinseveredutyapplications
Directcontrolofmotors
b
b
Characteristics:
pages4/46to4/50
References:
pages4/53to4/57
Dimensions:
pages4/6to4/66
Schemes:
page4/67
GS2 S3
+ handle GS2 AH550
GS2 N3
+ handle GS2 AH540
GS1 DD3
4
4/45
3to150A,TeSysGS
Isolation
Upstreamanddownstreambreakingoffusesforallratings
Doublebreakisolationofthepowercircuitandsafereplacementoffuses
Totalisolationofpowerandcontrolcircuitstoensuresafetyofpersonsand
equipment
GS1ANauxiliarycontacts
Controlcircuitisolation
Contactsforcedopenintheeventofwelding
FullyvisiblebreakOpenpositioncannotbeindicatedunlessallcontactsare
actuallyopen
SafeopeningandclearindicationofOpenstateofswitch-disconnector
Visibleisolationdistancebetweentheopencontacts
Visiblebreak(630to150Aratings)
b
b
b
b
Protection
AdditionofgG(gl)fuses
Overloadandshort-circuitprotectionofdistributioncircuitsandpowerswitching
circuits without signifcant current peak.
AdditionofaMfuses(associatedwiththermaloverloadrelays)
Typecoordination(Iq>50kA)formotorstartersconsistingoffuses,contactors,
relays
Short-circuitprotectionofmotorsandequipment
Additionofquick-blowfuses
Protectionofelectronicvariablespeedcontrollersandsoftstarters
Blownfusedetectiondevice
Protectionagainstsingle-phasing
Conditionalshort-circuitwithstandvoltageof100kAforallratings
Equivalencebetweenthebreakingcapacityofthefusesandtheabilityofthe
switch-disconnector-fusetowithstandthismaximumcapacity
Useininstallationswhereveryhighshort-circuitcurrentscandevelop
Handleswithpadlockingfacility,withdoorinterlock
Handlelockingbymeansofakey-operatedlock(option)
DoorinterlockinClosedposition
Operatorshaftspadlockablewithdooropen
Fuse covers ftted as standard on all ratings.
Protectionagainstaccidentalcontact
Protectionofpersons
IP0protectionwithterminalshrouds
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Information and testing
Upto1auxiliarycontacts
Earlybreak,OpenandClosedpositionsignalling,andblownfusesignalling
Useinautomationsystems
Controlcircuittestfacility,off-load,byusingauxiliarycontactsGS1AM110,
GS1AM101orGS1ANTinconjunctionwithhandlesGSAHT
IntheTestposition,theenclosuredoorcanbeopened
b
b
Characteristics:
pages4/46to4/51
References:
pages4/53to4/57
Dimensions:
pages4/6to4/66
Schemes:
page4/67
4
4/46
Type GS1 DD GSp F GSp G GSp J GSp K GSp KK GSp LL GSp L GSp N GSp QQ GS2 S GS2 V
Switch-disconnector-fuse characteristics
Environment
Conforming to standards Switch-disconnector-fuses IEC60947-3 IEC60947-3
Circuit-breakers IEC6069-1and IEC6069-1and
Product certifcations ASEFA/LOVAG,LROS(pending) ASEFA/LOVAG,LROS(pending)
conformingtoIEC6059
Onfrontpanel
withterminalshrouds
IP0 IP0
around the device
Storage C -40+80 -40+80
Flame resistance
conformingtoIEC60695--1
Body C 960 960 960
Fusecover C 850 850
for ambient temperature y 40 C
A 3 50 63 100 15 15 160 160 50 400 630 150
Fuse size 10x38 14x51 T00C x58 x58 T00 T00 T0 T1 T T3 T4
Rated insulation voltage(Ui) V 800 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 800 1000 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 1
Rated operational current (Ie) CatAC-3A/B
(1)
a400V A 3 50 63 100 15 15 160 160 50 400 630 1000
a500V A 3 50 63 100 15 15 160 160 50 315 500 800
a690V A 3 50 63 100(3) 100(3) 100(3) 15(3) 15(3) 50(3) 50/315 315/400 630
CatDC-3A/B
(1)
c440V(2) A 0 40 40 100 100 100 15 15 00 00/315(4) 400/630(4) 1000
Rated operational power CatAC-3A/B
(1)
a400V kW 15 5 30 51 63 63 80 80 13 0 355 560
a500V kW 185 33 40 63 90 90 110 110 160 0 355 560
a690V kW 5 45 55 90 80 80 110 110 0 0/95 95/400 400/475
Rated conditional
short-circuit current
Irmsata400Vwith
protectionbygG(gl)fuses
kA 100 100 100 100 100 100 100(50) 100 100 50 100 100
Ratingofassociatedfuses A 3 50 63 100 15 15 15(160) 160 50 400 630 150
Peak value of permissible
current (dynamic
short-circuit withstand)
Conformingto
IEC6069-1
a400V kA 55 76 106 0 0 0 7 0 35 40 70 90
Rated making capacity Irmsat400VCatAC-3B A 30 500 630 1000 150 150 1600 1600 500 4000 6300 10000
Rated breaking capacity Irmsat400VCatAC-3B A 56 400 500 800 1000 1000 180 180 000 300 5040 8000
Mechanical durability Numberofoperatingcycles 0000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 8000 5000
Electrical durability Numberofoperatingcycles
catAC/DC-3A/B(1)
1500/300 1500/300 1500/300 1500/300 1000/00 1000/00 1000/00 1000/00 1000/00 1000/00 1000/00 500/100
Cabling Cable(csamin/max) mm
2
5/16 6/5 10/5 5/95 35/95 35/95 50/95 50/95 95/40 185/40 x150/x300 /4x185
Bars(maxwidth) mm 0 0 0 0 0 3 45 63 80
Tightening torque N.m 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 5 5 44 44
(1) Category A: frequent operating cycles, category B: infrequent operating cycles
(2) 2 poles in series per phase.
(3) With terminal covers.
(4) Poles not juxtaposed.
Characteristics
3to150A,forusewithNFCorDINfuses
Presentation:
pages4/44and4/45
References:
pages4/53to4/57
Dimensions:
pages4/6to4/66
Schemes:
page4/67
4
4/47
Type GS1 DD GSp F GSp G GSp J GSp K GSp KK GSp LL GSp L GSp N GSp QQ GS2 S GS2 V
Environment
conformingtoIEC6059
Onfrontpanel
withterminalshrouds
IP0 IP0
around the device
Storage C -40+80 -40+80
Flame resistance
Body C 960 960 960
Fusecover C 850 850
A 3 50 63 100 15 15 160 160 50 400 630 150
Fuse size 10x38 14x51 T00C x58 x58 T00 T00 T0 T1 T T3 T4
(1)
a400V A 3 50 63 100 15 15 160 160 50 400 630 1000
a500V A 3 50 63 100 15 15 160 160 50 315 500 800
a690V A 3 50 63 100(3) 100(3) 100(3) 15(3) 15(3) 50(3) 50/315 315/400 630
CatDC-3A/B
(1)
c440V(2) A 0 40 40 100 100 100 15 15 00 00/315(4) 400/630(4) 1000
(1)
a400V kW 15 5 30 51 63 63 80 80 13 0 355 560
a500V kW 185 33 40 63 90 90 110 110 160 0 355 560
a690V kW 5 45 55 90 80 80 110 110 0 0/95 95/400 400/475
Rated conditional
Irmsata400Vwith
kA 100 100 100 100 100 100 100(50) 100 100 50 100 100
Ratingofassociatedfuses A 3 50 63 100 15 15 15(160) 160 50 400 630 150
current (dynamic
Conformingto
IEC6069-1
a400V kA 55 76 106 0 0 0 7 0 35 40 70 90
catAC/DC-3A/B(1)
1500/300 1500/300 1500/300 1500/300 1000/00 1000/00 1000/00 1000/00 1000/00 1000/00 1000/00 500/100
2
5/16 6/5 10/5 5/95 35/95 35/95 50/95 50/95 95/40 185/40 x150/x300 /4x185
Bars(maxwidth) mm 0 0 0 0 0 3 45 63 80
Presentation:
pages4/44and4/45
References:
pages4/53to4/57
Dimensions:
pages4/6to4/66
Schemes:
page4/67
4
4/48
Type GS1 DDB GS2 DB GS2 GB GS2 JB GS2 LB or LLB (3) GS2 MMB GS2 NB GS2 PPB GS2 QQB GS2 SB GS2 TB GS2 VB
Environment
conformingtoIEC6059
Onfrontpanel
withterminalshrouds
IP0 IP0
around the device
Storage C -40+80 -40+80
Flame resistance
Body C 960 960
Fusecover C 850 850
A 3 3 63 100 160 00 50 315 400 630 800 150
Fuse size A1 A1 A-A3 A4y31mm A4B1-B (3) B1-B B1B3 B1B3 B1B4 C1-C C1C3 D1
(1)
a400V A 3 3 63 100 160 00 50 315 400 630 800 1000
a500V A 3 3 63 100 160 00 50 315 315 500 630 800
a690V A 3 3 63 100(4) 15(4) 00/160(4) 50(4) 50/315(4) 50/315 315/400 630 630
CatDC-3A/B
(1)
c440V(2) A 0 0 40 100 15 00 00 00 00/315(5) 400/630(5) 800 1000
(1)
a400V kW 15 15 30 51 80 100 13 150 0 355 450 560
a500V kW 185 185 40 63 110 140 160 0 0 355 450 560
a690V kW 5 5 55 90 110 150/185 0 0/95 0/95 95/400 400 400/475
Rated conditional
Irmsata400Vwith
kA 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
Ratingofassociatedfuses A 3 3 63 100 160 00 50 315 400 630 800 150
current (dynamic
Conformingto
IEC6069-1
a400V kA 55 9 106 0 7 35 35 40 40 70 80 90
catAC/DC-3A/B(1)
1500/300 1500/300 1500/300 1500/300 1000/00 1000/00 1000/00 1000/00 1000/00 1000/00 500/100 500/100
2
5/16 6/5 10/5 5/95 50/95 95/40 95/40 185/40 185/40 x150/x300 x185/x300 /4x185
Bars(maxwidth) mm 0 0 3 3 45 45 63 63 80
(3) Fit switch-disconnector-fuses GS2 LB with B1 or B2 fuses and GS2 LLB with A4 fuses.
Characteristics
3to150A,forusewithBSfuses
Presentation:
pages4/44and4/45
References:
pages4/53to4/57
Dimensions:
pages4/6to4/66
Schemes:
page4/67
4
4/49
Type GS1 DDB GS2 DB GS2 GB GS2 JB GS2 LB or LLB (3) GS2 MMB GS2 NB GS2 PPB GS2 QQB GS2 SB GS2 TB GS2 VB
Environment
conformingtoIEC6059
Onfrontpanel
withterminalshrouds
IP0 IP0
around the device
Storage C -40+80 -40+80
Flame resistance
Body C 960 960
Fusecover C 850 850
A 3 3 63 100 160 00 50 315 400 630 800 150
Fuse size A1 A1 A-A3 A4y31mm A4B1-B (3) B1-B B1B3 B1B3 B1B4 C1-C C1C3 D1
(1)
a400V A 3 3 63 100 160 00 50 315 400 630 800 1000
a500V A 3 3 63 100 160 00 50 315 315 500 630 800
a690V A 3 3 63 100(4) 15(4) 00/160(4) 50(4) 50/315(4) 50/315 315/400 630 630
CatDC-3A/B
(1)
c440V(2) A 0 0 40 100 15 00 00 00 00/315(5) 400/630(5) 800 1000
(1)
a400V kW 15 15 30 51 80 100 13 150 0 355 450 560
a500V kW 185 185 40 63 110 140 160 0 0 355 450 560
a690V kW 5 5 55 90 110 150/185 0 0/95 0/95 95/400 400 400/475
Rated conditional
Irmsata400Vwith
kA 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
Ratingofassociatedfuses A 3 3 63 100 160 00 50 315 400 630 800 150
current (dynamic
Conformingto
IEC6069-1
a400V kA 55 9 106 0 7 35 35 40 40 70 80 90
catAC/DC-3A/B(1)
1500/300 1500/300 1500/300 1500/300 1000/00 1000/00 1000/00 1000/00 1000/00 1000/00 500/100 500/100
2
5/16 6/5 10/5 5/95 50/95 95/40 95/40 185/40 185/40 x150/x300 x185/x300 /4x185
Bars(maxwidth) mm 0 0 3 3 45 45 63 63 80
(3) Fit switch-disconnector-fuses GS2 LB with B1 or B2 fuses and GS2 LLB with A4 fuses.
Presentation:
pages4/44and4/45
References:
pages4/53to4/57
Dimensions:
pages4/6to4/66
Schemes:
page4/67
4
4/50
Characteristics
Auxiliarycontactsfor
GS1 AMp11, GS1 AM1 and GS1 AM2 early break and signalling contact characteristics
A 16
Rated operational current (Ie) CatAC-15 A 127 V: 5; 230 V: 4 ; 400 /415 V : 3 ; 440 V : 2
CatDC-13 A 24 V: 12; 48 V: 2; 110 V: 0.6; 220 V: 0.4
Durability Numberofoperatingcycles Mechanical:1000000
Electrical:catAC-15:30000
Fuse protection gG A 6max
Cabling mm Fastonconnectors:1x635orx8
GS1 AN and GS1 ANT signalling contact characteristics
A 0
Rated operational current (Ie) CatAC-15 A 127 V: 12; 230 V: 10; 400/415 V: 8; 440 V: 6
CatDC-13 A 48 V: 4; 110 V: 1.2; 220 V: 1
2
Min: 1.5; max: 10
GS1 AM110 and GS1 AM101 early break and signalling contact characteristics
A 10
Rated operational current (Ie) CatAC-15 A 120 V: 6; 240 V: 3; 400 V: 1.8; 480 V: 1.5
CatDC-13 A 24 V: 2.8; 48 V: 1.4; 125 V: 0.55; 250 V: 0.27; 400 V: 0.15
2
Min: 1 x 0.22; max: 2 x 2.5
GSp AF "blown fuse" signalling contact characteristics
A 16
Rated operational current (Ie) CatAC-15 A 230 V: 4; 400 V: 3
CatDC-13 A 24 V: 12; 48 V: 2; 110 V: 0.6; 220 V: 0.4
Cabling mm Fastonconnectors:1x635
Presentation:
pages4/44and4/45
References:
page4/55
Dimensions:
pages4/6to4/66
Schemes:
page4/67
4
4/51
Characteristics
GS1 AMp11, GS1 AM1 and GS1 AM2 early break and signalling contact characteristics
A 16
CatDC-13 A 24 V: 12; 48 V: 2; 110 V: 0.6; 220 V: 0.4
Cabling mm Fastonconnectors:1x635orx8
GS1 AN and GS1 ANT signalling contact characteristics
A 0
CatDC-13 A 48 V: 4; 110 V: 1.2; 220 V: 1
2
Min: 1.5; max: 10
GS1 AM110 and GS1 AM101 early break and signalling contact characteristics
A 10
Rated operational current (Ie) CatAC-15 A 120 V: 6; 240 V: 3; 400 V: 1.8; 480 V: 1.5
CatDC-13 A 24 V: 2.8; 48 V: 1.4; 125 V: 0.55; 250 V: 0.27; 400 V: 0.15
2
Min: 1 x 0.22; max: 2 x 2.5
GSp AF "blown fuse" signalling contact characteristics
A 16
Rated operational current (Ie) CatAC-15 A 230 V: 4; 400 V: 3
CatDC-13 A 24 V: 12; 48 V: 2; 110 V: 0.6; 220 V: 0.4
Cabling mm Fastonconnectors:1x635
Presentation:
pages4/44and4/45
References:
page4/55
Dimensions:
pages4/6to4/66
Schemes:
page4/67
4
4/5
GS1 APp
GS1 AF1, AF2p, AF3p, AF4p
GS1 AN11
GS1 AN22
GS1 AMp
GS2 AE2p
GS2 AE2p
GS2 AH51p
GS2 AH53p
GS1 APp
GS2 AH220
GS2 AH240
GS1 AF
50400A-Externaloperator
4
4/53
Switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with NF C or DIN fuses
Switch rating Fuse size Number of poles Reference Weight
A kg
For external front-mounted and RH side-mounted operators
32 10x38 3 GS1 DD3 0460
3+Nc(1) GS1 DD4 0500
50 14x51 3 GS2 F3 0800
4 GS2 F4 1000
63 Size00C(2) 3 GS2 G3 1000
4 GS2 G4 1300
100 x58 3 GS2 J3 1500
4 GS2 J4 000
125 x58 3 GS2 K3 1500
4 GS2 K4 000
Size00 3 GS2 KK3 1500
4 GS2 KK4 000
160 Size00 3 GS2 LL3 1800
4 GS2 LL4 300
Size0 3 GS2 L3 1800
4 GS2 L4 300
250 Size1 3 GS2 N3 300
4 GS2 N4 4500
400 Size 3 GS2 QQ3 4800
4 GS2 QQ4 6100
630 Size3 3 GS2 S3 16000
4 GS2 S4 0000
1250 Size4 3 GS2 V3 5000
4 GS2 V4 30000
For external LH side-mounted operators
32 10x38 3 GS1 DD3 0460
3+Nc(1) GS1 DD4 0500
50 14x51 3 GS2 FG3 0800
4 GS2 FG4 1000
63 Size00C(2) 3 GS2 GG3 1000
4 GS2 GG4 1300
100 x58 3 GS2 JG3 1500
4 GS2 JG4 000
125 x58 3 GS2 KG3 1500
4 GS2 KG4 000
Size00 3 GS2 KKG3 1500
4 GS2 KKG4 000
160 Size00 3 GS2 LLG3 1800
4 GS2 LLG4 300
Size0 3 GS2 LG3 1800
4 GS2 LG4 300
250 Size1 3 GS2 NG3 300
4 GS2 NG4 4500
400 Size 3 GS2 QQG3 4800
4 GS2 QQG4 6100
630 Size3 3 GS2 SG3 16000
4 GS2 SG4 0000
1250 Size4 3 GS2 VG3 5000
4 GS2 VG4 30000
1) Nc = Switched neutral.
2) Compact fuses for German market.
GS1 DD3
5
3
7
8
3
GS1 DD3
5
3
7
8
3
GS2 F3
5
6
8
6
6
4
GS2 F3
5
6
8
6
6
4
GS2 N3
5
6
8
6
6
5
GS2 N3
5
6
8
6
6
5
GS2 L4
5
6
8
6
6
6
GS2 L4
5
6
8
6
6
6
General:
pages4/44and4/45
Characteristics:
pages4/46to4/51
Dimensions:
pages4/6to4/66
Schemes:
page4/67
References
4
4/54
GS1 AF1, AF2p, AF3p, AF4p
GS1 AF
GS1 AM1
GS1 AM2
GS1 APp
GS1 AN11
GS1 AN22
GS1 AH01
GS1 AH02
GS1 APp
50400A-Directoperator
4
4/55
Switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with NF C or DIN fuses
Switch rating Fuse size Type of operator Number of poles Reference Weight
A kg
For direct operator
32 10x38 Front 3 GS1 DD3 0460
3+Nc(1) GS1 DD4 0500
50 14x51 RHside 3 GS1 FD3 0800
4 GS1 FD4 1000
63 Size00C(2) RHside 3 GS1 GD3 1000
4 GS1 GD4 1300
100 x58 RHside 3 GS1 JD3 1500
4 GS1 JD4 000
125 x58 RHside 3 GS1 KD3 1500
4 GS1 KD4 000
Size00 RHside 3 GS1 KKD3 1500
4 GS1 KKD4 000
160 Size00 RHside 3 GS1 LLD3 1800
4 GS1 LLD4 300
Size0 RHside 3 GS1 LD3 1800
4 GS1 LD4 300
250 Size1 RHside 3 GS1 ND3 300
4 GS1 ND4 4500
400 Size RHside 3 GS1 QQD3 4800
4 GS1 QQD4 6100
630 Size3 Front 3 GS2 S3 16000
4 GS2 S4 0000
1250 Size4 Front 3 GS2 V3 5000
4 GS2 V4 30000
1) Nc = Switched neutral.
2) Compact fuses for German market.
GS1 JD3
5
6
8
6
6
7
GS1 JD3
5
6
8
6
6
7
General:
pages4/44and4/45
Characteristics:
pages4/46to4/51
Dimensions:
pages4/6to4/66
Schemes:
page4/67
GS2 S3
with handle
GS2 AHp50 or
GS2 AHp60
5
1
0
7
6
1
4
4/56
GS2 AE8p
GS2 AH51p
GS1 AH103
GS1 AMp
GS1 AMp11
GS2 AE8p
GS1 AD10
GS2 AH220
3A-Directorexternaloperator
4
4/57
Switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with BS fuses
A kg
For external front-mounted and RH or LH side-mounted operator
For direct front-mounted operator
32 A1 3 GS1 DDB3 0500
3+Nc(1) GS1 DDB4 0540
For external front-mounted and RH side-mounted operators (2)
32 A1 3 GS2 DB3 0800
4 GS2 DB4 1000
63 A-A3 3 GS2 GB3 1000
4 GS2 GB4 1300
100 A4y31mm 3 GS2 JB3 1500
4 GS2 JB4 000
160 A4 3 GS2 LLB3 1800
4 GS2 LLB4 300
B1-B 3 GS2 LB3 1800
4 GS2 LB4 300
200 B1-B 3 GS2 MMB3 300
4 GS2 MMB4 4500
250 B1B3 3 GS2 NB3 300
4 GS2 NB4 4500
315 B1B3 3 GS2 PPB3 4800
4 GS2 PPB4 6100
400 B1B4 3 GS2 QQB3 4800
4 GS2 QQB4 6100
630 C1-C 3 GS2 SB3 (2) 16000
4 GS2 SB4 (2) 0000
800 C1C3 3 GS2 TB3 (2) 17000
4 GS2 TB4 (2) 1500
1250 D1 3 GS2 VB3 (2) 5000
4 GS2 VB4 (2) 30000
(1) Nc: switched neutral.
(2)630,800and1250Aswitch-disconnector-fusescanalsobefttedwithadirectfront-mountedoperator.
General:
pages4/44and4/45
Characteristics:
pages4/46to4/51
Dimensions:
pages4/6to4/66
Schemes:
page4/67
GS1 DDB3
5
1
0
9
6
1
GS2 GB3
5
1
0
9
6
7
4
4/58
GS2 APp
GS2 APp
GS2 AH260
GS2 AF6p, AF7p
GS1 AF
GS1 AMp
GS2 AE5p
GS2 AE5p
GS1 AN11
GS2 AH550
GS2 AH570
GS1 AN22
630150A-Externaloperator
4
4/59
Auxiliary early break and/or O, I and Test position signalling contacts (1) (2) (3)
Switch rating Contact type Type of operator Reference Weight
A kg
321250 1N/O External,frontorside-mounted(4) GS1 AM110 000
1N/C External,frontorside-mounted(4) GS1 AM101 000
Auxiliary O, I and Test position signalling contacts (3) (5)
A kg
Auxiliary O and I position signalling contacts
501250 1N/C+1N/O External,frontorRHside-mounted
Direct
GS1 AN11 013
External,LHside GS1 AN11G 0131
N/C+N/O External,frontorRHside-mounted
Direct
GS1 AN22 038
External,LHside GS1 AN22G 05
Auxiliary O, I and Test position signalling contacts (3)
50400 1N/C+1N/O External,frontside-mounted GS1 ANT11 0153
N/C+N/O External,frontside-mounted GS1 ANT22 058
Auxiliary early break and O and I position signalling contacts
A kg
32 1C/O GS1 AM111 0080
C/O GS1 AM211 0080
50400 1C/O Direct,RHside GS1 AM1 003
C/O Direct,RHside GS1 AM2 0035
Auxiliary blown fuse signalling contacts for use with NF C and DIN fuses (6)
Contact type Switch rating Fuse size Number of poles Reference Weight
A kg
1
st
C/O 50 14x51 3or4 GS1 AF1 005
100and15 x58 3 GS1 AF23 0033
4 GS1 AF24 0037
160 Size0 3 GS1 AF33 0036
4 GS1 AF34 0030
50and400 Size1andSize 3 GS1 AF43 0038
4 GS1 AF44 003
630 Size3 3 GS2 AF63 0046
4 GS2 AF64 0100
150 Size4 3 GS2 AF73 0080
4 GS2 AF74 0045
2
nd
C/O 50150 3or4 GS1 AF 0015
(1) For 32 A switch-disconnector-fuses, these auxiliary contacts allow:
- early break and O and I position signalling, - O and I position signalling,
- O, I and Test position signalling, - Test position signalling.
For 50 to 400 A switch-disconnector-fuses, they allow:
- early break, - O and I position signalling,
For 630 and 1250 A switch-disconnector-fuses, they allow:
- early break and O and I position signalling,
(2) Maximum number of auxiliary contacts:
Switch rating
A
Standard With additional
bracket
Reference of additional bracket
32 4 4+4 GS1AD10
50160 4 4+4 GSAD0
200400 8 8+4 GSAD0
6301250 8 8
(3) The Test position allows testing of the control circuits off-load. Auxiliary contacts GS1 AM110, GS1 AM101 and GS1 ANTpp
only allow the text function with external handles GS2 AHTppp.
(4)Theseauxiliarycontactscanalsobeusedwith630,800and1250Aswitch-disconnector-fusesfttedwithadirectfront-
mounted operator.
(5) Reversible add-on attachments for converting an N/C contact to an N/O contact and vice versa.
(6) For striker fuses (BS fuses are not available with striker).
GS1 AM1pp
5
6
8
4
7
3
GS1 AM1pp
5
6
8
4
7
3
GS1 AMp11
5
6
8
4
7
4
GS1 AMp11
5
6
8
4
7
4
GS1 ANppp
5
6
8
4
7
6
GS1 ANppp
5
6
8
4
7
6
GS1 AMp
5
6
8
4
7
5
GS1 AMp
5
6
8
4
7
5
General:
pages4/44and4/45
Characteristics:
pages4/46to4/51
Dimensions:
pages4/6to4/66
Schemes:
page4/67
References
3to150A
Auxiliarycontacts
4
4/60
Handles for external operator
Switch rating Handle colour Degree of protection Reference Weight
A kg
Handles for front-mounted external operators, padlockable and lockable in position O (1)
Door interlock in I position (2)
3263 Black/Grey IP65 GS2 AH510 000
IP55 GS2 AH515 000
Red/Yellow IP65 GS2 AH520 000
IP55 GS2 AH535 040
630 and 800 Black/Grey IP65 GS2 AH550 080
Handles for front-mounted external operators with test facility (3), padlockable and lockable in "O"
position (1). Door interlock in I position (2)
3263 Black/Grey IP65 GS2 AHT510 000
Red/Yellow IP65 GS2 AHT520 000
100400 Black/Grey IP65 GS2 AHT530 040
Red/Yellow IP65 GS2 AHT540 040
Handles for external RH side-mounted operators, padockable and lockable in "O" position (1)
IP55 GS2 AH215 000
IP55 GS2 AH235 040
Handles for external LH side-mounted operators, padockable and lockable in "O" position (1)
Shafts for external operators
Switch rating Shaft length Shaft cross section Reference Weight
A mm mm kg
32 00 5x5 GS2 AE82 0100
30 5x5 GS2 AE8 015
400 5x5 GS2 AE81 0150
50400 00 10x10 GS2 AE22 0160
30 10x10 GS2 AE2 080
400 10x10 GS2 AE21 030
6301250 00 1x1 GS2 AE52 040
30 1x1 GS2 AE5 0380
400 1x1 GS2 AE51 040
(1) Lockable with device GS2 AX1, to be ordered separately.
(2) Door interlock override by means of a tool.
(3) The Test facility allows testing of the control circuits off-load, by using auxiliary contacts GS1 AM110, GS1 AM101 or
GS1 ANTpp. In the Test position, the enclosure door can be opened.
References
3to150A
Handlesforexternaloperators
5
3
8
6
5
3
GS2 AHp70
GS2 AHp80
5
3
8
6
5
4
GS2 AHp50
GS2 AHp60
5
3
8
6
5
5
GS2 AHp30
GS2 AHp40
5
3
8
6
5
6
GS2 AHp10
GS2 AHp20
4
4/61
Handles for external operators
Switch rating Type of operator Handle colour Reference Weight
A kg
Handles for direct operators, padlockable
32 Front Black GS1 AH103 0060
50 and 63 RHside Black GS1 AH01 0060
100400 RHside Black GS1 AH02 0100
630 and 800 Front Black GS2 AH104 0480
1250 Front Black GS2 AH105 0600
Terminal protection shrouds for upstream or downstream connector plates
Switch rating Number of poles Reference Weight
A kg
50 and 63 3or4 (1)
100160 3 GS1 AP33 0073
4 GS1 AP34 0180
200400 3 GS1 AP43 040
4 GS1 AP44 080
630800 3 GS2 AP63 050
4 GS2 AP64 0780
1250 3 GS2 AP83 0680
4 GS2 AP84 0840
Devices for locking fuse covers in "I" position (2)
A kg
50 14x51 3or4 (3)
63 Size00C 3or4 GS1 AV1 001
100160 x58,Size00 3or4 GS1 AV2 0040
160 Size0 3 GS1 AV33 006
4 GS1 AV34 0010
250 Size1 3 GS1 AV53 006
4 GS1 AV54 0010
400 Size 3 GS1 AV73 007
4 GS1 AV74 0033
Cage terminals for connection of bare cables (without lug)
Switch rating Number of poles Reference Weight
A kg
50 and 63 3or4 (4)
100160 3 GS1 AW33 0179
4 GS1 AW34 0357
200250 3 GS1 AW43 036
4 GS1 AW44 0480
External handle locking device
Switch rating Description Reference Weight
A kg
321250 DeviceforRONISEL11APkeylock
(locktobeorderedseparately)
GS2 AX1 000
Height compensation plate for external handles
Switch rating
A
Description Degree of protection Reference Weight
kg
321250 AllowsanewGSpphandle
to be ftted on existing cut-outs
IP65 GS2 AH001 000
Flat mounting kit
Switch rating Description Reference Weight
A kg
50400 Thekit,forusewithafront-mountedexternalhandle,
includes:
a00mmshaft,crosssection10x10mm,
anadapterplate
b
b
GS2 ADL2 0300
(1)Fortheseratings,theswitch-disconnector-fusesarefttedwithterminalcoversasstandard.
(2)ForNFCandDINswitch-disconnector-fusesfttedwithright-handmounteddirectoperator.
(3)Forthisrating,switch-disconnector-fusesarefttedwithacoverlockingdeviceasstandard.
(4)Fortheseratings,switch-disconnector-fusesarefttedwithcageterminalsasstandard.
GS1 AH01
5
6
8
6
6
8
GS1 AH01
5
6
8
6
6
8
GS1 AH02
5
6
8
6
6
9
GS1 AH02
5
6
8
6
6
9
References
3to150A
Handlesforexternaloperators
Accessories
4
4/6
GS1 DD (32 A)
Direct front-mounted operator
GS1 DD GS1 DDB
4
5
65 8,5
1
4
96
37,5
35
15
21,5 17
21,5
5,2
112
44
19 6,5
7
9
,
5
9
8
2x5
9
8
4
5
65 8,5
1
4
96
37,5 15
5,2
112
44
19 6,5
7
9
,
5
83 98
2x5
External front-mounted operator
GS1 DD Door cut-out
15 37,5
1
4
44
7
0
90
65
I
Test
O
3
5
4
9
78
10min(1)
4x7
2
8
40
37
GS1 DDB Door cut-out
1
4
3
5
90
65
I
Test
O
78
44
7
0
37,5 15
4
9
10min(1)
(1) With 1 or 2 auxiliary contacts GS1 AM1pp: 130 mm.
(2) With 3 or 4 auxiliary contacts GS1 AM1pp: 155 mm.
4x7
2
8
40
37
External RH side-mounted operator
GS1 DD Door cut-out
4
9
4
9
44 19 70 6,5 96
52,5
I
70
90
O
78
36min
4
0
4x7
28
37
GS1 DDB Door cut-out
44 96
52,5
4
9
4
9
I
70
90
O
78
19 70 6,5
36min
4
0
4x7
28
37
Dimensions
3to150A
Presentation:
pages4/44and4/45
Characteristics:
pages4/46to4/48
References:
pages4/53to4/57
Schemes:
page4/67
4
4/63
GS1 pp (50400 A)
Direct RH side-mounted operator
GS1 FD (50 A), GD (63 A), JD (100 A), KD, KKD (125 A), LD, LLD (160 A), ND (250 A) and QQD (400 A)
R
G1
M 7
0
P P P1
b
b
2
b
1
a1
a
K(2)
J G
R1
31
c
L
c1
c2
(1)
(4)
(5)
Q
H
(3)
I
O
GS1 a a1 b b1 b2 c c1 c2 G G1 H J K L M P P1 Q R R1
FD 3P 118 118 87 134 7 54 106 31 65 5 7 335
4P 145 118 87 134 7 54 106 31 65 5 7 335
GD 3P 133 118 159 1165 134 145 3 54 106 36 65 5 3 36
4P 165 118 159 1165 134 145 3 54 106 36 65 5 3 36
JD, KD 3P 150 108 16 68 116 173 36 54 17 40 5 44 141 36 38 0 195 5 85
4P 186 144 16 68 116 173 36 54 17 40 5 44 141 36 38 0 195 5 85
KKD,
LLD
3P 150 108 16 68 141 165 173 193 36 54 17 40 5 44 141 36 38 0 195 5 85
4P 186 144 16 68 141 165 173 193 36 54 17 40 5 44 141 36 38 0 195 5 85
LD 3P 19 136 16 68 174 1365 173 9 50 54 140 54 5 44 141 50 45 0 195 5 85
4P 4 17 16 68 174 1365 173 9 50 54 140 54 5 44 141 50 45 0 195 5 85
ND 3P 53 180 195 345 185 146 173 51 60 64 16 64 6 65 166 60 81 3 195 5 11
4P 313 40 195 345 185 146 173 51 60 64 16 64 6 65 166 60 81 3 195 5 11
QQD 3P 71 19 05 355 00 149 173 60 66 64 17 70 6 65 175 66 86 50 0 3 11
4P 337 58 05 355 00 149 173 60 66 64 17 70 6 65 175 66 86 50 0 3 11
(1) Terminal cover.
(2) Mounting on 5 rail only for GS1 FD and GS1 GD (50 and 63 A).
(3) Protective screen, lockable in I position.
(4) 1 or 2 auxiliary contacts GS1 AFpp.
(5) 1 or 2 auxiliary contacts GS1 AMp.
3to150A
Presentation:
pages4/44and4/45
Characteristics:
pages4/46to4/48
References:
pages4/53to4/57
Schemes:
page4/67
4
4/64
GS2 pp (50400 A)
External front and RH side-mounted operator
GS2 DB (32 A), F (50 A), G, GB, JB (63 A), J (100 A), K, KK (125 A), L, LL, LB, LLB (160 A), MMB (200 A), N, NB (250 A), PPB (315 A),
QQ and QQB (400 A)
P
P2
P3
c1
M1
M2
P
J
G1
G J1 J2
45
45
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
a
31
c
b2
H
b
2
M b
b
3
b
1
P
2
P
1
P
2
Q
Emin
0min
30max
GS2 a b b1 b2 b3 c c1 E min. G G1 H J J1 J2 M M1 M2 P P1 P2 P3 Q
F, DB 3P 11 118 70 85 87(5) 153 100(5) 7 54 106 31 45 18 5 15 6 7 59 1
4P 148 118 70 85 87(5) 153 100(5) 7 54 106 31 45 18 5 15 6 7 59 1
G, GB 3P 136 118 70 159 1165(6) 145 15 3 54 106 36 50 18 5 15 6 3 59 1
4P 168 118 70 159 1165(6) 145 15 3 54 106 36 50 18 5 15 6 3 59 1
J, JB,
K
3P 148 16 68 15 141 116(6) 187 135 36 54 17 40 54 18 5 141 41 8 36 6 5 195 0 85
4P 184 16 68 15 141 116(6) 187 135 36 54 17 40 54 18 5 141 41 8 36 6 5 195 0 85
KK,
LL
3P 148 16 68 15 141 165(6) 193 135 36 54 17 40 54 18 5 141 41 8 36 6 5 195 0 85
4P 184 16 68 15 141 165(6) 193 135 36 54 17 40 54 18 5 141 41 8 36 6 5 195 0 85
L, LB,
LLB
3P 190 16 68 15 174 1365 9 145 50 54 140 54 64 18 5 141 41 8 50 6 5 195 0 85
4P 40 16 68 15 174 1365 9 145 50 54 140 54 64 18 5 141 41 8 50 6 5 195 0 85
MMB,
NB, N
3P 34 195 345 15 185 146 51 154 60 64 16 64 86 5 6 166 5 17 60 84 5 195 3 11
4P 94 195 345 15 185 146 51 154 60 64 16 64 86 5 6 166 5 17 60 84 5 195 3 11
PPB,
QQB,
QQ
3P 5 05 355 15 00 149 60 157 66 64 17 70 91 5 6 175 54 145 66 84 3 0 50 11
4P 318 05 355 15 00 149 60 157 66 64 17 70 91 5 6 175 54 145 66 84 3 0 50 11
(1) Terminal cover.
(2) Rear access connector plates (option).
(3) 1 to 8 auxiliary contacts GS1 AM1pp.
(4) 1 or 2 auxiliary contacts GS1 AFpp.
(5) 1 auxiliary contact GS1 AM1pp: + 23.5 mm, 2 auxiliary contacts GS1 AM1pp: + 47 mm.
(6) 132 mm with 2 auxiliary contacts GS1 AM1pp.
Door cut-out
Forexternalfront-mountedoperator
90 65
I
Test
O
4x7
2
8
40
37
78
ForexternalRHside-mountedoperator
I
O
90
4
0
4x7
28
37
78
Presentation:
pages4/44and4/45
Characteristics:
pages4/46to4/48
References:
pages4/53to4/57
Schemes:
page4/67
3to150A
4
4/65
GS2 pp (6301250 A)
Direct front-mounted operator
GS2 S, SB (630 A), TB (800 A), V and VB (1250 A)
(2)
(1)
2
5
0
b
2
2
G
11
34
2
6
0
9
0
2
3
5
,
5
4
7
1
P P
9
c1
155 Q R
59
7
(3)
c
79,5
85,5
a
2
3
5
,
5 1
8
8
7
7
3
0
0
13
Emin
GS2 a b c c1 E min. G P Q R
S, SB, TB 3P 364 300 50 380 65 84 94 51 65
4P 458 300 50 380 65 378 94 51 65
V, VB 3P 44 355 89 95 304 36 10 77 88
4P 56 355 89 95 304 48 10 77 88
(1) Handle GS2 AH104 for GS2S, GS2 SB and GS2 TB.
(2) Terminal cover.
(3) Rear access connector plates (GS2 V and GS2 VB).
Handle GS2 AH105 for GS2 V and GS2 VB (direct front-mounted operator) Connector plates for GS2 V and GS2 VB
103 28
1
6
5
1
6
5
3
3
0
40
25
2
0
13 77
Presentation:
pages4/44and4/45
Characteristics:
pages4/46to4/48
References:
pages4/53to4/57
Schemes:
page4/67
3to150A
4
4/66
GS2 pp (6301250 A) (continued)
External front and RH side-mounted operator
GS2 S, SB (630 A), TB (800 A), V and VB (1250 A)
61
34
61
2
1
0
b
210
2
2
Emin
15min
GS2 b E min.
S, SB, TB 3P 97 65
4P 97 65
Handle GS2 AH570 or GS2 AH580 for GS2 V and GS2 VB (external
front-mounted operator)
V, VB 3P 350 304
4P 350 304
1
6
5
1
6
5
3
5
0
60
39
90
I
O
Door cut-out
Forexternalfront-mountedoperator
90
I
O
4x7
2
8
40
37
78
ForexternalRHside-mountedoperator
I
O
90
4
0
4x7
28
37
78
Presentation:
pages4/44and4/45
Characteristics:
pages4/46to4/48
References:
pages4/53to4/57
Schemes:
page4/67
3to150A
4
4/67
Dimensions with auxiliary contacts
GS1 AM111, GS1 AM211 GS1 AM110, GS1 AM101
18
9
8
24 24 65
Schemes
3-pole GS 4-pole GS
32 to 1250 A 32 A 50 to 1250 A
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
5
/
L
3
/
T
1
4
/
T
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
5
/
L
3
/
T
1
4
/
T
6
/
T
3
7
/
L
3
8
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
5
/
L
3
/
T
1
4
/
T
6
/
T
3
7
/
L
3
8
/
T
3
Auxiliary contacts
GS1 AM110 GS1 AM101 GS1 AM111 and GS1 AM1 GS1 AM211 and GS1 AM2
1 N/O 1 N/C 1 C/O 2 C/O
p
3
p
4
p
p
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
4
1
GS1 ANpp GS1 AFp

1 N/C + 1 N/O 2 N/C + 2 N/O 1 C/O 2 C/O
1
3
1
4
1
1
3
1
4
1
3
3
3
4
4
4
1
1
4
1
1
1
4
1
Presentation:
pages4/44and4/45
Characteristics:
pages4/46to4/48
References:
pages4/53to4/57
Dimensions:
pages4/6to4/66
Dimensions,
schemes
3to150A
4
4/68
All TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses for the North American market are certifed UL98 and CSA 22.2 N 4.
Compact switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with UL fuses
Switch
rating
Fuse
size
Number
of poles
Reference Weight
A kg
For front-mounted external operators
For front-mounted direct operators
30 CC 3 GS1 DDU3 0600
J 3 GS1 DU3 067
Switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with UL fuses
Switch
rating
Fuse
size
Number
of poles
Reference Weight
A kg
For front-mounted external operators (1)
30 CC 3 GS2 EEU3 1400
J 3 GS2 EU3 100
60 J 3 GS2 GU3 17
100 J 3 GS2 JU3 761
200 J 3 GS2 MU3 4166
400 J 3 GS2 QU3 5400
600 J 3 GS2 SU3 9000
800 L 3 GS2 TU3 0860
Switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with UL fuses,
with handle for direct operator
Switch
rating
Fuse
size
Number
of poles
Type of
operator
Reference Weight
A kg
For direct operator
30 CC RHside-mounted
GS1AH01
GS1 EERU20 0991
CC 3 RHside-mounted
GS1AH01
GS1 EERU30 118
(1)630and800Aswitch-disconnector-fusescanalsobefttedwithafront-mounteddirectoperator.
GS1 DU3
5
3
8
7
3
5
GS1 DU3
5
3
8
7
3
5
Characteristics:
pages4/7and4/73
References
fortheNorthAmericanmarket,
conformingtoULandCSAstandards,
30to800A,TeSysGS
GS2 MU3
5
1
0
9
7
9
GS1 EERU30
5
1
0
9
5
9
4
4/69
Auxiliary early break and/or O, I and Test position signalling contacts (1), (2), (3)
Switch
rating
Contact
type
Type of
operator
Reference Weight
A kg
30 Compact 1N/O External,frontorside-mounted GS1 AM110 000
1N/C External,frontorside-mounted GS1 AM101 000
30800 1N/O External,frontorside-mounted(4) GS1 AM110 000
1N/C External,frontorside-mounted(4) GS1 AM101 000
Auxiliary O, I and Test position signalling contacts (3), (5)
Switch
rating
Contact
type
Type of
operator
Reference Weight
A kg
Auxiliary O and I position signalling contacts
30800 1N/C+1N/O External,frontorRHside-mounted
Direct
GS1 AN11 013
N/C+N/O External,frontorRHside-mounted
Direct
GS1 AN22 038
Auxiliary O, I and Test position signalling contacts (3)
30400 1N/C+1N/O External,front-mounted GS1 ANT11 0153
N/C+N/O External,front-mounted GS1 ANT22 058
(1) For 30 A switch-disconnector-fuses, these auxiliary contacts allow:
- early break and O and I position signalling, - O and I position signalling,
For 30 to 400 A switch-disconnector-fuses, they allow:
- early break, - O and I position signalling,
For 600 and 800 A switch-disconnector-fuses, they allow:
- early break and O and I position signalling,
(2) Maximum number of auxiliary contacts:
Switch rating
A
Standard With additional bracket Reference of
additional bracket
30 Compact CC 4 4+4 GS1AD10
J +4 GS1AD10
30100 4 4+4 GSAD0
200 and 400 8 8+4 GSAD0
600 and 800 8 8
(3) The Test position allows testing of the control circuits off-load. Auxiliary contacts GS1 AM110, GS1 AM101 and GS1 ANTpp
only allow the test function with external handles GS2 AHTppp.
(4)Theseauxiliarycontactscanalsobeusedwith600and800Aswitch-disconnector-fusesfttedwithafront-mounteddirect
operator.
GS1 AM1pp
5
6
8
4
7
3
GS1 AM1pp
5
6
8
4
7
3
GS1 ANppp
5
6
8
4
7
6
GS1 ANppp
5
6
8
4
7
6
30to800A,TeSysGSAuxiliarycontacts
4
4/70
Handles for external operators
Switch
rating
Protection index
Nema
Handle colour Reference Weight
A kg
Handles for front-mounted external operators, padlockable
30 Compact 1,3R,1 Black/Grey GS2 AH110 000
Red/Yellow GS2 AH120 000
1,3R,1 Black/Grey GS2 AH410 000
30400 1,3R,1 Black/Grey GS2 AH130 040
1,3R,4,4X,1 Black/Grey GS2 AH430 040
600 and 800 1,3R,1 Black/Grey GS2 AH150 080
Handles for front-mounted external operators with Test facility (2), padlockable
30 Compact 1,3R,1 Black/Grey GS2 AHT110 000
Red/Yellow GS2 AHT120 000
1,3R,4,4X,1 Black/Grey GS2 AHT410 000
30400 1,3R,1 Noir/Gris GS2 AHT130 040
1,3R,4,4X,1 Black/Grey GS2 AHT430 040
Shafts for external operators
Switch
rating
Shaft length Shaft cross section Reference Weight
A mm mm kg
30 Compact 00 5x5 GS2 AE82 0100
30 5x5 GS2 AE8 015
400 5x5 GS2 AE81 0150
30400 00 10x10 GS2 AE22 0160
30 10x10 GS2 AE2 080
400 10x10 GS2 AE21 030
600 and 800 00 1x1 GS2 AE52 040
30 1x1 GS2 AE5 0380
400 1x1 GS2 AE51 040
(1) Door interlock override by means of a tool.
(2) The Test position allows testing of the control circuits off-load, by using auxiliary contacts GS1 AM110. GS1 AM101 or
GS1 ANTpp. In the Test position, the enclosure door can be opened.
References
30to800A,TeSysGSHandles,accessories
5
3
8
6
5
4
GS2 AHp50
GS2 AHp60
5
3
8
6
5
5
GS2 AHp30
GS2 AHp40
5
3
8
6
5
6
GS2 AHp10
GS2 AHp20
4
4/71
Handles for direct operators
Switch
rating
Type of operator Handle colour Reference Weight
A kg
Handles for direct operators, padlockable
30 Compact Front-mounted Black GS2 AH106 0040
600 and 800 Front-mounted Black GS2 AH107 0480
Terminal protection shrouds for upstream or downstream connector plates
Switch
rating
Number
of poles
Reference Weight
A kg
30 Compact 3 (1)
3060 3 (1)
100 3 GS1 AP33 0073
200 3 GS1 AP43 040
400 3 GS1 APU53 0060
600 and 800 3 GS2 AP63 050
Height compensation plate for external handles
Switch
rating
A kg
30 Compact
30400
AllowsanewGSpp handle to be ftted in existing cut-outs GS2 AH001 000
(1)Fortheseratings,theswitch-disconnector-fusesarefttedwithterminalcoversasstandard.
GS1 AH01
5
6
8
6
6
8
GS1 AH01
5
6
8
6
6
8
GS1 AH02
5
6
8
6
6
9
GS1 AH02
5
6
8
6
6
9
30to800A,TeSysGSHandles,accessories
4
4/7
Type GS1 DDU3 GS1 DU3 GS2 EEU3 GS2 EU3 GS2 GU3 GS2 JU3 GS2 MU3 GS2 QU3 GS2 SU3 GS2 TU3
Environment
Conforming to standards Switch-disconnector-fuses UL489,CSAn5,
IEC60947-3
UL98,CSAn4,
IEC60947-3
UL98,CSAn4,
IEC60947-3
conformingtoIEC6059
Withterminalcovers IP0 IP0
around the device
Storage C -40+80 -40+80
Flame resistance
Body C 960 960 960 960
Fusecover C 850 850
A 30 30 30 30 60 100 00 400 600 800
Fuse size CC J CC J J J J J J L
Rated insulation voltage(Ui) V 800 800 750 750 750 750 750 800 1000 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 1
(1)
a400V A 3 3 3 3 63 100 00 400 630 800
a500V A 3 3 3 3 63 100 00 315 630 630
a690V A 3 3 3 3 63 100 00 50 630 630
(1)
a400V kW 15 15 15 15 30 51 100 0 355 450
a500V kW 185 185 185 185 40 63 140 0 450 560
a690V kW 5 5 5 5 55 90 185 0 600 600
Prospective short-circuit
current withstand
ConformingtoUL98/UL489
ata600V
kA 100 100 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
current (dynamic
Conformingto
IEC6069-1
a400V kA 55 55 76 176 176 3 36 80 80
Rated making capacity Irmsat400VCatAC-3B A 300 300 300 300 600 1000 000 4000 6000 8000
Rated breaking capacity Irmsat400VCatAC-3B A 40 40 40 40 480 800 1600 300 4800 6400
Mechanical durability Numberofoperatingcycles 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 8000 6000 5000 5000
CatAC/DC-3A/B(1)
1500/300 1500/300 1500/300 1500/300 1500/300 1500/300 1000/00 1000/00 1000/00 500/100
2
5 5 6 6 6 5 95 185 x150
Bars(maxwidth) mm 16 3 5 50 50 0 3 45 100 100
Tightening torque N.m 3 3 5,5 6,5 65 10 18 35 35 35
Characteristics
conformingtoULandCSA,
30to800A,TeSysGS
References:
page4/68
4
4/73
Type GS1 DDU3 GS1 DU3 GS2 EEU3 GS2 EU3 GS2 GU3 GS2 JU3 GS2 MU3 GS2 QU3 GS2 SU3 GS2 TU3
Environment
Conforming to standards Switch-disconnector-fuses UL489,CSAn5,
IEC60947-3
UL98,CSAn4,
IEC60947-3
UL98,CSAn4,
IEC60947-3
conformingtoIEC6059
Withterminalcovers IP0 IP0
around the device
Storage C -40+80 -40+80
Flame resistance
Body C 960 960 960 960
Fusecover C 850 850
A 30 30 30 30 60 100 00 400 600 800
Fuse size CC J CC J J J J J J L
Rated insulation voltage(Ui) V 800 800 750 750 750 750 750 800 1000 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 1
(1)
a400V A 3 3 3 3 63 100 00 400 630 800
a500V A 3 3 3 3 63 100 00 315 630 630
a690V A 3 3 3 3 63 100 00 50 630 630
(1)
a400V kW 15 15 15 15 30 51 100 0 355 450
a500V kW 185 185 185 185 40 63 140 0 450 560
a690V kW 5 5 5 5 55 90 185 0 600 600
Prospective short-circuit
current withstand
ConformingtoUL98/UL489
ata600V
kA 100 100 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
current (dynamic
Conformingto
IEC6069-1
a400V kA 55 55 76 176 176 3 36 80 80
Rated making capacity Irmsat400VCatAC-3B A 300 300 300 300 600 1000 000 4000 6000 8000
Rated breaking capacity Irmsat400VCatAC-3B A 40 40 40 40 480 800 1600 300 4800 6400
Mechanical durability Numberofoperatingcycles 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 8000 6000 5000 5000
CatAC/DC-3A/B(1)
1500/300 1500/300 1500/300 1500/300 1500/300 1500/300 1000/00 1000/00 1000/00 500/100
2
5 5 6 6 6 5 95 185 x150
Bars(maxwidth) mm 16 3 5 50 50 0 3 45 100 100
Tightening torque N.m 3 3 5,5 6,5 65 10 18 35 35 35
4/74
4
CartridgefusestypeaM
Forprotectionofequipmentwithcurrentpeaks
Fuse type Maximum

rated
voltage
Rating Sold in
lots of
Fuses without striker Fuses with striker
Unit
reference
Weight Unit
reference
Weight
V A kg kg
Cylindrical
8.5 x 31.5
a 400 1 10 DF2 BA0100 0010
10 DF2 BA0200 0010
4 10 DF2 BA0400 0010
6 10 DF2 BA0600 0010
8 10 DF2 BA0800 0010
10 10 DF2 BA1000 0010
Cylindrical
10 x 38
a500 016 10 DF2 CA001 0010
05 10 DF2 CA002 0010
050 10 DF2 CA005 0010
1 10 DF2 CA01 0010
10 DF2 CA02 0010
4 10 DF2 CA04 0010
6 10 DF2 CA06 0010
8 10 DF2 CA08 0010
10 10 DF2 CA10 0010
1 10 DF2 CA12 0010
16 10 DF2 CA16 0010
a400 0 10 DF2 CA20 0010
5 10 DF2 CA25 0010
3 10 DF2 CA32 0010
Cylindrical
14 x 51
a690 05 10 DF2 EA002 000
050 10 DF2 EA005 000
a500 1 10 DF2 EA01 000
10 DF2 EA02 000 DF3 EA02 000
4 10 DF2 EA04 000 DF3 EA04 000
6 10 DF2 EA06 000 DF3 EA06 000
8 10 DF2 EA08 000 DF3 EA08 000
10 10 DF2 EA10 000 DF3 EA10 000
1 10 DF2 EA12 000 DF3 EA12 000
16 10 DF2 EA16 000 DF3 EA16 000
0 10 DF2 EA20 000 DF3 EA20 000
5 10 DF2 EA25 000 DF3 EA25 000
3 10 DF2 EA32 000 DF3 EA32 000
40 10 DF2 EA40 000 DF3 EA40 000
a400 50 10 DF2 EA50 000 DF3 EA50 000
Cylindrical
22 x 58
a690 4 10 DF2 FA04 0045 DF3 FA04 0045
6 10 DF2 FA06 0045 DF3 FA06 0045
8 10 DF2 FA08 0045 DF3 FA08 0045
10 10 DF2 FA10 0045 DF3 FA10 0045
16 10 DF2 FA16 0045 DF3 FA16 0045
0 10 DF2 FA20 0045 DF3 FA20 0045
5 10 DF2 FA25 0045 DF3 FA25 0045
3 10 DF2 FA32 0045 DF3 FA32 0045
40 10 DF2 FA40 0045 DF3 FA40 0045
50 10 DF2 FA50 0045 DF3 FA50 0045
a500 63 10 DF2 FA63 0045 DF3 FA63 0045
80 10 DF2 FA80 0045 DF3 FA80 0045
100 10 DF2 FA100 0045 DF3 FA100 0045
a400 15 10 DF2 FA125 0045 DF3 FA125 0045
8
1
8
8
9
8
1
8
8
9
8
1
8
8
8
8
1
8
8
8
8
1
8
9
0
8
1
8
9
0
8
1
8
8
7
8
1
8
8
7
8
1
8
9
1
8
1
8
9
1
DF2 CAppp
DF2 EAppp
DF3 EApp
DF2 FApp
DF3 FApp
References 4
4/75
4
CartridgefusestypeaM
Forprotectionofequipmentwithcurrentpeaks
Fuse type Maximum

rated
voltage
Rating Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight Unit
reference
Weight
V A kg kg
Blade
size 00
a500 16 3 DF2 FGA16 0160
0 3 DF2 FGA20 0160
5 3 DF2 FGA25 0160
3 3 DF2 FGA32 0160
40 3 DF2 FGA40 0160
50 3 DF2 FGA50 0160
63 3 DF2 FGA63 0160
80 3 DF2 FGA80 0160
100 3 DF2 FGA100 0160
a400 15 3 DF2 FGA125 0160
Blade
size 0
a500 50 3 DF2 GA1051 030
63 3 DF2 GA1061 030
80 3 DF2 GA1081 030
100 3 DF2 GA1101 030
15 3 DF2 GA1121 030 DF4 GA1121 030
160 3 DF2 GA1161 030 DF4 GA1161 030
00 3 DF2 GA1201 030 DF4 GA1201 030
Blade
size 1
a500 160 3 DF2 HA1161 0400
00 3 DF2 HA1201 0400 DF4 HA1201 0400
50 3 DF2 HA1251 0400 DF4 HA1251 0400
315 3 DF2 HA1311 0400 DF4 HA1311 0400
Blade
size 2
a500 50 3 DF2 JA1251 0560
315 3 DF2 JA1311 0560 DF4 JA1311 0560
400 3 DF2 JA1401 0560 DF4 JA1401 0560
500 3 DF2 JA1501 0560 DF4 JA1501 0560
Blade
size 3
a500 400 3 DF2 KA1401 0850
500 3 DF2 KA1501 0850 DF4 KA1501 0850
630 3 DF2 KA1631 0850 DF4 KA1631 0850
Blade
size 4
a500 630 1 DF2 LA1631 1900 DF4 LA1631 1900
800 1 DF2 LA1801 1900 DF4 LA1801 1900
1000 1 DF2 LA1101 1900 DF4 LA1101 1900
a400 150 1 DF2 LA1251 1900 DF4 LA1251 1900
5
3
3
3
3
0
5
3
3
3
3
0
5
3
3
3
3
1
5
3
3
3
3
1
5
3
3
3
3
5
3
3
3
3
DF2 JApppp
DF4 GApppp
DF2 GApppp
4/76
4
CartridgefusestypegG
For protection of circuits without signifcant current peaks
Fuse type Maximum

rated
voltage
Rating Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight Unit
reference
Weight
V A kg kg
Cylindrical
8.5 x 31.5
a400 1 10 DF2 BN0100 0010
10 DF2 BN0200 0010
4 10 DF2 BN0400 0010
6 10 DF2 BN0600 0010
8 10 DF2 BN0800 0010
10 10 DF2 BN1000 0010
1 10 DF2 BN1200 0010
16 10 DF2 BN1600 0010
0 10 DF2 BN2000 0010
Cylindrical
10 x 38
a500 10 DF2 CN02 0010
4 10 DF2 CN04 0010
6 10 DF2 CN06 0010
8 10 DF2 CN08 0010
10 10 DF2 CN10 0010
1 10 DF2 CN12 0010
16 10 DF2 CN16 0010
0 10 DF2 CN20 0010
a400 5 10 DF2 CN25 0010
3 10 DF2 CN32 0010
Cylindrical
14 x 51
a500 4 10 DF2 EN04 000 DF3 EN04 000
6 10 DF2 EN06 000 DF3 EN06 000
10 10 DF2 EN10 000 DF3 EN10 000
16 10 DF2 EN16 000 DF3 EN16 000
0 10 DF2 EN20 000 DF3 EN20 000
5 10 DF2 EN25 000 DF3 EN25 000
3 10 DF2 EN32 000 DF3 EN32 000
40 10 DF2 EN40 000 DF3 EN40 000
a400 50 10 DF2 EN50 000
Cylindrical
22 x 58
a690 10 10 DF2 FN10 0045 DF3 FN10 0045
0 10 DF2 FN20 0045 DF3 FN20 0045
5 10 DF2 FN25 0045 DF3 FN25 0045
3 10 DF2 FN32 0045 DF3 FN32 0045
40 10 DF2 FN40 0045 DF3 FN40 0045
50 10 DF2 FN50 0045 DF3 FN50 0045
a500 63 10 DF2 FN63 0045 DF3 FN63 0045
80 10 DF2 FN80 0045 DF3 FN80 0045
100 10 DF2 FN100 0045 DF3 FN100 0045
8
1
8
9
7
8
1
8
9
7
8
1
8
9
6
8
1
8
9
6
8
1
8
9
8
8
1
8
9
8
8
1
8
9
5
8
1
8
9
5
8
1
8
9
9
8
1
8
9
9
DF3 FNpp
DF2 FNpp
DF3 ENpp
DF2 ENpp
DF2 CNpp
References 4
4/77
4
CartridgefusestypegG
For protection of circuits without signifcant current peaks
Fuse type Maximum

rated
voltage
Rating Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight Unit
reference
Weight
V A kg kg
Blade
size 00
a500 10 10 DF2 FGN10 0160
16 10 DF2 FGN16 0160
0 10 DF2 FGN20 0160
5 10 DF2 FGN25 0160
3 10 DF2 FGN32 0160
40 10 DF2 FGN40 0160
50 10 DF2 FGN50 0160
63 10 DF2 FGN63 0160
80 10 DF2 FGN80 0160
100 10 DF2 FGN100 0160
15 10 DF2 FGN125 0160
160 10 DF2 FGN160 0160
Blade
size 0
a500 50 3 DF2 GN1051 030
63 3 DF2 GN1061 030
80 3 DF2 GN1081 030
100 3 DF2 GN1101 030
15 3 DF2 GN1121 030 DF4 GN1121 030
160 3 DF2 GN1161 030 DF4 GN1161 030
Blade
size 1
a500 160 3 DF2 HN1161 0400
00 3 DF2 HN1201 0400 DF4 HN1201 0400
50 3 DF2 HN1251 0400 DF4 HN1251 0400
Blade
size 2
a500 50 3 DF2 JN1251 0560
315 3 DF2 JN1311 0560 DF4 JN1311 0560
400 3 DF2 JN1401 0560 DF4 JN1401 0560
Blade
size 3
a500 500 3 DF2 KN1501 0850 DF4 KN1501 0850
630 3 DF2 KN1631 0850 DF4 KN1631 0850
Blade
size 4
a500 800 1 DF2 LN1801 1900 DF4 LN1801 1900
1000 1 DF2 LN1101 1900 DF4 LN1101 1900
150 1 DF2 LN1251 1900 DF4 LN1251 1900
5
3
3
3
3
3
5
3
3
3
3
3
5
3
3
3
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
5
5
3
3
3
3
5
DF2 GNpppp
DF4 GNpppp
DF2 JNpppp
5/2
5 5 5 5
Contactors: defnitions and comments. .page 5/2
Tests according to standard utilisation categories conforming .
to.IEC.60947-4-1.and.5-1. .page 5/4
Current of asynchronous squirrel cage motors at nominal load. .page 5/5
TeSys contactors selection guide page 5/6
TeSys K contactors and reversing contactors
Contactors
6 to 16 A in category AC-3 and 6 to 12 A in category AC-4 . page 5/14
6 to 12 A in categories AC-3 and AC-4. page 5/15
20 A in category AC-1. page 1/17
Reversing contactors
6 to 16 A in category AC-3 and 6 to 12 A in category AC-4 . page 5/18
6 to 12 A in categories AC-3 and AC-4. page 5/19
20 A in category AC-1. page 5/20
Auxiliary contact blocks, suppressor modules and accessories. page 5/23
TeSys LC1 SK and LP1 SK mini-contactors
For motor control in categories AC-3 and AC-1 . page 5/34
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks .
and suppressor modules. page 5/35
TeSys LC1 SKGC mini-contactors
For use in modular panels. page 5/42
Suppressor modules. page 5/43
TeSys D contactors and reversing contactors
Contactors for motor control
Up to 75 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3 page 5/62
Up to 15 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3 . page 5/63
From 25 to 200 A, in category AC-1. page 1/64
From 20 to 200 A, for the North American market, .
conforming to UL and CSA standards. page 5/71
Reversing contactors for motor control
Up to 75 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3 page 5/72
Up to 15 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3 . page 5/73
From 20 to 200 A, in category AC-1. page 5/74
Components parts for assembling reversing contactors . page 5/76
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks and suppressor modules. page 5/79
Coils for TeSys D contactors . page 5/86
TeSys contactors for switching 3-phase capacitor
banks
Contactors used for power factor correction. page 5/102
b
b
b
b
v
v
v
b
v
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
v
v
b
v
v
v
b
b
b
b
Contents
5 - TeSys contactors and reversing
contactors
5 5
5/1
5 5
TeSys F contactors and reversing contactors
Contactors for motor control
115 to 800 A, in category AC-3 page 5/114
200 to 2100 A, in category AC-1. page 5/115
115 to 265 A, in category AC-3, customer assembly page 5/116
200 to 350 A, in category AC-1, customer assembly. page 5/117
Components for assembling reversing contactors. page 5/118
Instantaneous contact blocks and accessories . page 5/123
Coils for TeSys F contactors. page 5/130
High power changeover contactor pairs for
distribution
For customer assembly. page 5/153
Capacitive delayed opening devices
For TeSys D contactors. page 5/156
For TeSys F contactors . page 5/157
TeSys FG shockproof contactors
References. page 5/174
Dimensions and schemes. page 5/180
TeSys LC1 B contactors
750 to 1800 A, in category AC-3 . page 5/184
800 to 2750 A, in category AC-1. page 5/185
Accessories and spare parts. page 5/186
Replacement coils. page 5/188
Variable composition contactors
CV1 B from 80 to 1000 A and CV3 B from 80 to 500 A . page 5/228
3-pole vacuum contactors and reversing contactors
LC1 V and CV2 V . page 5/232
Magnetic latching contactors
CR1 F and CR1 B......................................... page 5/242
Modular equipment
TeSys GC standard contactor . page 5/278
TeSys GF impulse relays. page 5/286
TeSys GY dual tariff contactors. page 5/292
b
v
v
b
v
v
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
5/2
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors
Defnitions and comments
.........
Defnitions
Altitude The rarefed atmosphere at high altitude reduces the dielectric strength of the air and hence the
rated operational voltage of the contactor. It also reduces the cooling effect of the air and hence
the rated operational current of the contactor (unless the temperature drops at the same time)..
No derating is necessary up to 3000 m..
Derating factors to be applied above this altitude for main pole operational voltage and current
(a.c. supply) are as follows.
Altitude 3500 m 4000 m 4500 m 5000 m
Rated operetional voltage 0,90 0,80 0,70 0,60
Rated operational current 0,92 0,90 0,88 0,86
.
Ambient air temperature The temperature of the air surrounding the device, measured near to the device.
The operating characteristics are given :
with no restriction for temperatures between -5 and +55 C,
with restrictions, if necessary, for temperatures between -50 and +70 C..
-
-
Rated operational current (Ie) This is defned taking into account the rated operational voltage, operating rate and duty,
utilisation category and ambient temperature around the device..
Rated conventional thermal current (Ith) (1) The current which a closed contactor can sustain for a minimum of 8 hours without its
temperature rise exceeding the limits given in the standards..
Permissible short time rating The current which a closed contactor can sustain for a short time after a period of no load, without
dangerous overheating..
Rated operational voltage (Ue) This is the voltage value which, in conjunction with the rated operational current, determines the
use of the contactor or starter, and on which the corresponding tests and the utilisation category
are based. For 3-phase circuits it is expressed as the voltage between phases.
Apart from exceptional cases such as rotor short-circuiting, the rated operational voltage Ue is
less than or equal to the rated insulation voltage Ui..
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) The rated value of the control circuit voltage, on which the operating characteristics are based.
For a.c. applications, the values are given for a near sinusoidal wave form (less than 5% total
harmonic distortion)..
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) This is the voltage value used to defne the insulation characteristics of a device and referred to
in dielectric tests determining leakage paths and creepage distances. As the specifcations are
not identical for all standards, the rated value given for each of them is not necessarily the same..
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) The peak value of a voltage surge which the device is able to withstand without breaking down..
Rated operational power (expressed in kW) The rated power of the standard motor which can be switched by the contactor, at the stated
operational voltage..
Rated breaking capacity (2) This is the current value which the contactor can break in accordance with the breaking
conditions specifed in the IEC standard..
Rated making capacity (2) This is the current value which the contactor can make in accordance with the making conditions
specifed in the IEC standard..
On-load factor (m) This is the ratio between the time the current fows (t) and the duration of
the cycle (T)
Cycle duration: duration of current fow + time at zero current
Pole impedance The impedance of one pole is the sum of the impedance of all the circuit components between
the input terminal and the output terminal.
The impedance comprises a resistive component (R) and an inductive component (X = Lw).
The total impedance therefore depends on the frequency and is normally given for 50 Hz.
This average value is given for the pole at its rated operational current..
Electrical durability This is the average number of on-load operating cycles which the main pole contacts can
perform without maintenance. The electrical durability depends on the utilisation category, the
rated operational current and the rated operational voltage..
Mechanical durability This is the average number of no-load operating cycles (i.e. with zero current fow through the
main poles) which the contactor can perform without mechanical failure..
(1) Conventional thermal current, in free air, conforming to IEC standards.
(2) For a.c. applications, the breaking and making capacities are expressed by the rms value of the symmetrical component of the short-circuit current. Taking into
account the maximum asymmetry which may exist in the circuit, the contacts therefore have to withstand a peak asymmetrical current which may be twice the
rms symmetrical component.
Note : these defnitions are extracted from standard IEC 60947-1.
General
5 5
5/3
5 5
TeSys contactors
Defnitions and comments
..
Contactor utilisation categories conforming to IEC 60947-4
The standard utilisation categories defne the current values which the contactor must be able to make or break.
These values depend on:
- the type of load being switched : squirrel cage or slip ring motor, resistors,
- the conditions under which making or breaking takes place: motor stalled, starting or running, reversing, plugging..
ac applications
Category AC-1 This category applies to all types of a.c. load with a power factor equal to or greater than 0.95
(cos j.u 0.95)..
Application examples: heating, distribution..
Category AC-2 This category applies to starting, plugging and inching of slip ring motors.
On closing, the contactor makes the starting current, which is about 2.5 times the rated
current of the motor.
On opening, it must break the starting current, at a voltage less than or equal to the mains
supply voltage..
v
v
Category AC-3 This category applies to squirrel cage motors with breaking during normal running of the motor.
On closing, the contactor makes the starting current, which is about 5 to 7 times the rated
current of the motor.
On opening, it breaks the rated current drawn by the motor; at this point, the voltage at the
contactor terminals is about 20% of the mains supply voltage. Breaking is light.
Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors: lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket
elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc... ..
v
v
Category AC-4 This category covers applications with plugging and inching of squirrel cage and slip ring motors.
The contactor closes at a current peak which may be as high as 5 or 7 times the rated motor
current. On opening it breaks this same current at a voltage which is higher, the lower the motor
speed. This voltage can be the same as the mains
voltage. Breaking is severe
Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, cranes and hoists, metallurgy
industry.
dc applications
Category DC-1 This category applies to all types of d.c. load with a time constant (L/R) of less than or equal
to 1 ms..
Category DC-3 This category applies to starting, counter-current braking and inching of shunt motors.
Time constant y 2 ms.
On closing, the contactor makes the starting current, which is about 2.5 times the rated
motor current.
On opening, the contactor must be able to break 2.5 times the starting current at a voltage
which is less than or equal to the mains voltage. The slower the motor speed, and therefore
the lower its back e.m.f., the higher this voltage.
Breaking is diffcult..
v
v
Category DC-5 This category applies to starting, counter-current braking and inching of series wound motors.
Time constant y 7.5 ms.
On closing, the contactor makes a starting current peak which may be as high as 2.5 times the
rated motor current. On opening, the contactor breaks this same current at a voltage which is
higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as the mains voltage.
Breaking is severe.
Utilisation categories for auxiliary contacts & control relays conforming to IEC 60947-5
ac applications
Category AC-14 (1) This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn with the
electromagnet closed is less than 72 VA.
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors and relays.
Category AC-15 (1) This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn with the
electromagnet closed is more than 72 VA.
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors..
dc applications
Category DC-13.(2) This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads for which the time taken to reach
95 % of the steady state current (T = 0.95) is equal to 6 times the power P drawn by the load
(with P y 50 W)..
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors without economy resistor.
(1) Replaces category AC-11.
(2) Replaces category DC-13.
General
5/4
5 5 5 5
Technical information
Tests according to standard utilisation categories
conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and 5-1
based on rated operational current Ie .
and rated operational voltage Ue
Contactors
Electrical durability:
making and breaking conditions
Occasional duty:
ac supply
Typical
applications
Utilisation
category
Making Breaking Making Breaking
I U cos j I U cos j I U cos j I U cos j
Resistors,
non inductive .
or slightly inductive loads
AC-1 Ie Ue. 095 Ie Ue. 095 15.Ie 105.Ue 08 15.Ie 105.Ue 08

Motors
Slip ring motors: .
starting, breaking.
AC-2 25.Ie Ue 065 25.Ie Ue 065 4.Ie 105.Ue 065 4.Ie 105.Ue 065
Squirrel cage motors:
starting, breaking whilst
motor running.
AC-3
Ie.y.(1) 6.Ie Ue 065 1.Ie 017.Ue 065 10.Ie 105.Ue 045 8.Ie 105.Ue 045
Ie.>.(2) 6.Ie Ue 0.35 1.Ie 017.Ue 0.35 10.Ie 105.Ue 0.35 8.Ie 105.Ue 0.35
Squirrel cage motors:.
starting, .
reversing, .
inching
AC-4
Ie.y.(1) 6.Ie Ue 065 6.Ie Ue 065 12.Ie 105.Ue 045 10.Ie 105.Ue 045
Ie.>.(2) 6.Ie Ue 0.35 6.Ie Ue 0.35 12.Ie 105.Ue 0.35 10.Ie 105.Ue 0.35
dc supply
Typical
applications
Utilisation
category
I U L/R (ms) I U L/R (ms) I U L/R (ms) I U L/R (ms)
Resistors,
non inductive .
or slightly inductive loads
DC-1 Ie Ue. 1 Ie Ue. 1 15.Ie 105.Ue 1 15.Ie 105.Ue 1
Shunt wound motors: .
starting,
reversing,
inching
DC-3 25.Ie Ue 2 25.Ie Ue 2 4.Ie 105.Ue 25 4.Ie 105.Ue 25
Series wound motors: .
starting,
reversing,
inching
DC-5 25.Ie Ue 75 25.Ie Ue 75 4.Ie 105.Ue 15 4.Ie 105.Ue 15
Control relays and auxiliary contacts
Electrical durability:
Occasional duty:
ac supply
Typical
applications
Utilisation
category
I U cos j I U cos j I U cos j I U cos j
Electromagnets
y 72 VA AC-14 6.Ie 11.Ue 07 6.Ie 11.Ue 07.
> 72 VA AC-15 10.Ie Ue 07 Ie Ue 04 10.Ie 11.Ue 0.3 10.Ie 11.Ue 0.3
dc supply
Typical
applications
Utilisation
category
I U L/R (ms) I U L/R (ms) I U L/R (ms) I U L/R (ms)
Electromagnets DC-13 Ie Ue. 6.P.(3) Ie Ue 6.P.(3) 11.Ie 11.Ue 6.P.(3) 11.Ie 11.Ue 6.P.(3)
(1) Ie y 17 A for electrical durability, Ie y 100 A for occasional duty.
(2) Ie > 17 A for electrical durability, Ie > 100 A for occasional duty.
(3) The value 6 P (in watts) is based on practical observations and is considered to represent the majority of d.c. magnetic loads up to the maximum limit of P = 50
W i.e. 6 P = 300 ms = L/R.
Above this, the loads are made up of smaller loads in parallel. The value 300 ms is therefore a maximum limit whatever the value of current drawn.
General 5
5 5
5/5
5 5
Current of asynchronous squirrel cage motors .
at nominal load
.............
3-phase 4-pole motors
Current values for power in kW Current values for power in hp
Rated
operational
power (1)
Indicative rated operational current
values at:
Rated
operational
power (2)
Indicative rated operational current values at:
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 110 -
120 V
200 V 208 V 220 -
240 V
380 -
415 V
440 -
480 V
550 -
600 V
kW A A A A hp A A A A A A A
006 0.35 02 016 012 1/2 44 25 24 22 1.3 11 09
009 052 0.3 024 017 3/4 64 3.7 3.5 3.2 18 16 1.3
012 07 044 0.32 0.23 1 84 48 46 42 2.3 21 17
018 1 06 048 0.35 1
1/2
12 69 66 6 3.3 3 24
025 15 085 068 049 2 13.6 78 75 68 4.3 3.4 27
037 19 11 088 064 3 192 11 106 96 61 48 3.9
055 26 15 12 087 5 30.4 175 167 152 97 76 61
075 3.3 19 15 11 7
1/2
44 25.3 242 22 14 11 9
11 47 27 22 16 10 56 32.2 30.8 28 18 14 11
15 6.3 3.6 29 21 15 84 48.3 462 42 27 21 17
22 85 49 3.9 28 20 108 621 594 54 34 27 22
3 11.3 65 52 3.8 25 136 782 748 68 44 34 27
4 15 85 68 49 30 160 92 88 80 51 40 32
55 20 115 92 67 40 208 120 114 104 66 52 41
75 27 155 124 89 50 260 150 143 130 83 65 52
11 38 22 176 128 60 177 169 154 103 77 62
15 51 29 23 17 75 221 211 192 128 96 77
185 61 35 28 21 100 285 273 248 165 124 99
22 72 41 33 24 125 359 343 312 208 156 125
30 96 55 44 32 150 414 396 360 240 180 144
37 115 66 53 39 200 552 528 480 320 240 192
45 140 80 64 47 250 604 403 302 242
55 169 97 78 57 300 722 482 361 289
75 230 132 106 77 350 828 560 414 336
90 278 160 128 93 400 954 636 477 382
110 340 195 156 113 450 1030 515 412
132 400 230 184 134 500 1180 786 590 472
160 487 280 224 162
200 609 350 280 203
250 748 430 344 250
315 940 540 432 313
355 1061 610 488 354
400 1200 690 552 400
500 1478 850 680 493
560 1652 950 760 551
630 1844 1060 848 615
710 2070 1190 952 690
800 2340 1346 1076 780
900 2640 1518 1214 880
1000 2910 1673 1339 970
Nota : These values are given as a guide. They may vary depending on the type of motor, its polarity and the manufacturer.
(1) Values conforming to standard IEC 60072-1 (at 50 Hz).
(2) Values conforming to standard UL 508 (at 60 Hz).
General 5
5/6
5 5 5 5
Selection guide
Equipment requiring magnetic
latching contactors
Motors, resistive circuits, rotor
short-circuiting devices, electro
lifting magnets, hoisting, mines,
c motors, high operating rates
Variable composition bar mounted
contactors
Induction heating, heating of metal
or of a metal part in a channel or
crucible furnace by induction of a
c currentsContactors for
induction heating applications
Applications conforming to NATO
specifcations and references.
Shockproof contactors
.. ..
..
.. ..
..
.. ..
1501800.A 801800.A 12630 A
2502750.A 802750.A 8016 300 A 25850.A
1000 V a 1000 V
c 440 or 1500 V
3000 V 690 V or 1000 V
14 16 18 3 or 4
CR1 F
CR1 B
CVp CEp
CSp
LC1 DpG
LP1 DpG
LC1 FGppp
Pages 5/250.to.5/259 Pages 5/226.and.5/227 Please consult your Regional Sales Offce
Applications Equipment based on standard contactors Equipment requiring
low consumption
contactors which
can be switched
directly from
solid state outputs
.. .. .. .. ..
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Rated operational current AC-3 6.A 6016.A 9150.A 115800.A 7501800.A 612.A 925.A
AC-1 12.A 20.A 25200.A 2002100.A 8002750.A 20.A 2040.A
Rated operational voltage 690 V 690 V 690 V 1000 V 1000 V 690 V 690 V
Number of poles 2 or 3 3 or 4 3 or 4 2, 3 or 4 14 3 or 4 3
Contactor type references LC1
SKLP1
SK
LC1
KLC7
KLP1 K
LC1 D LC1 F LC1 B LP4 K LC1 D
Pages Pages 5/8.and.5/9 Pages
5/46.and
5/47
Pages 5/104.and.5/105 Page 5/15 Pages 5/48.
and.5/49
TeSys contactors
5 5
5/7
5 5
Equipment requiring magnetic
latching contactors
Motors, resistive circuits, rotor
short-circuiting devices, electro
lifting magnets, hoisting, mines,
c motors, high operating rates
Variable composition bar mounted
contactors
Induction heating, heating of metal
or of a metal part in a channel or
crucible furnace by induction of a
c currentsContactors for
induction heating applications
Applications conforming to NATO
specifcations and references.
Shockproof contactors
.. ..
..
.. ..
..
.. ..
1501800.A 801800.A 12630 A
2502750.A 802750.A 8016 300 A 25850.A
1000 V a 1000 V
c 440 or 1500 V
3000 V 690 V or 1000 V
14 16 18 3 or 4
CR1 F
CR1 B
CVp CEp
CSp
LC1 DpG
LP1 DpG
LC1 FGppp
Pages 5/250.to.5/259 Pages 5/226.and.5/227 Please consult your Regional Sales Offce
Applications Equipment based on standard contactors Equipment requiring
low consumption
contactors which
can be switched
directly from
solid state outputs
.. .. .. .. ..
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Rated operational current AC-3 6.A 6016.A 9150.A 115800.A 7501800.A 612.A 925.A
AC-1 12.A 20.A 25200.A 2002100.A 8002750.A 20.A 2040.A
Rated operational voltage 690 V 690 V 690 V 1000 V 1000 V 690 V 690 V
Number of poles 2 or 3 3 or 4 3 or 4 2, 3 or 4 14 3 or 4 3
Contactor type references LC1
SKLP1
SK
LC1
KLC7
KLP1 K
LC1 D LC1 F LC1 B LP4 K LC1 D
Pages Pages 5/8.and.5/9 Pages
5/46.and
5/47
Pages 5/104.and.5/105 Page 5/15 Pages 5/48.
and.5/49
5/8
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
From 6 to 16 A
....
Applications Simple automation systems
.. ..
Rated operational current Ie max AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) 6.A 6.A
Ie AC-1 (q.y 40 C)
12.A
Rated operational voltage 690 V
Number of poles 2 or 3 3
Rated operational power
in category AC-3
220/240 V 1.1 kW 1.5 kW
380/400 V 2.2 kW 2.2 kW
415/440 V 2.2 kW 2.2/3 kW
500 V . 3 kW
660/690 V . 3 kW
1000 V
Add-on auxiliary
contact blocks
Front Up to 2 N/C or N/O Up to 4 N/C or N/O
Side
Front time delay 1 N/C
Front dust and damp protected
Associated manual-auto
thermal overload relays
Class 10 A 01116.A
Class 20 A
Suppressor modules Varistor or diode Varistor, diode + Zener diode or RC circuit
Contactor type references
a
LC1 SK LC1 or LC7 K06
c
LP1 SK LP1 K06
Reversing contactor with
mechanical interlock
type references
a
LC2 or LC8 K06
c
LP2 K06
Pages Contactors Pages 5/34.and.5/35 Pages 5/14.to.5/17
Reversing contactors Pages 5/18.to.5/21
.
..
9.A 12.A 16.A
20.A
3 or 4
2.2 kW 3 kW 3 kW
4 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW
4 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW
4 kW 4 kW 5.5 kW
4 kW 4 kW 4 kW

..
..
LC1 or LC7 K09 LC1 or LC7 K12 LC1 K16
LP1 K09 LP1 K12
..
LP2 K09 LP2 K12
Selection guide 5
5 5
5/9
5 5
Applications Simple automation systems
.. ..
Rated operational current Ie max AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) 6.A 6.A
Ie AC-1 (q.y 40 C)
12.A
Rated operational voltage 690 V
Number of poles 2 or 3 3
in category AC-3
220/240 V 1.1 kW 1.5 kW
380/400 V 2.2 kW 2.2 kW
415/440 V 2.2 kW 2.2/3 kW
500 V . 3 kW
660/690 V . 3 kW
1000 V
Add-on auxiliary
contact blocks
Front Up to 2 N/C or N/O Up to 4 N/C or N/O
Side
Front time delay 1 N/C
Front dust and damp protected
Associated manual-auto
Class 10 A 01116.A
Class 20 A
Suppressor modules Varistor or diode Varistor, diode + Zener diode or RC circuit
Contactor type references
a
LC1 SK LC1 or LC7 K06
c
LP1 SK LP1 K06
Reversing contactor with
mechanical interlock
type references
a
LC2 or LC8 K06
c
LP2 K06
Pages Contactors Pages 5/34.and.5/35 Pages 5/14.to.5/17
Reversing contactors Pages 5/18.to.5/21
.
5
....
5 5
..
9.A 12.A 16.A
20.A
3 or 4
2.2 kW 3 kW 3 kW
4 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW
4 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW
4 kW 4 kW 5.5 kW
4 kW 4 kW 4 kW

..
..
LP1 K09 LP1 K12
..
LP2 K09 LP2 K12
5/10
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 0
..
..
Conforming to standards IEC 60947, NF C 63-110, VDE 0660, BS 5424
Product certifcations LCp and LPp K06 to K12 UL, CSA
Operating positions Vertical axis Horizontal axis
Without derating Without derating Possible positions for LCp K only.
Contactor pull-in voltage: 0.85 Uc
Connection Min Max Max to IEC 60947
Screw clamp
terminals
Solid conductor mm
2
1 x 1.5 2 x 4 1 x 4 + 1 x 2.5
Flexible conductor
without cable end
mm
2
1 x 0.75 2 x 4 2 x 2.5
Flexible conductor
with cable end
mm
2
1 x 0.34 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5
Spring terminals Solid conductor mm
2
1 x 0.75 1 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Flexible conductor
without cable end
mm
2
1 x 0.75 1 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Faston.connectors Clip mm 2 x 2.8 or 1 x 6.35
Solder pins for
printed circuit board
With locating device between
power and control circuits
4 mm x 35 microns
Tightening torque Philips head n 2 and 6 Nm 08
Terminal referencing Conforming to standards
EN 50005 and EN 50012
Up to 5 contacts, depending on model
(Ui)
Conforming to IEC 60947 V 690
Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C V 750
Conforming to BS 5424,
NF C 20-040
V 690
Conforming to CSA 22-2 n 14,
UL 508
V 600
Protective treatment Conforming to IEC 60068
(DIN 50016)
TC (Klimafest, Climateproof)
Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 Protection against direct fnger contact
Ambient air temperature.
around the device
Storage C - 50+ 80
5 ... 300 Hz
Contactor open 2 gn
Flame resistance Conforming to UL 94 Self-extinguishing materials V1
Conforming to NF F 16-101
and.16-102
Conforming to requirement 2
Shock resistance
(1/2 sine wave, 11 ms)
Contactor open On X axis: 6 gn
On Y and Z axes: 10 gn
Contactor closed On X axis: 10 gn
On Y and Z axes: 15 gn
Safe separation of circuits Conforming to VDE 0106
and IEC 60536
SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage), up to 400 V
9
0
9
0
9
0
9
0
1
8
0
1
8
0
9
0
9
0
9
0
9
0
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/21
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/21
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/21
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/21
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/21
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/21
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/21
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/21
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
Characteristics
5 5
5/11
5 5
TeSys contactors 0
..
.
Type LCp or LPp K06 K09 K12 K16
Conventional thermal
current (Ith)
For ambient temperature.
y 50 C
A 20
Rated operational frequency Hz 50/60
Frequency limits of the operational current Hz Up to 400
Rated making capacity I rms conforming to .
NF C 63 110 and IEC 60947
A 110 110 144 160
Rated breaking capacity I rms conforming
to NF C 63 110
and.IEC.60947
220/230 V A 110 110
380/400 V A 110 110
415 V A 110 110
440 V A 110 110 110 110
500 V A 80 80 80 80
660/690 V A 70 70 70 70.
Permissible short
time rating
In free air for a
time t from cold
state (q.y 50 C)
1.s. A 90 90 115 115
5.s. A 85 85 105 105
10.s. A 80 80 100 100
30 s A 60 60 75 75
1 min A 45 45 55 55
3 min A 40 40 50 50
u 15 min A 20 20 25 25.
Short-circuit protection gG fuse U y 440 V .
(aM fuse)
A 25
Average impedance per pole At Ith and 50 Hz mW 3
Use in category AC-1..
resistive circuits, heating,
lighting (Ue y 440 V)
Maximum rated operational
current for a temperature y 50 C
A 20
Maximum rated operational
current for a temperature y 70 C
A 16 for Ue only
Rated operational current limits
in relation to the on-load factor
and operating frequency
On-load factor 90 % 60 % 30 %
A 300 operating cycles/hour 13 15 18
A 120 operating cycles/hour 15 18 19
A 30 operating cycles/hour 19 20 20.
Increase in rated operational
current by paralleling of poles
Apply the following coeffcients to the above currents; these coeffcients take into
account an often unbalanced distribution of current between the poles
2 poles in parallel: K = 1.60
4 poles in parallel: K = 2.80.
squirrel cage motors
Operational
power according
to the voltage..
Voltage 50 or
60 Hz
115 V single-ph. kW 0.37 055
220 V single- kW 075 11
220/230 V 3- kW 15 22 3 4
380/415 V 3- kW 22 4 55 75
440/480 V 3- kW 3 4 5.5/4 (480) 5.5/4 (480)
500/600 V 3- kW 3 4 4 4
660/690 V 3-
ph.
kW 3 4 4 4.
Maximum operating rate .
(in operating cycles/hour in
relation to % of rated power)
Op. cycles/h 600 900 1200
Power 100 % 75 % 50 %
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/21
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/21
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/21
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/21
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
5/12
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 0
..
.
Type LC1 LC2 LC7 LC8 LP1 LP2 LP4 LP5
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) V a.12690.(1) a.24240.(1) c.12250.(1) c.12120
Control voltage limits (y 50 C)
single voltage coil
Operation 08115.Uc.(2) 08511.Uc 08115.Uc 0.71.30 Uc.
Drop-out u.020.Uc u.010.Uc u.010.Uc u.010.Uc.
Average consumption
at 20 C and at Uc
Inrush 30 VA 3 VA 3 W 1.8 W .
Sealed 4.5 VA 3 VA 3 W 1.8 W
Heat dissipation W 1.3 3 3 18
Operating time at 20 C and at Uc
Between coil energisation and: opening of the N/C contacts - ms 515 2535 2535 2535
closing of the N/O contacts - ms 1020 3040 3040 3040
Between coil de-energisation and: opening of the N/O contacts - ms 1020 30 10 1020
closing of the N/C contacts - ms 1525 40 15 1525
Maximum immunity to microbreaks ms 2 2 2 2
Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour 3600 3600 3600 3600
Mechanical durability at Uc
In millions of operating cycles
50/60 Hz coil 10 5 10 5 .
c coil 10 5 .
Wide range coil,.
Low consumption
30 5
(1) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor
module LA4 KE1FC (50129 V) or LA4 KE1UG (130250 V), see page 5/24.
(2) LC1 K16: 0.851.15 Uc.
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/21
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/21
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/21
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/21
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
5 5
5/13
5 5
TeSys contactors 0
..
...
Auxiliary contact characteristics of contactors and instantaneous contact blocks
Number of auxiliary contacts On.LCp K.or.LPp K 3-pole 1
On.LA1 K 2.or.4
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to V 690
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to BS 5424 V 690
Conforming to VDE 0110 group C V 750
Conforming to CSA C 22-2 n 14 V 600
Conventional
For ambient temperature
y 50 C
A 10
Frequency of the
operational current
Hz Up to 400
Minimum switching
capacity
U min (DIN 19 240) V 17
I min mA 5
Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947 .
and VDE 0660, gG fuse
A 10
Rated making capacity Conforming to .
IEC.60947
I rms A 110
Short-time rating Permissible for 1.s. A 80
500 ms A 90
100 ms A 110
Insulation resistance MW >.10
Non-overlap distance LA1 K: linked contacts
conforming to INRS, BIA .
and CNA specifcations
mm 0.5 (see schemes pages 5/27.and.5/29)
Operational power of contacts
ac supply, category AC-15 dc supply, category DC-13
Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating .
cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an
electromagnet: making current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the
power broken (cos j 0.4)..
Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating .
electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant
increasing with the load.

V

24

48
110/
127
220/
230
380/
400

440
600/
690

V

24

48

110

220

440

600

1 million operating cycles VA 48 96 240 440 800 880 1200 W 120 80 60 52 51 50
Occasional making capacity VA 1000 2050 5000 10.000 14.000 13 000 9000 W 720 600 400 300 230 200
.
Power broken in VA
.
Power broken in W
1 Breaking limit of contacts valid
for:
maximum of 50 operating
cycles at 10 s intervals .
(power broken = making .
current x cos j 0.7).
2 Electrical durability of contacts
for:
1 million operating cycles (2a)
3 million operating cycles (2b)
10 million operating cycles (2c).
3 Breaking limit of contacts valid
for:
maximum of 20 operating
cycles at 10 s intervals with current
passing for 0.5 s per operating
cycle.
4 Thermal limit.
-
-
-
-
-
10 000
5000
3000
2000
1000
800
600
500
400
300
200
100
80
60
24 48 110 220
440 690 V 120
380 500
40
16 000
8000
6000
4000
2c
2b
4
1
2a
10 000
5000
3000
2000
1000
800
600
500
400
300
200
100
80
60
24 48 110 220
440 690 V 120
380 500
40
16 000
8000
6000
4000
2c
2b
4
1
2a
1000
700
500
300
200
100
80
60
50
40
30
20
10
8
6
12 24 48 110 220 440 600 V
250
200
140
100
50
20
2c
2b
2a
3
4
1000
700
500
300
200
100
80
60
50
40
30
20
10
8
6
12 24 48 110 220 440 600 V
250
200
140
100
50
20
2c
2b
2a
3
4
References :
page 5/23
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
References :
page 5/23
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
References :
page 5/23
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
References :
page 5/23
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
5/14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
Contactors for motor control,
6 to 16 A in category AC-3 and 6 to 12 A
in category AC-4
Control circuit: a.c.
Contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/194 to 5/197 and 5/200 to 5/203.
Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fxing.
Screws in the open ready-to-tighten position.
Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/23 to 5/25.
3-pole contactors for standard applications
in category AC-3
Rated operational
current in
category AC-3
440 V
up to
Instan-
taneous
auxiliary
contacts
Basic reference,
to be completed by
(1) (2)
Weight
220 V
230 V
380 V
415 V
440/500 V
660/690 V
kW kW kW A kg
Screw clamp connections
15 22 3 6 1 LC1 K0610pp 0180
1 LC1 K0601pp 0180
22 4 4 9 1 LC1 K0910pp 0180
1 LC1 K0901pp 0180
3 55 4 (> 440) 12 1 LC1 K1210pp 0180
5.5 (440) 1 LC1 K1201pp 0180
4 75 4 (> 440) 16 1 LC1 K1610pp 0180
5.5 (440) 1 LC1 K1601pp 0180
Spring terminal connections
For 6 to 12 A ratings only, in the references selected above, insert a fgure 3 before the voltage code.
Example: LC1 K0610pp becomes LC1 K06103pp
Faston connectors, 1 x 635 or 2 x 28
For 6 to 16 A ratings, in the references selected above, insert a fgure 7 before the voltage code.
Solder pins for printed circuit boards
Example: LC1 K0610pp becomes LC1 K06105pp.
3-pole silent contactors
Recommended for use in areas sensitive to noise, high interference mains supplies, etc.
Coil with rectifer incorporated, suppressor ftted as standard.
15 22 3 6 1 LC7 K0610pp 0225
1 LC7 K0601pp 0225
22 4 4 9 1 LC7 K0910pp 0225
1 LC7 K0901pp 0225
3 55 4 (> 440) 12 1 LC7 K1210pp 0225
5.5 (440) 1 LC7 K1201pp 0225
In the references selected above, insert a fgure 7 before the voltage code.
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Offce):
ac supply
Contactors LC1 K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc)
Volts 12 20 24 (2) 36 42 48 110 115 120 127 200/208 220/230 230 230/240
50/60 Hz J7 Z7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 G7 FC7 L7 M7 P7 U7
Volts 256 277 380/400 400 400/415 440 480 500 575 600 660/690
50/60 Hz W7 UE7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 T7 S7 SC7 X7 Y7
Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72
Contactors LC7 K (0.851.1 Uc)
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230/240
50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 U7
(2) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4 KE1FC (50129 V)
or LA4 KE1UG (130250 V), see page 5/24.
LC1 K0910pp
5
1
1
1
3
7
LC1 K0910pp
5
1
1
1
3
7
LC1 K09103pp
5
1
1
1
3
8
LC1 K09103pp
5
1
1
1
3
8
LC1 K09107pp
5
1
1
1
3
9
LC1 K09107pp
5
1
1
1
3
9
LC1 K09105pp
5
1
1
1
4
0
LC1 K09105pp
5
1
1
1
4
0
LC7 K0910pp
5
1
1
1
4
1
LC7 K0910pp
5
1
1
1
4
1
Selection :
pages 5/194 and 5/197
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
Selection :
pages 5/194 and 5/197
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
Selection :
pages 5/194 and 5/197
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
Selection :
pages 5/194 and 5/197
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
Selection :
pages 5/194 and 5/197
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
Selection :
pages 5/194 and 5/197
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
Selection :
pages 5/194 and 5/197
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
Selection :
pages 5/194 and 5/197
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
References 5
5 5
5/15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
Contactors for motor control,
6 to 12 A in categories AC-3 and AC-4
Control circuit: d.c. or low consumption
Contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/194 to 5/197 and 5/200 to 5/203.
3-pole contactors, dc supply
in category AC-3
Rated operational
current in
category AC-3
440 V
up to
Instan-
taneous
auxiliary
contacts
Basic reference,
to be completed by
(1) (2)
Weight
220 V
230 V
380 V
415 V
440/500 V
660/690 V
kW kW kW A kg
15 22 3 6 1 LP1 K0610pp 0225
1 LP1 K0601pp 0225
22 4 4 9 1 LP1 K0910pp 0225
1 LP1 K0901pp 0225
3 55 4 (> 440) 12 1 LP1 K1210pp 0225
5.5 (440) 1 LP1 K1201pp 0225
Example: LP1 K0610pp becomes LP1 K06103pp.
Example: LP1 K0610pp becomes LP1 K06107pp
.
3-pole low consumption contactors
Compatible with programmable controller outputs.
LED indicator incorporated (except models LP4 KppppFW3.and.LP4 KppppGW3).
Wide range coil (0.71.30 Uc), suppressor ftted as standard, consumption 1.8 W.
15 22 3 6 1 LP4 K0610pp 0.235
1 LP4 K0601pp 0.235
22 4 4 9 1 LP4 K0910pp 0.235
1 LP4 K0901pp 0.235
3 55 4 (> 440) 12 1 LP4 K1210pp 0.235
5.5 (440) 1 LP4 K1201pp 0.235
dc supply (contactors LP1 K: 0.81.15 Uc)
Volts 12 20 24 (2) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 155 174 200 220 230 240 250
Code JD ZD BD CD ED ND SD KD FD GD PD QD LD MD MPD MUD UD
Coil with integral suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3
Low consumption (contactors LP4 K: 0.7130 Uc)
Volts 12 20 24 48 72 110 120
Code JW3 ZW3 BW3 EW3 SW3 FW3 GW3
(2) For LP1 K only, when connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the contactor coil, select a 20 V coil (a control
circuit voltage code Z7, c control circuit voltage code ZD) so as to compensate for the incurred voltage drop.
LP1 K0910pp
5
1
1
1
3
7
LP1 K0910pp
5
1
1
1
3
7
LP1 K09103pp
5
1
1
1
3
8
LP1 K09103pp
5
1
1
1
3
8
LP1 K09107pp
5
1
1
1
3
9
LP1 K09107pp
5
1
1
1
3
9
LP1 K09105pp
5
1
1
1
4
0
LP1 K09105pp
5
1
1
1
4
0
LP4 K0910pp
5
1
1
1
4
1
LP4 K0910pp
5
1
1
1
4
1
Selection :
pages 5/194 and 5/197
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
Selection :
pages 5/194 and 5/197
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
Selection :
pages 5/194 and 5/197
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
Selection :
pages 5/194 and 5/197
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
References 5
5/16
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
Contactors for control in category AC-1, 20 A
.........
Contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/198 and 5/199.
3 or 4-pole contactors for standard applications (1)
Non-inductive loads
Category AC-1
Maximum current
at q y 50 C
Number
of poles
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
Basic reference,
the voltage code (2) (3)
Weight
A kg
20 3 1 LC1 K0910pp 0180
or LC1 K1210pp 0180
3 1 LC1 K0901pp 0180
or LC1 K1201pp 0180
4 LC1 K09004pp 0180
or LC1 K12004pp 0180
2 2 LC1 K09008pp 0180
3 or 4-pole silent contactors (1)
20 3 1 LC7 K0910pp 0225
or LC7 K1210pp 0225
3 1 LC7 K0901pp 0225
or LC7 K1201pp 0225
4 LC7 K09004pp 0225
or LC7 K12004pp 0225
2 2 LC7 K09008pp 0225
(1) Selection between 9 and 12 A ratings according to number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve on page 5/198.
ac supply
Contactors LC1 K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc)
Volts 12 20 24 (3) 36 42 48 110 115 120 127 200/208 220/230 230 230/240
Volts 256 277 380/400 400 400/415 440 480 500 575 600 660/690
Contactors LC7 K (0.81.1 Uc)
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230/240
50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 U7
LC1 K09103pp
5
1
1
1
3
8
LC1 K09103pp
5
1
1
1
3
8
LC1 K09004pp
5
1
1
1
3
7
LC1 K09004pp
5
1
1
1
3
7
LC1 K09004pp
5
1
1
1
4
1
LC1 K09004pp
5
1
1
1
4
1
LC1 K09107pp
5
1
1
1
3
9
LC1 K09107pp
5
1
1
1
3
9
Selection :
pages 5/198 and 5/199
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
Selection :
pages 5/198 and 5/199
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
Selection :
pages 5/198 and 5/199
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
Selection :
pages 5/198 and 5/199
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
Selection :
pages 5/198 and 5/199
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
Selection :
pages 5/198 and 5/199
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
Selection :
pages 5/198 and 5/199
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
Selection :
pages 5/198 and 5/199
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
References 5
5 5
5/17
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
Contactors for control in category AC-1, 20 A
..............
Contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/198 and 5/199.
3 and 4-pole contactors, dc supply (1)
Non-inductive loads
Category AC-1
Maximum current at
q y 50 C
Number
of poles
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
Basic reference,
Weight
A kg
20 3 1 LP1 K0910pp 0225
or LP1 K1210pp 0225
3 1 LP1 K0901pp 0225
or LP1 K1201pp 0225
4 LP1 K09004pp 0225
or LP1 K12004pp 0225
2 2 LP1 K09008pp 0225
3 or 4-pole low consumption contactors (1)
LED indicator incorporated (except models LP4 KppppFW3 and LP4 KppppGW3).
20 3 1 LP4 K0910ppp 0.235
or LP4 K1210ppp 0.235
3 1 LP4 K0901ppp 0.235
or LP4 K1201ppp 0.235
4 LP4 K09004ppp 0.235
or LP4 K12004ppp 0.235
2 2 LP4 K09008ppp 0.235
dc supply (contactors LP1 K: 0.81.15 Uc)
Volts c 12 20 24 (3) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 155 174 200 220 230 240 250
Low consumption (contactors LP4 K: 0.7130 Uc)
Volts c 12 20 24 48 72 110 120
LC1 K09004pp
5
1
1
1
4
2
LC1 K09004pp
5
1
1
1
4
2
LC1 K09103pp
5
1
1
1
4
3
LC1 K09103pp
5
1
1
1
4
3
LC1 K09105pp
5
1
1
1
4
4
LC1 K09105pp
5
1
1
1
4
4
LC1 K09004pp
5
1
1
1
4
1
LC1 K09004pp
5
1
1
1
4
1
Selection :
pages 5/198 and 5/199
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
Selection :
pages 5/198 and 5/199
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
Selection :
pages 5/198 and 5/199
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
Selection :
pages 5/198 and 5/199
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes :
page 5/27
References 5
5/18
5 5 5 5
Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/194 to 5/197 and 5/200 to 5/203.
Integral mechanical interlock.
It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock
Pre-wired power circuit connections as standard on screw clamp versions.
Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fxing. Screws in the open ready-to-tighten position.
3-pole reversing contactors for standard applications
of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz
in category AC-3
Rated
operational
current in
category AC-3
440V
up to
Instan-
taneous
auxiliary
contacts per
contactor
Basic reference,
Weight
220 V
230 V
380 V
415 V
440/500 V
660/690 V
kW kW kW A kg
15 22 3 6 1 LC2 K0610pp 0.390
1 LC2 K0601pp 0.390
22 4 4 9 1 LC2 K0910pp 0.390
1 LC2 K0901pp 0.390
3 55 4 (> 440) 12 1 LC2 K1210pp 0.390
5.5 (440) 1 LC2 K1201pp 0.390
4 75 4 (> 440) 16 1 LC2 K1610pp 0.390
5.5 (440) 1 LC2 K1601pp 0.390
For 6 to 12 A ratings only, in the references selected above, insert a fgure 3 before the voltage code. .
3-pole silent reversing contactors
15 22 3 6 1 LC8 K0610pp 0480
1 LC8 K0601pp 0480
22 4 4 9 1 LC8 K0910pp 0480
1 LC8 K0901pp 0480
3 55 4 (> 440) 12 1 LC8 K1210pp 0480
5.5 (440) 1 LC8 K1201pp 0480
ac supply
Reversing contactors LC2 K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc)
Volts 12 20 24 (2) 36 42 48 110 115 120 127 200/208 220/230 230 230/240
Volts 256 277 380/400 400 400/415 440 480 500 575 600 660/690
Reversing contactors LC8 K (0.81.1 Uc)
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230/240
50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 U7
LC2 K0910pp
5
1
1
1
4
7
LC2 K0910pp
5
1
1
1
4
7
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors for motor control, 6 to 16 A
in category AC-3 and 6 to 12 A in category AC-4
References
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/203
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/28
Schemes :
page 5/29
LC2 K09105pp
5
1
1
1
4
8
5 5
5/19
5 5
Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/194 to 5/197 and 5/200 to 5/203.
Pre-wired power circuit connections as standard on screw clamp versions.
3-pole reversing contactors, dc supply
in category AC-3
Rated
operational
current in
category AC-3
440V
up to
Instan-
taneous
auxiliary
contacts per
contactor
Basic reference,
Weight
220 V 380 V 440/500 V
230 V 415 V 660/690 V
kW kW kW A kg
15 22 3 6 1 LP2 K0610pp 0480
1 LP2 K0601pp 0480
22 4 4 9 1 LP2 K0910pp 0480
1 LP2 K0901pp 0480
3 55 4 (> 440) 12 1 LP2 K1210pp 0480
5.5 (440) 1 LP2 K1201pp 0480
In the references selected above, insert a fgure 3 before the voltage code..
Example: LP2 K0610pp becomes LP2 K06103pp..
Example: LC2 K0610pp becomes LC2 K06107pp..
3-pole low consumption reversing contactors
LED indicator incorporated (except models LP5-KppppFW3 and LP5-KppppGW3).
Wide range coil (0.71.30 Uc), suppressor ftted as standard, consumption 1.8 W..
15 22 3 6 1 LP5 K0610pp 0490
1 LP5 K0601pp 0490
22 4 4 9 1 LP5 K0910pp 0490
1 LP5 K0901pp 0490
3 55 4 (> 440) 12 1 LP5 K1210pp 0490
5.5 (440) 1 LP5 K1201pp 0490
In the references selected above, insert a fgure 3 before the voltage code..
dc supply
Reversing contactors LP2 K (0.81.15 Uc)
Volts 12 20 24 (3) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 155 174 200 220 230 240 250
Low consumption
Reversing contactors LP5 K (0.71.30 Uc)
Volts 12 20 24 48 72 110 120
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/203
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/28
Schemes :
page 5/29
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/203
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/28
Schemes :
page 5/29
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/203
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/28
Schemes :
page 5/29
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/203
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/28
Schemes :
page 5/29
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors for motor control, 6 to 12 A
in categories AC-3 and AC-4
References
5/20
5 5 5 5
Warning: reversing contactors LC2 K0910pp and LC2 K0901pp are pre-wired for reverse motor operation as standard
Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/198 and 5/199.
3 or 4-pole reversing contactors for standard applications (1)
Non-inductive loads
Category AC-1
Maximum current
at q y 50 C
Number
of poles
Instantaneous
auxiliary
contacts per
contactor
Basic reference,
Weight
A kg
20 3 1 LC2 K0910pp 0.390
or LC2 K1210pp 0.390
3 1 LC2 K0901pp 0.390
or LC2 K1201pp 0.390
4 LC2 K09004pp 0.380
or LC2 K12004pp 0.380
3 or 4-pole silent reversing contactors (1)
20 3 1 LC8 K0910pp 0480
or LC8 K1210pp 0480
3 1 LC8 K0901pp 0480
or LC8 K1201pp 0480
4 LC8 K09004pp 0470
or LC8 K12004pp 0470
ac supply
Reversing contactors LC2 K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc).
Volts 12 20 24 (3) 36 42 48 110 115 120 127 200/208 220/230 230 230/240
Volts 256 277 380/400 400 400/415 440 480 500 575 600 660/690
Reversing contactors LC8 K (0.81.1 Uc)
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230/240
50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 U7
LC2 K0910pp
5
1
1
1
5
0
LC2 K0910pp
5
1
1
1
5
0
LC2 K09105pp
5
1
1
1
5
1
LC2 K09105pp
5
1
1
1
5
1
LC2 K09004pp
5
1
1
1
5
2
LC2 K09004pp
5
1
1
1
5
2
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors for control
in category AC-1, 20 A
References
Selection :
pages 5/198 and 5/199
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/28
Schemes :
page 5/29
5 5
5/21
5 5
Warning: reversing contactors LP2 K0910pp and LP2 K0901pp are pre-wired for reverse motor operation as standard
Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/198 and 5/199.
3 or 4-pole reversing contactors, dc supply (1)
Non-inductive loads
Category AC-1
Maximum current
at q y 50 C
Number
of poles
Instantaneous
auxiliary
contacts per
contactor
Basic reference,
Weight
A kg
20 3 1 LP2 K0910pp 0480
or LP2 K1210pp 0480
3 1 LP2 K0901pp 0480
or LP2 K1201pp 0480
4 LP2 K09004pp 0480
or LP2 K12004pp 0480
3 or 4-pole low consumption reversing contactors (1)
LED indicator incorporated (except models LP5 KppppFW3 and LP5 KppppGW3).
20 3 1 LP5 K0910ppp 0490
or LP5 K1210ppp 0490
3 1 LP5 K0901ppp 0490
or LP5 K1201ppp 0490
4 LP5 K09004ppp 0490
or LP5 K12004ppp 0490
dc supply (reversing contactors LP2 K: 0.81.15 Uc)
Volts c 12 20 24 (3) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 155 174 200 220 230 240 250
Low consumption (reversing contactors LP5 K: 0.7130 Uc)
Volts c 12 20 24 48 72 110 120
Selection :
pages 5/198 and 5/199
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/28
Schemes :
page 5/29
Selection :
pages 5/198 and 5/199
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/28
Schemes :
page 5/29
Selection :
pages 5/198 and 5/199
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/28
Schemes :
page 5/29
Selection :
pages 5/198 and 5/199
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
Dimensions :
page 5/28
Schemes :
page 5/29
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors for control
in category AC-1, 20 A
References
5/22
5 5 5 5
5
LC1, LC7, LP1 K
LC1, LC7, LP1 K
LC1, LC7, LP1 K
LC1, LP1 K
LP4
LP4
LP4
5 5
5/23
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
......
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks
Recommended for standard applications Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per contactor
Connection For use on contactors Composition Reference Weight
kg
Screw clamp terminals All products with screw clamp terminals 2 LA1 KN20 0045
2 LA1 KN02 0045
1 1 LA1 KN11 0045
All products with screw clamp terminals
except low consumption
4 LA1 KN40 0045
3 1 LA1 KN31 0045
2 2 LA1 KN22 0045
1 3 LA1 KN13 0045
4 LA1 KN04 0045
Spring terminals All products with spring terminals 2 LA1 KN203 0045
2 LA1 KN023 0045
1 1 LA1 KN113 0045
All products with spring terminals
4 LA1 KN403 0045
3 1 LA1 KN313 0045
2 2 LA1 KN223 0045
1 3 LA1 KN133 0045
4 LA1 KN043 0045
Faston connectors,
1 x 635 or 2 x 28
All products with Faston connectors 2 LA1 KN207 0045
2 LA1 KN027 0045
1 1 LA1 KN117 0045
All products with Faston connectors
4 LA1 KN407 0045
3 1 LA1 KN317 0045
2 2 LA1 KN227 0045
1 3 LA1 KN137 0045
4 LA1 KN047 0045
With terminal referencing to standard EN 50012 Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per contactor
with referencing
conforming to
standard EN 50012
All 3-pole + N/O products with screw
clamp terminals
except LP4 and LP5 K12
2 LA1 KN02M 0045
1 1 LA1 KN11M 0045
All 3-pole + N/O products with screw
clamp terminals except
LP4 or LP5 K06, K09 and K12
3 1 LA1 KN31M 0045
2 2 LA1 KN22M 0045
1 3 LA1 KN13M 0045
All 4-pole products with screw clamp
terminals except LP4 or LP5 K12
1 1 LA1 KN11P 0045
All 4-pole products with screw clamp
terminals except LP4
or LP5 K09 and K12
2 2 LA1 KN22P 0045
Electronic time delay auxiliary contact blocks
Relay output with common point changeover contact, a.or.c 240 V, 2 A maximum.
Control voltage 0.851.1 Uc.
Maximum switching capacity 250 VA or 150 W.
Operating temperature -10+ 60 C.
Reset time: 1.5 s during the time delay period, 0.5 s after the time delay period.
Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per contactor
Voltage Type Timing range Composition Reference Weight
V s kg
a.or.c.2448 On-delay 130 1 LA2 KT2E 0040
a.110240 On-delay 130 1 LA2 KT2U 0040
Characteristics :
page 5/13
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
Characteristics :
page 5/13
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
Characteristics :
page 5/13
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
Characteristics :
page 5/13
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
References 5
5/24
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
Suppressor modules incorporating LED indicator
....
References
Mounting
and connection
Type For voltages Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Clip-on fxing on the front
of contactors LC1 and LP1,
with locating device
No tools required
Varistor (1) a.and.c 1224 V 5 LA4 KE1B 0010.
.
a.and.c 3248 V 5 LA4 KE1E 0010.
.
a.and.c 50129 V 5 LA4 KE1FC 0010.
.
a.and.c 130250 V 5 LA4 KE1UG 0010.
.
Diode + Zener diode (2) c 1224 V 5 LA4 KC1B 0010.
.
c 3248 V 5 LA4 KC1E 0010.
.
RC.(3) a 110250 V 5 LA4 KA1U 0010.
.
(1) Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max.
Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks.
Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).
(2) No overvoltage or oscillating frequency.
Polarised component.
(3) Protection by limiting the transient voltage to 3 Uc max. and limitation of the oscillating frequency.
5
6
5
0
1
8
LA4 Kppp
5
6
5
0
1
8
LA4 Kppp
Characteristics :
page 5/13
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
Characteristics :
page 5/13
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
Characteristics :
page 5/13
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
Characteristics :
page 5/13
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
References 5
5 5
5/25
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
Accessories
.....
Mounting and marking accessories
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Mounting plates (1) For fxing on 1 4 rail Clip-on 1 LA9 D973 0025
.
For fxing on 2 4 rails 110/120 mm .
fxing centres
10 DX1 AP25 0065.
.
Marker holder Clip-on Onto front of contactor 100 LA9 D90 0001.
.
Clip-in markers 4 maximum .
per contactor
Strips of 10 identical
numbers 09
25 AB1 Pp (2) 0002.
.
letters AZ
25 AB1 Gp (2) 0002.
.
.
.
lots of
Unit
preference
Weight
kg
Paralleling links For 2 poles With screw clamps 4 LA9 E01 0010.
.
For 4 poles With screw clamps 2 LA9 E02 0015.
.
Set of 6
power connections
For 3-pole .
reversing contactors.
for motor control
For contactors with.
screw clamp terminals
100 LA9 K0969 0010
.
.
Set of 4
power connections
For 4-pole changeover
contactor pairs
For contactors with.
100 LA9 K0970 0010.
.
.
(1) Order 1 mounting plate for fxing a contactor and 2 mounting plates for fxing a reversing contactor.
(2) Complete the reference by replacing the dot with the required character.
5
6
5
0
1
9
DX1 AP25
5
6
5
0
1
9
DX1 AP25
5
6
5
0
2
0
LA9 E01
5
6
5
0
2
0
LA9 E01
Characteristics :
page 5/13
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
Characteristics :
page 5/13
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
Characteristics :
page 5/13
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
Characteristics :
page 5/13
Dimensions :
pages 5/26 and 5/28
Schemes :
pages 5/27 and 5/29
References 5
5/26
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys K contactors
Contactors
LC1 K, LC7 K, LP1 K, LP4 K
On panel On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)
LA9 D973 DX1 AP25
On one asymmetrical rail DZ5 MB with clip-on mounting plates
On printed circuit board
Electronic time delay contact blocks
LA2 KT
On.contactor
Suppressor modules
LA4 Kp
On contactor LC1 K or LP1 K
57 35
LA1 K
5
8
5
0
=
=
35
45
= =
4x4
57 35
LA1 K
5
8
5
0
=
=
35
45
= =
4x4
57
5
8
45 57
5
8
45
45
35 = =
5
0
5
5 57 21
45
35 = =
5
0
5
5 57 21
1
1
0
45
1
2
0
57 27
DZ5 ME5
1
1
0
45
1
2
0
57 27
DZ5 ME5
5
0
5
3
45
5
8
8,65 = = =
10x1,6
A1
A2
5
0
5
3
45
5
8
8,65 = = =
10x1,6
A1
A2
38 38
2
7
38 38
2
7
57
LA2 KT
5
8
38 57
LA2 KT
5
8
38
6
2
5
22
57 22
5
8
6
2
5
22
57 22
5
8
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/17
Schemes :
page 5/27
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/17
Schemes :
page 5/27
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/17
Schemes :
page 5/27
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/17
Schemes :
page 5/27
Dimensions,
mounting 5
5 5
5/27
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys K reversing contactors
3-pole contactors With integral suppression device
LC7 K LP4 K
3 P + N/O 3 P + N/C
4-pole contactors With integral suppression device
LC7 K LP4 K
4.P 2 P N/O + 2 P N/C
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts LA1 K
LA1 KN20, KN207, KN203 LA1 KN02, KN027, KN023 LA1 KN11, KN117, KN113
2 N/O 2 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C
LA1 KN40, KN407, KN403 LA1 KN31, KN317, KN313 LA1 KN22, KN227, KN223 LA1 KN13, KN137, KN133 LA1 KN04, KN047, KN043
4 N/O 3 N/O + 1 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C 1 N/O + 3 N/C 4 N/C
Terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012
LA1 KN02M LA1 KN11M LA1 KN31M LA1 KN22M LA1 KN13M
2 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C 3 N/O + 1 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C 1 N/O + 3 N/C
LA1 KN11P LA1 KN22P
1 N/O + 1 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C
Electronic time delay contact blocks Suppressor modules
LA2 KT LA4 KC LA4 KE
1.C/O.
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
7
/
L
4
T
4
/
8
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
7
/
L
4
T
4
/
8 2
2
2
1
/
N
C
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6 2
2
2
1
/
N
C
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
+
A
1
A
2
+
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
7
/
L
4
T
4
/
8
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
7
/
L
4
T
4
/
8
R
1
R
2
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
R
3
R
4
R
1
R
2
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
R
3
R
4
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
+
A
1
A
2
+
A
1
A
2
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
5
1
/
N
C
5
2
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
5
1
/
N
C
5
2
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
5
4
6
4
7
4
5
3
/
N
O
6
3
/
N
O
7
3
/
N
O
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
4
6
4
7
4
5
3
/
N
O
6
3
/
N
O
7
3
/
N
O
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
6
2
7
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
7
3
/
N
O
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
6
2
7
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
7
3
/
N
O
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
7
1
/
N
C
7
2
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
7
1
/
N
C
7
2
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
4
6
2
7
2
8
2
5
3
/
N
O
6
1
/
N
C
7
1
/
N
C
8
1
/
N
C
5
4
6
2
7
2
8
2
5
3
/
N
O
6
1
/
N
C
7
1
/
N
C
8
1
/
N
C
5
1
/
N
C
5
2
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
7
1
/
N
C
7
2
8
1
/
N
C
8
2
5
1
/
N
C
5
2
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
7
1
/
N
C
7
2
8
1
/
N
C
8
2
3
1
/
N
C
3
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
3
1
/
N
C
3
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
2
2
3
4
2
1
/
N
C
3
3
/
N
O
2
2
3
4
2
1
/
N
C
3
3
/
N
O
3
3
/
N
O
3
4
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
3
3
/
N
O
3
4
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
3
1
/
N
C
3
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
3
1
/
N
C
3
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
3
1
/
N
C
3
2
4
1
/
N
C
4
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
3
1
/
N
C
3
2
4
1
/
N
C
4
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
2
2
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
2
1
/
N
C
3
1
/
N
C
3
2
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
2
2
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
2
1
/
N
C
3
1
/
N
C
3
2
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
A
1
A
2
1
8
1
5
1
6
A
1
A
2
1
8
1
5
1
6
+ +
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/17
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/17
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/17
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
References :
pages 5/14 to 5/17
Dimensions :
page 5/26
Schemes 5
5/28
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
...
LC2 K, LC8 K, LP2 K, LP5 K
2 x LA9 D973 2 x DX1 AP25
On one asymmetrical mounting rail DZ5 MB with 2 clip-on mounting plates LA9 D973 or on 2 mounting plates DX1 AP25.
On printed circuit board for reversing contactors or 2 contactors mounted side by side
LA2 KT
On reversing contactors
Suppressor modules
LA4 Kp
On reversing contactors LC2 K or LP2 K
57 35
LA1 K
5
8
5
0
=
=
90
80
8x4
= = 57 35
LA1 K
5
8
5
0
=
=
90
80
8x4
= = 57
5
8
90 57
5
8
90
90
35 = =
5
0
5
5 57 21
90
35 = =
5
0
5
5 57 21
57 27
DZ5 ME5
90
1
1
0
1
2
0
57 27
DZ5 ME5
90
1
1
0
1
2
0
45
5
8
8,65 = = =
20x1,6
A1
A2
5
0
45
8,65 = = =
5
3
A1
A2
45
5
8
8,65 = = =
20x1,6
A1
A2
5
0
45
8,65 = = =
5
3
A1
A2
38 38
2
7
38 38
2
7
57
LA2 KT
5
8
38 57
LA2 KT
5
8
38
6
2
5
22 6
2
5
22
57 22
5
8
57 22
5
8
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
References :
pages 5/18 to 5/21
Schemes :
page 5/29
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
References :
pages 5/18 to 5/21
Schemes :
page 5/29
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
References :
pages 5/18 to 5/21
Schemes :
page 5/29
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
References :
pages 5/18 to 5/21
Schemes :
page 5/29
Dimensions,
mounting 5
5 5
5/29
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
3-pole reversing contactors With integral suppression
device
With screw clamp connections LC8 K LP5 K
3 P + N/O 3 P + N/C
With Faston connectors or solder pins (printed circuit board)
3 P + N/O 3 P + N/C
4-pole reversing contactors Integral suppression device
With screw clamp connections With Faston connectors or solder pins (printed
circuit board)
LC8 K LP5 K
4.P 4.P
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts LA1 K
Terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012
LA1 KN20, KN207, KN203 LA1 KN02, KN027, KN023 LA1 KN11, KN117, KN113 LA KN02M LA1 KN11M LA1 KN11P
2 N/O 2 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C 2 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C
LA1 KN40, KN407, KN403 LA1 KN31, KN317, KN313 LA1 KN22, KN227, KN223 LA KN13, KN137, KN133 LA1 KN04, KN047, KN043
4 N/O 3 N/O + 1 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C 1 N/O + 3 N/C 4 N/C
Electronic time delay contact blocks Suppressor modules
LA2 KT LA4 KC LA4 KE
1.C/O.
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
+
A
1
A
2
+
A
1
A
2
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
/
L
1
1
/
L
2
1
/
L
3
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
/
L
3
L
1
L
2
L
3
7
8
1
N
7
8
2
N
N
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
/
L
1
1
/
L
2
1
/
L
3
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
/
L
3
L
1
L
2
L
3
7
8
1
N
7
8
2
N
N
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
7
8
7
8
5
6
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
7
8
7
8
5
6
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
+
A
1
A
2
+
A
1
A
2
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
5
1
/
N
C
5
2
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
5
1
/
N
C
5
2
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
3
1
/
N
C
3
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
3
1
/
N
C
3
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
2
2
3
4
2
1
/
N
C
3
3
/
N
O
2
2
3
4
2
1
/
N
C
3
3
/
N
O
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
5
4
6
4
7
4
5
3
/
N
O
6
3
/
N
O
7
3
/
N
O
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
4
6
4
7
4
5
3
/
N
O
6
3
/
N
O
7
3
/
N
O
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
6
2
7
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
7
3
/
N
O
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
6
2
7
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
7
3
/
N
O
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
7
1
/
N
C
7
2
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
7
1
/
N
C
7
2
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
4
6
2
7
2
8
2
5
3
/
N
O
6
1
/
N
C
7
1
/
N
C
8
1
/
N
C
5
4
6
2
7
2
8
2
5
3
/
N
O
6
1
/
N
C
7
1
/
N
C
8
1
/
N
C
5
1
/
N
C
5
2
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
7
1
/
N
C
7
2
8
1
/
N
C
8
2
5
1
/
N
C
5
2
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
7
1
/
N
C
7
2
8
1
/
N
C
8
2
A
1
A
2
1
8
1
5
1
6
A
1
A
2
1
8
1
5
1
6
+ +
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
References :
pages 5/18 to 5/21
Dimensions :
page 5/28
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
References :
pages 5/18 to 5/21
Dimensions :
page 5/28
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
References :
pages 5/18 to 5/21
Dimensions :
page 5/28
Characteristics :
pages 5/10 to 5/13
References :
pages 5/18 to 5/21
Dimensions :
page 5/28
Schemes 5
5/30
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
Mini-contactors TeSys LC1 SK and LP1 SK
Environment
(Ui)
Conforming to 60947, .
VDE 0110 gr C,BS 5424, .
CSA 22-2 n 14, UL 508.
V 690
Conforming to standards . IEC 60947, NF C 63-110, VDE 0660, BS 5424
Approvals . UL, CSA
Protective treatment Conforming to IEC 60068.
(DIN 50015).
Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106. Protection against direct fnger contact
around the device
Storage. C - 50+ 70
Operation. C - 20+ 50
Maximum operating altitude Without derating. m 2000
Operating position Vertical axis Horizontal axis
Without derating Without derating
Cabling,
Min Max
Solid conductor mm
2
1 x 1.5 or 2 x 1.5 1 x 6 or 2 x 4
2
1 x 0.5 or 2 x 0.35 1 x 6 or 2 x 2.5
2
1 x 0.35 or 2 x 0.35 1 x 6 or 2 x 1.5
Tightening torque Pozidriv n 1 head Nm 08
Terminal referencing Conforming to standards En 50005
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
Characteristics 5
5 5
5/31
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
....
Conventional thermal current
(Ith)
For ambient temperature .
y 55 C
A 12
Frequency limits of the
operational current
Hz Up to 400
Rated operational voltage (Ue) . V 690
NF C 63-110 and IEC 60947
A 66
(for Ue y 400 V)
Conforming to NF C 63-110 and
IEC 60947 (I rms)
A 52
Short time rating In free air for a time t.
from cold state (q.y 55 C)
A 50
Short-circuit protection gl fuse U y 440 V A 16
Average impedance per pole At Ith and 50 Hz mW 4
Maximum rated operational current
For a temperature .
y 55 C
AC-3 (1)..
(Ue y 400 V)
A 6
AC-1 A 12
Utilisation in category AC-1
lighting
(Ue y 440 V)
Increase in operational current
by paralleling of poles
A 20
Auxiliary contact characteristics of add-on blocks
(Ue)
Up to V

690
(Ui)
Conforming to IEC 60947,
BS 5424, .
VDE 0110 group C, .
CSA C 22-2 n 14
V 690
(Ith)
For ambiant temperature.
y 55 C
A 10
Frequency of operational
current
Hz Up to 400
Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947 and
VDE 0660, gl fuse
A 10
Operational power of contacts conforming to IEC 60947
ac supply, category AC-15 dc supply, category DC-13
Electrical durability (valid up to 3600 operating
cycles per hour) on an inductive load such as the
coil of an electromagnet: making current .
(cos j 0.7) = 10 times the breaking current
(cos j 0.4).
Electrical durability (valid up to 1200
operating cycles per hour) on an inductive
load such as the coil of an electromagnet,
without economy resistor, the time
V 24 48
110/
127
220/
230
380/
400 440 V 24 48 110 220 440
1 million operating cycles VA 48 96 240 440 800 880 W 120 80 60 52 51
Occasional making capacity VA 1000 2050 5000 10000 14000 13000 W 720 600 400 300 230
(1) For LC1 contactors.
..
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
5/32
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
.
Type LC1 SK06 LP1 SK06
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) V a.24400 c.1272
Control voltage limits
(q.y 50 C)
For operation 08511.Uc 08511.Uc
For drop-out u.020.Uc u.010.Uc
Average coil consumption
at 20 C and at Uc
Inrush 16 VA 2.2 W
Sealed 4.2 VA 2.2 W
Heat dissipation W 14 22
Between coil
energisation and
opening of the N/C contacts ms 816 1018
closing of the N/O contacts ms 714 812
Between coil de-
energisation and
opening of the N/O contacts ms 68 46
closing of the N/C contacts. ms 810 68
Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour 1200 1200
50/60 Hz coil 10
..c coil 10
.
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
5 5
5/33
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
Use in category AC-3 (Ue y 440 V)
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors
with breaking whilst running..
The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the
rated operational current (Ie) of the motor.
Control of resistive circuits (cos j. u 0.95)..
The current broken (Ic) in category AC-1 is equal to the
current (Ie) normally drawn by the load.
.
10
8
9
7
6
5
4
3
2
1,5
1,2
1
0,8
0,9
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
220/380/415 V
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A 2,5
500 V
2 3 4 5 6 7 A 2,5
220/230 V
kW
380/400 V
1,1 1,5 2,2 3 4 kW
1,1 1,5 2,2 3 4
415 V
0,75 1,1 1,5 2,2
kW
0,55
Current broken in A
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
only up to 415 V
10
8
9
7
6
5
4
3
2
1,5
1,2
1
0,8
0,9
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
220/380/415 V
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A 2,5
500 V
2 3 4 5 6 7 A 2,5
220/230 V
kW
380/400 V
1,1 1,5 2,2 3 4 kW
1,1 1,5 2,2 3 4
415 V
0,75 1,1 1,5 2,2
kW
0,55
Current broken in A
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
only up to 415 V
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 12 20 30 40 2,5
10
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1,5
1
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,15
0,1
Current broken in A
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 12 20 30 40 2,5
10
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1,5
1
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,15
0,1
Current broken in A
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
Contactor selection guide
according to required
electrical durability 5
5/34
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
.
Width of contactor 27 mm.
Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail.
Screw clamp terminals.
b
b
b
Mini-contactors for motor in category AC-3
3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in
category AC-3 (1)
Rated operational
voltage in AC-3
up to 400 V
Number of poles Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
Basic reference
Complete with
code indicating
control circuit
voltage (2)
Weight
220 V
230 V
380 V
415 V
660 V
690 V
kW kW kW A kg
11 22 22 6 2 LC1 SK0600pp 0.132
Mini-contactors for motor in category AC-1
Non inductive loads
maximum current
(q y 55 C)
utilisation category AC-1
Control circuit
supply
Number of poles Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
Basic reference
Complete with
code indicating
control circuit
voltage (2)
Weight
A kg
12 ac 2 LC1 SK0600pp 0.132
dc 2 LP1 SK0600pp 0.132
Add-on block with 1 power pole (for 3-phase circuits)
For use on contactor Number of poles Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
Reference Weight
kg
LC1 SK06
clip-on front mounting
1 1 LA1 SK10 0022
1 1 LA1 SK01 0022
Nota : Auxiliary contact blocks and coil suppressor module, see next page.
(1) For use in AC-3 category and 3-phase circuits, an LA1 SKpp auxiliary contact block should be ordered separately for mounting
on the contactor.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (variable delivery times, please consult your Regional Sales Offce):
Mini-contactors LC1 SK
Volts a
50/60 Hz
24 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 400
Code B7 E7 F7 G7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7
Mini-contactors LP1 SK
Volts c 12 24 36 48 72
Code JD BD CD ED SD
.
LC1 SK06
5
1
1
1
3
1
LC1 SK06
5
1
1
1
3
1
LA1 SK10
5
1
1
1
3
2
LA1 SK10
5
1
1
1
3
2
Characteristics:
pages 5/30 to 5/33
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
Characteristics:
pages 5/30 to 5/33
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
Characteristics:
pages 5/30 to 5/33
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
Characteristics:
pages 5/30 to 5/33
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
References 5
5 5
5/35
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and coil suppressor
modules
Clip-on front mounting
For use on
contactor
Maximum
number of
blocks per
contactor
kg
LC1 SK06 1 2 LA1 SK20 0022
2 LA1 SK02 0022
1 1 LA1 SK11 0022
Coil suppressor modules
Clip-on fxing and electrical connection on right-hand side, without use
of tools
For use on
contactors
Type For voltages Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight
kg
LC1 SK06 and
LP1 SK06
Varistor (1) a.and.c..
24 V48 V
10 LA4 SKE1E 0.003
a.and.c..
110 V250 V
10 LA4 SKE1U 0.003
Diode (2) c..
24 V250 V
10 LA4 SKC1U 0.003
(1) Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. Maximum reduction of
transient voltage peaks. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).
LA1 SK11
5
1
1
1
3
3
LA1 SK11
5
1
1
1
3
3
LA4 SKp1p
5
1
1
1
3
4
LA4 SKp1p
5
1
1
1
3
4
Characteristics:
pages 5/30 to 5/33
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
Characteristics:
pages 5/30 to 5/33
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
Characteristics:
pages 5/30 to 5/33
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
Characteristics:
pages 5/30 to 5/33
Dimensions:
page 5/36
Schemes:
page 5/37
References 5
5/36
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
Dimensions
Mini-contactors
LC1 and LP1 SK06
(1) Only on LC1 SK06.
Mounting
Mini-contactors
LC1 and LP1 SK06
On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)..
.
..
5
6
27 55,5
84,5 5
3,5 LA1 SK (1) LA4 SK
5
6
27 55,5
84,5 5
3,5 LA1 SK (1) LA4 SK
27
5
6
55,5 27
5
6
55,5
Characteristics:
pages 5/30 to 5/33
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Schemes:
page 5/37
Characteristics:
pages 5/30 to 5/33
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Schemes:
page 5/37
Characteristics:
pages 5/30 to 5/33
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Schemes:
page 5/37
Characteristics:
pages 5/30 to 5/33
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Schemes:
page 5/37
Dimensions, mounting 5
5 5
5/37
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
Schemes
2-pole mini-contactors
LC1 and LP1 SK06
Add-on power pole block
1 pole + 1 N/O aux 1 pole + 1 N/C aux
LA1 SK10 LA1 SK01
2 N/O 2 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C
LA1 SK20 LA1 SK02 LA1 SK11
.
A
1
1
/
L
1
A
2
T
1
/
2
T
2
/
4
3
/
L
2
A
1
1
/
L
1
A
2
T
1
/
2
T
2
/
4
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
3
3
/
N
O
3
4
4
4
4
3
/
N
O
3
3
/
N
O
3
4
4
4
4
3
/
N
O
3
1
/
N
C
3
2
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
3
1
/
N
C
3
2
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
3
3
/
N
O
3
4
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
3
3
/
N
O
3
4
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
Characteristics:
pages 5/30 to 5/33
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Schemes:
page 5/37
Characteristics:
pages 5/30 to 5/33
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Schemes:
page 5/37
Characteristics:
pages 5/30 to 5/33
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Schemes:
page 5/37
Characteristics:
pages 5/30 to 5/33
References:
pages 5/34 and 5/35
Schemes:
page 5/37
Schemes 5
5/38
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
Mini-contactors TeSys LC1 SKGC,
for use in modular panels
....
Environment
Rated insulation
voltage (Ui)
VDE 0110 gr C, BS 5424,
CSA 22-2 n 14, UL 508
V 690
Product certifcations UL, CSA
(DIN 50015)
Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 Protection against direct fnger contact
Ambient air temperature around the device
Storage C - 50+ 70
Without derating Without derating
Cabling, connectors Min Max
Solid conductor mm
2
1 x 1.5 or 2 x 1.5 1 x 6 or 2 x 4
2
1 x 0.5 or 2 x 0.35 1 x 6 or 2 x 2.5
2
1 x 0.35 or 2 x 0.35 1 x 6 or 2 x 1.5
Tightening torque Pozidriv n 1 head Nm 08
Terminal referencing Conforming to standards En 50005
....
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
Characteristics 5
5 5
5/39
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
Mini-contactors TeSys LC1 SKGC, .
Mini-contactor type LC1 SKGC2 LC1 SKGC3 and LC1 SKGC4
Conventional
For ambient temperature y 55 C A 20 20
Frequency limit of the operational current Hz up to 400
(Ue)
V 690
NF C 63-110 and IEC 60947
A 50 85
(for Ue y 400 V)
Conforming to .
NF C 63-110 and IEC 60947.
(I rms)
A 40 68
Permissible
short time rating
In free air for a time t .
from cold state (q y 55 C)
A 40 60
Short-circuit protection gl fuse U y 440 V A 20 20
Average impedance
per pole
At Ith and 50 Hz mW 4 4
Maximum rated
operational current
For temperature .
y 55 C
AC-3.
(Ue y 400 V)
A 5 9
AC-1 A 20 20
lighting (Ue y 440 V)
Increase in rated operational
current by paralleling of 2 poles
A 32 32
Auxiliary contact characteristics of mini-contactors
(Ue)
Up to V 690
Rated insulation
voltage (Ui)
Conforming to IEC 60947, .
BS 5424, VDE 0110 group C,.
CSA C 22-2 n 14
V

690
Conventional
For ambient temperature y 55 C A 10
Frequency of the operational current Hz Up to 400
Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947 and
VDE 0660, gl fuse
A 10
ac supply, category AC-15
Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating
electromagnet: making current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times
the power broken (cos j 0.4).
Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating
cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of
an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time
V 24 48 110/
127
220/
230
380/
400
440 V 24 48 110 220 440
Occasional making capacity VA 1000 2050 5000 10000 14000 13000 W 720 600 400 300 230
....
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
5/40
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
....
Mini-contactor type LC1 SKGC2 LC1 SKGC3 and LC1 SKGC4
(Uc)
V a.24400
(q.y 55 C) Operation 08511.Uc
For drop-out
.020.Uc
Average coil consumption at 20 C and at Uc
Inrush VA 16 23
Sealed VA 42 49
Between coil
energisation and
opening of the N/C contacts ms 816
closing of the N/O contacts ms 714
Between coil .
de-energisation and
opening of the N/O contacts ms 68
closing of the N/C contacts ms 810
Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour 1200
in millions of operating cycles
50/60 Hz coil

10
....
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
5 5
5/41
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
........
....
Control of 3-phase asynchronous .
squirrel cage motors with .
breaking whilst running.
The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal .
to the rated operational current of the motor.
1 LC1 SKGC2
2 LC1 SKGC3 and SKGC4
- - - - -. only up to 415 V.
....
Control of resistive circuits (cos j. u 0.95).
The current broken (Ic) in category AC-1 is equal .
to the current (Ie) normally drawn by the load.
....
10
8
9
7
6
5
4
3
2
2 1
1,5
1,2
1
0,8
0,9
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
220/380/415 V
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A 2,5
500 V
2 3 4 5 6 7 A 2,5
220/230 V
kW
380/400 V
1,1 1,5 2,2 3 4 kW
1,1 1,5 2,2 3 4
415 V
0,75 1,1 1,5 2,2
kW
0,55
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
10
8
9
7
6
5
4
3
2
2 1
1,5
1,2
1
0,8
0,9
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
220/380/415 V
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A 2,5
500 V
2 3 4 5 6 7 A 2,5
220/230 V
kW
380/400 V
1,1 1,5 2,2 3 4 kW
1,1 1,5 2,2 3 4
415 V
0,75 1,1 1,5 2,2
kW
0,55
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 12 20 30 40 2,5
10
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1,5
1
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,15
0,1
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 12 20 30 40 2,5
10
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1,5
1
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,15
0,1
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
Contactor selection
according to required
electrical durability 5
5/42
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
Mini-contactors TeSys LC1 SKGC,
Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or fxing by four 4 screws, except for LC1 SKGC200.
Connection by connectors.
Mini-contactor ftted with transparent, sealable protective cover to prevent front face access.
b
b
b
Mini-contactors, width 27 mm
of 3-phase motors
Rated
operational
current
in AC-3
up to
400 V
Non inductive
loads
category AC-1
maximum
current
q y 50 C
No of poles Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (1)
Weight

220 V
230 V
380 V
415 V
660 V
690 V
kW kW kW A A kg
5 20 2 LC1 SKGC200pp 0.132
Mini-contactors, width 45 mm
of 3-phase motors
Rated
operational
current
in AC-3
up to
400 V
Non inductive
loads
category AC-1
maximum
current
q y 50 C
No of poles Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (1)
Weight

220 V
230 V
380 V
415 V
660 V
690 V
kW kW kW A A kg
11 4 4 9 20 3 1 LC1 SKGC310pp 0175
3 1 LC1 SKGC301pp 0175
4 LC1 SKGC400pp 0175
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Offce)
Volts a
50/60 Hz
24 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 400
....

5
1
1
1
3
5
LC1 SKGC200
5
1
1
1
3
5
LC1 SKGC200

5
1
1
1
3
6
LC1 SKGC400
5
1
1
1
3
6
LC1 SKGC400
Characteristics :
pages 5/38 to 5/41
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
Characteristics :
pages 5/38 to 5/41
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
Characteristics :
pages 5/38 to 5/41
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
Characteristics :
pages 5/38 to 5/41
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
References 5
5 5
5/43
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
Suppressor modules
Suppressor modules
Connection without need for tools by clipping onto right-hand side of contactor
For use on contactors Type For voltages Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
LC1 SKGC Varistor
(1)
a.and.c 2448 V 10 LA4 SKE1E 0.003
a.and.c 110250 V 10 LA4 SKE1U 0.003
Diode
(2)
c 24250 V 10 LA4 SKC1U 0.003
....
5
1
1
1
3
4
LA4 SKp1p
5
1
1
1
3
4
LA4 SKp1p
Characteristics :
pages 5/38 to 5/41
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
Characteristics :
pages 5/38 to 5/41
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
Characteristics :
pages 5/38 to 5/41
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
Characteristics :
pages 5/38 to 5/41
Dimensions :
page 5/44
Schemes :
page 5/45
References 5
5/44
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
Dimensions Mounting
Mini-contactors LC1 SKGC2 On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)
.. ..
Dimensions Mounting
Mini-contactors LC1 SKGC3 and SKGC4 On panel On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)
.. ..
....
3,5 LA4 SK
55,5
5
6
27
3,5 LA4 SK
55,5
5
6
27 27
5
6
55,5 27
5
6
55,5
4 LA4 SK
56 45
5
8
34-35
4
8
-
5
0
4 LA4 SK
56 45
5
8
34-35
4
8
-
5
0
45 56
5
8
45 56
5
8
Characteristics :
pages 5/38 to 5/41
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Schemes :
page 5/45
Characteristics :
pages 5/38 to 5/41
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Schemes :
page 5/45
Characteristics :
pages 5/38 to 5/41
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Schemes :
page 5/45
Characteristics :
pages 5/38 to 5/41
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Schemes :
page 5/45
Dimensions,
mounting 5
5 5
5/45
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
LC1 SKGC2
..
LC1 SKGC310 LC1 SKGC301
.. ..
LC1 SKGC400
..
....
A
1
1
/
L
1
A
2
T
1
/
2
T
2
/
4
3
/
L
2
A
1
1
/
L
1
A
2
T
1
/
2
T
2
/
4
3
/
L
2
A
1
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
A
2
T
1
/
2
T
2
/
4
T
3
/
6
A
1
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
A
2
T
1
/
2
T
2
/
4
T
3
/
6
A
1
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
A
2
T
1
/
2
T
2
/
4
T
3
/
6
A
1
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
A
2
T
1
/
2
T
2
/
4
T
3
/
6
A
1
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
A
2
T
1
/
2
T
2
/
4
T
3
/
6
7
/
L
4
T
4
/
8
A
1
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
A
2
T
1
/
2
T
2
/
4
T
3
/
6
7
/
L
4
T
4
/
8
Characteristics :
pages 5/38 to 5/41
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Schemes :
page 5/45
Characteristics :
pages 5/38 to 5/41
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Schemes :
page 5/45
Characteristics :
pages 5/38 to 5/41
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Schemes :
page 5/45
Characteristics :
pages 5/38 to 5/41
References :
pages 5/42 and 5/43
Schemes :
page 5/45
Schemes 5
5 5
5/46
5 5
Applications All types of control system
Rated operational current le max AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) 9.A 12.A 18.A 25.A 32 A 38 A 40.A 50.A 65.A 80.A 95.A 115.A 150.A
le AC-1 (q.y 60 C) 20/25.A 25/32 A 25/40.A 50.A 60.A 80.A 125.A 200.A
Rated operational voltage 690 V on a.and.c 690 V a.or.c 1000 V on a supply, 690 V on c supply
Number of poles 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 3 4 3 3 4 3 4 3 3 4 3
in AC-3
220/240 V 2.2 kW 3 kW 4 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 9 kW 11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW 25 kW 30 kW 40 kW
380/400 V 4 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW 30 kW 37 kW 45 kW 55 kW 75 kW
415/440 V 4 kW 5.5 kW 9 kW 11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW 25/30 kW 37 kW 45 kW 45 kW 59 kW 80 kW
500 V 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 10 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW 30 kW 37 kW 55 kW 55 kW 75 kW 90 kW
660/690 V 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 10 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 30 kW 33 kW 37 kW 45 kW 45 kW 80 kW 100 kW
1000 V 45 kW 45 kW 75 kW 90 kW
Auxiliary contacts 1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks common to
the whole range comprising up to 4 N/C or N/O instantaneous, up to 1 N/O + 1 N/C time delay
and up to 2 N/O or 2 N/C protected contacts and 2 screen continuity terminals.
1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks common to the whole range comprising up to 4 N/C or N/O instantaneous, up to
1 N/O + 1 N/C time delay and up to 2 N/O or 2 N/C protected contacts and 2 screen continuity terminals.
Thermal overload relays
manual-auto compatible
Class 10 A 01010.A 0.1013 A 01018.A 0.1032 A 0.1038 A 0.1038 A 1340 A 1350 A 1365 A 17104.A 17104.A 60150.A 60150.A
Class 20 2510.A 2.513 A 2518.A 2.532 A 1340 A 1350 A 1365 A 1780.A 60150.A 60150.A
Suppressor modules
(c and low consumption
contactors are ftted with a
built-in bidirectional peak
limiting diode suppressior
as standard)
Varistor p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
Diode p p p p p p p p
RC circuit p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
Bidirectional peak
limiting diode
p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
Interfaces Relay output p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
Relay interface with
manual override switch
p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
Solid state p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
Contactor
type references
a.or.c 3 pole LC1 D09 LC1 D12 LC1 D18 LC1 D25 LC1 D32 LC1 D38 LC1 D40A LC1 D50A LC1 D65A LC1 D80 LC1 D95 LC1 D115 LC1 D150
a 4 pole LC1 DT20/
LC1 D098
LC1 DT25/
LC1 D128
LC1 DT32/
LC1 D188
LC1 DT40/
LC1 D258
LC1 DT60A LC1 DT80A LC1 D80 LC1 D115
c 4 pole LC1 DT60A LC1 DT80A LC1 D80 LC1 D115
Reversing contactor
type references
a 3 pole LC2 D09 LC2 D12 LC2 D18 LC2 D25 LC2 D32 LC2 D38 LC2 D40A LC2 D50A LC2 D65A LC2 D80 LC2 D95 LC2 D115 LC2 D150
c 3 pole LC2 D09 LC2 D12 LC2 D18 LC2 D25 LC2 D32 LC2 D38 LC2 D40A LC2 D50A LC2 D65A
a 4 pole LC2 DT20 LC2 DT25 LC2 DT32 LC2 DT40 LC2 D80 LC2 D115
c 4 pole LC2 DT20 LC2 DT25 LC2 DT32 LC2 DT40
Pages Contactors 5/62.to.5/67 5/62.to.5/67
Reversing contactors 5/72.to.5/75 5/72.to.5/75
Selection guide
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors
5 5 5 5
5/47
Applications All types of control system
Rated operational current le max AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) 9.A 12.A 18.A 25.A 32 A 38 A 40.A 50.A 65.A 80.A 95.A 115.A 150.A
le AC-1 (q.y 60 C) 20/25.A 25/32 A 25/40.A 50.A 60.A 80.A 125.A 200.A
Rated operational voltage 690 V on a.and.c 690 V a.or.c 1000 V on a supply, 690 V on c supply
Number of poles 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 3 4 3 3 4 3 4 3 3 4 3
in AC-3
220/240 V 2.2 kW 3 kW 4 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 9 kW 11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW 25 kW 30 kW 40 kW
380/400 V 4 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW 30 kW 37 kW 45 kW 55 kW 75 kW
415/440 V 4 kW 5.5 kW 9 kW 11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW 25/30 kW 37 kW 45 kW 45 kW 59 kW 80 kW
500 V 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 10 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW 30 kW 37 kW 55 kW 55 kW 75 kW 90 kW
660/690 V 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 10 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 30 kW 33 kW 37 kW 45 kW 45 kW 80 kW 100 kW
1000 V 45 kW 45 kW 75 kW 90 kW
Auxiliary contacts 1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks common to
the whole range comprising up to 4 N/C or N/O instantaneous, up to 1 N/O + 1 N/C time delay
and up to 2 N/O or 2 N/C protected contacts and 2 screen continuity terminals.
1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks common to the whole range comprising up to 4 N/C or N/O instantaneous, up to
1 N/O + 1 N/C time delay and up to 2 N/O or 2 N/C protected contacts and 2 screen continuity terminals.
Thermal overload relays
manual-auto compatible
Class 10 A 01010.A 0.1013 A 01018.A 0.1032 A 0.1038 A 0.1038 A 1340 A 1350 A 1365 A 17104.A 17104.A 60150.A 60150.A
Class 20 2510.A 2.513 A 2518.A 2.532 A 1340 A 1350 A 1365 A 1780.A 60150.A 60150.A
Suppressor modules
(c and low consumption
contactors are ftted with a
built-in bidirectional peak
limiting diode suppressior
as standard)
Varistor p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
Diode p p p p p p p p
RC circuit p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
Bidirectional peak
limiting diode
p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
Interfaces Relay output p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
Relay interface with
manual override switch
p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
Solid state p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
Contactor
type references
a.or.c 3 pole LC1 D09 LC1 D12 LC1 D18 LC1 D25 LC1 D32 LC1 D38 LC1 D40A LC1 D50A LC1 D65A LC1 D80 LC1 D95 LC1 D115 LC1 D150
a 4 pole LC1 DT20/
LC1 D098
LC1 DT25/
LC1 D128
LC1 DT32/
LC1 D188
LC1 DT40/
LC1 D258
LC1 DT60A LC1 DT80A LC1 D80 LC1 D115
c 4 pole LC1 DT60A LC1 DT80A LC1 D80 LC1 D115
Reversing contactor
type references
a 3 pole LC2 D09 LC2 D12 LC2 D18 LC2 D25 LC2 D32 LC2 D38 LC2 D40A LC2 D50A LC2 D65A LC2 D80 LC2 D95 LC2 D115 LC2 D150
c 3 pole LC2 D09 LC2 D12 LC2 D18 LC2 D25 LC2 D32 LC2 D38 LC2 D40A LC2 D50A LC2 D65A
a 4 pole LC2 DT20 LC2 DT25 LC2 DT32 LC2 DT40 LC2 D80 LC2 D115
c 4 pole LC2 DT20 LC2 DT25 LC2 DT32 LC2 DT40
5 5
5/48
5 5
Applications Automation systems
Rated operational current le max AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) 9.A 12.A 18.A 25.A 32 A 38 A 40.A 50.A 65.A
le AC-1 (q.y 60 C) 20/25.A 20/25.A 25/32 A 25/40.A 50.A 50.A 60.A 80.A
Rated operational voltage 690 V 690 V 690 V
Number of poles 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 3 3 3 3
Rated operational
power in AC-3
220/240 V 2.2 kW 3 kW 4 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 9 kW 11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW
380/400 V 4 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW 30 kW
415/440 V 4 kW 5.5 kW 9 kW 11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW 25/30 kW 37 kW
500 V 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 10 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW 30 kW 37 kW
660/690 V 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 10 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 30 kW 33 kW 37 kW
Coil consumption 2.4 W (100 mA - 24 V) 2.4 W (100 mA - 24 V) 0.6 W (25 mA - 24 V) for relay LA4 DFB + the power consumed by the
contactor coil
Operating ranges 07125.Uc 07125.Uc
Operating time
at 20 C and at Uc
Closing 70 ms 70 ms
Opening 25 ms 25 ms
Auxiliary contact block modules 1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous contacts incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks
common to the whole range, comprising up to 2 N/C or 2 N/O instantaneous standard contacts
1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous contacts incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks common to the whole range, comprising up to 2 N/C or 2 N/O
instantaneous standard contacts
Interference suppression Built-in suppression as standard, by bi-directional peak limiting diode Built-in suppression as standard, by bi-directional peak limiting diode
Contactor type 3-pole LC1 D09 LC1 D12 LC1 D18 LC1 D25 LC1 D32 LC1 D38 LC1 D40A (1) LC1 D50A (1) LC1 D65A (1)
4-pole LC1 DT20/D098 LC1 DT25/D128 LC1 DT32/D188 LC1 DT40/D258
Reversing contactor type 3-pole LC2 D09 LC2 D12 LC2 D18 LC2 D25 LC2 D32 LC2 D38 LC2 D40A (2) LC2 D50A (2) LC2 D65A (2)
4-pole LC2 DT20 LC2 DT25 LC2 DT32 LC2 DT40
(1) With low consumption kit LA4 DBL (see page 5/83).
(2) With 2 low consumption kits LA4 DBL (see page 5/83).
Selection guide
TeSys contactors
TeSys D low consumption contactors
5 5 5 5
5/49
Applications Automation systems
Rated operational current le max AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) 9.A 12.A 18.A 25.A 32 A 38 A 40.A 50.A 65.A
le AC-1 (q.y 60 C) 20/25.A 20/25.A 25/32 A 25/40.A 50.A 50.A 60.A 80.A
Rated operational voltage 690 V 690 V 690 V
Number of poles 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 3 3 3 3
Rated operational
power in AC-3
220/240 V 2.2 kW 3 kW 4 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 9 kW 11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW
380/400 V 4 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW 30 kW
415/440 V 4 kW 5.5 kW 9 kW 11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW 25/30 kW 37 kW
500 V 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 10 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW 30 kW 37 kW
660/690 V 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 10 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 30 kW 33 kW 37 kW
Coil consumption 2.4 W (100 mA - 24 V) 2.4 W (100 mA - 24 V) 0.6 W (25 mA - 24 V) for relay LA4 DFB + the power consumed by the
contactor coil
Operating ranges 07125.Uc 07125.Uc
Operating time
at 20 C and at Uc
Closing 70 ms 70 ms
Opening 25 ms 25 ms
Auxiliary contact block modules 1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous contacts incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks
common to the whole range, comprising up to 2 N/C or 2 N/O instantaneous standard contacts
1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous contacts incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks common to the whole range, comprising up to 2 N/C or 2 N/O
instantaneous standard contacts
Interference suppression Built-in suppression as standard, by bi-directional peak limiting diode Built-in suppression as standard, by bi-directional peak limiting diode
Contactor type 3-pole LC1 D09 LC1 D12 LC1 D18 LC1 D25 LC1 D32 LC1 D38 LC1 D40A (1) LC1 D50A (1) LC1 D65A (1)
4-pole LC1 DT20/D098 LC1 DT25/D128 LC1 DT32/D188 LC1 DT40/D258
Reversing contactor type 3-pole LC2 D09 LC2 D12 LC2 D18 LC2 D25 LC2 D32 LC2 D38 LC2 D40A (2) LC2 D50A (2) LC2 D65A (2)
4-pole LC2 DT20 LC2 DT25 LC2 DT32 LC2 DT40
(1) With low consumption kit LA4 DBL (see page 5/83).
(2) With 2 low consumption kits LA4 DBL (see page 5/83).
5 5
5/50
5 5
Contactor type LC1 D09D18
DT20 and
DT25
D25D38
DT32 and
DT40
D40AD65A
DT60A and
DT80A
D80D95 D115 and
D150
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1,
overvoltage category III,
degree of pollution: 3
V 690 1000
Conforming to UL, CSA V 600
Rated impulse
Conforming to IEC 60947 kV 6 8
Conforming to standards IEC/EN 60947-4-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22.2 n14.
Product certifcations UL, CSA (1), CCC, GOST
GL, DNV, RINA, BV, LROS (pending for contactors LC1 D40A to D65A)
Degree of protection (2)
(front face only)
Conforming to VDE 0106
and.IEC.60529
Power circuit connections Protection against direct fnger contact IP 2X
Coil connection Protection against direct fnger contact IP 2X
Protective treatment Conforming to IEC 60068-2-30 TH
around the device
Storage C - 60+ 80
Operation C - 5+ 60
Permissible C - 40+ 70, for operation at Uc
Operating positions
(3)
Without derating
in the following positions
a/c a c
9
0

9
0

1
8
0

1
8
0

Positions that are

not permissible
For.c contactors LC1 D09 to LC1 D65A.
Flame resistance Conforming to UL 94 V1
Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 C 850
Shock resistance (4)
1/2 sine wave = 11 ms
Contactor open 10 gn 8 gn 10 gn 8 gn 6 gn
Contactor closed 15 gn 15 gn 15 gn 10 gn 15 gn
Vibration resistance (4)
5300 Hz
Contactor open 2 gn
Contactor closed 4 gn 4 gn 4 gn 3 gn 4 gn
(1) Contactor LC1 D95 with d.c. coil is not UL/CSA certifed.
(2) Protection provided for the cabling c.s.a.'s indicated on the next page and for connection by cable.
(3) When mounting on a vertical rail, use a stop.
(4) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction (coil energised at Ue).
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors
5 5 5 5
5/51
Contactor type LC1 D09
and D12
DT20
and DT25
D18
(3P)
D25
(3P)
D32 D38 D18 and
D25 (4P)
DT32 and
DT40
D40A to
D65A
DT60A
and
DT80A (1)
D80
and D95
D115
and D150
Power circuit connections
Screw clamp terminal connections
Tightening Screw clamp terminals Connector
2 inputs
Screw
clamp
terminals
Connector
1 input
Connector
2 inputs
Flexible cable
without cable end
1 conductor mm
2
14 156 2510 2510 135 450 10120
2 conductors mm
2
14 156 2510 2510 125
and 135
425 10120.
+ 1050
Flexible cable
with cable end
1 conductor mm
2
14 16 110 2510 135 450 10120
2 conductors mm
2
125 14 156 2510 125
and 135
416 10120.
+ 1050
Solid cable
without cable end
1 conductor mm
2
14 156 1510 2516 135 450 10120
2 conductors mm
2
14 156 2510 2516 125
and 135
425 10120.
+ 1050
Screwdriver Philips N 2 N 2 N 2 N 2
Flat screwdriver 6 6 6 6 6 8
Hexagonal key 4 4 4
Tightening torque Nm 17 17 25 18 5:.
y 25 mm
2
8: 35 mm
2
9 12
Spring terminal connections (2)
Flexible cable
without cable end
1 conductor mm
2
25.
(4: DT25)
4 4 4 10
2 conductors mm
2
25.
(except
DT25)
4 4 4
Bar csa 3 x 16 5 x 25
Lug external mm 8 8 10 10 8 165 17 25
of screw mm M3.5 M3.5 M4 M4 M3.5 M6 M6 M8
Screwdriver Philips N 2 N 2 N 2 N 2 N 2
Flat screwdriver 6 6 6 6 6 8
Key for hexagonal headed screw 10 10 13
Tightening torque Nm 17 17 25 25 18 6 9 12
Control circuit connections
Connection by cable (tightening via screw clamps)
Flexible cable
without cable end
1 conductor mm
2
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 125
2 conductors mm
2
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 125
Flexible cable
with cable end
1 conductor mm
2
14 14 14 14 14 14 125 125
2 conductors mm
2
125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125
Solid cable
without cable end
1 conductor mm
2
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 125
2 conductors mm
2
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 125
Screwdriver Philips N 2 N 2 N 2 N 2 N 2 N 2 N 2 N 2
Flat screwdriver 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Spring terminal connections (2)
Flexible cable
without cable end
1 conductor mm
2
25 25 25 25 25 07525
2 conductors mm
2
25 25 25 25 25 07525
Lug external mm 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
of screw mm M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5
Screwdriver Philips N 2 N 2 N 2 N 2 N 2 N 2 N 2 N 2
Flat screwdriver 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
(1) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be used (reference LAD ALLEN4,
see page 5/85).
(2) If cable ends are used, choose the next size down (example: for 2.5 mm
2
, use 1.5 mm
2
) and square crimp the cable ends using a special tool.
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors
5 5
5/52
5 5
Contactor type LC1 D09
(3P)
DT20
D098
D12
(3P)
DT25
D128
D18
(3P)
DT32
D188
D25
(3P)
DT40
D258
(Ue y 440 V)
In AC-3, q.y 60 C A 9 12 18 25
In AC-1, q.y 60 C A 25 (1) 20 25 (1) 25 32 (1) 32 40 (1) 40
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to V 690 690 690 690
Frequency limits Of the operational current Hz 25400 25400 25400 25400
current (Ith)
q.y 60 C A 25 (1) 20 25 (1) 25 32 (1) 32 40 (1) 40
Rated making capacity (440 V) Conforming to IEC 60947 A 250 250 300 450
Rated breaking capacity (440 V) Conforming to IEC 60947 A 250 250 300 450
Permissible short time rating
No current fowing for preceding
15 minutes with q.y 40 C
For.1.s A 210 210 240 380
For.10.s A 105 105 145 240
For 1 min A 61 61 84 120
For 10 min A 30 30 40 50
Fuse protection
against short-circuits .
(U y 690 V)
Without thermal
overload relay, .
gG fuse
type 1 A 25 40 50 63
type 2 A 20 25 35 40
With thermal overload relay A See pages 6/20 and 6/21, for aM or gG fuse ratings corresponding to the associated
thermal overload relay
Average impedance per pole At Ith and 50 Hz mW 25 25 25 2
Power dissipation per pole for
the above operational currents
AC-3 W 020 0.36 08 125
AC-1 W 156 156 25 3.2
Control circuit characteristics, ac supply
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) 50/60 Hz V 12690
50 or 60 Hz coils Operation
Drop-out
50/60 Hz coils Operation 0.81.1 Uc on 50 Hz and 0.851.1 Uc on 60 Hz at 60 C
Drop-out 0.30.6 Uc at 60 C
Average consumption
at 20 C and at Uc
a 50 Hz Inrush 50 Hz coil VA
Cos.j 075
50/60 Hz coil VA 70
Sealed 50 Hz coil VA
Cos.j 0.3
50/60 Hz coil VA 7
a 60 Hz Inrush 60 Hz coil VA
Cos.j 075
50/60 Hz coil VA 70
Sealed 60 Hz coil VA
Cos.j 0.3
50/60 Hz coil VA 75
Heat dissipation 50/60 Hz W 23
Operating time
(2)
Closing "C" ms 1222
Opening "O" ms 419
50 or 60 Hz coil
50/60 Hz coil on 50 Hz 15
at ambient temperature y 60 C
In operating cycles per hour 3600
(1) Versions with spring terminal connections:
16 A for LC1 D093 and LC1 D123 (20 A possible with 2 x 2.5 mm
2
in parallel),
25 A for LC1 D183 to LC1 D323 (32 A possible for LC1 D183 connected with 2 x 4 mm
2
cables in parallel; 40 A possible for LC1 D253 and LC1 D323 connected
with 2 x 4 mm
2
in parallel).
(2) The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to closure of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the
moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
References:
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions:
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes:
pages 5/96 and 5/97
5 5 5 5
5/53
D32 D38 D40A DT60A D50A D65A DT80A D80 D95 D115 D150
32 38 40 50 65 80 95 115 150
50 (1) 50 60 60 80 80 80 125 125 200 200
690 690 690 690 690 690 690 1000 1000 1000 1000
25400 25400 25400 25400 25400 25400 25400 25400 25400 25400 25400
50 50 60 60 80 80 80 125 125 200 200
550 550 800 800 900 1000 1000 1100 1100 1260 1660
550 550 800 800 900 1000 1000 1100 1100 1100 1400
430 430 720 720 810 900 900 990 1100 1100 1400
260 310 320 320 400 520 520 640 800 950 1200
138 150 165 165 208 260 260 320 400 550 580
60 60 72 72 84 110 110 135 135 250 250
63 63 80 80 100 125 125 200 200 250 315
63. 63 80 80 100 125 125 160 160 200 250
See pages 6/20 and 6/21 for aM or gG fuse ratings corresponding to the associated thermal overload relay
2 2 15 16 15 15 16 08 08 06 06
2 3 24 3.7 6.3 51 72 79 13.5
5 5 54 58 96 96 102 125 125 24 24
12690 12690 24500
0.851.1 Uc at 55 C
0.30.6 Uc at 55 C 0.30.5 Uc at 55 C
0.81.1 Uc on 50 Hz and.
0.851.1 Uc on 60 Hz .
at 60 C
0.81.1 Uc on 50 Hz and
0.851.1 Uc on 60 Hz at 60 C
0.81.1 Uc on 50 Hz and
0.851.1 Uc on 60 Hz .
at 55 C
0.81.15 Uc on 50/60 Hz
at 55 C
0.30.6 Uc at 60 C 0.30.6 Uc at 60 C 0.30.6 Uc at 55 C 0.30.5 Uc at 55 C
200 300
075 075 075 08 09
70 160 245 280350 280350
20 22
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 09
7 15 26 218 218
220 300
075 075 075 08 09
70 140 245 280350 280350
22 22
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 09
75 13 26 218 218
23 45 610 38 34.5
1222 1226 1226 1226 1226 1226 2035 2035 2050 2035
419 419 419 419 419 419 620 620 620 4075
10 10 8
15 6 6 6 6 6 4 4 8 8
3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 2400 1200
5 5
5/54
5 5
Contactor type LC1 D09D38
LC1 DT20DT40
LC1 D40AD65A
LC1 DT60A and
DT80A
LC1 or LP1 D80
LC1 D95
LC1 D115 and
LC1 D150
dc control circuit characteristics
Rated control circuit voltage.
(Uc)
c V 12440 12440 24440
Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V 690
Control voltage limits Operation Standard.
coil
07125.Uc.
at 60 C
075125.Uc
at 60 C
08511.Uc
at 55 C
07512.Uc
at 55 C
Wide range
coil
07512.Uc.
at 55 C
Drop-out 01025.Uc.
at 60 C
0.10.3 Uc.
at 60 C
0.10.3 Uc .
at 55 C
01504.Uc
at 55 C
Average consumption
at 20 C and at Uc
c Inrush W 54 19 22 270365
Sealed W 54 74 22 2451
Operating time (1)
average at Uc
Closing "C" ms 63 15 % 50 15% 95130 2035
Opening O ms 20 20 % 20 20% 2035 4075
Note: The arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For all normal 3-phase
applications, the arcing time is less than 10 ms. The load is isolated from the supply after a time
equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time.
Time constant (L/R) ms 28 34 75 25
Mechanical durability at Uc In millions of operating cycles 30 10 10 8
In operating cycles per hour 3600 3600 3600 1200
Low consumption control circuit characteristics
Maximum voltage Of the control circuit on c V 250
Average consumption
d.c. at 20 C and at Uc
Wide range coil
(0.71.25 Uc)
Inrush W 24
Sealed W 24
Operating time (1)
at Uc and at 20 C
Closing "C" ms 77 15 %
Opening O ms 25 20 %
Voltage limits (q y 60 C)
of the control circuit
Operation 08.to.125.Uc
Drop-out 0.10.3 Uc
Time constant (L/R) ms 40
Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles 30
(1) The operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode.
The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles.
The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
References:
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions:
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes:
pages 5/96 and 5/97
5 5 5 5
5/55
Characteristics of auxiliary contacts incorporated in the contactor
Mechanically linked
contacts
Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Each contactor has 2 N/O and N/C contacts mechanically linked on the same
movable contact holder
Mirror contact Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 The N/C contact on each contactor represents the state of the power contacts and
can be connected to a PREVENTA safety module
(Ue)
Up to V 690
Rated insulation voltage.
(Ui)
Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V 690
current (Ith)
Frequency of the operational current Hz 25400
Minimum switching
capacity l = 10
8
U min V 17
I min mA 5
Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 gG fuse: 10 A
Rated making capacity Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1,
I rms
A a: 140, c:.250
Short-time rating Permissible for 1.s A 100
500 ms A 120
100 ms A 140
Non-overlap time Guaranteed between .
N/C and N/O contacts
ms 1.5 (on energisation and on de-energisation)
conforming to IEC 60947-5-1
Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600
operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load
such as the coil of an electromagnet: making
current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power
broken (cos j 0.4).
such as the coil of an electromagnet, without
economy resistor, the time constant increasing
with the load.
V 24 48 115 230 400 440 600 V 24 48 125 250 440
1 million operating cycles VA 60 120 280 560 960 1050 1440 W 96 76 76 76 44
3 million operating cycles VA 16 32 80 160 280 300 420 W 48 38 38 32
10 million operating cycles VA 4 8 20 40 70 80 100 W 14 12 12
AC-15 DC-13
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,5
0,4 0,6
0,8
1
2 3
4
5
6
8
10
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,5
0,4 0,6
0,8
1
2 3
4
5
6
8
10
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
440 V
48 V
250 V
125 V
24 V
Current broken in A
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
References:
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions:
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes:
pages 5/96 and 5/97
5 5
5/56
5 5
Contact block type LAD N or LAD C LAD T and LAD S LAD R LAD 8
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-5-1, NF C 63-140, VDE 0660, BS 4794, EN 60947-5-1
Protective treatment Conforming to IEC 60068 TH
Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 Protection against direct fnger contact IP 2X
around the device
Storage C - 60+ 80
Operation C - 5+ 60
Permissible for operation at Uc C - 40+ 70
Connection by cable Phillips N 2 and 6 mm
Flexible or solid cable .
with or without cable end
mm
2
Min: 1 x 1; max: 2 x 2.5
Spring terminal connections Flexible or solid cable .
without cable end
mm
2
Max: 2 x 2.5
Instantaneous and time delay contact characteristics
Number of contacts 1, 2 or 4 2 2 2
(Ue)
Up to V 690
Rated insulation voltage..
(Ui)
Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V 690
current (Ith)
For ambient temperature .
y 60 C
A 10
Minimum switching capacity U min V 17
I min mA 5
Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1
and VDE 0660. gG fuse
A 10
IEC.60947-5-1
I rms A a: 140; c:.250
500 ms A 120
100 ms A 140
Overlap time Guaranteed between N/C and
N/O contacts on LAD C22
ms 15
Time delay
(LADT, R and S contact blocks)
Accuracy only valid for .
setting range indicated .
on the front face
Ambient air temperature.
for operation
C - 40+ 70 - 40+ 70
Repeat accuracy 2 % 2 %
Drift up to 0.5 million .
operating cycles
+ 15 % + 15 %
Drift depending on .
ambient air temperature
0.25 % per C 0.25 % per C
Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles 30 5 5 30
Operational power
of contacts
See page 5/58
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Auxiliary contact blocks without dust and damp
protected contacts for TeSys D contactors
References :
pages 5/79.and.5/80
Dimensions :
pages 5/92.and.5/93
Schemes :
pages 5/96.and.5/97
5 5 5 5
5/57
Contact block type LA1 DX LA1 DZ LA1 DY
Protected Non protected
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC60947-5-1, VDE0660
Ambient air temperature Storage and operation C - 25+ 70
Cabling Phillips N 2 and 6 mm
Flexible or solid conductor .
mm
2
Min: 1 x 1; max: 2 x 2.5
Number of contacts 2 2 2 2
Contact characteristics
(Ue)
Up to V 50 50 690 24
Rated insulation voltage..
(Ui)
Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V 250 250 690 250
current (Ith)
For ambient temperature.
y 40 C
A 10
Maximum operational current
(Ie)
mA 500 500 50
Minimum switching capacity U min V 3 3 3 3
I min mA 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 609475-1
gG fuse
A 10
IEC.609475-1
I rms A a:140; c:.250
500 ms A 120
100 ms A 140
Insulation resistance MW >.10 >.10 >.10 >.10
Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles 5 5 30 5
Materials and technology
used for dust and damp protected contacts
Silver - Single break Silver - Single break Gold - Single break
with crossed bars
TeSys contactors
Auxiliary contact blocks with dust and damp
References :
pages 5/79.and.5/80
Dimensions :
pages 5/92.and.5/93
Schemes :
pages 5/96.and.5/97
5 5
5/58
5 5
Rated operational power of contacts (conforming to IEC 60947-5-1)
Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: .
making current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos j 0.4).
V 24 48 115 230 400 440 600
1 million operating cycles VA 60 120 280 560 960 1050 1440
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1 2 3 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,6
0,5
0,8
0,7
7
1
2
3
5
4
6
8
10
Current broken in A
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy
resistor, the time constant increasing with the load.
V 24 48 125 250 440
1 million operating cycles W 120 90 75 68 61
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1 2 3 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,6
0,5
0,8
0,7
7
1
2
3
5
4
6
8
10
440 V
48 V
250 V
125 V
24 V
Current broken in A
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
TeSys contactors
Auxiliary contact blocks with dust and damp
References :
page 5/79
Dimensions :
pages 5/92.and.5/93
Schemes :
pages 5/96.and.5/97
5 5 5 5
5/59
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC.60947-5-1
around the device
Storage C 40+ 80
Operation C 25+ 55
Permissible for operation at Uc C 25+ 70
Suppressor modules
Module type LA4 DA, LAD 4RC,
LAD 4RC3
LA4 DB, LAD 4T,
LAD 4T3
LA4 DC, LAD 4D3 LA4 DE, LAD 4V,
LAD 4V3
Type of protection RC circuit Bidirectional .
peak limiting diode
Diode Varistor
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) V a.24415 a.or.c.24440 c.12250 a.or.c.24250
Maximum peak voltage 3 Uc 2.Uc Uc 2.Uc
Natural RC frequency 24/48 V Hz 400
50/127 V Hz 200
110/240 V Hz 100
380/415 V Hz 150
Mechanical latch blocks (1)
Mechanical latch block type LAD 6K10 LA6 DK20
For use on contactor LC1 D09D65A
DT20DT80A
LC1 D80D150
LP1 D80 and LC1 D115
Product certifcations UL, CSA UL, CSA
Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V 690 690
Rated control circuit voltage a 50/60 Hz and c V 24415 24415
Power required For unlatching a VA 25 25
c W 30 30
Maximum operating rate In operating cycles/hour 1200 1200
On-load factor 10 % 10 %
Mechanical durability at Uc In millions of operating cycles 05 05
(1) Unlatching can be manually operated or electrically controlled (pulsed).
The LA6 DK or LAD 6K latch coil and the LC1 D operating coil must not be energised simultaneously.
The duration of the LA6 DK or LAD 6K and LC1 D control signals must be u 100 ms.
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Control modules, coil suppressor modules and
mechanical latch blocks for TeSys D contactors
References :
pages 5/79.and.5/80
Dimensions :
pages 5/92.and.5/93
Schemes :
pages 5/96.and.5/97
5 5
5/60
5 5
Module type LA4 DT (On-delay)
Environment
around the device
Storage C 40+ 80
Operation C 25+ 55
For operation at Uc C 25+ 70
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V 250
Cabling Phillips n 2 and 6 mm
Flexible or solid conductor .
mm
2
Min: 1 x 1; max: 2 x 2.5
Built-in protection Of the input By varistor
Contactor coil suppression By varistor
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) V a .or..c.:.24250
Permissible variation 0811.Uc
Type of control By mechanical contact only
Timing characteristics
Timing ranges s 0.12; 1.530; 25500
Repeat accuracy 040 C 3 % (10 ms minimum)
Reset time During time delay period ms 150
After time delay period ms 50
Immunity to microbreaks During time delay period ms 10
Minimum control pulse duration ms
Time delay signalling By LED Illuminates during time delay period
Switching characteristics (solid state type)
Maximum power dissipated W 2
Leakage current mA <.5
Residual voltage V 3.3
Overvoltage protection 3 kV; 0.5 joule
Electrical durability In millions of operating cycles 30
Function diagram
Electronic on-delay timer LA4 DT
0
1
0
1
t
U supply (A1-A2)
Time delay output
Contactor coil
Red LED
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Electronic serial timer module .
for TeSys D contactors
References :
page 5/83
Dimensions :
pages 5/92.and.5/93
Schemes :
pages 5/96.and.5/97
5 5 5 5
5/61
Environment
around the device
Storage C 40+ 80
Operation C 25+ 55
Permissible for operation at Uc C 25+ 70
Module type LA4 DFB
With relay
LA4 DWB
Solid state
current (Ith)
Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V 250
Rated operational voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V 250
Indication of input state By integral LED which illuminates when the contactor coil is energised
Input signals Control voltage (E1-E2) V c 24 c 24
Permissible variation V 1730 530
Current consumption at 20 C mA 25 8.5 for 5 V
15 for 24 V
State 0 guaranteed for U V <.24 <.24
I mA <.2 <.2
State 1 guaranteed for U V 17 5
Built-in protection Against reversed polarity By diode By diode
Of the input By diode By diode
at 220 A/240 V
In millions of operating cycles 10 20
Maximum immunity to microbreaks ms 4 1
Power dissipated At 20 C W 06 04
Direct mounting
on contactor
With coil a 24250 V LC1 D80D150
a 100250 V LC1 D80D115
a 380415 V
Mounting with
cabling adapter
LAD 4BB
With coil a 24250 V LC1 D09D38,
LC1 DT20DT40
LC1 D09D38,
LC1 DT20DT40
a 380415 V
Mounting with
cabling adapter
LAD 4BB3
With coil a 24250 V LC1 D40AD65A LC1 D40AD65A
a 380415 V LC1 D40AD65A LC1 D40AD65A
Total operating time at Uc..
(of the contactor)
The operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. The
closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of
the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched
off to the moment the main poles separate.
LC1 D09D38,
LC1 DT20DT40
LC1 D40AD65A LC1 D80 and D95
With LA4 DFB "C" ms 2030 2834 2843
O ms 1624 2024 1832
Cabling Phillips N 2 and 6 mm
Flexible or solid cable .
mm
2
Min: 1 x 1; max: 2 x 2.5
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Interface modules for TeSys D contactors
References :
page 5/83
Dimensions :
pages 5/92.and.5/93
Schemes :
pages 5/96.and.5/97
5 5
5/62
5 5
3-pole contactors
(q y 60 C)
Rated
oper-
ational
current
in AC-3
440 V
up to
Instan-
taneous
auxiliary
contacts
Basic reference,
Weight
(3)
Fixing (1)
220 V
230 V
380 V
400 V
415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V
690 V
1000 V
kW kW kW kW kW kW kW A kg
Connection by screw clamp terminals
22 4 4 4 55 55 9 1 1 LC1 D09pp 0.320
3 55 55 55 75 75 12 1 1 LC1 D12pp 0.325
4 75 9 9 10 10 18 1 1 LC1 D18pp 0.330
55 11 11 11 15 15 25 1 1 LC1 D25pp 0.370
75 15 15 15 185 185 32 1 1 LC1 D32pp 0.375
9 185 185 185 185 185 38 1 1 LC1 D38pp 0.380
Power connections by EverLink
BTR screw connectors (4) and control by spring terminals

11 185 22 22 22 30 40 1 1 LC1 D40App (5) 0850
15 22 25 30 30 33 50 1 1 LC1 D50App (5) 0855
185 30 37 37 37 37 65 1 1 LC1 D65App (5) 0860
22 37 45 45 55 45 45 80 1 1 LC1 D80pp 1590
25 45 45 45 55 45 45 95 1 1 LC1 D95pp 1610
30 55 59 59 75 80 65 115 1 1 LC1 D115pp 2500
40 75 80 80 90 100 75 150 1 1 LC1 D150pp 2500
Connection by lugs or bars
Example: LC1 D09pp becomes LC1 D096pp
Separate components
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules: see pages 5/79 to 5/85
(1) LC1 D09 to D65A: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fxing.
LC1 D80 to D95 a: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fxing.
LC1 D80 to D95 c : clip-on mounting on 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fxing.
LC1 D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 5 rails AM1 DP or screw fxing.
ac supply
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500
LC1 D09D150 (D115 and D150 coils with built-in suppression as standard, by bi-directional peak limiting diode).
50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 S7
LC1 D80D115
50 Hz B5 D5 E5 F5 FE5 M5 P5 U5 Q5 V5 N5 R5 S5
60 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 U6 Q6 R6
dc supply
Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440
LC1 D09D65A (coils with integral suppression device ftted as standard)
U..075125.Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD GD MD UD RD
LC1 D80D95
U...08511.Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD GD MD UD RD
U...07512.Uc JW BW CW EW SW FW MW
LC1 D115 and D150 (coils with integral suppression device ftted as standard)
U..07512.Uc BD ED ND SD FD GD MD UD RD
Low consumption
Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250
LC1 D09D38 (coils with integral suppression device ftted as standard)
U..08125.Uc AL JL ZL BL EL FL ML UL
For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/86 to 5/91.
(3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg from
LC1 D09 to D38, 0.075 kg from LC1 D40A to D65A and 1 kg for LC1 D80 and D95.
(4) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be
used (reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85).
(5) For low consumption kit LA4 DBL (see page 5/83).
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors for motor control
up to 75 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3
For connection by screw clamp terminals and lugs
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
LC1 D09pp
5
2
6
2
1
6
LC1 D25pp
5
2
6
2
1
7
LC1 D65App
5
2
6
2
1
8
LC1 D95pp
5
2
6
2
1
9
LC1 D115pp
5
2
6
2
2
0
5 5 5 5
5/63
3-pole contactors
(q y 60 C)
Rated
oper-
ational
current
in AC-3
440 V
up to
Instan-
taneous
auxiliary
contacts
Basic reference,
Weight
(3)
Fixing (1)
220 V
230 V
380 V
400 V
415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V
690 V
1000 V
Power and control connections by spring terminals
22 4 4 4 55 55 9 1 1 LC1 D093pp 0.320
3 55 55 55 75 75 12 1 1 LC1 D123pp 0.325
4 75 9 9 10 10 18 1 1 LC1 D183pp 0.330
55 11 11 11 15 15 25 1 1 LC1 D253pp 0.370
75 15 15 15 185 185 32 (4) 1 1 LC1 D323pp 0.375

11 185 22 22 22 30 40 1 1 LC1 D40A3pp (6) 0850
15 22 25 30 30 33 50 1 1 LC1 D50A3pp (6) 0855
185 30 37 37 37 37 65 1 1 LC1 D65A3pp (6) 0860
Connection by Faston connectors
These contactors are ftted with Faston connectors: 2 x 6.35 mm on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm on the coil
and auxiliary terminals.
For contactors LC1 D09 and LC1 D12 only, replace the fgure 3 with a 9 in the references selected above.
Separate components
(1) LC1 D09 to D32: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fxing.
ac supply
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
LC1 D09D65A
dc supply
Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440
LC1 D09D65A (coils with built-in suppression as standard, by bi-directional peak limiting diode)
Low consumption
Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250
(3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit.
For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg from LC1 D09 to D32 and 0.075 kg from LC1 D40A to D65A.
(4) Must be wired with 2 x 4 mm
2
cables in parallel on the upstream side. On the downstream side, outgoing terminal block
LAD 331 may be used (Quickft technology, see page 1/199). When wired with a single cable, the product is limited to 25 A (11
kW/400 V motors).
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors for motor control
For connection by spring terminals
LC1 D123pp
5
2
6
2
2
1
LC1 D65A3pp
5
2
6
2
2
2
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
5 5
5/64
5 5
3-pole contactors
Non inductive loads
maximum current
(q y 60 C)
Number
of poles
Instan-
taneous
auxiliary
contacts
Basic reference,
Weight
(3)
Fixing (2)
A kg
25 3 1 1 LC1 D09pp 0.320
or LC1 D12pp 0.325
32 3 1 1 LC1 D18pp 0.330
40 3 1 1 LC1 D25pp 0.370
50 3 1 1 LC1 D32pp 0.375
or LC1 D38pp 0.380
Connection by EverLink
, BTR screw connectors (4)

60 3 1 1 LC1 D40App (7) 0850
80 3 1 1 LC1 D50App (7) 0855
or LC1 D65App (5) (7) 0860
125 3 1 1 LC1 D80pp 1590
or LC1 D95pp (5) 1610
200 3 1 1 LC1 D115pp 2500
or LC1 D150pp (6) 2500
3-pole contactors for connection by lugs
ac supply
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500
LC1 D09D150 (coils D115 and D150 ftted with integral suppression device as standard)
LC1 D80D150
60 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 U6 Q6 R6
dc supply
Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440
LC1 or LP1 D80 and D95
U..07512.Uc JW BW CW EW SW FW MW
Low consumption
Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250
LC1 D80 and D95 a: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fxing.
LC1 or LP1 D80 to D95 c: clip-on mounting on 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fxing.
LC1 D09 to D38, 0.075 kg from LC1 D40A to D65A and 1 kg for LC1 D80 and D95.
(5) Selection according to the number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve, page 5/198.
(6) 32 A with 2 x 4 mm
2
cables connected in parallel.

LC1 D09pp
5
2
6
2
3
0
LC1 D09pp
5
2
6
2
3
0
LC1 D65App
5
2
6
2
3
1
LC1 D65App
5
2
6
2
3
1
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys D, 3-pole contactors
for control in category AC-1, from 25 to 200 A
5 5 5 5
5/65
3-pole contactors for connection by Faston connectors
terminals. For contactors LC1 D09 and LC1 D12 only, in the references selected from the previous page, insert a
fgure 9 before the voltage code. Example: LC1 D09pp becomes LC1 D099pp
3-pole contactors
Non inductive loads
maximum current
(q y 60 C)
Number
of poles
Instan-
taneous
auxiliary
contacts
Basic reference,
Weight
(3)
Fixing (2)
A kg
16 3 1 1 LC1 D093pp (4) 0.320
or LC1 D123pp (4) 0.325
25 3 1 1 LC1 D183pp (5) 0.335
or LC1 D253pp (6) 0.325
or LC1 D323pp (6) 0.325

60 3 1 1 LC1 D40A3pp (9) 0850
80 3 1 1 LC1 D50A3pp (8) (9) 0855
or LC1 D65A3pp (8) (9) 0860
Separate components
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules: see pages 5/79 to 5/85.
ac supply
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500
LC1 D09D65A
dc supply
Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440
Low consumption
Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250
LC1 D09 to D38 and 0.075 kg from LC1 D40A to D65A.
(4) 20 A with 2 x 2.5 mm
2
(5) 32 A with 2 x 4 mm
2
(6) 40 A with 2 x 4 mm
2
(8) Selection according to the number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve, page 5/198.

LC1 D123pp
5
2
6
2
3
2
LC1 D123pp
5
2
6
2
3
2
LC1 D65A3pp
5
2
6
2
3
3
LC1 D65A3pp
5
2
6
2
3
3
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
TeSys contactors
For control in category AC-1, 25 to 200 A
5 5
5/66
5 5
4-pole contactors for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors
Non inductive loads
maximum current
(q y 60 C)
Number
of poles
Instan-
taneous
auxiliary
contacts
Basic reference,
Weight
(3)
Fixing (2)
A kg
20 4 1 1 LC1 DT20pp 0.365
2 2 1 1 LC1 D098pp 0.365
25 4 1 1 LC1 DT25pp 0.365
2 2 1 1 LC1 D128pp 0.365
32 4 1 1 LC1 DT32pp 0425
2 2 1 1 LC1 D188pp 0425
40 4 1 1 LC1 DT40pp 0425
2 2 1 1 LC1 D258pp 0425
Connection by EverLink
, BTR screw connectors

60 4 1 1 LC1 DT60App 1090
80 4 1 1 LC1 DT80App 1150
60 2 2 LC1 D40008pp 1440
or LP1 D40008pp 2210
80 2 2 LC1 D65008pp 1450
or LP1 D65008pp 2220
125 4 LC1 D80004pp 1760
or LP1 D80004pp 2685
2 2 LC1 D80008pp 1840
or LP1 D80008pp 2910
200 4 LC1 D115004pp 2860
4-pole contactors for connection by lugs or bars
Example: LC1 DT20pp becomes LC1 DT206pp.
ac supply
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500
LC1 D09D150 and LC1 DT20DT80A (coils D115 and D150 ftted with integral suppression device as standard)
LC1 D80D115
60 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 U6 Q6 R6
dc supply
Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440
LC1 D09D65A and LC1 DT20DT80A (coils with integral suppression device ftted as standard)
LC1 or LP1 D80
U..07512.Uc JW BW CW EW SW FW MW
LC1 D115 (coils with integral suppression device ftted as standard)
Low consumption
Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250
LC1 D09D38 and LC1 DT20DT40 (coils with integral suppression device ftted as standard)
(2) LC1 D09 to D38 and LC1 DT20 to DT80A: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fxing.
LC1 D80 a: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fxing.
LC1 or LP1 D80 c: clip-on mounting on 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fxing.
LC1 D09 to D38, 0.075 kg from LC1 DT60A and D80A and 1 kg for LC1 D80.
LC1 DT20pp
5
2
6
2
2
7
LC1 DT20pp
5
2
6
2
2
7
LC1 D65008pp
5
2
6
2
2
9
LC1 D65008pp
5
2
6
2
2
9
LC1 DT80App
5
2
6
2
2
8
LC1 DT80App
5
2
6
2
2
8
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
TeSys contactors
5 5 5 5
5/67
4-pole contactors
Non inductive loads
maximum current
(q y 60 C)
Number
of poles
Instan-
taneous
auxiliary
contacts
Basic reference,
to be completed by
Weight
(3)
Fixing (2)
A kg
20 4 1 1 LC1 DT203pp 0.380
2 2 1 1 LC1 D0983pp 0.380
25 4 1 1 LC1 DT253pp 0.380
2 2 1 1 LC1 D1283pp 0.380
32 4 1 1 LC1 DT323pp 0425
2 2 1 1 LC1 D1883pp 0425
40 4 1 1 LC1 DT403pp 0425
2 2 1 1 LC1 D2583pp 0425
Connection by by EverLink
, BTR screw connectors and control circuit by spring terminals

60 4 1 1 LC1 DT60A3pp 1090
80 4 1 1 LC1 DT80A3pp 1150
Separate components
ac supply
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500
LC1 D09D25 and LC1 DT20DT80A (coils with integral suppression device ftted as standard)
dc supply
Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440
LC1 D09D25 and LC1 DT20DT80A (coils with integral suppression device ftted as standard)
Low consumption
Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250
LC1 D09D25 and LC1 DT20DT40 (coils with integral suppression device ftted as standard)
For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages5/86 to 5/91.
(2) LC1 D09 to D38 and LC1 DT20 to DT80A: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1DP or screw fxing.
LC1 D09 to D38, 0.075 kg for LC1 DT60A and DT80A.

Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
TeSys contactors
5 5
5/68
5 5
Starters for the North American market
In recent years, the North American market has started to harmonise UL, CSA and
ANCE standards, as well as the industrial installation codes provided by national
regulations (NEC for the United States, CEC for Canada and MEC for Mexico). (1).
Major improvements, carried out by the Canena (2) are aimed at harmonising
product requirements based on IEC (3) standards
However, the North American codes use specifc terminology for defning the
functions of a starter.
These functions can be fulflled by standard IEC products, accompanied by
appropriate certifcations.
Combination Starters
Combination Starters are the most common type of packaged motor starter. They
are called "Combination" because of their structure and their combined functions.
The fgure opposite shows the four combined functions that constitute a complete
motor starter circuit, defned as a Motor branch circuit by the NEC (US National
Electric Code) in article 430. Standard UL508 currently gives different types of
combination starter that meet the requirements of a "Motor branch circuit".
Type E, called self-protected combination starter, covers all these functions and
can be controlled manually (thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker) or remotely
(starter-controller). Type E starters withstand faults within their declared nominal
rating without sustaining damage, after which they can be put back into service. In
addition, they can withstand more severe short-circuit and durability performance
tests without welding or excessive wear of the contact tips.
Type F, called Combination motor starter, consists of a type E manual starter
(thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker) combined with a contactor.
These starters are evaluated by means of basic short-circuit tests, but are not
considered as self-protected.
For this combination, the type E starter must be marked Combination Motor
Controller when used with ..., followed by the reference of the load side contactor.
(1) UL: Underwriters Laboratories, CSA: Canadian Standards Association, ACNE: Association
of Standardization and Certifcation, NEC: National Electric Code, CEC: Canadian Electrical
Code, MEC: Mexican Electrical Code.
(2) Canena: Council for Harmonization of Electrotechnical Standardization of North America.
(3) IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission.
Presentation
TeSys contactors
conforming to UL and CSA
M
1
2
3
4
1 Motor Disconnect (Disconnect switch)
2 Motor Branch Circuit Protection .
(Short-circuit protection)
3 Motor Controller (Contactor)
4 Motor Overload Protection (Thermal overload relay)
5 5 5 5
5/69
Control panels
To help users properly coordinate their motor control equipment with their distribution
system in the event of a fault, article 409 of the 2005 NEC requires panel builders to
list the short-circuit withstand rating of their motor control panels.
According to standard UL508A, manufacturers must use the short-circuit withstand
value of the lowest rated device as the nominal withstand rating of the panel, unless
the devices have been tested together for a higher coordinated rating.
The minimum short-circuit current rating (SCCR), on motor control components
for horsepower ratings of 50 hp or below is 5 000 A.
Using a type E.or.type F combination starter eliminates the coordination problems
of using individual components for the motor branch circuit protection, motor
controller and motor overload protection functions.
The panel builder uses the declared short-circuit current rating for the combination
starter. This value is generally higher than 5 000 A.
This makes it easier to list the short-circuit current ratings and to check the
compatibility of a UL508A motor control panel within a given distribution system.
TeSys contactors
5 5
5/70
5 5
Group protection
Article 430.53 of the NEC allows a single short-circuit protection device to be used
for more than one motor circuit if the components used are marked and listed for
such use.
Components suitable for use in group protection, known as motor group
installations, can be marked in one of the following two ways:
Case n 1
The contactor and the motor overload relay are both listed as suitable for group
installation.
An inverse time circuit-breaker can be used as the short-circuit protection device if it
is also listed as suitable for group installation.
The panel builder must therefore make sure that the short-circuit protection device
selected (fuses or inverse time circuit-breaker) does not exceed the value allowed by
article 430.40 for the smallest overload relay used in the circuit.
Once these conditions have been met, the panel builder can reduce the size of the
conductor connecting the short-circuit protection device to the individual motor
contactor/overload relay, to one third of the size of the upstream circuit conductor
supplying the protection device.
The panel builder must limit the length of the motor starter conductor (connecting the
short-circuit protection device to the motor contactor/overload relay) to a maximum
of 7.6 m (25 feet).
Case n 2
The motor contactor and overload relay are listed as suitable for tap conductor
protection in group installations.
This category allows the panel designer to reduce the size of the conductor
connecting the short-circuit protection device to the individual motor
contactor/overload relay, to one tenth of the size of the upstream circuit conductor
supplying the protection device.
The designer must limit the length of this conductor to a maximum of 3.05 m
(10 feet).
In both cases, the supply circuits must not be less than 125 % of the connected
motor FLA (Full Load Amps) rating.
For panel builders, using type F combination starters in group installations simplifes
group motor considerations.
Each starter is a fully coordinated motor branch circuit.
The.panel builder.follows the same NEC requirements for sizing the supply
conductors as those required for single motor branch circuits.
The size of the supply conductors can be reduced in accordance with the
specifcations of article 430.28.
This allows the same fexibility in conductor sizing as that offered in article 430.53
(D), without a requirement to check the short-circuit protection rating marked on the
components and the overload relay limit.
A UL508A panel does not need a short-circuit protection device when each motor
starter installed is a type F.
The upstream short-circuit protection device supplying the starter protects the panel.
The panel builder only has to consider the panel/enclosure disconnect requirements
specifed by the NEC or local codes.
TeSys contactors
5 5 5 5
5/71
LC1 D09pp
5
2
6
1
6
8
Contactors
Standard power ratings of motors 50/60 Hz Size Associated
cable
type
75 C-Cu
Continuous
current
Type of contactor required
Basic reference,
to be completed (1)
Single-phase
1
3-phase
3
115 V 230 V
240 V
200 V
208 V
230 V
240 V
460 V
480 V
575 V
600 V
Fixing, connection (2)
HP HP HP HP HP HP A
05.... 1 2 2 5 75 00 AWG10 20 LC1 D09pp
1 2 3 3 75 10 0 AWG10 25 LC1 D12pp
1 3 5 5 10 15 0 AWG8 32 LC1 D18pp
2.... 3 5 75 15 20 1 AWG6 40 LC1 D25pp
2 5 75 10 20 30 1 AWG6 50 LC1 D32pp

3.... 5 10 10 30 30 2 AWG3 60 LC1 D40App
3 75 15 15 40 40 2 AWG3 70 LC1 D50App
5 10 20 20 40 50 2 AWG3 80 LC1 D65App
75 15 20 25 60 60 2 AWG2 110 LC1 D80pp
75.... 15 20 25 60 60 2 AWG2 110 LC1 D95pp
30 40 75 100 3 AWG2/0 175 LC1 D115pp
40 50 100 125 4 AWG3/0 200 LC1 D150pp
Applications with High-Fault Short-Circuit ratings
For.contactors..LC1 D40A.to.LC1 D65A, the High-Fault Short-Circuit ratings are.50 kA at 480 V and 25 kA at 600 V.
If these contactors are used, stick the LAD UL1 warning sticker on the enclosure door
Description Language Sold in
lots of
Reference
Warning sticker English, Spanish, French 10 LAD UL1
Application example
For a 15 HP-230 V motor Select a contactor type LC1 D50A
Information: the contactor rating selected corresponds to
size 2, the associated cable is type AWG3 75 C-Cu.
ac supply
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500
LC1 D09D150 (D115 and D150 coils with integral suppression device ftted as standard)
LC1 D80D115
60 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 U6 Q6 R6
dc supply
Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440
LC1 D80 and D95
U...08511.Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD GD MD UD RD
U...07512.Uc JW BW CW EW SW FW MW
Low consumption
Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250
LC1 D80 and LC1 D95: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 6 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 6 rail AM1 DL or screw fxing.
LC1 D25pp
5
2
6
1
6
9
LC1 D25pp
5
2
6
1
6
9
LC1 D65App
5
2
6
1
7
0
LC1 D65App
5
2
6
1
7
0
LC1 D95pp
5
2
6
1
7
1
LC1 D95pp
5
2
6
1
7
1
Reference
TeSys contactors
conforming to UL and CSA standards, 20 to 200
5 5
5/72
5 5
3-pole reversing contactors for connection by screw clamp terminals
Pre-wired power connections
(q y 60 C)
Rated
opera-
tional
current
in AC-3
440 V
up to
Instan-
taneous
auxiliary
contacts
per
contactor
Contactors supplied with coil
Basic reference, to be completed by
adding the control voltage code (2)
Weight
(3)
Fixing (1)
220 V
230 V
380 V
400 V
415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V
690 V
1000 V
With mechanical interlock, without electrical interlocking, for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors
22 4 4 4 55 55 9 1 1 LC2 D09pp (4) 0687
3 55 55 55 75 75 12 1 1 LC2 D12pp (4) 0697
4 75 9 9 10 10 18 1 1 LC2 D18pp (4) 0707
55 11 11 11 15 15 25 1 1 LC2 D25pp (4) 0787
75 15 15 15 185 185 32 1 1 LC2 D32pp (4) 0797
9 185 185 185 185 185 38 1 1 LC2 D38pp (4) 0807
11 185 22 22 22 30 40 1 1 LC2 D40App (5) 1870
15 22 25 30 30 33 50 1 1 LC2 D50App (5) 1880
185 30 37 37 37 37 65 1 1 LC2 D65App (5) 1890
22 37 45 45 55 45 80 1 1 LC2 D80pp 3.200
25 45 45 45 55 45 95 1 1 LC2 D95pp 3.200
With mechanical interlock and electrical interlocking, for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors
30 55 59 59 75 80 65 115 1 1 LC2 D115pp 6.350
40 75 80 80 90 100 75 150 1 1 LC2 D150pp 6400
Connection by lugs or bars
For reversing contactors LC2 D09 to LC2 D38, LC2 D115 and LC2 D150, in the references selected above, insert
a fgure 6 before the voltage code. Example: LC2 D09pp becomes LC2 D096pp
To build a 40 to 65 A reversing contactor, for connection by lugs, order 2 contactors LC1 DppA6 and mechanical
interlock LAD 4CM (see page 5/76).
Component parts
LC2 D80 and D95: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fxing.
LC2 D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fxing.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages between 16 and 690 V, please consult your Regional Sales Offce):
ac supply
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500
LC2 D09D150 (D115 and D150 coils with integral suppression device ftted as standard))
LC2 D80D115
60 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 U6 Q6 R6
dcsupply
Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440
Low consumption
Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250
(3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.330 kg for
LC2 D09 to D38, 0.150 kg for LC1 D40A to D65A.
(4) For reversing contactors with electrical interlocking pre-wired at the factory, add suffx V to the references selected above.
Example: LC2 D09P7 becomes LC2 D09P7V.
Note: when assembling a reversing contactor, it is good practice to incorporate a 50 ms time delay.
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys D, 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control
Horizontally mounted, pre-assembled
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
pages 5/98 and 5/99
LC2 D12pp
5
2
6
1
7
2
LC2 D65App
5
2
6
1
7
3
LC2 D115pp
5
2
6
1
7
5
5 5 5 5
5/73
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys D, 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control
Horizontally mounted, pre-assembled
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
pages 5/98 and 5/99
3-pole reversing contactors, for connection by spring terminals
Mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking.
in category AC-3
(q y 60 C)
Rated
opera-
tional
current
in AC-3
440 V
up to
Instan-
taneous
auxiliary
contacts
per
contactor
Contactors supplied with coil
Basic reference,
to be completed by
Weight
(3)

Fixing (1)
220 V
230 V
380 V
400 V
415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V
690 V
kW kW kW kW kW kW A kg
22 4 4 4 55 55 9 1 1 LC2 D093pp 0687
3 55 55 55 75 75 12 1 1 LC2 D123pp 0697
4 75 9 9 10 10 18 1 1 LC2 D183pp 0707
55 11 11 11 15 15 25 1 1 LC2 D253pp 0787
75 15 15 15 185 185 32 (4) 1 1 LC2 D323pp 0797
Power connection by EverLink
, BTR screw connectors (5) and control by spring terminals

11 185 22 22 22 30 40 1 1 LC2 D40A3pp (6) 1870
15 22 25 30 30 33 50 1 1 LC2 D50A3pp (6) 1880
185 30 37 37 37 37 65 1 1 LC2 D65A3pp (6) 1890
For connection by Faston connectors
All power connections are to be made by the customer
terminals.
For reversing contactors LC2 D09 and LC2 D12 only, in the references selected above, replace the fgure 3.
before the voltage code with a fgure 9
Component parts
(1) LC2 D09 to D32: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fxing.
ac supply
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500
LC2 D09D65A
dc supply
Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440
Low consumption
Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250
(3) The weights indicated are for reversing contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add
0.330 kg for LC2 D09 to D38, 0.150 kg for LC1 D40A to D65A.
(4) Must be wired with 2 x 4 mm
2
cables in parallel on the upstream side. On the downstream side, outgoing terminal block
LAD 331 may be used (Quickft technology, see page 1/199).When wired with a single cable, the product is limited to 25 A (11
kW/400 V motors).
LC2 D123pp
5
2
6
1
7
4
5 5
5/74
5 5
Pre-assembled Pre-wired power connections
For connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors
LC2 DT20 to LC2 DT40: mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking.
LC2 D80004: order separately 2 auxiliary contact blocks LAD Np1 to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2
contactors (see page 5/79). For electrical interlocking incorporated in the mechanical interlock, please consult
your Regional Sales Offce.
LC2 D115004: mechanical interlock with integral, pre-wired electrical interlocking.
Utilisation category AC-1
Non-inductive loads
Maximum rated
operational current
(q y 60 C)
contacts per contactor
Contactors supplied with coil Weight
Basic reference, to be completed
by adding the voltage code (1)
Fixing (2)
A kg
20 1 1 LC2 DT20pp 0.730
25 1 1 LC2 DT25pp 0.730
32 1 1 LC2 DT32pp 0850
40 1 1 LC2 DT40pp 0850
125 LC2 D80004pp 3.200
200 LC2 D115004pp 7400
For connection by lugs or bars
20 1 1 LC2 DT206pp 0.730
25 1 1 LC2 DT256pp 0.730
32 1 1 LC2 DT326pp 0850
40 1 1 LC2 DT406pp 0850
For connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors
60 1 1 LC1 DT60App (3)
80 1 1 LC1 DT80App (3)
For connection by lugs or bars
60 1 1 LC1 DT60A6pp (3)
80 1 1 LC1 DT80A6pp (3)
Accessories
(1) See note (1) on next page.
(2) LC2 DT20 to LC2 DT80: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fxing.
LC2 D80: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fxing.
LC2 D115: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 5 rails AM1 DP or screw fxing.
(3) For these operational currents, order 2 identical contactors and a mechanical interlock LAD 4CM (see page 5/76).
Note: when assembling changeover contactor pairs, it is good practice to incorporate a 50 ms time delay.
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys D, 4-pole changeover contactor pairs
for control in category AC-1,
20.to.200.A
LC2 DT20pp
5
2
6
1
7
6
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
pages 5/98 and 5/99
5 5 5 5
5/75
Pre-assembled Pre-wired power connections
Non-inductive loads
Maximum rated
operational current
(q y 60 C)
contacts per contactor
Contactors supplied with coil Weight
Basic reference, to be completed
by adding the control voltage code (1)
Fixing (2)
A kg
20 1 1 LC2 DT203pp 0760
Power connection by EverLink
, BTR screw connectors (3) and control by spring terminals

60 1 1 LC1 DT60A3pp (4)
80 1 1 LC1 DT80A3pp (4)
Separate components
ac supply
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500
LC2 DT20DT40, LC1 DT60DT80
LC2 D80004D115004
60 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 U6 Q6 R6
dc supply
Volts 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440
LC2 DT20DT40, LC1 DT60DT80 (coils with integral suppression device ftted as standard)
Low consumption
Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250
LC2 DT20DT40 (coils with integral suppression device ftted as standard)
(2) Clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fxing.
(4) For these operational currents, order 2 identical contactors and a mechanical interlock LAD 4CM (see page 5/76).

References
TeSys contactors
TeSys D, 4-pole changeover contactor pairs
for control in category AC-1, 20 A
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
pages 5/98 and 5/99
5 5
5/76
5 5
For 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control
Contactors with screw clamp terminals or connectors. Horizontally mounted, assembled by customer
Description For contactors (1)
(2 identical contactors)
Reference Weight
kg
Kits for assembly of reversing contactors
Kit comprising:
a mechanical interlock LAD 9V2..
with electrical interlocking LAD 9V1
a set of power connections LAD 9V5 (parallel).
.and.LAD 9V6 (reversing)
b
b
LC1 D09 to D38 LAD 9R1V 0045
Kit comprising:
a mechanical interlock LAD 9V2..
without electrical interlocking
a set of power connections LAD 9V5 (parallel) .
and.LAD 9V6 (reversing)
b
b
LC1 D09 to D38 LAD 9R1 0045
Kit comprising:
a mechanical interlock LAD 4CM,
a set of power connections LA9 D65A69
b
b
LC1 D40A to D65A LAD 9R3 0170
Mechanical interlocks
Mechanical interlock with
integral electrical interlocking
LC1 D80 and D95 (a) LA9 D4002 0170
LC1 D80 and D95 (c) LA9 D8002 0170
LC1 D115 and D150 LA9 D11502 0290
Mechanical interlock without
integral electrical interlocking
LC1 D09 to D38 LAD 9V2 0040
LC1 D40A to D65A LAD 4CM 0040
LC1 D80 and D95 (a) LA9 D50978 0170
LC1 D80 and D95 (c) LA9 D80978 0170
Sets of power connections
Comprising:
a set of parallel bars,
a set of reverser bars.
b
b
LC1 D09 to D38 with screw
clamp terminals or connectors
LAD 9V5 + LAD 9V6
LC1 D09D32 with .
spring terminal connections
LAD 9V12 + LAD 9V13 (2)
LC1 D40A to D65A LA9 D65A69 0.130
LC1 D80 and D95 (a) LA9 D8069 0490
LC1 D80 and D95 (c) LA9 D8069 0490
LC1 D115 and D150 LA9 D11569 1450
For low-speed/high-speed starter
Description For contactors with
connection type
Reference Weight
kg
Connection kit enabling
reversing of low and high speed directions
using a reversing contactor and a .
2N/O + 2N/C main pole contactor
Screw clamps or connectors LAD 9PVGV 0016
Power connection module with
LAD 3PVGV 0.034
Outgoing terminal block with
LAD 3PVGV10 0.034
For star-delta starter
Description For contactors Reference Weight
kg
Mounting kit comprising:
1 time delay contact block LAD S2 (LC1 D09D80),
power circuit connections (LC1 D09D80),
hardware required for fxing the contactors .
onto the mounting plate (LC1 D80).
b
b
b
LC1 D09 and D12 LAD 91217 0180
LC1 D18 to D32 LAD 93217 0.310
LC1 D40A and D50A LAD 9SD3 0.380
LC1 D80 LA9 D8017 0680
Equipment mounting plates LC1 D09, D12 and D18 LA9 D12974 0150
LC1 D32 LA9 D32974 0180
LC1 D40A and D50A
LC1 D80 LA9 D80973 0.300
(1) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 5/65 and 5/72.
(2) To assemble a reversing contactor with spring terminal connections, the following components must be ordered:
- 1 mechanical interlock LAD 9V2,
- 1 upstream power connection kit and 1 downstream power connection kit..
Upstream power connection kit LAD 9V10: installed in the Quickft system with power connection module LAD 34.
(If module LAD 34 is not used, replace LAD 9V10 with LAD 9V12).
Downstream power connection kit LAD 9V11: installed in the Quickft system with outgoing terminal block LAD 331.
(If LAD 331 is not used, replace LAD 9V11 with LAD 9V13).

5
3
7
7
2
9
LAD 9R1
5
3
7
7
2
9
LAD 9R1
LAD 9R3
5
3
7
7
3
0
LAD 9R3
5
3
7
7
3
0
LA9 D8069
5
3
7
7
3
1
LA9 D8069
5
3
7
7
3
1
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
pages 5/98 and 5/99
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
pages 5/98 and 5/99
References
TeSys contactors
Component parts for assembling .
reversing contactors for motor control, .
low-speed/high-speed starters and star-delta starters
5 5 5 5
5/77
For 4-pole changeover contactor pairs (3-phase distribution + neutral)
Contactors with screw clamp terminals or connectors. Horizontally mounted, assembled by customer.
Reference Weight
kg
Kits for assembly of changeover contactor pairs
Kit comprising:
a mechanical interlock LAD 9V2.
with electrical interlocking LAD 9V1,
a set of power connections (changeover) LAD 9V7
b
b
LC1 DT20 to DT40 with
screw clamps or connectors
LAD T9R1V 0045
Kit comprising:
a mechanical interlock LAD 9V2.
without electrical interlocking,
a set of power connections (changeover) LAD 9V7
b
b
LAD T9R1 0045
With integral
electrical interlocking
LC1 D80004 LA9 D4002 0170
LP1 D80004 LA9 D8002 0170
LC1 D115004 LA9 D11502 0280
Without integral
....
LAD 9V2 (2) 0040
LC1 DT203 to DT403
LAD 9V2 (2) 0040
LC1 DT60A and DT80A LAD 4CM 0040
LC1 D80004 LA9 D50978 0155
LP1 D80004 LA9 D80978 0180
Comprising a set of parallel bars
.....
LC1 DT60A and DT80A LA9 D65A70 r 0150
LC1 D80004 LA9 D8070 0280
LP1 D80004 LA9 D8070 0280
LC1 D115004 LA9 D11570 1100
LC1 DT203 to DT403
LAD 9V9 0100.
LC1 D80004 LA9 D8070 (2)
LP1 D80004 LA9 D8070 (2)
For 3-pole changeover contactor pairs
Contactors with screw clamp terminals or connectors. Horizontally mounted, assembled by customer.
Reference Weight
kg
Without integral
LC1 D40AD65A LAD 9R3S 0105
With integral
LC1 D115 and D150 LA9 D11502 0280
Comprising a set of parallel bars, LC1 D115 and D150 LA9 D11571 0960
(1) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 5/65 and 5/72.
(2) Order 2 contact blocks LAD Np1 to build the electrical interlock, see page 5/79.
r Available 1
st
quarter 2010.
LA9 D50978
5
3
7
7
3
3
LA9 D50978
5
3
7
7
3
3
LA9 D8070
5
3
7
7
3
5
LA9 D8070
5
3
7
7
3
5
LA9 D6570
5
3
7
7
3
4
LA9 D6570
5
3
7
7
3
4
References
TeSys contactors
Component parts for assembling
changeover contactor pairs
5 5
5/78
5 5
See page opposite for mounting possibilities
according to the contactor type
or
5 5 5 5
5/79
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by screw clamp terminals
For use in normal operating environments
In order to mount an LAD 8N on an LC1 D80 to D95, a set of shims must be ordered separately, see page 5/85
Clip-on mounting
(1)
Number of
contacts per block
kg
Front 1 1 LAD N10 0020
1 LAD N01 0020
2 1 1 LAD N11 0.030
2 LAD N20 0.030
2 LAD N02 0.030
4 2 2 LAD N22 0050
1 3 LAD N13 0050
4 LAD N40 0050
4 LAD N04 0050
3 1 LAD N31 0050
4 incl. 1 N/O & 1 N/C make before break 2 2 LAD C22 0050
Side 2 1 1 LAD 8N11 0.030
2 LAD 8N20 0.030
2 LAD 8N02 0.030
For terminal referencing conforming to EN 50012
Front on 3P contactors and .
4P.contactors.20.to.80.A
2 1 1 LAD N11G 0.030
4 2 2 LAD N22G 0050
Front on.4P.contactors
125.to.200.A
2 1 1 LAD N11P 0.030
4 2 2 LAD N22P 0050
With dust and damp protected contacts, for use in particularly harsh industrial environments
Front 2 2 LA1 DX20 0040
1 1 LA1 DX11 0040
2 LA1 DX02 0040
2 2 LA1 DY20 (2) 0040
4 2 2 LA1 DZ40 0050
2 1 1 LA1 DZ31 0060
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by lugs
This type of connection is not possible for blocks with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp protected contacts.
For all other instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks, add the fgure 6 to the end of the references selected above.
Example: LAD N11 becomes LAD N116
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals
This type of connection is not possible for LAD 8, LAD N with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp protected
contacts. For all other contact blocks, add the fgure 3 to the end of the references selected above.
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by Faston connectors
This type of connection is not possible for LAD 8, LAD N with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp protected
contacts. For all other contact blocks, add the fgure 9 to the end of the references selected above. .
(1) Maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be ftted:
Contactors Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Time delay
Front
mounted
Type Number of poles and size Side mounted Front mounted
1 contact 2 contacts 4 contacts
a 3P LC1 D09D38 1 on LH side and 1 or.1 or.1
LC1 D40AD65A 1 on LH or 1 on RH side and 1 or.1 or.1
LC1 D80 and D95 (50/60 Hz) 1 on each side or 2 and.1 or.1 or.1
LC1 D80 and D95 (50 or 60 Hz) 1 on each side and 2 and.1 or.1 or.1
LC1 D115 and D150 1 on LH side and 1 or.1 or.1
4P LC1 DT20DT40 1 on LH side and 1 or.1 or.1
LC1 DT60A and DT80A 1 on LH or 1 on RH side and 1 or.1 or.1
LC1 D40008, D65008 and D80 1 on each side or 1 or.1 or.1 or.1
LC1 D115 1 on each side and 1 or.1 or.1 or.1
c 3P LC1 D09D38 1 or.1 or.1
LC1 D40AD65A 1 or.1 or.1
LC1 D80 and D95 1 or.1 or.1 or.1
LC1 D115 and D150 1 on LH side and 1 or.1 or.1
4P LC1 DT20DT40 1 or.1 or.1
LC1 DT60A and DT80A 1 or.1 or.1
LC1 D40008, D65008 and D80 2 and.1 or.1 or.1
LC1 D115 1 on each side and.1 or.1 or.1
BC (3) 3P LC1 D09D38 1
4P LC1 DT20DT40 1
(2) Device ftted with 4 earth screen continuity terminals.
(3) LC: low consumption.
References
TeSys contactors
5 5
5/80
5 5
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by screw clamp terminals
Maximum number of auxiliary contact blocks that can be ftted per contactor, see page 5/79.
Sealing cover to be ordered separately, see page 5/85.
LAD T0 and LAD R0: with extended scale from 0.1 to 0.6 s.
LAD S2: with switching time of 40 ms 15 ms between opening of the N/C contact and closing of the N/O contact.
Clip-on mounting Number
of contacts
Time delay Reference Weight
kg Type Setting range
Front 1 N/O + 1 N/C On-delay 0.13 s LAD T0 0060
0.130 s LAD T2 0060
10180.s LAD T4 0060
130 s LAD S2 0060
Off-delay 0.13 s LAD R0 0060
0.130 s LAD R2 0060
10180.s LAD R4 0060
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by lugs
Add the fgure 6 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD T0 becomes LAD T06
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals
Add the fgure 3 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD T0 becomes LAD T03.
.
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by Faston connectors
Add the fgure 9 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD T0 becomes LAD T09
Clip-on mounting Unlatching
control
For use on
contactor
Basic reference,
Weight
kg
Front Manual or
electric
LC1 D09D38 (a.or.c)
LC1 DT20DT40 (a.or.c)
LAD 6K10p 0070
LC1 D40AD65A
(3 P a.or.c)
LC1 DT60A and DT80A
(4 P a.or.c)
LAD 6K10p 0070
LC1 D80D150 (3 P a)
LC1 D80 and D115 (3 P c)
LC1 D80 (4 P a)
LC1 D80 and D115 (4 P a)
LP1 D80 and LC1 D115 (4 P c)
LA6 DK20p 0090
(1) The mechanical latch block must not be powered up at the same time as the contactor.
The duration of the control signal for the mechanical latch block and the contactor should be:
u 100 ms for a contactor operating on an a.c. supply,
u 250 ms for a contactor operating on a d.c. supply.
Maximum impulse duration for the LAD 6K10p mechanical latch block: 10 seconds.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Offce).
Volts 50/60 Hz, c 24 32/36 42/48 60/72 100 110/127 220/240 256/277 380/415
Code B C E EN K F M U Q
References
TeSys contactors
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks
Mechanical latch blocks
LAD Tp
LAD Tp3
LAD 6K10p
Characteristics:
pages 5/56 to 5/58
Dimensions:
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes:
pages 5/96 and 5/97
5 5 5 5
5/81
RC circuits (Resistor-Capacitor)
Effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to "high frequency" interference. For use only in cases where the
voltage is virtually sinusoidal. i.e. less than 5% total harmonic distortion. Voltage limited to 3 Uc max. and
oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time).
Mounting For use with contactor (1) Reference Weight
kg
Rating Type
V a V c
Clip-on side mounting (3) D09D38 (3P)
DT20DT40
2448. LAD 4RCE 0012
50127 LAD 4RCG 0012
110250. LAD 4RCU 0012
Clip-on front mounting (3) D40AD65A (3P)
DT60ADT80A (4P)
2448 LAD 4RC3E 0020
50127 LAD 4RC3G 0020
110240 LAD 4RC3U 0020
380415 LAD 4RC3N 0040
Screw fxing (4) D80D150 (3P)
D40D115 (4P)
2448 LA4 DA2E 0018
50127 LA4 DA2G 0018
110240 LA4 DA2U 0018
380415 LA4 DA2N 0018
Varistors (peak limiting)
Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks.
Clip-on side mounting (3) D09D38 (3P)
DT20DT40
2448. LAD 4VE 0012
50127 LAD 4VG 0012
110250 LAD 4VU 0012
Clip-on front mounting (3) D40AD65A (3P)
DT60ADT80A (4P)
2448. 2448 LAD 4V3E 0020
50127 50127 LAD 4V3G 0020
110250 110250 LAD 4V3U 0020
D80D115 (4P)
2448 LA4 DE2E 0018
50127 LA4 DE2G 0018
110250 LA4 DE2U 0018
D80D95 (3P)
D80 (4P)
2448 LA4 DE3E 0018
50127 LA4 DE3G 0018
110250 LA4 DE3U 0018
Flywheel diodes
No overvoltage or oscillating frequency. Increase in drop-out time (6 to 10 times the normal time).
Clip-on side mounting (5) D09D38 (3P), DT20DT40 24250 LAD 4DDL 0012
Clip-on front mounting (5) D40AD65A (3P), DT60ADT80A (4P) 24250 LAD 4D3U 0020
Screw fxing (4) D80 and D95 (3P), D40D80 (4P) 24250 LA4 DC3U 0018
Bidirectional peak limiting diodes
Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max.
Clip-on side mounting
(3) (5)
D09D38 (3P)
DT20DT40 (4P) (2)
24 LAD 4TB 0012
24 LAD 4TBDL 0012
72 LAD 4TS 0012
72 LAD 4TSDL 0012
125 LAD 4TGDL 0012
250 LAD 4TUDL 0012
600 LAD 4TXDL 0012
(3)
D40AD65A (3P)
DT60ADT80A (4P) (2)
1224 1224 LAD 4T3B 0020
2572 2572 LAD 4T3S 0020
73125 73125 LAD 4T3G 0020
126250 126250 LAD 4T3U 0020
251440 251440 LAD 4T3R 0020
D40D80 (4P)
1224 1224 LA4 DB2B 0018
2572 2572 LA4 DB2S 0018
24 LA4 DB3B 0018
72 LA4 DB3S 0018
(1) For satisfactory protection, a suppressor module must be ftted across the coil of each contactor.
(2) From D09 to D65A and from LC1 DT20 to DT80A, d.c. and low consumption 3-pole contactors are ftted with a built-in
bidirectional peak limiting diode suppressor as standard. This bidirectional peak limiting diode is removable and can therefore
be replaced by the user. (See reference above). If a d.c. or low consumption contactor is used without suppression, the
standard suppressor should be replaced with a blanking plug (reference LAD 9DL for LC1 D09 to D38 and LC1 DT20 to DT40;
reference LAD 9DL3 for LC1 D40A to D65A and LC1 DT60A to DT80A).
(3) Clipping-on makes the electrical connection. The overall size of the contactor remains unchanged.
(4) Mounting at the top of the contactor on coil terminals A1 and A2.
(5) In order to install these accessories, the existing suppression device must frst be removed.
References
TeSys contactors
Suppressor modules
LAD 4pp
LAD 4RC3p, LAD 4V3p,
LAD 4D3U, LAD 4T3p
LA4 Dpp
LAD 4DDL or LAD 4TpDL
5 5
5/82
5 5
See page opposite for mounting possibilities
according to the contactor type
5 5 5 5
5/83
Electronic serial timer modules (1)
3-pole contactors LC1 D09 to D38: .
mounted using adapter LAD 4BB, to be ordered separately, see below.
3-pole contactors LC1 D40A to D65A: .
mounted using adapter LAD 4BB3, to be ordered separately, see below.
3-pole contactors LC1 D80 to D150 and 4-pole contactors LC1 D40 to D115: .
mounted directly across terminals A1 and A2 of the contactor.
b
b
b
On-delay type
Operational voltage a Time delay Reference Weight
kg 24250 V 100250 V
LC1 D09D65A (3P) LC1 D80D150 (3P) 012.s LA4 DT0U 0040
1.530 s LA4 DT2U 0040
25500.s LA4 DT4U 0040
Interface modules
3-pole contactors LC1 D09 to D38: mounted using adapter LAD 4BB, to be ordered separately, see below.
3-pole contactors LC1 D40A to D65A: mounted using adapter LAD4 BB3, to be ordered separately, see below.
b
b
Relay interface
Operational voltage a Supply
voltage E1-E2 (c)
Reference Weight
kg 24250 V
LC1 D09D150 (3P) 24 V LA4 DFB 0050
Relay interface with "AUTO-I" manual override switch (output forced ON), solid state type
Operational voltage a Supply
voltage
E1-E2 (c)
Reference Weight
kg
24250 V 100250 V
LC1 D09D65A (3P) LC1 D80D115 (3P) 24 V LA4 DWB 0045
Low consumption kit
For use on contactors Composition Reference Weight
kg
LC1 D40AD65A (3P) (2) Kit comprising:
a retroft coil LAD 4BB3.
a relay interface module LA4 DFB.
b
b
LA4 DBL 0077
Retroft: coil for 3-pole contactor
For adapting existing wiring to a new product
For use on contactors Reference Weight
kg
LC1 D09D38 Without coil suppression LAD 4BB 0019
With coil suppression a 2448 V LAD 4BBVE 0014
a 50127 V LAD 4BBVG 0014
a 110250 V LAD 4BBVU 0014
LC1 D40A65A Without coil suppression LAD 4BB3 0027
(1) For 24 V operation, the contactor must be ftted with a 21 V coil (code Z). See pages 5/86 to 5/91.
(2) The kit is compatible with a coil voltage of a 24 V to a 250 V (B7 to U7) and c 24 V to c 250 V (BD to UD).
References
TeSys contactors
Accessories
Characteristics:
pages 5/59 to 5/61
Dimensions:
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes:
pages 5/96 and 5/97
5 5
5/84
5 5
Accessories for main pole and control connections
Description For use with contactors LC1 Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg a c
Connectors for cable, size
(1 connector)
4-pole 10 mm
2
DT20, DT25 DT20, DT25 1 LAD 92560 0.030
3-pole 25 mm
2
D09D38 D09D38 1 LA9 D3260 0040
EverLink

terminal block
3-pole D40AD65A D40AD65A 1 LAD 96560 0087
Connectors for cables
(2 connectors)
3-pole 120 mm
2
D115, D150 D115, D150 1 LA9 D115603 0560
4-pole 120 mm
2
D115 D115 1 LA9 D115604 0740
Connectors for
lug type terminals
(2 connectors)
3-pole D1156, D1506 D1156, D1506 1 LA9 D115503 0.300
4-pole D1156 D1156 1 LA9 D115504 0.360
Protective covers
for connectors for
lug type terminals
3-pole D40A6D65A6 D40A6D65A6 1 LAD 96570 0021
D1156, D1506 D1156, D1506 1 LA9 D115703 (1) 0250
4-pole D60A6D80A6 D60A6D80A6 1 LAD 96580 0027
D1156, D1506 D1156, D1506 1 LA9 D115704 0.300
IP 20 covers for lug type
terminals (for mounting with
circuit-breakers
GV3 Ppp6 and GV3 Lpp6)
3 poles D40A6D65A6 D40A6D65A6 1 LAD 96575 0010
Links for
parallel connection of
2 poles D09D38 D09D38 10 LA9 D2561 0060
DT20, DT25 (4P) DT20, DT25 (4P) 10 LA9 D1261 0012
DT32, DT40 (4P) DT32, DT40 (4P) 10 LAD 96061 0060
D40AD65A D40AD65A 1 LAD 9P32 0021
D80, D95 D80 2 LA9 D80961 0060
3 poles D09D38 D09D38 10 LAD 9P3 (2) 0005
D40AD65A D40AD65A 1 LAD 9P33 0021
D80, D95 D80, D95 1 LA9 D80962 0080
4 poles DT20, DT25 DT20, DT25 2 LA9 D1263 0024
D80, D95 D80 2 LA9 D80963 0100
Staggered coil connection D80 10 LA9 D09966 0006
Control circuit take-off
from main pole
D80, D95 D80, D95 10 LA9 D8067 0010
D115, D150 D115, D150 10 LA9 D11567 0014
Spreaders
for increasing the pole pitch to 45 mm
D115, D150 D115, D150 3 GV7 AC03 0180
(1) For 3-pole contactors: 1 set of 6 covers, for 4-pole contactors: 1 set of 8 covers.
(2) Separate connecting bar for connecting 2 poles in parallel.
TeSys contactors
Accessories
LA9 D3260
LA9 D11550p
LAD 96570
LA9 D11560p
LA9 D11570p
LA9 D80962
LA9 D11567
Dimensions:
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes:
pages 5/96 and 5/97
5 5 5 5
5/85
Sets of contacts and arc chambers
Description For contactor Reference Weight
kg
Sets of contacts 3-pole LC1 D115 LA5 D1158031 0260
LC1 D150 LA5 D150803 0260
4-pole LC1 D115004 LA5 D115804 0.330
Arc chambers 3-pole LC1 D115 LA5 D11550 0.395
LC1 D150 LA5 D15050 0.395
4-pole LC1 D115004 LA5 D115450 0470
Power connection accessories
Terminal block For supply to one or more GV2 G busbar sets GV1 G09 0040
Set of 63 A busbars
for parallelling of contactors
2 contactors LC1 D09D18 or D25D38 GV2 G245 0.036
4 contactors LC1 D09D18 or D25D38 GV2 G445 0077
Set of 115 A busbars
for parallelling of contactors
2 contactors LC1 D40AD65A GV3 G264 0150
3 contactors LC1 D40AD65A GV3 G364 (1) 0250
Set of S-shape busbars For circuit-breakers GV3 Ppp and GV3 Lpp
and contactors LC1 D40AD65A
GV3 S 0111
Protection accessories
Description Use Sold in
lots of
Reference Weight
kg
Miniature control
circuit fuse holder
5 x 20 with 4 A-250 V fuse 1 LA9 D941 0025
Sealing cover For LAD T, LAD R 1 LA9 D901 0005
Safety cover
preventing access to .
the moving contact carrier
LC1 D09D65A and DT20DT80A 1 LAD 9ET1 0026
LC1 D80 and D95 1 LAD 9ET3 0004
LC1 D115 and D150 1 LAD 9ET4 0004
.
Marking accessories
Description Use Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Sheet of 64 blank legends,
self-adhesive, 8 x 33 mm (2)
Contactors (except 4P).
LC1 D80D115 , .
LAD N (4 contacts), LA6 DK
10 LAD 21 0020
Sheet of 112 blank legends,
self-adhesive, 8 x 12 mm (2)
LAD N (2 contacts), .
LAD T, LAD R, LRD
10 LAD 22 0020
Sheet of 64 blank legends
for marking using plotter .
or 8 x 33 mm engraver
Contactors (except 4P).
LC1 D80D115, .
LAD (4 contacts), LA6 DK
10 LAD 23 0050
Sheet of 440 blank legends
for marking using plotter .
or 8 x 12 mm engraver
All products 35 LAD 24 0200
Marker holder
snap-in, 8 x 22 mm
4-pole contactors, .
LC1 D80...D115, LA6 DK
100 LA9 D92 0001
Marker holder
snap-in, 8 x 18 mm
LC1 D09...D65A, LC1 DT20...DT80A,
LAD N (4 contacts), LAD T, LAD R
100 LAD 90 0001
Bag of 300 blank legends
self-adhesive, 7 x 21 mm
On holder LA9 D92 1 LA9 D93 0001
SIS Label
labelling software
supplied on CD-Rom
Multi-language version:
English, French, German, Italian,
Spanish
1 XBY 2U 0100
Retroft plate
for screw fxing
For replacement of LC1 D40 to D65
with LC1 D40A to D65A
1 LAD 7X3 0150
Mounting plate For replacement of LC1 F115 or F150
with LC1 D115 or D150
1 LA9 D730 0.360
Set of shims For ftting side mounting blocks .
LAD 8N on LC1 D80 and D95
1 LA9 D511 0020
Size 4 Allen key, insulated,
1000 V
For use on contactors .
LC1 D40A to LC1 D150
5 LAD ALLEN4 0026
(1) With this set of busbars, any one contactor can be supplied directly by its EverLink
double cage power terminal block.

The other two contactors are supplied by the busbar set. The 115 A limitation is therefore applied to these two contactors.
Example: 1 LC1 D65A supplied directly + 1 contactor LC1 D65A and 1 contactor LC1 D50 A supplied via the busbar set =
115 A. This combination is compatible with busbar set GV3 G364.
(2) These legends are for sticking onto the safety cover of the contactors or add-on block, if ftted.
.
TeSys contactors
Accessories
GV2 G245
GV1 G09
LA9 D941
GV3 S
LAD 9ETp
LAD 7X3
5/86
5 5 5 5
References 5
For a contactors LC1 D09D38 and LC1 DT20DT40
Specifcations
Average consumption at 20 C:
inrush (cos j = 0.75) 70 VA,
sealed (cos j = 0.3) 50 Hz: 7 VA, 60 Hz: 7.5 VA
Operating range (q.y 60 C): 50 Hz: 0.81.1 Uc, 60 Hz: 0.851.1 Uc.
-
-
Control circuit voltage
Uc
Average resistance
at 20 C 10 %
Inductance of
closed circuit
Reference (1) Weight
V W H kg
50/60 Hz
12 1.33 005 LXD 1J7 .0070
21.(2) 417 017 LXD 1Z7 0070
24 5.37 022 LXD 1B7 0070
32 101 0.39 LXD 1C7 0070
36 128 049 LXD 1CC7 0070
42 17 067 LXD 1D7 0070
48 217 087 LXD 1E7 0070
60 34.6 14 LXD 1EE7 0070
100 1004 3.8 LXD 1K7 0070
110 1241 46 LXD 1F7 0070
115 1298 5 LXD 1FE7 0070
120 1506 54 LXD 1G7 0070
127 1585 61 LXD 1FC7 0070
200 4107 15 LXD 1L7 0070
208 430.4 16 LXD 1LE7 0070
220 5154 18 LXD 1M7 (3) 0070
230 538.6 20 LXD 1P7 0070
240 562.3 22 LXD 1U7 0070
277 8007 29 LXD 1W7 0070
380 1551 55 LXD 1Q7 (4) 0070
400 1633 60 LXD 1V7 0070
415 1694 65 LXD 1N7 0070
440 1993 73 LXD 1R7 0070
480 2398 87 LXD 1T7 0070
500 2499 95 LXD 1S7 0070
575 3294 125 LXD 1SC7 0070
600 3810 136 LXD 1X7 0070
660 4656 165 LXD 1YC7 0070
690 5020 180 LXD 1Y7 0070
(1) The last 2 digits in the reference represent the voltage code.
(2) Voltage for special coils ftted in contactors with serial timer modules, with 24 V supply.
(3) Suitable for use on 230 V / 50 Hz. In this case, apply a coeffcient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor
(see pages 5/52 and 5/53).
5
3
7
4
9
6
LXD 1pp
5
3
7
4
9
6
LXD 1pp
TeSys contactors 5
a.c. coils .
for TeSys D, 3 or 4-pole contactors
5 5
5/87
5 5
References 5
5
0
3
9
8
4
LXD 3pp
For a contactors LC1 D40AD65A, LC1 DT60A and LC1 DT80A
Specifcations
inrush (cos j = 0.75) 160 VA.
sealed (cos j = 0.3) 50 Hz: 15 VA, 60 Hz: 15 VA
Operating range (q.y 60 C): 50 Hz: 0.81.1 Uc, 60 Hz: 0.851.1 Uc.
-
-
Uc
Average resistance
at 20 C 10%
Inductance of
closed circuit
V W H kg
50/60 Hz
12. 049 0.03 LXD 3J5 (2) .0070
24 198 012 LXD 3B7 0070
32. 3.76 022 LXD 3C7 0070
42 618 0.37 LXD 3D7 0070
48 797 048 LXD 3E7 0070
100. 37.63 207 LXD 3K7 0070
110 4228 250 LXD 3F7 0070
115 4876 274 LXD 3FE7 0070
120 37.63 207 LXD 3G7 0070
127. 6029 3.34 LXD 3FC7 0070
200. 149 827 LXD 3L7 0070
208 105 622 LXD 3LE7 0070
220 182 10 LXD 3M7 (3) 0070
230 192 109 LXD 3P7 0070
240 202 119 LXD 3U7 0070
277. 193 11 LXD 3W7 0070
380 512 299 LXD 3Q7 (4) 0070
400 607 33.1 LXD 3V7 0070
415 635 35.6 LXD 3N7 0070
440 682 401 LXD 3R7 0070
480. 607 33.1 LXD 3T7 0070
500 878 517 LXD 3S7 0070
575 1238 684 LXD 3SC7 0070
600 1304 745 LXD 3X7 0070
660 1593 901 LXD 3YC7 0070
690 1683 985 LXD 3Y7 0070
(2) This coil can only be used on 50 Hz.
TeSys contactors 5
a.c. coils .
..
5/88
5 5 5 5
For 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1D40, D50, D65, D80, D95
Specifcations
inrush (cos j = 0.75) 50 Hz: 200 VA, 60 Hz: 220 VA,
sealed (cos j = 0.3) 50 Hz: 20 VA, 60 Hz: 22 VA
Operating range (q.y 55 C): 0.851.1 Uc.
-
-
Control
circuit
voltage
Uc
Average
resistance
at 20C
10 %
Inductance
of closed
circuit
Reference (1) Average
resistance
at 20C
10 %
Inductance
of closed
circuit
V W H W H kg
50 Hz 60 Hz
24 14 009 LX1 D6B5 105 006 LX1 D6B6 0280
32 26 016 LX1 D6C5 0280
42 44 027 LX1 D6D5 0280
48 55 0.35 LX1 D6E5 42 0.23 LX1 D6E6 0280
110 31 19. LX1 D6F5 22 12 LX1 D6F6 0280
115 31 19. LX1 D6FE5 0280
120 28 15 LX1 D6G6 0280
127 41 24 LX1 D6G5 0280
208 86 4.3 LX1 D6L6 0280
220 98 48 LX1 D6M6 0280
220/230 127 75 LX1 D6M5 0280
230 133 81 LX1 D6P5 0280
240 152 87 LX1 D6U5 120 57 LX1 D6U6 0280
256 166 10 LX1 D6W5 0280
277 157 8 LX1 D6W6 0280
380 300 14 LX1 D6Q6 0280
380/400 381 22 LX1 D6Q5 0280
400 411 25 LX1 D6V5 0280
415 463 26 LX1 D6N5 0280
440 513 30 LX1 D6R5 392 19 LX1 D6R6 0280
480 480 23 LX1 D6T6 0280
500 668 38 LX1 D6S5 0280
575 675 33 LX1 D6S6 0280
600 775 36 LX1 D6X6 0280
660 1220 67 LX1 D6Y5 0280
Specifcations
inrush (cos j = 0.75) 50/60 Hz: 245 VA at 50 Hz,
sealed (cos j = 0.3) 50/60 Hz: 26 VA at 50 Hz.
-
-
50/60 Hz
24
122 008 LX1 D6B7 0280

42 3.5 025 LX1 D6D7 0280
48 5 0.32 LX1 D6E7 0280
110 26 17 LX1 D6F7 0280
115 LX1 D6FE7 0280
120 32 2 LX1 D6G7 0280
220/230 (2) 102 67 LX1 D6M7 0280
230 115 77 LX1 D6P7 0280
230/240 (3) 131 8.3 LX1 D6U7 0280
380/400 (4) 310 20 LX1 D6Q7 0280
400 349 23 LX1 D6V7 0280
415 390 24 LX1 D6N7 0280
440 410 27 LX1 D6R7 0280
(2) For use on 230 V / 50 Hz, apply a coeffcient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor, see pages 5/52 and 5/53).
This coil can be used on 240 V at 60 Hz.
(3) This coil can be used on 220/240 V at 50 Hz and on 240 V only at 60 Hz.
(4) For use on 400 V / 50 Hz, apply a coeffcient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor, see pages 5/52 and 5/53).
5
3
7
4
9
7
LX1 D6pp
5
3
7
4
9
7
LX1 D6pp
TeSys contactors 5
a.c. coils .
..
5 5
5/89
5 5
For 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1 D115
Specifcations
inrush (cos j = 0.8) 50 or 60 Hz: 300 VA,
sealed (cos j = 0.3) 50 or 60 Hz: 22 VA
-
-
Control
circuit
voltage
Uc
Average
resistance
at 20C
10 %
Inductance
of closed
circuit
resistance
at 20C
10 %
Inductance
of closed
circuit
V W H W H kg
50 Hz 60 Hz
24 124 009 LX1 D8B5 087 007 LX1 D8B6 0260
32 214 017 LX1 D8C5 0260
42 3.91 028 LX1 D8D5 0260
48 451 0.36 LX1 D8E5 3.91 028 LX1 D8E6 0260
110 26.53 200 LX1 D8F5 1997 145 LX1 D8F6 0260
115 26.53 200 LX1 D8FE5 0260
120 2402 170 LX1 D8G6 0260
127 32.75 244 LX1 D8FC5 0260
208 6792 506 LX1 D8L6 0260
220 10477 765 LX1 D8M5 7961 569 LX1 D8M6 0260
230 10477 829 LX1 D8P5 0260
240 12525 889 LX1 D8U5 9704 675 LX1 D8U6 0260
277 12575 889 LX1 D8W6 0260
380 338.51 2226 LX1 D8Q5 243.07 1704 LX1 D8Q6 0260
400 368.43 2555 LX1 D8V5 0260
415 368.43 2765 LX1 D8N5 0260
440 44156 30.34 LX1 D8R5 338.51 2226 LX1 D8R6 0260
480 368.43 2555 LX1 D8T6 0260
500 56662 38.12 LX1 D8S5 0260
For 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1 D115, LC1 D150
Specifcations
inrush: cos j = 0.9 - 280 to 350 VA,
sealed: cos j = 0.9 - 2 to 18 VA.
Coils with integral suppression device ftted as standard, class B.
-
-
Control
circuit
voltage
Uc
Average
resistance
at 20C
10 %
Inductance
of closed
circuit
resistance
at 20C
10 %
Inductance
of closed
circuit
V W H W H kg
50/60 Hz
24 147 3.03 LX1 D8B7 0290
32 301 828 LX1 D8C7 0290
42 498 13.32 LX1 D8D7 0290
48 1061 2419 LX1 D8E7 0290
110 4377 10969 LX1 D8F7 0290
115 4377 10969 LX1 D8FE7 0290
120 4377 10969 LX1 D8G7 0290
127 6586 15265 LX1 D8FC7 0290
208 10.895 26015 LX1 D8LE7 0290
220 9895 21072 LX1 D8M7 0290
230 9895 21072 LX1 D8P7 0290
240 9895 21072 LX1 D8U7 0290
277 21.988 533.17 LX1 D8UE7 0290
380 21.011 48242 LX1 D8Q7 0290
400 21.011 48242 LX1 D8V7 0290
415 21.011 48242 LX1 D8N7 0290
440 21.501 50747 LX1 D8R7 0290
480 32 249 938.41 LX1 D8T7 0290
500 32 249 938.41 LX1 D8S7 0290
LX1 D8pp
5
3
7
5
0
2
LX1 D8pp
5
3
7
5
0
2
TeSys contactors 5
a.c. coils .
..
5/90
5 5 5 5
References 5
For 3-pole contactors LC1 D80 or 4-pole contactors LP1 D80
Specifcations
Average consumption: 22 W.
Operating range: 0.851.1 Uc.
Uc
Average resistance
at 20 C 10%
Inductance of
closed circuit
V W H kg
12 66 046 LX4 D7JD 0680
24 27 189 LX4 D7BD 0680
36 57 4 LX4 D7CD 0680
48 107 75 LX4 D7ED 0680
60 170 119 LX4 D7ND 0680
72 230 161 LX4 D7SD 0680
110 564 39.5 LX4 D7FD 0680
125 718 50.3 LX4 D7GD 0680
220 2215 155 LX4 D7MD 0680
250 2850 200 LX4 D7UD 0680
440 9195 640 LX4 D7RD 0680
LX4 D7pD
5
3
7
5
0
3
LX4 D7pD
5
3
7
5
0
3
TeSys contactors 5
d.c. coils .
....
5 5
5/91
5 5
References 5
TeSys contactors 5
d.c. coils .
...
For contactors LC1 D115, D150
Specifcations
Consumption: inrush 270 to 365 W, sealed 2.4 to 5.1 W.
Operating range: 0.751.2 Uc.
Coils with integral suppression device ftted as standard, class B.
Uc
Average resistance
at 20 C 10 %
Inductance of
closed circuit
V W H kg
24 147 3.03 LX4 D8BD 0.300
48 1061 2419 LX4 D8ED 0.300
60 1673 38.44 LX4 D8ND 0.300
72 2500 5627 LX4 D8SD 0.300
110 4377 10969 LX4 D8FD 0.300
125 6586 15265 LX4 D8GD 0.300
220 9895 21072 LX4 D8MD 0.300
250 18.022 345.40 LX4 D8UD 0.300
440 21.501 68466 LX4 D8RD 0.300
For 3-pole contactors LC1 D80 or 4-pole contactors LP1 D80
Specifcations
Wide range coils for specifc applications
Average consumption: 23 W.
Operating range: 0.75 to 1.2 Uc.
Coils with "TH" treatment as standard.
Uc
Average resistance
at 20 C 10 %
Inductance of
closed circuit
V W H kg
12 62 049 LX4 D7JW 0680
24 23.5 175 LX4 D7BW 0680
36 519 418 LX4 D7CW 0680
48 942 7 LX4 D7EW 0680
72 204 157 LX4 D7SW 0680
110 483 36 LX4 D7FW 0680
220 1922 144 LX4 D7MW 0680
5
3
7
5
0
4
LX4 D8pD
5
3
7
5
0
4
LX4 D8pD
5/92
5 5 5 5
LC1 D09D18 (3-pole) LC1 D25D38 (3-pole), LC1 DT20DT40 (4-pole)
LC1 D09D18 D093
D123
D099
D129
D25
D38
D183
D323
D098, D128,
DT20 and DT25
DT203 and
DT253
DT32 and.
DT40
D188, D258,
DT323 and DT403
b without add-on blocks 77 99 80 85 99 85 99 91 105
b1 with LAD 4BB 94 107 95,5 98 107 98
with LA4 Dp2 110.(1) 123 (1) 111,5 (1) 114.(1) 123 (1) 114
with LA4 DF, DT 119.(1) 132 (1) 120,5 (1) 123 (1) 132 (1) 129
with LA4 DW, DL 126.(1) 139 (1) 127,5 (1) 130 (1) 139 (1) 190
c without cover or add-on blocks 84 84 84 90 90 90 90 97 97
with cover, without add-on blocks 86 86 86 92 92 92 92 99 99
c1 with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) 117 117 117 123 123 123 123 131 131
c2 with LA6 DK10, LAD 6K10 129 129 129 135 135 135 135 143 143
c3 with LAD T, R, S 137 137 137 143 143 143 143 151 151
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover 141 141 141 147 147 147 147 155 155
(1) Including LAD 4BB.
LC1 D40AD65A (3-pole), LC1 DT60ADT80A (4-pole) LC1 D80 and D95 (3-pole), LC1 D80004.and.D80008
(4-pole), D40008.and.D65008 (4-pole)
LAD 4BB3
1
1
7
1
2
2
a
(LAD 8N) (LAD 8N)
12,5
c1
c2
c3
LA4 DpB
LA4 DpB
LAD 4BB3
b
1
12 c
12,5
Min. electrical clearance
LC1 D40AD65A DT60ADT80A D40008 D80 D95, D65008 D80004 D80008
a 55 70 85 85 85 96 96
b1 with LA4 Dp2 135 135 135 135 135
with LA4 DB3 or LAD 4BB3 136 135
with LA4 DF, DT 157 142 142 142 142 142
with LA4 DM, DW, DL 166 150 150 150 150 150
c without cover or add-on blocks 118 118 125 125 125 125 140
with cover, without add-on blocks 120 120 130 130
c1 with LAD N (1 contact) 139 150 150 150 150
with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) 150 150 147 158 158 158 158
c2 with LAD 6K10 or LA6 DK 163 163 159 170 170 170 170
c3 with LAD T, R, S 171 171 167 178 178 178 178
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover 175 175 171 182 182 182 182
LC1 D115 and D150 (3-pole), LC1 D115004 (4-pole)
LC1 D115, D150 D115004 D1150046
a 120 150 155
b1 with LA4 DA2 174 174 174
with LA4 DF, DT 185 185 185
with LA4 DM, DL 188 188 188
with LA4 DW 188 188 188
c without cover or add-on blocks 132 132 115
with cover, without add-on blocks 136
c1 with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) 150 150 150
c2 with LA6 DK20 155 155 155
c3 with LAD T, R, S 168 168 168
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover 172 172 172
(LAD 8) (LAD 8).(1)
b
c 10
c1
c2
c3
45 12,5 12,5
b
1
44
LA4
(LAD 8) (LAD 8).(1)
b
c 10
c1
c2
c3
45 12,5 12,5
b
1
44
LA4
(LAD 8)
b
45 12,5
(LAD 8) (1)
12,5
b
1
44
LA4
c 10
c1
c2
c3
Minimum electrical clearance
(LAD 8)
b
45 12,5
(LAD 8) (1)
12,5
b
1
44
LA4
c 10
c1
c2
c3
12,5
(LAD 8) (LAD 8)
1
2
7 b
1
a 12,5
44 32
LA4
c 12
c1
c2
c3
12,5
(LAD 8) (LAD 8)
1
2
7 b
1
a 12,5
44 32
LA4
c 12
c1
c2
c3
1
5
8
c a
c1
c2
c3
b
1
LAD 8
LA4
10
1
5
8
c a
c1
c2
c3
b
1
LAD 8
LA4
10
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors
Dimensions
5 5
5/93
5 5
LC1 D09D18 (3-pole) LC1 D25D38 (3-pole)
LC1 D09D18 D093D123 D099D129 D25D38 D183D323
b 77 99 80 85 99
c without cover or add-on blocks 93 93 93 99 99
with cover, without add-on blocks 95 95 95 101 101
c1 with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) 126 126 126 132 132
c2 with LA6 DK10 138 138 138 144 144
c3 with LAD T, R, S 146 146 146 152 152
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover 150 150 150 156 156
LC1 DT20DT40 (4-pole)
LC1 DT20 and DT25
D098 and D128
DT203 and DT253
D0983 and D1283
DT32 and DT40
D188D258
DT323 and DT403
D1883 and D2583
b 85 99 91 105
c with cover 99 99 107 107
c1 with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) 123 123 131 131
c2 with LA6 DK10 135 135 143 143
c3 with LAD T, R, S 143 143 151 151
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover 147 147 155 155
LC1 D40AD65A (3-pole), LC1 DT60ADT80A (4-pole) LC1 D80 and D95 (3-pole), LP1 D80004, LP1 D80008 (4-pole), .
LP1 D40008 and D65008 (4-pole)
LAD 4BB3
1
1
7
1
2
2
a
(LAD 8N) (LAD 8N)
12,5
c1
c2
c3
LA4 DpB
LA4 DpB
LAD 4BB3
b
1
12 c
12,5
LC1 D40A
D65A
LC1
DT60ADT80A
LP1 D40008
and D65008
LC1
D80 and D95
LP1 D80004 LP1 D80008
a 55 70 85 85 96 96
b1 with LAD 4BB3 136 136
with LA4 DF, DT 157 157
c without cover or add-on blocks 118 118 182 181 181 196
with cover, without add-on blocks 120 120 186
c1 with LAD N (1 contact) 196 204 204 204
with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) 150 150 202 210 210 210
c2 with LA6 DK10 163 163 213 221 221 221
c3 with LAD T, R, S 171 171 221 229 229 229
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover 175 175 225 233 233 233
LC1 D115ppp and.LC1 D150ppp with c coil: see page 24531/2
b
c 10
c1
c2
c3
45
b
c 10
c1
c2
c3
45
c
b
10
c1
c2
c3
45
c
b
10
c1
c2
c3
45
c
b
10
c1
c2
c3
45
c
b
10
c1
c2
c3
45
a c 12
c1
c2
c3
1
2
7
a c 12
c1
c2
c3
1
2
7
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors
Dimensions
5/94
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors
Mounting
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics:.
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References:.
pages 5/62 to 5/65
Schemes:.
pages 5/96 to 5/97
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics:.
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References:.
pages 5/62 to 5/65
Schemes:.
pages 5/96 to 5/97
LC1 D09D38, DT20DT40 LC1 D40AD65A, LC1 DT60A and DT80A, LC1 D80 and D95,
LC1 D40008 and D65008
On mounting rail AM1 DP200, DR200 or AM1 DE200 (width 35 mm) On mounting rail AM1 DL200 or DL201 (width 75 mm)
On mounting rail AM1 EDppp or AM1 DE200 (width 35 mm)
Control circuit: ac Control circuit: ac
LC1 D09
D18
D25
D38
DT20
and DT25
DT32
and DT40
LC1 D40AD65A
DT60ADT80A
D80
and D95
D40008
and D65008
b 77 85 85 100 b 122 127 127
c (AM1 DP200 or DR200) (1) 88 94 94 109 c (AM1 DL200) (1) 147 143
c (AM1 DE200) (1) 96 102 102 117 c (AM1 DL201) (1) 137 133
c (AM1 EDppp or DE200) (1) 128 137 133
Control circuit: dc Control circuit: dc
LC1 D09
D18
D25
D38
DT20
and DT25
DT32
and DT40
LC1 D40AD65A
DT60ADT80A
D80
and D95
D40008
and D65008
b 77 85 94 109 c (AM1 DL200) (1) 205 200
c (AM1 DP200 or DR200) (1) 97 103 103 118 c (AM1 DL201) (1) 195 190
c (AM1 DE200) (1) 105 110 111 1236 c (AM1 EDppp or DE200) (1) 128 128 190
(1) with safety cover. (1) with safety cover.
LC1 D80 and D95, LP1 D80
On 2 mounting rails DZ5 MB on 120 mm centres
Control circuit: ac
LC1 D80 and D95
c with cover 130
Control circuit: dc
LC1 D80 and D95
c with cover 186
LP1 D80
c 181
LC1 D115, D150
On 2 mounting rails DZ5 MB on 120 mm centres
1
0
0
=
=
1
5
8
c
Control circuit: ac or dc
LC1 D115 and D150 D1156 and D1506
c (AM1 DP200 or DR200) 134,5 117,5
c (AM1 DE200 or EDppp) 142,5 125,5
c
=
b

=
c
=
b
=
c
=
b

=
c
=
b
=
=
=
c
b
=
=
c
b
1
1
0
1
2
0
40 c 15
DZ5 ME5
1
1
0
1
2
0
40 c 15
DZ5 ME5
5 5
5/95
5 5
LC1 D09D38 and LC1 DT20DT40
On 2 mounting rails DZ5 MB
Control circuit: ac dc
LC1 D09D18 D25D38 D09D18 D25D38
c with cover 86 92 95 101
G 35 35 35 35
H 60 60 70 70
H1 70 70 70 70
4-pole contactors
LC1 DT20
and DT25
DT32
and DT40
DT20
and DT25
DT32
and DT40
c 92 100 101 109
G 35 35 35 35
H 60 60 70 70
H1 70 70 70 70
LC1 D09D38 and LC1 DT20DT40 LC1 D40AD65A, LC1 DT60ADT80A
On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA, PB, PC On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA, PB, PC and panel mounted
Control circuit: ac dc Control circuit: ac dc
LC1 D09D18 D25D38 D09D18 D25D38 LC1 D40A65A ,
DT60ADT80A
D40A65A ,
DT60ADT80A
c with cover 86 92 95 101
G 35 35 35 35 c with cover 120 120
H 60/70 60/70 70 70
LC1 DT20
and DT25
DT32
and DT40
DT20
and DT25
DT32
and DT40
c with cover 80 93 118 132
G 35 35 35 35
H 60 60 70 70
LC1 D09D38, LC1 DT20DT40 LC1 D80 and D95, LC1 D40008 and D65008, LP1 D80
Panel mounted On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA, PB, PC and panel mounted.
Control circuit: ac dc Control circuit: ac dc
LC1 D09D18 D25D38 D09D18 D25D38 LC1 D80 and D95, D80 and D95
c with cover 86 92 95 101 D40008 and D65008 D40008 and D65008
4-pole contactors c with cover 130 186
LC1 DT20
and DT25
DT32
and DT40
DT20
and DT25
DT32
and DT40
LP1 D80
c with cover 90 98 90 98 c without cover 181
LC1 D115, D150
Panel mounted
LC1 D115 D1156 D150 D1506
c 132 115 132 115
G (3-pole) 96/110 96/110 96/110 96/110
G (4-pole) 130/144 130/144
c 15
H
H
1
DZ5 ME8
G c 15
H
H
1
DZ5 ME8
G
H
AF1 EA4 G c
H
AF1 EA4 G c
5
0
2xM4
=
=
6
0
/
7
0
=
=
35 = = 35 = =
2x4,5 2xM4
c
5
0
2xM4
=
=
6
0
/
7
0
=
=
35 = = 35 = =
2x4,5 2xM4
c
1
3
0
=
=
1
5
8
c G = =
1
3
0
=
=
1
5
8
c G = =
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics:.
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References:.
pages 5/62 to 5/65
Schemes:.
pages 5/96 to 5/97
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics:.
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References:.
pages 5/62 to 5/65
Schemes:.
pages 5/96 to 5/97
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics:.
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References:.
pages 5/62 to 5/65
Schemes:.
pages 5/96 to 5/97
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics:.
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References:.
pages 5/62 to 5/65
Schemes:.
pages 5/96 to 5/97
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors
1
2
8
37,5 AF1.EA6 c 3x6,5
1
2
8
37,5
AF1.EA6 40
1
1
0
c 40 = =
1
0
0
/
1
1
0
=
=
3x6,5
5/96
5 5 5 5
Schemes
Contactors
3-pole contactors (References: pages 5/62 to 5/65)
LC1 D09 to D150
4-pole contactors (References: pages 5/66 and 5/67)
LC1 DT20 to DT80A LC1 D115004 LC1 D098 to D258 LC1 and LP1 D40008 to D80008
.
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References: page 5/79)
1 N/O LAD N10 (1) 1 N/C LAD N01 (1) 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11 2 N/O LAD N20
2 N/C LAD N02 2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N22 1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD N13 4 N/O LAD N40
4 N/C LAD N04 2 N/O + 2 N/C including 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break LAD C22 3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N31
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts conforming to standard EN 50012 (References: page 5/79)
1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11G 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11P 2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N22G 2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N22P
3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N31G 3 N/O + 1 N/C LADN31P 1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD N13G 1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD N13P
(1) Items in brackets refer to blocks mounted on right-hand side of contactor.
....
A
1
A
2
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
1
/
L
1
2
/
T
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
A
1
A
2
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
1
/
L
1
2
/
T
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
2
/
T
1
3
/
L
2
4
/
T
2
5
/
L
3
6
/
T
3
7
/
L
4
8
/
T
4
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
2
/
T
1
3
/
L
2
4
/
T
2
5
/
L
3
6
/
T
3
7
/
L
4
8
/
T
4
A
1
A
2
1
2
R
1
R
2
R
3
R
4
3
4
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
A
1
A
2
1
2
R
1
R
2
R
3
R
4
3
4
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
A
1
A
2
R
1
R
2
R
3
R
4
1
2
3
4
A
1
A
2
R
1
R
2
R
3
R
4
1
2
3
4
4
4
4
3
/
N
O
(
9
4
)
(
9
3
)
4
4
4
3
/
N
O
(
9
4
)
(
9
3
)
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
(
9
1
)
(
9
2
)
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
(
9
1
)
(
9
2
)
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
5
2
5
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
2
5
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
7
2
7
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
7
2
7
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
7
2
7
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
2
8
1
/
N
C
7
2
7
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
2
8
1
/
N
C
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
5
2
5
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
7
2
7
1
/
N
C
8
2
8
1
/
N
C
5
2
5
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
7
2
7
1
/
N
C
8
2
8
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
8
7
/
N
O
8
8
7
5
/
N
C
7
6
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
8
7
/
N
O
8
8
7
5
/
N
C
7
6
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
3
3
/
N
O
3
4
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
3
3
/
N
O
3
4
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
5
2
5
1
/
N
C
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
5
2
5
1
/
N
C
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Caractristiques :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/83
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Caractristiques :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/83
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Caractristiques :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/83
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Caractristiques :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/83
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Caractristiques :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/83
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Caractristiques :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/83
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Caractristiques :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/83
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Caractristiques :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/83
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys D contactors
.
5 5
5/97
5 5
Schemes (continued)
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Caractristiques :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/83
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Caractristiques :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/83
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Dust and damp protected instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References: page 5/79)
2 N/O (24-50 V)
LA1 DX20
2 N/C (24-50 V)
LA1 DX02
2 N/O (5-24 V)
LA1 DY20
2 N/O protected (24-50 V)
2 N/O standard LA1 DZ40
2 N/O protected (24-50 V)
+ 1 N/O + 1 N/C standard LA1 DZ31
Time delay auxiliary contacts (References: page 5/80)
On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD T Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD R On-delay 1 N/C + 1 N/O break before make LAD S
Mechanical latch blocks (References: page 5/80)
LAD 6K10 and LA6 DK20
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References: page 5/79)
1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD 8N11 (1) 2 N/O LAD 8N20 (1) 2 N/O LAD 8N02 (1)
Electronic serial timer modules
On-delay LA4 DTpU
Interface modules
Relay output Solid state
LA4 DFB LA4 DWB
References: page 5/83.
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
5
5
/
N
C
5
6
6
7
/
N
O
6
8
5
5
/
N
C
5
6
6
7
/
N
O
6
8
6
6
6
5
/
N
C
5
7
/
N
O
5
8
6
6
6
5
/
N
C
5
7
/
N
O
5
8
6
7
/
N
O
6
8
5
5
/
N
C
5
6
6
7
/
N
O
6
8
5
5
/
N
C
5
6
A
1
A
2
E
1
E
2
A
1
A
2
E
1
E
2
1
6
2
1
6
1
/
N
C
(
1
7
1
)
(
1
7
2
)
1
5
3
/
N
O
1
5
4
(
1
8
3
)
(
1
8
4
)
1
6
2
1
6
1
/
N
C
(
1
7
1
)
(
1
7
2
)
1
5
3
/
N
O
1
5
4
(
1
8
3
)
(
1
8
4
)
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys D contactors
1
5
3
/
N
O
1
5
4
(
1
8
4
)
(
1
8
3
)
1
6
3
/
N
O
1
6
4
(
1
7
4
)
(
1
7
3
)
2
6
2
2
6
1
/
N
C
(
2
7
1
)
(
2
7
2
)
2
5
1
/
N
C
2
5
2
(
2
8
1
)
(
2
8
2
)
5/98
5 5
5/98
5 5
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
TeSys D reversing contactors
LC2 D09 to D38 LC2 DT20 to DT40
2 x LC1 D09 to D38 2 x LC1 DT20 to DT40
2xM4
G
a
= =
6
0
/
7
0
=
= c
b
e
1
e
2
2xM4
G
a
= =
6
0
/
7
0
=
= c
b
e
2
LC2 or 2 x LC1 a b c (1) e1 e2 G LC2 or 2 x LC1 a b c G
D09 to D18 a 90 77 86 4 15 80 DT20 and DT25 90 85 90 80
D093 to D123 a 90 99 86 80 DT32 and DT40 90 91 98 80
D09 to D18 c 90 77 95 4 15 80 c, e: including cabling.
D093 to D123 c 90 99 95 80
D25 to D38 a 90 85 92 9 5 80
D183 to D383 a 90 99 92 80
D25 to D32 c 90 85 101 9 5 80
D183 to D383 c 90 99 101 80
e1.and e2: including cabling.
(1) With safety cover, without add-on block.
LC2 D40A to D65A
2 x LC1 D40A to D65A
1
2
2
1
2
8
120
119
64 18,7 18,7
26,5 37,5 37,5 6xM4
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics:
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References:
pages 5/62 to 5/77
Schemes:
pages 5/100 to 5/101
5 5
5/99
5 5
5/99
LC2 D80 and D95
2 x LC1 D80 and D95 a 2 x LC1 D80 and D95 c
c
b
e
1
e
2
G1 = =
6x6,5
40
a
= = G 40
1
0
0
/
1
1
0
8
1
3
c
b
e
1
e
2
G1 = =
6x6,5
40
a
= = G 40
1
0
0
/
1
1
0
8
1
3
LC2 or.2 x LC1 a b c e1 e2 G G1 2 x LC1 a b c e1 e2 G G1
D80 and D95 a 182 127 158 13 57 96 D80 and D95 207 127 215 13 20 96 111
D80004 a 207 127 158 20 71 111 c, e1.and.e2:.including cabling
c, e1.and.e2:.including cabling
LC2 D115 and D150
2 x LC1 D115 and D150
1
5
8
e
1
e
2
c
G
a
= =
1
3
0
=
=
LC2 or.2 x LC1 a c e1 e2 G
D115 and D150 266 148 56 18 242/256
D115004 334 148 60 310/324
c, e1.and.e2:.including cabling
TeSys contactors
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics:
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References:
pages 5/62 to 5/77
Schemes:
pages 5/100 to 5/101
5/100
5 5
5/100
5 5
Schemes
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors for motor control
LC2 D09D150 LAD 9R1V
Horizontally mounted With integral electrical interlocking
1
4
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
1
L
2
L
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
U V W
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
1
3
/
N
O
A
1
A
2
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
1
4
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
1
L
2
L
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
U V W
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
1
3
/
N
O
A
1
A
2
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
Changeover contactor pairs
LC2 DT20DT40 LAD T9R1V
Horizontally mounted With integral electrical interlocking
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
/
L
1
1
/
L
2
1
/
L
3
1
2
3
4
7
8
L
1
L
2
N
5
6
L
3
7
8
1
N
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
/
L
3
2
N
1
4
1
3
/
N
O
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
1
4
1
3
/
N
O
A
1
A
2
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
/
L
1
1
/
L
2
1
/
L
3
1
2
3
4
7
8
L
1
L
2
N
5
6
L
3
7
8
1
N
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
/
L
3
2
N
1
4
A
1
A
2
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
1
3
/
N
O
A
1
A
2
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics:
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References:
pages 5/62 to 5/77
Dimensions:
pages 5/98 to 5/99
5 5
5/101
5 5
5/101
Schemes (continued)
TeSys contactors
Electrical interlocking of reversing contactors ftted with:
Mechanical interlock with integral electrical contacts Mechanical interlock without integral electrical contacts
LA9 D4002, LA9 D8002 and LA9 D11502 LAD 9V2, LAD 4CM, LA9 D50978 and LA9 D80978
0
1
0
2
01
02
A
1
A
2
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
2
KM2 KM1
A
1
A
2
KM1
KM2
A
1
A
2
KM2
KM1
Low speed-High speed cabling kit, screw clamp terminals Low speed-High speed cabling kit, spring terminals
1
4
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
L
1
L
2
L
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
U V W
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
1
3
/
N
O
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
1
4
1
3
2
2
2
1
PV GV
R
1
R
2
R
3
R
4
LAD 9PV/GV
1
4
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
L
1
L
2
L
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
U V W
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
1
3
/
N
O
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
PV GV
R
1
R
2
R
3
R
4
LAD 3PV/GV
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
LAD 3PV/GV10
1
4
1
3
2
2
2
1
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/225
Characteristics:
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References:
pages 5/62 to 5/77
Dimensions:
pages 5/98 to 5/99
5/102
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
For switching 3-phase capacitor banks,
used for power factor correction,
Direct connection without choke inductors
........
Special contactors
Special contactors LC1 DpK are designed for switching 3-phase, single or multiple-step capacitor banks; they
conform to standards IEC 60070 and 60831, NFC 54-100, VDE 0560, UL and CSA.
Contactor applications
Specifcation
Contactors ftted with a block of early make poles and damping resistors, limiting the value of the current on
closing to 60 In max.
This current limitation increases the life of all the components of the installation, in particular that of the fuses
and capacitors.
The patented design of the add-on block (n 90 119-20) ensures safety and long life of the installation.
There is no need to use choke inductors for either single or multiple-step capacitor banks
Short-circuit protection must be provided by gI type fuses rated at 1.72 In.
Maximum operational power
The power values given in the selection table below are for the following operating conditions:
Prospective peak current at switch-on LC1 DpK 200.In
Maximum operating rate LC1 DFK, DGK, DLK, DMK, DPK 240 operating cycles/hour
LC1 DTK, DWK 100 operating cycles/hour
Electrical durability at nominal load All contactor ratings 400 V 300 000 operating cycles
690 V 200 000 operating cycles
Operational power at 50/60 Hz (1)
q y 55 C.(2)
Instantaneous
auxiliary
contacts
Tightening
torque on
cable end
Basic reference,
Weight
220 V 400 V 660 V
240 V 440 V 690 V
kVAR kVAR kVAR N/O N/C Nm kg
67 125 18 1 1 12 LC1 DFK11pp 0.430
2 12 LC1 DFK02pp 0.430
85 167 24 1 1 17 LC1 DGK11pp 0450
2 17 LC1 DGK02pp 0450
10 20 30 1 1 19 LC1 DLK11pp 0600
2 19 LC1 DLK02pp 0600
15 25 36 1 1 25 LC1 DMK11pp 0.630
2 25 LC1 DMK02pp 0.630
20 33.3 48 1 2 5 LC1 DPK12pp 1.300
25 40 58 1 2 5 LC1 DTK12pp 1.300
40 60 92 1 2 9 LC1 DWK12pp 1650
Switching of multiple-step capacitor banks (with equal or different power ratings)
The correct contactor for each step is selected from the above table, according to the power rating of the step to be switched.
Example: 50 kVAR 3-step capacitor bank. Temperature: 50 C and U = 400 V or 440 V.
One 25 kVAR step: contactor LC1 DMK, one 15 kVAR step: contactor LC1 DGK, and one 10 kVAR step: contactor LC1 DFK.
(1) Operational power of the contactor according to the scheme on the page opposite.
(2) The average temperature over a 24-hour period, in accordance with standards IEC 60070 and 60831 is 45 C.
Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
For other voltages between 24 and 440 V, please consult your Regional Sales Offce
5
1
1
5
5
5
LC1 DFK11pp
5
1
1
5
5
5
LC1 DFK11pp
5
1
1
5
5
6
LC1 DPK12pp
5
1
1
5
5
6
LC1 DPK12pp
page 5/103
page 5/103
page 5/103
page 5/103
References 5
5 5
5/103
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
For switching 3-phase capacitor banks, .
used for power factor correction
....
Dimensions
LC1 DFK, DGK LC1 DPK, DTK
LC1 c Type of fxing LC1 Type of fxing
DFK 117 LC1 D12 See pages 5/94 et 5/95 DPK LC1 D40 See pages 5/94 et 5/95
DGK 122 LC1 D18 See pages 5/94 et 5/95 DTK LC1 D50 See pages 5/94 et 5/95
LC1 DLK, DMK LC1 DWK
LC1 c Type of fxing LC1 Type of fxing
DLK 117 LC1 D25 See pages 5/94 et 5/95 DWK LC1 D80 See pages 5/94 et 5/95
DMK 122 LC1 D32 See pages 5/94 et 5/95
Schemes
LC1 DpK
R = Pre-wired resistor connections.
Cabling (maximum permissible c.s.a.)
Contactor type LC1 DFK DGK DLK DMK DPK, DTK DWK
Number of conductors 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Flexible cable with cable end (mm
2
) 25 15 4 25 4 4 6 4 16 6 50 25
Solid cable with cable end (mm
2
) 4 4 6 6 10 6 16 10 25 16 50 35
45 c
7
4
1
3
0
45 c
7
4
1
3
0
150
1
2
7
1
8
0
75 150
1
2
7
1
8
0
75
1
4
0
c
8
4
56
1
4
0
c
8
4
56
2
0
0
1
2
7
157 85
2
0
0
1
2
7
157 85
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
2
/
T
1
3
/
L
2
4
/
T
2
5
/
L
3
6
/
T
3
-.R
-.R
A
1
A
2
1
/
L
1
2
/
T
1
3
/
L
2
4
/
T
2
5
/
L
3
6
/
T
3
-.R
-.R
References :
page 5/102
References :
page 5/102
References :
page 5/102
References :
page 5/102
Dimensions,
schemes 5
5 5
5/104
5 5
Selection guide
TeSys contactors
From 115 to 2750 A
Applications Control of all types of motor for standard or severe duty applications
Control of resistive, inductive and capacitive circuits:
heating, lighting, cos j rectifcation, transformers, normal-standby
.. ..
Rated operational current le max. AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) 115.A 150.A 185.A 225.A 265.A 330 A
Ie max. AC-1 (q.y 40 C)
200.A 250.A 275.A 315 A 350 A 400.A
Rated operational voltage 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V
Number of poles 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4
in category AC-3
220/240 V 30 kW 40 kW 55 kW 63 kW 75 kW 100 kW
380/400 V 55 kW 75 kW 90 kW 110 kW 132 kW 160 kW
415 V 59 kW 80 kW 100 kW 110 kW 140 kW 180 kW
440 V 59 kW 80 kW 100 kW 110 kW 140 kW 200 kW
500 V 75 kW 90 kW 110 kW 129 kW 160 kW 200 kW
660/690 V 80 kW 100 kW 110 kW 129 kW 160 kW 220 kW
1000 V 65 kW 65 kW 100 kW 100 kW 147 kW 160 kW
Add-on auxiliary contact blocks Front mounting, identical to those used on LC1 D contactors (contacts: instantaneous .
LA1 DNpp, time delay LA2 DT or LA3 DR, dust and damp protected LA1 DX or DY or DZ)
Associated
and controllers
Manual-auto LR9 F
Electronic TeSys T
Interfaces Specifc LA4 FWB
Universal With or without, depending on the control circuit
Contactor type LC1 F115 LC1 F150 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330
Reversing contactor type LC2 F115 LC2 F150 LC2 F185 LC2 F225 LC2 F265 For customer
assembly
Pages Contactors Pages 5/114 and 5/115 Pages 5/114
and.5/115
Reversing contactors Pages 5/116 and 5/117 Pages 5/118
to.5/121
.. ..
400.A 500.A 630 A 780.A 800.A 750.A 1000.A 1500.A 1800.A
500.A 700.A 1000.A 1600.A 1000.A 1700.A 2100.A 800.A 1250.A 2000.A 2750.A
.
1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V
2, 3 or 4 2, 3 or 4 2, 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 3 3 1.to.4 1.to.4 1.to.4 1.to.4
110 kW 147 kW 200 KW 220 kW 250 kW 220 kW 280 kW 425 kW 500 kW
200 kW 250 kW 335 kW 400 kW 450 kW 400 kW 500 kW 750 kW 900 kW
Front mounting, identical to those used on LC1 D contactors (contacts: instantaneous LA1 DNpp, .
time delay LA2 DT or LA3 DR, dust and damp protected LA1 DX or DY or DZ).
4 instantaneous contact compositions: .
2 N/C + 2 N/O, 3 N/O + 1 N/C, 1 N/O + 3 N/C or 4 N/O
LR9 F LR9 F
TeSys T TeSys T
LA4 FWB
With or without, depending on the control circuit
LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F630 LC1 F780 LC1 F800 LC1 F1700 LC1 F2100 LC1 BL LC1 BM LC1 BP LC1 BR
Pages 5/114 and 5/115 Pages 5/184 and 5/185
Pages 5/118 to 5/121 Page 5/184
5 5 5 5
5/105
Applications Control of all types of motor for standard or severe duty applications
Control of resistive, inductive and capacitive circuits:
heating, lighting, cos j rectifcation, transformers, normal-standby
.. ..
Rated operational current le max. AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) 115.A 150.A 185.A 225.A 265.A 330 A
Ie max. AC-1 (q.y 40 C)
200.A 250.A 275.A 315 A 350 A 400.A
Rated operational voltage 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V
Number of poles 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4
in category AC-3
220/240 V 30 kW 40 kW 55 kW 63 kW 75 kW 100 kW
380/400 V 55 kW 75 kW 90 kW 110 kW 132 kW 160 kW
415 V 59 kW 80 kW 100 kW 110 kW 140 kW 180 kW
440 V 59 kW 80 kW 100 kW 110 kW 140 kW 200 kW
500 V 75 kW 90 kW 110 kW 129 kW 160 kW 200 kW
660/690 V 80 kW 100 kW 110 kW 129 kW 160 kW 220 kW
1000 V 65 kW 65 kW 100 kW 100 kW 147 kW 160 kW
Add-on auxiliary contact blocks Front mounting, identical to those used on LC1 D contactors (contacts: instantaneous .
LA1 DNpp, time delay LA2 DT or LA3 DR, dust and damp protected LA1 DX or DY or DZ)
Associated
and controllers
Manual-auto LR9 F
Electronic TeSys T
Interfaces Specifc LA4 FWB
Universal With or without, depending on the control circuit
Contactor type LC1 F115 LC1 F150 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330
Reversing contactor type LC2 F115 LC2 F150 LC2 F185 LC2 F225 LC2 F265 For customer
assembly
Pages Contactors Pages 5/114 and 5/115 Pages 5/114
and.5/115
Reversing contactors Pages 5/116 and 5/117 Pages 5/118
to.5/121
.. ..
400.A 500.A 630 A 780.A 800.A 750.A 1000.A 1500.A 1800.A
500.A 700.A 1000.A 1600.A 1000.A 1700.A 2100.A 800.A 1250.A 2000.A 2750.A
.
1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V 1000 V
2, 3 or 4 2, 3 or 4 2, 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 3 3 1.to.4 1.to.4 1.to.4 1.to.4
110 kW 147 kW 200 KW 220 kW 250 kW 220 kW 280 kW 425 kW 500 kW
Front mounting, identical to those used on LC1 D contactors (contacts: instantaneous LA1 DNpp, .
time delay LA2 DT or LA3 DR, dust and damp protected LA1 DX or DY or DZ).
4 instantaneous contact compositions: .
2 N/C + 2 N/O, 3 N/O + 1 N/C, 1 N/O + 3 N/C or 4 N/O
LR9 F LR9 F
TeSys T TeSys T
LA4 FWB
With or without, depending on the control circuit
LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F630 LC1 F780 LC1 F800 LC1 F1700 LC1 F2100 LC1 BL LC1 BM LC1 BP LC1 BR
Pages 5/114 and 5/115 Pages 5/184 and 5/185
Pages 5/118 to 5/121 Page 5/184
5/106
5 5 5 5
Characteristics
Environment
Contactor type LC1 F115 LC1 F150 LC1 F185
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 V 1000 1000 1000
Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C V 1500 1500 1500
voltage (Uimp)
Coil not connected to the
power circuit
kV 8 8 8
Conforming to standards EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-4-1, JEM 1038
Product certifcations CSA, UL, BV, GL, DNV, RINA, RMROS, LROS, CCC
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 2X front face with shrouds LA9 F
Conforming to VDE 0106 Front face protected against direct fnger contact with shrouds LA9 F
Protective treatment Standard version TH
around the device
Storage C - 60+ 80
Operation C - 5+ 55
Permissible at Uc (1) C - 40+ 70
Operating positions Without derating .
With derating
Apply the following derating coeffcients: 0.75 on the
pull-in voltage, 0.9 on the drop-out voltage and 0.8 on the
operational current in AC-1
Apply the following derating coeffcients: 1.15 on the pull-in
voltage, 1.1 on the drop-out voltage and 0.8 on the operational
current in AC-1
In either case: neither the making and breaking capacities nor the electrical and
mechanical durabilities can be assured.
Not to be used
Shock resistance (2)
Contactor open 9 gn 9 gn 7 gn
Contactor closed 15 gn 15 gn 15 gn
5300 Hz
Contactor open 2 gn 2 gn 2 gn
Contactor closed 6 gn 6 gn 5 gn
(1) In these conditions, it is recommended that LX9 F coils be used for contactor sizes F115
to F225.
(2) In the least favourable direction, without change of contact state (coil at Uc). Where higher
resistance to mechanical shock is required, select shock-proof contactors. Please consult
your Regional Sales Offce.
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/114 and 5/115
Dimensions :
pages 5/140 to 5/142
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/114 and 5/115
Dimensions :
pages 5/140 to 5/142
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/114 and 5/115
Dimensions :
pages 5/140 to 5/142
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/114 and 5/115
Dimensions :
pages 5/140 to 5/142
Schemes :
page 5/147
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors (115 to 2100 A)
Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.
(not to be used for LC1 F780, F1700 and F2100)
5 5
5/107
5 5
LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F630 LC1 F780 LC1 F800 LC1 F1700 LC1 F2100
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-4-1, JEM 1038
CSA, UL, BV, GL, DNV, RINA, RMROS, LROS, CCC UL, CSA, GL,
LROS
UL, CSA, CCC (pending)
IP 20 front face with shrouds LA9 F
Front face protected against direct fnger contact with shrouds LA9 F
TH
- 60+ 80 - 60+ 80 - 60+ 80
- 5+ 55 - 5+ 55 - 5+ 40
- 40+ 70 - 5+ 55 - 40+ 60
3000
.
Apply the following derating coeffcients: 0.75 on the pull-in voltage, 0.9 on the drop-out voltage
and 0.8 on the operational current in AC-1.
Apply the following derating coeffcients: 1.15 on the pull-in voltage, 1.1 on the drop-out voltage
and 0.8 on the operational current in AC-1.
In either case: neither the making and breaking capacities nor the electrical and mechanical
durabilities can be assured
Not to be used
7 gn 6 gn 6 gn 6 gn 9 gn 6 gn 5 gn 6 gn 6 gn 6 gn
15 gn 15 gn 15 gn 15 gn 15 gn 15 gn 15 gn 15 gn 15 gn 15 gn
2 gn 2 gn 2 gn 1.5 gn 2 gn 2 gn 2.5 gn 2 gn 2 gn 2 gn
5 gn 5 gn 5 gn 5 gn 4 gn 4 gn 5.5 gn 4 gn 4 gn 4 gn
(not to be used for LC1 F780, F1700 and F2100) (not to be used for LC1 F780, F1700 and F2100)
5/108
5 5 5 5
Number of poles 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4
Rated operational current .
(le)(Ue y 440 V)
In AC-3, q.y 55 C A 115 150 185
In AC-1, q.y 40 C A 200 250 275
Rated operational voltage ..
(Ue)
Up to V 1000 1000 1000
Frequency limits Of the operational current (1) Hz 16
2/3
200 16
2/3
200 16
2/3
200
q.y 40 C
A 200 250 275
IEC.60947-4-1
A Making current: 10 x I in AC-3 or 12 x I in AC-4
Rated breaking capacity I rms conforming to .
IEC.60947-4-1
A Making and breaking current: 8 x I in AC-3 or 10 x I in AC-4
Maximum permissible current
No current fowing for previous .
60 minutes, at q.y 40 C
For.10.s A 1100 1200 1500
For 30 s A 640 700 920
For 1 min A 520 600 740
For 3 min A 400 450 500
For 10 min A 320 350 400
by fuses
U.y 440 V
Motor circuit (type aM) A 125 160 200
With thermal overload relay
(type gG)
A 200 200 315
gG fuses A 200 250 315
Average impedance per pole At lth and 50 Hz mW 0.37 0.35 0.33
Power dissipation per pole
for the above .
operational currents
AC-3 W 5 8 12
AC-1 W 15 22 25
Connection Maximum c.s.a.
Bar Number of bars 2 2 2
Bar mm 20 x 3 25 x 3 25 x 3
Cable with lug mm
2
95 120 150
Cable with connector mm
2
95 120 150
Bolt diameter mm 6 8 8
Tightening torque Power circuit connections Nm 10 18 18
(1) Sine wave without interference. Above these values, please consult your Regional Sales
Offce.
(2) With set of right-angled connectors LA9 F2100 (see page 5/125).
(3) Paralleling of poles must be carried out only in accordance with the fuse manufacturer's
recommendations.
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/114 and 5/115
Dimensions :
pages 5/140 to 5/142
Schemes :
page 5/146
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/114 and 5/115
Dimensions :
pages 5/140 to 5/142
Schemes :
page 5/146
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/114 and 5/115
Dimensions :
pages 5/140 to 5/142
Schemes :
page 5/146
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/114 and 5/115
Dimensions :
pages 5/140 to 5/142
Schemes :
page 5/146
TeSys contactors
5 5
5/109
5 5
3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 2, 3 or 4 2, 3 or 4 2, 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 3 3
225 265 330 400 500 630 780 800
315 350 400 500 700 1000 1250 1600 1000 1700 2100.(2)
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
16
2/3
200 16
2/3
200 16
2/3
200 16
2/3
200 16
2/3
200 16
2/3
200 16
2/3
200 16
2/3
200 16
2/3
200 16
2/3
200
315 350 400 500 700 1000 1250 1600 1000 1700 2100.(2)
Making current: 10 x I in AC-3 or 12 x I in AC-4 Making current:
1.5 x I in AC-1
Making and breaking current: 8 x I in AC-3 or 10 x I in AC-4 Making and breaking current:
1.5 x I in AC-1
1800 2200 2650 3600 4200 5050 6250 5500
1000 1230 1800 2400 3200 4400 5600 4600
850 950 1300 1700 2400 3400 4600 3600
560 620 900 1200 1500 2200 3000 2600
440 480 750 1000 1200 1600 2200 1700
250 315 400 400 500 630 800 800
315. 500 500 630 800 800 1000 1000
315 400 500 500 800 1000 2 x 800 (3) 1000 2 x 800 (3) 2 x 1000 (3)
0.32 0.3 028 026 018 012 010 012 010 010
16 21 31 42 45 48 60 77
32 37 44 65 88 120 250 120 200 200
2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 4
32 x 4 32 x 4 30 x 5 30 x 5 40 x 5 60 x 5 60 x 5 100 x 5 60 x 5 100 x 5 100 x 5
185 240 240 2 x 150 2 x 240
185 240
10 .10 .10 .10 10 .12 2 x .12 .12 .12 ( 10 with set of right-
angled connectors LA9 F2100)
35 35 35 35 35 58 58 58
58.(35 with set of right-angled
connectors LA9 F2100)
5/110
5 5 5 5
Characteristics
Control circuit characteristics with LX1 or LX9 coil
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) 50 or 60 Hz V 241000
Control voltage limits (q.y 55 C)
50 or 60 Hz coils Operation 08511.Uc
Drop-out 0.350.55 Uc
40400 Hz coils Operation
Drop-out
Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc
a 50 Hz Inrush 50 Hz coil VA 550 550 805
40400 Hz coil VA
Cos j 0.3 0.3 0.3
Sealed 50 Hz coil VA 45 45 55
40400 Hz coil VA
Cos.j 0.3 0.3 0.3
a 60 Hz Inrush 60 Hz coil VA 660 660 970
40400 Hz coil VA
Cos.j 0.3 0.3 0.3
Sealed 60 Hz coil VA 55 55 66
40400 Hz coil VA
Cos.j 0.3 0.3 0.3
Heat dissipation W 1216 1216 1824
Operating time .(1) Closing "C" ms 2335 2335 2035
Opening "O" ms 515 515 715
Mechanical durability at.Uc In millions of operating cycles 10 10 10
at ambient temperature .
y 55 C
In operating cycles per hour 2400 2400 2400
Connection Min/max c.s.a.
Flexible cable
without cable end
1 or 2 conductors mm
2
1/4 1/4 1/4
Flexible cable .
with cable end
1 conductor mm
2
1/4 1/4 1/4
2 conductors mm
2
1/25 1/25 1/25
Solid cable .
without cable end
2
1/4 1/4 1/4
Tightening torque Nm 12 12 12
Mechanical latching Mechanical latch blocks LA6 DK must not be ftted on LC1 F contactors. .
For similar type of operation, use magnetic latching contactors CR1 F. .
See pages 5/240 to 5/267.
(1) The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial
contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply
is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
(2) Control circuit characteristics with LX1 coil.
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/114 and 5/115
Dimensions :
pages 5/140 to 5/142
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/114 and 5/115
Dimensions :
pages 5/140 to 5/142
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/114 and 5/115
Dimensions :
pages 5/140 to 5/142
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/114 and 5/115
Dimensions :
pages 5/140 to 5/142
Schemes :
page 5/147
TeSys contactors
5 5
5/111
5 5
241000 481000 481000 110500 110400 110500.(2) 110500.(2)
08511.Uc
0.350.55 Uc
08511.Uc 08511.Uc 08511.Uc 08511.Uc 08511.Uc 08511.Uc 08511.Uc
0.350.55 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 02505.Uc 0204.Uc 0.30.5 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 0.30.5 Uc
805
650 650 1075 1100 1650 2100 1700 2200 2200
0.3 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09
55
10 10 15 18 22 50 12 36 36
0.3 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09
970
650 650 1075 1100 1650 2100 1700 2200 2200
0.3 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09
66
10 10 15 18 22 50 12 36 36
0.3 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09
1824 8 8 14 18 20 2 x 22 25 2 x 18 2 x 18
2035 4065 4065 4075 4075 4080 4080 6080 4075 4075
715 100170 100170 100170 100170 100200 130230 150180 100170 100170
10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5
2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 1200 600 600 600 600
Min/max c.s.a.
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
1/25 1/25 1/25 1/25 1/25 1/25 1/25 1/25 1/25 1/25
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Mechanical latch blocks LA6 DK must not be ftted on LC1 F contactors..
For similar type of operation, use magnetic latching contactors CR1 F..

.
5/112
5 5 5 5
Characteristics
Control circuit characteristics with LX4 coil
(Uc)
c
V 24460 24460 24460
Control voltage limits..
(q.y 55 C)
Operation 08511.Uc 08511.Uc 08511.Uc
Drop-out 01502.Uc 01502.Uc 01502.Uc
Average consumption ..
at 20 C and at Uc
c
Inrush W 560 560 800
Sealed W 45 45 5
Average operating time
at Uc (1)
Closing "C" ms 3040 3040 3040
Opening "O" ms 3050 3050 3050
Note: The arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For all normal 3-phase
applications, the arcing time is less than 10 ms. The load is isolated from the supply after a time
equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time.
Mechanical durability at Uc In millions of operating cycles 10 10 10
Maximum operating rate at.
ambient temperature y 55 C
In operating cycles per hour 2400 2400 2400
Cabling Min/max c.s.a.
Flexible cable
without cable
end
1 conductor mm
2
1/4 1/4 1/4
2 conductors mm
2
1/4 1/4 1/4
Flexible cable
with cable end
1 conductor mm
2
1/4 1/4 1/4
2 conductors mm
2
1/25 1/25 1/25
Solid cable
without cable
end
1 conductor mm
2
1/4 1/4 1/4
2 conductors mm
2
1/4 1/4 1/4
Mechanical latching Mechanical latch blocks LA6 DK must not be ftted on LC1 F contactors..
(1) The operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. The
closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact
of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is
switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/114 and 5/115
Dimensions :
pages 5/140 to 5/142
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/114 and 5/115
Dimensions :
pages 5/140 to 5/142
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/114 and 5/115
Dimensions :
pages 5/140 to 5/142
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/114 and 5/115
Dimensions :
pages 5/140 to 5/142
Schemes :
page 5/147
TeSys contactors
Control circuit: d.c.
5 5
5/113
5 5
24460 24460 24460 48440 48440 48440 110440 110400 110440 110440
08511.Uc 08511.Uc 08511.Uc 08511.Uc 08511.Uc 08511.Uc 08511.Uc 08511.Uc 08511.Uc 08511.Uc
01502.Uc 01502.Uc 01502.Uc 0.20.35 Uc 0.20.35 Uc 0.20.35 Uc 0204.Uc 0.30.5 Uc 0.20.35 Uc 0.20.35 Uc
800 750 750 1000 1100 1600 2 x 1000 1900 2100 2100
5 5 5 6 6 9 2 x 21 12 10 10
3040 4050 4050 5060 5060 6070 7080 6080 5060 5060
3050 4065 4065 4560 4560 4050 100130 4050 4560 4560
Note: The arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For all normal 3-phase applications. the arcing time is less than 10 ms. The load is isolated
from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time.
10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5
2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 1200 600 600 600 600
Min/max c.s.a.
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
1/25 1/25 1/25 1/25 1/25 1/25 1/25 1/25 1/25 1/25
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Mechanical latch blocks LA6 DK must not be ftted on LC1 F contactors..
5/114
5 5 5 5
References
3-pole contactors
of 3-phase motors
Rated
opera-
tional
current
in AC-3
Basic reference,
to be completed by
(2)
Weight
Screw fxing,
cabling
(1)
220 V
230 V
380 V
400 V

415 V

440 V

500 V
660 V
690 V

1000 V
440 V
up to
30 55 59 59 75 80 65 115 LC1 F115pp 3.430
40 75 80 80 90 100 65 150 LC1 F150pp 3.430
55 90 100 100 110 110 100 185 LC1 F185pp 4650
63 110 110 110 129 129 100 225 LC1 F225pp 4750
75 132 140 140 160 160 147 265 LC1 F265pp 7440
100 160 180 200 200 220 160 330 LC1 F330pp 8600
110 200 220 250 257 280 185 400 LC1 F400pp 9100
147 250 280 295 355 335 335 500 LC1 F500pp 11.350
200 335 375 400 400 450 450 630 LC1 F630pp 18600
220 400 425 425 450 475 450 780 LC1 F780pp 39.500
250 450 450 450 450 475 450 800 LC1 F800pp 18750
Note: auxiliary contact blocks, modules and accessories: see pages 5/122 to 5/127.
(1) Power terminals can be protected against direct fnger contact by the addition of shrouds, to be
ordered separately, except on contactors LC1 F780 (see page 5/126).
(2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales
Offce) .
Volts a 24 48 110 115 120 208 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
LC1 F115F225
50 Hz (coil LX1) B5 E5 F5 FE5 M5 P5 U5 Q5 V5 N5
60 Hz (coil LX1) E6 F6 G6 L6 M6 U6 Q6 R6
40400 Hz (coil LX9) E7 F7 FE7 G7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
LC1 F265F330
40400 Hz (coil LX1) B7 E7 F7 FE7 G7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
LC1 F400F630
40400 Hz (coil LX1) E7 F7 FE7 G7 (3) L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
LC1 F780
40400 Hz (coil LX1) F7 FE7 F7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
LC1 F800
40400 Hz (coil LX4) (4) FW FW FW MW MW MW QW QW QW
Volts c 24 48 110 125 220 230 250 400 440
LC1 F115F330
(coil LX4 F) BD ED FD GD MD MD UD RD
LC1 F400F630
(coil LX4 F) ED FD GD MD UD RD
LC1 F780
(coil LX4 F) FD GD MD UD RD
LC1 F800
(coil LX4 F) FW FW MW MW QW
(3) F7 for LC1 F630.
(4) Coil LX4 F8pp + rectifer DR5TEpp.
8
1
3
0
8
0
LC1 F225
8
1
3
0
8
0
LC1 F225
LC1 F630
8
1
3
0
7
9
LC1 F630
8
1
3
0
7
9
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors for motor control in
utilisation category AC-3 (115 to 800 A)
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :.
pages 5/106 to 5/113
Dimensions :.
pages 5/140 to 5/142
Schemes :.
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :.
pages 5/106 to 5/113
Dimensions :.
pages 5/140 to 5/142
Schemes :.
page 5/147
5 5
5/115
5 5
LC1 F1700
5
6
8
6
7
4
LC1 F2100
5
6
8
6
7
5
2, 3 or 4-pole contactors
Maximum
current
in AC-1
(q.y 40 C)
Number of poles Basic reference,
to be completed by
Weight
Screw fxing,
cabling (1)
A kg
200 3 LC1 F115pp 3.430
4 LC1 F1154pp 3.830
250 3 LC1 F150pp 3.430
4 LC1 F1504pp 3.830
275 3 LC1 F185pp 4650
4 LC1 F1854pp 5450
315 3 LC1 F225pp 4750
4 LC1 F2254pp 5550
350 3 LC1 F265pp 7440
4 LC1 F2654pp 8540
400 3 LC1 F330pp 8600
4 LC1 F3304pp 9500
500 2 LC1 F4002pp 8000
3 LC1 F400pp 9100
4 LC1 F4004pp 10200
700 2 LC1 F5002pp 9750
3 LC1 F500pp 11.350
4 LC1 F5004pp 12950
1000 2 LC1 F6302pp 15500
3 LC1 F630pp 18600
4 LC1 F6304pp 21500
1250 2 LC1 F6302ppS011 15500
3 LC1 F630ppS011 18600
4 LC1 F6304ppS011 21500
1600 3 LC1 F780pp 39.500
4 LC1 F7804pp 48000
1700 3 LC1 F1700 30.000
2100 (3) 3 LC1 F2100 31.000
Note: auxiliary contact blocks, modules and accessories: see pages 5/122 to 5/127.
(1) Power terminals can be protected against direct fnger contact by the addition of shrouds, to
be ordered separately (except LC1 F780, LC1 F1700 and LC1 F2100), see page 5/126.
(2) Standard control circuit voltages, see previous page.
(3) With set of right-angled connectors LA9 F2100 (see page 5/125).
....
LC1 F1854
8
1
3
0
8
2
LC1 F1854
8
1
3
0
8
2
LC1 F4004
8
1
3
0
8
4
LC1 F4004
8
1
3
0
8
4
LC1 F6304
8
1
3
0
8
3
LC1 F6304
8
1
3
0
8
3
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors for control in category AC-1,
(200 to 2100 A )
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113
Dimensions :
pages 5/140 to 5/142
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113
Dimensions :
pages 5/140 to 5/142
Schemes :
page 5/147
5/116
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys F reversing contactors for motor control .
in utilisation category AC-3 (115 to 265 A), .
pre-assembled
3-pole reversing contactors (horizontally mounted) (1)
of 3-phase motors
Opera-
tional
current
in AC-3
Maximum
opera-
tional
voltage
Contactors
supplied
without coil (2)
Complete
reference
Weight
220 V
230 V
380 V
400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V
660 V
690 V 1000 V
440 V .
up to
Fixing, cabling
(3)
kW kW kW kW kW kW kW A V kg
30 55 59 59 75 80 65 115 1000 LC2 F115 7560.
.
40 75 80 80 90 100 65 150 1000 LC2 F150 7560.
.
55 90 100 100 110 110 100 185 1000 LC2 F185 10100.
.
63 110 110 110 129 129 100 225 1000 LC2 F225 14200
75 132 140 140 160 160 147 265 1000 LC2 F265 16480.
.
Description For reversing
contactors
Quantity
required
Reference Weight
kg
Power terminal
protection shrouds
LC2 F115 2 LA9 F701 0250.
.
LC2 F150, F185 2 LA9 F702 0250.
.
LC2 F225, F265 2 LA9 F703 0250.
Auxiliary contact
blocks and
add-on modules
.
.
.
See pages 5/122 .
to.5/1227
(1) Fitted with a mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking. Order separately 2 auxiliary
contact blocks LAD Np1 to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors, see page
5/123. For accessories, see pages 5/124 to 5/127.
(2) Coils to be ordered separately:
- a.c. supply, see pages 5/130 and 25/131,
- d.c. supply, see page 5/133
(3) Screw fxing.
Power terminals can be protected against direct fnger contact by the addition of shrouds, to
be ordered separately, see above.
LC2 F115
5
2
3
0
9
7
LC2 F115
5
2
3
0
9
7
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Dimensions:
pages 5/148 to 5/150
Schemes:
page 5/151
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Dimensions:
pages 5/148 to 5/150
Schemes:
page 5/151
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Dimensions:
pages 5/148 to 5/150
Schemes:
page 5/151
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Dimensions:
pages 5/148 to 5/150
Schemes:
page 5/151
References 5
5 5
5/117
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys F changeover contactor pairs for control .
in utilisation category AC-1 (200 to 350 A), .
pre-assembled
4-pole changeover contactor pairs (horizontally mounted) (1)..
Non inductive loads
Maximum operational current
q < 40 C
Maximum
operational
voltage
Contactors
supplied without
coil (2)
Complete
reference
Weight
Fixing, cabling (3)
A V kg
200 1000 LC2 F1154 8860.
.
250 1000 LC2 F1504 8860
275 1000 LC2 F1854 12100.
.
315 1000 LC2 F2254 15200.
.
350 1000 LC2 F2654 19480.
.
Description For changeover
pairs
Quantity
required
Reference Weight
kg
Power terminal
protection shrouds
LC2 F1154 2 LA9 F706 0250.
LC2 F1504, F1854 2 LA9 F707 0250.
.
LC2 F2254, F2654 2 LA9 F708 0250.
.
Auxiliary contact
blocks and
add-on modules
.
.
.
See pages 5/122 .
to.5/1227
(1) Fitted with a mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking. Order separately 2 auxiliary
contact blocks LAD Np1 to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors, see page
5/123. For accessories, see pages 5/124 to 5/127.
(2) Coils to be ordered separately:
- a.c. supply, see pages 5/130 and 5/131,
- d.c. supply, see page 5/133.
(3) Screw fxing.
Power terminals can be protected against direct fnger contact by the addition of shrouds, to
be ordered separately, see above.
LC2 F1854
5
2
6
0
9
8
LC2 F1854
5
2
6
0
9
8
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Dimensions:
pages 5/148 to 5/150
Schemes:
page 5/151
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Dimensions:
pages 5/148 to 5/150
Schemes:
page 5/151
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Dimensions:
pages 5/148 to 5/150
Schemes:
page 5/151
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Dimensions:
pages 5/148 to 5/150
Schemes:
page 5/151
5/118
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys F reversing contactors and changeover
contactor pairs
Components for assembling 3-pole reversing contactors
and changeover contactor pairs, for customer assembly..
Horizontally mounted Mechanical interlocks Sets of power connections
Reversers assembled using .
2 contactors of identical rating,
type :
Reversing contactors 3-pole changeover contactor
pairs (1)
LA9 Fp970 (2) LA9 Fppp76 (2)
.
LA9 Fppp82 (2)
.
LC1 F115
LC1 F150
LC1 F185
LC1 F225
LC1 F265
LC1 F330
LC1 F400
LC1 F500
LC1 F630
LC1 F800
Vertically mounted Mechanical interlocks
type :
LC1 F115
LC1 F150
LC1 F185
LC1 F225
LC1 F265
LC1 F330
LC1 F400
LC1 F500
LC1 F630
LC1 F800
2 contactors of different ratings,
see page 5/120.
LA9 FF4F
LA9 FG4G
LA9 FH4H
LA9 FJ4J
LA9 FK4K
LA9 FL4L
LC1 F780 LA9 FX970
(1) For 4-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 5/120 and 5/121.
(2) Complete references: see page 5/119.
A
1
A
1
A
2
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
1
L
2
L
3
U V W
A
1
A
1
A
2
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
1
L
2
L
3
U V W
A
2
A
2
A
1
A
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
1
/
L
3
1
/
L
2
1
/
L
1
L
2
1
2
L
1
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
/
L
3
L
3
A
2
A
2
A
1
A
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
1
/
L
3
1
/
L
2
1
/
L
1
L
2
1
2
L
1
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
/
L
3
L
3
Combinations 5
5 5
5/119
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys F reversing contactors and changeover pairs
Components for assembling 3-pole reversing contactors
and changeover contactor pairs, for customer assembly
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating
Contactor type
(1)
Set of power connections Mechanical interlock
Reference Weight
kg
Kit reference Weight
kg
For assembly of 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control
Horizontally mounted
LC1 F115 LA9 FF976 0600 LA9 FF970 0060
LC1 F150 LA9 F15076 0600 LA9 FF970 0060
LC1 F185 LA9 FG976 0780 LA9 FG970 0060
LC1 F225 LA9 F22576 1500 LA9 FG970 0060
LC1 F265 LA9 FH976 1500 LA9 FJ970 0140
LC1 F330 LA9 FJ976 2100 LA9 FJ970 0140
LC1 F400 LA9 FJ976 2100 LA9 FJ970 0140
LC1 F500 LA9 FK976 2.350 LA9 FJ970 0140
LC1 F630 or F800 LA9 FL976 3.800 LA9 FL970 0150.
Vertically mounted
LC1 F115 or F150 (2) LA9 FF4F 0.345
LC1 F185 (2) LA9 FG4G 0.350
LC1 F225 (2) LA9 FG4G 0.350
LC1 F265 or F330 (2) LA9 FH4H 1060
LC1 F400 (2) LA9 FJ4J 1200
LC1 F500 (2) LA9 FK4K 1200
LC1 F630 or F800 (2) LA9 FL4L 1220
LC1 F780 (3) LA9 FX970 (3) 6100.
For assembly of 3-pole changeover contactor pairs (4)
LC1 F115 LA9 FF982 0460 LA9 FF970 0060
LC1 F150 LA9 F15082 0460 LA9 FF970 0060
LC1 F185 LA9 FG982 0610 LA9 FG970 0060
LC1 F225 LA9 F22582 1200 LA9 FG970 0060
LC1 F265 LA9 FH982 1200 LA9 FJ970 0140
LC1 F330 LA9 FJ982 1800 LA9 FJ970 0140
LC1 F400 LA9 FJ982 1800 LA9 FJ970 0140
LC1 F500 LA9 FK982 2.300 LA9 FJ970 0140
LC1 F630 or F800 LA9 FL982 3.400 LA9 FL970 0150
Vertically mounted
LC1 F115 or F150 (2) LA9 FF4F 0.345
LC1 F185 (2) LA9 FG4G 0.350
LC1 F225 (2) LA9 FG4G 0.350
LC1 F265 or F330 (2) LA9 FH4H 1060
LC1 F400 (2) LA9 FJ4J 1200
LC1 F500 (2) LA9 FK4K 1200
LC1 F630 or F800 (2) LA9 FL4L 1220
LC1 F780 (3) LA9 FX970 (3) 7800
(1) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 25/114 and 5/115. For the 2 auxiliary contact blocks
LAD Np1 required to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors, see page 5/123
For accessories, see pages 5/124 to 5/127
(2) With the exception of contactors LC1 F780, all power connections are to be made by the
customer.
(3) Double mechanical interlock mechanism with 2 interlock connecting rods and 3 power
connecting links.
(4) For assembly of 4-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 5/120.and 5/121.
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Dimensions:
pages 5/148 to 5/150
Schemes:
page 5/151
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Dimensions:
pages 5/148 to 5/150
Schemes:
page 5/151
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Dimensions:
pages 5/148 to 5/150
Schemes:
page 5/151
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Dimensions:
pages 5/148 to 5/150
Schemes:
page 5/151
References 5
5/120
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys F changeover contactor pairs
Components for assembling 3 and 4-pole changeover
contactor pairs, for customer assembly
Horizontally mounted Mechanical interlocks Sets of power connections
Contactor pairs assembled using
type :
LC1 F1154
LC1 F1504
LC1 F1854
LC1 F2254
LC1 F2654
LC1 F3304
LC1 F4004
LC1 F5004
LC1 F6304
4-pole changeover contactor pairs (1)
LA9 Fp970 LA9 Fppp77
Vertically mounted Mechanical interlocks
type :
LC1 F1154
LC1 F1504
LC1 F1854
LC1 F2254
LC1 F2654
LC1 F3304
LC1 F4004
LC1 F5004
LC1 F6304
Assembly A Assembly B Assembly C
LA9 FF4F
LA9 FG4G
LA9 FH4H
LA9 FJ4J
LA9 FK4K
LA9 FL4L
LA9 FX971
2 contactors of different ratings,
type :
LC1 F115 or F1154
LC1 F150 or F1504
LC1 F185 or F1854
LC1 F225 or F2254
LC1 F265 or F2654
LC1 F330 or F3304
LC1 F400 or F4004
LC1 F500 or F5004
LC1 F630 or F6304
LC1 F800
LA9 FG4F LA9 FH4F, LA9 FH4G
LA9 FJ4F, LA9 FJ4G
LA9 FK4F, LA9 FK4G
LA9 FL4F, LA9 FL4G
LA9 FJ4H
LA9 FK4H, LA9 FK4J
LA9 FL4H, LA9 FL4J and LA9 FL4K
3 contactors of identical or
different ratings, type :
LA9 Fp4p4p : see pages 5/128 and 5/129.
LC1 F115 or F1154
LC1 F150 or F1504
LC1 F185 or F1854
LC1 F225 or F2254
LC1 F265 or F2654
LC1 F330 or F3304
LC1 F400 or F4004
LC1 F500 or F5004
LC1 F630 or F6304
LC1 F800
Important: the contactor ratings must be in decreasing size from top to
bottom.
(1) For 3-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 5/118 and 5/119.
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
N
1
/
L
3
1
/
L
2
L
2
1
2
L
1
7
8
1
/
L
1
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
/
L
3
2
N
L
3
N
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
N
1
/
L
3
1
/
L
2
L
2
1
2
L
1
7
8
1
/
L
1
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
/
L
3
2
N
L
3
N
Combinations 5
5 5
5/121
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys F changeover contactor pairs
Components for assembling 3 and 4-pole changeover
contactor pairs, for customer assembly
Contactor pairs assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating
For assembly of 4-pole changeover contactor pairs (1)
Contactor type
(2)
Set of power connections Mechanical interlock
Reference Weight
kg
kg
LC1 F1154 LA9 FF977 0460 LA9 FF970 0060
LC1 F1504 LA9 F15077 0460 LA9 FF970 0060
LC1 F1854 LA9 FG977 0610 LA9 FG970 0060
LC1 F2254 LA9 F22577 1200 LA9 FG970 0060
LC1 F2654 LA9 FH977 1200 LA9 FJ970 0140
LC1 F3304 LA9 FJ977 1800 LA9 FJ970 0140
LC1 F4004 LA9 FJ977 1800 LA9 FJ970 0140
LC1 F5004 LA9 FK977 2.300 LA9 FJ970 0140
LC1 F6304 LA9 FL977 3.400 LA9 FL970 0150.
Vertically mounted
LC1 F1154 or F1504 (3) LA9 FF4F 0.345
LC1 F1854 (3) LA9 FG4G 0.350
LC1 F2254 (3) LA9 FG4G 0.350
LC1 F2654 or F3304 (3) LA9 FH4H 1060
LC1 F4004 (3) LA9 FJ4J 1200
LC1 F5004 (3) LA9 FK4K 1200
LC1 F6304 (3) LA9 FL4L 1220
LC1 F7804 (4) LA9 FX971 (4) 7800.
Contactor pairs assembled using 2 contactors of different ratings
For assembly of 3 or 4-pole changeover contactor pairs
Contactor type(1) Mechanical interlock
At bottom At top Kit reference Weight
kg
Vertically mounted
LC1 F115 or F1154
or
LC1 F150 or F1504
LC1 F185 or F1854 LA9 FG4F 0.350
LC1 F225 or F2254 LA9 FG4F 0.350
LC1 F265 or F2654 LA9 FH4F 0870
LC1 F330 or F3304 LA9 FH4F 0870
LC1 F400 or F4004 LA9 FJ4F 0.930
LC1 F500 or F5004 LA9 FK4F 0940
LC1 F630, F6304 or F800 LA9 FL4F 0940
LC1 F185 or F1854
or
LC1 F225 or F2254
LC1 F265 or F2654 LA9 FH4G 0860
LC1 F330 or F3304 LA9 FH4G 0860
LC1 F400 or F4004 LA9 FJ4G 0940
LC1 F500 or F5004 LA9 FK4G 0940
LC1 F630, F6304 or F800 LA9 FL4G 0950
LC1 F265 or F2654
or
LC1 F330 or F3304
LC1 F400 or F4004 LA9 FJ4H 1.130
LC1 F500 or F5004 LA9 FK4H 1.130
LC1 F630, F6304 or F800 LA9 FL4H 1140
LC1 F400 or F4004 LC1 F500 or F5004 LA9 FK4J 1200
LC1 F630 or F6304 or F800 LA9 FL4J 1210
LC1 F500 or F5004 LC1 F630 or F6304 or F800 LA9 FL4K 1210.
For assembly of reversers using 3 contactors, vertically mounted
See pages 5/128 and 5/129.
(1) For assembly of 3-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 5/118 and 5/120.
(2) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 5/114 and 5/115. For the 2 auxiliary contact blocks
LAD Np1 required to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors, see page 5/123.
For accessories, see pages 5/124.to 5/127.
(3) All power connections are to be made by the customer.
connecting links.
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Dimensions:
pages 5/148 to 5/150
Schemes:
page 5/151
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Dimensions:
pages 5/148 to 5/150
Schemes:
page 5/151
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Dimensions:
pages 5/148 to 5/150
Schemes:
page 5/151
Selection:
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Dimensions:
pages 5/148 to 5/150
Schemes:
page 5/151
References 5
5/122
5 5 5 5
LAD R
LAD T, LAD S
LC1 F LAD N10, N01
LAD N
LAD N, LAD C
LA1 DX, DY, DZ
5
5 5
5/123
5 5
References 5
Number
of
contacts
Maximum number
of blocks per contactor
Clip-on mounting

kg
1 1 1 LAD N10 0020
1 LAD N01 0020
2 2 1 1 LAD N11 0.030
2 LAD N20 0.030
2 LAD N02 0.030
4 2 2 2 LAD N22 0050
1 3 LAD N13 0050
4 LAD N40 0050
4 LAD N04 0050
3 1 LAD N31 0050
2 2.(1) LAD C22 0050
With terminal referencing conforming to EN 50012
2 2 1 1 LAD N11P 0.030
1 1 LAD N11G 0.030
4 2 2 2 LAD N22P 0050
2 2 LAD N22G 0050
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by lugs
This type of connection is not possible for blocks with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp
protected contacts. For all other instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks, add the fgure 6 to the
end of the references selected above. Example: LAD N11 becomes LAD N116
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks with dust and damp
protected contacts
Recommended for use in particularly harsh industrial environments
Number
of
contacts
Maximum number of
blocks per contactor
Clip-on mounting
kg
2 2 2 LA1 DX20 0040
2 2.(2) LA1 DY20 0040
4 2 2 2 LA1 DZ40 0050
2 1 1 LA1 DZ31 0050
Number
of
contacts
Maximum number of
Clip-on mounting Type Range
s kg
1 N/O
+
1 N/C
2 On-delay 013 (3) LAD T0 0060
0130 LAD T2 0060
10180 LAD T4 0060
130 (4) LAD S2 0060
Off-delay 013 (3) LAD R0 0060
0130 LAD R2 0060
10180 LAD R4 0060
Interface for PLC control
Type of I/O Reference Weight
kg
Inputs: c 24 V - 100 mA
Outputs: a 480 V - 25 A
LA4 FSRE r
(1) Including 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break
(2) Device ftted with 4 earth screen continuity terminals.
(3) With extended scale from 0.1 to 0.6 s.
(4) With switching time of 40 ms 15 ms between opening of the N/C contact and closing of the
N/O contact.
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys F contactors
Presentation :
page 5/122
Schemes :
page 5/147
Presentation :
page 5/122
Schemes :
page 5/147
rAvailable 2
nd
half 2009.
5/124
5 5 5 5
References 5
Suppressor blocks
RC circuits (resistor-capacitor)
Effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to "high frequency" interference. For use only
in cases where the voltage is virtually sinusoidal, i.e. less than 5% total harmonic distortion.
Voltage limited to 3 Uc max. and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max.
b
b
b
Mounting Uc Reference Weight
kg
Clip-on mounting on all ratings .
and all a.c. coils.
a
2448 V
LA4 FRCE 0040
50110 V LA4 FRCF 0040
127240 V LA4 FRCP 0040
265415 V
LA4 FRCV 0040
Suppressor block bracket LA9 D09981 0010
Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max.
b
b
and all coils.
a.or.c 2448 V LA4 FVE 0040
50110 V LA4 FVF 0040
127240 V LA4 FVP 0040
265415 V
LA4 FVV 0040
Diodes.
No overvoltage or oscillating frequencies.
Increase in drop-out time (3 to 4 times the normal time).
b
b
b
Clip-on mounting on all ratings.
and all d.c. coils..
c
2448 V LA4 FDE 0040
55110 V LA4 FDF 0040
125250 V LA4 FDP 0040
280440 V
LA4 FDV 0040
Bidirectional peak limiting diodes (transil)
Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to between 2 and 2.5 times Uc max.
b
b
and all coils.
a.or.c 2448 V LA4 FTE 0040
50110 V LA4 FTF 0040
127240 V LA4 FTP 0040
265415 V
LA4 FTV 0040
For use on 4-pole contactors Set of 4 links Weight
Set reference kg
Links for parallel connection of poles (in pairs)
LC1 F1154 LA9 FF602 0200
LC1 F1504, F1854 LA9 FG602 0.350
LC1 F2254, F2654, F3304, F4004 LA9 FH602 1000
LC1 F5004 LA9 FK602 1750
LC1 F6304 LA9 FL602 3.000
Links for star connection of 3 poles
LC1 F115 LA9 FF601 0.035
LC1 F150, F185 LA9 FG601 0050
LC1 F225, F265, F330, F400 LA9 FH601 0120
LC1 F500 LA9 FK601 0180
LC1 F630, F800 LA9 FL601 0550
Control circuit voltage take-off from power terminals
For use with contactors Mounted on
bolt size
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
LC1 F115 M6 10 DZ3 FA3 0004
LC1 F150, F185 M8 10 DZ3 GA3 0004
LC1 F225F500 M10 10 DZ3 HA3 0006
LC1 F630, F800 M12 10 DZ3 JA3 0009
8
1
3
0
8
9
LA4 Fppp
LA9 D09981
8
1
3
0
8
9
LA4 Fppp
LA9 D09981
8
1
3
0
8
7
LA9 Fp602
8
1
3
0
8
7
LA9 Fp602
8
1
3
0
8
8
LA9 Fp601
8
1
3
0
8
8
LA9 Fp601
8
1
3
0
9
0
DZ3 FA3
8
1
3
0
9
0
DZ3 FA3
Dimensions :
pages 5/143 and 5/144
Dimensions :
pages 5/143 and 5/144
Dimensions :
pages 5/143 and 5/144
Dimensions :
pages 5/143 and 5/144
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys F contactors
Suppressor blocks
........
5 5
5/125
5 5
Right-angled connectors
For contactors or thermal overload relays
For use with With connector plates Set of 3 connectors
Contactors Thermal overload
relays .(1)
Set reference Weight
Width Type kg
LC1 F115 LR9 F5p67, LR9 F67 15 mm Rear LA9 FF981 0060
Side LA9 FF979 0240
Large
surface area
LA9 FF980 0150
LC1 F150,
F185
LR9 F5p69, F5p71,
LR9 F69, F71
20 mm Rear LA9 FG981 0080
Side LA9 FG979 0.350
Large
surface area
LA9 FG980 0200
LC1 F225,
F265, F330,
F400
LR9 F7p75,LR9 F75 25 mm Rear LA9 FJ981 0.430
Side LA9 FJ979 0750
Large
surface area
LA9 FJ980 0490
LC1 F500 LR9 F7p79, F7p81,
LR9 F79, F81
30 mm Rear LA9 FK981 0480
Side LA9 FK979 0920
Large
surface area
LA9 FK980 0800
LC1 F630,
F800
LR9 F7p81,LR9 F81 40 mm Rear LA9 FL981 1210
Side LA9 FL979 2570
Large
surface area
LA9 FL980 3.190
For use with With connector
plates
Set of 6 connectors
relays .(1)
Width Type kg
LC1 F1700,
F2100
60 mm Rear LA9 F2100 9550
For reversing contactors or "star-delta" contactors combined with a thermal
overload relay
For use with Width of
connector plates
Set of 3 busbars
relays .(1)
kg
LC1 F115 LR9 F5p57, F5p63
LR9 F5p67, F5p69
LR9 F69, F71
15 mm LA7 F401 0110
LC1 F150 .
and.F185
LR9 F5p57, F5p63 20 mm LA7 F402 0110
LC1 F185 LR9 F5p71,
LR9 F71
25 mm LA7 F407 0160
LC1 F225 .
and.F265
LR9 F5p71,
LR9 F71
25 mm LA7 F403 0160
LR9 F7p75, F7p79
LR9 F75, F79
25 mm LA7 F404 0160
LC1 F330 .
and.F400
LR9 F7p75, F7p79
LR9 F75, F79
25 mm LA7 F404 0160
LC1 F400 LR9 F7p81,LR9 F81 25 mm LA7 F404 0160
LC1 F500 LR9 F7p75, F7p79
LR9 F7p81
LR9 F75, F79, F81
30 mm LA7 F405 0270
LC1 F630,
F800
LR9 F7p81,
LR9 F81
40 mm LA7 F406 0600
(1) For protection relays class 10, replace the p with a 3 and for class 20, replace the p with a 5.
LA9 Fp981
8
1
3
0
9
1
LA9 Fp981
8
1
3
0
9
1
LA9 Fp979
8
1
3
0
9
3
LA9 Fp979
8
1
3
0
9
3
LA9 FL980
5
1
0
4
8
7
LA9 FL980
5
1
0
4
8
7
Dimensions :
pages 5/143 and 5/144
Dimensions :
pages 5/143 and 5/144
Dimensions :
pages 5/143 and 5/144
Dimensions :
pages 5/143 and 5/144
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys Fcontactors
Accessories
LA9 F2100
5
1
0
4
8
7
5/126
5 5 5 5
Insulated terminal blocks
For use on
3-pole contactors
Connection Tightening
tool
Set of 2 blocks Weight
Set reference kg
LC1 F115, F150, F185
1 x 16150 mm
2
..
or..
2 x 1695 mm
2
4 mm
hexagonal
socket key
LA9 F103 0560
Power terminal protection shrouds
For use on
2, 3 and 4-pole contactors
Number of
shrouds per set
kg
LC1 F115 6 LA9 F701 0250
LC1 F150, F185 6 LA9 F702 0250
LC1 F225, F265, F330, F400 and F4002
F500 and F5002
6 LA9 F703 0250
LC1 F630, F6302 and F800 6 LA9 F704 0250
LC1 F1154 8 LA9 F706 0.300
LC1 F1504 and F1854 8 LA9 F707 0.300
LC1 F2254, F2654, F3304, F4004, F5004 8 LA9 F708 0.300
LC1 F6304 8 LA9 F709 0.300
8
1
3
0
9
4
LA9 F103
8
1
3
0
9
4
LA9 F103
8
1
3
0
9
5
LA9 F701
8
1
3
0
9
5
LA9 F701
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys F contactors
Accessories
5 5
5/127
5 5
References 5
Sets of contacts
Per pole: 2 fxed contacts, 1 moving contact , 2 defectors, 1 back-plate, clamping screws and
washers.
For contactor Type Replacement
for
Reference Weight
kg
2-pole LC1 F4002 2 poles LA5 F400802 1.350
LC1 F5002 2 poles LA5 F500802 1950
LC1 F6302 2 poles LA5 F630802 4700
LC1 F6302S011 2 poles LA5 F630802S011 4800
3-pole LC1 F115. F150 3 poles LA5 FF431 0270
LC1 F185. F225 3 poles LA5 FG431 0.350
LC1 F265 3 poles LA5 FH431 0660
LC1 F330. F400 3 poles LA5 F400803 2000
LC1 F500 3 poles LA5 F500803 2950
LC1 F630 3 poles LA5 F630803 6100
LC1 F780 1 pole LA5 F780801.(1) 4700
3 poles LA5 F780803 13.200
LC1 F800 3 poles LA5 F800803 6100
LC1 F630S011 3 poles LA5 F630803S011 6200
4-pole LC1 F1504. F1154 4 poles LA5 FF441 0.360
LC1 F1854. F2254 4 poles LA5 FG441 0465
LC1 F2654 4 poles LA5 FH441 0880
LC1 F3304. F4004 4 poles LA5 F400804 2700
LC1 F5004 4 poles LA5 F500804 3.900
LC1 F6304 4 poles LA5 F630804 8150
LC1 F7804 1 pole LA5 F780801 (1) 4700
4 poles LA5 F780804 17.300
LC1 F6304S011 4 poles LA5 F630804S011 8400
Arc chambers
For contactor Type Replacement
for
Reference Weight
kg
2-pole LC1 F4002 2 poles LA5 F400250 0870
LC1 F5002 2 poles LA5 F500250 1250
LC1 F6302 2 poles LA5 F630250 2100
LC1 F6302S011 2 poles LA5 F630250 2100
LC1 F150 3 poles LA5 F15050 0490
LC1 F185 3 poles LA5 F18550 0670
LC1 F225 3 poles LA5 F22550 0670
LC1 F265 3 poles LA5 F26550 0920
LC1 F330 3 poles LA5 F33050 1.300
LC1 F400 3 poles LA5 F40050 1.300
LC1 F500 3 poles LA5 F50050 1850
LC1 F630 3 poles LA5 F63050 3.150
LC1 F780 1 pole LA5 F780150 (1) 2100
LC1 F800 3 poles LA5 F80050 3.150
LC1 F630S011 3 poles LA5 F63050 3.150
LC1 F1700 6 poles LA5 F170050 (2) 3.750
LC1 F2100 6 poles LA5 F210050 (2) 3.750
LC1 F1504 4 poles LA5 F150450 0660
LC1 F1854 4 poles LA5 F185450 0910
LC1 F2254 4 poles LA5 F225450 1000
LC1 F2654 4 poles LA5 F265450 1220
LC1 F3304 4 poles LA5 F330450 1740
LC1 F4004 4 poles LA5 F400450.(3) 1740
LC1 F5004 4 poles LA5 F500450.(3) 2500
LC1 F6304 4 poles LA5 F630450.(4) 4200
LC1 F7804 1 pole LA5 F780150 (1) 2100
LC1 F6304S011 4 poles LA5 F630450 4200
(1) Comprising 2 identical items per pole.
(2) Comprising three 2-pole arc chambers.
(3) Comprising two 2-pole arc chambers.
(4) Comprising single-pole arc chambers.
LA5 FG431
8
1
3
0
9
6
LA5 FG431
8
1
3
0
9
6
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys F contactors
Spare parts
LA5 F210050
5
6
9
5
5
6
5
6
9
5
5
5
LA5 F40050
5/128
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys F contactors
Accessories for assembly of reversing contactors .
and changeover contactor pairs using 3 contactors,
vertically mounted - for customer assembly
Closing of one of the 3 contactors prevents closing of the other 2.
Mechanical interlock kits
Contactor type (1) Mechanical interlock (2)
Top Middle Bottom Kit reference (3) Weight
kg
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LA9 FF4F4F 0554
LC1 F185, F225,
F1854.or.F2254
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LA9 FG4F4F 0559
LC1 F185, F225,
F1854.or.F2254
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LA9 FG4G4F 0559
LC1 F185, F225,
F1854.or.F2254
LA9 FG4G4G 0562
LC1 F265, F330,
F2654 or F3304
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LA9 FH4F4F 1.350
LC1 F185, F225,
F1854.or.F2254
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LA9 FH4G4F 1.375
LC1 F185, F225,
F1854.or.F2254
LA9 FH4G4G 1.375
LC1 F265, F330,
F2654 or F3304
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LA9 FH4H4F 1524
LC1 F185, F225,
F1854.or.F2254
LA9 FH4H4G 1527
LC1 F265, F330,
F2654 or F3304
LA9 FH4H4H 1684
LC1 F400, F4002 .
or.F4004
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LA9 FJ4F4F 1421
LC1 F185, F225,
F1854.or.F2254
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LA9 FJ4G4F 1424
LC1 F185, F225,
F1854.or.F2254
LA9 FJ4G4G 1428
LC1 F265, F330,
F2654 or F3304
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LA9 FJ4H4F 1595
LC1 F185, F225,
F1854.or.F2254
LA9 FJ4H4G 1598
LC1 F265, F330,
F2654 or F3304
LA9 FJ4H4H 1755
LC1 F400, F4002.
or.F4004
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LA9 FJ4J4F 1666
LC1 F185, F225,
F1854.or.F2254
LA9 FJ4J4G 1669
LC1 F265, F330,
F2654 or F3304
LA9 FJ4J4H 1829
LC1-F400, F4002
or.F4004
LA9 FJ4J4J 1890
LC1 F500, F5002 .
or.F5004..
(continued on page
5/129)
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LA9 FK4F4F 1421
LC1 F185, F225,
F1854.or.F2254
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LA9 FK4G4F 1424
LC1 F185, F225,
F1854.or.F2254
LA9 FK4G4G 1428
LC1 F265, F330,
F2654 or F3304
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LA9 FK4H4F 1595
LC1 F185, F225,
F1854.or.F2254
LA9 FK4H4G 1598
LC1 F265, F330,
F2654 or F3304
LA9 FK4H4H 1755
LC1 F400, F4002.
or.F4004
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LA9 FK4J4F 1666
LC1 F185, F225,
F2654 or F3304
LA9 FK4J4G 1669
LC1 F265, F330,
F2654 or F3304
LA9 FK4J4H 1829
LC1 F400, F4002
or.F4004
LA9 FK4J4J 1896
LC1 F500, F5002.
or.F5004
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LA9 FK4K4F 1666
(1) To order the 3 contactors, see pages 5/114 and 5/115. For auxiliary contact blocks LAD N02
used for electrical locking, see page 5/123. For accessories, see pages 5/124 to 5/127.
(2) Minimum distances between contactors, see page 5/129.
(3) The kit contains the lever arms, the 2 x 8 mm rods and all parts required for assembly.
8
1
3
2
1
5
8
1
3
2
1
5
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
LA9 Fp4p4p
References 5
5 5
5/129
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys F contactors
Accessories for assembly of reversing contactors .
and changeover contactor pairs using 3 contactors,
vertically mounted - for customer assembly
Mechanical interlock kits (continued)
Contactor type (1) Mechanical interlock (2)
Top Middle Bottom Kit reference (3) Weight
kg
LC1 F500, F5002.
or.F5004..
(continued)
LC1 F500, F5002.
or.F5004
LC1 F185, F225,
F1854.or.F2254
LA9 FK4K4G 1669
LC1 F265, F330,
F2654 or F3304
LA9 FK4K4H 1825
LC1 F400, F4002
or.F4004
LA9 FK4K4J 1896
LC1-F500, F5002.
or.F5004
LA9 FK4K4K 1896
LC1 F630, F800,
F6302 or F6304
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LA9 FL4F4F 1428
LC1 F185, F225,
F1854.or.F2254
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LA9 FL4G4F 1.431
LC1 F185, F225,
F1854.or.F2254
LA9 FL4G4G 1.436
LC1 F265, F330,
F2654 or F3304
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LA9 FL4H4F 1602
LC1 F185, F225,
F1854.or.F2254
LA9 FL4H4G 1606
LC1 F265, F330,
F2654 or F3304
LA9 FL4H4H 1751
LC1 F400, F4002.
or.F4004
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LA9 FL4J4F 1.673
LC1 F185, F225,
F1854.or.F2254
LA9 FL4J4G 1676
LC1 F265, F330,
F2654 or F3304
LA9 FL4J4H 1.832
LC1 F400, F4002
or.F4004
LA9 FL4J4J 1.903
LC1-F500, F5002 .
or.F5004
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LA9 FK4K4F 1666
LC1 F185, F225,
F1854.or.F2254
LA9 FK4K4G 1669
LC1 F265, F330,
F2654 or F3304
LA9 FK4K4H 1825
LC1 F400, F4002
or.F4004
LA9 FK4K4J 1896
LC1-F500, F5002
or.F5004
LA9 FK4K4K 1896
LC1 F630, F800,
F6302 or F6304
LC1 F115, F150,
F1154.or.F1504
LA9 FL4L4F 1680
LC1 F185, F225,
F1854.or.F2254
LA9 FL4L4G 1.683
LC1 F265, F330,
F2654 or F3304
LA9 FL4L4H 1910
LC1 F400, F4002
or.F4004
LA9 FL4L4J 1896
LC1 F500, F5002
or.F5004
LA9 FL4L4K 1896
LC1 F630, F800,
F6302, or F6304
LA9 FL4L4L 1920
(1) To order the 3 contactors, see pages 5/114 and 5/115. For auxiliary contact blocks LAD N02
used for electrical locking, see page 5/123. For accessories, see pages 5/124 to 5/127.
(2) Minimum distances between contactors.
This is the distance, in mm, between the centres of two adjacent contactors (between the top and
middle contactors or between the middle and bottom contactors).
Contactor
Bottom or top Middle
LC1 F115
or F150
LC1 F185
or F225
LC1 F265
or F330
LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F630
or F800
LC1 F115 or F150 200 210 240 250 270 320
LC1 F185 or F225 210 220 250 250 270 330
LC1 F265 or F330 240 250 250 260 280 350
LC1 F400 250 250 260 260 280 320
LC1 F500 270 270 280 280 300 340
LC1 F630 or F800 320 330 350 320 340 380
(3) The kit contains the lever arms, the 2 x 8 mm rods and all parts required for assembly.
LA9 Fp4p4p
8
1
3
2
1
6
LA9 Fp4p4p
8
1
3
2
1
6
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
5/130
5 5 5 5
References
References
Maximum ambient air temperature: 55 C. Above this, use an LX9 F coil, see page 5/135.
Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): y 2400
Control circuit
voltage
Average
resistance at
20 C 10 %
Inductance
of closed
circuit
Voltage
code
Reference Weight
Uc - 50 Hz Uc - 60 Hz
V V W H kg
For contactors LC1 F115 and LC1 F150
24 027 004 B5 LX1 FF024 0.430
42 094 0.13 D5 LX1 FF042 0.430
48 078 011 E6 LX1 FF040 0.430
48 117 016 E5 LX1 FF048 0.430
110 455 059 F6 LX1 FF092 0.430
120 477 064 G6 LX1 FF095 0.430
110 6.38 086 F5 LX1 FF110 0.430
115 6.38 086 FE5 LX1 FF110 0.430
127/132 914 115 G5 LX1 FF127 0.430
200/208 145 187 L6 LX1 FF162 0.430
220 184 2.38 M6 LX1 FF184 0.430
240 189 25 U6 LX1 FF187 0.430
220 265/277 281 3.44 M5 LX1 FF220 0.430
230 281 3.44 P5 LX1 FF220 0.430
240 31.1 41 U5 LX1 FF240 0.430
380 572 705 Q6 LX1 FF316 0.430
440 726 921 R6 LX1 FF360 0.430
380 460/480 869 10.3 Q5 LX1 FF380 0.430
400 869 10.3 V5 LX1 FF380 0.430
415 951 12 N5 LX1 FF415 0.430
500 141 17 S5 LX1 FF500 0.430
660 172 20.3 Y6 LX1 FF550 0.430
660/690 254 289 Y5 LX1 FF660 0.430
1000 414 489 LX1 FF850 0.430
1000 610 685 LX1 FF1000 0.430
Specifcations
Average consumption at 20C:
inrush 50Hz: 550VA; 60Hz: 660 VA,
sealed 50Hz: 45VA; 60 Hz: 55 VA, cos j= 0.3.
Heat dissipation: 1216 W.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 2335 ms, opening = 515 ms.
-
-
24 018 0.03 B5 LX1 FG024 0550
42 057 009 LX1 FG042 0550
48 047 008 E6 LX1 FG040 0550
48 071 012 E5 LX1 FG048 0550
110 274 044 F6 LX1 FG092 0550
115/120 287 049 G6 LX1 FG095 0550
110 418 065 F5 LX1 FG110 0550
115 418 065 FE5 LX1 FG110 0550
127/132 5.35 086 G5 LX1 FG127 0550
200/208 88 141 L6 LX1 FG162 0550
220 111 18 M6 LX1 FG184 0550
240 114 187 U6 LX1 FG187 0550
220 265/277 165 259 M5 LX1 FG220 0550
230 165 259 P5 LX1 FG220 0550
240 201 3.09 U5 LX1 FG240 0550
380 34 5.32 Q6 LX1 FG316 0550
440 43.5 694 R6 LX1 FG360 0550
380 460/480 51.3 775 Q5 LX1 FG380 0550
400 51.3 775 V5 LX1 FG380 0550
415 62.3 906 N5 LX1 FG415 0550
500 827 128 S5 LX1 FG500 0550
660 103 15.3 Y6 LX1 FG550 0550
660/690 154 218 Y5 LX1 FG660 0550
1000 249 36.6 LX1 FG850 0550
1000 370 516 LX1 FG1000 0550
Specifcations
inrush 50 Hz: 805 VA; 60 Hz: 970 VA,
sealed 50 Hz: 55 VA; 60 Hz: 66 VA, cos j= 0.3.
-
-
.
LX1 FFppp
8
1
3
1
8
1
LX1 FFppp
8
1
3
1
8
1
LX1 FGppp
8
1
3
1
8
2
LX1 FGppp
8
1
3
1
8
2
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
a.c. 50/60 Hz supply coils
5 5
5/131
5 5
References
References
Low sealed consumption.
Operate on networks with harmonic numbers y 7
Operating cycles/hour (q.y 55 C): y.2400
Control
circuit
voltage
Uc
Average resistance
at 20 C 10 %
Inductance
of closed
circuit
Voltage
code
Reference Weight
Inrush Sealed
V W W H kg
24 08 20 (1) B7 LX1 FH0242 0750
48 296 67 (1) E7 LX1 FH0482 0750
110 187 440 (1) F7 LX1 FH1102 0750
115 187 440 (1) FE7 LX1 FH1102 0750
120/127 229 536 (1) G7 LX1 FH1272 0750
200/208 584 1366 (1) L7 LX1 FH2002 0750
220 706 1578 (1) M7 LX1 FH2202 0750
230 706 1578 (1) P7 LX1 FH2202 0750
240 8794 1968 (1) U7 LX1 FH2402 0750
277 113 2444 (1) W7 LX1 FH2772 0750
380 217 4631 (1) Q7 LX1 FH3802 0750
400 217 4631 (1) V7 LX1 FH3802 0750
415 217 4631 (1) N7 LX1-FH3802 0750
440 265 6731 (1) R7 LX1 FH4402 0750
480/500 329 8543 (1) S7 LX1 FH5002 0750
600/660 296 10.245 (1) X7 LX1 FH6002 0750
1000 696 25.880 (1) LX1 FH10002 0750
Specifcations
Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz and cos j = 0.9:
inrush: 600700 VA,
sealed: 810 VA.
-
-
For contactor LC1 F400
48 16 295 018 E7 LX1 FJ048 1000
110/120 98 230 1.35 F7 LX1 FJ110 1000
115 98 230 1.35 FE7 LX1 FJ110 1000
120/127 128 280 175 G7 LX1 FJ127 1000
200/208 30 815 41 L7 LX1 FJ200 1000
220 37 1030 51 M7 LX1 FJ220 1000
230 37 1030 51 P7 LX1 FJ220 1000
240 475 1320 64 U7 LX1 FJ240 1000
265/277 61 1700 81 W7 LX1 FJ280 1000
380 120 3310 158 Q7 LX1 FJ380 1000
400 120 3310 158 V7 LX1 FJ380 1000
415 145 4070 194 N7 LX1 FJ415 1000
440 145 4070 194 R7 LX1 FJ415 1000
500 190 4980 255 S7 LX1 FJ500 1000
550/600 243 6310 274 X7 LX1 FJ600 1000
1000 720 19. 420 846 LX1 FJ1000 1000
Specifcations
Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz and cos j = 0.9:
inrush: 10001150 VA,
sealed: 1218 VA.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 4075 ms, opening = 100170.
-
-
(1) Please consult your Regional Sales Offce.
LX1 FHppp2
8
1
3
1
8
3
LX1 FHppp2
8
1
3
1
8
3
LX1 FJppp
8
1
3
1
8
4
LX1 FJppp
8
1
3
1
8
4
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
a.c. 40 to 400 Hz supply coils
....
5/132
5 5 5 5
Control
circuit
voltage
Uc
Average resistance
at 20 C 10 %
Inductance
of closed
circuit
Voltage
code
Reference Weight
Inrush Sealed
V W W H kg
48 19 33.5 019 E7 LX1 FK048 1150
110/120 955 260 125 F7 LX1 FK110 1150
115 955 260 125 FE7 LX1 FK110 1150
120/127 115 315 15 G7 LX1 FK127 1150
200/208 29 735 3.75 L7 LX1 FK200 1150
220 35.5 915 455 M7 LX1 FK220 1150
230 35.5 915 455 P7 LX1 FK220 1150
240 445 1160 575 U7 LX1 FK240 1150
265/277 565 1490 7.3 W7 LX1 FK280 1150
380 112 2980 147 Q7 LX1 FK380 1150
400 112 2980 147 V7 LX1 FK380 1150
415 143 3730 184 N7 LX1 FK415 1150
440 143 3730 184 R7 LX1 FK415 1150
500 172 4590 228 S7 LX1 FK500 1150
550/600 232 5660 23.9 X7 LX1 FK600 1150
1000 679 16. 960 72 LX1 FK1000 1150
Specifcations
.
Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz, cos j = 0.9:
sealed: 1620 VA.
-
-
48 11 171 009 E7 LX1 FL048 1500
110/120 645 165 185 F7 LX1 FL110 1500
115 645 165 185 FE7 LX1 FL110 1500
127 81 205 105 G7 LX1 FL127 1500
200/208 205 605 265 L7 LX1 FL200 1500
220 255 730 3.35 M7 LX1 FL220 1500
230 255 730 3.35 P7 LX1 FL220 1500
240 255 730 3.35 U7 LX1 FL220 1500
265/277 31 900 41 W7 LX1 FL260 1500
380 78 2360 105 Q7 LX1 FL380 1500
400 78 2360 105 V7 LX1 FL380 1500
415 96 2960 13 N7 LX1 FL415 1500
440 96 2960 13 R7 LX1 FL415 1500
500 120 3660 165 S7 LX1 FL500 1500
550/600 155 4560 195 X7 LX1 FL600 1500
1000 474 12. 880 562 LX1 FL1000 1500
Specifcations
.
sealed: 2025 VA.
Operating cycles/hour (q.y 55 C): 1200.
-
-
LX1 FKppp
8
1
3
1
8
6
LX1 FKppp
8
1
3
1
8
6
LX1 FLppp
8
1
3
1
8
7
LX1 FLppp
8
1
3
1
8
7
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
5 5
5/133
5 5
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
a.c. 40 to 400 Hz supply coils .
Control
circuit
voltage
Uc
Average resistance
at 20 C 10 %
Inductance
of closed
circuit
Voltage
code
Reference Weight
Inrush Sealed
V W W H kg
110/120 495.(2) 230 (2) 021 F7 LX1 FX110 (1) 3.000
115 495.(2) 230 (2) 021 FE7 LX1 FX110 (1) 3.000
127 61.(2) 280.(2) 026 G7 LX1 FX127 (1) 3.000
200/208 155.(2) 750.(2) 066 L7 LX1 FX200 (1) 3.000
220 195.(2) 920.(2) 082 M7 LX1 FX220 (1) 3.000
230 195.(2) 920.(2) 082 P7 LX1 FX220 (1) 3.000
240 195.(2) 920.(2) 082 U7 LX1 FX220 (1) 3.000
265/277 298.(2) 1330 (2) 125 W7 LX1 FX280 (1) 3.000
380 609.(2) 2780.(2) 2.3 Q7 LX1 FX380 (1) 3.000
400 609.(2) 2780.(2) 2.3 V7 LX1 FX380 (1) 3.000
415/480 74.3 (2) 3340 (2) 28 N7 LX1 FX415 (1) 3.000
440 74.3 (2) 3340 (2) 28 R7 LX1 FX415 (1) 3.000
500 92.(2) 4180.(2) 3.5 S7 LX1 FX500 (1) 3.000
Specifcations
.
inrush: 19002300 VA, sealed: 4455 VA.
Heat dissipation: 2 x 22 W.
-
Control circuit
voltage
Uc
Voltage
code
Rectifer
Reference
(3)
Coil
Reference
Weight
V kg
110/127 FE7 DR5 TE4U LX4 F8FW 1650
220/240 P7 DR5 TE4U LX4 F8MW 1650
380/440 V7 DR5 TE4S LX4 F8QW 1650
Specifcations
inrush: 1700 VA, sealed: 12 VA
-
Control
circuit
voltage
Uc
Average resistance
at 20 C 10 %
Inductance
of closed
circuit
Voltage
code
Reference Weight
Inrush Sealed
V W W H kg
110 592 106 072 F7 LX1 FK065 (4) 1150
120 592 106 072 G7 LX1 FK070 (4) 1150
220 955 260 125 M7 LX1 FK110 (4) 1150
230 955 260 125 P7 LX1 FK110 (4) 1150
240 115 315 150 U7 LX1 FK127 (4) 1150
277 165 420 225 W7 LX1 FK140 (4) 1150
380 29 735 3.75 Q7 LX1 FK200 (4) 1150
400 29 735 3.75 V7 LX1 FK200 (4) 1150
415 35.5 915 455 N7 LX1 FK220 (4) 1150
440 35.5 915 455 R7 LX1 FK220 (4) 1150
500 445 1160 575 S7 LX1 FK240 (4) 1150
Specifcations
inrush: 16002400 VA, sealed: 2937 VA.
Heat dissipation: 2 x 18 W.
-
(1) Reference of set of 2 identical coils, to be connected in series.
(2) Value for the 2 coils in series.
(3) Rectifer to be ordered separately: 0.100 kg.
(4) Order 2 coils and connect them in series.
5/134
5 5 5 5
References
References
High tolerance to inrush voltage drops.
Immune to micro-breaks (mains supply or contact chain).
Control
circuit
voltage
Uc
Average resistance
at 20 C 10 %
Inductance
of closed
circuit
Voltage
code
Reference Weight
Inrush Sealed
V W W H kg
48 3.03 802 0.3 E7 LX9 FF048 0.430
110 148 579 208 F7 LX9 FF110 0.430
115 148 579 208 FE7 LX9 FF110 0.430
120/127 19 746 265 G7 LX9 FF127 0.430
208 45 1788 595 L7 LX9 FF200 0.430
220 594 2190 77 M7 LX9 FF220 0.430
230 594 2190 77 P7 LX9 FF220 0.430
240 73.5 2750 968 U7 LX9 FF240 0.430
380 173 6540 23 Q7 LX9 FF380 0.430
400 173 6540 23 V7 LX9 FF380 0.430
415 218 8460 30 N7 LX9 FF415 0.430
440 218 8460 30 R7 LX9 FF415 0.430
500 262 10 300 36 S7 LX9 FF500 0.430
Specifcations
Average consumption at 20 C: inrush: 690855 VA, sealed: 6.68.1 VA.
Heat dissipation: 5.97.2 W.
Operating cycles/hour (q.y 55 C): < 2400.
48 22 60 0.23 E7 LX9 FG048 0550
110 104 411 146 F7 LX9 FG110 0550
115 104 411 146 FE7 LX9 FG110 0550
120/127 13 520 185 G7 LX9 FG127 0550
208 33 1339 49 L7 LX9 FG200 0550
220 421 1680 584 M7 LX9 FG220 0550
230 421 1680 584 P7 LX9 FG220 0550
240 506 2060 722 U7 LX9 FG240 0550
380 128 4730 164 Q7 LX9 FG380 0550
400 128 4730 164 V7 LX9 FG380 0550
415 157 5930 206 N7 LX9 FG415 0550
440 157 5930 206 R7 LX9 FG415 0550
500 194 7550 26.3 S7 LX9 FG500 0550
Specifcations
Average consumption at 20 C: inrush: 9501180 VA, sealed: 8.910.9 VA.
Heat dissipation: 89.8 W.
48 296 72 (2) LX9 FH0482 0750
110/115 187 415 (2) LX9 FH1102 0750
120/127 229 156 (2) LX9 FH1272 0750
220/230 716 1621 (2) LX9 FH2202 0750
240 88 1968 (2) LX9 FH2402 0750
380/415 222 5075 (2) LX9 FH3802 0750
500 345 7990 (2) LX9 FH5002 0750
Specifcations
Average consumption at 20 C: inrush: 560660 VA, sealed: 810 VA.
(1) Application examples: hoisting (inching, high operating rates), Main-Standby (unstable mains
supplies). These coils are particularly suited for use at higher operating temperatures
(mounting in non-ventilated compartments, enclosures, etc.).
LX9 FFppp
8
1
3
1
8
8
LX9 FFppp
8
1
3
1
8
8
LX9 FGppp
8
1
3
1
8
9
LX9 FGppp
8
1
3
1
8
9
Schemes:
page 5/146
. Schemes:
page 5/146
. Schemes:
page 5/146
. Schemes:
page 5/146
.
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
for specifc applications.(1)
5 5
5/135
5 5
Coils with short operating times (at Uc):
N/O: 60 ms,
N/C: 50 ms (a side); 20 ms (c side).
Coils with high operating rates (q.y 70 C):
3600 operating cycles/hour,
1800 for LC1 F630.
Coils with low inrush consumption.
-
-
-
-
Control
circuit
voltage
Uc
Average resistance
at 20 C 10 %
Inductance
of closed
circuit
Rectifer
Reference
(1)
Coil Reference Weight
Inrush Sealed
V W W H kg
48 4.03 43 022 DR5 TF4V LX9 FJ917 0970
110 257 246 1.3 DR5 TE4U LX9 FJ925 0970
127 32.3 302 17 DR5 TE4U LX9 FJ926 0970
220/230 995 919 5 DR5 TE4U LX9 FJ931 0970
380/415 311 3011 15 DR5 TE4S LX9 FJ936 0970
440 386 3690 19 DR5 TE4S LX9 FJ937 0970
500 478 4380 23 DR5 TE4S LX9 FJ938 0970
Specifcations
Average consumption:
inrush: 500 VA,
sealed: 23 VA
-
-
48 3.73 30.7 018 DR5 TF4V LX9 FK917 1080
110 24 204 11 DR5 TE4U LX9 FK925 1080
127 298 250 14 DR5 TE4U LX9 FK926 1080
220/230 899 770 4 DR5 TE4U LX9 FK931 1080
380/415 274 2075 12 DR5 TE4S LX9 FK936 1080
440 361 3060 16 DR5 TE4S LX9 FK937 1080
500 448 3750 19 DR5 TE4S LX9 FK938 1080
Specifcations
inrush: 550 VA,
sealed: 31 VA
Heat dissipation: 1518.3 W.
-
-
48 281 208 017 DR5 TF4V LX9 FL917 1450
110 13.5 114 077 DR5 TE4U LX9 FL924 1450
127 208 167 12 DR5 TE4U LX9 FL926 1450
220 52 425 29 DR5 TE4U LX9 FL930 1450
220/240 645 518 3.6 DR5 TE4U LX9 FL931 1450
380/400 163 1360 88 DR5 TE4S LX9 FL935 1450
415/440 204 1670 11 DR5 TE4S LX9 FL936 1450
500 312 2510 17 DR5 TE4S LX9 FL938 1450
Specifcations
inrush: 830 VA,
sealed: 47 VA
-
-
(1) Rectifer to be ordered separately: 0.100 kg.
LX9 FJppp
8
1
3
1
9
0
LX9 FJppp
8
1
3
1
9
0
LX9 FKppp
8
1
3
1
9
1
LX9 FKppp
8
1
3
1
9
1
LX9 FLppp
8
1
3
1
9
1
LX9 FLppp
8
1
3
1
9
1
Schemes:
page 5/146
. Schemes:
page 5/146
. Schemes:
page 5/146
. Schemes:
page 5/146
.
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
for specifc applications
......
5/136
5 5 5 5
References
References
Control
circuit
voltage
Uc
Average resistance
at 20 C 10 %
Inductance
of closed
circuit
Voltage
code
Reference Weight
Inrush Sealed
V W W H kg
24 112 177 11 BD LX4 FF024 0.430
48 452 715 427 ED LX4 FF048 0.430
110 217 2940 179 FD LX4 FF110 0.430
125 268 3560 223 GD LX4 FF125 0.430
220/230 84 11.100 704 MD LX4 FF220 0.430
250 105 13 000 868 UD LX4 FF250 0.430
440/460 301 48.200 4000 RD LX4 FF440 0.430
Specifcations
inrush: 543665 W,
sealed: 3.944.83 W.
-
-
24 079 169 149 BD LX4 FG024 0550
48 3.2 662 55.3 ED LX4 FG048 0550
110 149 2810 241 FD LX4 FG110 0550
125 19 3320 289 GD LX4 FG125 0550
220/230 577 10.200 890 MD LX4 FG220 0550
250 76 12.400 1140 UD LX4 FG250 0550
440/460 223 39 700 4210 RD LX4 FG440 0550
Specifcations
inrush: 737902 W,
sealed: 4.135.07 W.
-
-
24 09 192 26.3 BD LX4 FH024 0740
48 3.49 707 929 ED LX4 FH048 0740
110 168 3180 424 FD LX4 FH110 0740
125 208 3840 530 GD LX4 FH125 0740
220/230 657 11.500 1590 MD LX4 FH220 0740
250 84 13 900 1910 UD LX4 FH250 0740
440/460 255 44.000 7570 RD LX4 FH440 0740
Specifcations
inrush: 655803 W,
sealed: 3.684.53 W.
-
-
48 25 558 56 ED LX4 FJ048 0970
110 127 2660 270 FD LX4 FJ110 0970
125 158 3130 330 GD LX4 FJ125 0970
220 47 8820 910 MD LX4 FJ220 0970
250 61 10. 500 1200 UD LX4 FJ250 0970
440 236 33 750 4435 RD LX4 FJ440 0970
Specifcations
inrush: 9201140 W,
sealed: 47.5 W.
-
-
LX4 FFppp
8
1
3
1
9
3
LX4 FFppp
8
1
3
1
9
3
LX4 FHppp
8
1
3
1
9
2
LX4 FHppp
8
1
3
1
9
2
Schemes:
page 5/146
. Schemes:
page 5/146
. Schemes:
page 5/146
. Schemes:
page 5/146
.
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
d.c. supply coils
5 5
5/137
5 5
Control
circuit
voltage
Uc
Average resistance
at 20 C 10 %
Inductance
of closed
circuit
Voltage
code
Reference Weight
Inrush Sealed
V W W H kg
48 2.35 515 67 ED LX4 FK048 1080
110 115 2450 280 FD LX4 FK110 1080
125 15 2930 400 GD LX4 FK125 1080
220 44 8150 1080 MD LX4 FK220 1080
250 56 9650 1350 UD LX4 FK250 1080
440 225 31 300 5270 RD LX4 FK440 1080
Specifcations
inrush: 9901220 W,
sealed: 4.548 W.
-
-
48 17 353 405 ED LX4 FL048 1450
110 81 1680 180 FD LX4 FL110 1450
125 10 2110 230 GD LX4 FL125 1450
220 31 5160 650 MD LX4 FL220 1450
250 38 6080 815 UD LX4 FL250 1450
440 152 23 120 2910 RD LX4 FL440 1450
Specifcations
inrush: 14201920 W,
sealed: 6.512.5 W.
Operating time at Uc: closing = 6070 ms, opening = 4050.
-
-
110 61.(2) 280 (2) 026 FD LX4 FX110 (1) 3.000
125 77.(2) 410.(2) 0.33 GD LX4 FX125 (1) 3.000
220 246.(2) 1100.(2) 1 MD LX4 FX220 (1) 3.000
250 298.(2) 1330 (2) 125 UD LX4 FX250 (1) 3.000
440 92.(2) 4180.(2) 3.5 RD LX4 FX440 (1) 3.000
Specifcations
inrush: 19602420 W,
sealed: 4252 W.
-
-
110/120 FW LX4 F8FW 1650
220/240 MW LX4 F8MW 1650
380/400 QW LX4 F8QW 1650
Specifcations
110 294 734 98 FD LX4 FK055 (3) 1080
125 3.73 916 122 GD LX4 FK065 (3) 1080
220 115 2450 280 MD LX4 FK110 (3) 1080
250 15 2930 400 UD LX4 FK125 (3) 1080
440 44 8150 1080 RD LX4 FK220 (3) 1080
Specifcations
inrush: 20002200 W,
sealed: 810 W.
-
-
(1) Reference of set of 2 identical coils, to be connected in series.
(2) Value for the 2 coils in series.
(3) Order 2 coils and connect them in series.
LX4 FKppp
8
1
3
1
9
4
LX4 FKppp
8
1
3
1
9
4
Schemes:
page 5/146
. Schemes:
page 5/146
. Schemes:
page 5/146
. Schemes:
page 5/146
.
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
d.c. supply coils
5/138
5 5 5 5
References
References
Coils with short operating times (at Uc) :
N/O: 60 ms,
N/C: 20 ms.
Coils with high operating rates (q y 70 C):
3600 operating cycles/hour,
1800 for LC1 F630.
Coils with low inrush consumption.
-
-
-
-
Control
circuit
voltage
Uc
Average
resistance
at 20 C 10 %
Induc-
tance of
closed
circuit
Resistor (1) Coil
Qty
required
Reference Reference Weight
Inrush Sealed
V W W H kg
48 511 99 027 1 DR2 SC0047 LX9 FJ918 0970
110 32.3 632 17 1 DR2 SC0330 LX9 FJ926 0970
125 39.4 760 2 1 DR2 SC0390 LX9 FJ927 0970
220 123 2320 61 1 DR2 SC1200 LX9 FJ932 0970
440/460 478 9080 23 1 DR2 SC4700 LX9 FJ938 0970
Specifcations
inrush: 430 W,
sealed: 22 W.
-
-
48 467 767 022 1 DR2 SC0039 LX9 FK918 1080
110 298 470 14 1 DR2 SC0220 LX9 FK926 1080
125 37.4 637 17 1 DR2 SC0330 LX9 FK927 1080
220 115 1935 51 1 DR2 SC1000 LX9 FK932 1080
440/460 448 7050 19 1 DR2 SC3300 LX9 FK938 1080
Specifcations
inrush: 470 W.
sealed: 29 W.
-
-
48 3.43 529 020 2 DR2 SC0047 LX9 FL918 1450
110 172 272 098 2 DR2 SC0270 LX9 FL925 1450
125 208 333 12 2 DR2 SC0330 LX9 FL926 1450
220 645 1018 3.6 2 DR2 SC1000 LX9 FL931 1450
440/460 260 4010 14 2 DR2 SC3900 LX9 FL937 1450
Specifcations
inrush: 733 W.
sealed: 48 W.
-
-
(1) Resistor to be ordered separately, weight of resistor: 0.030 kg.
LX9 FJppp
8
1
3
1
9
4
LX9 FJppp
8
1
3
1
9
4
LX9 FKppp
8
1
3
1
9
6
LX9 FKppp
8
1
3
1
9
6
LX9 FLppp
8
1
3
1
9
5
LX9 FLppp
8
1
3
1
9
5
Schemes:
page 5/146
. Schemes:
page 5/146
. Schemes:
page 5/146
. Schemes:
page 5/146
.
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
d.c. supply coils
....
5 5
5/139
5 5
Wide range coils: 0.71.25 Uc.
Operating cycles/hour: y.60.(1)
Ambient temperature (operation): - 55 to + 70 C.
Control
circuit voltage
Uc
Average resistance
at 20 C 10 %
Inductance
of closed
circuit
Reference Weight
Inrush Sealed
V W W H kg
24 071 120 74 LX4 FF020 0.430
48 286 392 27 LX4 FF040 0.430
72 705 1055 66 LX4 FF060 0.430
110 13.2 1970 121 LX4 FF090 0.430
125 169 2340 149 LX4 FF100 0.430
Specifcations
inrush: 4151300 W,
sealed: 39 W.
-
-
24 052 112 9.3 LX4 FG020 0550
48 2 359 34.4 LX4 FG040 0550
72 507 984 85 LX4 FG060 0550
110 966 1840 157 LX4 FG090 0550
125 12 2230 196 LX4 FG100 0550
Specifcations
inrush: 5801820 W,
sealed: 3.19.5 W.
-
-
24 058 129 17.3 LX4 FH020 0740
48 219 400 595 LX4 FH040 0740
72 558 1110 149 LX4 FH060 0740
110 11 2120 287 LX4 FH090 0740
125 13.8 2520 353 LX4 FH100 0740
Specifcations
inrush: 5151600 W,
sealed: 2.78.5 W.
-
-
Oper-
ational
voltage
Average
resistance
at 20 C
10 %
Induc-
tance
of
closed
circuit
Coil Economy resistor
Resistors in //
Reference
of the
assembly (2)
Weight
Reference No W Reference
V W H kg
24 105 0049 LX2 FJW11 3 56 DR2 SC0056 LX5 FJW11 0970
48 48 022 LX2 FJW18 3 220 DR2 SC0220 LX5 FJW18 0970
72 96 044 LX2 FJW21 3 470 DR2 SC0470 LX5 FJW21 0970
Specifcations
inrush: 290860 W,
sealed: 1647 W.
-
-
(1) The mechanical durability of the contactor is limited to 1 million operating cycles.
(2) The set comprises: 1 coil LX2 FJ and 3 resistors DR2 SC.
LX4 FFppp
8
1
3
1
9
8
LX4 FFppp
8
1
3
1
9
8
LX4 FHppp
8
1
3
1
9
7
LX4 FHppp
8
1
3
1
9
7
Schemes:
page 5/146
. Schemes:
page 5/146
. Schemes:
page 5/146
. Schemes:
page 5/146
.
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
Wide range d.c. supply coils
5/140
5 5 5 5
Dimensions
LC1 F115 to F330
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according
to operating voltage and breaking capacity.
LC1 200500 V 6001000 V
F115, F150 10 15
F185 10 15
F225, F265 10 15
F330 10 15
(1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page
5/126).
LC1 a b b1 b2 c f G G1 J J1 L M P Q Q1 S S1 Y Z
F115 3P 163.5 162 137 265 171 131 106 80 106 120 107 147 37 295 60 20 26 44 13.5
4P 2005 162 137 265 171 131 143 80 106 120 107 147 37 295 60 20 26 44 13.5
F150 3P 163.5 170 137 301 171 131 106 80 106 120 107 150 40 26 575 20 34 44 13.5
4P 2005 170 137 301 171 131 143 80 106 120 107 150 40 26 555 20 34 44 13.5
F185 3P 1685 174 137 305 181 130 111 80 106 120 113.5 154 40 29 595 20 34 44 13.5
4P 2085 174 137 305 181 130 151 80 106 120 113.5 154 40 29 595 20 34 44 13.5
F225 3P 1685 197 137 364 181 130 111 80 106 120 113.5 172 48 21 515 25 445 44 13.5
4P 2085 197 137 364 181 130 151 80 106 120 113.5 172 48 17 475 25 445 44 13.5
F265 3P 2015 203 145 375 213 147 142 96 106 120 141 178 48 39 665 25 445 38 215
4P 2445 203 145 375 213 147 190 96 106 120 141 178 48 34 665 25 445 38 215
F330 3P 213 206 145 375 219 147 1545 96 106 120 145 181 48 43 74 25 445 38 205
4P 261 206 145 375 219 147 2025 96 106 120 145 181 48 43 74 25 445 38 205
f = minimum distance required for coil removal.
LC1 F400 and F500
LC1 200500 V 6001000 V
F400 15 20
F500 15 20
(1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page
5/126).
LC1 a b b2 c f G
supplied
G .
min.
G .
max.
G1
supplied
G1 .
min
G1 .
max.
J L M P Q Q1 S
F400 2P 213 206 375 219 146 80 66 102 170 156 192 195 145 181 48 69 96 25
3P 213 206 375 219 146 80 66 102 170 156 192 195 145 181 48 43 74 25
4P 261 206 375 219 146 80 66 150 170 156 240 675 145 181 48 43 74 25
F500 2P 233 238 400 232 150 80 66 120 170 156 210 39.5 146 208 55 76 102 30
3P 233 238 400 232 150 80 66 120 170 156 210 39.5 146 208 55 46 77 30
4P 288 238 400 232 150 140 66 175 230 156 265 34.5 146 208 55 46 77 30
.
J
J
1
b
1
=
=
G1
G Z
= =
Y
L
c.
=
b
=
b
2
X
1
X
1
S1
Q
a
P P Q1
f
M
S
(1)
J
J
1
b
1
=
=
G1
G Z
= =
Y
L
c.
=
b
=
b
2
X
1
X
1
S1
Q
a
P P Q1
f
M
S
(1)
G
G1 23,5 J
1
2
0
=
=
1
8
0
=
=
L
c
=
b
=
b
2
2
0
9
56
X
1
X
1
Q1
a
P Q P
f
M
44,5 S
6xM10x35
(1)
G
G1 23,5 J
1
2
0
=
=
1
8
0
=
=
L
c
=
b
=
b
2
2
0
9
56
X
1
X
1
Q1
a
P Q P
f
M
44,5 S
6xM10x35
(1)
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113
References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113
References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113
References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113
References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117
Schemes :
page 5/147
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
5 5
5/141
5 5
LC1 F630 and F800
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating
voltage and breaking capacity.
LC1 a G
supplied
G
min
G
max
J1 Q Q1 Voltage 200500 V 6901000 V 200690 V 1000 V
F630 2P 309 180 100 195 685 102 127 LC1 F630 20 30
F630, F800 3P 309 180 100 195 685 60 89 LC1 F800 10 20
F630 4P 389 240 150 275 685 60 89 (1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 5/126).
(2) Minimum distance required for coil removal.
LC1 F780
Voltage 200500 V 6901000 V
(1) Minimum distance required for coil removal. X1 (mm) 30 35
Fixing centres of LC1 F7804 Fixing centres of LC1 F780
Q1
a
80 80 Q
2
6
4
181.(2)
64 40
6xM12x45
155
=
3
0
4
=
197
255
2
8
0
X
1
4
6
4
72
X
1
(1)
Q1
a
80 80 Q
2
6
4
181.(2)
64 40
6xM12x45
155
=
3
0
4
=
197
255
2
8
0
X
1
4
6
4
72
X
1
(1)
1
8
0
=
=
J1 G 60,5
1
8
0
=
=
J1 G 60,5
191
183 (1)
191 160 160
183 (1)
60 12xM12x45 26 = =
3
4
8
4
0
0
2
2
2
6
3P=702, 4P=862
X
1
X
1
=
2
8
0
=
4
3
4
165
255
....
191
183 (1)
191 160 160
183 (1)
60 12xM12x45 26 = =
3
4
8
4
0
0
2
2
2
6
3P=702, 4P=862
X
1
X
1
=
2
8
0
=
4
3
4
165
255
....
102 240 90 190 240
1
8
0
1
2
7
1
2
7
102 240 90 190 240
1
8
0
1
2
7
1
2
7
132 240 90 240
1
8
0
1
2
7
1
2
7
132 240 90 240
1
8
0
1
2
7
1
2
7
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113
References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113
References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113
References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113
References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117
Schemes :
page 5/147
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
5/142
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
Dimensions
LC1 F1700 and LC1 F2100
Voltage 200500 V 6901000 V
(1) Minimum distance required for coil removal. X1 (mm) 90 100
Fixing centres of LC1 F1700 and 2100
190
240
50 50 49,5
1
8
5
4x5x15
190
240
50 50 49,5
1
8
5
4x5x15
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113
References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113
References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113
References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113
References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117
Schemes :
page 5/147
24x5
=
= =
2
1
0
=
3
3
2
137,3 14
238,6
34
3
4
129,7 129,7
438
LC1 F1700 : 84,9
LC1 F2100 : 91
2
9
8
200.(1) 200.(1)
X
1
X
1
5 5
5/143
5 5
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
Accessories
Dimensions
Right-angled connectors LA9 Fp981 (set of 3) for rear connection
LA9 FF981 FG981 FJ981 FK981 FL981
a 15 20 25 30 40
b 18 23 29 35 48
b1 3 3 4 5 8
c 42 45 55 52 86
G 24 26 32.5 26 45
H 105 13 165 20 28
65 9 11 11 13
Right-angled connectors LA9 Fp979 (set of 3) for side connection
LA9 FF979 FG979 FJ979 FK979 FL979
a 15 20 25 30 40
b 54 58 63.5 68 117
b1 5 5 6 6 10
c 80 92 120 120 130
G 24 28 37 37 37.5
G1 20 22 29 29 35
H 36 39 41 42 76
65 9 11 11 13
Right-angled connectors LA9 Fp980 with large surface area (set of 3)
LA9 FF980 FG980 FJ980 FK980 FL980
a 35 40 50 60 100
b 705 825 985 114 154
b1 40 45 55 65 85
c 29 29 33 33 43
c1 3 3 5 5 10
G 18 20 25 29 53
H 18 20 22 26 40
H1 10 12 14 17 20
H2 605 725 845 97 132
65 9 11 11 13
(1) 7 x 10 9 x 12 11 x 14 12.5 x 15 12.5 x 15
Right-angled connectors LA9 F2100 (set of 6) for rear connection
= =
1
6
1
2
5
34 13
60 47
3
4
5
2
5
2
5
3
8
2
5
5 20
.
c
G
b
1
a
H
b
c
G
b
1
a
H
b
b
1
H
b
c
G
1
G
G
a
b
1
H
b
c
G
1
G
G
a
(1)
H
1
a.
= G =
c
c1
b
H
b
1
H
2
(1)
H
1
a.
= G =
c
c1
b
H
b
1
H
2
References :
page 5/125
References :
page 5/125
References :
page 5/125
References :
page 5/125
References :
page 5/125
References :
page 5/125
References :
page 5/125
References :
page 5/125
5/144
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
Accessories
Paralleling links (set of 4)
LA9 FF602, FG602, FH602
LA9 FF602 FG602 FH602 FK602 FL602
LA9 FK602, FL602 a 25 30 40 50 60
b 45 55 60 85 100
b1 30 35 40 55 65
c 4 5 8 10 10
G 22 26
H 37.5 45 525 70 85
H1 125 15 15 14 17
H2 22 26
1 65 9 11 11 13
2 11 11 13 11 14
Links for "star" connection of 3 poles
LA9 Fp601
LA9 FF601 FG601 FH601 FK601 FL601
a 69 100 121 140 200
b 15 20 20 30 40
c 3 3 5 5 8
6.5 x 8.5 8.5 x 10.5 10.5 x 13 11 13
.
a
=
b
=
H
1
b
1
H
c
a
=
b
=
H
1
b
1
H
c
a
=
b
=
H
1
b
1
H
c G
H
2
a
=
b
=
H
1
b
1
H
c G
H
2
b
=
=
c a
b
=
=
c a
References :
page 5/124
References :
page 5/124
References :
page 5/124
References :
page 5/124
References :
page 5/124
References :
page 5/124
References :
page 5/124
References :
page 5/124
5 5
5/145
5 5
Mounting
LC1 F115 to F330
On panel On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA, PB, PC On rails DZ5 MB on 120 mm centres
LC1 F115
F150
F185
F225
F265 F330 LC1 F115
F150
F185
F225
F265 F330 LC1 F115
F150
F185
F225
F265 F330
c.(2) 3P 171 181 213 219 c.(2) 3P 171 181 213 219 c.(2) 3P 171 181 213 219
4P 171 181 213 219 4P 171 181 213 219 4P 171 181 213 219
G 3P 80 80 96 96 G 3P 80 80 96 96 G 3P 80 80 96 96
4P 80 80 96 96 4P 80 80 96 96 4P 80 80 96 96
J 3P 265 29 445 445
4P 45 49 685 685
J1 3P 57 595 615 615
4P 755 795 855 855
LC1 F LC1 F115 to F330 LC1 F400 to F800
On 2 notched rails AM1 ECppp
LC1 F115, F150 F185, F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F780 F800
c 3P 165.(5) 176 207 213 219 232 255 255 255
4P 165.(5) 176 207 213 219 232 255 255
G (M6) 3P 80 80 96 96
4P 80 80 96 96
G1 ( 8.5) 3P 80 80
4P 80 140
G2 ( 10.5) 3P 180 See page 5/141 180
4P 240
(1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 5/126).
(2) See X1 (minimum electrical clearance) pages 5/140 and 5/141.
(3) AF1 CDppp and AF1 VAppp.
(4) This AM1 EC200 upright is required when G2 or G3 is greater than 700 mm (please consult your Regional Sales Offce).
(5) + 6 mm with time-delay block on LC1 F.
c
J G
=
J1
=

1
1
0
=
=
(1)
c
J G
=
J1
=

1
1
0
=
=
(1)
c
AF1.EA6
1
1
0
G
c
AF1.EA6
1
1
0
G DZ5 MF5
c
G
1
1
0
1
2
0
15
DZ5 MF5
c
G
1
1
0
1
2
0
15
c 25
(3)
1
2
0
AM1 EC200 AF1 CD081 + AF1 VC820
AM1 EC200
AF1 CD061+
AF1 VA618
AF1 CD061 AF1 VA618
M6
LA9 F100
AF1 CD101+
AF1 VC10
AF1 CD081+
AF1 VC820
M6
AM1 EC200
1
1
0
3
5
1
8
0
G
= =
G
AF1 VA618
M6
G1
G2
G3
(4)
c 25
(3)
1
2
0
AM1 EC200 AF1 CD081 + AF1 VC820
AM1 EC200
AF1 CD061+
AF1 VA618
AF1 CD061 AF1 VA618
M6
LA9 F100
AF1 CD101+
AF1 VC10
AF1 CD081+
AF1 VC820
M6
AM1 EC200
1
1
0
3
5
1
8
0
G
= =
G
AF1 VA618
M6
G1
G2
G3
(4)
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113
References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113
References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113
References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113
References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117
Schemes :
page 5/147
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
5/146
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
Schemes
Contactors
2, 3 and 4-pole contactors
LC1 F115 to F630
(coil LX1 F a)
LC1 F115 to F630 (coil LX4 F c)
LC1 F115 to F265 (coil LX9 F a)
LC1 F800 (coil LX8 F a/ c)
LC1 F780 a or c LC1 F1700 a or c
LC1 F2100 a or c
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
A
2
A
1
Coils
Standard a coils
LX1 FF, FG, FJFL
LX1 FH0422FH3802
LX1 FH0202FH0362
LX1 FH4402FH10002
LX1 F8p
LX1 FX
Rectifer supplied and fxed on the contactor
Standard c coils
LX4 FF, FG, FH, FJ, FK, FL, FX (1), LX4 F8p
A2 A1
A2 A1
(1) 2 coils in series.
Special a coils
LX9 FF, FG LX9 FHppp2 LX9 FJ, FK, FL LX4 F8p
(1) Breaking on a side.
Drop-out time 50 ms .
(2) Breaking on c side.
Drop-out time 20 ms .
A
2
0
3
0
4
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
7
/
L
4
T
4
/
8 A
1
A
2
0
3
0
4
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
7
/
L
4
T
4
/
8 A
1
A
2
A
1
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
7
/
L
4
T
4
/
8
A
2
A
1
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
7
/
L
4
T
4
/
8
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
7
/
L
4
T
4
/
8
A
2
A
1
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
7
/
L
4
T
4
/
8
A
2
A
1
A2 A1
A2 A1 03
A2 A1
A2 A1 03
A2 A1
A2 A1
A2 A1
A2 A1
A2 A1 A2 A1
+
A2 A1 A2 A1
+
A2 A1
A2 A1
A2 A1
A2 A1 B1 A2/B2 A1 B1 A2/B2 A1
A
2
A
1
+
0
1
(1)
(2)
A
2
A
1
+
0
1
(1)
(2)
A2 A1
+
A2 A1
+
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113
References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117
Schemes :
page 5/147
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113
References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117
Schemes :
page 5/147
5 5
5/147
5 5
Add-on blocks
1 N/O LAD N10 (1) 1 N/C LAD N01 (1) 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11 2 N/O LAD N20 2 N/C LAD N02 2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N22
1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD N13 4 N/O LAD N40 4 N/C LAD N04 2 N/O + 2 N/C (2) LAD C22 3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N31
(1) Items in brackets: See TeSys D contactors. (2) 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break.
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts with terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012 (References: pages 5/122 and 5/123)
1 N/O + 1 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C
LAD N11P LAD N11G LAD N22P LAD N22G
Dust and damp protected instantaneous auxiliary contacts
2 N/O (24-50 V) 2 N/O (5-24 V) 2 N/O protected (24-50 V) + 2 N/O standard 2 N/O protected (24-50 V) + 1 N/O + 1 N/C standard
LA1 DX20 LA1 DY20 LA1 DZ40 LA1 DZ31
Time delay auxiliary contacts
On-delay 1 N/O +1 N/C LAD Tp Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD Rp On-delay 1 N/C + 1 N/O break before make LAD Sp
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
(
9
4
)
(
9
3
)
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
(
9
4
)
(
9
3
)
(
9
2
)
(
9
1
)
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
(
9
2
)
(
9
1
)
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
1
/
N
C
5
2
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
1
/
N
C
5
2
7
2
7
1
/
N
C
6
2
5
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
7
2
7
1
/
N
C
6
2
5
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
7
2
7
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
2
8
1
/
N
C
7
2
7
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
2
8
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
7
2
7
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
8
2
8
1
/
N
C
5
2
5
1
/
N
C
7
2
7
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
8
2
8
1
/
N
C
5
2
5
1
/
N
C
7
6
7
5
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
7
/
N
O
8
8
7
6
7
5
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
7
/
N
O
8
8
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
4
8
3
/
N
O
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
4
8
3
/
N
O
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
5
5
/
N
5
6
6
7
/
N
O
6
8
5
5
/
N
5
6
6
7
/
N
O
6
8
6
6
6
5
/
N
C
5
7
/
N
O
5
8
6
6
6
5
/
N
C
5
7
/
N
O
5
8
5
5
/
N
C
6
7
/
N
O
6
8
5
5
/
N
C
6
7
/
N
O
6
8
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113
References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
Characteristics :
pages 5/106 to 5/113
References :
pages 5/114 to 5/117
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
Schemes (continued)
5/148
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
TeSys F reversing contactors and changeover .
contactor pairs
Pre-assembled
LC2 F115 to F265 (reverser supplied on 2 bars which can be used for fxing the device)
f - Minimum distance required for coil removal. Bar fxing centres
Vertical: 120 mm
Horizontal: a2 see table
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity.
LC1 200500 V 6601000 V
F115, F150 10 15
F185 10 15
F225, F265 10 15
LC2 a a2 b b1 c G1 J J1 L M P P1 Q1 S f
F115 3P 345 317 162 137 171 80 71 57 107 147 37 77 60 20 131 M6
4P 419 378 162 137 171 80 108 755 107 147 37 77 60 20 131 M6
F150 3P 345 317 170 137 171 80 71 57 107 150 40 71 57 20 131 M8
4P 422 381 170 137 171 80 111 755 107 150 40 71 555 20 131 M8
F185 3P 357 326 174 137 181 80 78 595 113.5 154 40 78 595 20 130 M8
4P 437 390 174 137 181 80 118 795 113.5 154 40 78 595 20 130 M8
F225 3P 357 326 197 137 181 80 78 595 113.5 172 48 62 515 25 130 M10
4P 437 390 197 137 181 80 118 795 113.5 172 48 54 475 25 130 M10
F265 3P 425 386 203 145 213 96 109 615 141 178 48 100 665 25 147 M10
4P 521 464 203 145 213 96 157 855 141 178 48 100 665 25 147 M10
1
1
0
/
1
2
0
=
=
=
G1 J1
1
2
0
= =
G1
a2
=
J1 J
L
c
b
b
1
X
1
X
1
P1
a
P P Q1
f
M
S
f
P P Q1
1
1
0
/
1
2
0
=
=
=
G1 J1
1
2
0
= =
G1
a2
=
J1 J
L
c
b
b
1
X
1
X
1
P1
a
P P Q1
f
M
S
f
P P Q1
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/116 to 5/121
Schemes :
page 5/152
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/116 to 5/121
Schemes :
page 5/152
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/116 to 5/121
Schemes :
page 5/152
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/116 to 5/121
Schemes :
page 5/152
Dimensions 5
5 5
5/149
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
contactor pairs
.
For customer assembly, fxing recommended on AM1 EC uprights, please consult your Regional Sales Offce.
2 x LC1 F115 to F330 2 x LC1 F400, F500, F630, F800
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity.
LC1 200500 V 6601000 V 200690 V 1000 V
F115, F150 10 15
F185 10 15
F225, F265 10 15
F330 10 15
F400 15 20
F500 15 20
F630 20 30
F800 10 20
2 x LC1 a b b1 c G G1 J J1 J2 J3 L P1
F115 3P 345 162 137 171 80 71 57 107 77
4P 419 162 137 171 80 108 755 107 77
F150 3P 345 170 137 171 80 71 57 107 71
4P 422 170 137 171 80 111 755 107 71
F185 3P 357 174 137 181 80 78 595 113.5 78
4P 437 174 137 181 80 118 795 113.5 78
F225 3P 357 197 137 181 80 78 595 113.5 62
4P 437 197 137 181 80 118 795 113.5 54
F265 3P 425 203 145 213 96 109 615 141 100
4P 521 203 145 213 96 157 855 141 100
F330 3P 447 206 145 219 96 124 655 145 107
4P 543 206 145 219 96 172 895 145 107
F400 3P 446 206 209 219 80 170 157 645 67 195 145 107
4P 542 206 209 219 80 170 157 1125 67 675 145 107
F500 3P 485 238 209 232 80 170 156 845 66 39.5 146 112
4P 595 238 209 232 140 230 156 795 66 34.5 146 112
F630 3P 636 304 280 255 180 139 685 155 137
4P 796 304 280 255 240 139 885 155 137
F800 3P 636 304 280 255 180 139 685 155 137 .
(1) Except LC1 F630 and F800 : 4 x 10.5.
(2) Except LC1 F630 and F800.
For other dimensions: see pages 5/140 and 5/141.
1
1
0
/
1
2
0
=
=
=
G1 J1
= =
G1
=
J1 J
a
b
P1
L
c
b
b
1
X
1
X
1
1
1
0
/
1
2
0
=
=
=
G1 J1
= =
G1
=
J1 J
a
b
P1
L
c
b
b
1
X
1
X
1
G
G1 J3
1
2
0

(
2
)
=
=
1
8
0
=
=
b
G J1 J1
J2
J
G1 J3
P1
a
(1) (1)
G
G1 J3
1
2
0

(
2
)
=
=
1
8
0
=
=
b
G J1 J1
J2
J
G1 J3
P1
a
(1) (1)
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/116 to 5/121
Schemes :
page 5/152
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/116 to 5/121
Schemes :
page 5/152
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/116 to 5/121
Schemes :
page 5/152
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/116 to 5/121
Schemes :
page 5/152
Dimensions (continued) 5
5/150
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
contactor pairs
Vertically mounted
For customer assembly, with mechanical interlock (MI) LA9 F, fxing recommended on AM1 EC uprights (please consult your Regional Sales Offce).
2 x LC1 identical or different ratings (LC1 F115 to F630 and F800). See pages 5/118 to 5/121.
(1) Mechanical interlock shaft.
(2) For assembly of contactors of different ratings only.
(3) 4 x 6.5 for LC1 F115 to F225.
(4) 4 x 6.5 for LC1 F265.
(5) Mechanical interlock guide bracket.
(6) 4 x 8.5 for LC1 F400, F500 or
4 x 10.5 for LC1 F630 and F800.
Assembly A (7) - Mechanical interlock reference Assembly B (7) - Mechanical interlock reference
G3 3P G3 4P H min H max H1 min H1 maxJ1 3P J1 4P G1 3P G1 4P G3 3P G3 4P G5 3P G5 4P H min H max
LA9 FF4F 0 0 200 310 80 190 137 1555 LA9 FH4F 96 96 21 27 60 83 240 380
LA9 FG4F 3 4 210 300 90 180 139.5 1595 LA9 FJ4F 80 80 45 26 83 83 250 380
LA9 FG4G 0 0 220 310 100 190 139.5 1595 LA9 FK4F 80 140 45 26 83 83 270 380
J2 3P J2 4P J3 3P J3 4P J4 3P J4 4P LA9 FL4F 180 240 35 17 74 74 310 380
LA9 FF4F 137 1555 485 67 485 67 LA9 FH4G 96 96 19 23 60 83 250 380
LA9 FG4F 137 1555 53 73 54 69 LA9 FJ4G 80 80 42 22 83 83 250 380
LA9 FG4G 139.5 1595 53 73 53 73 LA9 FK4G 80 140 42 22 83 83 270 380
For customer assembly, fxing recommended on AM1 EC uprights,.
2 x LC1 F780
X1 and fxings, see page 5/141.
LA9 FL4G 180 240 33 13 74 74 310 380
H1 minH1 maxJ1 3P J1 4P J2 3P J2 4P J4 3P J4 4P
LA9 FH4F 110 250 1575 1815 137 1555 485 67
LA9 FJ4F 80 210 1445 1925 137 1555 485 67
LA9 FK4F 100 210 1645 2195 137 1555 485 67
LA9 FL4F 140 210 2485 328.5 137 1555 485 67
LA9 FH4G 120 250 1575 1815 139.5 1595 53 73
LA9 FJ4G 90 220 1445 1925 139.5 1595 53 73
LA9 FK4G 110 220 1645 2195 139.5 1595 53 73
LA9 FL4G 150 220 2485 328.5 139.5 1595 53 73
Assembly C (7)
G1 3P G1 4P G2 3P G2 4P G3 3P G3 4P G4 3P G4 4P G5 3PG5 4P
LA9 FH4H 96 96 96 96 0 0 60 83 60 83
LA9 FJ4H 80 80 96 96 23 0 60 83 83 83
LA9 FK4H 80 140 96 96 23 0 60 83 83 83
LA9 FL4H 180 240 96 96 14 9. (8) 60 83 74 74
LA9 FJ4J 80 80 80 80 0 0 83 83 83 83
LA9 FK4J 80 140 80 80 0 0 83 83 83 83
LA9 FL4J 180 240 80 80 9.(8) 9. (8) 83 83 74 74
LA9 FK4K 80 140 80 140 0 0 83 83 83 83
LA9 FL4K 180 240 80 140 9.(8) 9. (8) 83 83 74 74
LA9 FL4L 180 240 180 240 0 0 74 74 74 74
H min H max H1 min H1 maxJ1 3P J1 4P J2 3P J2 4P
LA9 FH4H 250 380 130 260 1575 1815 1575 1815
LA9 FJ4H 260 380 110 230 1445 1925 1575 1815
LA9 FK4H 280 380 130 230 1645 2195 1575 1815
LA9 FL4H 330 380 170 220 2485 328.5 1575 1815
LA9 FJ4J 260 380 60 200 1445 1925 1445 1925
LA9 FK4J 280 380 100 200 1645 2195 1445 1925
LA9 FL4J 325 380 140 195 2485 329.5 1445 1925
LA9 FK4K 300 380 120 200 1645 329.5 1645 2195
(7) Only 3P for F800.
(8) In this case, G4 is greater than G5.
LA9 FL4K 345 380 160 195 2485 328.5 1645 2195
LA9 FL4L 380 380 200 200 2485 328.5 2485 328.5
1
2
0
1
2
0
H
1
80 J4
J2
J1 G3
(2)
= =
(3)
= =
(3)
80 J3
H
(1)
(1)
1
2
0
1
2
0
H
1
80 J4
J2
J1 G3
(2)
= =
(3)
= =
(3)
80 J3
H
(1)
(1)
= =
F
3
3
0
F
2
6
5
1
2
0
H
1
1
2
0
}
F
4
0
0
F
5
0
0
F
6
3
0
F
8
0
0
1
8
0
G1 G5 12,5
J1 G3(2)
80 J4
(3)
= =
(6)
(4)
H
(1)
(1)
9
(5)
J2
= =
F
3
3
0
F
2
6
5
1
2
0
H
1
1
2
0
}
F
4
0
0
F
5
0
0
F
6
3
0
F
8
0
0
1
8
0
G1 G5 12,5
J1 G3(2)
80 J4
(3)
= =
(6)
(4)
H
(1)
(1)
9
(5)
J2
F
3
3
0
F
2
6
5
H
1
1
2
0
}
F
4
0
0
F
5
0
0
F
6
3
0
F
8
0
0
1
8
0
F
3
3
0
F
2
6
5
1
2
0
}
F
4
0
0
F
5
0
0
F
6
3
0
F
8
0
0
1
8
0
J1 G3(2)
(6)
G2 G4
J2
12,5
9
= =
(4)
(6)
G1 G5 12,5
H
(1)
(5)
(1)
(5)
F
3
3
0
F
2
6
5
H
1
1
2
0
}
F
4
0
0
F
5
0
0
F
6
3
0
F
8
0
0
1
8
0
F
3
3
0
F
2
6
5
1
2
0
}
F
4
0
0
F
5
0
0
F
6
3
0
F
8
0
0
1
8
0
J1 G3(2)
(6)
G2 G4
J2
12,5
9
= =
(4)
(6)
G1 G5 12,5
H
(1)
(5)
(1)
(5)
250
X
1
=
1
8
0
=
1
8
0
4
2
0
1
0
3
4
191 160 160 191
702(LC1 F780), 862(LC1 F7804)
X
1
250
X
1
=
1
8
0
=
1
8
0
4
2
0
1
0
3
4
191 160 160 191
702(LC1 F780), 862(LC1 F7804)
X
1
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/116 to 5/121
Schemes :
page 5/152
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/116 to 5/121
Schemes :
page 5/152
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/116 to 5/121
Schemes :
page 5/152
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/116 to 5/121
Schemes :
page 5/152
Dimensions 5
5 5
5/151
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
contactor pairs
Reversing contactors for motor control LC2 F
2 x LC1 F 2 x LC1 F
Horizontally mounted Vertically mounted
Changeover contactor pairs for distribution LC2 F
2 x LC1 F 2 x LC1 F
Horizontally mounted Vertically mounted
Electrical interlocking of reversers ftted with mechanical interlock without integral electrical contacts
LA9 F
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
1
L
2
L
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
U V W
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
1
L
2
L
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
U V W
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
/
L
1
1
/
L
2
1
/
L
3
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
L3
L2
L1
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
/
L
3
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
/
L
1
1
/
L
2
1
/
L
3
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
L3
L2
L1
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
/
L
3
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
N
1
/
L
3
1
/
L
2
1
2
3
4
7
8
L
1
L
2
N
A
1
A
2
5
6
L
3
7
8
1
/
L
1
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
/
L
3
2
N
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
N
1
/
L
3
1
/
L
2
1
2
3
4
7
8
L
1
L
2
N
A
1
A
2
5
6
L
3
7
8
1
/
L
1
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
/
L
3
2
N
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
/
L
1
1
/
L
2
1
/
L
3
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
N
L3
L2
L1
7
8
1
N
7
8
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
/
L
3
2
N
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
/
L
1
1
/
L
2
1
/
L
3
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
N
L3
L2
L1
7
8
1
N
7
8
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
/
L
3
2
N
A
1
A
2
KM2
KM1
A
1
A
2
KM1
KM2
A
1
A
2
KM2
KM1
A
1
A
2
KM1
KM2
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/116 to 5/121
Schemes :
page 5/152
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/116 to 5/121
Schemes :
page 5/152
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/116 to 5/121
Schemes :
page 5/152
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/116 to 5/121
Schemes :
page 5/152
Schemes 5
5/152
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
High power changeover contactor pairs .
for distribution
...
General
A changeover contactor pair ensures continuity of operation of an installation and
energy management.
It switches between:
a power supply source M (main) which normally supplies the installation,
and a power supply source S (standby) which may be an incoming line from an
additional network or a generating set.
The supply sources may be 3-phase or 3-phase + neutral.
Supply - 3-phase
Supply 3-phase + neutral
The 2 contactors must be mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent any
paralleling, even transitory, of the two supplies.
b
b
KM1 KM2
2 4 6
1
/
1
L
1
3
/
1
L
2
5
/
1
L
3
1
/
2
L
1
3
/
2
L
2
5
/
2
L
3
2 4 6
U
/
L
1
V
/
L
2
W
/
L
3
Contacteurs-inverseurs de sources grande puissance
Circuit de commande en courant alternatif ou continu
CIDESOURCEGPTRIPH-SCH-2-B
Main Standby
Application
KM1 KM2
2 4 6
1
/
1
L
1
3
/
1
L
2
5
/
1
L
3
1
/
2
L
1
3
/
2
L
2
5
/
2
L
3
2 4 6
U
/
L
1
V
/
L
2
W
/
L
3
Contacteurs-inverseurs de sources grande puissance
Circuit de commande en courant alternatif ou continu
CIDESOURCEGPTRIPH-SCH-2-B
Main Standby
Application
2 4 6 2 4 8
U
/
L
1
V
/
L
2
N
6
W
/
L
3
8
7
/
1
N
1
/
2
L
1
3
/
2
L
2
5
/
2
L
3
7
/
2
N
KM1 KM2
1
/
1
L
1
3
/
1
L
2
5
/
1
L
3
Standby Main
Application
2 4 6 2 4 8
U
/
L
1
V
/
L
2
N
6
W
/
L
3
8
7
/
1
N
1
/
2
L
1
3
/
2
L
2
5
/
2
L
3
7
/
2
N
KM1 KM2
1
/
1
L
1
3
/
1
L
2
5
/
1
L
3
Standby Main
Application
Dimensions :
pages 5/154 and 5/155
Schemes :
page 5/155
Dimensions :
pages 5/154 and 5/155
Schemes :
page 5/155
Dimensions :
pages 5/154 and 5/155
Schemes :
page 5/155
Dimensions :
pages 5/154 and 5/155
Schemes :
page 5/155
General 5
5 5
5/153
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
for distribution
..................
Changeover contactor pairs for customer assembly: 3-phase
Vertically mounted.
Maximum operational voltage: 1000 V
Utilisation category: AC-1
Maximum temperature in the vicinity of the devices: 40 C
Maximum operational current Contactors (1) Mechanical
interlock (2)
Main Standby Main Standby
3-phase 3-phase Reference Reference Reference
1600.A. 1000.A LC1 F780 LC1 F6309 LA9 FX970
1600.A. 1600.A LC1 F780 LC1 F780 LA9 FX970
Changeover contactor pairs for customer assembly:
3-phase + neutral
Vertically mounted.
Maximum operational voltage: 1000 V
Utilisation category: AC-1
Maximum temperature in the vicinity of the devices: 40 C
Maximum operational current Contactors (1) Mechanical
interlock (2)
Main Standby Main Standby
3-phase + N 3-phase + N Reference Reference Reference
1600 A + 1000 A 1000 A + 1000 A

LC1 F78041 LC1 F63049 LA9 FX970 (3)
1600 A + 1000 A 1600 A + 1000 A

LC1 F78041 LC1 F78040 LA9 FX970.(3)
1600 A + 1600 A 1000 A + 1000 A

LC1 F7804 LC1 F63049 LA9 FX971.
1600 A + 1600 A 1600 A + 1600 A

LC1 F7804 LC1 F7804 LA9 FX971
(1) Coils to be ordered separately, see pages 5/132 to 5/137.
connecting links. To order the the 2 auxiliary contact blocks LAD Np1 required to obtain
electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors: see page 5/123.
(3) Neutral connecting link not supplied (to be ordered separately).
8
1
3
2
2
1
LA9 FX970
8
1
3
2
2
1
LA9 FX970
8
1
3
2
2
2
LA9 FX971
8
1
3
2
2
2
LA9 FX971
Dimensions :
pages 5/154 and 5/155
Schemes :
page 5/155
Dimensions :
pages 5/154 and 5/155
Schemes :
page 5/155
Dimensions :
pages 5/154 and 5/155
Schemes :
page 5/155
Dimensions :
pages 5/154 and 5/155
Schemes :
page 5/155
References 5
5/154
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
for distribution
Dimensions
Contactors used to assemble high power changeover contactor pairs LC1 F780: see page 5/141
LC1 F6309 LC1 F63049
Common side view
LC1 F78040 LC1 F78041
Common side view
(1) Minimum distance required for removal of each coil.
3-phase changeover contactor pairs
LC1 F780 + LC1 F780 + LA9 FX970: see page 5/150.
LC1 F780 + LC1 F6309 + LA9 FX970
165
2
0
2
250
1
8
0
/
1
9
0
2
8
0
3
4
8
165
2
0
2
250
1
8
0
/
1
9
0
2
8
0
3
4
8
204 160 160 178
183 183 702
3
0
6
40
(1) (1)
204 160 160 178
183 183 702
3
0
6
40
(1) (1)
3
0
6
40
204 160 160 160 178
183
(1)
183
(1)
862
3
0
6
40
204 160 160 160 178
183
(1)
183
(1)
862
1
8
0
/
1
9
0
2
8
0
4
3
4
2
0
2
165
250
1
8
0
/
1
9
0
2
8
0
4
3
4
2
0
2
165
250
60
40
2
6
4
191 160 160 173 178
183
(1)
183
(1)
862
60
40
2
6
4
191 160 160 173 178
183
(1)
183
(1)
862
2
6
4
178 173 160 160 191
183
(1)
183
(1)
862
60
40
2
6
4
178 173 160 160 191
183
(1)
183
(1)
862
60
40
1
8
0
1
8
0
4
2
0
9
6
9
250 702
1
8
0
1
8
0
4
2
0
9
6
9
250 702
References :
page 5/153
References :
page 5/153
References :
page 5/153
References :
page 5/153
References :
page 5/153
References :
page 5/153
References :
page 5/153
References :
page 5/153
Dimensions 5
5 5
5/155
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
for distribution
3-phase + neutral changeover contactor pairs
LC1 F78041 + LC1 F63049 + LA9 FX970 LC1 F78041 + LC1 F78040 + LA9 FX970
LC1 F7804 + LC1 F63049 + LA9 FX971 LC1 F7804 + LC1 F7804 + LA9 FX971
Schemes
3-phase changeover contactor pairs 3-phase + neutral changeover contactor pairs
1
8
0
1
8
0
4
2
0
9
6
9
250 862
1
8
0
1
8
0
4
2
0
9
6
9
250 862
1
8
0
1
8
0
4
2
0
1
0
3
4
250 862
1
8
0
1
8
0
4
2
0
1
0
3
4
250 862
1
8
0
1
8
0
4
2
0
9
6
9
250 862
1
8
0
1
8
0
4
2
0
9
6
9
250 862
1
8
0
1
8
0
4
2
0
1
0
3
4
250 862
1
8
0
1
8
0
4
2
0
1
0
3
4
250 862
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
/
L
1
1
/
L
2
1
/
L
3
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
L3
L2
L1
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
/
L
3
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
/
L
1
1
/
L
2
1
/
L
3
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
L3
L2
L1
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
/
L
3
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
/
L
1
1
/
L
2
1
/
L
3
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
N
L3
L2
L1
7
8
1
N
7
8
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
/
L
3
2
N
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
/
L
1
1
/
L
2
1
/
L
3
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
N
L3
L2
L1
7
8
1
N
7
8
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
/
L
3
2
N
References :
page 5/153
References :
page 5/153
References :
page 5/153
References :
page 5/153
References :
page 5/153
References :
page 5/153
References :
page 5/153
References :
page 5/153
schemes 5
5/156
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
For TeSys D contactors
References
These devices prevent inadvertent opening of a contactor in the event of a brief volt
drop or momentary supply failure.
.........
Control circuit : dc supply
For use with contactor Corresponding delayed opening device
Type (1) Contactor
reference
to be
completed
(2)
Supply voltage
50/60 Hz
Non-
adjustable
delay time (Tr)
Reference Weight
V s kg
LC1 D09,
LC1 D12, .
LC1 D18,
LC1 D25, .
LC1 D32
or
LC1 D38
LC1 DppPD 110115 155 LAZ R90F 0215
LC1 DppQD 120127 255 LAZ R90F 0215
LC1 DppTD 220 48 LAZ R90M 0215
LC1 DppVD 240 510 LAZ R90M 0215
LC1 DppWD 380 48 LAZ R90Q 0215
LC1 DppXD
.
415440 5.513 LAZ R90Q 0215
LC1 D40,
LC1 D50 .
or.
LC1 D65
LC1 DppPD 110115 051 LAZ R90F 0215
LC1 DppQD 120127 0515 LAZ R90F 0215
LC1 DppTD 220240 125 LAZ R90M 0215
LC1 DppWD 380 125 LAZ R90Q 0215
LC1 DppXD
.
415440 13 LAZ R90Q 0215
LC1 D80 LC1 DppPD 110120 041 LAZ R90F 0215
LC1 DppQD 120127 051 LAZ R90F 0215
LC1 DppTD 220 052 LAZ R90M 0215
LC1 DppVD 240 125 LAZ R90M 0215
LC1 DppWD 380 12 LAZ R90Q 0215
LC1 DppXD

415440 125 LAZ R90Q 0215
Add-on blocks for delayed opening devices
Application For use with
delayed
opening
device
Operational
voltage
Non-
adjustable
delay time
Reference Weight
V s kg
To.
double.
the delay.
time
LAZ R90F. 110127 Tr x 2 LAZ R91F 0165
LAZ R90M. 220240 Tr x 2 LAZ R91M 0165
LAZ R90Q. 380440 Tr x 2 LAZ R91Q 0165
(1) These contactors can be supplied as standard for this application or can be adapted by
replacing the coil (except for contactors LC1 D09pppp to LC1 D38pppp on which the coil is
not replaceable).
(2) Reference to be completed : see page 5/62.
Dimensions Schemes
LAZ R9pp LAZ R9pp + LC1 D LAZ R9pp + LC1 F
Other versions Delayed opening devices for use with other types of contactor.
LAZ R90F LAZ R90F
LAZ R91F LAZ R91F
55
108
114
7
7
3
3
55
108
114
7
7
3
3
F1
A
1
A
2
0 1
D +
(LAZ R)
L
(LAZ R)
F1
A
1
A
2
0 1
D +
(LAZ R)
L
(LAZ R)
F1
A
1
A
2
0 1
L +
(LAZ R)
L
(LAZ R)
F1
A
1
A
2
0 1
L +
(LAZ R)
L
(LAZ R)
References,
dimensions 5
5 5
5/157
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
For TeSys F contactors
References
These devices prevent inadvertent opening of a contactor in the event of a brief volt
drop or momentary supply failure.
.........
Control circuit : dc supply (1)
For use with contactor Corresponding delayed opening device
Type With coil Supply
voltage
50/60 Hz
Non-
adjustable
delay time (Tr)
Reference Weight
V s kg
LC1 F115
or
LC1 F150
LX4 FF110 110 25 LAZ R90F 0215
LX4 FF125 127 25 LAZ R90F 0215
LX4 FF220 220 25 LAZ R90M 0215
LX4 FF250 240 25 LAZ R90M 0215
LX4 FF375 380415 25 LAZ R90Q 0215
LX4 FF440. 440 25 LAZ R90Q 0215
LC1 F185
or
LC1 F225
LX4 FG110 110 25 LAZ R90F 0215
LX4 FG125 127 25 LAZ R90F 0215
LX4 FG220 220 25 LAZ R90M 0215
LX4 FG250 240 25 LAZ R90M 0215
LX4 FG375 380415 25 LAZ R90Q 0215
LX4 FG440. 440 25 LAZ R90Q 0215
LC1 F265
or
LC1 F330
LX4 FH110 110 25 LAZ R90F 0215
LX4 FH125 127 25 LAZ R90F 0215
LX4 FH220 220 25 LAZ R90M 0215
LX4 FH250 240 25 LAZ R90M 0215
LX4 FH375 380415 25 LAZ R90Q 0215
LX4 FH440. 440 25 LAZ R90Q 0215
LC1 F400 LX4 FJ110 110 12 LAZ R90F 0215
LX4 FJ125 127 12 LAZ R90F 0215
LX4 FJ220 220 12 LAZ R90M 0215
LX4 FJ250 240 12 LAZ R90M 0215
LX4 FJ375 380 12 LAZ R90Q 0215
LX4 FJ400 415 12 LAZ R90Q 0215
LX4 FJ440. 440 12 LAZ R90Q 0215
LC1 F500 LX4 FK110 110 12 LAZ R90F 0215
LX4 FK125 127 12 LAZ R90F 0215
LX4 FK220 220 12 LAZ R90M 0215
LX4 FK250 240 12 LAZ R90M 0215
LX4 FK375 380 12 LAZ R90Q 0215
LX4 FK400 415 12 LAZ R90Q 0215
LX4 FK440. 440 12 LAZ R90Q 0215
LC1 F630 LX4 FL110 110 12 LAZ R90F 0215
LX4 FL125 127 12 LAZ R90F 0215
LX4 FL220 220 12 LAZ R90M 0215
LX4 FL250 240 12 LAZ R90M 0215
LX4 FL375 380 12 LAZ R90Q 0215
LX4 FL400 415 12 LAZ R90Q 0215
LX4 FL440. 440 12 LAZ R90Q 0215
Add-on blocks for delayed opening devices (1)
Application For use with
delayed
opening device
Operational
voltage
Non-
adjustable
delay time
Reference Weight
V s kg
To.
double.
the delay.
time
LAZ R90F. 110127 Tr x 2 LAZ R91F 0165
LAZ R90M. 220240 Tr x 2 LAZ R91M 0165
LAZ R90Q. 380440 Tr x 2 LAZ R91Q 0165
(1) Dimensions and schemes: see page 5/156.
Other versions Delayed opening devices for use with other types of contactor.
References 5
5 5
5/158
5 5
Presentation
TeSys contactors
3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG
Presentation
In an environment subject to severe mechanical shocks, unwanted closing of a
contactor's poles and the serious consequences of this, is not permissible.
Shockproof contactors LC1 FG150.to.FG630 are equipped with an auxiliary elec-
tromechanical device which ensures that the contactor is mechanically locked in
the open position when its main electromagnet is not energised.
If the contactor is subjected to mechanical impact, from back to front or from front
to back, accidental closing of the poles is then impossible.
In addition, accidental opening of the poles (when the contactor is in the on posi-
tion), is virtually impossible due to the signifcant pull-in force characteristic of these
contactors.
.
Applications
Marine: on-board equipment, windlasses, capstans, winches, etc.
Military equipment : land, sea, launching silos..
Heavy mechanical handling systems: travelling cranes, cranes, gantries..
Conveying and handling: lifts, hoists, conveyors..
Equipment for power stations
Distribution boards
-
b
b
b
b
b
b
LC1 FG150
P
F
5
3
7
3
3
4
LC1 FG150
P
F
5
3
7
3
3
4
LC1 FG265
P
F
5
3
7
3
3
6
LC1 FG265
P
F
5
3
7
3
3
6
Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/165
Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171
References :
page 5/174
pages 5/180 and 5/181
Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/165
Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171
References :
page 5/174
pages 5/180 and 5/181
5 5 5 5
5/159
TeSys contactors
Description of shockproof device
Shockproof contactors LC1 FGppp are equipped with:
A lever 1 that is rotated by the core of the contactors electromagnet..
An auxiliary electromagnet (EV) for the locking function..
An RC circuit (Resistor-Capacitor) to limit overvoltage.
0
,
3
0
,
6
KM1
2
1
EV
Direction of impact
ON KM1
OFF KM1
BACK FRONT
Operation
In the off position (contactor open and not energised) the core 2 of the
electromagnet (EV) locks the lever 1 and therefore the contactor. .
The coils (KM1) and (EV) are energised simultaneously, the core 2 releases the
lever 1 and allows the contactor to close. .
De-energisation of the locking electromagnet (EV) is achieved by an auxiliary
contact within the contactor. .
The core 2 rests freely in lever 1.
On de-energisation of coil KM1, the moving contact drops out. Core 2, under
spring pressure, once again locks lever 1.
.
.
KM1
A
1
A
2
2
2
2
1
C
2
C
1
KM1
a
a
EV
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/165
Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171
References :
page 5/174
pages 5/180 and 5/181
Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/165
Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171
References :
page 5/174
pages 5/180 and 5/181
5 5
5/160
5 5
Operational current and power (q y 55 C)
Contactors LC1 FG150 LC1 FG185 LC1 FG265 LC1 FG400 LC1 FG500 LC1 FG630
Operational current A 150 185 265 400 500 630
Operational power
Standard power ratings .
of motors)
220/230 V kW 40 55 75 110 147 200
hp 54 75 100 150 200 270
380/400 V kW 75 90 132 200 250 335
hp 100 185 180 270 340 450
415 V kW 80 100 140 220 280 375
hp 110 136 180 300 380 500
440 V kW 80 100 140 250 295 400
hp 110 136 190 340 400 545
500 V kW 90 110 160 257 355 400
hp 125 150 220 350 480 545
660/690 V kW 100 110 160 280 335 450
hp 136 150 220 380 450 600
1000 V kW 65 100 147 185 335 450
hp 85 136 200 250 450 610
Maximum operating rate (operating cycles/hour) (1)
On-load factor Operational power LC1 FG150 LC1 FG185 LC1 FG265 LC1 FG400 LC1 FG500 LC1 FG630
y 85 % P 750 750 750 500 500 500
y 85 % 05.P 2000 2000 2000 1200 1200 1200
y 25 % P 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200
(1) Depending on the operational power and the on-load factor (q y 55 C)
Electrical durability in utilisation category AC-3 (Ue y 440 V)
20 40 70 30 50 60 80 100 200 300 400 500 600 800
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
2
4
6
8
10
L
C
1

F
G
1
5
0
L
C
1

F
G
2
6
5
L
C
1

F
G
1
8
5
L
C
1

F
G
4
0
0
1000
L
C
1

F
G
5
0
0
L
C
1

F
G
6
3
0
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in Amperes
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst running.
The current broken (Ie) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current of the motor.
Example:
Asynchronous motor with P = 55 kW - Ue = 380 V - Ie = 105 A
4 million operating cycles required.
The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 FG265
Selection
TeSys contactors
a.c. supply
According to the utilisation category and required
Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159
Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171
References :
page 5/174
pages 5/180 and 5/181
5 5 5 5
5/161
Selection (continued)
TeSys contactors
3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG .
a.c. supply
Connection Cable Csa mm
2
120 150 240
Bar Number 2 2 2
Csa mm 30 x 5 40 x 5 60 x 5
in operating cycles/hour
600 600 600 600 600 600
Operational current AC-1 y 40 C A 250 270 350 500 700 1000
y 55 C A 220 240 300 430 580 850
y 70 C (1) A 170 180 250 340 500 700
(1) Only for operation with coil supplied at Uc.
Increase in operational current by parallel connection of poles
.
Apply the following multiplying factors to the current values given above. The factors
take into account the often unbalanced current distribution between the 2 poles:
Recommended connection scheme to equalise the currents in each pole (see
opposite).
b
b
b
Electrical durability in utilisation category AC-1 (Ue y 440 V)
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
20 40 70 30 50 60 80 100 200 300 400
270 350
500 600 800
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,6
0,8
1
2
4
6
8
10
L
C
1

F
G
1
5
0
L
C
1

F
G
2
6
5
L
C
1

F
G
1
8
5
L
C
1

F
G
4
0
0
1000 2000
L
C
1

F
G
5
0
0
L
C
1

F
G
6
3
0
Example:
Control of resistive circuits (cos j.u 0.95).
The current broken (Ic) in category AC-1 is equal to the current (Ie) normally drawn by the load.
Ue = 220 V - Ic = Ie = 300 A - q = 40 C.
The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 FG400
Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159
Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171
References :
page 5/174
pages 5/180 and 5/181
5 5
5/162
5 5
TeSys contactors
a.c. supply
Thermal limits in utilisation categories AC-2/AC-4
Thermal limit
zone
Operating cycles/hour (1)
and on-load factor
Maximum current broken according to the duty requirements..
(thermal limit, ambient temperature y 55 C)
A From 150 and 15 % to 300 and 10 % 310 380 560 780 1100 1400
B From 150 and 20 % to 600 and 10 % 280 350 500 700 950 1250
C From 150 and 30 % to 1200 and 10 % 240 300 400 600 750 950
D From 150 and 55 % to 2400 and 10 % 190 240 320 450 600 720
E From 150 and 85 % to 3600 and 10 % 145 170 230 350 500 660
(1) Do not exceed the maximum limit for the mechanical operating cycles.
Counter current braking (plugging)
The current varies from the maximum plug-braking current to the rated motor current.
The current made must be compatible with the making and breaking capacities of the contactor.
In most cases, breaking occurs at a current value close to the locked rotor current and contactor selection can therefore be made using the
criteria for utilisation categories AC-2 and AC-4.
Electrical durability in utilisation categories AC-2/AC-4 (Ue y 440 V)
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
200 400 300 500 600 800 1000 2000 3000 5000 7000
0,04
0,02
0,01
0,06
0,08
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
L
C
1

F
G
1
5
0
L
C
1

F
G
2
6
5
L
C
1

F
G
1
8
5
L
C
1

F
G
4
0
0
9000 100
L
C
1

F
G
5
0
0
L
C
1

F
G
6
3
0
Example: Contactor selection
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
/
h
o
u
r
On-load factor as %
For an on-load factor of 10 % at 400 operating cycles per hour, the curve on the left
indicates zone B. If the current broken is 600 A, the above table leads to selection of
an.LC1 FG400 contactor. Referring to the electrical durability curves, it can be seen
that the contactor will be able to perform 350 000 operating cycles. Where a higher
value of electrical durability is required, 1 million operating cycles for example, an
LC1 FG630 contactor would be recommended.
Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159
Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171
References :
page 5/174
pages 5/180 and 5/181
5 5 5 5
5/163
TeSys contactors
For switching 3-phase capacitor banks,.
used for power factor correction
Switching the primaries of 3-phase transformers (LV/LV)
Switching 3-phase capacitors
Capacitors, together with the circuits to which they are connected, form oscillatory circuits which can, at the moment of switch-on, give rise to
high transient currents (> 180 In) at high frequencies (1 to 15 kHz).
The contactors are used for direct switching. The values of peak current at switch-on must not exceed the values indicated below.
An inductor or an early break resistor may be inserted in each of the three phases supplying the capacitors to reduce the peak current, if nec-
essary. This must be done when switching multiple step capacitor banks.
Inductance values are determined according to the selected operating temperature: please refer to our Motor starter solutions - Control and
protection components catalogue.
In addition, in accordance with standards IEC 60070, NF C 54 100, VDE 0560, the switching contactor must be able to withstand a continu-
ous current of 1.43 times the rated current of the capacitor bank step being switched. .
The rated operational powers given in table the below take this overload into account.
Short-circuit protection is normally provided by g1 fuses rated at 1.3 to 1.6 In.
Maximum operational power of contactors

Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour.
Electrical durability at maximum load: 100 000 operations.
With choke inductors connected, where necessary.
Operational power at 50/60 Hz Maximum
peak current
Contactor
to be used
q y 40 C q y 55 C
220 V
240 V
400 V
440 V
600 V
660 V
220 V
240 V
400 V
440 V
600 V
660 V
kvar kvar kvar kvar kvar kvar A
60 100 135 40 85 90 3200 LC1 FG150
70 125 160 50 100 100 3500 LC1 FG185
90 160 225 75 125 125 5000 LC1 FG265
125 220 300 100 160 200 8000 LC1 FG400
180 300 400 125 220 300 10.000 LC1 FG500
250 400 600 190 350 500 12.000 LC1 FG630
Switching the primaries of 3-phase transformers (LV/LV)
When a transformer is switched on, there is generally an initial current surge which can reach 20 to 40 times the rated current for the power
ratings shown below.
This current reaches its peak value almost instantaneously and then decreases in a largely exponential manner, quickly dropping back down to
its steady state value.
Contactor selection
Operating rate less than 120 operating cycles/hour.
Maximum operational voltages: 1000 V 50/60 Hz.
The value of the peak magnetising current must be lower than the values indicated below.
Maximum ambient temperature: 55 C.
Contactor LC1 FG150 LC1 FG185 LC1 FG265 LC1 FG400 LC1 FG500 LC1 FG630
Maximum permissible
current peak at switch-on
A 1700 2800 3500 5500 6800 9000
Maximum operational
power (1)
220 V kVA 25 40 50 75 100 140
380 V kVA 50 75 90 130 170 225
415/440 V kVA 55 80 100 140 190 250
500 V kVA 65 95 110 170 225 280
660 V kVA 80 120 140 200 270 315
1000 V kVA 100 150 200 250 375 470
(1) Maximum operational power corresponding to a current peak at switch-on of 30 In.
Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159
Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171
References :
page 5/174
pages 5/180 and 5/181
5 5
5/164
5 5
TeSys contactors
d.c. supply
Selection guide for utilisation categories DC-1 to DC-5
Use in category DC-1 (resistive loads; time constant L/R y 1 ms)
Rated operational current Ie
Operational voltage (Ue) Number of poles
to be wired in series
Contactors
LC1 FG150 LC1 FG185 LC1 FG265 LC1 FG400 LC1 FG500 LC1 FG630
V A A A A A A
24 1 160 220 300 400 600 850
2 160 220 300 400 600 850
3 160 220 300 400 600 850
4 160 220 300 400 600 850
48/75 1 160 220 300 400 600 850
2 160 220 300 400 600 850
3 160 220 300 400 600 850
4 160 220 300 400 600 850
125 1
2 130 170 300 400 550 850
3 130 170 300 400 600 850
4 130 170 300 400 600 850
225 1
2 100 150 250 350 450 700
3 130 170 300 400 600 850
4 130 170 300 400 600 850
300 3 100 150 250 350 450 700
4 130 170 300 400 600 850
460 4 100 150 250 350 450 700
Use in category DC-2 to DC-5 (inductive loads; time constant L/R y 15 ms)
Rated operational current Ie
Operational voltage (Ue) Number of poles
to be wired in series
Contactors
LC1 FG150 LC1 FG185 LC1 FG265 LC1 FG400 LC1 FG500 LC1 FG630
V A A A A A A
24 1 140 180 280 350 550 850
2 140 180 280 350 550 850
3 140 180 280 350 550 850
4 140 180 280 350 550 850
48/75 1 140 180 280 350 550 850
2 140 180 280 350 550 850
3 140 180 280 350 550 850
4 140 180 280 350 550 850
125 1
2 100 140 250 350 550 850
3 120 160 280 350 550 850
4 120 160 280 350 550 850
225 1
2 80 100 200 280 450 700
3 100 140 250 350 550 850
4 120 160 280 350 550 850
300 3 80 100 200 280 450 700
4 120 160 280 350 550 850
460 4 80 100 200 280 450 700
Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159
Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171
References :
page 5/174
pages 5/180 and 5/181
5 5 5 5
5/165
TeSys contactors
d.c. supply
Selection guide for utilisation categories DC-1 to DC-5
Utilisation categories DC-1 to DC-5
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
1 3 8 20 2 4 6 10 30 40 50 60 80 100 140 200
0,08
0,02
0,01
0,6
0,8
1
2
4
6
8
10
L
C
1

F
G
1
5
0
L
C
1

F
G
2
6
5
L
C
1

F
G
1
8
5
L
C
1

F
G
4
0
0
300 400 600
L
C
1

F
G
5
0
0
L
C
1

F
G
6
3
0
0,1
0,04
0,06
0,2
0,4
Determining the electrical durability
The electrical durability can be read directly from the curve above, having previously calculated the power broken Pc. The following table gives,
for each utilisation category, the value of Pc according to the operational current Ie and the operational voltage Ue.
Utilisation categories Pc (Power broken)
DC-1 Non-inductive loads Pc = Ue x Ie
DC-2 Shunt motors, breaking whilst running Pc = 0.1 Ue x Ie
DC-3 Shunt motors, reversing Pc = Ue x 2.5 Ie
DC-4 Series wound motors, breaking whilst running Pc = 0.3 Ue x Ie
DC-5 Series wound motors, reversing Pc = Ue x 2.5 Ie
Counter current braking (plugging) Pc = 1.5 Ue x 1.5 Ie
Example:
Series wound motor, breaking whilst motor running, category DC-4.
P = 50 kW, Ue = 200 V, Ie = 250 A.
Select contactor LC1 FG265 with 3 poles in series.
The power broken is: Pc = 0.3 Ue x Ie = 0.3 x 200 x 250 = 15 kW.
The electrical durability read from the curve is 8 million operating cycles.
The following operating rate used at Ie must not be exceeded: 120 operating cycles/hour.
Use of poles in parallel
The electrical durability is equal to the number of operating cycles performed by a pole, multiplied by the number of poles in parallel, multiplied
by a coeffcient of 0.70.
Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159
Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171
References :
page 5/174
pages 5/180 and 5/181
5 5
5/166
5 5
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Environment
Contactor type LC1 FG150 LC1 FG185
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 V 1000
Rated impulse
Coil not connected .
to the power circuit
kV 8
Conforming to standards EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-4-1
Product certifcations N.A.T.O.
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 20 front face with shrouds LA9 F
Conforming to VDE 0106 Front face protected against direct fnger contact with shrouds LA9 F
around the device
Storage C - 60+ 80
Operation C - 5+ 55
Permissible at Uc (1) C - 40+ 70
Operating positions Without derating
.
With derating (3)
Fixing A

Fixing B
Not to be used
Shock resistance (2) 12 g, 50 ms on the three axes: X, Y, Z
15 g, 11 ms on the three axes: X, Y, Z
(1) In these conditions, it is recommended that coils LX9F be used for contactor sizes FG150 to FG265.
(2) In the least favourable direction, without change of contact state (coil at Uc).
(3) Horizontal fxing:
- The operational current AC-1 is equivalent to 80% of the value indicated in the catalogue
- Breaking and making capacities not guaranteed
- Mechanical and electrical durabilities not guaranteed
Derating of pull-in and drop-out voltage
Contactors LC1 FG150 FG185 FG265 FG400 FG500 FG630
Fixing A Pull-in 75% 75% 75% 80% 80% 80%
Drop-out 105% 105% 105% 110% 110% 110%
Fixing B Pull-in 115% 115% 115% 120% 120% 120%
Drop-out 90% 90% 90% 95% 95% 95%

Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159
Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/165
References :
page 5/174
pages 5/180 and 5/181
Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159
Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/165
References :
page 5/174
pages 5/180 and 5/181
5 5 5 5
5/167
LC1 FG265 LC1 FG400 LC1 FG500 LC1 FG630
1000
1500
8
EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-4-1
N.A.T.O.
IP 20 front face with shrouds LA9 F
Front face protected against direct fnger contact with shrouds LA9 F
TH
- 60+ 80
- 5+ 55
- 40+ 70
3000
.
A

B
5 5
5/168
5 5
TeSys contactors
Number of poles 3 3
(Ue y 440 V)
In AC-3, .
y 55 C
q.y 70 C A 150/150 185/180
In AC-1, .
y 55 C
q.y 70 C A 220/170 240/180
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to V 1000 1000
Frequency limits Of the operational current
(1)
Hz 25.to.200 25.to.200
Conventional thermal current y.40 C 250 275
IEC.60947-4-1
A Making current: 10 x I in AC-3
Rated breaking capacity I rms conforming to .
IEC.60947-4-1
A Making and breaking current: 8 x I in cat. AC-3
No current fowing for preceding .
60 minutes with y 40 C
For.15.or.10.s A 1200 1500
For 30 s A 700 920
For 1 mn A 600 740
For 3 mn A 450 500
For 10 mn A 350 400
Fuse protection
against short-circuits
(U y 440 V)
Motor circuit (type aM) A 160 200
With thermal overload relay
(type gG)
A 200 315
gG fuses A 250 315
Average impedance per pole At Ith and 50 Hz mW 0.35 0.33
Power dissipation per pole
for the above operational currents
AC-3 W 8 12
AC-1 W 22 25
Cabling
Minimum c.s.a.
Bar No. of bars 2 2
Bar mm 25 x 3 25 x 3
Cable with lug mm
2
120 150
2
120 150
Bolt diameter mm 8 8
Tightening torque Power circuit connections Nm 18 18
(1) Sine wave without interference. Above these values, please consult your Regional Sales Offce.
Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159
Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/165
References :
page 5/174
pages 5/180 and 5/181
5 5 5 5
5/169
3 3 3 3
265/250 400/340 500/500 630/630
300/250 430/340 580/500 850/700
1000 1000 1000 1000
25.to.200 25.to.200 25.to.200 25.to.200
350 500 700 1000
Making current: 10 x I in AC-3
Making and breaking current: 8 x I in AC-3
2200 3600 4200 5050
1230 2400 3200 4400
950 1700 2400 3400
620 1200 1500 2200
480 1000 1200 1600
315 400 500 630
500 630 800 800
400 500 800 1000
0.3 026 018 012
21 42 45 48
37 65 88 120
2 2 2 2
32 x 4 30 x 5 40 x 5 60 x 5
240 2 x 150 2 x 240
240
10 10 10 12
35 35 35 58
5 5
5/170
5 5
TeSys contactors
Control circuit characteristics with LX1 coil
Rated control
50 or 60 Hz V 48440
Control voltage
limits..
( y 55 C)
50 or 60 Hz
coils
Operation 08511.Uc
Drop-out 0.350.55 Uc
40400 Hz
coils
Operation
Drop-out
Average
consumption
at 20 C and at Uc
a 50 Hz Inrush 50 Hz coil VA 550 805
40400 Hz
coil
VA
Cos.j 0.3 0.3
Sealed 50 Hz coil VA 45 55
40400 Hz
coil
VA
Cos.j 0.3 0.3
a 60 Hz Inrush 60 Hz coil VA 660 970
40400 Hz
coil
VA
Cos.j 0.3 0.3
Sealed 60 Hz coil VA 55 66
40400 Hz
coil
VA
Cos.j 0.3 0.3
Operating time (1) Closing "C" ms 2335 2035
Opening "O" ms 515 715
Mechanical durability at.Uc In millions of .
operating cycles
10 10
In operating cycles .
per hour
2400 2400
Cabling
Min/max c.s.a.
Flexible cable .
without cable end
1.or.2.
conductors
mm
2
1/4 1/4
Flexible cable .
with cable end
1 conductor mm
2
1/4 1/4
2 conductors mm
2
1/25 1/25
Solid cable .
without cable end
1.or.2.
conductors
mm
2
1/4 1/4
Characteristics of the locking electromagnet (shockproof device)
Control circuit voltage 50/60 Hz V 48440 48440
Inrush consumption VA 100 100
Maximum energisation time at.Uc ms 20 20
Maximum operating rate In operating cycles .
per hour
2400 2400
Mechanical durability at.Uc In millions of .
operating cycles
1 x 10
6
1 x 10
6
(1) The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles.
The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159
Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/165
References :
pages 5/178 and 5/179
pages 5/180 and 5/181
5 5 5 5
5/171
48440 110440 110440 110440

08511.Uc 08511.Uc 08511.Uc 08511.Uc
0.350.55 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 02505.Uc

650 1075 1100 1650
09 09 09 09

10 15 18 22
09 09 09 09

650 1075 1100 1650
09 09 09 09

10 15 18 22
09 09 09 09
8 14 18 20
4065 4075 4075 4080
100170 100170 100170 100200
10 10 10 10
2400 2400 2400 1200
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
1/25 1/25 1/25 1/25
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
12 12 12 12
48440 110440 110440 110440
100 100 100 100
20 20 20 20
2400 2400 2400 1200
1 x 10
6
1 x 10
6
1 x 10
6
1 x 10
6
5 5
5/172
5 5
Environment
Contact block type LAD N LAD T and LAD S LAD R
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-5-1, NF C 63-140, VDE 0660, BS 4794, EN 60947-5-1
Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 Protection against direct fnger contact IP2X
around the device
Storage C - 60+ 80
Operation C - 5+ 60
Permissible for operation at Uc C - 40+ 70
Maximum
operating altitude
Without derating m 3000
Cabling Phillips N 2 and 6 mm. Flexible or
solid cable with or without cable end
mm
2
Min: 1 x 1; max: 2 x 2.5
Instantaneous and time delay contact characteristics
Contact block type LAD N LAD T and LAD S LAD R
Number of contacts 1.or.4 2 2
Rated operational
voltage (Ue)
Up to V 660
Rated insulation
voltage (Ui)
current (Ith)
Minimum
switching capacity
U min V 17
I min mA 5
Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 and .
VDE 0660..
gG fuse
A 10
Rated making capacity Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1, I rms A a 140; c.250
500 ms A 120
100 ms A 140
Time delay
(LADT, R and S .
contact blocks)
Accuracy only valid for
setting range indicated .
on the front face
Ambient air temperature for operation C - 40+ 70 - 40+ 70
Repeat accuracy 2 % 2 %
Drift up to 0.5 million operating cycles + 15 % + 15 %
Drift depending on ambient air
temperature
0.25 % per C 0.25 % per C
Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles 30 5 5
Rated operational
power of contacts
Conforming to .
IEC.60947-5-1
V 24 48 110/127 220/230 380/400 440 600
Occasional making capacity VA 1200 2600 7000 13 000 15.000 13 000 9000

References :
page 5/175
Schemes :
page 5/181
References :
page 5/175
Schemes :
page 5/181
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Auxiliary contact blocks .
for 3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG
5 5 5 5
5/173
TeSys contactors
Auxiliary contact blocks .
for 3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG
Environment
Module type LAD T (On-delay) LAD R (Off-delay)
Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 Protection against direct fnger contact IP2X
Ambient air
temperature around
the device
Storage C - 40+ 80
For operation at Uc C - 25+ 70
Rated insulation
voltage (Ui)
Cabling Phillips N 2 and 6 mm. Flexible or
solid cable with or without cable end
mm
2
Min: 1 x 1; max: 2 x 2.5
Built-in protection Of the input By varistor By varistor
Contactor coil suppression By varistor By bidirectional peak limiting diode
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) V a.or.c.24250 a.24250
Permissible variation 0811.Uc 0811.Uc
Control type By mechanical contact only By mechanical contact only
connecting cable < 10 m
Time delay characteristics
Timing ranges s 0.12 ; 1.530 ; 25500 0.12 ; 1.530 ; 25500
Repeat accuracy 040 C 3 % (10 ms minimum) 3 % (10 ms minimum)
Reset time During time delay period ms 150 225
Immunity to
microbreaks
During time delay period ms 10 20
Minimum impulse duration ms 40
Time delay signalling By LED Illuminates during time delay period Illuminates during time delay period
Switching characteristics (solid state type)
Maximum power dissipated W 2 3.5
Leakage current mA <.5 <.5
Residual voltage V 3.3 3.3
Overvoltage protection 3 kV; 0.5 joule 3 kV; 0.5 joule
Electrical durability In millions of operating cycles 30 30
Operating diagrams
Electronic On-delay timer LAD T Electronic Off-delay timer LAD R
0
1
0
1
t
U supply
(A1 - A2)
Time delay output
Contactor coil
Red LED
Control
(A2 - B2)
Time delay output
Contactor coil
Red LED
U supply
(A1 - A2)
0
1
0
1
t
0
1
40 ms
References :
page 5/175
Schemes :
page 5/181
5 5
5/174
5 5
3-pole shockproof contactors
Rated
operational
current in
cat AC-3,
440 V/AC-1
up to
(1)
DCN
ref.
Basic reference,
to be completed by
Weight
Screw fxing,
cabling (2)
220 V
230 V
380 V
400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V
660 V
690 V 1000 V
40 75 80 80 90 100 65 150/250 CR182 LC1 FG150pp 3.430
55 90 100 100 110 110 100 185/275 CR242 LC1 FG185pp 4650
75 132 140 140 160 160 147 265/350 CR302 LC1 FG265pp 7440
110 200 220 250 257 280 185 400/500 CR432 LC1 FG400pp 9100
147 250 280 295 355 335 335 500/700 CR582 LC1 FG500pp 11.350
200 335 375 400 400 450 450 630/1000 CR852 LC1 FG630pp 18600
Note: These contactors have instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks with 2 N/O contacts, 1 N/C contact and one coil maintaining
contact.
(1) Devices approved by the DCN (French naval shipyard department) and authorised for on-board use.
(2) Power terminals can, if required, be protected against direct fnger contact by the addition of shrouds, to be ordered
separately (see page 5/176).
Volt a 48 110 115
(1)
120 208 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
LC1 FG 150FG185 50 Hz (coil LX1) E5 F5 F5 M5 P5 U5 Q5 V5 N5
60 Hz (coil LX1) E6 F6 L6 M6 U6 Q6 R6
50/60 Hz (coil LX9) E7 F7 F7 G6 L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
LC1 FG265 40400 Hz (coil LX1) E7 F7 F7 G7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
LC1 FG400FG500 40400 Hz (coil LX1) F7 F7 G7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
LC1 FG630 40400 Hz (coil LX1) F7 F7 F7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7

LC1 FG150
P
F
5
3
7
3
3
4
LC1 FG150
P
F
5
3
7
3
3
4
LC1 FG185
P
F
5
3
7
3
3
5
LC1 FG185
P
F
5
3
7
3
3
5
LC1 FG265
P
F
5
3
7
3
3
6
LC1 FG265
P
F
5
3
7
3
3
6
Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159
Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/165
Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171
pages 5/180 and 5/181
Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159
Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/165
Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171
pages 5/180 and 5/181
References
TeSys contactors
For control of motors and distribution circuits. .
5 5 5 5
5/175
References
TeSys contactors
Auxiliary contact blocks for .
Number of
contacts
Max number of blocks per contactor Composition Reference Weight
kg
Clip-on mounting
1 1 1 LAD N10 (1) 0020
1 LAD N01 (1) 0020
4 1 2 2 LAD N22 (1) 0050
4 LAD N40 (1) 0050
4 LAD N04 (1) 0050
3 1 LAD N31 (1) 0050
Number of
contacts
Max number of blocks per contactor Time delay Reference

Weight
Clip-on mounting Type Range
s kg
1 N/O
+
1 N/C
1 On-delay 0.13 (2) LAD T0 0060
0.130 LAD T2 (1) 0060
10180 LAD T4 0060
130 (3) LAD S2 0060
Off-delay 0.13 (2) LAD R0 0060
0.130 LAD R2 (1) 0060
10180 LAD R4 0060
(1) Device approved by the DCN (French naval shipyard department) and authorised for on-board use.
(3) With switching time of 40 ms 15 ms between opening of the N/C contact and closing of the N/O contact.
LAD Npp LAD Npp
LAD Tp LAD Tp
LAD Rp LAD Rp
Characteristics:
pages 5/172 and 5/173
Schemes:
page 5/181
5 5
5/176
5 5
References
TeSys contactors
Accessories for 3-pole shockproof contactors
LC1 FG
For use
with contactors
Cabling Tightening Set of 2 blocks
Set
reference
Weight
kg
LC1 FG150 and FG185 1 x 16150 mm
2.
or..
2 x 1695 mm
2
4 mm hexagonal .
socket key
LA9 F103 0560
Power terminal protection shrouds
For use
with contactors
Number of
shrouds per set
Set
reference
Weight
kg
LC1 FG150 and FG185 6 LA9 F702 (1) 0250
LC1 FG265, FG400 and FG500 6 LA9 F703 (1) 0250
LC1 FG630 6 LA9 F704 (1) 0250
Shockproof devices (locking electromagnet) (2)
Maximum
energisation
time at Uc
Inrush
consumption
For contactors Kit reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (3)
Weight
ms VA kg
20 250 LC1 FG150 and FG185 LA9 FG150603pp (1) 0200
LC1 FG265 LA9 FG265603pp (1) 0200
LC1 FG400 and FG500 LA9 FG400603pp (1) 0200
LC1 FG630 LA9 FG630603pp (1) 0200
(2) Replacement shockproof device, supplied in kit form, comprising:
- 1 locking electromagnet.
- fxings suitable for the contactor rating.
(3) Control circuit voltage:
Volt a 48 110 115/120 208 220 230/240 380 415 440
LA9 FG150 to FG265 50/60 Hz E F F M M M Q N N
LA9 FG400 to FG630 50/60 Hz F F M M M Q N N
LA9 F103 LA9 F103
LA9 FGppp LA9 FGppp
5 5 5 5
5/177
TeSys contactors
Accessories for 3-pole shockproof contactors
LC1 FG
Sets of contacts
Per pole: 2 fxed contacts, 1 moving contact , 2 defectors, 1 back-plate, clamping screws and washers.
For use
on contactors
Replacement for Reference Weight
kg
LC1 FG150 3 poles LA5 FF431 (1) 0270
LC1 FG185 3 poles LA5 FG431 (1) 0.350
LC1 FG265 3 poles LA5 FG431 (1) 0660
LC1 FG400 3 poles LA5 F400803 (1) 2000
LC1 FG500 3 poles LA5 F500803 (1) 2950
LC1 FG630 3 poles LA5 F630803 (1) 6100
Arc chambers
For use
on contactors
Replacement for Reference Weight
kg
LC1 FG150 3 poles LA5 F15050 (1) 0490
LC1 FG185 3 poles LA5 F18550 (1) 0670
LC1 FG265 3 poles LA5 F26550 (1) 0920
LC1 FG400 3 poles LA5 F40050 (1) 1.300
LC1 FG500 3 poles LA5 F50050 (1) 1850
LC1 FG630 3 poles LA5 F63050 (1) 3.150
LA5 FG431 LA5 FG431
LA5 F40050 LA5 F40050
5 5
5/178
5 5
References
TeSys contactors
Coils for 3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG
Spare or replacement parts
a.c. supply 50/60 Hz
References
Control circuit voltage Uc Voltage
code
Coil
reference
Weight
50 Hz 60 Hz
V V kg
Coils for contactors LC1 FG150
48 E6 LX1 FF040 0.430
48 E5 LX1 FF048 0.430
110 F6 LX1 FF092 0.430
115/120 G6 LX1 FF095 (1) 0.430
110/115 F5 LX1 FF110 0.430
120 FE5 LX1 FF120 0.430
208 L6 LX1 FF170 0.430
320 M6 LX1 FF184 0.430
230/240 U6 LX1 FF187 0.430
208 LE5 LX1 FF200 0.430
220/230 M5 LX1 FF220 0.430
240 U5 LX1 FF240 0.430
380 Q6 LX1 FF316 0.430
415 N6 LX1 FF340 0.430
440 R6 LX1 FF360 0.430
380 Q5 LX1 FF380 0.430
415/440 N5 LX1 FF415 0.430
Specifcations
- inrush 50 Hz: 550 VA; 60 Hz: 660 VA,
- sealed 50 Hz: 45 VA; 60 Hz: 55 VA, cos j = 0.32.
Operating cycles/hour (q = 55 C): 2400.
48 E6 LX1 FG040 0550
48 E5 LX1 FG048 0550
110 F6 LX1 FG092 0550
115/120 G6 LX1 FG095 (1) 0550
110/115 F5 LX1 FG110 0550
120 FE5 LX1 FG120 0550
208 L6 LX1 FG170 0550
320 M6 LX1 FG184 0550
230/240 U6 LX1 FG187 0550
208 LE5 LX1 FG200 0550
220/230 M5 LX1 FG220 0550
240 U5 LX1 FG240 0550
380 Q6 LX1 FG316 0550
415 N6 LX1 FG340 0550
440 R6 LX1 FG360 0550
380 Q5 LX1 FG380 0550
415/440 N5 LX1 FG415 0550
Specifcations
- inrush 50 Hz: 805 VA; 60 Hz: 970 VA,
- sealed 50 Hz: 55 VA; 60 Hz: 66 VA, cos j = 0.34.
(1) Device approved by the DCN (French naval shipyard department) and authorised for
on-board use.
..
LX1 FFppp LX1 FFppp
LX1 FGppp LX1 FGppp
Scheme :
page 5/181
Scheme :
page 5/181
5 5 5 5
5/179
TeSys contactors
Coils for 3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG
Spare or replacement parts
a.c. supply 50/60 Hz
Control circuit voltage Uc
50 and 60 Hz
Voltage
code
Coil
reference
Weight
V kg
110/120 F7 LX1 FH1102 (1) 0740
208 L7 LX1 FH2002 0740
220/230 M7 LX1 FH2202 0740
240 U7 LX1 FH2402 0740
380/415 Q7 LX1 FH3802 0740
Specifcations
- inrush 50 or 60 Hz: 600 to 700 VA,
- sealed 50 or 60 Hz: 8 to 10 VA, cos j = 0.9.
110/120 F7 LX1 FJ110 (1) 1000
208 L7 LX1 FJ200 1000
220/230 M7 LX1 FJ220 1000
230/240 U7 LX1 FJ240 1000
380/400 Q7 LX1 FJ380 1000
415/440 N7 LX1 FJ415 1000
Specifcations
- inrush 50 or 60 Hz: 1000 to 1150 VA,
110/120 F7 LX1 FK110 (1) 1150
208 L7 LX1 FK200 1150
220/230 M7 LX1 FK220 1150
230/240 U7 LX1 FK240 1150
380/400 Q7 LX1 FK380 1150
415/440 N7 LX1 FK415 1150
Specifcations
- inrush 50 or 60 Hz: 1050 to 1150 VA,
110/120 F7 LX1 FL110 (1) 1500
208 L7 LX1 FL200 1500
220/230 M7 LX1 FL220 1500
380/400 Q7 LX1 FL380 1500
415/440 N7 LX1 FL415 1500
Specifcations
- inrush 50 or 60 Hz: 1500 to 1730 VA,
(1) Device approved by the DCN (French naval shipyard department) and authorised for on-
board use.
..
LX1 FHppp LX1 FHppp
LX1 FJppp LX1 FJppp
LX1 FKppp LX1 FKppp
LX1 FLppp LX1 FLppp
Scheme :
page 5/181
Scheme :
page 5/181
5 5
5/180
5 5
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
Dimensions
LC1 FG150, FG185 and FG265
J
J
1
b
1
=
=
G1
G Z
= =
Y
L
c
=
b
=
b
2
X
1
X
1
S1
Q
a
P P Q1
f
M
S
FG150 M8x25
F1G85 M8x25
FG265 M10x35
(1)
LC1 200500 V 6001000 V
FG150 10 15
FG185 10 15
FG265 10 15
(1) Power terminal protection shroud
(see page 5/176).
LC1 a b b1 b2 c f G G1 J J1 L M P Q Q1 S S1 Y Z
FG150 181 170 137 301 180 131 106 80 106 120 116 150 40 26 575 20 34 44 13.5
FG185 183.5 174 137 305 190 130 111 80 106 120 1225 154 40 29 595 20 34 44 13.5
FG265 2175 203 145 375 222 147 142 96 106 120 150 178 48 39 665 25 445 38 215
LC1 FG400 and FG500
G
G1 23,5 J
1
2
0
=
=
1
8
0
=
=
L
c
=
b
=
b
2
2
0
9
56
X
1
X
1
Q1
a
P Q P
f
M
44,5 S
6xM10x35
(1)
LC1 200500 V 6001000 V
FG400 15 20
FG500 15 20
(1) Power terminal protection shroud
(see page 5/176).
LC1 a b b2 c f G
supplied
G
min
G
max
G1
supplied
G1
min
G1
max
J L M P Q Q1 S
FG400 237 206 375 234 146 80 66 102 223 156 192 195 160 181 48 75 74 25
FG500 257 238 400 247 150 80 66 120 223 156 210 39.5 181 208 55 78 77 30

Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159
Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/165
Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171
References :
page 5/174
Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159
Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/165
Characteristics :
pages 5/166 to 5/171
References :
page 5/174
5 5 5 5
5/181
schemes
TeSys contactors
LC1 FG630
89
321
80 80 79
2
6
4
180 (2)
64 40
6xM12x45
155
=
3
0
4
=
197
255
2
8
0
X
1
4
6
4
72
X
1
(1)
1
8
0
=
=
68,5 282 60,5
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance
according to operating voltage and breaking
capacity.
LC1 200500 V 6901000 V
FG630 20 30
(1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 5/176).
(2) Minimum distance required for coil removal.
Schemes
Contactors LC1-FG150 to FG630
A
2
0
3
0
4
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6 A
1
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
C
1
C
2
a
a
Un y 240 V
d 50-60 Hz max
Add-on blocks
1 N/O LAD N10 1 N/C LAD N01 2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N22 4 N/O LAD N40 4 N/C LAD N04 3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N31
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
(
9
4
)
(
9
3
)
(
9
2
)
(
9
1
)
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
7
2
7
1
/
N
C
6
2
5
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
7
2
7
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
8
2
8
1
/
N
C
5
2
5
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
4
8
3
/
N
O
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
Time delay auxiliary contacts
On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD Tp Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD Rp
5
5
/
N
5
6
6
7
/
N
O
6
8
6
6
6
5
/
N
C
5
7
/
N
O
5
8
Coils a
LX1 FF, FG, FH, FJ, FK and FL
A2 A1
A2 A1 03
Presentation :
pages 5/158 and 5/159
Selection :
pages 5/160 to 5/165
Characteristics:
pages 5/166 to 5/171
References:
pages 5/174, 5/178 and 5/179
5/182
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
Environment
Contactor type LC1 BL LC1 BM LC1 BP LC1 BR
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to .
IEC.60158-1/IEC.60947-4
V 1000 1000 1000 1000
Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C V 1500 1500 1500 1500
Conforming to standards IEC 60158-1, IEC 60947-4, NF C 63-110,VDE 0660, BS 5424
Product certifcations CSA, BV, RINA
Special version TH
around the device
(for operation at Uc)
Storage C - 60+ 80
Operation C - 5+ 55
Permissible C - 50+ 60
Operating positions Without derating 30 occasional, in relation to normal vertical mounting plane
Number of poles 1, 2, 3 or 4 1, 2, 3 or 4 1, 2, 3 or 4 1, 2, 3 or 4
(Ue y 440 V)
In AC-3, q.y 55 C A 750 1000 1500 1800
In AC-1, q.y 40 C
A 800 1250 2000 2750
Frequency limits
(sine wave)
Without derating Hz 50/60
Derating coeffcient 100 Hz: 0.9 - 150 Hz: 0.8 - 250 Hz: 0.7 - 400 Hz: 0.5
Maximum thermal current (Ith) q y 40 C A 800 1250 2000 2750
IEC.60158-1.and.60947-4
A 10.000 10.000 15.000 18.000
Rated breaking capacity I rms
conforming to
IEC.60158-1..
and.60947-4
up to 440 V A 10.000 10.000 15.000 18.000
500 V A 9000 9000 12.000 15.000
660-690 V A 8000 8000 9000 11.000
1000 V A 4000 4000 5000 6000
From cold state, with no current
fowing for previous 60 minutes .
at.q.y 40 C
For.1.s A 9600 9600 12.000 15.000
For.5.s A 9600 9600 12.000 15.000
For.10.s A 7000 8000 9600 12.000
For 30 s A 4800 5200 6400 8000
For 1 min. A 3500 3800 5200 6300
For 3 min. A 2100 2400 3600 4400
For 10 min. A 1200 1800 2800 3600
by fuses
U.y 440 V
Motor circuit (type aM) A 800 1200 2 x 800 (1) 2 x 1000 (1)
With thermal overload relay .
(type gl)
A 1000 1500 2 x 1000 (1) 2 x 1200 (1)
gl fuses A 800 1200 2 x 1000 (1) 2 x 1200 (1)
Average impedance per pole At Ith and 50 Hz mW 018 018 0.13 009
Power dissipated per pole AC-3 W 88 180 290 360
AC-1 W 115 280 520 680
Connection Number of bars 2 2 3 4
Bar mm 50 x 5 80 x 5 100 x5 100 x 5
Bolt diameter mm 4 x 8 4 x 10 4 x 10 4 x 10
Tightening torque Power circuit connections Nm 21 35 35 35
(1) Fuses must not be connected in parallel unless specifed by the manufacturer.
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/184 to 5/186
Dimensions and schemes :
pages 5/192 and 5/193
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/184 to 5/186
pages 5/192 and 5/193
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/184 to 5/186
pages 5/192 and 5/193
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/184 to 5/186
pages 5/192 and 5/193
Characteristics 5
5 5
5/183
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
..
Rated control voltage 50/60 Hz V 110500 110500 110500 110500
c 1,2 or 3-pole contactors V 48500 48500 48500 48500
c 4-pole contactors V 48500 48500 48500 60500
Voltage limits Operation V 08511.Uc 08511.Uc 08511.Uc 0.851.1 Ucw
Drop-out V 0.300.50 Uc 0.300.50 Uc 0.350.50 Uc 040050.Uc
Maximum consumption
(coil + economy resistor)
a
Number of
poles: 1
VA Inrush: 620 - sealed: 10
Number of
poles: 2
Number of
poles: 3
Number of
poles: 4
c.(1) Number of
poles: 1
W Inrush: 520 - sealed: 10
Number of
poles: 2
Number of
poles: 3
Number of
poles: 4
Operating time (2)..
average at Uc .
(in milliseconds)
C ms 100150 100150 100150 100150
O breaking on a side ms 50100 50100 50100 50100
O breaking on c side ms 2040 2040 2040 2040
Mechanical durability (at Uc) In millions of operating cycles 12 12 12 12
Maximum operating rate in
mechanical operating cycles
Ambient temperature y 55 C Op
cycs/h
120 120 120 120
Characteristics of instantaneous auxiliary contacts ZC4 GMp
Rated thermal current A 20
Conforming to VDE, group C V 750
gl type cartridge fuses
Conforming to .
IEC 60947-1 and VDE 0660
A 20
Operational power a supply c supply
V 110/127 220 380 415/440 500 110 220 440 500
1 million operating cycles VA/W 2000 4000 4000 4000 3500 250 250 230 200
Making and breaking capacity VA/W 14.000 23 000 35 000 45.000 35 000 1600 800 400 360
Cabling With cable end mm
2
1 or 2 x 4 mm
2
conductors
Without cable end mm
2
1 or 2 x 6 mm
2
conductors
(1) The inrush and sealed power values of d.c. electromagnets often require the use of an
intermediate relay for control.
contact of the main poles. The opening time O is measured from the moment the coil supply
is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/184 to 5/186
pages 5/192 and 5/193
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/184 to 5/186
pages 5/192 and 5/193
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/184 to 5/186
pages 5/192 and 5/193
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/184 to 5/186
pages 5/192 and 5/193
5/184
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
...
Contactors for motor control in category AC-3, from 750 to 1800 A (a or c )
3-pole contactors
in category AC-3
Rated
opera-
tional
current
in AC-3
440V
up to
Instan-
taneous
auxiliary
contacts
Basic reference,
to be completed by
(1)
Weight
220 V
230 V
380 V
400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V
660 V
690 V 1000 V
220 400 425 450 500 560 530 750 2 2 LC1 BL33p22 58000
3 1 LC1 BL33p31 58000
1 3 LC1 BL33p13 58000
4 LC1 BL33p40 58000
280 500 530 560 600 670 530 1000 2 2 LC1 BM33p22 57000
3 1 LC1 BM33p31 57000
1 3 LC1 BM33p13 57000
4 LC1 BM33p40 57000
425 750 800 800 700 750 670 1500 2 2 LC1 BP33p22 94000
3 1 LC1 BP33p31 94000
1 3 LC1 BP33p13 94000
4 LC1 BP33p40 94000
500 900 900 900 900 900 750 1800 2 2 LC1 BR33p22 129000
3 1 LC1 BR33p31 129000
1 3 LC1 BR33p13 129000
4 LC1 BR33p40 129000
Contactors for control in category AC-1, from 800 to 2750 A (a or c )
Single, 2, 3 or 4-pole contactors
Maximum
operational
current
in AC-1..
(q.y 40 C)
Number
of poles
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code
(1)
Weight
A kg
800 1 2 2 LC1 BL31p22 32.000
3 1 LC1 BL31p31 32.000
1 3 LC1 BL31p13 32.000
4 LC1 BL31p40 32.000
2 2 2 LC1 BL32p22 45000
3 1 LC1 BL32p31 45000
1 3 LC1 BL32p13 45000
4 LC1 BL32p40 45000
3 2 2 LC1 BL33p22 58000
3 1 LC1 BL33p31 58000
1 3 LC1 BL33p13 58000
4 LC1 BL33p40 58000
4 2 2 LC1 BL34p22 72000
3 1 LC1 BL34p31 72000
1 3 LC1 BL34p13 72000
4 LC1 BL34p40 72000
Volts 48 110 120 125 127 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500
a 50400 Hz F K G M P U Q V N R S
c
ED FD GD MD UD RD SD
For voltages other than those indicated above, replace the p in the reference with the the operational voltage (3 fgures) and the
type of current (2 letters: AC for a.c. supply and DC for d.c. supply). Example: 82 V d.c., the reference becomes
LC1 BP33082DC22. For coil characteristics, see pages 5/188 to 5/191.
LC1 BP33
5
2
2
6
1
2
LC1 BP33
5
2
2
6
1
2
Selection:
pages 5/194.to.5/217
Characteristics:
pages 5/182 and 5/183
Dimensions and schemes:
pages 5/192 and 5/193
Selection:
pages 5/194.to.5/217
Characteristics:
pages 5/182 and 5/183
pages 5/192 and 5/193
Selection:
pages 5/194.to.5/217
Characteristics:
pages 5/182 and 5/183
pages 5/192 and 5/193
Selection:
pages 5/194.to.5/217
Characteristics:
pages 5/182 and 5/183
pages 5/192 and 5/193
References 5
5 5
5/185
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
Contactors for control in category AC-1, from 800 to 2750 A (a or c ) (continued)
Single, 2, 3 or 4-pole contactors
Maximum
operational
current in AC-1..
(q.y 40 C)
Number
of poles
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
Basic reference,
to be completed by
(1)
Weight
A kg
1250 1 2 2 LC1 BM31p22 31.000
3 1 LC1 BM31p31 31.000
1 3 LC1 BM31p13 31.000
4 LC1 BM31p40 31.000
2 2 2 LC1 BM32p22 44000
3 1 LC1 BM32p31 44000
1 3 LC1 BM32p13 44000
4 LC1 BM32p40 44000
3 2 2 LC1 BM33p22 57000
3 1 LC1 BM33p31 57000
1 3 LC1 BM33p13 57000
4 LC1 BM33p40 57000
4 2 2 LC1 BM34p22 71000
3 1 LC1 BM34p31 71000
1 3 LC1 BM34p13 71000
4 LC1 BM34p40 71000
2000 1 2 2 LC1 BP31p22 41000
3 1 LC1 BP31p31 41000
1 3 LC1 BP31p13 41000
4 LC1 BP31p40 41000
2 2 2 LC1 BP32p22 65000
3 1 LC1 BP32p31 65000
1 3 LC1 BP32p13 65000
4 LC1 BP32p40 65000
3 2 2 LC1 BP33p22 94000
3 1 LC1 BP33p31 94000
1 3 LC1 BP33p13 94000
4 LC1 BP33p40 94000
4 2 2 LC1 BP34p22 120000
3 1 LC1 BP34p31 120000
1 3 LC1 BP34p13 120000
4 LC1 BP34p40 120000
2750 1 2 2 LC1 BR31p22 52000
3 1 LC1 BR31p31 52000
1 3 LC1 BR31p13 52000
4 LC1 BR31p40 52000
2 2 2 LC1 BR32p22 85000
3 1 LC1 BR32p31 85000
1 3 LC1 BR32p13 85000
4 LC1 BR32p40 85000
3 2 2 LC1 BR33p22 129000
3 1 LC1 BR33p31 129000
1 3 LC1 BR33p13 129000
4 LC1 BR33p40 129000
4 2 2 LC1 BR34p22 160000
3 1 LC1 BR34p31 160000
1 3 LC1 BR34p13 160000
4 LC1 BR34p40 160000
(1) See previous page.
LC1 BP33
5
2
2
6
1
2
LC1 BP33
5
2
2
6
1
2
Selection:
pages 5/194.to.5/217
Characteristics:
pages 5/182 and 5/183
pages 5/192 and 5/193
Selection:
pages 5/194.to.5/217
Characteristics:
pages 5/182 and 5/183
pages 5/192 and 5/193
Selection:
pages 5/194.to.5/217
Characteristics:
pages 5/182 and 5/183
pages 5/192 and 5/193
Selection:
pages 5/194.to.5/217
Characteristics:
pages 5/182 and 5/183
pages 5/192 and 5/193
5/186
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
Accessories and spare parts
Spare parts
Description For contactor Composition Reference Weight
kg
Instantaneous
auxiliary contact
blocks
LC1 B 1 N/O ZC4 GM1 0.030
1 N/C ZC4 GM2 0.030
Description For contactor Number of sets
required per
contactor pole
kg
Set of contacts
(1 moving contact, .
1 fxed contact)
LC1 BL 1 PA1 LB80 0420
LC1 BM 1 PA1 LB80 0420
LC1 BP 2 PA1 LB80 0420
LC1 BR 3 PA1 LB80 0420
kg
Moving contact
only (for 1 fnger)
LC1 B PA1 LB75 0220
Fixed contact only
(for 1 fnger)
LC1 B PA1 LB76 0200
Blow-out horn only
(for 1 fnger)
LC1 B PA1 LB89 0120
Arc chamber
(for 1 contactor pole)
LC1 BL PA1 LB50 3.700
LC1 BM PA1 LB50 3.700
LC1 BP PA1 PB50 6200
LC1 BR PA1 RB50 8500
Description For contactor Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Bar support
bracket
for mounting on 120
or 150 mm centres
LC1 BL to BR 2 LA9 B103 1620
Assembly of two vertically mounted contactors by the customer
kg
Mechanical
interlock and
locking device
components
LC1 B EZ2 LB0601 1280
Specifcations
Positive mechanical interlock between two vertically mounted contactors of the same or
different ratings.
Connecting rod with cranks mounted on the right-hand, pole side.
Vertical fxing centres of the two contactors: 600 mm.
-
-
-
Description Specifcation Height
mm
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Notched
mounting rails
used as uprights .
and as equipment
support
2 mm steel, .
with zinc chromate
treatment
1650 4 AM1 EC165 2460
1850 4 AM1 EC185 2760
2000 4 AM1 EC200 2980
1/4 turn sliding
clip nut and
corresponding
screw for
assembly of rails
AM1 EC
M8 10 AF1 CD081 0020
M8 x 18 10 AF1 VC820 0024
ZC4 GM1
8
1
3
3
0
7
ZC4 GM1
8
1
3
3
0
7
PA1 LB80
(PA1 LB76 + PA1 LB75)
8
1
3
3
0
8
PA1 LB89
8
1
3
3
0
9
PA1 LB80
(PA1 LB76 + PA1 LB75)
8
1
3
3
0
8
PA1 LB89
8
1
3
3
0
9
PA1 LB50
8
1
3
3
0
6
PA1 LB50
8
1
3
3
0
6
EZ2 LB0601
8
1
3
3
0
5
EZ2 LB0601
8
1
3
3
0
5
Selection:
pages 5/194.to.5/217
Characteristics:
pages 5/182 and 5/183
pages 5/192 and 5/193
Selection:
pages 5/194.to.5/217
Characteristics:
pages 5/182 and 5/183
pages 5/192 and 5/193
Selection:
pages 5/194.to.5/217
Characteristics:
pages 5/182 and 5/183
pages 5/192 and 5/193
Selection:
pages 5/194.to.5/217
Characteristics:
pages 5/182 and 5/183
pages 5/192 and 5/193
References 5
5 5
5/187
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
Electromagnet
Electromagnet EB5 KB50 Adjustment of pick-up travel and pull-in travel
Poles
Complete pole N/O pole
c or a supply adjustment characteristics with economy resistor (and rectifer on a)
Electromagnet EB5 KB50 EB5 KB50 EB5 KB50 EB5 KB50
Pick-up travel (E) mm 30 30 30 30
Pull-in travel (e) mm 10 10 10 10
Coil WB1 KBppp WB1 KBppp WB1 KBppp WB1 KBppp
Pull-in voltage V 075.Uc 075.Uc 075.Uc 075.Uc
Drop-out voltage V 0.30.5 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 0.30.5 Uc
N/O pole
Adjustment of .
application force (F) .
on the contact per pole
according to contactor
composition
1-pole daN 30 30 30 (1) 30 (2)
2-pole daN 30 30 30 (1) 30 (2)
3-pole daN 30 30 30 (1) 30 (2)
4-pole daN 30 30 30 (1) 30 (2)
(1) Each pole has 2 contacts; the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts.
(2) Each pole has 3 contacts; the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts.
E
e
Moving
circuit
Coil
Return
spring
Moving
circuit
E
e
Moving
circuit
Coil
Return
spring
Moving
circuit
F
Fixed
contact
Moving contact
Opening gap adjustment
Adjustment of
application force
Pole
spring
F
Fixed
contact
Moving contact
Opening gap adjustment
Adjustment of
application force
Pole
spring
Selection:
pages 5/194.to.5/217
References:
pages 5/184 and 5/186
pages 5/192 and 5/193
Selection:
pages 5/194.to.5/217
References:
pages 5/184 and 5/186
pages 5/192 and 5/193
Selection:
pages 5/194.to.5/217
References:
pages 5/184 and 5/186
pages 5/192 and 5/193
Selection:
pages 5/194.to.5/217
References:
pages 5/184 and 5/186
pages 5/192 and 5/193
Adjustment
characteristics 5
5/188
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
Replacement coils and accessories .
for single-pole contactors
.
References
The same coils are used for c.or.a contactor control supply.
For d.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil:
1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + 1 or 2 auxiliary contact(s) or 1 contactor).
For 50 to 400 Hz a.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil:
1 individual rectifer (to be wired),
1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + auxiliary contact(s) or 1 contactor) wired into the rectifed current
side.
b
-
b
-
-
Operating range
min-max (1)
Coil Economy resistor Rectifer
(for a only)
Coil Weight
dc ac Resis-
tance
at
20 C
10 %
I
inrush
10 %
at Un
max
Resistor Contact Reference Reference
Unit
reference
Total
resis-
tance
Qty Reference
V V W A W kg
47-51 51 10.3 DR2 SC0270 270 1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB155 1120
52-56 59 95 DR2 SC0330 330 1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB132 1120
57-64 7.3 89 DR2 SC0390 390 1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB123 1120
65-68 95 71 DR2 SC0560 560 1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB133 1120
69-79 116 69 DR2 SC0680 680 1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB121 1120
80-87 162 5.3 DR2 SC0820 820 1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB130 1120
88-94 199 47 DR2 SC1000 1000 1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB140 1120
95-108 110-125 255 4.3 DR2 SC1200 1200 1 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB134 1120
109-136 126-155 33.1 42 DR2 SC1800 1800 1 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB124 1120
137-151 156-173 509 3 DR2 SC2700 2700 2 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB122 1120
152-166 174-191 61.36 27 DR2 SC3300 3300 2 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB135 1120
167-189 192-216 784 24 DR2 SC3900 3900 2 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB136 1120
190-221 217-256 948 2.3 DR2 SC4700 4700 2 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB139 1120
222-243 257-280 123.9 19 DR2 SC6800 6800 1 LC1 DT20 LDS135 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB125 1120
244-267 281-307 1599 17 DR2 SC8200 4700.
+ 3300
1 LC1 DT20 LDS135 DR5 TE1S WB1 KB137 1120
268-318 308-365 1996 16 DR2 SC1001 5600.
+ 4700
1 LC1 DT20 UDS135 DR5 TE1S WB1 KB126 1120
319-405 366-463 2474 16 DR2 SC1201 6800.
+ 5600
1 LC1 DT20 TDS135 DR5 TE1S WB1 KB138 1120
406-446 464-500 382 11.(2) DR2 SC1001 20.000 1 LC1 DT20 VDS135 DR5 TE1S WB1 KB127 1120
447-500 5067 1 (3) DR2 SC1201 24.000 1 LC1 DT20 RDS135 WB1 KB128 1120
Specifcations
Average coil consumption (low sealed consumption):
d.c.: inrush 380520 W, sealed 0.150.20 W
a.c. (with rectifer): inrush 450620 VA, sealed 0.150.20 VA
Time constant when sealed 25 ms
Economy resistor consumption: 710 W
Operating cycles/hour at q.y 55 C: y.120
Mechanical durability at Uc: 1.2 million operating cycles
With a.c. operation: good resistance to voltage drop on inrush, non susceptibility to micro-breaks, mains harmonics: level y.7
b
-
-
b
b
b
b
b
(1) For supply voltages of less than 110 V, beware of voltage drops caused by the inrush current.
(2) 2 resistors in series: 2 x 10 000 W.
(3) 2 resistors in series: 2 x 12,000 W.
WB1 KBppp
5
2
2
6
3
4
WB1 KBppp
5
2
2
6
3
4
References 5
5 5
5/189
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
for 2-pole contactors
.
References
side.
b
-
b
-
-
Operating range
min-max (1)
(for a only)
Coil Weight
dc ac Resis-
tance
at
20 C
10 %
I
inrush
10 %
at Un
max
Resistors (2 in series) Contact Reference Reference
Unit
reference
Total
resis-
tance
Qty Reference
V V W A W kg
48-51 3.22 158 DR2 SC0068 2x68 1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB141 1120
52-56 404 13.8 DR2 SC0082
DR2 SC0100
82.
+ 100
1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB142 1120
57-62 496 125 DR2 SC0100
DR2 SC0120
100..
+ 120
1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB155 1120
63-68 586 116 DR2 SC0120 2x120 1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB132 1120
69-79 72 11 DR2 SC0150 2 x 150 1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB123 1120
80-85 96 88 DR2 SC0180
DR2 SC0220
180.
+ 220
1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB133 1120
86-98 99-113 114 86 DR2 SC0220
DR2 SC0270
220.
+ 270
1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB121 1120
99-108 114-125 16.3 66 DR2 SC0330 2x330 1 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB130 1120
109-119 126-136 197 6 DR2 SC0390 2x390 1 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB140 1120
137-173 157-196 32.5 5.3 DR2 SC0680 2x680 2 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB124 1120
174-191 197-216 497 3.8 DR2 SC1000 2x1000 2 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB122 1120
211-238 239-272 772 3 DR2 SC1500
DR2 SC1800
1500..
+ 1800
2 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB136 1120
239-279 273-318 94 3 DR2 SC1800
DR2 SC2200
1800.
+ 2200
1 LP1 DT20 LDS135 DR5 TE1S WB1 KB139 1120
280-310 319-359 128 24 DR2 SC2700 2x2700 1 LP1 DT20 UDS135 DR5 TE1S WB1 KB125 1120
311-341 360-387 160 21 DR2 SC3300 2x3300 1 LP1 DT20 TDS135 DR5 TE1S WB1 KB137 1120
342-399 388-452 197 2 DR2 SC3900 2x3900 1 LP1 DT20 TDS135 DR5 TE1S WB1 KB126 1120
400-500 453-500 257 19 DR2 SC4700
DR2 SC5600
4700..
+ 5600
.
.
1 LP1 DT20 VDS135 DR5 TE1S WB1 KB138 1120
Specifcations
b
-
-
b
b
b
b
b
WB1 KBppp
5
2
2
6
3
4
WB1 KBppp
5
2
2
6
3
4
References 5
5/190
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
.
References
side.
b
-
b
-
-
Operating range
min-max (1)
(for a only)
Coil Weight
dc ac Resis-
tance
at
20 C
10 %
I
inrush
10 %
at Un
max
Resistors (2 in .
parallel or in series)
Contact Reference Reference
Unit
reference
Total
resis-
tance
Qty Reference
V V W A W kg
47-50 185 27 DR2 SC0150 2x150// 1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB154 1120
51-55 2.35 23.5 DR2 SC0180 2x180// 1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB153 1120
56-60 3.22 185 DR2 SC0220 2x220// 1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB141 1120
61-66 404 16 DR2 SC0270 2X270// 1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB142 1120
67-72 496 145 DR2 SC0330 2x330// 1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB155 1120
73-79 586 13.5 DR2 SC0100 2x100 1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB132 1120
80-92 72 128 DR2 SC0120 2x120 1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB123 1120
93-98 108-113 96 102 DR2 SC0150
DR2 SC0180
150..
+ 180
1 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB133 1120
99-114 114-132 114 10 DR2 SC0180
DR2 SC0220
180..
+ 220
1 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB121 1120
140-159 161-181 252 6.3 DR2 SC0390
DR2 SC0470
390 .
+ 470
2 ZC4 GM2 DR5 TE1U WB1 KB134 1120
223-246 256-282 61 4 DR2 SC1000 2x1000 1 LC1 DT20 LDS135 DR5 TE1S WB1 KB135 1120
247-277 283-316 772 3.6 DR2 SC1200 2x1200 1 LC1 DT20 LDS135 DR5 TE1S WB1 KB136 1120
278-327 317-372 94 3.5 DR2 SC1500 2x1500 1 LC1 DT20 UDS135 DR5 TE1S WB1 KB139 1120
328-360 373-408 128 28 DR2 SC1500 3x1500 1 LC1 DT20 TDS135 DR5 TE1S WB1 KB125 1120
361-399 409-452 160 25 DR2 SC1800 3x1800 1 LC1 DT20 VDS135 DR5 TE1S WB1 KB137 1120
470-500 257 19 DR2 SC2700 3x2700 1 LC1 DT20 RDS135 WB1 KB138 1120
Specifcations
d.c.: inrush 9001100 W, sealed 0.71 W
a.c. (with rectifer): inrush 11001300 VA, sealed 0.71 VA
b
-
-
b
b
b
b
b
WB1 KBppp
5
2
2
6
3
4
WB1 KBppp
5
2
2
6
3
4
References 5
5 5
5/191
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
.
References
side.
b
-
b
-
-
Operating range
min-max (1)
(for a only)
Coil Weight
dc ac Resis-
tance
at
20 C
10 %
I
inrush
10 %
at Un
max
Resistors (3 in series) Contact Reference Reference
Reference
unit
Total
resis-
tance
Qty Reference
V V W A W kg
57-61 2.35 26 DR2 SC0027 3x27 1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB153 1120
62-67 3.22 21 DR2 SC0033 3x33 1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB141 1120
68-73 404 18 DR2 SC0039 3x39 1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB142 1120
74-81 496 16.3 DR2 SC0047 3x47 1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB155 1120
82-89 586 15 DR2 SC0056 3x56 1 ZC4 GM2 WB1 KB132 1120
227-251 260-288 497 5 DR2 SC0470 3x470 1 LC1 DT20 LDS135 DR5 TE1S WB1 KB122 1120
252-278 289-317 61 45 DR2 SC0560 3x560 1 LC1 DT20 UDS135 DR5 TE1S WB1 KB135 1120
279-313 318-356 772 4 DR2 SC0680 3x680 1 LC1 DT20 UDS135 DR5 TE1S WB1 KB136 1120
314-368 357-418 94 3.9 DR2 SC0820 3x820 1 LC1 DT20 TDS135 DR5 TE1S WB1 KB139 1120
369-408 419-462 128 3.2 DR2 SC1200 3x1200 1 LC1 DT20 VDS135 DR5 TE1S WB1 KB125 1120
449-500 197 25 DR2 SC1800 3x1800 1 LC1 DT20 RDS135 WB1 KB126 1120
Specifcations
b
-
-
b
b
b
b
b
WB1 KBppp
5
2
2
6
3
4
WB1 KBppp
5
2
2
6
3
4
References 5
5/192
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
..
Single, 2, 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1 B
Common side view
Single, 2 or 3-pole contactors
LC1 Bp31, Bp32 or Bp33
4-pole contactors LC1 Bp34
LC1 BL LC1 BM LC1 BP LC1 BR
Number of poles 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
a 50 50 50 50 63 63 63 63 100 100 100 100 125 125 125 125
b 59 59 59 59 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 50 50 50 50
c 16 16 16 16 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 25 25 25 25
L 345 445 540 760 345 445 540 760 385 540 760 1065 445 635 885 1065
M 285 385 480 285 385 480 325 480 700 385 575 825
M1 308 308 455 455
M2 392 392 550 550
N 121 121 121 121 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 130 130 130 130
P 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 150 150 150 150 195 195 195 195
Q1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 110 110 110 110 130 130 130 130
R 122 122 122 122 157 157 157 157 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173
S 10 10 10 10 17 17 17 17 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
T 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
9 9 9 9 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
Electrical safety clearance
Values X1 and X2 are given for a breaking capacity of 10 In (a 3-phase supply).
a 3-phase voltage LC1 BL LC1 BM LC1 BP LC1 BR
380/440 V X1 100 100 150 200
X2 150 150 200 250
500 V X1 100 100 150 200
X2 150 150 220 250
660/690 V X1 150 150 200 200
X2 200 200 250 250
1000 V X1 200 200 200 250
X2 250 250 250 300
Mechanical interlock for assembling vertically mounted reversing contactors
EZ2 LB0601
a
T S
T
2
6
0
R
290 185
N
8
5
c
b
c
3
6
5
a
T S
T
2
6
0
R
290 185
N
8
5
c
b
c
3
6
5
44
3
3
0
P P Q1
30
15
30 M
L
15
44
3
3
0
P P Q1
30
15
30 M
L
15
3
3
0
P
30
15
30 M1
L
P Q1 51
M2
15
3
3
0
P
30
15
30 M1
L
P Q1 51
M2
15
X
2
X1
X
2
X1
A

=

(
E
1
1
2
)

4
8
8
E

=

6
0
0
A

=

(
E
1
1
2
)

4
8
8
E

=

6
0
0
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/184 to 5/186
Schemes :
page 5/193
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/184 to 5/186
Schemes :
page 5/193
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/184 to 5/186
Schemes :
page 5/193
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/184 to 5/186
Schemes :
page 5/193
Dimensions 5
5 5
5/193
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
LC1 Bp31p22 LC1 Bp31p31 LC1 Bp31p13 LC1 Bp31p40
ac control circuit
Dotted lines show optional wiring and external items required.
dc control circuit
Nota : It is essential to check that the control circuit contacts have ratings compatible with the voltage and power consumption of the operating coil of the contactor.
If not, an intermediate KA relay must be ftted and wired as shown.
Dotted lines show optional wiring and external items required.
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
S3
R
KM
S1
S2 KM
+
KM
2-wire.
control
3-wire.
control
S3
R
KM
S1
S2 KM
+
KM
2-wire.
control
3-wire.
control
S3
R
KM
S1
S2 KM
KM
+
2-wire.
control
3-wire .
control
S3
R
KM
S1
S2 KM
KM
+
2-wire.
control
3-wire .
control
S3
R
KA
KM KA
S1
S2 KM
KM
+
2-wire.
control
3-wire
control
S3
R
KA
KM KA
S1
S2 KM
KM
+
2-wire.
control
3-wire
control
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/184 to 5/186
Dimensions :
page 5/192
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/184 to 5/186
Dimensions :
page 5/192
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/184 to 5/186
Dimensions :
page 5/192
Selection :
pages 5/194 to 5/217
References :
pages 5/184 to 5/186
Dimensions :
page 5/192
Schemes 5
5/194
5 5 5 5
Selection 5
Operational current and power conforming to IEC (q.y 60 C)
Contactor size LC1/
LP1
K06
LC1/
LP1
K09
LC1
K12
LC1
K16
LC1
D09
LC1
D12
LC1
D18
LC1
D25
LC1
D32
LC1
D38
LC1
D40A
Maximum operational current.
in AC-3
y 440 V A 6 9 12 16 9 12 18 25 32 38 40
Rated operational power P .
(standard motor power ratings)
220/240 V kW 15 22 3 3 22 3 4 55 75 9 11
380/400 V kW 22 4 55 75 4 55 75 11 15 185 185
415 V kW 22 4 55 75 4 55 9 11 15 185 22
440 V kW 3 4 55 75 4 55 9 11 15 185 22
500 V kW 3 4 4 55 55 75 10 15 185 185 22
660/690 V kW 3 4 4 4 55 75 10 15 185 185 30
1000 V kW
Maximum operating rate in operating cycles/hour (1)
On-load factor Operational
power
LC1
D09
LC1
D12
LC1
D18
LC1
D25
LC1
D32
LC1
D38
LC1
D40A
y 85 % P 1200 1200 1200 1200 1000 1000 1000
05.P 3000 3000 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500
y 25 % P 1800 1800 1800 1800 1200 1200 1200
Operational current and power conforming to UL, CSA .(q.y 60 C)
Contactor size LC1/
LP1
K06
LC1/
LP1
K09
LC1/
LP1
K12
LC1
D09
LC1
D12
LC1
D18
LC1
D25
LC1
D32
LC1
D38
LC1
D40A
Maximum operational current.
in AC-3
y 440 V A 6 9 12 9 12 18 25 32 40
Rated operational power P .
(standard motor power ratings .
60 Hz)
200/208 V HP 15 2 3 2 3 5 75 10 10
230/240 V HP 15 3 3 2 3 5 75 10 10
460/480 V HP 3 5 75 5 75 10 15 20 30
575/600 V HP 3 5 10 75 10 15 20 25 30
(1) Depending on the operational power and the on-load factor (q y 60 C).
..
.
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensiopns, Schemes :
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
TeSys contactors 5
For utilisation category AC-3
..
5 5
5/195
5 5
5

LC1
D50A
LC1
D65A
LC1
D80
LC1
D95
LC1
D115
LC1
D150
LC1
F185
LC1
F225
LC1
F265
LC1
F330
LC1
F400
LC1
F500
LC1
F630
LC1
F780
LC1
F800
LC1
BL
LC1
BM
LC1
BP
LC1
BR
50 65 80 95 115 150 185 225 265 330 400 500 630 780 800 750 1000 1500 1800
15 18,5 22 25 30 40 55 63 75 100 110 147 200 220 250 220 280 425 500
22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 335 400 450 400 500 750 900
25 37 45 45 59 80 100 110 140 180 220 280 375 425 450 425 530 800 900
30 37 45 45 59 80 100 110 140 200 250 295 400 425 450 450 560 800 900
30 37 55 55 75 90 110 129 160 200 257 355 400 450 450 500 600 750 900
33 37 45 45 80 100 110 129 160 220 280 335 450 475 475 560 670 750 900
.
.
45 45 65 75 100 100 147 160 185 335 450 450 450 530 530 670 750
LC1
D50A
LC1
D65A
LC1
D80
LC1
D95
LC1
D115
LC1
D150
LC1
F185
LC1
F225
LC1
F265
LC1
F330
LC1
F400
LC1
F500
LC1
F630
LC1
F780
LC1
F800
LC1
BL
LC1
BM
LC1
BP
LC1
BR
1000 1000 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 500 500 500 500 500 120 120 120 120
2500 2500 2000 2000 2000 1200 2000 2000 2000 2000 1200 1200 1200 1200 600 120 120 120 120
.
.
1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 600 600 120 120 120 120

LC1
D50A
LC1
D65A
LC1
D80
LC1
D95
LC1
D115
LC1
D150
LC1
F185
LC1
F225
LC1
F265
LC1
F330
LC1
F400
LC1
F500
LC1
F630
LC1
F780
LC1
F800
50 65 80 95 115 150 185 225 265 330 400 500 630 780 800
15 20 30 30 30 40 50 60 60 75 100 150 250 350
15 20 30 30 40 50 60 75 75 100 125 200 300 450 400
40 40 60 60 75 100 125 150 150 200 250 400 600 900 900
.
.
40 50 60 60 100 125 150 150 200 250 300 500 800 900
5
..
5/196
5 5 5 5
Selection (continued) 5
Selection according to required electrical durability, in category AC-3 (Ue y 440 V)
The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) of the motor.
Operational power in kW-50 Hz.
Example:
Asynchronous motor with P = 5.5 kW - Ue = 400 V - Ie = 11 A - Ic = Ie = 11 A.
or asynchronous motor with P = 5.5 kW - Ue = 415 V - Ie = 11 A - Ic = Ie = 11 A.
3 million operating cycles required. .
The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 D18.
Selection according to required electrical durability, in category AC-3 (Ue = 660/690 V) (1)
(1) For Ue = 1000 V, use the 660/690 V curves, but do not exceed the operational current at the operational power indicated for 1000 V
.
2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 16
18
20 30 25
32 40
37 50 65 80 115 95 150
0,5
0,6
0,8
1
1,5
2
4
6
8
10
L
C
1
-
D
0
9
L
C
1
,

L
P
1
,

L
P
4

K
0
9
L
C
1
,

L
P
1
,

L
P
4

K
0
6
L
C
1

D
1
2
L
C
1

K
1
6
L
C
1
,

L
P
1
,

L
P
4

K
1
2
L
C
1

D
1
8
L
C
1

D
2
5
L
C
1

D
3
2
L
C
1

D
3
8
L
C
1

D
4
0
A
L
C
1

D
5
0
A
L
C
1

D
6
5
A
L
C
1

D
8
0
L
C
1

D
9
5
L
C
1

D
1
1
5
L
C
1

D
1
5
0
200
0
,
5
5
0
,
7
5
1
,
5
2
,
2
3
4
5
,
5
7
,
5
1
1
1
5
1
8
,
5
2
2
2
5
3
0
230 V
400 V
0
,
7
5
1
,
5
2
,
2
4 5
,
5
7
,
5
1
1
1
5
1
8
,
5
2
2
3
0
3
7
kW
1
,
5
2
,
2
5
,
5
7
,
5
1
1
1
5
1
8
,
5
2
2
3
7
4
5
5
5
7
5
3
0
440 V
kW
kW
4
5
5
5
7
5
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 16
18
20 30 25
32 40
37 50 65 80 115 95 150
0,5
0,6
0,8
1
1,5
2
4
6
8
10
L
C
1
-
D
0
9
L
C
1
,

L
P
1
,

L
P
4

K
0
9
L
C
1
,

L
P
1
,

L
P
4

K
0
6
L
C
1

D
1
2
L
C
1

K
1
6
L
C
1
,

L
P
1
,

L
P
4

K
1
2
L
C
1

D
1
8
L
C
1

D
2
5
L
C
1

D
3
2
L
C
1

D
3
8
L
C
1

D
4
0
A
L
C
1

D
5
0
A
L
C
1

D
6
5
A
L
C
1

D
8
0
L
C
1

D
9
5
L
C
1

D
1
1
5
L
C
1

D
1
5
0
200
0
,
5
5
0
,
7
5
1
,
5
2
,
2
3
4
5
,
5
7
,
5
1
1
1
5
1
8
,
5
2
2
2
5
3
0
230 V
400 V
0
,
7
5
1
,
5
2
,
2
4 5
,
5
7
,
5
1
1
1
5
1
8
,
5
2
2
3
0
3
7
kW
1
,
5
2
,
2
5
,
5
7
,
5
1
1
1
5
1
8
,
5
2
2
3
7
4
5
5
5
7
5
3
0
440 V
kW
kW
4
5
5
5
7
5
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
0,6
0,8
1
1,5
2
3
4
6
8
10
L
C
1

D
0
9
L
C
1

D
1
2
L
C
1

D
1
8
L
C
1

D
2
5
L
C
1

D
3
2
,
L
C
1

D
3
8
L
C
1

D
4
0
A
L
C
1

D
5
0
A
L
C
1

D
6
5
A
L
C
1

D
8
0
L
C
1

D
9
5
L
C
1

D
1
1
5
L
C
1

D
1
5
0
200 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 6,6
10
11
15
17
20
22 35
33 40
42 48
50 60 90 80 100
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
0,6
0,8
1
1,5
2
3
4
6
8
10
L
C
1

D
0
9
L
C
1

D
1
2
L
C
1

D
1
8
L
C
1

D
2
5
L
C
1

D
3
2
,
L
C
1

D
3
8
L
C
1

D
4
0
A
L
C
1

D
5
0
A
L
C
1

D
6
5
A
L
C
1

D
8
0
L
C
1

D
9
5
L
C
1

D
1
1
5
L
C
1

D
1
5
0
200 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 6,6
10
11
15
17
20
22 35
33 40
42 48
50 60 90 80 100
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
TeSys contactors 5
.
5 5
5/197
5 5
Operational power in kW-50 Hz.
Example:
Asynchronous motor with P = 132 kW - Ue = 380 V - Ie = 245 A - Ic = Ie = 245 A
or asynchronous motor with P = 132 kW - Ue = 415 V - Ie = 240 A - Ic = Ie = 240 A
1.5 million operating cycles required.
The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 F330.
(1) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1 BL contactors.
Selection according to required electrical durability, in category AC-3 (Ue = 660/690 V)
Example:
Asynchronous motor with P = 132 kW - Ue = 660 V - Ie = 140 A - Ic = Ie = 140 A
1.5 million operating cycles required.
(1) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1 BL contactors.
.
20 30 40 50 60 80
90
100 400 800 1000 2000
(1)
600
0,4
0,8
1
1,5
2
4
6
8
10
5
,
5
7
,
5
1
1
1
5
1
8
,
5
2
2
2
5
3
0
4
0
5
5
1
1
0
1
1
1
5
1
8
,
5
2
2
3
0
3
7
4
5
5
5
7
5
9
0
1
1
0
1
3
2
1
6
0
2
0
0
2
5
0
3
3
5
4
0
0
5
0
0
7
5
0
9
0
0
1
1
1
5
1
8
,
5
2
2
3
0
3
7
4
5
5
5
7
5
9
0
1
3
2
2
0
0
2
8
5
4
5
7
5
2
0
0
2
2
0
1
4
7
220 V
230 V
kW
kW
kW
380 V
400 V
440 V
L
C
1

F
1
8
5
L
C
1

F
2
2
5
L
C
1

F
2
6
5
L
C
1

F
3
3
0
L
C
1

F
4
0
0
L
C
1

F
5
0
0
L
C
1

F
7
8
0
L
C
1

F
6
3
0
L
C
1

F
8
0
0
L
C
1

B
P
L
C
1

B
R
L
C
1

B
L
,

B
M
0,6
200
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
20 30 40 50 60 80
90
100 400 800 1000 2000
(1)
600
0,4
0,8
1
1,5
2
4
6
8
10
5
,
5
7
,
5
1
1
1
5
1
8
,
5
2
2
2
5
3
0
4
0
5
5
1
1
0
1
1
1
5
1
8
,
5
2
2
3
0
3
7
4
5
5
5
7
5
9
0
1
1
0
1
3
2
1
6
0
2
0
0
2
5
0
3
3
5
4
0
0
5
0
0
7
5
0
9
0
0
1
1
1
5
1
8
,
5
2
2
3
0
3
7
4
5
5
5
7
5
9
0
1
3
2
2
0
0
2
8
5
4
5
7
5
2
0
0
2
2
0
1
4
7
220 V
230 V
kW
kW
kW
380 V
400 V
440 V
L
C
1

F
1
8
5
L
C
1

F
2
2
5
L
C
1

F
2
6
5
L
C
1

F
3
3
0
L
C
1

F
4
0
0
L
C
1

F
5
0
0
L
C
1

F
7
8
0
L
C
1

F
6
3
0
L
C
1

F
8
0
0
L
C
1

B
P
L
C
1

B
R
L
C
1

B
L
,

B
M
0,6
200
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
0,6
0,8
1
1,5
2
4
6
8
10
20 30 40 50 60 80 90 100 400 800 1000 2000 200 600 118
129
170
220 305 355 485
L
C
1

F
1
8
5
L
C
1

F
2
2
5
L
C
1

F
2
6
5
L
C
1

F
3
3
0
L
C
1

F
4
0
0
L
C
1

F
5
0
0
L
C
1

F
7
8
0
L
C
1

F
8
0
0
L
C
1

F
6
3
0
L
C
1

B
P
L
C
1

B
R
L
C
1

B
L
,

B
M
0,4
kW
1
1
0
1
6
0
3
5
5
3
3
5
1
2
9
2
2
0
6
7
0
7
5
0
9
0
0
4
7
5
5
6
0
660 V
690 V
(1)
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
0,6
0,8
1
1,5
2
4
6
8
10
20 30 40 50 60 80 90 100 400 800 1000 2000 200 600 118
129
170
220 305 355 485
L
C
1

F
1
8
5
L
C
1

F
2
2
5
L
C
1

F
2
6
5
L
C
1

F
3
3
0
L
C
1

F
4
0
0
L
C
1

F
5
0
0
L
C
1

F
7
8
0
L
C
1

F
8
0
0
L
C
1

F
6
3
0
L
C
1

B
P
L
C
1

B
R
L
C
1

B
L
,

B
M
0,4
kW
1
1
0
1
6
0
3
5
5
3
3
5
1
2
9
2
2
0
6
7
0
7
5
0
9
0
0
4
7
5
5
6
0
660 V
690 V
(1)
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
TeSys contactors 5
.
5/198
5 5 5 5
Selection
Maximum operational current (open-mounted device)
Contactor size LC1/
LP1
K09
LC1/
LP1
K12
LC1
D09
LC1
DT20
LC1
D12
DT25
LC1
D18
DT32
LC1
D25
DT40
LC1
D32
LC1
D38
LC1
D40A
DT60A
LC1
D50A
LC1
D65A
DT80A
LC1/
LP1
D80
LC1
D95
LC1
D115
LC1
D150
LC1
F185
LC1
F225
LC1
F265
LC1
F330
LC1
F400
LC1
F500
LC1
F630
LC1
F780
LC1
F800
LC1
F1700
LC1
F2100
LC1
BL
LC1
BM
LC1
BP
LC1
BR
600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 200 200 120 120 120 120
Connection
Cable c.s.a. mm
2
4 4 4 4 4 6 6 10 10 35 35 35 50 50 120 120 150 185 185 240
Bar c.s.a. mm 2
30 x 5
2
40 x 5
2
60 x 5
2
100 x 5
2
60 x 5
3
100 x 5
4
100.5
2
50 x 5
2
80 x 5
2
100 x 5
2
100 x 10
Operational current in AC-1 in A,
according to the .
ambient temperature .
y 40 C A 20 20 25 20 25 32 40 50 50 60 80 80 125 125 250 250 275 315 350 400 500 700 1000 1600 1000 1700 2100.
(2)
800 1250 2000 2750
y 60 C A 20 20 25 20 25 32 40 50 50 60 80 80 125 125 200 200 275 280 300 360 430 580 850 1350 850 1450 1750 700 1100 1750 2400
y 70 C A (at UC) (1) (1) 17 (1) 17 22 28 35 35 42 56 56 80 80 160 160 180 200 250 290 340 500 700 1100 700 600 900 1500 2000
Maximum operational .
power y 60 C
220/230 V kW 8 8 9 8 9 11 14 18 18 21 29 29 45 45 80 80 90 100 120 145 170 240 350 550 350 570 700 300 425 700 1000
240 V kW 8 8 9 8 9 12 15 19 19 23 31 31 49 49 83 83 100 110 125 160 180 255 370 570 370 600 780 330 450 800 1100
380/400 V kW 14 14 15 14 15 20 25 31 31 37 50 50 78 78 135 135 165 175 210 250 300 430 600 950 600 1000 1200 500 800 1200 1600
415 V kW 14 14 17 14 17 21 27 34 34 41 54 54 85 85 140 140 170 185 220 260 310 445 630 1000 630 1050 1300 525 825 1250 1700
440 V kW 15 15 18 15 18 23 29 36 36 43 58 58 90 90 150 150 180 200 230 290 330 470 670 1050 670 1100 1350 550 850 1400 2000
500 V kW 17 17 20 17 20 23 33 41 41 49 65 65 102 102 170 170 200 220 270 320 380 660 750 1200 750 1250 1550 600 900 1500 2100
660/690 V kW 22 22 27 22 27 34 43 54 54 65 80 80 135 135 235 235 280 300 370 400 530 740 1000 1650 1000 1700 2100 800 1100 1900 2700
1000 V kW 120 120 345 345 410 450 540 640 760 950 1500 2400 1500 2500 3100 1100 1700 3000 4200
(1) Please consult your Regional Sales Offce. (2) With set of right-angled connectors LA9 F2100.
Apply the following coeffcients to the currents or power values given above; these coeffcients take into account an often unbalanced current
distribution between the poles:
b
b
b
20 25 32 10 2 4 3 6 8 1 40 50 60 80 100 125 200 400
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
1,5
2
4
6
8
10
L
C
1
,

L
P
1
,

L
P
4

K
0
9
L
C
1
,

L
P
1
,

L
P
4

K
1
2
L
C
1

D
0
9
L
C
1

D
1
2
L
C
1

D
1
8
L
C
1

D
2
5
L
C
1

D
3
2
,

L
C
1

D
3
8
L
C
1

D
4
0
A
L
C
1

D
5
0
A
L
C
1

D
6
5
A
L
C
1
,

L
P
1

D
8
0
L
C
1

D
9
5
L
C
1

D
1
1
5
L
C
1

D
1
5
0
250
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
.
20 40 50 60 80 100 200 300
400
600 800 1000 2000 4000
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
2
4
6
8
10
L
C
1

F
1
8
5
L
C
1

F
2
6
5
L
C
1

F
2
2
5
L
C
1

F
3
3
0
275 315
350
500 700
1600
L
C
1

F
4
0
0
L
C
1

F
5
0
0
L
C
1

F
6
3
0
L
C
1

F
8
0
0
L
C
1

F
7
8
0
L
C
1

B
L
,

B
M
L
C
1

B
P
L
C
1

B
R
(3)
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
Control of resistive circuits (cos u 0.95).
Example:
Ue = 220 V - Ie = 50 A q .y 40 C - Ic = Ie = 50 A.
The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: either LC1 or LP1 D50.
b
b
b
Example:
Ue = 220 V - Ie = 500 A -.q.y 40 C - Ic = Ie = 500 A.
(3) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1 F225.
b
b
b
TeSys contactors
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
5 5
5/199
5 5
Maximum operational current (open-mounted device)
Contactor size LC1/
LP1
K09
LC1/
LP1
K12
LC1
D09
LC1
DT20
LC1
D12
DT25
LC1
D18
DT32
LC1
D25
DT40
LC1
D32
LC1
D38
LC1
D40A
DT60A
LC1
D50A
LC1
D65A
DT80A
LC1/
LP1
D80
LC1
D95
LC1
D115
LC1
D150
LC1
F185
LC1
F225
LC1
F265
LC1
F330
LC1
F400
LC1
F500
LC1
F630
LC1
F780
LC1
F800
LC1
F1700
LC1
F2100
LC1
BL
LC1
BM
LC1
BP
LC1
BR
600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 200 200 120 120 120 120
Connection
Cable c.s.a. mm
2
4 4 4 4 4 6 6 10 10 35 35 35 50 50 120 120 150 185 185 240
Bar c.s.a. mm 2
30 x 5
2
40 x 5
2
60 x 5
2
100 x 5
2
60 x 5
3
100 x 5
4
100.5
2
50 x 5
2
80 x 5
2
100 x 5
2
100 x 10
Operational current in AC-1 in A,
according to the .
ambient temperature .
y 40 C A 20 20 25 20 25 32 40 50 50 60 80 80 125 125 250 250 275 315 350 400 500 700 1000 1600 1000 1700 2100.
(2)
800 1250 2000 2750
y 60 C A 20 20 25 20 25 32 40 50 50 60 80 80 125 125 200 200 275 280 300 360 430 580 850 1350 850 1450 1750 700 1100 1750 2400
y 70 C A (at UC) (1) (1) 17 (1) 17 22 28 35 35 42 56 56 80 80 160 160 180 200 250 290 340 500 700 1100 700 600 900 1500 2000
Maximum operational .
power y 60 C
220/230 V kW 8 8 9 8 9 11 14 18 18 21 29 29 45 45 80 80 90 100 120 145 170 240 350 550 350 570 700 300 425 700 1000
240 V kW 8 8 9 8 9 12 15 19 19 23 31 31 49 49 83 83 100 110 125 160 180 255 370 570 370 600 780 330 450 800 1100
380/400 V kW 14 14 15 14 15 20 25 31 31 37 50 50 78 78 135 135 165 175 210 250 300 430 600 950 600 1000 1200 500 800 1200 1600
415 V kW 14 14 17 14 17 21 27 34 34 41 54 54 85 85 140 140 170 185 220 260 310 445 630 1000 630 1050 1300 525 825 1250 1700
440 V kW 15 15 18 15 18 23 29 36 36 43 58 58 90 90 150 150 180 200 230 290 330 470 670 1050 670 1100 1350 550 850 1400 2000
500 V kW 17 17 20 17 20 23 33 41 41 49 65 65 102 102 170 170 200 220 270 320 380 660 750 1200 750 1250 1550 600 900 1500 2100
660/690 V kW 22 22 27 22 27 34 43 54 54 65 80 80 135 135 235 235 280 300 370 400 530 740 1000 1650 1000 1700 2100 800 1100 1900 2700
1000 V kW 120 120 345 345 410 450 540 640 760 950 1500 2400 1500 2500 3100 1100 1700 3000 4200
(1) Please consult your Regional Sales Offce. (2) With set of right-angled connectors LA9 F2100.
Apply the following coeffcients to the currents or power values given above; these coeffcients take into account an often unbalanced current
distribution between the poles:
b
b
b
20 25 32 10 2 4 3 6 8 1 40 50 60 80 100 125 200 400
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
1,5
2
4
6
8
10
L
C
1
,

L
P
1
,

L
P
4

K
0
9
L
C
1
,

L
P
1
,

L
P
4

K
1
2
L
C
1

D
0
9
L
C
1

D
1
2
L
C
1

D
1
8
L
C
1

D
2
5
L
C
1

D
3
2
,

L
C
1

D
3
8
L
C
1

D
4
0
A
L
C
1

D
5
0
A
L
C
1

D
6
5
A
L
C
1
,

L
P
1

D
8
0
L
C
1

D
9
5
L
C
1

D
1
1
5
L
C
1

D
1
5
0
250
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
.
20 40 50 60 80 100 200 300
400
600 800 1000 2000 4000
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
2
4
6
8
10
L
C
1

F
1
8
5
L
C
1

F
2
6
5
L
C
1

F
2
2
5
L
C
1

F
3
3
0
275 315
350
500 700
1600
L
C
1

F
4
0
0
L
C
1

F
5
0
0
L
C
1

F
6
3
0
L
C
1

F
8
0
0
L
C
1

F
7
8
0
L
C
1

B
L
,

B
M
L
C
1

B
P
L
C
1

B
R
(3)
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
Control of resistive circuits (cos u 0.95).
Example:
Ue = 220 V - Ie = 50 A q .y 40 C - Ic = Ie = 50 A.
The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: either LC1 or LP1 D50.
b
b
b
Example:
Ue = 220 V - Ie = 500 A -.q.y 40 C - Ic = Ie = 500 A.
(3) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1 F225.
b
b
b
5/200
5 5 5 5
Selection 5
Maximum breaking current
Category AC-2: slip ring motors - breaking the starting current.
Category AC-4: squirrel cage motors - breaking the starting current.
Contactor size LC1/
LP1
K06
LC1/
LP1
K09
LC1/
LP1
K12
LC1
D09
LC1
D12
LC1
D18
LC1
D25
LC1
D32
LC1
D38
LC1
D40A
In category AC-4 (le max) Ue.y 440 V
le max broken = .
6 x l motor
A 36 54 54 54 72 108 150 192 192 240
440 V < Ue y 690 V
le max broken = .
6 x l motor
A 26 40 40 40 50 70 90 105 105 150
Depending on the maximum operating rate (1) and the on-load factor, q y 60 C (2)
From 150 and 15 % to 300 and 10 % A 20 30 30 30 40 45 75 80 80 110
From 150 and 20 % to 600 and 10 % A 18 27 27 27 36 40 67 70 70 96
From 150 and 30 % to 1200 and 10 % A 16 24 24 24 30 35 56 60 60 80
From 150 and 55 % to 2400 and 10 % A 13 19 19 19 24 30 45 50 50 62
From 150 and 85 % to 3600 and 10 % A 10 16 16 16 21 25 40 45 45 53
(1) Do not exceed the maximum number of operating cycles..
(2) For temperatures higher than 60 C, use a maximum operating rate value equal to 80% of the actual value when selecting from the tables.
Counter current braking (plugging)
The current varies from the maximum plug-braking current to the rated motor current.
The making current must be compatible with the rated making and breaking capacities of the contactor.
As breaking normally takes place at a current value at or near the locked rotor current, the contactor can be selected using the criteria for
categories AC-2 and AC-4.
Permissible AC-4 power rating for 200 000 operating cycles
Operational voltage LCp/
LPp
K06
LCp/
LPp
K09
LCp
LPp
K12
LCp
D09
LCp
D12
LCp
D18
LCp
D25
LCp
D32
LCp
D38
LCp
D40A
220/230 V kW 075 11 11 15 15 22 3 4 4 4
380/400 V kW 15 22 22 22 3.7 4 55 75 75 9
415 V kW 15 22 22 22 3 3.7 55 75 75 9
440 V kW 15 22 22 22 3 3.7 55 75 75 11
500 V kW 22 3 3 3 4 55 75 9 9 11
660/690 V kW 3 4 4 4 55 75 10 11 11 15
..
.
TeSys contactors 5
For utilisation categories AC-2 or AC-4
..
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
5 5
5/201
5 5
5
.
.

LC1
D50A
LC1
D65A
LC1
D80
LC1
D95
LC1
D115
LC1
D150
LC1
F185
LC1
F225
LC1
F26
LC1
F330
LC1
F40
LC1
F500
LC1
F630
LC1
F780
LC1
F800
LC1
BL
LC1
BM
LC1
BP
LC1
BR
.
.
300 390 480 570 630 830 1020 1230 1470 1800 2220 2760 3360 4260 3690 4320 5000 7500 9000
.
.
170 210 250 250 540 640 708 810 1020 1410 1830 2130 2760 2910 2910 4000 4800 5400 6600
140 160 200 200 280 310 380 420 560 670 780 1100 1400 1600 1600 2250 3000 4500 5400
120 148 170 170 250 280 350 400 500 600 700 950 1250 1400 1400 2000 2400 3750 5000
100 132 145 145 215 240 300 330 400 500 600 750 950 1100 1100 1500 2000 3000 3600
80 110 120 120 150 170 240 270 320 390 450 600 720 820 820 1000 1500 2000 2500
70 90 100 100 125 145 170 190 230 290 350 500 660 710 710 750 1000 1500 1800
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

LCp
D50A
LCp
D65A
LCp
D80
LCp
D95
LC1
D115
LC1
D150
LC1
F185
LC1
F225
LC1
F265
LC1
F330
LC1
F400
LC1
F500
LC1
F630
LC1
F780
LC1
F800
LC1
BL
LC1
BM
LC1
BP
LC1
BR
55 75 75 9 9 11 185 22 28 33 40 45 55 63 63 90 110 150 200
11 11 15 15 185 22 33 40 51 59 75 80 100 110 110 160 160 220 250
11 11 15 15 185 22 37 45 55 63 80 90 100 110 110 160 160 250 280
11 15 15 15 185 22 37 45 59 63 80 100 110 132 132 160 200 250 315
15 15 22 22 30 37 45 55 63 75 90 110 132 150 150 180 200 250 355
15 185 25 25 30 45 63 75 90 110 129 140 160 185 185 200 250 315 450
5
..
5/202
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
.
Selection according to required electrical durability, in categories AC-2 or AC-4 (Ue y 440 V)
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors (AC-4) or slip ring motors (AC-2) with breaking whilst motor stalled.
The current broken (Ic) in AC-2 is equal to 2.5 x Ie.
The current broken (Ic) in AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie. (Ie = rated operational current of the motor).
Example:
Asynchronous motor with P = 5.5 kW - Ue = 400 V - Ie = 11 A. Ic = 6 x Ie = 66 A
or asynchronous motor with P = 5.5 kW - Ue = 415 V - Ie = 11 A. Ic = 6 x Ie = 66 A.
200 000 operating cycles required.
The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 D25.
(1) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1, LP1 K12 contactors.
b
b
b
b
Selection according to required electrical durability, use in category AC-4 (440 V < Ue y 690 V)
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst motor stalled
The current broken (Ic) in AC-2 is equal to 2.5 x Ie.
The current broken (Ic) in AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie. (Ie = rated operational current of the motor).
.
5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 36 40 50 54 80 72 108 150 192 240 300 390 480 630 828 1000 570
0,01
0,02
0,03
0,04
0,06
0,05
0,08
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
L
C
1

D
0
9
L
C
1

D
1
2
L
C
1

D
1
8
L
C
1

D
2
5
L
C
1

D
3
2

e
t

D
3
8
L
C
1

D
4
0
A
L
C
1

D
5
0
A
L
C
1

D
6
5
A
L
C
1

D
8
0
L
C
1

D
9
5
L
C
1

D
1
1
5
L
C
1

D
1
5
0
L
C
1
,

L
P
1
,

L
P
4

K
0
9
,
K
1
2
L
C
1
,

L
P
1
,

L
P
4

K
0
6
(1)
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 36 40 50 54 80 72 108 150 192 240 300 390 480 630 828 1000 570
0,01
0,02
0,03
0,04
0,06
0,05
0,08
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
L
C
1

D
0
9
L
C
1

D
1
2
L
C
1

D
1
8
L
C
1

D
2
5
L
C
1

D
3
2

e
t

D
3
8
L
C
1

D
4
0
A
L
C
1

D
5
0
A
L
C
1

D
6
5
A
L
C
1

D
8
0
L
C
1

D
9
5
L
C
1

D
1
1
5
L
C
1

D
1
5
0
L
C
1
,

L
P
1
,

L
P
4

K
0
9
,
K
1
2
L
C
1
,

L
P
1
,

L
P
4

K
0
6
(1)
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 90 70 105 121 210 250 300 400 500 640 800 1000 540
0,01
0,02
0,03
0,04
0,06
0,05
0,08
0,07
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
L
C
1

D
0
9
L
C
1

D
1
2
L
C
1

D
1
8
L
C
1

D
2
5
L
C
1

D
4
0
A
L
C
1

D
5
0
A
L
C
1

D
6
5
A
L
C
1

D
8
0
L
C
1

D
9
5
L
C
1

D
1
1
5
L
C
1

D
1
5
0
150
L
C
1

D
3
2
,

D
3
8

M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 90 70 105 121 210 250 300 400 500 640 800 1000 540
0,01
0,02
0,03
0,04
0,06
0,05
0,08
0,07
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
L
C
1

D
0
9
L
C
1

D
1
2
L
C
1

D
1
8
L
C
1

D
2
5
L
C
1

D
4
0
A
L
C
1

D
5
0
A
L
C
1

D
6
5
A
L
C
1

D
8
0
L
C
1

D
9
5
L
C
1

D
1
1
5
L
C
1

D
1
5
0
150
L
C
1

D
3
2
,

D
3
8

M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
5 5
5/203
5 5
Selection according to required electrical durability, in categories AC-2 or AC-4 (Ue y 440 V)
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors (AC-4) or slip ring motors (AC-2) with breaking whilst motor stalled.
The current broken (Ic) in AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie.
(Ie = rated operational current of the motor).
Example:
Asynchronous motor with P = 90 kW - Ue = 380 V - Ie = 170 A. Ic = 6 x Ie = 1020 A .
or asynchronous motor with P = 90 kW - Ue = 415 V - Ie = 165 A. Ic = 6 x Ie = 990 A.
b
b
b
Selection according to required electrical durability, use in category AC-4 (440 V < Ue y 690 V)
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst motor stalled.
The current broken (Ic) in AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie.
(Ie = rated operational current of the motor).
.
6000 10 000
100 200 400 600 800 1020 1470 2220 3360 4260
3690 2760 1230 1800
5000 8000 20 000
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04
0,02
0,01
L
C
1

F
1
8
5
L
C
1

F
2
2
5
L
C
1

F
2
6
5
L
C
1

F
3
3
0
L
C
1

F
4
0
0
L
C
1

F
5
0
0
L
C
1

F
6
3
0
L
C
1

F
8
0
0
L
C
1

F
7
8
0
L
C
1

B
L
,

B
M
L
C
1

B
P
L
C
1

B
R
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
6000 10 000
100 200 400 600 800 1020 1470 2220 3360 4260
3690 2760 1230 1800
5000 8000 20 000
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04
0,02
0,01
L
C
1

F
1
8
5
L
C
1

F
2
2
5
L
C
1

F
2
6
5
L
C
1

F
3
3
0
L
C
1

F
4
0
0
L
C
1

F
5
0
0
L
C
1

F
6
3
0
L
C
1

F
8
0
0
L
C
1

F
7
8
0
L
C
1

B
L
,

B
M
L
C
1

B
P
L
C
1

B
R
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
10 000 100 200 400 600 800 1000 2000 4000 8000 20 000
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04
0,02
0,01
L
C
1

F
1
8
5
L
C
1

F
2
2
5
L
C
1

F
2
6
5
L
C
1

F
3
3
0
L
C
1

F
4
0
0
L
C
1

F
5
0
0
L
C
1

F
6
3
0
L
C
1

F
7
8
0
,

F
8
0
0
L
C
1

B
L
,

B
M
L
C
1

B
P
L
C
1

B
R
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
10 000 100 200 400 600 800 1000 2000 4000 8000 20 000
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04
0,02
0,01
L
C
1

F
1
8
5
L
C
1

F
2
2
5
L
C
1

F
2
6
5
L
C
1

F
3
3
0
L
C
1

F
4
0
0
L
C
1

F
5
0
0
L
C
1

F
6
3
0
L
C
1

F
7
8
0
,

F
8
0
0
L
C
1

B
L
,

B
M
L
C
1

B
P
L
C
1

B
R
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Current broken in A
TeSys contactors 5
.
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
5/204
5 5 5 5
Selection 5
+
2 poles
+
3 poles
+
4 poles
1 pole
+
Rated operational current (Ie) in Amperes, in utilisation category DC-1,
resistive loads: time constant
L
__
R
y 1 ms, ambient temperature y 60 C
Rated
opera-
tional
voltage
Ue
No of
poles
connec-
ted in
series
Contactor rating (1)
LC1
D09
LC1
DT20
LC1
D12
DT25
LC1
D18
DT32
LC1
D25
DT40
LC1
D32
LC1
D38
LC1
D40A
LC1
DT60A
V
24 1 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 50 50
2 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 50 50
3 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 50 50
4 20 20 25 32 50
48/75 1 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 50 50
2 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 50 50
3 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 50 50
4 20 20 25 32 50
125 1 4 4 4 4 7 7 7 7 7
2 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 50 50
3 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 50 50
4 20 20 25 32 50
250 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 4 4 4 4 7 7 7 7 7
3 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 50 50
4 20 20 25 32 50
300 3 4 4 4 4 7 7 7 7
4 20 20 25 32 50
460 1
4
900 2
1200 3
1500 4
Rated operational current (Ie) in Amperes, in utilisation category DC-2
to DC-5, inductive loads: time constant
L
__
R
y 15 ms, ambient temperature y 60 C
Rated
oper-
ational
voltage
Ue
No of
poles
connec-
ted in
series
Contactor rating (1)
LC1
D09
LC1
DT20
LC1
D12
DT25
LC1
D18
DT32
LC1
D25
DT40
LC1
D32
LC1
D38
LC1
D40A
LC1
DT60A
V
24 1 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 50 50
2 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 50 50
3 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 50 50
4 20 20 25 32 50
48/75 1 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 50 50
2 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 50 50
3 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 50 50
4 20 20 25 32 50
125 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4
2 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 50 50
3 20 20 20 25 32 40 40 50 50
4 20 20 25 32 50
250 1 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4
3 8 8 8 8 32 40 40 50 50
4 20 20 25 32 50
300 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
4 8 8 8 32 50
460 1
4
900 2
1200 3
1500 4
(1) For rated operational currents of contactors LC1 and LP1 K: please consult your
Regional Sales Offce.
....
TeSys contactors 5
For utilisation categories DC-1 to DC-5
.......
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
5 5
5/205
5 5
5
5
......

LC1
D50A
LC1
D65A
LC1
DT80A
LC1
D80
LC1
D95
LC1
D115
LC1
D150
LC1
F185
LC1
F225
LC1
F265
LC1
F330
LC1
F400
LC1
F500
LC1
F630
LC1
F780
LC1
F800
LC1
BL
LC1
BM
LC1
BP
LC1
BR

65 65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 100 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 100 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
7 7 7 12 12 12 12 210 230 270 320 380 520 760 1180 760 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 65 100 100 200 200 210 230 270 320 380 520 760 1180 760 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 100 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
1 1,5 1,5 2 2 10 10 700 1100 1750 2400
7 7 7 12 12 200 200 190 200 250 280 350 450 700 1000 700 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 100 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
7 7 7 12 12 200 200 190 200 250 280 350 450 700 1000 700 700 1100 1750 2400
65 100 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1000 850 700 1100 1750 2400
700 1100 1750 2400
200 190 200 250 280 350 450 700 1000 700 700 1100 1750 2400
700 1100 1750 2400
700 1100 1750 2400
700 1100 1750 2400

LC1
D50A
LC1
D65A
LC1
DT80A
LC1
D80
LC1
D95
LC1
D115
LC1
D150
LC1
F185
LC1
F225
LC1
F265
LC1
F330
LC1
F400
LC1
F500
LC1
F630
LC1
F780
LC1
F800
LC1
BL
LC1
BM
LC1
BP
LC1
BR
65 65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 100 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850
65 65 65 100 100 200 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 100 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
4 4 4 5 5 10 10 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 65 100 100 200 200 160 180 250 300 350 500 700 1000 700 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 65 100 100 200 200 240 240 280 310 350 550 850 1000 850 700 1100 1750 2400
65 100 200 240 240 280 310 350 550 850 1000 850 700 1100 1750 2400
1 15 15 1 1 3 3 700 1100 1750 2400
4 4 4 5 5 200 200 140 160 220 280 310 480 680 900 680 700 1100 1750 2400
65 65 65 100 100 200 200 160 180 250 300 350 500 700 1000 700 700 1100 1750 2400
65 100 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
3 3 3 5 5 200 200 140 160 220 280 310 480 680 900 680 700 1100 1750 2400
65 100 200 240 260 300 360 430 580 850 1300 850 700 1100 1750 2400
700 1100 1750 2400
200 140 160 220 280 310 480 680 800 680 700 1100 1750 2400
700 1100 1750 2400
700 1100 1750 2400
700 1100 1750 2400
....
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
5/206
5 5 5 5
Selection 5
Selection according to required electrical durability, use in categories DC-1 to DC-5
The criteria for contactor selection are:
the rated operational current Ie,
the rated operational voltage Ue,
the utilisation category and the time constant L/R,
the required electrical durability.
b
b
b
b
Maximum operating rate (operating cycles)
The following limits must not be exceeded: 120 operating cycles/hour at rated operational current Ie.
Example
Series wound motor - P = 1.5 kW - Ue = 200 V - Ie = 7.5 A. Utilisation: reversing, inching.
Utilisation category = DC-5.
Select contactor LC1 D09 with 3 poles in series.
The power broken is: Pc total = 2.5 x 200 x 7.5 = 3.75 kW.
The power broken per pole is: 1.25 kW.
The electrical durability read from the curve is u 3 millions of operating cycles.
b
b
b
b
b
Use of poles in parallel
Electrical durability can be increased by using poles connected in parallel.
With N poles connected in parallel, the electrical durability becomes: electrical
durability read from the curves x N x 0.7.
Note: 1
When the poles are connected in parallel, the maximum operational currents
indicated on pages 5/204 et 5/205 must not be exceeded.
Note: 2
Ensure that the connections are made in such a way as to equalise the currents in
each pole.
..
0,01
0,02
0,04
0,06
0,08
1
2
4
6
8
10
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6
0,7
1 0,8
0,9
2 3 4 5 6 7 9
8 10 16
14 20 30
24 32 36
40 50 60 70 90
80
100
L
C
1

D
0
9
L
C
1

D
1
2
L
C
1

D
1
8
L
C
1

D
2
5
L
C
1

D
3
2
,
L
C
1

D
3
8
L
C
1

D
4
0
A
,

D
T
6
0
A
L
C
1

D
5
0
A
L
C
1

D
6
5
A
,

D
T
8
0
A
L
C
1
,

L
P
1

D
8
0
L
C
1

D
9
5
L
C
1

D
1
1
5
,

D
1
5
0
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Power broken per pole in kW
0,01
0,02
0,04
0,06
0,08
1
2
4
6
8
10
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6
0,7
1 0,8
0,9
2 3 4 5 6 7 9
8 10 16
14 20 30
24 32 36
40 50 60 70 90
80
100
L
C
1

D
0
9
L
C
1

D
1
2
L
C
1

D
1
8
L
C
1

D
2
5
L
C
1

D
3
2
,
L
C
1

D
3
8
L
C
1

D
4
0
A
,

D
T
6
0
A
L
C
1

D
5
0
A
L
C
1

D
6
5
A
,

D
T
8
0
A
L
C
1
,

L
P
1

D
8
0
L
C
1

D
9
5
L
C
1

D
1
1
5
,

D
1
5
0
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
TeSys contactors 5
.....
5 5
5/207
5 5
Selection according to required electrical durability, use in categories DC-1 to DC-5
Determining the electrical durability
The electrical durability can be read directly from the curves below, having previously calculated the power broken as follows: .
P broken = U broken x l broken..
The tables below give the values of Uc and Ic for the various utilisation categories.
Power broken
Utilisation categories U broken I broken P broken
DC-1 Non inductive or slightly inductive loads Ue Ie Ue x Ie
DC-2 Shunt wound motors, breaking whilst motor running 01.Ue Ie 0.1 Ue x Ie
DC-3 Shunt wound motors, reversing, inching Ue 25.Ie Ue x 2.5 Ie
DC-4 Series wound motors, breaking whilst motor running 0.3 Ue Ie 0.3 Ue x Ie
DC-5 Series wound motors, reversing, inching Ue 25.Ie Ue x 2.5 Ie
Example
Series wound motor: P = 40 kW - Ue = 200 V - Ie = 200 A. Utilisation: reversing, inching.
Utilisation category = DC-5.
Select contactor LC1 F265 with 2 poles in series.
The power broken is: Pc total = 2.5 x 200 x 200 = 100 kW.
The power broken per pole is 50 kW.
The electrical durability read from the curve is 500 000 operating cycles.
b
b
b
b
.
2 3 4 5 6 7 9
10
20 30 40 50 60 70
100
90 200 300 400
500
600
700
1000 800
900 2000
4000
3000 5000
L
C
1

F
1
8
5
,

F
2
2
5
L
C
1

F
2
6
5
L
C
1

F
3
3
0
L
C
1

F
4
0
0
L
C
1

F
5
0
0
L
C
1

F
6
3
0
,

F
8
0
0
L
C
1

F
7
8
0
L
C
1

B
L
,

B
M

L
C
1

B
P
L
C
1

B
R
0,01
0,02
0,04
0,06
0,08
1
2
4
6
8
10
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
2 3 4 5 6 7 9
10
20 30 40 50 60 70
100
90 200 300 400
500
600
700
1000 800
900 2000
4000
3000 5000
L
C
1

F
1
8
5
,

F
2
2
5
L
C
1

F
2
6
5
L
C
1

F
3
3
0
L
C
1

F
4
0
0
L
C
1

F
5
0
0
L
C
1

F
6
3
0
,

F
8
0
0
L
C
1

F
7
8
0
L
C
1

B
L
,

B
M

L
C
1

B
P
L
C
1

B
R
0,01
0,02
0,04
0,06
0,08
1
2
4
6
8
10
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s

o
f

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

c
y
c
l
e
s
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
TeSys contactors 5
.....
5/208
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
For lighting circuits
General
The operating conditions of lighting circuits have the following characteristics:
continuous duty: the switching device can remain closed for several days or even months,
a dispersion factor of 1: all luminaires in the same group are switched on or off
simultaneously,
a relatively high temperature around the device due to the enclosure, the presence of fuses,
or an unventilated control panel location.
This is why the operational current for lighting is lower than the value given for AC-1 duty.
b
b
b
Protection
The continuous duty current drawn by a lighting circuit is constant.
In fact:
it is unlikely that the number of luminaires of an existing circuit will be modifed,
this type of circuit cannot create an overload of long duration.
It is therefore only necessary to provide short-circuit protection.
This can be provided by:
gG type fuses, or
modular circuit-breakers.
Nevertheless, it is always possible and sometimes more economical (smaller cable size) to
protect the circuit by a thermal overload relay and associated aM type fuses.
b
b
b
b
Distribution system
Single-phase circuit, 220/240 V
The tables on pages 5/209 to 5/213 are based on a single-phase 220/240 V circuit and can
therefore be applied directly in this case.
3-phase circuit, 380/415 V (with neutral)
The total number of lamps (N) to be switched simultaneously is divided into three equal groups,
each connected between one phase and neutral. The contactor can then be selected from the
220/240 V single-phase tables for a number of lamps equal to lamps.
3-phase circuit, 220/240 V
The total number of lamps (N) to be switched simultaneously is divided into three equal groups,
each connected between 2 phases (L1-L2), (L2-L3), (L3-L1). The contactor can then be selected
from the 220/240 V single-phase table for a number of lamps equal to
N
3
-------
lamps.
Contactor selection tables
For the different types of lamps, the tables on pages 5/209 to 5/213 give the maximum number of
lamps of unit power P (in Watts), which can be switched simultaneously for each size of
contactor
They are based on:
a 220/240 V single-phase circuit,
an ambient temperature of 55 C (1), taking into account the operating conditions (see
General paragraph).
an electrical life of more than 10 years (200 days operation per year).
They take into account:
the total current drawn (including ballast),
transient phenomena which occur at switch-on,
the starting currents and their duration,
the circulation of any harmonics which may be present.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Lamps with compensating capacitor C (F) connected in parallel
Parallel connected compensating capacitors C cause a current peak at the moment of switch-on.
To ensure that the value of this current peak remains compatible with the making characteristics
of the contactors, the unit value of the capacitance must not exceed the following:
Switching contactor
rating
LC1
K09
LP1
K09
LC1
D09
LC1
D12
LC1
D18
LC1
D25
LC1
D32
LC1
D38
LC1
D40A
LC1
D50A
LC1
D65A
LC1
D80
Maximum unit value C
(F) of parallel
connected
compensating capacitor
.
7
.
3
.
18
.
18
.
25
.
60
.
96
.
96
.
120
.
120
.
240
.
240
Switching contactor
rating
LC1
D95
LC1
D115
LC1
D150
LC1
F185
LC1
F225
LC1
F265
LC1
F330
LC1
F400
LC1
F500
LC1
F630
LC1
F800
Maximum unit value C
(F) of parallel
connected
compensating capacitor
.
240
.
300
.
360
.
800
.
1200
.
1700
.
2500
.
4000
.
6000
.
9000
.
10.800
This value is independent of the number of lamps switched by the contactor.
(1) For an ambient temperature of 40 C, multiply the number by 1.2.
....
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Selection 5
N
3
----
5 5
5/209
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
.........
Usual values
The tables show the following values:
IB: value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated voltage,
C: unit capacitance for each lamp,
corresponding to the values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers.
These values are given for an ambient temperature of 55 C (for 40 C, multiply the number by
1.2).
b
b
Incandescent and halogen lamps
P (W) 60 75 100 150 200 300 500 750 1000
IB (A) 027 034 045 068 091 140 230 340 460 LC1
Max no
of lamps
according
to P (W)
35 28 21 14 10 6 4 2 2 K09
59 47 35 23 17 11 7 4 3 D09, D12
77 61 46 30 23 15 9 6 4 D18
92 73 55 36 27 18 11 7 5 D25
129 103 77 51 38 25 15 10 7 D32, D38
163 129 97 64 48 31 19 13 9 D40A
207 164 124 82 62 40 24 16 12 D50A, D65A
296 235 177 117 88 57 34 23 17 D80, D95
430 340 256 170 126 82 50 34 24 D115
466 370 280 184 138 90 54 36 26 D150
710 564 426 282 210 136 82 56 40 F185
770 610 462 304 228 148 90 60 44 F225
888 704 532 352 262 170 104 70 52 F265
1006 800 604 400 298 194 118 80 58 F330
1274 1010 764 504 378 244 148 100 74 F400
1718 1364 1030 682 508 330 200 136 100 F500
2328 1850 1396 924 690 448 272 184 136 F630
2776 2204 1666 1102 824 534 326 220 162 F800
Mixed lighting lamps
P (W) 100 160 250 500 1000
IB (A) 045 072 110 230 450 LC1
Max no
of lamps
according
to P (W)
21 13 8 4 2 K09
35 22 14 7 3 D09, D12
46 29 18 9 4 D18
55 36 23 11 5 D25
77 48 30 15 7 D32, D38
97 61 38 19 9 D40A
124 77 49 24 12 D50A, D65A
177 111 70 34 17 D80, D95
256 160 104 50 26 D115
280 174 114 54 28 D150
426 266 174 82 42 F185
462 288 188 90 46 F225
532 332 218 104 52 F265
604 378 246 118 60 F330
764 478 312 150 76 F400
1030 644 422 202 102 F500
1398 874 572 272 140 F630
1666 1040 680 326 166 F800
..
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
5/210
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
.......
Usual values
These values are given for an ambient temperature of 55 C (for 40 C, multiply the number by 1.2).
b
b
Fluorescent lamps with starter. Single ftting
Non corrected With parallel correction
P (W) 20 40 65 80 110 20 40 65 80 110
IB (A) 039 045 070 080 12 017 026 042 052 072
C (F) 5 5 7 7 16 LC1
Max no
of lamps
according
to P (W)
24 21 13 12 8 56 36 22 18 K09
41 35 22 20 13 94 61 38 30 22 D09, D12
53 46 30 26 17 123 80 50 40 29 D18
66 57 37 32 21 152 100 61 50 36 D25
89 77 50 43 29 205 134 83 67 48 D32, D38
112 97 62 55 36 258 169 104 84 61 D40A
143 124 80 70 46 329 215 133 107 77 D50A, D65A
205 177 114 100 66 470 367 190 153 111 D80, D95
410 354 228 200 132 940 614 380 306 222 D115, D150
492 426 274 240 160 1128 738 456 368 266 F185
532 462 296 260 172 1224 800 490 400 288 F225
614 532 342 300 200 1412 922 570 462 332 F265
696 604 388 340 226 1600 1046 648 522 378 F330
882 764 490 430 286 2024 1322 818 662 478 F400
1190 1030 662 580 386 2728 1724 1104 892 644 F500
1612 1398 698 786 524 3700 2418 1498 1210 874 F630, F800
Fluorescent lamps with starter. Twin ftting
Non corrected With series correction
P (W) 2x20 2x40 2x65 2x80 2x110 2x20 2x40 2x65 2x80 2x110
IB (A) 2x022 2x041 2x067 2x082 2x11 2x013 2x024 2x039 2x048 2x065 LC1
Max no
of lamps
according
to P (W)
2x21 2x11 2x7 2x5 2x4 2x36 2x20 2x12 2x10 2x7 K09
2x36 2x18 2x10 2x8 2x6 2x60 2x32 2x20 2x16 2x12 D09, D12
2x46 2x24 2x14 2x12 2x8 2x80 2x42 2x26 2x20 2x16 D18
2x58 2x30 2x18 2x14 2x10 2x100 2x54 2x32 2x26 2x20 D25
2x78 2x42 2x26 2x20 2x14 2x134 2x72 2x44 2x36 2x26 D32, D38
2x100 2x52 2x32 2x26 2x18 2x168 2x90 2x56 2x44 2x32 D40A
2x126 2x68 2x40 2x34 2x24 2x214 2x116 2x70 2x58 2x42 D50A, D65A
2x180 2x96 2x58 2x48 2x36 2x306 2x166 2x102 2x82 2x60 D80, D95
2x360 2x194 2x118 2x96 2x72 2x614 2x332 2x204 2x166 2x122 D115, D150
2x436 2x234 2x142 2x116 2x86 2x738 2x400 2x246 2x200 2x148 F185
2x472 2x254 2x154 2x126 2x94 2x800 2x432 2x266 2x216 2x160 F225
2x544 2x292 2x178 2x146 2x108 2x922 2x500 2x308 2x250 2x184 F265
2x618 2x332 2x202 2x166 2x124 2x1046 2x566 2x348 2x282 2x208 F330
2x782 2x420 2x256 2x210 2x156 2x1322 2x716 2x440 2x358 2x264 F400
2x1054 2x566 2x346 2x282 2x210 2x1784 2x966 2x594 2x482 2x356 F500
2x1430 2x766 2x468 2x384 2x286 2x2418 2x1310 2x806 2x654 2x484 F630, F800
..
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
5 5
5/211
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
.......
Usual values
b
b
Fluorescent lamps without starter. Single ftting
P (W) 20 40 65 80 110 20 40 65 80 110
IB (A) 043 055 080 095 14 019 029 046 057 079
C (F) 5 5 7 7 16 LC1
Max no
of lamps
according
to P (W)
22 17 12 10 6 50 33 20 16 K09
37 29 20 16 11 84 55 34 28 20 D09, D12
48 38 26 22 15 110 72 45 36 26 D18
60 47 32 27 18 136 89 56 45 32 D25
97 63 43 36 25 184 101 76 61 44 D32, D38
102 80 55 46 31 231 151 95 77 55 D40A
130 101 70 58 40 294 193 121 98 70 D50A, D65A
186 145 100 84 57 421 275 173 140 101 D80, D95
372 290 200 168 114 842 550 346 280 202 D115, D150
446 348 240 202 136 1010 662 416 336 242 F185
484 378 260 218 148 1094 716 452 364 262 F225
558 436 300 252 170 1262 828 522 420 304 F265
632 494 340 286 194 1432 938 590 476 344 F330
800 624 430 362 246 1810 1186 748 604 434 F400
1078 844 580 488 330 2442 1600 1008 814 586 F500
1462 1144 786 662 448 3310 2168 1366 1104 796 F630, F800
Fluorescent lamps without starter. Twin ftting
Non corrected With series correction
P (W) 2x20 2x40 2x65 2x80 2x110 2x20 2x40 2x65 2x80 2x110
IB (A) 2x025 2x047 2x076 2x093 2x13 2x014 2x026 2x043 2x053 2x072 LC1
Max no
of lamps
according
to P (W)
2x19 2x10 2x6 2x5 2x3 2x34 2x18 2x11 2x9 2x6 K09
2x32 2x16 2x10 2x8 2x6 2x56 2x30 2x18 2x14 2x10 D09, D12
2x42 2x22 2x12 2x10 2x8 2x74 2x40 2x24 2x18 2x14 D18
2x52 2x26 2x16 2x12 2x10 2x92 2x50 2x30 2x24 2x18 D25
2x70 2x36 2x22 2x18 2x12 2x124 2x66 2x40 2x32 2x24 D32, D38
2x88 2x46 2x28 2x22 2x16 2x156 2x84 2x50 2x40 2x30 D40A
2x112 2x58 2x36 2x30 2x20 2x200 2x106 2x64 2x52 2x38 D50A, D65A
2x160 2x84 2x52 2x42 2x30 2x234 2x152 2x92 2x74 2x54 D80, D95
2x320 2x170 2x104 2x86 2x60 2x570 2x306 2x186 2x150 2x110 D115, D150
2x384 2x204 2x126 2x102 2x74 2x686 2x368 2x222 2x180 2x132 F185
2x416 2x220 2x136 2x112 2x80 2x742 2x400 2x242 2x196 2x144 F225
2x480 2x254 2x158 2x128 2x92 2x856 2x462 2x278 2x226 2x166 F265
2x544 2x288 2x178 2x146 2x104 2x970 2x522 2x316 2x256 2x188 F330
2x688 2x366 2x226 2x184 2x132 2x1228 2x662 2x400 2x324 2x238 F400
2x928 2x494 2x304 2x248 2x178 2x1656 2x892 2x540 2x438 2x322 F500
2x1258 2x668 2x414 2x338 2x242 2x2246 2x1210 2x730 2x592 2x436 F630, F800
..
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
5/212
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
.......
Usual values
b
b
Low pressure sodium vapour lamps
P (W) 35 55 90 135 150 180 200 35 55 90 135 150 180 200
IB (A) 12 16 24 31 32 33 34 03 04 06 09 1 12 13
C (F) 17 17 25 36 36 36 36 LC1
Max no
of lamps
according
to P (W)
6 5 3 2 2 2 2 K09
10 7 5 3 3 3 3 40 30 D09, D12
12 9 6 4 4 4 4 50 37 25 D18
15 11 7 6 5 5 5 63 47 31 21 19 15 14 D25
21 16 10 8 8 7 7 86 65 43 28 26 21 20 D32, D38
27 20 13 10 10 10 9 110 82 55 36 33 27 25 D40A
35 26 17 13 13 12 12 140 105 70 46 42 35 32 D50A, D65A
50 37 25 19 18 18 17 200 150 100 66 60 50 46 D80, D95
100 75 50 38 36 36 34 400 300 200 132 120 100 92 D115, D150
140 104 70 54 52 50 48 560 420 280 186 168 140 128 F185
152 114 76 58 56 54 54 606 454 302 202 182 152 140 F225
174 130 88 68 66 64 62 700 524 350 232 210 174 162 F265
198 148 98 76 74 72 70 792 594 396 264 238 198 182 F330
250 188 124 96 94 90 88 1002 752 502 334 300 250 252 F400
338 254 168 130 126 122 118 1352 1014 676 450 406 338 312 F500
496 372 248 192 186 180 174 1982 1488 992 660 594 496 458 F630, F800
High pressure sodium vapour lamps
P (W) 150 250 400 700 1000 150 250 400 700 1000
IB (A) 19 32 5 88 124 084 14 22 39 55
C (F) 20 32 48 96 120 LC1
Max no
of lamps
according
to P (W)
4 2 1 K09
6 3 2 1 D09, D12
7 4 3 1 1 17 D18
10 5 3 2 1 22 13 8 D25
13 8 5 2 2 30 18 11 6 D32, D38
17 10 6 3 2 39 23 15 8 6 D40A
22 13 8 4 3 50 30 19 10 7 D50A, D65A
31 18 12 6 4 71 42 27 15 10 D80, D95
62 36 24 12 8 142 84 54 30 20 D115, D150
88 52 34 18 14 200 120 76 42 30 F185
96 56 36 20 16 216 130 82 46 32 F225
110 66 42 24 18 250 150 94 54 38 F265
124 74 48 26 20 282 170 108 60 42 F330
158 94 60 34 24 358 214 136 76 54 F400
214 126 80 46 32 482 290 184 104 74 F500
312 186 118 68 48 708 424 270 152 108 F630, F800
..
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
5 5
5/213
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
.......
Usual values
b
b
High pressure mercury vapour lamps
P (W) 50 80 125 250 400 700 1000 50 80 125 250 400 700 1000
IB (A) 054 081 120 230 410 680 990 03 045 067 13 23 38 55
C (F) 10 10 10 18 25 40 60 LC1
Max no
of lamps
according
to P (W)
14 9 6 3 1 K09
22 14 9 5 2 1 1 40 26 17 9 D09, D12
27 18 12 6 3 2 1 50 33 22 11 6 D18
35 23 15 8 4 2 1 63 42 28 14 8 5 3 D25
48 32 21 11 6 3 2 86 57 38 20 11 6 4 D32, D38
61 40 27 14 8 4 3 110 73 49 25 14 8 6 D40A
77 51 34 17 10 6 4 140 93 62 32 18 11 7 D50A, D65A
111 74 49 26 14 8 6 200 133 89 46 26 15 10 D80, D95
222 148 100 52 28 16 12 400 266 178 92 52 30 20 D115, D150
310 206 140 72 40 24 17 560 372 250 128 72 44 30 F185
336 224 152 78 44 26 18 606 404 272 140 78 48 32 F225
388 258 174 90 50 30 20 700 466 312 162 90 54 38 F265
440 294 198 102 58 34 24 792 528 354 182 102 62 42 F330
556 372 250 130 72 44 30 1002 668 448 232 130 78 54 F400
752 500 338 176 98 60 40 1352 902 606 312 176 106 74 F500
1102 734 496 258 144 88 60 1982 1322 888 458 258 156 108 F630, F800
Metal iodine vapour lamps
P (W) 250 400 1000 2000 250 400 1000 2000
IB (A) 25 36 95 20 14 2 53 112
C (F) 32 32 64 140 LC1
Max no
of lamps
according
to P (W)
3 2 K09
4 3 1 D09, D12
6 4 1 D18
7 5 2 13 9 D25
10 7 2 1 18 13 4 D32, D38
13 9 3 1 23 16 6 D40A
16 11 4 2 30 21 7 D50A, D65A
24 16 6 3 42 30 11 5 D80, D95
48 32 12 6 84 60 22 10 D115, D150
66 46 18 8 120 84 32 14 F185
72 50 20 10 130 90 34 16 F225
84 58 22 12 150 104 40 18 F265
94 66 24 14 170 118 44 20 F330
120 84 32 16 214 150 56 26 F400
162 112 42 20 290 202 76 36 F500
238 164 62 30 424 298 112 52 F630, F800
..
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
Dimensions :
pages 5/92 to 5/95
Schemes :
pages 5/96 and 5/97
5/214
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
For heating circuits
Selection
General
A heating circuit is a power switching circuit supplying one or more resistive heating elements
switched by a contactor.
The same general rules apply as for motor circuits, except that heating circuits are not normally
subjected to overload currents. It is therefore only necessary to provide short-circuit protection..
Characteristics of heating elements
The examples below are based on resistive heating elements used for industrial furnaces or for
the heating of buildings (infra-red or resistive radiant type, convector heaters, closed loop
heating circuits, etc.).
The variation in resistance values between hot and cold states causes a current peak at switch-
on which never exceeds 2 to 3 times the rated operational current (In). This initial peak does not
recur during normal operation where subsequent switching is thermostatically controlled.
The rated power and current of a heater are given for the normal operating temperature..
Protection
The steady state current drawn by a heating circuit is constant when the voltage is stable.
In fact:
It is unlikely that the number of loads in an existing circuit will be modifed;
This type of circuit cannot create overloads. It is therefore only necessary to provide short-
circuit protection.
This can be provided by:
gG type fuses, or
modular circuit-breakers.
Nevertheless, it is always possible and sometimes more economical (smaller cable size) to
protect the circuit by a thermal overload relay and associated aM type fuses..
b
b
b
b
Switching, control, protection
A heating element or group of heating elements of a given power may be either single-phase or
3-phase and may be supplied from a 220/127 V or a 400/230 V distribution system.
Excluding a single-phase 127 V system (which is no longer commonly used), the following 3
types of circuit arrangement are possible:
Single-phase, 2-pole switching
3-phase switching.
b
b
b
Component selection according to the power switched
The combinations suggested below are based on an ambient temperature of 55 C and for
powers at the nominal voltage, but they also ensure switching in the event of prolonged
overloads up to 1.05 Ue..
Maximum power (kW) Contactor rating
220/240 V 380/415 V 660/690 V 1000 V
3.5 65 11 LC1, LP1 K09
45 8 14 LC1 D12
6 105 185 LC1 D18
7 13 225 LC1 D25
10 18 30.5 LC1 D32, LC1 D38
13 225 39.5 48 LC1 D40A
165 285 43.5 68 LC1 D65A
24 42 73 825 LC1, LP1 D80
44 76 118 157 LC1 D115, LC1 D150
48 83 130 170 LC1 F185
52 90 145 185 LC1 F225
60 104 160 210 LC1 F265
75 130 200 250 LC1 F330
86 145 230 300 LC1 F4002
116 200 310 400 LC1 F5002
170 290 450 695 LC1 F6302, LC1 F800
270 460 715 945 LC1 F780
140 242 370 490 LC1 BL32
220 380 580 770 LC1 BM32
350 605 925 1225 LC1 BP32
480 830 1270 1680 LC1 BR32
.
KM1
U
Circuit controlled by 2 poles of the contactor.
KM1
U
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Selection 5
5 5
5/215
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
For heating circuits
........
Component selection according to the power switched
(continued)
220/240 V 380/415 V 660/690 V 1000 V
45 8 13.5 LC1, LP1 K09004
7 13 225 LC1 DT25
12 21 36.5 LC1 DT40
26 455 795 109 LC1 DT80A
38 66 1175 132 LC1, LP1 D80004
70 121 190 251 LC1 D115004
76 132 202 270 LC1 F1854
80 142 230 295 LC1 F2254
96 166 253 335 LC1 F2654
120 205 320 400 LC1 F3304
137 236 363 480 LC1 F4004
185 320 490 650 LC1 F5004
272 470 718 950 LC1 F6304
425 735 1140 1520 LC1 F7804
224 387 590 785 LC1 BL34
352 608 930 1230 LC1 BM34
560 968 1478 1960 LC1 BP34
768. 1328 2025 2685 LC1 BR34
3-phase switching
220/240 V 380/415 V 660/690 V 1000 V
45 8 13.5 LC1, LP1 K09
7 13 225 LC1 D12
10 18 30.5 LC1 D18
13 225 39.5 LC1 D25
18 31 525 LC1 D32, LC1 D38
225 38 68 78 LC1 D40A
285 49 86 1125 LC1 D65A
405 705 126 135.5 LC1, LP1 D80
76 131 206 275 LC1 D115, LC1 D150
82 143 220 295 LC1 F185
90 155 250 320 LC1 F225
103 179 275 370 LC1 F265
130 225 345 432 LC1 F330
149 256 395 525 LC1 F400
200 346 530 710 LC1 F500
294 509 780 1030 LC1 F630, LC1 F800
463 800 1235 1650 LC1 F780
242 419 640 850 LC1 BL33
380 658 1005 1350 LC1 BM33
606 1047 1600 2150 LC1 BP33
830 1437 2200 2950 LC1 BR33
Application example For a 220 V, 50 Hz, single-phase circuit supplying a total heating
load of 12.5 kW.
Select a 3-pole contactor LC1 D65A
(1) See complete contactor references on pages 5/62 to 5/67 or consult your Regional Sales
Offce.
.
KM1
U
KM1
U
KM1
U
U
U
KM1
U
U
U
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Circuit controlled by a 4-pole contactor with the poles
parallel connected in pairs using appropriate connecting
links. This solution enables the control of power values
approximately equivalent to those controlled by the
same contactor on 3-phase.
5/216
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
For switching the primaries .
of 3-phase LV/LV transformers
......
Maximum ambient temperature: 55 C.
When a transformer is switched on, there is generally an initial current surge which reaches its
peak value almost instantaneously and then decreases in a largely exponential manner to
quickly reach its steady state value.
The value of this current depends on:
the characteristics of the magnetic circuit and of the windings (cross sectional area of the
core, rated inductance, number of turns, layout and size of the windings, ...)
the performance of the magnetic laminations used,
the magnetic state of the circuit and the instantaneous value of the a.c. mains voltage at the
moment of switch-on.
The inrush current at the moment of switch-on can reach 20 to 40 times the rated current for the
various kVA power ratings in the tables below. This value is independent of the no-load or on-
load state of the transformer..
b
b
b
Contactor selection
The peak magnetising current of the transformer must be lower than the values given in the
tables below.
Contactor rating LC1/
LP1
K06
LC1/
LP1
K09
LC1
D09
LC1
D12
LC1
D18
LC1
D25
LC1
D32
LC1
D38
LC1
D40A
LC1
D50A
LC1
D65A
LC1
D80
LC1
D95
LC1
D115
LC1
D150
Maximum permissible .
A 160 225 350 350 420 630 770 770 1100 1250 1400 1550 1650 1800 2000
Maximum operational power (1) 220 V
240 V
kVA 2 25 4 4 5 7 85 85 14 16 18 195 195 25 25
380 V
400 V
kVA 3.5 5 7 7 8 125 15 15 24 27 31 34 34 50 50
415 V
440 V
kVA 4 55 8 8 9 14 17 17 28 32 36 39 39 55 55
500 V kVA 5 7 9 9 11 165 20 20 32 36 40 45 45 65 65
660 V
690 V
kVA 6 85 12 12 14 215 265 265 42 48 53 59 59 80 80
1000 V kVA 60 70 80 85 95 100 100
Contactor rating LC1
F185
LC1
F225
LC1
F265
LC1
F330
LP1
F400
LC1
F500
LC1
F630
LC1
F780
LC1
F800
LC1
BL
LC1
BM
LC1
BP
LC1
BR
Maximum permissible .
A 2900 3300 3800 5000 6300 7700 9000 12.000 11.000 18.000 18.000 24.000 30 000
Maximum operational power (1) 220 V
240 V
kVA 40 45 50 65 75 100 120 175 145 230 230 300 380
380 V
400 V
kVA 75 80 90 120 130 170 200 280 245 400 400 530 660
415 V
440 V
kVA 80 90 100 130 140 190 220 310 270 450 450 560 700
500 V kVA 95 100 110 140 170 225 260 350 315 480 480 600 750
660 V
690 V
kVA 120 130 140 170 200 270 350 400 425 600 600 800 950
1000 V kVA 150 170 200 225 250 375 470 650 550 700 700 1000 1200
..
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Selection 5
5 5
5/217
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
For switching 3-phase .
capacitor banks used for .
power factor correction
.........
Standard contactors
Capacitors, together with the circuits to which they are connected, form oscillatory circuits which
can, at the moment of switch-on, give rise to high transient currents (> 180 In) at high frequencies
(1 to 15 kHz).
As a general rule, the peak current on energisation is lower when:
the mains inductances are high,
the line transformer ratings are low,
the transformer short-circuit voltage is high,
the ratio between the sum of the ratings of the capacitors already switched into the circuit and
that of the capacitor to be switched in is small (for multiple step capacitor banks).
In accordance with standards IEC 60070, NF C 54-100, VDE 0560, the switching contactor must
be able to withstand a continuous current of 1.43 times the rated current of the capacitor bank
step being switched.
The rated operational powers given in the tables below take this overload into account.
Short-circuit protection is normally provided by gI type HPC fuses rated at 1.7 to 2 In.
b
b
b
b
Contactor applications
Capacitors are directly switched. The values of peak current at switch-on must not exceed
the values indicated opposite
An inductor may be inserted in each of the three phases supplying the capacitors to reduce the
peak current, if necessary.
Inductance values are determined according to the selected operating temperature.
Power factor correction by a single-step capacitor bank
The use of a choke inductor is unnecessary: the inductance of the mains supply is adequate to
limit the peak to a value compatible with the contactor characteristics.
Power factor correction by a multiple-step capacitor bank
Select a special contactor as defned on page 5/102.
If a standard contactor is used, it is essential to insert a choke inductor in each of the
three phases of each step
Maximum operational power of contactors
Standard contactors
Electrical durability at maxiumum load: 100 000 operating cycles.
With choke inductors connected, where necessary.
Operational power at 50/60 Hz Max
peak
current
Contactor
rating
q y 40 C (1) q y 55 C (1)
220/240 V 400/440 V 600/690 V 220/240 V 400/440 V 600/690 V
kvAR kvAR kvAR kvAR kvAR kvAR A
6 11 15 6 11 15 560 LC1 D09, D12
9 15 20 9 15 20 850 LC1 D18
11 20 25 11 20 25 1600 LC1 D25
14 25 30 14 25 30 1900 LC1 D32, D38
17 30 37 17 30 37 2160 LC1 D40
22 40 50 22 40 50 2160 LC1 D50
22 40 50 22 40 50 3040 LC1 D65
35 60 75 35 60 75 3040 LC1 D80, D95
50 90 125 38 75 80 3100 LC1 D115
60 110 135 40 85 90 3300 LC1 D150
70 125 160 50 100 100 3500 LC1 F185
80 140 190 60 110 110 4000 LC1 F225
90 160 225 75 125 125 5000 LC1 F265
100 190 275 85 140 165 6500 LC1 F330
125 220 300 100 160 200 8000 LC1 F400
180 300 400 125 220 300 10.000 LC1 F500
250 400 600 190 350 500 12.000 LC1 F630
250 400 600 190 350 500 14.200 LC1 F800
200 350 500 180 350 500 25.000 LC1 BL
300 550 650 250 500 600 25.000 LC1 BM
500 850 950 400 750 750 25.000 LC1 BP
600 1100 1300 500 1000 1000 25.000 LC1 BR
(1) Upper limit of temperature category conforming to IEC 60070.
.
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Characteristics :
pages 5/50 to 5/55
References :
pages 5/62 to 5/67
pages 5/92 to 5/97
Selection 5
5/218
5 5 5 5
Recommended
wiring scheme,
operation,
curves
Applications
Auto-transformer starting is suitable for starting all types of squirrel cage motors: with 3, 6 or even 9 terminals according to North American
technology.
Starting is performed at reduced voltage and produces maximum torque at minimum line current.
It allows the starting torque (C = f(U)
2
) to be adapted to the resistive torque of the driven machine by means of the 2 or 3 intermediate voltage
take-off connections on the auto-transformer (0.65 and 0.8 Un or 0.5, 0.65 and 0.8 Un). In general, only one take-off connection is used.
This type of starting is used for high power and/or high inertia machines.
The motor is never disconnected from its power supply during starting (closed transition) and transient phenomena are eliminated.
Recommended wiring scheme
Operation
Starting is performed in 3 stages:
star connection of the auto-transformer is made by KM1, then contactor KM2 closes and the motor starts under reduced voltage;
the neutral point is opened by KM1; part of the auto-transformer winding is switched into each phase for a short moment, constituting a stator
starting inductance;
KM3 switches the motor to full mains voltage and causes the auto-transformer to be shunted out of circuit by KM2.
The auto-transformer used generally has an air gap (adjusted or not) in order to obtain, during the second phase of starting, a series inductance
whose value is compatible with correct starting.
b
b
b
Operating curves
1 Direct switching current
2 Current with auto-transformer
1 Direct motor torque
2 Torque with auto-transformer
3 Resistive torque of the machine
U
W
V
U3
W3
V3
M
3
KM3 KM2
T1
1 3 5 1 3 5
1 3 5
2 4 6 2 4 6
2 4 6
2 4 6
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
Q1
1
/
L
1
1
3
/
L
2
3
5
/
L
3
5
2 4 6
KM1
F2
U
W
V
U3
W3
V3
M
3
KM3 KM2
T1
1 3 5 1 3 5
1 3 5
2 4 6 2 4 6
2 4 6
2 4 6
U
1
V
1
W
1
U
2
V
2
W
2
Q1
1
/
L
1
1
3
/
L
2
3
5
/
L
3
5
2 4 6
KM1
F2
Q1/2
Q1
S1
13 14
KA1
1
3
1
4
KM1 KM3 KM2
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
S2
F1
Q1/6
2 1
95 96
F2
95 96
2
1
2
2
F3
KM3
KM1 KM3 KM2 KA1 F3
5
1
5
2
KM1
6
1
6
2
KM3
6
1
6
2
5
6
5
5
KA1
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
1
6
T3
Q1/2
Q1
S1
13 14
KA1
1
3
1
4
KM1 KM3 KM2
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
S2
F1
Q1/6
2 1
95 96
F2
95 96
2
1
2
2
F3
KM3
KM1 KM3 KM2 KA1 F3
5
1
5
2
KM1
6
1
6
2
KM3
6
1
6
2
5
6
5
5
KA1
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
1
6
T3
0
0 0,25 0,75 1 0,50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
I
N
I
2
I
D
XI
N
1
2
C
u
r
r
e
n
t
Speed
0
0 0,25 0,75 1 0,50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
I
N
I
2
I
D
XI
N
1
2
C
u
r
r
e
n
t
Speed
0 0,25 0,75 1 0,50
0
0,5
1
2
2,5
1,5
C
N
XC
N
1
2
3
T
o
r
q
u
e
Speed
0 0,25 0,75 1 0,50
0
0,5
1
2
2,5
1,5
C
N
XC
N
1
2
3
T
o
r
q
u
e
Speed
TeSys contactors
For auto-transformer starting
..........
5 5
5/219
5 5
Auto-transformer starters from 59 to 900 kW up to 440 V (type 1 coordination)
The components recommended in the table below have been determined according to the following characteristics:
auto-transformer: on 0.65 Un connection with non adjusted air gap,
3 starts per hour, of which 2 consecutive,
Motor starting current: Id/In = 6,
Iq = 70 kA,
Transient current on closing of KM3 y.7.2 In,
Maximum starting time: 30 seconds,
Ambient temperature q.y 40 C.
Switch-disconnector-fuses: operators and accessories, please consult your Regional Sales Offce.
Contactors: 3-pole.
LC1 D: see pages 5/62 and 5/65,
LC1 F: please consult your Regional Sales Offce,
LC1 B: please consult your Regional Sales Offce.
Auxiliary contact blocks:
for contactors LC1 D: one LAD N11 (1 N/O + 1 N/C) on KM1,
for contactors LC1 F: one LAD N22 (2 N/O + 2 N/C) on KM1, KM2 and KM3.
Thermal overload relays:
LR: see pages 6/20 to 6/25,
LR9 D: see pages 6/21 to 6/25,
LR9 F: please consult your Regional Sales Offce.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
of 3-phase motors
Switch-
disconnector-
fuse
Reference
aM fuses Contactors Overload relays
Size Rating KM3 KM2 KM1 Reference
(1)
Setting
range
LC1 LC1 LC1
220/
230 V
380/
400 V
415 V 440 V In
max
kW kW kW kW A A A
30 55 59 59 105 GSp K 22 x 58 125 D115 D115 D3210 LR9 D5369 90150
LRD 4367 95120
40 75 80 80 138 GSp L T0 160 D150 D115 D5011 LR9 D5369 90150
LRD 4369 110140
51 90 90 100 170 GSp N T1 200 F185 D115 D5011 LR9 F5371 132220
63 110 110 110 205 GSp N T1 250 F225 D150 D8011 LR9 F5371 132220
75 132 132 150 245 GSp N T1 250 F265 F185 D115 LR9 F5375 200330
90 160 160 185 300 GSp QQ T2 315 F330 F265 D115 LR9 F5375 200330
110 200 200 220 370 GSp QQ T2 400 F400 F330 D115 LR9 F5379 300500
140 250 257 280 460 GS2 S T3 500 F500 F400 D115 LR9 F5379 300500
180 315 355 375 584 GS2 S T3 630 F630 F400 D185 LR9 F5381 380630
200 355 375 400 635 GS2 V T4 800 F800 F500 F185 TC800/1 +
LRD 05
505800
220 400 425 450 710 GS2 V T4 800 F800 F500 F265 TC800/1 +
LRD 05
505800
250 450 475 500 800 GS2 V T4 800 F800 F500 F265 TC1000/1 +
LRD 05
6301000
280 500 530 560 900 GS2 V T4 1000 BM33p22 F630 F330 TC1000/1
LRD 05
6301000
315 560 600 630 1000 GS2 V T4 1000 BM33p22 F630 F400 TC1250/1
LRD 05
7901250
335 630 670 710 1100 GS2 V T4 1250 BP33p22 F630 F400 TC1250/1
LRD 05
7901250
400 710 750 800 1260 On base T4 2 x 800
(2)
BP33p22 F780 F400 TC1500/1
LRD 05
9451500
450 800 800 800 1450 On base T4 2 x 800
(2)
BP33p22 F780 F400 TC1750/1
LRD 05
1001750
500 900 900 900 1600 On base T4 2 x 800
(2)
BR33p22 F780 F500 TC2000/1
LRD 05
2602000
(1) For power ratings greater than or equal to 400 kW at 415 V, use one LRD-05 on the current transformer.
(2) Check with the motor manufacturer whether the fuses should be ftted in parallel.
TeSys contactors
For auto-transformer starting
........
5/220
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
For rotor circuits of slip-ring motors
......
Applications
These contactors are used to eliminate starting resistance in the rotor circuit of slip-
ring motors.
The most common application is for starters without inching and without rotor speed
adjustment: pumps, fans, conveyors, compressors, ...
In the case of control by means of a manually operated master controller, the use of
contactors with magnetic blow-out is recommended. Please consult your Regional
Sales Offce.
For hoisting applications, contactor selection must take into account the type of
motor duty, the operating rate, the rotor voltage and current, the type of connection,
the ambient temperature, etc..
Operation
The rotor circuit contactors are interlocked with the stator contactor and therefore do
not open until after the stator contactor has opened, when the rotor voltage has
disappeared, or virtually disappeared.
They make the current corresponding to the normal starting peak (1.5 to 2.5 times
the rated rotor current) and open the circuit under no-load. Making and breaking are
easy.
Different types of rotor connection
Star connection Delta connection
V connection W connection
..
Operation 5
5 5
5/221
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
For rotor circuits of slip-ring motors
.........
Contactor selection according to the type of connection
Rotor current and voltage coeffcients
Coeffcients to be applied to the operational current values shown in the table below.
Type of connection Rotor I coeffcient 3-phase rotor Ue (1)
Maximum With counter-current
Operational I LC1 F LC1 B LC1 F LC1 B
Star 1 2000 V 2000 V 1000 V 1000 V
Delta 14 1700 V 1700 V 850 V 850 V
In V 1 1700 V 1700 V 850 V 850 V
In W 16 1700 V 1700 V 850 V 850 V
Selection according to the operational current
The selection examples below take into account:
a ratio of 2 between the maximum operational rotor voltage (Uer) and the rated stator operational voltage (Ues). This ratio is given in standard
IEC 60947-4,
a guarantee of occasional duty (making and breaking capacities) specifed in the above standards.
b
b
Time current fowing Contactor rating
LC1
D150
LC1
F185
LC1
F265
LC1
F400
LC1
F500
LC1
F630
LC1
F780
LC1
BL
LC1
BM
LC1
BP
LC1
BR
Intermediate contactor: with number of operating cycles y 30/h
10.s 450.A 550.A 800.A 1100.A 1500.A 2000.A 2500.A 2000.A 2400.A 3750 A 5000.A
30 s 280.A 400.A 550.A 730 A 1000.A 1500.A 2000.A 1200.A 1800.A 2600.A 3600 A
60.s 220.A 300 A 400.A 550.A 750.A 1200.A 1500.A 1000.A 1500.A 2200.A 3000 A
Intermediate contactor: with number of operating cycles y 60/h
5.s 450.A 550.A 800.A 1100.A 1500.A 2000.A 2500.A 2000.A 2400.A 3750 A 5000.A
10.s 330 A 450.A 620.A 860.A 1250.A 1800.A 2300 A 1600.A 2200.A 3400 A 4500.A
30 s 220.A 300 A 400.A 550.A 750.A 1200.A 1500.A 1000.A 1500.A 2200.A 3000 A
Intermediate contactor: with number of operating cycles y 150/h for LC1 F and 120/h for LC1 B
5.s 300 A 420.A 580.A 820.A 1150.A 1650.A 2200.A 1500.A 2100.A 3200 A 4200.A
10.s 250.A 350 A 430 A 600.A 850.A 1300 A 1600.A 1100.A 1600.A 2300 A 3200 A
Rotor short-circuit contactor and intermediate contactor:
with number of operating cycles > 150/h for LC1 F and 120/h for LC1 B
200.A 270.A 350 A 500.A 700.A 1000.A 1600.A 800.A 1250.A 2000.A 2750.A
For automatic starting, the electrical durability is in the region of 1 million operating cycles.
(1) For use up to 3000 V, please consult your Regional Sales Offce.
.
Selection 5
5/222
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
Long distance remote control
....
Voltage drop caused by the inrush current
When the operating coil of a contactor is energised, the inrush current produces a
voltage drop in the control circuit cable caused by the resistance of the conductors,
which can adversely affect closing of the contactor.
An excessive voltage drop in the control supply cables (both a.c. and d.c.) can lead
to non closure of the contactor poles or even destruction of the coil due to
overheating.
This phenomenon is aggravated by:
a long line,
a low control circuit voltage,
a cable with a small c.s.a.,
a high inrush power drawn by the coil.
The maximum length of cable, depending on the control voltage, the inrush power
and the conductor c.s.a., is indicated in the graphs below.
Remedial action
To reduce the voltage drop at switch-on:
increase the conductor c.s.a.,
use a higher control circuit voltage,
use an intermediate control relay.
Selection of conductor csa
These graphs are for a maximum line voltage drop of 5%. They give a direct
indication of the copper conductor c.s.a. to be used for the control cable, depending
on its length, the inrush power drawn by the contactor coil and the control circuit
voltage (see example page 5/223).
........
Csa of copper cables
1 a 24 V 3 a 115 V 5 a 400 V A 0.75 mm
2
C 1.5 mm
2
E 4 mm
2
2 a 48 V 4 a 230 V 6 a 690 V B 1 mm
2
D 2.5 mm
2
F 6 mm
2
........
Csa of copper cables
7 c 24 V 9 c 125 V A 0.75 mm
2
C 1.5 mm
2
E 4 mm
2
8 c 48 V 10 c 250 V B 1 mm
2
D 2.5 mm
2
F 6 mm
2
(1) For 3-wire control, the current only fows in 2 of the conductors.
(2) This is the length of the cable comprising 2 or 3 conductors. (Distance between the contactor
and the control device).
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
1000
100
1
10
0,1
1
5
10
50
100
200
500
1000
2000
6
5
4
3
X
2
1
1000
100
1
10
0,1
10
50
100
150
500
1000
5000
10 000
A
D
F
C
E
B
Y
Inrush power drawn in VA Length of control cable in m (2)
Total resistance of the 2 conductors.
in the control cable in W (1)
Total resistance of the 2 conductors .
1000
100
1
10
0,1
1
5
10
50
100
200
500
1000
2000
6
5
4
3
X
2
1
1000
100
1
10
0,1
10
50
100
150
500
1000
5000
10 000
A
D
F
C
E
B
Y
Inrush power drawn in VA Length of control cable in m (2)
1000
100
1
10
0,1
1
5
10
50
100
200
500
1000
2000
10
9
8
7
1000
100
1
10
0,1
10
50
100
500
1000
5000
10 000
B
A
D
F
C
E
Inrush power drawn in W Length of control cable in m (2)
1000
100
1
10
0,1
1
5
10
50
100
200
500
1000
2000
10
9
8
7
1000
100
1
10
0,1
10
50
100
500
1000
5000
10 000
B
A
D
F
C
E
Inrush power drawn in W Length of control cable in m (2)
General 5
5 5
5/223
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
....
Voltage drop caused by the inrush current (continued)
What cable c.s.a. is required for the control circuit of an LC1 D40A, 115 V contactor,
operated from a distance of 150 metres?
Contactor LC1 D40A, voltage 115 V, 50 Hz: inrush power: 200 VA
On the left-hand graph on the page opposite, point X is at the intersection of the
vertical line corresponding to 200 VA and the a 115 V voltage curve.
On the right-hand graph on the page opposite, point Y is at the intersection of the
vertical line corresponding to 150 m and the horizontal line passing through point X.
Use the conductor c.s.a. indicated by the curve which passes through point Y, .
i.e.: 1.5 mm
2
If point Y lies between two c.s.a. curves, choose the larger of the c.s.a. values.
....
Calculating the maximum cable length
The maximum permissible length for acceptable line voltage drop is calculated by
the formula: ..
where:
L : distance between the contactor and the control device in m (length of the
cable),
U : supply voltage in V,
SA : apparent inrush power drawn by the coil in VA,
s : conductor c.s.a. in mm
2
,
K : factor given in the table below.
....
ac supply SA in VA 20 40 100 150 200
K 1.38 15 18 2 215
dc supply Irrespective of the apparent inrush power SA, expressed in W
K = 1.38
b
L = .s.K
U
2
SA
___
L = .s.K
U
2
SA
___
General (continued) 5
5/224
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors 5
....
Residual current in the coil due to cable capacitance
When the control contact of a contactor is opened, the control cable capacitance is
effectively in series with the coil of the electromagnet. This capacitance can cause a
residual current to be maintained in the coil, with the risk that the contactor will
remain closed.
This only applies to contactors operating on an ac supply
This phenomenon is aggravated by:
a long line length between the coil control contact and the contactor, or between
the coil control contact and the power supply,
a high control circuit voltage,
a low coil consumption, sealed,
a low value of contactor drop-out voltage.
The maximum control cable length, according to the contactor coil supply voltage, is
indicated in the graph on the page opposite
....
Remedial action
Various solutions can be adopted to avoid the risk of the contactor remaining closed
due to cable capacitance:
use a d.c. control voltage, or,
add a rectifer, connected as shown in the scheme below, but retaining an a.c.
operating coil: in this way, rectifed a.c. current fows in the control cable.
When calculating the maximum cable length, take the resistance of the conductors
into account.
....
Connect a resistor in parallel with the contactor coil (1)
Value of the resistance :
....
Power to be dissipated :
....
(1) To avoid increasing the voltage drop due to inrush current, this resistor must be brought into
operation after the contactor has closed by using an N/O contact.
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
A
1
A
2
+
1
2
S
u
p
p
l
y

5
0
/
6
0

H
z
L
A
1
A
2
+
1
2
S
u
p
p
l
y

5
0
/
6
0

H
z
L
R.W = (C capacit du cble de commande)
1
10
3
C (F)
___
R.W = (C capacit du cble de commande)
1
10
3
C (F)
___
PW =
U
2
R
___
PW =
U
2
R
___
R.W = (C capacitance of the control cable)
5 5
5/225
5 5
TeSys contactors 5
....
Residual current in the coil due to cable capacitance (continued)
These graphs are for a capacitance, between 2 conductors, of 0.2 F/km. They
make it possible to determine whether there is a risk of the contactor remaining
closed due to the power drawn by the coil when sealed, as well as the control circuit
voltage, according to the length of the control cable.
........
1 a 24 V 3 a 115 V 5 a 400 V 7 3-wire control
2 a 48 V 4 a 230 V 6 a 690 V 8 2-wire control
In the zones below the straight lines for 3-wire and 2-wire control respectively, there
is a risk of the contactor remaining closed.
....
Examples
What is the maximum length for the control cable of an LC1 D12 contactor, operating
on 230 V, with 2-wire control?
Contactor LC1 D12, voltage 230 V, 50 Hz: power sealed 7 VA.
On the left-hand graph, point A is at the intersection of the vertical line for 7 VA with
the a 230 V voltage curve.
On the right-hand graph, point B is at the intersection of the horizontal line with the
2-wire control curve.
The maximum cable length is therefore 300 m.
In the same example, with a 600 m cable, the point lies in the risk zone. A resistor
must therefore be connected in parallel with the contactor coil.
Value of this resistance :
Power to be dissipated : ..
Alternative solution: use a d.c. control supply.
....
Calculating the cable length
The maximum permitted length of control cable to avoid the effects of capacitance is
calculated using the formula: ..
L : distance between the contactor and the control device in km (length of the
cable),
S : apparent power, sealed, in VA,
U : control voltage in V,
Co : line capacitance of the cable in F/km.
b
100 100
0,1
1
10
0,01
1 5 7 10 50 100
2
1
4
6
3
5
10
0,1
1
0,01
100 500 300 1000 5000 10 000
7
8
A
B
Power drawn, sealed in VA Length of control cable in m
Cable capacitance in F Cable capacitance in F
100 100
0,1
1
10
0,01
1 5 7 10 50 100
2
1
4
6
3
5
10
0,1
1
0,01
100 500 300 1000 5000 10 000
7
8
A
B
Power drawn, sealed in VA Length of control cable in m
Cable capacitance in F Cable capacitance in F
P = = = 6 W
U
2
R
___
(220)
2
8300
___
P = = = 6 W
U
2
R
___
(220)
2
8300
___
L = 455 .
S
U
2
Co
___
L = 455 .
S
U
2
Co
___
.
R = = = 8.3 W......................
1
10
3
..C
__
1
10
3 .
012
___
5/226
5 5 5 5
TeSys contactors
Variable composition standard and high
performance contactors
..
Applications b Motor switching in categories AC-3
b Resistive load switching : heating, etc.
b Distribution circuit switching : line contactor
b Supply changeover switching : circuit coupling etc
b Transformer, capacitor, lighting switching.
Type Standard contactors
Rated operational current AC-3 80.A. 170.A 250.A 350 A 460.A 700.A
AC-4/DC-5 72.A/. 145.A/ 205.A/ 290/470.A.
(1)
380/630 A.
(1)
584/1000.A.
(1)
AC-1 80.A. 200.A 300 A 470.A 630 A 1000.A
Rated operational voltage 690 V a 690 V a 690 V a 690 V a 690 V a 690 V a
Control circuit Standard applications
a.c. supply a d.c. supply c
Contactors Type CV1
Rating F G H J K L
Pages 26216/2.to.26218/5.
(1) With PN3 poles.
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2

b Motor switching in categories AC-4, DC-5
b Inductive circuit switching
b High voltage d.c. switching : crane electromagnets, railway locomotives
b Load switching at high operating rates.
.
High performance contactors
80.A 200.A 250.A 320 A 460.A 800.A 1000.A 1500.A 1800.A.
80/80.A 170/200.A 208/300 A 250/320 A 380/500 A 720/800.A 830/1000 A 1200/1800.A 1500/2500.A.
80A 200.A 300 A 320 A 500.A 800.A 1250.A 2000.A 2750.A.
1000 V a 1000 V a 1000 V a 1000 V a 1000 V a 1000 V a 1000 V a 1000 V a 1000 V a
Low consumption applications
a.c. supply via economy resistor ... d.c. supply via economy resistor
CV3 CV3 and LC1 B
F G H J K L M P R
.
R
KM
A
1
A
2
KM R
KM
A
1
A
2
KM
R
KM
A
1
A
2
KM R
KM
A
1
A
2
KM
Selection guide
5 5
5/227
5 5

.
b Motor switching in categories AC-4, DC-5
b Inductive circuit switching
b High voltage d.c. switching : crane electromagnets, railway locomotives
b Load switching at high operating rates.
.
High performance contactors
80.A 200.A 250.A 320 A 460.A 800.A 1000.A 1500.A 1800.A.
80/80.A 170/200.A 208/300 A 250/320 A 380/500 A 720/800.A 830/1000 A 1200/1800.A 1500/2500.A.
80A 200.A 300 A 320 A 500.A 800.A 1250.A 2000.A 2750.A.
1000 V a 1000 V a 1000 V a 1000 V a 1000 V a 1000 V a 1000 V a 1000 V a 1000 V a
Low consumption applications
a.c. supply via economy resistor ... d.c. supply via economy resistor
CV3 CV3 and LC1 B
F G H J K L M P R
.
R
KM
A
1
A
2
KM R
KM
A
1
A
2
KM
R
KM
A
1
A
2
KM R
KM
A
1
A
2
KM

5/228
5 5 5 5
Selection
To defne a contactor
The criteria required to defne the composition of a contactor are:
the number of N/O and N/C power poles,
the current and power supply voltage, .
(note: on a d.c. supply, the time constant of the load must be known in order to
defne the number of poles to be wired in series to break the arc),
the control circuit voltage,
the number of auxiliary contacts.
b
b
b
b
To order a contactor
Contactor selectable by code combinations
Use the symbol combination table on page 5/229.
Check the maximum number of poles in the selection table on page 5/230.
Check the operational currents possible below (selection restrictions)..
b
b
b
Contactor not selectable by code combinations
For a composition that cannot be selected using these tables, use order form
CF 452, page 5/231..
b
Selection restrictions
Contactor type CV1 BF
CV3 BF
CV1 BG
CV3 BG
CV1 BH
CV3 BH
CV1 BJ
CV3 BJ
CV1 BK
CV3 BK
CV1 BL
Rated
operational
current
11.A E
13 A M
20.A N
40.A P
50.A Q Q
80.A F
125.A R R
200.A G G
250.A S
300 A H
320 A T
400.A U
470.A J
500.A V
630 A K K
1000.A L
0.
Without arc
chamber
Z Z Z Z Z Z
L
R
----
TeSys contactors
Variable composition contactors .
CV1 B (80 to 1000 A) and CV3 B (80 to 500 A)
Selection
5 5
5/229
5 5
Reference to be constituted
(see examples on page 5/230)
Type of contactor related to application
a 690 V, c 220 V/pole CV1 B
a 1000 V, c 440 V/pole CV3 B
Contactor size AC-1/AC-3
CV1 : 80/80 A CV3 : 80/80 A F
CV1 : 200/170 A CV3 : 200/200 A G
CV1 : 300/250 A CV3 : 300/285 A H
CV1 : 470/350 A CV3 : 320/320 A J
CV1 : 630/460 A CV3 : 500/460 A K
CV1 : 1000/700 A L
Number of poles
N/O poles 1 N/O 1
2 N/O 2
3 N/O 3
4 N/O 4
5 N/O 5
N/C poles 1 N/C 1 .
2 N/C 2
3 N/C 3
No main poles 0 Z 0 Z
Operational current (determines the blow-out coil size)
11.A E E
13 A M M
20.A N N
40.A P P
50.A Q Q
80.A F F
125.A R R
200.A G G
250.A S S
300 A H H
320 A T T
400.A U U
470.A J J
500.A V V
630 A K K
1000.A L L
Without breaking Z Z
24 V B
48 V E
110 V F
120 V K
127 V G
208 V L
220 V M
230 V P
240 V U
380 V Q
400 V V
415 V N
440 V R
480 V T
500 V S
600 V X
Operating frequency
50 Hz 5
60 Hz 6
50/60 Hz (rectifer + economy resistor) 7
c
D
c + economy resistor R
Auxiliary contacts (type ZC4 GM)
N/O instantaneous 1 N/O 1
2 N/O 2
3 N/O 3
4 N/O 4
N/C instantaneous 1 N/C 1
2 N/C 2
3 N/C 3
4 N/C 4
No instantaneous auxiliary contacts 0 0
On-delay 1.C/O J
Off-delay 1.C/O N
To check whether the symbol combinations are possible, refer to the selection information and guide on pages 5/228 and 5/230.
If in doubt, fll out order form CF 452.
TeSys contactors
Symbol combination table
5/230
5 5 5 5
Guide to selection of code combinations
CV1 contactors: maximum number of power poles
Contactor
type
CV1 BF CV1 BG CV1 BH CV1 BJ CV1 BK CV1 BL
Pole type N/O N/C N/O N/C N/O N/C N/O N/C N/O N/C N/O N/C
Number
of poles
5 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 2
(1)
0
0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 1.
(2)
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
CV3 contactors: maximum number of power poles
Contactor
type
CV3 BF CV3 BG CV3 BH CV3 BJ CV3 BK
Pole type N/O N/C N/O N/C N/O N/C N/O N/C N/O N/C
Number
of poles
5 0 4 0 4 0 2. 0 2 0 .
.
0 2 0 2 0 2
1 2 1 2
3 1 2 1 2 1
CV1 or CV3 contactors:
Maximum number of auxiliary contacts: 4 + 1 time delay if necessary
.
Selection restrictions, according to coil type:
(1) 4-pole with economy resistor.
(2) 2-pole with economy resistor.
Examples
Switching of single-phase capacitor: 400 V - 80 A - 1 N/O main pole. 220 V / 50 Hz
control circuit voltage, 1 N/O and 1 N/C auxiliary contacts. .
Reference: CV1 BF1F0ZM511
Switching of d.c. heating circuits: 800 V - 150 A - 2 N/O main poles - 48 V c.
control circuit, instantaneous auxiliary contact 1 N/O + 1 on-delay. .
Reference: CV3 BG2W0ZED10J
b
b
Other versions
To obtain a composition with more main poles or with more than 4 auxiliary contacts,
please use order form CF 452 (see page 5/231)..
TeSys contactors
Selection
5 5
5/231
5 5
(1) Standard delivery time: 3 weeks, from receipt of order. For faster delivery, please consult your Regional Sales Offce.
Date of order Editor Geog. area Order n Required delivery (1) Job n
/ /
Company: ................................ Customer Order N: ...............................
Activity sector: ................................ Application: ..............................
Number of contactors: ....... Type - size or symbol combination: ..........
For use by Schneider Electric
For devices with symbol combination: Do not fll out the form below
POWER CIRCUIT
AC Hz Poles
Voltage: V DC
Number of N/O main poles: Rated current: ................... Amp Ref:
Number of N/C main poles: Rated current: ................... Amp Ref:
Any special details: .....................................................................................................................
CONTROL CIRCUIT Electromag:

AC Hz
Coil:
Voltage: V DC
Coil maint. cont:
Rectifer:
Economy resistor: Yes No
Econ. resist. contact:
(unless specifed, an economy resistor will only be included if necessary)
Customer marking: .......... Econ. Resist.:
AUXILIARY CONTACTS AVAILABLE
No.
ZC4GM1 :
(N/O)
No.
ZC4GM2 :
(N/C)
Instantaneous contacts: Number of N/O Number of N/C No.
ZC1GP4 :
(N/C)
No.
ZC1GP5 :
(N/C+N/O)
If a specifc type or block of contacts is required, please indicate below. No.
ZC1GP6 :
(N/O+N/O)
Number GM1: GM2: GP4: GP5: GP6: LA1:
No.
ZC2GG1 :
(ON-Del)
Note : For mechanical interlocking, a N/C contact must be specifed for the interlocking function.
No.
ZC2GG5 :
(OFF-Del)
No. LA1BNp31 :
Time delay contacts N/C + N/O : On delay or Off delay
No. LA1DNpp.:
No. LApDTp.:
Note: If LA1 is used, a build specifcation is required. If CV1, specif. n:
MOUNTING Shaft: C or E =
Fixing centres L: Standard
Code:
Specifed With L = ............
Bar: L = :
Code:
Mechanical interlock MI:
Build see drwg.
Yes No
N :
Vertically mounted reversers fxing centres E =.......... mm MI bearing
Upper position contactor: ........................... Lower position contactor:
W1
If mechanical interlock specifed : Ref: .....................................
MI ref
Supply linking components for the 2 contactors (Rod, clevis, cranks, lock, etc...) : Yes No
..Note : MI components that are part of the contactor such as the bearing, clevis or lock support are factory ftted.
ANY SPECIAL DETAILS (Comments / Specifc requirements / Special MI / Accessories / Etc...)
Launch date
Delivery date
Contactor reference*
*.3 possibilities
1) Device with symbol combination (see drwg 1492177)
2) Device n defned on the basis of this form
Type/size/order n/year. E.g.: CV1GB000599
3) Reference defned to specifcation
L
Dimensions in catalogue
L
Dimensions in catalogue
TeSys contactors
CV1 and CV3
Reference constitution
or order form CF 452
5/232
5 5 5 5
Selection
Contactor size LC1 V160 LC1 V320 LC1 V610
Maximum operational
current in AC-3
A 160 320 610
Rated operational
power P
(standard power ratings.
of motors)
230 V kW 45 90 160
400 V kW 75 160 300
525 V kW 110 220 400
690 V kW 150 280 560
1000 V kW 200 400 800
1500 V kW 280 600 930
For 3-phase motors conforming to CSA standards
Rated operational
power P
(standard power ratings.
of 3-phase CSA motors)
200 V hp 50 100 150
240 V hp 60 125 200
380 V hp 100 200 300
480 V hp 125 250 400
600 V hp 150 300 500
800 V hp 200 400 700
1000 V hp 250 500 1000
1500 V hp 400 800 1300
For switching 3-phase capacitors
Rated operational
power P
240 V kVAR 47 94 176
480 V kVAR 95 190 356
600 V kVAR 100 200 400
1500 V kVAR 250 500 1000
For switching the primaries of 3-phase transformers (LV/LV)
Rated operational
power P
208 V kVA 20 41 81
240 V kVA 23 47 94
480 V kVA 47 94 188
600 V kVA 59 117 234
Contactor type LC1 V160 LC1 V320 LC1 V610
Shock resistance
(1/2 sine wave = 11 ms)
Contacts closed 10 gn 10 gn 10 gn
Contacts open 10 gn 10 gn 10 gn

.
10500 Hz
.
2 gn
.
2 gn
.
2 gn

Operating altitude
.
Above sea level
.
Maximum

m
.
3600
.
3600
.
3600
Below sea level Minimum m 2500 4500 4500

around the device
.
Storage

C
.
- 40+ 80
.
- 40+ 80
.
- 40+ 80
Operation.
08.11.Uc
C - 5+ 55 - 5+ 55 - 5+ 55
Permissible for.
operation at Uc
C - 10+ 75 - 10+ 75 - 10+ 75

.
.
IP.00
.
IP.00
.
IP.00

Operating position
.
Any
.
Any
.
Any

Cabling
.
Cable c.s.a.

mm
2
.
70
.
185
.
2 x 185
Key for hex. screws mm Allen 4 20 20
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) To earth V 2000 2000 2000

Consumption
.
Inrush

VA
.
300
.
600
.
1700
Sealed VA 30 20 28

Permissible control circuit voltage
.
0811.Uc
.
0811.Uc
.
0811.Uc

Closing time (1)

ms
.
1822
.
24...32
.
24...32

Opening time (1)

ms
.
95115
.
95115
.
95115
contact of the main poles. The opening time O is measured from the moment the coil supply is
switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
References :.
page 5/234
Dimensions : .
page 5/236
Schemes : .
page 5/236
References :.
page 5/234
Dimensions : .
page 5/236
Schemes : .
page 5/236
TeSys contactors
3-pole vacuum contactors.
and reversing contactors
Selection,
characteristics
5 5
5/233
5 5

Contactor type

LC1 V160

LC1 V320

LC1 V610


V
.
1500
.
1500
.
1500

Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)

kV
.
8
.
8
.
8

Conforming to standards
.
EN 60947-4-1 - IEC 60947-4-1

Approvals
.
CSA

Conventional rated thermal current (Ith)

A
.
160
.
320
.
630


q.y 40 C AC-1

A
.
160
.
320
.
630
q.y 55 C AC-3 A 160 320 610
q.y 55 C AC-4 A 130 270 540

(400 V at I max)
.
AC-1
.
12
.
1
.
1
AC-3 16 15 15
AC-4 018 015 012

.
.
5
.
25
.
2

in operating cycles.
per hour
.
Mechanical
.
1200
.
1200
.
1200
AC-1 900 900 900
AC-3 900 900 900
AC-4 450 450 450

Maximum making capacity
(lrms)
.
Ue = 1500 V To IEC 60947

A
.
1900
.
3800
.
7300

Maximum breaking capacity
(lrms)
.
Ue = 1500 V To IEC 60947

A
.
1600
.
3200
.
6100

Maximum
permissible current
.
For.1.s

A
.
2400
.
4500
.
9000
For.2.s A 2000 3750 7580
For.10.s A 1600 3200 6100
For 30 s A 960 1920 3600

at Ie in cat. AC-3 max.
.
aM fuse

A
.
160
.
400
.
630


V
.
690

Conventional rated thermal current (Ith)

A
.
10

.
AC-15, 230 V

A
.
078
AC-15, 400 V A 045
AC-15, 500 V A 0.35
DC-13, 24 V A 11
DC-13, 110 V A 024
DC-13, 220 V A 012

Cabling
.
Cable c.s.a.

mm
2
.
25

.
gG fuse

A
.
10

Operating time (1)
(at 100 % of Uc)
.
C

ms
.
5
O ms 5
(1) Operating time in relation to the main contacts.
Selection : .
page 5/232
References :.
pages 5/234 and 5/235
Dimensions :.
page 5/236
Schemes :.
page 5/236
Selection : .
page 5/232
References :.
pages 5/234 and 5/235
Dimensions :.
page 5/236
Schemes :.
page 5/236
TeSys contactors
3-pole vacuum contactors.
5/234
5 5 5 5
Vacuum contactors
50/60 Hz
in category AC-3
Rated
operational
current
Ie
Instan-
taneous
auxiliary
contacts
Control
circuit
voltage
(50/60 Hz)
Basic
reference (1)
Weight
230 V 400 V 525 V 690 V 1000 V AC-3 AC-1
45 75 110 150 200 160 160 ...2 ....1 (1) LC1 V160pp 3.800
90 160 220 280 400 320 320 ...1 ....1 (1) LC1 V320pp 10500
160 300 400 560 800 610 630 ...1 ....1 (1) LC1 V610pp 13.000
Reversing vacuum contactors
The reversing contactor range comprises :
for 160 A rating, a kit with set of power connections allowing assembly of the
starter,
for 320 and 610 A ratings, a complete starter, ready for use.
b
b
50/60 Hz
in category AC-3
Rated
operational
current
Ie
Instan-
taneous
auxiliary
contacts
Control
circuit
voltage
(50/60 Hz)
Basic
reference (1)
Weight
230 V 400 V 525 V 690 V 1000 V AC-3 AC-1
45 75 110 150 200 160 160 ..2 .....1 LA9 V974 (2) 1200
90 160 220 280 400 320 320 ..1 .....1 110-120 V LC2 V320FE7 30
220-240 V LC2 V320P7 30
380-415 V LC2 V320V7 30
160 300 400 560 800 610 630 ..1 .....1 110-120 V LC2 V610FE7 36
220-240 V LC2 V610P7 36
(1) Basic reference; add code indicating control circuit voltage.
Standard control circuit voltages :
Volts 50/60 Hz 110120 220240 380415 440480 550600
Item FE7 P7 V7 R7 X7
(2) Kit containing a mechanical interlock, a set of power connections and a fxing plate. To build
a complete reversing contactor, order contactors LC1 V160pp separately.
1
0
5
1
9
4
LC1 V320
1
0
5
1
9
4
LC1 V320
LA9 V974 LA9 V974
g f
3 L2
5 L3
1 L1
4 T2
6 T3
ON / I
OFF / 0
2 T1
LC1V610
3 L2
5 L3
1 L1
4 T2
6 T3
ON / I
OFF / 0
2 T1
LC1V610 KM1
KM2
L1
L2
L3
LC2 V610
g f
3 L2
5 L3
1 L1
4 T2
6 T3
ON / I
OFF / 0
2 T1
LC1V610
3 L2
5 L3
1 L1
4 T2
6 T3
ON / I
OFF / 0
2 T1
LC1V610 KM1
KM2
L1
L2
L3
LC2 V610
Selection :
page 5/232
Characteristics :
pages 5/232 and 5/233
Dimensions :
page 5/236
Schemes :
page 5/236
Selection :
page 5/232
Characteristics :
pages 5/232 and 5/233
Dimensions :
page 5/236
Schemes :
page 5/236
TeSys contactors
3-pole vacuum contactors
Power and control circuits
a.c. supply
References
5 5
5/235
5 5
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (1)
Number of contacts Maximum number of
Auxiliary
contacts
Reference Weight
kg
2 4 1 1 LA1 VN11 0.030
2 LA1 VN02 0.030
2 LA1 VN20 0.030
1 1 LA1 VN11X (2) 0.030
50/60 Hz coils
Rated voltage Voltage code Reference Weight
V kg
For contactors LC1 V160
110120 FE7 LX1 V160FE7 0400
220240 P7 LX1 V160P7 0400
380415 V7 LX1 V160V7 0400
440480 R7 LX1 V160R7 0400
550600 X7 LX1 V160X7 0400
110120 FE7 LX1 V320FE7 0800
220240 P7 LX1 V320P7 0800
380415 V7 LX1 V320V7 0800
440480 R7 LX1 V320R7 0800
550600 X7 LX1 V320X7 0800
110120 FE7 LX1 V610FE7 0800
220240 P7 LX1 V610P7 0800
380415 V7 LX1 V610V7 0800
440480 R7 LX1 V610R7 0800
550600 X7 LX1 V610X7 0800
(1) LC1 V160 : auxiliary contact blocks mounted at the top of the contactor, with no change to the
overall dimensions.
LC1 V320 or LC1 V610 : 2 auxiliary contact blocks mounted on the RH and LH side of the
contactor, with no change to the overall dimensions.
(2) For LC1 V160 : 1 N/C contact for the coil + 1 N/O contact.
5
0
0
3
0
8
LA1 VN11
5
0
0
3
0
8
LA1 VN11
5
0
0
3
1
0
LX1 V320pp
5
0
0
3
1
0
LX1 V320pp
Selection :
page 5/232
Characteristics :
pages 5/232 and 5/233
References :
page 5/234
Selection :
page 5/232
Characteristics :
pages 5/232 and 5/233
References :
page 5/234
TeSys contactors
Power and control circuits
a.c. supply
5/236
5 5 5 5
LC1 V160
LC1 V320
LC1 V610
Schemes
LC1 V160 LC1 V320, V610
LA1 VN11 1 N/O & 1 N/C LA1 VN02 2 N/C LA1 VN20 2 N/O LA1 VN11X 1 N/O
151 36,5
123
36,5
1
6
8
24
48
24
48
7
7
1
5
2
9
5
0
0
3
1
1
151 36,5
123
36,5
1
6
8
24
48
24
48
7
7
1
5
2
9
5
0
0
3
1
1
35
159
130
156
133
63,5
201
63,5
2
2
2
37
1
8
5
38
76
170
70
2x8
2x8,5x19
2
0
3
9
,
5
1
9
1
3
,
5
48
15
2x8,5
50
2x10,5
5
0
0
3
1
2
35
159
130
156
133
63,5
201
63,5
2
2
2
37
1
8
5
38
76
170
70
2x8
2x8,5x19
2
0
3
9
,
5
1
9
1
3
,
5
48
15
2x8,5
50
2x10,5
5
0
0
3
1
2
95
178
127
172
2x8,5x19
2
0
3
2
2
2
9
,
5 15
2x8,5
68
201
68
3
5
6
3
2
8
32,5
68 68
5
0
0
3
1
3
95
178
127
172
2x8,5x19
2
0
3
2
2
2
9
,
5 15
2x8,5
68
201
68
3
5
6
3
2
8
32,5
68 68
5
0
0
3
1
3
1
/
L
1
2
/
T
1
A
1
0
3
/
N
O
1
3
/
N
O
A
2
0
4
1
4
3
/
L
2
4
/
T
2
5
/
L
3
6
/
T
3
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
1
/
L
1
2
/
T
1
A
1
0
3
/
N
O
1
3
/
N
O
A
2
0
4
1
4
3
/
L
2
4
/
T
2
5
/
L
3
6
/
T
3
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
1
/
L
1
2
/
T
1
A
1
1
3
/
N
O
A
2
1
4
3
/
L
2
4
/
T
2
5
/
L
3
6
/
T
3
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
1
/
L
1
2
/
T
1
A
1
1
3
/
N
O
A
2
1
4
3
/
L
2
4
/
T
2
5
/
L
3
6
/
T
3
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
1
4
2
2
1
3
/
N
O
2
1
/
N
C
5
0
0
3
1
6
1
4
2
2
1
3
/
N
O
2
1
/
N
C
5
0
0
3
1
6
5
2
6
2
5
1
/
N
C
6
1
/
N
C
5
2
6
2
5
1
/
N
C
6
1
/
N
C
3
4
4
4
3
3
/
N
O
4
3
/
N
O
3
4
4
4
3
3
/
N
O
4
3
/
N
O
0
4
0
3
/
N
O
N
C
c
o
i
l
0
4
0
3
/
N
O
N
C
c
o
i
l
TeSys contactors
Dimensions,
mounting,
schemes
5 5
5/237
5 5
LA9 V974 + 2 x LC1V160
LC2 V320
LC2 V610
48 81,8 48
88,9
1
5
2
,
4
1
1
,
1
8
5
3
177,8
2
1
5
254 151
5
6
2
3
2
0
48 81,8 48
88,9
1
5
2
,
4
1
1
,
1
8
5
3
177,8
2
1
5
254 151
5
6
2
3
2
0
418
4
4
6
2
2
168 63
16
107
108 63 48
616
96 41
5
4
3
5
6
=
=
4
6
3
559
241
6
3
5
4
1
0
4
5
3
6
0
4
7
418
4
4
6
2
2
168 63
16
107
108 63 48
616
96 41
5
4
3
5
6
=
=
4
6
3
559
241
6
3
5
4
1
0
4
5
3
6
0
4
7
41
16
4
3
2
1
0
5
1
1
7
3
5
6
=
=
4
6
3
69 69
112
559
165
199
112
68
T1 T2 T3
L2 L1 L3
68
616
5
6
2
3
2
2
41
16
4
3
2
1
0
5
1
1
7
3
5
6
=
=
4
6
3
69 69
112
559
165
199
112
68
T1 T2 T3
L2 L1 L3
68
616
5
6
2
3
2
2
TeSys reversing contactors
3-pole reversing vacuum contactors
Dimensions,
mounting
Selection :.
page 5/232
Characteristics :.
pages 5/232 and 5/233
References :.
page 5/234
5/238
5 5 5 5
Schemes
LA9 V974 + 2 x LC1V160
LC2 V320
(1) Dotted line indicates wiring to be installed by the customer.
.
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
2 4 6
U V
W
KM1
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
A
1
A
2
KM2
A
1
A
2
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
2 4 6
U V
W
KM1
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
A
1
A
2
KM2
A
1
A
2
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
2 4 6
U V
W
KM1
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
A
1
A
2
KM2
A
1
A
2
6
7
8
9
- KM1
- KM1
- KM2
A
1
A
2
3
4
5
- KM2 - KM1 - KM2
- KM2
- KM1
A
2
A
1
F1
(1)
Start Start
Stop
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
2 4 6
U V
W
KM1
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
A
1
A
2
KM2
A
1
A
2
6
7
8
9
- KM1
- KM1
- KM2
A
1
A
2
3
4
5
- KM2 - KM1 - KM2
- KM2
- KM1
A
2
A
1
F1
(1)
Start Start
Stop
Selection :.
page 5/232
Characteristics :.
pages 5/232 and 5/233
References :.
page 5/234
Selection :.
page 5/232
Characteristics :.
pages 5/232 and 5/233
References :.
page 5/234
Schemes
5 5
5/239
5 5
Schemes (continued)
LC2 V610
(1) Dotted line indicates wiring to be installed by the customer.
.
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
2 4 6
U V
W
KM1
A
1
A
2
KM2
A
1
A
2
6
7
8
9
- KM1 - KM1
- KM1
- KM1
- KM2
A
1
A
2
3
4
5
- KM2 - KM2
- KM2
- KM1
A
2
A
1
F1
(1)
- KM2
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
Start Start
Stop
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
2 4 6
U V
W
KM1
A
1
A
2
KM2
A
1
A
2
6
7
8
9
- KM1 - KM1
- KM1
- KM1
- KM2
A
1
A
2
3
4
5
- KM2 - KM2
- KM2
- KM1
A
2
A
1
F1
(1)
- KM2
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
Start Start
Stop
Selection :.
page 5/232
Characteristics :.
pages 5/232 and 5/233
References :.
page 5/234
Selection :.
page 5/232
Characteristics :.
pages 5/232 and 5/233
References :.
page 5/234
Schemes (continued)
5/240
5 5 5 5
General
Magnetic latching contactors of both block and bar mounted types are ftted with a
special electromagnet which enables them to remain in the On position when the
coil is no longer energised.
.
Applications
The special properties of magnetic latching contactors make them suitable for a large
number of applications.
Properties Applications
Retention of the sequence memory in
automatic control equipment in the
event of loss of control voltage.
b Refneries, power stations, excitation
circuits.
b
Energy saving, since the source of
supply to the coil does not need to
supply current when the contactor is
latched in the closed state.
b Contactors remaining in the closed
state for long periods. .
Examples: refneries, power supplies,
low voltage distribution
b
Change of state from Closed to
Open by current signal through the
coil.
b Selective opening control. b
Unaffected by mains interference. b No unwanted opening and closing of
the main power poles.
b
Utilisation of contactors beyond their
breaking capacity, as operations are
performed off-load.
b Current carrying at voltages up to
1000 Volts.
b
Contactors are silent in the latched
position.
b
Operation of the electromagnet
CR1 F block contactors
CR1 F magnetic latching contactors are ftted with a double coil with 3 terminals
comprising a latching winding and an unlatching winding. The 2 windings have a
common point which can necessitate special wiring precautions when the latching
supply is separate from the unlatching supply.
The power supplies may be a.c. or d.c. For d.c. operation, the polarities indicated
must be complied with.
Operating precautions:
the 2 windings must not be supplied simultaneously,
a winding must not be supplied continuously,
supply to the coils must be via pulsed contacts.
Manual opening:
if the control voltage is not present, the contactor can be unlatched manually.
CR1 B bar mounted contactors
CR1 B magnetic latching contactors are ftted with a single coil, supplied with d.c. or
with a.c. through a rectifer.
Latching is obtained by direct supply of the coil in one direction of current fow.
Unlatching is obtained by a reverse current, adjusted by resistors.
....
Mechanical latching contactors
LC1 D block contactors
For applications using smaller contactor sizes than those described on page 5/241, it
is possible to obtain the same function by the addition of a mechanical latch block
type LA6 DK, which can be mounted on LC1 D contactors (see page 5/80).
v
v
v
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions, schemes :.
pages 5/260 to 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
pages 5/260 to 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
pages 5/260 to 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
pages 5/260 to 5/267
TeSys contactors
5 5
5/241
5 5
Selection
Continuous or intermittent duty up to 30 operating cycles/hour
Motor (1) 3-pole
contactor
3-pole differential
3 fuses
Type
220 V
230 V
380 V
400 V
415 V 440 V
(2) Reference Setting
range
aM BS-88
P In P In P In P In Reference Rating
kW HP A kW HP A kW HP A kW HP A A A A
25 35 85 CR1 F150 LR9 F5367 60100 100 125
30
33
40
45
103.
113
51
55
70
75
98.
105
55
75
100.
59 80. 97. CR1 F150 LR9 F5369 90150 100 160

59
63
80
85
112.
117
59
63
80
85
105.
115
63
85
109.
CR1 F150 LR9 F5369 90150 125 160

37
40
50
54
126.
134
75
100
138.
75
100
135.
75
80
100
110
125.
131
CR1 F150 LR9 F5369 90150 160 200
45 60 150 80 110 147 80 110 138 90 125 146 CR1 F185 LR9 F5369 90150 160 200
51
55
70
75
170.
182
90
125
170.
90
100
125
136
165.
182
100
136
162.
CR1 F185 LR9 F5371 132220 200 250

59
63
80
85
195.
203
100
110
138
150
188.
205
110
150
200.
110
129
150
175
178.
209
CR1 F265 LR9 F5371 132220 250 315
75
100
240.
129
132
175
180
242.
245
129
132
175
180
230.
240
132
180
215.
CR1 F265 LR9 F7375 200330 250 315

140 190 250 140 190 227 CR1 F265 LR9 F7375 200330 315 400
80

110

260.

140
147
150
190
200
205
260.
273.
280
147
150
160
200
205
220
260.
270.
280
147
150
160
200
205
220
236.
246.
256
CR1 F400 LR9 F7375 200330 315 400
90
125
295.
160
220
300.
180
185
245
250
289.
295
CR1 F400 LR9 F7375 200330 315 400
100
110
136
150
325.
356
180
185
245
250
333.
342
180
185
245
250
320.
325
200
220
270
300
321.
353
CR1 F400 LR9 F7379 300500 400 500
200 270 370 200
220
270
300
340.
385
250
340
401.
CR1 F400 LR9 F7379 300500 400 500

129 175 420 220 300 408 257 350 412 CR1 F500 LR9 F7379 300500 500 630
132
140
180
190
425.
450
250
340
460.
250
257
340
350
425.
450
280
380
450.
CR1 F500 LR9 F7381 380630 500 630

147 200 472 295 400 473 CR1 F500 LR9 F7381 380630 500 630
257
350
475.
280
295
380
400
475.
500
300
410
481.
CR1 F630 LR9 F7381 380630 500 630

150
160
205
220
483.
520
280
295
380
400
510.
546
300
315
410
430
510.
535
315
335
430
450
505.
518
CR1 F630 LR9 F7381 380630 630 800
180
185
245
250
578.
595
300
315
410
430
565.
584
335
355
450
480
550.
580
355
375
480
500
549.
575
CR1 F630 LR9 F7381 380630 630 800
200 270 626 335 450 620 375 500 610 400 454 611 CR1 F630 LR9 F7381 380630 800 1000
220
g
700 355
375
400
g
g
g
635.
670.
710.
400
425
445
450
g
g
g
g
650.
690.
730.
740
425
445
450
475
g
g
g
g
650.
680.
690.
730
CR1 BL33 LR2 F8383 500800 800 1000
250
g
800 425
g
760 475
g
780 500
g
780 CR1 BM33 LR2 F8383 500800 800 1000
257
280
295
300
315
g
g
g
g
g
826.
900.
948.
980.
990
445
450
475
500
530
g
g
g
g
g
790.
800.
850.
900.
950
500
530
560
600
g
g
g
g
820.
870.
920.
978
530
560
600
630
g
g
g
g
825.
870.
920.
965
CR1 BM33 LR2 F8383 6301000 1000 1250
(1) The ratings are for standard 220/230 V, 380/400 V, 415 or 440 V motors. The overload relays should preferably be set to the motor full-load current shown on
the motor rating plate. For other power ratings, select the overload relay with the appropriate range; the associated contactor and fuses must have ratings equal
to or immediately greater than In.
(2) Reference to be completed, see page 5/250.
g There are no standard power ratings for these motors.
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
TeSys contactors
Selection guide for direct on-line starting .
5/242
5 5 5 5
Selection
Contactor size CR1
F150
CR1
F185
CR1
F265
CR1
F400
CR1
F500
CR1
F630
CR1
BL
CR1
BM
CR1
BP
CR1
BR
Rated operational current in AC-3 (q.y 55 C)
440 V A 150 185 265 400 500 630 750 1000 1500 1800
500 V A 135 175 245 385 500 540 750 900 1200 1500
660/690 V A 130 140 230 365 435 470 700 800 900 1100
1000 V A 47 73 95 135 270 330 400 400 500 600
Rated operational power (standard motor power ratings)
220240 V kW 40 55 75 110 147 200 220 280 425 500
HP 54 75 100 150 200 270 300 380 580 680
380400 V kW 75 90 132 200 250 335 400 500 750 900
HP 100 185 180 270 340 450 545 680 1000 1220
415 V kW 80 100 140 220 280 375 425 530 800 900
HP 110 136 180 300 380 500 580 720 1100 1220
440 V kW 80 100 140 250 295 400 450 560 800 900
HP 110 136 190 340 400 545 610 760 1100 1220
500 V kW 90 110 160 257 355 400 500 600 750 900
HP 125 150 220 350 480 545 680 810 1000 1220
660/690 V kW 100 110 160 280 335 450 560 670 750 900
HP 610 760 910 1000 1220
1000 V kW 65 100 147 185 335 450 530 530 670 750
HP 136 200 250 610 720 720 910 1000
Maximum operating rate in operating cycles/hour, at rated operational power with an
on-load factor = 85%: 750 for CR1 F150 to F265, 500 for CR1 F400 to F630 and .
120 for CR1 B.
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
TeSys contactors
Selection guide for utilisation category AC-3
5 5
5/243
5 5
20 30 40 50 60 70 8090
100
150 200 300 400
500
600 800 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 6000 800010 000
0,008
0,001
0,002
0,004
0,006
0,008
0,01
0,02
0,04
0,06
0,08
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
C
R
1

F
1
5
0
C
R
1

F
1
8
5
C
R
1

F
2
6
5
C
R
1

F
4
0
0
C
R
1

F
5
0
0
C
R
1

F
6
3
0
C
R
1

B
L
,

B
M
C
R
1

B
P
C
R
1

B
R

AC-3 AC-2
AC4
Millions of
operating .
cycles
Current broken in A
Current .
breaking .
limits
In categories
Selection
Use in category AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) (1) (q.y 55 C)
The current (Ic) in AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) drawn by the motor.
....
......
Example:
Asynchronous motor with P = 50 kW, Ue = 380 V, Ie = 100 A, Ic = Ie = 100 A, or asynchronous motor with P = 55 kW, Ue = 415 V, Ie = 100 A,
Ic = Ie = 100 A
The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed, CR1 F185.
(1) For 660 V, multiply the number of operating cycles by 0.8.
......
Example:
Asynchronous motor with P = 50 kW, Ue = 380 V, Ie = 100 A, Ic = Ie = 100 A, or asynchronous motor with P = 55 kW, Ue = 415 V, Ie = 100 A,
Ic = Ie = 100 A
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
TeSys contactors
Selection according to required electrical durability
5/244
5 5 5 5
Selection
Maximum operational current (on-load factor u 0.95)
Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour
Contactor size CR1
F150
CR1
F185
CR1
F265
CR1
F400
CR1
F500
CR1
F630
CR1
BL
CR1
BM
CR1
BP
CR1
BR
Cable csa mm
2
120 150 185
Number of bars 2 2 2 2 2 3 4
Bar csa mm 30 x 5 40 x 5 60 x 5 50 x 5 80 x 5 100 x 5 100 x 5
Operational current
in category AC-1
at ambient temperature
y 40 C A 250 275 350 500 700 1000 800 1250 2000 2750
y 55 C A 250 275 300 430 580 850 700 1100 1750 2400
y 70 C A 170 180 250 340 500 700 600 900 1500 2000
Apply the following coeffcients to the above currents; these coeffcients take into account an often unbalanced distribution of current between
the poles:
v
v
v
Electrical durability (Ue y 440 V) (1)
.........
Example:
Ue = 220 V - Ie = 200 A - q = 40 C - Ic = Ie = 200 A
0,01
80 60 100 250
275
400
350 500
600
700
800 1000
1250
2000
2750
4000
0,02
0,04
0,06
0,08
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
C
R
1

F
1
5
0
C
R
1

F
1
8
5
C
R
1

F
2
6
5
C
R
1

F
4
0
0
C
R
1

F
5
0
0
C
R
1

F
6
3
0
C
R
1

B
L
,

B
M
C
R
1

B
P
C
R
1

B
R

Millions of
operating .
cycles
Current broken in A
0,01
80 60 100 250
275
400
350 500
600
700
800 1000
1250
2000
2750
4000
0,02
0,04
0,06
0,08
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
C
R
1

F
1
5
0
C
R
1

F
1
8
5
C
R
1

F
2
6
5
C
R
1

F
4
0
0
C
R
1

F
5
0
0
C
R
1

F
6
3
0
C
R
1

B
L
,

B
M
C
R
1

B
P
C
R
1

B
R

Millions of
operating .
cycles
Current broken in A
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
TeSys contactors
Selection guide for utilisation category AC-1 .
and according to required electrical durability
5 5
5/245
5 5
Selection
Maximum ambient temperature: 55 C
Maximum operational voltage: 1000 V, 5060 Hz
When a transformer is switched on, there is generally an initial current surge which
reaches its peak value almost instantaneously and then decreases in a largely
exponential manner to quickly reach its steady state value.
The value of this current depends on:
the characteristics of the magnetic circuit and of the windings (cross sectional area
of the core, rated inductance, number of turns, size of the windings, ...)
the performance of the magnetic laminations used (residual induction and
saturation inductance),
the magnetic state of the circuit and the instantaneous value of the a.c. mains
voltage at the moment of switch-on.
The peak current at the moment of switch-on can reach 20 to 40 times the rated
current for the various kVA power ratings in the tables below. This value is
independent of the no-load or on-load state of the transformer.
The peak magnetising current of the transformer must be lower than the values given
in the tables below.
v
v
v
TeSys contactors
Selection guide for switching the primaries .
of 3-phase transformers
Contactor selection
Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour
Contactor size CR1
F150
CR1
F185
CR1
F265
CR1
F400
CR1
F500
CR1
F630
CR1
BL
CR1
BM
CR1
BP
CR1
BR
Maximum permissible
A 1700 2800 3500 5500 6800 9000 18.000 18.000 24.000 30 000
Maximum
operational power (1)
220230 V. kVA 25 40 50 75 100 140 230 230 300 380
380400 V. kVA 50 75 90 130 170 225 400 400 530 660
415440 V. kVA 55 80 100 140 190 250 450 450 560 700
500 V. kVA 65 95 110 170 225 280 480 480 600 750
660 V. kVA 80 120 140 200 270 315 600 600 800 950
1000 V. kVA 100 150 200 250 375 470 700 700 1000 1200
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
5/246
5 5 5 5
Contactor type CR1 F150 CR1 F185 CR1 F265
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60158-1,
BS 775, 60947-4
V 1000 1000 1000
Conforming to VDE 0110 grC V 1500 1500 1500
Special version
around the device
Storage C - 60+ 80
For operation at Uc C - 15+ 70
Operating positions Without derating 5
Number of poles . 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4
Rated operational current (Ie).
(Ue y 440 V)
In AC-3, q.y 40 C A 150 185 265
In AC-1, q.y 40 C A 250 275 350
In AC-4, q.y 40 C A 138 170 245
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to. V 1000 1000 1000
Frequency limits
(sine wave)
Of the opeational current Hz 25200 25200 25200
Rated making capacity I rms. A 1700 2100 2940
Rated breaking capacity I rms 220440 V A 1500 1800 2450
500 V A 1200 1600 2200
660/690 V A 1100 1200 1700
1000 V A 450 600 800
from cold state, with no current
fowing for previous 60 minutes .
at.q.y 40 C
For.1.s A 1200 1500 2200
For.5.s A 1200 1500 2200
For.10.s A 1200 1500 2200
For 30 s A 700 920 1230
For 1 min A 600 740 950
For 3 min A 450 500 620
For 10 min A 350 400 480
Short-circuit protection by fuses
q.y 440 V
Motor circuit AC-3 (type aM) A 160 200 315
AC-1 circuit (type gG, BS 88). A 250 315 400
Average impedance per pole At lth and 50 Hz. mW 045 0.36 0.32
Power dissipated per pole
for the above operational currents
AC-3 W 6 12 22
AC-1. W 18 26 39
Connection Number of conductors 1 1 1
Cable with lugs mm
2
120 150 240
2
120 150 240
Number of bars 2 2 2
Bar c.s.a. mm 25 x 3 25 x 3 32 x 4
Bolt diameter 8 8 10
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
TeSys contactors
Characteristics
5 5
5/247
5 5
CR1 F400 CR1 F500 CR1 F630 CR1 BL CR1 BM CR1 BP CR1 BR
1000. 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
1500. 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500
TH TC
. TH
- 60+ 80 - 60+ 80
- 15+ 70. - 15+ 60
3000. 3000
5 in relation to normal vertical mounting plane. 5 in relation to normal vertical mounting plane
3 or 4. 3 or 4 3 or 4 1, 2, 3 or 4 1, 2, 3 or 4 1, 2, 3 or 4 1, 2, 3 or 4
400 500 630 750 1000 1500 1800
500 700 1000 800 1250 2000 2750
370 460 560 700 800 1250 1500
1000. 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
25200. 25200 25200 5060 5060 5060 5060
4500. 5000 6740 10.000 10.000 15.000 18.000
4000 5000 6300 10.000 10.000 15.000 18.000
3500 4500 5400 9000 9000 12.000 15.000
3000 3560 4600 8000 8000 9000 11.000
1200 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 6000
3600 4200 5050 9600 9600 12.000 15.000
3600 4200 5050 9600 9600 12.000 15.000
3600 4200 5050 7000 8000 9600 12.000
2400 3200 4400 4800 5200 6400 8000
1700 2400 3400 3500 3800 5200 6300
1200 1500 2200 2100 2400 3600 4400
1000 1200 1600 1200 1800 2800 3600
400 500 630 800 1200 800 x 2 (1) 1000 x 2 (1)
500. 800 1000 800 1200 1000 x 2 (1) 1200 x 2 (1)
028. 018 012 018 018 0.13 009
45 45 48 88 180 290 360
70. 88 120 115 280 520 680
2 2
150 240

2 2 2 2 2 3 4
30 x 5 40 x 5 60 x 5 50 x 5 80 x 5 100 x 5 100 x 10
10 10 12 4 x 8 4 x 10 4 x 10 4 x 10
35 35 58 21 35 35 35
(1) Paralleling of poles must be carried out only in accordance with the fuse manufacturers recommendations.
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
5/248
5 5 5 5
Contactor type CR1 F150 CR1 F185 CR1 F265
Rated control
a 50 or 60 Hz V 48415
a 400 Hz V 48220
c
V 48220
c low consumption V 48220
a.and.c
Latching 08511.Uc
Unlatching 08511.Uc
Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles 1
Average consumption Latching 1-pole VA
50/60 Hz 2-pole VA
3-pole VA 1100 1600 1650
4-pole VA 100 1600 1650
Unlatching 1-pole VA
2-pole VA
3-pole VA 7.3 8 9
4-pole VA 7.3 8 9
400 Hz and c Latching 1-pole VA
2-pole VA
3-pole VA 1260 1750 1800
4-pole VA 1260 1750 1800
Unlatching 1-pole VA
2-pole VA
3-pole VA 10 11 12
4-pole VA 10 11 12
c low
consumption
Latching 3/4-pole W 500 500 500
Unlatching 3/4-pole W 15 20 40
Average operating time
at Uc (1)
Latching ms 3540 3540 4550
Unlatching ms 50100 50100 50100
(1) The closing time is measured from the moment the closing coil is energised to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time is measured from the moment
the opening coil is energised to the moment the main poles separate.
Nota : the arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the main poles. For 3-phase applications the arcing time is usually less than 10 ms. The load is isolated
Type of contacts . LAD N for contactors CR1 F
Conventional thermal current A 10
(Ui)
Connection Flexible or solid conductor
mm
2
1 x 1 min; 2 x 2.5 max
LAD N for contactors CR1 F
ac supply dc supply
broken (cos j 0.4).
economy resistor, the time constant
V 48 115 230 400 600 V 48 125 250 440
1 million operating cycles VA 120 280 560 960 1440 W 90 75 68 61
Occasional making capacity VA 2600 7000 13 000 15.000 9000 W 700 400 260 220
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
TeSys contactors
Characteristics
5 5
5/249
5 5
CR1 F400 CR1 F500 CR1 F630 CR1 BL CR1 BM CR1 BP CR1 BR
48415 110500
48220 110500
48220 110500
48220
08511.Uc 08511.Uc
08511.Uc 08511.Uc
120. 120
1 1
650 650 650 650
1100 1100 1100 1100
1450 1650 2100 1650 1650 1650 1650
1450 1650 2100 1850 1850 1850 1850
110 110 110 110
125 125 125 125
12 95 8 165 165 165 165
12 95 8 175 175 175 175
600 600 600 600
1000 1000 1000 1000
1600 1800 2300 1500 1500 1500 1500
1600 1800 2300 1700 1700 1700 1700
100 100 100 100
115 115 115 115
16 13 11 150 150 150 150
16 13 11 160 160 160 160
500 550 620
70 60 45
4075 4080 4080 100150 100150 100150 100150
50100 50100 50100 2040 2040 2040 2040
(1) The closing time is measured from the moment the closing coil is energised to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time is measured from the moment
the opening coil is energised to the moment the main poles separate.
Nota : the arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the main poles. For 3-phase applications the arcing time is usually less than 10 ms. The load is isolated
LAD N for contactors CR1 F ZC4 GM for contactors CR1 B
10. 20
690. 660
1 x 1 min; 2 x 2.5 max. 2 min; 4 max
ZC4 GM for contactors CR1 B
ac supply dc supply
broken (cos j 0.4).
economy resistor, the time constant
V 110
127
220 380 415
440
500 V 110 120 440 500
1 million operating cycles VA 2000 4000 4000 4000 3500 W 250 250 230 200
Occasional making capacity VA 14.000 23 000 35 000 45.000 35 000 W 1600 800 400 360
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
5/250
5 5 5 5
CR1 F1854
CR1 F500
CR1 BP33
5
0
1
6
1
2
_
1
5
0
1
6
1
3
_
1
5
0
1
6
1
4
_
1
Maximum thermal
current in category
AC-1
40 C
Rated
operational
current in
category AC-3
(440 V max)
Number
of poles
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
Basic reference,
to be completed by
(1)
Weight
A A kg
250 150 3 CR1 F150pp 3.500
4 CR1 F1504pp 3.800
275 185 3 CR1 F185pp 4600
4 CR1 F1854pp 5400
350 265 3 CR1 F265pp 7400
4 CR1 F2654pp 8500
500 400 3 CR1 F400pp 9100
4 CR1 F4004pp 10200
700 500 3 CR1 F500pp 11.300
4 CR1 F5004pp 12900
1000 630 3 CR1 F630pp 18600
4 CR1 F6304pp 21500
800 750 1 1 2 CR1 BL31p12 32.000
2 1 CR1 BL31p21 32.000
3 CR1 BL31p30 32.000
2 1 2 CR1 BL32p12 45000
2 1 CR1 BL32p21 45000
3 CR1 BL32p30 45000
3 1 2 CR1 BL33p12 58000
2 1 CR1 BL33p21 58000
3 CR1 BL33p30 58000
4 1 2 CR1 BL34p12 72000
2 1 CR1 BL34p21 72000
3 CR1 BL34p30 72000
1250 1000 1 1 2 CR1 BM31p12 31.000
2 1 CR1 BM31p21 31.000
3 CR1 BM31p30 31.000
2 1 2 CR1 BM32p12 44000
2 1 CR1 BM32p21 44000
3 CR1 BM32p30 44000
3 1 2 CR1 BM33p12 57000
2 1 CR1 BM33p21 57000
3 CR1 BM33p30 57000
4 1 2 CR1 BM34p12 71000
2 1 CR1 BM34p21 71000
3 CR1 BM34p30 71000
2000 1500 1 1 2 CR1 BP31p12 41000
2 1 CR1 BP31p21 41000
3 CR1 BP31p30 41000
2 1 2 CR1 BP32p12 65000
2 1 CR1 BP32p21 65000
3 CR1 BP32p30 65000
3 1 2 CR1 BP33p12 94000
2 1 CR1 BP33p21 94000
3 CR1 BP33p30 94000
4 1 2 CR1 BP34p12 120000
2 1 CR1 BP34p21 120000
3 CR1 BP34p30 120000
2750 1800 1 1 2 CR1 BR31p12 52000
2 1 CR1 BR31p21 52000
3 CR1 BR31p30 52000
2 1 2 CR1 BR32p12 85000
2 1 CR1 BR32p21 85000
3 CR1 BR32p30 85000
3 1 2 CR1 BR33p12 129000
2 1 CR1 BR33p21 129000
3 CR1 BR33p30 129000
4 1 2 CR1 BR34p12 160000
2 1 CR1 BR34p21 160000
3 CR1 BR34p30 160000
(1) Standard control circuit voltages: see page opposite.
Selection :
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :
pages 5/266 and 5/267
TeSys contactors
Control circuit: a.c. or d.c. supply
References
5 5
5/251
5 5
Accessories for contactors CR1 F
Description Number of
contacts or
shrouds
For use on Reference Weight
kg
Instantaneous
auxiliary contacts
(1) CR1.F LAD N (1) 0050
Time delay
auxiliary contacts
(1) CR1.F LAD p (1) 0060
Contact blocks with
protected terminals
(for mounting on contactors
with closed arc chamber)
Set of 2 blocks CR1.F150.and.
CR1.F185
LA9 F103 0.300
Power terminal
protection shrouds
Set of 6 shrouds .
for 3-pole
contactors
CR1.F150.and.
CR1.F185
LA9 F702 0250
CR1.F265.to.
CR1.F500
LA9 F703 0250
CR1 F630. LA9 F704 0250
Set of 8 shrouds .
for 4-pole
contactors
CR1.F1504.and.
CR1.F1854
LA9 F707 0.300
CR1.F2654.to.
CR1.F5004
LA9 F708 0.300
CR1 F6304 LA9 F709 0.300
Description Application Reference
and power connections
For assembly of .
reversing contactors and .
See pages 5/252
and 5/253
Accessories for contactors CR1 B
kg
with mounting .
accessories (3)
For vertical assembly of .
reversing contactors and .
EZ2 LB0601 1560
Kit containing 2
bar mounting brackets
For mounting on .
120 or 150 mm centres
LA9 B103 1620
(1) For maximum number per contactor and complete reference, see page 5/123.
Offce):
Volts 48 110 125 127 220 230 240 250 380 400 415 440 500
For contactors CR1 F
a 50/60 Hz E7 F7 G7 M7 M7 U7 Q7 Q7 N7
a 400 Hz E7 F7 G7 M7 M7
c
E7 F7 G7 M7 M7
c low
consumption
EZ7 FZ7 GZ7 MZ7
For contactors CR1 B
a 50400 Hz F G M M U Q V N R S
c
FD GD MD UD UCD RD SD
(3) Positive mechanical interlocking between 2 vertically mounted contactors of identical or
different ratings. Connecting rods and cranks assembled on right-hand sides, crank pins on
the pole side.
Vertical fxing centre distance between the two contactors: 600 mm.
LAD N
5
0
1
3
7
7
_
1
LAD N
5
0
1
3
7
7
_
1
LA9 F103
5
0
1
6
1
6
_
1
LA9 F103
5
0
1
6
1
6
_
1
LA9 F70p
5
0
1
6
1
7
_
1
LA9 F70p
5
0
1
6
1
7
_
1
EZ2 LB0601
5
0
1
6
1
8
_
1
EZ2 LB0601
5
0
1
6
1
8
_
1
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/264
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
TeSys contactors
Accessories
References
5/252
5 5 5 5
Mechanical interlocks Sets of power connections
Reversers assembled .
using 2 contactors of
identical rating, type:.
CR1 F150
CR1 F185
CR1 F265
CR1 F400
CR1 F500
CR1 F630
.
LA9 Fp970..
.
Reversing contactors.
LA9 Fp976.
.
3 or 4-pole changeover contactor pairs.
LA9 Fp977 or LA9 Fp982.
..
Vertically mounted
identical rating, type:.
CR1 F150
CR1 F185
CR1 F265
CR1 F400
CR1 F500
CR1 F630
LA9 FF4F.
LA9 FG4G.
..
Assembly A LA9 FH4H.
LA9 FJ4J.
LA9 FK4K.
LA9 FL4L
Assembly C.
.
..
different ratings, type:.
CR1 F150
CR1 F185
CR1 F265
CR1 F400
CR1 F500
CR1 F630
LA9 FG4F
..
Assembly A LA9 FH4F.
LA9 FJ4F.
LA9 FK4F.
LA9 FL4F.
LA9 FH4G.
LA9 FJ4G.
LA9 FK4G.
LA9 FL4G
Assembly B.
..
LA9 FJ4H.
LA9 FK4H.
LA9 FL4H.
LA9 FK4J.
LA9 FL4J.
LA9 FK4K
Assembly C.
..
identical or different ratings
LA9 Fp4p4p
..
.
.
.
.
Warning: the contactor ratings
must be in decreasing size from
top to bottom.
A
1
E
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
E
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
1
L
2
L
3
U V W
A
1
E
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
E
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
1
L
2
L
3
U V W
A
1
E
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
E
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
N
1
/
L
3
1
/
L
2
L
2
1
2
L
1
7
8
1
/
L
1
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
/
L
3
2
N
L
3
N
A
1
E
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
E
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
N
1
/
L
3
1
/
L
2
L
2
1
2
L
1
7
8
1
/
L
1
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
/
L
3
2
N
L
3
N
F150
F185
F265
F400
F500
F630
F150 F185 F265 F400 F500 F630
F185
F265
F400
F150
F500
F630
CR1 F500
CR1 F265
CR1 F185
A
B
C
F150
F185
F265
F400
F500
F630
F150 F185 F265 F400 F500 F630
F185
F265
F400
F150
F500
F630
CR1 F500
CR1 F265
CR1 F185
A
B
C
TeSys contactors
Components for assembling reversing contactors .
and changeover contactor pairs CR1 F
Horizontally or vertically mounted
Mounting
5 5
5/253
5 5
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating
Contactor type Set of power connections Mechanical interlock
3-pole
Reference
4-pole
Reference
Weight
kg
kg
For assembly of 3-pole reversing contactors
for motor control (1)
CR1.F150 LA9 FF976 0600 LA9 FF970 0060
CR1.F185 LA9 FG976 0780 LA9 FG970 0060
CR1.F265 LA9 FH976 1500 LA9 FJ970 0140
CR1.F400 LA9 FJ976 2100 LA9 FJ970 0140
CR1.F500 LA9 FK976 2.350 LA9 FJ970 0140
CR1 F630 LA9 FL976 3.800 LA9 FL970 0150
Vertically mounted
CR1.F150 (2) LA9 FF4F 0.345
CR1.F185 (2) LA9 FG4G 0.350
CR1.F265 (2) LA9 FH4H 1060
CR1.F400 (2) LA9 FJ4J 1200
CR1.F500 (2) LA9 FK4K 1200
CR1 F630 (2) LA9 FL4L 1220
For assembly of 4-pole changeover contactor pairs Horizontally mounted
CR1.F1504 LA9 FF982 LA9 FF977 0460 LA9 FF970 0060
CR1.F1854 LA9 FG982 LA9 FG977 0610 LA9 FG970 0060
CR1.F2654 LA9 FH982 LA9 FH977 1200 LA9 FJ970 0140
CR1.F4004 LA9 FJ982 LA9 FJ977 1800 LA9 FJ970 0140
CR1.F5004 LA9 FK982 LA9 FK977 2.300 LA9 FJ970 0140
CR1 F6304 LA9 FL982 LA9 FL977 3.400 LA9 FL970 0150
Vertically mounted
CR1.F1504 (2) LA9 FF4F 0.345
CR1.F1854 (2) LA9 FG4G 0.350
CR1.F2654 (2) LA9 FH4H 1060
CR1.F4004 (2) LA9 FJ4J 1200
CR1.F5004 (2) LA9 FK4K 1200
CR1 F6304 (2) LA9 FL4L 1220
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of different ratings
Contactor type Mechanical interlock
At bottom At top Kit reference Weight
kg
For assembly of 3 or 4-pole changeover contactor pairs Vertically mounted (3)
CR1.F150.or.F1504 CR1.F185.or.F1854 LA9 FG4F 0.350
CR1.F265.or.F2654 LA9 FH4F 0870
CR1.F400.or.F4004 LA9 FJ4F 0.930
CR1.F500.or.F5004 LA9 FK4F 0940
CR1 F630 or F6304 LA9 FL4F 0940
CR1.F185.or.F1854 CR1.F265.or.F2654 LA9 FH4G 0860
CR1.F400.or.F4004 LA9 FJ4G 0940
CR1.F500.or.F5004 LA9 FK4G 0940
CR1 F630 or F6304 LA9 FL4G 0950
CR1.F265.or.F2654 CR1.F400.or.F4004 LA9 FJ4H 1.130
CR1.F500.or.F5004 LA9 FK4H 1.130
CR1 F630 or F6304 LA9 FL4H 1140
CR1.F400.or.F4004 CR1.F500.or.F5004 LA9 FK4J 1200
CR1 F630 or F6304 LA9 FL4J 1210
CR1.F500.or.F5004 CR1 F630 or F6304 LA9 FL4K 1210
For assembly of 3 or 4-pole reversing contactors Using 3 contactors (vertically mounted)
of identical or different ratings
Kit reference (4)
The contactor ratings must be in decreasing size .
from top to bottom.
LA9 Fp4p4p
(1) A 3-pole reversing contactor for motor control can be converted into a 3-pole changeover
contactor pair by removing the upper connecting links.
(2) All power connections are to be made by the customer.
(3) With identical or different number of poles. Power connections to be made by the customer.
(4) Complete the reference by replacing the frst dot with the code for the upper contactor, the
second dot with the code for the middle contactor and the third dot with the code for the bottom
contactor.
Contactors CR1 F150 CR1 F185 CR1 F265 CR1 F400 CR1 F500 CR1 F630
Code F G H J K L
Example: mechanical interlock for reversing contactor made up of 3 different contactors:
CR1 F500 top, CR1 F26 middle and CR1 F185 bottom: LA9 FK4H4G
Illustrations :.
page 5/252
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 and 5/263
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Illustrations :.
page 5/252
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 and 5/263
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Illustrations :.
page 5/252
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 and 5/263
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Illustrations :.
page 5/252
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 and 5/263
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
TeSys contactors
Components for assembling reversing contactors .
and changeover contactor pairs CR1 F
References
5/254
5 5 5 5
Standard coils
Usual voltages Resistance of winding .
at.q = 20 C
Reference Voltage
code
Weight
50400 Hz.
or.c
50 Hz, 60 Hz Latching Unlatching
V V W W kg
For contactors CR1 F150
48 198 230.8 LX0 FF005 E7 0440
110 9.35 1453 LX0 FF006 F7 0440
127 1161 1788 LX0 FF007 G7 0440
208 23.50 4098 LX0 FF020 L7 0440
220/230 37.55 5139 LX0 FF008 M7 0440
240 4516 6544 LX0 FF009 U7.. 0440
380/400 11410 12.447 LX0 FF010 Q7 0440
415 139.50 16.717 LX0 FF011 N7 0440.
48 1,42 220 LX0 FG005 E7 0,560
110 692 1339 LX0 FG006 F7 0560
127 845 1676 LX0 FG007 G7 0560
208 21.30 3169 LX0 FG020 L7 0560
220/230 2627 4729 LX0 FG008 M7 0560
240 32.95 4729 LX0 FG009 U7 0560
380/400 8229 11.885 LX0 FG010 Q7 0560
415 102.30 14 305 LX0 FG011 N7 0560.
48 1.34 183.4 LX0 FH005 E7 0780
110 690 1031 LX0 FH006 F7 0780
127 856 1325 LX0 FH007 G7 0780
208 2020 2654 LX0 FH020 L7 0780
220/230 2577 4090 LX0 FH008 M7 0780
240 33.03 5002 LX0 FH009 U7..... 0780
380/400 78.39 11 803 LX0 FH010 Q7 0780
415 1029 15.006 LX0 FH011 N7 0780.
48 1.32 905 LX0 FJ005 E7 1120
110 809 813 LX0 FJ006 F7 1120
127 979 1027 LX0-FJ007 G7 1120
208 2440 2643 LX0 FJ020 L7 1120
220/230 30.14 3309 LX0 FJ008 M7 1120
240 37.02 4074 LX0 FJ009 U7 1120
380/400 9480 9380 LX0 FJ010 Q7 1120
415 12110 11 763 LX0 FJ011 N7 1120.
48 157 166 LX0 FK005 E7 1220
110 7.53 916 LX0 FK006 F7 1220
127 956 1159 LX0 FK007 G7 1220
208 23.60 2981 LX0 FK020 L7 1220
220/230 2881 3733 LX0 FK008 M7 1220
240 35.67 4595 LX0 FK009 U7 1220
380/400 8956 10.570 LX0 FK010 Q7 1220
415 11206 13 256 LX0 FK011 N7 1220.
48 087 204 LX0 FL005 E7 1460
110 520 1423 LX0 FL006 F7 1460
127 645 1830 LX0 FL007 G7 1460
208 2020 2961 LX0 FL020 L7 1460
220/230 25.36 4603 LX0 FL008 M7 1460
240 25.36 5658 LX0 FL009 U7 1460
380/400 6095 10.676 LX0 FL010 Q7 1460
415 7797 13 003 LX0 FL011 N7 1460
5
0
1
4
7
0
_
1
LX0 FF009
5
0
1
4
7
0
_
1
LX0 FF009
5
0
1
4
7
1
_
1
LX0 FH009
5
0
1
4
7
1
_
1
LX0 FH009
TeSys contactors
Coils for contactors CR1 F
References
5 5
5/255
5 5
Special coils
Coils with two windings with common point, allowing the use of two separate power
sources for latching and unlatching.
Coil voltages at 50 Hz,
60 Hz, 400 Hz or c
Resistance of winding .
at.q = 20 C
Reference Voltage
code
Weight
Latching Unlatching Latching Unlatching
V V W W kg
220 24 295 39.5 LX0 FF224 MB7 . 0440.
220 24 265 19 LX0 FG224 MB7 0560.
220 24 26 295 LX0 FH224 MB7 0780.
220 24 30 23 LX0 FJ224 MB7 1120.
220 24 29 26 LX0 FK224 MB7 1220.
220 24 26 41 LX0 FL224 MB7 1460.
Coils with low inrush consumption
Usual voltages.
c
Resistance of winding .
at.q = 20 C
Reference Voltage
code
Weight
Latching Unlatching
V W W kg
48 456 14056 LX0 FF055 EZ7 0440
110 22.37 70644 LX0 FF056 FZ7 0440
127 35.54 1086.36 LX0 FF057 GZ7 0440
220 8985 3342.51 LX0 FF058 MZ7 0440.
48 519 10654 LX0 FG055 EZ7 0570
110 2550 536.26 LX0 FG056 FZ7 0570
127 32.75 732.64 LX0 FG057 GZ7 0570
220 10244 2378.62 LX0 FG058 MZ7 0570.
48 519 7426 LX0 FH055 EZ7 0800
110 25 364.61 LX0 FH056 FZ7 0800
127 30.98 45845 LX0 FH057 GZ7 0800
220 9789 1344.46 LX0 FH058 MZ7 0800.
48 505 36.36 LX0 FJ055 EZ7 1150
110 25.39 17149 LX0 FJ056 FZ7 1150
127 31.86 22120 LX0 FJ057 GZ7 1150
220 9819 64879 LX0 FJ058 MZ7 1150.
48 442 41 LX0 FK055 EZ7 1270
110 2274 193.36 LX0 FK056 FZ7 1270
127 2825 313.60 LX0 FK057 GZ7 1270
220 8512 91868 LX0 FK058 MZ7 1270.
48 3.94 5917 LX0 FL055 EZ7 1500
110 19.36 365.33 LX0 FL056 FZ7 1500
127 25.39 45227 LX0 FL057 GZ7 1500
220 7444 1071.43 LX0 FL058 MZ7 1500
5
0
1
4
7
2
_
1
LX0 FF030
5
0
1
4
7
2
_
1
LX0 FF030
TeSys contactors
5/256
5 5 5 5
Coils with TC treatment (associated accessories, see page opposite)
Usual voltages Resistance
at q = 20 C
Reference Weight
c a
50400 Hz
V V W kg
For contactors CR1 Bp31
110120 197 WB1 KB140 1120
110125 252 WB1 KB134 1120
220240 772 WB1 KB136 1120
220 94 WB1 KB139 1120
250 128 WB1 KB125 1120
380400 197 WB1 KB126 . 1120
415440 257 WB1 KB138 1120.
110 96 WB1 KB133 1120
110 120127 114 WB1 KB121 1120
125 197 WB1 KB140 1120
220/230 32.5 WB1 KB124 1120
220 240 497 WB1 KB122 1120
250 772 WB1 KB136 1120
380400 128 WB1 KB125 1120
415440 160 WB1 KB137 1120.
110 72 WB1 KB123 1120
110 120127 96 WB1 KB133 1120
125 114 WB1 KB121 1120
220 240 32.5 WB1 KB124 1120
250 61 WB1 KB135 1120
380415 94 WB1 KB139 1120
440 128 WB1 KB125 1120.
110 58 WB1 KB132 1120
110 120127 72 WB1 KB123 1120
125 114 WB1 KB121 1120
220/230 252 WB1 KB134 1120
240 32.5 WB1 KB124 1120
250 497 WB1 KB122 1120
380 772 WB1 KB136 1120
400440 94 WB1 KB139 1120.
Coils with TH treatment (associated accessories, see page opposite)
Add suffx TH to the references selected above. Example: WB1 KB140TH
5
0
1
4
7
3
_
1
WB1 KBppp
5
0
1
4
7
3
_
1
WB1 KBppp
TeSys contactors
Coils for contactors CR1 B
References
5 5
5/257
5 5
Accessories for use with coils (1)
Coils
(TC or
TH)
Additional resistors (2) Automatic coil
cut-out contact
(3)
Rectifer
(4)
R1 Reference R2 Reference Nb Reference Reference
W W
WB1 KB140 68 DR2 SC0068 47 DR2 SC0047 2 ZC4 GM2.or.
ZC4 GM8
.. DR5 TE1U
ZC4 GM8
ZC4 GM8
DR5 TE1U
WB1 KB139 270 DR2 SC0270 220 DR2 SC0220 .. 2. ZC4 GM2.or.
ZC4 GM8
ZC4 GM8
ZC4 GM8
DR5 TE1S
ZC4 GM8
DR5 TE1S
WB1 KB133 10 DR2 SC0010 33. DR2 SC0033 1 PR4 FB0011 DR5 TE1U
WB1 KB140 100 DR2 SC0100 47. DR2 SC0047 1 PR4 FB0009
WB1 KB125 470 DR2 SC0470 470. DR2 SC0470 1 PR4 FB0005 DR5 TE1S
WB1 KB124 180 DR2-SC0180 120. DR2 SC0120 1 PR4 FB0008 DR5 TE1U
WB1 KB125 680 DR2-SC0680 470. DR2 SC0470 1 PR4 FB0004 DR5 TE1S
WB1 KB132 33 DR2 SC0033 27. DR2 SC0027 1 PR4 FB0014.
.
DR5 TE1U
WB1 KB124 180 DR2-SC0180 150. DR2 SC0150 1 PR4 FB0007 DR5 TE1U ...
(1) For connections, see page 5/267.
(2) Weight of resistors DR2 SCpppp : 0.030 kg.
(3) Weight of automatic coil cut-out contacts: ZC4 GMp : 0.030 kg and PR4 FB00pp : 0.600 kg.
(4) Weight of rectifer DR5 TE1p : 0.100 kg. The rectifer is for use on a.c. only.
5
0
1
4
7
5
_
1
ZC4 GM2
5
0
1
4
7
5
_
1
ZC4 GM2
5
0
1
4
7
4
_
1
DR2 SC0220
5
0
1
4
7
4
_
1
DR2 SC0220
5
0
1
4
7
6
_
1
PR4 FB0014
5
0
1
4
7
6
_
1
PR4 FB0014
5
0
1
4
7
7
_
1
DR5 TE1U
5
0
1
4
7
7
_
1
DR5 TE1U
TeSys contactors
Coils for contactors CR1 B
5/258
5 5 5 5
References
kg
Complete sets
of contacts
for 3 or 4 poles (1)
3-pole CR1.F150 LA5 FF431 0270.
CR1.F185 LA5 FG431 0.350.
CR1.F265 LA5 FH431 . 0660.
CR1.F400 LA5 F400803 0660.
CR1.F500 LA5 F500803 0660.
CR1 F630 LA5 F630803 0660.
4-pole CR1.F1504 LA5 FF441 0.360.
CR1.F1854 LA5 FG441 0465.
CR1.F2654 LA5 FH441 0880.
CR1.F4004 LA5 F400804 0465.
CR1.F5004 LA5 F500804 0465.
CR1 F6304 LA5 F630804 0465.
Arc chambers 3-pole CR1.F150 LA5 F15050 0490.
CR1.F185 LA5 F18550 0670.
CR1.F265 LA5 F26550 0920.
CR1.F400 LA5 F40050 . 1.300.
CR1.F500 LA5 F50050 1850.
CR1 F630 LA5 F63050 3.150.
4-pole CR1.F1504 LA5 F150450 0660.
CR1.F1854 LA5 F185450 0910.
CR1.F2654 LA5 F265450 1220.
CR1.F4004 LA5 F400450 1740.
CR1.F5004 LA5 F500450 2500.
CR1 F6304 LA5 F630450 4200.
(1) Set containing the following (per pole): 2 fxed contacts, 1 moving contact , 2 defectors,
1 back-plate, clamping screws and washers.
5
0
1
4
7
8
_
1
LA5 FG431
5
0
1
4
7
8
_
1
LA5 FG431
5
0
1
4
7
9
_
1
LA5 F40050
5
0
1
4
7
9
_
1
LA5 F40050
References
TeSys contactors
Accessories and replacement parts for contactors CR1 F
5 5
5/259
5 5
Description For
contactors
Number of
sets required
per pole
Unit
reference
of set
Weight
kg
Sets of contacts
(1 moving contact, .
1 fxed contact)
CR1 BL 1 PA1 LB80 0420.
CR1 BM 1 PA1 LB80 0420.
CR1 BP 2 PA1 LB80 . 0420.
CR1 BR 3 PA1 LB80 0420.
Description For
contactors
kg
Moving contact only
(for one fnger)
All ratings PA1 LB75 0220.
Fixed contact only
(for one fnger)
All ratings PA1 LB76 0200.
Blow-out horn only
(for 1 fnger)
All ratings PA1 LB89 ... 0120.
Arc chambers
(for a single pole)
CR1 BL PA1 LB50 . 3.700.
CR1 BM PA1 LB50 3.700.
CR1 BP PA1 PB50 6200.
CR1 BR PA1 RB50 8500.
Auxiliary
contact blocks
All ratings 1 N/O contact .
- normal
ZC4 GM1 . 0.030
All ratings 1 N/C contact .
- normal
ZC4 GM2 0.030
All ratings 1 N/O contact.
- gold fashed
ZC4 GM9 0.030.
All ratings 1 N/C contact.
- gold fashed
ZC4 GM8 0.030.
N/C pole
for automatic cut-out coil
All ratings PR4 FB00pp (1) . 0600
Set of moving and fxed
contacts for N/C pole
All ratings PV1 FA80 0.035
Arc chamber
for N/C pole
All ratings PN1 FB50 0220
Electromagnet All ratings ET1 KB50 10600.
Description For
contactors
No of
parts required
Reference Weight
kg
Return springs..
for moving part .
of electromagnet
CR1 B.
(1 pole)
1 DV1 RT292 0050.
CR1 B.
(2, 3 or 4 poles)
2 DV1 RT292 0050.
N/O pole springs CR1 BL, BM .
or BP
1 per pole DV1 RC201 0020
CR1 BR 1 per pole DV1 RC155 0020.
(1) Reference to be completed, see page 5/257.
5
0
1
4
8
0
_
1
PA1 LB80
(PA1 LB76 + PA1 LB75)
5
0
1
4
8
0
_
1
PA1 LB80
(PA1 LB76 + PA1 LB75)
PA1 LB89
5
0
1
4
8
2
_
1
PA1 LB89
5
0
1
4
8
2
_
1
5
0
1
4
8
3
_
1
PA1 LB50
5
0
1
4
8
3
_
1
PA1 LB50
5
0
1
4
8
1
_
1
ZC4 GM1
5
0
1
4
8
1
_
1
ZC4 GM1
5
0
1
4
8
4
_
1
PR4 FB004pp
5
0
1
4
8
4
_
1
PR4 FB004pp
TeSys contactors
Accessories and replacement parts for contactors CR1 B
5/260
5 5 5 5
CR1 F150 to F500
Common side view .. CR1 F150, F185, F265 CR1 F400, F500 .
CR1 F150 F185 F265 CR1 F400 F500
3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P
a 163.5 2015 1685 2085 2015 2445 a 213 261 233 288
b 170 170 174 174 203 203 G min. 66 66 66 66
b1 137 137 137 137 145 145 b 206 206 238 238
b2 301 301 305 305 370 370 b2 375 375 400 400
c 171 171 181 181 213 213 c 219 219 232 232
f 131 131 130 130 147 147 f 146 146 150 150
G 106 143 111 151 142 190 G supplied 80 80 80 140
G1 80 80 80 80 96 96 G max. 102 150 120 175
J 106 106 106 106 106 106 G1 supplied 170 170 170 230
J1 120 120 120 120 120 120 G1 min. 156 156 156 156
L 107 107 113.5 113.5 141 141 G1 max. 192 240 210 265
M 150 150 154 154 178 178 J 12 60 32 27
P 40 40 40 40 48 48 L 145 145 146 146
Q 26 26 29 29 39 34 M 181 181 208 208
Q1 575 555 595 595 665 665 P 48 48 55 55
S 20 20 20 20 25 25 Q 43 43 47 47
S1 27 27 34 34 38 38 Q1 74 74 77 77
Y 44 44 38.5 30.5 30.5 215 S 25 25 30 30
Z 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 155 155
f = minimum distance required for coil removal. f = minimum distance required for coil removal.
X1: Minimum electrical clearance according to operational voltage and breaking capacity. X1: Minimum electrical clearance according to operational
Voltage in V 200500 6601000 Voltage in V 200500 6601000
CR1 F150 10 15 CR1 F400 15 20
CR1 F185 10 15 CR1 F500 15 20
CR1 F265 10 15
(1) Power terminal protection shroud.
CR1 F630
.. CR1 F630 3P 4P
a 309 389
G supplied 180 240
G min. 100 150
G max. 195 275
J1 61 81
Q 60 60
Q1 89 89
X1: Min. electrical clearance according to
operational voltage and breaking capacity.
Voltage in V X1
200500 20
6901000 30
(2) Minimum distance required for coil
removal.
J
J
1
b
1
=
=
G1
G Z
= =
Y
3x6,5
L
c
(1)
=
b
=
b
2
X
1
X
1
S1
Q
a
P P Q1
f
M
S
F150 M8x25
F185 M8x25
F265 M10x35
J
J
1
b
1
=
=
G1
G Z
= =
Y
3x6,5
L
c
(1)
=
b
=
b
2
X
1
X
1
S1
Q
a
P P Q1
f
M
S
F150 M8x25
F185 M8x25
F265 M10x35
Q1
a
P Q P
f
M
44,5 S
6xM10x35
G
G1 23,5 J
1
2
0
=
=
1
8
0
=
=
8x8,5
Q1
a
P Q P
f
M
44,5 S
6xM10x35
G
G1 23,5 J
1
2
0
=
=
1
8
0
=
=
8x8,5
155
=
3
0
4
=
(1)
197
255
2
8
0
X
1
4
6
4
72
X
1
Q1 80 80 Q
2
6
4
181 (2)
64 40
6xM12x45
a
1
8
0
=
=
J1 G 60,5
4x10,5
155
=
3
0
4
=
(1)
197
255
2
8
0
X
1
4
6
4
72
X
1
Q1 80 80 Q
2
6
4
181 (2)
64 40
6xM12x45
a
1
8
0
=
=
J1 G 60,5
4x10,5
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
TeSys contactors
Magnetic latching contactors CR1 F
Dimensions
5 5
5/261
5 5
CR1 F150F265
Panel mounted On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA, PB, PC . On rails DZ5 MB on 120 mm centres .
CR1 F150 F185 F265 CR1 F150 F185 F265 CR1 F150 F185 F265
c 3P 171 181 213 c 3P 171 181 213 c 3P 171 181 213
4P 171 181 213 4P 171 181 213 4P 171 181 213
G 3P 80 80 96 G 3P 80 80 96 G 3P 80 80 96
4P 80 80 96 4P 80 80 96 4P 80 80 96
J 3P 265 29 445
4P 45 49 685
J1 3P 57 595 615
4P 755 795 855
CR1 F150F650
On 2 notched uprights AM1 ECppp....
CR1 F150 F185 F265 F400 F500 F630
c 3P 171 181 213 213 226 250
4P 171 181 213 213 226 250
G (M6) 3P 80 80 96
4P 80 80 96
G1 ( 8.5) 3P 80 80
4P 80 140
G2 ( 10.5) 3P 180
4P 240
(1) AF1 CDppp or AF1 VAppp.
(2) This AM1 EC200 upright is required when G2 or G3 is greater than 700 mm (please consult your Regional Sales Offce).
3x6,5
c
J G
=
J1
=

1
1
0
=
=
(1) 3x6,5
c
J G
=
J1
=

1
1
0
=
=
(1)
c
AF1 EA6
1
1
0
G
c
AF1 EA6
1
1
0
G
DZ5 MF5
c
G
1
1
0
1
2
0
15
DZ5 MF5
c
G
1
1
0
1
2
0
15
c 25
(1)
1
2
0
(2)
10,5
AM1 EC200 AF1 CD081 + AF1 VC820
AM1 EC200
AF1 CD061+
AF1 VA618
AF1 CD061 AF1 VA618
M6
LA9 F100
AF1 CD101+
AF1 VC10
AF1 CD081+
AF1 VC820
8,5 M6
AM1 EC200
1
1
0
3
5
1
8
0
G
= =
G
AF1 VA618
M6
G1
G2
G3
c 25
(1)
1
2
0
(2)
10,5
AM1 EC200 AF1 CD081 + AF1 VC820
AM1 EC200
AF1 CD061+
AF1 VA618
AF1 CD061 AF1 VA618
M6
LA9 F100
AF1 CD101+
AF1 VC10
AF1 CD081+
AF1 VC820
8,5 M6
AM1 EC200
1
1
0
3
5
1
8
0
G
= =
G
AF1 VA618
M6
G1
G2
G3
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
TeSys contactors
Mounting
5/262
5 5 5 5
Reversing contactors 2 x CR1 F150F265 Reversing contactors 2 x CR1 F400F630
Horizontally mounted .. ...
2 x CR1 F150 F185 F265 2 x CR1 F400 F500 F630
a 3P 345 357 425 a 3P 446 485 636
4P 422 437 521 4P 542 595 796
b 3P 170 174 203 b 3P 206 238 304
4P 170 174 203 4P 206 238 304
G1 3P 80 80 96 G 3P 80 80 180
4P 80 80 96 4P 80 140 240
J 3P 71 78 109 G1 3P 170 170
4P 111 118 157 4P 170 230
J1 3P 57 595 615 J 3P 157 156 139
4P 755 795 855 4P 157 156 139
P1 3P 71 78 100 J1 3P 645 845 685
4P 71 78 100 4P 1125 795 685
J2 3P 67 66
4P 67 66
J3 3P 195 39.5
4P 675 34.5
P1 3P 107 112 137
4P 107 112 137
(1) Except F630: 4 x 10.5.
(2) Except F630: 180.
1
1
0
/
1
2
0
=
=
=
G1 J1
3x6,5
= =
G1
=
J1 J
3x6,5
a
b
P1
1
1
0
/
1
2
0
=
=
=
G1 J1
3x6,5
= =
G1
=
J1 J
3x6,5
a
b
P1
G
G1 J3
1
2
0

(
2
)
=
=
1
8
0
=
=
8x8,5 (1)
b
G J1 J1
J2
J
G1 J3
8x8,5 (1) P1
a
G
G1 J3
1
2
0

(
2
)
=
=
1
8
0
=
=
8x8,5 (1)
b
G J1 J1
J2
J
G1 J3
8x8,5 (1) P1
a
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
TeSys contactors
5 5
5/263
5 5
Vertically mounted with mechanical interlock LA9 Fppp.
2.contactors.CR1 F of identical or different ratings (CR1 F150F630), see pages 5/252 and 5/253.
Assembly A .. Assembly B Assembly C
(1) Mechanical interlock shaft.
(2) For assembly of contactors of different ratings only.
(3) 3 x 6.5 mm for CR1 F150F265.
(4) 3 x 6.5 mm for CR1 F265.
(5) Mechanical interlock guide bracket.
(6) 4 x 8.5 mm for CR1 F400, F500 or 4 x 10.5 mm.
Assembly type A B C
LA9 F F4F G4F G4G H4F J4F K4F L4F H4G J4G K4G L4G H4H J4H K4H L4H J4J K4J L4J K4K L4K L4L
G1 3P 96 80 80 180 96 80 80 180 96 80 80 180 80 80 180 80 180 180
4P 96 80 140 240 96 80 140 240 96 80 140 240 80 140 240 140 240 240
G2 3P 96 96 96 96 80 80 80 80 80 180
4P 96 96 96 96 80 80 80 140 140 240
G3 3P 0 3 0 21 45 45 35 19 42 42 33 0 23 23 14 0 0 9 (7) 0 9 (7) 0
4P 0 4 0 27 26 26 17 23 22 22 13 0 0 0 9 (7) 0 0 9 (7) 0 9 (7) 0
G4 3P 60 60 60 60 83 83 83 83 83 74
4P 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 74
G5 3P 60 83 83 74 60 83 83 74 60 83 83 74 83 83 74 83 74 74
4P 83 83 83 74 83 83 83 74 83 83 83 74 83 83 74 83 74 74
H min. 200 210 220 240 250 270 310 250 250 270 310 250 260 280 330 260 280 325 300 345 380
max. 310 300 310 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380
H1 min. 80 90 100 110 80 100 140 120 90 110 150 130 110 130 170 60 100 140 120 160 200
max. 190 180 190 250 210 210 210 250 220 220 220 260 230 230 220 200 200 195 200 195 200
J1 3P 133 134 134 1495 137 157 241 1495 137 157 241 1495 137 157 24 137 157 241 157 244 241
4P 145 146 146 1645 185 212 321 1645 185 212 321 1645 185 212 321 185 212 321 212 321 321
J2 3P 133 133 134 183 133 183 133 134 134 134 134 1425 1495 1495 1495 137 137 137 157 157 241
4P 145 145 146 145 145 145 145 146 146 146 146 1645 1645 1645 1645 185 185 185 212 212 312
J3 3P 485 53 53
4P 67 73 73
J4 3P 485 54 53 485 485 485 485 53 53 53 53
4P 67 69 73 67 67 67 67 73 73 73 73
(7) In this case, G4 is greater than G5.
F
3
3
0
F
2
6
5
H
1
1
2
0
}
F
4
0
0
F
5
0
0
F
6
3
0
1
8
0
}
F
3
3
0
F
2
6
5
1
2
0
}
F
4
0
0
F
5
0
0
F
6
3
0
1
8
0
}
J1 G3(2)
(6)
G2 G4
J2
12,5
9
= =
(4)
(6)
G1 G5 12,5
H
(1)
(5)
(1)
(5)
= =
F
3
3
0
F
2
6
5
1
8
0
H
1
1
2
0
}
F
4
0
0
F
5
0
0
F
6
3
0
1
8
0
}
G1 G5 12,5
J1 G3(2)
80 J4
(3)
= =
(6)
(4)
H
(1)
(1)
9
(5)
J2
1
2
0
1
2
0
H
1
80 J4
J2
J1 G3
(2)
= =
(3)
= =
(3)
80 J3
H
(1)
(1)
F
3
3
0
F
2
6
5
H
1
1
2
0
}
F
4
0
0
F
5
0
0
F
6
3
0
1
8
0
}
F
3
3
0
F
2
6
5
1
2
0
}
F
4
0
0
F
5
0
0
F
6
3
0
1
8
0
}
J1 G3(2)
(6)
G2 G4
J2
12,5
9
= =
(4)
(6)
G1 G5 12,5
H
(1)
(5)
(1)
(5)
= =
F
3
3
0
F
2
6
5
1
8
0
H
1
1
2
0
}
F
4
0
0
F
5
0
0
F
6
3
0
1
8
0
}
G1 G5 12,5
J1 G3(2)
80 J4
(3)
= =
(6)
(4)
H
(1)
(1)
9
(5)
J2
1
2
0
1
2
0
H
1
80 J4
J2
J1 G3
(2)
= =
(3)
= =
(3)
80 J3
H
(1)
(1)
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
TeSys contactors
5/264
5 5 5 5
Contactors CR1 B Single-pole, 2-pole or 3-pole 4-pole
Common side view .. ...... ....
CR1 BL CR1 BM CR1 BP CR1 BR
1P 2P 3P 4P 1P 2P 3P 4P 1P 2P 3P 4P 1P 2P 3P 4P
a 50 50 50 50 63 63 63 63 100 100 100 100 125 125 125 125
b 59 59 59 59 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 50 50 50 50
c 16 16 16 16 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 25 25 25 25
L 345 445 540 760 345 445 540 760 385 540 760 1065 445 635 885 1065
M 285 385 480 285 385 480 325 480 700 385 575 825
M1 308 308 455 455
M2 392 392 550 550
N 121 121 121 121 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 130 130 130 130
P 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 150 150 150 150 195 195 195 195
Q1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 110 110 110 110 123 123 123 123
R 122 122 122 122 157 157 157 157 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173
S 10 10 10 10 17 17 17 17 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
T 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
9 9 9 9 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
Values X1 and X2 are given for a breaking capacity of 10 In (3-phase a current).
... 3-phase a voltage CR1 BL CR1 BM CR1 BP CR1 BR
380-415-440 V X1 100 100 150 200
X2 150 150 200 250
500 V X1 100 100 150 200
X2 150 150 220 250
600 V X1 150 150 200 200
X2 200 200 250 250
1000 V X1 200 200 200 250
X2 250 250 250 300
Mechanical interlock for assembly of vertically mounted reversing contactors
EZ2 LB0601
..
..
a
T S
T
2
6
0
R
290 185
N
8
5
c
b
c
3
6
5
a
T S
T
2
6
0
R
290 185
N
8
5
c
b
c
3
6
5
44 P P Q1
30
15
30 M
L
15
3
5
0
44 P P Q1
30
15
30 M
L
15
3
5
0
3
5
0
P
30
15
30 M1
L
P Q1 51
M2
15
3
5
0
P
30
15
30 M1
L
P Q1 51
M2
15
X
2
X1
X
2
X1
A

=

(
E
1
1
2
)

4
8
8
E

=

6
0
0
A

=

(
E
1
1
2
)

4
8
8
E

=

6
0
0
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
TeSys contactors
Magnetic latching contactors CR1 B
Dimensions
5 5
5/265
5 5
5
0
1
3
9
1
_
1
Complete pole
Adjustment of pick-up travel and pull-in travel
.
.
.
.
.
.
1 Moving circuit
2 Coil
3 Moving circuit
4 Return spring
N/O pole adjustment
.
.
.
.
.
.
1 Fixed contact
2 Moving contact
3 Pull-in gap adjustment
4 Adjustment of application force
5 Pole spring
N/C automatic coil cut-out pole adjustment
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1 Fixed contact
2 Moving contact
3 Opening gap adjustment
4 Adjustment of application force
5 Pole spring
ac or dc supply with economy resistor (and rectifer on a)
Contactor type CR1 BL CR1 BM CR1 BP CR1 BR
Electromagnet
(EB5 KB50)
Pick-up travel (E) mm 30 30 30 30
Pull-in travel (e) mm 10 10 10 10
Coil
(WB1 KB)
Pull-in voltage V 075.Uc 075.Uc 075.Uc
Drop-out voltage V 0.30.5 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 0.30.5 Uc
N/O power pole
(PA1)
Application force (F) to contact
per pole
daN 30 30 30 (1) 30 (2)
N/C automatic
coil cut-out pole
(PR4)
Application force (F) daN 09 09 09 09
Opening gap (b) with
electromagnet closed
mm 3.5 0.5 3.5 0.5 3.5 0.5 3.5 0.5
(1) Each pole has 2 contacts: the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts.
(2) Each pole has 3 contacts: the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts.
.
E
e
1
2
3
4
E
e
1
2
3
4
F
1
2
3
4
5
F
1
2
3
4
5
b
F
1
2
3
4
5
b
F
1
2
3
4
5
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Schemes :.
pages 5/266 and 5/267
TeSys contactors
Magnetic latching contactors CR1 B
Adjustment
characteristics
5/266
5 5 5 5
Contactors CR1 F 3-pole 4-pole
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References : page 5/123)
1 N/O LAD N10 (1). 1 N/C LAD N01.(1) . 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11. 2 N/O LAD N20 . 2 N/C LAD N02 . 2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N22 .
1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD N13 4 N/O LAD N40 4 N/C LAD N04 2 N/O + 2 N/C of which 1 N/O + 1 N/C make
before break.LAD C22
3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N31
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts conforming to standard EN 50012 (References: page 5/123)
1 N/O +1 N/C
LAD N11P. .
1 N/O +1 N/C
LAD N11G. .
2 N/O + 2 N/C
LAD N22P.
2 N/O + 2 N/C
LAD N22G. ..
Front mounting add-on contact blocks - Dust and damp protected instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References : page 5/123)
2 N/O (24-50 V)
LA1 DX20 . .
2 N/O (5-24 V)
LA1 DY20 . .
2 N/O protected (24-50 V) 2 N/O standard
LA1 DZ40 . .
2 N/O protected (24-50 V) + 1 N/O + 1 N/C standard
LA1 DZ31 . .
Time delay auxiliary contacts (References : page 5/123)
On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD Tp . Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD Rp . On-delay 1 N/C + 1 N/O break before make
LAD Sp .
3-pole reversing contactors 2 x CR1 F150F630 4-pole reversing contactors 2 x CR1 F1504F6304
....
Vertically mounted contactors using 2 contactors of identical or different ratings

..
A
1
A
2
E
1
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
A
1
A
2
E
1
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
A
1
A
2
E
1
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
7
/
L
4
T
4
/
8
A
1
A
2
E
1
1
/
L
1
T
1
/
2
3
/
L
2
T
2
/
4
5
/
L
3
T
3
/
6
7
/
L
4
T
4
/
8
4
3

N
O
4
4
4
3
/
N
O
(
9
4
)
(
9
3
)
4
3

N
O
4
4
4
3
/
N
O
(
9
4
)
(
9
3
)
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
(
9
1
)
(
9
2
)
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
(
9
1
)
(
9
2
)
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
5
2
5
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
2
5
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
7
2
7
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
7
2
7
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
7
2
7
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
2
8
1
/
N
C
7
2
7
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
2
8
1
/
N
C
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
5
2
5
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
7
2
7
1
/
N
C
8
2
8
1
/
N
C
5
2
5
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
7
2
7
1
/
N
C
8
2
8
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
8
7
/
N
O
8
8
7
5
/
N
C
7
6
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
8
7
/
N
O
8
8
7
5
/
N
C
7
6
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
3
2
3
1
/
N
C
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
5
5
/
N
C
5
6
6
7
/
N
O
6
8
5
5
/
N
C
5
6
6
7
/
N
O
6
8
6
6
6
5
/
N
C
5
7
/
N
O
5
8
6
6
6
5
/
N
C
5
7
/
N
O
5
8
6
7
/
N
O
6
8
5
5
/
N
C
5
6
6
7
/
N
O
6
8
5
5
/
N
C
5
6
A
1
A
2
E
1
A
1
A
2
E
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
1
L
2
L
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
U V W
A
1
A
2
E
1
A
1
A
2
E
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
1
L
2
L
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
U V W
A
1
A
2
E
1
A
1
A
2
E
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
N
1
/
L
3
1
/
L
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
1
L
2
L
3
7
8
1
/
L
1
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
/
L
3
7
8
N
2
N
A
1
A
2
E
1
A
1
A
2
E
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
N
1
/
L
3
1
/
L
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
1
L
2
L
3
7
8
1
/
L
1
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
/
L
3
7
8
N
2
N
A
1
A
2
E
1
1
2
3
4
1
/
L
1
1
/
L
2
1
2
3
4
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
5
6
1
/
L
3
5
6
2
/
L
3
A
1
A
2
E
1
L3
L2
L1
A
1
A
2
E
1
1
2
3
4
1
/
L
1
1
/
L
2
1
2
3
4
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
5
6
1
/
L
3
5
6
2
/
L
3
A
1
A
2
E
1
L3
L2
L1
A
1
A
2
E
1
1
2
3
4
7
8
1
/
L
1
1
/
L
2
1
N
1
2
3
4
7
8
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
N
5
6
1
/
L
3
5
6
2
/
L
3
A
1
A
2
E
1
L3
L2
L1
N
A
1
A
2
E
1
1
2
3
4
7
8
1
/
L
1
1
/
L
2
1
N
1
2
3
4
7
8
2
/
L
1
2
/
L
2
2
N
5
6
1
/
L
3
5
6
2
/
L
3
A
1
A
2
E
1
L3
L2
L1
N
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 and 5/263
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 and 5/263
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 and 5/263
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 and 5/263
TeSys contactors
Schemes
5 5
5/267
5 5
Start
Contactors CR1 B
CR1 Bp31p12 CR1 Bp31p21 CR1 Bp31p30
Wiring schemes
Contactors CR1 F and CR1 B
with thermal overload relay.
Contactors CR1 F
..
Connectors CR1 B
..
(1) automatic coil cut-out contact ZC4 GM or PR4 FB00pp
S1: latching pushbutton
S2: unlatching pushbutton
Pushbutton control.. Scheme of internal circuit..
Switch control
Warning: terminal A2 is common to both windings in all cases.
..
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
2 4 6
L
1
L
2
L
3
1 3 5
KM1
U W
M
3 a
V
1 3 5
2 4 6
F1
2 4 6
L
1
L
2
L
3
1 3 5
KM1
U W
M
3 a
V
1 3 5
2 4 6
F1
1
3
1
4
KM1
9
5
9
6
F1
1
3
1
4
S1
9
7
9
8
1
3
1
4
S2
A
1
E
1
A
2
KM1
KM1:1
KM1:5
1
3
1
4
KM1
9
5
9
6
F1
1
3
1
4
S1
9
7
9
8
1
3
1
4
S2
A
1
E
1
A
2
KM1
KM1:1
KM1:5
9
6
9
5
1
3
1
4
S1
1
3
1
4
KM1
A
1
A
2
R
1
9
7
9
8
R
2
F1
2
1
KM1
K
M
1
:
1
K
M
1
:
5
(1)
2
1
2
2
S2
9
6
9
5
1
3
1
4
S1
1
3
1
4
KM1
A
1
A
2
R
1
9
7
9
8
R
2
F1
2
1
KM1
K
M
1
:
1
K
M
1
:
5
(1)
2
1
2
2
S2
A1
E1
A2
Unlatching
winding
A1
E1
A2
Unlatching
winding
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/263
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/263
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/263
Selection :.
pages 5/241 to 5/245
Characteristics :.
pages 5/246 to 5/249
References :.
pages 5/250 to 5/259
Dimensions :.
pages 5/260 to 5/263
TeSys contactors
Schemes (continued)
Latching .
winding
Start/Stop
Stop
5 5
5/268
5 5
Selection guide
Modular equipment
Applications Control of lighting, heating, hot water systems, ventilation systems and small motors Control of lighting heating, hot
water systems, ventilation
systems and small motors
Direct control of motors Fuse protection Motor control and protection
Functions GC contactors for standard applications GY Dual tariff contactors Impulse relays Rotary switch disconnectors Single, 2, 3 or 4-pole fuse carriers,
with or without neutral
Thermal-magnetic motor .
circuit-breakers
Rating 1663 A 1663 A 16.A 2580.A Up to 125 A 0.132 A
Number of 175 mm modules
(variable, depending on size and number of poles)
13 14 1 25 18 25
Device type GC GY GF 16 VVD, VVE DF8, DF10, DF14, DF22 GV2 M
..
Pages 5/278 5/292 5/286 Please consult your Regional Sales
Offce
4/26 3/50
5 5 5 5
5/269
Applications Control of lighting, heating, hot water systems, ventilation systems and small motors Control of lighting heating, hot
water systems, ventilation
systems and small motors
Direct control of motors Fuse protection Motor control and protection
Functions GC contactors for standard applications GY Dual tariff contactors Impulse relays Rotary switch disconnectors Single, 2, 3 or 4-pole fuse carriers,
with or without neutral
Thermal-magnetic motor .
circuit-breakers
Rating 1663 A 1663 A 16.A 2580.A Up to 125 A 0.132 A
Number of 175 mm modules
(variable, depending on size and number of poles)
13 14 1 25 18 25
Device type GC GY GF 16 VVD, VVE DF8, DF10, DF14, DF22 GV2 M
..
Pages 5/278 5/292 5/286 Please consult your Regional Sales
Offce
4/26 3/50
5/270
5 5 5 5
Presentation,
standards
Presentation
TeSys GC contactors are designed for use in modular panels and enclosures.
These contactors feature:
Easy installation
quick clip-on fxing and locking onto 35 mm omega rail,
easy connection by means of ready-to-tighten, captive, pozidrive screw terminals.
Compact size
All units have a common depth of 60 mm and width in modules of 17.5 mm (width of
one module: 17.5 mm).
User safety
use of materials conforming to strictest fre safety standards,
live parts protected against direct fnger contact,
completely safe operation,
state indication on front panel.
....
Standards
This range of modular contactors has been designed taking into account the
requirements of international standard IEC 61095.
This standard is specifc to Electromagnetic contactors for domestic and similar
use.
It has very strict requirements, meeting the expectations of users, with regard to the
safety of equipment and persons in premises and areas accessible to the public.
Conformity with this standard makes it possible to obtain the following quality labels
without the need for additional tests: NF-USE, VDE, CEBEC, etc.
....
Applications
TeSys GC modular contactors are designed for switching all single-phase, 3-phase
or 4-phase loads up to 100 A.
....
Power switching
These contactors have multiple applications in industrial, agricultural and
commercial premises, hospitals and the home, i.e. wherever switching of a specifc
supply is required:
lighting,
heating,
ventilation,
motorised shutters or gates.
....
b
v
v
b
b
v
v
v
v
b
b
b
b
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Modular equipment
Standard contactors TeSys GC
GC 25
5
3
8
8
6
2
5 5
5/271
5 5
Setting-up
precautions
Setting-up precautions
The contactor controls must be bounce free. If not, connect a coil suppression block
1 (GAP 21, 22 or 23) across the coil terminals y 250 V.
When several contactors which operate at the same time are mounted side by side,
a GAC 5 ventilation 1/2 module 2 must be ftted every 2 contactors.
....
It is advisable to mount electronic units at the bottom of the modular panel and to
separate them from electromechanical units by a space 3 equal to one module, or by
2 ventilation 1/2 modules (GAC 5).
....
Derating of contactors mounted in a modular enclosure if the temperature within the
enclosure is > 40 C
....
Contactor rating 40 C 50 C 60 C (1)
16 A 16.A 14.A 13 A
25 A 25.A 22.A 20.A
40 A 40.A 36 A 32 A
63 A 63 A 57.A 50.A
100 A 100.A 87.A 80.A
(1) Ventilation 1/2 module must be ftted
....
1 2 1 2
33
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Modular equipment
5/272
5 5 5 5
Contactor selection for
lighting circuits
Lighting (Maximum number of lamps depending on the power of each unit)
Presentation of installations according to type of supply
Single-phase circuit, 230 V
....
3-phase circuit, 230 V
....
The maximum number of lamps
which can be operated per
phase is equal to the number of
lamps in the single phase
230 V table divided by 3
3-phase circuit, 400 V (with neutral)
....
The maximum number of lamps
which can be operated per
phase is equal to the total
number of lamps in the single-
phase 230 V table.
Contactor rating for a single-phase 230 V circuit (single-pole)
Fluorescent lamps with starter
Single
ftting
Non corrected With parallel correction Contactor
rating
P (W) 20 40 50 80 110 20 40 58 80 110
I
B
(A) 0.39 0.43 070 080 12 019 029 046 057 079
C (F) 5 5 7 7 16
Maximum
number
of lamps
22 20 13 10 7 15 15 10 10 5 16 A
30 28 17 15 10 20 20 15 15 7 25 A
70 60 35 30 20 40 40 30 30 14 40 A
100 90 56 48 32 60 60 43 43 20 63 A
Twin
ftting
Non corrected With series correction Contactor
rating
P (W) 2 x 18 2 x 36 2 x 58 2 x 80 2 x 140 2 x 18 2 x 36 2 x 58 2 x 80 2 x 140
I
B
(A) 044 082 1.34 164 22 026 048 078 096 1.3
C (F) 3.5 45 7 9 18
Maximum
number
of lamps
20 11 7 5 4 30 17 10 9 6 16 A
30 16 10 8 6 46 25 16 13 10 25 A
50 26 16 13 10 80 43 27 22 16 40 A
75 42 25 21 16 123 67 42 34 25 63 A
....
High pressure mercury vapour lamps
rating
P (W) 50 80 125 250 400 700 50 80 125 250 400 700 1000
I
B
(A) 06 08 115 215 3.25 54 0.35 050 07 15 24 4 57
C (F) 7 8 10 18 25 40 60
Maximum
number
of lamps
15 10 8 4 2 1 10 9 9 4 3 2 16 A
20 15 10 6 4 2 15 13 10 6 4 2 1 25 A
34 27 20 10 6 4 28 25 20 11 8 5 3 40 A
53 40 28 15 10 6 43 38 30 17 12 7 5 63 A
I
B
: value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated voltage.
C : unit capacitance for each lamp.
I
B
and C correspond to values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers
....
2
3
0
V
L1
N
2
3
0
V
L1
N
L3
L1
L2
2
3
0
V
2
3
0
V
2
3
0
V
L3
L1
L2
2
3
0
V
2
3
0
V
2
3
0
V
2
3
0
V
L3
N
2
3
0
V
L1
L2
2
3
0
V
2
3
0
V
L3
N
2
3
0
V
L1
L2
2
3
0
V
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Modular equipment
Modular contactors
5 5
5/273
5 5
lighting circuits (continued)
Contactor rating for a single-phase 230 V circuit (single-pole) (continued)
rating
P (W) 18 35 55 90 135 180 18 35 55 90 135 180
I
B
(A) 0.35 14 14 21 3.1 3.1 0.35 06 06 09 09 09
C (F) 5 20 20 26 45 40
Maximum
number
of lamps
18 4 5 3 2 2 14 3 3 2 1 1 16 A
34 9 9 6 4 4 21 5 5 4 2 2 25 A
57 14 14 9 6 6 40 10 10 8 4 5 40 A
91 24 24 19 10 10 60 15 15 11 6 7 63 A
.....
rating
P (W) 70 150 250 400 1000 70 150 250 400 1000
I
B
(A) 1 18 3 44 10.3 06 07 15 25 6
C (F) 12 20 32 45 100
Maximum
number
of lamps
8 4 2 1 6 6 2 2 1 16 A
12 7 4 3 1 9 9 3 4 2 25 A
20 13 8 5 2 18 18 6 8 4 40 A
32 18 11 8 3 25 25 9 12 6 63 A
.....
Metal iodine or halogen vapour lamps
rating
P (W) 35 70 150 250 400 39 70 150 250 400 2000
I
B
(A) 0.3 05 1 15 25 6 0.3 05 1 15 25 6 55
C (F) 6 12 20 32 45 85 60
Maximum
number
of lamps
27 16 8 5 3 1 12 6 4 3 2 1 16 A
40 24 12 8 5 2 18 9 6 4 3 1 2 25 A
68 42 20 14 8 4 31 16 10 7 5 3 3 40 A
106 64 32 21 13 5 50 25 15 10 7 4 5 63 A
.....
Incandescent and halogen lamps
Contactor
rating
P (W) 60 75 100 150 200 300 500 1000
I
B
(A) 026 0.32 044 065 087 1.3 217 44
Maximum
number
of lamps
30 25 19 12 10 7 4 2 16 A
45 38 28 18 14 10 6 3 25 A
85 70 50 35 26 18 10 6 40 A
125 100 73 50 37 25 15 8 63 A
.....
Halogen lamps used with transformer
Contactor
rating
P (W) 60 80 105 150
I
B
(A) 026 0.35 045 065
Maximum
of lamps
9 8 6 4 16 A
14 12 9 6 25 A
27 23 18 13 40 A
40 35 27 19 63 A
I
B
: value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated voltage.
C : unit capacitance for each lamp.
I
B
and C correspond to values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Modular equipment
Modular contactors
5/274
5 5 5 5
heating circuits (continued)
Heating (AC-7a)
..
3-phase switching
..
Heating by resistive elements or by infra-red radiators, convectors or radiators,
heating ducts, industrial furnaces. The current peak between the hot and cold states
must not exceed 2 to 3 In at the moment of switch-on.
........
Contactor selection according to power and required electrical life
(in operating cycles)
Maximum power (kW) Contactor
rating
100 x 10
3
150 x 10
3
200 x 10
3
500 x 10
3
10
6
Single-phase switching
230 V
(2-pole)
3.5 3 22 1 08 16 A
54 46 3.5 16 12 25 A
86 74 56 26 19 40 A
13.6 116 88 4 3 63 A
216 184 14 64 48 100 A
3-phase switching
400 V
(3-pole)
10 9 65 3.2 22 16 A
16 14 10 5 3.5 25 A
26 22 17 75 6 40 A
41 35 265 12 9 63 A
648 552 42 192 144 100 A
....
UU
U
U
U
U
U
U
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Modular equipment
Modular contactors
5 5
5/275
5 5
motor control
Motor control (AC-7b)
Single-phase circuit, 230 V
..
3-phase circuit, 400 V
..
Contactor selection according to maximum power in kW
230 V single-phase
capacitor motor
(2-pole)
400 V 3-phase motor Contactor
rating
(Ith)
055 22 16 A
11 4 25 A
22 75 40 A
4 11 63 A
....
U
V
M
L1
L2
U
V
M
L1
L2
U
W
M
V
L1
L2
L3
U
W
M
V
L1
L2
L3
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Modular equipment
Modular contactors
5/276
5 5 5 5
Characteristics
Contactor type GC16 GC25 GC40 GC63 GC100
Environment
(Ui)
Conforming to VDE 0110 V 500
Rated impulse withstand voltage
(Uimp)
kV 4 in enclosure
Conforming to standards IEC 61095, VDE 0637-3 and IEC 60947-5 for auxiliary contacts
Product certifcations NF- USE, VDE, CEBEC, VE
Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 Protection against direct fnger contact (IP 20 open, IP 40 in enclosure)
around the device
Storage C - 40+ 70
Operation C - 5+ 50 (0.851.1 Uc)
Operating positions Without derating 30 in relation to normal vertical mounting plane
Shock resistance
5300 Hz
Contactor open 2 gn
Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 61095
Number of poles 2, 3 or 4
(Ue y 440 V)
In AC-7a (heating) A 16 25 40 63 100
In AC-7b (motor control) A 5 85 15 25
(Ue)
Up to V 250 two-pole contactors, 415 three and four-pole contactors
Frequency limits Of the operating current Hz 400
Conventional thermal current..
(lth)
q.y 50 C
A 16 25 40 63 100
Rated breaking and making
capacity
(AC-7b) .
I rms 400 V 3-phase
A 40 68 120 200
no current fowing for preceding .
For.10.s A 128 200 320 504 800
For 30 s A 40 62 100 157 250
by fuse or circuit breaker..
U.y 440 V
gl fuse A 16 25 40 63 100
Circuit-breaker I
2
t.
(at 3 kA rms
prospective)
230 V A
2
s 5000 10.000 16.000 18.000
400 V A
2
s 9000 14.000 17.500 20.000
Average impedance per pole At lth and 50 Hz mW 25 25 2 2 1
Power dissipated per pole For the above .
operational currents
W 065 16 3.2 8 10
Maximum
cabling csa
Flexible cable
without cable end
1 conductor mm
2
6 6 25 25 35
2 conductors mm
2
4 4 16 16
Flexible cable.
with cable end
1 conductor mm
2
6 6 16 16 35
2 conductors mm
2
15 15 4 4
Solid cable .
without cable end
1 conductor mm
2
6 6 25 25 35
2 conductors mm
2
4 4 6 6 10
Tightening torque Power circuit connections Nm 08 08 3.5 3.5 3.5
....
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Modular equipment
TeSys GC standard contactors
5 5
5/277
5 5
Contactor type GC16, GC25
single or 2-pole
GC16, GC25
3 or 4-pole.
GC40, GC63
2-pole
GC40, GC63
3 or 4-pole.
GC100
2-pole
GC100
4-pole
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) 50 or 60 Hz V 12240 V, for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Offce
(q.y 50 C)
50 Hz coils Operational 08511.Uc
Drop-out 02075.Uc
Average coil
consumption
at 20 C and at Uc
a 50 Hz Inrush VA 15 34 53 106
Sealed VA 3.8 46 65 13
Maximum heat dissipation 50/60 Hz W 1.3 16 21 42
Operating time Closing C ms 1030
Opening O ms 1025.
Mechanical durability In operating cycles 10
6
In operating cycles per
hour
300
Maximum
cabling csa
Flexible cable
without cable
end
2
25
Flexible cable
with cable end
1 conductor mm
2
25
2 conductors mm
2
15
Solid cable
without .
cable end
2
15
Instantaneous auxiliary contact characteristics
IEC.60947-5
V 500
Conforming to.
VDE 0110
V 500
For ambient q.y 50 C
A 5
Mechanical durability Operating cycles 10
6
Maximum cabling csa Flexible or .
solid conductor
mm
2
25
....
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Modular equipment
5/278
5 5 5 5
References
Standard contactors, TeSys GC
Maximum
current
rating
category
AC-7a
No of poles Number of
175 mm
modules
Sold in
lots of
Basic reference,
to be completed by
Weight
A kg
16 1 1 12 GC 1610pp 0110
2 1 12 GC 1620pp 0110
3 2 6 GC 1630pp 0.230
4 2 6 GC 1640pp 0.230
1 1 1 12 GC 1611pp 0110
2 2 2 6 GC 1622pp 0.230
25 1 1 12 GC 2510pp 0110
2 1 12 GC 2520pp 0110
3 2 6 GC 2530pp 0.230
4 2 6 GC 2540pp 0.230
1 1 1 12 GC 2511pp 0110
2 2 2 6 GC 2522pp 0.230
2 1 12 GC 2502pp 0110
4 2 6 GC 2504pp 0.230
40 2 2 6 GC 4020pp 0.230
3 3 4 GC 4030pp 0.350
4 3 4 GC 4040pp 0.390
1 1 2 6 GC 4011pp 0.230
2 2 3 4 GC 4022pp 0.390
2 2 6 GC 4002pp 0.230
4 3 4 GC 4004pp 0.390
63 2 2 6 GC 6320pp 0.340
3 3 4 GC 6330pp 0.390
4 3 4 GC 6340pp 0.390
1 1 2 6 GC 6311pp 0.340
2 2 3 4 GC 6322pp 0.390
2 2 6 GC 6302pp 0.340
4 3 4 GC 6304pp 0.390
100 2 3 4 GC 10020pp 0680
4 6 2 GC 10040pp 0780
Offce):
Volts 12 24 48 110 220/240
50 Hz J5 B5 E5 F5 M5
60 Hz J6 B6 E6 F6 M6
....
GC 10020 GC 10020
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Modular equipment
GC 2520
5
2
6
2
8
5
5
2
6
2
8
6
GC 4040
5 5
5/279
5 5
Number
of contacts
No of poles Reference Weight

kg
2 1 1 GAC 0521 0016
2 GAC 0531 0016
1 GAC 0511 0016
Accessories
Description For use on
contactor
Number
of
modules
Operational
voltage
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
V kg
Coil
suppression
blocks
comprising .
2 RC circuits
1 1248 1 GAP 21 0090
110240 1 GAP 23 0090
Ventilation
1/2 module
Clips onto
5 rail
1/2 10 GAC 5 0015
Cover plates 1/2 10 GA1 C7 0001
1 10 GA1 C6 0001
Set of sealable
terminal covers
(10 top parts + .
10 bottom parts)
16.or.25.A.
3 or 4
contacts
2 1 GW 254 0040
40 or 63 A .
2.contacts
2 1 GW 632 0040
40 or 63 A .
3 or 4
contacts
3 1 GW 634 0050
....
GAC 5
GA1 Cp
GAC 5
GA1 Cp
GW 254
GW 63p
GW 254
GW 63p
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
pages 5/280.and.5/281
Modular equipment
5
3
3
7
1
5
GAC 05pp
5
2
6
2
8
7
GAP 2p
5/280
5 5 5 5
Dimensions
Dimensions
Contactors
Common side view GC 1610, 1611, 1620
GC 2502, 2510, 2511, 2520
GC 1622, 1640
GC 2504, 2522, 2530, 2540
1 module 2 modules
....
Common side view GC 4002, 4011, 4020
GC 6302, 6311, 6320
GC 4004, 4022, 4030, 4040
GC 6304, 6322, 6330, 6340
2 modules 3 modules
....
Common side view GC 10020 GC 10040
3 modules 6 modules
....
....
17,5 43,7
60
65
8
1
4
4
,
4
35 17,5 43,7
60
65
8
1
4
4
,
4
35
35 43,7
60
65
8
1
4
4
,
4
52,5 35 43,7
60
65
8
1
4
4
,
4
52,5
54 43,7
60
65
8
1
4
4
,
4
108 54 43,7
60
65
8
1
4
4
,
4
108
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
Schemes :
page 5/281
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
Schemes :
page 5/281
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
Schemes :
page 5/281
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
Schemes :
page 5/281
Modular equipment
5 5
5/281
5 5
schemes
Dimensions
Auxiliary contacts Coil suppression blocks
GAC 0511, 0531 and 0521 GAP 21, 22 and 23
.. ..
Clip-on ventilation 1/2 module Cover plates
GAC 5 GA1 C6 GA1 C7
.. .. ..
Schemes
Contactors
GC pp10 GC pp20 GC pp30 GC pp40
.. .. .. ..
GC pp11 GC pp22 GC pp02 GC pp04
.. .. .. .
Auxiliary contacts
GAC 0521 GAC 0531 GAC 0511
.. .. ..
....
8,75
12,75
43,7
60
65
8
1
4
4
,
4
8,75
12,75
43,7
60
65
8
1
4
4
,
4
4
4
,
4
17,5 43,7
60
65
8
1
4
4
,
4
17,5 43,7
60
65
8
1
8 65
67
4
4
8 65
67
4
4
5
4
6 18 11,5
5
4
6 18 11,5
5
4
6
9 11,5
5
4
6
9 11,5
A
1
A
2
1
2
A
1
A
2
1
2
A
1
A
2
3
4
1
2
A
1
A
2
3
4
1
2
A
1
A
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
A
1
A
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
A
1
A
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
8
A
1
A
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
8
R
1
R
2
A
1
A
2
1
2
R
1
R
2
A
1
A
2
1
2
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
R
1
R
2
R
3
R
4
A
1
A
2
1
2
3
4
R
1
R
2
R
3
R
4
R
1
R
2
A
1
A
2
R
3
R
4
R
1
R
2
A
1
A
2
R
3
R
4
A
1
A
2
R
1
R
2
R
7
R
8
R
3
R
4
R
5
R
6
A
1
A
2
R
1
R
2
R
7
R
8
R
3
R
4
R
5
R
6
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
2
4
2
3
/
N
O
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
2
4
2
3
/
N
O
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
1
4
/
N
O
1
3
/
N
O
1
2
1
4
/
N
O
1
3
/
N
O
1
2
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
Dimensions :
page 5/280
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
Dimensions :
page 5/280
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
Dimensions :
page 5/280
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/276.and.5/277
References :
pages 5/278.and.5/279
Dimensions :
page 5/280
Modular equipment
5/282
5 5 5 5
Presentation
TeSys GF impulse relays are designed for use in modular enclosures.
They feature:
Easy installation
easy connection by means of ready-to-tighten captive, pozidrive screw terminals.
Compact size
Units have a common depth of 60 mm and width of 18 mm.
User safety
state indication on front panel..
....
Standards
This range of modular impulse relays has been designed taking into account the
requirements of international standard IEC 60669-2.
This standard is specifc to Impulse relays.
without the need for additional tests: NF-USE, VDE, CEBEC, etc..
....
Functions
Modular impulse relays are designed for opening and closing of circuits which are
remotely controlled by impulses. The position is mechanically maintained.
These impulse relays are used in lighting circuits when there are more than two
switching points..
....
Power switching
TeSys GF impulse relays have multiple applications in industrial, agricultural and
lighting supply is required:
....
b
v
v
b
b
v
v
v
Characteristics :
pages 5/284 and 5/285
References :
page 5/286
page 5/287
Characteristics :
pages 5/284 and 5/285
References :
page 5/286
page 5/287
Characteristics :
pages 5/284 and 5/285
References :
page 5/286
page 5/287
Characteristics :
pages 5/284 and 5/285
References :
page 5/286
page 5/287
Modular equipment
TeSys GF impulse relays
Presentation
GF 1611M7
P
F
5
2
6
2
8
4
5 5
5/283
5 5
Lighting circuits
Fluorescent lamps with starter
Single ftting Non corrected With parallel correction
Power in W 18 36 58 18 36 58
Number of lamps 70 35 21 50 25 16
Twin ftting With series correction
Power in W 2 x 18 2 x 36 2 x 58
Number of lamps 56 28 17
Incandescent lamps: flament lamps
Power in W 40 60 75 100 200
Number of lamps 40 25 20 16 8
Incandescent lamps: halogen lamps
Power in W 300 500 1000 1500
Number of lamps 5 3 1 1
Incandescent lamps: very low voltage halogen lamps
Power in W 20 50 75 100
Non corrected
Power in W 55 90 135 180
Non corrected
Power in W 250 400 1000
Number of lamps 5 3 1
Heating circuits
Single-phase 230 V, 2-pole
Power in kW 3.6
....
Characteristics :
pages 5/284 and 5/285
References :
page 5/286
page 5/287
Characteristics :
pages 5/284 and 5/285
References :
page 5/286
page 5/287
Characteristics :
pages 5/284 and 5/285
References :
page 5/286
page 5/287
Characteristics :
pages 5/284 and 5/285
References :
page 5/286
page 5/287
Modular equipment
Selection for lighting
and heating circuits
5/284
5 5 5 5
Characteristics
Environment
IEC.60947-1-5
V 400
Conforming to .
VDE 0110
V 400
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 4 in enclosure
Conforming to standards IEC 60669-1 and 60669-2, NF C 61-112
Product certifcations NF-USE, CEBEC, ASE, KEMA, N, S, D, FI, VDE
Degree of protection Conforming to .
VDE 0106
Protection against direct fnger contact IP 20 open, IP 40 in enclosure
around the device
Storage C - 40+ 80
Shock resistance
Impulse relay open Please consult your Regional Sales Offce
Impulse relay closed Please consult your Regional Sales Offce
5300 Hz
Impulse relay open 4 gn
Impulse relay closed 4 gn
Number of poles 1.or.2
(Ue y 250 V)
In AC-7a (heating) A 16
Conventional thermal current (lth)
q.y 50 C
A 16
no current fowing for preceding .
For.1.s A 320
For.10.s A 96
For 30 s A 48
by fuse or circuit-breaker
gl fuse A 16
Circuit-breaker I
2
t (at
3 kA rms prospective)
A
2
s 5000
Average impedance per pole At lth and 50 Hz mW 4
Power dissipated per pole W 1
Maximum
cabling
csa
Min Max
Flexible cable .
without cable end
1 conductor mm
2
05 6
2 conductors mm
2
05 4
Flexible cable .
with cable end
1 conductor mm
2
05 6
2 conductors mm
2
05 4
Solid cable.
without cable end
1 conductor mm
2
05 6
2 conductors mm
2
05 4
Tightening torque Power circuit
connections
Nm 08
....
Presentation :
page 5/282
Selection :
page 5/283
References :
page 5/286
page 5/287
Presentation :
page 5/282
Selection :
page 5/283
References :
page 5/286
page 5/287
Presentation :
page 5/282
Selection :
page 5/283
References :
page 5/286
page 5/287
Presentation :
page 5/282
Selection :
page 5/283
References :
page 5/286
page 5/287
Modular equipment
5 5
5/285
5 5
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) V 12240 V, for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Offce
(q < 50 C)
Operating threshold, .
dual frequency 50/60 Hz
V 08511.Uc
Average consumption
at 20 C and at Uc
Inrush at 50 Hz VA 19
Operating time Closing C ms 70
Opening O ms 70
Minimum impulse time ms 70
Mechanical durability 10
6
operating cycles
AC-21 200 000 operating cycles
AC-22 100 000 operating cycles
Maximum operating rate Operating cycles .
per hour
900
Maximum
cabling csa
Flexible cable .
without cable end
2
25
Flexible cable .
with cable end
1 conductor mm
2
25
2 conductors mm
2
15
Solid cable .
without cable end
2
15
...
Presentation :
page 5/282
Selection :
page 5/283
References :
page 5/286
page 5/287
Presentation :
page 5/282
Selection :
page 5/283
References :
page 5/286
page 5/287
Presentation :
page 5/282
Selection :
page 5/283
References :
page 5/286
page 5/287
Presentation :
page 5/282
Selection :
page 5/283
References :
page 5/286
page 5/287
Modular equipment
5/286
5
References
Maximum current rating
category AC-1
Composition Coil voltages Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
a 50/60 Hz
c
A V V kg
16 1 12 6 12 GF 1610J7 0110
24 12 12 GF 1610B7 0110
48 24 12 GF 1610E7 0110
110 48 12 GF 1610F7 0110
220 12 GF 1610M7 0110
230/240 110 12 GF 1610U7 0110
2 12 6 12 GF 1620J7 0110
24 12 12 GF 1620B7 0110
48 24 12 GF 1620E7 0110
110 48 12 GF 1620F7 0110
220 12 GF 1620M7 0110
230/240 110 12 GF 1620U7 0110
1 1 12 6 12 GF 1611J7 0110
24 12 12 GF 1611B7 0110
48 24 12 GF 1611E7 0110
110 48 12 GF 1611F7 0110
220 12 GF 1611M7 0110
230/240 110 12 GF 1611U7 0110
....
Presentation :
page 5/282
Selection :
page 5/283
Characteristics :
pages 5/284 and 5/285
page 5/287
Presentation :
page 5/282
Selection :
page 5/283
Characteristics :
pages 5/284 and 5/285
page 5/287
Presentation :
page 5/282
Selection :
page 5/283
Characteristics :
pages 5/284 and 5/285
page 5/287
Presentation :
page 5/282
Selection :
page 5/283
Characteristics :
pages 5/284 and 5/285
page 5/287
Modular equipment
GF 1611M7
P
F
5
2
6
2
8
4
5/287
5
Dimensions,
schemes
Dimensions
GF 1610, GF 1611, GF 1620
..
Schemes
GF 1610 GF 1611 GF 1620
.. .. ..
....
18
64
60
44
5,5
8
1
4
5
18
64
60
44
5,5
8
1
4
5
A
1
A
2
1
2
A
1
A
2
1
2
R
1
R
2
A
1
A
2
1
2
R
1
R
2
A
1
A
2
1
2
A
1
A
2
3
4
1
2
A
1
A
2
3
4
1
2
Presentation :
page 5/282
Selection :
page 5/283
Characteristics :
pages 5/284 and 5/285
References :
page 5/286
Presentation :
page 5/282
Selection :
page 5/283
Characteristics :
pages 5/284 and 5/285
References :
page 5/286
Presentation :
page 5/282
Selection :
page 5/283
Characteristics :
pages 5/284 and 5/285
References :
page 5/286
Presentation :
page 5/282
Selection :
page 5/283
Characteristics :
pages 5/284 and 5/285
References :
page 5/286
5/288
5 5 5 5
Presentation
standards
Presentation
TeSys GY dual tariff contactors are designed for use in modular panels and
enclosures.
These contactors feature:
Easy installation
easy connection by means of ready-to-tighten captive, pozidrive screw terminals.
Compact size
All units have a common depth of 60 mm and width in modules of 17.5 mm (width of
one module: 17.5 mm).
User safety
use of materials conforming to strictest fre safety standards,
state indication on front panel.
Dual tariff contactors are designed for use with Electricity Supply Authority dual
tariffs.
They have a 4-position selector switch on the front panel:
b
v
v
b
b
v
v
v
v
Stop (O) For switching off the load, e.g. for prolonged periods of
absence.
Off peak
Automatic start (A)
The contactor switches automatically during off peak hours
as set by the Supply Authority remote control and thus
supplies the load, (washing machine, dishwasher, convector
heater, water heater) during this period, at an economy rate to
the user.
Peak time
Manual start (I)
In this position, the contactor supplies the load to cater for
additional requirements for hot water, heating, etc., but at
the standard rate. The contactor returns automatically to the
off-peak position at the start of the off-peak period.
Peak time
Manual override
with lock
Facility for setting the contactor to continuous manual
operation, ignoring the automation system and the Supply
Authority control; setting and locking is achieved by means
of a tool, with manual return to the AUTO position.
Standards
This range of modular contactors has been designed taking into account the
requirements of international standard IEC 61095.
This standard is specifc to Electromagnetic contactors for domestic and similar
use.
It has very strict requirements, meeting the expectations of users, with regard to the
safety of equipment and persons in premises and areas accessible to the public.
without the need for additional tests: NF-USE, VDE, CEBEC, etc.
Applications
Dual tariff modular contactors are designed for switching all single-phase, 3-phase
or 4-phase loads up to 63 A.
Power switching
TeSys GY contactors have multiple applications in industrial, agricultural and
supply is required:
lighting,
heating, ventilation,
motorised shutters or gates.
v
v
v
.
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290.and.5/291
References :
pages 5/292.and.5/293
pages 5/294.and.5/295
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290.and.5/291
References :
pages 5/292.and.5/293
pages 5/294.and.5/295
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290.and.5/291
References :
pages 5/292.and.5/293
pages 5/294.and.5/295
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290.and.5/291
References :
pages 5/292.and.5/293
pages 5/294.and.5/295
Modular equipment
TeSys GY dual tariff contactors
5
2
6
2
9
5
GY 25
5 5
5/289
5 5
Setting-up
precautions
Setting-up precautions
The contactor controls must be bounce free. If not, connect a coil suppression block
1 (GAP 21, 22 or 23) across the coil terminals y 250 V.
When several contactors which operate at the same time are mounted side by side,
a GAC 5 ventilation 1/2 module 2 must be ftted every 2 contactors.
It is advisable to mount electronic units at the bottom of the modular panel and to
separate them from electromechanical units by a space equal to one module 3 or by
2 ventilation 1/2 modules GAC 5
Derating of contactors mounted in a modular enclosure if the temperature within the
enclosure is > 40 C
Contactor rating 40C 50C 60 C (1)
16 A 16.A 14.A 13 A
25 A 25.A 22.A 20.A
40 A 40.A 36 A 32 A
63 A 63 A 57.A 50.A
(1) Ventilation 1/2 module must be ftted
.
1 2 1 2
33
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290.and.5/291
References :
pages 5/292.and.5/293
pages 5/294.and.5/295
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290.and.5/291
References :
pages 5/292.and.5/293
pages 5/294.and.5/295
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290.and.5/291
References :
pages 5/292.and.5/293
pages 5/294.and.5/295
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290.and.5/291
References :
pages 5/292.and.5/293
pages 5/294.and.5/295
Modular equipment
5/290
5 5 5 5
Characteristics
Environment
Type GY 16 GY 25 GY 40 GY 63
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 61095 V 500
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 4 in enclosure
Conforming to standards IEC 61095, VDE 0637-3 and IEC 60947-5 for auxiliary contacts
Product certifcations NF-USE, VDE, CEBEC, VE
Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 Protection against direct fnger contact IP 20 open, IP 40 in enclosure
around the device
Storage C - 40+ 70
Operation C - 5+ 50 (0.851.1 Uc)
Shock resistance
5300 Hz
Contactor open 2 gn
Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 61095
Number of poles 2, 3 or 4
(Ue y 440 V)
In AC-7a (heating) A 16 25 40 63
In AC-7b (motor control) A 5 85 15 25
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to V 250 - 2-pole contactors, 415 - 3 and 4-pole contactors
Conventional
thermal current (lth)
q.y 50 C A 16 25 40 63
Rated breaking
and making capacity
Conforming to IEC 61095 .
(AC-7b) .
I rms 400 V 3-phase
A 40 68 120 200
Short time rating
with no current fow for the
previous previous 15 minutes
with q.y 40 C
For.10.s A 128 200 320 504
For 30 s A 40 62 100 157
Short-circuit protection by fuse or circuit breaker
.U.y 440 V
gl fuse A 16 25 40 63
Circuit breaker I
2
t..
(at 3 kA rms prospective)
230V A
2
s 5000 10.000 16.000 18.000
400V A
2
s 9000 14.000 17.500 20.000
Average impedance per pole At lth and 50 Hz mW 25 25 2 2
Power dissipated per pole For the above operational
currents
W 065 16 3.2 8
Maximum cabling csa
Flexible cable .
without cable end
1 conductor mm
2
6 6 25 25
2 conductors mm
2
4 4 16 16
Flexible cable .
with cable end
1 conductor mm
2
6 6 16 16
2 conductors mm
2
15 15 4 4
Solid cable .
without cable end
1 conductor mm
2
6 6 25 25
2 conductors mm
2
4 4 6 6
Tightening torque Power circuit connections Nm 08 08 3.5 3.5
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
References :
pages 5/292 and 5/293
pages 5/294 and 5/295
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
References :
pages 5/292 and 5/293
pages 5/294 and 5/295
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
References :
pages 5/292 and 5/293
pages 5/294 and 5/295
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
References :
pages 5/292 and 5/293
pages 5/294 and 5/295
Modular equipment
5 5
5/291
5 5
Type GY 16, GY 25
single or 2-pole
GY 16, GY 25
3 or 4-pole
GY 40, GY 63
3 or 4-pole
GY 40, GY 63
2-pole
Rated control
50 or 60 Hz V 12240 V, for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Offce
Control voltage limits (q.y 50 C)
50 Hz coils Operational 08511.Uc
Drop-out 02075.Uc
Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc
a 50 Hz Inrush VA 15 34 53
Sealed VA 3.8 46 6,5
Heat dissipation 50/60 Hz W 1.3 16 21
Operating time Closing C ms 10 ... 30
Opening O ms 10..25
6
Maximum cabling csa
Flexible cable .
without cable end
2
25
Flexible cable .
with cable end
1 conductor mm
2
25.
2 conductors mm
2
15
Solid cable .
without cable end
2
15
Instantaneous auxiliary contact characteristics
Rated operational
voltage (Ue)
Up to V 250
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-5 V 500.
Conventional
For ambient q y 50 C A 5
6
Maximum cabling csa Flexible or solid conductor mm
2
.25
Tightening torque Nm .08
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
References :
pages 5/292 and 5/293
pages 5/294 and 5/295
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
References :
pages 5/292 and 5/293
pages 5/294 and 5/295
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
References :
pages 5/292 and 5/293
pages 5/294 and 5/295
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
References :
pages 5/292 and 5/293
pages 5/294 and 5/295
Modular equipment
5/292
5 5 5 5
References
Maximum
current
rating
category AC-7a
No of poles Number of
175 mm
modules
Sold in
lots of
Basic reference,
to be completed by
Weight
A kg
16 2 1 12 GY 1620pp 0110
4 2 6 GY 1640pp 0.230
1 1 1 12 GY 1611pp 0110
25 2 1 12 GY 2520pp 0110
3 2 6 GY 2530pp 0.230
4 2 6 GY 2540pp 0.230
1 1 1 12 GY 2511pp 0110
40 2 2 6 GY 4020pp 0.230
3 3 4 GY 4030pp 0.350
4 3 4 GY 4040pp 0.390
63 2 2 6 GY 6320pp 0.340
3 3 4 GY 6330pp 0.390
4 3 4 GY 6340pp 0.390
Volts 12 24 48 110 220/240
50 Hz J5 B5 E5 F5 M5
60 Hz J6 B6 E6 F6 M6
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290 and 5/291
pages 5/294 and 5/295
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290 and 5/291
pages 5/294 and 5/295
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290 and 5/291
pages 5/294 and 5/295
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290 and 5/291
pages 5/294 and 5/295
Modular equipment
5
2
6
2
9
5
GY 2520M5
5
2
6
2
9
6
GY 6340M5
5 5
5/293
5 5
References
Number of contacts Number of poles Reference Weight
kg
2 1 1 GAC 0521 0016
2 GAC 0531 0016
1 GAC 0511 0016
Accessories
Description For use on
contactor
Number
of modules
Operational
voltage
in V
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Coil suppression blocks
comprising 2 RC circuits
1 1248 1 GAP 21 0090
110240 1 GAP 23 0090
Ventilation 1/2 module
clips onto 5 rail
1/2 10 GAC 5 0015
Cover plates 1/2 10 GA1 C7 0001
1 10 GA1 C6 0001
Set of sealable
terminal covers
(10 top parts .
+ 10 bottom parts)
16.or.25.A.
3 or 4 contacts
2 1 GW 254 0040.
40 or 63 A
2.contacts
2 1 GW 632 0040
40 or 63 A.
3 or 4 contacts
3 1 GW 634 0050
GAC 5 GA1 Cp
8
1
2
0
2
9
8
1
2
0
2
9
GAC 5 GA1 Cp
8
1
2
0
2
9
8
1
2
0
2
9
GW 254
5
2
2
6
4
3
GW 254
5
2
2
6
4
3
GW 63p
5
2
2
6
4
4
GW 63p
5
2
2
6
4
4
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290 and 5/291
pages 5/294 and 5/295
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290 and 5/291
pages 5/294 and 5/295
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290 and 5/291
pages 5/294 and 5/295
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290 and 5/291
pages 5/294 and 5/295
Modular equipment
5
2
6
2
8
7
GAP 23
5/294
5 5 5 5
Dimensions
Dual tariff contactors
GY 1611, 1620
GY 2511, 2520
GY 1640
GY 2530, 2540
Common side view 1 module 2 modules
GY 4020
GY 6320
GY 4030, 4040
GY 6330, 6340
Common side view 2 modules 3 modules
43,7
64
69
8
1
4
4
,
4
43,7
64
69
8
1
4
4
,
4
17,5 17,5 35 35
43,7
64
69
8
1
4
4
,
4
43,7
64
69
8
1
4
4
,
4
35 35 52,5 52,5
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290 and 5/291
References :
pages 5/292 and 5/293
page 5/295
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290 and 5/291
References :
pages 5/292 and 5/293
page 5/295
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290 and 5/291
References :
pages 5/292 and 5/293
page 5/295
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290 and 5/291
References :
pages 5/292 and 5/293
page 5/295
Modular equipment
5 5
5/295
5 5
schemes
Dimensions
Auxiliary contacts Coil suppression block
GAC 0511, 0531 and 0521 GAP 21, 22 and 23
Clip-on ventilation 1/2 module Cover plates
GAC 5 GA1 C6 GA1 C7
Schemes
Contactors
GY pp20 GY pp30 GY pp40 GY pp11
Auxiliary contacts
GAC 0521 GAC 0531 GAC 0511
8,75
12,75
43,7
60
65
8
1
4
4
,
4
8,75
12,75
43,7
60
65
8
1
4
4
,
4
4
4
,
4
17,5 43,7
60
65
8
1
4
4
,
4
17,5 43,7
60
65
8
1
8 65
67
4
4
8 65
67
4
4
5
4
6 18 11,5
5
4
6 18 11,5
5
4
6
9 11,5
5
4
6
9 11,5
A
1
A
2
3
4
1
2
A
1
A
2
3
4
1
2
A
1
A
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
A
1
A
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
A
1
A
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
8
A
1
A
2
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
8
R
1
R
2
A
1
A
2
1
2
R
1
R
2
A
1
A
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
2
2
2
1
/
N
C
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
2
4
2
3
/
N
O
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
2
4
2
3
/
N
O
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
1
4
/
N
O
1
3
/
N
O
1
2
1
4
/
N
O
1
3
/
N
O
1
2
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290 and 5/291
References :
pages 5/292 and 5/293
Dimensions :
page 5/294
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290 and 5/291
References :
pages 5/292 and 5/293
Dimensions :
page 5/294
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290 and 5/291
References :
pages 5/292 and 5/293
Dimensions :
page 5/294
Selection :
pages 5/272 to 5/275
Characteristics :
pages 5/290 and 5/291
References :
pages 5/292 and 5/293
Dimensions :
page 5/294
Modular equipment
6/2
6
Motor and machine protection page 6/4
TeSys K relays
Adjustable from 011 to 16 A page 6/10
TeSys D, 3-pole thermal overload relays
Description, characteristics page 6/14
Accessories page 6/25
Dimensions, mounting and schemes page 6/26
TeSys LR9 D, 3-pole electronic thermal overload
relays
Dimensions page 6/27
Schemes page 6/29
TeSys LR9 F, 3-pole electronic thermal overload
relays
Description page 6/30
characteristics page 6/31
Dimensions, schemes and setting-up page 6/38
TeSys RM1 XA, single pole magnetic current relays
Presentation, characteristics page 6/40
Dimensions and schemes page 6/43
LT3, thermistor protection units for use with PTC
thermistor probes
General, characteristics page 6/46
Dimensions, schemes and setting-up page 6/52
Operation page 6/53
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Contents
6 - TeSys protection components:
relays and controllers
1
2
4
5
7
8
9
10
1
2
4
5
7
8
9
10
1
2
4
5
7
8
9
10
6/1
6
TeSys LR97 D and LT47, electronic over current
relays
Presentation, description page 6/54
Curves, characteristics page 6/55
Dimensions, mounting and schemes page 6/59
TeSys U controllers
Application example page 6/61
Associations page 6/65
Dimensions and mounting page 6/66
Schemes page 6/67
TeSys T
Motor Management System
Functions page 6/75
Programming page 6/79
Dimensions and mounting page 6/90
Schemes page 6/92
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
1
2
4
5
7
8
9
10
1
2
4
5
7
8
9
10
1
2
4
5
7
8
9
10
6
6/2
Applications Motor protection Machine protection Motor and machine protection
Thermal motor protection Protection of slip
ring motors and of
circuits without
current peaks
Protection of
resistors, bearings,
capacitors
Specifc motor protection Protection and control
Protection - Motor overload
- Stalling
- Phase failure
- Strong overcurrent
- Stalling
- Frequent starting
- Harsh environments
- Overtorque
- Mechanical shocks
- Locked rotor
- Phase failure
- Overtorque
- Mechanical shocks
- Thermal overload
- Phase imbalance
and phase failure
- Motor stalling
- Long starting times
- Earth fault
- Thermal overload
- Phase imbalance and
phase failure
- Locked rotor
- Phase reversal
- Earth fault
Tripping class Class 10 A Classes 10 A and 20 Classes 10 and 20 Classes 5 to 30 Classes 5 to 30
Communication Modbus, CANopen,
DeviceNet,
ProfbusDP,
Advantys STB,
AS-Interface
Modbus, CANopen,
DeviceNet,
ProfbusDP,
Ethernet TCP/IP
Used with contactor type LC1 K, LP1 K LC1 D LC1 F All contactors
Motor current (In) 01116 A 01150 A 30630 A 07630 A Unlimited 0338 A 0360 A 035800 A 04810 A
Relay or controller type LR2 K LRD, LR2 D and LR9 D LR9 F RM1 XA LT3 S LR97D LT47 LUTM p0BL LTM R
Pages 6/12 6/20 to 6/23 6/34 and 6/35 6/41 and 6/42 6/50 6/58 6/64 6/86
Selection guide
Protection relays and controllers
6
6/3
Applications Motor protection Machine protection Motor and machine protection
Thermal motor protection Protection of slip
ring motors and of
circuits without
current peaks
Protection of
resistors, bearings,
capacitors
Specifc motor protection Protection and control
Protection - Motor overload
- Stalling
- Phase failure
- Strong overcurrent
- Stalling
- Frequent starting
- Harsh environments
- Overtorque
- Mechanical shocks
- Locked rotor
- Phase failure
- Overtorque
- Mechanical shocks
- Thermal overload
- Phase imbalance
and phase failure
- Motor stalling
- Earth fault
- Thermal overload
- Phase imbalance and
phase failure
- Locked rotor
- Phase reversal
- Earth fault
Tripping class Class 10 A Classes 10 A and 20 Classes 10 and 20 Classes 5 to 30 Classes 5 to 30
Communication Modbus, CANopen,
DeviceNet,
ProfbusDP,
Advantys STB,
AS-Interface
Modbus, CANopen,
DeviceNet,
ProfbusDP,
Ethernet TCP/IP
Used with contactor type LC1 K, LP1 K LC1 D LC1 F All contactors
Motor current (In) 01116 A 01150 A 30630 A 07630 A Unlimited 0338 A 0360 A 035800 A 04810 A
Relay or controller type LR2 K LRD, LR2 D and LR9 D LR9 F RM1 XA LT3 S LR97D LT47 LUTM p0BL LTM R
Pages 6/12 6/20 to 6/23 6/34 and 6/35 6/41 and 6/42 6/50 6/58 6/64 6/86
6 6
6/4
6 6
General
Motor and machine protection
Introduction
Exceeding the operating limits of an electric motor will lead, eventually, not only to
destruction of the motor itself but also of the mechanisms it drives
This type of load can be the cause of electrical or mechanical faults
Electrical faults:
overvoltage, voltage drop, imbalance and phase failure which cause variations in
the current drawn,
short-circuits which can cause the current to reach levels capable of destroying
the load
Mechanical faults:
locked rotor,
brief or prolonged overload which leads to an increase in the current drawn by the
motor, and therefore overheating

The cost of these faults must take into account loss of production, loss of raw
materials, repair of the production tool, poor quality of production and delays in
delivery
These faults can also have dramatic consequences on the safety of persons in direct
or indirect contact with the motor
To prevent these faults, protection measures are necessary They make it possible to
isolate the equipment to be protected from the mains supply by measuring
variations in electrical values (voltage, current, etc)
Each motor starter must therefore have:
short-circuit protection, to detect and break, as quickly as possible, abnormal
currents generally greater than 10 times the rated current (In)
overload protection, to detect increases in current up to about 10 In and switch
off the starter before overheating of the motor and conductors damages the
insulation
Thisprotectionisprovidedbyspecifcdevicessuchasfuses,circuit-breakersand
thermal overload relays, or by more integrated devices offering several types of
protection
b
v
v
b
v
v
b
b
6 6 6 6
6/5
Causes, effects and consequences of various faults
There are two types of fault:
Internal faults within the motor
External faults: these are located outside the electric motor but their
consequences can lead to damage inside the motor
b
b
Faults Causes Effects Consequences on the motor and on the
machine
Short-circuit Contact between several phases, or
between one phase and neutral or
between several turns of the same
phase
Current peak
Electrodynamic forces on the
conductors
b
b
Destruction of windings
Overvoltage Lightning
Electrostatic discharge
Operation
b
b
b
Dielectric breakdown in the windings Destruction of the windings due to loss of
insulation
Phase imbalance
and phase failure
Opening of a phase
Single-phase load upstream of the
motor
Short-circuit between the turns of
the same winding
b
b
b
Reductionofusabletorque,effciency
and speed
Increase in losses
Starting impossible if phase failure
b
b
b
Overheating (1)
High starting
frequency
Failure of the automation system
Too many manual control
operations
Numerous fault trips
b
b
b
High stator and rotor temperature rise
due to the frequent start current
Overheating (1)
Consequences on the process
Voltage
variations
Instability of the mains voltage
Connection of heavy loads
b
b
Reduction of usable torque
Increase in losses
b
b
Overheating (1)
Harmonics Pollution of the mains supply by
variable speed drives, inverters, etc
b Reduction of usable torque
Increase in losses
b
b
Overheating (1)
Long
starting time
Resistive torque too high (load too
heavy)
Voltage drop
b
b
Increase in starting time Overheating 1)
Jamming Mechanical problem (crusher)
Seizures
b
b
Overcurrent Overheating (1)
Consequences on the process
No-load running Pump running empty
Mechanical break in drive to the
load
b
b
Drop in current drawn Consequences on the process
Frequency
fuctuations
Overload of a supply powered by
limited independent sources
Faulty alternator speed regulator
b
b
Increase in losses
Interferes with synchronous devices
(clock, recorder, )
b
b
Overload Increase in resistive torque

Voltage drop
Drop in power factor
b
b
b
Increase in current consumption Overheating (1)
Loss of machine
excitation
Signifcantdropinexcitation
current
Break in rotor winding
b
b
Increase in active power
Drop in power factor
b
b
Signifcantoverheatingofrotorandcage
Phase-Earth fault Accidental Phase-Earth contacts
Accidental Phase-machine casing
contacts (casing connected to earth)
b
b
Overvoltage developed in the mains
supply
Rise in earth potential (safety of
persons)
b
b
Consequences on safety of persons
(1) Then, in the longer or shorter term, depending on the seriousness of the fault and/or its frequency, short-circuit and destruction of the windings.
General (continued)
6 6
6/6
6 6
General (continued)
Protection functions
General
A short-circuit results in a very rapid rise in current which can reach several hundred
times the value of the operational current The consequences of a short-circuit are
dangerous to both equipment and persons It is therefore imperative to use
protection devices to detect the fault and very quickly break the circuit

Two types of protection are commonly used:
fuses (cutout) which break the circuit by melting, which then requires their
replacement,
magnetic trip circuit-breakers, often more simply called "magnetic circuit-
breakers", which only require re-setting to put them back into service
Short-circuit protection can also be built-into multifunction devices such as motor
circuit-breakers and contactor-breakers
The main characteristics of short-circuit protection devices are:
their breaking capacity: this is the highest prospective short-circuit current value
that a protection device can break at a given voltage
their making capacity: this is the highest current value that the protection device
canmakeatitsratedvoltageinspecifedconditions.
The making capacity is equal to k times the breaking capacity
b
b
b
b
Fuses (cutouts)
Fuses provide individual phase protection (single-pole), with a high breaking
capacity in a compact size:
mounted either in fuse carriers,
or in isolators, replacing the original links or shunt bars
For motor protection, aM type fuses are used Their design characteristics allow
them to conduct the high magnetising currents that occur when motors are switched
on They are therefore unsuitable for overload protection (unlike gG type fuses) This
is why an overload relay must be included in the motor power supply circuit
b
b
Magnetic circuit-breakers
These circuit-breakers protect installations against short-circuits, within the limit of
their breaking capacity
Magnetic circuit-breakers provide omnipole breaking as standard
For relatively low short-circuit currents, the operation of a circuit-breaker is faster than
that of fuses
This protection conforms to standard IEC 60947-2
The thermal and electrodymanic effects are also limited, therefore ensuring better
protection of cables and equipment

5
2
6
1
7
9
GV2 L
magnetic circuit-breraker
5
2
6
1
7
9
GV2 L
magnetic circuit-breraker
TeSys U LUB 12 starter with
LUCApp control unit
5
2
6
1
8
0
TeSys U LUB 12 starter with
LUCApp control unit
5
2
6
1
8
0
LS1 D32
fuse carrier
5
2
6
1
7
7
GS2 N3
5
2
6
1
7
8
6 6 6 6
6/7
Protection functions (continued)
Overload protection
General
An overload condition is the most frequently encountered fault The symptoms are a
rise in the current drawn by the motor and thermal effects A rapid return to normal
operating conditions is important
The actual operating conditions (ambient temperature, operating altitude and type of
standard duty) are essential to determine the operating values of the motor (power,
current) and to be able to select effective overload protection These operational
values are given by the motor manufacturer
According to the level required, protection can be provided by:
overload relays and thermal overload relays (bi-metallic or electronic type) which
protect motors in the event of:
overload, by monitoring the current drawn by each phase,
phase imbalance or failure, by their differential mechanism
relayswithPTCthermistorprobes(PositiveTemperatureCoeffcient).
overtorque relays,
multifunction relays
b
v
v
b
b
b
Overload relays
These relays protect motors against overload They must allow the temporary
overload that occurs on starting and must only trip if the starting time is abnormally
long
The overload relay will be selected according to the length of the starting time
(tripping class) and the motor rating
These relays have a thermal memory (except for certain electronic overload relays,
indicated by their manufacturers) and can be connected:
either in series with the load,
or to current transformers placed in series with the load
Bi-metallic thermal overload relays
Combined with a contactor, these relays protect the line and the equipment against
small and prolonged overloads They must be protected against strong overcurrent
by a circuit-breaker or fuses
These relays may be used on an ac or dc system and are generally:
3-pole,
compensated, ie insensitive to ambient temperature variations,
with manual or automatic reset,
graduated with a "motor FLC" scale: allowing direct setting to the full load current
as shown on the motor rating plate
They can also be sensitive to phase failure: this is known as 'differential' This
function conforms to standards IEC 60947-4-1 and 60947-6-2
This type of relay is extremely reliable and is a relatively low cost device
Electronic thermal overload relays
Electronic thermal overload relays have the advantage of electronics which allow a
more complex thermal image of the motor to be created
They can be combined with products having complementary functions, such as:
temperature sensing via PTC probes,
protection against jamming and overtorque,
protection against phase reversal,
earth fault protection,
protection against no-load running,
alarm function
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
5
2
6
1
8
1
LRD 02
5
2
6
1
8
4
5
2
6
1
8
3
RM4 JA current measurement relay
TeSys U starter with thermal overload
alarm function module
LRD 365
5
2
6
1
8
2
General (continued)
6 6
6/8
6 6
General (continued)

Protection functions (continued)
Overload protection (continued)
Relays for use with PTC thermistor probes
With direct sensing of the stator windings, these relays can be used to protect motors
against:
overload,
a rise in ambient temperature,
a ventilation circuit fault,
a high starting frequency,
mechanical shocks, etc
b
b
b
b
b
Overload (or overtorque) relays
These relays protect the drive line in the event of a locked rotor, seizure or
mechanical shocks This is an additional protection
Unlike thermal overload relays, these relays do not have a thermal memory They
havedefnitetimecharacteristics(adjustablecurrentthresholdandtimedelay).
The overtorque relay can be used as overload protection for motors with long
starting times or very frequent starting (for example, lifting hoists)
Multifunction relays
Overcurrent relays are limited when it is necessary to take into account problems
associated with voltage, temperature or special applications New production or
maintenance management needs have prompted manufacturers to offer products
which provide not only adaptable protection, but also complete management of the
motor and its load
They incorporate:
current and voltage sensors (TeSys T controllers),
hybrid analog and digital electronic technology,
the use of communication buses for data exchange and control,
powerful motor modelling algorithms,
integrated application programs whose parameters can be set
These products make it possible to reduce installation and operating costs by
reducing maintenance and downtime
TeSys U starters:
The multifunction relay is incorporated in the motor starter
This solution is very compact with reduced wiring It is limited to 32 A
TeSys U controllers:
The multifunction relay is separate from the power line and reuses the function
blocks from the TeSys U solution It can be used in conjunction with a contactor up to
810 A
TeSys T controllers:
The multifunction relay is separate from the power line and incorporates inputs and
outputs It can be used in conjunction with a contactor up to 810 A
b
b
b
b
b
b
5
2
6
1
8
5
LT3 S relays for use with
thermistor probes
5
2
6
1
8
5
LT3 S relays for use with
thermistor probes
5
2
6
1
8
6
LR97 D07
instantaneous electronic
overcurrent relays
5
2
6
1
8
6
LR97 D07
instantaneous electronic
overcurrent relays
5
2
6
1
8
7
TeSys U LUB 32 starter
with multifunction control
unit LUC M
5
2
6
1
8
7
TeSys U LUB 32 starter
with multifunction control
unit LUC M
5
2
6
1
8
8
TeSys U controller
LUTM 20BL
5
2
6
1
8
8
TeSys U controller
LUTM 20BL
5
2
6
1
8
9
TeSys T controller
LTM R08MBD
5
2
6
1
8
9
TeSys T controller
LTM R08MBD
6 6 6 6
6/9
Protection relay selection table
Motor protection Machine
protection
Motor and machine
protection
Relay type Thermal
overload
relay
LR2 K,
LRD,
LRD 3,
LR9 F,
LR9 D (1)
Relays for
use with
PTC
probes
LT3 S
Overtorque
relays
LR97 D,
LT47
TeSys U
controller
LUT M
TeSys T
controller
LTM R
Causes of overheating (2) (2) (2) (3)
Slight overload
Locked rotor
No-load running
Supply phase failure LR9 7D
Ventilation fault With probes
Abnormal temperature
rise
With probes
Shaft bearing seizure With probes
Insulation fault
Protracted starting time
Severe duty With probes
Voltage variation
Frequency fuctuations
Loss of machine
excitation
Ideally suited
Possible solution
Not suitable (no protection)
(1) for motor circuit-breaker type GV2ME.
(2) Protection based on current.
(3) Protection based on current and voltage.
General (continued)
6/10
6 6 6 6
Environment
(DIN 50016)
Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 Protectionagainstdirectfngercontact
around the device
Storage C - 40+ 70
For normal operation (IEC 60947) C - 20+ 55 (without derating)
Operating limit C - 30+ 60 (with derating) (1)
Maximum operating
altitude
Without derating m 2000
Operating positions Vertical axis

Without derating
Horizontal axis

With derating (1)
Flame resistance Conforming to UL 94 Self-extinguishing material V1
Conforming to NF F 16-101
and 16-102
Conforming to requirement 2
Shock resistance, hot state
N/C contact
10 gn
N/O contact
10 gn
Vibration resistance,
hot state
5 to 300 Hz
N/C contact
2 gn
N/O contact
2 gn
Safe separation of
circuits
Conforming to VDE 0106
and IEC 60536
VLSV (2), up to 400 V
Cabling
Minimum Maximum Maximum to IEC 60947
Solid cable mm
2
1 x 15 2 x 4 1 x 4 + 1 x 25
2
1 x 075 2 x 4 2 x 25
2
1 x 034 1 x 15 + 1 x 25 1 x 15 + 1 x 25
Tightening torque Philips head n 2 - 6 N.m 08
Mounting Directly under the contactor or reversing contactor
Connections Made automatically when mounted under the contactor, as follows :
contactor terminal A2 connected to overload relay terminal 96 on all products,
contactor terminal 14 connected to overload relay terminal 95 on products with
3 P + N/O
When using 3 P + N/C, or 4 P contactors, or the N/O auxiliary contact marked 13-14,
at a voltage other than the coil voltage, break off the link marked 14
b
b
Number of contacts 1 N/C + 1 N/O
Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947,
VDE 0660 gG fuse or
circuit-breaker GB2 CBpp
A 6 max
Maximum power
of the controlled contactor coils
(sealed) (Occasional operating
cycles of contact 95-96)
ac V 24 48 110 220/230 400 415/440 600/690
VA 100 200 400 600 600 600 600
dc V 24 48 110 220 250
W 100 100 50 45 35
Maximum operational
voltage
ac, category AC-15 V 690
dc, category DC-13 V 250
(2) Very low safety voltage.

References :
page 6/12
Dimensions :
page 6/13
Schemes :
page 6/13
References :
page 6/12
Dimensions :
page 6/13
Schemes :
page 6/13
References :
page 6/12
Dimensions :
page 6/13
Schemes :
page 6/13
References :
page 6/12
Dimensions :
page 6/13
Schemes :
page 6/13
TeSys K thermal overload relays,
adjustable from 011 to 16 A
Characteristics
6 6
6/11
6 6
Electrical characteristics of the power circuit
Rated operational
voltage (Ue)
Up to V 690
Rated insulation
voltage (Ui)
Conforming to BS 4941 V 690
Conforming to VDE 0110 group C V 750
Conforming to CSA C 22-2 n 14 V 600
voltage (Uimp)
kV 6
Frequency limits of the operational current Hz Up to 400
Power dissipated per pole W 2
Sensitivity to phase
failure
Conforming to IEC 60947 Yes
Reset Manual or automatic Selected by means of a lockable and sealable switch on the front of the relay
Signalling On front of relay Trip indicator
Reset-Stop function Pressing the Reset-Stop button :
actuates the N/C contact
has no effect on the N/O contact
-
-
Test function By pushbutton Pressing the Test button enables :
checking of the control circuit wiring
simulation of overload tripping (actuation of both N/C and N/O contacts,
and of the trip indicator)
-
-
Short-circuit protection and coordination See pages 1/18 and 1/28
Tripping curves
Average operating time related to multiples of the current setting (Class 10 A)
Balanced 3-phase operation, from cold state Balanced operation with 2 phases only, from cold state

1 Setting : at lower end of scale
2 Setting : at upper end of scale

2 h
1h 20 min
1 h
40 min
20 min
10 min
6 min
4 min
2 min
1 min
40 s
20 s
10 s
6 s
4 s
2 s
1s
1 1,2 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15
1
2
Time
X setting current (Ir)
2 h
1h 20 min
1 h
40 min
20 min
10 min
6 min
4 min
2 min
1 min
40 s
20 s
10 s
6 s
4 s
2 s
1s
1 1,2 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15
1
2
Time
2 h
1h 20 min
1 h
40 min
20 min
10 min
6 min
4 min
2 min
1 min
40 s
20 s
10 s
6 s
4 s
2 s
1 s
1 1,2 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15
Time
2 h
1h 20 min
1 h
40 min
20 min
10 min
6 min
4 min
2 min
1 min
40 s
20 s
10 s
6 s
4 s
2 s
1 s
1 1,2 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15
Time
References :
page 6/12
Dimensions :
page 6/13
Schemes :
page 6/13
References :
page 6/12
Dimensions :
page 6/13
Schemes :
page 6/13
References :
page 6/12
Dimensions :
page 6/13
Schemes :
page 6/13
References :
page 6/12
Dimensions :
page 6/13
Schemes :
page 6/13
6/12
6 6 6 6
3-pole relays with screw clamp terminals
These overload relays are designed for the protection of motors They are
compensated and phase failure sensitive Resetting can either be manual or
automatic
Direct mounting: under the contactor for versions with screw clamp terminals only;
pre-wired terminals, see pages 6/10 and 6/13
Separate mounting: using terminal block LA7 K0064 (see below)
On the front face of the overload relay:
selection of reset mode: Manual (marked H) or Automatic (marked A),
red pushbutton: Trip Test function,
blue pushbutton: Stop and manual Reset,
yellowtripfagindicator:overloadrelaytripped.
Protection by magnetic circuit-breaker GV2 LE, see pages 1/18 and 1/28

Class 10 A (the standard specifes a tripping time of between 2 and 10 seconds at 7.2 In)
Relay setting
range
Fuses to be used with selected relay
Maximum rating
Type
Reference Weight
aM gG BS88
A A A A kg
011016 025 05 LR2 K0301 0145
016023 025 05 LR2 K0302 0145
023036 05 1 LR2 K0303 0145
036054 1 16 LR2 K0304 0145
05408 1 2 LR2 K0305 0145
0812 2 4 6 LR2 K0306 0145
1218 2 6 6 LR2 K0307 0145
1826 4 8 10 LR2 K0308 0145
2637 4 10 16 LR2 K0310 0145
3755 6 16 16 LR2 K0312 0145
558 8 20 20 LR2 K0314 0145
8115 10 25 20 LR2 K0316 0145
1014 16 32 25 LR2 K0321 0145
1216 20 40 32 LR2 K0322 0145
Overload relays for unbalanced loads
Class 10 A:Toorder,replacetheprefxLR2 by LR7 in the references selected from
above (only applicable to overload relays LR2 K0305 to LR2 K0322)
Example: LR7 K0308

Accessory
Description Type of connection Reference Weight
kg
Terminal block for separate
clip-on mounting of the overload
relay on 35 mm 7 rail
Screw clamp LA7 K0064 0100
b
b
b
b
References
LA7 K0064
8
1
2
5
5
9
LR2 K0307
1
0
6
1
6
7
_
1
Characteristics:
pages 6/10 and 6/11
Dimensions:
page 6/13
Schemes:
page 6/13
Characteristics:
pages 6/10 and 6/11
Dimensions:
page 6/13
Schemes:
page 6/13
6 6
6/13
6 6
LR2 K
Direct mounting beneath the contactor Separate mounting with terminal block LA7 K0064 on 35 mm 7 rail
(AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200)

AM1 c
DP200 785
DE200 86
Schemes
LR2 K LR2 K + LCp K
Pre-wiring scheme

LR7 K Note : If pre-wiring is not required, break off the 2 links located on the thermal overload relay.

65
8
=
=
35 = =
45
5
8
5
0
1
1
6
65
8
=
=
35 = =
45
5
8
5
0
1
1
6
3
8
8
0
75
c
45
3
8
8
0
75
c
45
1 3 5
2 4 6
9
7
9
8
9
5
9
6
A
H
Test
Reset/stop
1 3 5
2 4 6
9
7
9
8
9
5
9
6
A
H
Test
Reset/stop
1 3 5 1
3
A
1
2 4 6
1
4
A
2
2 4 6
9
7
9
5
9
8
9
6
1 3 5 1
3
A
1
2 4 6
1
4
A
2
2 4 6
9
7
9
5
9
8
9
6
KM1
A
2
A
1
9
6
9
5
1
3
1
4
KM1
O
95
96
KM1
A
2
A
1
9
6
9
5
1
3
1
4
KM1
O
95
96
1 3 5
2 4 6
9
7
9
8
9
5
9
6
A
H
Test
Reset/stop
1 3 5
2 4 6
9
7
9
8
9
5
9
6
A
H
Test
Reset/stop
Dimensions,
mounting,
schemes
Characteristics:
pages 6/10 and 6/11
References:
page 6/12
Characteristics:
pages 6/10 and 6/11
References:
page 6/12
6 6
6/14
6 6
Presentation
TeSys D thermal overload relays are designed to protect ac circuits and motors
against:
overloads,
phase failure,
excessively long starting times,
prolonged stalled rotor condition
b
b
b
b
Power connection
LRD 01 to LRD 35
LRD 01 to 35 relays are designed for connection by screw clamp terminals
They can be supplied for connection by spring terminals or by lugs (1).
LRD 313 to LRD 365
LRD 313 to 365 relays are for connection by BTR screw connectors (hexagon socket
head)
The screws are tightened by means of a size 4, insulated Allen key
This type of connection uses the EverLink system with creep compensation (2)
(Schneider Electric patent)
This technique makes it possible to achieve accurate and durable tightening torque
These relays are also available for connection by lugs (1)
LRD 3361 to 4369, LR2 D3561 to D3563
LRD 3361 to 4369 and LR2 D3561 to D3563 relays are designed for connection by
screw clamp terminals They can be supplied for connection by lugs (1)
Description
TeSys D 3-pole thermal overload relays are designed to protect ac circuits and
motors against overloads, phase failure, long starting times and prolonged stalling
of the motor
Adjustment dial Ir
Test button
Operation of the Test button allows:
- checking of control circuit wiring,
- simulation of relay tripping (actuates both the N/O and N/C contacts)
3 Stop button Actuates the N/C contact; does not affect the N/O contact
4 Reset button
5 Trip indicator
6 Setting locked by sealing the cover
7 Selector for manual or automatic reset

LRD 01 to 35 and LRD 313 to LRD 365 relays are supplied with the selector in the
manual position, protected by a cover Deliberate action is required to move it to the
automatic position
1
2
(1) Connection by lugs meets the requirements of certain Asian markets and is suitable for
applications subject to strong vibration, such as railway transport.
(2) Creep: normal crushing phenomenon of copper conductors, that is accentuated over time.
LRD 08
5
2
6
2
1
2
LRD 08
5
2
6
2
1
2
LRD 365
5
2
6
2
1
3
LRD 365
5
2
6
2
1
3
LRD 33pp
5
2
6
2
1
5
LRD 33pp
5
2
6
2
1
5
LRD 0135 and LRD 313LRD 365
RESET
STOP
5
4
3,5
3
0 1
1
6
2, 5
4
3
7
LRD 0135 and LRD 313LRD 365
RESET
STOP
5
4
3,5
3
0 1
1
6
2, 5
4
3
7
5
0
A
4
1
R
E
S
E
T
TEST
98 97 95 96
NO NC
M A
3
7
4 6
1
5
3
4
2
6
LRD 33614369, LR2 D35613563
5
0
A
4
1
R
E
S
E
T
TEST
98 97 95 96
NO NC
M A
3
7
4 6
1
5
3
4
2
6
LRD 33614369, LR2 D35613563
References:
pages 6/20 and 6/21
Dimensions, mounting :
pages 6/26 to 6/28
Schemes:
page 6/29
Presentation,
description
3-pole thermal overload relays
TeSys D
6 6 6 6
6/15
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC/EN 60947-4-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C222 n 14
ATEX directive 94/9/EC (1)
Product certifcations UL, CSA CCC, GOST
ATEX INERIS (1)
GL, DNV, RINA, BV, LROS (2)
Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 ProtectionagainstdirectfngercontactIP2X
around the device
Storage C - 60+ 70
Normal operation, without
derating (IEC 60947-4-1)
C - 20+ 60
Minimum /maximum operating
temperatures (with derating)
C - 40+ 70
Operating positions
without derating
Any position
When mounting on a vertical rail, use a stop
Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 C 850
Shock resistance Permissible acceleration
15 gn - 11 ms
Vibration resistance (3) Permissible acceleration
6 gn
Dielectric strength at 50 Hz Conforming to IEC 60255-5 kV 6
Surge withstand Conforming to IEC 60801-5 kV 6
Electrical characteristics of power circuit
Relay type LRD 01
16,
LR3 D01
16
LRD 1508
1532
LRD 21
35,
LR3 D21
35
LRD 313
365
LR3
D313
365
LRD 313L
365L
LRD 3322
33696
LR3
D3322
33696
LR2
D3522
3563
LRD
4365
4369
Tripping class Conforming to UL 508,
IEC 60947-4-1
10 A 20 10 A 10 A 20 10 A 20 10 A
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 V 690 1000
Conforming to UL, CSA V 600 600
except
LRD
4369
Setting range Depending on model A 0113 2532 1238 965 965 17140 1780 80140
Max. sealed consumption
of the operating coils of
controlled contactors
(Occasional operating
ac supply, AC-15 V 120 240 380 480 500 600
A 3 15 095 075 072 012
dc supply, DC-13 V 125 250 440
A 022 01 006
Protection against
short-circuits
By gG, BS fuses
Maximum rating or by GB2
A 5
(1) For relays LRD01 to LRD365.
(2) Pending for relays LRD313 to LRD365.
(3) For relays LRD 313 to LRD 365: 6 gn only with independent plate mounting and 4 gn when
mounted beneath the contactor.
Characteristics
TeSys D
References:
pages 6/20 and 6/21
pages 6/26 to 6/28
Schemes:
page 6/29
6 6
6/16
6 6
Relay type LRD 01
16,
LR3 D01
16
LRD 1508
1532
LRD 21
35,
LR3 D21
35
LRD 313
365
LR3
D313
365
LRD 313L
365L
LRD 3322
33696
LR3
D3322
33696
LR2
D3522
3563
LRD
4365
4369
Connection to screw clamp terminals
Flexible cable
without cable end
1 conductor mm
2
1510 1510 135 135 435 450
Flexible cable
with cable end
1 conductor mm
2
14 16
except
LRD 21:
14
135 135 435 435
Solid cable without
cable end
1 conductor mm
2
16 15/10
except
LRD 21:
1/6
135 135 435 450
Tightening torque N.m 17 185 25 125 : 5
35 : 8
125 : 5
35 : 8
9 9 9
Connection to spring terminals (Min/max csa)
Flexible cable
without cable end
1 conductor mm
2
154 154
Flexible cable
with cable end
1 conductor mm
2
154 154
e
d
L
d
L L'
Relay type LRD 016
166
LRD 216
356
LRD 3136
3656
LRD 313L6
365L6
LRD 3322A66
3365A66
Pitch Without spreaders mm 145 175 175 175 215
Bars or cables with lugs e N.m y 6 y 6 y 6 y 6 y 6
L mm y 8 y 8 y 135 y 135 y 16
L mm y 95 y 10 y 165 y 165 y 16
d y 7 y 7 y 10 y 10 y 12
Screws M4 M4 M6 M6 M10
Tightening torque N.m 23 23 6 6 113
Connection to screw clamp terminals or spring terminals
Bare cables
h
Relay type LRD 01
16,
LR3 D01
16
LRD 1508
1532
LRD 21
35,
LR3 D21
35
LRD 313
365
LR3
D313
365
LRD 313L
365L
LRD 3322
33696
LR3
D3322
33696
LR2
D3522
3563
LRD
4365
4369
Connection to screw
clamp terminals (1)
Solid cable without cable end mm
2
2 x 125
2
2 x 125
2
2 x 125
Connection to
spring terminals
(Min/max csa)
Solid cable mm
2
125 125
2
125 125
(1) For relays LRD 313 to 365: BTR hexagon socket head screws, EverLink system.
In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be used
(reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85).
TeSys D
References:
pages 6/20 and 6/21
pages 6/26 to 6/28
Schemes:
page 6/29
6 6 6 6
6/17
Relay type LRD 01
16,
LR3 D01
16
LRD 1508
1532
LRD 21
35,
LR3 D21
35
LRD 313
365
LR3
D313
365
LRD 313L
365L
LRD 3322
33696
LR3
D3322
33696
LR2
D3522
3563
LRD
4365
4369
Tripping threshold Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1
A 114 006 Ir
Sensitivity to phase failure Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1
Tripping current I 30 % of Ir on one phase, the others at Ir
Tripping curves
Average operating time related to multiples of the setting current
LRD 01 to LRD 35, LR2 D and LRD 3322 to LRD 4369 LRD 1508 to LRD 32 and LR2 D3522 to LR2 D3563
2
1
40
20
10
4
2
1
40
20
10
4
2
1
0,8
0,8 1 2 4 6 10 1720
1
3
2
Class 10 A Time
x the setting current (Ir)
s
e
c
o
n
d
s
m
i
n
u
t
e
s
h
o
u
r
s
2
1
40
20
10
4
2
1
40
20
10
4
2
1
0,8
0,8 1 2 4 6 10 1720
1
3
2
Class 20 Time
s
e
c
o
n
d
s
m
i
n
u
t
e
s
h
o
u
r
s
LRD 313 to LRD 365 LRD 313L to LRD 365L
0,1
1
2
4
10
20
40
1
5
10
15
50
1
2
1 2 4 6 8 10 14 20
1
3
2
Class 10 A Time
s
e
c
o
n
d
s
m
i
n
u
t
e
s
h
o
u
r
s
1
2
4
10
20
40
1
2
5
10
20
40
1
2
1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20
1
3
2
Class 20 Time
s
e
c
o
n
d
s
m
i
n
u
t
e
s
h
o
u
r
s
Balancedoperation,3-phase,withoutpriorcurrentfow(coldstate).
2-phaseoperation,withoutpriorcurrentfow(coldstate).
Balanced operation, 3-phase, after a long period at the set current (hot state)
1
2
3
TeSys D
References:
pages 6/20 and 6/21
pages 6/26 to 6/28
Schemes:
page 6/29
6 6
6/18
6 6
Description
Ir(A)
150 90
127 107
NO
97 98
NC
95 96
2
3
1
4
5
6
LR9 D5367D5569
Alarm
NO
97 98
NC
95 96
1
7
8
2
3
4
6
5
Ir(A)
150 90
127 107
+ 24 V - / 103 104
10
20
Class Load
LR9 D67 and D69
LR9 D electronic thermal overload relays are designed for use with contactors
LC1 D115 and D150
In addition to the protection provided by TeSys D thermal overload relays
(see page 6/14), they offer the following special features:
protection against phase imbalance,
choice of starting class,
protection of unbalanced circuits,
protection of single-phase circuits,
alarm function to avoid tripping by load shedding
Adjustment dial Ir
Test button
Stop button
Reset button
Trip indicator
Setting locked by sealing the cover
Class 10/class 20 selector switch
Selector for
balanced load /unbalanced load
b
b
b
b
b
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-4-1, 255-8, 255-17, VDE 0660 and EN 60947-4-1
Product certifcations UL 508 , CSA 22-2
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529
and VDE 0106
IP 20 on front panel with protective covers LA9 D11570p or D11560p
around the device
(Conforming to IEC 60255-8)
Storage C - 40+ 85
Normal operation C - 20+ 55 (1)
Operating positions
without derating
Any position
13 gn - 11 ms
Vibration resistance Permissible acceleration
2 gn - 5300 Hz
Surge withstand Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 kV 6
Resistance to
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 kV 8
radio-frequency disturbances
and NF C 46-022
V/m 10
Immunity to
Electromagnetic compatibility Draft EN 50081-1 and 2,
EN 50082-2
Meets requirements
Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts
Max. sealed consumption
of the operating coils of
controlled contactors
(Occasional operating
ac supply V 24 48 110 220 380 600
VA 100 200 400 600 600 600
dc supply V 24 48 110 220 440
W 100 100 50 45 25
Protection against
short-circuits
By gG or BS fuses
or by circuit-breaker GB2
A 5
Cabling
Flexible cable
without cable end
2
Minimum csa: 1
Maximum csa: 25
(1) For operating temperatures up to 70 C, please consult your Regional Sales Offce.
Description,
characteristics
3-pole electronic thermal overload relays,
TeSys LR9 D
References:
pages 6/20 and 6/21
pages 6/26 to 6/28
Schemes:
page 6/29
6 6 6 6
6/19
TeSys LR9 D
Relay type LR9 D
Tripping class Conforming to UL 508,
IEC 60947-4-1
A 10 or 20
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 V 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage
(Uimp)
Hz 8
Frequency limits Of the operating current Hz 5060 (1)
Setting range Depending on model A 60150
Power circuit connections Width of terminal lug mm 20
Clamping screw M8
Tripping thresholds Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1
Alarm A 105 006 In
Trip A 112 006 In
Sensitivity to phase failure Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Tripping in 4 s 20 % in the event of phase failure
Alarm circuit characteristics
Rated supply voltage dc supply V 24
Supply voltage limits V 1732
Current consumption No-load mA y 5
Switching capacity mA 0150
Protection Short-circuit and overload Self protected
Voltage drop Closed state V y 25
Cabling Flexible cable
without cable end
mm
2
0515
(1) For other frequencies and for applications involving the use of these overload relays with soft
starters or variable speed drives, please consult your Regional Sales Offce.
LR9 D tripping curves
1
1000
100
10
1
0
1,12
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1
2
Tripping time in seconds
Average operating time related to multiples of the setting current
Cold state curve
Hot state curve
1
2
References:
pages 6/20 and 6/21
pages 6/26 to 6/28
Schemes:
page 6/29
6 6
6/20
6 6
Differential thermal overload relays
for use with fuses or magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 L and GV3 L
Compensated relays with manual or automatic reset,
with relay trip indicator,
for ac or dc
b
b
b
Relay setting
range (A)
Fuses to be used with selected relay For use with
contactor LC1
Reference Weight
kg
aM (A) gG (A) BS88 (A)
Class 10 A (1) for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors
010016 025 2 D09D38 LRD 01 0124
016025 05 2 D09D38 LRD 02 0124
025040 1 2 D09D38 LRD 03 0124
040063 1 2 D09D38 LRD 04 0124
0631 2 4 D09D38 LRD 05 0124
116 2 4 6 D09D38 LRD 06 0124
1625 4 6 10 D09D38 LRD 07 0124
254 6 10 16 D09D38 LRD 08 0124
46 8 16 16 D09D38 LRD 10 0124
558 12 20 20 D09D38 LRD 12 0124
710 12 20 20 D09D38 LRD 14 0124
913 16 25 25 D12D38 LRD 16 0124
1218 20 35 32 D18D38 LRD 21 0124
1624 25 50 50 D25D38 LRD 22 0124
2332 40 63 63 D25D38 LRD 32 0124
3038 40 80 80 D32 and D38 LRD 35 0124
Class 10 A (1) for connection by EverLink
BTR screw connectors (3)

913 16 25 25 D40AD65A LRD 313 0375
1218 20 32 35 D40AD65A LRD 318 0375
1725 25 50 50 D40AD65A LRD 325 0375
2332 40 63 63 D40AD65A LRD 332 0375
3040 40 80 80 D40AD65A LRD 340 0375
3750 63 100 100 D40AD65A LRD 350 0375
4865 63 100 100 D50A and D65A LRD 365 0375
Class 10 A (1) for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors
1725 25 50 50 D80 and D95 LRD 3322 0510
2332 40 63 63 D80 and D95 LRD 3353 0510
3040 40 100 80 D80 and D95 LRD 3355 0510
3750 63 100 100 D80 and D95 LRD 3357 0510
4865 63 100 100 D80 and D95 LRD 3359 0510
5570 80 125 125 D80 and D95 LRD 3361 0510
6380 80 125 125 D80 and D95 LRD 3363 0510
80104 100 160 160 D80 and D95 LRD 3365 0510
80104 125 200 160 D115 and D150 LRD 4365 0900
95120 125 200 200 D115 and D150 LRD 4367 0900
110140 160 250 200 D150 LRD 4369 0900
80104 100 160 160 (2) LRD 33656 1000
95120 125 200 200 (2) LRD 33676 1000
110140 160 250 200 (2) LRD 33696 1000
Class 10 A (1) for connection by lugs
Select the appropriate overload relay with screw clamp terminals or connectors from the table above and add one
ofthefollowingsuffxes:
fgure6 for relays LRD 01 to LRD 35 and relays LRD 313 to LRD 365
A66 for relays LRD 3322 to LRD 3365
Relays LRD 43pp are suitable, as standard, for use with lug-clamps
b
b
Thermal overload relays for use with unbalanced loads
Class 10 A (1) for connection by screw clamp terminals or lugs
Inthereferencesselectedabove,changetheprefxLRD (except LRD 4ppp) to LR3 D
Example: LRD 01 becomes LR3 D01
Example with EverLink
connectors: LRD 340 becomes LR3 D340

Example with lugs: LRD 3406 becomes LR3 D3406
(1) Standard IEC 60947-4-1 specifes a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current I
R
:
class 10 A: between 2 and 10 seconds
(2) Independent mounting of the contactor.
References
Characteristics:
pages 6/14 to 6/17
Dimensions:
pages 6/26 to 6/28
Schemes:
page 6/29
LRD pp
5
2
6
2
0
0
LRD 3pp
5
2
6
2
0
1
LRD 3pp6
5
2
6
2
0
3
LRD 33pp
5
2
6
2
0
2
6 6 6 6
6/21
for ac or dc
b
b
b
Relay setting
range (A)
contactor LC1
Reference Weight
kg
Classes 10 A (1) for connection by spring terminals (only for direct mounting beneath the contactor)
010016 025 2 D09D38 LRD 013 0140
016025 05 2 D09D38 LRD 023 0140
025040 1 2 D09D38 LRD 033 0140
040063 1 2 D09D38 LRD 043 0140
0631 2 4 D09D38 LRD 053 0140
116 2 4 6 D09D38 LRD 063 0140
1625 4 6 10 D09D38 LRD 073 0140
254 6 10 16 D09D38 LRD 083 0140
46 8 16 16 D09D38 LRD 103 0140
558 12 20 20 D09D38 LRD 123 0140
710 12 20 20 D09D38 LRD 143 0140
913 16 25 25 D12D38 LRD 163 0140
1218 20 35 32 D18D38 LRD 213 0140
1624 25 50 50 D25D38 LRD 223 0140
Class 10 A with connection by EverLink
BTR screw connectors(2) and control by spring terminals

913 16 25 25 D40AD65A LRD 3133 0375
1218 20 32 35 D40AD65A LRD 3183 0375
1725 25 50 50 D40AD65A LRD 3253 0375
2332 40 63 63 D40AD65A LRD 3323 0375
3040 40 80 80 D40AD65A LRD 3403 0375
3750 63 100 100 D40AD65A LRD 3503 0375
4865 63 100 100 D50A and D65A LRD 3653 0375
Thermal overload relays for use with unbalanced loads
Classes 10 A (1) for connection by BTR screw connectors (2) and control by spring terminals
In the references selected above, replace LRD 3 with LR3 D3
Example: LRD 3653 becomes LR3 D3653
Thermal overload relays for use on 1000 V supplies
Classes 10 A (1) for connection by screw clamp terminals
For relays LRD 06 to LRD 35 only, for an operating voltage of 1000 V, and only for independent mounting, the
reference becomes LRD 33ppA66
Example: LRD 12 becomes LRD 3312A66
Order an LA7 D3064 terminal block separately, see page 6/25
R
:
LRD pp3
5
2
6
2
0
4
6 6
6/22
6 6
for ac or dc
b
b
b
Relay setting
range (A)
contactor LC1
Reference Weight
kg
Classes 20 (1) for connection by screw clamp terminals
254 6 10 16 D09D32 LRD 1508 0190
46 8 16 16 D09D32 LRD 1510 0190
558 12 20 20 D09D32 LRD 1512 0190
710 16 20 25 D09D32 LRD 1514 0190
913 16 25 25 D12D32 LRD 1516 0190
1218 25 35 40 D18D32 LRD 1521 0190
1725 32 50 50 D25 and D32 LRD 1522 0190
2328 40 63 63 D25 and D32 LRD 1530 0190
2532 40 63 63 D25 and D32 LRD 1532 0190
Class 20 (1) for connection by EverLink
BTR screw connectors (2)

913 20 32 35 D40AD65A LRD 313L 0375
1218 25 40 40 D40AD65A LRD 318L 0375
1725 32 50 50 D40AD65A LRD 325L 0375
2332 40 63 63 D40AD65A LRD 332L 0375
3040 50 80 80 D40AD65A LRD 340L 0375
3750 63 100 100 D40AD65A LRD 350L 0375
4865 80 125 125 D50A and D65A LRD 365L 0375
Classes 20 (1) for connection by screw clamp terminals
1725 32 50 50 D80 and D95 LR2 D3522 0535
2332 40 63 63 D80 and D95 LR2 D3553 0535
3040 40 100 80 D80 and D95 LR2 D3555 0535
3750 63 100 100 D80 and D95 LR2 D3557 0535
4865 80 125 100 D80 and D95 LR2 D3559 0535
5570 100 125 125 D80 and D95 LR2 D3561 0535
6380 100 160 125 D80 and D95 LR2 D3563 0535
R
:
class 20: between 6 and 20 seconds
TeSys D, thermal overload relays
LRD 15pp
5
2
6
2
0
5
LRD 3ppL
5
2
6
2
0
1
LR2 D35pp
5
2
6
2
0
6
6 6 6 6
6/23
for use with fuses or magnetic circuit-breakers NSX
Compensated relays, with relay trip indicator,
for ac,
for direct mounting on contactor or independent mounting(1)
b
b
b
Relay setting
range (A)
Fuses to be used with selected relay For mounting
beneath
contactor LC1
Reference Weight
kg
aM (A) gG (A)
Classes 10 or 10A (2) for connection using bars or connectors
60100 100 160 D115 and D150 LR9 D5367 0885
90150 160 250 D115 and D150 LR9 D5369 0885
Classes 20 (2) for connection using bars or connectors
60100 125 160 D115 and D150 LR9 D5567 0885
90150 200 250 D115 and D150 LR9 D5569 0885
Electronic thermal overload relays for use with balanced or unbalanced loads
Compensated relays,
with separate outputs for alarm and tripping
b
b
Relay setting
range (A)
Fuses to be used with selected relay For mounting
beneath
contactor LC1
Reference Weight
kg
aM (A) gG (A)
Classes 10 or 20 (2) selectable, for connection using bars or connectors
60100 100 160 D115 and D150 LR9 D67 0900
90150 160 250 D115 and D150 LR9 D69 0900
(1) Power terminals can be protected against direct fnger contact by the addition of shrouds and/or insulated terminal blocks, to
be ordered separately (see page 5/84).
R
:
class 10: between 4 and 10 seconds,
class 10 A: between 2 and 10 seconds,
Other versions
Thermal overload relays for resistive circuits in category AC-1
PleaseconsultyourRegionalSalesOffce.
TeSys D, thermal overload relays
6 6
6/24
6 6
6 6 6 6
6/25
Separate components for relays
Description For use with Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Pre-wiring kit allowing direct connection
of the N/C contact of relay LRD 0135 or
LR3 D01D35 to the contactor
LC1 D09D18 10 LAD 7C1 (1) 0002
LC1 D25D38 10 LAD 7C2 (1) 0003
Terminal block (2)
for clip-on mounting on
35mmrail(AM1DP200)orscrewfxing;
forfxingcentres,seepages6/26to6/28
LRD 0135 and LR3 D01D35 1 LAD 7B106 0100
LRD 150832 1 LAD 7B105 0100
LRD 33ppp, LR3 D33ppp, LR2 D35pp 1 LA7 D3064 (3) 0370
EverLink
terminal block
for independent mounting
LRD 3pp, LRD 3ppL and LR3 D3pp 1 LAD 96560 0087
Size 4 Allen key, insulated , 1000 V LRD 3pp, LRD 3ppL and LR3 D3pp 5 LAD ALLEN4 0026
Terminal block adapter for mounting a relay
beneath an LC1 D115 or D150 contactor
LRD 3pp, LR3 D3ppp, LRD 35pp 1 LA7 D3058 (3) 0080
Mounting plates (4)
forscrewfxingon110mmcentres
LRD 0135, LR3 D01D35, LRD
150832
10 DX1 AP25 0065
LRD 3ppp, LR3 D3ppp, LR2 D35pp 1 LA7 D902 0130
Marker holders,
snap-in 8 x 18 mm
LRD 3pp 100 LAD 90 0001
All relays except LRD 0135,
LR3 D01D35, LRD 3pp, LRD 3ppL
and LR3 D3pp
100 LA7 D903 0001
Bag of 400 blank legends
(self-adhesive, 7 x 16 mm)
All relays 1 LA9 D91 0001
Stop button locking device All relays except LRD 0135,
LR3 D01D35, LR9 D
and LRD 313LRD 365
10 LA7 D901 0005
Remote Stop or
electrical reset device (5)
LRD 0135, LR3 D01D35
and LRD 313LRD 365
1 LAD 703p (6) (7) 0090
Remote tripping or
electrical reset device (5)
LR3 D01D35, LRD 3pp, LRD 3ppL
and LR3 D3pp
1 LA7 D03p (6) 0090
Block of insulated terminals LR9 D 2 LA9 F103 0560
IP 20 cover for lug type terminals
LRD 31363656 1 LAD 96570 0021
IP 20 cover for lug type terminals
for mounting with contactor LC1 D40A6D65A6
LRD 31363656 1 LAD 96575 0010
Terminal block for lug type terminals
LRD 31363656 1 LAD 96566 0010
Remote control
Reset function
Description For use with Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
By fexible cable
(length = 05 m)
LRD 0135, LR3 D01D35
and LRD 313LRD 365
1 LAD 7305 (7) 0075
LR3 D01D35, LRD 3pp,
LRD 3ppL and LR3 D3pp
1 LA7 D305 0075
"Stop" and/or "Reset" functions
The terminal protection shroud must be removed and the following 3 products must be ordered
separately:
Adapter for door mounting LRD 33pp, LR2 D and LRD 15pp 1 LA7 D1020 0005
Operating heads
for spring return pushbutton
Stop All relays 1 XB5 AL84101 0027
Reset All relays 1 XB5 AA86102 0027
(1) These pre-wiring kits cannot be used with reversing contactors.
(2) Terminal blocks are supplied with terminals protected against direct fnger contact and screws in the open, "ready-to-tighten"
position.
(3) To order a terminal block for connection by lugs, the reference becomes LA7 D30646.
(4) Remember to order the terminal block corresponding to the type of relay.
(5) The time for which the coil of remote tripping or electrical resetting device LA7 D03 or LAD 703 can remain energised
depends on its rest time: 1 s pulse duration with 9 s rest time; 5 s pulse duration with 30 s rest time; 10 s pulse duration with
90 s rest time; maximum pulse duration 20 s with a rest time of 300 s. Minimum pulse time: 200 ms.
(6) Reference to be completed by adding the code indicating the control circuit voltage.
Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Offce) :
Volts 12 24 48 96 110 220/230 380/400 415/440
50/60 Hz B E F M Q N
Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 VA
c J B E DD F M
Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 W.
(7) Not compatible with 3-pole relays ftted with spring terminals.
References
LAD 7Cp
LAD 7B106
LAD 96570 LAD 96575
LAD 96570
6 6
6/26
6 6
LRD 0135 LRD 150832 LRD 013223
Direct mounting beneath contactors
with screw clamp connections
with screw clamp connections
with spring terminal connections
b
45 70
c
b
e
45 92
c
b
45 66
c
LC1 D09D18 D25D38 LC1 a D09
D18
a D25
D38
c D09
D18
c D25
D38
LC1 D093D253
b 123 137 b 90 97 90 97 b 168
c See pages 5/92 and 5/93 c 97 96 107 106 c See pages 5/92 and 5/93
e 53 60 53 60
LRD 313 365 LRD 3136 3656
Direct mounting beneath contactors LC1 D40AD65A
with screw clamp connections or EverLink

connectors
Direct mounting beneath contactors LC1 D40A6D65A6 with lugs
1
8
5
7
0
1
1
5
1
2
6
123 55
1
9
2
2
3
6
1
2
6
123 55
LAD 96575
LAD 96570
Dimensions,
mounting
TeSys D thermal overload relays
Characteristics :
pages 6/14 to 6/17
References :
pages 6/20 and 6/21
Schemes :
page 6/29
6 6 6 6
6/27
LRD 4ppp LR9 D
Direct mounting beneath contactors LC 1D115 and D150 Direct mounting beneath contactors LC 1D115 and D150
132 d 120
2
6
7
1
5
0
1
8
9
132 120 d
1
7
4
2
5
5
1
3
6
AM1 DL200 and DR200 DE200 and EDppp AM1 DP200 and DR200 DE200 and EDppp
d 25 105 d 25 105
LRD 0135
Independent mounting on 50 mm centres or on rail AM1 DP200 or DE200 Independent mounting on 110 mm centres
LAD 7B106
45 2 80
3
7
,
5
8
5
5
0
5
35 10
6
1
5
LAD 7B106
1
1
0
=
=
46
= =
2x6,5 DX1 AP25 90
1
2
5
LRD 313 365
Mounting on rail AM1 Dp200 or ED200 Panel mounting Mounted on plate AM1 P
With terminal block LAD 96560 Outgoing terminal block
not shown
8
7
116 d 55
LAD 96560 (1)
43
7
2
2
2
43
7
4
AF1 EA4 LAD 96560
AM1 DP200 DE200 ED200
d 2 95 95 (1) 2 elongated holes 4.2 x 6.
LRD 0135 and LRD 313365
Remote tripping or electrical reset
LAD 703 (1)
32
(1) Can only be mounted on RH side of relay LRD0135 and LRD313365
Dimensions,
mounting (continued)
Characteristics :
pages 6/14 to 6/17
References :
pages 6/20 and 6/21
Schemes :
page 6/29
6 6
6/28
6 6
LRD 15pp
Independent mounting on 50 mm centres or on rail AM1 DP200 or DE200 Remote tripping or electrical reset
100
4
1
d
8
2
LAD 7B105
4
5
0
/
6
5
8
17
2x4,5
35 = =
45
34 96
LA7 D03 (1)
AM1 DP200 DE200
d 2 95 (1) Can be mounted on RH or LH side of relay LR2 D15.
LRD 3ppp and LR2 D35pp LRD 3ppp, LR2 D35pp and LR9 D
Independent mounting on 50 mm centres or on rail AM1 DP200 or DE200 Remote tripping or electrical reset
121
1
0
0
2x4,5
LA7 D3064
5
1
,
5
d
7
5
/
8
7
2
50
75
= =
23,5
32
119 21
LA7 D03 (1)
AM1 DP200 DE200
d 2 95 (1) Can be mounted on RH or LH side of relay LRD 3ppp, LR2 D35pp or LR9 D.
LRD 15 and LRD 3ppp
Adapter for door mounted operator
LA7 D1020 Stop Reset
c 10
LA7 D1020
c : adjustable from 17 to 120 mm
LRD, LRD 313365, LRD 15 and LR9 D
Reset by fexible cable
LA7 D305 and LAD 7305
Mounting with cable straight Mounting with cable bent
c e
M10x1 e
e : up to 20 mm
c : up to 550 mm
e : up to 20 mm
Dimensions,
mounting(continued)
Characteristics :
pages 6/14 to 6/17
References :
pages 6/20 and 6/21
Schemes :
page 6/29
6 6 6 6
6/29
LRD pp, LRD 3pp and LR2 Dpp Pre-wiring kit LAD 7C1, LAD 7C2
1 3 5
2 4 6
9
7
9
8
9
6
9
5
Test
Stop
Auto
Man
Reset
95 96
KM
A
1
A
2
_
LRD
_
LR9 D5ppp
95
97
6
/
T
3
4
/
T
2
2
/
T
1
9
6
9
8
5
/
L
3
3
/
L
2
1
/
L
1
M
A
1
3
1
4
KM
KM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
M

L
1
L
2
L
3
(1) KM
A
1
A
2
(4)
(2)
N
(3)
3
(3)
_
_
_
_
_
u112%
Test
Stop
Man reset
(1) Tripped.
(2) Overload.
(3) Setting current.
(4) Specialised circuit.
LR9 D67 and LR9 D69
95
97
6
/
T
3
4
/
T
2
2
/
T
1
9
6
9
8
5
/
L
3
1
0
3
1
0
4
3
/
L
2
1
/
L
1
M
A
1
3
1
4
KM
KM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
M

L
1
L
2
L
3
(1) KM
A
1
A
2
(4)
(2) (5)
N
(3)
3
(3)
(5)
+
+
0

V
_
_
_
_
_
u112% u105%
Test
Stop
Man reset
(1) Tripped.
(2) Overload.
(3) Setting current.
(4) Specialised circuit.
(5) Alarm.
Schemes
Characteristics :
pages 6/14 to 6/17
References :
pages 6/20 and 6/22
Dimensions :
pages 6/26 to 6/28
6/30
6 6 6 6
Presentation
TeSys LR9 F electronic protection relays are especially suited to the operating
conditions of motors
They provide protection against:
thermal overload of 3-phase or single-phase balanced or unbalanced circuits;
phase failure and large phase unbalance,
protracted starting times,
prolonged stalled rotor condition
LR9 F electronic protection relays are mounted directly below an LC1 F type
contactor They cover a range from 30 to 630 A, in eight ratings
The settings can be locked by sealing the transparent protective cover
A reset button is mounted on the front of the relay
Two versions are available:
simplifedversion:class10:LR9Fp3pp, class 20: LR9 Fp5pp,
complete version: class 10, 10 A or class 20, selectable, conforming to
EN 60947-4-1: LR9 Fpp
This latter version includes an alarm function which makes it possible to forestall
tripping by load shedding

Simplifed version: class 10 or 20

Complete version: class 10, 10 A or class 20, selectable, and alarm circuit

Ir adjustment dial
Test button
Stop button
Reset button
Trip indicator
Setting locked by sealing the cover
Class 10/class 20 selector switch
Selector switch for balanced load /unbalanced load
Alarm circuit
b
b
b
b
b
b
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Ir(A)
150 90
127 107
NO
97 98
NC
95 96
2
3
1
4
5
6
Ir(A)
150 90
127 107
NO
97 98
NC
95 96
2
3
1
4
5
6
Alarm
NO
97 98
NC
95 96
9
7
8
2
3
4
1
6
5
Ir(A)
150 90
127 107
+ 24 V - / 103 104
10
20
Class Load
Alarm
NO
97 98
NC
95 96
9
7
8
2
3
4
1
6
5
Ir(A)
150 90
127 107
+ 24 V - / 103 104
10
20
Class Load
TeSys LR9 F
Presentation
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33
References :
pages 6/34 to 6/37
pages 6/38 and 6/39
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33
References :
pages 6/34 to 6/37
pages 6/38 and 6/39
6 6
6/31
6 6
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60255-8, IEC 60255-17, EN 60947-4-1 and VDE 0660
Product certifcations UL 508, CSA 22-2
Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 IP 20
Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 20 on front of relay with accessories LA9 F103 or LA7 F70p, see page 6/37
around the device
(conforming to IEC 60255-8)
Storage C - 40+ 85
Normal operation C - 20+ 55 (1)
Operating positions
without derating
Any position
13 gn - 11 ms
2 gn - 5 to 300 Hz
Surge withstand Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 kV 4
Resistance to
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 kV 8 (in air)
6 (in indirect mode)
Resistance to radiated
radio-frequency disturbance
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 V/m 10
Resistance to
Electromagnetic
compatibility
EN 50081-1 and 2, EN 50082-2 Conforming
(1) For operating temperatures up to 70 C, please consult your Regional Sales Offce.

Presentation :
page 6/30
References :
pages 6/34 to 6/37
pages 6/38 and 6/39
Presentation :
page 6/30
References :
pages 6/34 to 6/37
pages 6/38 and 6/39
Presentation :
page 6/30
References :
pages 6/34 to 6/37
pages 6/38 and 6/39
Presentation :
page 6/30
References :
pages 6/34 to 6/37
pages 6/38 and 6/39
TeSys LR9 F
Characteristics
6/32
6 6 6 6
Relay type LR9 F5p57, F57 F5p63, F63
F5p67, F67
F5p69, F69
F5p71, F71 F7p75, F75
F7p79, F79
F7p81, F81
(Ui)
(Ue)
Rated impulse
Conforming to IEC 60947-1 kV 8
Rated operational current (Ie) A 30 to 630
Short-circuit protection and coordination See pages: 1/18, 1/19, 1/30 and 1/31
Frequency limits Of the operating current Hz 5060.Forotherfrequencies,pleaseconsultyourRegionalSalesOffce(1)
Power circuit
connections
Width of terminal lug mm 20 25 25 30 LR9 F7p75
and LR9 F75
40 LR9 F7p79
and LR9 F79
40
Clamping screw M6 M8 M10 M10 M12
Tightening torque N.m 10 18 35 35 58
Auxiliary contact electrical characteristics
Short-circuit protection By gG or BS fuses or by
circuit-breaker GB2 CD10
A 5
Control circuit
connections
Flexible cable
with cable end
Min. Max.
1 conductor mm
2
1 x 075 1 x 25
2 conductors mm
2
2 x 1 2 x 15
Flexible cable
without cable end
1 conductor mm
2
1 x 075 1 x 4
2 conductors mm
2
2 x 1 2 x 25
Solid cable 1 conductor mm
2
1 x 075 1 x 25
2 conductors mm
2
2 x 1
Maximum sealed current
consumption of the coils
of associated contactors
(occasional operating
ac supply V 24 48 110 220 380 600
VA 100 200 400 600 600 600
dc supply V 24 48 110 220 440
W 100 100 50 45 25
(1) For applications involving the use of these overload relays with soft starters or variable speed
drives, please consult your Regional Sales Offce.

TeSys LR9 F
Presentation :
page 6/30
References :
pages 6/34 to 6/37
pages 6/38 and 6/39
Presentation :
page 6/30
References :
pages 6/34 to 6/37
pages 6/38 and 6/39
6 6
6/33
6 6
Tripping class Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 10, 10 A and 20
Reset Manual on front of relay
Fault indication On front of relay
Test function On front of relay
Stop function Actuation of N/C contact, without affecting N/O contact
Tripping thresholds Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1
Alarm A 105 006 In
Tripping A 112 006 In
Sensitivity to
phase failure
Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1
Tripping in 4 s 20 % in the event of phase failure
Adjustment
(nominal motor current)
Setting dial on front of relay
Security sealing Yes
Alarm circuit characteristics
Rated supply voltage dc supply V 24
Supply voltage limits V 1732
Current consumption No-load mA y 5
Switching current mA 0150
Protection Short-circuit and overload Auto-protected
Voltage drop Closed state V y 25
Connection Flexible cable without cable end mm
2
0515
LR9 F tripping curve
Average operating times depending on multiples of the setting current
Class 10 Class 20

Cold state curve
Hot state curve
1
2

1
1000
100
10
1
0
1,12
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1
2
x times the setting current (Ir)
1
1000
100
10
1
0
1,12
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1
2
1 0
1,12
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1000
100
10
1
1
2
1 0
1,12
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1000
100
10
1
1
2
TeSys LR9 F
Presentation :
page 6/30
References :
pages 6/34 to 6/37
pages 6/38 and 6/39
Presentation :
page 6/30
References :
pages 6/34 to 6/37
pages 6/38 and 6/39
6/34
6 6 6 6
Compensated and differential overload relays
compensated and differential,
for ac,
for direct mounting on contactor or independent mounting (1)
Relay
setting range
Fuses to be used
with selected relay
For direct mounting
beneath contactor
LC1
Reference Weight
aM gG
A A A kg
Class 10 (2)
3050 50 80 F115F185 LR9 F5357 0885
4880 80 125 F115F185 LR9 F5363 0900
60100 100 200 F115F185 LR9 F5367 0900
90150 160 250 F115F185 LR9 F5369 0885
132220 250 315 F185F400 LR9 F5371 0950
200330 400 500 F225F500 LR9 F7375 2320
300500 500 800 F225F500 LR9 F7379 2320
380630 630 800 F400F630 and
F800
LR9 F7381 4160
Class 20 (2)
3050 50 80 F115F185 LR9 F5557 0885
4880 80 125 F115F185 LR9 F5563 0900
60100 100 200 F115F185 LR9 F5567 0900
90150 160 250 F115F185 LR9 F5569 0885
132220 250 315 F185F400 LR9 F5571 0950
200330 400 500 F225F500 LR9 F7575 2320
300500 500 800 F225F500 LR9 F7579 2320
380630 630 800 F400F630 and
F800
LR9 F7581 4160
(1) When mounting overload relays up to size LR9 F5371 directly beneath the contactor, they
may be additionally supported by a mounting plate (see page 6/37). Above this size it is
always necessary to use the mounting plate.
Power terminals can be protected against direct fnger contact by the addition of shrouds and/
or insulated terminal blocks, to be ordered separately (see page 6/37).
(2) Standard IEC 60947-4 specifes a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current In:
- class 10: between 4 and 10 seconds,
- class 20: between 6 and 20 seconds.

b
b
b
b
LR9 F53pp
8
1
9
5
5
5
LR9 F53pp
8
1
9
5
5
5
LR9 F73pp
8
1
9
5
5
6
LR9 F73pp
8
1
9
5
5
6
Presentation :
page 6/30
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33
pages 6/38 and 6/39
Presentation :
page 6/30
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33
pages 6/38 and 6/39
Presentation :
page 6/30
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33
pages 6/38 and 6/39
Presentation :
page 6/30
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33
pages 6/38 and 6/39
TeSys LR9 F for motor protection
References
6 6
6/35
6 6
Compensated overload relays, class 10 or 20 with alarm
compensated,
for ac,
for direct mounting on contactor or independent mounting (1),
class 10 or 20 by selector switch,
protection of 3-phase or single-phase circuits by selector switch,
with alarm function that enables tripping to be forestalled

Relay
setting range
Fuses to be used
with selected relay
For direct mounting
beneath contactor
LC1
Reference Weight
aM gG
A A A kg
3050 50 80 F115F185 LR9 F57 0885
4880 80 125 F115F185 LR9 F63 0900
60100 100 200 F115F185 LR9 F67 0900
90150 160 250 F115F185 LR9 F69 0885
132220 250 315 F185F400 LR9 F71 0950
200330 400 500 F225F500 LR9 F75 2320
300500 500 800 F225F500 LR9 F79 2320
380630 630 800 F400F630 and
F800
LR9 F81 4160
(1) When mounting overload relays up to size LR9 F71 directly beneath the contactor, they may
be additionally supported by a mounting plate (see page 6/37). Above this size it is always
necessary to use the mounting plate.
Power terminals can be protected against direct fnger contact by the addition of shrouds and/
or insulated terminal blocks, to be ordered separately (see page 6/37).

b
b
b
b
b
b
b
LR9 F57
8
1
9
5
5
7
LR9 F57
8
1
9
5
5
7
Presentation :
page 6/30
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33
pages 6/38 and 6/39
Presentation :
page 6/30
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33
pages 6/38 and 6/39
Presentation :
page 6/30
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33
pages 6/38 and 6/39
Presentation :
page 6/30
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33
pages 6/38 and 6/39
TeSys LR9 F for motor protection
6/36
6 6 6 6
Control accessories
Description Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Remote electrical reset device (1) 1 LA7 D03p (2) 0090
Remote Reset function control
byfexiblecable(length=0.5m)
1 LA7 D305 0075
Remote Stop and/or
Reset function control
Adapter for door
mounted operator
1 LA7 D1020 0005
Rod (snap-off end
to obtain required
length, between
17 and 120 mm)
10 ZA2 BZ13 0100
Operating head
for spring return
pushbutton
1 ZA2 Bpppp (3) 0012
For mounting an LR9 F5p71 thermal overload relay together with an
LC1 F185 contactor
kg
Set of 3 busbars LA7 F407 0160
For mounting a thermal overload relay beneath a reversing contactor or
star-delta contactors
Application Width of
terminal lug
Set of 3 busbars
Reference
Weight
For relay For contactor
mm kg
LR9 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67,
F5p69, F69, F71
LC1 F115 15 LA7 F401 0110
LR9 F5p57, F5p63 LC1 F150, F185 20 LA7 F402 0110
LR9 F5p71,
LR9 F71
LC1 F185 25 LA7 F407 0160
LR9 F5p71,
LR9 F71
LC1 F225, F265 25 LA7 F403 0160
LR9 F7p75, F7p79,
LR9 F75, F79
LC1 F225F400 25 LA7 F404 0160
LR9 F7p81,
LR9 F81
LC1 F400 25 LA7 F404 0160
LR9 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81,
LR9 F75, F79, F81
LC1 F500 30 LA7 F405 0270
LR9 F7p81,
LR9 F81
LC1 F630, F800 40 LA7 F406 0600
(1) The time for which the coil of remote electrical reset device LA7 D03 can remain energised
depends on its rest time: 1 s pulse duration with 9 s rest time; 5 s pulse duration with 30 s rest
time; 10 s pulse duration with 90 s rest time. Maximum pulse duration of 20 s with rest time of
300 s. Minimum pulse time: 200 ms.
(2) Reference to be completed by adding the coil voltage code.
Standard control circuit voltages,
(for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Offce) :

Volts 12 24 48 96 110 220/
230
380/
400
415/
440
a 50/60 Hz B E F M Q N
Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 VA
c
J B E DD F M
Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 W.
(3) Stop: ZA2 BL432 and Reset: ZA2 BL639.

LA7 D03p LA7 D03p
RR
LA7 D305
RR
LA7 D305
Presentation :
page 6/30
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33
pages 6/38 and 6/39
Presentation :
page 6/30
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33
pages 6/38 and 6/39
Presentation :
page 6/30
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33
pages 6/38 and 6/39
Presentation :
page 6/30
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33
pages 6/38 and 6/39
TeSys LR9 F
References
6 6
6/37
6 6
Mounting plates for overload relay
For use with relays Reference Weight
kg
LR9 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, F5p71,
LR9 F57, F63, F67, F69, F71
LA7 F901 0100
LR9 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81,
LR9 F75, F79, F81
LA7 F902 0100
Sets of power terminal protection shrouds, single-pole
For use
with relays
Number of
shrouds per set
Set
reference
Weight
kg
LR9 F5p57,
LR9 F57
6 LA9 F701 0015
LR9 F5p63, F5p67, F5p69,
LR9 F63, F67, F69
6 LA9 F702 0015
LR9 F5p71,
LR9 F71
6 LA9 F705 0015
LR9 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81,
LR9 F75, F79, F81
6 LA9 F703 0015
Power terminal protection shrouds, 3-pole
For use
with relays
Reference Weight
kg
LR9 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69,
LR9 F57, F63, F67, F69
LA7 F701 0030
LR9 F5p71,
LR9 F71
LA7 F702 0030
LR9 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81,
LR9 F75, F79, F81
LA7 F703 0030
For use
with relays
Set of 2 blocks
Reference
Weight
kg
LR9 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69,
LR9 F57, F63, F67, F69
LA9 F103 0560
Marking accessories
Description Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Clip-in marker holder 100 LA7 D903 0001
Bag of 400 blank
self-adhesive legends
7 x 16 mm
1 LA9 D91 0001

LA7 F90p LA7 F90p
LA9 F70p LA9 F70p
LA7 F70p LA7 F70p
LA9 F103 LA9 F103
Presentation :
page 6/30
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33
pages 6/38 and 6/39
Presentation :
page 6/30
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33
pages 6/38 and 6/39
Presentation :
page 6/30
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33
pages 6/38 and 6/39
Presentation :
page 6/30
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33
pages 6/38 and 6/39
TeSys LR9 F
6/38
6 6 6 6
Common side view LR9 F5p71, F71 LR9 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67,
LR9 F5p69, F57, F63, F67, F69

(1) Terminal shroud LA9 F70p (2) 6.5 x 13.5 for LR9 F5p57 and F57. 8.5 x 13.5 for LR9 F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, F63, F67, F69
Common side view LR9 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81,
LR9 F75, F79, F81
LR9 F7p81 (for mounting beneath LC1 F630 and F800),
LR9 F81

(1) Terminal shroud
LA9 F70p
P1 P2
LR9 F7p75, F75 48 48
LR9 F7p79, F7p81, F79, F81 55 55
Direct mounting beneath contactor LC1 F Mounting beneath contactors:
reversing LC2 F or star-delta LC3 F
Mounting plate
for LR9 F

LA7 G
F901 145
F902 190
Contactors LC1 With LR9 relays b H1 H2 H3 Contactors LC1 With LR9 relays b H1 H2 H3
F115 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69,
F57, F63, F67, F69
240 30 50 120 F115 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69,
F57, F63, F67, F69
279 60 50 120
F150 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69
F57, F63, F67, F69
246 30 50 120 F150 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69
F57, F63, F67, F69
283 60 50 120
F185 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69
F57, F63, F67, F69
250 30 50 120 F185 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69
F57, F63, F67, F69
285 60 50 120
F225 F5p71, F71 273 40 50 120 F225 F5p71, F71
F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 308 50 58 120 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 360 100 58 120
F265 F5p71, F71 279 40 50 120 F265 F5p71, F71 332 90 50 120
F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 314 60 58 120 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 363 100 58 120
F330 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 317 60 58 120 F330 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 364 100 58 120
F400 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81 317 60 58 180 F400 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81 364 100 58 180
F500 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81 346 70 58 180 F500 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81 390 110 58 180
F630, F800 F7p81, F81 510 110 58 180 F630, F800 F7p81, F81 509 120 58 180
(1) Relay mounting plate LA7 F90p, see page 6/37
(2) AM1 EC or AM1 DF for LC1 F115 to F630 and LC1 F800
(3) DZ5 MB for LC1 F115 to F400
56,8
123,5
3
46,8 3
4
4
,
8
(1) 56,8
123,5
3
46,8 3
4
4
,
8
(1)
7
6
25
48 48
1
0
1
115
7
6
25
48 48
1
0
1
115
120
6
0
50 50
7
1
5
,
5
120
6
0
50 50
7
1
5
,
5
40 40
9
6
(2)
50 50
7
6
6
0
7
1
5
,
5
115
20
40 40
9
6
(2)
50 50
7
6
6
0
7
1
5
,
5
115
20
42,2
127,6
6
4
4
,
8
(1) 42,2
127,6
6
4
4
,
8
(1)
1
0
8
,
8
1
4
30
P2 P1
150
51,5 51,5
66 66
7
0
2
2
,
1
6
8
2
1
3
6
,
8
25
1
0
8
,
8
1
4
30
P2 P1
150
51,5 51,5
66 66
7
0
2
2
,
1
6
8
2
1
3
6
,
8
25 1
8
8
,
8
2
0
200
80 80
193
2
2
8
,
8
76,5 76,5
6
2
,
1
40
40
1
8
8
,
8
2
0
200
80 80
193
2
2
8
,
8
76,5 76,5
6
2
,
1
40
40
H
2
b
H
3
H
1
(3) (2) (1)
H
2
b
H
3
H
1
(3) (2) (1)
H
2
b
H
1
(3) (2) (1)
H
3
LA7 F4
H
2
b
H
1
(3) (2) (1)
H
3
LA7 F4
H
2
G
H
2
G
TeSys LR9 F
Dimensions
Presentation :
page 6/30
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33
References :
pages 6/34 to 6/37
Schemes :
page 6/39
Presentation :
page 6/30
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33
References :
pages 6/34 to 6/37
Schemes :
page 6/39
6 6
6/39
6 6
Schemes
LR9 F5p57F7p81 LR9 F57F81 (with alarm)

(1) Tripped on thermal overload
(2) Overheating alarm
(3) Setting current
(4) Specialised circuit
Setting-up the special functions of TeSys LR9 F thermal overload relays
Setting the relay
Lift the transparent cover 7 to gain access to the various settings
Adjustment is achieved by turning dial 1 which is graduated directly in Amperes
The setting can be locked by sealing the cover 7
b
b
b

Stop function 3 Test function 2
Stop Test Trip indicator

The Stop function is obtained by pressing the red STOP button 3
Pressing the Test button:
actuates the N/C contact,
has no effect on the N/O contact
TheSTOPbuttoncanbelockedbyfttingaUclip
(reference: LA7 D901)
b
b
v
v
b
The Test function is obtained by pressing the red TEST button 2
with a screwdriver
Operation of the TEST button simulates tripping of the relay and:
actuates both the N/O and N/C contacts,
actuates the trip indicator 5
b
b
v
v
95
97
6
/
T
3
4
/
T
2
2
/
T
1
9
6
9
8
5
/
L
3
3
/
L
2
1
/
L
1
M
A
1
3
1
4
KM
KM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
M

L
1
L
2
L
3
(1) KM
A
1
A
2
(4)
112 %
N
3
(3)
(1)
Test
Stop
Man reset 95
97
6
/
T
3
4
/
T
2
2
/
T
1
9
6
9
8
5
/
L
3
3
/
L
2
1
/
L
1
M
A
1
3
1
4
KM
KM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
M

L
1
L
2
L
3
(1) KM
A
1
A
2
(4)
112 %
N
3
(3)
(1)
Test
Stop
Man reset 95
97
6
/
T
3
4
/
T
2
2
/
T
1
9
6
9
8
5
/
L
3
1
0
3
1
0
4
3
/
L
2
1
/
L
1
M
A
1
3
1
4
KM
KM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
M

L
1
L
2
L
3
(1) KM
A
1
A
2
(4)
N
3
(3)
(2)
+
+
0

V
(2) (1)
Test
Stop
Man reset 95
97
6
/
T
3
4
/
T
2
2
/
T
1
9
6
9
8
5
/
L
3
1
0
3
1
0
4
3
/
L
2
1
/
L
1
M
A
1
3
1
4
KM
KM1
1
2
3
4
5
6
M

L
1
L
2
L
3
(1) KM
A
1
A
2
(4)
N
3
(3)
(2)
+
+
0

V
(2) (1)
Test
Stop
Man reset
LR9 F5369
Ir(A)
150 90
125 105
STOP
TRIPPED
TEST
RESET
NO
97 98
NC
95 96
1
2
3
4
6
7
5
LR9 F5369
Ir(A)
150 90
125 105
STOP
TRIPPED
TEST
RESET
NO
97 98
NC
95 96
1
2
3
4
6
7
5
R
E
S
E
T
S
T
O
P
P
E
D
R
E
S
E
T
S
T
O
P
P
E
D
T
E
S
T
R
E
S
E
T
T
R
IP
P
E
D
S
T
O
P
T
E
S
T
R
E
S
E
T
T
R
IP
P
E
D
S
T
O
P
T
E
S
T
R
E
T
R
IP
P
E
D
S
T
O
P
T
E
S
T
R
E
T
R
IP
P
E
D
S
T
O
P
TeSys LR9 F
Schemes,
setting-up
Presentation :
page 6/30
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33
References :
pages 6/34 to 6/37
Dimensions :
page 6/38
Presentation :
page 6/30
Characteristics :
pages 6/31 to 6/33
References :
pages 6/34 to 6/37
Dimensions :
page 6/38
6/40
6 6 6 6
Presentation
The RM1 XA electromagnetic relay detects over current peaks in excess of the
maximum permissible current value It is designed for the protection of circuits which
are not subject to current peaks (starters, resistors) or for controlling starting peaks
on slip ring motors
It trips instantaneously and is not suitable for frequent operation (12 operating cycles
per hour) It can withstand a continuous current equivalent to 125 times the minimum
setting current

Conforming to standards Standard version NF C 63-650, VDE 0660
Approvals CSA
Protective treatment Standard version TC, special version TH
around the device
C Storage: - 60+ 70
Operation: - 40+ 60
Operating position 15 in relation to normal vertical mounting position
Maximum rated operational voltage V a or c 600
Frequency limits
of the rated operational current
Hz 060
Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts
Occasional making and
breaking capacities
ac supply Voltage V 48 110 220 380 600
Power (1) VA 4000 12 000 17 000 22 000
dc supply Voltage V 48 110 220 440 600
Power (2) W 240 200 190 180 180
(1) Circuit such as the electromagnet of a contactor - cos j j inrush: 0.7 and cos j sealed: 0.4.
(2) Circuit such as an electromagnet without economy resistor ; time constant varying from 20
ms for 5 W to 200 ms for 100 W or more.

Operating times
Operating times: because of the numerous applications for RM1 XA over current
relays, it is not possible to give precise operating times The curves shown are
therefore purely indicative

References:
pages 6/41 and 6/42
Dimensions:
page 6/43
Schemes:
page 6/43
References:
pages 6/41 and 6/42
Dimensions:
page 6/43
Schemes:
page 6/43
References:
pages 6/41 and 6/42
Dimensions:
page 6/43
Schemes:
page 6/43
References:
pages 6/41 and 6/42
Dimensions:
page 6/43
Schemes:
page 6/43
8
0,9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
4
3
2
1
25 In
1,6 In
In
0,8 In
T
i
m
e

i
n

m
s
current passing/set current
Setting
points
Single-pole magnetic over current relays
Presentation,
characteristics
6 6
6/41
6 6
Non-latching
With 1 C/O contact block, non-latching
Recommanded
operating range
(motor In)
Setting range
(trip current)
Maximum
continuous
current
a or c
Reference Weight
A A A kg
a or c 07115 1254 16 RM1 XA001 0990
11618 263 25 RM1 XA002 0990
1929 3210 4 RM1 XA004 0990
346 516 63 RM1 XA006 0990
4772 825 10 RM1 XA010 0990
73115 12540 16 RM1 XA016 0990
11618 2063 25 RM1 XA025 0990
18129 32100 40 RM1 XA040 0990
29146 50160 63 RM1 XA063 0990
46172 80250 100 RM1 XA100 0990
73115 125400 160 RM1 XA160 0990
116145 160500 200 RM1 XA200 0990
146230 250800 315 RM1 XA315 0990
231360 400 1250 500 RM1 XA500 0990
a 361630 6302200 1000 RM1 XA101 0990
c
361570 6302000 1000 RM1 XA101 0990
Accessory (to be ordered separately)
kg
1 C/O contact block, non-latching RM1 ZG21 0060

5
3
3
5
5
8
RM1 XA001
5
3
3
5
5
8
RM1 XA001
Characteristics:
page 6/40
Dimensions:
page 6/43
Schemes:
page 6/43
Characteristics:
page 6/40
Dimensions:
page 6/43
Schemes:
page 6/43
Characteristics:
page 6/40
Dimensions:
page 6/43
Schemes:
page 6/43
Characteristics:
page 6/40
Dimensions:
page 6/43
Schemes:
page 6/43
References
6/42
6 6 6 6
Latching with manual reset
With 1 C/O contact block, latching with manual reset
Recommanded
operating range
(motor In)
Setting range
(trip current)
Maximum
continuous
current
a or c
Reference Weight
A A A kg
a or c 07115 1254 16 RM1 XA0011 0990
11618 263 25 RM1 XA0021 0990
1929 3210 4 RM1 XA0041 0990
346 516 63 RM1 XA0061 0990
4772 825 10 RM1 XA0101 0990
73115 12540 16 RM1 XA0161 0990
11618 2063 25 RM1 XA0251 0990
18129 32100 40 RM1 XA0401 0990
29146 50160 63 RM1 XA0631 0990
46172 80250 100 RM1 XA1001 0990
73115 125400 160 RM1 XA1601 0990
116145 160500 200 RM1 XA2001 0990
146230 250800 315 RM1 XA3151 0990
231360 4001250 500 RM1 XA5001 0990
a
361630 6302200 1000 RM1 XA1011 0990
c
361570 6302000 1000 RM1 XA1011 0990
kg
1 C/O contact block, latching RM1 ZH21 0070
Electrical reset (1)
(consumption: inrush, sealed: 500 VA)
(fttedtotherelaytogetherwithalatchingcontactblock)
Basic reference Complete with code indicating control circuit
voltage (2)
ER1 XA2p 0240
(1) The impulse duration must not exceed 2 seconds within 10 minute intervals.
(2) Standard coil voltages for electrical reset:
Volts 24 48 110 220 380
50 Hz B E F M Q

5
3
3
5
5
9
RM1 XA0011
5
3
3
5
5
9
RM1 XA0011
5
3
3
5
6
0
RM1 XA1001
+
ER1 XA2p
5
3
3
5
6
0
RM1 XA1001
+
ER1 XA2p
5
3
3
5
6
1
RM1 XA0011
+
RM1 ZH21
5
3
3
5
6
1
RM1 XA0011
+
RM1 ZH21
Characteristics:
page 6/40
Dimensions:
page 6/43
Schemes:
page 6/43
Characteristics:
page 6/40
Dimensions:
page 6/43
Schemes:
page 6/43
Characteristics:
page 6/40
Dimensions:
page 6/43
Schemes:
page 6/43
Characteristics:
page 6/40
Dimensions:
page 6/43
Schemes:
page 6/43
6 6
6/43
6 6
Dimensions
RM1 XAppp,
RM1 XAppp1
RM1 XA001XA040
RM1 XA0011XA0401
RM1 XA063, XA100
and XA315
RM1 XA0631, XA1001
and XA3151
RM1 XA160, XA200,
and XA500
RM1 XA1601, XA2001,
and XA5001
RM1 XA101,
RM1 XA1011
Common side view

RM1 XAppp1 with electrical reset ER1 XA2p RM1 d d1 M L L1 S
XA 063 205 83 25 40 15 M6
XA 100 205 87 25 40 20 M8
XA 160 275 55 94 25 40 25 M8
XA 200 275 55 94 25 40 25 M8
XA 315 355 74 44 55 30 M10
XA 500 405 7 84 44 55 40 M10
XA 101 37 64
Schemes
RM1 XAppp1 RM1 XAppp RM1 XA
Latching Non-latching 3-wire control (without
mechanical latching)
2-wire control (with
mechanical latching)
3-wire control
(with trip signal)

RM1 ZH2
L
1
2
4
123 13
L1
RM1 ZH2
L
1
2
4
123 13
L1
55
1
1
0
27,5 27,5
=
=
M4/M5
55
1
1
0
27,5 27,5
=
=
M4/M5
d
S
M
d
S
M
d
S
M
d
1
d
S
M
d
1
M12
2
5
63,5
50
2
5
2
5
25
2
M12
2
5
63,5
50
2
5
2
5
25
2
55
27,5 27,5
48
155
55
27,5 27,5
48
155
1
2
9
3
9
4
9
2
9
1 1
2
9
3
9
4
9
2
9
1 1
2
9
3
9
4
9
2
9
1 1
2
9
3
9
4
9
2
9
1
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
1
1
2
S1
S2
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
KM1
9
1
RM1
9
2
9
3
9
4
1
2
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
1
1
2
S1
S2
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
KM1
9
1
RM1
9
2
9
3
9
4
1
2
1
3
1
4
2 1
A
1
A
2
KM1
9
1
9
2
9
3
9
4
1
2
RM1
1
3
1
4
2 1
A
1
A
2
KM1
9
1
9
2
9
3
9
4
1
2
RM1
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
1
1
2
S1
S2
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
KM1
9
1
9
2
9
3
9
4
1
2
X
1
X
2
H1
RM1
A
1
A
2
KM1
1
1
1
2
S1
S2
1
3
1
4
1
3
1
4
KM1
9
1
9
2
9
3
9
4
1
2
X
1
X
2
H1
RM1
Characteristics:
page 6/40
References :
pages 6/41 and 6/42
Characteristics:
page 6/40
References :
pages 6/41 and 6/42
Characteristics:
page 6/40
References :
pages 6/41 and 6/42
Characteristics:
page 6/40
References :
pages 6/41 and 6/42
Dimensions,
schemes
6/44
6 6 6 6
Selection guide

IEC 60034-11, PTB, UL, CSA
LROS
Automatic Manual or automatic
On front panel of unit and remote
Yes
By pushbutton on front panel of unit
Dual voltage 115/230 V
Multivoltage 24230 V
Single voltage 400 V
Dual voltage 24/48 V, 115/230 V
Dual voltage 24/48 V Dual voltage 24/48 V
Dual voltage 1 N/C + 1 N/O
Multivoltage 2 C/O
Single voltage or dual voltage 1 N/C + 1 N/O
Multivoltage 2 C/O
LT3 SA LT3 SM
6/50
Applications General protection and protection of motors ftted with PTC thermistor probes (1)
Standards and approvals IEC 60034-11, UL, CSA
Reset method Automatic
Fault signalling
Fault memory in the event of a supply failure
Fault test
Rated control circuit voltages
a 50/60 Hz
Single voltage 115 V or 230 V
Rated control circuit voltages c Single voltage 24 V
Contact type 1 N/C
Protection unit type
LT3 SE
Pages 6/50
(1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coeffcient
Thermistor protection units
for use with PTC thermistor probes (1)
6 6
6/45
6 6

IEC 60034-11, PTB, UL, CSA
LROS
Automatic Manual or automatic
On front panel of unit and remote
Yes
By pushbutton on front panel of unit
Dual voltage 115/230 V
Single voltage 400 V
Dual voltage 24/48 V, 115/230 V
Dual voltage 24/48 V Dual voltage 24/48 V
Dual voltage 1 N/C + 1 N/O
Multivoltage 2 C/O
Single voltage or dual voltage 1 N/C + 1 N/O
Multivoltage 2 C/O
LT3 SA LT3 SM
6/50
Applications General protection and protection of motors ftted with PTC thermistor probes (1)
Standards and approvals IEC 60034-11, UL, CSA
Reset method Automatic
Fault signalling
Fault memory in the event of a supply failure
Fault test
Rated control circuit voltages
a 50/60 Hz
Single voltage 115 V or 230 V
Rated control circuit voltages c Single voltage 24 V
Contact type 1 N/C
Protection unit type
LT3 SE
Pages 6/50
6/46
6 6 6 6
Application
LT3 Sp thermistor protection units continuously monitor the temperature of the
machines to be protected (motors, generators, etc) by means of PTC thermistor
probes embedded in the machine windings
If the nominal operating temperature of the probes is reached, they convert the rapid
increase in resistance into a switching function which can be used to switch off the
machine or signal a fault (see paragraph relating to thermistor probes below)
Accidental breaks in the supply circuits of the thermistors are also detected

Electromagnetic compatibility
Conforming to Electromagnetic compatibility directive
Conforming to standard EN 61000-6-2
Resistance to electrostatic discharge (conforming to IEC 61000-4-2) Level 3
Resistance to fast transients (conforming to IEC 61000-4-4) Level 3
Susceptibilitytoelectromagneticfelds(conformingtoIEC61000-4-3) Level 3
Surge resistance 12/50 - 8/20 (conforming to IEC 61000-45) Level 4
Immunity to microbreaks and voltage drops (IEC 61000-4-11)
Suitable for use with variable speed controllers
Thermistor probes
Range of most commonly used PTC thermistor probes:
from 90 to 160 C, in steps of 10 C
Curve R = f (q),characteristicofaPTCthermistorprobe,isdefnedbystandard
IEC 60947-8
The choice of PTC thermistor probe to be incorporated in the motor winding depends
on the insulation class, the type of motor and the most suitable location for the probe
This choice is usually made by the motor manufacturer or the motor rewinder, who
have all the necessary information
Application example
Insulation class of rotating
machines conforming to
IEC 60034-11
(S1 duty)
NOT
Nominal operating
temperature
Temperature at which
rapid increase in
resistance occurs
Probes used for
Alarm

Fault
C C C
A 100 100 100
B 110 110 120
E 120 120 130
F 140 140 150
H 160 160 170

Characteristics :
pages 6/47 to 6/49
References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
Characteristics :
pages 6/47 to 6/49
References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
Characteristics :
pages 6/47 to 6/49
References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
Characteristics :
pages 6/47 to 6/49
References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
General
6 6
6/47
6 6
Protection unit type LT3 SE LT3 SA LT3 SM
Reset method Automatic Automatic Manual/Automatic
Fault indication On front panel of unit and
remote
On front panel of unit and
remote
Fault test By pushbutton on front
panel of unit
Probe interchangeability Label Mark A
to IEC 60034-11
Label Mark A
to IEC 60034-11
Label Mark A
to IEC 60034-11
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 60034-11
VDE 0660
IEC 60034-11
VDE 0660
IEC 60034-11
VDE 0660
Product certifcations LROS
Degree of protection IP 20 conforming to IEC 60529, VDE 0106
e marking LT3 Sp protection units have been designed to comply with the basic
recommendations of European directives relating to low voltage and EMC
Therefore LT3 Sp products bear the European Community e mark
around the device
Storage
and 2-2
C - 40+ 85
Maximum operating altitude Without derating 1500 m
With derating Up to 3000 m, the maximum permissible ambient air temperature for operation (60 C)
must be reduced by 5 C per additional 500 m above 1500 m
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 25 gn (225 Hz)
1 gn (25150 Hz)
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 5 gn (11 ms)
Operating positions
without derating
Any position
Power supply circuit characteristics
(Uc)
a 50/60 Hz Single voltage V 115 or 230 400
08511 Uc Dual voltage V 115/230 115/230 24/48
a 50/60 Hz Multivoltage V 24230 24230
08511 Uc
c Single voltage V 24
08125 Uc Dual voltage V 24/48 24/48
08511 Uc Multivoltage V 24230 24230
Average consumption Sealed
a
VA < 25 < 25 < 25 except (400 V : 27)
c
W < 1 < 1 < 1
References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
Characteristics
6/48
6 6 6 6
Protection unit type LT3 SE LT3 SA LT3 SM
Resistance Tripping W 27003100 27003100 27003100
Reset W 15001650 15001650 15001650
Maximum number of probes
fttedinseries (2)
Probes y 250 W at 25 6 6 6
Voltage at terminals
in the thermistor circuit
Normal operation
(R = 1500 W)
V < 25 < 25 < 25
Conforming to IEC 60034-11
(R = 4000 W)
V < 75 < 75 < 75
Thermistor probe
short-circuit detection
Operating threshold W < 20 < 20
Connection of probes
to the LT3
Distance m 300 400 500 1000 (3)
Minimum csa of conductors mm
2
075 1 15 25
Electrical characteristics of the output relay contacts
Contact type Single voltage or dual voltage 1 N/C 1 N/C + 1 N/O 1 N/C + 1 N/O
Multivoltage 2 C/O 2 C/O
Rated insulation voltage V a 500
Maximum operational voltage V a 250 (a 400 V for LT3 SM00V)
Rated impulse
withstand voltage
Uimp kV 25
Operational power At 220 V VA 100 for 05 million operating cycles
Breaking capacity In cat AC-16 120 V A 6
250 V A 3
In DC-13 24 V A 2
Cabling (cage type connector)
forfexibleorsolidcable
Without cable end mm
2
2 x 11 x 25
With cable end mm
2
1 x 0752 x 25
Thermistor probe characteristics
Probe type DA1 TTppp DA1 TSppp
Conforming to standards IEC 60034-11 Mark A
Resistance At 25 C W 3 x 250 in series 250
(Ue)
Per probe V c 25 V max c 25 V max
(Ui)
kV 25 1
Insulation Reinforced Reinforced
Length of connecting cables Between probes mm 250
Between probe and
motor terminal plate
m 1 1
(2) Provided that the total resistance of the probe circuit is less than 1500 W at 20 C.
(3) For distances greater than 500 m take cabling precautions (twisted shielded pairs).

References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
6 6
6/49
6 6
LT3 S protection unit/thermistor probe combination
Guaranteed operating zones: examples with 3 probes type DA1 TTppp (250 W at
25 C) in series, conforming to standard IEC 60034-11, Mark A
LT3 SE, LT3 SA, LT3 SM protection units
1 3 probes type DA1 TTppp (250 W at 25 C) in series
NOT: Nominal Operating Temperature
Protection unit tripped
Protection unit reset

10 000
3100
100
10
-20
20
750
1000
1650
2700
1500
0
1
Resistance
(ohms)
Trip zone
Reset zone
Trip zone on probe short-circuit
Temperature
(C)
N
O
T

+

1
5

C
N
O
T

+
5

C
N
O
T

-
2
0

C
N
O
T

-
5

C
N
O
T
10 000
3100
100
10
-20
20
750
1000
1650
2700
1500
0
1
Resistance
(ohms)
Trip zone
Reset zone
Trip zone on probe short-circuit
Temperature
(C)
N
O
T

+

1
5

C
N
O
T

+
5

C
N
O
T

-
2
0

C
N
O
T

-
5

C
N
O
T
References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
6/50
6 6 6 6
Protection units (without fault memory)
Units with automatic reset with thermistor short-circuit detection
Connection Voltage Output
contact
Reference Weight
kg
Cage connectors a 50/60 Hz 115 V N/C LT3 SE00F 0220
230 V N/C LT3 SE00M 0220
c
24 V N/C LT3 SE00BD 0220
Units with automatic reset with thermistor short-circuit detection
On front panel: fault and voltage signalling indicator
contact
Reference Weight
kg
Cage connectors a 50/60 Hz 115/230 V N/C + N/O LT3 SA00M 0220
c
24/48 V N/C + N/O LT3 SA00ED 0220
a 50/60 Hz
or c

24230 V 2 C/O LT3 SA00MW 0220
Protection units (with fault memory)
Units with manual reset with thermistor short-circuit detection
On front panel:
fault and voltage signalling indicator,
Test and Reset button
-
-
contact
Reference Weight
kg
Cage connectors a 50/60 Hz 400 V N/C + N/O LT3 SM00V 0220
24/48 V N/C + N/O LT3 SM00E 0220
115/230 V N/C + N/O LT3 SM00M 0220
c
24/48 V N/C + N/O LT3 SM00ED 0220
a 50/60 Hz
or c
24230 V 2 C/O LT3 SM00MW 0220
LT3 SE00M
1
0
8
6
9
4
-
2
4
-
M
LT3 SE00M
1
0
8
6
9
4
-
2
4
-
M
LT3 SA00M
1
0
8
6
9
8
-
2
4
-
M
LT3 SA00M
1
0
8
6
9
8
-
2
4
-
M
LT3 SM00M
1
0
8
6
9
6
-
2
4
-
M
LT3 SM00M
1
0
8
6
9
6
-
2
4
-
M
Characteristics :
pages 6/47 to 6/49
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
Characteristics :
pages 6/47 to 6/49
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
Characteristics :
pages 6/47 to 6/49
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
Characteristics :
pages 6/47 to 6/49
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
References
6 6
6/51
6 6
PTC thermistor probes (1)
Description Nominal
Operating
Temperature
(NOT)
Colour Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
C kg
Integrated triple
probes
90 Green/green 10 DA1 TT090 0010
110 Brown/brown 10 DA1 TT110 0010
120 Grey/grey 10 DA1 TT120 0010
130 Blue/blue 10 DA1 TT130 0010
140 White/blue 10 DA1 TT140 0010
150 Black/black 10 DA1 TT150 0010
160 Blue/red 10 DA1 TT160 0010
170 White/green 10 DA1 TT170 0010
Surface probes 60 White/grey 10 DA1 TS060 0005
70 White/brown 10 DA1 TS070 0005
80 White/white 10 DA1 TS080 0005
90 Green/green 10 DA1 TS090 0005
100 Red/red 10 DA1 TS100 0005
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Adapter Forfxingon4 rail DZ5 MB

10 RHZ 66 0005
Marking accessories
Clip-in markers
(maximum of 5
per unit)
Strips of 10 identical numbers
(0 to 9)
25 AB1 Rp (2) 0002
Strips of 10 identical capital letters
(A to Z)
25 AB1 Gp (2) 0002
DA1 TTppp
8
1
3
3
8
3
DA1 TTppp
8
1
3
3
8
3
DA1 TSppp
8
1
3
3
8
4
DA1 TSppp
8
1
3
3
8
4
Characteristics :
pages 6/47 to 6/49
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
Characteristics :
pages 6/47 to 6/49
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
Characteristics :
pages 6/47 to 6/49
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
Characteristics :
pages 6/47 to 6/49
Dimensions :
page 6/52
Schemes :
pages 6/52 and 6/53
6/52
6 6 6 6
Dimensions
LT3 SE, SA, SM
Mounting on 5 rail AM1 DP200 Mounting on 1 4 rail
(with adapter RHZ 66)
Schemes for no fault operation
LT3 SE LT3 SA dual voltage LT3 SA multivoltage
Without fault memory
LT3 SM dual voltage and 400 V (without B1) LT3 SM multivoltage LT3 Sp dual voltage
Terminal A1 B1
Voltage 48 V 24 V
230 V 115 V
Setting-up
Cabling
It is inadvisable to use the same multi-core cable for the thermistor probe circuit and the power circuit This is especially important for long cable runs
If it is impossible to comply with the above recommendation, a pair of twisted conductors must be used for the thermistor probe circuit
Testing the insulation of the line connecting the thermistors to the LT3 S unit
Before carrying out this test, short-circuit all the terminals of the LT3 S protection unit
Measuretheinsulationvaluebetweentheseterminalsandearthusingameggerorafashtester,progressivelyincreasingthevoltagetothevaluedefnedbythe
standards
Checking the PTC thermistor probes for correct operation
With the machine stopped, in the cold state and after having taken all the necessary safety precautions:
disconnect the line linking the thermistors to the LT3 S protection unit, at the terminals of the machine being protected: motor, etc,
using an ohmmeter with a voltage rating less than or equal to 25 V, measure the resistance of the probe circuit at the machine terminals,
depending on the number and type of thermistors connected in series, check that their resistance value at 25 C is correct
Example:motorfttedwith3PTCthermistorprobeswitharesistancey 250 W at 25 C
Any value higher than 250 x 3 = 750 W indicates a problem
b
b
b
(2) Relay energised: the contacts are shown in the operating position.
22,5
1
0
0
100
9
8
,
4
22,5
1
0
0
100
9
8
,
4
115
5
0
5
0
RHZ 66
115
5
0
5
0
RHZ 66
96
(2)
95
T1
T2
A
2
A
1
M
A
K
K
96
(2)
95
T1
T2
A
2
A
1
M
A
K
K
98
96
(2)
95
97
T1
T2
A
2
M
A
Ue
K H
K
A
1
o
r
B
1
Fault
98
96
(2)
95
97
T1
T2
A
2
M
A
Ue
K H
K
A
1
o
r
B
1
Fault
05
06
08
95
(2)
96
98
T1
T2
A
2
A
1
M
A
Ue
K H
K
Fault
05
06
08
95
(2)
96
98
T1
T2
A
2
A
1
M
A
Ue
K H
K
Fault
98
96
(2)
95
97
T1
T2
Y1
Y2 A
2
M
A
Ue
K H
K
Rd
A
1
o
r
B
1
Fault
Test
Reset
98
96
(2)
95
97
T1
T2
Y1
Y2 A
2
M
A
Ue
K H
K
Rd
A
1
o
r
B
1
Fault
Test
Reset
05
06
08
95
(2)
96
98
T1
T2
Y1
Y2
A
2
A
1
M
A
Ue
K H
K
Rd
Fault
Test
Reset
05
06
08
95
(2)
96
98
T1
T2
Y1
Y2
A
2
A
1
M
A
Ue
K H
K
Rd
Fault
Test
Reset
Dimensions,
schemes,
setting-up
Characteristics :
pages 6/47 to 6/49
References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51
Characteristics :
pages 6/47 to 6/49
References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51
6 6
6/53
6 6
LT3 SA protection units
Starting
The LT3 SA is normally energised and its internal relay is in the pre-energised
position
The motor is started by operating pushbutton M automatically held in by K (3-wire
control circuit)
Thermal fault
The strong increase in resistance of the PTC probes at the moment their temperature
reaches the nominal operating temperature (NOT) is detected by the LT3 SA unit
and causes the relay to drop out; indicator H comes on, as does the built-in indicator
on unit LT3 SA
Contactor K drops out and pressing button M has no effect
Reset
As the motor cools, it reaches the reset threshold, 2 to 3C below the nominal
operating temperature
The relay resets and the motor can be started by pressing button M
LT3 SM protection units
Operation is very similar to that described above, except for the following:
Reset
After tripping on thermal fault and cooling to the reset threshold, the Test/RESET
button on the unit (R1) or a remote reset button (Rd) must be pressed to energise the
relay
The fault is therefore memorised, even though the temperature of the probes has
dropped to well below the reset threshold
Signalling circuit
Astherelayisfttedwith2separatecontacts,thesignallingvoltagemaybedifferent
from the contactor control voltage
Test
Pressing the Test/RESET button simulates a fault and causes the relay to drop out:
the FAULT indicator comes on, as does the remote signalling indicator The unit is
reset by pressing the Test/RESET button again
K
L1
L2
L3
N
98
96
95
97
T1
T2
A
2
M
A
Ue
Ko
K H
K
A
1
o
r
B
1
Fault
K
L1
L2
L3
N
98
96
95
97
T1
T2
A
2
M
A
Ue
Ko
K H
K
A
1
o
r
B
1
Fault
NOT, Tripping
threshold
Operating
temperature
Reset threshold
Contactor K
Relay Ko
Fault indicator
Pushbutton M
NOT, Tripping
threshold
Operating
temperature
Reset threshold
Contactor K
Relay Ko
Fault indicator
Pushbutton M
98
96
95
97
T1
T2
M
A
Ue
K H
K
Rd
R1
K
L1
L2
L3
N
A
2
Ko
A
1
o
r
B
1
Fault
98
96
95
97
T1
T2
M
A
Ue
K H
K
Rd
R1
K
L1
L2
L3
N
A
2
Ko
A
1
o
r
B
1
Fault
NOT, Tripping
threshold
Operating
temperature
Reset threshold
Contactor K
Test/Reset
button
Fault indicator
Pushbutton M
Relay Ko
Reset Rd
NOT, Tripping
threshold
Operating
temperature
Reset threshold
Contactor K
Test/Reset
button
Fault indicator
Pushbutton M
Relay Ko
Reset Rd
Characteristics :
pages 6/47 to 6/49
References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51
Characteristics :
pages 6/47 to 6/49
References :
pages 6/50 and 6/51
Operation
6/54
6 6 6 6
Presentation,
description
Presentation
LR97 D and LT47 electronic over current relays have been developed to satisfy machine
protection requirements
Theserelayshavedefnitetimecharacteristics:currentthresholdandtimebasedfunction.
They are particularly recommended for providing mechanical protection on machines with high
resistive torque, high inertia and with strong probability of jamming under steady state conditions
They can be used for motor protection in the case of long starting times or frequent starting
TheLR97Drelayalsoincorporatestwofxedtimeprotectionfunctions,oneof0.5seconds
against locked rotor and one of 3 seconds against phase failure
LR97 D and LT47 can be used to provide mechanical shock protection In this case, setting the
O-Time knob to minimum will ensure tripping in 03 seconds
Applications
LR97 D and LT47 relays are particularly suitable for the following machines:
Monitoringfunctionforexcessivelylongstartingtimeonmachineswithariskofdiffcult
starting:
Machines with high resistive torque, high inertia machines
Monitoring of machines during steady state operation: overtorque detection function
Machines with strong risk of jamming, machines with torque build-up over time,
Mechanical failure monitoring,
Faster detection of malfunctioning on machines where the motor is oversized in relation to its
thermal protection It
Motorprotectionforspecifcapplications:
Machines with long starting times,
Machines with high on-load factor: more than 30 to 50 starts/hour,
Machinewithfuctuatingloadfromasteadystate,wherethethermalimageofathermal
overload relay (thermal memory) is unsuitable in relation to actual overheating of the motor
Examples of machines:
Conveyors, crushers and mixers,
Fans, pumps and compressors,
Centrifuges and spin-dryers,
Presses, shearing machines, saws, broaching machines, sanders and lifting hoists
b
v
b
v
v
v
b
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Operation
Because of their two separate time settings, LR97 D and LT47 relays can be combined with the
motor-starter function:
D-Time: starting time, O-Time: trip time during steady state
The D-Time function is only available during the motor starting phase During this phase the
overload detection function is inhibited in order to allow starting Under steady state conditions,
when the motor current is greater than the setting current due to an overload or single-phasing,
the red LED lights up and the internal relay switches its contact after a time preset by the O-Time
knob
The red LED stays on, indicating that the relay has tripped
The relays are simple to set, in 5 easy steps:
Adjust the 3 knobs to maximum (Load, D-Time and O-Time),
Adjust the D-Time knob to the value corresponding to the motor starting time
When the motor reaches steady state, adjust the Load knob (turn the knob counter-clockwise
untiltheredLEDstartstoficker).
Slowly turn the Load knob clockwise until the LED goes out
Set the required tripping time, using the O-Time knob
-
-
-
-
-
Description
Description Status signalling
LR97 Dppppp LT47 ppppp LR97 Dppppp LT47 ppppp
To assist fast diagnostics, two LEDs (one green and one red) allow signalling of the operating
status:
1 RESET knob
2 TEST/STOP knob
3 Ready/Run Indicator
4 Relay tripped indicator
5 Current setting
6 Adjustment of starting
time
7 Adjustment of tripping
time
8 Manual/Auto adjustment
9 Single-phase/3-phase
adjustment
10 Retractablefxinglugs

5
1
0
4
2
9
LR97 D
5
1
0
4
2
9
LR97 D
5
1
0
4
3
0
LT47
5
1
0
4
3
0
LT47
A1 A2 98 96
TEST/STOP
2T1 4T2 6T3
RESET
95
1
8
2
3
4
9
5 6 7
A1 A2 98 96
TEST/STOP
2T1 4T2 6T3
RESET
95
1
8
2
3
4
9
5 6 7
RESET
TEST
1
2
4
3
5 6 7 10
RESET
TEST
1
2
4
3
5 6 7 10
Status
Voltage
Starting
Steady
state
Overload
On
On
On
Off
Off
LED signal
Green LED Red LED
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Over-
current
L1
Rotor
locked
Pha
se
fail-
ure
Trip
L2
L3
Status
Voltage
Starting
Steady
state
Overload
On
On
On
Off
Off
LED signal
Green LED Red LED
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Over-
current
L1
Rotor
locked
Pha
se
fail-
ure
Trip
L2
L3
Condition
Voltage
Starting
Steady
state
Overload
On
On
On
Off
Off
LED signal
Green LED Red LED
Trip
Off On
Condition
Voltage
Starting
Steady
state
Overload
On
On
On
Off
Off
LED signal
Green LED Red LED
Trip
Off On
Curves :
pages 6/55 and 6/56
Characteristics :
pages 6/56 and 6/57
References :
page 6/58
page 6/59
Schemes :
page 6/59
Curves :
pages 6/55 and 6/56
Characteristics :
pages 6/56 and 6/57
References :
page 6/58
page 6/59
Schemes :
page 6/59
Curves :
pages 6/55 and 6/56
Characteristics :
pages 6/56 and 6/57
References :
page 6/58
page 6/59
Schemes :
page 6/59
Curves :
pages 6/55 and 6/56
Characteristics :
pages 6/56 and 6/57
References :
page 6/58
page 6/59
Schemes :
page 6/59
Electronic over current relays
6 6
6/55
6 6
Curves
Curves
LR97 D
Overload protection
Protection against locked rotor and mechanical jamming under steady state conditions
Overload protection
Protection against phase failure during starting and during steady state operation
Mechanical shock protection
(1) By Reset button.
(2) Fixed time of 120 s. Selectable by dip switch. Function not available in the event of tripping due to locked rotor/mechanical jamming (I> 3 x I
setting
) or phase failure.
(3) By brief interruption of power supply, minimum 0.1 s.
0,5 s
t
95
96
98
95
96
98
U power supply A1-A2
3 x I
setting
Setting current
Normal steady state operation
Current
Tripping due to locked rotor or
mechanical jamming during
steady state operation
Tripping on overload
Starting Locked rotor
on starting
Mechanical jamming
during steady state
operation
Overload
Reset: Manual (1)
or electric (3)
Reset: Manual (1)
automatic (2)
or electric (3)
D-Time O-Time O-Time
Brief
overload
0,5 s
t
95
96
98
95
96
98
3 x I
setting
Setting current
Current
Tripping due to locked rotor or
mechanical jamming during
steady state operation
Starting Locked rotor
on starting
Mechanical jamming
during steady state
operation
Overload
Reset: Manual (1)
or electric (3)
Reset: Manual (1)
automatic (2)
or electric (3)
Brief
overload
95
96
98
95
96
98
< 3 s
< 3 s
t
Setting current
Current
Tripping due to
phase failure
Starting Phase
failure
Missing
phase
Overload
Reset: Manual (1)
or electric (3)
Reset: Manual (1)
automatic (2)
or electric (3)
Brief
overload
95
96
98
95
96
98
< 3 s
< 3 s
t
Setting current
Current
Tripping due to
phase failure
Starting Phase
failure
Missing
phase
Overload
Reset: Manual (1)
or electric (3)
Reset: Manual (1)
automatic (2)
or electric (3)
Brief
overload
95
96
98
t
O-Time set to
minimum (02-03 s)
Setting current
Current
Tripping to due mechanical shock
Starting Overload
D-Time
Reset: Manual (1)
automatic (2)
or electric (3)
95
96
98
t
O-Time set to
minimum (02-03 s)
Setting current
Current
Tripping to due mechanical shock
Starting Overload
D-Time
Reset: Manual (1)
automatic (2)
or electric (3)
Presentation, description :
page 6/54
Characteristics :
pages 6/56 and 6/57
References :
page 6/58
page 6/59
Schemes :
page 6/59
page 6/54
Characteristics :
pages 6/56 and 6/57
References :
page 6/58
page 6/59
Schemes :
page 6/59
page 6/54
Characteristics :
pages 6/56 and 6/57
References :
page 6/58
page 6/59
Schemes :
page 6/59
page 6/54
Characteristics :
pages 6/56 and 6/57
References :
page 6/58
page 6/59
Schemes :
page 6/59
6/56
6 6 6 6
Curves (continued),
characteristics
Curves (continued)
LT47
Overload protection
Mechanical shock protection
(1) By Reset button.
(2) Only available on version with automatic reset (LT47 ppppA). Time adjustable from 1 to 120 s with the R-Time knob.
(3) By brief interruption of power supply, minimum 0.1 s.
Characteristics
Environment
Relay type LR97 Dppppp LT47 ppppp
Conforming to standards IEC 60255-6, IEC 60947 IEC 60255-6, IEC 60947
Product certifcations UL, CSA UL, CSA
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529
and VDE 0106
IP 20 (front face) IP 20 (front face)
Protective treatment Conforming to IEC 60068 TH TH
around the device
Storage C - 30+ 80 - 30+ 80
Normal operation without derating
(IEC 60947-4-1)
C - 25+ 60 - 25+ 60
Operating positions
without derating
Any position Any position
15 gn - 11 ms 15 gn - 11 ms
4 gn 4 gn
Dielectric strength at 50 Hz Conforming to IEC 60255-5 kV 2 2
Surge withstand Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 kV 6 6
Resistance to
In open air kV 8 (level 3) 8 (level 3)
In direct mode kV 6 (level 3) 6 (level 3)
Immunity to radiated radio-frequency disturbance V/m 10 (level 3) 10 (level 3)
Immunity to fast transient currents kV 2 2
Conducted emissions Conforming to EN 55011 Class A Class A
Conducted HF disturbance Conforming to EN 61000-4-6 V 10 10
t
98 97
96 95
Setting current
Current
Trip
on overload
Starting Overload
D-Time
Reset: Manual (1)
automatic (2)
or electric (3)
O-Time O-Time
Brief
overload
t
98 97
96 95
Setting current
Current
Trip
on overload
Starting Overload
D-Time
Reset: Manual (1)
automatic (2)
or electric (3)
O-Time O-Time
Brief
overload
t
98 97
96 95
Setting current
Current
Tripping due to
mechanical shock
Starting Overload
D-Time
Reset: Manual (1)
automatic (2)
or electric (3)
O-Time set to
minimum (02-03 s)
t
98 97
96 95
Setting current
Current
Tripping due to
mechanical shock
Starting Overload
D-Time
Reset: Manual (1)
automatic (2)
or electric (3)
O-Time set to
minimum (02-03 s)
page 6/54
References :
page 6/58
page 6/59
Schemes :
page 6/59
page 6/54
References :
page 6/58
page 6/59
Schemes :
page 6/59
page 6/54
References :
page 6/58
page 6/59
Schemes :
page 6/59
page 6/54
References :
page 6/58
page 6/59
Schemes :
page 6/59
6 6
6/57
6 6
Characteristics
Relay type LR97 Dppppp LT47 ppppp
Contact type 1 NO/NC 1 N/O + 1N/C
Conventional thermal current A 3 3
Maximum hold consumption
of controlled contactor coils
(occasional operating cycles
of contact 95-96)
V a 24 a 48 a 110 a 220 a 24 a 48 a 110 a 220
Conforming to IEC 60947 VA 70 140 360 360 70 140 360 360
V c 24 c 48 c 110 c 220 c 24 c 48 c 110 c 220
W 55 55 28 28 55 55 28 28
Short-circuit protection By gG, BS fuses Maximum
rating or GB2 circuit-breaker
A 3 3
Connection by cable or lug-clamps
Flexible cable
without cable end
1 or 2 conductors Min mm
2
1 x 075 1 x 1
Max mm
2
2 x 25 2 x 25
Flexible cable
with cable end
1 or 2 conductors Min mm
2
1 x 034 1 x 1
Max mm
2
1 x 15 + 1 x 25 2 x 25
External of lugs mm 7 7
of screw mm M3 M35
Relay type LR97 D015pp to
LR97 D25pp
LR97 D38pp LT47 ppppp
Setting range Depending on model A 0338 0560
Tripping class Adjustable Adjustable
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 V 690 690
Conforming to UL, CSA V 600 600
Rated impulse
kV 6 6
Frequency limits Of the operating current Hz 5060 5060
Connection by cable or lug-clamps
Flexible cable
without cable end
1 conductor Min mm
2
15 25
Max 10 10
Flexible cable
with cable end
1 conductor Min mm
2
1 1
Max 4 6
External of lugs mm 10 12
of screw mm M4 M4
Relay type LR97 Dppppp LT47 ppppS LT47 ppppA
Adjustment Current A Load knob Load knob Load knob
Time D-time
knob
s 0530 0530
O-time
knob
s 02/0310 02/0310 02/0330
R-time
knob
s 1120
Reset Manual Reset button Reset button Reset button
Automatic 120sfxed R-time knob: 1-120 s
Electrical By interruption of power
supply (minimum 01 s)
By interruption of power
By interruption of power
Protection functions On starting Steady
state
On starting Steady
state
Overload I
max
> I
setting
Tripping Inhibited
during
D-time
After O-time Inhibited
during
D-time
After O-time After O-time
Locked rotor, mechanical
jamming I > 3 x I
setting
Tripping After D-time < 05 s Inhibited
during
D-time
Sensitivity to phase failure Tripping < 3 s < 3 s Inhibited
during
D-time
Status and fault signalling
(see table page 6/54)
2 LEDs 2 LEDs 2 LEDs
TEST/STOP function Test No load No load No load
Stop Under load Under load Under load
Sealing Yes Yes Yes
page 6/54
Curves :
pages 6/55 and 6/56
References :
page 6/58
page 6/59
Schemes :
page 6/59
page 6/54
Curves :
pages 6/55 and 6/56
References :
page 6/58
page 6/59
Schemes :
page 6/59
page 6/54
Curves :
pages 6/55 and 6/56
References :
page 6/58
page 6/59
Schemes :
page 6/59
page 6/54
Curves :
pages 6/55 and 6/56
References :
page 6/58
page 6/59
Schemes :
page 6/59
6/58
6 6 6 6
References
LR97 D electronic over current relays
Relay
setting
range
Usable
range
(1)
For use
with contactor
(2)
Relay
supply
voltage
Reference
(3)
Weight
A A kg
0.31.5 0.31.3 LC1 D09D38 a 200240 V LR97 D015M7 0172
a 100120 V LR97 D015F7 0172
c/a 24 V LR97 D015B 0172
c/a 48 V LR97 D015E 0172
1.27 1.26 LC1 D09D38 a 200240 V LR97 D07M7 0172
a 100120 V LR97 D07F7 0172
c/a 24 V LR97 D07B 0172
c/a 48 V LR97 D07E 0172
525 521 LC1 D09D38 a 200240 V LR97 D25M7 0172
a 100120 V LR97 D25F7 0172
c/a 24 V LR97 D25B 0172
c/a 48 V LR97 D25E 0172
2038 2034 LC1 D25D38 a 200240 V LR97 D38M7 0172
a 100120 V LR97 D38F7 0172
c/a 24 V LR97 D38B 0172
c/a 48 V LR97 D38E 0172
LT47 electronic over current relays
Relay
setting
range
Usable
range
(1)
Relay
supply
voltage
Reference Weight
A A kg
LT47 relay with manual/electric reset
0.56 0.55 a 200240 V LT47 06M7S 0192
a 100120 V LT47 06F7S 0192
c/a 24 V LT47 06BS 0192
c/a 48 V LT47 06ES 0192
330 325 a 200240 V LT47 30M7S 0192
a 100120 V LT47 30F7S 0192
c/a 24 V LT47 30BS 0192
c/a 48 V LT47 30ES 0192
560 550 a 200240 V LT47 60M7S 0192
a 100120 V LT47 60F7S 0192
c/a 24 V LT47 60BS 0192
c/a 48 V LT47 60ES 0192
LT47 relay with automatic reset
0.56 0.55 a 200240 V LT47 06M7A 0,192
a 100120 V LT47 06F7A 0192
c/a 24 V LT47 06BA 0192
c/a 48 V LT47 06EA 0192
330 325 a 200240 V LT47 30M7A 0192
a 100120 V LT47 30F7A 0192
c/a 24 V LT47 30BA 0192
c/a 48 V LT47 30EA 0192
560 550 a 200240 V LT47 60M7A 0192
a 100120 V LT47 60F7A 0192
c/a 24 V LT47 60BA 0192
c/a 48 V LT47 60EA 0192
Description For
use with
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Pre-wiring kits allowing
connection of the LR97 D
relay N/C contact directly to
the contactor
LC1 D09D18 10 LAD 7C1 0002
LC1 D25D38 10 LAD 7C2 0003
Terminal block for clip-on
mounting on 35 mm rail
(AM1 DP200)
LR97 D 1 LAD 7B106 0100
(1) To allow adjustment of the tripping sensitivity, see adjustment method (page 6/54).
(2) Please see pages 5/46 and 5/47.
(3) If a pre-wiring kit is used, it is no longer possible to electrically wire signalling of tripped status.
5
1
0
4
2
9
LR97 D07pp
5
1
0
4
2
9
LR97 D07pp
5
1
0
4
3
0
LT47 30ppp
5
1
0
4
3
0
LT47 30ppp
page 6/54
Curves :
pages 6/55 and 6/56
Characteristics :
pages 6/56 and 6/57
page 6/59
Schemes :
page 6/59
page 6/54
Curves :
pages 6/55 and 6/56
Characteristics :
pages 6/56 and 6/57
page 6/59
Schemes :
page 6/59
page 6/54
Curves :
pages 6/55 and 6/56
Characteristics :
pages 6/56 and 6/57
page 6/59
Schemes :
page 6/59
page 6/54
Curves :
pages 6/55 and 6/56
Characteristics :
pages 6/56 and 6/57
page 6/59
Schemes :
page 6/59
6 6
6/59
6 6
Dimensions,
mounting,
schemes
Dimensions
LR97 Dpppp LT47 pppp

Mounting
Direct mounting beneath the contactor
LC1 D09D18 D25D38 Note: Can be mounted on 5 rail
b 123 137
c See pages 5/92 and 5/93
Schemes

5
1
,
5
1
3
67,5 45
5
1
,
5
1
3
67,5 45
5
0
,
8 7
0
,
3
1
9
,
5
2
0
,
4
77,2 56
71
10
62,2 63
51
12
5
0
,
8 7
0
,
3
1
9
,
5
2
0
,
4
77,2 56
71
10
62,2 63
51
12
b
45
c
67,5
b
45
c
67,5
T
1
T
3
T
2
L
1
L
3
L
2

M3
A1 98 95 96 A2
A
1
9
8
9
5
9
6
A
2
KM1
KM1
MCBB
L
1
L
2
L
3
LR 97D
1
3
1
4
KM1
A
1
A
2
Start
Stop
T
e
s
t
/
S
t
o
p
R
e
s
e
t
T
1
T
3
T
2
L
1
L
3
L
2

M3
A1 98 95 96 A2
A
1
9
8
9
5
9
6
A
2
KM1
KM1
MCBB
L
1
L
2
L
3
LR 97D
1
3
1
4
KM1
A
1
A
2
Start
Stop
T
e
s
t
/
S
t
o
p
R
e
s
e
t
A
1
9
8
9
5
9
6
A
2
9
7
LT47
L
1
L
2
L
3
KM1
1
3
1
4
a
M3
KM1
A
1
A
2
MCBB
Start
Stop
T
e
s
t
/
S
t
o
p
R
e
s
e
t
A
1
9
8
9
5
9
6
A
2
9
7
LT47
L
1
L
2
L
3
KM1
1
3
1
4
a
M3
KM1
A
1
A
2
MCBB
Start
Stop
T
e
s
t
/
S
t
o
p
R
e
s
e
t
page 6/54
Curves :
pages 6/55 and 6/56
Characteristics :
pages 6/56 and 6/57
References :
page 6/58
page 6/54
Curves :
pages 6/55 and 6/56
Characteristics :
pages 6/56 and 6/57
References :
page 6/58
page 6/54
Curves :
pages 6/55 and 6/56
Characteristics :
pages 6/56 and 6/57
References :
page 6/58
page 6/54
Curves :
pages 6/55 and 6/56
Characteristics :
pages 6/56 and 6/57
References :
page 6/58
6 6
6/60
6 6
Presentation
Above 32 A, the TeSys U controller provides a motor starter management solution
identical to that provided by TeSys U starter-controllers
Used in conjunction with a short-circuit protection device and a contactor, it provides
a motor starter whose functions are the same as those of a TeSys U starter-controller
and, in particular, provides the following functions: overload protection, motor starter
control and application monitoring
It consists of a control unit whose adjustment range is compatible with the secondary
ofcurrenttransformers,plusacontrolbasewhichalsoallowsftmentofafunction
module or a communication module
It requires a c 24 V external power supply
The secondaries of current transformers, the c 24 V power supply, the 10 inputs and
the 5 outputs are connected by screw terminal block
Application example
Detecting blockage of a rock crusher by monitoring the motor current
Power: 90 kW at 400 V
In: 185 A
Duty class S1
Control circuit voltage: a 230 V
Control-command by PLC and serial link using the Modbus protocol
Products used
Controller 1 1 LUT M20BL 6/64
Multifunction control unit 2 1 LUCM T1BL 6/64
Modbus communication module 3 1 LUL C033 1/95
Current transformer 4 3 LUT C4001 6/64
Contactor 5 1 LC1 F185P7
Circuit-breaker 6 1 NS 250HMA
Functions performed
Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 70 kA at 400V
Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4
Detection of crusher blockage by monitoring the induced overcurrent To use the
"overtorque or jam" function, the following parameters must be entered:
trip: the answer yes/no enables or disables the function,
time before tripping: the time period during which the value of the current must be
above the tripping threshold in order to cause tripping (adjustable from 1 to 30 s)
tripping threshold: value as a % of the load current ratio in relation to the setting
current.Iftheratioremainsabovethisthresholdforthetimespecifedintheprevious
parameter, the product trips (adjustable from 100 to 800 %)
It is possible to set the parameter for an alarm at a preset threshold under the same
conditions as above
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
v
Presentation,
application example
TeSys U controllers
5
2
3
7
6
2
6
4
5
1
2
3
5
2
0
9
7
3
1
0
7
2
2
6
Characteristics :
pages 6/62 and 6/63
References :
page 6/64
page 6/66
Schemes :
page 6/66
6 6 6 6
6/61
Application example (continued)
Scheme
230 V a
a
4 5 8
Modbus
4 5 8
VW3 A8 306 TF03
D

(
B
)
D

(
A
)
G
n
d
+
c 24 V
L
O
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
D

(
B
)
D

(
A
)
G
n
d
I
.
3
I
.
6
I
.
7
9
6
1
3
A
1
A
2
LUCM T1BL LUT M20BL
L
1
L
2
L
3
LUL C033
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
1
/
L
1
3
/
L
2
5
/
L
3
1
/
L
1
2
T
1
3
/
L
2
4
T
2
5
/
L
3
6
T
3
U
1
W
1
V
1
M
3 a
T1
Q6
Q6 Q6
KA1
KM1
KA1 KA1
KM1
KA1
KA1
KA1
S1
S
2
S1
S
2
S1
S
2
T2
T3
KM1
S1
S2
Multifunction Control Unit
From S1/T1, S1/T2, S1/
T3, S2/T1, S2/T2, S2/
T3
To KA1
24 V Aux
Controller
24 V
c
24 V
Aux COM
Modbus Module
Other functions
The multifunction control unit incorporates other control and protection functions, such as: monitoring and control of phase current, alarm,
Communication module LUL C033 also provides a programmable output and two programmable inputs
Application example
(continued)
TeSys U controllers
Characteristics :
pages 6/62 and 6/63
References :
page 6/64
page 6/66
Schemes :
page 6/66
6 6
6/62
6 6
Environment
Control base and control unit type LUT M + LUCB T1BL or LUCD T1BL
without LUL C
LUT M + LUCM T1BL or LUL C
Product certifcations UL, CSA, ASEFA
Conforming to standards IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 N14
of the outputs
(Ui)
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1,
degree of pollution: 3
V 250
Conforming to UL508, CSA C22-2 n14 V 250
voltage of the outputs
(Uimp)
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 kV 4
Conforming to
IEC/EN 60947-1
(protection against
directfngercontact)
Front panel (outside connection zone) IP 40
Front panel and wired terminals IP 20
Other faces IP 20
Protective treatment Conforming to IEC/EN 60068 TH
Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30 Cycles 12
Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-11 h 48
around the device
Storage C - 40+ 85
Operation C - 25+ 70 - 25+ 60
Operating positions
Without derating
30
30
90 90
Conforming to IEC/EN 60695-2-12 C 960 (parts supporting live components)
C 650
Shock resistance
Conforming to IEC/EN60068-2-27 (1) 15 gn
5300 Hz
Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 (1) 4 gn
Resistance to
Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2 kV In open air: 8 - Level 3
kV On contact: 6 - Level 3
Resistance to
radiated felds
Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3 V/m 10 - Level 3
Immunity to fast
transient currents
Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4 kV CT outputs and inputs: 4 - Level 4
kV Inputs and supply: 2 - Level 3
Immunity to
radioelectric felds
Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-6 V 10
Control base and control unit relays
Immunity to
dissipated
shock waves
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Common mode Serial mode
Output relays / power line kV 4 2
Inputs kV 2 1
Serial communication kV 2
Characteristics
TeSys U controllers
Presentation :
page 6/60
References :
page 6/64
page 6/66
Schemes :
page 6/66
6 6 6 6
6/63
Control circuit supply characteristics
Operational voltage V c 204288
Power consumption W 2 max
Associated protection A gG fuse 05
Cabling
Connectors Pitch mm 5
Flexible cable without cable end 1 conductor mm
2
0225
2 identical
conductors
mm
2
0215
Flexible cable with cable end
Without insulated ferrule 1 conductor mm
2
02525
2 identical
conductors
mm
2
0251
With insulated ferrule 1 conductor mm
2
02525
2 identical
conductors (1)
mm
2
0515
Solid cable without cable end 1 conductor mm
2
0225
2 identical
conductors
mm
2
021
Conductor size 1 conductor AWG 24 to AWG 12
Flat screwdriver mm 3
Input characteristics
Operational voltage V c 24
Logic inputs Logic state 1: I u 6 mA - 16 V
Logic state 0: I y 15 mA - 5 V
Discrete output characteristics
Base controller type LUT M10BL LUT M20BL
Type Single break volt-free contacts
Load ac supply C 300 B 300
dc supply 24 V/5 A 24 V/5 A
Permissible power in cat. AC-15 For 500 000
operating cycles
VA 180 500
Permissible power in cat. DC-13 For 500 000
operating cycles
W 30 30
Associated protection A gG fuse, 4 gG fuse, 4
Used with contactor type (2)

Control voltage c 24 V:
LP1K, LC1 D09D95
Control voltage a 24240 V:
LC1K, LC1D
Control voltage a 100240 V:
LC1K, LC1D, LC1 F185F500
Characteristics of external current transformers LUT Cppp1
Precision Class 5P
Precision limit factor 10
Maximum operating temperature C 70
Transformer ratio 30/1 50/1 100/1 200/1 400/1 800/1
Diameter of conductor passage hole mm 28 22 35 32
Maximum wire c.s.a. mm
2
30 x 10 30 x 10 40 x 10 65 x 32 38 x 127 53 x 127
(1) Use a double cable end.
(2) For other combinations, use an intermediate relay between the output of controller LUTM
and the contactor coil.
TeSys U controllers
Presentation :
page 6/60
References :
page 6/64
page 6/66
Schemes :
6/66
6 6
6/64
6 6
References
Control bases (auxiliary supply voltage c 24 V)
Connection For use
with contactor
Reference Weight
kg
Current
transformers
Control
Screws Screws LC1 Dpp LUT M10BL 0800
LC1 Fppp LUT M20BL 0800
Control units
Description Class For motor
type
Setting range Reference Weight
kg
Advanced 10 3-phase 035105 LUCB T1BL 0140
20 3-phase 035105 LUCD T1BL 0140
Multifunction 5 to 30 3-phase 035105 LUCM T1BL 0175
Current transformers
Operating current Reference Weight
kg
Primary Secondary
30 1 LUT C0301 0550
50 1 LUT C0501 0330
100 1 LUT C1001 0450
200 1 LUT C2001 0590
400 1 LUT C4001 0870
800 1 LUT C8001 1210
Function modules and communication modules
The TeSys U controller is compatible with the modules listed below:
Thermal overload alarm module LUF W10,
Motor load indication module LUF V2,
Communication modules:
Modbus (LUL C033),
CANopen (LULC08),
DeviceNet (LULC09),
Advantys STB (LUL C15)
b
b
b
v
v
v
v
Note : Communication modules LUL C07 (Profbus DP), ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51
(AS-Interface) are not compatible with the TeSys U controller.
Module LUF W10 is only compatible with control units LUCB T1BL and LUCD T1BL.
References
TeSys U controllers
LUT M + LUCM T1BL + LUTC pp
5
3
2
0
8
3
Presentation :
page 6/60
Characteristics :
pages 6/62 and 6/63
page 6/66
Schemes :
page 6/66
6 6 6 6
6/65
Combinations providing type 2 coordination
With circuit-breaker
in category AC-3 400/415 V
Circuit-breaker Contactor TeSys U
controller
Current
transformers
PkW IeA Reference Rating
A
Irm (1)
A
Reference (2) Reference Reference
185 35 GV3 L40 40 560 LC1 D50A LUTM + LUCp 3 x LUT C0501
37 66 NS80HMA 80 1040 LC1 D80 LUTM + LUCp 3 x LUT C1001
90 160 NS250HMA 220 2200 LC1 F185 LUTM + LUCp 3 x LUT C2001
With fuses
in category AC-3 400/415 V
Circuit-breaker aM fuses Contactor TeSys U
controller
Current
transformers
PkW IeA Reference Size Rating
A
Reference (2) Reference Reference
185 35 GSp F 14 x 51 40 LC1 D40A LUTM + LUCp 3 x LUT C0501
22 41 GSp J 22 x 58 50 LC1 D50A LUTM + LUCp 3 x LUT C1001
30 55 GSp J 22 x 58 80 LC1 D80 LUTM + LUCp 3 x LUT C1001
55 97 GSp L T0 125 LC1 D115 LUTM + LUCp 3 x LUT C2001
75 132 GSp L T0 160 LC1 D150 LUTM + LUCp 3 x LUT C2001
90 160 GSp N T1 200 LC1 F185 LUTM + LUCp 3 x LUT C2001
110 195 GSp N T1 250 LC1 F225 LUTM + LUCp 3 x LUT C4001
132 230 GSp QQ T2 315 LC1 F265 LUTM + LUCp 3 x LUT C4001
160 280 GSp QQ T2 400 LC1 F330 LUTM + LUCp 3 x LUT C4001
200 350 GS2 S T3 500 LC1 F400 LUTM + LUCp 3 x LUT C4001
(2) For reversing operation, replace the prefx LC1 with LC2.
Combinations
TeSys U controllers
Presentation :
page 6/60
Characteristics :
pages 6/62 and 6/63
References :
page 6/64
page 6/66
Schemes :
page 6/66
6 6
6/66
6 6
Dimensions,
mounting
TeSys U controllers
Controllers
LUTM p0BL Rail mounting Rail mounting
45
1
6
3
1
7
3
a (1)
7
3
30 2x4
1
7
1
a
With Advantys STB, CANopen
or DeviceNet modules
147
(1) Depth with communication module
Current transformers
LUTC 03011001 LUTC 20018001
4,2
G
J
a c
b
1
b
c 5,2/6,2
J G
a
a1
b
1
b
LUTC a b b1 c G J LUTC a a1 b b1 c G J
0301 78 108 42 46 28 45 54 2001 94 32 99 55 40 68 52
0501 57 86 31 42 23 45 50 4001 99 38 170 127 40 75 64
1001 78 108 42 46 35 45 54 8001 125 54 170 127 40 95 67
Presentation :
page 6/60
Characteristics :
pages 6/62 and 6/63
References :
page 6/64
Schemes :
page 6/66
6 6 6 6
6/67
Schemes
TeSys U controllers
Schemes
Reversing controller LUT M
L
1
L
2
L
3
LUTM
1
3
/
N
O
2
3
/
N
O
9
5
9
6
/
N
O
9
7
/
N
C
LUTM
9
8
0
5
0
6
/
N
C
I
.
1
I
.
2
I
.
3
I
.
4
+
LUTM
I
.
5
I
.
6
I
.
7
I
.
8
I
.
9
I
.
1
0
LUTM
S1
S2
(1)
24 V Aux
3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact
I
.
9
I
.
1
0
I
.
1
I
.
2
I
.
3
I
.
4
I
.
5

R
S
T
I
.
6

S
F
I
.
7

S
R
I
.
8
+ +
1
3
KM1 KM2
2
3
9
5
9
6
9
7
9
8
0
5
0
6
24 V c
24250 V a
KM1 AV KM2
Q1
AR 24 V c
24 V c
Channel 1 Channel 2
Any fault
Control unit fault
External fault
Trip
Stop
Reset
Control for Modbus communication module LUL C033
I
.
9
I
.
1
0
I
.
1
I
.
2
I
.
3
I
.
4
I
.
5

R
S
T
I
.
6

S
F
I
.
7

S
R
I
.
8
+ +
1
3
KM1 KM2
2
3
9
5
9
6
9
7
9
8
0
5
0
6
24 V c
24250 V a
KM1 KM2
Q1
Q1
24 V c
24 V c
KM1 KM2 AU
C
O
M
O
A
1
O
A
3
L
O
1
L
I
1
L
I
2
AU
Channel 1 Channel 2
Any fault
Controll unit fault
Local/
remote
Trip
Stop
Reset
Manu 1 Manu 2
Any
fault
Free Free
On
Modbus
network port
Communication
module
Local/remote
(1) The contacts are represented with controller powered up and not in a fault condition.
Presentation :
page 6/60
Characteristics :
pages 6/62 and 6/63
References :
page 6/64
page 6/66
6 6
6/68
6 6
Selection guide
TeSys T Motor Management System
Applications Multifunction motor and machine protection
Device type Controllers Input extension modules,
for all LTM R controllers
Operator control unit
For network/bus Modbus CANopen DeviceNet ProfbusDP Ethernet TCP/IP
Current range 04100 A (with internal current transformer)
100810 A (with external current transformer)

Control voltage c 24 V
a 100240 V
c 24 V (1) a 100240 V (1) Powered via the LTM R controller
or via the LTM E extension module
Number of I/O 6 inputs
4 outputs
4 independent inputs
Measurements - Current between phases
- Earth fault
- Motor temperature
Voltage between phases
Functions Protection and monitoring functions:
- thermal overload,
- motor temperature monitoring,
- phase imbalance and phase failure,
- locked rotor,
- long starting times,
- phase reversal,
- earth fault
Monitoring functions:
- voltage,
- power,
- Cos j j (power factor)
Display functions:
- measurements,
- faults and alarms,
- statistics, etcj
Device type LTM RppMpp LTM RppCpp LTM RppDpp LTM RppPpp LTM RppEpp LTM EV40BD LTM EV40FM LTM CU
Pages 6/86 6/87 6/87
(1) Input control voltage. The electronics are powered via the controller.
6 6 6 6
6/69
Applications Multifunction motor and machine protection
Device type Controllers Input extension modules,
for all LTM R controllers
Operator control unit
For network/bus Modbus CANopen DeviceNet ProfbusDP Ethernet TCP/IP
Current range 04100 A (with internal current transformer)
100810 A (with external current transformer)

Control voltage c 24 V
a 100240 V
c 24 V (1) a 100240 V (1) Powered via the LTM R controller
or via the LTM E extension module
Number of I/O 6 inputs
4 outputs
4 independent inputs
Measurements - Current between phases
- Earth fault
- Motor temperature
Voltage between phases
Functions Protection and monitoring functions:
- thermal overload,
- motor temperature monitoring,
- phase imbalance and phase failure,
- locked rotor,
- long starting times,
- phase reversal,
- earth fault
Monitoring functions:
- voltage,
- power,
- Cos j j (power factor)
Display functions:
- measurements,
- faults and alarms,
- statistics, etcj
Device type LTM RppMpp LTM RppCpp LTM RppDpp LTM RppPpp LTM RppEpp LTM EV40BD LTM EV40FM LTM CU
Pages 6/86 6/87 6/87
(1) Input control voltage. The electronics are powered via the controller.
6/70
6 6 6 6

Presentation
TeSys T is a motor management system that provides protection, metering and
monitoring functions for single-phase and 3-phase, constant speed, ac motors up
to 810 A

Suitable for the harshest applications, this product range offers:
high-performance multifunction protection, independent of the automation system,
a local HMI control unit for reading, displaying and modifying the parameters
monitored, diagnostics, etc
confgurationoftheapplicationusingPowerSuitesoftware,
connection to the automation system via a communication network (selection
according to various protocols)

Application
The TeSys T motor management system is used for motor control and protection in
harsh industrial applications, in which downtime must be avoided because it is very
costly: Oil & Gas, chemical industry, water treatment, metal, minerals and mining,
pharmaceutical industry, microelectronics, tunnels, airports etc
With TeSys T, untimely stoppages of a process or manufacturing, associated with a
motor, are anticipated via predictive analysis of fault situations Fault tripping is
therefore reduced to a minimum
Its use in motor control panels makes it possible to:
increase the operational availability of installations,
improvefexibilityfromprojectdesignthroughtoimplementation,
increase productivity by making available all information needed to run the
system
The TeSys motor management system integrates perfectly with Schneider Electric
low voltage equipment, such as Okken, Blokset and Prisma
b
b
b

b
b
b
b
5
2
6
3
7
8
1 LTM EV40BD extension module
2 LTM R08MBD controller
1 2
5
2
6
3
7
8
1 LTM EV40BD extension module
2 LTM R08MBD controller
1 2
3
M
3
1
2
4
1 Magnetic circuit-breaker
2 Contactor
3 Controller with extension module
4 Operator control unit
Presentation
6 6
6/71
6 6
Composition of the motor management system
The system comprises:
an LTM R motor management controller
with integral current transformer up to 100 A,
above 100 A, by external current transformer up to 810 A,
an LTM E extension module,
an LTM CU operator control unit,
confgurationsoftwareincorporatedinthePowerSuitesoftwareapplication,
accessories for system set-up
Communication
The LTM R controller is equipped with a communication interface to allow remote
monitoring and control of the motor All motor information is then available at
automation system level
The following networks are available:
Modbus,CANopen,DeviceNet,ProfBusDPandEthernetTCP/IP.
TeSys T system functions
Protection functions:
against thermal overload,
against phase imbalance and phase failure,
thermal motor protection via PTC probes,
against phase reversal,
against earth faults,
against long starting times and motor stalling,
against automatic load shedding and restarting,
againstloadfuctuations(I,U,P),
against variations of Cos j (power factor)
Metering functions
Measurements (rms values):
current on the 3 phases,
voltage on the 3 phases (shedding),
motor temperature,
earth fault,
Values calculated:
average current,
frequency,
Cos j (power factor), power, power consumption
Motor control functions
A motor managed by TeSys T can be controlled:
locally, using the logic inputs present on the product, or via the HMI terminal
remotely, via the network (connection by terminal block or connector except for
DeviceNet: terminal block only),
Motor control modes
5predefnedmotorcontrolmodesareincorporatedinthecontroller:
overload mode: monitoring of motors whose control is not managed by the
controller,
independent mode: starting of non-reversing motors,
reverser mode: starting of reversing motors,
2-step mode: 2-step starting of motors (star-delta, by autotransformer and by
resistor),
2-speed mode: 2-speed starting of motors (Dahlander, pole changer)
A 6
th
Custommodeisavailabletoallowtheusertocreateaspecifcmotorcontrol
modethatisnotpredefnedinthecontroller.
Statistical and diagnostic functions
fault statistics: counters per type of protection and history of the last 5 faults,
motor statistics: saving of motor statistics values,
diagnosis of faults affecting correct operation of the product
b
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
v
v
b
v
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
LTM R08MBD
5
2
6
3
7
9
LTM R08MBD
5
2
6
3
7
9
LTM EV40BD
5
2
6
3
8
0
LTM EV40BD
5
2
6
3
8
0
LTM CU
5
6
8
6
0
5
LTM CU
5
6
8
6
0
5

6/72
6 6 6 6
Description
Description
The LTM R controller
The controller is the central component in the motor management system
It manages the basic functions such as:
measurement of 3-phase current via integral current transformers from 04 to
100 A (up to 810 A by external current transformers),
measurement of earth current by external earth fault toroid
measurement of motor temperature by PTC probe,
inputs and outputs for the various motor control modes, fault management and
associated functions

Characteristics
Asstandard,thecontrollermanagesthefollowingpredefnedcontrolmode
functions:
overload mode,
independent mode,
reverser mode,
2-speed mode,
2-step mode,
"Custom" mode
Supply
2 types of controller power supply are available:
c 24 V,
a 100240 V
Current ranges
3 current ranges allow measurement of motor current from 04 to 100 A:
048 A,
13527 A,
5100 A
For use with external current transformers, choose the 048 A range (1 or 5 A
current transformer secondary)
Inputs
6 discrete logic inputs
Outputs
3 relay logic outputs (1N/O)
1 relay output for fault signalling (1N/O + 1N/C))
Measurements
connections for a temperature probe,
connections for an earth fault toroid

LTM E extension module
The extension module adds the following functionalities to the TeSys T controller:
voltage measurement on the 3 phases This enables it to calculate numerous
engine monitoring parameters (power, frequency, Cos j ),
4 additional inputs

Characteristics
Inputs
4 discrete logic inputs (independent)
Power supplies
2 types of power supply for the inputs: c 24 V and a 100240 V
A c 24 V controller can be assembled with an a 100240 V extension module and
vice versa
Voltage measurement between phases up to 690 V nominal.

b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
LTM Rpp
5
2
6
3
8
1
LTM Rpp
5
2
6
3
8
1

6 6
6/73
6 6
Human/Machine Interfaces (HMI)
Depending on the application, 2 types of HMI can be used with the LTM R controller
The LTM CU operator control unit:
Entirely dedicated to the TeSys T range,
Only for control/monitoring of an LTM R controller
A Magelis XBT N410 terminal
For control/monitoring of 1 to 8 LTM R controllers
LTM CU operator control unit
Dedicated exclusively to TeSys T controllers, control unit LTM CU makes it possible
to:
ConfguretheparametersoftheLTMRcontroller
Displayinformationoncontrollerconfgurationandoperation.
Monitor the alarms and faults generated by the controller
Local control of the motor via the local control interface (keys can be customised)
Three different languages can be loaded into the LTM CU controller at the same
time
By default, these 3 languages are: English, French and Spanish
Note: English is the only compulsory language.
A language download utility (LangTool), together with all the other languages, are
available on the website wwwschneider-electriccom
This tool allows the languages present in the LTM CU control unit to be adapted
TheLTMCUHMIcontrolunithasanRJ45port,protectedbyafexiblecoverto
provide a good level of protection (IP54)
This port on the front panel allows connection to a PC, via a connecting cable, in
order to use PowerSuite software
In this case, the control unit acts as a transmitter and all information can then be
viewed in PowerSuite
b
b
b
b
The Magelis XBT N410 HMI terminal
TwoapplicationshavebeenpredefnedforTeSysT.Dependingontheapplication
loaded, the HMI terminal makes it possible to:
confgureandmonitoramotorstarter(LTM_1T1_V1.dop).
monitor and modify certain parameters on up to 8 motor starters
(LTM_1T8_X_V1dop) (1)
XBT L1000 programming software is needed for loading applications into the HMI
terminal
These applications are available on the website wwwschneider-electriccom
b
b
(1) Replace the X with an E for the English version, or an F for the French version.
b
v
v
b
v
LTM CU
5
6
8
6
0
5
LTM CU
5
6
8
6
0
5
6/74
6 6 6 6

LTM R controllers
Modbus DeviceNet
2
3
4
6
7
10
8
1
9
5
2
3
4
7
10
8
1
9
5
Controllers feature the
following on their front panel:
1 Controller power supply
2 Input connections
3 Fault outputs (N/O+N/C)
4 Port for connection to the
HMI terminal, a PC or an
extension module (RJ45)
5 Controller status LEDs
6 Network port for
connection to the network
by connector (except
DeviceNet) (1)
7 Test/Reset button
8 Connection to the network
by terminal block (except
Ethernet TCP/IP)
9 Connection for an earth
fault toroid and
temperature probes
10 Outputs for motor control
mode function
Profbus DP CANopen
2
3
4
6
7
10
8
1
9
5
2
3
4
6
7
10
8
1
9
5
Ethernet TCP/IP
2
3
4
6
10
1
9
5
7
6
(1) Connection using power
extension (daisy-
chaining) is possible for
Ethernet TCP/IP.
LTM EV40pp extension modules LTM CU operator control unit
1
2
3
5
4
1
2
3
4
Extension modules have the following on their front
face:
1 Inputs for voltage measurement
2 Port for connection to the HMI terminal or to the PC
3 Port for connection to the controller
4 Extension module status LEDs
5 Connection of additional inputs
The control unit has the following on its front face:
1 Screen LCD display
2 Local control interface including control keys and LEDs
3 RJ45 port on front panel for connection to a PC (protected by a cover)
4 Contextual navigation keys
6 6
6/75
6 6
Thermal and current protection functions
Functions Setting range Controller
LTM R
Controller
and extension
module
(LTM R +
LTM E)
Alarm
threshold
Fault
threshold
Description
Thermal overload:
thermal protection of motor by monitoring current consumption
Class: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25,
30
Inversether/defnite
time

Motor temperature:
thermal monitoring of the motor using temperature probes
(winding, paper) Up to 3 sensors in series
PTC binary
PTC/NTC analogue:
20 6500 Ohm
Phase imbalance:
monitors the symmetry of currents To be used for imbalance
< 80% of the average current (1)
1070% I average
0220 s
Phase failure:
monitors the symmetry of currents To be used for imbalance
< 80% of the average current (1)
0130 s
Phase reversal:
signalswhenthephasesequenceisdifferentfromthedefned
sequence (motor running)
A-B-C
A-C-B
Long starting time:
monitors the motor starting time
100800 % of FLC (2)
1200 s
Locked rotor:
locking detected by a sudden increase in current
after the start phase
100800 % of FLC (2)
130 s
Min/max current load limit variations:
monitors motor load through variations of current
around preset thresholds
min.:
30100 % of FLC (2)
1200 s
max.:
20800 % of FLC (2)
1250 s
Earth fault:
signals internal insulation faults, by vectorial summing
of external currents, via earth fault toroid
internal:
20500 % min FLC (2)
00525 s
external:
00210 A
00525 s
Frequent starting:
Protects the motor against overheating due to frequent starting
09999 s
Voltage and power protection functions
Phase imbalance:
monitors the symmetry of voltage between phases
To be used for imbalance < 40 % of the average voltage (3)
315 %
0220 s
Phase failure:
monitors the symmetry of voltage between phases
To be used for imbalance > 40 % of the average voltage (3)
0130 s
Phase reversal:
signalswhenthephasesequenceisdifferentfromthedefned
sequence (motor stopped)
A-B-C
A-C-B
Voltage variations.
Min/max voltage limits:
monitors voltage variations around preset thresholds
min.:
7099 %
0225 s
max.:
101115 %
0225 s
Load shedding:
opens outputs O1 and O2 if voltage drops below a preset
threshold
68115 %
19999 s
Power variations.
Min/max power limits:
monitors power variations around preset thresholds
20800 %
0100 s
Variations of Cos j.
Min/max limits of Cos j :
monitors variations of Cos j around preset thresholds
01025 s
Function performed (1) Average current value measured on the 3 phases.
(2) FLC: Full Load Current (setting current).
(3) Average voltage value measured on the 3 phases.

Functions
6/76
6 6 6 6
Motor control functions
Functions Description With controller
LTM R
With controller LTM R
and extension module LTM E
Control modes Local, via terminal block X X
Local, via HMI terminal (1) X X
Remote, via network X X
Operating modes Overload X X
Independent X X
Reverser X X
2-step X X
2-speed X X
"Custom" mode X X
Fault management Manual reset X X
Automatic reset X X
Remote reset X X
Metering functions and statistics
Functions Description Measurement range With controller
LTM R
With controller LTM R
and extension module LTM E
Measurements (2) Current/Phase 0081000 A X X
Earth current 01633 x CT ratio X X
Average current 0081000 A X X
Current imbalance between
phases
0200 % X X
Thermal capacity level 0200 % X X
Motor temperature rise 06500 Ohm X X
Frequency 0 100 Hz X
Voltage between phases a 0830 V X
Voltage imbalance between
phases
0200 % X
Active power 065535 kW X
Reactive power 065535 kWr X
Cos j (power factor)
0100 X
Active power consumption 0400 kWh X
Reactive power consumption 0400 kWrh X
Fault statistics Protection fault counters X X
Protection alarm counters X X
Diagnostic fault counters X X
Motor control function counters X X
Fault history X X
Fault diagnostics Internal watchdog fault X X
Controller internal temperature X X
Temperature sensor connection X X
Current connection X X
Voltage connection X
Motor control commands (start, stop, run check back and
stop check back)
X X
Controlconfgurationchecksum X X
Loss of communication X X
Motor statistics Number of motor control commands (O1/O2 starts) X X
Operating time X X
Number of starts/hour X X
Last start I max X X
Duration of last start X X
Thermal overload statistics Time to trip X X
Time to restart X X
System operating statistics Run, ON, Start, alarm, fault X X
(1) HMI: Human Machine Interface.
See measurement details page 6/82.
6 6
6/77
6 6
Service classes offered by the Ethernet TCI/IP version
Class A 20 ETH10/100 + FTP server
Basic Web server None
Basic communications services
Ethernet TCP/IP
Modbus messaging (read/write of data
words)
Ethernet TCP/IP
communication
advanced
management services
I/O Scanning Yes
Global Data No
Client FDR (1) Automatic monitoring and updating of
productparameterconfguration.
Automatic assignment of IP address and
network parameters
SNMP network
administrator (2)
Yes
Ethernet: different network topologies
Star topology
In a star topology, all the peripherals are linked via an intermediate peripheral (hub or
switch)
In industrial Ethernet applications, the use of full duplex switches (instead of hubs)
as central peripherals is strongly recommended
Power extension (Daisy chain) topology
Power extension (or Daisy chaining), at bus level, is another connection topology
commonly used in traditional, industrial automation system networks The cable
segments link several peripherals to each other, constituting the peripheral "section"
of the network cable
Ethernet Power extension (Daisy chain)
Power extension is not yet a very commonly used Ethernet connection topology, but
will quickly become so when a large number of peripherals are made available in the
market
In an Ethernet power extension topology, the peripherals have:
2 Ethernet ports
and an integrated switch
Schneider Electric is progressively introducing, into the industrial market, Ethernet
peripherals that can be used in daisy chain type architectures
Implementation of a power extension topology
No hub or switch is required for using a power extension topology Each peripheral
must have an integrated switch (two ports)
A port on the peripheral is connected to a port on the neighbouring upstream and
downstream peripherals These consecutive connections constitute the power
extension (daisy chain)
Ethernet switches may be included in a power extension (daisy chain) topology
when several scan chains are used by the monitoring peripheral
The Ethernet switch must be installed close to the monitoring peripheral, with
the various scan chains coming from the switch
b
b
(1) FDR: Faulty Device Replacement.
(2) SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol.
Functions (continued),
Topology
TeSys T TeSys T
TeSys T TeSys T
TeSys T TeSys T TeSys T
Star topology
Daisy chain topology
6/78
6 6 6 6
Ethernet: different network topologies (continued)
Ring topology
In a ring topology, all the peripherals or components of the network infrastructure are
connected within a loop
This type of topology makes it possible to achieve different levels of redundancy of
the network
Ethernet ring
Ethernet rings are generally the main networks in applications where a high level of
reliability is required If a ring topology is required, the switches handling this function
must be used
Redundancy
Redundancy of the network infrastructure is the key to development of applications
with high operational reliability
Implementing a single or double ring architecture makes it possible to provide
protection against breaks in network segments
Single ring
Thefrstlevelofredundancycanbeachievedbyinstallingasinglering.
ConneXiumswitchescanbeusedtoestablishmainnetworkringconfgurations.
The ring is created using HIPER-Ring ports
If a section of the line fails, the ring structure (including a maximum of 50 switches)
convertsintoalinetypeconfgurationinlessthan0.5seconds.
Topology (continued)
TeSys T TeSys T
TeSys T TeSys T
Ring topology
6 6
6/79
6 6
Possible confgurations and applications
LTM CU
TeSys T
TeSys T
TeSys T
PowerSuite
LTM CU
PowerSuite
PLC (automation platform)
N
e
t
w
o
r
k

o
r

b
u
s
or
Programming

6/80
6 6 6 6
Programming (continued)
Confguration with PowerSuite
TheTeSysTconfguratorisincorporatedinthePowerSuitesoftwareapplication,as
from version 25 (1)
Itallowsconfguration,commissioningandmaintenanceofmotorstarters
protected by TeSys T
Alibrarycontainingpredefnedmotorcontrolmodefunctionsisavailableinorderto:
allow standardisation,
avoid errors,
reduce motor starter setup times
5predefnedmotorcontrolmodesareincorporatedinthecontroller:
overload mode: monitoring of motors whose control is not managed by the
controller,
independent mode: starting of non-reversing motors,
reverser mode: starting of reversing motors,
2-step mode: 2-step starting of motors (star-delta, by autotransformer and by
resistor),
2-speed mode: 2-speed starting of motors (Dahlander, pole changer)
By using logic functions, a "Custom" mode makes it possible to:
easilyadaptthesepredefnedmotorcontrolmodefunctionstothespecifcneeds
of your applications,
create a link with the motor starter environment or
create new functions

Thefunctionsthusdefnedcanbesavedandusedtobuildyourfunctionlibraryfor
future applications
Tocreatespecialfunctions,alogiceditorisincorporatedintheconfguratorand
allows a choice of 2 programming languages:
function block,
structured text
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
(1) An update fle is available, free of charge, on the website www.schneider-electric.com. It will
enable you to take advantage of the latest functions in the TeSys T motor management
system.
5
6
8
6
0
9
Example of TeSys T confgurator setup screen
5
6
8
6
0
9
Example of TeSys T confgurator setup screen
5
3
6
1
9
6
Example of logic editor screen.
5
3
6
1
9
6
Example of logic editor screen.
6 6
6/81
6 6
Characteristics
Environment
Product type LTM R controllers LTM EV40pp extension modules
Conforming to standards IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL 508, CSA 22-2 n14, IACS E10
Product certifcations UL, CSA,BV, LROS, DNV, GL, RINA, ABS, RMRos, NOM, CCC, C-TICK, ATEX,
GOST, KERI (1)
of the outputs (Ui)
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1,
degree of pollution 3
V 690
Conforming to UL 508,
CSA C222 n 14
V 690
voltage (Uimp)
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1
a 100240 V
supply, inputs and outputs
kV 4 4
c 24 V
supply, inputs and outputs
kV 08 08
Communication circuits kV 08
Current or voltage
measurement circuit
kV 6 6
Short-circuit withstand Conforming to
IEC/EN 60947-4-1
kA 100
Protective treatment Conforming to IEC/EN 60068 TH
Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30 12 x 24 hour cycles
Conforming to IEC/EN 60070-2-11 h 48
around the device
Storage C - 40+80
Operation C - 20+60
Operating position
without dating
In relation to normal vertical
mounting plane
30 in relation to mounting plate, 90

Flame resistance Conforming to UL 94 C 960 (for parts supporting live components)
Conforming to IEC/EN 60695-2-12 C 650 (for other parts)
Shock resistance
Conforming to
IEC/EN 60068-2-27 (2)
15 gn
Vibration resistance Conforming to
IEC/EN 60068-2-6 (2)
5300 Hz
4 gn (plate mounted)
1 gn (mounted on 5 rail)
Resistance to
Conforming to
IEC/EN 61000-4-2
kV In open air: 8 - Level 3
On contact: 6 - Level 3
electromagnetic interference
Conforming to
IEC 61000-4-3
V/m 10 - Level 3
Immunity to
fast transient bursts
Conforming to
IEC 61000-4-4
kV On supply and relay outputs: 4 - Level 4
Other circuits: 2 - Level 3
Immunity to
radioelectric felds
Conforming to
IEC/EN 61000-4-6
V 10 - Level 3
Immunity to
dissipated
shock waves
Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-5 Common mode Serial mode Common mode Serial mode
Relay outputs and supply kV 4 2
c 24 V inputs kV 1 1 1 1
a 100240 V inputs kV 2 1 2 1
Voltage inputs kV 4 2
Communication kV 2 2
Temperature sensor
(IT1/IT2)
kV 1 05
Altitude derating 2000 m 3000 m 3500 m 4000 m 4500 m
Rated operational voltage (Ui) 1 093 087 08 07
Max operating temperature 1 093 092 09 088
(1) Certain certifcations are pending; please consult your Customer Care Centre.
(2) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavorable direction.
6/82
6 6 6 6
Controller and extension module characteristics
Product type Controllers Extension modules
LTM RpppBD LTM RpppFM LTM EV40BD LTM EV40FM
Control supply
Operational voltage (U) Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 V c 24 a 100240
Resistance to voltage dips Conforming to
IEC/EN 61000-4-11
V 0 for 3 ms
70% of U for 500 ms
Associated protection A gG fuse, 05

Operational voltage V c 2042624 a 935264
Current consumption 50/60 Hz mA c 56127 a 8628
Cabling
Connectors Pitch mm 508 508
Flexible cable without cable end 1 conductor mm
2
0225 0225
2 identical conductors mm
2
0215 0215
Flexible cable with cable end
Without insulated ferrule 1 conductor mm
2
02525 02525
2
0515 0515
With insulated ferrule 1 conductor mm
2
02525 02525
2
021 021
Solid cable without cable end 1 conductor mm
2
0225 0225
2
021 021
Conductor size AWG 24 to AWG 14 AWG 24 to AWG 14
Flat screwdriver mm 3 3
Input characteristics
Nominal values Conforming to IEC/EN 61131-1 Type 1 positive logic (c: resistive, a: capacitive)
Voltage V c 24 a 100240 c 24 a 100240
Current mA c 7 a 31 for 100 V
a 75 for 240 V
c 7 a 31 for 100 V
a 75 for 240 V
Logic inputs Logic state 1 Voltage V 15 max 79 < U < 264 15 max 79 < U < 264
Current mA 2 min15 max 2 min at 110 V
3 min at 220 V
2 min15 max 2 min at 110 V
3 min at 220 V
Logic state 0 Voltage V 5 max 0 < U < 40 5 max 0 < U < 40
Current mA 15 max 15 max 15 max 15 max
Response time Change to state 1 ms 15 25 15 25
Change to state 0 ms 5 25 5 25
Output characteristics
Type Volt free, single break
Load
a
250 V / 5 A B300
c
30 V / 5 A
Permissible power in cat. AC-15 For 500 000 operating cycles VA 480 / Ie max: 2 A
Permissible power in cat. DC-13 For 500 000 operating cycles W 30 / Ie max: 125 A
Associated protection A gG fuse, 4
Max. frequency Hz 2
Max. operating level op.
cycles/h
1800
Response time Change to state 1 ms 10 max
Change to state 0 ms 10 max
Measurement details
Current 1 % for the 048 A and 13527 A ranges
2 % for the 5100 A range
Voltage 1% from 100 to 830 V
Earth fault current Internal measurement
without earth fault toroid
515 % for
current > 01 A in the 048 A range
External measurement
with earth fault toroid
< 5 % or 001 A
Temperature measurement 2 %
Power factor 3 % for a Cos j > 06
Active and reactive power 5 % (typical value)
Internal clock 30 min / year
6 6
6/83
6 6
Bus and network characteristics
Type of bus/network Modbus CANopen DeviceNet Profbus DP Ethernet
Physical interface 2-wire RS 485 ISO 11898 ISO 11898 polarised
2-wire RS 485
IEEE 8023
Addressing 1 to 247 1 to 127 1 to 64 1 to 125 0 to 159
Transmission speeds 12 to 192 K
bits/s
10, 20, 50, 125,
250, 500, 800
and 1000 K bits/s
+ Auto baud
125 to
500 K bits/s
96 K to
12 M bits/s
10/100 Mbit/s,
with
automatic
recognition
Connections RJ45/terminal
block
9-way SUB-D/
terminal block
Terminal block 9-way SUB-D/
terminal block
RJ45
Cables 2 shielded
twisted pairs
4 twisted,
shielded wires
4 twisted,
shielded wires
2 shielded
twisted pairs,
type A
2 shielded
twisted pairs
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA 22-2 n14
Product certifcations UL, CSA, CE, C-TICK, NOM, GOST
around the device
Storage C -40+80
Operation C -20+60
Relative humidity 1595 % without condensation
Protective treatment Conforming to
IEC/EN 60068-2-30
12 x 24 hour cycles
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60947-1 IP 54
Shock resistance Conforming to
IEC/EN 60068-2-27
15 gn / 11ms
Vibration resistance Conforming to
IEC/EN 60068-2-6
530 Hz
4 gn
Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 60947-1 C 650
Conforming to UL 94 V2
Electrical characteristics
Supply to the product Powered via the controller
Maximum current mA 140
Maximum power dissipated W 1
Resistance to
electromagnetic discharge
Conforming to
IEC/EN 61000-4-2
kV In open air: 8 Level 3
On contact: 4 Level 3
electromagnetic interference
Conforming to
IEC/EN 61000-4-3
V/m 10 - Level 3
Immunity to
fast transient bursts
Conforming to
IEC/EN 61000-4-4
kV 2, shielded access Level 3
Immunity to
radioelectric felds
Conforming to
IEC/EN 61000-4-6
V 10 Level 3
Immunity to shock waves Conforming to
IEC/EN 61000-4-5
kV 2, shielded access Level 3
Physical characteristics
Mounting Flush mounted
Display Backlit LCD
Signalling By 4 LEDs
Cabling RJ45
6/84
6 6 6 6
Characteristics(continued)
LT6 CTpppp external current transformer characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 60185, BS 7626
Precision Class 5P
Precision limit factor 15
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) 690
Maximum operating temperature C 50
Transformer ratio A 100/1 200/1 400/1 800/1
Diameter of conductor passage hole mm 35 35 35 35
Maximum cabling c.s.a. mm
2
30 x 10 30 x 10 30 x 10 incorporated (1)
Earth fault toroid characteristics
Toroid type 50437 50438 50439 50440 50441 50442 50485 50486
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 1000
Operating temperature C - 35+ 70
Protection index IP30 (connections IP20)
Transformer ratio 1/1000
Rated operational current le A 65 85 160 250 400 630 85 250
Max. conductor c.s.a. per phase mm
2
25 50 95 240 2 x
185
2 x
240
50 240
DA1 TTpp probe characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 60034-11 mark A
Economy resistor At 25 C W 3 x 250 in series
(Ue)
Per probe V c 25 max
(Ui)
kV 25
Insulation Reinforced
Length of connecting cables Between probes mm 250
Between probe and motor
terminal plate
m 1
Guaranteed operating zones: example with 3 probes type DA1 TTppp (250 W at 25 C) in series, conforming to standard EC 60034-11, mark A

1 3 probes type DA1ppp (250 W at 25 C) in series
NOT: Nominal Operating Temperature
Protection unit tripped
Protection unit reset
(1) Electrical connection to be made using M10 bolt.
10 000
4000
100
10
-20
20
750
1000
1650
1500
0
1
Economy resistor
(ohms)
Trip zone
Reset zone
Trip zone on
probe short-circuit
Temperature
(C)
N
O
T

+

1
5

C
N
O
T

+

5

C
N
O
T

-

2
0

C
N
O
T

-

5

C
N
O
T
10 000
4000
100
10
-20
20
750
1000
1650
1500
0
1
Economy resistor
(ohms)
Trip zone
Reset zone
Trip zone on
probe short-circuit
Temperature
(C)
N
O
T

+

1
5

C
N
O
T

+

5

C
N
O
T

-

2
0

C
N
O
T

-

5

C
N
O
T
6 6
6/85
6 6
Tripping curves
Cold state curves

Hot state curves

10 000
1000
100
10
1
t (s)
I/Ir
1 1,12 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Class 5
Class 10
Class 15
Class 20
Class 25
Class 30
10 000
1000
100
10
1
t (s)
I/Ir
1 1,12 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Class 5
Class 10
Class 15
Class 20
Class 25
Class 30
10 000
1000
100
10
1
t (s)
I/Ir
1 1,12 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Class 5
Class 10
Class 15
Class 20
Class 25
Class 30
10 000
1000
100
10
1
t (s)
I/Ir
1 1,12 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Class 5
Class 10
Class 15
Class 20
Class 25
Class 30
6/86
6 6 6 6
Controllers
Setting
range
Control
voltage
Current
range
Reference Weight
A V A kg
For Modbus
8 c 24 048 LTM R08MBD 0530
a 100240 V 048 LTM R08MFM 0530
27 c 24 13527 LTM R27MBD 0530
a 100240 V 13527 LTM R27MFM 0530
100 c 24 5100 LTM R100MBD 0530
a 100240 V 5100 LTM R100MFM 0530
For CANopen
8 c 24 048 LTM R08CBD 0530
a 100240 V 048 LTM R08CFM 0530
27 c 24 13527 LTM R27CBD 0530
a 100240 V 13527 LTM R27CFM 0530
100 c 24 5100 LTM R100CBD 0530
a 100240 V 5100 LTM R100CFM 0530
For DeviceNet
8 c 24 048 LTM R08DBD 0530
a 100240 V 048 LTM R08DFM 0530
27 c 24 13527 LTM R27DBD 0530
a 100240 V 13527 LTM R27DFM 0530
100 c 24 5100 LTM R100DBD 0530
a 100240 V 5100 LTM R100DFM 0530
For Profbus DP
8 c 24 048 LTM R08PBD 0530
a 100240 V 048 LTM R08PFM 0530
27 c 24 13527 LTM R27PBD 0530
a 100240 V 13527 LTM R27PFM 0530
100 c 24 5100 LTM R100PBD 0530
a 100240 V 5100 LTM R100PFM 0530
For Ethernet TCP/IP
8 c 24 048 LTM R08EBD 0530
a 100240 V 048 LTM R08EFM 0530
27 c 24 13527 LTM R27EBD 0530
a 100240 V 13527 LTM R27EFM 0530
100 c 24 5100 LTM R100EBD 0530
a 100240 V 5100 LTM R100EFM 0530
LTM R08MBD
5
2
6
3
8
7
LTM R08MBD
5
2
6
3
8
7
LTM R08CBD
5
2
6
3
8
8
LTM R08CBD
5
2
6
3
8
8
LTM R08DBD
5
2
6
3
8
9
LTM R08DBD
5
2
6
3
8
9
LTM R08PBD
5
2
6
3
9
0
LTM R08PBD
5
2
6
3
9
0
References
LTM R08EBD
5
2
6
3
9
1
6 6
6/87
6 6
Extension modules. with voltage measurement on the 3 phases
Input control
voltage
Number of
inputs
Supply to the electronics Reference Weight
V kg
c 24 4 Via the controller LTM EV40BD 0210
a 100240 4 Via the controller LTM EV40FM 0210
HMI terminals
Description Supply
Voltage
Reference Weight
kg
Operator control unit Supply
via the controller
LTM CU 0400
Magelis compact display c 24 V external XBT N410 0380
Description Number and type
of connectors
Length
m
Reference Weight
kg
Connecting cables
for the LTM CU control unit
2 x RJ45 1 VW3 A1 104R10 0065
3 VW3 A1 104R30 0140
5 VW3 A1 104R50 0210
Connecting cables
for the XBT N410
SUB-D 25-way female
RJ45
25 XBT Z938 0200
Cables
of connectors
Length Reference Weight
m kg
Connecting cables
For connecting the controller
to the extension module
2 x RJ45 004 LTM CC004 (1) 0120
03 LU9 R03 0045
1 LU9 R10 0065
Replacement connectors
of connectors
Reference Weight
kg
Complete set of
connectors for controllers
and extension modules
10 screw terminals
(all network versions included)
LTM 9TCS 0200
LTM EV40BD
5
2
6
3
8
0
LTM EV40BD
5
2
6
3
8
0
LTM CU
5
6
8
6
0
5
6/88
6 6 6 6
Confguration tools
kg
Connection kit
for PC serial port
for Modbus
multidrop connection
1 x 3 m length cable with two
RJ45 connectors,
1 RS 232/RS 485 converter with
one 9-way female SUB-D
connector and one RJ45
connector
b
b
VW3 A8 106
Interface for USB port
(for use with cable
VW3 A8 106)
Length: 18 m
1 USB cable, SUB-D 9-way
Drivers supplied on CD-Rom
b
b
SR2 CBL06 0350
Current transformers (1)
Operational current Reference Weight
Primary Secondary
A A kg
100 1 (2) LT6 CT1001 0550
200 1 (2) LT6 CT2001 0550
400 1 (2) LT6 CT4001 0550
800 1 (2) LT6 CT8001 0680
Earth fault toroids (marketed under the Schneider Electric brand)
Rated operational
current Ie
Internal
of toroid
Reference Weight
A mm kg
Closed toroids, type A
65 30 50437 0120
85 50 50438 0200
160 80 50439 0420
250 120 50440 0530
400 200 50441 1320
630 300 50442 2230
Split toroids, type OA
85 46 50485 1300
250 110 50486 3200
PTC thermistor probes (3)
Description Nominal
Operating
Temperature
(NOT)
Colour Unit
reference (4)
Weight
C kg
Triple probes 90 Green/green DA1 TT090 0010
110 Brown/brown DA1 TT110 0010
120 Grey/grey DA1 TT120 0010
130 Blue/blue DA1 TT130 0010
140 White/blue DA1 TT140 0010
150 Black/black DA1 TT150 0010
160 Blue/red DA1 TT160 0010
170 White/green DA1 TT170 0010
(1) The transformers offered for use with TeSys U starters are suitable. Please consult our
"TeSys U starter-controllers" catalogue.
(2) For use with LTM R08pp controllers.
(3) PTC: Positive Temperature Coeffcient.
LT6 CT4001
5
2
6
3
9
2
LT6 CT4001
5
2
6
3
9
2
DA1 TTppp
5
1
0
5
7
5
DA1 TTppp
5
1
0
5
7
5
6 6
6/89
6 6
Marking accessories (to be ordered separately)
Description Composition Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Clip-in markers
(maximum of 5 per unit)
numbers (0 to 9)
25 AB1 Rp (1) 0002
capital letters (A to Z)
25 AB1 Gp (1) 0002
Description Length Reference Weight
m kg
For Modbus connection
Cables ftted with
2 x RJ45 connectors
03 VW3 A8 306 R03 0045
1 VW3 A8 306 R10 0065
3 VW3 A8 306 R30 0125
T-junctions 03 VW3 A8 306 TF03 0032
1 VW3 A8 306 TF10 0032
RS 485 line terminator VW3 A8 306 R 0012
For CANopen connection
Cables 50 TSX CAN CA50 4930
100 TSX CAN CA100 8800
300 TSX CAN CA300 24560
IP20 connectors
SUB-D 9-way female
Line end adapter switch
Elbowed (90) TSX CAN KCDF 90T 0046
Straight TSX CAN KCDF 180T 0049
Elbowed (90) with
SUB-D 9-way
connector for
connection to
PC or diagnostic tool
TSX CAN KCDF 90TP 0051
For DeviceNet connection
Cables 50 TSX CAN CA50 4930
100 TSX CAN CA100 8800
300 TSX CAN CA300 24560
For Profbus DP connection (2)
Cables 100 TSX PBSCA100
400 TSX PBSCA400
Connectors With line terminator 490 NAD 911 03
Without line terminator 490 NAD 911 04
With line terminator
and terminal port
490 NAD 911 05
For Ethernet TCP/IP connection
Shielded twisted pair cables to standard EIA/TIA568
Cables ftted with
2 x RJ45 connectors
for connection to
terminal equipment
Straight 2 490 NTW 000 02
5 490 NTW 000 05
12 490 NTW 000 12
40 490 NTW 000 40
80 490 NTW 000 80
Shielded twisted pair cables, UL and CSA 22.1 approved
Cables ftted with
2 x RJ45 connectors
for connection to
terminal equipment
Straight 2 490 NTW 000 02U
5 490 NTW 000 05U
12 490 NTW 000 12U
40 490 NTW 000 40U
80 490 NTW 000 80U
(2) To order other connectors and cables (UL cables for harsh environments, etc.), please
consult our Customer Care Centre.
6/90
6 6 6 6
LTM Rpp controllers

LTM EV40pp extension modules

Panel mounting, cut-out
23
50
117
7
0
92
4
5
(1) 140 mm with RJ45 connector for connection to extension module and to network,
166 mm with Profbus DP/CANopen connector.
(2) Leave a gap around the device of: 9 mm at 45 C, 9 to 40 mm from 45 to 50 C, 40 mm at 60 C.
5,2 91
(2) (2)
122,5 (1)
6
1
3
0
,
2
(
2
)
(
2
)
5,2 91
(2) (2)
122,5 (1)
6
1
3
0
,
2
(
2
)
(
2
)
5,5 45
120,7 (1)
6
1
3
0
,
2
5,5 45
120,7 (1)
6
1
3
0
,
2

6 6
6/91
6 6
Current transformers HMI terminal
LT6 CT XBT N410

(1) 104 mm with fxing clips (supplied with the product).
(2) 58 mm with SUB-D 25-way elbowed cable XBT Z9680 for Twido, TSX Micro and
Premium or XBT Z998 for Advantys STB.
104 mm with SUB-D 25-way cable XBT Z68/Z9681 for Twido, TSX Micro and Premium
Earth fault toroids
50437 and 50438 50439, 50440 and 50441

Type b b1 c c1 c2 H Type a a1 b b1 b2 c c1 G H J K
50437 83 53 30 60 31 50 50439 265 44 122 80 55 80 150 35 65 126 40
50438 109 66 50 87 45 60 50440 265 44 164 80 55 120 190 35 65 166 40
50441 29 46 256 120 90 196 274 37 104 254 60
50442 50485 and 50486

Type a b c G
50485 72 148 46 57
50486 78 224 110 76
2
,
5
35 25 5 5 25
95
3
5 1
0
7
3
0
4
2
1
0
1
0
2
,
5
2
0
42,5 42,5 5 5
2
,
5
35 25 5 5 25
95
3
5 1
0
7
3
0
4
2
1
0
1
0
2
,
5
2
0
42,5 42,5 5 5
132
7
4

(
1
)
6
(
2
)
132
7
4

(
1
)
6
(
2
)
c1
c2
8
H
b
1
b
29
21
4
1
6
c1
c2
8
H
b
1
b
29
21
4
1
6
H
a
G
a1
J
c1
b
2
K
b
1
H
a
G
a1
J
c1
b
2
K
b
1
3
4
4
29 299
3
4
4
29 299
a
G
a
G

6/92
6 6 6 6
Schemes
Schemes
Overload mode
3-wire local-control

(1) Connection of a single-phase motor is possible. In this case, do not use the central current transformer.
Independent mode
3-wire local-control\

2-wire local-control 3-wire with switchable local/network control 2-wire with switchable local/network control

L : Local control
O : Stop
N : Network control
LTM R 2
4
3
3
3
4
1
3
1
4
2
3
9
6
9
5
9
8
9
7
I
.
6
C
I
.
5
I
.
4
C
I
.
3
I
.
2
C
I
.
1
A
2
A
1
KM1
KM1
O.1 O.2 O.3
O.4
M
3
Stop
Start
LTM R 2
4
3
3
3
4
1
3
1
4
2
3
9
6
9
5
9
8
9
7
I
.
6
C
I
.
5
I
.
4
C
I
.
3
I
.
2
C
I
.
1
A
2
A
1
KM1
KM1
O.1 O.2 O.3
O.4
M
3
Stop
Start
LTM R 2
4
3
3
3
4
1
3
1
4
2
3
9
6
9
5
9
8
9
7
I
.
6
C
I
.
5
I
.
4
C
I
.
3
I
.
2
C
I
.
1
A
2
A
1
KM1
O.1 O.2 O.3
O.4
M
3
KM1
Stop
Start
LTM R 2
4
3
3
3
4
1
3
1
4
2
3
9
6
9
5
9
8
9
7
I
.
6
C
I
.
5
I
.
4
C
I
.
3
I
.
2
C
I
.
1
A
2
A
1
KM1
O.1 O.2 O.3
O.4
M
3
KM1
Stop
Start
9
6
9
5
9
8
9
7
I
.
6
C
I
.
5
I
.
4
C
I
.
3
I
.
2
C
I
.
1
O.4
Start/Stop
9
6
9
5
9
8
9
7
I
.
6
C
I
.
5
I
.
4
C
I
.
3
I
.
2
C
I
.
1
O.4
Start/Stop
9
6
9
5
9
8
9
7
I
.
6
C
I
.
5
I
.
4
C
I
.
3
I
.
2
C
I
.
1
O.4
N L O
Start
Stop
9
6
9
5
9
8
9
7
I
.
6
C
I
.
5
I
.
4
C
I
.
3
I
.
2
C
I
.
1
O.4
N L O
Start
Stop
9
6
9
5
9
8
9
7
I
.
6
C
I
.
5
I
.
4
C
I
.
3
I
.
2
C
I
.
1
O.4
N L O
9
6
9
5
9
8
9
7
I
.
6
C
I
.
5
I
.
4
C
I
.
3
I
.
2
C
I
.
1
O.4
N L O

(1)
6 6
6/93
6 6
Schemes (continued)
Schemes (continued)
Reverser mode

2-step mode, star-delta application

(1) Contacts for interlocking KM1 and KM2 are not obligatory because the controller electronically interlocks outputs O.1 and O.2.
LTM R 2
4
3
3
3
4
1
3
1
4
2
3
9
6
9
5
9
8
9
7
I
.
6
C
I
.
5
I
.
4
C
I
.
3
I
.
2
C
I
.
1
A
2
A
1
KM2 KM1
KM1
KM2
KM2
KM1 (1)
O.1 O.2 O.3
O.4
M
3
Stop
Start
Forw
Start
Rev
LTM R 2
4
3
3
3
4
1
3
1
4
2
3
9
6
9
5
9
8
9
7
I
.
6
C
I
.
5
I
.
4
C
I
.
3
I
.
2
C
I
.
1
A
2
A
1
KM2 KM1
KM1
KM2
KM2
KM1 (1)
O.1 O.2 O.3
O.4
M
3
Stop
Start
Forw
Start
Rev
LTM R 2
4
3
3
3
4
1
3
1
4
2
3
9
6
9
5
9
8
9
7
I
.
6
C
I
.
5
I
.
4
C
I
.
3
I
.
2
C
I
.
1
A
2
A
1
KM2 KM3
KM1
KM3 KM3
KM2 KM3
KM1 KM1 (1)
O.1 O.2 O.3
O.4
KM1
M
3
Stop Start
LTM R 2
4
3
3
3
4
1
3
1
4
2
3
9
6
9
5
9
8
9
7
I
.
6
C
I
.
5
I
.
4
C
I
.
3
I
.
2
C
I
.
1
A
2
A
1
KM2 KM3
KM1
KM3 KM3
KM2 KM3
KM1 KM1 (1)
O.1 O.2 O.3
O.4
KM1
M
3
Stop Start

6/94
6 6 6 6
Schemes (continued)
Schemes (continued)
2-step mode, primary resistor application

2-speed mode, Dahlander application

(1) For a Dahlander application, all the power cables must pass through current transformers. The controller can also be placed upstream of the contactor. In this
case, and if the Dahlander motor is used in "variable torque" mode, all the cables downstream of the contactors must be of identical size.
(2) Contacts for interlocking KM1 and KM2 are not obligatory because the controller electronically interlocks outputs O.1 and O.2.
LTM R 2
4
3
3
3
4
1
3
1
4
2
3
9
6
9
5
9
8
9
7
I
.
6
C
I
.
5
I
.
4
C
I
.
3
I
.
2
C
I
.
1
A
2
A
1
KM2 KM1
KM1 KM2
O.1 O.2 O.3
O.4
M
3
Stop Start
LTM R 2
4
3
3
3
4
1
3
1
4
2
3
9
6
9
5
9
8
9
7
I
.
6
C
I
.
5
I
.
4
C
I
.
3
I
.
2
C
I
.
1
A
2
A
1
KM2 KM1
KM1 KM2
O.1 O.2 O.3
O.4
M
3
Stop Start
LTM R 2
4
3
3
3
4
1
3
1
4
2
3
9
6
9
5
9
8
9
7
I
.
6
C
I
.
5
I
.
4
C
I
.
3
I
.
2
C
I
.
1
A
2
A
1
KM1 KM3
O.1 O.2 O.3
O.4
KM1
KM2
KM2 KM3
KM2 KM1 (2)
(1)
KM2
M
3
Low
speed
High
speed Stop
LTM R 2
4
3
3
3
4
1
3
1
4
2
3
9
6
9
5
9
8
9
7
I
.
6
C
I
.
5
I
.
4
C
I
.
3
I
.
2
C
I
.
1
A
2
A
1
KM1 KM3
O.1 O.2 O.3
O.4
KM1
KM2
KM2 KM3
KM2 KM1 (2)
(1)
KM2
M
3
Low
speed
High
speed Stop

6 6
6/95
6 6
Schemes (continued)
Schemes (continued)
Earth fault toroid and motor temperature probe connection

Connection of outputs for motor control mode function
Without intermediate relay With intermediate relay

2
4
3
3
3
4
1
3
1
4
2
3
O.1 O.2
Z1 Z2 T1 T2
O.3
LTM R 2
4
3
3
3
4
1
3
1
4
2
3
O.1 O.2
Z1 Z2 T1 T2
O.3
LTM R
M
3
LTM R 1
3
1
4
KM1
O.1
KM1
M
3
LTM R 1
3
1
4
KM1
O.1
KM1
M
3
LTM R 1
3
1
4
KM1
O.1
KA1 KM1
M
3
LTM R 1
3
1
4
KM1
O.1
KA1 KM1

6/96
6 6
6/96
6 6
Combinations for customer
assembly
0.37 to 355 kW at 400/415 V: type 2 coordination
With switch-disconnector, contactor and class 10 controller
400/415 V
Switch-
disconnector
aM fuses Contactor TeSys T
controller
External current
transformer
P Ie Reference (1) Size Rating Reference (2) Reference Reference
kW A A
0.37 11 GS1 DD 10 x 38 2 LC1 D09 LTM R08pp
0.55 15 GS1 DD 10 x 38 2 LC1 D09 LTM R08pp
0.75 19 GS1 DD 10 x 38 4 LC1 D09 LTM R08pp
1.1 27 GS1 DD 10 x 38 4 LC1 D09 LTM R08pp
1.5 36 GS1 DD 10 x 38 4 LC1 D09 LTM R08pp
2.2 49 GS1 DD 10 x 38 6 LC1 D09 LTM R08pp
3 65 GS1 DD 10 x 38 8 LC1 D09 LTM R27pp
4 85 GS1 DD 10 x 38 10 LC1 D09 LTM R27pp
5.5 115 GS1 DD 10 x 38 16 LC1 D12 LTM R27pp
7.5 155 GS1 DD 10 x 38 16 LC1 D25 LTM R27pp
10 19 GSp F 14 x 51 25 LC1 D25 LTM R27pp
11 22 GSp F 14 x 51 25 LC1 D25 LTM R27pp
15 29 GSp F 14 x 51 32 LC1 D32 LTM R100pp
18.5 35 GSp F 14 x 51 40 LC1 D40A LTM R100pp
22 41 GSp J 22 x 58 50 LC1 D50A LTM R100pp
37 66 GSp J 22 x 58 100 LC1 D80 LTM R100pp
45 80 GSp J 22 x 58 100 LC1 D95 LTM R100pp
55 97 GSp K T00 125 LC1 D115 LTM R08pp LT6 CT2001
75 132 GSp L T0 160 LC1 D150 LTM R08pp LT6 CT2001
90 160 GSp N T1 200 LC1 F185 LTM R08pp LT6 CT2001
132 230 GSp QQ T2 315 LC1 F265 LTM R08pp LT6 CT4001
200 350 GS2 S T3 500 LC1 F400 LTM R08pp LT6 CT8001
355 610 GS2 V T4 800 LC1 F630 LTM R08pp LT6 CT8001
(1) GSp: GS1 for direct operator, GS2 for external operator.
(2) For reversing operation, replace the prefx LC1 with LC2.
6 6
6/97
6 6
6/97
assembly (continued)
0.06 to 250 kW at 400/415 V: type 2 coordination
With circuit-breaker, contactor and class 10 controller
in category AC-3
400/415 V
Circuit-breaker Contactor TeSys T
controller
External current
transformer
P Ie Icc Reference Reference Reference Reference
kW A kA
0.06 02 130 GV2 L03 LC1 D09 LTM R08pp
0.09 03 130 GV2 L03 LC1 D09 LTM R08pp
0.12 044 130 GV2 L04 LC1 D09 LTM R08pp
0.18 06 130 GV2 L04 LC1 D09 LTM R08pp
0.25 085 130 GV2 L05 LC1 D09 LTM R08pp
0.37 11 130 GV2 L05 LC1 D09 LTM R08pp
0.55 15 130 GV2 L06 LC1 D09 LTM R08pp
0.75 19 130 GV2 L07 LC1 D09 LTM R08pp
1.1 27 130 GV2 L07 LC1 D18 LTM R08pp
1.5 36 130 GV2 L08 LC1 D18 LTM R08pp
2.2 49 130 GV2 L10 LC1 D18 LTM R08pp
3 65 130 GV2 L14 LC1 D18 LTM R08pp
4 85 130 GV2 L14 LC1 D18 LTM R27pp
5.5 115 130 GV2 L16 LC1 D25 LTM R27pp
7.5 155 50 GV2 L20 LC1 D25 LTM R27pp
9 181 50 GV2 L22 LC1 D25 LTM R27pp
11 22 50 GV2 L22 LC1 D25 LTM R27pp
15 29 50 GV3 L32 LC1 D40A LTM R100pp
18.5 35 50 GV3 L40 LC1 D50A LTM R100pp
22 41 50 GV3 L50 LC1 D50A LTM R100pp
30 55 50 GV3 L65 LC1 D65A LTM R100pp
37 66 70 NS80HMA LC1 D80 LTM R100pp
45 80 25 NS100HMA LC1 D115 LTM R100pp
45 80 70 NS100HMA LC1 D115 LTM R100pp
6/98
6 6
6/98
6 6
0.06 to 250 kW at 400/415 V: type 2 coordination (continued)
With circuit-breaker, contactor and class 10 controller
in category AC-3
400/415 V
Circuit-breaker Contactor TeSys T
controller
External current
transformer
P Ie Icc Reference Reference Reference Reference
kW A kA
55 97 36 NS160NMA LC1 D115 LTM R08pp LT6 CT2001
55 97 70 NS160HMA LC1 D115 LTM R08pp LT6 CT2001
75 132 36 NS160NMA LC1 D150 LTM R08pp LT6 CT2001
75 132 70 NS160HMA LC1 D150 LTM R08pp LT6 CT2001
90 160 36 NS250NMA LC1 F185 LTM R08pp LT6 CT2001
90 160 70 NS250HMA LC1 F185 LTM R08pp LT6 CT2001
110 195 36 NS250NMA LC1 F225 LTM R08pp LT6 CT2001
132 230 130 NS400LMA LC1 F265 LTM R08pp LT6 CT4001
Substitution table
Old range
LT6 P multifunction protection relay
New range
TeSys T controllers
Motor current Reference Reference External current
transformer
Reference
Reference Reference External current
transformer
Reference
a 100240 V c 24 V a 100240 V c 24 V
I < 5 A LT6 P0M005FM LT6 P0M005S144 LTM R08pFM LTM R08pBD
5 A < I < 25 A LT6 P0M025FM LT6 P0M025S144 LTM R27pFM LTM R27pBD
25 A < I < 100 A LT6 P0M005FM LT6 P0M005S144 LT6 CT1001 LTM R100pFM LTM R100pBD
100 A < I < 200 A LT6 P0M005FM LT6 P0M005S144 LT6 CT2001 LTM R08pFM LTM R08pBD LT6 CT2001
6 6
6/99
6 6
6/99
0.37 to 400 kW at 690 V: type 2 coordination
With switch-disconnector, contactor and class 10 controller
Switch-
disconnector
(1)
aM fuses Contactor TeSys T
controller
External current
tranformer
P Ie Reference Size Rating Reference Reference Reference
kW A A
0.37 064 GSp F 14 x 51 1 LC1 D09 LTM R08pp
0.55 087 GSp F 14 x 51 2 LC1 D09 LTM R08pp
0.75 11 GSp F 14 x 51 2 LC1 D09 LTM R08pp
1.1 16 GSp F 14 x 51 2 LC1 D09 LTM R08pp
1.5 21 GSp F 14 x 51 4 LC1 D09 LTM R08pp
2.2 28 GSp F 14 x 51 4 LC1 D09 LTM R08pp
3 38 GSp F 14 x 51 6 LC1 D09 LTM R08pp
4 49 GSp F 14 x 51 6 LC1 D09 LTM R08pp
5.5 67 GSp F 14 x 51 8 LC1 D25 LTM R08pp
7.5 89 GSp F 14 x 51 10 LC1 D25 LTM R27pp
11 128 GSp F 14 x 51 16 LC1 D25 LTM R27pp
15 17 GSp G T000 20 LC1 D32 LTM R27pp
18.5 21 GSp G T000 25 LC1 D32 LTM R27pp
22 24 GSp G T000 32 LC1 D40A LTM R27pp
30 32 GSp G T000 40 LC1 D50A LTM R100pp
45 47 GSp J 22 x 58 63 LC1 D80 LTM R100pp
55 57 GSp J 22 x 58 80 LC1 D115 LTM R100pp
75 77 GSp KK T00 100 LC1 D115 LTM R100pp
90 93 GSp KK T00 125 LC1 F150 LTM R08pp LT6 CT2001
110 113 GSp KK T00 125 LC1 F185 LTM R08pp LT6 CT2001
132 134 GSp L T0 160 LC1 F265 LTM R08pp LT6 CT2001
(1) GSp: GS1 for direct operator, GS2 for external operator.
7

7/2
7/1
7
Contents
7-TeSyscontrolrelays
TeSys K control relays
Fora.c.ord.c.controlcircuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page7/5
Ford.c.controlcircuit(lowconsumption). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/6
Instantaneousandtimedelayauxiliarycontactblocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/7
Mountingandmarkingaccessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/8
TeSys SK mini-control relays
Mini-controlrelaysCA2SKandCA3SK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/13
Mini-controlrelaywithalternatingcontactsCA2SKE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/13
Instantaneousauxiliarycontactsandcoilsuppressormodules. . . . . . . page 7/14
TeSys D control relays and add-on blocks
Controlcircuit:a.c.,d.c.orlowconsumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/22
Add-onblocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/23
Accessoriesandspareparts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/24
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
7/2
7
Characteristics
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC60947,NFC63-140,VDE0660,BS5424
Product certifcations UL,CSA
Operating positions Vertical axis Horizontal axis
Withoutderating Withoutderating Possiblepositionsfor
CA2 Konly,withderating,
pleaseconsultyour
Regional Sales Offce.
Connection Min. Max. Max. to IEC 60947
Screwclampconnections Solidcable mm
2
1x1.5 2x4 1x4+1x2.5
2
1x0.75 2x4 2x2.5
2
1x0.34 1x1.5+1x2.5 1x1.5+1x2.5
Springterminals Solidcable mm
2
1x0.75 1x1.5 2x1.5
2
1x0.75 1x1.5 2x1.5
Fastonconnectors Clip mm 2x2.8or1x6.35
Solderpinsfor
printedcircuitboard
Withlocatingdevicebetween
powerandcontrolcircuits
4mmx35microns
Tightening torque Philipsheadn2and6 N.m 0.81.3
Terminal referencing Conformingtostandards
EN50005andEN50011
Upto8contacts
Protective treatment Conf.toIEC60068(DIN50016) TC(Klimafest,Climateproof)
Degree of protection ConformingtoVDE0106 Protection against direct fnger contact
(deviceswithscrewclampterminalsorpinsforprintedcircuitboard)
aroundthedevice
Storage C -50...+80
Operation C -25...+50
Maximum operating altitude Withoutderating m 2000
Vibration resistance Controlrelayopen 2gn
5...300Hz Controlrelayclosed 4gn
Flame resistance ConformingtoUL94 Self-extinguishingmaterialV1
ConformingtoNFF16-101
and16-102
Conformingtorequirement2
Shock resistance
(1/2sinewave,11ms)
Controlrelayopen 10gn
Controlrelayclosed 15gn
Safety separation of circuits ConformingtoVDE0106
andIEC60536
SELV(SafetyExtraLowVoltage),upto400V
Control relay type CA2 K CA3 K CA4 K
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) V a 12...690 c 12...250 c 12...120
(y 50 C) single voltage coil
Foroperation 0.8...1.15Uc 0.8...1.15Uc 0.7...1.3Uc
Fordrop-out y0.2Uc y0.1Uc y0.1Uc
Inmillionsofoperatingcycles
50/60Hzcoil 10
Standardccoil 20
Widerange,
lowconsumptionccoil
30
Maximum operating rate Inoperatingcyclesperhour 10000 10000 6000
Average consumption
at20CandatUc
Inrush 30VA 3W 1.8W
Sealed 4.5VA 3W 1.8W
Heat dissipation W 1.3 3 1.8
Operating time
at20CandatUc
Betweencoilenergisationand
openingoftheN/Ccontacts ms 5...15 25...35 25...35
closingoftheN/Ocontacts ms 10...20 30...40 30...40
Betweencoilde-energisationand
openingoftheN/Ocontacts ms 10...20 10 10...20
closingoftheN/Ccontacts ms 15...25 15 15...25
Maximum immunity to microbreaks ms 2 2 2
References:
pages7/4and7/5
Dimensions:
page7/8
Schemes:
page7/9
References:
pages7/4and7/5
Dimensions:
page7/8
Schemes:
page7/9
References:
pages7/4and7/5
Dimensions:
page7/8
Schemes:
page7/9
References:
pages7/4and7/5
Dimensions:
page7/8
Schemes:
page7/9
Control relays
TeSysKcontrolrelays
7/3
7
Contact characteristics of control relays and instantaneous contact blocks
Number of auxiliary contacts On CAp K 4
On LA1 K 2or4for CA2 KandCA3 K,2forCA4 K
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Upto V 690
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) ConformingtoBS5424 V 690
ConformingtoIEC60947 V 690
ConformingtoVDE0110groupC V 750
ConformingtoCSAC22-2n14 V 600
(Ith)
Forambienttemperaturey 50C A 10
Frequency of the operational current Hz Upto400
Minimum switching capacity Umin(DIN19240) V 17
Imin mA 5
Short-circuit protection ConformingtoIEC60947
andVDE0660,gGfuse
A 10
Rated making capacity ConformingtoIEC60947
Irms A 110
Short-time rating Permissiblefor
1s A 80
500ms A 90
100ms A 110
Insulation resistance MW >10
Non-overlap distance CApKandLA1K:linked
contactsconformingtoINRS,
BIA and CNA specifcations
mm 0.5(seeschemespage7/9)
a.c. supply, category AC-15 d.c. supply, category DC-13
Electricaldurability(validforupto3600
operatingcycles/hour)onaninductiveload
suchasthecoilofanelectromagnet:
makingcurrent(cosj0.7)=10timesthe
powerbroken(cosj0.4)
Electricaldurability(validforupto
1200operatingcycles/hour)onan
inductiveloadsuchasthecoilofan
electromagnet,withouteconomy
resistor,thetimeconstantincreasing
withtheload.
V 24 48 110/
127
220/
230
380/
400
440 600/
690
V 24 48 110 220 440 600
1millionoperatingcycles VA 48 96 240 440 800 880 1200 W 120 80 60 52 51 50
Occasionalmakingcapacity VA 1000 2050 5000 10000 14000 13000 9000 W 720 600 400 300 230 200
1 Breakinglimitofcontactsvalidfor:
maximumof50operatingcyclesat10sintervals
(powerbroken=makingcurrentxcosj0.7).
2 Electricaldurabilityofcontactsfor:
1millionoperatingcycles(2a)
3millionoperatingcycles(2b)
10millionoperatingcycles(2c).
3 Breakinglimitofcontactsvalidfor:
maximumof20operatingcyclesat10sintervalswith
currentpassingfor0.5speroperatingcycle.
4 Thermallimit
b
b
b
b
b

10 000
5000
3000
2000
1000
800
600
500
400
300
200
100
80
60
24 48 110 220
440 690 V 120
380 500
40
16 000
8000
6000
4000
2c
2b
4
1
2a
PowerbrokeninVA
10 000
5000
3000
2000
1000
800
600
500
400
300
200
100
80
60
24 48 110 220
440 690 V 120
380 500
40
16 000
8000
6000
4000
2c
2b
4
1
2a
PowerbrokeninVA
1000
700
500
300
200
100
80
60
50
40
30
20
10
8
6
12 24 48 110 220 440 600 V
250
200
140
100
50
20
2c
2a
3
4
2b
PowerbrokeninW
T
i
m
e
c
o
n
s
t
a
n
t
i
n
m
s
1000
700
500
300
200
100
80
60
50
40
30
20
10
8
6
12 24 48 110 220 440 600 V
250
200
140
100
50
20
2c
2a
3
4
2b
PowerbrokeninW
T
i
m
e
c
o
n
s
t
a
n
t
i
n
m
s
References:
pages7/4and7/5
Dimensions:
page7/8
Schemes:
page7/9
References:
pages7/4and7/5
Dimensions:
page7/8
Schemes:
page7/9
References:
pages7/4and7/5
Dimensions:
page7/8
Schemes:
page7/9
References:
pages7/4and7/5
Dimensions:
page7/8
Schemes:
page7/9
Control relays
TeSysKcontrolrelays
7/4
7
References
Control relays for a.c. control circuit
Mountingon35mm7 rail or 4 screw fxing.
Screwsintheopenready-to-tightenposition.
b
b
Control circuit
Consumption
Auxiliary
contacts
Basic reference,
Weight
kg
4.5VA 4 CA2 KN40pp 0.180
3 1 CA2 KN31pp 0.180
2 2 CA2 KN22pp 0.180
4.5VA 4 CA2 KN403pp 0.180
3 1 CA2 KN313pp 0.180
2 2 CA2 KN223pp 0.180
Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8
4.5VA 4 CA2 KN407pp 0.180
3 1 CA2 KN317pp 0.180
2 2 CA2 KN227pp 0.180
4.5VA 4 CA2 KN405pp 0.210
3 1 CA2 KN315pp 0.210
2 2 CA2 KN225pp 0.210
Control relays for d.c. control circuit
b
b
3W 4 CA3 KN40pp 0.225
3 1 CA3 KN31pp 0.225
2 2 CA3 KN22pp 0.225
3W 4 CA3 KN403pp 0.225
3 1 CA3 KN313pp 0.225
2 2 CA3 KN223pp 0.225
3W 4 CA3 KN407pp 0.225
3 1 CA3 KN317pp 0.225
2 2 CA3 KN227pp 0.225
3W 4 CA3 KN405pp 0.255
3 1 CA3 KN315pp 0.255
2 2 CA3 KN225pp 0.255
Control relays CA2 K (0.8...1.15Uc)(0.85...1.1 Uc)
Volts a 12 20 24(2) 36 42 48 110 115 127 220/ 230 230/ 380/ 400 400/ 440 500 660/
50/60 Hz 230 240 400 415 690
Code J7 Z7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 FC7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 S7 Y7
Uptoandincluding240V,coilwithintegralsuppressiondeviceavailable:add2tothecoderequired.Example:J72
Control relays CA3 K (0.8...1.15Uc)
Volts c 12 20 24(2) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 200 220 230 240 250
Code JD ZD BD CD ED ND SD KD FD GD LD MD MPD MUD UD
Coilwithintegralsuppressiondeviceavailable:add3tothecoderequired.Example:JD3.
(2) When connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the coil of the control relay, select a 20 V coil (a code Z7,
c code ZD) so as to compensate for the incurred voltage drop.
CA2 KN40pp
8
1
6
8
9
2
CA2 KN40pp
8
1
6
8
9
2
CA3 KN407pp
8
1
9
4
1
1
CA3 KN407pp
8
1
9
4
1
1
CA2 KN403pp
8
1
6
8
9
1
CA2 KN403pp
8
1
6
8
9
1
Characteristics:
pages7/2and7/3
Dimensions:
page7/8
Schemes:
page7/9
Characteristics:
pages7/2and7/3
Dimensions:
page7/8
Schemes:
page7/9
Characteristics:
pages7/2and7/3
Dimensions:
page7/8
Schemes:
page7/9
Characteristics:
pages7/2and7/3
Dimensions:
page7/8
Schemes:
page7/9
Control relays
TeSysKcontrolrelays
Fora.c.ord.c.controlcircuit
7/5
7
References
Low consumption control relays (d.c. control circuit)
b
b
Control circuit
Consumption
Auxiliary
contacts
Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (1)
Weight
kg
1.8W 4 CA4 KN40pp 0.235
3 1 CA4 KN31pp 0.235
2 2 CA4 KN22pp 0.235
1.8W 4 CA4 KN403pp 0.235
3 1 CA4 KN313pp 0.235
2 2 CA4 KN223pp 0.235
1.8W 4 CA4 KN407pp 0.235
3 1 CA4 KN317pp 0.235
2 2 CA4 KN227pp 0.235
1.8W 4 CA4 KN405pp 0.265
3 1 CA4 KN315pp 0.265
2 2 CA4 KN225pp 0.265
Control relays CA4 K (Widerangecoil:0.7...1.3Uc)
Volts c 12 20 24 48 72 110 120
CA4 KN40ppp
8
1
6
8
9
5
CA4 KN40ppp
8
1
6
8
9
5
Control relays
TeSysKcontrolrelays
Ford.c.controlcircuit
Characteristics:
pages7/2and7/3
Dimensions:
page7/8
Schemes:
page7/9
Characteristics:
pages7/2and7/3
Dimensions:
page7/8
Schemes:
page7/9
7/6
7
References
Clip-on front mounting, 1 per control relay
Connection Composition Reference Weight
kg
Screw clamp terminals 2 LA1 KN20 0.045
2 LA1 KN02 0.045
1 1 LA1 KN11 0.045
4 LA1 KN40 (1) 0.045
3 1 LA1 KN31 (1) 0.045
2 2 LA1 KN22 (1) 0.045
1 3 LA1 KN13 (1) 0.045
4 LA1 KN04 (1) 0.045
Spring terminals 2 LA1 KN203 0.045
2 LA1 KN023 0.045
1 1 LA1 KN113 0.045
4 LA1 KN403 (1) 0.045
3 1 LA1 KN313 (1) 0.045
2 2 LA1 KN223 (1) 0.045
1 3 LA1 KN133 (1) 0.045
4 LA1 KN043 (1) 0.045
Faston connectors
1x6.35or2x2.8
2 LA1 KN207 0.045
2 LA1 KN027 0.045
1 1 LA1 KN117 0.045
4 LA1 KN407 (1) 0.045
3 1 LA1 KN317 (1) 0.045
2 2 LA1 KN227 (1) 0.045
1 3 LA1 KN137 (1) 0.045
4 LA1 KN047 (1) 0.045
Relayoutputwithcommonpointchangeovercontact,aorc240V,2Amaximum
Controlvoltage0.85...1.1Uc
Maximumswitchingcapacity250VAor150W
Operatingtemperature-10...+60C
Resettime:1.5sduringthetimedelayperiod0.5safterthetimedelayperiod
b
b
b
b
b
Clip-on front mounting, 1 per control relay
Voltage Type Timing
range
V s kg
aorc24...48 On-delay 1...30 1 LA2 KT2E 0.040
a110...240 On-delay 1...30 1 LA2 KT2U 0.040
Other versions ElectronictimerstypeRE4.
(1) Block of 4 contacts for use on CA2K and CA3K.
LA1 KN20
8
1
6
8
9
9
LA1 KN20
8
1
6
8
9
9
LA2 KT2p
8
1
6
8
9
9
LA2 KT2p
8
1
6
8
9
9
Characteristics:
page7/3
Dimensions:
page7/8
Schemes:
page7/9
Characteristics:
page7/3
Dimensions:
page7/8
Schemes:
page7/9
Characteristics:
page7/3
Dimensions:
page7/8
Schemes:
page7/9
Characteristics:
page7/3
Dimensions:
page7/8
Schemes:
page7/9
Control relays
TeSysKcontrolrelays
Instantaneousandtimedelayauxiliarycontactblocks
7/7
7
References
Suppressor modules incorporating LED indicator
Mounting
and connection
Type For
voltages
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Clipsontofrontofrelay
withlocatingdevice.
Notoolsrequired.
Varistor(1) aandc
12...24V
5 LA4 KE1B 0.010
aandc
32...48V
5 LA4 KE1E 0.010
aandc
50...129V
5 LA4 KE1FC 0.010
aandc
130...250V
5 LA4 KE1UG 0.010
Diode+Zenerdiode (2)
c
12...24V
5 LA4 KC1B 0.010
c
32...48V
5 LA4 KC1E 0.010
RC(3)
a
220...250V
5 LA4 KA1U 0.010
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Mounting plates On14rail Clip-on 1 LA9 D973 0.025
On24rails 110/120mm
fxing centres
10 DX1 AP25 0.065
Marking accessories
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Marker holder Clip-on fxing on front face 100 LA9 D90 0.001
Clip-inmarkers 4maximumperrelay Stripsof10
identical
numbers0to9
25 AB1 Rp(4) 0.002
Stripsof10
identicalcapital
lettersAtoZ
25 AB1 Gp (4) 0.002
(3) Protection by limiting the transient voltage to 3 Uc max. and limitation of the oscillating
frequency.
(4) Complete the reference by replacing the dot with the required character.
LA4 Kppp LA4 Kppp

LA9 D973 LA9 D973
Dimensions:
page7/8
Dimensions:
page7/8
Dimensions:
page7/8
Dimensions:
page7/8
Control relays
TeSysKcontrolrelays
Mountingandmarkingaccessories
7/8
7
Dimensions,
mounting
Control relays
CA2 K, CA3 K, CA4 K
On panel On printed circuit board

On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)
LA9 D973 DX1 AP25

On asymmetrical rail with clip-on mounting plates On asymmetrical rail with clip-on mounting plates

LA2 KT
On control relay

Suppressor modules
LA4 K
On control relay

57 35
LA1 K
5
8
5
0
=
=
35
45
= = 57 35
LA1 K
5
8
5
0
=
=
35
45
= =
5
0
5
3
45
5
8
8,65 = = = A1
A2
5
0
5
3
45
5
8
8,65 = = = A1
A2
57
5
8
45 57
5
8
45
57 21
45
35 = =
5
0
5
5 57 21
45
35 = =
5
0
5
5
1
1
0
45
1
2
0
57
57 27
DZ5 ME5
1
1
0
45
1
2
0
57
57 27
DZ5 ME5
38 38
2
7
38 38
2
7
57
LA2 KT
5
8
38 57
LA2 KT
5
8
38
6
2
5
22 6
2
5
22
57 22
5
8
LA4 K
57 22
5
8
LA4 K
Characteristics:
pages7/2and7/3
References:
pages7/4to7/7
Schemes:
page7/9
Characteristics:
pages7/2and7/3
References:
pages7/4to7/7
Schemes:
page7/9
Characteristics:
pages7/2and7/3
References:
pages7/4to7/7
Schemes:
page7/9
Characteristics:
pages7/2and7/3
References:
pages7/4to7/7
Schemes:
page7/9
Control relays
TeSysKcontrolrelays
7/9
7
Schemes
Control relays With integral suppression device
CA2 K, CA3 K, CA4 K CA3 K CA4 K
4 N/O 3 N/O + 1 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks LA1 K
For CA2 K, CA3 K, CA4 K For CA2 K, CA3 K
2 N/O 2 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C 4 N/O 3 N/O + 1 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C
LA1 KN20,
LA1 KN207
LA1 KN02,
LA1 KN027
LA1 KN11,
LA1 KN117
LA1 KN40,
LA1 KN407
LA1 KN31,
LA1 KN317
LA1 KN22,
LA1 KN227

1 N/O + 3 N/C 4 N/C
LA1 KN13, LA1 KN137 LA1 KN04, LA1 KN047

Electronic time delay contact blocks LA2 KT Suppressor modules
For CA2 K, CA3 K, CA4 K LA4 KC LA4 KE
1 C/O
LA2 KT2

+
A
1
A
2
+
A
1
A
2
_
+ A1 A2
_
+ A1 A2
A
1
A
2
1
4
2
4
3
4
1
3
/
N
O
2
3
/
N
O
3
3
/
N
O
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
A
1
A
2
1
4
2
4
3
4
1
3
/
N
O
2
3
/
N
O
3
3
/
N
O
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
A
1
A
2
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
3
3
/
N
O
3
4
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
A
1
A
2
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
3
3
/
N
O
3
4
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
A
1
A
2
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
3
1
/
N
C
3
2
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
A
1
A
2
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
3
1
/
N
C
3
2
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
5
1
/
N
C
5
2
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
5
1
/
N
C
5
2
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
5
4
6
4
7
4
5
3
/
N
O
6
3
/
N
O
7
3
/
N
O
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
4
6
4
7
4
5
3
/
N
O
6
3
/
N
O
7
3
/
N
O
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
6
2
7
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
7
3
/
N
O
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
6
2
7
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
7
3
/
N
O
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
7
1
/
N
C
7
2
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
7
1
/
N
C
7
2
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
4
6
2
7
2
8
2
5
3
/
N
O
6
1
/
N
C
7
1
/
N
C
8
1
/
N
C
5
4
6
2
7
2
8
2
5
3
/
N
O
6
1
/
N
C
7
1
/
N
C
8
1
/
N
C
5
1
/
N
C
5
2
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
7
1
/
N
C
7
2
8
1
/
N
C
8
2
5
1
/
N
C
5
2
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
7
1
/
N
C
7
2
8
1
/
N
C
8
2
+
_
+
_
A
1
A
2
1
8
1
5
1
6
A
1
A
2
1
8
1
5
1
6
Control relays
TeSysKcontrolrelays
Characteristics:
pages7/2and7/3
References:
pages7/4to7/7
Dimensions,mounting:
page7/8
Characteristics:
pages7/2and7/3
References:
pages7/4to7/7
page7/8
7/10
7
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) ConformingtoIEC60947,
VDE0110grC,BS5424,
CSA22-2n14,UL508
V 690
Conforming to standards IEC60947,NFC63-110,VDE0660,BS5424
Protective treatment ConformingtoIEC60068
(DIN50015)
TC(Klimafest,Climateproof)
Degree of protection ConformingtoVDE0106 Protection against direct fnger contact
aroundthedevice
Storage C -50+70
Operation C -20+50
Maximum operating altitude Withoutderating m 2000
Withoutderating Withoutderating
Connection by connectors Min. Max.
Solidcable mm
2
1x1.5or2x1.5 1x6or2x4
2
1x0.5or2x0.35 1x6or2x2.5
2
1x0.35or2x0.35 1x6or2x1.5
Tightening torque Pozidrivn1head N.m 0.8
Terminal referencing Conformingtostandards
EN50005andEN50011
Upto4contacts
Control relay CA2 SK CA2 SKE CA3 SK
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) V a24400 c1272
(y50C)
Foroperation 0.851.1Uc 0.851.1Uc
Fordrop-out u0.20Uc u0.10Uc
Average consumption
at20CandatUc
Inrush 16VA 23VA 2.2W
Sealed 4.2VA 4.9VA 2.2W
Heat dissipation W 1.4 1.5 2.2
Operating time
at20CandatUc
Betweencoilenergisationand
openingoftheN/Ccontacts ms 816 1018
closingoftheN/Ocontacts ms 714 812
Betweencoilde-energisationand
openingoftheN/Ocontacts ms 68 46
closingoftheN/Ccontacts ms 810 68
Maximum operating rate Inoperatingcyclesperhour 1200 1200
inmillionsofoperatingcycles
50/60Hzcoil 10
Standardccoil 10
References:
pages7/12and7/13
Dimensions:
page7/14
Schemes:
page7/15
References:
pages7/12and7/13
Dimensions:
page7/14
Schemes:
page7/15
References:
pages7/12and7/13
Dimensions:
page7/14
Schemes:
page7/15
References:
pages7/12and7/13
Dimensions:
page7/14
Schemes:
page7/15
Characteristics
Control relays
Mini-controlrelaysTeSysCApSKandCA2SKE
7/11
7
Auxiliary contact characteristics of mini-control relays and instantaneous contact blocks
(Ue)
V Upto690
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) ConformingtoIEC96047,
BS5424,VDE0110groupC,
CSAC22-2n14
V 690
Conventional rated
Forambienttemperature
y55C
A 10
Frequency of the operational current Hz Upto400
Short-circuit protection ConformingtoIEC60947
andVDE0660,glfuse
A 10
a.c. supply, category AC-15 d.c. supply, category DC-13
suchasthecoilofanelectromagnet:making
current(cosj0.7)=10timesthepower
broken(cosj0.4).
suchasthecoilofanelectromagnet,without
economyresistor,thetimeconstant
increasingwiththeload.
V 24 48 110/
127
220/
230
380/
400
440 V 24 48 110 220 440
1millionoperatingcycles VA 48 96 240 440 800 880 W 120 80 60 52 51
Occasionalmakingcapacity VA 1000 2050 5000 10000 14000 13000 W 720 600 400 300 230
References:
pages7/12and7/13
Dimensions:
page7/14
Schemes:
page7/15
References:
pages7/12and7/13
Dimensions:
page7/14
Schemes:
page7/15
References:
pages7/12and7/13
Dimensions:
page7/14
Schemes:
page7/15
References:
pages7/12and7/13
Dimensions:
page7/14
Schemes:
page7/15
Control relays
7/12
7
References
Mini-control relays
Widthofmini-controlrelays27mm.
Mountingon35mm 7rail.
Connectionbyconnectors.
b
b
b
Control circuit supply Auxiliary contacts Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (1)
Weight
kg
a.c. supply 2 CA2 SK20pp 0.132
1 1 CA2 SK11pp 0.132
d.c. supply 2 CA3 SK20pp 0.132
1 1 CA3 SK11pp 0.132
Mini-control relay with alternating contacts
Thismini-controlrelaywithalternatingcontacts(seefunctiondiagrampage7/15)makesitpossibleto
automaticallysplittheoperatingtimebetween2circuitsofaredundantsystem.
Byregularlyenergisingthesafetycircuits,thisdevicemakesitpossibletoensurethattheyareoperating
correctly.
Widthofmini-controlrelay45mm.
Fixingby4screws.
Connectionbyconnectors.
Cannot be ftted with front-mounted auxiliary contact block.
Cannot be ftted with coil suppressor module.
b
b
b
b
b
Control circuit supply Auxiliary contacts Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (1)
Weight
kg
a.c. supply 2 CA2 SKE20pp 0.175
Mini-control relays CA2 SK and CA2 SKE
Volts a
50/60 Hz
24 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 400
Mini-control relays CA3 SK
Volts c 12 24 36 48 72
Code JD BD CD ED SD
CA2 SK20pp
5
3
3
6
6
4
CA2 SK20pp
5
3
3
6
6
4
CA2 SKE20pp
5
3
3
6
6
5
CA2 SKE20pp
5
3
3
6
6
5
Characteristics:
pages7/10and7/11
Dimensions:
page7/14
Schemes:
page7/15
Characteristics:
pages7/10and7/11
Dimensions:
page7/14
Schemes:
page7/15
Characteristics:
pages7/10and7/11
Dimensions:
page7/14
Schemes:
page7/15
Characteristics:
pages7/10and7/11
Dimensions:
page7/14
Schemes:
page7/15
Control relays
Mini-controlrelaysTeSysCA2SKandCA3SK
Mini-controlrelayTeSysCA2SKEwithalternatingcontacts
7/13
7
References
For use on
control relays
Maximum number
of blocks
per contactor
kg
CA2 SK20 1 2 LA1 SK20 0.022
2 LA1 SK02 0.022
1 1 LA1 SK11 0.022
Suppressor modules
Connection without need for tools by clipping onto right-hand side of contactor
For use on
control relays
Type For
voltages
Sold
in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
CA2 SK and CA3 SK Varistor
(1)
aandc 24V48V 10 LA4 SKE1E 0.003
aandc 110V250V 10 LA4 SKE1U 0.003
Diode
(2)
c 24V250V 10 LA4 SKC1U 0.003
LA1 SK11
5
3
3
6
6
6
LA1 SK11
5
3
3
6
6
6
LA4 SKp1p
5
3
3
6
6
7
LA4 SKp1p
5
3
3
6
6
7
Characteristics:
pages7/10and7/11
Dimensions:
page7/14
Schemes:
page7/15
Characteristics:
pages7/10and7/11
Dimensions:
page7/14
Schemes:
page7/15
Characteristics:
pages7/10and7/11
Dimensions:
page7/14
Schemes:
page7/15
Characteristics:
pages7/10and7/11
Dimensions:
page7/14
Schemes:
page7/15
Control relays
Mini-controlrelaysTeSysCA2SKandCA3SK
Instantaneousauxiliarycontactsand
coilsuppressormodules
7/14
7
Dimensions
Mini-control relays
CA2 SK and CA3 SK

(1) Only on CA2 SK20.
Mounting
Mini-control relays
CA2 SK and CA3 SK
On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)
Dimensions
CA2 SKE
Mounting
CA2 SKE

3,5 LA4 SK
55,5
5
6
27
3,5 LA4 SK
55,5
5
6
27
5
6
27 55,5
84,5 5
3,5 LA1 SK (1)
5
6
27 55,5
84,5 5
3,5 LA1 SK (1)
5
6
55,5 27
5
6
55,5 27
4
68 45
5
8
4
68 45
5
8
34-35
4
8
-
5
0
34-35
4
8
-
5
0
45 68
5
8
45 68
5
8
Characteristics:
pages7/10and7/11
References:
pages7/12and7/13
Schemes:
page7/15
Characteristics:
pages7/10and7/11
References:
pages7/12and7/13
Schemes:
page7/15
Characteristics:
pages7/10and7/11
References:
pages7/12and7/13
Schemes:
page7/15
Characteristics:
pages7/10and7/11
References:
pages7/12and7/13
Schemes:
page7/15
Characteristics:
pages7/10and7/11
References:
pages7/12and7/13
Schemes:
page7/15
Characteristics:
pages7/10and7/11
References:
pages7/12and7/13
Schemes:
page7/15
Characteristics:
pages7/10and7/11
References:
pages7/12and7/13
Schemes:
page7/15
Characteristics:
pages7/10and7/11
References:
pages7/12and7/13
Schemes:
page7/15
Control relays
7/15
7
Schemes
CA2 SK20, CA3 SK20 CA2 SK11, CA3 SK11
2 N/O 1 N/O + 1 N/C

CA2 SKE CA2 SKE
2 N/O Function diagram

2 N/O 2 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C
LA1 SK20 LA1 SK02 LA1 SK11

A
1
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
A
2
2
3
/
N
O
2
4
A
1
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
A
2
2
3
/
N
O
2
4
A
1
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
A
2
2
1
/
N
O
2
2
A
1
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
A
2
2
1
/
N
O
2
2
A
1
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
A
2
2
3
/
N
O
2
4
A
1
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
A
2
2
3
/
N
O
2
4
A2 A1
14 13
24 23
De-energised
Close
Open
Close
Open
Energised
A2 A1
14 13
24 23
De-energised
Close
Open
Close
Open
Energised
3
3
/
N
O
3
4
4
4
4
3
/
N
O
3
3
/
N
O
3
4
4
4
4
3
/
N
O
3
1
/
N
C
3
2
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
3
1
/
N
C
3
2
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
3
3
/
N
O
3
4
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
3
3
/
N
O
3
4
4
2
4
1
/
N
C
Characteristics:
pages7/10and7/11
References:
pages7/12and7/13
page7/14
Characteristics:
pages7/10and7/11
References:
pages7/12and7/13
page7/14
Characteristics:
pages7/10and7/11
References:
pages7/12and7/13
page7/14
Characteristics:
pages7/10and7/11
References:
pages7/12and7/13
page7/14
Schemes
Control relays
7/16
7
TeSys control relays 7
TeSysDcontrolrelays
Control relay type CADa CADc CAD

low consumption
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) ConformingtoIEC 60947-5-1
OvervoltagecategoryIIIand
degreeofpollution3
V 690 690 690
ConformingtoUL,CSA V 600 600 600
voltage (Uimp)
ConformingtoIEC60947 kV 6 6 6
Separation of
electrical circuits
ConformingtoIEC60536
andVDE0106
Reinforcedinsulationupto400V
Conforming to standards IEC60947-5-1,N-FC 63-140,VDE0660,BS4794,
EN60947-5
Protective treatment ConformingtoIEC60068 TH
Degree of protection ConformingtoVDE 0106 Front face protected against direct fnger contact IP 2X Protectionagainstdirect
fnger contact
aroundthedevice
Storage C - 60+ 80 - 60+ 80 - 60+ 80
Operation,conformingto
IEC60255(0.81.1UC)
C - 5+ 60 - 5+ 60 - 5+ 60
ForoperationatUc C - 40+ 70 - 40+ 70 - 40+ 70
Maximum operating altitude Withoutderating m 3000 3000 3000
Operating positions Withoutderating
inthefollowingpositions
Shock resistance(1)
halfsinewavefor11ms
Controlrelayopen 10gn 10gn 10gn
Controlrelayclosed 15gn 15gn 15gn
5300Hz
Controlrelayopen 2gn 2gn 2gn
Controlrelayclosed 4gn 4gn 4gn
Screw clamp connections Flexible
conductor
withoutcable
end
1conductor mm
2
14 14 14
2conductors mm
2
14 14 14
Flexible
conductorwith
cableend
1conductor mm
2
14 14 14
2conductors mm
2
12.5 12.5 12.5
Solidconductor
withoutcable
end
1conductor mm
2
14 14 14
2conductors mm
2
14 14 14
Tighteningtorque N.m 1.7 1.7 1.7
Spring terminal connections 1 or 2 fexible or rigid conductors
withoutcableend
mm
2
12.5 12.5 12.5
(1) In the least favourable direction, without change of contact state, with coil supplied at Uc.
3
0
3
0
3
0
3
0
9
0
9
0
1
8
0
9
0
9
0
1
8
0
1
8
0
1
8
0
1
8
0
9
0
9
0
1
8
0
9
0
9
0
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
Characteristics 7
7/17
7
TeSysDcontrolrelays
Control relay type CAD a CADc CAD

low consumption
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) V 12690 12440 c572
Operation Withcoil50/60Hz 0.81.1Ucat50Hz
0.851.1 Ucat60Hz
Withstandardcoil,
widerange
0.71.25 Uc 0.71.25 Uc
Drop-out 0.30.6 Uc 0.10.25 Uc 0.10.25 Uc
Average consumption
at 20 C and at Uc
a50/60Hz(at50Hz) VA Inrush:70
sealed:8
Withstandardcoil W Inrushorsealed:5.4 Inrushorsealed:2.4
Operating time
(atratedcontrolcircuitvoltage
andat20 C)
Betweencoilenergisation
and
-openingoftheN/Ccontacts
ms 419 5515% 6715%
-closingoftheN/Ocontacts ms 1222 6315% 7715%
Betweencoilde-energisation
and
-openingoftheN/Ocontacts
ms 412 2020% 2720%
-closingoftheN/Ccontacts ms 617 2520% 3520%
Short supply failure Maximumdurationwithout
affectinghold-inofthedevice
ms 2 2 2
Maximum operating rate Inoperatingcycles
persecond
3 3 3
Inmillionsofoperatingcycles
Withcoil50/60Hz
(at50Hz)
30
Withstandardcoilc
widerange
30 30
Time constant L/R ms 28 40
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
7/18
7
TeSysDcontrolrelays
Characteristics of instantaneous contacts incorporated in the control relay
Number of contacts 5
(Ue)
Upto V 690
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) ConformingtoIEC60947-5-1 V 690
ConformingtoUL,CSA V 600
Conventional
Forambienttemperature 60C A 10
Frequency of the
operational current
Hz 25...400
Minimum switching capacity Umin V 17
Imin mA 5
Short-circuit protection ConformingtoIEC60947-5-1 gGfuse:10A
Rated making capacity Conformingto
IEC60947-5-1
Irms a :140,c :250
Short-time rating Permissiblefor 1s A 100
500ms A 120
100ms A 140
Insulation resistance MW >10
Non-overlap time Guaranteedbetween
N/CandN/Ocontacts
ms 1.5(onenergisationandonde-energisation)
Tightening torque Philipsheadn2and6 N.m 1.2
Non-overlap distance LinkedcontactsinassociationwithauxiliarycontactsLADN
Mechanically linked
contacts
ConformingtoIEC60947-5-1 The3N/Ocontactsandthe2N/CcontactsofCADN32arelinkedmechanicallybyone
mobilecontactcarrier.
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
7/19
7
TeSysDcontrolrelays
Rated operational power of contacts (conforming to IEC 60947-5-1)

a.c. supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15
Electricaldurability(validforupto3600operatingcycles/hour)onaninductiveloadsuch
asthecoilofanelectromagnet:
makingcurrent(cosj0.7)=10timesthepowerbroken(cosj0.4).
V 24 48 115 230 400 440 600
1millionoperatingcycles VA 60 120 280 560 960 1050 1440
d.c. supply, category DC-13

Electricaldurability(validforupto1200operatingcycles/hour)onaninductiveload
suchasthecoilofanelectromagnet,withouteconomyresistor,thetimeconstant
increasingwiththepower.
V 24 48 125 250 440
1millionoperatingcycles W 120 90 75 68 61
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4

0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1 2 3 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,6
0,5
0,8
0,7
7
1
2
3
5
4
6
8
10
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s
o
f
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
c
y
c
l
e
s
CurrentbrokeninA
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1 2 3 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,6
0,5
0,8
0,7
7
1
2
3
5
4
6
8
10
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s
o
f
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
c
y
c
l
e
s
CurrentbrokeninA
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1 2 3 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,6
0,5
0,8
0,7
7
1
2
3
5
4
6
8
10
440 V
48 V
250 V
125 V
24 V
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s
o
f
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
c
y
c
l
e
s
CurrentbrokeninA
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1 2 3 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,6
0,5
0,8
0,7
7
1
2
3
5
4
6
8
10
440 V
48 V
250 V
125 V
24 V
M
i
l
l
i
o
n
s
o
f
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
c
y
c
l
e
s
CurrentbrokeninA
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
7/20
7
Seepageoppositeformountingpossibilities
accordingtocontrolrelaytypeandrating
7/21
7
TeSysDcontrolrelaysandadd-onblocks
Controlcircuit:a.c.,d.c.orlowconsumption
Control relays for connection by screw clamp terminals

Type Number of
contacts
Composition Basic reference, to be
completed by adding the
control voltage code (1)
Weight
Standard voltages
a c
LC (2) kg
Instantaneous 5 5 CAD 50pp (3) B7 P7 BD BL 0.580
3 2 CAD 32pp (3) B7 P7 BD BL 0.580
Control relays for connection by spring terminals
Instantaneous 5 5 CAD 503pp B7 P7 BD BL 0.580
3 2 CAD 323pp B7 P7 BD BL 0.580
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by screw clamp terminals
Number of
contacts
Maximum number per relay Composition Reference Weight
Clip-on mounting
front side
kg
2 1 1 1 LAD N11 0.030
1onLHside 1 1 LAD 8N11 (6) 0.030
1 2 LAD N20 0.030
1onLHside 2 LAD 8N20 (6) 0.030
1 2 LAD N02 0.030
1onLHside 2 LAD 8N02 (6) 0.030
4 (4) 1 2 2 LAD N22 0.050
1 3 LAD N13 0.050
4 LAD N40 0.050
4 LAD N04 0.050
3 1 LAD N31 0.050
4 (4) 1 2 2 LAD C22 0.050
Including1N/Oand1N/Cmakebeforebreak.
With dust and damp protected contacts, for use in particularly harsh industrial environments
Number of
contacts
Maximum
number per
relay
kg
Front
mounting
protected (5)
2 1 2 LA1 DX20 0.040
2 LA1 DX02 0.040
2 2 LA1 DY20 0.040
4(4) 1 2 2 LA1 DZ40 0.050
2 1 1 LA1 DZ31 0.050
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals
ThistypeofconnectionisnotpossibleforcontactblocksLAD8andblockswithdustanddampprotectedcontacts.Forallother
instantaneousauxiliarycontactblocks,addthedigit3totheendofthereferencesselectedabove.
Example:LAD N11 becomesLAD N113.
(1)Standardcontrolcircuitvoltages(forothervoltages,pleaseconsultyourRegionalSalesOffce).
a.c. supply
Voltsa 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
50/60Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
d.c. supply (coils with integral suppression device ftted as standard)
Voltsc 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440
Ufrom0.7to1.25Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD GD MD UD RD
Low consumption (coils with integral suppression device ftted as standard)
Voltsc 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250
Code AL JL ZL BL EL FL ML UL
(2)LC:lowconsumption.
(3) To order control relays with connection by lugs, add the digit 6 to the end of the selected reference.
Example:CAD50ppbecomesCAD506pp.
(4) Blocks with 4 auxiliary contacts cannot be used on low consumption control relays.
(5)Productfttedwith4earthscreencontinuityterminals.
(6) These contact blocks cannot be used on low consumption control relays.
CAD 50pp
CAD 32pp
CAD 503pp
CAD 323pp
CAD 50pp
CAD 32pp
CAD 503pp
CAD 323pp
Characteristics:
pages7/16and7/17
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
Characteristics:
pages7/16and7/17
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
Characteristics:
pages7/16and7/17
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
Characteristics:
pages7/16and7/17
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
References 7
7/22
7
TeSysDcontrolrelays
Add-onblocks
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by screw clamp terminals (1)
Number
and type of
contacts
Maximum number
per relay

kg
Front mounting Type Range
1 N/C and 1 N/O 1 On-delay 0.13s(2) LAD T0 0.060
0.130s LAD T2 0.060
10180s LAD T4 0.060
130s(3) LAD S2 0.060
Off-delay 0.13s(2) LAD R0 0.060
0.130s LAD R2 0.060
(Sealingcover:seepage5/85) 10180s LAD R4 0.060
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals
Addthedigit3tothereferencesselectedabove.Example:LAD T0 becomesLAD T03.
Unlatching
control
Maximum number
per relay
Basic reference
to be completed
(5)
Weight

kg
Front mounting
Manual or
electric
1 LAD 6K10p 0.070
Suppressor modules
Thesemodulesclipontothetopofthecontrolrelayandtheelectricalconnectionisinstantlymade.
Fittingofaninputmoduleisstillpossible.
RC circuits (Resistor-Capacitor)
Effectiveprotectionforcircuitshighlysensitivetohighfrequencyinterference. b
Voltagelimitedto3Ucmaximumandoscillatingfrequencylimitedto400Hzmaximum. b
Slighttimedelayondrop-out(1.2to2timesthenormaltime). b
For
mounting on
Operational
voltage
Reference Weight
kg
CAD a a 2448V LAD 4RCE 0.012
a 110240V LAD 4RCU 0.012
Protectionprovidedbylimitingthetransientvoltagevalueto2Ucmaximum. b
Maximumreductionoftransientvoltagepeaks. b
Slighttimedelayondrop-out(1.1to1.5timesthenormaltime). b
CAD a a2448V LAD 4VE 0.012
a 50127V LAD 4VG 0.012
a 110250V LAD 4VU 0.012
Freewheel diode
Noovervoltageoroscillatingfrequency. b
Increaseindrop-outtime(6to10timesthenormaltime). b
Polarisedcomponent. b
CAD c c24250V LAD 4DDL 0.012
Bidirectional peak limiting diode
Protectionprovidedbylimitingthetransientovervoltagevalueto2Ucmaximum. b
Maximumreductionoftransientvoltagepeaks. b
CAD a a24V LAD 4TB 0.012
a 72V LAD 4TS 0.012
CAD c c24V LAD 4TBDL 0.012
c72V LAD 4TSDL 0.012
c125V LAD 4TGDL 0.012
c 250V LAD 4TUDL 0.012
c600V LAD 4TXDL 0.012
(1) These contact blocks cannot be used on low consumption control relays.
(3) With switching time of 40 ms 15 ms between opening of the N/C contact and closing of the N/O contact.
(4) Power should not be simultaneously applied or maintained to the mechanical latching block of the CAD N.
The duration of the control signal to the mechanical latching block and the CAD N should be u 100 ms.
Volts a and c 24 32/36 42/48 60/72 100 110/127 220/240 256/277 380/415
Code B C E EN K F M U Q
(6) CAD ppd.c.andlowconsumptioncontrolrelaysarefttedwithabuilt-inbi-directionalpeaklimitingdiodesuppressor
as standard. On control relays produced after 15th July 2004, this diode is removable. It can therefore be replaced by
the user (see references LAD4Tppp above). It can also be replaced by a freewheel diode LAD4DDL . If a d.c. or
low consumption control replay is used without suppression, the standard suppressor should be replaced with
a blanking plug LAD9DL.
LAD T LAD T
LAD 6K10 LAD 6K10
LAD 4pp LAD 4pp
Characteristics:
pages7/16and7/17
Illustrations:
page7/20
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
Characteristics:
pages7/16and7/17
Illustrations:
page7/20
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
Characteristics:
pages7/16and7/17
Illustrations:
page7/20
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
Characteristics:
pages7/16and7/17
Illustrations:
page7/20
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
References 7
7/23
7
TeSysDcontrolrelays
Accessoriesandspareparts
Description For
mounting on
Sold in
lots of
Unit reference Weight
kg
For marking
Sheetof64blanklegends,
self-adhesive,8x33mm
CAD,LAD (4contacts) 10 LAD 21 0.020
Sheetof112blanklegends,
self-adhesive,8x12mm
LAD (2contacts),
LADT
LAD 22 0.020
Stripsofblank,self-adhesive
legendsforprintingbyplotter
(4setsof5strips)
Allproducts 35 LAD 24 0.200
SISLabellabelling
softwareforlegendsLAD21
andLAD22,suppliedon
CD-Rom
Multi-languageversion:
English,French,German,
Italian,Spanish
1 XBY 2U 0.100
Legendholder,snap-in,
8x18mm
LC1D09...38
LC1DT20...40
LADN(4contacts)
LADT, LADR
100 LAD 90 0.001
For protection
Sealingcover LADT,LADR 1 LA9 D901 0.005
Safetycoverpreventing
accesstothemovingcontact
carrier
CAD LAD 9ET1 0.004
1
Spare parts: coils
Specifcations
Averageconsumptionat20C:
- inrush(cos j =0.75)50/60Hz:70VAat50Hz,
- sealed(cosj =0.3)50/60Hz:8VAat60Hz,
b
Operatingrange(q<60C):0.85to1.1Uc b
Control circuit
voltage Uc
Average resistance
at 20 C 10 %
Inductance of
closed circuit
Reference (1)
50/60 Hz
Weight
V V H kg
12 6.3 0.26 LXD 1J7 0.070
21 (2) 5.6 0.24 LXD 1Z7 0.070
24 6.19 0.26 LXD 1B7 0.070
32 12.3 0.48 LXD 1C7 0.070
36 LXD 1CC7 0.070
42 19.15 0.77 LXD 1D7 0.070
48 25 1 LXD 1E7 0.070
60 LXD 1EE7 0.070
100 LXD 1K7 0.070
110 130 5.5 LXD 1F7 0.070
115 LXD 1FE7 0.070
120 159 6.7 LXD 1G7 0.070
127 192.5 7.5 LXD 1FC7 0.070
200 LXD 1L7 0.070
208 417 16 LXD 1LE7 0.070
220/230 539 22 LXD 1M7 (3) 0.070
230 595 21 LXD 1P7 0.070
230/240 645 25 LXD 1U7 (4) 0.070
277 781 30 LXD 1W7 0.070
380/400 1580 60 LXD 1Q7 0.070
400 1810 64 LXD 1V7 0.070
415 1938 74 LXD 1N7 0.070
440 2242 79 LXD 1R7 0.070
480 2300 85 LXD 1T7 0.070
500 2499 LXD 1S7 0.070
575 3294 LXD 1SC7 0.070
600 3600 135 LXD 1X7 0.070
690 5600 190 LXD 1Y7 0.070
(2)Voltageforspecialcoilsfttedincontrolrelayswithserialtimermodulewith24Vsupply.
(3) This coil can be used on 240 V at 60 Hz.
(4) This coil can be used on 230/240 V at 50 Hz and on 240 V only at 60 Hz.
LA9 D901 LA9 D901
LAD 9ET1 LAD 9ET1
LXD 1 LXD 1
Characteristics:
pages7/16and7/17
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
Characteristics:
pages7/16and7/17
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
Characteristics:
pages7/16and7/17
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
Characteristics:
pages7/16and7/17
Dimensions:
page7/24
Schemes:
page7/25
References 7
7/24
7
Dimensions
CAD a CAD corLC(lowconsumption)
CAD 32
50
323
503
CAD 32
50
323
503
b 77 99 b 77 99
c withoutcoveroradd-onblocks 84 84 c withoutcoveroradd-onblocks 93 93
withcover,withoutadd-onblocks 86 86 withcover,withoutadd-onblocks 95 95
c1 withLADNorC(2or4contacts) 117 117 c1 withLADNorC(2or4contacts) 126 126
c2 withLAD6K10 129 129 c2 withLAD6K10 138 138
c3 withLADT,R,S 137 137 c3 withLADT,R,S 146 146
withLADT,R,Sandsealingcover 141 141 withLADT,R,Sandsealingcover 150 150
Mounting
CAD
Panel mounted Mounted on rail AM1 DP200 or DE200
CAD a CAD corLC CAD a CAD corLC
c withcover 86 95 c (AM1DP200) (2) 88 97
c (AM1DP200) (2) 96 105
(1) 2 elongated holes 4.5 x 9 (2) With cover
Mounted on plate AM1 P
CAD a CAD corLC
c withcover 86 95
45 12,5
(LAD8)
b
c
c1
c2
c3
45 12,5
(LAD8)
b
c
c1
c2
c3
b
c
c1
c2
c3
45
b
c
c1
c2
c3
45
6
0
/
7
0
=
=
35 = =
(1)
c
6
0
/
7
0
=
=
35 = =
(1)
c
7
8
=
=
45 c
7
8
=
=
45 c
c 35
6
0
/
7
0
AF1 EA4
c 35
6
0
/
7
0
AF1 EA4
Characteristics:
pages7/16to7/19
Illustrations:
page7/20
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Schemes:
page7/25
Characteristics:
pages7/16to7/19
Illustrations:
page7/20
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Schemes:
page7/25
Characteristics:
pages7/16to7/19
Illustrations:
page7/20
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Schemes:
page7/25
Characteristics:
pages7/16to7/19
Illustrations:
page7/20
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Schemes:
page7/25
Dimensions,
mounting
7/25
7
5 N/O 3 N/O + 2 N/C
CAD 50 CAD 32
1 N/O + 1 N/C 2 N/O 2 N/C
LAD N11 LAD 8N11 (1) LAD N20 LAD 8N20(1) LAD 8N02 LAD N02
(1)ThefguresinbracketsareforthedevicemountedontheRHsideofthecontrolrelay.
2 N/O + 2F N/C 1 N/O + 3 N/C 4 N/O 4 N/C 3 N/O + 1 N/C
LAD N22 LAD N13 LAD N40 LAD N04 LAD N31
2 N/O + 2 N/C including
1 N/O + 1 N/C
make before break
With dust and damp protected contacts
2 N/O protected 2 N/C protected 2 N/O protected(2) 2 N/O protected +
2 N/O non protected
2 N/O protected +
1 N/O + 1 N/C
non protected
LAD C22 LA1 DX20 LA1 DX02 LA1 DY20 LA1 DZ40 LA1 DZ31
(2)Productfttedwith4earthscreencontinuityterminals.
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks Mechanical latch blocks
On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C
LAD T LAD S LAD R LAD 6K10
A
1
A
2
0
3
/
N
O
0
4
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
2
3
/
N
O
2
4
3
3
/
N
O
3
4
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
A
1
A
2
0
3
/
N
O
0
4
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
3
1
/
N
C
3
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
A
1
A
2
0
3
/
N
O
0
4
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
2
3
/
N
O
2
4
3
3
/
N
O
3
4
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
A
1
A
2
0
3
/
N
O
0
4
1
3
/
N
O
1
4
3
1
/
N
C
3
2
2
1
/
N
C
2
2
4
3
/
N
O
4
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
1
5
3
/
N
O
1
5
4
1
6
1
/
N
C
1
6
2
(
1
8
4
)
(
1
8
3
)
(
1
7
2
)
(
1
7
1
)
1
5
3
/
N
O
1
5
4
1
6
1
/
N
C
1
6
2
(
1
8
4
)
(
1
8
3
)
(
1
7
2
)
(
1
7
1
)
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
1
5
3
/
N
O
1
5
4
1
6
3
/
N
C
1
6
4
(
1
8
4
)
(
1
8
3
)
(
1
7
4
)
(
1
7
3
)
1
5
3
/
N
O
1
5
4
1
6
3
/
N
C
1
6
4
(
1
8
4
)
(
1
8
3
)
(
1
7
4
)
(
1
7
3
)
1
6
1
/
N
C
1
6
2
(
1
7
2
)
(
1
7
1
)
1
5
1
/
N
C
1
5
2
(
1
8
2
)
(
1
8
1
)
1
6
1
/
N
C
1
6
2
(
1
7
2
)
(
1
7
1
)
1
5
1
/
N
C
1
5
2
(
1
8
2
)
(
1
8
1
)
5
1
/
N
C
5
2
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
5
1
/
N
C
5
2
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
7
1
/
N
C
7
2
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
7
1
/
N
C
7
2
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
7
1
/
N
C
7
2
8
1
/
N
C
8
2
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
7
1
/
N
C
7
2
8
1
/
N
C
8
2
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
7
1
/
N
C
7
2
8
1
/
N
C
8
2
5
1
/
N
C
5
2
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
7
1
/
N
C
7
2
8
1
/
N
C
8
2
5
1
/
N
C
5
2
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
8
7
/
N
O
8
8
7
5
/
N
C
7
6
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
1
/
N
C
6
2
8
7
/
N
O
8
8
7
5
/
N
C
7
6
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
2
5
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
2
5
1
/
N
C
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
6
3
/
N
O
6
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
6
2
6
1
/
N
C
5
3
/
N
O
5
4
8
3
/
N
O
8
4
7
3
/
N
O
7
4
5
5
/
N
C
5
6
6
7
/
N
O
6
8
5
5
/
N
C
5
6
6
7
/
N
O
6
8
5
5
/
N
C
5
6
6
7
/
N
O
6
8
5
5
/
N
C
5
6
6
7
/
N
O
6
8
5
7
/
N
O
5
8
6
5
/
N
C
6
6
5
7
/
N
O
5
8
6
5
/
N
C
6
6
E
2
E
1
A
2
A
1
E
2
E
1
A
2
A
1
Characteristics:
pages7/16to7/19
Illustrations:
page7/20
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Schemes:
page7/24
Characteristics:
pages7/16to7/19
Illustrations:
page7/20
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Schemes:
page7/24
Characteristics:
pages7/16to7/19
Illustrations:
page7/20
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Schemes:
page7/24
Characteristics:
pages7/16to7/19
Illustrations:
page7/20
References:
pages7/21to7/23
Schemes:
page7/24
Schemes

8
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
8/1
Contents
8-Technicalinformation
Testsaccordingtostandardutilisationcategoriesconforming
toIEC60947-4-1and5-1 page8/
Currentofasynchronoussquirrelcagemotorsatnominalload page 8/3
Protectivetreatmentofequipmentaccordingtoclimaticenvironment page 8/4
Product standards and certifcations page 8/5
Degreesofprotectionprovidedbyenclosures(IPcode) page 8/6
b
b
b
b
b
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
8
8/
8
Protectivetreatmentofequipment
accordingtoclimaticenvironment
Dependingontheclimaticandenvironmentalconditionsinwhichtheequipmentis
placed,SchneiderElectriccanofferspeciallyadaptedproductstomeetyour
requirements
In order to make the correct choice of protective fnish, two points should be
remembered:
theprevailingclimateofthecountryisnevertheonlycriterion,
onlytheatmosphereintheimmediatevicinityoftheequipmentneedbe
considered
All climates treatment TC
ThisisthestandardtreatmentforSchneider-electricbrandequipmentandissuitable
forthevastmajorityofapplicationsItistheequivalentoftreatmentsdescribedas
Klimafest,Climateproof
In particular, it meets the requirements specifed in the following publications:
PublicationUTEC63-100(methodl),successivecyclesofhumidheatat:
+40Cand95%relativehumidity
DIN50016-Variationsofambientconditionswithinaclimaticchamber:
+3Cand83%relativehumidity,
+40Cand9%relativehumidity
It also meets the requirements of the following marine classifcation societies:
BV-LR-GL-DNV-RINA
Characteristics
SteelcomponentsareusuallytreatedwithzincWhentheyhaveamechanical
function,theymayalsobepainted
Insulatingmaterialsareselectedfortheirhighelectrical,dielectricandmechanical
characteristics
Metal enclosures have a stoved paint fnish, applied over a primary phosphate
protectivecoat,oraregalvanised(egsomeprefabricatedbusbartrunking
components)
Limits for use of TC (All climates) treatment
TCtreatmentissuitableforthefollowingtemperaturesandhumidity:
Temperature (C) Relative humidity (%)
0 95
40 80
50 50
TCtreatmentisthereforesuitableforalllatitudesandinparticulartropicaland
equatorialregionswheretheequipmentismountedinnormallyventilatedindustrial
premisesBeingshelteredfromexternalclimaticconditions,temperaturevariations
aresmall,theriskofcondensationisminimisedandtheriskofdrippingwateris
virtuallynon-existent
Extension of use of TC (All climates) treatment
Incaseswherethehumidityaroundtheequipmentexceedstheconditionsdescribed
above,orinequatorialregionsiftheequipmentismountedoutdoors,orifitisplaced
in a very humid location (laundries, sugar refneries, steam rooms, etc.), TC
treatmentcanstillbeusedifthefollowingprecautionsaretaken:
TheenclosureinwhichtheequipmentismountedmustbeprotectedwithaTH
fnish (see next page) and must be well ventilated to avoid condensation and dripping
water(egenclosurebaseplatemountedonspacers)
Components mounted inside the enclosure must have a TC fnish.
Iftheequipmentistobeswitchedoffforlongperiods,aheatermustbeprovided
(0to05kWpersquaredecimetreofenclosure),thatswitchesonautomatically
whentheequipmentisturnedoffThisheaterkeepstheinsideoftheenclosureata
temperatureslightlyhigherthantheoutsidesurroundingtemperature,thereby
avoidinganyriskofcondensationanddrippingwater(theheatproducedbythe
equipment itself during normal running is suffcient to provide this temperature
difference)
SpecialconsiderationsforOperatordialogandDetectionproducts:
forcertainpilotdevices,theuseofTCtreatmentcanbeextendedtooutdooruse
providedtheirenclosureismadeoflightalloys,zincalloysorplasticmaterialInthis
case,itisalsoessentialtoensurethatthedegreeofprotectionagainstpenetration
ofliquidsandsolidobjectsissuitablefortheapplicationsinvolved
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
General 8
8/3
8
Protectivetreatmentofequipment
accordingtoclimaticenvironment
TH treatment for hot and humid environments
Thistreatmentissuitableforhotandhumidatmosphereswhereinstallationsare
regularlysubjecttocondensation,drippingwaterandtheriskoffungi
Inaddition,plasticinsulatingcomponentsareresistanttoattacksfrominsectssuch
astermitesandcockroachesThesepropertieshaveoftenledtothistreatmentbeing
describedasTropicalFinish,butthisdoesnotmeanthatallequipmentinstalledin
tropicalandequatorialregionsmustsystematicallyhaveundergoneTHtreatment
Ontheotherhand,certainoperatingconditionsintemperateclimatesmaywell
requiretheuseofTHtreatedequipment(seelimitationsforuseofTCtreatment)
Special characteristics of TH treatment
Allinsulatingcomponentsaremadeofmaterialswhichareeitherresistanttofungi
ortreatedwithafungicide,andwhichhaveincreasedresistancetocreepage
(StandardsIEC6011,NFC6-0,DIN5348)
Metalenclosuresreceiveatop-coatofstoved,fungicidalpaint,appliedoverarust
inhibitingundercoatComponentswithTHtreatmentmaybesubjecttoasurcharge
(1). Please consult your Regional Sales Offce.
These treatments cover, in particular, the applications defned by methods I and II of
guideUTEC63-100
Special precautions for electronic equipment
ElectronicproductsalwaysmeettherequirementsofTCtreatmentAnumberof
themareTHtreatedasstandard
Some electronic products (for example: programmable controllers, fush mountable
controllers CCX and fush mountable operator terminals XBT) require the use of an
enclosure providing a degree of protection to at least IP 54, as defned by standards
IEC60664andNFC0040,foruseinindustrialapplicationsorinenvironmental
conditionsrequiringTHtreatment
These electronic products, including fush mountable products, must have a degree
ofprotectiontoatleastIP0(providedeitherbytheirownenclosureorbytheir
installationmethod)forrestrictedaccesslocationswherethedegreeofpollution
doesnotexceed(atestboothnotcontainingmachineryorotherdustproducing
activities,forexample)
Special treatments
Forparticularlyharshindustrialenvironments,SchneiderElectricisabletooffer
special protective treatments. Please consult your Regional Sales Offce.
(1) A large number of the Schneider-electric brand products are TH treated as standard and
are, therefore, not subject to a surcharge.
b
b
Protective treatment selection guide
Surrounding
environment
Duty cycle Internal
heating of
enclosure
when not in
use
Type of
climate
Protective
treatment
of
equip-
ment
of
enclo-
sure
Indoors
Nodrippingwater
orcondensation
Unimportant Notnecessary Unimportant TC TC
Presenceofdripping
waterorcondensation
Frequent
switchingofffor
periodsofmore
than1day
No Temperate TC TH
Equatorial TH TH
Yes Unimportant TC TH
Continuous Notnecessary Unimportant TC TH
Outdoors (sheltered)
Nodrippingwater
ordew
Unimportant Notnecessary Temperate TC TC
Equatorial TH TH
Exposed outdoors or near the sea
Frequentandregular
presenceofdripping
waterordew
Frequent
switchingofffor
periodsofmore
than1day
No Temperate TC TH
Equatorial TH TH
Protective treatment selection guide
Surrounding
environment
Duty cycle Internal
heating of
enclosure
when not in
use
Type of
climate
Protective
treatment
of
equip-
ment
of
enclo-
sure
Indoors
Nodrippingwater
orcondensation
Unimportant Notnecessary Unimportant TC TC
Presenceofdripping
waterorcondensation
Frequent
switchingofffor
periodsofmore
than1day
No Temperate TC TH
Equatorial TH TH
Outdoors (sheltered)
Nodrippingwater
ordew
Unimportant Notnecessary Temperate TC TC
Equatorial TH TH
Exposed outdoors or near the sea
Frequentandregular
presenceofdripping
waterordew
Frequent
switchingofffor
periodsofmore
than1day
No Temperate TC TH
Equatorial TH TH
General 8
8/4
8
Product standards and certifcations
Standardisation
Conformity to standards
SchneiderElectricproductssatisfy,inthemajorityofcases,national(forexample:BSinGreat
Britain,NFinFrance,DINinGermany),European(forexample:CENELEC)orinternational
(IEC) standards. These product standards precisely defne the performance of the designated
products(suchasIEC60947forlowvoltageequipment)
Whenusedcorrectly,asdesignatedbythemanufacturerandinaccordancewithregulationsand
correctpractices,theseproductswillallowuserstobuildequipment,machinesystemsor
installationsthatconformtotheirappropriatestandards(forexample:IEC6004-1,relatingto
electricalequipmentusedonindustrialmachines)
SchneiderElectricisabletoprovideproofofconformityofitsproductiontothestandardsithas
chosentocomplywith,throughitsqualityassurancesystem
Onrequest,anddependingonthesituation,SchneiderElectriccanprovidethefollowing:
adeclarationofconformity,
a certifcate of conformity (ASEFA/LOVAG),
a homologation certifcate or approval, in the countries where this procedure is required or for
particular specifcations, such as those existing in the merchant navy.
Code Certifcation authority Country
Name Abbreviation
ANSI AmericanNationalStandardsInstitute ANSI USA
BS BritishStandardsInstitution BSI GreatBritain
CEI ComitatoElettrotecnicoItaliano CEI Italy
DIN/VDE VerbandDeutscherElectrotechniker VDE Germany
EN ComitEuropendeNormalisationElectrotechnique CENELEC Europe
GOST GosudarstvenneKomitetStandartov GOST Russia
IEC InternationalElectrotechnicalCommission IEC Worldwide
JIS JapaneseIndustrialStandardsCommittee JISC Japan
NBN InstitutBelgedeNormalisation IBN Belgium
NEN NederlandsNormalisatieInstitut NNI Netherlands
NF UnionTechniquedelElectricit UTE France
SAA StandardsAssociationofAustralia SAA Australia
UNE Asociacion Espaola de Normalizacion y Certifcacion AENOR Spain
European EN standards
These are technical specifcations established in conjunction with, and with approval of, the
relativebodieswithinthevariousCENELECmembercountries(EuropeanUnion,EuropeanFree
TradeAssociationandmanycentralandeasternEuropeancountrieshavingmemberor
affliated status). Prepared in accordance with the principle of consensus, the European
standardsaretheresultofaweightedmajorityvoteSuchadoptedstandardsarethenintegrated
intothenationalcollectionofstandards,andcontradictorynationalstandardsarewithdrawn
European standards incorporated within the French collection of standards carry the prefx
NFENAttheUnionTechniquedelElectricit(Technical Union of Electricity)(UTE),theFrench
versionofacorrespondingEuropeanstandardcarriesadualnumber:Europeanreference
(NF EN ) and classifcation index (C ).
Therefore,thestandardNFEN60947-4-1relatingtomotorcontactorsandstarters,effectively
constitutestheFrenchversionoftheEuropeanstandardEN60947-4-1andcarriestheUTE
classifcation C 63-110.
ThisstandardisidenticaltotheBritishstandardBSEN60947-4-1ortheGermanstandardDIN
EN60947-4-1
Whenever reasonably practical, European standards refect the international standards (IEC).
Withregardtoautomationsystemcomponentsanddistributionequipment,inadditionto
complyingwiththerequirementsofFrenchNFstandards,SchneiderElectricbrandcomponents
conformtothestandardsofallothermajorindustrialcountries
Regulations
European Directives
OpeningupofEuropeanmarketsassumesharmonisationoftheregulationspertainingtoeach
ofthemembercountriesoftheEuropeanUnion
ThepurposeoftheEuropeanDirectiveistoeliminateobstacleshinderingthefreecirculationof
goodswithintheEuropeanUnion,anditmustbeappliedinallmembercountriesMember
countriesareobligedtotranscribeeachDirectiveintotheirnationallegislationandto
simultaneouslywithdrawanycontradictoryregulationsTheDirectives,inparticularthoseofa
technicalnaturewhichconcernus,onlyestablishtheobjectivestobeachieved,referredtoas
essentialrequirements
Themanufacturermusttakeallthenecessarymeasurestoensurethathisproductsconformto
therequirementsofeachDirectiveapplicabletohisproduction
As a general rule, the manufacturer certifes conformity to the essential requirements of the
Directive(s) for his product by affxing the emark
Thee mark is affxed to Schneider Electric brand products concerned, in order to comply with
FrenchandEuropeanregulations
Signifcance of the e mark
Thee mark affxed to a product signifes that the manufacturer certifes that the product
conformstotherelevantEuropeanDirective(s)whichconcernit;thisconditionmustbemetto
allowfreedistributionandcirculationwithinthecountriesoftheEuropeanUnionofanyproduct
subjecttooneormoreoftheEUDirectives
Theemarkisintendedsolelyfornationalmarketcontrolauthorities
Theemarkmustnotbeconfusedwithaconformitymarking
b
b
b
b
b
b
General 8
8/5
8
Product standards and certifcations
European Directives (continued)
For electrical equipment, only conformity to standards signifes that the product is suitable for its
designatedfunction,andonlytheguaranteeofanestablishedmanufacturercanprovideahigh
levelofqualityassurance
ForSchneiderElectricbrandproducts,oneorseveralDirectivesarelikelytobeapplicable,
dependingontheproduct,andinparticular:
theLowVoltageDirective006/95/EC:theemarkrelatingtothisDirectivehasbeen
compulsorysince16
th
January007
theElectromagneticCompatibilityDirective89/336/EEC,amendedbyDirectives9/31/EEC
and93/68/EEC:theemarkonproductscoveredbythisDirectivehasbeencompulsorysince
1stJanuary1996
ASEFA-LOVAG certifcation
ThefunctionofASEFA(AssociationdesStationsdEssaisFranaisedAppareilslectriques-
Association of French Testing Stations for Low Voltage Industrial Electrical Equipment)istocarry
out tests of conformity to standards and to issue certifcates of conformity and test reports.
ASEFAlaboratoriesareauthorisedbytheFrenchauthorisationcommittee(COFRAC)
ASEFAisnowamemberoftheEuropeanagreementgroupLOVAG(LowVoltageAgreement
Group). This means that any certifcates issued by LOVAG/ASEFA are recognised by all the
authoritieswhicharemembersofthegroupandcarrythesamevalidityasthoseissuedbyany
ofthememberauthorities
Quality labels
Whencomponentscanbeusedindomesticandsimilarapplications,itissometimes
recommended that a Quality label be obtained, which is a form of certifcation of conformity.
Code Quality label Country
CEBEC ComitElectrotechniqueBelge Belgium
KEMA-KEUR KeuringvanElectrotechnischeMaterialen Netherlands
NF UnionTechniquedelElectricit France
VE sterreichischerVerbandfrElectrotechnik Austria
SEMKO SvenskaElectriskaMaterielKontrollanatalten Sweden
Product certifcations
In some countries, the certifcation of certain electrical components is a legal requirement. In this
case, a certifcate of conformity to the standard is issued by the offcial test authority.
Each certifed device must bear the relevant certifcation symbols when these are mandatory:
Code Certifcation authority Country
CSA CanadianStandardsAssociation Canada
UL UnderwritersLaboratories USA
CCC China Compulsory Certifcation China
Note on certifcations issued by the Underwriters Laboratories (UL). There are two levels of
approval:
Recognized ( )
Thecomponentisfullyapprovedforinclusioninequipmentbuiltina
workshop,wheretheoperatinglimitsareknownbytheequipment
manufacturerandwhereitsusewithinsuchlimitsisacceptablebythe
UnderwritersLaboratories
ThecomponentisnotapprovedasaProductforgeneralusebecause
itsmanufacturingcharacteristicsareincompleteoritsapplication
possibilitiesarelimited
A Recognized component does not necessarily carry the certifcation
symbol
Listed (UL) The component conforms to all the requirements of the classifcation
applicabletoitandmaythereforebeusedbothasaProductforgeneral
useandasacomponentinassembledequipmentAListedcomponent
must carry the certifcation symbol.
Marine classifcation societies
Prior approval (= certifcation) by certain marine classifcation societies is generally required for
electricalequipmentwhichisintendedforuseonboardmerchantvessels
Code Classifcation authority Country
BV BureauVeritas France
DNV DetNorskeVeritas Norway
GL GermanischerLloyd Germany
LR LloydsRegister GreatBritain
NKK NipponKaijiKyoka Japan
RINA RegistroItalianoNavale Italy
RRS RegisterofShipping Russia
Note
For further details on a specifc product, please refer to the Characteristics pages in this
catalogue or consult your Regional Sales Offce.
b
b
General 8
8/6
8
8
Degreesofprotectionprovidedbyenclosures
IP code
Degrees of protection against the penetration of solid

bodies, water and personnel access to live parts
TheEuropeanstandardEN6059datedOctober1991,IECpublication59
(
nd
edition - November 1989), defnes a coding system (IP code) for indicating the
degreeofprotectionprovidedbyelectricalequipmentenclosuresagainstaccidental
directcontactwithlivepartsandagainsttheingressofsolidforeignobjectsorwater
Thisstandarddoesnotapplytoprotectionagainsttheriskofexplosionorconditions
suchashumidity,corrosivegasses,fungiorvermin
Certainequipmentisdesignedtobemountedonanenclosurewhichwillcontribute
towardsachievingtherequireddegreeofprotection(example:controldevices
mountedonanenclosure)
Differentpartsofanequipmentcanhavedifferentdegreesofprotection(example:
enclosurewithanopeninginthebase)
StandardNFC15-100(May1991edition),section51,table51A,providesa
cross-referencebetweenthevariousdegreesofprotectionandtheenvironmental
conditions classifcation, relating to the selection of equipment according to external
factors
PracticalguideUTEC15-103shows,intheformoftables,thecharacteristics
requiredforelectricalequipment(includingminimumdegreesofprotection),
accordingtothelocationsinwhichtheyareinstalled
IP ppp code
TheIPcodecomprises2 characteristic numerals(egIP 55)andmayincludean additional letterwhentheactualprotectionofpersonnel
against direct contact with live parts is better than that indicated by the frst numeral (e.g. IP 20C).
Any characteristic numeral which is unspecifed is replaced by an X (e.g. IP XXB).
1
st
characteristic numeral: 2
nd
characteristic numeral: Additional letter:
correspondstoprotectionoftheequipmentagainst
penetrationofsolidobjectsandprotectionofpersonnel
againstdirectcontactwithliveparts
correspondstoprotectionoftheequipment
againstpenetrationofwaterwithharmfuleffects
correspondstoprotectionof
personnelagainstdirectcontact
withliveparts
Protection of the equipment Protection of
personnel
0 Non-protected Non-protected 0 Non-protected A Withthebackofthehand
1 Protectedagainst
thepenetrationof
solidobjects
havingadiameter
greaterthanor
equalto50mm
Protectedagainst
directcontactwith
thebackofthe
hand(accidental
contacts)
1 Protectedagainst
verticaldrippingwater,
(condensation)
B With the fnger.
2 Protectedagainst
thepenetrationof
solidobjects
havingadiameter
greaterthanor
equalto15mm
Protectedagainst
direct fnger
contact
2 Protectedagainst
drippingwateratan
angleofupto15
C Witha5mmtool
3 Protectedagainst
thepenetrationof
solidobjects
havingadiameter
greaterthanor
equalto5mm
Protectedagainst
directcontactwith
a5mmtool
3 Protectedagainstrainat
anangleofupto60
D Witha1mmwire
4 Protectedagainst
thepenetrationof
solidobjects
havingadiameter
greaterthanor
equalto1mm
Protectedagainst
directcontactwith
a1mmwire
4 Protectedagainst
splashingwaterinall
directions
5 Dustprotected
(noharmful
deposits)
Protectedagainst
directcontactwith
a1mmwire
5 Protectedagainstwater
jetsinalldirections
6 Dusttight Protectedagainst
directcontactwith
a1mmwire
6 Protectedagainst
powerfuljetsofwater
andwaves
7 Protectedagainstthe
effectsoftemporary
immersion
8 Protectedagainstthe
effectsofprolonged
immersionunder
specifed conditions.
1
5
1
5
6
0
6
0
1m
15 cm
min
1m
15 cm
min
mm
Presentation 8
8/7
8
8
Degreesofprotectionprovidedbyenclosures
IK code
Degrees of protection against mechanical impact The European standard EN 50102 dated March 1995 defnes a coding system
(IKcode)forindicatingthedegreeofprotectionprovidedbyelectricalequipment
enclosuresagainstexternalmechanicalimpact
StandardNFC15-100(May1991edition),section51,table51A,providesa
cross-referencebetweenthevariousdegreesofprotectionandtheenvironmental
conditions classifcation, relating to the selection of equipment according to external
factors
PracticalguideUTEC15-103shows,intheformoftables,thecharacteristics
requiredforelectricalequipment(includingminimumdegreesofprotection),
accordingtothelocationsinwhichtheyareinstalled
IK pp code
TheIKcodecomprises2 characteristic numerals(egIK 05)
2 characteristic numerals:
correspondingtoavalueofimpactenergy
h(cm) Energy(J)
00 Non-protected
01 75 015
02 10 0
03 175 035
04 5 05
05 35 07
06 0 1
07 40
08 30 5
09 0 10
10 40 0
0,2 kg
h
0,2 kg
h
0,5 kg
h
0,5 kg
h
1,7 kg
h
1,7 kg
h
5 kg
h
5 kg
h
Presentation 8
8/8
8
8
Notes
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Schneider Electric Industries SAS
35, rue Joseph Monier
CS 30323
F- 92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex
RCS Nanterre 954 503 439
Capital social 896 313 776
www.schneider-electric.com

2
0
1
0

-

S
c
h
n
e
i
d
e
r

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

-

T
o
u
s

d
r
o
i
t
s

r
s
e
r
v
s
12-2010
As standards, specifcations and designs change from time to time, please ask
for confrmation of the information given in this publication.
This document has been printed on ecological paper.
Design: Schneider Electric
Photos: Schneider Electric
Printed:
MKTED210011EN

Protection Control Tesys - Contactor Tesys D-F

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Protection Control Tesys - Contactor Tesys D-F

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Low Voltage

1 - TeSys motor starters: open version

Levels of service. .page 1/2

54 51 GV.ME08 LC1.K06 GV2 ME08K1pp 0460

54 51 GV.ME08 LC.K06 GV2 ME08K2pp 0460

040063 8 GV.ME04 LC1.D09pp GV2 DM104pp (3) 0596

0631 13 GV.ME05 LC1.D09pp GV2 DM105pp (3) 0596

54 51 GV.ME08 LC1.D09pp GV2 DM108pp (3) 0596

040063 8 GV.ME04 LC.D09pp GV2 DM204pp 0963

0631 13 GV.ME05 LC.D09pp GV2 DM205pp 0963

54 51 GV.ME08 LC.D09pp GV2 DM208pp 0963

040063 8 GV.P04 LC1.D09pp GV2 DP104pp 0686

0631 13 GV.P05 LC1.D09pp GV2 DP105pp 0686

54 51 GV.P08 LC1.D09pp GV2 DP108pp 0696

040063 8 GV.P04 LC.D09pp GV2 DP204pp 1053

0631 13 GV.P05 LC.D09pp GV2 DP205pp 1053

54 51 GV.P08 LC.D09pp GV2 DP208pp 1073

GV2 ME04 040063 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09

GV2 ME20 1318 LC1 D18

GV2 P03 or GV2 ME03 0504 LC1 D09

GV2 P04 or GV2 ME04 04063 LC1 D09

GV2 P05 or GV2 ME05 0631 LC1 D09

GV2 P10 or GV2 ME10 463 LC1 D09

GV2 P14 or GV2 ME14 610 LC1 D09

GV7 RS100 60100 LC1 D115

GV2 L03 or LE03 04 5 LC1 D09 LRD 03 05040

GV2 L04 or LE04 063 8 LC1 D09 LRD 04 04063

GV2 L05 or LE05 1 13 LC1 D09 LRD 05 0631

GV2 L22 5 37 LC1 D25 LRD 22 164

NS630pMA (3) 500 5500 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300500

NS630pMA (3) 500 650 LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300500

V22 V22 V23 V22 V22 V24 V25

LU2B + ASILUF C5 + LU9M

LU2B + ASILUF C5 + LU9M

LUB + LUC pppBL

LUB + LUC pppBL

LUB + LUL C08 + LU9B N11L

LUB + LUL C08 + LU9B N11L

LUB + LUC pppBL

LUB + LUC pppBL

9 ATSU 01N209LT .. 0340

1 ATSU 01N212LT .. 0340

Soft start-soft stop unit/TeSysU starter controller combination

LA1 LC025 0170

LA1.LC010 LA1.LC01 LA1.LC00 LA1.LC001

Determining the spacing between busbar supports

.x.4 .x.4 3.x.4 4.x.4 3.x.4

Selection guide page 2/2

LA1 LC012 0.0

LA1 LC010 LA1 LC01 LA1 LC00 LA1 LC001

0.631 LF3 P05D LF3 P05E 1.300

914 LF3 P16D LF3 P16E 1.350

0.631 LF4 P05D LF4 P05E 1.550

914 LF4 P16D LF4 P16E 1.600

0.631 LF3 M05D LF3 M05E 1.50

914 LF3 M16D LF3 M16E 1.300

0.631 LF4 M05D LF4 M05E 1.500

914 LF4 M16D LF4 M16D 1.550

Applications Protection of motors

Applications Protection of motors

GV2 ME and GV3 ME80

GV2 P, GV3 P and GV7 R

TeSys protection components

p p p y0kA y10kA (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)